NSR 10 (English)

Machine Translated by Google
Ministry of Environment, Housing and Territorial Development

Vice Ministry of Housing and Territorial Development
Housing System Management
Republic of Colombia
PERMANENT ADVISORY COMMISSION FOR THE REGIME

OF EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT BUILDINGS
(Created by Law 400 of 1997)
COLOMBIAN REGULATION OF
EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION
NSR-10
Bogota DC, Colombia

January 2010
Commission Secretariat:
Colombian Association of Earthquake Engineering

Carrera 20 N° 84-14 Office 502 • Bogotá, DC, COLOMBIA • Telephone: 530-0826 • Fax: 530-0827


CONTENT
TECHNICAL AND SCIENTIFIC MODIFICATIONS IN THE UPDATE OF THE COLOMBIAN

REGULATION FOR EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION —
NSR-10 ................................ ................................................................ ................................................ 1
TITLE A — GENERAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT ................................................ ............................. A-1
TITLE B — CHARGES ................................................ ................................................................ ......B-1
TITLE C — STRUCTURAL CONCRETE .................................................. ........................C-1
TITLE D — STRUCTURAL MASONRY ................................................... .................D-1
TITLE E — ONE AND TWO-STORY HOUSES ............................................ ........................ E-1
TITLE F — METALLIC STRUCTURES .................................................... ........................ F-1
TITLE G — WOODEN STRUCTURES AND GUADUA STRUCTURES ....................G-1
TITLE H — GEOTECHNICAL STUDIES ................................................... .......................... H-1
TITLE I — TECHNICAL SUPERVISION ................................................... ...................................I-1
TITLE J — FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS IN

BUILDINGS .................................................. .....................................J-1
TITLE K — SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS ................................................... .............K-1



UPDATE COLOMBIAN REGULATION OF

EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION — NSR-10
TECHNICAL AND SCIENTIFIC MODIFICATIONS
Introduction
On June 7, 1984, Decree 1400 of 1984 issued the first Colombian regulations for earthquake-resistant
constructions(45)* . This document was a response to the tragedy in victims and material damage caused by the
Popayán earthquake of March 31, 1983. Since it was a decree of extraordinary powers authorized by Law 11 of
1983, its technological update was not possible. without a new law that authorized it.
In the mid-1990s, steps were taken before the Legislature to create a framework law that would regulate issues
related to earthquake-resistant constructions and allow periodic updates without having to go to Congress every
time there was a need to update the regulations. In 1997, the Congress of the Republic issued Law 400(31) by
means of which the subject of earthquake resistance of Colombian buildings was regulated.
Law 400 of 1997 regulated the following fundamental aspects so that the country has modern and updated
earthquake-resistant construction regulations at all times:
• Sets the object, scope, exceptions, definitions, professional responsibilities and other topics.
related. (Title I to V – Articles 1 to 22).
• Defines the professionals who can carry out the tasks of design, design review, construction and technical
supervision, their qualifications and qualifications. (Title VI – Articles 23 to 38). • Creates the
Permanent Advisory Commission for the Seismic-Resistant Construction Regime,
defines its conformation and functions. (Title VII – Articles 39 to 44).
• Defines in detail the technical and scientific agenda of the Colombian Regulations for Earthquake Resistant
Construction and authorizes the President to issue periodic updates through decrees with the prior
favorable approval of the Permanent Advisory Commission of the Earthquake Resistant Construction
Regime. (Title VIII – Articles 45 to 49).
• Defines the responsibilities and sanctions, sets deadlines to carry out the seismic vulnerability analyzes
and the updating of essential buildings and attention to the community. (Titles IX and X – Articles 50 to
56).
Based on the regulatory power granted by Law 400 of 1997, the Regulation was issued
Colombian Construction Seismic Resistant NSR-98 through Decree 33 of January 9,
ÿ Indicates the number of the bibliographic reference at the end of the document
1



1998(44). Subsequently, three additional decrees included in Regulation NSR-98 were issued, namely: Decree
34 of 1999, Decree 2809 of 2000 and Decree 52 of 2002; which dealt with important aspects for the correct
application of Regulation NSR-98 and which affected only some parts of it.
Listed below are the main technical and scientific modifications that were made to produce the update of the
Colombian Seismic-Resistant Construction Regulation NSR-10.
Title A — General earthquake resistant design and construction requirements

Data sheet:
Developed and maintained by Subcommittee A of the AIS 100 Committee of the Colombian
Association of Earthquake Engineering established in 1981.
Base documents (1984 Regulation) — SEAOC 1974(46), ATC-3(23) and AIS 100-81(24) and
AIS 100-83(25) Standards.
Base documents (NSR-98 Regulation) — SEAOC 1996(47), UBC-97(39), NEHRP 1994(35),
and AIS Standard 100-97(27).
Base documents (NSR-10 Regulation) — SEAOC 1999(48), NEHRP 2006(36), IBC-2009(40),
Eurocode-8(33) and AIS Standard 100-09(28).
For the update, the latest versions of the same base standards that were used in the drafting of the 1984
Regulation and in the update of the NSR-98 Regulation were consulted. In particular, the NEHRP 2006
requirements (FEMA 450-2006(36)) were consulted, which corresponds directly to the base document that has
been used for earthquake-resistant design in Colombia since 1984. In addition, the International requirements
were taken into account. Building Code (IBC-2009(40)). The most important modifications are:
Chapter A.1 — Introduction

• Law 1229 of 2008, which modified Law 400 of 1997, was included in the Colombian earthquake-resistant construction regulations (A.1.1). • In
the agenda of the Regulations (A.1.2.1 — Agenda)
were included as new theme in Title G
Guadua structures at the request of the President of the Republic and the Minister of AVDT.
• Modified section A.1.3.4 — Structural Design so that it is clear that it includes both new buildings and existing buildings. The steps listed in this
section have been adjusted and clarified.
• In A.1.3.10 — Essential buildings, some buildings from Use Group III were included.
inside buildings, in addition to those of Use Group IV, which must comply with the verification requirements for the damage threshold
of Chapter A.12.
• The requirements of section A.1.3.12 — Design Fundamentals, were updated, clarified
and coordinated with the other sections of the Regulations.
• A new section A.1.3.13 — Environmentally responsible construction was included , as requested by the Minister of AVDT in the meeting he
had with the Permanent Advisory Commission of the Seismic-Resistant Construction Regime.
2



• A.1.3.6.5 clarifies the responsibility of the builder who signs the construction license application to comply with the designs and qualities of the
materials to be used in the non-structural elements. • In A.1.7 — System of units, the reference to the Titles that remained in
the mks metric system was removed, since the entire NSR-10 Regulation is in the international system of SI measurements as required by
Colombian legislation (Decree 1731 of December 18). September 1967).
Chapter A.2 — Seismic hazard zones and design seismic movements

• The design earthquakes defined in A.2.2 — Design Earthquakes, are maintained at the same level of
exceedance probability (a 10% probability of exceedance in a period of fifty years) but are now
defined by means of two parameters, Aa and Av, unlike the NSR-98 Regulation where they were
only defined by means of the Aa parameter. The reason for this change is a better description of the
attenuation effects of seismic waves in the national territory, as has been established from the study
of the accelerographic records obtained in strong earthquakes after the last update of the NSR in
1998. Parameter Aa characterizes the seismic movements of the ground caused by relatively close
earthquakes in the range of vibration periods of buildings between 0.1 and 0.5 s, which generally
corresponds to buildings between one and five stories high. The Av parameter characterizes the
seismic movements of strong earthquakes that occur at moderate distances through vibration periods
of approximately 1 s, which corresponds to buildings of 10 floors or more. • The definition of seismic
hazard zones remains the same as the definition contained in the NSR-98 Regulation, only that in
the NSR-10 version the highest value of Aa and Av is used to characterize them, unlike NSR - 98
where was characterized only with Aa.
• The Colombian catalog of seismic events contains historical earthquakes (the first that has a written record
that occurred in 1541) and instrumental ones and has (as of May 2009) 33,100 events with Richter
magnitude ranging from low values to near Richter magnitudes. to 9. In 1995, when the general study
of seismic hazard in Colombia began(26), which led to the maps used in Regulation NSR-98, the
catalog contained 11,088 events. This means that thanks to the National Seismological Network
attached to Ingeominas, which began operating in 1995, about 22,000 additional events were
recorded during the period between 1995 and 2009, which allows for a better estimate of the national
seismic threat than at any other time in the past. • On the other hand, during the same period, serious
and important investigations have been carried out by various institutions and universities in
the country about national tectonics, which have led to a better understanding of the causes and sources of
earthquakes in the country. • For the new version of the NSR-10 Regulation, the Permanent Advisory
Commission of the Seismic-Resistant Construction Regime undertook a series of tasks
leading to determining the seismic hazard maps included in it, which are summarized as follows: ÿ A
subcommittee of the of the same Commission evaluated the national seismic hazard using the same
methodology as the studies that led to the maps included in the 1984 and 1998 versions
of the Regulations. The purpose of this work was to determine the impact of the new seismological
and tectonic information on the national seismic hazard, but using the same methodology as in
1996. The result of this part of the investigation allowed us to conclude that the variations in the
values of
3



Horizontal acceleration expected in the capital cities of the department remained within the same
order of magnitude. ÿ This subcommittee
also studied in detail the accelerographic records obtained in the country of earthquakes that had
caused damage in Colombian cities in order to establish whether a change in the spectral forms
to be used in Regulation NSR-10 was warranted. From this work came the decision to use
spectral shapes based on two parameters (Aa and Av) unlike the NSR-98 Regulation where a
single parameter Aa was used.
ÿ The subcommittee carried out, as a third task, an analysis of the maximum horizontal acceleration
in each of the department capitals inferred from the location and magnitude of the earthquakes
in the catalog of events using different attenuation equations. The result of this exercise was the
establishment of maximum expected accelerations for the average return period established by
Regulation NSR-10, defined by deterministic methods. These values were subsequently used as
part of the information used in the production of the final maps included in Regulation NSR-10.
ÿ The Institute for Research in Geosciences, Mining and Chemistry - Ingeominas carried out with its
officials an evaluation of the national seismic threat using the Crisis mathematical model and
updated seismological and neotectonic information. He determined acceleration recurrence
relationships in the departmental capitals and for a geographically dense grid and presented
these results to the Commission. ÿ The AIS 300 Committee of the Colombian
Association of Earthquake Engineering, which includes among its members professors and
researchers from the main universities in the country and engineers and consultants from the
main national consulting companies, advanced, just as it had done for the Regulation NSR-98
an assessment of the national seismic hazard with the new available seismology and tectonics
information also using the Crisis mathematical model. In the same way, this investigation
produced acceleration recurrence relations in the departmental capitals and for a dense grid and
also presented these results to the Commission.
ÿ Lastly, the Commission made an agreement, through the Ministry of Environment, Housing and
Territorial Development and the Colombian Association of Earthquake Engineering, with Professor
Mario Ordaz from the Institute of Engineering of the National Autonomous University of Mexico
to carry out a quality control of the works mentioned. As a result of this part of the investigation,
Dr. Ordaz delivered several reports in which he recorded his observations about the work
presented by Ingeominas and the AIS 300 Committee, which were addressed by both parties in
the production of final results. Subsequently, it advised the Commission in the formulation of the
definitive maps, which are based on the appropriate portions of the investigations summarized
here and whose final reports are being prepared independently by Ingeominas and the AIS 300
Committee and will be forwarded to the Commission in a timely manner. • As a result of these
investigations on the seismic hazard, the following is included in the NSR-10 Regulation: ÿ Table
A.2.3-2 — Value of Aa and Av
for departmental capital cities.
4



ÿ Figure A.2.3-1 — Seismic Hazard Zones applicable to buildings for NSR-10

depending on Aa and Av.
ÿ Figure A.2.3-2 — Map of Aa values
ÿ Figure A.2.3-3 — Map of Av values
ÿ Table A.10.3-2 — Value of Ae for departmental capital cities. ÿ Figure A.10.3-1 —
Map of Ae values
ÿ Table A.12.2-2 — Values of Ad for departmental capital cities ÿ Figure A.12.2-1 —
Map of values of Ad ÿ Appendix A-4 — Values
of Aa, Av, Ae and Ad and definition of the zone seismic threat
of Colombian municipalities •
Section A.2.4 — Local effects, which deals with the amplification of seismic waves due to the underlying soil
of the building, was updated and modernized for Regulation NSR-10. The site effects are now defined
by means of coefficients, Fa and Fv, which affect the short period (0.1 s) and medium period (1 s)
region of the spectrum respectively. • In section A.2.5 — Importance coefficient, where a
greater degree of conservatism is prescribed in the earthquake-resistant design of those buildings that are
essential for emergency response and community recovery after the occurrence of an earthquake. In
the strong earthquake, the use groups (I, II, III and IV) were updated and modernized , now including
school buildings within Use Group III of community service buildings, following global trends in this
regard. The values of the importance coefficient, I, were also updated (Table A.2.5-1).
• The definition of the design spectrum (A.2.6 — Design spectrum) has been adjusted to take into account
the parameters Aa and Av as they are now defined. Unlike the NSR-98 Regulation, now, in addition
to the acceleration spectrum, the speed and displacement spectra are also presented. • The
requirements for the use of
accelerogram families as a spectra-resistant seismic design alternative, A.2.7 — Accelerogram families, has
been updated and modernized to be compatible with the seismic hazard definition prescribed in the
NSR Regulation. -10.
• The requirements of A.2.9 — Seismic microzoning studies were updated and adjusted according to the
national experiences in conducting these studies and the accelerographic records recorded in soft
soil in Colombian cities. A.2.9.3.7 (e) transcribes what is required in Article 2 of Decree 2809 of 2000
regarding the need to resort to a concept by the Permanent Advisory Commission of the Regime of
Seismic Resistant Constructions of microzoning studies when funds from Nation entities have been
used in its preparation and in A.2.9.5 it is suggested to harmonize the existing microzoning studies
to the new Regulation NSR-10. • A new section A.2.10 — Specific site seismic studies is included ,
which regulates the development of specific site studies to determine the effects of
amplification in buildings whose importance or size so warrant.
5



Chapter A.3 — General earthquake resistant design requirements

• The general philosophy of this chapter has remained the same as that of Regulation NSR-98. HE
They made adjustments and updates in the following aspects:
• In A.3.3 — Structural configuration of the building, an update was made of the permitted structural systems
and the handling of irregularities with more cases than those previously contemplated. A penalty
factor for lack of redundancy of the structural system is now included to prevent the design of
seismically vulnerable structures due to lack of structural redundancy (A.3.3.8 — Lack of redundancy
in the seismic resistant structural system). • In A.3.3.9 — Use of the overresistance coefficient ÿ0, a
new parameter is introduced to
adequately treat structural elements that are not capable of dissipating energy in the inelastic response
range, as the base standards have been doing for some years.
• The analysis requirements, both static and dynamic, are modernized, including non-linear procedures (A.3.4
— Analysis methods), thus taking into account the enormous advances that have occurred in
computer science in the last decade. .
• In A.3.6.8 — Diaphragms, the way inertial forces acting on the diaphragms are calculated was modernized.
• The use of insulators at
the base is allowed (A.3.8 — Seismically isolated structures at their base) and energy dissipators (A.3.9 —
Use of energy dissipating elements) and the parameters and requirements for their use are
established, opening In this way, the possibility of using these very modern techniques in the country,
but making reference to the appropriate documents so that their use is carried out with all the
guarantees of the case.
• Tables A.3-1 to A.3-4 where the allowed structural systems are regulated, the heights according to the
seismic hazard zone and the use groups where they can be used, were updated taking into account
the extensive national experience in this regard. and seeking, in several cases, the way to reduce
costs in the structural systems that are used primarily in affordable housing. Furthermore, in all these
tables the new coefficient of overresistance ÿ0 was included . • In Table A.3-5 — Mixture of structural
systems at height, a prohibition is imposed
on systems with a rigid structure supported on a structure with less rigidity, which have had very poor
behavior in numerous earthquakes throughout the world and In colombia.
Chapter A.4 — Equivalent horizontal force method

• The requirements for this method have been reviewed and updated. • In
A.4.2.1 the maximum limit of the fundamental period of vibration is modified based on the approximate period
for the different structural systems of seismic resistance, unlike Regulation NSR-98 which prescribed
a single value.
Chapter A.5 — Dynamic analysis method

• The requirements for this highly mathematical method have been revised and updated especially in light of
recent advances in computer science.
6



• Section A.5.4.5 — Adjustment of Results, was modified to take into account current practices in national
structural design offices.
Chapter A.6 — Drift requirements

• Made an update to the drift requirements with some simplifications to
regular structures.
• In the NSR-10 Regulation, in A.6.2.1.2, for the calculation of the displacement in the center of mass of the
floor, it is allowed in buildings of all use groups to use an importance coefficient I = 1.0 but in the
calculation of the design forces if the value of I prescribed in Clause A.2 is to be used.
• Now, for buildings with a rigid diaphragm that do not have torsional irregularities in plan, it is allowed to
evaluate the drift only in the center of mass of the diaphragm (A.6.3.1.1).
When the structure has torsional irregularities, drift must be evaluated in all column vertical axes and
in the vertical edges of structural walls (A.6.3.1.2). • Introduced in A.6.3.1.3 a new procedure for
buildings based on structural walls by which it is possible to evaluate the maximum drift in the upper stories
using the tangent drift. This produces a relief in this type of buildings that previously had to be
excessively stiffened when the structural system consisted only of walls.
• The permissible limits for drift, A.6.4 — Limits of Drift, remain the same as those of the
Regulation NSR-98.
• Section A.6.5 — Separation between adjacent structures due to seismic considerations, was modified in
accordance with some recommendations issued by the Permanent Advisory Commission of the
Seismic-Resistant Construction Regime in 2007. Now there are explicit requirements regarding the
separation between buildings neighboring buildings more in line with the urban regulations of
Colombian cities and to avoid harmful interaction between neighboring buildings during an earthquake.
Chapter A.7 — Soil-structure interaction

• The requirements of this Chapter remain the same as those of Regulation NSR-98.
Chapter A.8 — Seismic effects on structural elements that are not part of the seismic resistance system
• The requirements of this Chapter remain the same as those of Regulation NSR-98 except in the
how seismic forces on elements are evaluated in A.8.2.1.1.
Chapter A.9 — Non-structural elements

• The requirements of this Chapter were updated with respect to those of Regulation NSR-98 taking into
account their application from 1998. • In A.9.3.1, the
responsibilities of the builder and the technical supervisor associated with the adequate construction of these
non-structural elements of fundamental importance in the defense of life in the event of a strong
earthquake. • A.9.4.2.1 — Acceleration at the support point of the element was
modified , using a more precise procedure to estimate these accelerations caused by the earthquake.
7



Chapter A.10 — Evaluation and intervention of buildings built before the effective date of the
this version of the regulation
• This Chapter was updated with respect to the NSR-98 Regulation. The main modifications are the following:
• Now it contemplates the following
cases: ÿ A.10.1.3.1 — Repairs and minor
changes, ÿ A.10.1.3.2 — Change of use, ÿ A.10.1.3.3
— Seismic vulnerability, ÿ A.
10.1.3.4 — Modifications, ÿ A.10.1.3.5 —
Structural reinforcement, and ÿ
A.10.1.3.6 — Repair of buildings damaged by
earthquakes. • Within section A.10.2 — Required studies and
investigations, the way in which the existing structure is classified in A.10.2.2 — State of the structural system
is modified, with a significant variation in the assignment of the factors ÿc and ÿe ( see Table
A.10.4-1). This change makes it possible to assign a comparatively greater effective resistance to
the most modern buildings and in a better state of maintenance.
• A new section A.10.3 — Design Earthquakes with Limited Safety is introduced , defining design earthquakes
with a shorter average return period corresponding to a probability of exceedance of 20% in 50 years
(as opposed to 10% in 50 years for all other buildings as defined in Chapter A.2). These alternate
design seismic motions can be used on existing heritage-listed buildings where there may be great
difficulty in meeting the design seismic forces of conventional structures. In this new section, a limited
safety design spectrum is defined based on the seismic hazard parameter Ae also obtained in the
seismic hazard study. The section includes the corresponding map and the Ae values for the
departmental capital cities and are included in the list for all Colombian municipalities in Appendix
A-4.
• In A.10.4 — Evaluation criteria for the existing structure, an update and coordination is made with the
requirements of the NSR-10 Regulation for existing buildings, although the approach and philosophy
is the same as that of the NSR-98 Regulation. • Section A.10.9 —
Seismic rehabilitation, is updated. Prescribes the requirements to be met in: ÿ A.10.9.2.1 — Intervention
of essential buildings and community service ÿ A.10.9.2.2 — Intervention of buildings designed and
built within the validity
of Regulation NSR-98 of Law 400 of 1997,
ÿ A.10.9.2.3 — Intervention of buildings designed and built within the validity of Decree 1400 of 1984,
ÿ A.10.9.2.4 — Intervention
of buildings designed and built before the validity of Decree 1400 of 1984, and
ÿ A.10.9.2.5 — Buildings declared as historical heritage • Section A.10.10

— Repair of buildings damaged by earthquakes, had been introduced to Regulation NSR-98 by means of
Decree 2809 of the year 2000. For Regulation NSR-10, has been updated and modified with the real
experiences obtained during the care of
8



the damages occurred with the Quindío earthquake of January 25, 1999 that affected the coffee zone
and especially the cities of Armenia and Pereira, the Pizarro earthquake of November 15, 2004 that
affected the city of Cali and the Quetame earthquake of November 24 May 2008 that caused damage
in the city of Bogotá.
Chapter A.11 — Seismic instrumentation

• This Chapter did not undergo major modifications for Regulation NSR-10. However, the way in which it
would become more effective was discussed within the Permanent Advisory Commission for the
Seismic-Resistant Construction Regime, given that there has been a systematic non-compliance with
its demands by the builders. For this reason, the new section A.11.1.3.2 was introduced , where it is
indicated that it is an essential requirement to obtain the construction license and the occupation
permit defined by Decree 564 of 2006.
Chapter A.12 — Special requirements for essential buildings in Use Groups III and IV
• In Regulation NSR-10, the requirements of this Chapter must also be applied to buildings of Use Group III.
• In addition, aspects associated with
seismic movements of the damage threshold (A.12.2) were updated , whose average return period was
modified to increase its effectiveness.
• In A.12.2 — Seismic movements of the damage threshold, the values of the seismic hazard parameter for
the damage threshold, Ad, were part of the update of the seismic hazard in the country and are
presented in a map and a table. for department capitals and are included in the list for all Colombian
municipalities in Appendix A-4.
• The requirements of A.12.5.3 — Drift limits for the damage threshold, were adjusted to the new
average return period.
Chapter A.13 — Definitions and nomenclature of Title A

• Updated and included new definitions of terms introduced in the Regulations
NSR-10.
Appendix A-1 — Seismic Recommendations for Some Structures Outside the Scope of the Code
• This Appendix, which is informative and not mandatory, remains essentially the same
in Regulation NSR-10.
• In A-1.1.1 — Purpose, reference is made to the new standard of the Colombian Association of Earthquake
Engineering: “Standard AIS-180 — Seismic resistant design requirements for some structures other
than buildings” which contains broader guidelines than the content of this Appendix for structures
that are outside the scope of Regulation NSR-10.
Appendix A-2 — Recommendations for calculating soil-structure dynamic interaction effects
• This Addendum remains essentially the same in Regulation NSR-10.
9



Appendix A-3 — Push-over Static Nonlinear Procedure

• This Appendix is new in the NSR-10 Regulation, it is not mandatory and it has been included for preliminary
study in order to be able to adopt it in future editions of the Regulation, if deemed appropriate.
• The alternate requirements suggested in it come from the NEHRP 2006(36) document.
Appendix A-4 — Values of Aa, Av, Ae and Ad and definition of the seismic hazard zone of Colombian
municipalities
• The values contained in this Appendix were updated according to the results of the new
seismic hazard assessment of the country.
Title B — Charges
Data sheet:
Developed and maintained by Subcommittee B of the AIS 100 Committee of the Colombian
Base Documents (1984 Regulation) — ANSI A.58-82(20) and AIS Standard 100-83(25)
Base documents (NSR-98 Regulation) — ANSI/ASCE 7-95(21) and AIS Standard 100-97(27)
Base Documents (NSR-10 Regulation) — ASCE/SEI 7-05(22) , IBC-2009(40), ACI-IPS
1(7) and AIS Standard 100-09(28)
The requirements have been made more in line with document ASCE 7-05(22), on whose 1995(21) version this
Title was based on Regulation NSR-98, which has included the following aspects. For the NSR-10 Regulation,
in addition to the ASCE 7-05 document, the ACI IPS-1(7) document was taken into account, which was developed
in Colombia through an agreement signed by the American Concrete Institute — ACI with Icontec and the
Colombian Association of Seismic Engineering — AIS. The most important updates are:
Chapter B.1 — General requirements

• A new section B.1.4 — Load paths was added to emphasize the importance
of structural integrity.
Chapter B.2 — Load Combinations

• In B.2.3 — Load Combinations to be used with the Work Stress Method or Serviceability Limit State
Verifications, the load combinations given there have been updated to those contained in ASCE
7-05(22) .
• In B.2.4 — Factored Load Combinations Using the Strength Method, the load combinations given there
have been updated to those contained in ASCE 7-05(22) which are the same for all structural
materials being designed. by the resistance method (structural concrete, structural masonry and
structures
10



metallic). They are also those used in document ACI 318-08(11) on which Title C of Regulation
NSR-10 is based.
Chapter B.3 — Dead loads

• In Section B.3.2 — Masses and Weights of Materials, all values were reviewed.
listed in Table B.3.2-1.
• In section B.3.4 — Non-structural elements, a novel division for non-structural elements was adopted,
which allows the calculation of the loads produced by these elements in a simpler and safer way: ÿ
B.3.4.1 — Non-structural elements horizontal,
and ÿ B.3.4.2 — Vertical non-structural elements.
• A new section B.3.4.3 — Alternative minimum values for dead loads of non-structural elements was
introduced , which covers the most common cases for these loads. • Section B.3.6 —
Special considerations was included to insist on the responsibility of the builder and the technical supervisor
regarding the values of these loads corresponding to those used in the design.
• Throughout the Chapter references to loads using the mks metric system were placed.
Chapter B.4 — Live loads

• In section B.4.2.1 — Required live loads, all the values for the live loads, according to the use of the
building, consigned in Table B.4.2.1-1 — Minimum uniformly distributed live loads, were reviewed .
Likewise, the values of Table B.4.2.1-2 — Minimum live loads on roofs were reviewed. • Likewise,
the values given in section B.4.2.2 —
Thrust on handrails and parapets were revised , making them safer and in accordance with international
regulations. • The requirements of Sections B.4.3 — Partial Load, B.4.4 — Impact, B.4.5 — Live
Load Reduction, B.4.6 — Overhead Cranes, and B.4.7 — Dynamic Effects, remained the same as in
Regulation NSR-98.
• A new section B.4.8 — Ponding loads of water and hail was included , to prevent the collapse of light roof
structures caused by either rainwater or hail, and the corresponding responsibilities were assigned
among the different professionals involved in them. the design of these structures. The hail load must
be taken into account in all places in the country with a height greater than 2000 m above sea level,
or where the municipal authorities so require.
Chapter B.5 — Earth pressure and hydrostatic pressure

• This Chapter remains unchanged from Regulation NSR-98.
Chapter B.6 — Wind forces

• This Chapter was updated. • In
B.6.1.1 — Permitted procedures, they are indicated as such:
ÿ Method 1 — Simplified Procedure, for buildings that meet the requirements
specified in section B.6.4,
eleven



ÿ Method 2 — Analytical Procedure, for buildings that meet the requirements

specified in section B.6.5 and ÿ Method
3 — Wind Tunnel Procedure as specified in section B.6.6. • The remainder of the Chapter contains
detailed requirements for evaluating forces.
produced by the wind throughout the country.
• Figure B.6.4-1 includes the wind hazard map, which corresponds to the same
contained in Regulation NSR-98, with minor adjustments.
• The following figures show guides and graphic aids to determine the forces of the
wind in many cases.
Title C — Structural Concrete

Data sheet:
Developed and maintained by Subcommittee C of the AIS 100 Committee of the Colombian Association
of Earthquake Engineering established in 1981.
Base Documents (1984 Regulation) — Blume, et al (29), ACI 318-77(7), ACI 318-83(2),
Icontec 2000(41) Standard and AIS 100-83(25) Standard
Base documents (NSR-98 Regulation) — ACI 318-89(3), ACI 318-95(4) and AIS Standard
100-97(27)
Base Documents (NSR-10 Regulation) — ACI 318-99(6), ACI 318-02(8), ACI 318-05(9),
ACI 318-08(11) and AIS Standard 100-09(28)
The design and construction of reinforced and prestressed concrete structures has been carried out in the country, even
before the issuance of the first earthquake-resistant construction regulations in 1984, using document ACI 318 of the
American Concrete Institute (ACI). ) which had its first version in 1908. In 1977 the Colombian Institute of Cement
Producers — ICPC, paid ACI for the translation rights of this document and an official translation of it was made, which
was used by Icontec to issue the Icontec 2000(41) standard , which in turn was used as a basis, with the modifications
introduced in ACI 318-83(2), for Title C of Decree 1400 of 1984. For the NSR Regulation -98 versions ACI 318-89(3) and
ACI 318-95(4) were used. After the issuance of Regulation NSR-98, the ACI has published new versions of ACI 318 in
1999(6), 2002(8), 2005(9) and 2008(11). Therefore, the NSR-98 Regulation is four versions behind the ACI 318 base
document. For the NSR-10 Regulation, this situation is corrected, incorporating all the changes referred to in them. For
use in Regulation NSR-10, the Colombian Association of Earthquake Engineering paid for and obtained the reproduction
rights of document ACI 318S-08(11) (in Spanish) from the American Concrete Institute — ACI.
For the theme of earthquake resistant design of reinforced concrete structures, it begins with the treatise by Blume,
Newmark and Corning(29), which publishes, based on extensive experimental research, for the first time the principles
of earthquake resistant design of reinforced concrete structures. reinforced concrete. These principles are carried over
to the ACI 318 document for the first time as an appendix in the
12



1971 version. What is currently contained in ACI 318-08(11) corresponds to the most modern and effective
requirements on the subject worldwide.
The update of Title C of Regulation NSR-10 included the following aspects:
Chapter C.1 — General requirements

• In C.1.1.8 it is indicated that it is allowed to use document IPS-1(7) (or ACI 314) for the simplified design of
concrete structures of less than five stories or less than 3,000 m2 of surface area .
area.
• In C.1.1.10 — Provisions for seismic resistance, it is indicated how Title C of the
Regulation NSR-10 with Title A for earthquake resistant design.
Chapter C.2 — Notation and definitions

• In C.2.1 — Notation of Title C of Regulation NSR-10, all the technical terms used in Title C are updated. All
the nomenclature and definition of the variables have been updated and streamlined. • In C.2.2 —
Definitions, the English
term being defined is included in parentheses.
to facilitate the application of this title of Regulation NSR-10.
Chapter C.3 — Materials

• In C.3.1 — Materials tests, the responsibilities of the builder and the technical supervisor are indicated
regarding the quality of the materials used in reinforced concrete construction and how Title C
coordinates with Title I of the NSR-10 Regulation. • In C.3.2 — Cementitious materials,
cements are defined according to the cements that
They are produced in Colombia.
• In C.3.5 — Reinforcing steel, the ACI 318 document is adjusted to the national practice of the
following way: ÿ
Corrugated steel bars must comply with the Colombian technical standard NTC 2289 throughout the
national territory.
ÿ The use of reinforcing corrugated steel manufactured under NTC 245,
nor any other type of steel that has been cold worked or drawn.
ÿ Smooth reinforcement is only allowed in stirrups, shrinkage and temperature reinforcement or spiral
reinforcement and cannot be used as longitudinal flexural reinforcement, except when forming
electro-welded mesh.
ÿ Galvanized reinforcing bars complying with NTC 4013 are permitted. ÿ Epoxy-
coated wires and welded wire reinforcement must comply with ASTM A884M. ÿ It is allowed to use
headed bolts and their
assemblies, which must comply with
ASTM A1044M
• Section C.3.5.10 — Evaluation and Acceptance of Reinforcing Steel is included, which does not exist
in ACI 318, to require quality control of reinforcing steel within the country.
• In C.3.8 — Cited standards, all the NTC standards issued by Icontec are listed and in
failing that, the corresponding ASTM standard.
13



Chapter C.4 — Durability requirements

• This Chapter was reorganized making it clearer and easier to use. • In C.4.2
— Exposure categories and classes, the characteristics of the environments that can cause problems for
concrete are defined, and in C.4.3 — Requirements for concrete mixes , how to adjust the dosage of
concrete to prevent its deterioration due to environmental aspects.
Chapter C.5 — Concrete quality, mixing, and placement

• This Chapter was updated but maintains the same approach as in Regulation NSR-98. • In C.5.3.2 —
Required Average Strength, two new equations are introduced to determine the strength of concrete when it
is greater than 35 MPa. • C.5.6.2.4 now allows the use of standard format test
tubes (cylinders) (300 mm high and 150 mm in diameter) and smaller format (200 mm high and 100 mm in
diameter) which facilitates quality control of concrete.
• C.5.6.6 — Steel Fiber Reinforced Concrete now allows this type of reinforcement for
cutting.
Chapter C.6 — Shoring and formwork, embedments and construction joints

• This Chapter was updated but maintains the same approach as in Regulation NSR-98.
Chapter C.7 — Reinforcement details

Chapter C.8 — Analysis and design — General considerations

• This Chapter was updated but maintains the same approach as in Regulation NSR-98. • In C.8.4 —
Redistribution of moments in continuous elements subjected to bending, it is now allowed to increase or
decrease both positive moments and negative moments, while in Regulation NSR-98 it was only
allowed for the latter.
• The use of lightweight aggregates as defined in C.8.6 — Lightweight Concrete is now permitted. • A
new section C.8.8 — Effective stiffness to determine lateral deflections is introduced , which sets the
parameters to be used in the calculation of drifts (Chapter A.6) caused by seismic forces in reinforced
concrete structures. • Section C.8.13 — Joists in ribbed slabs, was
adjusted to the national practice, which is different from the North American practice for this type of elements.
Chapter C.9 — Strength and performance requirements

The most important updates are the following:
• In C.9.2 — Required Strength, all load combination and factorization equations are updated. These
equations are coordinated with those prescribed in Title B.
Since these equations lead to lower values of the required resistance, which are compensated by
lower values of the resistance reduction coefficient ÿ, a warning to this effect is included in B.2.4.1 .
14



• In C.9.3 — Design resistance, the new values of the reduction coefficient are presented.
of resistance ÿ.
Chapter C.10 — Bending and axial loads

• This Chapter presents one of the major variations in the ACI 318 document, consisting of changing the use
of the balanced quantity to determine the behavior of the flexural elements by the use of the unit
strain in the reinforcement steel located in the area. tensile strength of the element, which is known
worldwide as the unified theory since it is usable in both reinforced and prestressed concrete. This
change is presented in section C.10.3 — General Principles and Requirements.
• In C.10.6 — Distribution of flexural reinforcement in beams and slabs in one direction, the requirements for
distribution of reinforcement in tension zones are modified, which reduces cracking in this type of
elements.
• In C.10.8 — Design Dimensions for Compression Members (Columns), the minimum sections for columns,
which had been removed since the 1971 version of ACI 318, are removed. For structures permitted
in intermediate seismic hazard zones and high, minimal sections are maintained. This change allows
lower costs in reinforced concrete structures located in low seismic hazard zones. • In C.10.9 —
Limits of reinforcement of compression elements (columns), the maximum
allowable amount in columns is reduced to 4% of the section area to avoid excessive congestion of the
longitudinal reinforcing steel in the columns.
• The slenderness requirements for columns, C.10.10 — Slenderness Effects on Compression Members,
was modernized to now allow for greater and better use of modern computer programs. • In C.10.12
— Load transmission of
the columns through the mezzanine slabs, the results of a recent investigation carried out by a Colombian
engineer at the University of Alberta, Canada, are included.
Chapter C.11 — Shear and Torsion

The most important updates are the following:
• All the equations in the Chapter are converted from efforts to forces, which makes it easier to identify the
area on which the effort referred to in the equation applies.
• The use of minimum shear reinforcement is clarified in C.11.4.6 — Minimum shear reinforcement.
Chapter C.12 — Development lengths and reinforcement splices

Chapter C.13 — One- and Two-way Slab Systems

• This Chapter in ACI 318 refers only to slabs in two directions.
Traditionally, since the 1984 version of the Colombian Regulation, this Chapter has covered one-way
and two-way slabs as they are used in the country because they differ notably from the way they are
built in North America.
fifteen



• Additionally, the NSR Regulation in its 1998 versions and this new 2010 version, restrict the use of slab-
column systems, including the cellular lattice, where the slab replaces the beam due to the very poor
seismic behavior of these systems in the country and in the outside.
• Section C.13.8 — Plastic Methods of Analysis and Design, allows the use of more complex methodologies.
modern than traditional ones in the design of slab systems.
• Section C.13.9 — Two-way Slabs Supported on Walls or Rigid Beams, including Tables C.13.9-1 to
C.13.9-4, does not exist in ACI 318-08(11), is very useful. for national slab systems and comes from
the same source, but from the 1963 version.
Chapter C.14 — Walls

Chapter C.15 — Foundations

• This Chapter was updated but maintains the same approach as in Regulation NSR-98. • Section C.15.11
— Piles and foundation caissons, was adjusted to national practice and was coordinated with the requirements
of Title A of the Regulations. • Similarly, section C.15.13 — Foundation
tie beams, was adjusted to practice.
and was coordinated with the requirements regarding Title A of the Regulations.
Chapter C.16 — Precast concrete

It refers to concrete elements that are manufactured in a place other than their final position in the
structure.
Chapter C.17 — Concrete-concrete composite members subjected to flexure

It refers to concrete elements that are built in stages.
Chapter C.18 — Prestressed concrete

• This Chapter was updated. The most important modifications are the following: • In C.18.3 —
Design Assumptions, the concept of Class U, Class T or Class C is introduced as a function of calculated
stress in the extreme fiber in tension in the zone pre-compressed in tension, calculated for service
charges. • In C.18.4 — Performance
requirements — Elements subjected to bending, adjustments and precisions were made regarding the
allowable efforts in service conditions for prestressed elements. • Section C.18.13 — Post-Tensioned
Tendon Anchorage Zone
was updated. • Section C.18.22 — External post-tensioning, is new and very useful in
the repair and
rehabilitation of buildings.
Chapter C.19 — Shells and folded slabs

• This Chapter was updated.
16



Chapter C.20 — Strength Assessment of Existing Structures

• This Chapter was updated. It is very useful to establish the safety of structures when there are doubts about
their resistance and also to define important aspects in the intervention of existing buildings.
Chapter C.21 — Seismic resistant design requirements

• This Chapter was updated. The most important modifications are the following: • All the
requirements of this Chapter, as brought by ACI 318-08(11), were adjusted to the prescriptions of Title A of
seismic resistant design of Regulation NSR-10. The most important adjustment in this regard consists
of the application of the energy dissipation capabilities in the inelastic range (Minimum Dissipation —
DMI, Moderate Dissipation — DMO and Special Dissipation — DES), which is clarified in section
C.21.1.1 - Scope. • It should be taken into account that the detailed
requirements for special dissipation, DES, can be used in all seismic hazard zones in the country, those for
moderate dissipation, DMO, can only be used in zones of intermediate and low seismic hazard, and
those for minimum dissipation, DMI, can only be used in low seismic hazard areas. • It is important
to note that the requirements that the Colombian Regulation has traditionally had for structures
with moderate capacity for DMO energy dissipation are stricter than the homologous requirements of the ACI
318 document. The reason for this is that the two most populous cities in the country, Bogotá and
Medellín are located very close to the border that distinguishes the zones of high and intermediate
seismic threat. For this reason, the approach to give greater energy dissipation capacity in structures
with DMO requirements is derived from those of special DES dissipation , unlike ACI 318, where they
are derived as a very minor increase, in the opinion of national experts on the subject. , from the DMI
minimum dissipation requirements . This position is shared by the Advisory Commission for the
Seismic-Resistant Construction Regime. • The Chapter has been reordered and its requirements
now go in ascending order from minimum dispel, DMI, through moderate dispel, DMO, and ending at
the end of the Chapter in special dispel, DEX.
• In C.21.1.4 — Concrete in structures with moderate energy dissipation capacity (DMO) and special (DES),
the requirements are given for concrete to be used in structures with moderate energy dissipation
capacity, BMD, and special. , OFF Parallel requirements for reinforcing steel are given in C.21.1.5 —
Reinforcement in Moderate (DMO) and Special (DES) Energy Dissipation Capacity Structures . •
C.21.2 — Ordinary frames resistant to moment with minimum energy
dissipation capacity (DMI), contains the requirements that apply to structures with minimum energy dissipation
capacity (DMI). They were reorganized and updated. • The requirements of C.21.3 — Moment-
resistant intermediate frames with moderate energy dissipation capacity (DMO),
were revised and updated but maintaining the same philosophy of the NSR-98 Regulation, as explained
above. • Section C.21.3.6 — Minimum flexural resistance of frame columns with moderate energy
dissipation capacity (DMO), is new for this type of energy dissipation.
17



which requires compliance with the principle of strong column weak beam, of fundamental importance
in the response to seismic solicitations of the structure.
• Section C.21.4 — Intermediate Structural Walls with Moderate Energy Dissipation (DMO) Capacity, was
updated and coordinated with the requirements for Special Dissipation, DES.
Now it brings a novel way to define if there is a need to use edge elements in the wall by procedures
based on displacement when the unit strains in this zone indicate that the concrete may fail due to
excessive compression. • Sections C.21.5 — Elements subjected to bending in special
moment-resistant frames with special energy dissipation (DES) capacity, and C.21.6 — Elements subjected
to bending and axial load belonging to special moment-resistant frames with special capacity of
energy dissipation (DES) are updated. In C.21.6.4.3 a new procedure is introduced to calculate the
spacing of the confining stirrups of the columns.
• Section C.21.7 — Joints in Special Moment-Resisting Frames with Capacity

special energy dissipation (DES) is updated.
• New section C.21.8 — Special Moment-Resisting Frames Constructed of Precast Concrete with Special
Energy Dissipation Capacity (DES) is introduced for special precast frames. • Section C.21.9 —
Special Structural Walls and Coupler
Beams with Special Energy Dissipation (DES) Capacity, has been updated and now provides a novel way to
define if there is a need to use edge elements in the wall by procedures based on displacement
when strains in this zone indicate that the concrete may fail from excessive compression and now
allows the use of diagonal reinforcement in the coupler beams between walls.
• New section C.21.10 — Special Structural Walls Constructed Using Precast Concrete with Special Energy
Dissipation (DES) Capacity is introduced for special precast walls. • Sections C.21.11 — Diaphragms
and Structural Trusses
Assigned to Special Energy Dissipation (DES) Capacity and C.21.12 — Foundations of Structures Assigned
to Special Energy Dissipation (DES) Capacity are updated.
• A new section C.21.13 — Elements not designated as part of the seismic resistance system is introduced
for the design of reinforced concrete elements that are not part of the seismic resistance structural
system.
Chapter C.22 — Plain structural concrete

• This Chapter was updated.
Chapter C.23 — Concrete tanks and environmental engineering structures

• In Regulation NSR-98, a Chapter for the design of tanks in buildings had been introduced. Since it was the
only national reference applicable to the design of environmental engineering structures, despite the
fact that these are outside the scope of the Regulation. For Regulation NSR-10, it was decided to
modernize and update this chapter to include the own environmental engineering structures. With
this, an important contribution is being made
18



for the correct design and construction of drinking water treatment plants and wastewater disposal in
the national territory. • Chapter C.23 of Regulation NSR-10
is based on document ACI 350M-06(10)
specialized in concrete environmental engineering structures.
• Chapter C.23 indicates the sections of the rest of Title C that vary for use in environmental structures.
Appendix CA — Strut-Tie Models

• This Appendix is new. It corresponds to the standardization of the "rod method" of European inspiration
and applicable to the design of elements where the general theory of bending is not valid.
Its text comes from ACI 318-08(11).
Appendix CB — Alternative Design Provisions for Prestressed and Reinforced Concrete Members in Flexure and
Compression
• This Addendum is new and allows the use of the maximum amount requirements based on a fraction of the
balanced amount that were used for flexural elements in the 1984 Regulation and in the NSR-98.
Appendix CC — Alternative Strength Reduction and Load Factors

• This Appendix is new and allows the use of the load combination equations and strength reduction factors
ÿ that were used in the 1984 Regulation and NSR-98.
Appendix CD — Anchoring to Concrete

• This Appendix is new and gives design requirements for anchors. Its text comes from the ACI
318-08(11).
• This appendix refers to both anchors pre-installed prior to concrete placement
as to post-installed anchors.
• Does not include special inserts, through bolts, multiple anchors connected to a single steel plate at the
embedded end of the anchors, glued or grouted anchors, or direct anchors such as bolts or nails
installed pneumatically or using gunpowder.
Appendix CE — Information about reinforcing steel

• This Appendix is new and lists the characteristics of the reinforcing steel used in the
Regulation NSR-10.
Appendix CF — Equivalence between the SI system, the mks system, and the English system of non-
homogeneous equations of Title C of the Regulations
• This Appendix is new and gives the equivalence of the equations of Title C of the Regulation
NSR-10 between different unit systems.
19



Appendix CG — Information about reinforcing steel

• This Appendix existed in Regulation NSR-98 and was revised and updated for Regulation
NSR-10.
Title D — Structural Masonry

Data sheet:
Developed and maintained by Subcommittee D of the AIS 100 Committee of the Colombian Association
Base documents (1984 Regulation) — Yamín, et al(50), UBC-79(38), and AIS Standard
100-83(25)
Base Documents (NSR-98 Regulation) — ACI 530-95/ASCE 5-95/TMS 402-95(5) and
AIS 100-97(27) Standard
Base Documents (NSR-10 Regulation) — ACI 530-08/ASCE 5-08/TMS 402-08(12) and
The design and construction of reinforced masonry structures was new in the country when the 1984 Regulation was
issued. At the time, there were some documents on how to use the clay brick produced in the country for structural
purposes. The 1984 Regulation included an American-inspired Vertical Drilled Block Masonry Design and Construction
Title(38) and requirements for the design and construction of confined masonry inspired by national experience in this
type of masonry and based on the results of national(50) and foreign experimental trials , mainly Mexican. For the
production of Regulation NSR-98 and the update to NSR-10, there is an extensive national bibliography on this structural
system and numerous experimental tests carried out in various universities in the country.
For the issue of earthquake resistant design of reinforced masonry structures, this is reaffirmed by the treatise by
Englekirk and Hart(32). These principles are taken to the ACI 530 document. What is currently contained in ACI
530-08(12) corresponds to the most modern and effective requirements on the subject to
world level.
The update of Title D of Regulation NSR-10 included the following aspects:
Chapter D.1 — General requirements

• This Chapter remains unchanged with respect to that of Regulation NSR-98.
Chapter D.2 — Classification, uses, standards, nomenclature and definitions

• In D.2.1 — Classification of structural masonry, the types of masonry are indicated.
structure recognized by Regulation NSR-10: ÿ Reinforced
cavity masonry, its requirements are found in Chapter D.6. ÿ Reinforced masonry its requirements
are found in Chapter D.7.
twenty



ÿ Partially reinforced masonry, its requirements are found in Chapter D.8. ÿ Unreinforced
masonry, its requirements are found in Chapter D.9. This structural system is restricted to some
regions of the low seismic hazard zones.
ÿ Confined wall masonry, its requirements are found in Chapter D.10. ÿ Masonry of diaphragm
walls, its requirements are found in Chapter D.11. ÿ Externally reinforced masonry, its
requirements are found in the new Chapter D.12 and it is a system that was not included in Regulation
NSR-98 and is new in NSR-10.
• In the rest of the Chapter, the nomenclature, definitions and NTC and ASTM standards were updated.
manufacturing masonry materials.
Chapter D.3 — Quality of materials in structural masonry

• This Chapter was updated and coordinated with the rest of the Regulations. • In
D.3.4 — Glue mortar, a new type of H mortar is introduced for grout applications.
higher height where greater resistance of the mortar is required.
Chapter D.4 — Construction requirements for structural masonry

D.4.2.5.2 — Development Length, the development length expression is partially modified to a more modern
expression. • In D.4.5.11.1 — Horizontal Joint
Reinforcement for Masonry Walls, now states that joint reinforcement can be part of the reinforcement that
resists shear forces in the plane of the wall.
• A new section D.4.10 — Curing of Masonry Walls is introduced .
Chapter D.5 — General analysis and design requirements

• This Chapter was updated and coordinated with the rest of the Regulations. • A
new section D.5.1.5.3 — Values of ÿ for bearing stresses is introduced , which replaced section D.5.1.5.3 —
Values of ÿ for reinforcement, which is not required in the NSR-10 Regulation.
• The expression for the modulus of elasticity of the filler mortar in D.5.2.1.3 was modified by
an expression that better fits the national experimental results.
• In D.5.5.1 — Maximum theoretical axial resistance, the coefficient of the expression for the maximum axial
load was modified from 0.85 to 0.80 according to the value in document ACI 530-08(12).
• In the same way and for the same reason, the expression of section D.5.5.2 — Reduction of axial resistance
due to slenderness and the expressions of Table D.5.8-2 — Value of the nominal shear resisted by
the masonry, Vm, were modified.
• In D.5.8.4.3, it is now allowed within shear-resisting reinforcement to include joint reinforcement, but with
only 35% efficiency.
Chapter D.6 — Reinforced cavity masonry

• This Chapter remains the same as that of Regulation NSR-98.
twenty-one



Chapter D.7 — Reinforced masonry built with vertical drilling units

D.7.2.1.1 — Reinforced masonry walls with special energy dissipation capacity (DES), additional requirements
are included to be able to classify this type of masonry as special dissipation.
Chapter D.8 — Partially Reinforced Masonry Constructed with Vertical Drilling Units
D.8.2.1, this system is now allowed in the NSR-10 Regulation as one of the moderate dissipation DMO
structural systems.
Chapter D.9 — Unreinforced masonry

Chapter D.10 — Confined Wall Masonry

D.10.7.4 the correction coefficient for slenderness of the wall is modified. • In
D.10.7.7 — Shear design of the wall in the direction parallel to its plane, the shear strength ratio of the
confined masonry wall was modified for this situation.
Chapter D.11 — Masonry of diaphragm walls

• This Chapter remains the same as that of Regulation NSR-98. •
This type of construction is not allowed for new buildings, and its use is only allowed within the scope of
chapter A.10, applicable to the addition, modification or remodeling of the structural system of
buildings built before the validity of this version of the Regulation, or in the evaluation of its seismic
vulnerability.
Chapter D.12 — Externally reinforced masonry

• This Chapter is new in Regulation NSR-10. • Covers
externally reinforced masonry walls where the reinforcement consists of electro-welded mesh that is placed
inside the coating mortar or plaster (pattern) on both lateral faces of the walls, fixing them to them by
means of connectors and/or steel nails with the specifications and procedures described in this
Chapter.
Appendix D-1 — Structural Masonry Design by Allowable Working Stress Method
• This Appendix remains the same as that of Regulation NSR-98. • In

D-1.5.2 — Allowable forces for axial compression, the correction coefficient for slenderness of the wall is
modified. • Table D-1.5-1 —
Allowable tensile stresses for flexural masonry with bonded primer Ft (MPa), was updated and now includes
type H mortar.
22



Title E — One- and Two-Story Homes

Data sheet:
Developed and maintained by Subcommittee E of the AIS 100 Committee of the Colombian
Base documents (1984 Regulation) — AIS Standard 100-83(25)
Base documents (NSR-98 Regulation) — AIS Standard 100-97(27)
This unique Title worldwide that allows the construction of one and two-story houses without the mandatory
participation of a structural engineer, through empirical requirements, has been maintained, reviewed and
updated for Regulation NSR-10. Its requirements are a simplification of the use of confined masonry in Chapter
D.10.
Through Decree 52 of 2002, a Chapter on cemented bahareque was added within Regulation NSR-98, which is
maintained in Regulation NSR-10.
The update of Title E of Regulation NSR-10 included the following aspects:
Chapter E.1 — Introduction

• This Chapter was updated with respect to Regulation NSR-98. • Section
E.1.1.1 — Scope, has been updated. • Added a
new section E.1.2 — Definitions. • Section E.1.3.4 —
Structural Integrity, was updated.
Chapter E.2 — Foundations

• This Chapter corresponds to the old Chapter E.5 of Regulation NSR-98. It has been moved further into Title
E and its content is updated and modernized.
Chapter E.3 — Confined Masonry

• This Chapter corresponds to the old Chapter E.2 of Regulation NSR-98. Your content is
updated and modernized.
• Added new section E.3.4 — Openings in walls. • Added new section
E.3.6.6 — Symmetrical Wall Layout.
Chapter E.4 — Confinement elements in confined masonry

• This Chapter corresponds to the old Chapter E.3 of the NSR-98 Regulation but its content remains the
same.
Chapter E.5 — Floor slabs, roofs, dividing walls and parapets

• This Chapter corresponds to the former Chapter E.4 of Regulation NSR-98. Your content is
updated and modernized
23



• The new sections E.5.1.3 — Minimum thickness of slabs, E.5.1.4 — Solid slabs are included.
and E.5.1.5 — Lightened slabs.
Chapter E.6 — Additional Confined Masonry Construction Recommendations

Chapter E.7 — Bahareque cemented

• This Chapter was added to Regulation NSR-98 through Decree 52 of 2002. For Regulation NSR-10 it remains the
same, reorganizing it and bringing part of the content to Chapter E.8 and E.9.
Chapter E.8 — Mezzanine floors and joints in cemented bahareque

• This Chapter contains part of the material that existed in Chapter E.7 of Regulation NSR-98.
It is rearranged and updated.
Chapter E.9 — Roofs for cemented bahareque construction

• This Chapter contains part of the material that existed in Chapter E.7 of Regulation NSR-98.
It is rearranged and updated.
Appendix EA — Verification of the resistance of cemented bahareque walls

• This Appendix remains the same as that of Regulation NSR-98.
Title F — Metallic structures

Data sheet:
Developed and maintained by Subcommittee F of the AIS 100 Committee of the Colombian Association of
Earthquake Engineering established in 1983.
Base documents (1984 Regulation) — AISC-1978(13), Fedestructuras Code(37), NTC 2001(42) and AIS
100-83(25) Standard
Base documents (NSR-98 Regulation) — AISC-1994(14) and AIS Standard 100-97(27)
Base documents (NSR-10 Regulation) — AISC-2010(15), AISC-Seismic-2010(16) and
The design and construction of metal structures in the country, even before the issuance of the first earthquake-resistant
construction regulations in 1984, has been carried out using the document of the American Institute of Steel Construction —
AISC(13) . In 1977, the Colombian Federation of Manufacturers of Metallic Structures — Fedestructuras, carried out a
translation and adaptation to the national medium of it(37), which was used by Icontec to issue the NTC 2001 standard(42)
which in turn was used as the basis for Title F of Decree 1400 of 1984. For Regulation NSR-98, the versions AISC-1994(14),
AISI-1987(18) and AISI-1991(19) were used, and for the requirements of aluminium, the corresponding English standard(30).
In the course of these years there has been a fundamental change in the design philosophy of metallic structures, going
from the method of design by allowable efforts to the
24



design method by load and resistance factors. The update to the NSR-10 Regulation has been carried out with
the most modern document in this regard, which is the AISC document of the year 2010(15). Regarding aluminum
structures, it was updated with respect to Eurocode 9(34), which follows and modernizes the guidelines of the
English standard originally used in Regulation NSR-98.
For the theme of earthquake resistant design of metal structures have been traditionally used in the
country the AISC(16) requirements. For the NSR-10 Regulation, the most recent version corresponding to the
year 2010 has been used.
The update of Title F of Regulation NSR-10 also included that all of Title F is now in the SI metric system. In
Regulation NSR-98 this Title was in the metric system mks.
Chapter F.1 — General requirements

• In F.1.1 — Limits of applicability, the types of metallic construction are defined for which the
Title F contains requirements:
ÿ The design of steel structures with members made of rolled sections is
covered by Chapters F.2 and F.3.
ÿ The design of metallic structures with cold-formed members is covered in Chapter
F.4.
ÿ The design of metallic structures with structural aluminum elements is covered in
Chapter F.5.
Chapter F.2 — Steel structures with rolled, reinforced and structural tubular sections
• In Chapter F.2 the following sections are now included: ÿ F.2.1 —
General provisions ÿ F.2.2 — Design
requirements
ÿ F.2.3 — Design for stability
ÿ F.2.4 — Design of members in tension ÿ
F.2.5 — Design of members in compression ÿ
F.2.6 — Design of members in flexure ÿ
F.2.7 — Design of members by shear ÿ F.2.8 —
Design of members requested by Combined and Torsional Forces ÿ F.2.9 — Design of
Composite Section Members ÿ F.2.10 — Design of
Connections ÿ F.2.11 — Design of
Connections of Structural Hollow Sections (STPs) and Members in
caisson ÿ F.2.12 — Design for serviceability limit states

ÿ F.2.13 — Manufacturing, assembly and quality control ÿ
F.2.14 — Quality control and technical supervision ÿ
F.2.15 — Design based on inelastic analysis ÿ F.2.16 —
Damping ÿ F.2.17 — Fatigue
Design ÿ F.2.18 — Design for
Fire Conditions ÿ F.2.19 — Evaluation of Existing
Structures ÿ F.2.20 — Column and Beam Bracing
25



ÿ F.2.21 — Alternative Stability Design Methods ÿ F.2.22 —

Approximate Second-Order Analysis Procedure
Chapter F.3 — Seismic provisions for steel structures with rolled, reinforced sections and structural tubing

General provisions ÿ F.3.2 — General
design requirements ÿ F.3.3 — Analysis ÿ
F.3.4 — General
design requirements ÿ F.3.5 — Moment
Resisting Frames (PRM) ÿ F.3.6 — Braced Systems
and Shear Walls ÿ F.3.7 — Composite Moment Resisting
Frames (PRMC) ÿ F.3.8 — Braced Systems and Composite Shear
Walls ÿ F.3.9 — Fabrication and assembly ÿ F.3.10 — Quality control
and technical supervision for seismic
resistance system structures
ÿ F.3.11 — Connection qualification tests
Chapter F.4 — Steel structures with cold-formed sheet sections

General provisions ÿ F.4.2 —
Elements ÿ F.4.3 —
Members ÿ F.4.4 —
Armored members and structural systems ÿ F.4.5 —
Connections and joints ÿ F.4.6 —
Tests for special cases ÿ F.4.7 — Metal panels
for work in composite section ÿ F.4.8 — Specifications for construction
of cold-formed steel frames, dry-build systems and truss frames
Chapter F.5 — Aluminum structures

• In Chapter F.5 the following sections are now included:
ÿ F.5.1 — General ÿ F.5.2
— Material Properties and Selection ÿ F.5.3 — Design
Principles ÿ F.5.4 — Static Design
of Members ÿ F.5.5 — Assembled Sheets
and Beams ÿ F.5.6 — Static Design of joints
ÿ F.5.7 — Fatigue ÿ F.5.8 — Tests
Appendix F.5.A — Aluminum Product Nomenclature

• This Appendix was updated for Regulation NSR-10.
26



Appendix F.5.B — Typical Design Life Values

• This Appendix remains the same as for Regulation NSR-98.
Appendix F.5.C — Derivation of Material Limit Stresses for Use in Design

Appendix F.5.D — Calculation of elasto-plastic moment

Appendix F.5.E — Heat Affected Regions Adjacent to Welds

Appendix F.5.F — General formulas for torsional properties of open wall sections
slim
Appendix F.5.G — Lateral Torsional Buckling of Beams

Appendix F.5.H — Torsional buckling of compression members: determination of the parameter of

slenderness ÿ
Appendix F.5.I — Design curve equations

Appendix F.5.J — Fatigue Strength Data

Title G — Wooden structures and guadua structures

Data sheet:
Developed and maintained by Subcommittee G of the AIS 100 Committee of the Colombian
Base documents (1984 Regulation) — Did not exist in the 1984 Regulation
Base documents (NSR-98 Regulation) — PADT-REFORT(43) and AIS Standard 100-97(27)
Base documents (NSR-10 Regulation) — AITC-2004(17) and AIS Standard 100-09(28)
This Title was introduced for the first time in the NSR-98 Regulation as it did not exist in the 1984 Regulation.
The Board of the Cartagena Agreement of the Andean Pact, worked on the development of an adequate
technological base that allows the exploitation and use of the products of tropical forests
27



Andean. As a result of this effort, the "Andean Group Wood Design Manual"(43) was published. The requirements
presented in Title G of Regulation NSR-98 were based on this document. For Regulation NSR-10, this information
has been updated using numerous recent national investigations and the requirements of the latest version of
the American Institute of Timber Construction manual(17). On the other hand, Icontec has developed a wide
group of Colombian NTC technical standards on wood, which have been incorporated as normative references
in Regulation NSR-10.
For the requirements for guadua structures in Regulation NSR-10, the draft ISO standard on this material and
numerous national investigations have been used, including a set of NTC standards developed by Icontec, which
have been included as normative references in the NSR-10 Regulation. Regulation NSR-10.
Chapter G.1 — General requirements

• This Chapter has been updated for Regulation NSR-10. • G.1.1.3
includes a reference to NTC 2500 – Use of Wood in Construction, developed by Icontec, which deals with
wood as a construction material and industrial processes and treatments, as well as the requirements
for manufacturing, assembly, transport and maintenance of wooden elements. • Section G.1.2 —
Definitions and nomenclature is expanded. • Section
G.1.3.2 — Quality requirements for structural wood, is modernized
including a new section G.1.3.3 — Quality of structural wood, establishing more modern quality categories
than those contained in Regulation NSR-98 and Section G.1.3.5 — Structural Groups is also updated.
• A new section G.1.5 — References to Title G is included.
Chapter G.2 — Basis for structural design

• This Chapter has been updated for Regulation NSR-10. • Section
G.2.2.2 — Allowable Stresses and Modulus of Elasticity is updated to the new
classification of structural woods.
• In G.2.2.3 — Allowable stresses and modification coefficients, all the values are updated.
parameters.
• Table G.2.2-10 is included which summarizes the changes.
Chapter G.3 — Design of elements requested by bending

• This Chapter has been updated for Regulation NSR-10. • Added a
new section G.3.2 — Deflections. where a correction is introduced for
shear effects G.3.2.4 — Effect of shear.
• G.3.3 — Bending, G.3.4 — Shear, and G.3.5 — Crush are updated and modernized.
Chapter G.4 — Design of elements requested by axial force

new section G.4.3.3 — Studs Frames.
28



Chapter G.5 — Design of elements requested by bending and axial load

• This Chapter has been updated for Regulation NSR-10.
Chapter G.6 — Unions

• This Chapter has been updated and modernized for Regulation NSR-10 with the addition of
several new sections and explanatory tables and figures.
Chapter G.7 — Horizontal Diaphragms and Shear Walls

Chapter G.8 — Rebars

• This Chapter has been updated and modernized for Regulation NSR-10 with the addition of several new
sections and explanatory tables and figures. Now includes larger scale trusses than allowed by
Regulation NSR-98.
Chapter G.9 — Structural systems

Chapter G.10 — Sawing

• This Chapter has remained essentially the same as that of Regulation NSR-98.
Chapter G.11 — Preparation, fabrication, construction, assembly and maintenance

Chapter G.12 — Guadua structures

• This Chapter is completely new within the NSR-10 Regulation. • It includes
the following topics:
ÿ G.12.1 — Scope ÿ
G.12.2 — Terms and definitions ÿ G.12.3
— Materials ÿ G.12.4 —
Procurement and commercialization ÿ G.12.5
— Complementary materials ÿ G.12.6 —
Basis for structural design ÿ G.12.7 — Structural
design method ÿ G.12.8 — Design of elements
subjected to bending ÿ G.12.9 — Design of elements
requested by axial force ÿ G.12.10 — Design of elements requested
by bending and axial load ÿ G.12.11 — Connections ÿ G. 12.12—Preparation,
fabrication, construction,
assembly, and maintenance
29



Appendix GA — Methodology for obtaining allowable stresses

• This Addendum is new to Regulation NSR-10.
Appendix GB — Structuring parameters of Regulation NSR-10 Title G

Appendix GC — Contractions
Appendix GD — Moisture Content Equilibrium

Appendix GE — NTC Standards issued by Icontec Complementary to Title G

Appendix GF — Properties of Nominal Measured Preferential Sections

Appendix GG — Allowable Loads for Deck Design

Title H — Geotechnical Studies

Data sheet:
Developed and maintained by Subcommittee H of the AIS 100 Committee of the Colombian
Base documents (NSR-98 Regulation) — ACDB(49) and AIS Standard 100-97(27)
Base documents (NSR-10 Regulation) — IBC-2009(40) and AIS Standard 100-09(28)
This Title was introduced for the first time in the NSR-98 Regulation as it did not exist in the 1984 Regulation.
For its first version, the preliminary draft of the Bogota Code(49) developed by the Universidad de los Andes for
the Administrative Department of Planning of the Special District of Bogotá and other national and foreign
documents were also consulted.
For the version of the NSR-10 Regulation, the content of this Title has been reorganized, modified and
modernized based on the experience of using the NSR-98 Regulation and new advances in geotechnics and
related sciences. As a partial basis, the homologous requirements of the International Building Code(40) in its
2009 version were consulted .
The content is now divided like this:
30



Chapter H.1 — Introduction

• This Chapter has been updated for Regulation NSR-10.
Chapter H.2 — Definitions •

This Chapter has been updated for Regulation NSR-10. • New section
H.2.3 — Groundwater is included. • Added a new section H.2.4
— Safety Factors. • Added new section H.2.5 — Non-cohesive or
granular soils and cohesive soils.
Chapter H.3 — Geotechnical characterization of the subsoil

H.3.1 — Construction Unit, was updated in its entirety. • Section H.3.2 — Investigation
of the subsoil for definitive studies, was updated in its
whole.
• Section H.3.3 — Laboratory tests, was modernized and expanded clarifying numerous
aspects.
Chapter H.4 — Foundations

new section H.4.3 — Offset Foundations. • Added a new section H.4.4 — Pile
Foundations. in which it expands and
expands previously contained on stilts. • A new
section H.4.5 — Rock Foundations is included . • Added a new section
H.4.6 — Foundation Depth. • A new section H.4.7 — Indirect factors of safety
is included . • Section H.4.8 — Settlements, is updated in its entirety. • Added a
new section H.4.9 — Settlement Effects. • A new section H.4.10 —
Structural Design of the Foundation is included .
Chapter H.5 — Excavations and slope stability

• This Chapter is new in Regulation NSR-10. • The content
previously scattered in the other chapters has been concentrated here. It now contains the following sections:
ÿ H.5.1 — Excavations ÿ H.5.2 —
Slope stability on natural or
intervened slopes
Chapter H.6 — Retaining structures

ÿ H.6.1 — General ÿ H.6.2 — Limit
states ÿ H.6.3 — Design
considerations
31



ÿ H.6.4 — Earth pressure ÿ

H.6.5 — Thrusts due to water ÿ H.6.6 —
Thrusts due to external loads ÿ H.6.7 —
Capacity before failure ÿ H.6.8 —
Seismic thrusts ÿ H.6.9 —
Indirect safety factors
Chapter H.7 — Geotechnical evaluation of seismic effects

ÿ H.7.1 — Fundamentals ÿ H.7.2 —
Dynamic Response Analysis ÿ
H.7.3 — Stability Analysis ÿ H.7.4 —
Liquefaction and Related Phenomena
Chapter H.8 — Construction system of foundations, excavations and retaining walls

ÿ H.8.1 — Geotechnical construction
system ÿ H.8.2 — Excavations ÿ H.8.3 —
Retaining structures ÿ H.8.4
— Construction procedures for foundations
Chapter H.9 — Special geotechnical conditions

• This Chapter has been updated for Regulation NSR-10 from what is contained in Chapter H.6 of Regulation
NSR-98. • A new section
H.9.4 — Effects of vegetation is included , which thematically contains the
that included Chapter H.7 of Regulation NSR-98.
Chapter H.10 — Seismic rehabilitation of buildings: threats of geotechnical earthquake origin and reinforcement
of buildings
• This Chapter is completely new within the NSR-10 Regulation. • Contains
the following sections: ÿ H.10.1 — Scope
ÿ H.10.2 — Site
Characterization ÿ H.10.3 — Site Seismic
Hazard Mitigation ÿ H.10.4 — Foundation Strengthening and
Stiffness ÿ H.10.5 — Site Rehabilitation soil and foundations
32



Title I — Technical supervision

Data sheet:
Developed and maintained by Subcommittee I of the AIS 100 Committee of the Colombian Association
Base documents (NSR-98 Regulation) — Regulation 1984(45) and AIS Standard 100-97(27)
This Title was introduced for the first time in the NSR-98 Regulation since this Title did not exist in the 1984 Regulation.
However, in the 1984 Regulation the term of Technical Supervision was introduced to monitor that the construction is
carried out in accordance with what is stated in the designs and plans and with the appropriate qualities of construction
materials. The term "Interventory" was avoided given the connotation of money control that it has within the national
environment. Technical Supervision can be part of the Supervision, but only the Technical Supervision part is
mandatory according to Law 400 of 1997.
For the version of the NSR-10 Regulation, the content of this Title has been updated in accordance with the experience
of technical supervision carried out in the country under the use of the NSR-98 Regulation.
The content is divided like this:
Chapter I.1 — General

• This Chapter has been updated for Regulation NSR-10. • The definitions
were updated.
Chapter I.2 — Scope of technical supervision

• This Chapter has been updated and coordinated for Regulation NSR-10.
Chapter I.3 — Suitability of the technical supervisor and his auxiliary personnel
• This Chapter has been updated and coordinated for Regulation NSR-10.
Chapter I.4 — Recommendations for the exercise of technical supervision

• This Chapter is new in Regulation NSR-10. The material was taken from Appendix IA of the NSR-98 Regulation
where it was not mandatory and was a simple recommendation without legal obligation in its application.
The experience of the application of the NSR-98 Regulation has indicated the advisability of making it
mandatory within the NSR-10 Regulation.
• In addition to updating the references to the appropriate sections from the rest of the NSR-10 Regulation, a new
section I.4.3.8 — Final Report was included. Where the final report model to be submitted by the Technical
Supervisor is presented.
33



Title J — Building Fire Protection Requirements
Data sheet:
Developed and maintained by Subcommittee J of the AIS 100 Committee of the Colombian
Base documents (NSR-10 Regulation) — NFPA, IBC-2009(40) and AIS Standard 100-09(28)
This Title was introduced for the first time in the NSR-98 Regulation, since this Title did not exist in the 1984
Regulation. For its first version, the preliminary draft of the Bogotá Code(49) developed by the Universidad de
los Andes was used. for the Administrative Department of Planning of the Special District of Bogotá and other
national and foreign documents were also consulted.
For the version of the NSR-10 Regulation, the content of this Title has been updated according to the experience
of its application in the country under the use of the NSR-98 Regulation, in addition to the NFPA regulations and
the International Building Code IBC-2009. (40).
Chapter J.1 — General

Chapter J.2 — General requirements for fire protection in buildings

J.2.2 — Electrical, gas, and other combustible, flammable, or fuel networks is new.
Chapter J.3 — Fire resistance requirements in buildings

• This Chapter is new in Regulation NSR-10. • Contains
the following sections: ÿ J.3.1 — Scope
ÿ J.3.2 — Definitions
ÿ J.3.3 — Classification
of buildings based on the risk of loss of human life
or threat of combustion
ÿ J.3.4 — Determination of the required resistance against fire ÿ J.3.5
— Evaluation of the provision of resistance against fire in elements of
buildings
Chapter J.4 — Fire detection and extinction

• This Chapter is new in Regulation NSR-10. • Contains
the following sections:
3. 4



ÿ J.4.1 — Scope ÿ
J.4.2 — Fire detection and alarm systems and equipment ÿ J.4.3 — Fire
extinguishing systems and equipment
Title K — Supplemental Requirements

Data sheet:
Developed and maintained by Subcommittee K of the AIS 100 Committee of the Colombian
Base documents (NSR-10 Regulation) —IBC-2009(40) and AIS Standard 100-09(28)
This Title was introduced for the first time in the NSR-98 Regulation, since this Title did not exist in the 1984
Regulation. For its first version, the preliminary draft of the Bogotá Code(49) developed by the Universidad de
los Andes was used. for the Administrative Department of Planning of the Special District of Bogotá and other
national and foreign documents were also consulted.
For the version of the NSR-10 Regulation, the content of this Title has been updated according to the experience
of its application in the country under the use of the NSR-98 Regulation, in addition to the regulations on glass in
buildings from different countries and the International Building. Code IBC-2009(40).
Chapter K.1 — General, purpose and scope

Chapter K.2 – Classification of buildings by occupancy groups

Chapter K.3 – Requirements for common areas

• This Chapter was updated with respect to the NSR-98 Regulation.
Chapter K.4 – Special requirements for glasses, glass products and glazing systems
• This Chapter was fully updated with respect to the NSR-98 Regulation. • In K.4.1 —
General, K.4.1.1 — Scope was expanded to: ÿ Glass,
stained glass, windows, and glass products for use in buildings. ÿ Vertical and inclined
glass sheets for use in glazing systems on facades. ÿ Glass sheets for floors and glass structural
elements. ÿ Complementary elements in glazing systems.
35



• In K.4.1.2 — Definitions, added new terms. • Section K.4.2 —

Design Requirements, was updated and modernized. • In section K.4.3 — Safety,
new important aspects for safety against impact by humans were included, defining the type of glass and its
location.
36



Bibliographic references
(1) American Concrete Institute — ACI, 1977, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318-77) and Commentary
(ACI 318R-77), Detroit, MI, USA.
(2) American Concrete Institute — ACI, 1983, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318-83) and Commentary
(3) American Concrete Institute — ACI, 1989, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318-89) and Commentary
(4) American Concrete Institute — ACI, 1995, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318-95)
and Commentary (ACI 318R-95), Farmington Hills, MI, USA.
(5) American Concrete Institute — ACI, American Society of Civil Engineers — ASCE, The Masonry Society — TMS, 1995,
Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures -- Building Code Requirements for Masonry
Structures (ACI 530-95/ ASCE 5- 95/ TMS 402-95) and Specifications for Masonry Structures (ACI 530.1-95/ ASCE 6-95/
TMS 602-95) and Companion Commentaries, MSJC — Masonry Standards Joint Committee ACI/ASCE/TMS, Farmington
Hills, MI, USA , 491 p.
(6) American Concrete Institute—ACI, 1999, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318-99)
(7) American Concrete Institute — ACI, ICONTEC and AIS, 2002, Essential Requirements for Reinforced Concrete Buildings (For
Buildings of Limited Size and Height, Based on ACI 318-02), International Publication Series IPS-1, ACI, Farmington
Hills, MI, USA, 248 p.
(10) American Concrete Institute — ACI, 2006, Code requirements for environmental engineering concrete
structures (ACI 350M-06) and Commentary, Farmington Hills, MI, USA.
(12) American Concrete Institute — ACI, American Society of Civil Engineers — ASCE, The Masonry Society — TMS, 2008,
Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures -- Building Code Requirements for Masonry
Structures (ACI 530-08/ ASCE 5- 08/ TMS 402-08) -- Specifications for Masonry Structures (ACI 530.1-08/ ASCE 6-08/
TMS 602-08) and Companion Commentaries, MSJC — Masonry Standards Joint Committee ACI/ASCE/TMS, Farmington
Hills, MI, USES.
(13) American Institute of Steel Construction — AISC, 1978, Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection
of Structural Steel for Buildings, AISC, Chicago, IL., USA.
37



(14) American Institute of Steel Construction — AISC, 1994, Manual of Steel Construction - Load and Resistance Factor Design -
Volume I: Structural Members, Specifications & Codes - Volume II: Connections, 2nd.
Edition, AISC, Chicago, IL, USA, 2021 p.
(15) American Institute of Steel Construction — AISC, 2010, Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings, AISC,
Chicago, IL, USA.
(16) American Institute of Steel Construction — AISC, 2010, Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings,
AISC, Chicago, IL, USA.
(17) American Institute of Timber Construction — AITC, 2004, Timber Construction Manual, Fifth Edition, John Wiley and Sons
Inc., Hoboken, NJ, USA.
(18) American Iron and Steel Institute — AISI, 1987, Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual, AISI, Washington, DC,
USES.
(19) American Iron and Steel Institute — AISI, 1991, LRFD Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual, AISI, Washington,
DC, USA.
(20) American National Standards Institute—ANSI, 1982, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures - ANSI A.58.1 -1982, New York, New York, USA.
(21) American Society of Civil Engineers — ASCE, 1996, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures - ANSI/
ASCE 7-95, ASCE, New York, NY, USA, 134 p.
(22) American Society of Civil Engineers — ASCE and Structural Engineering Institute — SEI, 2005, Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures - ASCE/ SEI 7-05, ASCE, Reston, VA, USA, 388 p.
(23) Applied Technology Council—ATC, 1978, Tentative Provisions for the Development of Seismic Regulations
for Buildings, ATC-3-06, Palo Alto, CA, USA, 505 p.
(24) Colombian Association of Earthquake Engineering — AIS, 1981, Seismic Requirements for Buildings - AIS Standard
100-81, Bogota, Colombia, 58 p.
(25) Colombian Association of Earthquake Engineering — AIS, 1983, Seismic Requirements for Buildings - Standard
AIS 100-83, AIS, Bogota.
(26) Colombian Association of Earthquake Engineering - AIS, Universidad de los Andes and Institute of Research in Geosciences,
Mining and Chemistry - Ingeominas, 1996, General Study of Seismic Hazard in Colombia, Committee AIS 300 -
Earthquake Hazard, Bogotá, Colombia.
AIS 100-97, Bogota, Colombia, 2 Vol.
AIS 100-09, Bogota, Colombia, 3 Vol.
(29) Blume, J., NM Newmark, and LH Corning, (1961), Design of Multistory Reinforced Concrete Buildings for
Earthquake Motions, Portland Cement Association, Skokie, IL, USA, 318 p.
38



(30) British Standards Institution — BSI, 1991, British Standard BS-8118 - Part I - Structural Use of Aluminum —
Design Code, BSI, London, UK.
(31) Congress of the Republic, 1997, Law 400 of 1997 — By means of which requirements for earthquake-resistant construction
are adopted, Bogotá, Colombia.
(32) Englekirk, RE, and GC Hart, 1982, Earthquake Design of Concrete Masonry Buildings, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs NJ.,
USA.
(33) European Committee for Standardization — CEN, 2005, Eurocode 8: Design provisions for earthquake resistance of
structures - ENV 1998-1-1, Brussels, Belgium, 276 p.
(34) European Committee for Standardization — CEN, 2005, Eurocode 9: Design of aluminum structures - ENV
1999-1-1, Brussels, Belgium
(35) Federal Emergency Management Agency — FEMA, 1994, NEHRP Recommended Provisions for the Development of
Seismic Regulations for New Buildings (FEMA 222) - 1994 Edition, and Commentary, Earthquake Hazard Reduction
Series No. 222A, Building Seismic Safety Council, Washington, DC, USA.
(36) Federal Emergency Management Agency — FEMA, 2006, NEHRP Recommended Provisions for the Development of
Seismic Regulations for New Buildings and Other Structures (FEMA 450) - 2006 Edition, and Commentary, Earthquake
Hazard Reduction Series No. 450, Building Seismic Safety Council , Washington, DC, USA, 385 p.
(37) Fedestructuras, 1977, Fedestructuras Metallic Construction Code, Colombian Federation of

Manufacturers of Metallic Structures, Bogotá.
(38) International Conference of Building Officials — ICBO, 1979, Uniform Building Code - UBC-79, ICBO, Whittier,
CA, USA, 734 p.
(39) International Conference of Building Officials — ICBO, 1997, UBC - Uniform Building Code - 1997 Edition,
Whittier, CA, USA, 3 Vol.
(40) International Code Council — ICC, 2009, International Building Code — IBC — 2009, Country Club Hills, IL,
USES.
(41) Colombian Institute of Technical Standards — ICONTEC, 1983, Colombian Code of Structures of
Reinforced Concrete, Icontec-2000 Standard, Bogotá, Colombia.
(42) Colombian Institute of Technical Standards — ICONTEC, 1984, Colombian Building Code
Metallic - Icontec-2001 Standard, Bogotá, Colombia.
(43) Board of the Cartagena Agreement, Andean Pact, 1984, Design Manual for Timber of the Andean Group, 3rd Edition, Andean
Technological Development Projects in the Area of Tropical Forest Resources, PADT-REFORT, Lima, Peru, 597 p.
(44) Ministry of Economic Development, 1998, Decree 33 of 1998, by means of which the Colombian Regulation for Earthquake-
Resistant Construction NSR-98 is adopted, Bogotá, Colombia, 4 Vol.
39



(45) Ministry of Public Works and Transportation — MOPT, 1984, Decree 1400 of June 7, 1984 — Code
Colombian Construction of Earthquake Resistant, Bogotá, Colombia
(46) Structural Engineers Association of California — SEAOC, 1974, Recommended Lateral Force Requirements and Commentary,
3rd Edition, SEAOC Seismology Committee, San Francisco, CA., USA.
5th Edition, SEAOC Seismology Committee, San Francisco, CA., USA.
7th Edition, SEAOC Seismology Committee, San Francisco, CA., USA.
(49) Universidad de los Andes, 1985, Bogotá Building Code Draft, Department of
Civil Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, Universidad de los Andes, Bogotá.
(50) Yamín, LE, LE Garcia, J. Galeano, and G. Reyes, 1993, Study of the Seismic Behavior of Confined Masonry Walls and
Design Recommendations, Universidad de los Andes, Bogotà, Colombia, 24 p.
40



NSR-10
TITLE A — REQUIREMENTS
DESIGN GENERAL AND
EARTHQUAKE CONSTRUCTION
RESISTANT

NSR-10 — Chapter A.1 — Introduction
TITLE A
GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS AND
CHAPTER A.1
INTRODUCTION
A.1.1 — COLOMBIAN EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT STANDARDS
A.1.1.1 — The design, construction and technical supervision of buildings in the territory of the Republic of Colombia must
be subject to the criteria and minimum requirements established in the Colombian Seismic Resistant Standards, which
include:
(a) Law 400 of 1997, (b)

Law 1229 of 2008, (c)
This Colombian Regulation of Seismic Resistant Constructions, NSR-10, and (d) The
resolutions issued by the "Permanent Advisory Commission of the Seismic Earthquake Resistant Constructions"
of the National Government, attached to the Ministry of Environment, Housing and Territorial Development,
and created by Article 39 of Law 400 of 1997.
A.1.2 — ORGANIZATION OF THIS REGULATION
A.1.2.1 — AGENDA — This Colombian Regulation for Earthquake-Resistant Construction, NSR-10, is divided thematically
into the following Titles, in accordance with the provisions of Article 47 of Law 400 of 1997, as follows:
TITLE A — General earthquake resistant design and construction requirements
TITLE B — Charges
TITLE C — Structural Concrete
TITLE D — Structural Masonry
TITLE E — One- and Two-Story Houses
TITLE F — Metallic structures
TITLE G — Wooden structures and Guadua structures
TITLE H — Geotechnical studies
TITLE I — Technical supervision
TITLE J — Fire protection requirements in buildings
TITLE K — Other Supplementary Requirements
A.1.2.2 — OBJECT — The purpose of this Seismic-Resistant Construction Regulation, NSR-10, is to:
A.1.2.2.1 — Minimize the risk of loss of human lives, and defend as much as possible the patrimony of the State
and citizens.
A-1
A.1.2.2.2 — A building designed following the requirements of this Regulation must be capable of resisting, in
addition to the forces imposed by its use, low-intensity tremors without damage, moderate tremors without
structural damage, but possibly with some damage. to non-structural elements and a strong tremor with damage
to structural and non-structural elements but without collapse.
A.1.2.2.3 — In addition to the defense of life, with compliance with the levels prescribed by this Regulation for
design seismic movements, which correspond to the minimum requirements established for the design of
structural elements and non-structural elements, It is allowed to protect to some extent the patrimony.
A.1.2.2.4 — The design seismic movements prescribed in this Regulation correspond to those that would affect
buildings if a strong earthquake occurs. Before the occurrence, in the national territory, of a strong earthquake
that induces movements of similar characteristics to the design seismic movements prescribed in this Regulation,
repairable structural and non-structural damages must be expected in buildings built complying with the
Regulations, although in some cases it may not be economically feasible to repair them.
A.1.2.2.5 — For essential buildings and community services as defined in Chapter A.2 of this Regulation, it is
expected that the damage produced by seismic movements with characteristics similar to the design seismic
movements prescribed in it will be repairable and not so severe as to inhibit the immediate and continued
operation and occupancy of the building.
A.1.2.3 — SCOPE — This Seismic-Resistant Construction Regulation, NSR-10, contains:
A.1.2.3.1 — The minimum requirements for the design and construction of new buildings, so that they are capable
of resisting the forces imposed by nature or their use and to increase their resistance to the effects produced by
seismic movements . It also establishes, in Title E, simplified design and construction requirements for one- and
two-story houses that belong to use group I as defined in A.2.5.1.4.
A.1.2.3.2 — For buildings built before the validity of this Regulation, Chapter A.10 establishes the requirements
to be used in the evaluation, addition, modification and remodeling of the structural system; vulnerability analysis,
the design of seismic reinforcement and rehabilitation interventions, and the repair of buildings after the occurrence
of an earthquake.
A.1.2.3.3 — Chapter A.12 establishes special requirements for the earthquake-resistant design and construction
of essential buildings belonging to use group IV as defined by A.2.5.1.1 and those included in subparagraphs (a) ,
(b), (c) and (d) of use group III, as defined by A.2.5.1.2, essential for the recovery of the community after the
occurrence of an emergency, including an earthquake. In relation to the buildings included in literals (e) and (f) of
use group III, as defined in A.2.5.1.2, it is up to the owner in the first case or the competent authority in the second
to define whether It is required to advance the design of them according to the special requirements of Chapter
A.12.
A.1.2.4 — EXCEPTIONS — This Seismic-Resistant Construction Regulation, NSR-10, is applicable to buildings

(constructions whose primary use is habitation or occupation by human beings) and does not apply to:
A.1.2.4.1 — The design and construction of special structures such as bridges, transmission towers, towers and
industrial equipment, docks, hydraulic structures and all those different constructions of buildings.
A.1.2.4.2 — Structures whose dynamic behavior and response to design seismic movements differ from that of
conventional buildings. When the use of these structures is habitation or occupation by human beings, their
design and construction must be subject to the provisions of Chapter II, Articles 8 to 14 of Law 400 of 1997.
A.1.2.4.3 — Structures that are not covered within the limitations of each one of the structural materials prescribed
within this Regulation. When the use of these structures is habitation or occupation by human beings, their design
and construction must be subject to the provisions of Chapter II, Articles 8 to 14 of Law 400 of 1997.
A.1.2.4.4 — For the earthquake resistant design of some structures that are outside the scope of the Regulations,
A-2
See Appendix A-1, which is not mandatory.
A.1.2.5 — DEFINITIONS — Chapter A.13 of this Regulation for Earthquake-Resistant Constructions gives the definitions
of the terms used in this Title A of the Regulation.
A.1.3 — BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURE, IN

ACCORDANCE WITH THE REGULATION
A.1.3.1 — GENERAL — The design and construction of a building subject to this Regulation must be carried out as
indicated below. The different stages of the studies, construction and technical supervision are expanded in the pertinent
sections of the Regulation.
A.1.3.2 — GEOTECHNICAL STUDIES — An exploration of the subsoil must be carried out in the place where the building
is going to be built, complemented with a consideration of its surroundings to detect, if applicable, ground movements.
The scope of exploration and the laboratory testing program are established in Title H — Geotechnical Studies. The
geotechnical engineer must prepare a report in which he relates the exploration and the results obtained in the laboratory,
giving the recommendations that the structural engineer must follow in the design of the foundation and containment
works, the definition of local seismic effects, the construction procedures that the builder must use, and the special
aspects to be taken into account by the technical supervisor. The report should indicate the expected settlements, their
variability over time, and the measures that must be taken to avoid adversely affecting neighboring buildings. The report
must be signed, or labeled, by a civil engineer empowered for this purpose in accordance with Law 400 of 1997.
A.1.3.3 — ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN — The architectural project of the building must comply with current urban
regulations, the requirements specified in Title J and Title K and must also indicate, for the purposes of this Regulation,
the uses of each one. of the parts of the building and their classification within the use groups defined in Chapter A.2, the
type of each one of the non-structural elements and the degree of minimum performance they must have in accordance
with the requirements of Chapter A. .9. The architectural project must be signed by an architect with a current professional
license. When the architectural plans include the seismic designs of the non-structural elements, they must be signed or
labeled by a professional empowered for this purpose in accordance with Law 400 of 1997. See A.1.3.6.
A.1.3.4 — STRUCTURAL DESIGN — The structural design must be carried out by a civil engineer authorized for this
purpose, in accordance with Law 400 of 1997. The structure of the building must be designed so that it has adequate
resistance and rigidity in the face of loads. minimum design requirements prescribed by the Regulations and it must also
be verified that it has adequate rigidity to limit deformability under service loads, in such a way that the functioning of the
building is not affected. Table A.1.3-1 below specifies the stages that must be carried out, within the scope of this
Regulation, in the structural design of new and existing buildings, other than those covered in A.1.3.11. In table A.1.3-1,
the order of the design procedure for new buildings has been followed, which does not necessarily coincide with that of
existing buildings, since the latter must be adjusted to the sequence prescribed in Chapter A.10 and indicated in table
A.1.3-1 is merely informative for existing buildings.
Table A.1.3
-1 Structural design procedure for new and existing buildings
Design of new buildings Intervention of existing buildings
Step 1 — Pre-sizing and coordination with other professionals

Definition of the structural system, tentative dimensions In addition to the coordination with other professionals to preliminarily
evaluate the different requests regarding the project, it must be established if the intervention such as: the mass of the
structure, the dead loads, is included within the scope given in A .10.1.3. If live loads, seismic effects, and wind forces are
covered, steps 1 and 2 of A.10.1.4 must be performed and with that information stage 3 of that wind must be performed.
professionals involved in the design. numeral. These preliminary dimensions are coordinated with the other
keep going...
A-3
Table A.1.3 -1 (continuation)

Structural Design Procedure for New and Existing Buildings
Step 2 — Evaluation of final applications

With the dimensions of the elements of the structure, stage 4 of A.10.1.4 must be carried out where, among others defined as a
result of step 1, all aspects are evaluated, analogous real information must be determined, and solicitations that may affect the
construction according to that required for new buildings, but based on the requirements of Title B of the Regulations. These
existing buildings in accordance with what is indicated in include: the gravitational effect of the mass of A.10.4.2.6. structural
elements, or self-weight, finishing loads and non-structural elements, dead
loads, wind forces, deformations imposed by rheological
effects of structural materials and settlement of the soil that
supports the foundation. Likewise, the mass of the building
and its content must be determined when required by the
Regulations, which will be used to determine the seismic
effects, in accordance with the following steps.
Step 3 — Obtaining the seismic threat level and the values of Aa and Av
This step consists of locating the place where the building will Within the scope of stage 4 of A.10.4.1, for existing buildings,
be built within the seismic zoning maps given in Chapter A.2 the design seismic movements are determined in the same
of the Regulations and determining the level of seismic threat way as for new buildings, with the exception of buildings for
of the place, according to the values of the Aa and Av which the Regulation allows them to benefit from the use of
parameters . obtained in the seismic zoning maps of Chapter seismic movements for the limited security level for seismic
rehabilitation. For the use of seismic movements for the limited
A.2. The seismic threat level will be classified as high, security level, A.10.9.2.5 should be consulted, which only
intermediate or low. Appendix A-4 presents a list of Colombian
applies to buildings declared as historical heritage and under
municipalities, with their definition of the seismic hazard zone,
the conditions imposed there. In this case the use of Ae is
and the values of the Aa and Av parameters , among others.
allowed , instead of the values of Aa and Av as indicated in
A.10.3.
Step 4 — Design Earthquakes

Design seismic movements must be defined at the building The same procedure must be followed as for new buildings.
site, in accordance with the requirements of Chapter A.2 of In the case of buildings declared as historical heritage and
the Regulations and, in the case of Buildings covered by under the conditions allowed by A.10.9.2.5, seismic movements
A.1.2.3.3, with the requirements of Chapter A.12 of the can be used for the limited security level defined in A.10.3.
Regulations. Regulation, taking into account:
(a) The seismic threat for the place determined in step 3,

expressed through the parameters Aa and Av , or Ad ,
as the case may be, which represent the effective peak
horizontal acceleration and the effective peak horizontal
velocity expressed in terms of acceleration of the design
earthquake, (b) The characteristics
of the stratification of the underlying soil in the place through
some coefficients of site Fa and Fv , and (c) The
importance of the
construction for the recovery of the community after the
occurrence of an earthquake through a coefficient of
importance I.
The characteristics of design seismic motions are expressed

by means of a design elastic spectrum.
The Regulation contemplates alternative descriptions of the
design earthquake, either through families of accelerograms,
or through expressions derived from seismic microzoning
studies, which must be determined following the requirements
given in Chapter A.2.
keep going...
A-4
Table A.1.3 -1 (continuation)

Step 5 — Characteristics of the structure and the structural material used

The seismic resistance structural system of the building must Within the scope of stage 4 of A.10.4.1, for existing buildings,
be classified within one of the structural systems prescribed a correspondence with the structural systems that are allowed
in Chapter A.3: load-bearing wall system, combined system, for new buildings according to the characteristics of the
frame system, or dual system. The Regulation defines structural system originally used in their construction must be
limitations on the use of structural seismic resistance systems determined. with what is prescribed in A.10.4.2.
based on the seismic hazard zone where the building is
located, the type of structural material used (structural
concrete, metal structure, structural masonry, or wood), the
very way in which the material is arranged in the structural
elements according to whether it is able to adequately respond
to seismic movements such as those expected through its
energy dissipation capacity, which can be special (DES),
moderate ( BMD ) or minimal (DMI); the height of the building,
and its degree of irregularity.
Step 6 — Degree of irregularity of the structure and analysis procedure

Definition of the seismic analysis procedure of the The same principles are applied as for structure buildings according to the
regularity or irregularity of the configuration of the building, new.
both in plan and elevation, its degree of redundancy or
absence of it in the system structure of seismic resistance, its
height, the characteristics of the soil in the place, and the level
of seismic threat, following the precepts given in Chapter A.3
of this Regulation.
Step 7 — Determination of seismic forces

Obtaining the seismic forces, Fs, that must be applied to the Within the scope of stage 4 of A.10.4.1, for existing buildings,
loads equivalent to those of new buildings are determined, but
structure, for which the design seismic movements defined in
adjusted to the properties of the existing structure. See
step 4 must be used.
A.10.4.2.
Step 8 — Seismic analysis of the structure

Seismic analysis of the structure is carried out What is indicated in stage 5 of A.10.1.4 must be fulfilled.
applying the prescribed design seismic motions to an
appropriate mathematical model of the structure, as defined
in Clause A.3. This analysis is carried out for the design
seismic movements without being divided by the coefficient of
energy dissipation capacity, R , and must be done by the
method that has been defined in step 6. The maximum
displacements imposed by the seismic movements must be
determined. from design to the structure and the internal
forces that derive from them.
Step 9 — Horizontal Offsets
Evaluation of the horizontal displacements, including the What is indicated in stage 9 of A.10.1.4 must be fulfilled.
torsional effects of the entire structure, and the drifts (relative
displacement between adjacent levels), using the procedures
given in Chapter A.6 and based on the displacements obtained
in step 8.
keep going...
TO 5
Table A.1.3 -1 (continued)

Step 10 — Drift Check

Verification that the obtained design drifts do not exceed the What is indicated in stage 10 of A.10.1.4 must be fulfilled.
limits given in Chapter A.6. If the structure exceeds the drift
limits, calculated including the torsional effects of the entire
structure, it is mandatory to stiffen it, carrying out steps 8, 9
and 10 again, until the drift check is met.
Step 11 — Combination of the different requests

The different solicitations that must be taken into account must comply with what is indicated in stages 6 to 8 of A.10.1.4.
account, are combined to obtain the internal design forces of
the structure, in accordance with the requirements of Chapter
B.2 of the Regulation, by the design method of each structural
material. In each of the required load combinations, the
stresses are multiplied by the load coefficient prescribed for
that combination in Chapter B.2 of the Regulations. The effects
caused by the design earthquake take into account the energy
dissipation capacity of the structural system, which is achieved
by using reduced design seismic effects, E obtained by dividing
the seismic forces Fs, determined in step 7, by the coefficient
of power dissipation capacity ) ,
RE FR=s . Dissipation capacity coefficient

( energy, R (a) , is a function of:
The seismic resistance system according to the classification
given in Chapter A.3, (b) The degree
of irregularity of the building, (c) The degree of
redundancy or absence of it in the structural system of seismic
resistance, and (d) Of the design and detailed
requirements of each material, for the degree of corresponding
energy dissipation capacity (DMI, DMO, or DES), as
specified in Chapter A. 3.
Step 12 — Design of structural elements

It is carried out in accordance with the requirements of the What is indicated in stages 8, 11 and 12 of A.10.1.4 must be
seismic resistance system and the structural material used. complied with, where it is indicated how to interpret the effective
Structural elements must be designed and detailed in resistance of the building in light of the solicitations
accordance with the requirements of the degree of minimum equivalents and how the resistance to be provided is defined
(DMI), moderate (DMO) or special (DES) energy dissipation to reduce the vulnerability of the building, when it is vulnerable,
capacity prescribed in Chapter A.3, as appropriate, which will to design the building intervention.
It will allow the structure to respond, in the event of an
earthquake, in the inelastic range of response and meet the
objectives of the earthquake resistance standards. The design
of the structural elements must be carried out for the most
unfavorable values obtained from the combinations obtained in
step 11, as prescribed in Title B of this Regulation.
A.1.3.5 — FOUNDATION DESIGN — The effects of the different stresses, including the effects of the design seismic movements on the foundation
elements and the supporting soil are obtained as follows:
(a) For the purposes of the structural design of the elements that make up the foundation, the results of the combinations carried out in step 11
of A.1.3.4 are used, using the appropriate loads and reduced design seismic forces, E from of the reactions of the structure on these
elements, taking into account the capacity of the structure. In the
, design of the foundation elements, the requirements of the structural
material and Title H of this document must be followed.
A-6
Regulation.
(b) In order to obtain the stresses on the foundation soil, from the reactions of the structure and its foundation on the
soil, the load combinations are used for the work stress method of section B.2.3, using appropriate loads and
reduced design seismic forces, E . The effects of the structure and the earthquake on the ground thus obtained
are defined at the level of work efforts and must be evaluated in accordance with the requirements of Title H of
this Regulation.
A.1.3.6 — SEISMIC DESIGN OF NON-STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS — The seismic design of non-structural elements must
be carried out in accordance with the following requirements:
A.1.3.6.1 — The degree of superior, good or low performance defined in Chapter A.9 must be met according to the
use group to which the building belongs.
A.1.3.6.2 — The design of non-structural elements must be carried out by professionals empowered for this purpose
in accordance with articles 26 and 29 of Law 400 of 1997 and following the requirements of Chapter A.9, considering
for the effect the seismic design parameters provided by the structural designer.
A.1.3.6.3 — Within the classification of non-structural elements, systems such as racks are included, whose treatment
must be as that of structural systems, which can be part of the building structure, or be an independent structural
system of the structure of the building where they are housed. The design of this type of system must be carried out
by structural engineers, following earthquake resistant design requirements in accordance with the specific load
conditions of each application, in accordance with Chapter A.9.
A.1.3.6.4 — The use of elements designed and installed by their manufacturer is allowed, or whose installation is
done following their instructions, complying with what is indicated in A.1.5.1.2.
A.1.3.6.5 — The builder who signs the construction license must:
(a) Compile the designs of the different non-structural elements and the characteristics and documentation
of those that take advantage of what is allowed in A.1.5.1.2, to present them in a single report before
the Curatorship or office or agency in charge of studying, processing , and issue construction licenses.
(b) The different designs of the non-structural elements must be signed by the Constructor who signs the
license, thus indicating that he is responsible for the non-structural elements being built according to the
design, complying with the specified degree of performance.
A.1.3.7 — REVIEW OF THE DESIGNS — The plans, reports and studies carried out must be reviewed for the purpose of
obtaining the construction license as indicated by Law 400 of 1997, Law 388 of 1997 and their respective regulations. . This
review must be carried out in the curatorship or in the offices or dependencies in charge of studying, processing, and issuing
construction licenses, or by an independent professional, at the expense of the person requesting the license. Design
reviewers must have the qualities established in Law 400 of 1997.
A.1.3.8 — CONSTRUCTION — The construction of the structure, and of the non-structural elements, of the building is carried
out in accordance with the requirements of the material, for the degree of energy dissipation capacity for which it was
designed, and under technical supervision, when required by Law 400 of 1997, carried out in accordance with the requirements
of Title I. In construction, the requirements given by the Regulations for each structural material must be met and the
procedures and specifications given by the designers. The direction of the construction must be carried out by a civil engineer,
or architect, or a mechanical engineer in the case of metallic or prefabricated structures, empowered for this purpose, in
accordance with Law 400 of 1997, or a builder in architecture or engineering empowered for this purpose by Law 1229 of
2008.
A.1.3.9 — TECHNICAL SUPERVISION — In accordance with Title V of Law 400 of 1997, the construction of building
structures, or construction units, that have more than 3000 m² of built area, regardless of their use, must be submitted to a
technical supervision carried out in accordance with the provisions of this section and in Title I of these Regulations.
A-7
A.1.3.9.1 — Essential and community service buildings — In accordance with Article 20 of Law 400 of 1997,
buildings of use groups III and IV, regardless of their area, must be subject to Supervision. Technique.
A.1.3.9.2 — Buildings designed and built in accordance with Title E of the Regulation — In accordance with
Paragraph 1 of Article 18 of Law 400 of 1997, structures that are design and build following Title E recommendations,
as long as they are less than 15 housing units.
A.1.3.9.3 — Technical supervision required by the designers — In accordance with Paragraph 2 of Article 18 of
Law 400 of 1997, the structural designer, or the geotechnical engineer, according to their criteria, may require
technical supervision in buildings of any area; whose complexity, special construction procedures or materials used,
make it necessary, consigning this requirement in the structural plans or in the geotechnical study respectively.
A.1.3.9.4 — Suitability of the technical supervisor — The technical supervisor must be a professional, civil
engineer or architect, who meets the qualities required by Chapter V of Title VI of Law 400 of 1997 or a builder in
architecture and engineering according to Articles 3 and 4 of Law 1229 of 2008. The professional, under his
responsibility, can delegate some of the supervision tasks to non-professional personnel.
Technical supervision corresponds to a part of the intervention and can be carried out by a professional other than
the auditor.
A.1.3.9.5 — Scope of technical supervision — The scope of the tasks that the technical supervisor must carry out
are established in Title I of these Regulations.
A.1.3.9.6 — Buildings where technical supervision is not required — In those buildings where technical
supervision is not required, this fact does not exempt the builder from carrying out the quality controls of the materials
that the Regulation requires for the different structural materials, nor to keep records and controls of the foundation
and geotechnical conditions of the project.
A.1.3.10 — ESSENTIAL BUILDINGS — Essential buildings belonging to use group IV, as defined by A.2.5.1.1, and those
included in subparagraphs (a), (b), (c) and (d). ) of use group III, as defined in A.2.5.1.2, shall be designed and constructed
meeting the requirements presented in the design procedure defined in A.1.3.2 to A.1.3.8, plus any additional requirements
given. in Chapter A.12, within which Step 10 of A.1.3.4 is expanded, requiring a verification of the building for seismic
movements corresponding to the building damage threshold. In relation to the buildings included in literals (e) and (f) of use
group III, as defined in A.2.5.1.2, it is up to the owner in the first case or the competent authority in the second to define
whether It is required to advance the design of them according to the special requirements of Chapter A.12.
A.1.3.11 — ONE AND TWO-STOREY HOUSES — One and two-story buildings must be designed in accordance with
Chapters A.1 to A.12 of these Regulations. One- and two-story houses of use group I, as defined by A.2.5.1.4, that are not
part of programs of fifteen or more dwelling units and do not have more than 3,000 m² of combined area, may be alternatively
designed in accordance with the requirements of Title E of this Regulation.
A.1.3.12 — FUNDAMENTAL ASPECTS OF DESIGN — In any building of use group I, as defined by A.2.5.1, that has more
than 3000 m² of combined area, that is part of a program of fifteen or more housing units, in all the buildings of the groups of
uses II, III and IV, as defined by A.2.5.1 and when based on the characteristics of the building or of the place any of the
designers deems it appropriate, they must be considered the following special aspects in its design, construction and technical
supervision:
(a) Influence of the type of soil on the amplification of seismic movements and the seismic response of buildings that
can also be affected by the similarity between the periods of the structure and some of the periods of the deposit,
(b) Potential for liquefaction of the soil
in the place, (c) Possibility of failure of slopes or
mass removal due to the earthquake, (d) Group behavior of the set before
seismic, wind and thermal solicitations in accordance with the
meetings that have the project,
(e) Complementary specifications regarding the quality of the materials to be used and the scope of the
technical verification tests of the real quality of these materials, and
A-8
(f) Verification of the structural design of the building from the point of view of vertical loads and
horizontal forces.
(g) Obligation of a professionally qualified technical supervision of the construction, according to what is
required in A.1.3.9.
A.1.3.13 — ENVIRONMENTALLY RESPONSIBLE CONSTRUCTION — Constructions carried out in the national

territory must comply with national, departmental, and municipal or district legislation and regulations regarding the
environmentally responsible use of construction materials and procedures. Natural resources must be used appropriately
and the environment must be taken into account without causing deterioration in it and without violating the renewal or
future availability of these materials. This environmental responsibility must be developed from the design stage and
applied and verified in the construction stage, by all the professionals and other people involved in said stages.
A.1.4 — SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
A.1.4.1 — BY SIZE AND USE GROUP — In all buildings of use group I, as defined by A.2.5.1, that have more than 3000
m² of combined area, or that are part of a program of fifteen or more dwelling units, and in all buildings of use groups II,
III and IV, as defined by A.2.5.1, the obligation of professionally qualified technical supervision of the construction must
be taken into account, as required in A.1.3.9.
A.1.4.2 — PREFABRICATED SYSTEMS — Pursuant to the provisions of Article 12 of Law 400 of 1997, the use of
seismic resistance systems that are partially or totally composed of prefabricated elements, which are not covered, is
permitted. by this Regulation, as long as it complies with one of the following two procedures:
(a) The seismic design criteria presented in A.3.1.7 are used, or (b) Prior
authorization is obtained from the Permanent Advisory Commission for the Seismic-Resistant Construction
Regime, in accordance with the requirements and responsibilities established in the Article 14 of Law 400 of
1997.
A.1.5 — DESIGNS, PLANS, REPORTS AND STUDIES

A.1.5.1 — RESPONSIBLE DESIGNER — The responsibility for the designs of the different elements that make up the
building falls on the professionals under whose direction the different particular designs are made. It is presumed that
when an element appears in a plan or design report, it is because all the necessary measures have been taken to fulfill
the purpose of the Regulation and therefore the professional who signs or labels the plan is responsible for the
corresponding design.
A.1.5.1.1 — Title II of Law 400 of 1997, as well as Chapter A.13 of this Regulation, should be consulted for the
definitions of builder, architectural designer, structural designer, geotechnical engineer, owner and technical
supervisor, for purposes of assigning the corresponding responsibilities.
A.1.5.1.2 — In those cases in which the designs specify elements whose supply and installation is carried out by
their manufacturer or following their instructions, the designer may limit himself to specifying in his plans, reports
or specifications, the characteristics that the elements must comply with, and the responsibility for compliance
with these characteristics lies with the builder who signs the construction license and this compliance must be
verified by the technical supervisor, when the building must have their participation according to A.1.3. 9.
A.1.5.2 — PLANS — The architectural, structural and non-structural element plans that are submitted to obtain the
construction license must be the same as those used in the construction of the work, and at least one copy must be
remain in the file of the Curatorship, administrative department or district or municipal agency in charge of issuing
construction licenses. The Urban Curatorship or the municipal or district agency in charge of issuing the construction
licenses, may request a copy on magnetic media of the structural project (plans and reports), in the digital formats that it
defines. In projects that require technical supervision, in accordance with this Regulation, what is specified in Title I must
also be complied with.
A-9
in relation to the final work plans (record plans).
A.1.5.2.1 — Structural plans — The structural plans must be signed or labeled with a dry seal by a civil engineer
authorized for that purpose and who acts as responsible structural designer. The structural plans must contain at least:
(a) Specifications of the construction materials to be used in the structure, such as concrete strength, steel
strength, quality of masonry units, type of mortar, quality of structural wood, and any additional information
that is relevant for the construction and technical supervision of the structure. When the quality of the material
changes within the same building, it should be clearly noted which material should be used in each portion
of the structure,
(b) Size and location of all structural elements as well as their dimensions and reinforcement, (c) Precautions
that must be taken into account, such as cambers, to counteract volumetric changes of structural materials such
as: changes due to variations in humidity setting shrinkage, creep, or temperature variations, (d) Location
and magnitude of all prestressing forces, when concrete is used
prestressed,
(e) Type and location of the connections between structural elements and the joints between the reinforcing
elements, as well as connection details and the cleaning and anti-corrosion protection system in the case of
steel structures,
(f) The degree of energy dissipation capacity under which the structural material of the
seismic Resistance System,
(g) The live and finishing loads assumed in the calculations, and (h)
The use group to which the building belongs.
A.1.5.2.2 — Architectural plans and architectural non-structural elements — Architectural plans must be signed or
marked with a dry seal by an architect authorized for that purpose and who acts as responsible architectural designer. For
the purposes of this Regulation, they must contain the degree of seismic performance of the non-structural architectural
elements, as defined in Chapter A.9, and also all the details and specifications, compatible with this degree of performance,
necessary to guarantee that the construction can be properly executed and monitored. The designer of the non-structural
elements, when the seismic design of the non-structural elements is carried out by a professional other than the architect,
must sign or label the general architectural plans, in addition to those of the particular designs. See A.1.3.6.
A.1.5.2.3 — Hydraulic and sanitary, electrical, mechanical and special installation plans — The plans for hydraulic
and sanitary, electrical, mechanical installations and special installations must be signed or labeled with a dry seal by
professionals authorized for that purpose. . For the purposes of this Regulation, they must contain the degree of
performance of the non-structural elements other than architectural ones, as defined in Chapter A.9, and also all the
details and specifications, compatible with this degree of performance, necessary to guarantee that the Construction can
be properly executed and supervised.
A.1.5.3 — REPORTS — The plans must be accompanied by design and calculation reports in which the procedures by which the
designs were made are described.
A.1.5.3.1 — Structural reports — The structural plans submitted to obtain the construction license must be accompanied
by the supporting calculation report, signed by the Engineer who carried out the structural design. This report must include
a description of the structural system used, and must also clearly note the vertical loads, the degree of energy dissipation
capacity of the seismic resistance system, the calculation of the seismic force, the type of structural analysis used and the
verification that the maximum drifts were not exceeded. When automatic information processing equipment is used, in
addition to the above, a description of the principles under which the digital model and its structural analysis and the input
data to the automatic processor are duly identified must be provided. The output data can be used to illustrate the results
and can be included in its entirety in an annex to the calculation reports, but they cannot constitute themselves as
calculation reports, requiring an explanatory report of their use in the design.
A.1.5.3.2 — Reports of other designs — Justifications for the degree of performance of non-structural elements must be
recorded in a report. This report must be prepared by the
A-10
professional responsible for the designs, either the architect or the designer of the non-structural elements, and
the designers of hydraulics, electrical, mechanical or special installations. See A.1.3.6. Likewise, there must be a
memory of the specifications on materials, structural elements, means of entry and exit, and fire detection and
extinction systems related to life safety, in accordance with Titles J and K of these Regulations.
A.1.5.4 — GEOTECHNICAL STUDY — For purposes of obtaining a construction license, a geotechnical study must be
submitted in accordance with the requirements of Title H of this Regulation. The geotechnical study must be signed by a
civil engineer empowered for that purpose, and must refer to:
(a) As required in A.1.3.2,

(b) To the definition of local effects required in A.2.4, including the case in which a study is carried out
particular seismic data of the site as indicated in A.2.10,
(c) To obtain the soil parameters for the purpose of evaluating the soil-structure interaction as defined in Chapter
A.7, when this is required by Chapter A.3, and (d) To the others that require Title H.
A.1.6 — OBLIGATION OF THE TECHNICAL STANDARDS CITED IN THE REGULATION

A.1.6.1— NTC STANDARDS — The Colombian NTC Technical Standards, cited in this Regulation, are part of it. The
NTC standards are promulgated by the Colombian Institute of Technical Standards and Certification ICONTEC, the only
national standardization body recognized by the Colombian government.
A.1.6.2 — OTHER STANDARDS — In those cases in which there is no NTC standard, the use of standards from the
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) or from other institutions is accepted. which are also part of the
Regulation when there is no corresponding NTC standard.
A.1.6.3 — REFERENCES — A standard from ASTM or another institution has been placed in parentheses next to NTC
standards. This is done for reference only and the mandatory standard will always be the NTC standard. This reference
standard corresponds to an ASTM standard, or of another institution, that is compatible with the corresponding
requirements of the Regulation, and does not necessarily correspond to the antecedent standard of the NTC standard.
The antecedent norms of the NTC norms are those that are consigned in the text of the same norm.
A.1.7 — SYSTEM OF UNITS

A.1.7.1 — SI METRIC SYSTEM — In accordance with the requirements of Decree 1731 of September 18, 1967, this
Colombian Regulation for Earthquake Resistant Constructions NSR-10, has been issued using the International
Measurement System (SI) , which is mandatory use in the national territory. Standard NTC 1000 (ISO 1000), issued by
ICONTEC, should be consulted for the purposes of the correct application of the International System of SI Measurements.
A.1.7.2 — REFERENCES TO THE METRIC SYSTEM mks — The units used in the equations of the Regulation are the
units of the SI system. At the end of some Titles there is an appendix in which the corresponding equations in the SI and
mks unit systems are listed. In general, all equations in which the square root of a stress is used, which by definition still
has stress units, as is the case of cfÿ in reinforced concrete, fm
ÿ
in reinforced masonry, or Fy in metallic structures, they produce inconsistent results if

they are used in forces expressed in the mks (kgf/cm2 ) system, and can only be used with forces expressed in the
International System of Measurements (SI).
A-11
Grades:
A-12
NSR-10 — Chapter A.2 — Seismic Hazard Zones and Design Earthquake Movements
CHAPTER
A.2 ZONES OF SEISMIC
HAZARD AND DESIGN SEISMIC MOVEMENTS
A.2.0 — NOMENCLATURE
Aa = coefficient that represents the effective peak horizontal acceleration, for design, given in A.2.2.
Av = coefficient that represents the effective peak horizontal speed, for design, given in A.2.2. DC
= is the sum of the thicknesses of the k layers of cohesive soils located within 30 m
profile tops. =
thickness of stratum i, located within the upper 30 m of the profile. = is the sum
say ds of the thicknesses of the m strata of non-cohesive soils located within 30 m
tops of the profile in equation A.2.4-3.
Fa = coefficient of amplification that affects the acceleration in the zone of short periods, due to the effects
of site, dimensionless.
fv = coefficient of amplification that affects the acceleration in the zone of intermediate periods, due to the
site effects, dimensionless. =
g acceleration due to gravity (9.8 m/s2 ). = total
h thickness in m of the cohesive soil strata. = importance
Yo coefficient defined in A.2.5.2 = plasticity index,
IP which is obtained by complying with the ASTM D 4318 standard. = number of blows
Neither
per foot obtained in the standard penetration test, carried out in situ according to the ASTM standard D 1586, making
correction for energy N60. The value of Ni used to obtain the mean value must not exceed 100.
R0 = basic energy dissipation capacity coefficient defined for each structural system and each
degree of energy dissipation capacity of the structural material. See Chapter A.3.
R. = energy dissipation capacity coefficient to be used in the design, corresponds to the basic energy dissipation
coefficient, R0 , multiplied by the energy dissipation capacity reduction coefficients due to irregularities in height, in
plan, and by absence of redundancy
in the seismic resistance structural system ( R R =apr

ÿ ÿ0ÿ) . See Chapter A.3.
RC = coefficient of energy dissipation capacity defined for the area of short periods less than when required in microzoning
TC as a function of the value of , studies. Defined in the
R equation A.2.9-1.
sa = value of the spectrum of design accelerations for a given period of vibration. Maximum design horizontal acceleration,
expressed as a fraction of the acceleration due to gravity, for a one degree of freedom system with a period of
vibration T . It is defined in A.2.6.1.
sd = value of the spectrum of design displacements for a given period of vibration. Maximum design horizontal
displacement, expressed in m, for a one degree of freedom system with a period of vibration T . It is defined in
A.2.6.3. = value of the design velocity spectrum for
sv a given period of vibration. Maximum design horizontal velocity, expressed in m/s, for a one degree of freedom system
with a period of vibration T . It is defined in A.2.6.2.
ui s = is the undrained shear strength in kPa (kgf/cm²) of stratum i , which should not exceed 250 kPa (2.5
kgf/cm²) to perform the weighted average. This resistance is measured according to the NTC 1527 (ASTM D 2166)
or NTC 2041 (ASTM D 2850) standard. = period of
you vibration of the elastic system, in seconds. = vibration period,
CT in seconds, corresponding to the transition between the zone of constant acceleration of the design spectrum, for
short periods, and the descending part of it. (See A.2.6). = vibration period, in seconds, corresponding
TL to the start of the displacement zone
approximately constant of the design spectrum, for long periods. (See A.2.6).
A-13
T0 = vibration period at which the zone of constant accelerations of the acceleration spectrum begins, in
s.
yes v = average speed of the shear wave of the soil of stratum i , field measurement, in m/s
w = water content in percentage, which is determined by means of the NTC 1495 standard (ASTM D 2166).
A.2.1—OVERALL
A.2.1.1— PRESCRIBED SEISMIC MOVEMENTS — For purposes of the seismic design of the structure, it must be located within one of
the seismic hazard zones, low, intermediate or high, and the design seismic movements defined in the this Chapter, which can be expressed
by means of the design elastic spectrum defined in A.2.6, or by means of families of accelerograms that meet the requirements of A.2.7.
A.2.1.2 — DIFFERENT LOCAL EFFECTS — In A.2.4 the Code prescribes a procedure to determine the effects on the design seismic
movements of the transmission of seismic waves in the existing soil below the building. Design seismic motions other than those defined in
A.2.4 may be used if it can be shown that they were obtained using better information from a detailed study of seismic wave propagation
through the existing ground below the site, or from the incidence of topography of the place, in the following cases:
A.2.1.2.1 — Seismic microzoning studies — When the municipal or district authorities have approved a seismic microzoning
study, carried out in accordance with the scope established in section A.2.9, which contains recommendations for the place where
the seismic microzoning will take place. building, either by means of site effects or special spectral shapes, the results of the
building, as well as the values of the site coefficient, given in it, should be used instead of those presented in A.2.4 and A.2.6 .
A.2.1.2.2 — Specific site seismic studies — When the geotechnical engineer responsible for the geotechnical study of the
building defines particular local effects for the place where the building is located, using amplification studies of seismic waves or
special studies referring to for surveying purposes, or both, these must be carried out in accordance with the provisions of A.2.10.
A.2.1.3 — DIFFERENT SEISMIC MOVEMENTS — When using design seismic movements obtained from values of Aa or Av or Ae
different from those given in this Regulation, these values of Aa , Av , or both, or of Ae , they must be approved by the office or district or either
municipal agency in charge of issuing the construction licenses, prior concept of the Permanent Advisory Commission for the Regime of
Seismic Resistant Constructions.
A.2.2 — DESIGN SEISMIC MOVEMENTS

A.2.2.1 — The design seismic movements are defined as a function of the effective peak acceleration, represented by the parameter Aa ,
and the effective peak velocity, represented by the parameter Av , for a ten percent probability of being exceeded in a span of fifty years.
The values of these coefficients, for the purposes of this Regulation, must be determined in accordance with A.2.2.2 and A.2.2.3.
A.2.2.2 — Determine the number of the region where the building is located using the map of Figure A.2.3-2 for Aa and the number of the
region where the building is located for Av , on the map of Figure A.2.3-3.
A.2.2.3 — The values of Aa and Av are obtained from Table A.2.2-1, based on the region number determined in A.2.2.2. For the capital
cities of the department of the country, the values are presented in table A.2.3-2 and for all the municipalities of the country in Appendix A-4
included at the end of this Title.
A-14
Table A.2.2-1
Values of Aa and Av , according to the regions From
the maps of figures A.2.3-2 and A.2.3-3
Aa or Av
Region No.
value
10 0.50
9 0.45
8 0.40
7 0.35
6 0.30
5 0.25
4 0.20
3 0.15
2 0.10
1 0.05
A.2.3 — SEISMIC HAZARD ZONES

The building must be located within one of the seismic hazard zones defined in this section and shown on the Map in figure A.2.3-1.
A.2.3.1 — LOW SEISMIC THREAT ZONE — It is the set of places where both Aa and Av are less than or equal to 0.10. See table A.2.3-1.
A.2.3.2 — INTERMEDIATE SEISMIC HAZARD ZONE — It is the set of places where Aa or Av , or both, are greater than 0.10 and neither of
them exceeds 0.20. See table A.2.3-1.
A.2.3.3 — HIGH SEISMIC THREAT ZONE — It is the set of places where Aa or Av , or both, are greater than 0.20. See table A.2.3-1.
Table A.2.3-1
Seismic hazard level according to Aa and Av values
Highest value between Associated in maps of Threat

figures A.2.3-2 and seismic
aa and av
A.2.3-3 to Region Nº 10 9
0.50 8 high
0.45 high
0.40 high
0.35 high
0.30 high
0.25 765 high
0.20 4 Intermediate
0.15 3 Intermediate
0.10 twenty-
Low
0.05 one
Low
A-15
Table A.2.3-2
Value of Aa and Av for departmental capital cities
Zone of
City
aah Av
Threat
seismic
Arauca 0.15 0.15 Intermediate
Armenia 0.25 0.25 high
Barranquilla 0.10 0.10 Low
Bogota DC 0.15 0.20 Intermediate
Bucaramanga 0.25 0.25 high
Cali 0.25 0.25 high
Cartagena 0.10 0.10 Low
Cúcuta 0.35 0.30 high
Florencia 0.20 0.15 Intermediate
Ibagué 0.20 0.20 Intermediate
Leticia 0.05 0.05 Low
Manizales 0.25 0.25 high
Medellín 0.15 0.20 Intermediate
Mitu 0.05 0.05 Low
Mocoa 0.30 0.25 high
Montería 0.10 0.15 Intermediate
Neiva 0.25 0.25 high
Pasto 0.25 0.25 high
Pereira 0.25 0.25 high
Popayán 0.25 0.20 high
Puerto Carreño 0.05 0.05 Low
Puerto Inírida 0.05 0.05 Low
Quibdó 0.35 0.35 high
Riohacha 0.10 0.15 Intermediate
San Andrés, Santa 0 .10 0 .10 Low
Marta Island 0.15 0.10 Intermediate
San José del Guaviare 0.05 0.05 Low
Sincelejo 0.10 0.15 Intermediate
Tunja 0.20 0.20 Intermediate
Valledupar 0.10 0.10 Low
Villavicencio 0.35 0.30 high
Yopal 0.30 0.20 high
A-16
Figure A.2.3-1 — Seismic Hazard Zones applicable to buildings for NSR-10 based on Aa and Av
A-17
Figure A.2.3-2 — Map of Aa values
A-18
Figure A.2.3-3 - Map of Av values
A-19
A.2.4 — LOCAL EFFECTS
In this section the types of soil profile and the values of the site coefficients are given. The soil profile must be determined
by the geotechnical engineer based on duly supported geotechnical data.
A.2.4.1 — GENERAL — Two site effect spectrum amplification factors, Fa and Fv , are prescribed, which affect the short-
period and intermediate-period part of the spectrum, respectively. The local effects of the seismic response of the building
must be evaluated based on the soil profiles given below, regardless of the type of foundation used. The identification of the
soil profile is made from the surface of the land. When there are basements, or in a building on a hillside, the geotechnical
engineer, according to the type of foundation proposed, can vary the point from which the definition of the profile begins, by
means of a study about the interaction that may exist. between the retaining structure and the surrounding soil; but in no
case can this point be below the slab on the ground of the lower basement.
A.2.4.1.1 — Soil Deposit Stability — The soil profiles presented in this section A.2.4 refer to stable soil deposits.
When there is a possibility that the deposit is not stable, especially in the event of an earthquake, such as in sites
on slopes or in sites with potentially liquefiable soils, the given definitions should not be used and there is a need to
carry out a geotechnical investigation that identify the stability of the reservoir, as well as corrective measures, if
possible, that must be taken in order to advance construction on the site. The geotechnical study must clearly
indicate the corrective measures and the site coefficients that must be used in the design, given that the proposed
corrective measures are carried out. The construction of buildings on the site cannot be advanced without taking
corrective measures, when necessary.
A.2.4.1.2 — Alternate procedures — When alternative procedures are allowed under A.2.1.2 to define local
effects, the requirements therein shall be followed instead of what is presented in this section.
A.2.4.2 — TYPES OF SOIL PROFILE — Six types of soil profile are defined, which are presented in table A.2.4-1. The
parameters used in the classification are those corresponding to the upper 30 m of the profile for profiles type A to E. Those
profiles that have clearly distinguishable strata must be subdivided, assigning them a subscript i that goes from 1 on the
surface to n on the bottom . lower part of the upper 30 m of the profile. For the type F profile , other criteria are applied and
the response should not be limited to the upper 30 m of the profile in cases of profiles with significant soil thickness.
A.2.4.3 — PARAMETERS USED IN THE DEFINITION OF THE TYPE OF SOIL PROFILE — The parameters used to
define the type of soil profile based on the upper 30 m of it and considering tests carried out on samples are defined below.
taken at least every 1.50 m of soil thickness. These parameters are (a) the mean velocity of the shear wave, in m/s, (b) the
v s , along the entire profile, or , ( c) When it comes to
mean number of blows from the standard penetration test, N in blows/ft
, cohesive layers of the profile separately, for the non-cohesive soil strata, the average
considering the non-cohesive and
number of blows of the standard penetration test, Nch , in blows/foot, and for the cohesive ones the mean shear strength
obtained from the test to determine its undrained strength, us , in kPa. In addition, the Plasticity Index ( ) IP , and the water
content in percentage, w , are used .
A.2.4.3.1 — Average speed of the shear wave — The average speed of the shear wave is obtained by means of:
no
ÿ d Yo
v = i 1=
(A.2.4-1)
yes
no d
ÿ Yo
v
i 1= yes
where:
yes v
= average speed of the shear wave of the soil of stratum i , field measurement, in m/s
gave
= thickness of layer i , located within the upper 30 m of the profile
TO 20
no
ÿ =d30 m always
Yo
i =1
A.2.4.3.2 — Average number of blows of the standard penetration test — The average number of blows of the
standard penetration test is obtained by means of the two procedures given below:
(a) Average number of blows from the standard penetration test on any soil profile —
The average number of blows of the standard penetration test in any soil profile, regardless of whether it is
made up of non-cohesive or cohesive soils, is obtained by means of:
no
ÿ d Yo
No. = i =1 (A.2.4-2)
no d
ÿ Yo
No.
i =1 i
where:
Ni = number of blows per foot obtained in the standard penetration test, carried out in situ according to
ASTM D 1586, correcting for N60 energy, corresponding to stratum i . The value of Ni to be used
to obtain the mean value must not exceed 100.
(b) Average number of blows from the standard penetration test on profiles containing non-cohesive
soils — In the non-cohesive soil strata located in the upper 30 m of the profile, the following relationship
must be used, which applies only to the m non-cohesive soil strata:
d
No.
ch = m d
yes
(A.2.4-3)
Yo
ÿ No.
i =1 i
where:
ds = is the sum of the thicknesses of the m strata of non-cohesive soils located within
the upper 30 m of the profile.
A.2.4.3.3 — Mean shear strength — For the undrained shear strength, us , obtained from tests in the cohesive
soil strata located in the upper 30 m of the profile, the following relationship should be used, which applies only to
the k strata of cohesive soils:
d
c
yes
= (A.2.4-4)
uk ÿ d
Yo
yes
= 1 ui
where:
dc = is the sum of the thicknesses of the k cohesive soil strata located within the upper 30 m of the profile. ui s =
is the undrained
shear strength in kPa (kgf/cm²) of stratum i , which should not exceed 250 kPa
(2.5 kgf/cm²) to perform the weighted average. This resistance is measured according to the NTC 1527
(ASTM D 2166) or NTC 2041 (ASTM D 2850) standard.
A.2.4.3.4 — Plasticity index — In the classification of the clay strata, the Plasticity Index ( ) IP is used
, which is obtained by complying with the ASTM D 4318 standard.
A-21
A.2.4.3.5 — Water content — Percentage water content, w , is used in the classification of clay strata.
, which is determined by means of the NTC 1495 (ASTM D 2166) standard.
A.2.4.4 — DEFINITION OF THE TYPE OF SOIL PROFILE — The procedure used to define the type of soil profile is based
on the values of the soil parameters of the upper 30 meters of the profile, measured at the site that were described in A.2.4.3.
The classification is given in table A.2.4-1.
Table A.2.4-1
Classification of soil profiles
profile type Description Definition
TO Competent rock profile v ÿ 1500m/s
yes
B. Medium stiffness rock profile 1500m/s > v ÿ 760m/s

yes
Very dense soil profiles or soft rock, which meet the

shear wave velocity criterion, or very dense soil 760 m/s> v ÿ 360m/s
yes
profiles or soft rock,

C.
which meet either of the two criteria N ÿ 50, or
us ÿ 100 kPa (ÿ1 kgf/cm²)

Rigid soil profiles that meet the shear wave velocity
criterion, or 360 m/s > v ÿ 180m/s
yes
D.
rigid floor profiles that meet any of the two conditions 50 > N ÿ 15, or
100 kPa (ÿ1 kgf/cm²) > us ÿ 50 kPa (ÿ0.5 kgf/cm²)

Profile that meets the shear wave velocity criterion, or
180 m/s > v
s
AND
profile containing a total thickness H greater than 3 m IP > 20w
of soft clays ÿ 40%
50 kPa (ÿ0.50 kgf/cm²) > us

Type F soil profiles require explicit on-site evaluation by a geotechnical engineer in accordance with the procedure in
A.2.10. The following subclasses are considered: F1 — Soils susceptible to failure or collapse caused by
seismic excitation, such as: soils
liquefiable, sensitive clays, dispersive or weakly cemented soils, etc.
F
F2 — Organic and highly organic peat and clays ( H > 3 m for organic and highly organic peat or clays
organic).
F3 — Clays with very high plasticity ( H > 7.5 m with Plasticity Index IP > 75)
F4 — Thickness profiles of medium to soft rigidity clays ( H > 36 m)
A.2.4.5 — CLASSIFICATION PROCEDURE — The procedure to define the profile is as follows:
A.2.4.5.1 — Step 1 — It must first be verified if the soil falls within the classification of any of the type F soil profile
, classification study must be carried out on site, by a geotechnical
categories , in which case a particular seismic
engineer following the guidelines of A.2.10.
A.2.4.5.2 — Step 2 — The existence of soft clay layers must be established. Soft clay is defined as that which has
an undrained shear strength of less than 50 kPa (0.50 kgf/cm²), a water content, w , greater than 40%, and a plasticity
index, IP , greater than 20. If there is a total thickness, H
, of 3 m or more of clay layers that meet these conditions, the profile is classified as type E .
A.2.4.5.3 — Step 3 — The profile is classified using one of three criteria: v

s , No.
, or consideration
joint Nch and us , selecting the applicable one as indicated below. In the event that it is counted, the classification v yes
based on this criterion will prevail. In case there is no criterion based on N that involves all v you can use the yes
the strata of the profile. Alternatively, the criterion based jointly on us can be used , for the fraction of cohesive soils
and the Nch criterion , which takes into account the fraction of non-cohesive soils in the profile. For this third
consideration, in the event that the two respective evaluations indicate different profiles, the softer soil profile of the
two cases should be used, for example, assigning a profile type E instead of type D. Table A.2.4-2 summarizes the
three
A-22
criteria to classify soil profile type C, D or E. The three criteria are applied as follows:
(a) v in the upper 30 m of the profile, (b)

yes
N in the upper 30 m of the profile, or (c)

Nch for existing soil strata in the upper 30 m that are classified as no or the weighted average us in the
cohesive when IP 20 < , cohesive soil strata indicating a more
existing in the upper 30 m of the profile, which have IP 20 > soft. ,
Table A.2.4-2
Criteria for classifying soils within soil profiles types C, D or E
profile type vs us
N or Nch
C. between 360 and 760 m/ greater than 50 greater than 100 kPa (ÿ 1 kgf/cm²)
D. s between 180 and 360 m/s between 15 and 50 between 100 and 50 kPa (0.5 to 1 kgf/
AND less than 180m/s under 15 cm²) less than 50 kPa (ÿ0.5 kgf/cm²)
A.2.4.5.4 — Shear wave velocity in rock — The competent rock of the type A profile must be defined by means
of shear wave velocity measurements at the site, or in profiles of the same formation where there is weathering.
and similar fracturing. In those cases where the rock conditions are known to be continuous to a depth of at least
30 m, the surface shear wave velocity can be used to define v . The shear wave velocity in rock, for the Type profile
B, must be measured at the site, or estimated, by the geotechnical engineer for competent rock with moderate
yes
weathering and fracturing. For softer, heavily weathered, or fractured rocks, the shear wave velocity must be
measured on site, or else classified as a type C profile. Profiles where there is more than 3 m of soil between the
rock surface and the lower part of the foundation, cannot be classified as type A or B profiles.
A.2.4.5.5 — Table A.2.4-3 gives the values of the coefficient Fa that amplifies the ordinates of the spectrum in rock
to take into account site effects in the range of short periods of the order of T0 , shows the figure A.2.4-1. For as
intermediate values of Aa, it is allowed to interpolate linearly between values of the same type of profile.
Table A.2.4-3
Values of the coefficient Fa, for the area of short periods of the spectrum
Intensity of seismic movements

Kind of
Profile ÿA0.1 _
to
toto0.2
= toto0.3
= toto0.4
= toto0.5
ÿ
TO 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8

B. 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
C. 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0
D. 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.1 1.0
AND 2.5 1.7 1.2 0.9 0.9
F see note see note see note see note see note
Note: For the F type profile , a particular geotechnical investigation must be carried out for the specific place
and a wave amplification analysis must be carried out according to A.2.10.
A.2.4.5.6 — Table A.2.4-4 gives the values of the coefficient Fv that amplifies the ordinates of the spectrum in rock
to take into account site effects in the range of intermediate periods of the order of 1 s . These coefficients are also
presented in Figure A.2.4-2. For intermediate values of Aa, it is allowed to interpolate linearly between values of
the same type of profile.
A-23
Table A.2.4-4
Values of the coefficient Fv , for the zone of intermediate periods of the spectrum
Intensity of seismic movements

Kind of
Profile Atv0.1 ÿ to v0.2= to v0.3= to v0.4= at v
0.5 ÿ
TO 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8

B. 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
C. 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3

D. 2.4 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.5
AND
3.5 3.2 2.8 2.4 2.4
F see note see note see note see note see note
Note: For the F type profile, a particular geotechnical investigation must be carried out for the specific place
and a wave amplification analysis must be carried out according to
A.2.10.
3.5
3.0
2.5
Soil Type E
2.0
Fa
1.5
Soil Type D
Type C Soil
1.0
Soil Type B
Soil Type A
0.5
0.0
0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50
aah
Figure A.2.4-1 - Coefficient of amplification Fa of the soil

for the zone of short periods of the spectrum
A-24
3.5
3.0
Soil Type E
2.5
2.0
Soil Type D
fv
1.5 Type C Soil
1.0
Soil Type B
Soil Type A
0.5
0.0
0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50
Av
Figure A.2.4-2 — Amplification coefficient Fv of the soil for

the zone of intermediate periods of the spectrum
A.2.4.5.7 — The values of the coefficients Fa and Fv do not take slope effects into account. If there are any, they
must be considered additionally based on a regulation issued by the municipality or, in the absence of said
regulation, based on private studies, carried out by the geotechnical engineer of the building, duly supported.
A.2.5 — RATIO OF IMPORTANCE

This section defines the usage type groups and the importance coefficient values.
A.2.5.1 — USE GROUPS — All buildings must be classified within one of the following Use Groups:
A.2.5.1.1 — Group IV — Indispensable buildings — These are the community service buildings that must
function during and after an earthquake, and whose operation cannot be quickly moved to an alternate location.
This group should include:
(a) All the buildings that make up clinical hospitals and health centers that have surgery services,
intensive care rooms, neonatal rooms and/or emergency care, (b) All the buildings that make up
airports, railway stations and massive transportation systems, telephone, telecommunication and radio
broadcasting exchanges, (c) Buildings designated as emergency shelters, air navigation
centers,
emergency services aircraft hangars,
(d) Buildings of operation and control centers for vital lines of electricity, water, fuel, information, and
transportation of people and products,
(e) Buildings that contain explosive, toxic and harmful agents for the public, and (f) Group
IV must include structures that house emergency power generation plants, tanks and structures that are
part of their fire-fighting systems, and the pedestrian and vehicular accesses of the buildings typified
in literals a, b, c, d and e of this numeral.
A-25
A.2.5.1.2 — Group III — Community care buildings — This group includes those buildings, and their accesses,
that are essential after an earthquake to deal with the emergency and preserve the health and safety of people,
except for included in group IV. This group should include:
(a) Fire stations, civil defense, police, armed forces barracks, and headquarters of disaster prevention and
care offices,
(b) Garages for emergency vehicles, (c)
Structures and equipment of emergency care centers, (d) Nurseries,
schools, colleges, universities and other educational centers, (e) Those of group II
for which the owner wishes to have additional security, and (f) Those others that the municipal,
district, departmental or national administration designates as
such.
A.2.5.1.3 — Group II — Special Occupation Structures — Covers the following structures:
(a) Buildings where more than 200 people can meet in the same room, (b) Outdoor
bleachers where there can be more than 2000 people at a time, (c) Warehouses
and shopping centers with more than 500 m² per floor , (d) Buildings
of hospitals, clinics and health centers, not covered in A.2.5.1.1. (e) Buildings where more
than 3,000 people work or reside, and (f) Government buildings.
A.2.5.1.4 — Group I — Normally occupied structures — All buildings covered by the scope of this Regulation,
but not included in Groups II, III and IV.
A.2.5.2 — IMPORTANCE COEFFICIENT — The Importance Coefficient, I modifies the, spectrum, and with it the design
forces, according to the use group to which the building is assigned to take into account that for buildings of the Groups II,
III and IV should be considered acceleration values with a lower probability of being exceeded than that of ten percent in a
period of fifty years considered in numeral A.2.2.1. The values of I are given in Table A.2.5-1.
Table A.2.5-1
Values of the importance coefficient, I
Use Group Importance Coefficient,

I
IV. 1.50
II 1.25
II 1.10
Yo
1.00
A.2.6 — DESIGN SPECTRUM

A.2.6.1 — Spectrum of Accelerations — The shape of the elastic spectrum of accelerations, Sa expressed as a fraction
of gravity, for a five percent (5%) coefficient of critical damping, to be used in the design, is given in Figure A.2.6-1 and
defined by Equation A.2.6-1, with the constraints given in A.2.6.1.1 to A.2.6.1.3.
1.2 AFI
vv
Sto = (A.2.6-1)
you
A.2.6.1.1 — For vibration periods less than TC , calculated according to equation A.2.6-2, the value of Sa can be
limited to that obtained from equation A.2.6-3.
AFvv
=
T 0.48 (A.2.6-2)
CAF oh
A-26
and
=
S2.5AFI (A.2.6-3)
to oh
A.2.6.1.2 — For periods of vibration greater than TL , calculated according to equation A.2.6-4, the value of Sa cannot
be less than that given by equation A.2.6-5.
= L
T 2.4F (A.2.6-4)
v
and
1.2AFTI
Sto =
vvL 2
(A.2.6-5)
you
sa
(g) =
S2.5AFI
to oh
Note: This spectrum is defined for a damping ratio

of 5 percent of the critical
you ÿ
= AFI 0.4 0.6ÿ + ÿ ÿ
Sto2.5 oh
you
0 ÿÿ
1.2AFIvv
Sto =
In dynamic analysis, only you
for modes other than the

fundamental in each
main address in plant 1.2AFTI
Sto =
vvL
IPA
oh
2
you
you
0 you
C.
you
L T(s)
AFvv AFvv T2.4F
L = v
=
T 00.1 =
T C.0.48
AFoh AFoh
Figure A.2.6-1 — Elastic Spectrum of Design Accelerations as fraction of g
A.2.6.1.3 — When dynamic analysis is used, as defined in Chapter A.5, for periods of vibration other than the
fundamental, in the direction under study, less than T0 calculated according to equation A.2.6 -6, the design spectrum
can be obtained from equation A.2.6-7.
= AFvv
T 0.1 (A.2.6-6)
0 AF oh
and
you ÿ
= AFI 0.4 0.6
Sto2.5 ÿ+ÿÿ (A.2.6-7)
oh
you
0 ÿÿ
A.2.6.2 — Velocity Spectrum — The shape of the elastic velocity spectrum in m/s, for a five percent (5%) coefficient of critical
damping, to be used in the design, is given in Fig. A.2.6-2 and is defined by Equation A.2.6-8, with the constraints given in
A.2.6.2.1 to A.2.6.2.3.
= AFI vv
Sv1.87 (m/s) (A.2.6-8)
A.2.6.2.1 — For periods of vibration less than TC , calculated according to equation A.2.6-2, the value of Sv , in m/s,
can be limited to that obtained from equation A.2.6-9.
A-27
Sv3.9AF
= IToh (m/s) (A.2.6-9)
A.2.6.2.2 — For periods of vibration greater than TL , calculated according to equation A.2.6-4, the value of Sv ,
in m/s, cannot be less than that given by equation A.2.6- 10.
1.87AFIT
vv L
Sv = (m/s) (A.2.6-10)
you
A.2.6.2.3 — When dynamic analysis is used, as defined in Chapter A.5, for periods of vibration other than the
fundamental, in the direction under study, less than T0 calculated according to equation A.2.6 -6, the spectrum
of design speeds, in m/s, can be obtained from equation A.2.6-11.
ÿT+ÿS ÿ
v =
3.9AFIT 0.4
oh 0.6 ÿ (m/s) (A.2.6-11)
you
ÿ 0ÿ
sv
= AFI (m/s)
S 1.87 1.87AFvvIT
L
(m/s) v vv Sv = (m/s)
you
=
S 3.9AFIT (m/s)
v oh
Note: This spectrum is

defined for a damping ratio of 5
percent of the critical
In dynamic analysis, only for

modes other than the
fundamental in each main
direction in plan ÿ you ÿ
=
Sv3.9AFIT 0.4 0.6 + ÿ (m/s)
oh
you
ÿÿ 0 ÿ
you
0 you
C.
you
L T(s)
AFvv AFvv T2.4F
L = v
=
T 00.1 =
T C.0.48
AFoh AFoh
Figure A.2.6-2 — Design Elastic Spectrum of Velocities (m/s)
A.2.6.3 — Displacement Spectrum — The shape of the elastic displacement spectrum in m, for a five percent (5%)
coefficient of critical damping, to be used in the design, is given in Figure A. 2.6-3 and is defined by means of equation
A.2.6-12, with the limitations given in A.2.6.3.1 to A.2.6.3.3.
Sd0.3AFIT
= vv (m) (A.2.6-12)
A.2.6.3.1 — For periods of vibration less than TC , calculated according to equation A.2.6-2, the value of Sd , in
m, can be limited to that obtained from equation A.2.6-13.
=
2Sd 0.62AFIT oh (m) (A.2.6-13)
A.2.6.3.2 — For periods of vibration greater than TL , calculated according to equation A.2.6-4, the value of Sd ,
in m, cannot be less than that given by equation A.2.6-14.
A-28
=
S 0.3AFIT vv L (m) (A.2.6-14)
d
A.2.6.3.3 — When dynamic analysis is used, as defined in Chapter A.5, for vibration periods other than the
fundamental, in the direction under study, less than T0 calculated according to equation A.2.6 -6, the spectrum
of design displacements, in m, can be obtained from equation A.2.6-15.
2 T ÿ
=
Sd0.62AFIT 0.4 (A.2.6-15)
oh 0.6 ÿ+ÿ ÿ (m) ÿ
you
ÿ 0
sd =
Sd0.3AFIT vv L (m)
(m)
=
Sd0.3AFIT (m)
vv
Note: This spectrum is

defined for a damping ratio of 5
percent of the critical
=
2Sd 0.62AFIT oh (m)
In dynamic analysis, only for
modes other than the fundamental
in each main direction in plan
2 you ÿ
=
Sd0.62AFIT 0.4
oh 0.6 ÿ+ÿ ÿ (m)
you 0
ÿ ÿ
you
0 youC. L
you T(s)
AFvv AFvv T2.4F
L = v
=
T 00.1 =
T C.0.48
AFoh AFoh
Figure A.2.6-3 - Elastic Spectrum of Design Displacements (m)
A.2.7 — FAMILIES OF ACCELEROGRAMS

A.2.7.1 — When dynamic analysis procedures are used consisting of evaluations against time, obtained by integrating
the equation of motion step by step, the accelerograms used must meet the following requirements:
(a) For design purposes, the response to the horizontal component of a minimum of three (3) different
accelerograms must be used (see A.5.5), all of them representative of the expected movements of the
ground, taking into account that they must come from Records taken at events with magnitudes, hypocentral
or causative fault distances, and rupture mechanisms similar to those of the design earthquakes prescribed
for the site, but meeting the widest range of frequencies and amplifications possible. If seven or more
accelerograms are used, instead of the minimum of three prescribed above, the average value of the values
obtained from all the accelerograms used can be used instead of considering the maximum values from the
individual analyses. (b) When it is considered that it is not possible to have the required number of
real records with the conditions described in (a), it is allowed to make up the difference by means of simulated
synthetic records suitable to represent the design seismic movements prescribed for the place. . (c) The
response spectra of the accelerograms employed, appropriately scaled consistent with the
threat, cannot have individually spectral ordinates, for any
A-29
vibration period in the range between 0.8T and 1.2T, where T is the expected inelastic fundamental vibration
period of the structure in the direction under study, less than 80% of the spectral ordinates of the expected
ground motion defined in A .2.6, and the average of the spectral ordinates of all the records used, in the
range between 0.2T and 1.5T, must not be less than the spectral ordinates in the same range of periods for
the expected ground motion defined in A .2.6.
(d) When in Clause A.5 these logs are used in three-dimensional analyses, the two horizontal components of the
same log must be used and they must be scaled with the same scale factor.
In this case, instead of the average mentioned in (c) the square root of the sum of the squares of the values
should be used.
A.2.8 — VERTICAL COMPONENT OF SEISMIC MOVEMENTS

A.2.8.1 — When the vertical component of the design seismic movements is used, it must be taken as a minimum of two
thirds of the values corresponding to the horizontal effects, either in the design spectrum or in the families of
accelerograms, counting in this case with only horizontal records (See A.5.4.6). In case of using real accelerograms, the
vertical acceleration registered with the equivalent adjustment that has been made to the horizontal components can be
used.
A.2.9 — SEISMIC MICROZONING STUDIES

A.2.9.1 — When seismic microzoning studies are carried out that comply with the scope given in section A.2.9.3, the
municipal or district authorities are empowered to issue a substitute regulation of a mandatory nature, which replaces
what is indicated in Sections A.2.4 and A.2.6 of these Regulations. The seismic microzoning studies covered by the
scope of this Regulation have the ultimate goal of providing design parameters for buildings regarding the amplification
of seismic waves due to the effect of the underlying soils under the city subject to seismic microzoning and therefore are
must restrict to this end. Similar studies for the design of constructions other than buildings and that cover aspects of the
design of vital lines or other constructions not covered by the scope of Law 400 of 1997, must be subject to a scope that,
although analogous, may not be the same. indicated in this section of the Regulation and its processing must be
independent of what is covered in this Regulation.
A.2.9.2 — Department capitals and cities with more than 100,000 inhabitants, located in intermediate and high seismic
threat zones, in order to take into account the effect that wave propagation has on constructions seismic through the
underlying soil strata, they must harmonize the planning instruments for territorial ordering, with a seismic microzoning
study or studies, which complies with the scope given in section A.2.9.3.
A.2.9.3 — SCOPE — The scope of the seismic microzoning study must cover, as a minimum, the following topics, which
must be included in a detailed report describing the work carried out, the results of these tasks, and the sources of
information from third parties considered, if any:
A.2.9.3.1 — Geology and neotectonics — The studies to be carried out correspond to:
(a) A regional geological and geomorphological study with special emphasis on the identification of the
seismogenic tectonic deformation that occurred during the Quaternary (Neotectonic) and on the
determination of the age of such seismogenic deformations, oriented to the definition of seismic
recurrence rates. The neotectonic study must record all the morphotectonic and stratigraphic
indicators leading to clearly identify the geometry and kinematics of the seismogenic faults that have
had recurrent seismogenic activity during the Quaternary, with which, for the purposes of this
Regulation, said fault is considered active.
In addition, said regional geological study must contain regional structural geology maps that include
rock types, surface geological structures, and geological faults, including estimates of their length,
continuity, and type of displacement they have suffered.
(b) Optionally, when a geological fault, which the neotectonics study has defined as active, is located
less than twenty kilometers around the area that is being microzoned, it can be investigated through
particular neotectonics and paleoseismology studies, which among other techniques may use
seismological exploration trenches,
A-30
with the objective of establishing in the best possible way the magnitude, the age of the prehistoric
seismic episodes and the recurrence periods of such episodes. These data must be incorporated in
the determination of the value of the maximum effective horizontal acceleration. (c) In the
case of faults that are located immediately below the city, explorations must be carried out by particular
studies of geotectonics, paleoseismicity and geophysics in order to determine recent fault breaks
and other lineaments. Displacements, settlements, doubling of strata, liquefaction, flooding by floods
or tsunamis (in coastal areas), lateral expansion, landslides and mudflows in the place should be
described. Verification of groundwater levels should be included in order to determine if there are
barriers within the water table that may be associated with faults or affect the response of the soil
during an earthquake.
A.2.9.3.2 — Regional seismology — Historical and instrumental information on regional seismicity should be
collected. This information must include:
(a) Detailed documentation of the seismic history of the region. Seismic catalogs of events felt at the site
should be prepared. These catalogs must contain the date, location, depth and magnitude, among
other data, for each earthquake. This information should be illustrated by means of regional maps.
(b) Elaboration, where the information allows it,
of recurrence curves of the frequency of regional earthquakes, including small magnitudes. The estimate
of the frequency of occurrence of damaging earthquakes can be estimated from these statistics.
(c) Study of the available accelerographic records, of the damage reports and all the existing information
on local intensities in the region. (d) Preparation of estimates
of the maximum intensity on firm ground, close to the site, which must be
have felt with the important earthquakes that have affected the site.
(e) All the instrumental seismological information of the region should be collected. This must include
the definition of the magnitude used, the conversion equations when it has been converted from
another type of magnitude, and the source (type of instrument and its location) of the seismograms
used to determine the original magnitude and original location of the event. .
A.2.9.3.3 — Definition of Seismogenic Sources — Based on the regional geology, neotectonics, and seismicity
determined in A.2.9.3.1 and A.2.9.3.2, the following shall be determined:
(a) Faults and active seismogenic zones known for the region that can produce strong earthquakes that
affect the city must be identified. (b) If
considered convenient, seismogenic sources will be formed with fault groups, particularly when events
cannot be reasonably assigned to just one of them.
(c) Special treatment should be given to those events that cannot be assigned to failures. (d) The
expected recurrence rates for different magnitudes and the expected maximum magnitudes for all
seismogenic sources must be determined statistically.
A.2.9.3.4 — Determination of expected acceleration and velocity for design seismic waves in rock — The
following studies shall be performed and documented based on the information obtained in A.2.9.3.1, A.2.9.3.2,
and A. .2.9.3.3: (a) Evaluation
by deterministic procedures — The maximum horizontal acceleration and the maximum horizontal
velocity in rock that can be produced by the characteristic earthquake of each one of the seismogenic
sources identified in A.2.9.3.3 in the city must be determined. , for the maximum expected magnitude
and the geographical disposition of the source with respect to the city. For this evaluation, attenuation
ratios appropriate to the tectonic setting should be used at their mean values. As a minimum,
attenuation ratios appropriate for waves of short period (in the approximate range of 0.1 to 0.5
seconds periods) should be used to obtain maximum horizontal acceleration values on rock and of
moderate period of approximately 1 second to obtain velocity values. horizontal maximum in rock.
(b) Evaluation of the values of Aa and Av by probabilistic procedures
— The maximum effective horizontal acceleration and the effective horizontal speed with a probability of
exceedance of 10 percent in a period of 50 years must be evaluated, taking into account the
uncertainty in the determination of both the maximum effective horizontal acceleration and the
maximum effective velocity, so as to include at least 90 percent of their total dispersion. This part of
the study should incorporate appropriate scientific interpretations, including model uncertainties and
parameter values for seismogenic sources and earthquake motions. The study must be documented
in the final report. In case in
A-31
development of the evaluations (a) or (b) above, it is possible to count only with the values of horizontal
velocity in rock without counting those of horizontal acceleration in rock, the horizontal velocities can be
converted into equivalent effective horizontal accelerations by dividing them by 0.75 m /s to express them in
a fraction of g , or in the case of having only the effective acceleration,the opposite relationship can be used
to obtain the effective speeds in
rock.
(c) Evaluation of spectral accelerations for design in rock —Alternatively to the procedure outlined in (b), the
exceedance rates of spectral accelerations in rock can be evaluated for a sufficient number of structural
periods such that, making use of the exceedance rate From estimated spectral accelerations, uniform rock-
level threat spectra can be estimated for various exceedance probabilities, including a 10 percent
exceedance probability over 50 years. For this spectrum, the parameters Aa , Av , T0 , TC and TL that best
fit the spectral shapes proposed by this regulation in section A.2.6 must be evaluated. As indicated in (b),
for the methodology considered in (c), this part of the study must incorporate appropriate scientific
interpretations, including the uncertainties in the models and the values of the parameters for the seismogenic
sources and the seismic movements. The study must be documented in the final report.
(d) Comparison with the values of Aa and Av of the Regulations — The values of effective horizontal
acceleration and effective horizontal speed converted into acceleration, obtained in (a), (b) or (c) must be
compared with the values of Aa and Av given in this Regulation in A.2.2.
For purposes of the seismic microzoning study and the city regulations, the highest values of Aa and Av
among those obtained in (a), (b) or (c) and those given in A.2.2 for the city must be used. . If you want to
use a lower value than the one given in A.2.2, you must obtain a special authorization from the Permanent
Advisory Commission of the Seismic-Resistant Construction Regime, created by Law 400 of 1997 and
attached to the Ministry of Environment, Housing and Development Territorial, by means of a duly supported
request in this regard.
The same authorization must be obtained from the Advisory Commission if it is desired to use a value of T0
greater or values of TC and TL less than those given in A.2.6.1.3, A.2.6.1.1 and A.2.6.1.2 respectively.
(e) Definition of families of accelerograms — Consistent with what is indicated in A.2.7, a plural number of
accelerograms must be determined that are representative of seismic movements, in rock, descriptive of
what can occur on firm ground (rock) in the city or in the underlying rock below it. The number of
accelerograms must not be less than three for each type of seismic source representative of the threat and
must be compatible with the conditions that affect their frequency content, tectonic environment, epicentral
distance, type of seismogenic source that generates them, and acceleration levels. and maximum horizontal
speed that they represent as studied for the particular case. These accelerograms can be scaled either in
acceleration or in velocity based on attenuation or amplification studies when they correspond to records
taken at significantly different epicentral distances.
A.2.9.3.5 — Geotechnical studies — Based on information from existing geotechnical studies and surveys carried out
especially for the study of seismic microzoning, the following must be determined: (a) Identification and study of local
geotechnical and geological aspects in different places of the city, referring to the position and thickness of the dominant
stratification, the depth of the base rock, and the location of the water table. (b) Definition of the soil
properties in the depth of the profiles from the
engineering point of view, such as: specific weight, unit weight, water content, consistency limits, shear resistance,
behavior under cyclic loads through of the dynamic shear modulus, values of the hysteretic damping
capacity. These properties must be established using on-site measurements, or laboratory tests on
undisturbed samples obtained from boreholes, as the case may be. The study of soil classification and
characteristics must identify the presence of saturated and loosely compacted granular soils, in order to
establish susceptibility to liquefaction.
(c) Determination of the speeds of the P and S waves, using on-site measurement procedures (geophysical
wave propagation methods such as cross-hole or down hole techniques, among others) or using correlations
with other representative parameters to
A-32
complement the speed profile.

(d) In areas with appreciable boulder content, complete stratigraphic columns must be obtained that
include the portions represented by soil and rocks. It is not acceptable in these cases to limit
ourselves to reporting only the soil portion or to base wave amplification studies only on this portion
of the stratigraphic column, ignoring the existence of boulders.
(e) The boreholes of the microzonation studies must reach, as a minimum, the depth
of 30 m, or reach rock.
(f) Based on the above, a first approximation to a geotechnical zoning for evaluation of the seismic
response must be established, which includes sectors of homogeneous profiles by stratigraphy and
thickness, which are the basis of the response zoning or microzoning map. seismic.
A.2.9.3.6 — Studies of wave amplification, zoning, and obtaining design seismic movements on the
surface — Based on information obtained and defined in the previous steps, the following must be determined:
(a) Analysis of the dynamic response of the subsoil, using in principle the one-dimensional, two-
dimensional or three-dimensional wave propagation, but supported by the annotated geotechnical
studies, in a plural number of places within the city where there are soil profiles and mechanical
properties of the soil. even if they are considered representative of the surrounding area.
(b) Definition of average transfer curves of the seismic signal by the soil strata located between the rock
and the surface, which allow defining the variations, amplification or de-amplification, of the seismic
waves for the different vibration periods of interest . The result of these average transfer curves
must correspond to the amplifications obtained for the different accelerograms and although a range
of soil properties is used, in this case the amplification will also be evaluated in the average of the
response for the different accelerograms and the different soil properties.
(c) Study of the amplification effects generated by topographic features such as isolated slopes and hills.
(d) In hillside areas, the
potential threat of earthquake-initiated mass movements must be established (see A.2.4.1.1). (e) From
these wave amplification studies, the
corresponding spectra that include local amplification should be deduced so that, through an appropriate
qualitative analysis, dominant subsurface amplification factors can be established for the identified
stratigraphies. (f) When in an area of the surface spectrum the particularities of the seismic
movements coming from a seismogenic source dominate and in another area of the spectrum those of
another seismogenic source, if considered appropriate for the analysis of the multimodal structural
behavior and if possible its separation, the results can be presented independently without trying to
generate an envelope that covers them. (g) Synthesis of the results by grouping them into zones
whose characteristics are similar, to which the deduced average
amplification values can be applied, establishing site coefficients Fa and Fv , as defined in A.2.4. In this
synthesis of the results, it will be presented through the establishment of smaller zones, which make
up the seismic microzoning, whose dynamic response is significantly similar. The highest criteria
must be exercised in the selection of the dimensions of the microzones, including the study of the
amplification effects generated by topographic features such as isolated slopes and hills. As an
alternative to defining seismic microzones, the response spectra can be defined in a mesh of points
dense enough that for practical purposes it can be considered as a continuous definition of the
response spectrum, within which the spectrum corresponding to the particular site of a building
under study.
Alternatively to the explicit determination of site coefficients Fa and Fv , the amplification or de-
amplification effects of the site can be represented in uniform surface threat spectra. This last case
can be used in places where local conditions generate threat spectra on the surface that cannot be
adjusted to the forms of spectral amplification according to A.2.6 and associated with the Fa and Fv
factors . (h) The microzoning study must define the spectral shapes of
the limited safety spectrum to be used in Chapter A.10 of NSR-10 and the damage threshold spectrum
of Chapter A.12 of NSR-10, the which must be adjusted to the levels of probability of exceedance
and average return period indicated in these chapters respectively and their
A-33
Surface amplification must be consistent with the other parameters of the proposed design spectrum
and take into account for the damage threshold spectrum that the latter is defined for a critical
damping coefficient of 2%. (i) Where possible, local experimental
verification of the results by means of environmental vibration response studies, in order to establish the
agreement between the experimental results and the amplification factors obtained in (g) for the
case of very low intensities.
(j) If applicable, definition of the criteria to be used in the transition zones between one type of soil
behavior and another. (k) Definition of the
criteria to be used when carrying out seismic studies of particular sites, according to A.2.10, for a
particular building, whose minimum values required in the design of the building must be those that
would be obtained for a type B profile. according to numeral A.2.4 of this version of the Regulation
without the existence of seismic microzoning.
A.2.9.3.7 — Approval of the microzoning study — In order for the seismic microzoning study to be required
to obtain building construction licenses, as defined by Laws 388 and 400 of 1997, the results of the studies
whose Scope defined here must meet the following conditions:
(a) That all the requirements demanded by Laws 388 and 400 of 1997 in this regard are met. (b)
That there be a concept of the Permanent Advisory Commission of the Seismic-Resistant Construction
Regime, created by means of Law 400 of 1997 and attached to the Ministry of Environment, Housing
and Territorial Development through which the Commission indicates that the study is meets the
requirements of this version of the Regulation.
(c) That the structural engineers of the city or district object of the study have been consulted, empowered
to present structural designs, according to Law 400 of 1997 and its regulatory decrees, channeling
their observations through the union organizations that represent them in the Permanent Advisory
Commission of the Seismic Resistant Construction Regime, namely: the Colombian Society of
Engineers (SCI), the Colombian Association of Seismic Engineering (AIS), the Colombian
Association of Structural Engineering (ACIES) and the Colombian Chamber of Construction
(CAMACOL). ).
(d) That the city subject to the seismic microzoning develop a plan for the installation, operation, and
maintenance of a network of strong movement accelerographs that covers the zones defined in the
seismic microzoning and states its intention to maintain the equipment, make it public domain the
records obtained, interpret the records obtained in light of the seismic microzoning and update,
within a prudential term, the requirements of the seismic microzoning based on the records obtained.
(e) When funds from Nation entities are used for the preparation
of the microzoning study, the results of these studies and their harmonization with current earthquake
resistant regulations must be reviewed by the Permanent Advisory Commission of the Seismic
Resistant Construction Regime created by Law 400 of 1997, before the district or municipal
authorities can issue the substitute regulation referred to in ordinal A.2.9.1 of this Regulation.
A.2.9.4 — USE OF THE ENERGY DISSIPATION COEFFICIENT, R — When spectra are proposed in the seismic
microzoning study that tend to ground acceleration when the vibration period tends to zero, the energy dissipation
coefficient, RC , to be used in the design of the structure when using this type of spectra, has a variable value in the area
of short periods, starting at the prescribed value
in Chapter A.3, RR R =(ÿ ÿas ) apr
ÿ zero, 0 , for a period equal to T0 and tending to unity as the period tends to
shown in Figure A.2.9-1. The value of RC is described by equation A.2.9-1:
you
RRC.1 =ÿ ( ) + ÿ1R (A.2.9-1)
you
0
A-34
sa sa
(g) (g)
T(s) T(s)
T0 TL TL
youC. T0 CT
Spectrum of the Standard - Chapter A.2 Spectrum of microzoning

R.C. R.C.
R. R.
1 1
0 T(s) 0 T0 T(s)
Variation of R for the spectrum of the Standard of Chapter A.2 Variation of R for the spectrum of microzoning
Figure A.2.9-1 — Variation of the energy dissipation coefficient R
A.2.9.5 — HARMONIZATION OF SEISMIC MICROZONING STUDIES WITH THE PRESENT VERSION OF THE
REGULATION — The seismic microzoning studies approved by the competent authority before the issuance of this
version of the Regulation must be harmonized with respect to the requirements contained in this version of the
Regulations. For this purpose, these authorities must request a concept from the Permanent Advisory Commission of the
Seismic Resistant Construction Regime, created by means of Law 400 of 1997 and attached to the Ministry of
Environment, Housing and Territorial Development, presenting an evaluation associated with this harmonization. indicating
to what extent the microzoning study carried out in due course covers the scope described in A.2.9.3, and also indicating
to what extent before the wave amplification study there are associated spectra that sufficiently cover what is required in
the literal (d) of numeral A.2.9.3.4. In the event of not complying with what is indicated in A.4.9.3.4(d), the effect of the
shortcomings in the available study must be indicated, as well as an approach on how to overcome them in a second part
of the harmonization process. which in that case should be done.
Once the harmonization has been validated, the Commission will issue a concept indicating that the results of this
modification are in full accordance with what is contained in the present version of the Regulation. While this concept is
obtained by the Commission, it is desirable that the municipal or district authorities issue a transition regulation that allows
requesting and processing construction licenses.
A.2.10 — SPECIAL SITE SEISMIC STUDIES

A.2.10.1 — PURPOSE — The following use cases of site-specific seismic surveys whose scope is defined in A.2.10.2
are foreseen:
A.2.10.1.1 — In all cases of type F soil profile, according to A.2.4, the geotechnical engineer responsible for the
geotechnical study of the building must define the particular local effects for the place where the building is
located (see table A.2.10-1).
A.2.10.1.2 — In buildings whose height, use group, size, or special characteristics warrant it in the judgment of
the responsible geotechnical engineer, structural designer, or owner.
A.2.10.1.3 — When it is considered that the site effects described through the requirements of A.2.4 or a
A-35
current seismic microzoning study are not representative of the situation in place.
Table A.2.10-1
Cases in which a particular seismic study of the site is required
soil profile type profile subtype Description of the

profile Soils susceptible to failure or collapse caused
by seismic excitation, such as: liquefiable soils,
F1
sensitive clays, dispersive or weakly cemented soils,
among others.
Organic and highly organic peat and clays ( H > 3 m
F F2
for organic and highly organic peat or clays)
Clays with very high plasticity ( H > 7.5 m with
F3
Plasticity Index IP > 75)
Thick profiles of medium to soft rigidity clays ( H > 36
F4
m)
A.2.10.2 — SCOPE AND METHODOLOGY — The scope of the individual seismic study of the site must cover, as a
minimum, the following topics, which must be included in a detailed report describing the work carried out, the results of
these tasks and sources of information from third parties:
A.2.10.2.1 — Geological and tectonic environment, regional seismology, and seismogenic sources —
When a study with an equivalent scope to that required in A.2.9.3.1, A.2.9.3.2 and A.2.9.3.3 is not carried out, The
use of studies carried out by third parties, which have been published and which are generally accepted by
specialists who know about these aspects in the region, is allowed. When there is a current seismic microzonation,
the results of the phases of the seismic microzonation study described in A.2.9.3.1, A.2.9.3.2 and A.2.9.3.3 must
be used.
A.2.10.2.2 — Design acceleration spectrum in rock and families of accelerograms to be used — For
purposes of defining the acceleration spectrum to be used in rock, the one indicated in A.2.6 can be used with the
values indicated in A.2.2 for the city, or a study can be carried out with the scope indicated in A.2.9.3.4 and taking
into account that the use of lesser spectral accelerations than those given in A.2.6 requires special authorization
from the Permanent Advisory Commission of the Seismic Resistant Construction Regime , created by means of
Law 400 of 1997 and attached to the Ministry of Environment, Housing and Territorial Development by means of
a duly supported request in this regard. When there is a current seismic microzonation, the results of the phase of
the seismic microzonation study described in A.2.9.3.4 must be used.
A.2.10.2.3 — Additional geotechnical exploration to that required for the design of the foundation — In
addition to the geotechnical exploration required by Title H of the Regulations for the particular building in order to
determine the type of foundation and design parameters of the same, the scope of the geotechnical exploration
must include the following aspects for purposes of the particular seismic study of the site: (a) Carrying out at least
one
drilling up to rock or to a material that presents a significantly higher shear wave speed than that of the
materials located on it and a shear wave velocity contrast is presented that allows us to infer that the
amplification of seismic waves occurs above this layer of the profile. In the event that said depth to
the rock or to a material that presents a speed of the shear wave appreciably greater than that of the
materials located on it exceeds 50 m, exploration may be limited to said depth to the extent possible.
complement the information from the survey by geophysical methods and/or by regional studies that
provide the information associated with the strata below said level.
(b) Definition of the soil properties in the depth of the profile from the engineering point of view, such as:
specific weight, unit weight, water content, shear resistance, behavior under cyclic loads through the
dynamic shear modulus and values of the hysteretic damping capacity. These properties shall be
established using, as applicable, on-site measurements, or laboratory tests on undisturbed samples
obtained from the borehole or boreholes if more than one was performed. The study of soil
classification and characteristics must identify the presence of saturated and loosely compacted
granular soils, in order to establish susceptibility to liquefaction. For him
A-36
In the case of stiffness degradation curves or damping variation with deformation, if it is not possible
to obtain them reliably in the laboratory, it is possible to resort to recognized relationships in the
national and/or international technical literature that take into account , among other parameters,
the type of soil and its state of stress and deformation. (c) Determination of the speeds of the
P and S waves, using on-site measurement procedures (geophysical wave propagation methods such
as cross-hole or down hole techniques, among others) or using correlations with other representative
parameters. (d) Identification of the water table and the possibility of existence of
aquifers framed within soils with less permeability. The measurement of the water table must be carried
out in such a way as to guarantee that it does not correspond to false levels of the water table
caused by the same exploration operations. The possibility of placing at least one piezometer in the
place should be studied and a reading program should be established with an adequate periodicity.
(e) In areas with appreciable boulder content, a complete stratigraphic column must be obtained that
includes the portions represented by soil and rocks. It is not acceptable in these cases to limit
ourselves to reporting only the soil portion or to base the wave amplification studies only on this
portion of the stratigraphic column, ignoring the existence of boulders.
A.2.10.2.4 — Study of wave amplification and obtaining design seismic movements on the surface —
Based on information obtained and defined in the previous steps, the following must be determined: (a) Analysis
of the
dynamic response of the subsoil, using in principle the one-dimensional, two-dimensional or three-
dimensional wave propagation, but supported by the annotated geotechnical studies. (b) Definition
of an average seismic
signal transfer curve for the soil strata located between the rock and the surface, which allows defining
the variations, amplification or de-amplification, of the seismic waves for the different vibration
periods of interest . The result of this average transfer curve should correspond to the amplifications
obtained for the different accelerograms, considering, if applicable, the uncertainties in the
mechanical properties of the soil deposits underlying the building. The mean of the responses
calculated for the different accelerograms and values that represent the variation in soil properties
will be used. The study must not include those soil layers that are removed due to the construction
of basements in the building and must include the soil layers that actually exist once the building is
built. (c) Determination, based on the average amplification values deduced from the surface
spectrum for the place of interest according to A.2.10.2.2, which will be used in the design
considering the set of its spectral ordinates.
(d) The zone of the proposed spectrum on the surface corresponding to the values of the fundamental
period of the building in the two directions of analysis in plan taken from the lowest value of the
fundamental period of the building and 1.4 times the highest value of the fundamental period of the
building. building should be studied in more detail. (e) The
surface, for purposes of defining the design seismic movements proposed in the particular seismic study
of the site, must correspond to the base of the building as defined in this Title A of the Regulations.
(f) The minimum values required in the design
of the building must be those that would be obtained for
a type B profile according to numeral A.2.4 of this version of the Regulations.
A.2.10.2.5 — If these particular local effects are defined using a design spectrum, it shall be calculated for a
structural damping ratio equal to 5 percent of critical. If they are defined by means of families of accelerograms,
the requirements given in A.2.7 must also be fulfilled.
A.2.10.2.6 — In the case of buildings that will be subject to the limited security procedure to be used in Chapter
A.10 or buildings covered by the requirements of Chapter A.12, the specific site study must define the forms
spectrum of the limited safety spectrum for Chapter A.10 of the NSR-10 and of the damage threshold spectrum
of Chapter A.12 of the NSR-10, which must be adjusted to the levels of probability of exceedance and period of
average return indicated in these chapters respectively and its surface amplification must be consistent with the
other parameters of the proposed design spectrum and take into account for the damage threshold spectrum
that the latter is defined for a critical damping coefficient of 2%.
A-37
A.2.10.3 — USE OF THE RESULTS — The individual seismic studies of the site are part of the geotechnical studies that
must be submitted to obtain the building construction license as indicated in A.1.3.2 and must be approved. by urban
curators or, failing that, the municipal authorities in charge of issuing construction licenses, in accordance with the
provisions of Law 388 of 1997 and its regulatory decrees for the presentation, review and approval of geotechnical
studies when these are part of of the documentation that must be submitted to obtain the construction license.
A.2.11 — TECHNICAL STANDARDS MENTIONED IN THIS CHAPTER
This Chapter uses the following NTC technical standards issued by Icontec and, failing that, those issued by the American
Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM, which are part of this Regulation:
NTC 1495 – Soils. Test to determine the water content of soils and rocks, based on mass (ASTM D 2166 – Standard
Test Method for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass)
NTC 1527 – Soils. Test method to determine the resistance to unconfined compression of cohesive soils
(ASTM D 2166 – Standard Test Method for Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil)
NTC 2041 – Soils. Determination of unconsolidated undrained triaxial compressive strength in cohesive soils. (ASTM D
2850 Standard Test Method for Unconsolidated-Undrained Triaxial Compression Test on Cohesive Soils)
ASTM D 1586 – Standard Test Method for Penetration Test and Split-barrel Sampling of Soils
ASTM D 4318 Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils
A-38
NSR-10 — Chapter A.3 — General requirements for seismic resistant design
CHAPTER A.3
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT DESIGN
Av = acceleration coefficient representing the effective peak horizontal velocity, for design, given in A.2.2.
As = maximum acceleration at the ground surface estimated as the spectral acceleration corresponding to
a period of vibration equal to zero, See equation A.3.6-3.
Ax = amplification coefficient of accidental torsion at level x , defined in A.3.6.7.
i will = acceleration at level i , See equation A.3.6-3.
AND
= reduced design seismic forces (E FR = ) yes
Fi = part of the seismic shear at the base that is generated at level i = , see A.3.6.6.
fs seismic forces, see A.3.1.1. m/s2 ).
g = acceleration
due to gravity ( g 9.8 = = height in meters,
hi measured from the base, of level i , see equation A.3.6-3.
hn = height in meters, measured from the base, of the highest floor of the building, see equation A.3.6-3. =
heq equivalent height of the one degree of freedom system simulating the building, see equation A.3.6-3. = coefficient
Yo
of importance given in A.2.5.2.
M = total mass of the building — M is expressed in kg. It must be equal to the total mass of the structure plus the mass of
those elements such as dividing walls and partitions, permanent equipment, tanks and their contents, etc. In
warehouses or warehouses, 25 percent of the mass corresponding to the elements that cause the live load of
the floor must also be included. Chapters A.4 and A.5.
Mp = mass of an element or component, in kg. = part of
my M that is placed in level i = coefficient of basic , in kg. See equation A.4.3-3.
R0 energy dissipation capacity defined for each structural system and each
coefficient, R0 , multiplied by the energy dissipation capacity reduction coefficients due to irregularities in height,
plan and lack of redundancy

ÿ ÿ0ÿ ) . See Chapter A.3.
sa = value of the design spectral acceleration for a given period of vibration. See equation A.3.6-3
V = seismic shear force at level x . See A.3.6.6.
x max
ÿ = maximum horizontal displacement at level x . See equation A.3.6-2.
ÿavg = average of the horizontal displacements at the extreme points of the structure at level x . see
equation A.3.6-2.
aÿ = coefficient of reduction of the energy dissipation capacity caused by irregularities in height of
the building. See A.3.3.3.
pÿ = coefficient of reduction of the energy dissipation capacity caused by irregularities in plant
of the building. See A.3.3.3.
rÿ = coefficient of reduction of the energy dissipation capacity caused by the absence of redundancy in the seismic
resistance system. See A.3.3.8.
ÿ0 = coefficient of overstrength. See A.3.3.9.
A.3.1 — GENERAL BASIS OF EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT DESIGN
A.3.1.1 — DESIGN PROCEDURE — In A.1.3 the steps that must be followed in the earthquake resistant design of a building
are established. In Chapter A.2 the design seismic movements are established. This Chapter establishes:
A-39
(a) The types of structural systems of seismic resistance, and the different methods of analysis, which depend on the
degree of irregularity of the structural system and, in addition, allow determining the seismic shear at the base and its
distribution in the height of the building .
(b) Once the seismic forces corresponding to each level have been determined, they are applied to the structural system of
chosen seismic resistance.
(c) By means of an appropriate mathematical model, the deflections of the structure and the forces are determined.
internal in each element of the structural system produced by seismic forces.
(d) The drift check is performed for the horizontal deflections of the structure obtained from the
analysis.
(e) The elements and their connections are designed using all the stresses required by Title B of the Regulations, duly
combined as required therein. The seismic forces obtained from the Fs analysis are reduced, dividing them by the
coefficient of energy dissipation capacity, R corresponding to the seismic resistance structural system, to obtain the ,
reduced design seismic forces (
E FR
= yes ) that are used in the load combinations prescribed in Title B.
(f) The value of the energy dissipation capacity coefficient to be used in the design corresponds to the basic energy
dissipation coefficient, R0 , multiplied by the energy dissipation capacity reduction coefficients due to irregularities in
height, on plan , and for lack of redundancy

ÿ ÿ 0ÿ ) .
(g) Brittle connection elements between elements and others that, in accordance with the requirements of the structural
materials that constitute them, require the use of the overresistance coefficient ÿ0 , design using the design seismic HE
forces E obtained from equation A.3.3- 2.
(h) The design of the structural elements and their connections is carried out in compliance with the required requirements.
for the required degree of energy dissipation capacity of the material.
(i) These design forces of the structural elements obtained following the annotated procedure are forces at the resistance
level, that is, they correspond to factored forces that have already been multiplied by their load coefficients. For
members that are designed using the working stress method, refer to A.3.1.8.
A.3.1.2 — STRUCTURING CHARACTERISTICS — The seismic resistance system of the building must be classified within one
of the structural systems given in A.3.2 and must meet the requirements indicated in this Title A of the Regulations and those of
the structural material indicated in the corresponding Title and for the degree of energy dissipation in the appropriate inelastic
range. Seismic effects on structural elements that are not part of the seismic resistance system must be evaluated following the
requirements of Chapter A.8. Seismic effects on non-structural elements must be evaluated following the requirements of Chapter
A.9.
A.3.1.3 — REQUIRED MINIMUM ENERGY DISSIPATION CAPACITY — Depending on the type of structural material and the
characteristics of the seismic resistance system, the minimum energy dissipation capacity degrees (DES, DMO, or DMI) that must
be established comply with the structural material in the different seismic hazard zones defined in Chapter A.2. See tables A.3-1
to A.3-4.
A.3.1.4 — SEISMIC RESISTANCE IN DIFFERENT HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONS — Given that seismic effects can be
preponderant in any horizontal direction, the structure must have seismic resistance in all directions and therefore the seismic
resistance structural system must exist in two orthogonal or approximately orthogonal directions, in such a way that stability is
guaranteed, both of the structure considered as a whole, and of each one of its elements, before seismic movements that can
occur in any horizontal direction.
A.3.1.5 — PATH OF FORCES — Forces must be transferred from their point of application to their final point of resistance.
Therefore, a continuous trajectory or trajectories must be provided, with sufficient resistance and rigidity to guarantee the adequate
transfer of forces. The foundation must be designed for the effects of seismic forces and movements.
A.3.1.6 — ISOSTATIC SEISMIC RESISTANCE SYSTEMS — Whenever possible, the seismic resistance structural system
should be hyperstatic. In the design of buildings where the seismic resistance system is not hyperstatic, the adverse effect that
the failure of one of the members or connections would have on the stability of the building must be taken into account.
A-40
A.3.1.7 — PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL SEISMIC RESISTANCE SYSTEMS — Buildings can be built whose
seismic resistance system is made up of prefabricated elements. The precast system must be designed for the seismic
forces obtained in accordance with this Regulation using a basic energy dissipation capacity coefficient, as defined in
Chapter A.13, equal to one and a half ( )
= . When it is shown with experimental and analytical evidence that the proposed system has a R 1.5 0
resistance, energy dissipation capacity and work capacity in the inelastic range equal to or greater than those obtained
with the structure built using one of the prescribed materials By this Regulation, the requirements of Articles 10 and 12 of
Law 400 of 1997 must be met, but in no case may the value of R0 be greater than that set by this Regulation for seismic
resistance systems built monolithically with the same material. structural. In this regard, consult A.1.4.2.
A.3.1.8 — STRUCTURAL MATERIALS DESIGNED USING THE WORK STRESS METHOD

— When the structural material is designed using the work stress method, as defined in B.2.3 of this Regulation, to obtain
the effects of reduced design seismic forces at the work stress level used in the design of structural elements should use
a load factor of 0.7
as presented by B.2.3.
A.3.2 — STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS

A.3.2.1—TYPES OF STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS —Four general types of seismic-resistant structural systems are
recognized and are defined in this section. Each of them is subdivided according to the types of vertical elements used to
resist seismic forces and the degree of energy dissipation capacity of the structural material used. The structural systems
of seismic resistance recognized by this Regulation are the following:
A.3.2.1.1 — Load-bearing wall system — It is a structural system that does not have an essentially complete
frame and in which vertical loads are resisted by the load-bearing walls and horizontal forces are resisted by
structural walls or frames with diagonals. See table A.3-1.
A.3.2.1.2 — Combined system — It is a structural system, (see Table A.3-2), in which:

(a) The vertical loads are resisted by an essentially complete non-moment-resisting frame, and the
horizontal forces are resisted by structural walls or frames with diagonals, or
(b) Vertical and horizontal loads are resisted by an essentially complete moment-resisting frame
combined with structural walls or frames with diagonals, and which does not meet the requirements
for a dual system.
A.3.2.1.3 — Frame system — A structural system comprised of an essentially complete, moment-resisting space
frame, without diagonals, that resists all vertical loads and horizontal forces. See table A.3-3.
A.3.2.1.4 — Dual system — A structural system that has a moment-resisting space frame without diagonals,
combined with structural walls or frames with diagonals. See table A.3-4. For the structural system to be classified
as a dual system, the following requirements must be met:
(a) The essentially complete, diagonal-free, moment-resisting frame space shall be
capable of supporting vertical loads.
(b) The horizontal forces are resisted by the combination of structural walls or frames with diagonals,
with the moment-resisting frame, which can be a frame of special energy dissipation capacity (DES),
when it is reinforced concrete or structural steel, a reinforced concrete moderate energy dissipation
(DMO) frame, or a structural steel minimal energy dissipation (DMI) frame. The moment-resisting
frame, acting independently, shall be designed to be capable of resisting at least 25 percent of the
seismic shear at the base. (c) The two systems must be designed in such a way that together they
are capable of resisting the entire seismic shear at the base, in proportion to their relative
stiffnesses, considering the interaction of the dual system at all levels of the building, but in In no case
may the responsibility of the structural walls, or of the frames with diagonals, be less than 75 percent
of the seismic shear at the base.
A-41
A.3.2.2 — CLASSIFICATION IN ONE OF THE STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS — Every building or any part of it must be classified within
one of the four seismic resistance structural systems described in tables A.3-1 to A.3- 4.
A.3.2.3 — HEIGHT LIMITS FOR STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS — Tables A.3-1 to A.3-4 give the maximum heights, measured in meters
from the base or in number of stories above the same, which can have each one of the structural systems of seismic resistance
prescribed, for each one of the zones of seismic threat.
A.3.2.4 — COMBINATION OF STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS AT HEIGHT — When different structural systems are combined at height
within the same building, the following requirements must be met:
A.3.2.4.1 — Maximum value of R allowed — With the exception of the provisions in A.3.2.4.2 to A.3.2.4.4, the structure that
combines different structural systems in height is classified as irregular type 5aA or 5bA (table A.3-7), and the value of the
,
coefficient of energy dissipation capacity, R in any direction and at any level, must at most be the smallest value of R of the
structural systems that are being combined above that level and in the direction considered. The design requirements for each
structural system and for each degree of energy dissipation capacity of the structural material must be met.
A.3.2.4.2— Lightweight floors —There is no need to apply the requirements of A.3.2.4.1 when the mass of the floors located
above the level where a structural system begins is less than 10 percent of the total mass, m
, of the building.
A.3.2.4.3 — Flexible structure supported by a more rigid structure — For structures that have a flexible top supported by
a more rigid one and that meet the requirements of Table A.3-5, the design procedure may be used. indicated there.
A.3.2.4.4 — Rigid structure resting on a structure with less rigidity — This type of combination of structural systems at
height presents drawbacks in its seismic behavior, therefore it is not an acceptable structural system for this Regulation.
A.3.2.5 — COMBINATION OF STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS IN PLAN — Structural systems may be combined in plan, without this
leading to the structure being classified as irregular, with the following limitations:
(a) The two systems must coexist throughout the height of the building, unless the following requirements are met.
requirements of A.3.2.4,
(b) When the structure has a load-bearing wall system in only one direction, the value of R
to design the orthogonal direction, it cannot be greater than 1.25 times the value of R of the load-bearing wall structural
system, (c) When the structure
has two different load-bearing wall systems in the same direction, for the system that has the highest value of R the value to
be used cannot be greater than 1.25 times the value of R of the system with the lowest value of R
, and
(d) When the structure has systems other than load-bearing walls in both directions, for the system that has a higher value of
R , the value to be used cannot be greater than, 1.25 times the value of R of the system with the lowest value of R.
.
A.3.2.6 — ELEMENTS COMMON TO SEVERAL STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS — Structural elements common to different structural
systems must be designed and detailed following the most restrictive requirements within the systems for which they are common.
A.3.3 — STRUCTURAL CONFIGURATION OF THE BUILDING

A.3.3.1 — GENERAL — For seismic design purposes, the building shall be classified as regular or irregular in plan and height, or as
redundant or non-redundant in accordance with the requirements of this section.
A.3.3.2 — DEFINITION OF THE STRUCTURAL CONFIGURATION — The structural configuration of the building is understood not
only its external shape and its size, but also its nature, dimensions and location
A-42
of the structural and non-structural elements that affect the behavior of the building in the face of seismic solicitations.
A.3.3.3 — REDUCTION OF THE VALUE OF R FOR IRREGULAR STRUCTURES AND WITH ABSENCE OF
REDUNDANCY — When a structure is classified as irregular, the value of the energy dissipation capacity coefficient R
that is used in the seismic design of the building, it must be reduced by multiplying it by pÿ , due to irregularities in plan,
by aÿ due to irregularities in height, and by rÿ due to lack of redundancy, as indicated in equation A.3.3-1.
R=ÿÿÿ R (A.3.3-1)
apr 0
When a building has several types of irregularity in plan simultaneously, the lowest value of pÿ will be applied . Similarly,
when a building has several types of irregularity in height simultaneously, the lowest value of aÿ will be applied .
A.3.3.4 — PLAN CONFIGURATION — The building is considered irregular when it occurs, see Figure A.3-1, one or
more of the cases described in Table A.3-6, where the values are defined. of pÿ .
A.3.3.5 — HEIGHT CONFIGURATION — A building is classified as irregular in height, see Figure A.3-2, when one or
several of the cases described in Table A.3-7 occur, where the values of aÿ are defined .
A.3.3.5.1 — Exceptions to height irregularities — When for all stories, the drift of any story is less than 1.3
times the drift of the next story upwards, it can be considered that there are no height irregularities of types 1aA,
1bA, 2A, or 3A, as defined in Table A.3-7, and in this case applies to ÿ = 1. There is no need to consider in this
evaluation the drifts of the top two floors of the building or the basements that have retaining walls integrated into
the structure in all its periphery. The drifts used in the evaluation can be calculated without including torsional
effects. Likewise, a flexible structure resting on a more rigid structure that meets the requirements of A.3.2.4.3
and the corresponding ones of table A.3-5 is not considered irregular.
A.3.3.6 — BUILDINGS IN LOW SEISMIC HAZARD ZONES OF USE GROUPS I AND II — For buildings belonging to
use groups I and II, located in low seismic hazard zones, the evaluation to determine if the building is irregular or not, it
can be limited to irregularities in plan of the type 1aP, 1bP (table A.3-6) and in height of the type 5aA and 5bA (table
A.3-7).
A.3.3.7 — BUILDINGS IN INTERMEDIATE SEISMIC HAZARD ZONES OF USE GROUP I — For buildings belonging
to use group I, located in intermediate seismic hazard zones, the evaluation to determine whether the building is irregular
or not, can be limited to irregularities in plan of types 1aP, 1bP, 3P and 4P (table A.3-6) and in height of types 4A, 5aA
and 5bA (table A.3-7).
A.3.3.8 — ABSENCE OF REDUNDANCY IN THE STRUCTURAL SYSTEM OF SEISMIC RESISTANCE — A resistance

reduction factor must be assigned for the absence of redundancy in the structural system of seismic resistance, rÿ , in
the two main directions in plan as follows :
A.3.3.8.1 — In buildings with a structural system with minimum energy dissipation capacity (DMI) — For
buildings whose seismic resistance structural system is made of a material that meets the minimum energy
dissipation capacity (DMI) requirements, the value of the resistance reduction factor due to the absence of
redundancy in the seismic resistance structural system, rÿ , is assigned a value of unity ( ) rÿ = 1.0 .
A.3.3.8.2 — In buildings with a structural system with moderate energy dissipation capacity (DMO) and
special (DES) — For buildings whose structural system is made of a material that meets the requirements for
moderate energy dissipation capacity (DMO ) or special (DES) the value of the resistance reduction factor due
to the absence of redundancy in the structural resistance system can be assigned a value of unity (ÿ = r 1.0)
when in all floors that resist more seismic, rÿ ,
A-43
of 35 percent of the basal cut in the direction under study, the seismic resistance structural system meets the
following redundancy conditions:
(a) In systems composed of concentrically braced frames —Failure of any of the diagonals or their
connections to the frame does not result in more than a 33 percent reduction in resistance to
horizontal story forces or produce a torsional irregularity in plan extreme (Type 1bP).
(b) In systems composed of frames with eccentric bracing — The loss of resistance to moment (in
the case of moment links), or to shear (in the case of shear links), of the two ends of a link does not
result in a reduction of more than 33 percent in the resistance to horizontal forces of the story nor
does it produce an extreme torsional irregularity in plan (Type 1bP).
(c) In moment-resisting frame systems —Loss of moment resistance at the beam-column connection
of the two ends of a beam does not result in more than a 33-percent reduction in resistance to
horizontal story forces nor does it produce a torsional irregularity in extreme plan (Type 1bP).
(d) In systems with structural concrete structural walls — The failure of a structural wall or a portion
of it that has a ratio of the height of the story to its greater horizontal length of the unit, or of the
collector elements that connect it to the diaphragm, it does not result in a reduction of more than 33
percent of the resistance to horizontal forces of the floor nor does it produce an extreme plan
torsional irregularity (Type 1bP). (e) For other systems — There are no
special requirements.
In structural systems that do not meet the conditions stated in (a) to (d) the resistance reduction factor due to the
absence of redundancy in the seismic resistance structural system, rÿ , must be assigned a value of rÿ = 0.75 .
Even if the conditions stated in (a) to (d) are not met, the resistance reduction factor due to the absence of
redundancy in the seismic resistance structural system, rÿ , must be assigned a value equal to unity ( rÿ = 1.0 HE
if all the floors that resist more than 35 percent of the) basal cut in the direction under study the seismic resistance
structural system are regular in plan and have at least two spans made up of elements that are part of the
seismic resistance system located on the periphery of both sides of the plan in the two main directions.In the
case of structural walls, for purposes of counting the number of equivalent openings, it is calculated as the
horizontal length of the wall divided by the height of the story.
A.3.3.9 — USE OF THE OVERSTRENGTH COEFFICIENT ÿ0 — When requirements for structural material and degree
of energy dissipation require that brittle elements or connections between elements be designed for seismic forces, E ,
amplified by the coefficient of overresistance, ÿ0 , this should be used in the following way to obtain the design forces
that include seismic effects:
=
ohms
0sF
AND ±
0.5AFD oh (A.3.3-2)
R.
Where Fs corresponds to the seismic forces obtained from the analysis, R is the coefficient of energy dissipation capacity
corresponding to the structural system of seismic resistance R = ÿÿÿ , and D corresponds
on the to the dead load R apr 0 acting
element as shown. defined in Title B of the Regulations and the sign on the right side of the equation is the one that leads
to the highest value of E, depending on the sign of Fs.
A.3.4 — METHODS OF ANALYSIS
A.3.4.1 — RECOGNIZED METHODS — The following seismic resistance system analysis methods are recognized for
design purposes:
(a) Equivalent horizontal force method, which is described in Chapter A.4, (b) Elastic
dynamic analysis methods, in accordance with the requirements of Chapter A.5, (c) Inelastic
dynamic analysis methods, in accordance with the requirements of Chapter A.5, and (d)
Alternative analysis methods, which must take into account the dynamic characteristics of the building, the
inelastic behavior of materials, and must be generally accepted in the
A-44
engineering. In the application of any alternative analysis method, fundamental periods greater than those
allowed in Chapters A.4 and A.5 cannot be used.
A.3.4.2 — METHOD OF ANALYSIS TO BE USED — As a minimum, the following methods of analysis should be used:
analysis:
A.3.4.2.1 — Equivalent Horizontal Force Method — The equivalent horizontal force method may be used on the
following buildings: (a) All buildings, regular and
irregular, in low seismic hazard zones, (b) All buildings, regular and irregular, belonging to use
group I located in zones of intermediate seismic threat, ,
(c) Regular buildings, 20 stories or less and 60 m high or less measured from the base, in any seismic
hazard zone, except for buildings located in places that have a type D, E or F soil profile, with periods
vibration greater than 2TC , (d) Irregular buildings that do not have more than 6 levels
nor more than 18 m in height measured at
starting from the base,
(e) Flexible structures supported by more rigid structures that meet the requirements of
A.3.2.4.3.
A.3.4.2.2 — Elastic Dynamic Analysis Method — The elastic dynamic analysis method shall be used on all
buildings not covered by A.3.4.2.1, including the following:
(a) Buildings of more than 20 stories or more than 60 m high, except for buildings
mentioned in A.3.4.2.1 (a) and (b),
(b) Buildings that have vertical irregularities of types 1aA, 1bA, 2A and 3A, as described in
defined in A.3.3.5,
(c) Buildings that have irregularities that are not described in A.3.3.4 and A.3.3.5, except for the case
described in A.3.2.4.3, (d) Buildings of more
than 5 levels or more than 20 m high, located in areas of high seismic threat, which do not have the same
structural system throughout their height, with the exception of those prescribed in A.3.2.4.3,
(e) Structures, regular or irregular, located in sites that have a soil profile D, E or F and that have a period
greater than 2TC . In this case, the analysis must include the effects of soil-structure interaction, as
prescribed in Chapter A.7, when an analysis of the structure is carried out assuming it is embedded in
its base.
A.3.4.2.3 — Inelastic dynamic analysis method — The inelastic dynamic analysis method can be used in those
cases where, in the judgment of the designer engineer, there are variations in the energy dissipation capacity in the
inelastic range that can only be identified by this procedure. When using this method of analysis the requirements
given in Chapter A.5 must be met. The designs made by this methodology must be reviewed by two professionals,
independent of the structural designer, who meet the suitability requirements required for reviewers of structural
designs as prescribed by Law 400 of 1997, who will sign a memorandum in which it is exhaustively indicated that
the procedures Employees consult the best methodologies available on these procedures and that the building thus
designed has resistance and behavior expectations similar to those of a building designed by the other methods
allowed by the Regulations, when subjected to seismic movements of similar intensity to those design seismic
movements prescribed by this Regulation. This memorial will be attached to the documents provided to obtain the
corresponding construction license.
A.3.4.2.4 — Static nonlinear analysis method of progressive plasticization — The static nonlinear analysis
method, known as the “push-over” or progressive plasticization procedure, can be used in those cases that, in the
judgment of the designer engineer, is desired evaluate the energy dissipation capacity in the inelastic range by this
procedure. When using this method of analysis, the requirements given in Appendix A-3 must be met and, in
addition, they must be compared with another of the analysis methods allowed by the Regulations, using the most
demanding in the design.
A.3.4.3 — RIGIDITY OF THE STRUCTURE AND ITS ELEMENTS — The rigidities used in the structural analysis for the
seismic design must be defined by the designer engineer according to his criteria, taking into account the precepts given for
each structural material. in the corresponding Title of this Regulation.
A-45
A.3.5 — REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL MATERIALS
A.3.5.1 — Special requirements for the design and specific details of each structural material are given for the degree of
energy dissipation capacity; minimum (DMI), moderate (DMO) or special (DES), that is required of the material and for
each one of the structural systems of seismic resistance in tables A.3-1 to A.3-4.
A.3.6 — SEISMIC EFFECTS ON STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS
A.3.6.1 — GENERAL — All structural elements must be designed for the effects of the design seismic movements that
act on them, in addition to all the loads that may affect them, as prescribed in Title B of this Regulation.
A.3.6.1.1 — Elements of the seismic resistance system — Only the elements that belong to the structural
system of seismic resistance can contribute to the seismic resistance of the building and must be designed
according to the requirements of its structural material and for the grade of power dissipation capacity required,
in addition to the additional requirements given in this section.
A.3.6.1.2 — Structural elements that are not part of the seismic resistance system — Structural elements
that are not part of the seismic resistance structural system must be investigated in order to determine if they
can maintain their capacity to resist vertical loads when they are applied. They are subjected to horizontal
displacements and drifts caused by design seismic movements, but there is only a need for them to meet the
minimum energy dissipation capacity grade requirements for their structural material. Their anchorages and ties
to the seismic resistance system must meet the requirements given in this section and in Chapter A.8.
A.3.6.2 — COMBINATION OF LOAD EFFECTS — The load coefficients that must be used in the combination of gravity
loads and seismic forces are established in Title B of this Regulation. It must be taken into account that the seismic forces
obtained following this Regulation are defined at the resistance level, therefore they are already factored.
A.3.6.3 — DIRECTION OF APPLICATION OF THE SEISMIC FORCES — In zones of intermediate or high seismic
threat, orthogonal effects must be considered, unless (1) the structure has flexible diaphragms or (2) they are one-story
buildings ( industrial buildings or similar) in which there are no type 5P irregularities in the plan. Orthogonal effects can
be taken into account assuming the simultaneous occurrence of 100% of the seismic forces in one direction and 30% of
the seismic forces in the perpendicular direction. The combination that requires the highest element strength should be
used. Alternatively, the orthogonal effects can be calculated as the square root of the sum of the squares of the effects
produced by 100% of the seismic forces acting independently in the two orthogonal directions, assigning the sign that
leads to the most conservative result. The seismic force must be combined with the vertical loads in accordance with the
requirements of Title B of this Regulation.
A.3.6.4—TIES AND CONTINUITY —All structural elements must be interconnected. The connection and connecting
elements must be capable of transmitting the seismic forces induced by the connecting parts; In addition to the
requirements of Chapter A.8, the following requirements must be met:
A.3.6.4.1 — Parts of the building — Any part or portion of the building that forms a set that is indistinctly
differentiated from the rest of the structure, but that is structurally linked to it, must be linked and tied to the rest
of the building by means of of connection elements whose resistance is designed taking into account the axial,
shear and bending forces transmitted by the interaction between the parts under the load combinations specified
in Title B. The seismic force involved, such as
minimum, should be ( 0.40A ) tog times the mass of the part or portion. It is particularly important that, in the
In the case of this connection, the analysis does not use a master knot or other method of equalizing degrees of
freedom for the analysis under lateral loads.
A.3.6.4.2 — Tie beams in foundation — Foundation elements, such as footings,
A-46
pile dice, piles or "caissons", etc., must be tied by means of elements capable of resisting in tension or compression
a force not less than (0.25Aa) times the total vertical load of the element that has the greatest load among those
that interconnects, in addition to the forces transmitted to it by the superstructure. For the purposes of designing the
foundation, the provisions of A.3.7 must be complied with.
A.3.6.5 — COLLECTOR ELEMENTS — Collector elements capable of transferring seismic forces originating in other parts
of the building to the vertical element of the seismic resistance system that resists those forces shall be provided.
A.3.6.6 — DISTRIBUTION OF SHEAR FORCE IN THE FLOOR — When using the equivalent horizontal force method
defined in Chapter A.4, the shear force, Vx , at level x with the following formula: , must be determined according
no
VFxi = ÿ (A.3.6-1)
ix=
The shear force, Vx , and the associated torsions must be distributed between the different frames and structural walls of
the seismic resistance system according to their respective displacement stiffnesses and taking into account the diaphragm
stiffness, according to the definition of the stiffness of the diaphragm. diaphragms given in A.3.6.7.2.
A.3.6.7 — TORSION ON THE STORY — The effects of torsion on the floor must be taken into account in the design,
considering that these come from the uncertainty in the location of the masses within the floor, which leads to accidental
torsion , or due to the eccentricity between the center of mass and the center of rigidity when the diaphragms are considered
rigid in their own plane, or from the asymmetry in the distribution of the mass and the rigidity of vertical elements, when the
diaphragms cannot be considered as rigid in their own plane. In the event of performing a dynamic analysis, the analysis
itself will reflect the effects of the torsion in the structure, leaving the designer the option of whether or not it involves
accidental torsion conditions. In the case that the equivalent horizontal force method is used, the requirements of A.3.6.7.1
to A.3.6.7.3, described below, must be met for the consideration of the torsion in the floor.
A.3.6.7.1 — Accidental Torsion — The mass of all stories shall be assumed to be displaced transversely, to either
side, of the calculated center of mass of each story, a distance equal to 5 percent (0.05) of the dimension of the
building on that floor, measured in the direction perpendicular to the direction under study. The effect of the torsion
that is generated must be taken into account in the distribution of the floor shear to the vertical elements of the
seismic resistance system. When there are 1aP or 1bP type irregularities in plan, as defined in A.3.3.4.1 (table
A.3-6), the accidental torsion must be increased at each level x, multiplying it by an amplification coefficient, Ax ,
determined from according to the following equation:
2
ÿ ÿ max ÿ
= ÿ 3 .0 (A.3.6-2)
ax ÿ ÿ
1 .2 ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
prom ÿ
ÿ
A.3.6.7.2 — Torsion due to the non-coincidence of the center of mass and stiffness — When the diaphragm
can be considered rigid in its own plane, the increase in shears on the vertical elements of the seismic resistance
system due to to the distribution, in plan, of the stiffness of the elements of the seismic resistance system.
(a) Flexible diaphragm — The diaphragm may be assumed to be flexible, for the purposes of the
requirements of this section, when the maximum horizontal deflection within the diaphragm, when subjected
to seismic forces, Fs, is more than 2 times the average of its horizontal deflections.
This determination of the flexibility of the diaphragm can be made by comparing the horizontal deflection
due to seismic forces, obtained at the midpoint of the diaphragm, with that of each of the vertical elements
of the seismic resistance system, when subjected to an equivalent horizontal force. to that produced by the
mass afferent to the element.
(b) Diaphragm rigid in its own plane —The diaphragm can be assumed to be rigid in its own plane when
its stiffness and strength are arranged in such a way that it acts as a unit and its
A-47
Mass and stiffness properties can be concentrated at the center of mass and at the center of stiffness
respectively. In buildings that have irregularities of the 2P and 3P types, the consideration of a rigid
diaphragm should be carefully evaluated, since in most cases these irregularities inhibit the behavior of
the building's mezzanine floors as a rigid diaphragm.
A.3.6.7.3 — Design Torsion — The design torsional moment at any level of the structure is obtained as the sum
of the design torsions of all levels located above the level under study. The portion of the torsion contributed by
each level is obtained as the accidental torsion of the level, plus the product of the horizontal seismic force,
corresponding to that level by a dimension equal to the projection, in the direction perpendicular to the direction
of the forces, of the distance between the center of mass and the center of rigidity of the level.
A.3.6.8 — DIAPHRAGMS — In intermediate and high seismic hazard zones, the following must be taken into account in
the design of floors and roofs that act as diaphragms:
A.3.6.8.1 — The deflection in the plane of the diaphragm must not exceed the allowable deflection of the
elements that are attached to it. The allowable deflection must be that which allows the adhered elements to
maintain their structural integrity under the imposed forces.
A.3.6.8.2 — Floor or deck diaphragms must be designed to be capable of resisting the forces caused by
acceleration at each level, expressed as a fraction of gravity, determined by the following equation:
( Yeah
So oh )
ÿ
aa =
i+ yes
Hi Hÿ
eq
h
eq
h Yo
(A.3.6-3)
as =
i to Hi Hÿ
eq
h eq
heq can be estimated simply as 0.75hno
As an alternative to equation A.3.6-3 to calculate the forces that the floor or roof diaphragms must resist, more
precise estimates of the maximum absolute accelerations to which these diaphragms would be subjected can be
used, as a result, for example, of dynamic analyses.
When the diaphragm must transmit forces from the vertical elements of the seismic resistance system that are
above the diaphragm, to vertical elements of the seismic resistance system that are below the diaphragm, due
to displacements in the location of the elements, or by changes in the stiffness of the vertical elements, the
corresponding forces must be added to those obtained by means of equation A.3.6-3.
A.3.6.8.3 — Diaphragms that support reinforced concrete or masonry walls must have continuous ties between
the different elements of the diaphragm in order to distribute the anchoring forces specified in A.3.6.10.
A.3.6.8.4 — Diaphragm connections to vertical elements or collector elements, or between collector elements, in
structures located in high seismic hazard zones that have plan irregularities of types 1aP, 1bP, 2P, 3P, or 4P
(table A.3-6), must be designed for the corresponding seismic forces, multiplied by 1.25.
A.3.6.8.5 — In buildings located in areas of high seismic threat that have 2P type irregularities in plan (table
A.3-6), the diaphragm elements must be designed considering independent movements of the outward projecting
wings of the structure. Each of the diaphragm elements must be designed for the most severe condition produced
by movement of the diaphragm wings in the same direction, or in opposite directions.
A.3.6.9 — ELEMENTS LOCATED UNDER THE BASE — The resistance and stiffness of the elements that are part of
the seismic resistance system that are located between the base and the foundation do not
A-48
must be less than those of the superstructure. The elements located between the base and the foundation must have the
same degree of energy dissipation capacity as the elements of the seismic resistance system.
A.3.6.10 — STRUCTURAL WALLS — Structural concrete or masonry walls, exterior and interior, must be tied to the
diaphragms or covers that provide them with lateral support, by means of anchors designed to resist a horizontal force that
acts perpendicular to the plane of the Wall. Said force can be calculated from the force caused by the acceleration on each
floor, calculated with equation A.3.6-3, but not 0.10M g , where Mp is the mass of the wall section considered. As an
more alternative
p to equation A.3.6-3 less than to calculate the horizontal forces perpendicular to the plane of the wall,
precise estimates of the maximum absolute accelerations to which these walls would be subjected can be used.
A.3.6.11 — INVERTED PENDULUM TYPE STRUCTURES — These are structures where the seismic resistance system
acts as one or more isolated cantilevers and a very high percentage of the mass is concentrated in the upper part of the
structure. The supporting columns or pillars of the inverted pendulum type structures must be designed for a bending
moment diagram that starts at the base with a value determined in accordance with the procedures established in Chapter
A.4 and varies uniformly until reaching the middle. of this value at the top. See table A.3-3 for purposes of permitted
structural systems.
A.3.6.12 — DISCONTINUOUS VERTICAL ELEMENTS — In intermediate and high seismic hazard zones, when there are
discontinuities in the alignment of the vertical elements of the seismic resistance system, such as those described in type
4P plan irregularities (table A.3-6) and in height type 4A (table A.3-7), the following requirements must be met: (a) The
factored axial forces of the vertical elements
that support the elements that are suspended must be obtained using the combinations loads from those
given in B.2.4, using a load coefficient equal to 0.4R , but not less than 1.0, in combinations that include
reduced design E seismic forces instead of the 1.0 coefficient.
,
prescribed there,
(b) It must be guaranteed that the elements, such as beams, that carry these axial forces to the vertical
elements that support them are capable of resisting them, (c) The vertical
elements must be designed for the factored axial forces as indicated in the literal (a), accompanied by the
moments obtained from the analysis, which are increased using the normal load combinations
prescribed in B.2.4,
(d) Vertical elements must be designed and detailed following the requirements of the special grade
of energy dissipation capacity (DES) of the corresponding material.
When the design of vertical members supporting the member being suspended is made using the working stress
method prescribed in B.2.3, the design axial forces at the working stress level shall be multiplied by 0.3R, but not
less than 0.7, instead of the 0.7 coefficient prescribed there.
A.3.6.13 — EFFECT OF VERTICAL ACCELERATIONS — In high and intermediate seismic hazard zones, the effects of
vertical seismic movements on the following structural elements must be taken into account:
(a) In cantilevers, considering a vertical force, ascending or descending, at the tip of the element with a value equal
to 30 percent of the dead load of the cantilever in areas of high seismic threat, and 15 percent in areas
intermediate seismic hazard zones, and (b) In elements built with
prestressed concrete, additional load combinations must be used to all those that include dead load, using 50
percent of the dead load.
A.3.7 — DESIGN SEISMIC FORCES OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

A.3.7.1 — SEISMIC RESISTANCE SYSTEM — The elements of the seismic resistance structural system, and their
connections, must be designed using all the forces required by Title B of the Regulations, duly combined as required therein.
The seismic forces obtained from the Fs analysis are reduced, dividing them by the coefficient of energy dissipation capacity,
R , corresponding to the seismic resistance structural system, to obtain the reduced design seismic forces (E FR = ) that are
used in the load combinations prescribed in Title B. The value of the energy dissipation capacitycoefficient to be used in the
yes
design corresponds to the basic energy dissipation coefficient, R0 , multiplied by the energy dissipation capacity reduction
coefficients per irregularities in height, plan, and by
A-49
R=ÿÿÿ
absence of redundancy of the seismic resistance structural system ( R apr 0 ) . The design of the elements
structures and their connections is carried out in compliance with the requirements for the degree of energy dissipation
capacity required of the material. These design forces of the structural elements obtained following the noted procedure
are forces at the resistance level, that is, they correspond to factored forces that have already been multiplied by their load
coefficients. For members that are designed using the working stress method, refer to A.3.1.8.
Brittle connection elements between elements and others that, according to the requirements of the structural materials
that make them up, require the use of the overresistance coefficient ÿ0 , are designed using the design seismic forces E
obtained from equation A.3.3-2.
A.3.7.2 — FOUNDATION — The seismic forces acting on the foundation and supporting soil are obtained
So:
(a) For the purposes of the structural design of the elements that make up the foundation (including the walls and
other elements to which the structure is connected), the procedure indicated in A.3.7.1 is used, using the
appropriate loads and the reduced design seismic forces, E, from the reactions of the structure on these
elements, qualifying the value of R used in the structure to establish the loads to the foundation. In case a
particular evaluation is required, the actions of the structure on the foundation must be determined with one
of the following methods: (1) by inelastic analysis procedures of the structure. (2) Evaluating the performance
of the structure (demand and capacity curves) (3) Calculating the actions that the structure will apply to the
elements that make up the foundation, when the shear load necessary to produce the plasticization mechanism
is applied to the structure .
In the design of the foundation elements, the requirements of the structural material and Title H of this
Regulation must be followed.
(b) In order to obtain the stresses on the foundation soil, from the reactions of the structure and its foundation on
the soil, the load combinations are used for the work stress method of section B.2.3, using appropriate loads
and reduced design seismic forces, E . The effects on the soil thus obtained are defined at the level of work
efforts and must be evaluated in accordance with the requirements of Title H of this Regulation.
A.3.8 — STRUCTURES SEISMICLY ISOLATED AT THEIR BASE
A.3.8.1 — The use of seismically isolated structures at their base is allowed, as long as the requirements in respect of one
of the following two documents are fully met:
(a) “NEHRP Recommended Provisions for Seismic Regulations for New Buildings — Provisions and Commentary”,
2003 Edition, Federal Emergency Management Agency, FEMA 450, Building Seismic Safety Council, National
Institute of Buildings Sciences, Washington, DC, USA, 2004,
(b) “Minimum Design Loads for Building and Other Structures,” ASCE/SEI 7-05, Structural Engineering
Institute of the American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, Virginia, USA, 2006
A.3.8.2 — In the design and construction of seismically isolated structures at their base, the requirements of Articles 10
and 11 of Law 400 of 1997 must be met, with the structural designer and builder assuming the responsibilities indicated
therein. .
A.3.8.3 — The construction of a building that uses seismic isolation systems at its base must be subject to permanent
technical supervision, as described in Title I.
A.3.9 — USE OF ENERGY DISSIPATING ELEMENTS
A.3.9.1 — The use of energy dissipating elements is allowed, as long as the requirements regarding one of the following
two documents are fully met:
(a) “NEHRP Recommended Provisions for Seismic Regulations for New Buildings — Provisions and
Commentary”, 2003 Edition, Federal Emergency Management Agency, FEMA 450, Building Seismic
A-50
Safety Council, National Institute of Building Sciences, Washington, DC, USA, 2004
(b) “Minimum Design Loads for Building and Other Structures,” ASCE/SEI 7-05, Structural Engineering
Institute of the American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, Virginia, USA, 2006
A.3.9.2 — In the design and construction of structures that have energy dissipating elements, the requirements of Articles
10 and 11 of Law 400 of 1997 must be met, the structural designer and the builder assuming the responsibilities that are
established therein. indicate.
A.3.9.3 — The construction of a building that uses energy dissipating elements must be subject to permanent technical
supervision, as described in Title I.
A-51
Table A.3-1
Structural system of load-bearing walls (Note 1)
Worth Worth seismic hazard zones

A. LOADING WALL SYSTEM
R0 ÿ0 high intermediate Low
Seismic resistance system Resistance system for (Note (Note use max use max use Height
(horizontal forces) vertical loads for 2) 4) permit height permit height permit max.
1. Wood shear panels lightweight laminated wood 3.0 2.5 Yeah 6m Yeah 9m Yeah 12m
walls
2. Structural walls
to. Concrete walls with special
energy dissipation capacity the same 5.0 2.5 Yeah 50m Yeah Yeah
Unlimited Unlimited
(DES) b. Concrete walls with
moderate energy dissipation
capacity (DMO) c. Concrete the same 4.0 2.5 not allowed Yeah 50m Yeah
Unlimited
walls with minimum energy
dissipation capacity (DMI) d.
Vertical drilled block the same 2.5 2.5 not allowed not allowed Yeah 50m
(DES) reinforced masonry walls
with all cells filled e. Vertical
Drilled Block (DMO) the same 3.5 2.5 Yeah 50m Yeah Yeah
Reinforced Masonry Walls Unlimited Unlimited
the same 2.5 2.5 Yeah 30m Yeah 50m Yeah
Unlimited
F. Partially reinforced masonry

the same 2.0 2.5 Cluster 12m 18m
walls of vertical drilled block g. Yeah Yeah
Yo
2 floors
confined masonry walls
the same 2.0 2.5 Cluster Cluster 12m Cluster 18m
Yo
2 floors Yo Yo
h. Reinforced Cavity Masonry 4.0 2.5 Yeah 45m Yeah 60m Yeah
Walls Unlimited
the same
i. Unreinforced masonry walls
Group I
(does not have energy dissipation the same 1.0 2.5 not allowed not allowed (Note 3) 2 floors
capacity)
3. Frames with diagonals (diagonals carry vertical force) a. Structural steel
frames with concentric diagonals
(DES) b. Frames with concrete the same 5.0 2.5 Yeah 24m Yeah 30m Yeah
Unlimited
diagonals with moderate energy

dissipation capacity (MOD) the same 3.5 2.5 not allowed Yeah 30m Yeah 30m
c. Wooden porticos with
diagonals
the same 2.0 2.5 Yeah 12m Yeah 15 m Yeah 18m
Grades:
1. The load-bearing wall system is a structural system that does not have an essentially complete frame, in which the vertical loads are resisted by the load-bearing walls and
the horizontal forces are resisted by structural walls or frames with diagonals. ÿ to get ÿ and
2. For buildings classified as irregular, the value of R0 must be multiplied by ÿ to
, p r R. = apr 0 ÿÿÿ
R. (See
A.3.3.3).
3. Unreinforced masonry is only allowed in the regions of low seismic hazard zones where Aa is less than or equal to 0.05
when it comes to buildings of use group I , one and two floors.
4. The value of ÿ0 can be reduced by subtracting 0.5 in structures with a flexible diaphragm, but it must not be less than 2.0 for any structure.
A-52
Table A.3-2
Combined structural system (Note 1)

B. COMBINED SYSTEM
high intermediate low
R0 ÿ0
Seismic resistance system Resistance system for (Note (Note use max use max use height
(horizontal forces) vertical loads 2) 4) allow height allow height allow max.
1. Steel frames with eccentric diagonals
to. Steel frames with Moment-resistant steel frames with
eccentric diagonals if the minimum energy dissipation Without
connections with the columns capacity (DMI) 7.0 2.0 Yeah 45m Yeah 60m Yeah
Limit
outside the link are moment
resistant
b. Steel frames with Moment-resistant steel frames with
eccentric diagonals if the minimum energy dissipation without
connections with the columns capacity (DMI) 6.0 2.0 Yeah 45m Yeah 60m Yeah
Limit
outside the link are not moment
resistant
c. Steel frames with eccentric non-moment resisting
diagonals if the link does not steel frames Without
6.0 2.0 Yeah 30m Yeah 45m Yeah
connect to the column Limit
d. Steel frames with eccentric Moment-resistant steel frames with

diagonals if the link has a minimum energy dissipation Without
moment resistant capacity (DMI) 5.0 2.0 Yeah 30m Yeah 45m Yeah
Limit
connection with the column
2. Structural walls
to. Concrete walls with special concrete frames with special
energy dissipation energy dissipation 7.0 2.5 Yeah 72m Yeah Yeah
Unlimited Unlimited
capacity (DES) b. Concrete walls capacity (DES) concrete frames
with moderate energy with moderate energy
dissipation capacity (DMO) dissipation capacity (DMO) 5.0 2.5 not allowed Yeah 72m Yeah
Unlimited
c. Concrete walls with moderate slab-column frames (Note 3) with
energy dissipation capacity moderate energy dissipation
(DMO) d. Concrete walls capacity (DMO) concrete frames 3.5 2.5 not allowed Yeah 18m Yeah 27m
with minimum energy dissipation with minimum capacity energy
capacity (DMI) e. Concrete dissipation capacity (DMI)
walls with minimum slab-column frames 2.5 2.5 not allowed not allowed Yeah 72m
energy dissipation capacity (Note 3) with minimum energy
(DMI) f. Vertical drilled block dissipation capacity (DMI)
(DES) reinforced 2.0 2.5 not allowed not allowed Yeah 18m
masonry walls with all cells filled
g. Vertical Drilled Block
concrete frames with special
(DMO) Reinforced Masonry 4.5 2.5 30m 45m 45m
energy dissipation Yeah Yeah Yeah
Walls h. Vertical Drilled Block

(DMO) Reinforced Masonry capacity (DES)
Walls i. Confined Masonry concrete frames with special

Walls (MOD — Moderate energy dissipation 3.5 2.5 Yeah 30m Yeah 45m Yeah 45m
Energy Dissipation Capacity) capacity (DES) concrete frames
j. Confined Masonry Walls with moderate energy
(MOD — moderate energy dissipation capacity (MOD) 2.5 2.5 not allowed Yeah 30m Yeah 45m
dissipation capacity) k.
Reinforced cavity masonry
concrete frames with
walls (DES — special energy 2.0 2.5 Cluster 18m Cluster 21m
moderate energy dissipation not allowed
dissipation capacity) l. Yo Yo
capacity (DMO)
Reinforced
cavity masonry walls (DES
— special energy dissipation 2.0 2.5 Cluster 18m
minimum energy not allowed not allowed
capacity) m. Steel Plate Shear Yo
dissipation capacity (DMI)

Walls
(DES)
moderate energy dissipation 4.0 2.5 not allowed Yeah 30m Yeah 45m
capacity (DMO)

minimum energy 2.0 2.5 not allowed not allowed Yeah 45m
steel frames resistant or not to 7.0 2.0 Yeah 50m Yeah Yeah
moments Unlimited Unlimited
A-53
Table A.3-2 (continued)

Combined structural system (Note 1)
Worth Worth intermediate seismic hazard

B. COMBINED SYSTEM
high zones
R0 ÿ0 low
(horizontal forces) n. vertical loads 2) 4) allow height allow height allow max.
Composite shear walls
steel frames resistant or not to 6.5 2.5 50m
with steel plate and concrete moments
Yeah Yeah
Unlimited
Yeah
Unlimited
o. Reinforced
concrete walls (DES)
mixed with steel elements p. moments
Yeah Yeah
Unlimited
Yeah
Unlimited
Reinforced concrete
walls (DMO) mixed with
heavy-duty steel gantries or 5.5 2.5
steel elements q. Reinforced not at times Not allowed Not allowed Yeah
Unlimited
concrete walls (DMI )
mixed with
moments not allowed not allowed Yeah
steel elements
3. Frames with concentric diagonals
to. Steel frames with non-moment resisting 5.0 2.5 Yeah 30m Yeah 45m Yeah 60m
concentric diagonals (DES) steel frames
b. Steel frames with non-moment resisting 4.0 2.5 not allowed Yeah 10m Yeah 60m
concentric diagonals (DMI) steel frames
c. Mixed frames with heavy-duty steel gantries or 5.0 2.0 Yeah 50m Yeah Yeah
concentric diagonals (DES) not at times Unlimited Unlimited
d. Mixed frames with steel frames resistant or not to not allowed not allowed
3.0 2.0 Yeah
concentric diagonals (DMI) moments (note 5) (note 5) Unlimited
and. Steel frames with

buckling-restrained
non-steel gantries 7.0 2.5 30m 45m
concentric diagonals, with resistant to moments
Yeah Yeah Yeah
Unlimited
moment-resisting beam-
column connections
F. Steel frames with
buckling-restrained
non-moment resisting 6.0 2.5 30m 45m
concentric diagonals, with non- steel frames
Yeah Yeah Yeah
Unlimited
moment-resisting beam-column
connections
g. Concrete frames with
concentric diagonals with 3.5 2.5 24m 30m
moderate energy dissipation not allowed Yeah Yeah
moderate energy dissipation

capacity (DMO)
capacity (MOD)
Grades:
1. The combined system is a structural system in which: (a) vertical loads are resisted by an essentially complete, non-moment-resisting frame, and horizontal forces are
resisted by structural walls or frames with diagonals, or (b ) vertical and horizontal loads are resisted by an essentially complete moment-resisting frame combined with
structural walls or frames with diagonals, and which does not meet the requirements of a dual system.
= ÿÿÿ R
2. For buildings classified as irregular, the value of R0 must be multiplied by aÿ , pÿ and rÿ , to obtain R apr 0
(See A.3.3.3).
3. The slab-column frames include the cellular reticular.
5. A height of 20m is allowed in one-story buildings (industrial warehouses or similar) that are not in use group IV.
A-54
Table A.3-3
Moment-resisting frame structural system (Note 1)
C. MOMENT RESISTANT FRAME SYSTEM
high Intermediate low
R0 ÿ0
Seismic resistance system Resistance system for vertical loads use max use max use max
(Note (Note
(horizontal forces) allow height allow height allow height
2) 4)
1. Moment-resistant frames with special energy dissipation capacity (DES) a. Of concrete (DES)
the same 7.0 3.0 Yeah Yeah Yeah
Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited

b. Steel (DES) 7.0
the same (Note 3.0 Yeah Yeah Yeah

3)
c. Mixed Steel or mixed frames resistant no
7.0 3.0 Yeah Yeah Yeah
or not to moments Unlimited Unlimited limit

d. Steel with ductile trusses (DES) Steel frames resistant or not to moments no
6.0 3.0 Yeah 30m Yeah 45m Yeah
limit
2. Moment-resistant frames with moderate energy dissipation capacity (MOD) a. Of concrete (BMD)
the same 5.0 3.0 not allowed Yeah Yeah
Unlimited Unlimited
b. Steel (BMD) 5.0
the same (Note 3.0 not allowed Yeah Yeah
Unlimited Unlimited
3)
c. Mixed with rigid connections (DMO) Steel or mixed frames resistant
5.0 3.0 not allowed Yeah Yeah
or not to moments Unlimited Unlimited
3. Moment-Resisting Frames with Minimum Energy Dissipation Capacity (DMI) a. Concrete (DMI)
the same 2.5 3.0 not allowed not allowed Yeah
Unlimited
b. Steel (DMI) the same 3.0 2.5 not allowed not allowed Yeah
Unlimited
c. Mixed with connections totally
Steel or mixed frames resistant
restricted to moment (DMI) d. 3.0 3.0 not allowed not allowed Yeah
or not to moments Unlimited
Mixed with partially restricted

Steel or mixed frames resistant
connections moment e. Steel with to 6.0 3.0 not allowed Yeah 30m Yeah 50m
or not to moments
non-ductile
trusses f. Steel with cold-bent sheet not allowed (note 5) not allowed (note 5)
the same 1.5 1.5 Yeah 12m
sections
and PTE structural hollow sections that
do not meet the requirements of F.2.2.4
the same 1.5 1.5 not allowed (note 5) not allowed (note 5)
for non-slender sections (note 6) g. Other Yeah
Unlimited
lattice structures such as girders and
trusses
They cannot be used as part of the seismic resistance system, unless they have rigid
connections to columns, in which case they will be treated as truss frames.
4. Slab-column frames (includes cellular reticular) a. Concrete

with moderate energy dissipation
capacity (DMO) b. Concrete with minimum the same 2.5 3.0 not allowed Yeah 15 m Yeah 21m
energy
the same 1.5 3.0 not allowed not allowed Yeah 15 m
5. Inverted pendulum structures a.

Moment-resistant steel frames with 2.5
special energy dissipation (DES) the same (Note 2.0 Yeah Yeah Yeah

capacity b. Concrete frames with 3)
special energy dissipation
capacity (DES) the same 2.5 2.0 Yeah Yeah Yeah
c. Moment-resisting steel frames with 1.5

moderate energy dissipation capacity the same (Note 2.0 not allowed Yeah Yeah
Unlimited Unlimited
(MOD) 3)
Grades:
1. The frame system is a structural system composed of a spatial frame, resistant to moments, essentially
complete, without diagonals, resisting all vertical loads and horizontal forces.
2. For buildings classified as irregular, the value of R0 must be multiplied by aÿ , pÿ and rÿ , to obtain ÿ 0 R
R. =ÿ ÿapr
(See A.3.3.3).
3. In the case of steel structures where the joints of the seismic resistance system are welded on site, the value
of R0 must be multiplied by 0.90.
4. The value of ÿ0 can be reduced by subtracting 0.5 in structures with flexible diaphragm, but it must not be less than 2.0 for
any structure.
5. Up to a height of 12m is allowed in one-story buildings (industrial warehouses or similar) that are not in Use IV group.
6. Folded shell profiles and structural hollow sections that meet the requirements of F.2.2.4 for non-slender members that are designed with
ductile connections qualified in accordance with F.3.1.8 may be designed as moment-resisting frames. conventional.
A-55
Table A.3-4
Dual structural system (Note 1)
Worth ÿ0 seismic hazard zones

D. DUAL SYSTEM
R0 value high intermediate low
2) 3)
(horizontal forces) vertical loads allow height allow height allow max.
1. Structural walls a.
Concrete walls with special concrete frames with special
energy dissipation capacity energy dissipation capacity 8.0 2.5 Yeah Yeah Yeah

(DES) b. Concrete walls with (DES) moment-resistant steel
special energy dissipation frames with special energy
capacity (DES) dissipation capacity (DES) 8.0
2.5 Yeah Yeah Yeah
concrete frames with Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited

moderate energy
c. Concrete walls with dissipation capacity (MOD)
moderate energy dissipation moment-resistant steel 6.0 2.5 not allowed Yeah Yeah
Unlimited Unlimited
capacity (DMO) d. Concrete walls frames with capacity energy
with moderate energy dissipation capacity (DMO) concrete
dissipation capacity (DMO) frames with special energy 6.0 2.5 not allowed Yeah
Unlimited
Yeah
Unlimited
dissipation capacity (DES)
and. Vertical Drilled Block

(DES) Reinforced Masonry 5.5 3.0 Yeah 45m Yeah 45m Yeah 45m
Walls with
all cells filled
F. Vertical drilled block (DES) Moment-resistant steel frames with
reinforced masonry walls special energy dissipation 5.5 3.0 Yeah 45m Yeah 45m Yeah 45m
with all cells filled g. Vertical Drilled (DES) capacity Concrete
Block (DMO) Reinforced frames with
Masonry Walls h. Vertical special energy-dissipation
Drilled Block (DMO) (DES) capacity Moment- 4.5 2.5 Yeah 35m Yeah 35m Yeah 35m
Reinforced Masonry Walls resistant steel frames with special
energy-dissipation (DES) capacity
Steel frames with special 4.5 2.5 Yeah 35m Yeah 35m Yeah 35m
energy dissipation moments
with moderate
Yo. Vertical Drilled Block energy dissipation capacity (MOD)
(DMO) Reinforced Masonry concrete frames with moderate 3.5 2.5 30m 30m
not allowed Yeah Yeah
Walls j. Vertical Drilled energy dissipation capacity

Block (MOD)
(DMO) Reinforced Masonry
Walls 3.5 2.5 30m 30m
Full-core steel frames with rigid

k. Steel Plate Shear Walls (DES) 7.0 2.5
connections (DES) Full-core steel Yeah
Unlimited
Yeah
Unlimited
Yeah
Unlimited
frames
m. Mixed shear walls with steel with rigid connections (DES)
Full-core steel frames with rigid 6.5 2.5 Yeah Yeah Yeah
plate Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited
no. Reinforced concrete connections (DES) Full-core

walls (DES) mixed with steel steel frames with rigid connections 6.0 2.5 Yeah Yeah Yeah

elements or. Reinforced ( OFF)
concrete walls (DMI) p. Portico concrete walls of
mixed with steel with reinforced soul (DMI ) 5.0 2.5 not allowed not allowed Yeah
Unlimited
steel elements mixed
with filled, with rigid connections steel elements (DMO)
4.0 3.0 not allowed not allowed Yeah
Unlimited
2. Steel frames with eccentric diagonals

to. Steel frames with Moment-resistant steel frames with
eccentric diagonals if the special energy dissipation 8.0
connections with the columns capacity (DES) 2.5 Yeah Yeah Yeah

outside the tie are moment
resistant b. Steel frames
with eccentric diagonals if Moment-resistant steel frames with
the connections with the columns special energy dissipation
outside the link are not moment capacity (DES) 7.0 2.5 Yeah Yeah Yeah

resistant
A-56
Table A.3-4 (Continued)

dual structural system
Worth ÿ0 seismic hazard zones

D. DUAL SYSTEM
R0 value high intermediate low
2) 3)
(horizontal forces) vertical loads steel allow height allow height allow max.
c. Steel frames with eccentric frames resistant to moments with
diagonals if the connections with moderate energy dissipation
the columns outside the tie are capacity (DMO) 6.0 2.5 Yeah Yeah Yeah

resistant to moment d. Steel
frames with eccentric
diagonals if the connections Moment-resistant steel frames with
with the columns outside the tie moderate energy dissipation
are not moment resistant capacity (MOD) 5.0 2.5 Yeah Yeah Yeah
3. Frames with concentric diagonals a. Steel

Frames with Special Energy Dissipation Capacity (DES) Moment-Resisting
Steel Frames with Special Energy Dissipation (DES) Moment-Resisting 6.0 2.5 Yeah Yeah Yeah
Steel Frames with Moderate Energy Dissipation (BMD) Concrete Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited
Frames with
b. Steel with minimum energy Moderate Capacity of energy
dissipation capacity (DMI) dissipation (DMO) steel 3.0 2.5 60m
Unlimited
frames with full core with rigid
connections
c. Concrete with moderate energy (DES) steel frames with full
dissipation capacity (DMO) d. core with rigid connections 4.0 2.5 not allowed Yeah 24m Yeah 30m
Mixed frames (DES) steel frames with full core
with concentric diagonals with rigid connections (DMO)
(DES) steel frames with full core with 6.0 2.5 Yeah Yeah Yeah

rigid
and. Steel frames with connections (DMO)
concentric diagonals 7.0 2.5 Yeah Yeah Yeah

restricted to buckling f.
Steel frames with concentric
diagonals (DES) 6.0 2.5 not allowed Yeah 10m Yeah
Unlimited
g. Mixed frames with

concentric diagonals (DES) 5.5 2.5 Yeah 50m Yeah 30m Yeah
Unlimited
h. Frames with concentric

diagonals that resist tension only the same 3.0 2.5 not allowed (note 4)
Grades:
1. The dual system is a structural system that has a moment-resisting space frame without diagonals, combined with structural walls or frames with diagonals. For the
structural system to be classified as a dual system, the following requirements must be met: (a) The essentially complete, diagonal-free, moment-resistant space frame
must be capable of supporting vertical loads. (b) The horizontal forces are resisted by the combination of structural walls or frames with diagonals, with the moment-
resisting frame, which can be a frame of special energy dissipation capacity (DES), when it is reinforced concrete or structural steel, a moderate energy dissipating
reinforced concrete frame, or a minimal energy dissipating structural steel frame. The moment-resisting frame, acting independently, shall be designed to be capable
of resisting at least 25 percent of the seismic shear at the base. (c) The two systems must be designed in such a way that together they are capable of resisting the
entire seismic shear at the base, in proportion to their relative stiffnesses, considering the interaction of the dual system at all levels of the building, but in In no case
may the responsibility of structural walls or diagonal frames be less than 75 percent of the seismic shear at the base.
2. For buildings classified as irregular, the value of R0 must be multiplied by aÿ , pÿ and rÿ , to obtain R ÿ 0 R
=ÿ ÿapr (See
A.3.3.3).
4. Up to a height of 12m is allowed in one-story buildings (industrial warehouses or similar) that are not in use group IV.
A-57
Table A.3-5
Mix of structural systems at height
Description of the combination Requirements

Flexible structure supported on a more rigid structure
The requirements given here can be used if the This combination of structural systems is allowed
structure meets the following conditions:
p = to 1.0) , and the system
not be considered irregular ( ÿ =ÿ
(a) Both parts of the structure, considered separately, can be seismically designed using the equivalent horizontal
can be classified as regular in accordance with the force method, as prescribed in Chapter A.4, as follows:
requirements of A.3.3,
(b) The average of the bottom story stiffnesses is at (1) The flexible upper part can be analyzed and designed as
least 10 times the average of the top story stiffnesses, a separate structure, supported for horizontal forces by the
and more rigid lower part, using the appropriate value of R0 for its
structural system.
(c) The period of the structure, considered as a
whole, is not greater than 1.1 times the period of the
upper part, when considered as an independent
structure embedded in the base. (2) The lower rigid part must be analyzed and designed as a
separate structure, using the appropriate value of R0 for its
If the above conditions are not met the structure is structural system, and the reactions of the upper part, obtained
considered irregular and the requirements of A.3.3 from its analysis, must be amplified by the ratio between the
must be followed. value of R0 for the top and the value of R0 for the bottom.
Rigid structure supported on a structure with less rigidity

Corresponds to buildings in which a more rigid (1) It is not acceptable as a structural solution for this
structural system is suspended before reaching the Regulation.
base of the structure, partially or totally, than the one
that reaches the base of the structure.
This type of combination of structural systems at

height presents drawbacks in its seismic behavior. It
is not acceptable as a structural solution to this
Regulation.
A-58
Table A.3-6
Irregularities in plan
Guy Description of the irregularity in plan pÿ References
1aP Torsional Irregularity — Torsional irregularity exists when in a rigid diaphragm building, 0.9 A.3.3.6,
the maximum story drift from one end of the structure, calculated including accidental A.3.4.2,
torsion and measured perpendicular to a given axis, is more than 1.2 and less than A.3.6.3.1,
or equal to 1.4 times the average drift of the two ends of the structure, with respect to A.3.6.7.1,
the same reference axis. 1bP Extreme torsional irregularity — Extreme torsional A.3.6.8.4,
irregularity exists when in a rigid A.5.2.1.
diaphragm building, the maximum story drift at one end of the structure, calculated including 0.8 A.3.3.6,
accidental torsion and measured perpendicular to a given axis, is more than 1.4 times A.3.4.2,
the drift average of the two ends of the structure, with respect to the same reference A.3.6.3.1,
axis. A.3.6.7.1,
A.3.6.8.4,
A.5.2.1.
2P Excessive Setbacks at Corners — The configuration of a structure is considered 0.9 A.3.4.2,
irregular when it has excessive setbacks at its corners. A corner setback is considered A.3.6.8.4,
excessive when the projections of the structure on either side of the setback are A.3.6.8.5,
greater than 15 percent of the plan dimension of the structure in the direction of the A.5.2.1,
setback.
3P Discontinuities in the diaphragm — When the diaphragm has appreciable discontinuities 0.9 A.3.3.7,
or variations in its stiffness, including those caused by openings, entries, setbacks, or A.3.4.2,
voids with areas greater than 50 percent of the gross area of the diaphragm or there A.3.6.8.4,
are changes in the effective stiffness of the diaphragm of more than 50 percent, A.5.2.1.
between consecutive levels, the structure is considered irregular.
4P Displacements of the plane of action of vertical elements — The structure is 0.8 A.3.3.7,
considered irregular when there are discontinuities in the trajectories of the forces A.3.4.2,
induced by seismic effects, such as when the plane containing a group of vertical A.3.6.8.4,
elements of the seismic resistance system is translated. , in a direction perpendicular A.3.6.12,
to it, generating a new plane. Mezzanines or manzardas with a single story are A.5.2.1.
exempted from this requirement in the consideration of irregularity.
5P Non-parallel systems — When the directions of horizontal action of the vertical elements 0.9 A.3.4.2,
of the seismic resistance system are not parallel or symmetric with respect to the A.3.6.3.1,
main horizontal orthogonal axes of the seismic resistance system, the structure is A.5.2.1.
considered irregular.
Grades:
1. In zones of intermediate seismic threat for buildings belonging to use group I, the evaluation of irregularity
it may be limited to irregularities of types 1aP, 1bP, 3P and 4P (See A.3.3.7).
2. In areas of low seismic threat for buildings belonging to use groups I and II, the evaluation of
irregularity can be limited to type 1aP and 1bP irregularities (See A.3.3.6).
A-59
Table A.3-7
Irregularities in height
Guy Description of the irregularity in height aÿ References
1aA Flexible Story (Irregularity in Stiffness) — When the stiffness to horizontal forces of 0.9 A.3.3.5.1,
a story is less than 70 percent but greater than or equal to 60 percent of the stiffness A.3.4.2,
of the story above or less than 80 percent but greater than or equal to 70 percent of
the average stiffness of the top three stories, the structure is considered irregular.
1bA Flexible Story (Extreme Irregularity in
Stiffness) — When the stiffness to horizontal forces of a story is less than 60 percent of the 0.8 A.3.3.5.1,
stiffness of the top story or less than 70 percent of the average stiffness of the top A.3.4.2,
three stories, the structure is considered irregular.
2A Irregularity in the distribution of masses — When the mass, mi, of any story is greater 0.9 A.3.3.5.1,
than 1.5 times the mass of one of the adjacent stories, the structure is considered A.3.4.2.
irregular. The case of roofs that are lighter than the floor below is excepted.
3A Geometric Irregularity — When the horizontal dimension of the seismic resisting system 0.9 A.3.4.2.
on any story is greater than 1.3 times the same dimension on an adjacent story, the
structure is considered irregular. The case of single-story mezzanines is excepted.
4A Displacements within the plane of action — The structure is considered irregular 0.8 A.3.3.7,
when there are displacements in the alignment of the vertical elements of the seismic A.3.4.2,
resistance system, within the same plane that contains them, and these displacements A.3.6.12.
are greater than the horizontal dimension of the element. When the displaced
elements only support the roof of the building without other additional loads of tanks
or equipment, they are exempt from this consideration of irregularity.
5aA Weak floor — Discontinuity in resistance — When the resistance of the floor is less 0.9 A.3.2.4.1,
than 80 percent of that of the floor immediately above but greater than or equal to 65 A.3.3.6,
percent, understanding the resistance of the floor as the sum of the resistances of all A.3.3.7,
the elements that share the shear of the floor for the considered direction, the A.3.4.2.
structure is considered irregular.
5bA Weak story — Extreme discontinuity in resistance — When the resistance of the 0.8 A.3.2.4.1,
story is less than 65 percent of that of the story immediately above, understanding A.3.3.6,
the resistance of the story as the sum of the resistances of all the elements that A.3.3.7,
share the shear of the story for the considered direction, the structure is considered A.3.4.2.
irregular.
Grades:
1. When the drift of any story is less than 1.3 times the drift of the next story up, it can be considered that
there are no irregularities of types 1aA, 1bA, 2A, or 3A (See A.3.3.5.1).
2. In zones of intermediate seismic threat for buildings belonging to use group I, the irregularity evaluation can be limited to irregularities of types 4A,
5aA and 5bA (See A.3.3.7).
3. In zones of low seismic threat for buildings belonging to groups of uses I and II, the irregularity evaluation can be limited to the irregularity type 5aA
and 5bA (See A.3.3.6).
A-60
Type 1aP — Torsional irregularity Type 1bP — Extreme torsional irregularity

pÿ = 0.9 pÿ = 0.8
ÿÿ 12
ÿÿ ÿ +ÿ ÿ +ÿ 12 ÿÿ2
+ÿ1 ÿ
1.4 ÿÿ ÿÿ 1 1.2 ÿ 1> 1.4

2 ÿÿ > ÿÿ ÿÿ 2 ÿÿ
2 ÿÿ
ÿ
1
ÿ 2
Type 2P — Corner setbacks — pÿ = 0.9

A > 0.15B and C > 0.15D
B. TO C.
D.
Type 3P — Irregularity of the diaphragm — pÿ = 0.9

AB ×> × 0 5. 2) (CDCE AB ×+×) 0 1) CD×
> 5.
TO TO
B. B. D.
D. C. C.
AND
Type 4P — Displacement of Action Planes — pÿ = 0.8
low direction
study
Displacement
of the plane of action
Type 5P — Non-parallel systems — pÿ = 0.9
non-parallel systems
PLANT
Figure A.3-1 — Irregularities in plan
A-61
Type 1aA — Resilient

F
floor aÿ = 0.9
0.60 KD Stiffness ÿ KC Stiffness < 0.70 KD Stiffness AND
either
D.
0.70 (KD+KE+KF) /3 ÿ Stiffness KC < 0.80 (KD+KE+KF) /3 Type 1bA —
Extreme flexible floor aÿ = 0.8 C.
B.
KC Stiffness < 0.60 KD Stiffness
TO
either
KC stiffness < 0.70 (KD+KE+KF) /3
Type 2A — Mass distribution — aÿ = 0.9 AND
D.
C.
mD > 1.50 mE
either
B.
mD > 1.50 mC
TO
F
Type 3A — Geometric — aÿ = 0.9
AND
D.
a > 1.30b
C.
B.
TO
to
Type 4A — Displacement within the AND
action plane — aÿ = 0.8 b

D.
to
b>a C.
B.
TO
Type 5aA — Weak floor

F
aÿ = 0.9
AND
0.65 Resistance Floor C ÿ Resist. Floor B < 0.80 Resist. floor C D.
C.
Type 5bA — Extreme weak floor
aÿ = 0.8 B.
TO
Resistance Floor B < 0.65 Resistance Floor C
Figure A.3-2 — Height irregularities
A-62
NSR-10 — Chapter A.4 — Equivalent Horizontal Force Method
CHAPTER
A.4 EQUIVALENT HORIZONTAL FORCE METHOD
AB = area of the building at its base, in m2 .

Awi = minimum shear area of the section of a structural wall i, measured in a horizontal plane, at the first level of the
structure and in the direction under study, in m². See A.4.2.
Av = acceleration coefficient that represents the effective peak horizontal velocity, for design, given in A.2.2.
Ct = coefficient used to calculate the period of the structure, defined in A.4.2.2.
Cu = coefficient used to calculate the maximum allowable period of the structure, defined in A.4.2.1.
Cvx = coefficient defined in A.4.3.
wi = horizontally measured length, in meters, of a structural wall i at the first level of the structure y
in the direction under study. See A.4.2.
Fi , Fx = horizontal seismic forces at levels i or x respectively. See A.4.3.
fv = coefficient of amplification that affects the acceleration in the zone of intermediate periods, due to the
site effects, dimensionless.
if = horizontal seismic force at level i to be used in equation A.4.2-1. = acceleration
g due to gravity (9.8 m/s²).
hi , hx = height in meters, measured from the base, of level i or x . See A.4.3.2.
hn = height in meters, measured from the base, of the highest floor of the building. See
hp A.4.2.2. = floor height measured from floor diaphragm surface to floor diaphragm surface
immediately below.
hwi = height of wall i measured from the base, in m. =
Yo coefficient of importance given in A.2.5.2. =
what
exponent related to the fundamental period of the building given in A.4.3.2.
M = total mass of the building — M must be equal to the total mass of the structure plus the mass of those elements such
as dividing walls and partitions, permanent equipment, tanks and their contents, etc.
In warehouses or warehouses, 25 percent of the mass corresponding to the elements that cause the live load
of the floor must also be included. Chapters A.4 and A.5 (in kg).
number = part of M that is located on level i or x respectively mi , mx N =
of floors of the building. = number of building
nw walls effective to resist horizontal seismic forces in the direction
under study.
sa = value of the spectrum of design accelerations for a given period of vibration. Maximum design horizontal
acceleration, expressed as a fraction of the acceleration due to gravity, for a one degree of freedom system
with a period of vibration T . It is defined in A.2.6.
you
= fundamental period of the building as determined in A.4.2. =
Ta approximate fundamental period of vibration. See A.4.2. =
vs. seismic shear at the base, for seismic forces. See A.4.3. = exponent to
ÿ be used in calculating the approximate period Ta . See A.4.2.2. = horizontal displacement
ÿi
_ of level i with respect to the base of the structure, due to the forces
horizontal if , to be used in equation A.4.2-1.
A.4.1—OVERALL
A.4.1.1 — The requirements of this Chapter control the obtaining of the horizontal seismic forces of the building and the
seismic analysis of the same, in accordance with the requirements given in Chapter A.3 for the use of the force method.
equivalent horizontal.
A-63
A.4.2 — FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD OF THE BUILDING

A.4.2.1 — The value of the fundamental period of the building, T must, be obtained from the properties of its seismic
resistance system, in the direction under consideration, according to the principles of structural dynamics, using a
mathematical model linearly elastic structure. This requirement can be met by using the following equation:
no
2
ÿÿ ( m ii )
i =1
T2= ÿ (A.4.2-1)
no
( ÿ ÿFii
)
i =1
The values of if represent horizontal forces distributed approximately according to Equations A.4.3-2 and A.4.3-3, or using
any other rational distribution that approximates that of the fundamental ÿ mode of the structure in the direction under study. .
The horizontal deflections, i must be calculated using the horizontal forces if . ,
The value of T cannot exceed C Tu a , where Cu is calculated by means of equation A.4.2-2 and Ta is calculated according
to A.4.2-3.
= 1.2AF
C or1.75 ÿ
vv (A.4.2-2)
but Cu must not be less than 1.2.
A.4.2.2 — Alternatively the value of T may be equal to the approximate fundamental period, Ta , which is obtained by means
of equation A.4.2-3.
ÿ
Ch=t
T to (A.4.2-3)
where Ct and ÿ have the values given in Table A.4.2-1.
Table A.4.2-1
Value of the parameters Ct and ÿ for the calculation of the approximate period Ta
Seismic resistance structural system

ct ÿ
Reinforced concrete moment frames that resist full seismic forces and are not
constrained or attached to more rigid structural or non-structural components that limit
horizontal displacement when subjected to seismic forces. 0.047 0.9
Structural steel moment-resisting frames that resist full seismic forces and are not
constrained or attached to more rigid structural or non-structural components that limit
horizontal displacement when subjected to seismic forces. 0.072 0.8
Structural steel braced frames with buckling-restrained eccentric diagonals. 0.073 0.75
All other structural systems based on walls of similar or greater stiffness than concrete 0.049 0.75
or masonry walls Alternatively, for structures having reinforced concrete
structural walls or structural masonry, the following parameters Ct and ÿ may be used
where Cw is calculated using 0.0062
1.00
,
cw _
equation A.4.2-4.
A-64
ÿ
2
ÿÿ nw _ ÿ h ÿ TO
= no wi
C.
w 100 ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
2
(A.4.2-4)
TO
B. i =1 hwi _ ÿÿ ÿ ÿh wi
+ÿÿÿ ÿ ÿ 1 0.83
ÿ wi
Alternatively, for buildings of 12 stories or less with story heights, hp , not greater than 3 m whose seismic-resistant structural
system is composed of moment-resisting frames of reinforced concrete or structural steel, the approximate period of vibration,
Ta , in s, can be determined by means of equation A.4.2-5.
=
T0.1N
to
(A.4.2-5)
A.4.2.3 — The value of T obtained by using equations A.4.2-1, A.4.2-3 or A.4.2-5 is a reasonable initial estimate of the
structural period to predict the forces to be applied to the structure with in order to size your seismic resistance system.
However, once the structure has been dimensioned, the adjusted value of T must be calculated by applying modal analysis
or equation A.4.2-1 to compare it with the initial estimate; If the period of the designed structure differs by more than 10%
from the initially estimated period, the analysis process must be repeated, using the last period calculated as the new estimate,
until it converges on a result within the 10% tolerance indicated. .
A.4.3 — EQUIVALENT HORIZONTAL SEISMIC FORCES

A.4.3.1 — The seismic shear at the base, Vs , equivalent to the totality of the horizontal inertial effects produced by the design
seismic movements, in the direction under study, is obtained by means of the following equation:
=
V SgMto
yes
(A.4.3-1)
The value of Sa in the previous equation corresponds to the value of the acceleration, as a fraction of that of gravity, read in
the spectrum defined in A.2.6 for the period T of the building.
A.4.3.2 — The horizontal seismic force, Fx , at any level x , for the direction under study, shall be determined using the
following equation:
=
F xCV vx s (A.4.3-2)
and
k
mhxx
C.vx = (A.4.3-3)
no
ÿ (mhii what
)
i =1
where k is an exponent related to the fundamental period, T , of the building as follows:
(a) For T less than or equal to 0.5 seconds, k 1.0 = ,

(b) For T between 0.5 and 2.5 seconds, k 0.75
= 0.5T
+ , and
(c) For T greater than 2.5 seconds, k 2.0 = .
A.4.4 — STRUCTURE ANALYSIS

A.4.4.1 — The effect of the seismic forces, obtained in accordance with the requirements of A.4.3, corresponding to each
level, must be evaluated by means of an analysis carried out using a linearly elastic mathematical model of the structure,
which adequately represents the characteristics of the structural system. The analysis, carried out in accordance with the
principles of structural mechanics, must take into account, as a minimum:
A-65
(a) The support conditions of the structure, especially when vertical elements of
seismic resistance with appreciable differences in their stiffness,
(b) The diaphragm effect, rigid or flexible, of the building floors, in the distribution of the seismic shear from the floor
to the vertical elements of the structural system of seismic resistance, (c) The variations in
the axial forces of the elements verticals of the seismic resistance system
caused by overturning moments induced by seismic forces,
(d) The torsional effects prescribed in A.3.6.7, (e)
The effects of the direction of application of the seismic force prescribed in A.3.6.3, (f) In
reinforced concrete structures and structural masonry, in judgment from the design engineer, considerations about
the degree of cracking of the elements, compatible with the seismic forces and the degree of energy dissipation
capacity prescribed for the structural material, and (g) The requirements of A.3.4.3 should
be consulted.
A.4.4.2 — As results of the analysis, the following must be obtained, as a minimum:
(a) The horizontal displacements of the structure, including torsional effects, which are used to assess whether the
drifts of the structure meet the requirements given in Clause A.6, (b) The story shear distribution,
including the effects torsional, to all vertical elements
of the seismic resistance system,
(c) The effects of seismic forces on the foundation of the building, and (d) Internal
forces (bending moments, shear forces, axial forces and torsion moments)
corresponding to each element that is part of the seismic resistance system.
A.4.5 — USE OF THE INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM OF MEASUREMENTS (SI) IN THE CALCULATION

OF SEISMIC FORCES IN ACCORDANCE WITH THIS CHAPTER
In the International System of Measurements (SI) the kg (kilogram) is a unit of mass, therefore the mass of the structure
must be expressed in kg. Applying Newton's 2nd Law which says that the inertial force is equal to the mass of the body
multiplied by its acceleration; if the mass is subjected to an acceleration in m/s2 , you get a force
whose units are (kg · m/s2 ). By definition, in the SI system the unit of force is a newton (N) and corresponds to the inertial
force of a 1 kg mass subjected to an acceleration of 1 m/s2 (1 N = 1 kg 1 m/ s2 ) . So, if the mass is expressed in kg and the
accelerations in m/s2 , you get inertial forces in newtons.
Equation A.4.3-1 is an application of Newton's 2nd Law and is used to determine the horizontal inertial forces that produce
ground motions caused by the design earthquake. The value of the maximum horizontal acceleration of the ground where
the structure rests is read from the spectrum of accelerations, Sa , defined in Chapter A.2 for the fundamental period of
vibration of the structure T . The Sa spectrum is dimensionless, and corresponds to the horizontal acceleration imposed by
the earthquake at the base of the structure, expressed as a fraction of gravity, therefore to obtain the acceleration in m/s2
, must be multiplied by the
m/s2 ). in
acceleration due to gravity, g ( g 9.8 = expressed Using Equation
kg, then A.4.3-1,
the totality if the
of the total mass
horizontal of theforces
inertial building,
thatM
act on the ,
structure when it is subjected to the design earthquake, Vs , is obtained in newtons as follows:
VS sa
g
=ÿ
(m/s²) ÿ
MS gM (kg) (kgtom/s²)
= ÿÿ ÿ
= ÿÿ
SgM
to
(N)
But in practical building design both kg and N are very small units; for this reason it is convenient to express the mass in Mg
(Megagrams, 1 Mg = 1000 kg = 106 g). In this case the application of equation A.4.3-1 leads to a force, Vs , in kN
(kilonewtons):
VS sa
=ÿ
g M ) S gM (m/s²) (Mg
ÿ
= ÿÿ
to
(mg m/s²)
ÿ
= ÿÿ
SgM
to
(1000 kgm/s²)
ÿ ÿ
= ÿÿ
SgM
to
(1000N)
ÿ = ÿÿ
SgM
to
(kN)
For reference, in the old mks system (m-kgf-s, meter-kilogram force-second) 1 kgf = 9.8 N ÿ 10 N, and analogously 1000 kgf
= 1 ton = 9806.65 N ÿ 10000 N = 10kN. So a kN is about a tenth of a ton.
A-66
NSR-10 — Chapter A.5 — Dynamic Analysis Method
CHAPTER
A.5 DYNAMIC ANALYSIS METHOD
AND
= reduced design seismic forces (E FR = ) yes
fs = seismic forces, see A.3.1.1. =

acceleration due to gravity (9.8 m/s²).
g M = total mass of the building — M must be equal to the total mass of the structure plus the mass of those elements such
as dividing walls and partitions, permanent equipment, tanks and their contents, etc.
In warehouses or warehouses, 25 percent of the mass corresponding to the elements that cause the live load of
the floor must also be included. Chapters A.4 and A.5 (in kg).
Mj = total acting mass of the building in the j direction. Equation A.5.4-1.
Mm = modal effective mass of the mode m = , determined according to equation A.5.4-2.
number part of M that is placed at level i or x , respectively. mi , mx = total
p of modes used in the modal analysis of the structure.
degree of energy dissipation capacity of the structural material. Chapter A.3.
coefficient, R0 , multiplied by the energy dissipation capacity reduction coefficients due to irregularities in height,
in plan, and by absence of redundancy

ÿ ÿ0ÿ ) .
Sam = value of the design acceleration spectrum for the vibration period Tm , corresponding to the mode
of vibration m .
= approximate fundamental period of vibration, in seconds, calculated according to A.4.2.
Ta Tm = vibration period corresponding to the vibration mode m Vmj = , in s.
seismic shear at the base corresponding to the mode m in the horizontal direction j.
vs. = design seismic shear at the base of the structure, calculated by the horizontal force method
equivalent of Chapter A.4. =
vtj seismic shear at the total base in the horizontal direction j.
m
= displacement amplitude of level i , in the j direction, when it is vibrating in the m mode .
ÿij _
A.5.1—OVERALL
A.5.1.1 — The dynamic analysis methods must meet the requirements of this Chapter and the rest of this Title of the
Regulation.
A.5.1.2 — Dynamic analysis methods can be used in the seismic design of all buildings covered by this Regulation and must
be used in the design of the buildings indicated in A.3.4.2.2.
A.5.1.3 — The results obtained using the dynamic analysis methods must conform to the minimum values prescribed in this
Chapter for each of them. The minimum values to which they must be adjusted refer to the values obtained using the
equivalent horizontal force method presented in Chapter A.4. (See A.5.4.5).
A.5.1.4 — All dynamic analysis methodologies used must be based on established principles of structural mechanics, which
are adequately supported analytically or experimentally.
A.5.1.5 — The design engineer must ensure that the dynamic analysis procedures, manual or
A-67
electronics, which you use, comply with the principles of structural mechanics and in particular the requirements of this
Chapter. The Regulations do not require a specific procedure and leave their selection in the hands of the designer and
therefore the responsibility for compliance with the principles set forth herein. It is the designer's responsibility to ensure
that electronic procedures, if used, adequately describe the dynamic response of the structure as prescribed by the
requirements of this Chapter.
A.5.2 — MATHEMATICAL MODEL

A.5.2.1 — MATHEMATICAL MODEL TO BE USED — The mathematical model of the structure must describe the spatial
distribution of the mass and stiffness of the entire structure, in such a way that it is suitable for calculating the relevant
characteristics of the dynamic response of the structure. same. At least one of the following procedures must be used:
A.5.2.1.1 — Three-dimensional model with rigid diaphragm — In this type of model the floors are considered
infinitely rigid diaphragms in their own plane. The mass of each diaphragm is considered to be concentrated at its
center of mass. Directional effects can be accounted for through the appropriate components of the displacements
of the orthogonal horizontal degrees of freedom of the diaphragm. This procedure must be used when there are
irregularities in plan of type 1aP, 1bP, 4P or 5P, as defined in A.3.3.4 (table A.3-6), and in those cases in which,
in the opinion of the engineer designer, this is the most appropriate procedure.
A.5.2.1.2 — Three-dimensional model with flexible diaphragm — In this type of model, it is considered that
the masses afferent to each node of the structure can move and rotate in any horizontal or vertical direction. The
stiffness of the structural elements of the seismic resistance system is described three-dimensionally. The
diaphragm is represented by elements that adequately describe its flexibility. This procedure should be used
when there is no actual diaphragm, when the diaphragm is flexible compared to the vertical structural elements
of the seismic-resistant structural system, or when there are 2P or 3P irregularities in plan, as defined by A. 3.3.4
(table A.3-6), and in those cases in which, in the judgment of the designer engineer, this is the most appropriate
procedure.
A.5.2.1.3 — Models limited to a vertical plane — In this type of model the response of the structure is limited
to horizontal movements in a single direction. This model is allowed in all cases that are not covered by A.5.2.1.1.
and A.5.2.1.2. The torsional effects of floors must be evaluated independently and added to the values obtained
from the analysis in one plane when the diaphragm is rigid and can be neglected when the diaphragm is flexible.
In the same way, the effects produced by the direction of incidence of the seismic movements of the ground must
be evaluated separately and added to the values obtained from the dynamic analysis.
A.5.2.1.4 — Other models — If, in the opinion of the design engineer, the stiffness or mass characteristics of the
structure require it, the use of dynamic inelastic analysis models or alternative methods is permitted, as indicated
in A.3.4. .1.
A.5.2.2 — BUILDING MASS — The building masses used in the dynamic analysis shall be representative of the masses
that will exist in the building when it is subjected to design seismic movements. For purposes of the requirements of this
Regulation, the total mass of the building can be taken as . The distribution of the mass of the building must represent the
real distribution of the different masses of the as M building.
A.5.2.3 — STIFFNESS IN DYNAMIC ELASTIC METHODS — The stiffness used in the structural elements of the seismic
resistance system when dynamic elastic methods are used must be carefully selected and must be representative of the
stiffness when they are subjected to stress. design seismic motions. In concrete and masonry structures, the stiffness
assigned must be consistent with the degree of cracking that the different elements may have when subjected to
deformations imposed by design seismic movements. When there are appreciable variations in the stiffness of the
different vertical elements of the seismic resistance system that contribute to the resistance of the same movement
components, the stiffness assigned to each of them must be consistent with the deformation levels.
A-68
A.5.2.4 — STIFFNESS IN INELASTIC DYNAMIC METHODS — The mathematical models used to describe the stiffness of
the structural elements of the seismic resistance system, when inelastic dynamic methods are used, must be consistent with
the degree of energy dissipation capacity. of the material, with the expected levels of strain and with the sequences of
stresses and strains that occur during the response, through hysteretic models that describe the degradation of stiffness
and strength, the throttling effects of hysteretic shapes, and the effects strain hardening of steel. The stiffness models used
must be adequately supported analytically or experimentally.
A.5.3 — REPRESENTATION OF SEISMIC MOVEMENTS

A.5.3.1 — GENERAL — According to the representation of the design seismic movements used in the dynamic analysis,
the procedures are divided into:
(a) Spectral procedures, and (b)

Chronological analysis procedures.
A.5.3.2 — SPECTRAL PROCEDURES — Spectral procedures shall use the design spectrum defined in A.2.6.
A.5.3.3 — CHRONOLOGICAL PROCEDURES — Families of accelerograms, as defined by A.2.7, shall be used in

chronological procedures.
A.5.4 — SPECTRAL ELASTIC DYNAMIC ANALYSIS

A.5.4.1 — ANALYSIS METHODOLOGY — The following requirements must be taken into account when using the spectral
elastic dynamic analysis method:
(a) Derivation of vibration modes — Vibration modes should be obtained using established methodologies of
structural dynamics. All modes of vibration of the structure that contribute significantly to the dynamic response
of the structure shall be used, meeting the requirements of A.5.4.2. (b) Modal spectral response — The
maximum response of
each mode is obtained using the ordinates of the design spectrum defined in A.5.3.2, for the vibration period proper
to the mode. (c) Total response —The maximum modal responses, including those of
deflections, drifts, story forces, story shear, base shear, and member forces, are combined statistically to obtain the
total response of the structure to design seismic motions. The requirements of A.5.4.4 must be met in the
statistical combination of the maximum modal responses. (d) Adjustment of results —If the total response
results are less than the minimum values prescribed in A.5.4.5, the total results of the dynamic analysis
shall be adjusted as indicated therein.
The adjustment should cover all the results of the dynamic analysis, including deflections, drifts, story forces,
story shear, base shear, and member forces.
(e) Evaluation of drifts — It shall be verified that the total drifts obtained, duly adjusted according to the
requirements of A.5.4.5, do not exceed the limits established in Chapter A.6. (f) Design forces in
members —The total internal seismic forces in members, Fs, properly adjusted in accordance with the requirements
of A.5.4.5, are divided by the value of the coefficient of energy dissipation capacity, R of the seismic resistance
, and the absence of redundancy according to the requirements of
system, modified according to the irregularity
A.3.3.3, to obtain the reduced design seismic forces, E , and are combined with the other loads prescribed by
this Regulation, in accordance with Title B. (g) Design of structural elements — The structural elements are
designed and detailed
following the requirements of the degree of corresponding energy dissipation capacity of the material, in accordance
with the requirements of Chapter A.3.
A.5.4.2 — NUMBER OF VIBRATION MODES — All vibration modes that contribute significantly to the dynamic response
of the structure shall be included in the dynamic analysis. This requirement is considered to have been met when it is shown
that, with the number of modes used, p , at least 90 percent of each of the horizontal directions of analysis, j, has been
included in the calculation of the response. cent of the
A-69
participating mass of the structure. The participating mass, Mj , in each of the analysis directions, j, for the number of modes
used, p , is determined by means of the following equations:
p
0.90M= ÿ ÿ MM (A.5.4-1)
j mj
m =1
2
no
ÿ
mÿ
ÿÿ m Yo
ij
i =1
mmj = ÿÿ
no
ÿÿ
2
(A.5.4-2)
m
ÿÿ m Yo
( ij
)
i =1
A.5.4.3 — CALCULATION OF THE MODAL SHEAR AT THE BASE — The part of the shear at the base contributed by
the mode m in the horizontal direction j, Vmj, must be determined according to the following equation:
Vmj = Sam g Mmj (A.5.4-3)
where Mmj is given by equation A.5.4-2, and Sam is the value read from the elastic spectrum of accelerations, Sa , for the
in
vibration period Tm corresponding to the vibration mode m . The total modal shear at the base, Vtj , in the j direction is
obtained by combining the shears contributed by each mode, Vmj, in the same direction according to the procedure of
A.5.4.4.
A.5.4.4 — COMBINATION OF MODES — The maximum responses obtained for each mode, m from deflections, drifts, ,
story forces, story shear, base shear, and member forces, shall be combined using appropriate methods. and duly supported,
such as the square root of the sum of the squares or others. Special care must be taken when calculating drift combinations,
calculating the maximum drift response caused by each mode independently and combining them afterwards. It is not
permitted to obtain total drifts from horizontal deflections that have already been combined. When using three-dimensional
analysis mathematical models, modal interaction effects, such as total quadratic combination, must be taken into account.
A.5.4.5 — FITTING THE RESULTS — The value of the total dynamic shear at the base, Vtj , obtained after performing the
modal combination, for any of the directions of analysis, j, cannot be less than 80 percent. for regular structures, or 90
percent for irregular structures, of the seismic shear at the base, calculated by the equivalent horizontal force method of
Chapter A.4. In addition, the Vs must be met , following conditions:
(a) For the purpose of calculating this value of Vs the fundamental period of the structure obtained in the dynamic
analysis, T in seconds must not exceed C Tu a , in accordance with the requirements of Chapter A.4, and
when using the procedures of soil-structure interaction, it is allowed to use the value of Vs
reduced for this reason.
(b) When the value of the total dynamic shear at the base, Vtj , obtained after performing the modal combination,
for any of the directions of analysis, j, is less than 80 percent for regular structures, or less than 90 percent.
percent for irregular structures, of seismic base shear, Vs , calculated as indicated in (a), all dynamic response
parameters, such as deflections, drifts, story forces, story shear, base shear and forces in the elements of the
corresponding direction j must be multiplied by the following modification factor:
V yes
0.80 for regular structures (A.5.4-4)

V
tj
A-70
V
(A.5.4-5)
yes
0.90 for irregular structures

V
tj
(c) When the seismic shear at the base, Vtj , obtained after performing the modal combination, for any of the
principal directions, exceeds the values prescribed in (a), all the parameters of the total dynamic response,
such as deflections, Drifts, story forces, story shear, base shear, and element forces can be reduced
proportionally, at the discretion of the designer.
A.5.4.6—DIRECTIONAL EFFECTS —The directional effects of design seismic motions shall be accounted for in accordance
with the requirements of A.3.6.3. The effects of vertical acceleration of seismic motions on cantilevers and prestressed
members shall be taken into account following the requirements of A.3.6.13 or alternatively by means of a dynamic analysis
procedure, but in no case the results obtained by means of this alternative procedure may lead to lesser results than those
obtained by means of A.3.6.13.
A.5.4.7 — TORSION — The dynamic analysis shall take into account the torsional effects of the entire structure as
as indicated in A.3.6.7.
A.5.4.8 — DUAL SYSTEMS — When the seismic resistance system corresponds to a dual system, as defined by A.3.2.1.4,
the system must be capable, as a whole, of resisting the total shear at the base that is obtained through dynamic analysis.
Analysis of the moment-resisting space frame, acting independently as prescribed by A.3.2.1.4(b), may be carried out by
means of an appropriate dynamic analysis, or by means of an equivalent horizontal force analysis in accordance with the
requirements of Chapter A.4.
A.5.5 — CHRONOLOGICAL DYNAMIC ANALYSIS METHOD

A.5.5.1 — GENERAL — The chronological dynamic analysis methodology can be used when, in the judgment of the
designer engineer, it adequately describes the dynamic properties of the structure and leads to representative results of the
design seismic movements. The mathematical model used can be linearly elastic or inelastic. If inelastic dynamic analysis
methods are used, special care must be taken to comply with the requirements of A.3.4.2.3.
A.5.5.2 — MAXIMUM RESPONSE — The maximum responses of deflections, drifts, story forces, story shear, base shear,
and member forces must be determined for the record set of the required family of accelerograms. per A.2.7.1, which, in this
case, must not be less than three records.
A.5.5.3 — FITTING THE RESULTS — The value of the maximum total dynamic shear at the base, Vtj , for any of obtained
the main directions, j, cannot be less than the seismic shear at the base, Vs , calculated by the equivalent horizontal force
method of Chapter A.4 and complying with the provisions of A.5.4.5(a).
It should be noted that in case of using an inelastic mathematical model, the results already have the effect associated with
R involved , which
, must be taken into account for the required adjustment.
When the maximum value of the total dynamic shear at the base, Vtj , obtained for any of the principal directions, j, is less
than the seismic shear at the base, Vs , calculated as indicated above, all the parameters of the dynamic response, such as
deflections, drifts, story forces, story shear, base shear and member forces of the corresponding j direction must be multiplied
by the following modification factor:
V
(A.5.5-1)
yes
V
tj
If seven or more accelerograms are used, instead of the maximum value of the total dynamic shear at the base, Vtj ,
obtained for any of the principal directions, j, the average value of the values obtained from all the accelerograms used can
be used to purposes of meeting the requirements of this section.
A-71
A.5.5.4 — DESIGN FORCES IN THE ELEMENTS — To obtain the design forces of the elements, the maximum internal
seismic forces in the elements, Fs, duly adjusted according to the requirements of A.5.5.3, are used. So:
(a) In the case of an elastic dynamic analysis, they are divided by the value of the coefficient of energy dissipation
,
capacity, R of the seismic resistance system, modified according to the irregularity and absence of redundancy
according to the requirements of A.3.3 .3, to obtain the reduced design seismic forces, E , and are combined
with the other loads prescribed by this Regulation, in accordance with the requirements of Title B, and (b) In
the cases of inelastic
dynamic analysis, the forces at The level at which yielding occurs corresponds to the reduced design seismic
forces, E , and should not be divided by the coefficient of energy dissipation capacity. In this case, when
applying the adjustment of the results indicated in A.5.5.3, it is allowed to divide the value of Vs by R in order
to make the comparisons indicated there.
It must be verified that the load combinations prescribed by this Regulation, in accordance with the requirements
of Title B, except for those that include earthquakes, in no case lead to efforts greater than those of plasticization.
A.5.5.5 — DESIGN FORCES IN THE FOUNDATION — In order to obtain the design forces of the foundation, what is
prescribed in A.3.7.2 must be fulfilled when it is a dynamic elastic analysis. In the case of an inelastic dynamic analysis there
is no need to divide by R to find the reduced design seismic forces, E, of the foundation structural elements nor the stresses
on the ground, which just have to be multiplied by the load coefficient equal to 0.7.
A-72
NSR-10 — Chapter A.6 — Drift Requirements
CHAPTER
A.6 DRIFT REQUIREMENTS
hi = height in meters, measured from the base, of level i .

hn = height in meters, measured from the base, of the highest floor of the building.
, measured from the diaphragm surface of the floor i to the diaphragm surface of the
Yo
#! = height of floor i
floor immediately below, i 1 ÿ .
j = index of one of the main orthogonal directions in plan, it can be x or y . = sum of the total
Pi vertical load, including dead and live, that exists on story i , and all stories located above it. For the calculation of the P-
Delta effects, there is no need for the load coefficients to be greater than unity.
Qi = stability index, of the floor i = , used in the evaluation of P-Delta effects. See A.6.2.3.
rj projection, on the direction perpendicular in plan to the direction under study, j, of the distance between
the center of mass of the story and the point of
you interest = fundamental period of the building as determined in A.4.2.
Ta = approximate fundamental period of vibration. See A.4.2.
Saw = floor shear force i , in the direction under study, without dividing by R . It is determined through the
equations of numeral A.4.3. It corresponds to the sum of the seismic horizontal forces that are applied to level i , and
all levels located above it. ÿcm,j = drift of story i
Yo
, in the direction under study, j, measured at the center of mass of the floor, as the difference
between the horizontal displacement of the floor i minus that of the floor i 1 ÿ in the same direction j.
Yo
ÿj = drift from floor i in the main direction on floor j.
i ÿ max = maximum drift for any point on floor i .

Yo
ÿcm ,j
= horizontal displacement of the center of mass of the floor i , in the direction j.
Yo
ÿpd ,j
= additional horizontal displacement of the center of mass of the floor i , caused by P-Delta effects, in the
address j.
Yo
ÿt ,j = additional horizontal displacement caused by torsion effects of any point on the diaphragm of the
floor i at address j.
Yo
ÿtot ,j = total horizontal displacement of any point on the diaphragm of floor i in the j direction
ÿi = rotation around a vertical axis that passes through the center of mass of the floor i torsional,, caused by the effects
in radians.
A.6.1 — GENERAL
A.6.1.1 — SCOPE — This Chapter gives the procedures for calculating drift as well as its permissible limits.
A.6.1.2 — DEFINITION OF DRIFT — Drift is understood as the relative horizontal displacement between two points placed on the
same vertical line, on two floors or consecutive levels of the building.
A.6.1.3 — NEED TO CONTROL DRIFT — Drift is associated with the following effects during an earthquake:
(a) Inelastic deformation of structural and non-structural elements. (b) Overall stability
of the structure. (c) Damage to structural
elements that are not part of the seismic resistance system and to
A-73
non-structural elements, such as dividing walls, partitions, veneers, finishes, electrical and mechanical installations, etc. (d)
Alarm and panic among the
people occupying the building.
For the above reasons, it is essential to carry out strict compliance with the drift requirements given in this Chapter during design, in order
to guarantee compliance with the purpose of the Regulation and adequate behavior of the structure and its content.
A.6.2 — CALCULATION OF HORIZONTAL DISPLACEMENT
A.6.2.1 — HORIZONTAL DISPLACEMENTS IN THE CENTER OF MASS OF THE FLOOR, cm,j ÿ — Corresponds
to the horizontal displacements,
in the two main directions in plan, that the center of mass of the floor has.
In the case of calculating displacements using the dynamic analysis method, what is indicated in A.5.4.4 for the combination of modes
must be taken into account.
A.6.2.1.1 — When using the equivalent horizontal force method, the horizontal forces used to determine the horizontal and
torsional displacements at the center of mass can be calculated using the period, T , which is obtained from the equation
A.4.2-1, applying the limit of C Tu a indicated there, or alternatively the period T obtained by any of the equations A.4.2-3 or
A.4.2-5.
A.6.2.1.2 — In buildings belonging to use groups II, III and IV, for the determination of the horizontal forces that are used to
calculate the horizontal displacements in the center of mass, have a value equal to the unit (I 1.0 = ) , and the design forces
structure must use the value of the importance allows the importance coefficient I to be used to obtain the resistance of the
coefficient I
corresponding to the building use group, as defined in A.2.5.2.
A.6.2.2 — HORIZONTAL DISPLACEMENTS CAUSED BY TORSIONAL EFFECTS. ÿ — t,j
They correspond to the additional horizontal displacements, in the two main orthogonal directions in plan, caused by the rotation of the
entire structure with respect to a vertical axis and due to the torsional effects defined in A.3.6.7. This effect should only be evaluated when
the diaphragms are rigid. When the diaphragms are rigid, the increase in horizontal displacement caused by torsional effects in any of the
two main directions in plan is obtained from:
ÿ =ÿ r t,jji (A.6.2-1)
where ÿ is the increase in horizontal displacement caused by torsional effects at a point within t,j
level i ,
in one of the main directions in plan, j r is the projection onto the perpendicular direction in plan
to the direction under study, j, of the distance between the center of mass of the floor and the point of interest, and i ÿ is the rotation
around a vertical axis that passes through the center of mass of level i , caused by torsional effects.
A.6.2.3 — HORIZONTAL DISPLACEMENTS CAUSED BY P-DELTA EFFECTS, pd,j ÿ — Correspond to the additional effects, in the two
main directions in plan, caused by the second order effects (P-Delta effects) of the structure . The P-Delta effects produce an increase in
the horizontal deflections and in the internal forces of the structure. These effects must be taken into account when the stability index, Qi ,
is greater than 0.10. The stability index, for floor i and in the direction under study, is calculated by means of the following equation: is
Pi ÿcm
Q = (A.6.2-2)
Yo
Vh
i pee
The stability index of any story, Qi , must not exceed the value of 0.30. When the value of Qi is greater than 0.30, the structure is
potentially unstable and must be stiffened unless all of the requirements listed in C.10.11.6.2(b) are met for reinforced concrete structures.
A-74
The additional deflection caused by the P-Delta effect in the direction under study and for story i from the , is calculated by means
following equation:
ÿ ÿQ
ÿ =ÿ Yo
ÿ ÿ pd cm ÿ ÿ (A.6.2-3)
1Q ÿ Yo
A.6.2.3.1 — Alternatively, P-Delta effects can be evaluated following the requirements of C.10.11 on reinforced concrete
structures.
A.6.2.3.2 — When the stability index is greater than 0.10, the P-Delta effects on the internal forces of the structure caused by
lateral loads must be increased, multiplying them at each story by the factor ( ) i 11Qÿ .
A.6.2.4 — TOTAL HORIZONTAL DISPLACEMENTS — The horizontal displacements, in the two main orthogonal directions in plan, that
have all the degrees of freedom of the structure when affected by the design seismic movements defined in A.2.2, are determined by
means of structural analysis carried out using the analysis method defined in A.3.4 and with the stiffnesses indicated in A.3.4.3. The total
horizontal displacements, t0t,j , in any of the principal directions in plan, j, and for any degree of freedom of the structure, are obtained
ÿ
from the following sum of absolute values:
ÿ =ÿ +ÿ +ÿ t0t,j cm,jt,j pd,j (A.6.2-4)
where ÿcm ,j corresponds to the horizontal displacement of the center of mass in the direction under study, j; ÿ the t,j
additional displacement caused by torsional effects in the direction under study when the diaphragm is rigid, j, and pd,j to the additional
ÿ
displacement caused by the P-Delta effect in the direction under study, j. When soil-structure interaction procedures are used, or when
A.3.4.2 so requires because the analysis of the structure was carried out assuming it was embedded in its base, the additional
displacements obtained in accordance with the procedure in Chapter A.7.
A.6.3 — ASSESSMENT OF MAXIMUM DRIFT
A.6.3.1 — MAXIMUM DRIFT — The maximum drift for any story shall be obtained as follows:
A.6.3.1.1 — In regular and irregular buildings that do not have irregularities in plan of types 1aP or 1bP (see table A.3-6), or
Yo
,
buildings with flexible diaphragm, the maximum drift for the story i ÿmax , corresponds to the greater drift of the two main
directions in plan, j, calculated as the absolute value of the algebraic difference of the horizontal displacements of the center of
mass of the diaphragm in the main direction in plan under study with respect to those of the diaphragm of the floor floor i ÿ , cm,j
,
) direction, including P-Delta effects.

immediately below ( i 1 ÿ in the same
A.6.3.1.2 — In buildings that have irregularities in plan of types 1aP or 1bP (see table A.3-
6) the maximum drift at any point on story i can be obtained as the,difference between the maximum total horizontal
displacements, according to A.6.2.4, of the point on story i and the maximum total horizontal displacements of a point located on
the same vertical axis on the floor immediately below (
i1ÿ
) , by means of the following equation:
2
i i1 ÿ
i ÿ = max 2 (
ÿ ÿÿ tot,j
tot,j
) (A.6.3-1)
=
ÿj1
Alternatively, procedures can be used to estimate maximum responses of vector quantities.

Compliance with the drift calculation for any point on the floor can be done by verifying it only in all the vertical axes of the column
and in the points located on the edges of the walls.
A-75
Yo
structural. The maximum drift of the story i the , ÿmax , corresponds to the maximum drift obtained from all
points thus studied within the same story i .
A.6.3.1.3 — In the upper stories of buildings that meet the conditions (a) to (e) presented below, it is allowed to calculate the
maximum drift of the story in the alternative way that is obtained with the expression A.6.3-2 indicated in this section.
(a) The building is ten or more stories high above its base. (b) The alternative
procedure is only applicable in the upper floors located above two thirds of the height of the building measured from its
base.
(c) The seismic resistance structural system is different from the moment-resisting frame. (d) The building is
classified as regular both in plan and in height according to the
requirements of Chapter A.3.
(e) The stability index, Qi, is less than 0.10 on all floors where this would apply.
alternative procedure.
Yo
The maximum drift of the story i , ÿmax , in the alternative procedure corresponds to the maximum drift of the
two main directions in plan, j, calculated by means of the following equation:
( ÿ cm,jpp
ÿÿ cm,j
i1 i2 i i1
)( H H+ )
ÿÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ ii i2 ÿ ÿ i1
ÿ =ÿ ÿ 0.5 j cm,j ÿÿ0.5
ÿ ÿ
+ÿcm ,j (A.6.3-2)
hi 1 cm,j
ÿ
ÿ p ÿ
A.6.4 — DRIFT LIMITS

A.6.4.1 — The maximum drift for any story determined in accordance with the procedure of A.6.3.1, may not exceed the limits established
in Table A.6.4-1, in which the maximum drift is expressed as a percentage of story height hpi :
Table A.6.4-1
Maximum drifts as a percentage of hpi
Structures of: maximum drift

reinforced concrete, metal, wood,
and masonry meeting the
1.0%
ÿÿ0.010h _
Yo
max pi
)
requirements of A.6.4.2.2 Masonry
meeting
the requirements of A.6.4.2.3
( 0.5% (
ÿ ÿ 0.005 hpi
Yo
max )
A.6.4.1.1 — When cracked sections are used, both in reinforced concrete and in masonry and in the case of composite structures
with steel, the drifts can be multiplied by 0.7 before making the comparison with the limits given in table A. 6.4-1.
A.6.4.1.2 — When an inelastic analysis has been carried out, verifying the performance of all the structural elements in a
performance range not greater than "Life Protection" (LS according to the requirements of ASCE 31 and ASCE 41), the drifts can
be multiplied by 0.7 before comparing with the limits given in table A.6.4-1.
A.6.4.1.3 — It is allowed to use the limit of maximum permissible drift of built with structural 0.010h in pi buildings
masonry when these are composed of walls whose prevailing mode of failure is bending before forces parallel to the plane of the
wall, essentially designed as slender vertical elements that act as cantilevers supported on their base or foundation, and that are
built in such a way that the transfer of moment between walls through the horizontal coupling elements in the mezzanine
diaphragms, whether they are slabs, connecting beams, parapets or lintels, is negligible.
A-76
A.6.4.1.4 — When dealing with structural masonry walls that are not very slender or whose prevailing failure mode
is caused by shear forces, the maximum allowable drift limit of 0.005h must be used . pi
A.6.4.1.5 — There are no drift limits in one-story buildings, provided interior and exterior walls, partitions, and
ceilings are designed to accommodate story drift.
A.6.5 — SEPARATION BETWEEN ADJACENT STRUCTURES DUE TO SEISMIC

CONSIDERATIONS
A.6.5.1— WITHIN THE SAME CONSTRUCTION— All parts of the structure shall be designed and constructed to act as
an integral unit for purposes of resisting seismic forces, unless separated by a sufficient distance to avoid harmful collision.
Between the parts. To determine the minimum separation distance, the absolute value of the total horizontal displacements
obtained in A.6.2.1 must be added for each of the portions of the building in the direction perpendicular to the joint that
separates them, unless measures are taken. so that no damage to the structure occurs when using a smaller distance.
A.6.5.2 — BETWEEN NEIGHBORING BUILDINGS THAT ARE NOT PART OF THE SAME CONSTRUCTION — The
separation between neighboring buildings, to avoid harmful effects in the event of an earthquake, must meet the following
requirements:
A.6.5.2.1 — Scope — This regulation is applicable in the following cases:
(a) In municipalities located in Zones of Low Seismic Threat as provided in this Regulation in its Chapter
A.2, considerations of seismic separation between neighboring buildings are not required.
(b) Only applies to obtaining construction permits for new buildings that are requested for the first time
after the adoption of this Regulation.
(c) Does not apply in the case of buildings that are subject to the Recognition process.
(d) In the case of seismic rehabilitation of existing buildings, the requirements apply
specials indicated in A.10.7.
(e) The requirements of this section of the Regulations may be modified by the municipal or district
administration, as long as the seismic separation requirements resulting from the application of the
municipal or district regulations are not less than those given here.
A.6.5.2.2 — Definitions — In Chapter A.13, the following definitions should be consulted: height of the floor,
height of the building in the adjoining, enclosure, coincidence of the mezzanine slabs in the adjoining, level
(measured from the base ) of one story in the adjoining, number of above-ground floors of the building, number of
above-ground floors in the adjoining, and seismic separation in the adjoining. In addition, it must be taken into
account when the terrain is sloped in the adjoining area, or there are different story heights in the adjoining area,
or there is a different number of aerial floors in the adjoining area, that the story height or the number of aerial
floors must be used. leading to the greatest seismic separation.
A.6.5.2.3 — Seismic separation requirements with respect to the lot face for new buildings — The following
requirements must be met for purposes of determining the seismic separation with respect to the lot face in new
buildings covered by the scope given in A.6.5. .2.1:
(a) When the lot facing is adjacent to a public road or public green zone, it does not require seismic
separation with respect to the facing on that side or sides. This does not exempt compliance with the
urban requirements of the municipal building regulations regarding setbacks.
(b) When there is an enclosure in the adjoining area, and the new building is separated from this
enclosure by a distance that exceeds that indicated for the critical floor in Table A.6.5-1, it shall not be
A-77
requires seismic separation of the enclosure of the new building with respect to the face of the lot.
(c) Buildings with one or two adjoining aerial floors do not require seismic separation.
(see also Table A.6.5-1).
(d) Buildings with more than two floors above the adjoining must be separated from the adjoining facing
as follows (see also Table A.6.5-1 and Figure A.6.5-1):
(i) Buildings with up to three above-ground floors in the adjoining — Seismic separation of
the new building from the facing is not required when there is no existing neighboring
building, or when the slabs of the new building coincide in the adjoining (see definitions).
with those of the existing neighboring building in the same adjoining area. If the mezzanine
slabs of the new building do not coincide with those of the existing building, a seismic
separation of the new building with respect to the facing equal to 1% (one percent) of the
height of the new building in the adjoining is required.
(ii) Buildings with more than three above-ground floors in the adjoining area — When the
slabs of the new building coincide in adjoining (see definitions) with those of the existing
neighboring building in the same adjoining area, the new building must be removed from the
facing on the adjoining a seismic separation distance equal to 2% (two percent) of the height
of the new building in the adjoining. When the mezzanine slabs of the new building do not
coincide with those of the existing building in the adjoining, this seismic separation must be
3% (three percent) of the height of the new building in the adjoining. If there is no neighboring
building in the adjoining (it also covers the case that it is only an enclosure), this seismic
separation must be 1% (one percent) of the height of the new building in the adjoining.
(e) When seismic separation is required, the separation on any particular story corresponds to the
horizontal distance in a direction perpendicular to the vertical plane raised on the boundary between
the two plots of land, measured from the mezzanine slab of the building to this plane. , calculated
using the height above ground level of the particular story multiplied by the coefficient indicated in
Table A.6.5-1 for that case. See also Figure A.6.5-1.
(f) Precautions must be taken so that foreign materials are not deposited within the seismic separation
between buildings. Likewise, an appropriate moisture protection must be placed so that rainwater
does not enter the opening of the seismic separation.
(g) In the case of buildings subject to seismic reinforcement and rehabilitation, the rehabilitation designer
engineer must record that he studied the potential harmful effect of the interaction with neighboring
neighboring buildings and that he took the appropriate measures according to his best judgment
within as required in A.10.1.7.
(h) The face of the lot and the required seismic separation must be clearly indicated in the architectural
plans that are presented to the competent authority or conservatorship to obtain the construction
license.
A-78
Table A.6.5-1
Minimum seismic separation on the roof between adjacent
buildings that are not part of the same construction
adjoining type
There is a neighboring building that has not left the There is no
Height of the required seismic separation neighboring building
new building or the one that exists
Match the mezzanine The mezzanine has left the
slabs slabs do not match required seismic
separation
does not does not does not
1 and 2 floors
require separation require require separation
separation 0.01 times
does not the height of the does not
3 floors
require separation require separation
new building (1% of
0.02 times the height of hn) 0.03 times the 0.01 times the height of
More than 3 floors the new building height of the new the new building
(2% of hn) building (3% of hn) (1% of hn)
Notes:
1. To obtain the seismic separation on floors other than the roof, the coefficient indicated in the Table
multiplied by the height above the ground of the particular floor will be applied.
2. When the adjoining land is inclined in the direction of the face, or there are different floor heights or
different numbers of aerial floors in the adjoining, the floor height, or the number of aerial floors
that lead to the greatest seismic separation.
Deck
aerial floor i
Seismic separation for any
floor, is at least the distance obtained by multiplying
the coefficient indicated in Table A.6.5-1 by the
aerial floor 2 corresponding hi.
hn
hi
aerial floor 1
h2
facing
h1
ground level
new building existing building
Figure A.6.5-1 — Seismic separation measurement (elevation view)
A-79
Grades:
A-80
NSR-10 — Chapter A.7 — Soil-structure interaction
CHAPTER
A.7 SOIL-STRUCTURE INTERACTION
A.7.1 — GENERAL
A.7.1.1 — DEFINITION — The seismic response of the structure is closely linked to the way in which the
Earthquake movements affect the structure through its foundation. The dynamic characteristics of the underlying soil, the
stiffness and layout of the foundation, and the type of structural system of the building interact with each other to
characterize the seismic effects on it. The fact that the foundation stiffness and the dynamic characteristics of the
underlying soil are not taken into account in the seismic analysis of the building can lead to appreciable variations
between the estimated seismic response and the actual response of the structure. For the reasons noted, it is convenient
to include the effects of soil-structure interaction in the seismic analysis of the building.
A.7.1.2 — EFFECTS ASSOCIATED WITH SOIL-STRUCTURE INTERACTION — Depending on the characteristics of

the structure, its foundation, and the underlying soil, the structure's response to static vertical and dynamic loads (seismic)
may vary with respect to the estimate that is made without taking into account the soil-structure interaction, in the following
aspects:
(a) The presence of soft and compressible soils in the distribution of stresses and deformations under foundation
slabs, both in the face of vertical loads and horizontal forces,
(b) Increase in the period of the soil-structure system that considers the flexibility of the soil, with respect to the
evaluation of the periods of vibration of the building considering a model of embedded base,
(c) Generally, an increase in the equivalent viscous damping of the structure-soil foundation system compared
to that considered for the structure alone, by involving the additional dissipation of energy resulting from the
material and geometric damping of the soil,
(d) Increase in the lateral displacements of the structure in response to seismic stresses, due in significant part
to the rotation of the base due to pitching effect, with changes in the drifts (relative horizontal displacements)
depending on the height at which they are located the levels under consideration,
(e) Variation in the distribution of horizontal shear forces produced by seismic movements, between the different
elements of the seismic resistance system, especially when elements with different stiffnesses and support
systems are combined in the foundation, as may be the case of combination of frames and structural walls,
(f) and others.
A.7.1.2.1 — Soil-structure interaction effects should not be confused with site effects, caused by amplification of
the seismic wave traveling from the rock to the surface, which are described in Chapter A.2.
A.7.1.3 — RECOMMENDED PROCEDURE — This Chapter defines the general criteria that must be taken into account,
both by the structural engineer and by the geotechnical engineer, when soil-structure interaction procedures must be
used, in accordance with the requirements from A.3.4.2. If, in the opinion of the structural engineer and the geotechnical
engineer, the necessary information is available, obtained with the greatest possible rigor, regarding the geotechnical
and structural parameters involved, the requirements presented in Appendix A-2 of this Regulation Title may be used. .
A.7.2 — GEOTECHNICAL INFORMATION
The following describes the minimum scope of exploration, interpretation and recommendations that the geotechnical
study must contain, in full accordance with the provisions of Title H of this Regulation:
A-81
NSR-10 — Chapter A.7 — Soil-structure interaction
A.7.2.1 — EXPLORATION — Exploration procedures should be consistent with the type of properties to be studied,
either by field or laboratory procedures. Special care must be taken regarding the deformation levels at which the soil
properties are expressed, which must be compatible with the deformation levels imposed by seismic movements.
A.7.2.2 — LABORATORY — Laboratory procedures should quantify, directly or indirectly, the characteristics of the
material under dynamic conditions and the strain levels expected during seismic motions.
A.7.2.3 — INTERPRETATION — Field and laboratory information should be combined into a set of recommendations
that describe and support the features that the structural engineer should use in mathematical models of the phenomenon.
The recommendations must establish limitations and ranges of applicability, easy to identify, in order to avoid the danger
involved in using the recommended parameters, outside the context in which they were expressed.
A.7.2.4 — REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF THE RESULTS — The geotechnical engineer must review and endorse the
results obtained by the structural engineer, regarding the recommendations for soil-structure interaction of the
geotechnical study and the validity of the soil interaction results. -structure obtained based on their own recommendations.
A.7.3 — STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
The following describes the minimum scope of aspects that the structural engineer must take into account to describe the
effects of soil-structure interaction:
A.7.3.1 — TYPE OF MODEL — Mathematical models can be static or dynamic and must describe the stiffness
characteristics of the structure, foundation, and soil, at levels compatible with the expected deformations. In the structural
models used in the analysis of the structure, elastic support conditions of the walls, columns and elements of the seismic
resistance system must be introduced at the foundation level, consistent with the assumed stiffnesses to obtain the
response of the structure taking into account the effects of soil-structure interaction.
A.7.3.2 — DESIGN FORCES OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS — The mathematical model used must be used in the
evaluation of the characteristics of the structure's response to different loads. The distribution of the internal forces of the
structure that is used in its design must be the one obtained through the analysis that includes the effects of soil-structure
interaction.
A.7.3.3 — DRIFTS — The drifts obtained by using the soil-structure interaction procedures must comply with the limits
established in Chapter A.6. As indicated in A.7.1.2 (d) there are cases in which larger drifts must be expected than would
be obtained by assuming the structure embedded in its base.
A.7.3.4 — SEISMIC SHEAR AT THE BASE — In those cases in which there is an increase in the seismic shear at the
base, the design must be carried out for the shear obtained using the soil-structure interaction. When, due to an increase
in the equivalent structural period and/or in the effective damping, there is a decrease in the design seismic shear at the
base, the value of the design seismic shear at the base cannot be less than what would be obtained using the equivalent
horizontal force method of Clause A.4, using a period of vibration equal to C Tu a according to A.4.2.1 and the spectra
of Clause A.2.
A.7.3.5 — MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM VALUES OF THE SOIL-STRUCTURE INTERACTION EFFECTS — Due to the
uncertainty presented by the determination of the soil parameters used in the soil-structure interaction analysis, the
expected maximum and minimum values must be considered. of such parameters and use those that produce the most
unfavorable effects, both in the determination of the seismic shears, as well as for the calculation of the story drifts and
the design forces of the elements of the structure and the foundation.
A-82
NSR-10 — Chapter A.8 — Seismic effects on structural elements that are not part of
the seismic resistance system
CHAPTER
A.8 SEISMIC EFFECTS ON STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS THAT
ARE NOT PART OF THE SEISMIC RESISTANCE SYSTEM
Ace = maximum acceleration at the ground surface estimated as the spectral acceleration corresponding to
a vibration period equal to zero, See A.8.2.1.1.
i will
= acceleration at level l i , See A.8.2.1.1.
for = horizontal acceleration, expressed as a percentage of the acceleration due to gravity, on the element
structure that is not part of the seismic resistance system, located on floor x
fp = horizontal force on a structural element that is not part of the seismic resistance system,
applied to its center of mass. m/
g s2 ). = acceleration
due to gravity ( g 9.8 = = height in meters,
measured from the base, of level i , see A.8.2.1.1.
hi = height in metres, measured from the base, of the highest story of the building, see A.8.2.1.1. =
hn equivalent height of the one degree of freedom system simulating the building, see A.8.2.1.1.
heq Mp = mass of a structural element that is not part of the seismic resistance system.
expressed as a fraction of the acceleration due to gravity, for a one degree of freedom system with a period of
vibration T . It is defined in A.2.6.
A.8.1 — GENERAL
A.8.1.1 — SCOPE — This Chapter covers the seismic provisions that must be taken into account in the design of structural
elements that are not part of the seismic resistance system, as defined in Chapter A.3, and their anchorages. him. These items
include, but are not limited to:
(a) Stairs, ramps, etc., (b)

Tanks, pools, etc., (c) Roofing
elements, such as trusses, purlins, etc., (d) Secondary elements of
mezzanine systems, such as joists , etc., (e) Columns, colonettes, piers, and other
elements that support roofs and other minor parts
of the building,
(f) Equipment supports such as elevators, escalators, etc., and (g) In general, all
those structural elements that are included within the structural plans and
that are not part of the seismic resistance system.
A.8.1.2 — DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY — The design, in response to the requirements established by this Regulation in Title A
or Title B, of any structural element that appears within the structural plans, is the responsibility of the structural designer. These
elements include the elements mentioned in A.8.1.1.
A.8.1.3 — DESIGN CRITERIA — The design for seismic effects of the structural elements that are not part of the seismic
resistance system, made up of the structural elements themselves, and of the anchors, unions or moorings of these elements to
the system of seismic resistance, must be carried out for the situation that controls:
(a) The effect of forces on the element itself,
A-83
NSR-10 — Chapter A.8 — Seismic effects on structural elements that are not part
of the seismic resistance system
(b) The ability to resist the deformations imposed on the element by the seismic resistance system when responding
to design seismic movements, and the influence that the element may have on the seismic response of the
structure, as may be the case of stairs and ramps, which can act as bracing (or diagonals) from one floor to
another.
A.8.2 — DESIGN HORIZONTAL FORCES

A.8.2.1 — HORIZONTAL ACCELERATION ON THE ELEMENT — The element is subjected, before the occurrence of
design seismic movements, to the same horizontal accelerations that the seismic resistance system is subjected to at the
same height based on The building in which the item is located.
The inertial forces to which the element or any portion of it is subjected correspond to the mass of the element multiplied by
the acceleration imposed by the movements caused by the earthquake. This acceleration is determined by one of the
following procedures:
A.8.2.1.1 — Equivalent Horizontal Force Method — When using the equivalent horizontal force method, as
prescribed in Chapter A.4, the horizontal acceleration, i a , expressed as a fraction of the acceleration of the Gravity,
on the structural element that is not part of the seismic resistance system, located on floor i, is obtained by means
of the following equation:
( Yeah
ÿ
So
)
oh
aa=+
i Hi eq
Hÿ
heq
yes
h (A.8.2-1)
=
ace to
Yo
HH
ÿ
Yo Yo
eq
heq
heq can be estimated simply as 0.75hno
As an alternative to equation A.8.2-1 to calculate the forces that the floor or roof diaphragms must resist, more
precise estimates of the maximum absolute accelerations to which these diaphragms would be subjected can be
used, resulting, for example, from dynamic analyses.
A.8.2.1.2 — Dynamic analysis method — When the dynamic analysis method is used, the horizontal acceleration,
xa , expressed as a percentage of the acceleration due to gravity, on the structural element that is not part of the
, after
seismic resistance system , located on the floor x is equal to the acceleration to which the floor is subjected
performing the adjustment of results prescribed in A.5.4.5. The value of the acceleration obtained by means of the
dynamic analysis method cannot be less than that obtained by means of equation A.8.2-1.
A.8.2.2 — HORIZONTAL FORCES ON THE ELEMENT — The reduced design horizontal seismic force, which can act in
any direction, on the structural element that is not part of the seismic resistance system at its center of mass, is obtained by
means of from the following equation:
ag
x
FM
pp
= (A.8.2-2)
R0
where R0 is the coefficient of energy dissipation capacity corresponding to the design requirements of the structural element,
as indicated in A.8.4. The previous equation can be applied to elements that have only one support, or when there are no
relative displacements between their supports.
A.8.2.2.1 — When the structural element that is not part of the seismic resistance system has dynamic characteristics
that amplify its response to acceleration xa , these characteristics must be taken into account in the evaluation of
the horizontal forces that may affect it. This occurs especially in building appendages.
A-84
A.8.2.2.2 — When the structural element that is not part of the seismic resistance system has supports that can
move relatively during the earthquake, as is the case of elements that are connected to two different floors of the
building, they must be taken into account. In addition to the forces calculated by means of equation A.8.2-2, the
design takes into account the forces that induce the relative displacements between its supports.
A.8.2.3 — FORCES ON JOINTS TO THE SEISMIC RESISTANCE SYSTEM — In addition to the requirements of A.3.6.4,
joints, splices, and ties of structural elements that are not part of the seismic resistance system must be capable of resisting
the full design reduced seismic forces on the member as defined in A.8.2.2.
A.8.3 — DESIGN DEFORMATIONS
A.8.3.1 — The structural elements that are not part of the seismic resistance system must be capable of resisting, without
deterioration, the deformations imposed by the seismic response of the structure. As a minimum they must be able to
resist the deformations that are obtained from the maximum design drifts determined as indicated in Chapter A.6.
A.8.4 — DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.8.4.1 — The requirements that must be followed in the design of the structural elements that are not part of the seismic
resistance system for each of the materials covered by the Regulation, must be those indicated in each of the Titles.
corresponding within the Regulation, and failing that, those of the lower energy dissipation capacity level than those given
for each material.
A-85
Grades:
A-86
NSR-10 — Chapter A.9 — Non-structural elements
CHAPTER
A.9 NON-STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS
aah = coefficient that represents the effective peak horizontal acceleration, for design, given in A.2.2. = maximum
Ace acceleration at the ground surface estimated as the spectral acceleration corresponding to
a vibration period equal to zero, See A.9.4.2.1.
pa
= coefficient of dynamic amplification of the non-structural element. It is given in tables A.9.5-1 and A.9.6-1.
for = horizontal acceleration, expressed as a percentage of the acceleration due to gravity, on the element
non-structural, located on floor x
AND
= reduced design seismic forces (EFR = pp )
fp = horizontal seismic force on the non-structural element, applied at its center of mass. m/s2 ). =
g acceleration due to gravity ( g 9.8 = = equivalent
heq height of the one degree of freedom system simulating the building, see A.9.4.2.1.
hx = height in meters, measured from the base, of the support level of the non-structural element. =
hn height in metres, measured from the base, of the highest story of the building, see A.8.2.1.1. = coefficient
Yo
of importance given in A.2.5.2.
Mp = mass of the non-structural element.
Rp = coefficient of energy dissipation capacity of the non-structural element and its support system.
It is given in tables A.9.5-1 and A.9.6-1.
expressed as a fraction of the acceleration due to gravity, for a one degree of freedom system with a period of vibration
T . It is defined in A.2.6.
A.9.1 — GENERAL
A.9.1.1 — PURPOSE — The requirements of this Chapter are intended to establish the design criteria for elements that are not part
of the building structure, in order to fulfill the purpose of the Regulation.
A.9.1.2 — SCOPE — This Chapter covers the seismic provisions that must be taken into account in the design of non-structural
elements and their anchorages to the structure, with the exception of what is indicated in A.9.1.3. Non-structural elements that must
be seismically designed include:
(a) Finishes and architectural and decorative elements,
(b) Hydraulic and sanitary installations,
(c) Electrical installations,
(d) Gas installations,
(e) Mechanical equipment,
(f) Shelves and
(g) Special facilities.
A.9.1.3 — EXEMPTIONS — All buildings belonging to use groups I and II located in areas with low seismic threat are exempt from
the requirements of this Chapter.
A-87
A.9.2 — PERFORMANCE GRADE OF NON-STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

A.9.2.1 — DEFINITION OF PERFORMANCE — The behavior of the non-structural elements of the building in the event of the
design earthquake that affects it is called performance. Performance is classified into the following grades:
(a) Superior — It is the one in which the damage that occurs in the non-structural elements is minimal and does not
interfere with the operation of the building due to the occurrence of the design earthquake.
(b) Good - It is the one in which the damage that occurs in the non-structural elements is totally repairable and there
may be some interference with the operation of the building after the occurrence of the design earthquake.
(c) Low — Is that in which there is serious damage to non-structural elements, including non-repairable, but without
detachment or collapse, due to the occurrence of the design earthquake.
A.9.2.2 — CLASSIFICATION INTO ONE OF THE PERFORMANCE GRADES — The building shall be classified within one of
the three nonstructural element performance grades defined in A.9.2.1. This degree of performance cannot be less than the
minimum allowable established in A.9.2.3. The owner of the building, voluntarily, can demand that the designs be carried out for
a degree of performance better than the minimum required, communicating it in writing to the designers. In the absence of this
communication, designers are only required to comply with the minimum allowable degree set out in A.9.2.3.
A.9.2.3 — MINIMUM PERFORMANCE GRADE — As a minimum, the performance grade indicated in Table A.9.2-1 must be
met, for each of the use groups defined in A.2.5.1.
Table A.9.2-1
Minimum required performance grade
Use
Group performance grade
IV. Superior
II Superior
II Well
Yo
Low
A.9.3 — RESPONSIBILITIES
A.9.3.1 — OF THE RESPONSIBLE DESIGNER — The responsibility for the seismic design of the non-structural elements falls
on the professionals under whose direction the different particular designs are prepared. It is presumed that the fact that a non-
structural element appears on a plan or design memory is because all the necessary measures have been taken to meet the
appropriate degree of performance and therefore the professional who signs or labels the plan becomes responsible that the
design was carried out for the appropriate degree of performance. The builder who signs the construction license must comply
with what is indicated in A.1.3.6.5 and is ultimately responsible for ensuring that the designs of the structural elements have been
carried out properly and that their construction is carried out properly.
A.9.3.1.1 — In those cases in which the designs specify non-structural elements whose supply and installation is carried
out by their manufacturer, the designer must limit himself to specifying in his plans, reports or specifications, the degree
of performance to be met by the elements. The builder who signs the construction license must also comply in these
cases with what is indicated in A.1.3.6.5.
A.9.3.2 — OF THE TECHNICAL SUPERVISOR — The technical supervisor must verify that the construction and installation of
non-structural elements is carried out following the corresponding plans and specifications. In those cases in which the design
documents (plans, reports and specifications) only indicate the degree of performance required, it is the responsibility of the
technical supervisor to verify that the non-structural elements that are installed in the building are in fact in capacity. to meet the
performance grade specified by the designer.
A-88
A.9.3.3 — COORDINATION BETWEEN DESIGNS OF ELEMENTS THAT ARE PART OF DIFFERENT SYSTEMS — The
responsibility for coordination between the different designs lies with the professional listed as architectural designer in the
construction permit application. The professional who carries out the coordination must take all the necessary precautions so
that the resulting design of each one of the non-structural elements, carried out by professionals different from him, does not
affect the performance of elements designed by other professionals.
A.9.4 — DESIGN CRITERIA

A.9.4.1 — GENERAL — The designer of nonstructural elements may adopt one of two design strategies:
(a) Separate them from the structure — In this type of design, the non-structural elements are isolated laterally from
the structure, leaving a sufficient separation so that the structure, when deformed as a consequence of the
earthquake, does not adversely affect them. The non-structural elements are supported in their lower part on the
structure, or are hung from it; therefore they must be capable of resisting by themselves the inertial forces imposed
by the earthquake, and their anchorages to the structure must be capable of resisting and transferring these forces
induced by the earthquake to the structure. In addition, the separation to the building structure must be wide
enough to guarantee that they do not come into contact, for the displacements imposed by the design earthquake.
In the resulting space, avoid placing elements that stiffen the joint, eliminating the flexibility required by the design.
(b) Arrange elements that admit the deformations of the structure — In this type of design, non-structural elements
are arranged that touch the structure and that therefore must be flexible enough to be able to resist the
deformations that the structure imposes on them without suffering damage. greater than the one that admits the
degree of performance preset for the non-structural elements of the building. In this type of design, there must be
coordination with the structural engineer, so that he takes into account the potential harmful effect on the structure
that the interaction between structural and non-structural elements may have.
A.9.4.2—DESIGN SEISMIC FORCES —Design reduced horizontal seismic forces acting on any nonstructural element shall be
calculated using the following equation:
=
aa
xp AIto
f
p pp GM ÿ
GM (A.9.4-1)
R2p
The parameters involved in this equation, other than the mass of the element, Mp , are defined as follows
manner:
A.9.4.2.1 — Acceleration at the point of support of the element, xa — Corresponds to the horizontal acceleration
that occurs at the point where the non-structural element is supported, or anchored, to the structural system of the
building, when it is affected by design seismic motions. This acceleration depends on the dynamic characteristics of
the seismic resistance system of the building and the location of the element within it. It must be evaluated by means
of a dynamic analysis of the structure that takes into account its energy dissipation capacity in the inelastic range, or
by means of the following equation compatible with the seismic forces obtained by means of the equivalent horizontal
force method as presented in Chapter A.4 of the Regulation:
(Yeah
to sx
ÿ
oh )
aA
x
=+ HxHÿ
yes
eq
h
eq
hx (A.9.4-2)
ace= HxHÿ
x to eq
h
eq
heq can be estimated simply as 0.75hno.
A-89
The value of Sa must be calculated for the two directions of analysis in plan of the structure, and the value that
leads to the highest value of Sa must be used .
A.9.4.2.2 — Dynamic amplification of the non-structural element, ap — Depending on the stiffness, distribution
of its mass and support characteristics on the structure, the non-structural element amplifies the accelerations that
occur at its point of support due to effects resonance. These resonance effects depend on the relationship between
the fundamental period of the structure and that of the non-structural element, including the action of its supports.
When the non-structural element is rigid, its mass is located near the point of support and it is firmly anchored to
the structure, its dynamic amplification is lower, this occurs in non-structural elements with vibration periods of the
order of 0.06s or less . . When the non-structural element is flexible, or its mass is distributed in height, or
concentrated far from the point of support, or its supports allow appreciable displacements, the accelerations to
which it is subjected are appreciably amplified with respect to the accelerations that are present at their point of
support. This amplification, pa , must be determined by means of detailed dynamic analysis or experimental
dynamic tests. In the absence of these, the approximate values given in Tables A.9.5-1 and A.9.6-1 can be used,
where the values of ap vary between 1.0 and 2.5.
A.9.4.2.3 — Energy dissipation capacity in the inelastic range of the non-structural element, Rp
— This coefficient represents, as a whole, the energy dissipation capacity in the inelastic response range of the
element itself and its anchoring or mooring system to the building structure. A low Rp value , close to unity, indicates
brittleness, low energy dissipation capacity, and anchors or ties to the structure with little capacity to deform
inelastically. As these potential degrees of deficient behavior are addressed, it is possible to increase the Rp
values . Tables A.9.5-1 and A.9.6-1 give the conditions for the Rp values , minimum allowed for each performance
grade, which vary between 0.5 and 6.0, according to A.9.4.9.
A.9.4.3 — DEFORMATION CAPACITY — When subjected to design seismic movements, non-structural elements
undergo displacements with respect to the building structure that must not exceed the separation clearances that are left,
or deformations of the element itself. that endanger their integrity. The verification displacements of the non-structural
elements and their anchors or moorings are set based on the maximum acceptable drift for the structure prescribed in
Chapter A.6 of the Regulations.
Therefore, it must be taken into account in the design that the element must be able to resist, without suffering a level of
damage greater than that admissible for its degree of performance, the deformations imposed by the seismic response of
the structure.
A.9.4.4 — APPLICATION OF SEISMIC FORCES — Seismic forces on any nonstructural element act according to the
distribution of mass and stiffness of the element. It is allowed to suppose that they are applied in the center of gravity of
the element, taking into account that they can act in any horizontal direction. For purposes of designing mechanical and
electrical elements, a vertical force acting upwards or downwards must be taken into account in the design, in addition to
its weight, equal to one third of it, which must not be amplified by the coefficients ax neither ap nor divided by the coefficient
Rp.
A.9.4.5 — TRANSFER OF SEISMIC FORCES — Non-structural elements that need to be designed to resist seismic
forces must be tied or anchored in such a way that these forces are finally transferred to the building structure. The
mooring must be a connection or anchorage that allows resisting tension and compression, without counting on the effects
of friction, or resistance to the tension of glue mortars.
A.9.4.6 — OTHER REQUESTS — The designer of the non-structural elements must take into account in their designs the
other requests that may affect the behavior of the non-structural elements, of those mentioned in Title B of the Regulation.
A.9.4.7 — DESIGN USING THE WORK STRESS METHOD — When the material of the nonstructural element is designed
using the work stress method, as defined in B.2.3, the reduced design seismic forces, E, that determined in accordance
with the requirements of this Chapter, must be multiplied by a load factor of 0.7, as indicated by the load combinations in
B.2.3, to obtain the reduced design seismic forces, at the working stress level, which are used in the design of the
elements and their anchors.
A-90
A.9.4.8 — NON-STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS LOCATED AT THE BASE OF THE STRUCTURE AND BELOW IT, OR
OUTSIDE OF IT — Non-structural elements, located at or below the base of the structure, or by outside it, they shall be
designed for reduced design seismic forces determined according to equation A.9.4-1, for an acceleration xa equal to AI
to .
A.9.4.9 — TYPES OF ANCHORAGE ACCORDING TO THE VALUE OF Rp ALLOWED FOR THE NON ELEMENT
STRUCTURAL — The anchoring systems of non-structural elements must have energy dissipation capacity in the inelastic
range and ductility compatible with the minimum level of Rp required for the non-structural element. Some of the types of
anchorage used in the medium and their degree of acceptability for the different values of Rp are indicated below :
A.9.4.9.1 — Specials ( ) R 6 p = — These are anchorages designed following Title F requirements for
structural steel structures for special dissipation capacity (DES). All the requirements given there must be met to
allow this value of Rp .
A.9.4.9.2 — Ductiles ( ) Rp6= — When the anchorage is carried out by means of deep anchorages that use
chemical (epoxy), cast-in-place deep anchors, or cast-in-place anchors that meet the requirements of Chapter
C.21. Expansion bolts or anchors placed by explosive means (shots) are not allowed. Deep anchors are those in
which the ratio between the embedded portion and the diameter of the bolt is greater than 8. This type of anchor
must be used when the non-structural element is ductile.
A.9.4.9.3 — Non-ductile ( = — )When anchoring is done by means of expansion bolts, R 1.5 p

surface anchors that use chemicals (epoxy), surface anchors cast in place, or anchors placed by explosive means
(shots). Superficial anchors are those in which the ratio between the embedded portion and the diameter of the
bolt is less than 8. Within this type of anchors are reinforcing steel bars with hooks at the ends that are embedded
within the adhesive mortar. the masonry. This type of anchorage is allowed when the non-structural element is not
ductile. If used in ductile nonstructural members, they must be designed to the same value of R 1.5
= .
p
A.9.4.9.4 — Wet ( )
= — When using mortar, or adhesives that stick directly to R 0.5 p
mortar or concrete, without any type of tensile-resistant mechanical anchorage.
A.9.4.10 — CONNECTION ELEMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS — The connection element is the
attachment that connects the non-structural element with the anchors to the structure. In some cases it is the same anchor
element. The connections that allow movement must be arranged in such a way that there can be relative movement
between the structure and the non-structural element, by means of elongated holes, holes of a larger size than the dowels
or screws, by means of steel elements that flex , or other procedures, but must be capable of withstanding the prescribed
reduced design seismic forces in directions in which movement is not permitted. In façades, the connecting element itself
must be designed to resist a reduced design seismic force equal to 1.33F and all bolts, screws, welds, and dowels that
p
belong to the connection system, they must be designed for 3.0F . p
A.9.5 — FINISHES AND ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS

A.9.5.1—GENERAL —The architectural finishes and elements listed in Table A.9.5-1 and their anchorages to the structure
shall be designed and detailed in accordance with the requirements of this section. The calculations and designs of the
architectural elements and finishes must be included as part of the finishing design reports.
A.9.5.2 — ELEMENTS THAT REQUIRE SPECIAL CARE IN THEIR DESIGN — The seismic behavior of some non-
structural elements represent a particularly serious danger to life and in other cases may
A-91
lead to the failure of critical structural elements, such as columns. These elements include, among others, the following:
(a) Façade walls — Facades must be designed and built so that their components do not disintegrate as a result
of the earthquake, and also the assembly must be adequately tied to the structure so that there is no possibility
of it falling, endangering passers-by at road level. For glazing façade systems see Chapter K4.
(b) Interior walls — Precautions must be taken to prevent tipping of interior walls and
partitions. For glazing façade systems see Chapter K4.
(c) Suspended ceilings — The detachment and fall of subceilings represents a serious hazard to the
people.
(d) Façade veneers - the detachment and fall of the facade veneers represents a serious hazard for passers-by.
The veneers must be considered for their design as a system that involves all its components (support, filler or
plaster mortar, adhesives and veneer).
Special consideration should be given in the design of the movements of the façade system due to temperature
effects, changes in humidity, integrity due to weathering, or deformation of the support.
(e) Attics, parapets, and sills — The same potential hazard exists as frontage walls. When the roof of the building
is made up of tiles or fragile elements, the possibility of the parapet failing inwards, falling on the roof, producing
its failure and endangering the inhabitants of the top floor, must be considered in the design.
(f) Glass - glass breakage generated by the deformation of the window frame represents a danger to people inside
or outside the building. Precautions must be taken to allow sufficient clearance within the glass or window
assembly to prevent breakage or to ensure that breakage occurs safely. The placement of protective films,
tempered glass and triple glass are other alternatives to avoid the danger associated with glass breakage. The
use of safety glass is an alternative to reduce the risk associated with glass breakage. For specifications for
glass, glass products and glazing systems, see Chapter K4.
(g) Precast Façade Panels — When prefabricated façade panels are used, sufficient clearances must be left to
allow deformation of the structure without affecting the panel. In addition, the panel must be adequately
adhered to the structural system of seismic resistance, to avoid its detachment. In case they are made of
glass, see Chapter K4.
(h) Short Columns or Captive Columns — Certain types of interaction between non-structural elements and the
building structure must be avoided at all costs. Within this type of interaction is the case of "short columns" or
"captive columns" in which the column is restricted in its lateral displacement by a non-structural wall that does
not reach the mezzanine slab at the top. In this case, the wall must be separated from the column, or be
brought up to the mezzanine slab in its upper part, if it is left attached to the column.
A.9.5.3 — DESIGN SEISMIC FORCES — Architectural elements and finishes and their anchorages to the structure shall
be designed to resist the reduced design seismic forces determined by Equation A.9.4-1, using the coefficients given in the
table A.9.5-1.
A.9.5.4 — WIND FORCES — When wind forces, positive or negative, exceed 0.7F for nonstructural façade walls, these
p
forces shall be those used in the design of the nonstructural element, and its anchorages shall be designed to resist 1.4
times the wind forces.
A.9.5.5 — ANCHORAGE OF FACADES — The anchorages and ties of the non-structural walls of the façade, to the
building structure and to the interior walls, must be capable of resisting the reduced design seismic forces obtained through
the equation A.9.4-1 and must also have sufficient ductility and rotation capacity to accept displacements, in each story,
between its base and the top, equal to the design drift, calculated in accordance with the requirements of Chapter A. 6.
The wall must be capable of resisting flexure imposed by the reduced design seismic forces acting in a direction
perpendicular to the plane of the wall.
A-92
A.9.5.6 — DEFORMATION CAPACITY — The finishes and architectural elements must be capable of resisting, with the
level of damage acceptable for the corresponding performance grade, the deformations dictated by drift, calculated in
accordance with the requirements of Chapter A. .6. In non-structural and finished elements placed on cantilevered
structural elements, the vertical deflection caused by rotation at the cantilever support must be taken into account.
A.9.5.7 — SEISMIC FORCES IN THE DIRECTION PERPENDICULAR TO THE PLANE OF THE NON-STRUCTURAL
WALL — In the design of non-structural walls for seismic forces perpendicular to the plane of the wall, it must be verified
that the deflections of the wall caused by these forces do not exceed the capacity deformation of the wall.
A.9.5.8 — FLAT CEILINGS — The interaction of architectural, hydraulic, mechanical, and electrical elements incorporated
within the ceiling must be considered in the design of ceiling systems.
TABLE A.9.5-1
Dynamic amplification coefficient, pa , and type of anchors or ties required, used to determine the energy
dissipation capacity coefficient, Rp , for architectural elements and finishes
Type of anchors or moorings to determine the

coefficient of energy dissipation capacity,
non-structural element pa Rp , minimumrequired in A.9.4.9
performance grade
Superior Well Low
Facades •
precast panels supported above and below • in glass 1.0 ductile not ductile not ductile
supported above and below • plaster 1.0 ductile not ductile not ductile
sheet, with steel ribs • reinforced masonry, 1.0 not ductile not ductile not ductile
laterally separated from the structure, supported above and 1.0 ductile not ductile not ductile
below • reinforced masonry, laterally
separated from the structure, supported only below • 2.5 ductile not ductile not ductile
unreinforced masonry, laterally
separated from structure, supported above and below • 1.0 This type of non-structural Non-ductile(1)
unreinforced masonry, laterally separated element is not allowed
from structure, supported only below • unreinforced masonry, 2.5 This type of non-structural Non-ductile(1)
confined by structure element is not allowed
1.0 This type of non-structural Non-ductile(2)
element is not allowed
Walls that enclose fixed points and ducts for stairs, elevators, 1.0 ductile not ductile Wet(1)
and others
Dividing walls and partitions •
corridors in public areas • full-height 1.0 ductile not ductile Wet(1)
dividing walls 1.0 not ductile not ductile Wet(1)
• partial height partition walls 2.5 not ductile not ductile Wet(1)
Vertical Cantilever Elements
• attics, parapets and chimneys 2.5 ductile not ductile not ductile
Facade veneer anchoring 1.0 ductile not ductile wet
1.5 ductile not ductile not ductile
Mezzanines 1.0 not ductile not ductile Not required(3)
Low ceilings Shelves, shelves and bookcases over 2.50 m
high, including content • Designed
in accordance with Title F 2.5 specials ductile Not required(3)
• Other 2.5 ductile not ductile Not required(3)
Tiles 1.0 not ductile not ductile Not required(3)
Notes:
1. It must be verified that the wall does not lose its integrity when subjected to the maximum drift calculated for the structure.
2. In addition to (1) it must be verified that it does not adversely interact with the structure.
3. The non-structural element does not require design and seismic verification.
4. In the design, manufacture and supervision of the assembly of racking systems, the applicable guidelines established in the
Section A.1.3.4 for its structural design, and the other conditions stipulated in this regard in Title F.
A-93
A.9.6 — HYDRAULIC, SANITARY, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

A.9.6.1—GENERAL —The nonstructural elements listed in Table A.9.6-1 and their anchorages to the structure shall be
designed and detailed in accordance with the requirements of this section. The calculations and designs of the elements
of hydraulic, sanitary, mechanical and electrical installations must be included as part of the design reports of each one
of the systems. An analysis of the support mechanism of its components, in accordance with established principles of
structural dynamics, can be made to justify a reduction of the forces determined in A.9.6.2. Combined stress states such
as tension and shear in anchor bolts should be investigated in accordance with established principles of structural
mechanics.
A.9.6.2—DESIGN SEISMIC FORCES —Hydraulic, mechanical, and electrical components and their anchorages shall be
designed for reduced design seismic forces determined by Equation A.9.4-1, using the coefficients given in Table A.
9.6-1.
A.9.6.3 — SUPPORTS — The support systems must be designed for the reduced design seismic forces defined in
A.9.6.2 and in accordance with the corresponding requirements of the structural material of the support, as established
in the corresponding Title. to the structural material. The supports must be capable of resisting the displacements of the
structure induced by seismic movements, calculated according to the requirements of Chapter A.6.
A.9.6.4 — UTILITY TIPS — Flexible connections shall be provided at utility ties in all cases where the ties are located
where the structure can be moved relative to the ground. ground as a result of seismic movements. The flexible tie must
be able to resist, without damage, displacements calculated as indicated in Chapter A.6.
A.9.6.5 — AUTOMATIC SWITCHES — In the ties with the public electricity and gas service networks, in buildings that
belong to use group IV, located in zones of intermediate and high seismic threat, they must be placed, on the side of the
building, an automatic switch. The circuit breaker should be activated when a horizontal ground acceleration greater than
0.5A occurs . to
A.9.6.6 — ELEVATORS IN BUILDINGS OF USE GROUP IV — In buildings of use group IV located in areas of high
seismic threat, the design, construction, and assembly of elevators must be carried out in compliance with the
requirements of the ANSI/ ASME A.17.1 "American National Standard Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators,"
including Appendix F.
A-94
TABLE A.9.6-1
Coefficient of dynamic amplification, pa , and type of anchors or moorings required, used to determine the
coefficient of energy dissipation capacity, Rp , for hydraulic, mechanical or electrical elementsa
Type of anchors or moorings to determine the

coefficient of energy dissipation capacity,
b
non-structural element pa Rp , minimumrequired in A.9.4.9
performance grade
Superior Well Low
Fire protection systems 2.5 ductile not ductile not ductile
emergency power plants 1.0 not ductile not ductile Not requiredg
Elevator machinery, elevator guides and rails and 1.0 ductile not ductile Not requiredg
counterweight
Equipment in
general • Boilers, furnaces, incinerators, water heaters,
water and other fuel-using equipment, and their
chimneys and exhausts.
• Communication systems
• Electrical ducts, cable glands and cable traysc • Electrical 1.0 ductile not ductile Not requiredg
equipment, transformers, substations, motors, etc. • Hydraulic
pumps •
Tanks, condensers, heat
exchangers, pressure equipment • Ties with utility networks
Industrial production
machinery Piping systems
1.0 ductile not ductile wet
• Gas and fuel pipes • Fire system pipes 2.5 ductile not ductile not ductile
2.5 ductile not ductile not ductile
• Other piping systemsd Air 2.5 Non-ductile Not requiredg Not requiredg
conditioning, heating and ventilation systems, and their ductse 1.0 ductile not ductile Not requiredg
Control panels and electrical cabinets not ductile not ductile Not requiredg
Luminaires and lighting systemsf 1.0 not ductile not ductile Not requiredg
Notes:
(a) See exemptions in A.9.1.3. (b)
The values of p given are for the horizontal component. For the vertical component they must be increased by 33%.
(c) There is no need to provide seismic supports for electrical cable trays in the following situations: (1) Ducts and cable trays hung from individual
supports that are 300 mm or less in length. (2) In spaces for mechanical equipment and boilers, where the duct is less than 30 mm inside diameter.
(3) Any electrical conduit of less than 65 mm internal diameter, located in other spaces.
(d) There is no need to provide seismic supports for pipelines in the following situations: (1) Pipes hung from individual supports that are 300 mm or
less in length. (2) In spaces for mechanical equipment and boilers, where the piping is less than 30 mm inside diameter. (3) Any pipe less than 65
mm inside diameter, located in other spaces.
(e) There is no need to provide seismic supports for heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts in the following situations: (1) Ducts hung from
individual supports that are 300 mm or less in length. (2) Ducts that have a section with an area of less than 0.60 m².
(f) Luminaires arranged as pendulums must be designed using a value of pa equal to 1.5. The vertical support must be designed with a
factor of safety equal to 4.0. (g)
The non-structural element does not require design and seismic verification.
A-95
Grades:
A-96
NSR-10 — Chapter A.10 — Evaluation and Intervention of Buildings built before the
validity of this version of the Regulation
CHAPTER A.10
EVALUATION AND INTERVENTION OF BUILDINGS
CONSTRUCTED BEFORE THE VALIDITY OF
THE PRESENT VERSION OF THE REGULATION
Aa = coefficient representing the effective peak horizontal acceleration for design, according to A.2.2.
Ae = coefficient representing the reduced effective peak acceleration for design with limited safety, given
in A.10.3.
Av = acceleration coefficient that represents the effective peak horizontal velocity for design, according to
A.2.2.
AND
= reduced seismic forces for revision of the existing structure and design of the extension (E FR = ÿ) . = yes
Fs equivalent seismic forces, see A.10.4.2.5.

Nef = effective resistance.
Nex = existing resistance.

R = coefficient of energy dissipation capacity to be used in the design, corresponds to the basic energy dissipation
coefficient, R0 , multiplied by the coefficients of reduction of energy dissipation capacity due to irregularities
in height, in plan and due to the absence of redundancy

ÿ ÿ ÿ0 ) . See Chapter A.3.
Rÿ = coefficient of energy dissipation capacity that is assigned to the existing building according to
with what is prescribed in Chapter A.10.
aÿ = coefficient of reduction of the energy dissipation capacity caused by irregularities in height of
cÿ = resistance reduction coefficient due to the quality of the design and construction of the structure. see
A.10.4.3.4.
eÿ = coefficient of resistance reduction by state of the structure. See A.10.4.3.4. = coefficient
pÿ of reduction of the energy dissipation capacity caused by irregularities in plant
of the building. See A.3.3.3. =
rÿ coefficient of reduction of power dissipation capacity caused by lack of redundancy
in the structural system of seismic resistance. See A.3.3.8.
A.10.1 — PURPOSE AND SCOPE

A.10.1.1 — GENERAL — This Chapter establishes the criteria and procedures that must be followed to assess seismic
vulnerability and add, modify or remodel the structural system of existing buildings designed and built prior to the validity
of this version of the Colombian Regulation of Seismic Resistant Constructions.
A.10.1.2 — PURPOSE — A building that is intervened following the requirements presented here must be able to resist
small tremors without damage, moderate tremors without structural damage, but with some damage to non-structural
elements, and strong tremors without collapse.
A.10.1.3 — SCOPE — The requirements given in this Chapter must be used to carry out the evaluation of the seismic
behavior and the design of the intervention, repair or reinforcement of the existing building structure before the validity of
this version. of the Colombian Regulation of Seismic Resistant Constructions that are modified or rehabilitated in the
national territory.
A-97
A.10.1.3.1 — Minor repairs and changes — The structural system of the building is considered unchanged when
minor repairs and changes are made that do not affect the seismic resistance system or the structural integrity of
the building. In this case there is no need to carry out the studies referred to in this Chapter, with the exception
noted in A.10.1.3.2.
A.10.1.3.2 — Change of use — When the use of a building is modified, even in the cases mentioned in A.10.1.3.1,
understanding the change of use as a modification according to urban regulations (from residential to multifamily,
of any of them to commercial, among others), as well as a change from one of the Use Groups described in A.2.5.1
to a higher one within that numeral, the implications caused by this change of use must be evaluated, in the event
of vertical loads , horizontal forces and especially before seismic effects.
A.10.1.3.3 — Seismic vulnerability — The criteria presented in this Chapter can be used in the diagnosis or
evaluation of the seismic vulnerability of existing buildings before the validity of this version of the Regulation.
A.10.1.3.4 — Modifications — The criteria presented in this Chapter must be used for the design and construction
of attached extensions or height extensions, updates to the regulations and/or alterations, understood as any
construction or renovation of a construction other than a extension.
A.10.1.3.5 — Structural reinforcement — The requirements of Chapter A.10 and especially those of A.10.9 must
be used in updating and seismic rehabilitation of existing buildings.
A.10.1.3.6 — Repair of buildings damaged by earthquakes — The requirements of Chapter A.10 and especially
those of A.10.10 must be used in the repair of buildings that have suffered moderate to severe damage to their
structure, or moderate damage to severe in their non-structural elements, or both, and that have not been
designated as mandatory total demolition by the competent authority or by the census carried out for that purpose
after the occurrence of the earthquake, as the case may be.
A.10.1.4 — INTERVENTION EVALUATION PROCEDURE — In applying this Chapter, the following stages must be
followed:
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
Stage 1 — It should be verified that the intervention is covered by the scope given in A.10.1.3.
Stage 2 — Existing information about the geotechnical and structural design as well as the construction process of
the original building and its subsequent modifications must be collected and studied and explorations must be
carried out in the building, all in accordance with A.10.2.
Stage 3 — The condition of the structural system must be qualified with respect to: (a) the quality of the design of
the original structure and its foundation system and of its construction and (b) the state of maintenance and
conservation. This qualification must be done in accordance with the requirements of A.10.2.
EVALUATION OF THE EXISTING STRUCTURE
Step 4 — Equivalent stresses must be determined in accordance with the requirements of A.10.4.2.
Stage 5 — An elastic analysis of the structure and its foundation system must be carried out for the equivalent
forces defined in Stage 4.
Step 6 — The existing strength of the structure shall be determined using the requirements of A.10.4.3.3.
Stage 7 — An effective resistance of the structure must be obtained, starting from the existing resistance, affecting
it by two resistance reduction coefficients obtained from the results of the qualification carried out in Stage 3.
Stage 8 — An overstress index must be determined as the maximum quotient obtained for any element or section
thereof, between the requested internal forces obtained from the structural analysis carried out
A-98
in Stage 5 for the equivalent forces defined in Stage 4 and the effective resistance obtained in Stage 7.
Step 9 — Using the horizontal displacements obtained in the analysis of Step 5, the drifts of the structure should be
obtained.
Stage 10 — A flexibility index for horizontal effects must be determined as the maximum quotient between the drifts
obtained in Stage 9 and the drifts allowed by the Regulations in Chapter A.6.
Likewise, a flexibility index for vertical effects must be determined as the maximum quotient between the vertical
deflections measured in the building and the deflections allowed by this Regulation.
INTERVENTION OF THE STRUCTURAL SYSTEM
Stage 11 — The structural intervention must be defined according to the type of modification established in A.10.6
within one of three categories: (a) Attached extensions, (b) Height extensions and (c)
Update to the Regulation.
Stage 12 — The set must be reanalyzed including the proposed intervention, which must be designed for the forces
and efforts obtained from this reanalysis. The geotechnical and structural design and the construction must be carried
out in accordance with the requirements established for each type of modification in this Chapter.
A.10.1.5 — CALCULATIONS, REPORTS AND PLANS — A report justifying the calculations must be drawn up, in which the
following aspects must be clearly stated:
(a) A list of the design and construction documents of the original building that were used in the evaluation and design
of the modifications, such as: architectural and structural plans, calculation reports, soil studies and foundation
design, records audit, work books, personal consultations with professionals who participated in the design or
construction, etc. (b) A description of the evaluation of the current state of the building and its foundation
system
carried out as required by A.10.2.
(c) A very clear description justifying the definition of the evaluation and design parameters that
They come from the study of the current situation of the building.
(d) Calculation report of the design of the modification to the structure with the corresponding justification that the final
structure will have the expected resistance and behavior, when acting together with the original structure.
(e) The other appropriate documents, in the opinion of the designer, of those required by this Regulation
for new buildings.
A.10.1.5.1 — This report must be signed by a duly registered Civil Engineer, who meets the conditions established in
Articles 26 and 27 of Law 400 of 1997.
A.10.1.6 — TECHNICAL SUPERVISION — The construction of the existing structural system intervention must be submitted,
in all cases, to a technical supervision within the scope given in Title I of these Regulations.
A.10.1.6.1 — The Technical Supervisor must record in the supervision records that the hypotheses on which the
designer relied were confirmed on site. In the event of discrepancies, there must be a written record that the designer
was informed of them and of the corrective actions that he set.
A.10.1.7 — JUDGMENT AND RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ENGINEER — The type of design referred to in its scope in this
document requires the best judgment and experience on the part of the engineer who carries it out, since the designer is
responsible, within of the same scope that this responsibility has in the present Regulation, of the correct application of the
requirements of the Regulation and of the behavior of the building in the future.
A-99
A.10.2 — REQUIRED STUDIES AND INVESTIGATIONS

A.10.2.1 — PRIOR INFORMATION — Investigations must be carried out on the existing construction, tending to
determine the following aspects about it:
(a) When descriptive documents of the design of the structure and its original foundation system are available,
their concordance with the construction as it is at the moment must be verified on the site. Explorations must
be carried out in representative places and the scope of these explorations must be recorded. (b) The quality
of construction of
the original structure must be determined in a qualitative manner. (c) The state of conservation of the
structure must be assessed in a qualitative way. (d) The structure must be investigated to
determine its condition through evidence of local failures, excessive deflections, reinforcement corrosion, and
other indications of its behavior. (e) The occurrence of foundation settlements and their
effect on the structure should be investigated. (f) The possible occurrence in the past of extraordinary
events that may have affected the integrity of the structure, due to an explosion, fire, earthquake, previous
remodeling, placement of finishes that have increased loads, and other modifications, must be determined.
A.10.2.2 — CONDITION OF THE STRUCTURAL SYSTEM — The condition of the building's structural system must be
qualified in a fully qualitative manner based on the quality of the design and construction of the original structure and its
current condition. This qualification must be carried out in the manner prescribed below:
A.10.2.2.1 — Quality of Original Structure Design and Construction — This rating is defined in terms of the
best existing technology at the time the building was built. In this regard, information such as construction
inspection records and tests carried out especially for this can be used. Within the qualification, the potential for
bad behavior of the building due to irregular distribution of mass or rigidity, absence of diaphragms, anchors,
moorings and other necessary elements to guarantee its good behavior in the face of different solicitations must
be taken into account. The design and construction quality of the original structure should be rated as good, fair,
or poor.
A.10.2.2.2 — State of the structure — A qualification of the current state of the building structure must be made,
based on aspects such as: earthquakes that may have affected it, cracking due to temperature changes,
reinforcement corrosion, settlements differentials, reforms, excessive deflections, state of union elements and
other aspects that allow determining their current state. The state of the existing structure must be qualified as
good, regular or bad.
A.10.3 — DESIGN SEISMIC MOVEMENTS WITH LIMITED SAFETY

A.10.3.1 — For situations when, according to A.10.9, this Regulation allows it for the purposes of evaluation and
intervention of existing buildings, the design seismic movements with limited safety are defined for a twenty percent
probability of being exceeded in a period of fifty years, based on the reduced effective peak acceleration, represented by
the parameter Ae. The value of this coefficient, for the purposes of this Regulation, must be determined in accordance
with A.10.3.2 and A.10.3.3. Limited safety design earthquakes are not applicable to new buildings and cannot be used in
the design of new buildings under any circumstances.
A.10.3.2 — Determine the region number where the building is located using the map in Figure A.10.3-1. The value of
Ae is obtained from table A.10.3-1, depending on the number of the region, or for the capital cities of the department
using table A.10.3-2 and for the municipalities of the country in Appendix A-4 , included at the end of this Title.
A-100
NSR-10 — Chapter A.10 — Evaluation and Intervention of Buildings built before the validity of this
version of the Regulation
Table A.10.3-1
Value of Ae according to the regions
of the maps of figure A.10-3-1
Region No. oh
7 0.25 – 0.28
6 0.21 – 0.24
5 0.17 – 0.20
4 0.13 – 0.16
0.09 – 0.12
0.05 – 0.08
0.00 – 0.04
3 2 1 Note: Regions represent
ranges of values. Appendix A-4
should be consulted to determine
the value of Ae in each municipality.
Table A.10.3-2
Value of Ae for departmental capital cities
City oh City oh
arauca 0.10 Neiva 0.20
Armenia 0.15 Grass 0.15
Barranquilla 0.05 Pereira 0.20
Bogota 0.13 Popayan 0.15
Bucaramanga 0.15 Puerto Carreno 0.04
Cali 0.15 Puerto Inirida 0.04
Cartagena 0.05 Quibdó 0.25
cucuta 0.25 riohacha 0.07
Florence 0.10 San Andres, Island 0.05
ibagué 0.15 San Jose del Guaviare 0.04
Leticia 0.04 Santa Marta 0.10
Manizales 0.20 sincelejo 0.07
Medellin 0.13 Tunja 0.15
My you 0.04 Valledupar 0.05
runny 0.20 Villavicencio 0.20
Hunting 0.07 Yopal 0.15
A-101
Figure A.10.3-1 — Map of Ae values

Note: Regions represent ranges of values. Appendix A-4 should be consulted to determine the value of Ae
in each municipality.
A-102
A.10.3.3 — Alternatively, when the municipality or district carries out a seismic microzoning study, or has a local
accelerographic network, based on the microzoning study or on the records obtained, it is possible to modify, by means of
an agreement municipal, the value of Ae , with respect to the values given here, but in no case may this value be less than
that given in this Regulation. See A.2.9.3.6.
A.10.3.4 — The shape of the design spectra for the evaluation and intervention of existing buildings with limited safety is
obtained from section A.2.6, substituting there the values of Aa and Av for the value of Ae given in A. .10.3.2 and A.10.3.3.
A.10.3.5 — When conducting a particular site survey and using the limited safety design procedure, the requirements of
A.2.10.2.6 shall be met.
A.10.4 — EVALUATION CRITERIA FOR THE EXISTING STRUCTURE

A.10.4.1 — GENERAL — It must be determined if the building in its current state is capable of adequately resisting the
loads prescribed by this Regulation.
A.10.4.2 — EQUIVALENT REQUESTS — An equivalence must be established between the requirements prescribed by
this Regulation and those that the structure is able to resist in its current state. In this regard, the following criteria should be
used:
A.10.4.2.1 — Seismic movements for a security level equivalent to that of a new building — The design
seismic movements prescribed in Chapter A.2 must be used for the place where the building is located, for the Use
Group that it will have once the modification is carried out, in order to analyze the structure as if it were a new
building.
A.10.4.2.2 — Seismic movements for a limited safety level — The design seismic movements prescribed by
A.10.3 must be used for the place where the building is located, for the Use Group that it will have once it is
installed. carry out the modification, when according to A.10.9 this Regulation explicitly allows the analysis of the
structure to be carried out for a limited level of security.
A.10.4.2.3 — Classification of the structural system — The structural system must be classified within one of
the structural systems defined in Chapter A.3.
A.10.4.2.4 — Energy dissipation capacity coefficient, Rÿ — According to the structural system to which the
building corresponds and the construction and design requirements that have been followed in the execution of the
original structure, a value must be assigned of the dissipation capacity coefficient, which will be called Rÿ in this
energy, RR R( apr
=ÿ0ÿdone
, ÿbe ) Chapter. The assignment must
according to the information available about the structure.
(a) When good information on the original design is available, such as plans and memories, it is allowed,
according to the best judgment of the engineer carrying out the evaluation, to determine a value of the
coefficient of energy dissipation capacity, Rÿ , by comparison with the requirements that the Regulation
sets for the material and the structural system. The selection of the energy dissipation capacity
,
coefficient, Rÿ when there is partial compliance with the requirements, can be approximated by
interpolating between the values of R given in Chapter A.3.
(b) When good information on the original design is not available, or it is incomplete or fragmentary, the
engineer carrying out the evaluation must define a value of Rÿ according to his best judgment. This
value cannot be greater than the value established in Chapter A.3 for the same structural system and
the same material.
(c) When there is no type of information, it is allowed to use a value of Rÿ corresponding to three quarters
of the value established in Chapter A.3 for the same structural system and the same material. The
value thus obtained need not be less than unity.
A-103
(d) In the case of unreinforced masonry buildings, the value of the coefficient must be equal to unity.
power dissipation capacity, Rÿ ,
A.10.4.2.5 — Seismic forces — The seismic forces, Fs, that the design earthquake imposes on the building shall
be determined by means of the equivalent horizontal force method, as prescribed in Chapter A.4. These seismic
forces must be distributed in height according to the same method as the equivalent horizontal force. The dynamic
analysis method given in Chapter A.5 is permitted if, in the judgment of the designer, there is sufficient information
to permit its use.
A.10.4.2.6 — Loads other than seismic solicitations — Other solicitations other than seismic solicitations must
be determined following the requirements of Title B, with the exception of dead loads, which must be evaluated
based on field observations and measurements. The dead loads in no case, for purposes of determining the
equivalent solicitations, can be less than those prescribed in Title B.
A.10.4.2.7 — Structural analysis — In order to determine the internal forces and stresses of the structure, a
structural analysis must be carried out by means of one of the mathematical models allowed by this Regulation.
A.10.4.2.8 — Obtaining the equivalent forces — The different forces that must be taken into account are
combined to obtain the equivalent internal forces that are used in the evaluation of the existing structure. This
combination must be carried out in accordance with the requirements of Chapter B.2 of the Regulation, by the
design method of each structural material. In each of the required load combinations, the stresses are multiplied by
the load coefficient prescribed for that combination in Chapter B.2 of the Regulations. In the effects caused by the
design earthquake, the energy dissipation capacity of the structural system is taken into account, which is achieved
using reduced revision seismic effects, E, obtained by dividing the seismic forces FS , by the coefficient of ÿ ( =
ÿ) . energy dissipation capacity RE FR
S
A.10.4.3 — RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN DEMAND AND CAPACITY — Some overstress and flexibility indices must be
determined, which make it possible to define the capacity of the existing structure to support and adequately respond to the
equivalent demands defined in A.10.4.2.
A.10.4.3.1 — Definition of the overstress index — The overstress index is expressed as the quotient between
the equivalent forces, calculated according to A.10.4.2, and the effective resistance.
It has two meanings:
(a) Index of overstress of the elements — which refers to the index of overstress of
each of the individual structural elements, and
(b) Overstress index of the structure — when determined for the entire structure, evaluating the elements
with a higher individual overstress index and taking into account their importance within the general
resistance of the structure as a whole.
A.10.4.3.2 — Determination of the overstress index — For all the elements of the structure and for all the effects
such as shear, bending, torsion, etc., the force or effort that is required must be divided by applying the equivalent
requests , factored in accordance with the procedure given in Title B of the Regulations and for the load combinations
given therein, by the effective resistance of the element. The overstress index for the entire structure will correspond
to the highest value obtained from these ratios, among the elements that may endanger the general stability of the
building.
A.10.4.3.3— Existing Strength of Elements —The existing strength of structural elements, Nex , shall be
determined by the evaluating engineer based on available information and using his or her best judgment and
experience. By resistance we define the level of force or stress at which the element stops responding in the elastic
range or the level at which brittle materials reach their maximum resistance or the level at which ductile materials
begin to flow. In general, the existing resistance corresponds to the values obtained for each structural material by
applying the resistance models prescribed by the Regulation in the corresponding titles.
A-104
A.10.4.3.4 — Effective resistance — The effective resistance Nef of the elements, or of the structure in general,
must be evaluated as the product of the existing resistance Nex , multiplied by the resistance reduction coefficients
cÿ and eÿ , thus:
Nef = ÿc ÿe Nex (A.10-1)
where cÿ and eÿ are assigned the value given in Table A.10.4-1, depending on the qualification of the quality and
condition of the structure defined in A.10.2.2.1 and A.10.2.2.2.
Table A.10.4-1
Values of cÿ and eÿ
Quality of design and construction, or

condition of the building
Good Regular Bad 0.8
cÿ or eÿ 1.0 0.6
A.10.4.3.5 — Definition of the flexibility index — A flexibility index must be determined, which indicates the
susceptibility of the structure to have excessive deflections or drifts, with respect to those allowed by the
Regulations. It has two meanings:
(a) Floor flexibility index — which is defined as the quotient between the deflection or drift obtained from
the analysis of the structure, and that allowed by the Regulations, for each of the floors of the building,
and
(b) Flexibility index of the structure — defined as the highest value of the floor flexibility indices of the
entire structure. It should be evaluated for vertical deflections and for drifts.
A.10.4.4 — ALTERNATE METHODOLOGIES — For the evaluation of existing buildings, instead of what is prescribed in
A.10.4, as long as the resistance and functional capacity criteria established in A.10.9 are guaranteed, the alternative use
of of the recommendations presented in the following documents:
(a) “Seismic Evaluation of Existing Buildings”, ASCE/SEI 31-03, American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston,
Virginia, USA, 2003.
(b) “Seismic Evaluation and Retrofit of Concrete Buildings”, ATC-40, Vol 1, Appendices, Vol 2, Applied Technology
Council, Redwood City, CA, USA, 1996. (c) "NEHRP
Handbook for Seismic Evaluation of Existing Buildings ”, FEMA 178, Federal Emergency
Management Agency / Building Seismic Safety Council, Washington, DC, USA, 1992
A.10.5 — VULNERABILITY ANALYSIS

A.10.5.1 — GENERAL — The seismic vulnerability analysis of an existing building consists of the following aspects:
(a) Determination of the individual overstress rates of all the structural elements of the building, considering the
relationships between the seismic stress demand and the ability to resist them,
(b) Formulation of a building failure sequence hypothesis based on the line of least resistance, identifying the
incidence of progressive failure of the elements, starting with those with a higher overstress index,
(c) Definition of a general overstress index of the building, defined based on the results of (b). The inverse of the
general overstress index expresses the vulnerability of the building as a fraction of the resistance that a new
building would have built in accordance with the requirements of this version of the Regulation, and
A-105
NSR-10 — Chapter A.10 — Evaluation and Intervention of Buildings built before the validity
of this version of the Regulation
(d) Obtaining a general flexibility index of the building, defined based on the procedure defined in A.10.4.3.5. The inverse
of the general flexibility index expresses the seismic vulnerability of the building as a fraction of the stiffness that a
new building would have, built in accordance with the requirements of this version of the Regulation.
A.10.5.2 — ESSENTIAL BUILDINGS — In addition to what is indicated in A.10.5.1, the verification of the seismic vulnerability of
existing essential buildings must include at least the following aspects:
(a) Identify the influence of the design seismic movements of Chapter A.2, and of the movements
seismic corresponding to the damage threshold of Chapter A.12,
(b) Determine the basal resistant shear of the building as a whole, either by bending or by shear forces, taking into
account the different possible collapse mechanisms. This evaluation can be performed using the procedure defined
in Appendix A-3. This verification can be carried out for the distribution, in the height of the building, of the horizontal
seismic forces prescribed by the equivalent horizontal force method, Chapter A.4, or the dynamic analysis method,
Chapter A.5, and ( c ) It must, by means of adequately supported inelastic methodologies such as the one
presented in Appendix A-3, carry out the identification of the prevailing failure mode, either by bending or by shear. The
value of the energy dissipation capacity coefficient Rÿ to be used must be consistent with the indicated lift, with the
expected stiffness and resistance degradation sequence, and with its influence on the seismic vulnerability of the
building.
A.10.6 — TYPES OF MODIFICATION

The following types of modification to the existing structure are considered:
A.10.6.1 — EXTENSIONS — Covers those buildings where their area is expanded with or without modification in height. They
are divided into:
(a) Attached extension — It is the one in which the area is enlarged without modifying its height. The enlargement should
designed and constructed following the requirements of A.10.7.
(b) Increase in height — It is the one in which the height of the building is modified with or without an increase in the
plan of the built area. The design and construction of this type of extension shall be carried out following the
requirements of A.10.8.
A.10.6.2 — UPDATE TO THE REGULATION — Covers those buildings where there is no extension either in the area or in its
height and where the owner voluntarily wishes to modify the capacity of the structural system so that it is capable of resisting the
stresses required by this version. of the Regulation and thus obtain a better seismic behavior of the building. The update must be
done following the requirements given in A.10.9.
A.10.6.3 — MODIFICATIONS — Covers those constructions or renovations in a building other than an attached extension or in
its height. Modifications are allowed in a construction without requiring validation of the resulting capacity of the structure, to the
extent that the modification itself complies with these regulations and the modification does not increase the seismic request in
any element of the existing structure by more than 10 % or reduce the structural capacity of any element by more than 10%. In
the event that any of these conditions is exceeded, the structural capacity against seismic loads of the entire construction must
be reviewed, including the proposed modification according to the requirements of this Regulation.
A.10.7 — ATTACHED EXTENSION

The following are the requirements that must be met in the design and construction of a semi-detached extension:
A.10.7.1 — NEED FOR INTERVENTION IN THE EXISTING STRUCTURE — When the overstress and flexibility indices of the
existing structure are less than unity, there is no need to intervene in the existing structural system, as long as the new portion of
the building is separate from the old one with an appropriate gasket in accordance with the requirements of Chapter A.6 of the
Regulations. In this case the new portion should
A-106
designed and built in accordance with the requirements of the Regulations for new buildings.
A.10.7.1.1 — In those cases in which for the existing building the overstress index or the flexibility index is greater
than unity, there is a need to intervene in the structural system of the existing portion up to the point in which the
overstress index and that of flexibility are less than unity, even in those cases in which the old portion is separated
from the new one by means of a joint.
A.10.7.2 — REQUIRED STRENGTH AND OPERATIONAL CAPACITY — The building resulting from the modification,
including the new and the old part, must be reanalyzed and the new structural elements must be designed in such a way
that the building is left with an index of overexertion and a flexibility index less than unity.
A.10.7.2.1 — When the new portion is separated from the existing portion by means of an appropriate joint, the
new portion must be designed in its entirety following the requirements of the Code. The existing portion must be
modified in such a way that its overstrain index and its flexibility index are less than or equal to unity. Only in
those cases in which the construction license for the extension does not cover the old portion, this portion can
be left without intervention and the fact that this portion was not intervened must be clearly marked on the plans
and documents, and that therefore its expected behavior may be different from the new slice.
A.10.7.2.2 — When the two buildings, old and new, work together in response to the required stresses, the
horizontal forces must be distributed in proportion to the relative stiffness of the two portions, taking special care
to avoid harmful torsional effects when joining the portions. old and new building. The designer must demonstrate
that the torsional effect was taken into account. When the old portion is adequately intervened, it is allowed to
modify the value of Rÿ as well as the classification of the state of the building and use the new value of the
coefficient of resistance reduction by state of the building, eÿ in the calculation of the overstress index .
A.10.7.3 — CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS — The new portion must be designed and built following the
requirements for the material and the structural system that the Regulations establish for the seismic hazard zone where
the building is located.
A.10.7.4 — EFFECTS ON THE FOUNDATION — It must be demonstrated that the foundation of the new portion does
not affect the foundation of the old part and that the whole will behave adequately from the point of view of settlements
and bearing capacity of the soil. In those cases in which the old foundation must support loads from the new portion, an
exploration of the old foundation must be carried out, supervised by a geotechnical engineer, demonstrating that there is
adequate capacity to resist the new loads imposed without harmful effects. .
A.10.8 — HEIGHT EXTENSION

The following are the requirements that must be met in the design and construction of height extensions:
A.10.8.1 — WORKING TOGETHER — In this type of modification, the two portions of the building work together for both
horizontal forces and vertical loads, therefore, all analysis and design must take into account the portion in an integrated
manner. old and the new portion; and all the necessary precautions must be taken so that the joint action occurs,
arranging suitable lanyards.
A.10.8.2 — REQUIRED RESISTANCE AND OPERATIONAL CAPACITY — The building as a whole must be analyzed
again and, using the forces and stresses obtained from this new analysis, it must be demonstrated that it is capable of
resisting the stresses required by the Regulations for both vertical loads and for horizontal forces. In addition, it must be
demonstrated that the foundation, including the modifications made to it, is capable of resisting the loads established by
the Regulations. The resistance must be evaluated according to the following:
A.10.8.2.1 — Vertical loads — The entire structure must be capable of resisting the vertical loads established
by the Regulations. The resistance used in the evaluation of the elements of the old portion cannot be taken to a
value greater than the effective resistance calculated in accordance with A.10.4.3.4.
For the purposes of this evaluation, the coefficient of resistance reduction by state of the structure, eÿ ,
A-107
it can be updated to the level of the state that is obtained after the intervention.
A.10.8.2.2 — Horizontal Forces — Seismic forces shall be determined using the same coefficient of energy
dissipation capacity, Rÿ used in the determination of the overstress, index, calculated in accordance with A.10.4.3.4.
These requests must be calculated for the entire building, including the new and the old part. The resistance of the
elements of the old portion cannot exceed the effective resistance evaluated in accordance with the prescriptions of
A.10.4.3.3. For the purposes of this evaluation, the coefficient of resistance reduction due to the state of the
structure, eÿ , can be updated to the level of the state that is obtained after the intervention.
A.10.8.3 — ADDITIONAL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS IN THE OLD PORTION — In the event that when calculating the
overstress or flexibility index for the assembly, it is found that the old portion does not have sufficient resistance or rigidity to
guarantee good behavior , additional elements must be provided that give sufficient strength and stiffness to obtain an
overstress index and a flexibility index less than unity.
A.10.8.4 — SPLICE OF NEW ELEMENTS WITH OLD ELEMENTS — It must be demonstrated by analysis or test that the
splices between new and old elements are capable of transferring the forces resulting from the stresses.
A.10.8.5 — CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS — All new structural elements, placed in the new or old portion, must meet
the requirements for structural material required by the Regulations, for the appropriate degree of energy dissipation capacity.
A.10.8.6 — EFFECTS ON FOUNDATION — The effect of horizontal and vertical forces on the foundation of the structure,
taken together, should be investigated under the supervision of a geotechnical engineer. It must be demonstrated that the
foundation is capable of behaving adequately from the point of view of bearing capacity, settlements and especially for the
overturning effect produced by the horizontal forces working with a new higher height of the building.
A.10.9 — SEISMIC REHABILITATION

The requirements that must be met in the intervention of building structures that must be reinforced or updated to the present
version of the Regulation are established below.
A.10.9.1 — SCOPE — The requirements of this section apply to the following buildings:
(a) Those designated by Law 400 of 1997 and its regulatory decrees, as mandatory updating.
(b) Those that must be reinforced by change of use or modifications that require structural intervention. (c)
Those that have been damaged by earthquakes, and
(d) Those that their owner wishes to update voluntarily, in accordance with these regulations.
A.10.9.2 — RESISTANCE AND OPERATIONAL CAPACITY REQUIRED ACCORDING TO THE USE AND AGE OF THE
BUILDING — The minimum requirements that must be met for seismic reinforcement and rehabilitation are defined below,
according to the use and age of the buildings:
A.10.9.2.1 — Intervention of essential buildings and attention to the community — The design of buildings
belonging to use groups III and IV, as defined by A.2.5, regardless of the time of construction of the building, must
meet the requirements established in A.10.4.2.1, in order to achieve a level of security equivalent to that of a new
building, and in accordance with the criteria and requirements of this Regulation, in such a way that the building,
once intervened, remains with an overexertion index and a flexibility index less than unity. The intervention of non-
structural elements can be limited to façade elements and short or captive columns and those that are in poor
condition and represent a danger to life in the event of an earthquake in the future. In this regard, refer to A.9.5.2. If
the building belonging to use groups III or IV has already been intervened during the validity of the NSR-98
Regulation to comply with it and if the same use group is maintained, it does not necessarily need to be intervened
again for the requirements of this Regulation. .
A-108
A.10.9.2.2 — Intervention of buildings designed and built within the validity of Regulation NSR-98 of Law
400 of 1997 — Structures according to A.10.9.1, designed and built after February 19, 1998, within of the validity
of Law 400 of 1997, they must be intervened complying with the requirements established in A.10.4.2.1 in order to
achieve a level of security equivalent to that of a new building and be treated in accordance with the criteria and
requirements of this Regulation, in such a way that the building, once intervened, is left with an overstress index
and a flexibility index less than unity.
A.10.9.2.3 — Intervention of buildings designed and built within the validity of Decree 1400 of 1984 — In the
intervention of buildings according to A.10.9.1 designed and built after December 1, 1984 and before February 19
of 1998, within the validity of Decree 1400 of 1984, it is allowed to comply with the following requirements,
substituting the corresponding requirements contained in this Regulation:
(a) In the case of designing the intervention complying with the requirements established in A.10.4.2.1, in
order to achieve a level of security equivalent to that of a new building, the flexibility index evaluated
for the repaired building is allowed to reach , without exceeding, values up to 1.5. The overexertion
index cannot exceed unity. (b) Alternatively, the design of the
intervention may be carried out in compliance with the requirements for the level of limited security,
established in A.10.4.2.2, and treated in accordance with the criteria and requirements of this
Regulation, in such a way that the building once intervened, he was left with an overexertion index and
a flexibility index less than unity. This level of limited security will be allowed as long as it is accepted
by the owner and a memorial signed by the structural designer and the owner is included in the
documents submitted to obtain the corresponding licenses and permits, in which it is declared that the
limited security level was used. This memorial must be formalized by public deed at a Notary. (c) The
intervention of non-structural elements may be limited to façade elements and short or captive columns
and those that are in poor
condition and represent a danger to life in the event of an earthquake in the future. In this regard, refer to
A.9.5.2.
A.10.9.2.4 — Intervention of buildings designed and built before the validity of Decree 1400 of 1984 — The
structures according to A.10.9.1, designed and built before December 1, 1984, the date on which the Decree 1400
of 1984, must obtain, as a minimum, when intervened, the level of limited security prescribed in A.10.4.2.2 and be
treated in accordance with the criteria and requirements of this Regulation, in such a way that the building, once
intervened, remains with an overexertion index and a flexibility index less than unity. This level of limited security
will be allowed as long as it is accepted by the owner and a memorial signed by the structural designer and the
owner is included in the documents submitted to obtain the corresponding licenses and permits, in which it is
declared that the limited security level was used. This memorial must be formalized by public deed at a Notary.
A.10.9.2.5 — Buildings declared as historical heritage — In the case of structural interventions in buildings
declared as historical heritage, where there are severe restrictions to achieve a level of security equivalent to that
required by the Regulations for a new building or to that prescribed in A. .10.4.2.2, except in the case of buildings
belonging to use groups III and IV, as defined in A.2.5, a lower level of seismic safety will be allowed as long as this
lower level is justified by the designer engineer. and it is accepted by the owner, including within the documents
that are presented to request the respective construction license, a memorial signed jointly in which the reasons
that motivate the reduction are included, the level of seismic security proposed, and the measures that will be
adopted to restrict access to the general public or the collateral procedures that will be adopted to provide
appropriate security for the occupants. This memorial must be formalized by public deed at a Notary.
A.10.9.3 — CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS — The modification must be carried out in compliance with the
requirements, for the material and structural system of the building, demanded for the degree of energy dissipation capacity
used in the determination of the overstress index of the building existing.
A.10.9.4 — ALTERNATE METHODOLOGIES — Exclusively in building vulnerability assessment
A-109
existing buildings, instead of what is prescribed in A.10.4, as long as the resistance and functional capacity criteria established
in A.10.9 are guaranteed, alternatively, the use of the sections corresponding to the rehabilitation of existing buildings of the
following documents is allowed:
(a) "Seismic Rehabilitation of Existing Buildings", ASCE/SEI 41-06, American Society of Civil Engineers,
Reston, Virginia, USA, 2006.
(b) “Prestandard and Commentary for the Seismic Rehabilitation of Buildings”, American Society of Civil Engineers for
Federal Emergency Management Agency, FEMA 356, Washington, DC, USA, 2000 (c) 'Seismic Evaluation
and Retrofit of Concrete Buildings”, ATC -40, Vol 1, Appendices, Vol 2, Applied Technology Council, Redwood City,
CA, USA, 1996.
A.10.10 — REPAIR OF BUILDINGS DAMAGED BY EARTHQUAKES

A.10.10.1 — GENERAL — After the occurrence of an earthquake, buildings that have suffered moderate to severe damage to
their structure, or moderate to severe damage to their non-structural elements, or both, must be evaluated based on studies
and investigations such as those stipulated in section A.10.10.2, which will make it possible to establish whether it is technically
feasible to advance its repair. This will provide basic criteria to guide the decision of the owner or of the competent authority to,
if applicable, designate the structure for total demolition, or to appeal the demolition decision if it has been taken by the
competent authority or the census that was has been carried out for this purpose, before counting on the referred study. The
repair of those buildings that have not finally been designated as mandatory total demolition must be carried out in accordance
with the requirements and criteria established below:
A.10.10.1.1 — Object — A building repaired in accordance with the requirements established herein, must meet the
very purpose of the earthquake resistance standards as indicated in article 1 of Law 400 of 1997 and in A.1.2.2 of this
Regulation.
A.10.10.1.2 — Scope of repair — According to the type of damage presented, with the exception of buildings in use
groups III and IV , which must comply with the provisions of A.10.9.2.1, the scope of The repair can be approached in
one of the following ways:
1. Damage to non-structural elements, no damage to structural elements — The

repair will be limited to intervening the non-structural elements affected, in accordance with the requirements
of Chapter A.9 of the Regulation.
2. Structural damage attributable to adverse interaction with non-structural elements — The scope of
the repair may be limited to repairing the affected structural elements, eliminating the adverse interaction of
non-structural elements, following the requirements of Chapter A.9.
3. Other types of damage — The scope of the repair will be dictated by the ability to meet the primary
structural objectives of the seismic resistant design of providing adequate resistance to the forces imposed by
the seismic without the structure having excessive horizontal deflections (drifts) when be affected by them. To
guarantee compliance with these objectives, an evaluation of the structure in general must be carried out and,
according to the results of this evaluation, determine the elements of the building that must be intervened,
which in many cases include more than those that simply have to be repaired. The scope of the intervention
must cover at least:
(a) The structural elements that were damaged, (b) The

structural elements of the seismic resistance system necessary to give the minimum required seismic
resistance, (c) The structural elements
of the seismic resistance system necessary to meet the drift requirements, and
(d) The non-structural elements that suffered damage.
A.10.10.1.3 — Occupancy of the building during its repair — The building can be occupied during the execution of
the repair, if the professionals in charge of its design and direction emit a positive concept in this regard, based on the
fact that there is no danger for the life of the occupants.
A-110
A.10.10.2 — STUDIES AND INVESTIGATIONS REQUIRED — In order to establish whether the repair is viable or not, the
studies and investigations described below must be carried out, as a minimum:
A.10.10.2.1 — Damage Assessment and Repair Design Procedure — The procedure in A.10.1.4 shall be
followed, and in steps 11 and 12 the requirements of this section A.10.10 shall be followed. .
A.10.10.2.2 — Information about the structure and its condition — The requirements of A.10.2 shall be followed.
A.10.10.2.3 — Criteria for designing the repair — The criteria that must be used to identify the cause of the
damage and its repair are those established in A.10.4, modified in accordance with what is indicated in A.10.9.2
according to the age of the building. For structural concrete and masonry buildings, in the methodological part for
the evaluation and design of the repair, the use of the recommendations contained in the documents is allowed:
(a) "Evaluation of Earthquake Damaged Concrete and Masonry Wall Buildings — Basic Procedures Manual”,
FEMA 306, Federal Emergency Management Agency, Building Seismic Safety Council, Washington,
DC, USA, 1999. (b) "Evaluation
of Earthquake Damaged Concrete and Masonry Wall Buildings — Technical Resources", FEMA 307,
Federal Emergency Management Agency, Building Seismic Safety Council, Washington, DC, USA,
1999.
(c) "Repair of Earthquake Damaged Concrete and Masonry Wall Buildings. FEMA 308, Federal Emergency
Management Agency, Building Seismic Safety Council, Washington, DC, USA, 1999 (d) "Seismic
Rehabilitation of Existing Buildings”, ASCE/SEI 41- 06, American Society of Civil
Engineers, Reston Virginia, USA, 2006.
A.10.10.2.2 — Calculations, reports and repair plans — The calculations, reports and repair plans must comply
with the requirements of A.10.1.5.
A.10.10.2.3 — Technical supervision — The repair must undergo technical supervision when Law 400 of 1997
and its regulations require it.
A-111
Grades:
A-112
NSR-10 — Chapter A.11 — Seismic instrumentation
CHAPTER A.11
SEISMIC INSTRUMENTATION
A.11.1 — GENERAL
A.11.1.1 — INSTRUMENTATION — This Chapter indicates when seismic instruments should be placed in buildings,
where they should be located, and who bears the costs of the instruments, the space they occupy, and their maintenance
and surveillance. .
A.11.1.2 — ACCELEROGRAPHS — In the seismic instrumentation of buildings, strong motion digital accelerographs
must be used.
(a) Objectives of the instrumentation — Among the objectives of this type of instrumentation is the collection
of records that allow, among others: the measurement of the vibration periods of the building when subjected
to seismic movements, the determination of the level of damage that occurred to the building due to the
occurrence of an earthquake that affects it, the identification of site effects caused by the amplification of
seismic waves due to the underlying soil strata, the degree of attenuation suffered by seismic waves when
travel from the place where the release of energy occurs to the site where the building is located, and in
general the improvement of the knowledge that there is at the national level of seismic phenomena and their
effects on national constructions and construction materials . The valuable information that is collected
through the instrumentation will allow adjustments to the requirements of this Regulation in its future editions;
leading to a reduction in the seismic vulnerability of Colombian buildings, and, very surely, to a reduction in
the costs of providing seismic security to them.
(b) Approval of the type of instrument — INGEOMINAS is the government entity that operates the National
Network of Accelerographs and is in charge of approving the types of instruments that are placed in the
buildings that require them in accordance with the requirements of this Chapter. INGEOMINAS will maintain
a list of the types of instruments that can be used and their minimum specifications to be placed in buildings,
as required by this Chapter. The INGEOMINAS National Network of Accelerographs and whoever designates
the municipal or district authority where the building is located must receive, free of charge and at least once
a year, a copy of the records obtained, regardless of who owns the instrument. . When the municipality or
district where the building is located has, in accordance with A.2.9.3.7(d), developed a plan for the installation,
operation and maintenance of a network of strong motion accelerographs, the municipal or district entity that
manages This network may, if it so desires, assume the functions that are assigned to INGEOMINAS in this
section, to whom it must inform about this decision.
A.11.1.3 — LOCATION — The definition of the location of the accelerographic seismic instruments inside the buildings
is the responsibility of the Engineer who carries out the structural design of the project, following the recommendations
given in this section and in A.11.1.4. The location of the instruments must be included within one of the following types:
(a) Instrumentation at height — A minimum of three instruments are arranged at the height of the building, in
such a way that there is at least one at its base, one at approximately half the height of the building, and one
at the upper level. In this case the instrument placed on the base must have three triaxial sensors with two
orthogonal horizontal components and one vertical component, and the other two instruments can have only
two orthogonal horizontal sensors.
(b) Single Instrument in Building —When a single instrument is placed in the building, it
It should be located at the base of it.
(c) Open Field Instrument —An instrument is placed on the ground, away from the
buildings, at least a distance equal to their height.
(d) Arrangement of instruments — A set of instruments is arranged covering the above locations. In this case,
the instruments must have a device that starts recording accelerations in all of them simultaneously.
A-113
A.11.1.3.1 — In all buildings where seismic instruments are placed, a geotechnical study must be carried out whose
scope allows defining the dynamic properties of the soil on the site.
A.11.1.3.2 — The Curatorships or the entities in charge of issuing construction licenses in accordance with the
requirements of Law 388 of 1997 and its regulatory decrees will refrain from issuing the corresponding construction
license, including those for future remodeling and reinforcements , when in the cases that seismic instrumentation
is required according to this Regulation, the spaces referred to in this Chapter have not been provided in the
architectural project and have not been consigned in the horizontal property regulation of the building, in the case of
co-ownership , the obligations of co-ownership regarding the location, supply, maintenance and surveillance of the
instrument. The competent authority will refrain from issuing the occupancy permit certificate referred to in Article
46 of Decree 564 of 2006 when the instrument or instruments required in accordance with the provisions of this
Chapter of the Regulations have not been installed.
A.11.1.4 — CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SPACE WHERE THE INSTRUMENT IS PLACED — The physical space
where the instrument is placed must have at least an area of two square meters with a minimum plan dimension of one
meter and a minimum free height of two meters, it must be away from high traffic areas, machinery and equipment that
induce vibrations. The space must be closed, but with adequate ventilation, and be made of a suitable material to guarantee
the safety of the instrument. In addition, a double electrical outlet, a 15-amp breaker and an electrical lighting outlet with a
switch must be placed inside it. The floor must be concrete and thick enough to allow the instrument to be anchored
(minimum 15 cm). The space cannot be used for any purpose other than to house the instrument. When an array of
instruments is used, the spaces that house the different instruments must have a connection between them by means of a
PVC tube with a minimum diameter of one inch (1”) to be able to make the electrical connections between instruments.
A.11.1.5 — COSTS — The different costs incurred in the implementation of a building are distributed as follows:
(a) Cost of the instruments — The instruments will be acquired by the person, natural or legal, in whose name
the building construction license is issued, who must also pay for its installation. INGEOMINAS reserves the
right to place additional instruments, at its cost, within the spaces designated for seismic instrumentation. The
ownership of the instruments will belong to those who acquire them. Regardless of who owns the instrument,
the National Seismological Network and whoever designates the municipal or district authority where the
building is located, must receive a copy, free of charge, of the records obtained through the instruments.
(b) Cost of the spaces where the instruments are placed — The cost of the space or spaces where the
instruments are placed will be the responsibility of the building owners. The owner, or owners, of the building
will give free access to these spaces to INGEOMINAS officials, or to whomever they delegate, for purposes
of installation, maintenance, and removal of the instrument's records. In the case of co-ownership, the co-
ownership regulations must include clauses in this regard.
(c) Cost of maintenance of the instruments — The cost of maintenance of the instruments shall be borne by
the owner or owners of the building. This obligation must be included in the co-ownership regulations. Whoever
provides maintenance must be approved by INGEOMINAS. Maintenance should be performed as often as
required by the instrument manufacturer; however, this must be carried out with a periodicity of no more than
one year.
(d) Cost of monitoring the instrument — The costs of monitoring the instruments will be borne by the owners of
the building where they are located, whether they are their property or not. Owners are responsible for the
instrument for its safety, and must purchase and maintain an insurance policy, which must cover the
replacement cost of the instrument in case of theft, subtraction, or other eventuality.
A-114
A.11.2 — PLACEMENT OF SEISMIC INSTRUMENTS

Within the constructions that are carried out in the national territory, covered by the scope of this
Regulation, seismic instruments must be placed in the following cases:
A.11.2.1 — ZONES OF HIGH SEISMIC THREAT — In the following buildings, located in zones of
high seismic threat should be placed seismic instruments:
(a) In every building with a constructed area of more than 20,000 m² and that has between 3 and 10 floors, at
least one seismic instrument must be placed. The space for its placement will be adjacent to the structural
system and must be located on the lower level of the building.
(b) In every building with a constructed area of more than 20,000 m² that has between 11 and 20 floors, at least 2
seismic instruments must be placed, in spaces adjacent to the structural system, located, one on the lower
level and another near to the deck. In this case the instrument located near the deck may have only two
orthogonal horizontal sensors.
(c) In every building with 21 or more floors, regardless of the built area, there must be 3
instruments, in spaces adjacent to the structural system. One on the lower level, one approximately halfway
up, and one in the immediate vicinity of the deck. The instruments must make up an arrangement. As an
alternative to the arrangement of three instruments, it is possible to install three acceleration sensors, one
triaxial and two biaxial, as indicated in A.11.1.3(a), connected to a central data capture system.
(d) In every housing complex that has more than 200 housing units, that are not of social interest, an open field
instrument must be placed.
A.11.2.2 — ZONES OF INTERMEDIATE SEISMIC HAZARD — In the following buildings, located in zones
of intermediate seismic threat, seismic instruments must be placed:
(a) In every building with a constructed area of more than 30,000 m² and that has between 5 and 15 floors, at
least one instrument must be placed. The space where the instrument is placed will be adjacent to the
structural system and must be located on the lower level of the building.
(b) In every building with a constructed area of more than 30,000 m² that has between 16 and 25 floors, at least 2
seismic instruments must be placed, in spaces adjacent to the structural system, located, one on the lower
level and another near to the deck.
(c) In every building with more than 25 floors, regardless of the built area, 3 must be placed
seismic instruments, in spaces adjacent to the structural system. One on the lower level, one approximately
halfway up, and one in the immediate vicinity of the deck. The instruments must make up an arrangement. As
an alternative to the arrangement of three instruments, it is possible to install three triaxial acceleration
sensors, connected to a central data capture system. (d) Any housing complex that has more
than 300 housing units, which are not of social interest,
an open field seismic instrument should be placed.
A.11.2.3 — ZONES OF LOW SEISMIC THREAT — In buildings located in zones of low seismic threat there is no
obligation to place seismic instruments.
A-115
Grades:
A-116
NSR-10 – Chapter A.12 – Special requirements for essential buildings
of use groups III and IV
CHAPTER
A.12 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
ESSENTIAL BUILDINGS OF USE GROUPS III AND IV
Ad = coefficient representing the effective peak acceleration, for the damage threshold, given in A.12.2.
Ed = seismic forces from the damage threshold.
Fv = amplification coefficient affecting the acceleration in the zone of intermediate periods, due to site effects,
dimensionless, given in A.2.4.5. m/s2 ). =
g acceleration due to gravity ( g 9.8 = = height of
hpi floor i , measured from the diaphragm surface of the floor i to the diaphragm surface of the
floor immediately below, i 1 ÿ = .
coefficient of importance defined in A.2.5.2
I M = total mass of the building - M is expressed in kg. It must be equal to the total mass of the structure plus the mass of
those elements such as dividing walls and partitions, permanent equipment, tanks and their contents, etc. In
warehouses or warehouses, 25 percent of the mass corresponding to the elements that cause the live load of the
floor must also be included. Chapters A.4 and A.5.
S = site coefficient given in A.12.3.
S S 1.25S = ) .
= site coefficient to be used in the damage threshold seismic spectrum ( = value of the
sad damage threshold seismic spectrum, for a given vibration period. Maximum horizontal acceleration for the damage
threshold, expressed as a fraction of the acceleration of gravity, for a one degree of freedom system with a period
of vibration T. It is defined in A.12.3.
= period of vibration of the elastic system, in seconds.
T TCd = vibration period, in seconds, corresponding to the transition between the zone of constant acceleration of the seismic
spectrum of the damage threshold, for short periods, and the descending part of it. See A.12.
TLd = period of vibration, in seconds, corresponding to the transition between the displacement zone
constant of the seismic spectrum of the damage threshold, for long periods. See A.12.3
vs. = seismic shear at the base of the structure, calculated by the equivalent horizontal force method
of Chapter A.4.
vsd = seismic shear at the base, for the damage threshold seismic forces. See A.12.4.
A.12.1 — GENERAL
A.12.1.1 — PURPOSE — This Chapter contains the additional requirements, to those contained in the remaining chapters of
this Title, that must be met in the earthquake resistant design and construction of buildings belonging to use group IV, defined
in A.2.5.1.1, and those included in literals (a), (b), (c) and (d) of use group III, as defined by A.2.5.1.2, essential for the
recovery of the community after the occurrence of an emergency, including an earthquake, in order to guarantee that they
can operate during and after the occurrence of an earthquake, in order to guarantee that they can operate during and after
the occurrence of an earthquake. In relation to the buildings included in subparagraphs (e) and (f) of Group III, as defined in
A.2.5.1.2, it is up to the owner in the first case or the competent authority in the second to define whether it is required.
advance the design of them according to the special requirements of Chapter A.12.
A.12.1.2 — SCOPE — The requirements of this Chapter must be used in the design of the essential buildings listed in
A.2.5.1.1, those included in subparagraphs (a), (b), (c) and (d) of the group of Use III, as defined in A.2.5.1.2 and of the others
that the community designates as such.
A-117
NSR-10 – Chapter A.12 – Special requirements for essential buildings of
use groups III and IV
A.12.1.3 — METHODOLOGY — The determination of the operability of the building after the occurrence of an earthquake is carried
out by verifying that the building remains within the elastic response range when subjected to seismic stresses corresponding to the
beginning of the damage , or damage threshold.
A.12.1.4 — VERIFICATION PROCEDURE — In addition to the steps that must be followed in the design of the building presented in
A.1.3.4, the following additional steps must be carried out, in order to verify that the structure and elements do not structures remain
within the elastic range of response when the seismic movements corresponding to the damage threshold occur:
Step A — Seismic movements corresponding to the damage threshold — Determination of the movements
seismic data of the damage threshold for the place, in accordance with the provisions of A.12.2.
Step B — Seismic forces corresponding to the damage threshold — Obtaining the seismic forces of the damage threshold under
which the behavior of the building structure and non-structural elements must be verified.
Step C — Analysis of the structure for seismic forces corresponding to the damage threshold — Analysis of the structure by
means of an appropriate mathematical model. The analysis is carried out by applying the seismic movements
corresponding to the damage threshold, as defined in A.12.4. The maximum displacements imposed by the seismic
movements corresponding to the threshold of damage to the structure and the internal forces that derive from them must
be determined.
Step D — Verification for the damage threshold — Verification that the deflections for the damage threshold do not exceed the limits
established by this Regulation. If the limits of the maximum drifts for the damage threshold, established in A.12.5, are
exceeded, the structure must be stiffened until the check is met.
A.12.2 — SEISMIC MOVEMENTS OF THE DAMAGE THRESHOLD
A.12.2.1 — The seismic movements of the damage threshold are defined for an eighty percent probability of being exceeded in a
period of fifty years, as a function of the effective peak acceleration at the level of the damage threshold, represented by the parameter
Ad . The value of this coefficient, for the purposes of this Regulation, must be determined in accordance with A.12.2.2 and A.12.2.3.
A.12.2.2 — Determine the region number where the building is located using the Map in Figure A.12.2-1. The value of Ad is obtained
from table A.12.2-1, depending on the number of the region, or for the capital cities of the department using table A.12.2-2 and for the
municipalities of the country in Appendix A-4 , included at the end of this Title.
A.12.2.3 — Alternatively when the municipality or district carries out a seismic microzoning study, or has a local accelerographic
network; based on the microzoning study or on the records obtained, it is possible to vary, by means of a municipal ordinance, the
value of Ad , with respect to the values given here, but in no case may this value be less than that given in the present Regulation.
Table A.12.2-1
Values of Ad according to the region of the map in Figure A.12.2-1
Region No. ad
7 0.13 – 0.14
6 0.11 – 0.12
5 0.09 – 0.10
4 0.07 – 0.08
3 0.05 – 0.06
2 0.03 – 0.04
1 0.00 – 0.02
Note: Regions represent ranges of values. Appendix A-4 should be
consulted to determine the value of Ad in each municipality.
A-118
Note: Regions represent ranges of values. Appendix A-4 should be consulted to determine the value of Ad in each municipality.
Figure A.12.2-1 — Ad value map
A-119
NSR-10 – Chapter A.12 – Special requirements for essential buildings of use
groups III and IV
Table A.12.2-2
Values of Ad for departmental capital cities
City Ad City
ad
arauca 0.04 Neiva 0.08
Armenia 0.10 Grass 0.08
Barranquilla 0.03 Pereira 0.10
Bogota 0.06 Popayan 0.08
Bucaramanga 0.09 Puerto Carreno 0.02
Cali 0.09 Puerto Inirida 0.02
Cartagena 0.03 Quibdó 0.13
cucuta 0.10 riohacha 0.04
Florence 0.05 San Andres, Island 0.03
ibagué 0.06 San Jose del Guaviare 0.02
Leticia 0.02 Santa Marta 0.04
Manizales 0.10 sincelejo 0.04
Medellin 0.07 Tunja 0.07
My you 0.02 Valledupar 0.03
runny 0.10 Villavicencio 0.07
Hunting 0.04 Yopal 0.06
A.12.3 — SEISMIC SPECTRUM FOR THE DAMAGE THRESHOLD
A.12.3.1 — The parameters to determine the spectrum of horizontal accelerations for the damage threshold in the elastic field, for a critical
damping of two percent (2%), which must be used in the damage threshold verifications, they are given in Figure A.12.3-1. The damage
threshold spectrum is defined by means of equation A.12.3-1, in which the T value is the same as that used to obtain the building design
seismic spectrum in Chapter A.2 and the value of S is equal to where Fv is the value of the amplification coefficient that affects the
acceleration in the area of intermediate periods due to 1.25F v , that is obtained according to section A.2.4, using there for Av the value of
site effects
Ad according to A.12.2. In addition, the constraints given in A.12.3.2 to A.12.3.4 must be met.
1.5ASd
Sad = (A.12.3-1)
you
A.12.3.2 — For periods of vibration less than 0.25 seconds, the seismic spectrum of the damage threshold can be obtained from Equation
A.12.3-2.
Sad = Ad (1.0 + 8T) (A.12.3-2)
A.12.3.3 — For vibration periods greater than 0.25 seconds and less than TCd , calculated according to equation A.12.3-3, the value of Sad
can be limited to that obtained from equation A.12.3-4.
= Cd
T 0.5S (A.12.3-3)
and
S 0Ad
= 3.ad
_ (A.12.3-4)
A.12.3.4 – For vibration periods greater than TLd , calculated according to equation A.12.3-5, the value of Sad can be limited to that obtained
from equation A.12.3-6.
A-120
= Ld
T 2.4S (A.12.3-5)
and
1.5A ST
dLd
Sad = (A.12.3-6)
2
you
S ad
(g)
Sad = 3.0A d
Note: This spectrum is defined for a
damping ratio of 2 percent of the critical
SA =
ad 1 8Td + ( )
1.5ASd
Sad =
you
1.5A ST
dLd
Sad =
ad 2
you
0.25s you
CD you T(s)
ld
= Cd
T 0.5S =
T 2.4S
ld
Figure A.12.3-1 — Damage threshold elastic spectrum of horizontal accelerations
A.12.3.5 – When the city where the building is located has seismic microzoning regulations, the damage threshold
spectrum defined there must be used. Otherwise, the prescriptions contained in this section A.12.3 must be followed.
A.12.4 — ANALYSIS METHODOLOGY

A.12.4.1 — ANALYSIS METHOD TO BE USED — In verifying the response of the structure to seismic movements
corresponding to the damage threshold, the equivalent horizontal force method given in Chapter A.4 must be used as a
minimum, although the use of the dynamic analysis method, prescribed in Chapter A.5, is allowed.
A.12.4.2 — RIGIDITY OF THE STRUCTURE AND ITS ELEMENTS — The rigidities used in the structural analysis to
verify the damage threshold must be compatible with the forces and deformations imposed by the seismic movements
corresponding to the structure. At the level of deformations of the damage threshold, it is considered that the structure
responds in the linear and elastic range of behavior and that the non-structural elements can contribute to the rigidity of
the structure, if they are not isolated from it. When non-structural elements interact with the structure at the damage
threshold deformation level, this interaction must be taken into account, both in the structure and in the non-structural
elements.
A.12.4.3 — USE OF THE EQUIVALENT HORIZONTAL FORCE METHOD IN THE ASSESSMENT OF THE DAMAGE
THRESHOLD — When using the equivalent horizontal force method in the analysis of the structure for the damage
threshold seismic movements must take into account the following aspects:
A-121
A.12.4.3.1 — Fundamental period of building — The fundamental vibration period determined in accordance
with the requirements of A.4.2 may be used.
A.12.4.3.2 — Horizontal seismic forces of the damage threshold — The seismic forces corresponding to the
seismic movements of the damage threshold correspond to the distribution in the height of the building of the
seismic shear at the base, Vsd . This seismic shear at the base is equivalent to the totality of the horizontal inertial
effects produced by the seismic movements of the damage threshold, in the direction under study, and is obtained
by means of the following equation:
= sd ad
VS gM (A.12.4-1)
The value of Sad in the previous equation corresponds to the value of the acceleration read from the seismic
spectrum defined in A.12.3 for the period T of the building. The damage threshold horizontal seismic force at any
level can be obtained from equations A.4.3-1 and A.4.3-2, using Vsd instead of Vs .
A.12.4.3.3 — Analysis of the structure for the horizontal seismic forces of the damage threshold — By means
of a structural analysis carried out using the seismic forces corresponding to the damage threshold obtained as
indicated in A.12.4.3.2, the internal forces of the damage threshold, Ed . The requirements of A.4.4.1 shall be used
with the exception of subparagraph (f). In reinforced concrete and structural masonry structures, the degree of
cracking must be compatible with the seismic forces of the damage threshold, taking into account that the structure
acts within the linear range of response. As results of the analysis, the horizontal displacements of the structure
must be obtained, including the torsional effects, which are used to assess compliance with the drift requirements
for the damage threshold. If non-structural elements were included in the analysis, their deformations and stresses
must be determined.
A.12.4.4 — USE OF THE DYNAMIC ANALYSIS METHOD IN THE ASSESSMENT OF THE DAMAGE THRESHOLD —
When the dynamic analysis method is used, the requirements of Chapter A.5 must be used, using the seismic movements
corresponding to the damage threshold instead of design seismic motions. The adjustment of the results indicated in
A.5.4.5 must be made with respect to the value of Vsd , obtained by means of equation A.12.4-1, instead of Vs .
A.12.5 — DRIFT REQUIREMENTS FOR DAMAGE THRESHOLD

A.12.5.1 — TOTAL HORIZONTAL DISPLACEMENTS FOR THE DAMAGE THRESHOLD — The horizontal displacements,
in the two main directions in plan, that have all the degrees of freedom of the structure when affected by seismic
movements for the damage threshold, defined in A.12.2, are determined by means of structural analysis carried out using
the analysis method defined in A.12.4 and with the stiffnesses indicated in A.12.4.2. The horizontal displacements for the
damage threshold, in any of the principal directions in plan and for any degree of freedom of the structure, are obtained by
means of equation A.6.2-1, except that there is no need to include displacements caused by P-Delta effects.
A.12.5.2 — MAXIMUM DRIFT FOR THE DAMAGE THRESHOLD — The maximum drift, for the damage threshold, at any
point on the floor under study is obtained by means of equation A.6.3-1.
A.12.5.3 — DRIFT LIMITS FOR DAMAGE THRESHOLD — The maximum drift, for damage threshold, assessed at any
point on the structure, determined in accordance with the procedure of A.12.5.2, may not exceed the limits established in
table A.12.5-1, in which the maximum drift is expressed as a percentage of the story height hpi :
A-122
NSR-10 – Chapter A.12 – Special requirements for essential buildings of use
groups III and IV
Table A.12.5-1
Max drifts for damage threshold as a percentage of hpi
Structures of: maximum drift

reinforced concrete, metal, wood, and
masonry meeting the requirements 0.40% ÿ ÿmax0.0040 h pi
Yo
)
of A.12.5.3.1 Masonry meeting the
requirements of A.12.5.3.2
)
Yo
( 0.20% ÿ( ÿmax
0.0020h
pi
A.12.5.3.1 — It is allowed to use the maximum permissible drift limit of buildings built with 0.0040h in buildings pi
structural masonry when they are composed of walls whose prevailing failure mode is bending under forces parallel to the plane
of the wall, essentially designed as slender vertical elements that act as cantilevers supported on their base or foundation and that
are built in such a way that the moment transfer between walls through the horizontal coupling elements in the mezzanine
diaphragms, whether they are slabs, connecting beams, parapets or lintels, is negligible .
A.12.5.3.2 — In the case of masonry walls that are not very slender or whose prevailing failure mode is caused by shear forces,
the maximum allowable drift limit of 0.0020h . pi
A.12.6 — STRESS VERIFICATION

A.12.6.1 — STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS — There is no need to check structural elements for damage threshold earthquake-generated
stresses.
A.12.6.2—NONSTRUCTURAL WALLS— There is no need to check nonstructural elements for damage threshold seismic stresses.
A-123
Grades:
A-124
NSR-10 — Chapter A.13 — Title A Definitions and Nomenclature
CHAPTER A.13
DEFINITIONS AND NOMENCLATURE OF TITLE A
A.13.1 — DEFINITIONS
The following definitions correspond to Title A of this Regulation:
Finishes — Parts and components of a building that are not part of the structure or its foundation.
See non-structural elements
Effective peak acceleration, Aa — It is a parameter used to determine the design spectrum and is given in A.2.2.
Accelerogram — Description in time of the accelerations to which the ground was subjected during the occurrence of a
real earthquake.
Accelerograph — Instrument that allows recording the accelerations to which the ground is subjected during the
occurrence of an earthquake. This record is recorded in an accelerogram.
Height of the building in the adjoining — It is the sum of the story heights in the adjoining.
Floor height — It is the vertical distance measured between the finished floor slab or ground level and the finished slab
on the level immediately above. In the event that the level immediately above corresponds to the roof of the building, this
measure will be taken up to the root level of the roof when it is inclined or up to the level of the waterproofing or weather
protection element when the roof is flat. .
In the cases in which the height of the story measured as indicated above exceeds 6 m, it will be considered for purposes
of calculating the number of stories as two stories. It is allowed that for the first aerial floor the height of the floor is
measured from the crown of the retaining wall of the new building against the wall that is in the adjoining, when it exists.
Seismic hazard — It is the expected value of future seismic actions at the site of interest and is quantified in terms of an
expected horizontal ground acceleration, which has a given probability of exceedance in a predetermined period of time.
Damping — Loss of energy in a wave motion.
Seismic wave amplification — Increase in the amplitude of seismic waves, produced by their passage from rock to the
ground surface through soil strata.
Dynamic analysis — Mathematical procedure by means of which the dynamic equilibrium equations are solved, in order
to obtain the deformations and stresses of the structure when subjected to an excitation that varies in time.
Elastic Dynamic Analysis — A type of dynamic analysis in which the stiffness and strength properties of the structure
remain within the range of linear response.
Inelastic Dynamic Analysis — A type of dynamic analysis in which it is taken into account that the stiffness and strength
properties of the structure may move out of the linear response range and into the inelastic response range.
Spectral analysis — Type of modal dynamic analysis in which the maximum dynamic response of each mode is obtained
using the ordinate of the spectrum, corresponding to the period of vibration of the mode.
Modal Analysis — Dynamic analysis procedure whereby the dynamic response of the structure is obtained as the
superposition of the responses of the different modes, or forms of vibration.
Appendix — It is a non-structural element that protrudes from the general volume of the building.
Truss — See truss.
A-125
Base — It is the level at which seismic movements are transmitted to the structure or the level at which the structure,
considered as an oscillator, is supported.
Energy dissipation capacity — It is the capacity of a structural system, a structural element, or a section of a structural
element, to work within the inelastic range of response without losing its resistance.
It is quantified by means of the strain energy that the system, element or section is capable of dissipating in consecutive
hysteretic cycles. When referring to the seismic resistance system of the building as a
everything, is defined by means of the basic energy dissipation capacity coefficient R0 , which is later affected due to
irregularities in the structure and the absence of redundancy in the seismic resistance system, to
obtain the coefficient of power dissipation RR ( =ÿ ÿappr
ÿ R.0 ) . The degree of power dissipation capacity is
classified as special (DES), moderate (BMD) and minimal (DMI).
Rotation capacity of the section — It is the capacity of a section of a structural element to admit rotations in the inelastic
range without losing its capacity to resist bending moments and shear forces.
It is measured in terms of its ability to dissipate energy upon rotation.
Dead Load — Is the vertical load due to the gravitational effects of the mass, or weight, of all permanent elements, whether
structural or non-structural. Title B of this Regulation should be consulted.
Gravitational load or weight, ( ) Mg — It is the vertical effect of the acceleration due to gravity on the mass,
m , of the building. M must be equal to the mass of the structure plus the mass of elements such as dividing walls and
partitions, permanent equipment, tanks and their contents, etc. In warehouses and warehouses, 25 percent of the mass
produced by the live load must also be included.
Live load — It is the load due to the use of the structure, not including dead load, wind force or earthquake. Title B of this
Regulation should be consulted.
House — Single-family building for housing. This definition is included solely for the purposes of applying Title E of the
Regulations.
Center of mass of the floor — It is the locus where the entire mass of the floor would be located, in plan, assuming the
diaphragm of the floor as an infinitely rigid body in its own plane.
Center of rigidity of the floor — It is the geometric place, located in plan and determined under the assumption that the
diaphragm of the floor is infinitely rigid in its own plane, where when applying a horizontal force, in any direction, there is no
rotation of the diaphragm around a vertical axis.
Truss — It is a set of structural elements joined together, which primarily resist axial forces.
Enclosure — Wall located on the face of the plot of land and which is separated from the building in the direction
perpendicular to the face of the plot of land, which is not part of the structural support system of the building, and whose
height does not exceed 4 meters .
Critical Damping Ratio — For an elastic system of one degree of freedom with viscous damping, it is the ratio of the
amount of damping in the system to the minimum damping that inhibits any oscillation.
Basic energy dissipation capacity coefficient, R0 — Coefficient that is prescribed for each structural system of seismic
resistance, the value of which depends on the type of structural system and on the energy dissipation capacity characteristics
of the structural material used in the building. system. It is a measure of the general energy dissipation capacity of the
seismic resistance system when seismic movements cause it to respond inelastically.
Energy dissipation capacity coefficient, R — Coefficient corresponding to the basic energy dissipation capacity coefficient,
R0 , multiplied by the dissipation capacity reduction coefficients due to irregularities in elevation, aÿ , irregularity in plan, pÿ ,
and a absence of redundancy of the structural system of
A-126
seismic resistance, rÿ . ( ÿ ÿ0 R ) .
R = ÿ apr
Coincidence of the mezzanine slabs in the adjoining — It is considered that the mezzanine slabs of two adjoining
structures coincide or are in contact when at least half the height of the mezzanine slab of the building for which the
construction permit is requested coincides level with the mezzanine slab of the existing adjoining building.
Earthquake-resistant construction — It is the type of construction that meets the objective expressed in A.1.2.2, through a
design and construction that meet the requirements of Law 400 of 1997 and this Regulation.
Builder — It is the professional, civil engineer, architect or builder in architecture and engineering, under whose responsibility
the construction of the building is carried out.
Story shear, Vx — Is the algebraic sum of the horizontal seismic forces acting above the story under consideration.
Shear at the base, Vs — It is the algebraic sum, taken at the base, of all the horizontal seismic forces of the building.
Chord — It is the edge element of a diaphragm, which resists mainly axial forces, in a manner analogous to the flanges of a
beam.
Story drift — It is the difference between the horizontal displacements of the levels between which the story is included.
Performance of non-structural elements — The performance of the non-structural elements of the building in the event of
an earthquake that affects it is called performance. The performance is classified into superior, good and low degree.
(a) Higher performance grade — It is the one in which the damage that occurs in non-structural elements is minimal
and does not interfere with the operation of the building in any way. (b) Good performance
grade — It is the one in which the damage that occurs in the non-structural elements is completely repairable and
there may be some interference with the operation of the building after the occurrence of the earthquake.
(c) Low performance grade — It is the one in which there are serious damages in the elements not
structural, even non-repairable.
DES — Special power dissipation ability.
Diaphragm — Set of structural elements, such as a mezzanine slab, that transmits horizontal inertial forces to the vertical
elements of the seismic resistance system. The term diaphragm includes horizontal braced assemblies. See horizontal bracing
system.
Diagonal — It is a structural element that is part of a frame with diagonals. The diagonal can be concentric, in frames with
reinforced concrete or structural steel diagonals, or eccentric in structural steel frames.
Concentric Diagonal — A diagonal whose two ends meet at beam-column connections.
Eccentric Diagonal — A diagonal in which one end meets the beam at a point away from the beam-column connection. Only
used on structural steel frames with diagonals.
Architectural designer — It is the architect under whose responsibility the design and architectural plans of the building are
made, and who signs or labels them.
Designer of non-structural elements — It is the professional empowered for this purpose, under whose responsibility the
design and plans of the non-structural elements of the building are made, and who signs or labels them.
Structural Designer — It is the civil engineer, empowered for that purpose, under whose responsibility the design and
structural plans of the building are made, and who signs or labels them.
A-127
DMO — Moderate power dissipation capacity.
DMI — Minimum Power Dissipation Capability.
Ductility — The ability of a structural material to resist, without failure, deformations that take the structural material
beyond the elastic limit, or limit where the deformations are linearly proportional to the stress or applied force. (See power
dissipation capacity, as these terms are often confused.)
Depending on the parameter that describes the deformations, ductility can refer, among others, to:
(a) Ductility of curvature — when ductility is measured with respect to the curvature of the section of the
structural member. The curvature is defined as the quotient between the applied bending moment and the
stiffness of the section,
(b) Rotational ductility — when ductility is measured with respect to the rotation that a longitudinal sector of the
structural element has. Rotation is defined as the slope of the elastic line of the element measured with
respect to the original position of the longitudinal axis of the element,
(c) Displacement ductility — when ductility is measured with respect to the displacement or deflection of the
structural element. The displacement is measured with respect to the original position of the longitudinal axis
of the element, and
(d) Strain ductility —when ductility is measured with respect to the strain of a fiber parallel to the neutral axis of
the section.
Building — It is a construction whose primary use is habitation or occupation by human beings.
Community care building — These are the urban equipment necessary to attend to emergencies, preserve the health
and safety of people, such as fire stations, police and military headquarters, health facilities, headquarters of emergency
operating agencies, among others.
Indispensable buildings — Are those urban community care equipment that must function during and after an earthquake,
whose operation cannot be quickly transferred to an alternate location, such as hospitals and vital line operation and
control centers.
Gravitational effects — See weight.
Structural element or member — Component of the building's structural system. In metallic structures the two terms are
not synonymous as a member is made up of elements. For example, in an I-section beam, the beam itself is the structural
member, and its web and flanges are member elements.
Collector element — It is an element that serves to transmit the inertial forces generated inside the diaphragm, to the
elements of the seismic resistance system.
Border element — It is an element that is placed on the edges of the openings, on the perimeter of the shear walls or on
the perimeter of the diaphragms.
Flexible elements (or flexible systems) — Are those whose deformation, when requested by a horizontal force, is
significantly greater than that of the adjacent elements of the system.
Nonstructural Elements — Building elements or components that are not part of the structure or its foundation. See
finishes.
Orthogonal effects — These are those that occur in the structural elements that simultaneously belong to resistant
systems located on two orthogonal axes, when the seismic forces act in a direction other than that of these two axes.
P-Delta Effects — These are the second order effects on the horizontal displacements and internal forces of the structure,
caused by the action of the vertical loads of the building when they are displaced horizontally.
Spectrum — It is the collection of maximum values, either of acceleration, velocity, or displacement, that systems with
one degree of freedom have during an earthquake.
Design spectrum — It is the spectrum corresponding to the design seismic movements.
A-128
Spectrum of the damage threshold — It is the spectrum corresponding to the seismic movements at the level of the damage
threshold.
Structure — It is an assembly of elements, designed to support gravitational loads and resist horizontal forces. Structures can
be classified as building structures or structures other than buildings.
Geologic Fault — A rupture, or rupture zone, in the rock of the Earth's crust whose sides have moved parallel to the plane of
rupture.
Active Geologic Fault — A geological fault that is considered to be capable of producing seismic motion. For the purposes of
this Regulation, an active fault is one that has had recurrent seismogenic activity during the Quaternary (see A.2.9.3.1).
Factored Forces — These are the forces that have been multiplied by their respective load coefficients, as defined in B.2.1 of
this Regulation.
Seismic forces — Are the inertial effects caused by the acceleration of the earthquake, expressed as forces to be used in the
analysis and design of the structure.
Use group — Classification of buildings according to their importance for the care and recovery of the people who live in a
region that may be affected by an earthquake, or any type of disaster.
Hysteresis — Phenomenon by which two, or more, physical properties are related in a way that depends on their previous
behavior history. In general, it refers to the behavior of structural materials when they are subjected to deformations or stresses
that are outside the linear, or elastic, range of behavior. A large part of the energy that the structural material is capable of
dissipating in the inelastic range of response is associated with the area comprised within the hysteresis loops.
Drift Index — The drift of the floor divided by the height of the floor.
Geotechnical Engineer — It is the civil engineer, who signs the geotechnical study, under whose responsibility the geotechnical
or soil studies are carried out, by means of which the design parameters of the foundation are set, the amplification effects of
the seismic wave caused by the type and stratification of the soil underlying the building, and the definition of the soil parameters
that must be used in the evaluation of the effects of soil-structure interaction.
Essential facilities — See essential buildings.
Soil-structure interaction — It is the effect that the stiffness properties of the soil that supports the building have on the static
and dynamic response of the structure, together with the stiffness properties of the foundation and the structure.
Auditor - It is the professional, civil engineer, architect or builder in architecture and engineering, who represents the owner
during the construction of the building and under whose responsibility it is verified that it is carried out in accordance with all the
corresponding regulations and following the plans, designs and specifications made by the designers. See technical supervision.
The Supervision also includes work quantification activities and can be extended to administrative tasks.
Construction license — Act by means of which authorization is given, at the request of the interested party, to carry out works
on a property with buildings, whatever they may be, in accordance with the territorial planning plan and the urban regulations of
the district or municipality.
Liquefaction — Response of soils subjected to vibrations, in which they behave as a dense fluid and not as a moist soil mass.
Life lines — Basic infrastructure of networks, pipes or connected or continuous elements, which allows the mobilization of
electrical energy, water, fuel, information and the transport of people or products, essential to carry out the activities of society
with efficiency and quality.
Structural masonry — See the Definitions in Title D of this Regulation.
A-129
Mass — Amount of matter that a body possesses. In the International System of Measurements (SI) it is expressed in kilograms, kg.
Equivalent Horizontal Force Method — The method of seismic analysis in which the effects of design seismic motions are expressed by equivalent
static horizontal forces.
Elastic dynamic analysis method — It is the seismic analysis method in which the effects of the design seismic movements are determined by means
of the solution of the dynamic equilibrium equations, considering that the stiffness properties of the structure remain within the range linear or elastic
response.
Inelastic dynamic analysis method — It is the seismic analysis method in which the effects of design seismic movements are determined by solving
the dynamic equilibrium equations, considering that the stiffness properties of the structure are out of range. linear or elastic response.
Seismic microzoning — Division of a region or an urban area into smaller zones that present a certain degree of similarity in the way seismic movements
are affected, given the characteristics of the underlying soil strata.
Vibration modes — These are the different forms of vibration characteristic of the structure. Each vibration mode corresponds to its own vibration
frequency. The dynamic response of the structure, in the elastic range, can be expressed as the superposition of the effects of the different modes. A
structure has as many modes of vibration as it has degrees of freedom.
Fundamental mode — It is the mode of vibration corresponding to the fundamental period of the structure in the horizontal direction of interest.
Design seismic movements — It is a characterization of the ground movements, in the place where the building is located, that would occur as a
consequence of the occurrence of the design earthquake.
Seismic movements for the damage threshold — It is a characterization of the ground movements, in the place where the building is located, that
would occur as a consequence of the occurrence of the earthquake corresponding to the damage threshold.
Telluric movement — Movement of the earth's crust. See earthquake.
Load-bearing wall — It is a structural wall, continuous to the foundation, that supports mainly vertical loads.
Shear wall — See structural wall.
Dividing wall or partition — It is a wall that does not fulfill a structural function and that is used to divide spaces.
Structural Wall — A wall, load-bearing or not, that is designed to resist horizontal, seismic, or wind forces parallel to the plane of the wall.
Non-structural wall — See partition wall.
Level (measured from the base) of a story in the adjoining — It is the sum of the story heights in the adjoining measured from the base to the top of
the story under study.
Number of aerial floors of the building — For the purposes of applying the regulation of separation between buildings in A.6.5.2, the maximum number
of aerial floors of a building corresponds to the number of aerial mezzanine slabs, counting within them the covered as a mezzanine slab, and not
counting basements. An aerial mezzanine slab is one that is not in contact with the ground at any point. When a floor is more than 6 m high, it will be
counted as two floors for purposes of calculating the number of aerial floors of the building.
Number of adjoining aerial floors — Corresponds to the number of aerial floors of the building, which extend to the face of the plot of land in the
adjoining area under study. When an adjoining floor is more than 6 m high, it will be counted as two floors for purposes of calculating the number of floors.
A-130
aerial views of the building in the adjoining area.
Soil profile — These are the different existing soil strata below the building site.
Vibration period, T — It is the time that elapses within a harmonic wave movement, or vibration, for it to repeat itself.
Fundamental vibration period — It is the longest period of vibration of the structure in the horizontal direction of interest.
Weight — Gravitational effect on mass. It is obtained by multiplying the mass in kg by the acceleration due to m/s2 ). It is
g ( g 9.8 = expressed in newtons, N (1 N = 1 kg 1 m/s2 ). gravity,
Floor — It is the space between two levels of a building. Floor x is the one below level x .
Flexible floor — It is one in which the rigidity before horizontal forces, of the seismic resistance system, is less than 70%
of the rigidity before horizontal forces, of the seismic resistance system, of the immediately superior floor.
Weak story — Is one in which the resistance to horizontal forces of the seismic resistance system of the story is less than
70% of the resistance to horizontal forces of the seismic resistance system of the story immediately above.
Progressive plastification, method of — Static nonlinear analysis method known in English as “push-over” (See
Appendix A-3).
Frame — It is a set of beams, columns and, in some cases, diagonals, all of them interconnected by means of connections
or nodes that may or may not be capable of transmitting bending moments from one element to another. Depending on its
characteristics it has the following denominations:
Braced frame — See definition of frame with diagonals.
Moment-resistant steel frame-truss — Frame in which the beams are trusses whose central section, called the special
segment, is designed to act as an energy dissipating element, so that all elements other than the special segment remain
in range elastic.
Diagonal Frame — A frame composed of eccentric, or concentric, beams, columns, and diagonals used primarily to resist
horizontal forces. Its elements work mainly by deforming axially, like a truss. Its joints may or may not be capable of
transmitting bending moments, depending on the structural material used.
Frame with concentric diagonals — It is a frame with diagonals in which they reach the nodes formed by the connections
between beams and columns.
Frame with eccentric diagonals — It is a frame, made of structural steel, with diagonals that meets the requirements
presented in Chapter F.3.
Steel frame with buckling-restrained diagonals — It is a frame with diagonals whose buckling is restricted by the use
of concrete-filled sleeves.
Space frame — A three-dimensional structural system, without load-bearing walls, composed of interconnected elements
in such a way that the assembly acts as a unit, with or without the aid of horizontal diaphragms or horizontal bracing
systems. (See flat frame).
Slab-column frame — It is a framed three-dimensional structural system in which the slabs perform the function of the
beams. This system has numerous restrictions imposed by the Regulation on its use. See celled reticular.
Unbraced frame — A moment-resisting frame that supports horizontal forces by means of bending moments in its
members, and has no diagonals or structural walls.
A-131
Non-moment-resisting frame — A frame whose connections are not moment-resisting and therefore unstable when
subjected to horizontal forces, unless the responsibility for resistance to these forces is served by diagonals within the
frame itself or by sets of structural elements, such as structural walls or frames with diagonals.
Vertical Load Frame — A space frame designed to resist vertical loads only.
Flat frame — A frame in which all of its elements are contained within a vertical plane. This type of frames cannot be used
unless there are structural elements that restrict movement in the direction perpendicular to the plane of the frame, such
as other frames or structural walls, and there is a diaphragm that horizontally anchors the assembly. (See A.3.1.5) The
links between flat frames through the beams of the mezzanine system are not considered adequate for the purpose of
restricting displacements in the direction perpendicular to the plane of the frame, in which case beams must be arranged
parallel to the beams that link the columns and form a spatial portico.
Moment resistant frame — It is a space frame in which its members and nodes are capable of resisting forces, mainly by
bending.
Non-energy dissipating moment-resisting frame — A reinforced concrete frame that does not meet special
reinforcement detailing requirements for ductile behavior, or is not spatially arranged and has no resistance to horizontal
forces in the direction perpendicular to its own plane.
Moment resistant frame with special energy dissipation capacity (DES) — It is a space frame designed in accordance
with the corresponding provisions of Chapter C.21 when it is made of reinforced concrete or Chapter F.3 when it is made
of structural steel.
Moment resistant frame with minimum energy dissipation capacity (DMI) — It is a space frame designed in
accordance with the corresponding provisions of Chapter C.21 when it is made of reinforced concrete or Chapters F.1 and
F.2 when it is made of reinforced concrete. structural steel.
Moment-resistant frame with moderate energy dissipation capacity (DMO) — It is a space frame, designed in
accordance with the corresponding provisions of Chapter C.21 when it is made of reinforced concrete, or Chapter F.3
when it is made of structural steel.
Probability — It is the quotient of the number of cases that actually occur, divided by the total number of possible cases.
Owner - For the purposes of this Regulation, it is the person, natural or legal, holder of main real rights, possessor, owner
of the domain right as a trust and the settlors of the same trusts, in whose name the license is issued. of construction.
Resistance — It is the useful capacity of a structure, or of its members, to resist loads, within the deformation limits
established in this Regulation.
Cellular reticular — It is a type of slab-column portico, in which the slab works in two directions and is lightened in the
areas far from the columns and solid, or with capitals, in the areas surrounding the columns. This system has numerous
restrictions imposed by the Regulation on its use.
Design reviewer — It is the civil engineer, different from the designer and independent from him, who is responsible for
reviewing the structural designs and geotechnical studies, or the architect, civil or mechanical engineer, who reviews the
designs of non-structural elements; within the process of issuing a construction license, to verify that the proposed building
meets the requirements of Law 400 of 1997 and these Regulations.
Seismic risk — Corresponds to the determination of the economic and social consequences, expressed in monetary
terms, or victims, respectively, for the site of interest based on its probability of exceedance for a given exposure time.
A-132
Story Stiffness — For a story x in , is the quotient between the floor shear, Vx , and the drift that this shear produces
the story.
Brace — See diagonal.
Diaphragm Brace (Transmitting Brace, Tie, Collector Element) — The element of a diaphragm, parallel to the applied
force, that collects and transmits the diaphragm shear to the vertical resisting elements or distributes the forces within the
diaphragm. These members may be subjected to axial tension or compression effects. See horizontal bracing systems.
Registered Dry Stamp — An embossed mark placed on a construction plan to replace the signature of the designer
responsible for the designs expressed therein. The brand that it produces must contain the name of the professional, his
profession (civil engineer, architect, etc.) and the number of the professional registration.
Seismic separation in the adjoining — It is the horizontal distance in a perpendicular direction to the vertical plane raised
on the boundary between the two plots of land, measured from the mezzanine slab of the building to this plane.
Earthquake, tremor or earthquake — Vibrations of the earth's crust induced by the passage of seismic waves coming
from a place or area where sudden movements of the earth's crust have occurred.
Characteristic earthquake — An earthquake defined for an active fault that has a magnitude equal to the best estimate
that can be made of the maximum magnitude likely to occur on the fault, but not less than the greatest magnitude that has
historically occurred on the fault.
Design earthquake — It is the characterization of the minimum seismic movements that must be used in carrying out the
earthquake resistant design. For the purposes of this Regulation, it is an earthquake whose effects at the place of interest
have a probability of only ten percent of being exceeded in a period of fifty years, which leads to an average return period of
475 years. The earthquake resistant design has among its objectives the protection of life before the occurrence of the
design earthquake.
Limited safety earthquake - It is the characterization of seismic movements that can be used alternatively in the evaluation
and intervention of certain existing structures. For the purposes of this Regulation, it is an earthquake whose effects at the
place of interest have a twenty percent probability of being exceeded in a period of fifty years, which corresponds to an
average return period of 225 years. Its use is subject to the limitations given in A.10.3.
Damage threshold earthquake — An earthquake whose effects at the location of interest have an eighty percent probability
of being exceeded within fifty years, leading to an average return period of 31 years. Corresponds to an earthquake of
relatively low intensity, before whose occurrence there should be no damage to the structural and non-structural elements,
which in case they occur, they must be repairable and must not interfere with the operation of the building.
Combined system — It is a structural system in which the vertical loads are resisted by an essentially complete frame,
moment resistant or not, and the horizontal forces are resisted by structural walls or frames with diagonals. (See A.3.2.1.2).
Load-bearing wall system — A structural system that does not have an essentially complete frame and in which vertical
loads are carried to the foundation by load-bearing walls and horizontal forces are resisted by structural walls or diagonal
frames. (See A.3.2.1.1).
Frame System — A structural system comprised of an essentially complete, unbraced, space, moment-resisting frame that
resists all vertical loads and horizontal forces. (See A.3.2.1.3).
Dual system — It is the structural system resulting from the combination of a space frame resistant to moments (of moderate
or high energy dissipation capacity) with structural walls or frames with diagonals, designed in accordance with A.3.2.1.4.
Horizontal bracing system — It is a horizontal truss or reinforcement system that meets the same
A-133
functions of a diaphragm.
Seismic resistance system — It is that part of the structure that, according to the design, provides the resistance required to
withstand the design seismic movements.
International System of Measurements (SI) — The SI system was established at the Eleventh World Conference on Weights
and Measures, which took place in Sevres, France, in 1960. Through Decree 1731 of September 18, 1967, the only system of
Measurements allowed in the country is the International System of Measurements SI. The system is based on seven basic
units, which are the meter (m) for length, the kilogram (kg) for mass, the second (s) for time, the ampere (A) for electric current,
and the kelvin (K) for temperature. ), for luminous intensity the candela (cd) and for quantity of substance the mole (mol).
For the purposes of this Regulation, the following units are used:
Base units — for distance the meter (m), for mass the kilogram (kg), and for time the second (s).
Supplementary units — for plane angle the radian (rad)
Derived units — for frequency the hertz (Hz) [1 Hz = 1 s-1], for force the newton (N) [1 N = 1 kg m/s2 ], for effort, or
force per unit area, the pascal (Pa) [1 Pa = 1 N/m²], and for energy or work the joule (J)
[1 J = N m]
The SI system uses the following prefixes:
1018 exa 1 000 000 000 000 000 000.
peta P E 1015 1 000 000 000 000 000.
109 1012 tera T 1 000 000 000 000.
giga G 106 1 000 000 000.
mega M 1 000 000.
kilo k 10-3103 1 000.
micro ÿ milli m 10-6 0.001
10-12 10-9 nano n 0.000 001
10-15 10-18 0.0 00 000 001
peak p 0.000 000 000 001
femto f 0.000 000 000 000 001
atto a 0.000 000 000 000 000 001
In order to avoid confusion in the use of the SI system, there are the following internationally accepted rules regarding the
syntax to be used:
(a) Lowercase and uppercase are never interchanged: mm and not MM, or kg and not
KG. (b) The symbols are not altered in the plural: kg, and
not kgs. (c) No space is left between the prefix and the symbol: MPa
and not M Pa. (d) No period is added at the end of the symbol, unless it is the final period of a
sentence. (e) The symbols are not abbreviations, therefore: Pa and not Pasc, my
not mts. (f) In symbol products a raised point is used: kN · m. (g) In the
quotients, a single division symbol is used, or negative powers can be used: kg/(m · s), or kg · m-1 · s-1, but not kg/m/
s. (h) A period, or a comma,
may be used to indicate decimals, depending on local custom. This means that neither should be used to separate
groups of digits, for this a = 9.806 650 m/s2 is used . white. Example: g (i) For numbers less than unity, the
never omitted: leading zero is
0.123 and not .123. (j) There must always be a space between the number and the units: 12.3
m/s, except when it comes to
degrees celsius: 12°C.
(k) The units whose name is the surname of a scientist, are used with a capital letter: N, Pa, etc., but
when referring to them, capital letters are not used: pascals, etc.
Solicitations — Are the forces or other actions that affect the structure, within which are counted: the gravitational effects on
its own mass, or its own weight, the loads generated by the non-structural elements, by its occupants and their possessions,
the effects environmental conditions such as wind or earthquake, differential settlement, and dimensional changes caused by
temperature variations or rheological effects of materials. In general, they correspond to everything that can affect the structure.
Technical supervision — It is the verification that the construction of the building structure is carried out in accordance with
the designs, plans and specifications made by the structural designer. Likewise, that the non-structural elements are built
following the designs, plans, and specifications made by the designer of non-structural elements, according to the degree of
performance required.
A-134
Technical Supervisor — It is the professional, civil engineer, architect or builder in architecture and engineering, under whose
responsibility the technical supervision is carried out. The scope of technical supervision is defined in Title I
of this Regulation. Technical supervision can be carried out by the same professional who performs the intervention.
See controller.
Tremor, earthquake — See earthquake.
Damage threshold — Corresponds to the level of seismic movement from which damage to structural and non-structural
elements can occur.
Shear Wave Velocity — It is the speed with which the seismic shear wave travels within a soil.
Vulnerability — It is the quantification of the potential for bad behavior of a building with respect to some solicitation.
Seismic hazard zone (low, intermediate, or high) — These are regions of the country where the seismic hazard is considered
low, intermediate, or high, as defined in A.2.3. Structural design and analysis requirements vary from area to area.
The following nomenclature corresponds to the variables used in Title A of this Regulation:
pa = coefficient of dynamic amplification of the non-structural element. See Chapter A.9.

for = horizontal acceleration, expressed as a percentage of the acceleration due to gravity, on the structural element that
is not part of the seismic resistance system, or on the non-structural element, located on the x story . See Chapters
A.8 and A.9.
AB = area of the building at its base, in m2 .
Ad = coefficient representing the effective peak acceleration, for the damage threshold, given in A.12.2.
oh = coefficient representing the reduced effective peak acceleration for design with limited safety, given
in A.10.3.
Ace = maximum acceleration at the ground surface estimated as the spectral acceleration corresponding to
a period of vibration equal to zero, See equations A.3.6-3, A.8.2-1 or A.9.4-2.
Av = acceleration coefficient that represents the effective peak horizontal velocity, for design, given in A.2.2.
Awi = minimum shear area of the section of a structural wall i measured in a horizontal , plane, in the
first level of the structure and in the address under study, in m². See A.4.2. defined
Ax = amplification coefficient of accidental torsion at level x See equations , in A.3.6.7.
i will = acceleration at level i , A.3.6-3 and A.8.2-1.
Ct = coefficient used to calculate the period of the structure, defined in A.4.2.2 = coefficient
Cu used to calculate the maximum allowable period of the structure, defined in A.4.2.1
Cvx = coefficient defined in A.4.3. DC
= is the sum of the thicknesses of the k layers of cohesive soils located within 30 m
profile tops. =
thickness of stratum i = , located within the upper 30 m of the profile
say ds is the sum of the thicknesses of the m strata of non-cohesive soils located within 30 m
profile tops.
or (EFR =pp ) , = or reduced seismic forces for

AND
reduced design seismic forces (E FR = ) , revision of the yes
existing structure and design of the extension (E FR = ÿ) . yes
Ed = seismic forces from the damage threshold. See Chapter A.12.
A-135
if = horizontal seismic force at level i to be used in equation A.4.2-1. = coefficient of

Fa amplification that affects the acceleration in the zone of short periods, due to the effects
of site, dimensionless.
= part of the seismic shear at the base that is generated at level i , see A.3.6.6.
Fi Fi , Fx = horizontal seismic forces at levels i or x respectively. See A.4.3.
fp = horizontal force on a structural element that is not part of the seismic resistance system, or a non-structural
element, component or equipment of a building, applied at its center of mass. See Chapters A.8 and A.9 =
seismic forces, see
fs A.3.1.1, or equivalent seismic forces, see = amplification coefficient affecting
fv acceleration in the zone of intermediate periods, due to site effects, dimensionless , given in A.2.4.5.
Fxm = part of the modal seismic shear Vm that is generated at the level x = , according to A.5.4.
g acceleration due to gravity ( g 9.8 = m/s²). = equivalent
heq height of the one degree of freedom system simulating the building, see A.3.6.8.2, A.8.2.1.1
and
hi A.9.4.2.1. = height in meters, measured from the base, of, level i
see A.3.6.8.2, A.8.2.1.1 and A.9.4.2.1.
hi , hx = height in meters, measured from the base, of level i or x . See A.4.3.2. = height in metres,
measured from the base, of the highest floor of the building, see A.3.6.8.2, A.4.2.2, A.8.2.1.1 and hn
A.9.4.2.1.
, measured from the diaphragm surface of the floor i to the diaphragm surface of the
Yo
ph = height of floor i
floor immediately below, i 1 ÿ . See Chapters A.4, A.6 and A.12. = height of
hwi wall i measured from the base, in m. = total
h thickness in m of the cohesive soil strata. = coefficient of
Yo importance given in A.2.5.2. = plasticity index,
ip which is obtained by complying with the ASTM D 4318 standard. = index of one of
j the main orthogonal directions in plan, it can be x or y . See Chapter
A.6.
what = exponent related to the fundamental period of the building given in A.4.3.2. = horizontally
wi measured length, in meters, of a structural wall i at the first level of the structure y
in the direction under study. See A.4.2. =
my part of M that is placed at level i = part of M that , in kg. See A.4.3.2.
M must is placed at level i or x respectively. See Chapters A.3 and A.4. mi , mx M = total mass of the building —
be equal to the total mass of the structure plus the mass of those elements such as dividing walls and partitions, permanent
equipment, tanks and their contents, etc.
In warehouses or warehouses, 25 percent of the mass corresponding to the elements that cause the live load of
the floor must also be included. Chapters A.4 and A.5 (in kg).
Mp = mass of an element or component, in kg. See Chapters A.3, A.8, and A.9.
Mj = total acting mass of the building in the j direction. Equation A.5.4-1.
Mm = modal effective mass of mode m , determined according to equation A.5.4-2.
nw = number of building walls effective to resist horizontal seismic forces in the direction
under study.
No.
= number of floors of the building. =
neph effective resistance. See Chapter A.10. = existing
Nex resistance. See Chapter A.10. = number of blows
Neither per foot obtained in the standard penetration test, carried out in situ according to ASTM D 1586, without correcting
for N60 energy. The value of Ni used to obtain the mean value must not exceed 100.
p = total number of modes used in the modal analysis of the structure. See Chapter A.5. = sum of the
Pi total vertical load, including dead and live, that exists on story i , and all stories located above it. For the calculation
of P-Delta design effects, there is no need for the
A-136
load coefficients of are greater than unity. See Chapter A.6.

Qi = stability index of floor i used in the evaluation of the P-Delta effects. See A.6.2.3. = projection, on the
rj direction perpendicular in plan to the direction under study, j, of the distance between the
center of mass of the floor and the point of interest. See Chapter A.6. =
R. energy dissipation capacity coefficient to be used in the design, corresponds to the basic energy dissipation coefficient,
R0 , multiplied by the energy dissipation capacity reduction coefficients due to irregularities in height, in plan, and by
absence of redundancy
in the seismic resistance structural system ( R R = apr

ÿ ÿ ÿ0 ) . See Chapter A.3.
Rÿ = coefficient of energy dissipation capacity that is assigned to the existing building according to
with what is prescribed in Chapter A.10.
RC = coefficient of energy dissipation capacity defined for the area of short periods less than when required in microzoning studies.
TC as a function of the value of R , Defined in the
equation A.2.9-1
Rp = coefficient of energy dissipation capacity of the non-structural element and its support system.
It is given in tables A.9.5-1 and A.9.6-1.
ui s = is the undrained shear strength in kPa (kgf/cm²) of stratum i , which should not exceed 250 kPa (2.5 kgf/
cm²) to perform the weighted average. This resistance is measured according to the NTC 1527 (ASTM D 2166) or NTC
2041 (ASTM D 2850) standard. = site coefficient considered
S in A.12.3
S
= site coefficient to be used in the seismic spectrum of the damage threshold ( S 1.25S = ) .
expressed as a fraction of the acceleration due to gravity, for a one degree of freedom system with a period of vibration
T . It is defined in A.2.6. = value of the seismic spectrum of the damage threshold,
sad for a given period of vibration. Maximum horizontal acceleration to the damage threshold, expressed as a fraction of the
acceleration due to gravity, for a one degree of freedom system with a period of vibration T. It is defined in A.12.3.
Sam = value of the design acceleration spectrum for the vibration period Tm , corresponding to the vibration mode m . See Chapter
A.5.
sd = value of the spectrum of design displacements for a given period of vibration. Maximum design horizontal displacement,
expressed in m, for a one degree of freedom system with a period of vibration T . It is defined in A.2.6.3. = value of the
design velocity spectrum for a given period of vibration.
sv Maximum design horizontal velocity, expressed in m/s, for a one degree of freedom system with a period of vibration T. It
is defined in A.2.6.2.
you
= fundamental period of the building as determined in A.4.2.
T0 = vibration period at which the zone of constant accelerations of the acceleration spectrum begins, in
s.
Ta = approximate fundamental period of vibration, in seconds, calculated according to A.4.2. = vibration period,
CT in seconds, corresponding to the transition between the zone of constant acceleration of the design spectrum, for short
periods, and the descending part of it. See A.2.6. = vibration period, in seconds, corresponding to the
ctd transition between the zone of constant acceleration of the seismic spectrum of the damage threshold for short periods and
the descending part of it. See Chapter A.12.
TL = vibration period, in seconds, corresponding to the start of the displacement zone

approximately constant of the design spectrum, for long periods. (See A.2.6).
TLd = vibration period, in seconds, corresponding to the beginning of the zone of approximately constant displacement of the
damage threshold spectrum, for long periods. (See A.12.3.4).
Tm = vibration period corresponding to the vibration mode m Ts , in sec See Chapter A.5. = period
of fundamental vibration, in seconds, of the underlying soil deposit at the site. See A.2.4.
= average speed of the shear wave of the soil of stratum i , measured in the field, in m/s.
yes v
A-137
Vmj = seismic shear at the base corresponding to mode m in the horizontal direction j. see the
Chapter A.5.
Vi , Vx = shear force of the story i or x , respectively, in the direction under study, without dividing by R . It is determined by
means of the equations of numeral A.4.3. It corresponds to the sum of the horizontal seismic design forces that
are applied to level i or x , and all levels located above it.
equivalent of Chapter A.4. =
vsd seismic shear at the base, for the damage threshold seismic forces. See A.12.4. = total seismic
vtj shear at the base in the horizontal direction j. See Chapter A.5.
vx = seismic shear force at level x . See A.3.6.6.
w = water content in percentage, which is determined by means of the NTC 1495 standard (ASTM D 2166). =
ÿ exponent to be used in calculating the approximate period Ta . See A.4.2.2.
Yo
ÿcm ,
= horizontal displacement of the center of mass of the floor i , in the direction j. See Chapter A.6.
j ÿi = horizontal displacement of level i with respect to the base of the structure, due to horizontal forces if , to be used
in equation A.4.2-1, or horizontal displacement of the center of mass of level i of the structure, in meters , used
in Chapter A.6. = maximum horizontal displacement at level x . See
ÿ max equation A.3.6-2.
Yo
ÿpd ,j
= additional horizontal displacement of the center of mass of the floor i , caused by P-Delta effects, in the
address j. See Chapter A.6.
ÿavg = average of the horizontal displacements at the extreme points of the structure at level x . see
equation A.3.6-2.
Yo
ÿt ,j = additional horizontal displacement caused by torsion effects, of any point on the diaphragm of the
floor i , in the direction j. See Chapter A.6.
Yo
ÿtot ,j
= total horizontal displacement, of any point on the diaphragm of floor i in direction j See the
Chapter A.6.
, in the direction under study, j, measured at the center of mass of the floor, as the difference
Yo
ÿcm ,j
= drift from floor i
between the horizontal displacement of the floor i minus that of the floor i 1 ÿ in the same direction j. See
Chapter A.6.
Yo
ÿj
_
= drift from floor i in the main direction on floor j.
Yo
ÿmax = maximum design drift for any point on the floor i . See Chapter A.6. = coefficient of
reduction of the energy dissipation capacity caused by irregularities in height of aÿ
eÿ = coefficient of resistance reduction by state of the structure. See A.10.4.3.4. = resistance
cÿ reduction coefficient due to the quality of the design and construction of the structure. see
A.10.4.3.4.
m
ÿij _
= displacement amplitude of level i of the building, in direction j, when it is vibrating in the
mode m . See Chapter A.5. =
pÿ coefficient of reduction of the energy dissipation capacity caused by irregularities in plant
of the building. See A.3.3.3.
rÿ = coefficient of reduction of power dissipation capacity caused by lack of redundancy
in the structural system of seismic resistance. See A.3.3.8. = coefficient of
ÿ0 ÿi overresistance. See A.3.3.9.
_
= rotation around a vertical axis passing through the center of mass of floor i , caused by the effects
torsional, in radians. See Chapter A.6.
ÿ
A-138
A-139
NSR-10 – Appendix A-1 – Seismic recommendations for some structures that are
outside the scope of the Regulation
APPENDIX A-1
SEISMIC RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SOME STRUCTURES
THAT ARE OUTSIDE THE SCOPE OF THE REGULATION
A-1.0 — NOMENCLATURE
g s2 ). = acceleration due to gravity ( g 9.8 = = m/

Yo
importance coefficient given in A.2.5.2.
M = total mass of the building; M must be equal to the total mass of the structure plus its contents. In structures such as
tanks, silos and other storage structures, it must include the mass corresponding to the normal operational
content of the structure.
R. = coefficient of energy dissipation capacity to be used in the design, corresponds to the basic energy dissipation
coefficient, R0 , multiplied by the coefficients of reduction of energy dissipation capacity due to irregularities in
height, in plan, and due to the absence of redundancy

ÿ ÿ0ÿ ) . See Chapter A.3.
= fundamental period of the structure.
TW = total weight of the building; W M = g .
A-1.1—OVERVIEW
A-1.1.1 — PURPOSE — This Appendix provides recommendations that allow determining the design seismic forces of
some special structures not covered by the scope of the Colombian Seismic Resistant Standards and their Regulations. In
addition, you can consult the document "AIS-180 Standard — Seismic resistant design requirements for some structures
other than buildings", 2010, of the Colombian Association of Earthquake Engineering - AIS, which corresponds to the
translation and adaptation of Chapter 14 of the document NEHRP 2003 and which analyzes in detail the behavior of tanks,
containers and silos mainly.
This Appendix and the AIS document indicated contain design recommendations that are not mandatory, and are included
for illustrative purposes only.
A-1.1.2 — SCOPE — The requirements of this Appendix can be used in the earthquake resistant design of constructions
that are outside the scope of Law 400 of 1997 and its regulations. The earthquake resistant design parameters are given in
a manner compatible with what is required for buildings in this Regulation.
A-1.1.3 — APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS — In general, it is recommended to follow the requirements of the Regulation
with the exceptions noted in this Chapter. Special care must be taken with the wind forces on these special structures, since
in many cases they are greater than the seismic forces.
A-1.2 — FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD OF THE STRUCTURE

, be obtained from the properties of its seismic
A-1.2.1 — The value of the fundamental period of the structure, T, must
resistance system, in the direction under consideration, according to the principles of structural dynamics, using a
mathematical model linearly elastic structure. This requirement can be met by using equation A.4.2-1.
A-1.3 — CALCULATION OF DESIGN SEISMIC FORCES

A-1.3.1 — DESIGN SEISMIC MOVEMENTS — The definition of design seismic movements given in Chapter A.2 of the
Regulations must be used.
A-139
NSR-10 – Appendix A-1 – Seismic recommendations for some structures that are outside
the scope of the Regulation
A-1.3.2 — TOTAL MASS, M — The total mass, M shall include , the mass corresponding to all dead loads and the masses
corresponding to the normal operational contents of the structure, especially in tanks, silos and other storage structures.
A-1.3.3 — IMPORTANCE COEFFICIENT, I — An importance coefficient, I , equal to unity, must be taken, unless the structure is
part of or may affect buildings of use groups II, III or IV. In the case of structures that are part of vital line systems, the definition of
the importance coefficient to be used must be based on considerations that include the level of redundancy of the system and the
potential that an eventual failure of the structure could affect the operation. or stability of essential buildings.
A-1.3.4 — HEIGHT DISTRIBUTION OF SEISMIC FORCES — The height distribution of horizontal seismic forces can be carried out
by any of the procedures presented in Chapters A.4 or A.5 of the Regulations.
A-1.3.5 — BASIC ENERGY DISSIPATION COEFFICIENT, R0 — It is recommended to use the values of the energy dissipation
capacity coefficient, R0 , given in table A-1.3-1 of this Appendix.
Table A-1.3-1
Coefficient of energy dissipation capacity, R0 , for some
special structures
Type of structure R0 value

Tanks, containers for liquids and gases under pressure, supported on 2.0
braced columns, with or without diagonals Silos and reinforced
concrete chimneys cast on site, whose walls are continuous until the 3.5
foundation Tower-shaped structures whose mass is
distributed in height, such as chimneys, silos and tanks, whose 3.0
supports consist of skirts.
Lattice towers, self-supporting or with temples, chimneys and towers 3.0

with temples.
Inverted pendulum type structures 2.0
Hoppers on columns, with or without bracing. 3.0
Cooling towers Storage 3.5
towers or racks Signs and billboards 3.0
Monuments and amusement 3.5
park structures Other self-supporting structures, not 2.0
included above 3.0
A-1.4 — DRIFT REQUIREMENTS
A-1.4.1 — The drift requirements presented in Chapter A.6 are not directly applicable to special structures other than those covered
by the Regulation in its scope. The drift limits must be established by the designer, taking into account the danger that the failure of
structural and non-structural elements represents to life, as a consequence of the displacements suffered by the structure when
affected by design seismic movements.
A-140
NSR-10 — Appendix A-2 — Recommendations for calculating dynamic soil-
structure interaction effects
APPENDIX A-2
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR CALCULATING THE EFFECTS
OF DYNAMIC SOIL-STRUCTURE INTERACTION
A-2.0 — NOMENCLATURE
aah = coefficient that represents the effective peak acceleration, for design, given in A.2.2.
year
= area of the foundation.
ds = depth of the soft layer. See A-2.2.1.2.

= 2
go s0 = average shear modulus for the soils located under the foundation for deformations
ÿv small unit.
g = acceleration due to gravity (9.8 m/s²)
= height measured from the base of the level under study.
hx
h = effective height of the building, which should be taken equal to 0.7 times the total height, hn . In buildings in which
the entire mass M of the building is concentrated on a single story, it must be taken equal to the height of the story,
measured from the base.
I heard
= moment of inertia of the foundation with respect to a horizontal axis, perpendicular to the direction in
study.
what = rigidity of the structure considering it embedded in the base. It is calculated by means of the equation
A-2-4.
Ky = lateral stiffness of the foundation of the building, which is defined as the horizontal static force applied to the foundation,
which produces a unitary horizontal deflection. Both the static force and the horizontal deflection are taken in the
direction under study.
Kÿ = rotational or rolling stiffness of the foundation of the building, defined as the static moment necessary to produce a unitary
rotation, on average, of the foundation with respect to a horizontal axis perpendicular to the direction under study.
= total length of the foundation in the direction under
Lo study.
Mo = overturning moment at the base of the building calculated using the horizontal design forces without including the
reduction due to soil-structure interaction effects.
Mlo = overturning moment at the base of the building calculated using the horizontal forces
corresponding to the first mode without including the reduction due to soil-structure interaction effects.
M = participating mass of the building, which can be taken equal to 0.7M , except in those cases in which the entire mass M of
the building is concentrated in a single story, in which case it must be taken equal to M .
mlj = participating mass of the building, for the fundamental mode of the building in the j-direction, calculated
using equation A.5.4-2. =
r characteristic length of the foundation. It is determined by means of equations A-2-7 or A-2-8. = characteristic
ar length of the foundation. Defined by means of equation A-2-7. = characteristic length of the
rm foundation. Defined by means of equation A-2-8. = value of the spectrum of design
sa accelerations, determined in accordance with the requirements of Chapter A.2, corresponding to the fundamental
period of the structure, T or Ta , considered embedded in its base, calculated in accordance with the provisions of
A.4.2. = value of the spectrum of design
Salt accelerations, determined in accordance with the requirements of Chapter A.2, corresponding to the period of the
fundamental mode of the structure, Tl , considered embedded in its base. = value of the spectrum of design
sa accelerations, determined in accordance with the requirements of Chapter A.2, corresponding to the fundamental
period of the structure, T, when this is calculated considering the effects of soil-structure interaction, as defined in
A-2.2.1.1.
Salt = value of the spectrum of design accelerations, determined in accordance with the requirements of Chapter A.2,
A-141
NSR-10 — Appendix A-2 — Recommendations for calculating dynamic soil-structure interaction
effects
corresponding to the fundamental period of the structure, Tl , effects of soil- when it is calculated considering the
structure interaction. = value of the fundamental
you period of the building, calculated in accordance with the provisions of A.4.2. = value of the fundamental period of the
tl building, corresponding to the first mode of vibration. = value of the fundamental period of the building taking into
you
account the soil-structure interaction. It is determined
in accordance with the requirements of A-2.2.1.1.
tl = value of the fundamental period of the building, corresponding to the first mode of vibration, taking into account
account the soil-structure interaction.
equivalent of Chapter A.4.
ÿ
vs. = seismic shear at the base of the structure, calculated by the equivalent horizontal force method
of Chapter A.4, using a period of vibration equal to C Tu a .
vlj = design seismic shear at the base of the structure in the j direction, contributed by the fundamental mode in that direction, calculated
according to equation A.5.4-3 and unaffected by soil-structure interaction effects.
vs. = design seismic shear at the base of the structure, calculated taking into account soil interaction
structure.
vlj = design seismic shear at the base of the structure in the j direction, contributed by the mode
fundamental in that direction, and affected by soil-structure interaction.

ÿVs = reduction in the design seismic shear at the base of the structure, due to the effects of the
soil-structure interaction. Equation A-2-2.
ÿVlj = reduction in the design seismic shear at the base of the structure in the j direction, contributed by the
fundamental mode in that direction, due to the effects of soil-structure interaction.
v so = average velocity of the shear wave, of the soils located below the foundation, for low levels of unit strain, less than 0.00001 (0.001%). =
parameter that describes the relative density of the structure and the soil below it. Defined
ÿ in the equation
A-2-6.
ÿÿÿ = modifier of the dynamic stiffness of the foundation to take into account rolling. = critical damping coefficient of
_ the structural system, considering the soil interaction
structure, calculated in accordance with the provisions of A-2.2-1.
oÿ = critical damping coefficient of the foundation. It is determined by means of figure A-2.2-1. = horizontal deflection at level x of the
xÿ structure, calculated following the equivalent horizontal force method and using design seismic forces without being modified by soil-structure
interaction effects.
ÿlx _ = horizontal deflection at level x of the structure, calculated for the first mode of vibration without including the
effects of soil-structure interaction.
xÿ = horizontal deflection at level x of the structure, modified by soil interaction effects

structure. Equation A-2-11.
ÿlx _ = horizontal deflection at level x of the structure, for the first mode of vibration, modified by the
effects of soil-structure interaction.
ÿ = average unit mass of soil.
A-2.1—OVERALL
A-2.1.1 — The requirements presented in this Appendix can be used to take into account the effects of soil-structure interaction in the determination of
the design seismic forces and the deformations they impose on the structure. Its use is allowed within the limitations given in Chapter A.7 when the
mathematical model used to determine the response of the structure does not directly incorporate the flexibility of the foundation (use of models
embedded in the foundation). In general, the use of these requirements decreases the design values of the seismic shear at the base, the horizontal
forces and the overturning moments, but increases the horizontal deflections of the structure, and therefore the drifts, in particular places of the structure.
Besides
A-142
NSR-10 — Appendix A-2 — Recommendations for calculating dynamic soil-structure
interaction effects
displacements and secondary forces associated with P-Delta effects. Requirements for use with the equivalent horizontal force method are
given in A-2.2 and for the elastic modal dynamic analysis method in A-2.3. These requirements should not be used if a flexible foundation
model was used where the foundation is modeled directly in the analysis of the structure, and not an embedded foundation model.
A-2.2 — EQUIVALENT HORIZONTAL FORCE METHOD

The requirements presented below complement those given in Chapter A.7 with regard to soil-structure interaction.
A-2.2.1 — BASE SHEAR — To account for soil-structure interaction effects, the design seismic base shear, Vs , determined by Equation
A.4-5, can be modified to:
VV V= ss
ÿÿ s (A-2-1)
and the value of the reduction in the seismic shear at the base, for design, must be calculated by means of:
0.4
ÿ ÿÿ 0.05
ÿÿ ÿ
ÿ VSS
ÿ=yesÿaaÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ gM (A-2-2)
ÿ ÿ
The value of the modified seismic shear at the base, Vs , cannot be less than 0.7Vÿ .
yes
A-2.2.1.1 — Effective period of the building — The effective period, T the following , must be determined by
equation:
what
ÿ Kh 2 ÿ
TT+=+ 1 1 and
(A-2-3)
ÿ ÿ
k ÿ
ÿ k ÿÿ
and
ÿ
and
ÿ M ÿ
k4 = ÿ 2ÿ ÿ
you 2 ÿ (A-2-4)
ÿ ÿ
The foundation stiffnesses, Ky and Kÿ , must be determined by means of established soil mechanics principles, using soil properties
that are representative of their behavior at unit strain levels, commensurate with those that produce the design seismic movements.
In those cases in which the geotechnical study does not indicate it, the average shear modulus, G, for the soils located below the
foundation, under appreciable unit strain conditions, and the shear wave velocity, vs, associated with these unit strains can be
determined using table A.-2.1-1.
Table A-2.1-1
Values of G Go and vv
yes so
Aa value
ÿ0.10 ÿ 0.15 ÿ 0.20 0.64 0.49 ÿ0.30
G Go Value 0.81 _ 0.42 _
Value of vv s so 0.90 0.80 0.70 0.65
Alternatively, for buildings whose foundation is a shallow or approximately shallow slab foundation, which is constructed in such a
way that the contact between the retaining walls and the ground can be considered not to restrict the free movement of the structure,
the period of
A-143
Effective vibration, taking into account the effects of soil-structure interaction, can be determined by means of the
following equation:
ÿ 25
ÿ rh ÿ ÿ
T T1
+ ÿ=+
22 vT ÿ s to
2 1.12rh
to
1 (A-2-5)
ÿ 3
rÿ m ÿÿÿ
where:
m
ÿ= (A-2-6)
ÿ Ahh either
TO
(A-2-7)
either
r=a
ÿ
and
4I
r = m 4 or (A-2-8)
ÿ
A-2.2.1.2 — Effective damping — The effective damping coefficient of the foundation structure system must be
calculated by means of:
0.05
ÿ=ÿ + either
3
(A-2-9)
ÿ ÿyouÿ
ÿ
ÿ you
ÿ
The values of oÿ are obtained from Figure A-2.2-1. The parameter r in figure A-2.2-1 is a characteristic length of
the foundation, which can be determined as follows:
h h
For ÿ0.5 _ , r is equal to ar , from Equation A-2-7 and for ÿ1.0 _ , r is equal to rm , from Equation A-2-8.
L either
L either
For intermediate values it can be interpolated. Lo is the length of the foundation in the direction under study, and in
the application of equations A-2-7 and A-2-8, Ao and oI are determined for the area of the foundation that is
effectively in contact with the ground, since it transmits the weight of the building.
For buildings founded on pointed piles, and for all other cases in which the foundation soil consists of a relatively
uniform layer of soft soils, placed on top of a deposit of harder soils, or rock, presenting an abrupt change of
stiffness, the effective damping coefficient, oÿ , used in Equation A-2-9 can be substituted for the value given in the
following equation:
ÿ 4D yes
ÿ
(A-2-10)
ÿ
ÿ=ÿ
either either
ÿÿ
vT
yes
ÿÿ
which is applicable only in those cases in which the expression between parentheses is less than unity. In this
equation Ds is the total depth of the soft layer.
The value of ÿ , calculated according to equation A-2-9, with or without the adjustment represented in equation
A-2-10, can never be less than 0.05, nor more than 0.20.
A-144
0.25
aah ÿ0.20
aah = 0.15
h aah ÿ0.10
0.20 ÿ1.0
r
h
0.15
= 1.5
r
ÿo
0.10 h
= 2.0
r
0.05
h
= 5.0
r
0.00
1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00
you
you
Figure A-2.2-1 — Foundation critical damping ratio, oÿ
A-2.2.2 — HEIGHT DISTRIBUTION OF SEISMIC FORCES — The height distribution of the shear at the base corrected
for soil-structure interaction effects must be taken as the same as that of the structure without interaction.
A-2.2.3 — OTHER EFFECTS — Story shears, overturning moments, and torsional effects must be determined in the
same way as for buildings in which soil-structure interaction has not been taken into account, but using the forces
horizontals reduced by interaction effects. The modified deflections must be determined by means of the following equation:
V Mh
ÿ yes ox ÿ
ÿ=
x ÿ+ ÿ (A-2-11)
V ÿ xyes Kÿ ÿÿ
A-2.3 — MODAL ANALYSIS METHOD

The following requirements complement, with regard to soil-structure interaction, what is presented in Chapter A.5.
A-2.3.1 — MODAL SHEARS AT BASE — To account for soil interaction effects

structure, the design seismic shear at the base, corresponding to the fundamental mode, Vlj , in the j direction, determined
by means of equation A.5.4-3, can be modified to:
VV V=1jÿÿ1j 1j (A-2-12)
and the value of the reduction in the seismic shear at the base corresponding to the fundamental mode, must be calculated
using equation A-2-13:
0.4
ÿ 0.05
ÿ VSS
ÿ ÿÿ= ÿ1j a1 a1 ÿ ÿ gM 1j (A-2-13)
ÿÿ ÿÿÿÿ
ÿ
A-145
The period T1 is calculated using Equation A-2-3 or A-2-5, as appropriate, using T1 instead of T by determining k using ,
Equation A-2-4, using M1j instead of M , and calculating h by means of the following equation:
no
1
ÿÿ mh ii Yo
h = i =1 (A-2-14)
no
1
ÿÿ m ii
i =1
The mentioned values of T1 , T1 , M1j , and h are used to calculate ÿ in Equation A-2-6 and the coefficient oÿ in Figure
A-2.2-1. No reduction should be made in the contributions of vibration modes other than the fundamental due to soil-structure
interaction effects. The shear at the design basis can never be 0.7Vÿ . smaller than
yes
A-2.3.2 — OTHER MODAL EFFECTS — Story shears and overturning moments must be determined in the same way as
for buildings in which soil-structure interaction has not been taken into account, as prescribed by Chapter A.5, but using the
value of V1j instead of V1j. The modified deflections of the first mode must be determined by means of the following equation:
V1 ÿ mh ÿ
1o x
ÿ=
1xÿ+ ÿ 1x (A-2-15)
V1 ÿ Kÿ ÿÿ
A-2.3.3 — DESIGN VALUES — They are determined using the procedures indicated in Chapter A.5, but using the modified
values of the effects of the first mode in each of the main directions, in plan, of the building.
A-146
NSR-10 – Appendix A-3 – “Push-Over” progressive plasticization static nonlinear procedure
APPENDIX A-3
STATIC NON-LINEAR PROCEDURE
PROGRESSIVE PLASTICIZATION “PUSH-OVER”
PREFACE — This appendix deals with static nonlinear analysis, a seismic analysis procedure also sometimes known as
push-over analysis, or capacity method, or capacity curve method.
This appendix is not mandatory and has been included for preliminary study in order to adopt it in future editions of the
Regulations if deemed appropriate.
Although nonlinear static analysis has only recently been included in building design and construction provisions, the
procedure itself is not new and has been used for many years in both research and design applications. For example,
static nonlinear analysis has been used for many years as a standard methodology in the design of offshore platform
structures for hydrodynamic purposes, and has recently been adopted in several standard methodologies for seismic
evaluation and rehabilitation of buildings, including the Criteria Seismic Design Guidelines for Buildings with Moment-
Resisting Steel Frames (FEMA-350, 2000a), Pre-Standard and Comments for Seismic Rehabilitation of Buildings (FEMA
356, 2000b) and Seismic Evaluation and Building Improvement (ATC 40, 1996 ). Static non-linear analysis constitutes
the foundation for the seismic loss estimation procedures contained in HAZUS (NIBS, 1999), which is the seismic loss
estimation model of the US Office of Disaster Assistance (FEMA). Although it does not appear explicitly in the Regulation,
the static nonlinear analysis methodology also constitutes the basis for the equivalent lateral force procedures contained
in the provisions for isolated structures at the base and structures with energy dissipators.
One of the objections to the introduction of a methodology of this nature in the Regulations is related to the determination
of the limit deformation (sometimes called performance displacement). Different methodologies have been proposed to
determine the displacement induced to the structure by the ground movements produced by an earthquake and some of
them have been adopted as a regulatory procedure in different countries.
The treatment presented in this appendix is based on statistical correlations of the displacements whose prediction has
been made using linear and non-linear analysis methodologies of the structure, which are similar to those contained in
FEMA 356. A second reason for discussion has to do with with the lack of uniformity of criteria regarding the goodness of
the design once the forces and deformations produced by the design earthquake have been estimated. It must be taken
into account that this limitation applies equally to the treatment against time of the non-linear response, which has already
been adopted in the Regulation.
Static nonlinear analysis corresponds to a simplified method to directly evaluate the nonlinear response of structures to
strong ground motions caused by an earthquake. This is an attractive alternative to the more complex procedures of
nonlinear response versus time analysis. It is hoped that the consideration of this methodology through its inclusion in
this appendix will allow the development of the necessary consensus to allow a subsequent integration into the Regulation
as such.
A-3.1 — OVERALL
A-3.1.1 — Purpose — This Appendix provides recommendations for performing a static nonlinear analysis, also known
as a push-over procedure. This appendix is not mandatory within the regulation.
A-3.1.2 — Scope — The requirements of this Appendix can be used in the earthquake resistant analysis and design of
existing and new buildings. The earthquake resistant analysis and design parameters are given in a manner compatible
with what is required in Title A of the Regulations.
A-3.1.3 — Definitions
Base (Base) — See Chapter A.13
Dead load (Dead load) —See Chapter A.13
Live Load— See Chapter A.13
A-147
Component — A part or element of an architectural, electrical, mechanical, or structural system.
Basal Cut (Base shear) — See Chapter A.13
Capacity curve — A plot of the total lateral force Vf versus the lateral displacement of the control point, as determined in a
static nonlinear analysis.
Effective yield displacement — The displacement of the control point at the intersection of the first and second branches
of a bilinear curve that fits the capacity curve in accordance with Section A-3.2.3
Target Displacement — An estimate of the maximum expected displacement of the control point calculated for the design
earthquake in accordance with Section A-3.2.5
Diaphragm (Diaphragm) — See Chapter A.13
Structural designer (Structural engineer of record) — See Chapter A.13
Building — See Chapter A.13
Structure (Structure) — See Chapter A.13
Design earthquake ground motion —See Chapter A.13
Floor (Story) — See Chapter A.13
Control point — A point used to index the lateral displacement of the structure in a static nonlinear analysis, determined in
accordance with Section A-3.2.1
Effective Yield Strength — The total lateral force applied at the intersection of the first and second branches of a bilinear
curve that fits the capacity curve in accordance with Section A 3.2.3
Seismic-force-resisting system — See Chapter A.13
A-3.1.4 — Nomenclature
cs = seismic response coefficient, result of dividing Sa by R = a .

C0 modification factor to relate the displacement of the control point to the displacement of a system representative of
a single degree of freedom, as determined by Equation A-3.2-3 = a modification factor to take into
C1 account the influence of inelastic behavior on the
system response as determined by Equation A-3.2-4 =
gj
acceleration of gravity (9.8 m/s2 ) = the
_
increase in lateral load
M = total mass of the building
my = the portion of the total mass of the building M = , at Level i
R. coefficient of energy dissipation capacity to be used in the design, corresponds to the basic energy dissipation
coefficient, R0, multiplied by the coefficients of reduction of energy dissipation capacity per irregularities in
height, in plan, and due to the absence of redundancy in the structural system of seismic resistance (R = ÿa ÿp
ÿr R0).
Rd = the ductility factor of the system analyzed by push-over as determined by equation A-3.2-5 Sa
= value of the spectrum of design accelerations for a given period of vibration. Maximum horizontal design
acceleration, expressed as a fraction of the acceleration due to gravity, for a one degree of freedom system with
a period of vibration T. It is defined in A.2.6.
tl = the fundamental period of the structure in the direction under consideration determined in the
first iteration of the push-over analysis.
tc = period of vibration, in seconds, corresponding to the transition between the zone of constant acceleration
A-148
of the design spectrum, for short periods, and the descending part of it. See A.2.6. = the effective
Tea fundamental period of the structure in the direction being considered, as
determined in Section A-3.2.3
vj = the total lateral force applied to the load increment j
vl = total lateral force applied to the first increment of lateral load = effective
vy yield strength determined from a bilinear curve fitted to the yield capacity curve
according to Section A-3.2.3
ÿ = drift from the story as determined in Section A-3.2.6 =
iÿ the deformations of member i
ÿj = the displacement of the control point at one load increment j
ÿT _ = the target displacement of the control point determined in accordance with Section A-3.2.5 = the
ÿl
_ displacement of the control point at the first increment of lateral load = the effective
yÿ yield displacement of the control point determined from a bilinear curve fitted to the
capacity curve in accordance with Section A-3.2.3. = the
i amplitude of the characteristic shape vector at Level i , determined in accordance with Section A-3.2.4
ÿ ÿo = coefficient of overresistance. See A.3.3.9.
A-3.2 - STATIC NON-LINEAR PROCEDURE

The requirements of this section shall be used when using the static nonlinear procedure to design structures.
A-3.2.1 — Modeling — A mathematical model of the structure must be defined that adequately represents the spatial
distribution of the mass and stiffness of the structural system considering the effects of the non-linearity of the components
for the deformation levels that exceed the proportional limit. Delta P effects should be included in the analysis.
For regular structures with orthogonal seismic resistance systems, it is allowed to use independent two-dimensional models
to represent each system. For structures that have irregularities in plan Types 4P and 5P, as defined in Table A.3-6, or
structures without independent orthogonal systems, a three-dimensional model incorporating a minimum of three degrees of
freedom for each level of the structure shall be used. , consisting of translation in two orthogonal directions and torsional
rotation about the vertical axis. When the diaphragms are not rigid compared to the vertical elements of the seismic
resistance system, the model must include the representation of the flexibility of the diaphragm.
Unless analysis indicates that the component remains in the elastic range, a nonlinear force-strain model should be used to
represent component stiffness before yielding, yield strength, and component stiffness properties. components at different
strain levels after creep.
The properties of the components of nonlinear models must be consistent with the principles of mechanics or with
experimental data. The properties that represent the behavior of the components before creep must be consistent with what
is indicated in Chapter A.5. The resistance of the elements must not exceed the expected values taking into account the
over-strength of the material and strain hardening. The properties of elements and components beyond creep must take into
account the degradation of strength and stiffness according to the principles of structural mechanics or the results of
experimental tests. The model for the columns must take into account the influence of the axial load when 15% of the
compressive strength is exceeded. Likewise, the effects of section cracking must be considered in the case of the stiffness
properties of concrete and masonry elements, as well as the contribution of the deformations of the panel areas for the
general displacements of the floor in the resistant steel frames. at moments. It shall be assumed that the structure has a
fixed base or alternatively it shall be permitted to use actual considerations regarding the stiffness and bearing-carrying
characteristics of foundations, consistent with site-specific soil data and rational principles of mechanics. of soils.
One control point must be selected for each model. For structures without lofts, the control point must be at the center of
mass of the highest level of the structure. For structures with mezzanines, the control point must be at the center of mass of
the level at the base of the mezzanine.
A-149
A-3.2.2— Analysis — The structure shall be analyzed for the application of seismic actions occurring simultaneously
with the effects of dead load combined with not less than 25 percent of the live loads required by the design, reduced as
permitted to the area of a single floor. Lateral forces must be applied to the center of mass of each level and must be
proportional to the distribution obtained from a modal analysis for the fundamental mode of response in the direction
being considered. Lateral loads must increase monotonically.
As the lateral load j increases , the total lateral force applied to the model must be characterized by the term Vj . Lateral
force increases should be made in increments that are small enough to allow significant changes in the behavior of
individual components (such as creep, buckling, or failure) to be detected. The first increase in lateral load should
produce elastic behavior. In each step of the analysis, the total applied lateral force Vj , the lateral displacement of the
control point ÿ and j the forces and deformations of each component must be recorded. Analysis should be continueduntil
the control point displacement is at least 150% of the target displacement determined in accordance with Section A-3.2.5.
The structure shall be designed so that the total applied lateral force does not decrease at any step in the analysis for
control point displacements less than or equal to 125% of the target displacement.
A-3.2.3 — Effective Yield Strength and Effective Period — A bilinear curve shall be fitted to the capacity curve such
that the first segment of the bilinear curve coincides with the capacity curve at 60% capacity. effective to creep; the
second segment must coincide with the capacity curve at the target displacement, and the area under the bilinear curve
must equal the area under the capacity curve between the origin and the target displacement. The effective yield strength
Vy , corresponds to the total lateral force applied at the intersection of the two segments. The effective creep
displacement, yÿ , corresponds to the displacement of the control point at the intersection of the two line segments.
The fundamental effective period Te , must be determined using the following equation:
V ÿl
_
(A-3.2-1)
he
TT =
and he
V
ÿyy _
Where: Vl , l , and Tl are determined for the first increment of the lateral load. ÿ
A-3.2.4 — Shape characteristic vector — The shape characteristic vector shall be equal to the shape of the first mode
of the structure in the direction under consideration, determined by means of a modal analysis of the structure with the
properties of the structure. first increment of lateral load, and normalized to have unit amplitude at the control point level.
It is permitted to substitute the deflected shape of the structure in the increment at which the control point displacement
is equal to the effective yield displacement instead of the mode shape, to determine the shape vector.
A-3.2.5 — Target Displacement — The target displacement of the control point, ÿT , shall be determined using equation
A-3.2-2 as follows:
2
ÿ ÿyouÿ
ÿ= CCS g 2 ÿ
and
(A-3.2-2)
T 0 1a
ÿÿÿ
Where the spectral acceleration Sa , is determined as Section A.2.6 says for the effective fundamental period Te , g is
the acceleration of gravity, and the coefficients C0 and Cl are determined as follows: The coefficient C0
must be calculated using the equation A-3.2-3 as:
A-150
no
ÿÿ m ii
C.0 =
i =1 (A-3.2-3)
no
2
ÿÿ m ii
i =1
Where:
e = the portion of the total mass M located at Level i
iÿ = the amplitude of the characteristic shape vector at Level i
When the effective fundamental period of the structure in the direction under consideration, Te , is greater than Tc
as defined in A.2.6.1.1, the coefficient C1 shall be taken as 1.0. Otherwise the value of the coefficient C1 must be calculated
using equation A-3.2-4 as follows:
1 ÿ ( + R d1T ÿ
) C. ÿ
C.1 = ÿ1 ÿ
(A-3.2-4)
Rd you
ÿ and
ÿ
Where: Rd is given by equation A-3.2-5 as follows:
Smg
R.d = to (A-3.2-5)
v
and
Tc and Vy are defined above, Sa is the design spectral acceleration at the fundamental effective period, Te is the
fundamental effective period defined in Section A-3.2.3, and M is defined in Section A-3.1.4.
A-3.2.6 — Story Drift — The story drift ÿ is reached, , taken as the value obtained for each floor at the step in which
the target offset must not exceed the drift limit specified in Section A.6.4.1.
A-3.2.7 — Resistance of elements — In addition to satisfying the requirements of this appendix, the resistance of elements
shall also satisfy the requirements of A.1.3.4, step 11 using E 0 = , except that A. .3.3.9 should be applied when this
Regulation specifically requires the consideration of structural overstrength in the design seismic force.
When this Regulation requires the consideration of structural overresistance in accordance with numeral A.3.3.9, the value
of the individual member force obtained from the analysis at the target displacement level must be substituted by ÿo sF R .
A-3.2.8 — Distribution of design seismic forces — The lateral forces used to design the elements shall be applied to the
mass of each level and shall be proportional to the distribution obtained from a modal analysis for the fundamental mode of
response in the direction being considered.
A-3.2.9 — Detailed Evaluation — There is no need to comply with Section A-3.2.9.1 and Section A-3.2.9.2 if the effective
yield strength exceeds the product of the system overstrength factor given in Tables A. .3-1 to A.3-4 of Chapter A.3 and the
seismic base shear determined in Section A.4.3.1 of Chapter A.4 modified to use the effective period Te fundamental,
instead of T for the determination of Cs .
A-3.2.9.1 — Required element force and deformation — For each nonlinear static analysis the design response
parameters, including individual element forces and element deformations shall be taken as the values obtained from the
analysis in the iteration. in which the displacement i ÿ , objective is reached.
A-3.2.9.2— Members — The competence of individual members and their connections to resist member forces and
deformations shall be evaluated based on ilaboratory
ÿ, test data for similar components. The effects of gravity and other loads
on the deformation capacity of the elements must be considered in these evaluations. The deformation of an element to
support the loads of
A-151
Gravity must not exceed:
(i) Two-thirds of the deformation resulting in loss of ability to support gravity loads. (ii) Two-thirds of the strain at
which the element's strength has deteriorated to less than 70% of the component's model peak strength. The deformation
of an element not required to support gravity loads shall not exceed two-thirds of the value to which the element's
strength has deteriorated to less than 70% of the component's model peak strength.
Alternatively, it is allowed to consider the deformation of the element as acceptable if the deformation does not
exceed the determined value established by the acceptance criteria for non-linear procedures given in the Pre-
Standard and Commentary for the Seismic Rehabilitation of Buildings (FEMA 356) for level of Life Safety
performance.
Element forces should be considered acceptable if they do not exceed expected capabilities.
A-3.2.10 — Design Review — An independent committee composed of at least two members, composed of engineers
empowered under Law 400 of 1997 to design in the appropriate disciplines and others with experience in seismic analysis
methods and in theory and application of non-linear seismic analysis and structural behavior under seismic loads, you must carry
out the review of the seismic resistant design and the supporting structural analyses. The design review should include:
(i) Review of any site-specific seismic criteria used in the analysis, including, if applicable,
where appropriate, site-specific spectrum development and
(ii) Review of the determination of the target displacement and the effective yield strength of the
structure.
For those structures with effective yield resistance lower than the product of the overstrength factor of the system as provided in
tables A.3-1 to A.3-4 of Chapter A.3 and the seismic shear at the base determined in Section A .4.3.1 of Chapter A.4, modified to
use the effective fundamental period Te instead of T for the determination of Cs , the design review shall further include but is
not limited to the following:
(1) Review of the acceptance criteria used to demonstrate the adequacy of structural elements and systems to resist the
calculated force and deformation demands, together with laboratory and other data used to support such criteria.
Review of the acceptance criteria for nonlinear procedures given in the Pre-Standard and Commentary for Seismic
Rehabilitation of Buildings (FEMA 356) is at the discretion of the design review team.
(2) Review of the final design of the entire structural system and all support analyses. The design review team must
produce a report that identifies, within the scope of the review, significant concerns and any general compliance
discrepancies with the provisions of the Regulation.
REFERENCES
ATC 40 (SSC, 1996) Seismic Evaluation and Retrofit of Concrete Buildings, SSC Report No. 96-01, Seismic Safety Commission,
State of California, Sacramento, California, Developed by the Applied Technology Council, Redwood City, California.
FEMA 250 (FEMA 2000a), Recommended Seismic Design Criteria for New Steel Moment-Frame Buildings, Federal Emergency
Management Agency, Washington DC
FEMA 356 (FEMA, 2000b), Prestandard and Commentary for Seismic Rehabilitation of Buildings, Federal Emergency
Management Agency, Washington D.C.
HAZUS (NIBS, 1999), HAZUS99 Technical Manual, National Institute of Building Science, Washington DC
Developed by the Federal Emergency Management Agency through agreements with the National Institute of Building
Sciences.
ASCE/SEI (2003), "Seismic Evaluation of Existing Buildings", ASCE/SEI 31-03, American Society of Civil Engineers,
Reston, Virginia, USA, 2003
ASCE/SEI (2006), "Seismic Rehabilitation of Existing Buildings", ASCE/SEI 41-06, American Society of Civil
Engineers, Reston, Virginia, USA, 2006
ÿ
A-152
NSR-10 - Appendix A-4 - Values of Aa, Av, Ae and Ad and definition
of the seismic hazard zone of Colombian municipalities
APPENDIX A-4
VALUES OF Aa, Av, Ae AND Ad AND DEFINITION OF THE ZONE OF
SEISMIC THREAT OF COLOMBIAN MUNICIPALITIES
Amazon Department
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Leticia 91001 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
The charm 91263 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
the chorrera 91405 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
The stone 91407 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
The victory 91430 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
Miriti-Paraná 91460 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
Puerto Alegria 91530 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
Puerto Arica 91536 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
Puerto Narino 91540 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
Santander Port 91669 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
tarapaca 91798 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
Antioch's Department
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Medellin 05001 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.07
bumblebee 05002 0.20 0.25 high 0.13 0.07
Abriaqui 05004 0.20 0.25 high 0.13 0.07
Alexandria 05021 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
Feint 05030 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.09
Amalfi 05031 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.07 0.04
Andes 05034 0.25 0.30 high 0.17 0.10
angelopolis 05036 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Angostura 05038 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.04
Anori 05040 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.07 0.04
Anza 05044 0.20 0.30 high 0.14 0.08
Pulled apart 05045 0.25 0.25 high 0.19 0.09
trees 05051 0.10 0.20 Intermediate 0.05 0.03
Algeria 05055 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.07
Armenia 05059 0.20 0.25 high 0.15 0.08
barbosa 05079 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.05
Beautiful 05088 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.07
Belmira 05086 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.06
bethany 05091 0.25 0.30 high 0.16 0.10
betulia 05093 0.20 0.25 high 0.14 0.08
briceno 05107 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.06
Buriticá 05113 0.20 0.25 high 0.12 0.07
cañasgordas 05138 0.20 0.25 high 0.12 0.07
caceres 05120 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.03
caicedo 05125 0.20 0.25 high 0.13 0.07
Caldas 05129 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.16 0.08
Camp 05134 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
snail 05142 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.06
caramanta 05145 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.09
carepa 05147 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Carmen Viboral 05148 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
Carolina 05150 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
caucasia 05154 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
A-153
Chigorodo 05172 0.25 0.30 high 0.19 0.10

Cisneros 05190 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.04
Bolivar City 05101 0.25 0.30 high 0.16 0.10
cocorná 05197 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
Conception 05206 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.05
Concord 05209 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.08
Copacabana 05212 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.06
Dabeiba 05234 0.25 0.30 high 0.13 0.08
don matias 05237 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.05
ebejico 05240 0.15 0.25 high 0.15 0.08
the catfish 05250 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.07 0.04
entrerríos 05264 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
Envigado 05266 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.07
Fredonia 05282 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.09
frontino 05284 0.30 0.30 high 0.15 0.09
giraldo 05306 0.20 0.25 high 0.12 0.07
spinner 05308 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
Gomez Silver 05310 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
Grenade 05313 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.05
Guadeloupe 05315 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
guard 05318 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.06
guatape 05321 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.05
heliconia 05347 0.15 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Hispania 05353 0.25 0.30 high 0.16 0.10
Itagui 05360 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.14 0.08
Ituango 05361 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
Garden 05364 0.25 0.30 high 0.20 0.11
Jericho 05368 0.25 0.25 high 0.18 0.10
The eyebrow 05376 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.07
The star 05380 0.15 0.25 high 0.15 0.08
The Painted 05390 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.09
The Union 05400 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.06
Liborine 05411 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.14 0.07
Maceo 05425 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
marinilla 05440 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
montebello 05467 0.20 0.25 high 0.14 0.08
Murindó 05475 0.35 0.35 high 0.25 0.13
Mutata 05480 0.25 0.30 high 0.16 0.09
Narino 05483 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.07
nechi 05495 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.05 0.03
Necocli 05490 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.15 0.07
Olaya 05501 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.15 0.07
Peak 05541 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.05
small 05543 0.20 0.25 high 0.11 0.06
pueblorrico 05576 0.25 0.25 high 0.17 0.10
Puerto Berrio 05579 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
port nare 05585 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
Puerto Triunfo 05591 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
remedies 05604 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.15 0.07
Withdrawal 05607 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.07
Black river 05615 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.06
Sabanalarga 05628 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.07
Sabaneta 05631 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.14 0.08
exit 05642 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.09
Saint Andrew 05647 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.06
Saint Charles 05649 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
San Francisco 05652 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.07
St Geronimo 05656 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.15 0.08
Saint Joseph of the Mountain 05658 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.06
San Juan de Uraba 05659 0.10 0.20 Intermediate 0.06 0.03
A-154
saint Louis 05660 0.15 0.25 high 0.12 0.06

Saint Peter 05664 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.06
San Pedro de Uraba 05665 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.06 0.04
San Rafael 05667 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
San Roque 05670 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.05
st vincent 05674 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
Saint Barbara 05679 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.09
Saint Rose of Bears 05686 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.05
Santa Fe de Antioquia 05042 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.07
Santo Domingo 05690 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
Sanctuary 05697 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
segovia 05736 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.05
Are are 05756 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.07
sopetran 05761 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.15 0.08
thames 05789 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.09
Taraza 05790 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
Tarsus 05792 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.09
titiribí 05809 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.15 0.08
Toledo 05819 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.07
Turbo 05837 0.25 0.25 high 0.13 0.07
uramite 05842 0.25 0.25 high 0.12 0.07
Urrao 05847 0.30 0.30 high 0.17 0.10
Valdivia 05854 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.05
Valparaiso 05856 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.09
Vegachi 05858 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.05
Venice 05861 0.20 0.25 high 0.15 0.08
Fort Watcher 05873 0.35 0.35 high 0.22 0.12
yalí 05885 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
Yarumal 05887 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
Yolombo 05890 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
yondo 05893 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.06 0.04
Saragossa 05895 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.05 0.03
Arauca Department
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
arauca 81001 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.10 0.04
Arauquita 81065 0.20 0.15 Intermediate 0.07 0.03
Cravo North 81220 0.05 0.05 Low 0.03 0.02
Fortul 81300 0.30 0.20 high 0.32 0.12
Puerto Rondon 81591 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.14 0.05
Saravena 81736 0.30 0.25 high 0.21 0.08
tame 81794 0.25 0.20 high 0.31 0.10
San Andres Archipelago

Zone of
Code Threat
Municipality aah Av oh ad
Municipality seismic
Saint Andrew 88001 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03
Providence and Santa Catalina 88564 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03
Department of Atlantic
Zone of
Code Threat
Municipality aah Av oh ad
Municipality seismic
Barranquilla 08001 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03
Baranoa 08078 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03
field of the cross 08137 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.03
A-155
candlemas 08141 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.03

Galapa 08296 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03
Juan de Acosta 08372 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.03
Luruaco 08421 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
malambo 08433 0.10 0.10 Low 0.06 0.03
sea cow 08436 0.10 0.10 Low 0.06 0.03
Palmar de Varela 08520 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.03
Louse 08549 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
polonew 08558 0.10 0.10 Low 0.06 0.03
laying nest 08560 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.03
Colombian Port 08573 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.03
repelon 08606 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
Big bed sheet 08634 0.10 0.10 Low 0.07 0.03
Sabanalarga 08638 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03
St. Lucia 08675 0.10 0.10 Low 0.07 0.03
St Thomas 08685 0.10 0.10 Low 0.07 0.03
Loneliness 08758 0.10 0.10 Low 0.06 0.03
suan 08770 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.03
tubara 08832 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.03
Usiacuri 08849 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.03
Bolivar Department
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Cartagena 13001 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03
there 13006 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.07 0.04
Altos del Rosario 13030 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.06 0.03
sandbank 13042 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.05 0.04
arjona 13052 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03
Arroyohondo 13062 0.10 0.10 Low 0.07 0.04
Loba ravine 13074 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.05 0.03
Squid 13140 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.04
cantagallo 13160 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
cicuco 13188 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.03
Clemency 13222 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03
Cordova 13212 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03
The Carmen of Bolivar 13244 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
the guamo 13248 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.04
the rock 13268 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.07 0.04
Loba's bundle 13300 0.15 0.10 Intermediate 0.05 0.03
magangue 13430 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.03
Mahates 13433 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.03
Daisy flower 13440 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03
mary the short 13442 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.07 0.03
mompos 13468 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.03
Monte Cristo 13458 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
Morales 13473 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.07 0.04
pinillos 13549 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.05 0.03
alderman 13580 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.07 0.04
old river 13600 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.07 0.04
San Cristobal 13620 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.04
Saint Stanislaus 13647 0.10 0.10 Low 0.06 0.03
San Fernando 13650 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.03
San Jacinto 13654 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.04
San Jacinto del Cauca 13655 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
Saint John Nepomuk 13657 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.04
San Martin de Loba 13667 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.06 0.04
Saint Paul 13670 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.36 0.04
Saint Catherine 13673 0.10 0.10 Low 0.06 0.03
A-156
Santa Rosa 13683 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03

Saint Rose of the South 13688 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
Simiti 13744 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
windblown 13760 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.04
Talaigua New 13780 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.03
tiquisio 13810 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.05
turbaco 13836 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03
turban 13838 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03
villanueva 13873 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03
Zambrano 13894 0.10 0.10 Low 0.06 0.03
Boyacá Department
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Tunja 15001 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.15 0.07
Almeida 15022 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Aquitaine 15047 0.25 0.30 high 0.16 0.08
Arcabuco 15051 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
Belen 15087 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
berbeo 15090 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Betitiva 15092 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Boavita 15097 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
boyacá 15104 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.14 0.06
briceno 15106 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.12 0.07
Good view 15109 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
busbanza 15114 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Caldas 15131 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
fieldbeautiful 15135 0.30 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
cherry 15162 0.20 0.25 high 0.15 0.07
chinavita 15172 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
chiquinquira 15176 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
chiquiza 15232 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.05
girls 15180 0.25 0.30 high 0.16 0.08
Cheetah 15183 0.25 0.30 high 0.16 0.08
Chitaraque 15185 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
chivatá 15187 0.15 0.25 high 0.14 0.07
chivor 15236 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Cienega 15189 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
combita 15204 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.05
copper 15212 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
corrals 15215 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
covarachia 15218 0.20 0.25 high 0.14 0.07
cubara 15223 0.30 0.30 high 0.16 0.08
cucaita 15224 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.05
captive 15226 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Duitama 15238 0.20 0.25 high 0.14 0.07
The cocuy 15244 0.25 0.30 high 0.22 0.08
the hawthorn 15248 0.25 0.30 high 0.16 0.08
Firavitoba 15272 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
forest 15276 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
gachantiva 15293 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
gameza 15296 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
garagoa 15299 0.25 0.30 high 0.16 0.08
macaws 15317 0.25 0.25 high 0.18 0.08
Party 15322 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.07
guayata 15325 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Guicán 15332 0.30 0.30 high 0.16 0.08
hoist 15362 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
jenesano 15367 0.20 0.25 high 0.15 0.07
A-157
Jericho 15368 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08

The chapel 15380 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.07
the uvita 15403 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
The victory 15401 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.16 0.08
big farm 15377 0.30 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
macanal 15425 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Maripi 15442 0.20 0.15 Intermediate 0.13 0.07
miraflores 15455 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Mongua 15464 0.25 0.30 high 0.16 0.08
mongui 15466 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Moniquirá 15469 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
Motavite 15476 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.05
muzo 15480 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.15 0.08
Nobsa 15491 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
new colon 15494 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.06
oicata 15500 0.20 0.25 high 0.13 0.06
otanche 15507 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.16 0.08
pacavita 15511 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.07
Paez 15514 0.30 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
paipa 15516 0.20 0.25 high 0.12 0.06
Birdie 15518 0.30 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
panqueba 15522 0.25 0.30 high 0.16 0.08
pauna 15531 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.15 0.07
Paya 15533 0.35 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Rio Peace 15537 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Fishing 15542 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
pisba 15550 0.30 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Puerto Boyaca 15572 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.10 0.05
Quipama 15580 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.16 0.08
ramiriqui 15599 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
raquira 15600 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
Rondon 15621 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Savoy 15632 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
sachica 15638 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
samaca 15646 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.05
st edward 15660 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
San Jose de Pare 15664 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
Saint Louis of Gaceno 15667 0.35 0.30 high 0.16 0.07
Saint Matthew 15673 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Saint Michael of Sema 15676 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
Saint Paul Borbur 15681 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.16 0.08
San Rosa Viterbo 15693 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Santa Maria 15690 0.30 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
hagia sophia 15696 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
Santana 15686 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.07
sativanorte 15720 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
sativasur 15723 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
siachoque 15740 0.15 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Soata 15753 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.07
Socha 15757 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Socota 15755 0.25 0.30 high 0.16 0.08
sogamoso 15759 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
somondoco 15761 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Sora 15762 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.05
soracá 15764 0.20 0.25 high 0.14 0.07
Sotaquirá 15763 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
susacon 15774 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
sutamarchan 15776 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
sutatenza 15778 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
tasco 15790 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
A-158
pincer 15798 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.08

Tibana 15804 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.07
Tibasosa 15806 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
tinjacá 15808 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
tipacoque 15810 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.07
touch 15814 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
toguí 15816 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
topaga 15820 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
total 15822 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Tunungua 15832 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.13 0.07
turmequé 15835 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.06
tuta 15837 0.20 0.25 high 0.14 0.07
Tutazá 15839 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Umbita 15842 0.20 0.25 high 0.15 0.06
burnt sale 15861 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.05
Villa de Leyva 15407 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
viracachá 15879 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Zetaquirá 15897 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Caldas Department
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Manizales 17001 0.25 0.25 high 0.20 0.10
gouache 17013 0.25 0.25 high 0.20 0.10
anserma 17042 0.25 0.30 high 0.20 0.10
Aranzazu 17050 0.25 0.25 high 0.19 0.09
Belalcazar 17088 0.25 0.30 high 0.20 0.10
chinchina 17174 0.25 0.25 high 0.20 0.10
Philadelphia 17272 0.25 0.25 high 0.20 0.10
the golden 17380 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
The mercy 17388 0.25 0.25 high 0.21 0.10
manzanares 17433 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.20 0.10
marmato 17442 0.25 0.25 high 0.20 0.10
marquetalia 17444 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.17 0.08
marulanda 17446 0.20 0.25 high 0.18 0.09
Neira 17486 0.25 0.25 high 0.19 0.10
Norcasia 17495 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.15 0.07
pacora 17513 0.25 0.25 high 0.20 0.10
Palestine 17524 0.25 0.25 high 0.20 0.10
Pennsylvania 17541 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.18 0.09
Dirty river 17614 0.25 0.30 high 0.20 0.10
Risaralda 17616 0.25 0.30 high 0.20 0.10
salami 17653 0.25 0.25 high 0.18 0.09
samaná 17662 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.19 0.09
Saint Joseph 17665 0.25 0.30 high 0.20 0.10
knew 17777 0.15 0.30 high 0.20 0.10
Victory 17867 0.25 0.20 high 0.13 0.06
villamaria 17873 0.25 0.25 high 0.18 0.09
Viterbo 17877 0.25 0.30 high 0.23 0.10
Department of Caqueta
Zone of
Code Threat
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av oh ad
seismic
Florence 18001 0.20 0.15 Intermediate 0.10 0.05
Albanian 18029 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.06 0.04
Bethlehem of the Andaquíes 18094 0.20 0.15 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
Cartagena del Chairá 18150 0.05 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
Currillo 18205 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.06 0.03
A-159
The Maiden 18247 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.06 0.03

The Curassow 18256 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.06 0.03
the little mountain 18410 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.05 0.03
Milan 18460 0.05 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
Morelia 18479 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.06 0.03
Puerto Rico 18592 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.07 0.03
Saint Joseph of the Forge 18610 0.25 0.20 high 0.09 0.05
San Vicente del Caguan 18753 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
solano 18756 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
Alone 18785 0.05 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
Valparaiso 18860 0.05 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.03
Department of Casanare
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Yopal 85001 0.30 0.20 high 0.15 0.06
aguazul 85010 0.30 0.20 high 0.14 0.06
chameza 85015 0.30 0.30 high 0.16 0.08
herd corozal 85125 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
the saltworks 85136 0.30 0.30 high 0.16 0.08
Peanut 85139 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
Monterey 85162 0.30 0.25 high 0.11 0.05
nunchía 85225 0.20 0.15 Intermediate 0.09 0.04
orocue 85230 0.05 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
Peace of Ariporo 85250 0.05 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
By e 85263 0.20 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
Receiver 85279 0.30 0.30 high 0.16 0.08
Sabanalarga 85300 0.35 0.30 high 0.13 0.05
take me out 85315 0.35 0.20 high 0.16 0.08
Saint Louis of Palenque 85325 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
Tamara 85400 0.35 0.15 high 0.16 0.08
tauramena 85410 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.06 0.03
Trinity 85430 0.05 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
villanueva 85440 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.06 0.03
Department of Cauca
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Popayan 19001 0.25 0.20 high 0.15 0.08
Almaguer 19022 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Algeria 19050 0.35 0.25 high 0.09 0.06
Balboa 19075 0.30 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Bolivar 19100 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.07
Buenos Aires 19110 0.25 0.20 high 0.16 0.08
cajibío 19130 0.25 0.20 high 0.15 0.08
caldono 19137 0.25 0.20 high 0.16 0.07
caloto 19142 0.25 0.20 high 0.16 0.07
Maroon 19212 0.25 0.20 high 0.12 0.06
the tambo 19256 0.30 0.25 high 0.14 0.08
Florence 19290 0.25 0.25 high 0.14 0.07
handsome 19318 0.40 0.35 high 0.14 0.08
Inza 19355 0.25 0.20 high 0.12 0.06
jambaló 19364 0.25 0.20 high 0.11 0.06
The saw 19392 0.25 0.20 high 0.16 0.08
The Vega 19397 0.25 0.20 high 0.16 0.07
Lopez 19418 0.40 0.30 high 0.14 0.07
merchants 19450 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.08
miranda 19455 0.25 0.20 high 0.13 0.06
A-160
Morales 19473 0.25 0.20 high 0.16 0.08

padilla 19513 0.25 0.20 high 0.16 0.07
Paez 19517 0.25 0.20 high 0.11 0.05
pathy 19532 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
piedmont 19533 0.25 0.20 high 0.09 0.05
piendamo 19548 0.25 0.20 high 0.16 0.08
Puerto Tejada 19573 0.25 0.20 high 0.13 0.08
puracé 19585 0.25 0.20 high 0.12 0.06
roses 19622 0.25 0.20 high 0.16 0.08
Saint Sebastian 19693 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.07
Santa Rosa 19701 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Santander de Quilichao 19698 0.25 0.20 high 0.14 0.08
Silvia 19743 0.25 0.20 high 0.10 0.05
will drop 19760 0.25 0.20 high 0.13 0.07
Suarez 19780 0.25 0.20 high 0.16 0.08
Sucre 19785 0.25 0.25 high 0.14 0.08
timbío 19807 0.25 0.20 high 0.16 0.08
timbiqui 19809 0.40 0.30 high 0.14 0.08
toribio 19821 0.25 0.20 high 0.09 0.05
Totoro 19824 0.25 0.20 high 0.10 0.05
Villa Rica 19845 0.25 0.20 high 0.14 0.08
Department of Cesar
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Valledupar 20001 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03
Aguachica 20011 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
Augustine Codazzi 20013 0.10 0.10 Low 0.07 0.04
astrea 20032 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.04
becerril 20045 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.04
bosconia 20060 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.04
chimichagua 20175 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.04
chiriguana 20178 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.04
curumani 20228 0.15 0.10 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
The Copey 20238 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.04
Step 20250 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.04
gamarra 20295 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
gonzalez 20310 0.20 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
The glory 20383 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
The Jagua of Ibirico 20400 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.04
Peace 20621 0.10 0.10 Low 0.06 0.03
manaure 20443 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.04
little straws 20517 0.15 0.10 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
pelaya 20550 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
beautiful town 20570 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03
River of gold 20614 0.20 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
st albert 20710 0.20 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
San Diego 20750 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03
San Martin 20770 0.20 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
tamalameque 20787 0.15 0.10 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
Department of Chocó
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Quibdó 27001 0.35 0.35 high 0.25 0.13
acandi 27006 0.25 0.25 high 0.09 0.04
high baudó 27025 0.40 0.40 high 0.24 0.10
I attract 27050 0.35 0.35 high 0.24 0.10
A-161
bagado 27073 0.35 0.30 high 0.24 0.10

Solano Bay 27075 0.45 0.40 high 0.24 0.10
under baudó 27077 0.45 0.40 high 0.24 0.10
Bethlehem of Bajirá 27086 0.25 0.30 high 0.24 0.10
Bojayá 27099 0.40 0.40 high 0.24 0.10
Canton of São Paulo 27135 0.40 0.40 high 0.24 0.10
Carmen del Darien 27150 0.35 0.35 high 0.24 0.10
Certeguí 27160 0.35 0.35 high 0.24 0.10
condot 27205 0.35 0.35 high 0.24 0.10
The Carmen of Atrato 27245 0.30 0.30 high 0.24 0.10
The San Juan Coast 27250 0.40 0.40 high 0.20 0.10
Itsmína 27361 0.40 0.40 high 0.23 0.10
Jury 27372 0.40 0.40 high 0.24 0.10
I cry 27413 0.40 0.35 high 0.24 0.10
Medium Atrato 27425 0.35 0.35 high 0.24 0.10
Medium Baudó 27430 0.45 0.40 high 0.24 0.10
middle san john 27450 0.40 0.40 high 0.24 0.10
Novita 27491 0.40 0.35 high 0.24 0.10
nuqui 27495 0.45 0.40 high 0.24 0.10
iro river 27580 0.35 0.35 high 0.24 0.10
Quito River 27600 0.35 0.40 high 0.24 0.10
Dirty river 27615 0.35 0.35 high 0.24 0.10
San Jose del Palmar 27660 0.35 0.30 high 0.24 0.10
sipi 27745 0.35 0.35 high 0.24 0.10
tado 27787 0.35 0.35 high 0.24 0.10
A guide 27800 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.07
Pan American Union 27810 0.40 0.40 high 0.24 0.10
Department of Cordoba
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Hunting 23001 0.10 0.20 Intermediate 0.07 0.04
Ayapel 23068 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.07 0.04
paddle 23090 0.10 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
cerete 23162 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.06 0.04
chimá 23168 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.07 0.04
Chinu 23182 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
gold swamp 23189 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
Parrot 23300 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.06 0.03
the secluded 23350 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
lorica 23417 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.05 0.03
The Cordobas 23419 0.10 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.05
little bows 23500 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.05 0.03
Momil 23464 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.07 0.03
Montelibano 23466 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
rich planet 23555 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
New town 23570 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.05
hidden port 23574 0.10 0.20 Intermediate 0.06 0.04
Puerto Libertador 23580 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
purest 23586 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.06 0.03
Sahagun 23660 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
San Andres de Sotavento 23670 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
San Antero 23672 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.05 0.03
Saint Bernard of the Wind 23675 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.05 0.03
Saint Charles 23678 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
San Pelayo 23686 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.06 0.03
tierralta 23807 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
Valencia 23855 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
A-162
Department of cundinamarca
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Bogota D.C. 11001 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.06
Water of God 25001 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
Alban 25019 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.16 0.06
Anapóima 25035 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.06
Anolaima 25040 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.16 0.06
Apulo 25599 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.06
Arbeláez 25053 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
beltran 25086 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.06
bituima 25095 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.16 0.06
Bojacá 25099 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
cabrera 25120 0.25 0.25 high 0.12 0.06
Cachipay 25123 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.15 0.06
Cajicá 25126 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
caparrapi 25148 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.15 0.06
caqueza 25151 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.06
carmen carupa 25154 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
chaguani 25168 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.16 0.06
chia 25175 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
chipaque 25178 0.20 0.25 high 0.11 0.05
choachi 25181 0.20 0.25 high 0.12 0.06
choconta 25183 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.05
cogua 25200 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
dimension 25214 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
cucunuba 25224 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
The school 25245 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
the rosebush 25260 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
facatativa 25269 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.06
fomeque 25279 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.06
Fosca 25281 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.06
funza 25286 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
fuquene 25288 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.05
fusagasuga 25290 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
gachalá 25293 0.30 0.25 high 0.26 0.06
gachancipá 25295 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
Gacheta 25297 0.20 0.25 high 0.15 0.06
Spectrum 25299 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.06
girardot 25307 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.06
Grenade 25312 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.05
Guacheta 25317 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.05
Guaduas 25320 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.15 0.06
guasca 25322 0.15 0.25 high 0.11 0.05
guataqui 25324 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.16 0.06
Guatavita 25326 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.05
Guayabal de Síquima 25328 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.16 0.06
Guayabetal 25335 0.30 0.25 high 0.16 0.06
gutierrez 25339 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.06
Jerusalem 25368 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.16 0.06
Junin 25372 0.20 0.25 high 0.16 0.06
the calera 25377 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.05
Table 25386 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.14 0.06
The Palm 25394 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.16 0.06
The sorrow 25398 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.16 0.06
The Vega 25402 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.06
lenguazaque 25407 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
A-163
macheta 25426 0.20 0.25 high 0.13 0.06

Madrid 25430 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
Blanket 25436 0.20 0.25 high 0.15 0.06
Medina 25438 0.35 0.25 high 0.16 0.06
mosquera 25473 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
Narino 25483 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.06
nemocón 25486 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
Nile 25488 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.05
Nimaima 25489 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.14 0.06
nocaima 25491 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.14 0.06
pacho 25513 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
Paime 25518 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.06
pandy 25524 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
good luck 25530 0.30 0.25 high 0.09 0.04
easter 25535 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.05
port salgar 25572 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
puli 25580 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.14 0.06
quebradanegra 25592 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.16 0.06
keep me 25594 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Quipile 25596 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.16 0.08
Ricaurte 25612 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
Saint Anthony of Tequendama 25645 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
Saint Bernard 25649 0.25 0.20 high 0.10 0.05
San Cayetano 25653 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
San Francisco 25658 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
San Juan de Rioseco 25662 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.16 0.06
sasaima 25718 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.16 0.06
sesquile 25736 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.05
sibate 25740 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
silvania 25743 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
Simijaca 25745 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
Soacha 25754 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
sniffed 25758 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
undershock 25769 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
suesca 25772 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
supata 25777 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
susa 25779 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
Sutatausa 25781 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.05
tabio 25785 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
rate 25793 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
had 25797 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.06
I have 25799 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
tibacuy 25805 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
tibirita 25807 0.20 0.25 high 0.15 0.06
tocaima 25815 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.06
Tocancipá 25817 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
topaipi 25823 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.15 0.06
ubala 25839 0.35 0.25 high 0.16 0.06
ubaque 25841 0.20 0.25 high 0.12 0.06
ubate 25843 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.05
Unite 25845 0.20 0.25 high 0.13 0.06
Utica 25851 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.18 0.06
Venice 25506 0.25 0.20 high 0.10 0.05
Vergara 25862 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.06
viani 25867 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.16 0.06
Villagomez 25871 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
villapinzon 25873 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.05
Villeta 25875 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.17 0.06
Viota 25878 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.05
yacopi 25885 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.15 0.06
A-164
Zipacon 25898 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.06

zipaquirá 25899 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
Capital district
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Bogota D.C. 11001 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.06
Department of Guainía
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Puerto Inirida 94001 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
Mine Ravine 94343 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
peanut 94886 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
the guadalupe 94885 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
mapiripana 94663 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
Morichal 94888 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
corduroy corduroy 94887 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
Colombian Port 94884 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
San Felipe 94883 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
Guajira Department
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
riohacha 44001 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.07 0.04
Albanian 44035 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.04
ravines 44078 0.15 0.10 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
dibulla 44090 0.15 0.10 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
Distraction 44098 0.15 0.10 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
The mill 44110 0.10 0.10 Low 0.06 0.04
fonseca 44279 0.15 0.10 Intermediate 0.07 0.04
hatonuevo 44378 0.15 0.10 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
The Jagua del Pilar 44420 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03
Maicao 44430 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.07 0.04
manaure 44560 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.07 0.04
Saint John of Caesar 44650 0.15 0.10 Intermediate 0.05 0.03
uribia 44847 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
urumite 44855 0.10 0.10 Low 0.06 0.03
villanueva 44874 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.03
Department of Guaviare
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
San Jose Del Guaviare 95001 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
Squid 95015 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
Return 95025 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
miraflores 95200 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
Department of Huíla
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Neiva 41001 0.25 0.25 high 0.20 0.08
acevedo 41006 0.30 0.15 high 0.17 0.06
Liking 41013 0.30 0.15 high 0.26 0.08
A-165
aipe 41016 0.25 0.25 high 0.14 0.05

Algeciras 41020 0.30 0.20 high 0.20 0.08
Altamira 41026 0.30 0.15 high 0.20 0.08
Baraya 41078 0.30 0.25 high 0.19 0.08
Happy field 41132 0.30 0.20 high 0.20 0.08
Colombia 41206 0.30 0.25 high 0.19 0.08
Elijah 41244 0.30 0.15 high 0.20 0.08
Waiter 41298 0.30 0.15 high 0.20 0.07
Giant 41306 0.30 0.15 high 0.20 0.08
Guadeloupe 41319 0.30 0.15 high 0.16 0.06
hobo 41349 0.30 0.20 high 0.20 0.08
Iquira 41357 0.25 0.20 high 0.16 0.06
isnos 41359 0.25 0.20 high 0.19 0.07
Argentina 41378 0.25 0.15 high 0.19 0.07
the silver 41396 0.25 0.15 high 0.19 0.07
nataga 41483 0.25 0.20 high 0.19 0.07
Oporapa 41503 0.30 0.15 high 0.20 0.08
paicol 41518 0.25 0.20 high 0.20 0.08
Palermo 41524 0.25 0.25 high 0.18 0.07
Palestine 41530 0.30 0.20 high 0.20 0.08
pital 41548 0.30 0.15 high 0.20 0.08
pitalito 41551 0.30 0.15 high 0.20 0.08
Rivera 41615 0.30 0.20 high 0.20 0.08
saltywhite 41660 0.25 0.20 high 0.20 0.07
San Agustin 41668 0.25 0.20 high 0.19 0.08
Santa Maria 41676 0.25 0.20 high 0.14 0.05
suaza 41770 0.30 0.15 high 0.16 0.06
tarqui 41791 0.30 0.15 high 0.20 0.08
tello 41799 0.30 0.25 high 0.19 0.08
Teruel 41801 0.25 0.20 high 0.19 0.07
Thessaly 41797 0.25 0.20 high 0.19 0.07
Timana 41807 0.30 0.15 high 0.20 0.08
Villavieja 41872 0.25 0.25 high 0.19 0.07
yaguará 41885 0.25 0.20 high 0.19 0.08
Department of Magdalena
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Santa Marta 47001 0.15 0.10 Intermediate 0.10 0.04
Carob tree 47030 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.02
aracataca 47053 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
ariguani 47058 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
san antonio hill 47161 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
chivolo 47170 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
Swamp 47189 0.10 0.10 Low 0.06 0.02
Concord 47205 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
The bank 47245 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
the pinion 47258 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
the checkpoint 47268 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
Foundation 47288 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.02
Guamal 47318 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
New Grenada 47460 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
Pedraza 47541 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
Pijino del Carmen 47545 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
pivijay 47551 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
Dish 47555 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
Old Town 47570 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
Swirl 47605 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
sheets of San Angel 47660 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
A-166
salami 47675 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02

San Sebastian de Buenavista 47692 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
san zeno 47703 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
Saint Ana 47707 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
Santa Barbara de Pinto 47720 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
newsite 47745 0.10 0.10 Low 0.05 0.02
Tenerife 47798 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
Zapayan 47960 0.10 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
Banana Zone 47980 0.10 0.10 Low 0.08 0.02
Department of Meta
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Villavicencio 50001 0.25 0.30 high 0.20 0.07
acacias 50006 0.30 0.30 high 0.17 0.06
Upia Canyon 50110 0.25 0.25 high 0.08 0.04
cabuyaro 50124 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.06 0.03
Castile the New 50150 0.20 0.25 high 0.07 0.03
cumaral 50226 0.25 0.25 high 0.09 0.04
The Calvary 50245 0.30 0.25 high 0.26 0.08
the castle 50251 0.25 0.25 high 0.11 0.04
The Golden 50270 0.25 0.25 high 0.11 0.05
gold fountain 50287 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.05 0.02
Grenade 50313 0.20 0.25 high 0.07 0.03
Guamal 50318 0.35 0.25 high 0.28 0.08
The Macarena 50350 0.05 0.10 Low 0.03 0.02
the uribe 50370 0.25 0.25 high 0.10 0.04
remoteness 50400 0.30 0.25 high 0.19 0.08
Mapiripan 50325 0.05 0.05 Low 0.02 0.02
plateaus 50330 0.20 0.25 high 0.07 0.03
port concordia 50450 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
Puerto Gaitan 50568 0.05 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
Puerto Lleras 50577 0.05 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
Puerto Lopez 50573 0.05 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
Puerto Rico 50590 0.05 0.10 Low 0.04 0.02
restrepo 50606 0.30 0.30 high 0.13 0.05
San Carlos Guaroa 50680 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.05 0.03
San Juan de Arama 50683 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.06 0.03
San Juanito 50686 0.30 0.25 high 0.20 0.08
Saint Louis of Cubarral 50223 0.35 0.25 high 0.20 0.08
San Martin 50689 0.05 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
Beautiful view 50711 0.05 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
Department of Narino
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Grass 52001 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.08
Alban 52019 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Aldana 52022 0.25 0.25 high 0.14 0.08
Ancuya 52036 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.08
Grove 52051 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.08
barbecues 52079 0.35 0.35 high 0.16 0.08
Belen 52083 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
buesaco 52110 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
chachagui 52240 0.25 0.25 high 0.11 0.07
Colon 52203 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.08
Consacá 52207 0.25 0.25 high 0.11 0.07
accountant 52210 0.25 0.25 high 0.12 0.07
A-167
Cordova 52215 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08

quaspud 52224 0.25 0.25 high 0.14 0.08
cumbal 52227 0.30 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
will cumbite 52233 0.30 0.30 high 0.10 0.07
The puddle 52250 0.40 0.35 high 0.13 0.08
the penol 52254 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
The rosary 52256 0.30 0.30 high 0.11 0.07
the plank 52258 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
the tambo 52260 0.25 0.25 high 0.13 0.08
Francisco Pizarro 52520 0.50 0.40 high 0.16 0.08
funes 52287 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Guachucal 52317 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Guaitarilla 52320 0.25 0.25 high 0.13 0.08
Gualmatan 52323 0.25 0.25 high 0.12 0.07
Iles 52352 0.25 0.25 high 0.11 0.07
imúes 52354 0.25 0.25 high 0.11 0.07
ipiales 52356 0.30 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
The cross 52378 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Florida 52381 0.25 0.25 high 0.12 0.07
the plain 52385 0.30 0.30 high 0.11 0.07
The Tola 52390 0.50 0.40 high 0.16 0.08
The Union 52399 0.25 0.25 high 0.12 0.07
Leiva 52405 0.30 0.25 high 0.15 0.08
linares 52411 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
The Andes 52418 0.30 0.30 high 0.12 0.07
magui 52427 0.40 0.35 high 0.16 0.08
mallama 52435 0.30 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
mosquera 52473 0.50 0.40 high 0.16 0.08
Olaya Herrera 52490 0.50 0.40 high 0.16 0.08
ospina 52506 0.25 0.25 high 0.12 0.08
polycarp 52540 0.30 0.30 high 0.13 0.08
potosi 52560 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Providence 52565 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
leeks 52573 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
pupials 52585 0.25 0.25 high 0.12 0.08
Ricaurte 52612 0.35 0.30 high 0.16 0.08
Roberto Payan 52621 0.45 0.40 high 0.16 0.08
Samaniego 52678 0.30 0.30 high 0.13 0.08
Saint Bernard 52685 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
San Lorenzo 52687 0.25 0.25 high 0.11 0.07
Saint Paul 52693 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Saint Peter of Carthage 52694 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.08
sandoná 52683 0.25 0.25 high 0.13 0.08
Santa Cruz 52699 0.30 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
sapuyes 52720 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Taminango 52786 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.08
tangua 52788 0.25 0.25 high 0.13 0.08
tumaco 52835 0.45 0.40 high 0.16 0.08
tuquerres 52838 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.08
Yacuanquer 52885 0.25 0.25 high 0.11 0.07
North Santander Department

Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
cucuta 54001 0.35 0.25 high 0.25 0.10
shelter 54003 0.30 0.20 high 0.07 0.04
groves 54051 0.30 0.25 high 0.08 0.04
Bochalema 54099 0.35 0.25 high 0.13 0.06
A-168
bucarasica 54109 0.30 0.25 high 0.09 0.04

cachira 54128 0.25 0.25 high 0.07 0.04
cacota 54125 0.30 0.25 high 0.10 0.05
Chinacota 54172 0.35 0.30 high 0.16 0.07
Chitaga 54174 0.30 0.30 high 0.11 0.05
Convention 54206 0.20 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
cucutilla 54223 0.30 0.25 high 0.08 0.04
Durania 54239 0.35 0.25 high 0.14 0.06
Carmen 54245 0.15 0.10 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
the tarra 54250 0.20 0.15 Intermediate 0.05 0.03
the Zulia 54261 0.35 0.25 high 0.22 0.09
gramalote 54313 0.30 0.25 high 0.11 0.05
hacarí 54344 0.25 0.20 high 0.06 0.03
herran 54347 0.35 0.30 high 0.19 0.08
The hope 54385 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.05 0.03
The beach 54398 0.20 0.15 Intermediate 0.06 0.03
labateca 54377 0.35 0.30 high 0.14 0.06
Playgrounds 54405 0.35 0.30 high 0.22 0.09
lourdes 54418 0.30 0.25 high 0.11 0.05
mutiscua 54480 0.30 0.25 high 0.08 0.04
Ocana 54498 0.20 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.03
Pamplona 54518 0.30 0.25 high 0.10 0.05
pamplonite 54520 0.35 0.25 high 0.13 0.06
Santander Port 54553 0.35 0.25 high 0.09 0.04
ragonvalia 54599 0.35 0.30 high 0.20 0.09
Salazar 54660 0.30 0.25 high 0.09 0.04
Saint Callistus 54670 0.20 0.15 Intermediate 0.05 0.03
San Cayetano 54673 0.35 0.30 high 0.19 0.08
Santiago 54680 0.30 0.25 high 0.14 0.06
Sardinata 54720 0.30 0.25 high 0.15 0.06
silos 54743 0.25 0.25 high 0.07 0.03
theorama 54800 0.20 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
tibu 54810 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.04
Toledo 54820 0.35 0.30 high 0.24 0.10
expensive villa 54871 0.30 0.25 high 0.07 0.04
Villa del Rosario 54874 0.35 0.30 high 0.25 0.10
Putumayo Department
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
runny 86001 0.30 0.25 high 0.20 0.10
Colon 86219 0.25 0.25 high 0.13 0.08
Orito 86320 0.30 0.25 high 0.08 0.05
Puerto Asis 86568 0.05 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
Puerto Caicedo 86569 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
Puerto Guzman 86571 0.05 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
Puerto Leguizamo 86573 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
San Francisco 86755 0.30 0.25 high 0.16 0.10
San Miguel 86757 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
Santiago 86760 0.30 0.25 high 0.17 0.10
sibundoy 86749 0.25 0.25 high 0.14 0.08
Guamuez Valley 86865 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.04 0.02
villagarzón 86885 0.30 0.25 high 0.08 0.05
Department of Quindío
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Armenia 63001 0.25 0.25 high 0.20 0.10
A-169
Good view 63111 0.25 0.20 high 0.19 0.09

calarca 63130 0.25 0.25 high 0.20 0.10
circasia 63190 0.25 0.25 high 0.20 0.11
Cordova 63212 0.25 0.20 high 0.20 0.10
filandia 63272 0.25 0.25 high 0.20 0.11
genoa 63302 0.25 0.20 high 0.20 0.09
the thebaid 63401 0.25 0.25 high 0.18 0.09
Montenegro 63470 0.25 0.25 high 0.19 0.10
pijao 63548 0.25 0.20 high 0.20 0.10
quimbaya 63594 0.25 0.25 high 0.20 0.10
salento 63690 0.25 0.25 high 0.18 0.09
Department of Risaralda
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Pereira 66001 0.25 0.25 high 0.20 0.10
Apia 66045 0.30 0.30 high 0.20 0.10
Balboa 66075 0.25 0.30 high 0.20 0.10
Nativity Scene of Umbria 66088 0.25 0.30 high 0.20 0.10
two ravines 66170 0.25 0.25 high 0.20 0.10
Guatica 66318 0.25 0.30 high 0.20 0.10
Celia 66383 0.30 0.30 high 0.20 0.10
the virginia 66400 0.25 0.30 high 0.20 0.10
Marseilles 66440 0.25 0.25 high 0.20 0.10
Mistrató 66456 0.30 0.30 high 0.20 0.10
rich town 66572 0.30 0.30 high 0.20 0.10
Quinchia 66594 0.25 0.30 high 0.20 0.10
Saint Rose of Cabal 66682 0.25 0.25 high 0.18 0.09
Sanctuary 66687 0.30 0.30 high 0.20 0.10
Santander Department
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Bucaramanga 68001 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.09
watery 68013 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.17 0.09
Albanian 68020 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.09 0.06
Aratoca 68051 0.25 0.25 high 0.11 0.07
barbosa 68077 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.06
Barichara 68079 0.20 0.25 high 0.13 0.08
barrancabermeja 68081 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.06 0.04
betulia 68092 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.09
Bolivar 68101 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.07 0.04
cabrera 68121 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.08
California 68132 0.25 0.25 high 0.09 0.05
captain 68147 0.25 0.25 high 0.11 0.06
almost 68152 0.25 0.25 high 0.12 0.06
cepita 68160 0.25 0.25 high 0.11 0.06
small hill 68162 0.25 0.25 high 0.11 0.06
charala 68167 0.20 0.25 high 0.08 0.05
chart 68169 0.25 0.25 high 0.09 0.06
Chima 68176 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.20 0.10
chipata 68179 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.07
Scimitar 68190 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.06 0.04
Conception 68207 0.25 0.25 high 0.12 0.06
confines 68209 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.06
Hiring 68211 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.20 0.10
coromoro 68217 0.20 0.25 high 0.09 0.06
Curiti 68229 0.20 0.25 high 0.10 0.06
A-170
The Carmen of Chucuri 68235 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.17 0.08

the florian 68271 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.12 0.07
the macaw 68245 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.18 0.10
the playon 68255 0.25 0.25 high 0.14 0.07
encino 68264 0.20 0.25 high 0.09 0.05
enciso 68266 0.25 0.25 high 0.10 0.05
floridablanca 68276 0.25 0.25 high 0.13 0.08
Prince 68296 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.20 0.10
gambit 68298 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.07 0.05
Goepsa 68327 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.06
Giron 68307 0.20 0.25 high 0.18 0.10
guaca 68318 0.25 0.25 high 0.09 0.05
Guadeloupe 68320 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.16 0.09
Guapotá 68322 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.08
Guavata 68324 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
Herd 68344 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.21 0.10
Jesus Maria 68368 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
Jordan 68370 0.20 0.25 high 0.10 0.07
The beauty 68377 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.16 0.07
Peace 68397 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.14 0.09
landazuri 68385 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
Lebrija 68406 0.25 0.20 high 0.13 0.09
The Saints 68418 0.20 0.25 high 0.11 0.08
macaravita 68425 0.25 0.25 high 0.12 0.06
Malaga 68432 0.25 0.25 high 0.09 0.05
Slaughter 68444 0.25 0.25 high 0.10 0.06
mogotes 68464 0.25 0.25 high 0.10 0.06
molagavita 68468 0.25 0.25 high 0.10 0.06
ocamonte 68498 0.20 0.25 high 0.08 0.05
heard 68500 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.06
onzaga 68502 0.25 0.25 high 0.13 0.07
Palm grove 68522 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.15 0.09
relief palms 68524 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.08
Paramo 68533 0.20 0.25 high 0.09 0.06
piedecuesta 68547 0.25 0.25 high 0.11 0.07
skewer 68549 0.20 0.25 high 0.09 0.06
National Bridge 68572 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.05
Puerto Parra 68573 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.05 0.04
Port Wilches 68575 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.03
Black river 68615 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.07 0.04
Torres Savannah 68655 0.20 0.15 Intermediate 0.06 0.04
Saint Andrew 68669 0.25 0.25 high 0.09 0.05
San Benito 68673 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.07
San Gil 68679 0.20 0.25 high 0.09 0.06
Saint Joaquin 68682 0.25 0.25 high 0.13 0.07
San Jose de Miranda 68684 0.25 0.25 high 0.10 0.05
San Miguel 68686 0.25 0.25 high 0.11 0.06
San Vicente de Chucuri 68689 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.16 0.08
Santa Helena del Opón 68720 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.18 0.10
simacota 68745 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.09 0.06
Help 68755 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.07
suaita 68770 0.15 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.06
Sucre 68773 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.15 0.07
Surata 68780 0.25 0.25 high 0.09 0.05
tone 68820 0.25 0.25 high 0.09 0.05
San Jose Valley 68855 0.20 0.25 high 0.08 0.06
Velez 68861 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.15 0.08
veins 68867 0.25 0.25 high 0.09 0.05
A-171
villanueva 68872 0.20 0.25 high 0.11 0.07

shoe 68895 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.20 0.10
Department of Sucre
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
sincelejo 70001 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.07 0.04

alligator 70124 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.03
Horsedealer 70230 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.08 0.04
Colossus 70204 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.07 0.04
corozal 70215 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.05 0.04
The Oak 70233 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.03
galleys 70235 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.03
Guaranda 70265 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.06 0.05
The Union 70400 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.05 0.04
the palmitos 70418 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.05 0.04
majagual 70429 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.04
Morroa 70473 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.07 0.04
sheep 70508 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.06 0.04
Palm heart 70523 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.05 0.04
Sampués 70670 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.06 0.04
Saint Benedict Abbot 70678 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.03
Saint John Bethulia 70702 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.05 0.03
Saint Mark 70708 0.15 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.04
Saint Onofre 70713 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.03
Saint Peter 70717 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.03
sincere 70742 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.03
Sucre 70771 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.03
tolu 70820 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.04 0.03
rainstorm 70823 0.10 0.15 Intermediate 0.06 0.04
Department of Tolima
Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
ibagué 73001 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.15 0.08

Alpujarra 73024 0.25 0.25 high 0.14 0.07
Alvarado 73026 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.07
Ambalema 73030 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
anzoategui 73043 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.08
Gunsmith 73055 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
I attack 73067 0.25 0.20 high 0.07 0.04
cajamarca 73124 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.14 0.08
Carmen Apicala 73148 0.25 0.20 high 0.11 0.05
Casabianca 73152 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.16 0.08
Chaparral 73168 0.25 0.20 high 0.08 0.05
neck 73200 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
coyaima 73217 0.25 0.20 high 0.09 0.05
cunday 73226 0.25 0.20 high 0.09 0.05
pains 73236 0.25 0.25 high 0.12 0.06
Spinal 73268 0.25 0.20 high 0.13 0.06
falan 73270 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.07
flanders 73275 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06
ash tree 73283 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.14 0.09
guamo 73319 0.25 0.20 high 0.11 0.06
herveo 73347 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.16 0.08
Sling 73349 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.10 0.06
Icononzo 73352 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.08 0.05
A-172
Lleida 73408 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.06

Lebanon 73411 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.07
ladybug 73443 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.07
melgar 73449 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.09 0.05
Murillo 73461 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.15 0.08
Natagaima 73483 0.25 0.25 high 0.11 0.06
ortega 73504 0.25 0.20 high 0.08 0.05
palocabildo 73520 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.08
stones 73547 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.14 0.07
planadas 73555 0.25 0.20 high 0.06 0.04
Meadow 73563 0.25 0.20 high 0.13 0.06
Purification 73585 0.25 0.20 high 0.14 0.06
White River 73616 0.25 0.20 high 0.07 0.04
Roncesvalles 73622 0.25 0.20 high 0.15 0.08
Rovira 73624 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.12 0.07
saldana 73671 0.25 0.20 high 0.11 0.06
Saint Anthony 73675 0.25 0.20 high 0.10 0.06
saint Louis 73678 0.25 0.20 high 0.10 0.06
Saint Elizabeth 73686 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.13 0.08
Suarez 73770 0.25 0.20 high 0.13 0.06
San Juan Valley 73854 0.25 0.20 high 0.10 0.06
deer 73861 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.11 0.07
Beautiful villa 73870 0.20 0.20 Intermediate 0.15 0.08
Villarica 73873 0.25 0.20 high 0.09 0.05
Department of Valle del Cauca

Zone of
Code
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av Threat oh ad
seismic
Cali 76001 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.09
alcala 76020 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.10
Andalusia 76036 0.25 0.25 high 0.14 0.09
ansermanuevo 76041 0.25 0.30 high 0.16 0.10
Algeria 76054 0.30 0.30 high 0.16 0.10
Bolivar 76100 0.30 0.30 high 0.16 0.10
good luck 76109 0.40 0.35 high 0.13 0.08
buga 76111 0.25 0.20 high 0.11 0.07
bugalagrande 76113 0.25 0.25 high 0.13 0.08
caicedonia 76122 0.25 0.20 high 0.14 0.08
haze 76126 0.30 0.30 high 0.10 0.07
candlemas 76130 0.25 0.20 high 0.10 0.07
carthage 76147 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.10
Dagua 76233 0.25 0.25 high 0.09 0.06
The Eagle 76243 0.30 0.30 high 0.16 0.10
Cairo 76246 0.30 0.30 high 0.16 0.10
The hill 76248 0.25 0.20 high 0.11 0.07
The Dovio 76250 0.30 0.30 high 0.18 0.10
Florida 76275 0.25 0.20 high 0.10 0.06
Geneva 76306 0.25 0.20 high 0.11 0.07
guacari 76318 0.25 0.25 high 0.12 0.08
Jamundi 76364 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.10
The top 76377 0.25 0.25 high 0.11 0.08
The Union 76400 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.13
The victory 76403 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.10
Obando 76497 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.10
palmyra 76520 0.25 0.20 high 0.12 0.07
Meadow 76563 0.25 0.20 high 0.12 0.06
restrepo 76606 0.25 0.25 high 0.11 0.08
Cold river 76616 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.10
roller 76622 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.10
Saint Peter 76670 0.25 0.25 high 0.12 0.08
A-173
Seville 76736 0.25 0.20 high 0.13 0.08

Bull 76823 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.14
Trujillo 76828 0.25 0.25 high 0.15 0.10
tulua 76834 0.25 0.20 high 0.12 0.07
ulloa 76845 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.10
versailles 76863 0.30 0.30 high 0.16 0.10
vijes 76869 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.10
I touch 76890 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.10
Yumbo 76892 0.25 0.25 high 0.16 0.10
briar patch 76895 0.25 0.25 high 0.14 0.10
Department of Vaupes
Zone of
Code Threat
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av oh ad
seismic
My you 97001 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
caruru 97161 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
pacoa 97511 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
papunahua 97777 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
taraira 97666 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
Yavarate 97889 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
Department of Vichada
Zone of
Code Threat
Municipality
Municipality
aah Av oh ad
seismic
Puerto Carreno 99001 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
cumaribo 99773 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
Spring 99524 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
Santa Rosalia 99624 0.05 0.05 Low 0.04 0.02
A-174


NSR-10
TITLE B — LOADS

NSR-10 – Chapter B.1 – General requirements
TITLE B
LOADS
CHAPTER B.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
B.1.1 — SCOPE
This Title of this Regulation gives the minimum requirements that buildings must meet with respect to loads that must be
used in their design, other than the forces or effects imposed by the earthquake. For an earthquake-resistant structure to
adequately fulfill its objective, it must be able to resist, in addition to seismic effects, the effects of the loads prescribed in
this Title. The design of the elements that make up the building structure must be made for the critical load combination.
B.1.2 — BASIC REQUIREMENTS
B.1.2.1 — The structure and all its parts must meet, in addition to the prescriptions given in Title A for seismic reasons,
the following requirements:
B.1.2.1.1 — Resistance — The building structure and all its parts must be designed and built so that the materials
used in the construction of the elements and their connections can safely support all the loads contemplated in
this Title B of the NSR-10 without exceeding the design resistances when the loads are increased by means of
load coefficients, or the allowable stresses when the loads without increases are used.
B.1.2.1.2 — Operation — Structural systems and their components must be designed to have adequate stiffness
to limit: (a) vertical deflections of members, (b) drift under seismic and wind loads, (c) vibrations and (d) any other
deformation that adversely affects the operation of the structure or building.
B.1.2.1.3 — Forces caused by imposed deformations — The design must take into account the forces caused
by deformations imposed on the structure by: (a) the differential settlements contemplated in title H, (b) by
restriction to changes dimensional changes due to temperature variations, moisture expansion, setting shrinkage,
creep, and similar effects.
B.1.2.1.4 — Analysis — The effects of loads on the different elements of the structure and their connections shall
be determined using accepted methods of structural analysis, taking into account the principles of equilibrium,
general stability, compatibility of deformations and the properties of materials both in the short and long term. In
those elements that tend to accumulate residual deformations under sustained service loads (creep flow), their
effects during the useful life of the structure must be taken into account in the analysis.
B.1.3 — GENERAL STRUCTURAL UNITY AND INTEGRITY
B.1.3.1 — In addition to the mooring requirements between parts of the structure and between structural elements given
for seismic reasons in Title A of this Regulation, the additional requirements given below must be taken into account. In
the case of reinforced concrete structures, the requirements of C.7.13 should also be consulted.
B.1.3.2 — For accidental reasons or because the structure is used for purposes other than those foreseen in the design,
it may suffer local damage or lack of resistant capacity in an element or in a minor portion of the building. Due to this the
elements and structural members must be united in order to obtain a
B-1
NSR-10 – Chapter B.1 – General requirements
general structural integrity that allows them to experience local damage without the structure in general losing its stability
or spreading the local damage to other elements, or progressive collapse.
B.1.3.3 — The most common method of obtaining structural integrity is to arrange structural elements in such a way as
to provide overall stability to the structure, giving them continuity, and ensuring that they have sufficient ductility, energy
absorption capacity, and energy dissipation capacity to that can redistribute loads from a damaged area to adjacent
regions without collapse.
B.1.4 — LOAD PATHS

B.1.4.1 — The structural system must be designed in such a way that there is a continuous trajectory for all the loads
and requests considered in the design.
B.1.4.2 — The load path provided must be designed in such a way that it is capable of adequately resisting the forces
from their point of application to the structure, or where they originate in the structure, through the structural elements to
the foundation or other supporting elements.
B.1.4.3 — In structures subjected to horizontal forces from wind, earthquake, earth pressure and others, the structural
elements that are part of the load trajectory must be capable of resisting the forces applied to the surface of other
elements structural either as distributed loads or inertial effects caused by the mass of these elements and must include
diaphragms when required to transmit horizontal forces to the vertical elements of the lateral force resistance system.
B-2
NSR-10 — Chapter B.2 — Load Combinations
CHAPTER
B.2 LOAD COMBINATIONS
B.2.1 — DEFINITIONS AND LIMITATIONS

B.2.1.1 — DEFINITIONS — The definitions given below refer to this Title B (The English translation of each of the defined
terms is included for purposes of consistency with the requirements of the standards that have served as the basis to
updating these requirements within NSR-10):
Loads — These are forces or other stresses that act on the structural system and come from the weight of all permanent
elements in the building, the occupants and their belongings, environmental effects, differential settlements, and restriction
of dimensional changes. Permanent loads are loads that vary very little in time and whose variations are small in
magnitude. All other charges are variable charges.
Service loads — See nominal loads.
Factored load — It is a load that is obtained as the product of a nominal load by a load coefficient. The seismic forces
given in Title A of this Regulation correspond to factored forces, since they have already been affected by the load
coefficient, which is included in the probability of occurrence of the design earthquake.
Nominal loads (Nominal loads) — Are the magnitudes of the loads specified in B.3 to B.6 of this Regulation. The dead,
live and wind loads given in this Title are nominal or real loads, which have NOT been multiplied by the load coefficient.
Load factor — It is a factor that takes into account the unavoidable deviations of the actual loads from the nominal loads
and the uncertainties that are taken into account in the structural analysis. It is synonymous with "load factor" for the
purposes of Regulation NSR-10.
Strength reduction factor — It is a coefficient that takes into account the unavoidable deviations between the actual
resistance and the nominal resistance of the element and the form and consequence of its type of failure. It is synonymous
with "resistance reduction factor" for the purposes of Regulation NSR-10.
Curatorships — They are, in accordance with Law 388 of 1997, the entities in charge of studying, processing and
issuing construction licenses in the cases contemplated by the Law. In those cases in which the present Regulation
NSR-10 mentions the Curatorship, also implies the entity that issues the construction or urban planning licenses that
fulfill their functions.
Durability (Durability) — Capacity of a structure or structural elements to guarantee that there is no deterioration
detrimental to the required performance in the environment for which it was designed.
Building (Building) — It is a construction whose main use is habitation or occupation by human beings.
Effects of the loads (Load effects) — These are the deformations and internal forces that produce the loads in the
structural elements.
Limit state (Limit state) — It is a condition beyond which a structure or one of its components ceases to fulfill its function
(serviceability limit state) or becomes unsafe (resistance limit state).
Operation (Serviceability) — Capacity of the structure, or of a structural element, to have an adequate behavior under
service conditions.
Structural integrity — Ability of the structure to avoid widespread collapse when localized damage occurs.
Maintenance (Maintenance) — Total set of activities that are carried out during the design service life of the structure
so that it is capable of meeting the performance requirements.
B-3
Strength design method — A design method for structural members such that the calculated internal forces produced
by factored loads do not exceed their design strengths.
Work stress method (Allowable stress design method) — It is a method for designing structural elements in which
the elastically calculated stresses, using real loads, must not exceed a specified limit value for each material.
Limit state design method — It is a method for designing structures in such a way that the probability of failure for
certain limit states considered important is within acceptable values. In general, the limit states of service and resistance
are studied. This last case is known as the resistance method.
Repairability (Restorability) — Capacity of the structure, or of a structural element, to be able to be physically and
economically repaired when it is damaged by the effects of the solicitations considered.
Resistance (Resistance) — Capacity of a structural element to support the loads or forces applied to it
Design strength — Is the product of nominal strength times a coefficient of strength reduction.
Nominal resistance (Nominal strength) — It is the capacity of the structure, or component of it, to resist the effects of
the loads, determined by means of calculation in which the nominal values of the resistances of the materials are used,
the nominal dimensions of the element and equations derived from acceptable principles of structural mechanics. These
equations come from field trials and laboratory tests with scale models, taking into account modeling effects and
differences between field and laboratory conditions.
Structural system — Interconnected structural elements that together fulfill a specific function.
Load path (Load path) — Succession of structural elements along which loads are transmitted from their point of
application to the foundation.
Design service life — Period during which the structure or structural element is usable for the purpose for which it was
designed with required maintenance but without the need for major repairs.
B.2.1.2 — LIMITATION — The safety of the structure can be verified using the requirements of B.2.3 or B.2.4 depending
on the chosen design method and structural material. Once it has been determined if some requirements or others are
used, the design must be made in its entirety following the requirements of that numeral for all the elements of the
structure.
B.2.2 — NOMENCLATURE
D. = Dead load consisting of: (a)
own weight of the element. (b)
Weight of all construction materials incorporated into the building and permanently supported by the element,
including walls and room dividers.
(c) weight of permanent
AND
equipment. = reduced design seismic forces (E FR = ) used to design members
yes
structural.
Ed = seismic force of the damage threshold. =
F loads due to weight and pressure of fluids with well-defined densities and controllable maximum heights. = load
due to flooding. = seismic
forces calculated in accordance with the requirements of Title A of the Regulations.
Fa Fs G = load due to hail, without taking into account the contribution of ponding. = live
loads due to the use and occupation of the building, including loads due to moving objects, L
B-4
partitions that can be moved. L includes any reduction that is allowed. If resistance to shock loads is taken
into account, this effect must be taken into account in the live load L .
Le = water ponding load.
Lr = live load on the roof. = unreduced
L0 live load, in kN/m2 . See B.4.5.1.
H = loads due to lateral pressure of soil, groundwater or materials stored with restriction
horizontal.
R0 = coefficient of basic energy dissipation capacity defined for each structural system and each
R = coefficient of energy dissipation capacity to be used in the design, corresponds to the basic energy dissipation
coefficient multiplied by the coefficients of reduction of energy dissipation capacity due to irregularities in
height and plan, and by the absence of redundancy in he
R=ÿÿÿ
seismic resistance structural system ( R apr 0 ) . See Chapter A.3.
you
= forces and effects caused by cumulative effects of temperature variation, setting shrinkage, creep, moisture
changes, differential settlement, or a combination of several of these effects.
W = Wind load.
B.2.3 — LOAD COMBINATIONS TO BE USED WITH THE WORK STRESS

METHOD OR IN SERVICE LIMIT STATE VERIFICATIONS
B.2.3.1 — BASIC COMBINATIONS — Except when so indicated in the part corresponding to each of the materials
regulated in this Regulation, all the loads indicated below must be taken into account acting in the given combinations.
The design must be made for the combination that produces the most unfavorable effect on the building, its foundation,
or the structural element under consideration. The most unfavorable effect can occur when one or several of the charges
do not act.
In this NSR-10 Regulation, all structural materials, with the exception of wood and guadua in Title G, are designed by the
resistance method and therefore the basic load combinations of this section B.2.3 .1 are not applicable to the structural
materials required by the Regulations and should not be used. They are included for those special cases in which the
design is carried out by the allowable stress method and should only be used when explicitly indicated in the corresponding
Title or Chapter or Section of the Regulations.
D F+ (B.2.3-1)
DHFLT + +++ (B.2.3-2)
+++ óGóL (
DHFL r and
) (B.2.3-3)
+++0.75
DHF ( L or )G or L
+ + LT 0.75 ( r and
) (B.2.3-4)
DHFW + ++ (B.2.3-5)
DHF 0.7E + ++ (B.2.3-6)
( +r ++ +
DHF 0.75W 0.75L 0.75 L or+G or L and
) (B.2.3-7)
( 0.75
DHF 0.75 0.7E 0.75L ) L or G
+ or L(+ ++
r +e ) (B.2.3-8)
0.6DWH ++ (B.2.3-9)
0.6D 0.7EH + + (B.2.3-10)
The most unfavorable effects of wind and earthquake must be considered taking them independently.
B-5
B.2.3.2 — SEISMIC FORCES — The reduced seismic forces, E used in the combinations
, B.2.3-6, B.2.3-8 and B.2.3-10
correspond to the effect, expressed in terms of force, Fs, of the seismic movements of ( = ) . When it comes to designing the
the working efforts of the material, the value of the load
members by the design method prescribed in Title A, divided by RE FR of
yes
coefficient that affects the seismic forces E , is 0.7 .
B.2.3.2.1 — Verification of the drifts by the work stress method for the design seismic — To evaluate the drifts
obtained from the horizontal deflections caused by the design seismic, the requirements of chapter A.6 must be used,
the which require that the drifts be verified for the seismic forces Fs, without having been divided by R , using 1.0E
instead of 0.7E in the equations that include E in B.2.3.
B.2.3.2.2 — Verification of the drifts by the work stress method for the damage threshold earthquake — To
evaluate the drifts obtained from the horizontal deflections caused by the damage threshold earthquake in essential
buildings of use group IV , the requirements of chapter A.12 must be used, which require that the drifts be verified for
the seismic forces Ed .
B.2.4 — INCREASED LOAD COMBINATIONS USING THE STRENGTH

METHOD
B.2.4.1 — APPLICABILITY — The load combinations and load factors given in section B.2.4.2 must be used in all structural
materials allowed by the Material Design Regulations, with the exception of those cases in which the Regulation explicitly
indicates that the design must be carried out using the work stress method. in which case the combinations of section B.2.3.1
must be used.
Important Note: The load combinations given in B.2.4.2 contain lower load factors than those prescribed by the NSR-98
Regulation, but at the same time for each of the structural materials in this new version of the Regulation (NSR-10 ) values of the
resistance reduction coefficients, ÿ , have been prescribed lower than those contained in the NSR-98 Regulation, the new values
being consistent with the probability of structural failure that the Regulation limits. It is therefore incorrect, and unsafe, to use the
new load combination equations from B.2.4.2 with the values of the resistance reduction coefficients, ÿ , contained in the NSR-98.
B.2.4.2 — BASIC COMBINATIONS — The design of the structures, their components and foundations must be done in such a
way that their design resistances equal or exceed the effects produced by factored loads in the following combinations:
1.4 DF+( ) (B.2.4-1)
1.2 (DFT
)( )1.6 LH 0.5 L or G or L ++( +r + + e ) (B.2.4-2)
1.2D +1.6 L(orr G or LL or

) +(0.8W
and
) (B.2.4-3)
re 1.0L 0.5 L or (G or L + +
1.2D +1.6W ) (B.2.4-4)
1.2D 1.0E 1.0L ++ (B.2.4-5)
0.9D 1.6W 1.6H ++ (B.2.4-6)
0.9D 1.0E 1.6H ++ (B.2.4-7)
,
B.2.4.2.1 — The reduced design seismic forces, E used in the combinations B.2.4-5 and B.2.4-7 correspond to the
effect, expressed in terms of force, Fs, of the design seismic movements ) . When it comes to designing members, the
(= yes
value of prescribed in Title A, divided by RE FR
B-6
load coefficient affecting seismic forces E is 1.0, since these ,are prescribed at the resistance level. For the verification
of the drifts obtained from the horizontal deflections caused by the design earthquake, the requirements of Chapter
A.6 must be used, which demand that the drifts be verified for the seismic forces Fs, without having been divided by
R .
B.2.4.2.2 — The live load factor, L, is permitted to be reduced to 0.5 in combinations B.2.4-3, B.2.4-4, and B.2.4-5,
except for parking lots, occupied areas such as public assembly and in all areas where L0 is greater than 4.8 kN/m2 .
B.2.4.2.3 — When the wind loads prescribed in chapter B.6 of the NSR-10 Regulation are not reduced by the
directionality factor prescribed therein, it is allowed to use 1.3W instead of 1.6W in the combinations B.2.4- 4 and
B.2.4-6.
B.2.4.2.4 — Title A of the NSR-10 Regulation defines the forces by earthquake at the resistance level; therefore, in
the combinations B.2.4-5 and B.2.4-7, 1.0E must be used . In Equations B.2.4-5 and B.2.4-7, 1.4E may be used
instead of 1.0E, when earthquake loading effects E are based on service levels of seismic forces.
B.2.4.2.5 — The load factor for H , loads due to the weight and pressure of the soil, water in the soil, or other
materials, must be set equal to zero in the combinations B.2.4-6 and B.2.4-7 if the structural action due to H
neutralizes those caused by W or E . When lateral pressures exerted by soil pressure provide resistance to structural
actions from other forces, they should not be included in H but should be included in the design resistance. ,
B.2.4.2.6 — If impact effects are to be taken into account in the design, these effects must be included with the live
load L .
B.2.4.2.7 — Estimates of differential settlement, creep, shrinkage, expansion of shrinkage-compensated concrete, or

temperature variations shall be based on a realistic assessment of such effects that may occur during the life of the
structure. .
B-7
Grades
B-8
NSR-10 – Chapter B.3 – Dead loads
CHAPTER
B.3 DEAD LOADS
B.3.1 — DEFINITION
The dead load covers all the loads of permanent construction elements including its structure, walls, floors, roofs, low
ceilings, stairs, fixed equipment and all those loads that are not caused by the occupation and use of the building. The
net prestress forces must be included within the dead load.
B.3.2 — MASSES AND WEIGHTS OF MATERIALS
When calculating the dead loads, the actual mass densities (in kg/m3 ) of the materials must be used, which must be
multiplied by the acceleration of gravity, 9.8 m/s2 , in order to obtain weight values in N/m3 . Table B.3.2-1
shows the mass density values in kg/m3 for the most frequently used materials.
Table B.3.2-1
Masses of materials
Density Density
Material Material
(kg/m3 ) (kg/m3 )
Steel 7800 Injection mortar for masonry 2,250
Glue mortar for masonry 2 100

Water
Sweet 1,000 Stone
Marine 1,030 limestone, marble, quartz 2,700
Aluminum 2,700 Basalt, granite, gneiss 2,850
Sand Sandstone 2,200
Clean and dry 1440 Board 2,600
river dry 1 700 Lead 11,400
Ceramic tile 2,400 bituminous products
Bronze 8,850 asphalt and tar 1 300
Lime Gasoline 700
loose hydrated 500 Graphite 2 160
compact hydrated 730 Paraffin 900
coal, stacked 800 Petroleum 850
Charcoal 200 ash filling 920
Agglutinated wood boards
Portland cement, bulk 1440 750
Copper 9,000 Terracotta

plain concrete 2,300 saturated pores 1,950
Reinforced concrete 2,400 unsaturated pores 1,150
cork, compressed 250 Earth 7 360 1
Tin 660 wet clay 1,750
dry gravel 920 dry clay 1,100
Ice clay and dry gravel 1,600
Iron sand and wet gravel 1,900
Molten 7,200 Sand and dry rammed 1,750

gravel
Wrought 7,700 loose dry sand and gravel 1,600
Brass 8 430 Consolidated wet silt 1,550
laminated wood 600 loose wet silt 1,250
Dry wood 450-750 Glass 2,600
concrete masonry 2 150 Plaster on boards for walls 800
solid brick masonry 1 850 loose plaster 1,150
stone masonry 2 200 Zinc in rolled sheets 7,200
B-9
B.3.3 — MINIMUM DEAD LOADS

When calculating dead loads, the actual masses of the materials should be used. Special care must be taken to determine
representative masses in this calculation, use the weight specified by the manufacturer or, failing that, they must be
evaluated analytically or experimentally.
B.3.4 — NON-STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

For the calculation of the dead loads produced by non-structural construction materials, these elements are divided into
horizontal and vertical.
B.3.4.1 — HORIZONTAL NON-STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS — Horizontal non-structural elements are those whose vertical
dimension is substantially less than their horizontal dimensions, and are applied, supported, fixed, or anchored to the slabs
or roof of the building. These elements include, among others: permanent formwork for slabs or joists, floor refining mortars,
floor fillers, floor finishes, pitched roof fillers, roof elements, tiles, waterproof membranes, thermal insulation, skylights,
ceilings, enlisted, and ducts for services.
[Note: For design purposes, dead loads for horizontal nonstructural members are considered to be uniform vertical loads
per unit surface area or horizontal projection, applied in the appropriate zones where they are applied.
locate such items. In determining the dead loads produced by such elements, the density of
actual mass of the materials and a realistic thickness. As a guide, table B.3.2-1 suggests the minimum mass densities
(these values must be multiplied by g and by the corresponding thickness in m to obtain the dead loads in N/ m2 ). Tables
B.3.4.1-1 to B.3.4.1-4 give dead load values for typical materials in horizontal non-structural elements, which correspond to
average minimum values. The structural designer must take into account the possibility of variation of these values due to
differences in local materials and construction practice.]
Table B.3.4.1-1
Minimum Dead Loads of Horizontal Nonstructural Elements – Drop Ceiling
Load Load
Component (kN/m2 ) (kgf/m2 )
m2 of plant area m2 of plant area
Low ceiling
Suspended steel channels 0.10 10
Mechanical ducts 0.20 20
Suspended metal framework refined in cement. 0.70 70
Suspended metal framework tuned in plaster. 0.50 50

Acoustic fibers 0.10 10
Plaster or concrete plaster 0.25 25
Timber-framed plaster 0.80 80
Gypsum boards 0.0080 (per mm of thickness) 8 (per cm of thickness)
Wood suspension system. 0.15 15
Table B.3.4.1-2
Minimum dead loads of horizontal non-structural elements – floor fill
Load Load
floor filler
Sand 0.0150 (per mm of thickness) 15 (per cm of thickness)
slag concrete 0.0200 (per mm of thickness) 20 (per cm of thickness)
concrete with stone 0.0250 (per mm of thickness) 25 (per cm of thickness)
lightweight concrete 0.0150 (per mm of thickness) 15 (per cm of thickness)
B-10
Table B.3.4.1-3
Minimum dead loads of horizontal non-structural elements – floors
Load Load
Floors and finishes
Refined concrete floor finish (25 0.0200 (per mm of thickness) 20 (per cm of thickness)
mm) on stone aggregate concrete Ceramic tile (20 mm) on 1.50 150
12 mm mortar. 0.80 80
Ceramic tile (20 mm) on 25 mm mortar. 1.10 110
Tile on 25 mm mortar 1.10 110
Asphalt block (50 mm), on 12 mm mortar 1.50 150
Wooden block (75 mm) without padding 0.50 50
Wood block (75mm) on 12mm mortar 0.80 80
Wooden sleepers, 20 mm 0.15 15
Dense wood, 25mm 0.20 20
Marble and mortar on stone aggregate concrete 1.60 160
Asphalt or linoleum floor, 6 mm 0.05

Board 0.030 (per mm of thickness) 5 30 (per cm of thickness)
Terrazzo (25 mm), concrete 50 mm 1.50 150
Terrazzo (40 mm) directly on the slab 0.90 90
Terrazzo (25 mm) on refined in concrete 1.50 150
Table B.3.4.1-4
Minimum dead loads of horizontal non-structural elements – decks
Load Load
Deck
copper or brass 0.05 5
insulating covers
Fiberglass 0.0020 (per mm of thickness) 2.0 (per cm of thickness)
fiber boards 0.0030 (per mm of thickness) 3.0 (per cm of thickness)
perlite 0.0015 (per mm of thickness) 1.5 (per cm of thickness)
Polystyrene foam 0.0005 (per mm of thickness) 0.5 (per cm of thickness)
Polyurethane foam 0.0010 (per mm of thickness) 1.0 (per cm of thickness)
Asbestos-cement corrugated roofing 0.20 20
wooden decking 0.0060 (per mm of thickness) 6.0 (per cm of thickness) 10
Plaster sheets, 12 mm 0.10
Laminated wood (depending on thickness) 0.0100 (per mm of thickness) 10.0 (per cm of thickness)
Waterproof membranes:
Bituminous, gravel covered 0.25 25
Bituminous, smooth surface 0.10 10
Liquid applied 0.05 5
Single-ply roofing felt Canopies, 0.03 3
metal frame, 10mm glass Fiberboard, 12mm Wood 0.40 40
boards, 50mm Wood boards, 0.05
75mm Metal board, 20 gauge 0.25 5
(0.9 mm nominal thickness) 0.40 25
0.08 40 8
Metal board, 18 gauge (1.2 mm nominal thickness) 0.08 8
Asbestos-cement shingles Asphalt shingles 0.20 20

Wood shingles Clay tile, including 0.10 10
mortar 0.15 15
0.80 80
B-11
B.3.4.2 — VERTICAL NON-STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS — Vertical non-structural elements are those whose vertical
dimension is substantially greater than their minimum horizontal dimension and are freely erected or supported by the
vertical structural elements or fixed to them or anchored only to the mezzanine slabs. Such elements include, among
others: facades, non-structural walls, partitions, wall coverings, veneers, architectural ornamentation, windows, doors,
and vertical service ducts.
In buildings in which partitions can be provided, load provision must be made for them, whether or not they appear on
the architectural plans.
Table B.3.4.2-1
Minimum dead loads of vertical non-structural elements – wall covering
Load (kN/m2 ) Load (kgf/m2 )

per m2 of surface per m2 of surface
vertical vertical
Component (multiply by the height of the (multiply by the height of the
element in m to obtain element in m to obtain
distributed loads in kN/ m) distributed loads in kgf/ m)
wall covering
cement tile 0.80 80
wooden decking 0.0060 (per mm of thickness) 6.0 (per cm of thickness)
Laminated wood (depending on thickness) 0.0100 (per mm of thickness) 10.0 (per cm of thickness)
Insulating boards for walls
Polystyrene foam 0.0005 (per mm of thickness) 0.5 (per cm of thickness)
Polyurethane foam 0.0010 (per mm of thickness) 1.0 (per cm of thickness)
fiber or acrylic 0.0020 (per mm of thickness) 2.0 (per cm of thickness)
perlite 0.0015 (per mm of thickness) 1.5 (per cm of thickness)
fiber boards 0.0030 (per mm of thickness) 3.0 (per cm of thickness)
fiber boards, 12 mm 0.05
Gypsum boards, 12 mm 0.10 5 10
Table B.3.4.2-2
Minimum dead loads of vertical non-structural elements – lightweight partitions
Load (kN/m2 ) per m2 of Load (kgf/m2 ) per m2 of

vertical surface vertical surface
(multiply by the height of the (multiply by the height of the
Component
lightweight partitions
Movable steel partitions (partial height) 0.50 50
Movable steel partitions (full height) 0.20 20
Post in wood or steel, 12 mm plaster on each side 0.90 90
Wooden pole, 50 x 100, without paneling 0.30 30

Wooden post, 50 x 100, drape on one side 0.60 60
Wooden pole, 50 x 100, plastered on both sides 2.00 200
Table B.3.4.2-3
Minimum dead loads of vertical non-structural elements – veneers

Component
veneer
ceramic veneer 0.015 (per mm of thickness) 15 (per cm of thickness)
sandstone veneer 0.013 (per mm of thickness) 13 (per cm of thickness)
limestone veneer 0.015 (per mm of thickness) 15 (per cm of thickness)
granite veneer 0.017 (per mm of thickness) 17 (per cm of thickness)
B-12
Table B.3.4.2-4
Minimum dead loads of vertical non-structural elements – walls

vertical surface (multiply by the vertical surface (multiply by the
Component height of the element in m to obtain height of the element in m to obtain
walls
Panel exteriors (steel or wood
studs):
15mm plaster, insulated, 1.00 100
10mm decking
Exteriors with brick veneer 2.50 250
Clay block masonry: Wall thickness (in mm) 100 Wall thickness (in cm)
150 200 250 300 1.80 2.50 3.10 10 15 20 25 30
Wrapped on both sides 3.80 4.40 1.30 2.00 2.60 3.30 3.90 180 250 310 380 440 130 200
without draping Wall thickness (in mm) 100 150 260 330 390
Concrete block masonry: 200 250 300 1.40 1.4 5 1.90 Wall thickness (in cm)
2.25 2.60 1.70 2.25 2.70 3.15 10 15 20 25 30
Without 1.80 2.30 2.80 3.30 1.80 2.40 3.00 140 145 190 225 260 170 225
backfill Backfill every 3.45 2.00 2.60 3.20 3.75 270 315 180 230 280 330
1.2 m Backfill every 2.20 2.90 3.60 4.30 3.00 180 240 300 345 200 260
1.0 m Backfill every 4.00 5.00 6.10 320 375 220 290 360 430
0.8 m Backfill every 300 400 500 610
0.6 m Backfill every
0.4 m All cells filled Solid
clay masonry: Wall thickness (in mm) 100 Wall thickness (in cm)
150 200 250 300 1.90 2.90 3.80 10 15 20 25 30
without draping 4.70 5.50 190 290 380 470 550
Solid concrete masonry: Wall thickness (in mm) 100 Wall thickness (in cm)
150 200 250 300 2.00 3.10 4.20 10 15 20 25 30
without draping 5.30 6.40 200 310 420 530 640
Table B.3.4.2-5
Minimum dead loads of vertical non-structural elements – windows

Component
element in m to element in m to
obtain distributed loads in kN/ obtain distributed loads in
m) kgf/ m)
Windows
Glass curtain walls, lattice and frame 0.50 50
Windows, glass, lattice and frame 0.45 45
[Note: For design purposes, dead loads caused by vertical nonstructural members are considered as concentrated, or
distributed loads per unit length of the nonstructural member. As a guide, the minimum bulk density values from table
B.3.2-1 are suggested (the values given there should be multiplied by g, by the corresponding thickness in m, and by the
element height in m, in order to to obtain uniform dead loads distributed in N/ m). Tables B.3.4.2-1 to B.3.4.2-5 give the
dead load values of typical materials used in vertical non-structural elements, in kN per unit of vertical area in m2 . To
obtain distributed dead loads in kN/ m, the values suggested in tables B.3.4.2-1 to B.3.4.2-5 must be multiplied by the
height in m of the vertical non-structural element. The values given in tables B.3.2-1 and B.3.4.2-1 to B.3.4.2-5,
correspond to average minimum values; the structural designer must take into account the possibility of variation of these
values due to differences in local materials and construction practice.]
[Note: The dead load of internal vertical non-structural elements, such as walls and interior partitions, may be considered
as a vertical uniform dead load per unit area when the secondary structural elements of the floor system are capable of
supporting the concentrated or distributed loads. caused by them, without affecting the level of resistance or service of
the floor system of the non-structural element. If vertical non-structural members are more than one level high, their dead
loads shall be considered as concentrated or distributed loads. The dead load of facades and building envelope elements
must be considered as distributed loads on the edge of the slab.]
B-13
B.3.4.3 — ALTERNATIVE MINIMUM VALUES FOR DEAD LOADS OF NON-STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS — In buildings
with heights between finished floors less than 3 m, the minimum values of dead load in kN/m2 of horizontal plan area may
be used, given in table B.3.4.3-1 according to the type of occupancy, instead of those obtained from the detailed analysis
of dead loads caused by non-structural elements.
Table B.3.4.3-1
Alternative minimum values of dead load of non-structural elements when a
more detailed analysis is not carried out
Floor and Floor and

Façade and Façade and
deck deck
partitions tuning partitions tuning
Occupation (kN/m2 ) (kgf/m2 )
m2 of plant (kN/m2 ) m2 of plant (kgf/m2 )
m2 of plant m2 of plant
area area
area area
Buildings with a meeting room for
Meeting less than 100 people and without 1.0 1.8 100 180
stages.
Full height mobile partitions 1.0 1.8 100 180
Offices
fixed masonry partitions 2.0 1.8 200 180
educational classrooms 2.0 1.5 200 150
Factories light industries 0.8 1.6 80 160
Boarding schools with care for
2.0 1.6 200 160
residents
Institutional Prisons, jails, reform schools and 2.5 1.8 250 180
detention centers
Daycare centers. 2.0 1.6 200 160
Trade Exhibition and sale of merchandise. 1.5 1.4 150 140
Facade and masonry 3.0 1.6 300 160
Residential partitions.
Facade and light partitions. 2.0 1.4 200 140
Storage Storage of light materials.
1.5 1.5 150 150
Garages for vehicles with a 0.2 1.0 100

garages twenty
capacity of up to 2000 kg
B.3.5 — FIXED EQUIPMENT
Dead loads must include the corresponding mass of all fixed equipment that is supported on structural elements such as
elevators, hydraulic pumps, transformers, air conditioning and ventilation equipment, and others.
B.3.6 — SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
Professionals involved in construction and technical supervision, and the building owner, must be aware of the values of
dead loads used in the design and take the necessary precautions to verify on site that the weights of materials used do
not exceed the values used in the design. It is the responsibility of the person signing the construction license as a builder
to comply with this requirement.
See A.1.3.6.5.
B-14
NSR-10 – Chapter B.4 – Live loads
CHAPTER
B.4 LIVE LOADS
B.4.1 — DEFINITION
B.4.1.1 — Live loads are those loads produced by the use and occupation of the building and should not include
environmental loads such as wind and earthquake.
B.4.1.2 — Live loads on roofs are those caused by: (a) The materials,
equipment and workers used in the maintenance of the roof and (b) Those caused by
mobile objects, such as pots or other decorative objects and for the people
have access to them.
B.4.2 — UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LIVE LOADS
B.4.2.1 — REQUIRED LIVE LOADS — The live loads used in the design of the structure must be the maximum loads
that are expected to occur in the building due to its intended use. In no case can these live loads be less than the
minimum live loads given in tables B.4.2.1-1 and B.4.2.1-2.
Table B.4.2.1-1
Minimum uniformly distributed live loads
Uniform load (kN/m2 ) Uniform load (kgf/m2 )

occupation or use
m2 of plant area 5.0 m2 of plant area 500
balconies 5.0 500
corridors and stairs
Fixed seating (fixed to the floor) 3.0 300
gyms 5.0 500
Meeting lobbies 5.0 500
Mobile seats 5.0 500
Recreational areas 5.0 500
platforms 5.0 500
scenarios 7.5 750
corridors and stairs 3.0 300
Offices Offices 2.0 200
Restaurants 5.0 500
Classrooms 2.0 200
educational Libraries
reading rooms 2.0 200
shelves 7.0 700
light industries 5.0 500
Factories
heavy industries 10.0 1000
Surgery rooms, laboratories 4.0 400
Institutional private rooms 2.0 200
Retail 5.0 500
Trade
Wholesaler 6.0 600
balconies 5.0 500
Residential Private rooms and their corridors 1.8 180
Stairs 3.0 300
Lightweight 6.0 600
Storage
Heavy 12.0 1200
Garages for passenger cars Garages 2.5 250
for cargo
garages
vehicles of up to 2,000 kg capacity. 5.0 500
bleachers 5.0 500
Coliseums and Stadiums
stairs 5.0 500
B-15
Table B.4.2.1-2
Minimum live loads on roofs
Uniform load (kN/m2 ) Uniform load (kgf/m2 )

cover type m2 of plant area m2 of plant area
the same as the rest of the same as the rest of
Covers, Roofs and Terraces
the building (Note-1) the building (Note-1)
Decks used for deck gardens or for gatherings 5.00 500
Inclined roofs with a slope of more than 15° in a metallic or

wooden structure with the physical impossibility of being 0.35 35
subjected to loads greater than those stipulated here
Inclined roofs with a slope of 15° or less in a metal or

wooden structure with the physical impossibility of being 0.50 fifty
subjected to loads greater than those stipulated here
Note-1 — The live load of the roof must not be less than the maximum value of the live loads used in the rest of the building, and
when it has mixed use, such load must be the highest of the live loads corresponding to the different
applications.
B.4.2.2 — PUSH ON HANDRAILS AND BALCONIES — Railings, stair and balcony handrails, and auxiliary bars, both
exterior and interior, and parapets must be designed to resist a horizontal force of 1.00 kN/m (100 kgf/m ) applied to the
top of the railing, handrail or sill and must be capable of transferring this load through the supports to the structure. For
single-family homes, the minimum load is 0.4 kN/m. (40 kgf/m). In stadiums and arenas, this minimum horizontal load of
railings and parapets will not be less than 2.5 kN/m (250 kgf/m). In these and other public settings, the railings must be
subjected to load tests, which must be directed and documented by the Technical Supervisor before being put into service.
Midrails (all except handrails) and infill panels shall be designed to support a normal horizontally applied load of 0.25 kN
(25 kgf) over an area not to exceed 0.3 m on a side, including openings and gaps between rails. It is not necessary to
overlap the actions due to these loads with those of any of the preceding paragraphs.
Vehicle barrier systems, in the case of passenger cars, must be designed to resist a single load of 30 kN (3000 kgf)
applied horizontally in any direction to the barrier system, and must have anchors or ties capable of transferring this load.
load to the structure. For system design, it must be assumed that the load will act at a minimum height of 0.5 m above the
floor or ramp surface over an area not exceeding 0.3 m on a side, and need not be assumed to act together. with any load
for handrails or protection systems specified in the preceding paragraphs. Indicated loads do not include barrier systems
in garages for public transport vehicles and trucks; In these cases, the appropriate analyzes should be carried out that
contemplate these situations.
B.4.3 — PARTIAL LOAD
When the span of an element is partially loaded with the design live load, producing a more unfavorable effect than when
it is loaded in the entire span, this effect must be taken into account in the design.
B.4.4 — IMPACT
When the structure is subjected to live load generating impact, the live load must be increased, for design purposes, by
the following percentages:
(a) Supports for Elevators and Elevators, ............................................ .................................... 100%

(b) Girders of overhead cranes with operating cabin and their connections, .................................
25% (c) Girders of overhead cranes operated by remote control and their connections, ..........................
10% (d) Supports of light machinery, moved by an electric motor or by an axis, . .................. twenty%
B-16
(e) Supports for machinery with a piston or driven by a piston engine, not less than .................... 50% (f)
Turnbuckles that serve as support for floors or suspended balconies and stairs, ..................... 33%
B.4.5 — REDUCTION OF LIVE LOAD
B.4.5.1 — REDUCTION OF THE LIVE LOAD BY AFFERENT AREA — When the area of influence of the element
structure is greater than or equal to 35 m2 and the live load is greater than 1.80 kN/m2 (180 kgf/m2 ) and less than 3.00 kN/m2
(300 kgf/m2 ), the live load can be reduced using equation B.4.5-1:
ÿ
4.6 ÿ
LL=0.25or ÿ + ÿ (B.4.5-1)
TO Yo
ÿ ÿ
Where:
L = reduced live load, in kN/m2

It = unreduced live load, in kN/m2
Ai = area of influence of the element in m2
B.4.5.1.1 — The reduced live load cannot be less than 50% of Lo in elements that support one story or 40% of Lo in
two or more stories.
B.4.5.1.2 — The area of influence is the area of the panels adjacent to the element considered, in such a way that for
columns and beams it is equivalent to the area of the plate panels that touch the element, thus:
center beams Ai = area of two panels

edge beams Ai = area of a panel
central columns Ai = area of four panels
edge columns Ai = area of two panels
corner columns Ai = area of a panel
For elements that support more than one floor, the areas of influence of the different floors must be added.
B.4.5.2 — REDUCTION DUE TO THE NUMBER OF FLOORS — As an alternative to what is stipulated in the previous
numeral, in buildings with five floors or more, the live load for column and foundation design purposes may be taken as the
sum of the live loads of each floor multiplied by the coefficient r corresponding to that floor:
r 1.0 = for in = a i n4 = ÿ (upper five floors) for i n5 = ÿ

r 1.0 0.10 in 4 =+ + ( ) a i n8 = ÿ
r 0.5 = for i n9 = ÿ onwards
Where:
no
= number of floors of the building
Yo
= number of the floor where the coefficient r is applied
B.4.6 – BRIDGE CRANES
In the design of the rail beams of the overhead cranes, a horizontal force equivalent to at least 20% of the sum of the weights
of the crane and the lifted load must be taken into account. The weight of the stationary parts of the overhead crane does not
enter into the sum. This force must be assumed to be placed on top of the rails, normally to the rails themselves, and must be
distributed among the beams taking into account the lateral stiffness of the structure supporting the rails. In addition, a
longitudinal horizontal force, applied to the top of the rail, equal to 10% of the maximum wheel loads of the crane must be
taken into account.
B-17
B.4.7 — DYNAMIC EFFECTS
Buildings exposed to dynamic excitations produced by the public such as: stadiums, coliseums, theaters, gymnasiums,
dance floors, meeting centers or similar, must be designed in such a way that they have vertical natural frequencies equal
to or greater than 5 Hz (periods vertical natural values less than 0.2 s).
B.4.8 — WATER POUNDING AND HAIL LOADS

B.4.8.1 — GENERAL — In the structural design of roofs, the effects of water ponding and hail must be considered. Water
stagnation is caused by obstruction of the roof drainage systems, which can occur due to debris, tree leaves, or hail, among
other sources of obstruction. The determination of the loads due to water stagnation and hail is carried out as follows:
(a) All roofs must have an auxiliary system for evacuating excess water when there is an obstruction in the normal
downspouts. This system can consist of gargoyles, overflows or other implements that prevent the accumulation
of water and reliably evacuate it in the event of obstruction of the drainage system downspouts. (b) The water
ponding load, Le , is determined
based on the volume of water that can be contained until the level of the elements of the auxiliary system for
evacuating excess water is reached, as indicated in B. 4.8.2.
B.4.8.2 — WATER POUNDING CHARGE
B.4.8.2.1 — The hydraulic project of the building must include the design of the roof drainage system and the
auxiliary system for evacuating excess water and will define the volume of water that can accumulate before the
auxiliary drainage system of excess operate. It is the responsibility of the builder who signs the construction license
to approve the hydraulic project and to ensure that the normal and auxiliary drainage systems are appropriate and
to supply the information about the volume of water that may accumulate to the structural designer.
B.4.8.2.2 — Based on the information provided by the builder, the structural designer will determine the loads
caused by the volume of water that can accumulate before the auxiliary excess drainage system operates and its
distribution to the supporting structural elements. of the roof, making its design in such a way that they are capable
of resisting this weight without failing.
B.4.8.2.3 — For metal structure roofs, the revision of the puddle must additionally take into account what is indicated
in F.2.2.3.9.
B.4.8.3 — HAIL LOAD
, into account in the regions of the country with more than 2,000 meters
B.4.8.3.1 — The hail loads, G must be taken
above sea level or in lower places where the municipal or district authority so requires.
B.4.8.3.2 — In municipalities and districts where the hail load must be taken into account, its value is 1.0 kN/m2
(100 kgf/m2 ). For roofs with a slope greater than 15° this value can be reduced to 0.5 kN/m2
(50 kgf/m2 ).
B-18
NSR-10 – Chapter B.5 – Earth pressure and hydrostatic pressure
CHAPTER B.5
EARTH PRESSURE AND HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
B.5.1 — THRUST IN BASEMENT RETAINING WALLS
B.5.1.1 — In the design of the retaining walls of basements and other approximately vertical structures located
underground, the lateral pressure of the adjacent soil must be taken into account. Likewise, the possible loads, both live
and dead, that may occur in the upper part of the adjacent soil must be taken into account.
When part or all of the basement structure is below the water table, the thrust must be calculated for the weight of the
submerged soil and the total hydrostatic pressure. The requirements of Title H of the Regulations should be consulted.
B.5.1.2 — The earth pressure coefficient must be chosen based on the deformability conditions of the containment
structure, being able to assign the active pressure coefficient when the structures have freedom of rotation and translation;
Otherwise, the coefficient will be that of rest or a higher one, up to the value of the liability, in the opinion of the
geotechnical engineer and in accordance with the geometric conditions of the structure and of the adjacent slopes,
fulfilling the additional requirements of Title H of the Regulation. .
B.5.2 — UPPRESSURE, DOWNPRESSURE, IN BASEMENT FLOOR SLABS

The design of basement floor slabs and other approximately horizontal structures located underground must take into
account the full upward hydrostatic pressure applied to the area. The head of hydrostatic pressure should be measured
from the water table. The same consideration must be made in the design of tanks and pools. See chapter C.23.
B.5.3 — EXPANSIVE SOILS
When there are expansive soils under the foundation of the building, or under slabs resting on the ground, the foundation,
the slabs and the other elements of the building must be designed to be able to tolerate the movements that occur, and
resist the pressures risers caused by soil expansion, or expansive soils must be removed or stabilized under and around
the building, according to the instructions of the geotechnical engineer. Title H of the Regulations must be consulted.
B.5.4 — FLOOD AREAS
In those areas designated by the competent authority as flood prone, the structural system of the building must be
designed and built so that it is capable of resisting the effects of flotation and lateral displacement caused by the
hydrostatic, hydrodynamic and impact effects of floating objects.
B-19
NSR-10 – Chapter B.5 – Earth pressure and hydrostatic pressure
Grades
B-20
NSR-10 – Chapter B.6 – Wind forces
CHAPTER
B.6 WIND FORCES
B.6.1 — SCOPE
Below are methods to calculate the wind forces with which the main wind force resistance system (SPRFV) of buildings, their
components and cladding elements must be designed. It does not apply to structures of special shape or location, which require
appropriate investigation, or to those that may be subjected to severe wind-induced oscillations, or to bridge structures.
When there are experimental results, obtained in wind tunnels, these can be used instead of those specified in this chapter, as
long as they receive the approval of the Permanent Advisory Commission for the Seismic-Resistant Construction Regime.
B.6.1.1 — PERMITTED PROCEDURES — Design loads for buildings and other structures, including SPRFV and all components
and cladding elements thereof, shall be determined using one of the following procedures:
Method 1 — Simplified Procedure, for buildings meeting the requirements specified in section B.6.4 Method 2 —
Analytical
Procedure, for buildings meeting the requirements specified in section
B.6.5.
Method 3 — Wind Tunnel Procedure as specified in Section B.6.6.
B.6.1.2 — WIND PRESSURES ACTING ON OPPOSITE FACES OF EACH SURFACE OF THE BUILDING — To calculate the
SPRFV design wind loads, the algebraic sum of the pressures acting on opposite faces of each surface must be taken of the
building.
B.6.1.3 — MINIMUM DESIGN WIND LOAD — The design wind load, determined by any of the procedures in Section B.6.1.1,
shall not be less than that specified below.
B.6.1.3.1 — Main System Resisting Wind Loads (SPRFV) — For a closed or partially closed building or for any
structure, the wind load to be used in the SPRFV design shall not be less than the multiplication of 0.40 kN/ m2 by the
area of the building or structure, projected to a vertical plane normal to the wind direction under study.
B.6.1.3.2 — Components and Linings — The design wind pressure for the components and linings of the structure
shall not be less than a net pressure of 0.40 kN/m2 acting in any direction normal to the surface.
B.6.2 — DEFINITIONS
The following definitions apply to this chapter:
Openings — Openings or spaces in the building envelope that allow air to circulate through the enclosure and that are designed
to be “open” during design winds as defined in these specifications.
Eave height, h — The distance from the ground surface adjacent to the building to the eave on a given wall. If the height of the
cornice varies along the wall, the average height will be taken.
Mean Roof Height, h — The average of the height to the cornice and the height to the highest point of the roof. For roofs with
inclination angles less than or equal to 10o , the average roof height will be the height
from the cornice
Approved — Accepted by the authority having jurisdiction.
B-21
Effective Area — The area used to determine GCp . For component elements and cladding panels,
the effective area in figs. B.6.5-8A to B.6.5-14 and in Fig. B.6.5-16A, B, C and D and is the span length multiplied by an
effective width which shall not be less than one third of the length of the section. For lining lashings, the effective wind area
shall not be greater than the tributary area of an individual lashing.
Hill — With respect to topographic effects in Section B.6.5.7, refers to a terrain surface characterized by a noticeable
change in relief in any horizontal direction.
Components and coatings — Those elements that are not part of the main system resistant to wind forces, SPRFV.
Free Cover —Cover with a configuration similar to that of figs. B.6.5-15A to B.6.5-15D (single, gabled or trough), in an open
building without enclosing walls below the roof surface.
Open building — A building with openings of at least 80% of the area in each of the walls that make up the building
envelope (facades and roofs). This condition is expressed by the following equation where: ÿ A 0.8A g , or
Ao = total area of openings in a wall receiving external positive pressure, in m2 .

Ag = total area of the wall to which Ao refers.
Low building — Enclosed or partially enclosed building that meets the following conditions: (a) Average
roof height ( ) h less than or equal to 18 m (60ft). (b) Average roof
height ( ) h does not exceed the least horizontal dimension of the building.
Enclosed building — A building that does not meet the requirements for open or partially enclosed buildings.
Simple diaphragm building — A building in which the wind loads to windward and leeward are transmitted through the
floor and roof diaphragms to the same SPRFV, that is, it does not have structural separations.
Regular-shaped structure or building — A building or other structure that does not have irregular geometry in its spatial
shape.
.
Rigid building or structure — A building or other structure whose fundamental frequency is greater than or equal to 1 Hz
Partially Enclosed Building — A building that meets the following conditions: (a) The
total area of openings in a wall receiving positive external pressure exceeds by more than 10% the sum of the areas
of openings in the remaining area of the building shell (walls and roof). (b) The total area of openings in a
positively charged wall exceeds 0.37 m2 or 1% of the area of that wall (whichever is less), and the percentage of
openings in the remaining area of the building envelope does not exceed twenty%.
These conditions are expressed by the following conditions:
At 1.10A >
either I heard
2 to 0.37m
> or or A 0.01A > og , whichever is less, and AA 0.20ÿgi
I heard
where
Ao = total area of openings in a wall receiving external positive pressure, in m2 .

Ag = total area of the wall to which Ao refers.
Aoi = the sum of the areas of openings, not including Ao , in the building envelope (walls and roof), in m2 . of the building
cladding
Agi = the sum of the (walls
gross and roof),
areas, notinincluding
m2 Ag ,
B-22
Building or other flexible structure — Buildings or other slender structures with a fundamental natural frequency less than 1 Hz.
Escarpment — With respect to the topographic effects of Section B.6.5.7, refers to a steep cliff or slope that separates
two terrain levels (see Fig. B.6.5-1).
Importance Factor, I — Factor that takes into account the degree of threat to human life and property damage.
Design Force, F — Equivalent static force used to determine wind loads for open buildings and other structures.
Recognized Literature — Published research or technical papers that have been approved.
Glazing material —Glass items, including annealed glass, organically coated glass, tempered glass, laminated glass,
wired glass, sheets of plastic material, or combinations of these used in glazing (see K.4.1.2).
Design Pressure, p — Equivalent static pressure used to determine wind loads for buildings.
Building Envelope — Components that enclose the building such as roofs, skylights, exterior walls, doors, and windows.
Impact Resistant Lining — An enclosure designed to protect glazing materials.
Primary Wind Load Resisting System (SPRFV) — An assembly of structural elements intended to provide support and
stability to the entire structure. The system generally receives wind loads from more than one surface.
Wind speed, V — As specified in section B.6.5.4, is the speed of a 3-second gust measured 10 m above the ground at
Exposure C (See section B.6.5.6.3).
Stained glass — Glass or translucent sheets of plastic used in windows, doors, skylights or enclosures.
B.6.3 — NOMENCLATURE
The following nomenclature covers the variables used in this chapter.
A = effective area for wind, in m2

Af = area of a building or other open structure. It can refer to the area normal to the wind direction or to the projected area
in a plane normal to the wind direction, in m2
Ag = gross area to which Ao refers , in m2 in m2
Agi = the sum of the gross areas of the entire enclosure surface (walls and roof) not including Ag , Ao = total
area of openings in a wall receiving external positive pressure, in m2
Aoi = the sum of the area of openings of the entire surface of the enclosure (walls and cover) not including Ao , in
m2
Aog = total area of openings on the entire surface of the enclosure (walls and roof) of the building, in m2
Ag = gross area of the free solid wall or rigid fence, in m2
to = width of the zone for pressure coefficient, in m =
B. horizontal dimension of the building measured in a direction normal to the direction of the wind,
b in m = factor of mean hourly wind speed in eq. B.6.5-12 from Table B.6.5-2
ˆ
b = 3-second gust velocity factor, from Table B.6.5-2 = force coefficient
CF to be used in calculating wind loads for structures other than buildings
CN = net pressure coefficient to be used in the calculation of wind loads for open buildings
B-23
Cp = coefficient of external pressure to be used in the calculation of wind loads for buildings
c = turbulence intensity factor in eq. B.6.5-3 from Table B.6.5-2 D = diameter of
circular structure or member, in m Dÿ = depth of protruding
elements such as ribs and cornices, in m F = design wind force for structures other than
buildings , in N G = gust effect factor Gf = gust effect factor for the SPRFV of flexible
buildings and other structures
GCpn = combined pressure coefficient for a parapet GCp = product of the external pressure
coefficient and the gust effect factor to be used in the determination
of
wind loads for buildings
GCpf = product of the equivalent coefficient of external pressure and the gust effect factor to be used in the
determination of wind loads for the SPRFV of low buildings
GCpi = product of the internal pressure coefficient and the gust effect factor to be used in the determination of
wind loads for buildings = peak
gQ factor for environment response in eqs. B.6.5-2 and B.6.5-6 = peak factor
gR for resonance response in eqs. B.6.5-6 = peak factor for wind
gÿ response in eqs. B.6.5-2 and B.6.5-6
H = height of the hill or escarpment in fig. B.6.5-1, in m = average
height of a building or height of any other structure. The height to the cornice must be used if the h is less than or
equal to 10oangle of inclination e = , in me
I have height of the cornice on a given wall or average height of the cornice if it varies along the length of the wall
structure.
he
= importance factor =
zl turbulence intensity from eq. B.6.5-6
K ,K ,K 123 = multiplication factors in fig. B.6.5-1 used to calculate Kzt

Kd = wind directionality factor, in table B.6.5-4 Kh = coefficient of pressure
exposure by velocity evaluated in zh =
Kz = pressure exposure coefficient per velocity evaluated at height z Kzt = topographic .
factor defined in section B.6.5.7 L Lh = distance upwind from
= horizontal dimension of the building measured parallel to the wind direction, in m
the crest of the hill or escarpment in fig. B.6.5-1, where the difference in terrain elevation is half the height of the hill or
escarpment, in m
lz = integral length to scale of turbulence (for scale models in wind tunnel), in m = horizontal dimension
lr of return corner for a free wall or solid fence of fig. B.6.5-17, in m = integral length scale factor from Table
B.6.5-2, in m N1 = reduced frequency from Eq. B.6.5-10 = natural
frequency of the building, in Hz = design pressure
n1 to be used in the calculation of wind loads
p for buildings = wind pressure acting on the leeward side in fig. B.6.5-6, in N/m2
pL
pnet = net design wind pressure from Eq. B.6.4-2, in N/m2
wind = net design wind pressure for exposure category B ah=10.0 m net10 p = net design
$ pressure from eq. B.6.4-1, in N/m2
s10p _ = simplified design wind pressure for exposure category B ah=10.0 m in Fig. B.6.4-2 = wind pressure acting on
the windward side in fig. B.6.5-6, in N/m2
pw Q = response factor of the environment from eq. B.6.5-4
what = pressure times velocity, in N/m2
what = pressure times velocity evaluated at height zh = = , in N/m2
qi pressure times velocity for the determination of internal pressure, in N/m2
B-24
because = pressure times velocity at the top of the parapet, in N/m2

= pressure times velocity evaluated at a height z above ground, in N/m2
qz R = resonance response factor from eq. B.6.5-8 = values of
Ri Rn eq. B.6.5-8 R ,R ,R BhL
= reduction factor from eq. B.6.5-14
= value of Eq. B.6.5-9 =

yes
vertical dimension of a free wall or a solid fence of fig. B.6.5-17, in m V = basic wind
speed from fig. B.6.4-1 in m/s. The basic wind speed corresponds to the speed of a 3-second gust at a height of 10 m
above the ground in a terrain of exposure category C = internal volume without partitions, in m3 . = average
wind speed per hour at a
height ÿ. m/s
Vi
Vz W = width of the building in figs. B.6.5-9 and B.6.5-11A and B; and width of the light in figs. B.6.5-10 and B.6.5-12, in
m
X = distance to the center of pressure from the windward edge, in m
x = distance taken from the top in the windward or leeward direction in fig. B.6.5-1, in m = height above
z ground, in m = equivalent height of the
z structure, in m = nominal height of the
gz atmospheric boundary layer used in this code. The values appear in the table
B.6.5-2
min z = minimum exposure height from Table B.6.5-2 =
ÿ exponent for the 3-sec gust speed power law from Table B.6.5-2 = inverse of ÿ from Table
ÿˆ B.6.5-2 = exponent for the power law
ÿ of the average hourly speed of the wind, eq. B.6.5-12 in table B.6.5-2 = damping coefficient, critical percentage
ÿ for buildings and other structures = coefficient of solid area vs gross area for free walls,
ÿ solid fences, open fences, lattice towers
and other lattice structures
ÿ = adjustment factor for height and exposure of the building of figs. B.6.4-2 and B.6.4-3.
ÿ = exponent for the power law of the integral length scale in Eq. B.6.5-5 obtained from the table
B.6.5-2
ÿ = value used in eq. B.6.5-11A (see section B.6.5.8.2) = angle
ÿ of inclination of the roof, in degrees. = height/width
ÿ ratio for solid fences
B.6.4 — SIMPLIFIED PROCEDURE

B.6.4.1 — SCOPE —A building whose design wind loads are determined in accordance with this section shall meet the
conditions of B.6.4.1.1 or B.6.4.1.2. If only the conditions of B.6.4.1.2 are met for the design of the cladding elements and
components, the RFPS shall be designed using Method 2 (Analytical Procedure) or Method 3 (Wind Tunnel Procedure).
B.6.4.1.1 — Main Wind Force Resistance System (SPRFV) — For the SPRFV design, the building must meet
all of the following conditions:
(a) The building is single diaphragm as defined in Section B.6.2. (b) The
building is low in accordance with section B.6.2. (c) The
building is enclosed as defined in section B.6.2 and complies with zoning provisions
hurricane prone in accordance with Section B.6.5.9.3. (d) The
building is of regular shape as defined in section B.6.2. (e) The building
is not classified as flexible as defined in section B.6.2. (f) The response characteristics
of the building are such that the building is not subject to through-wind loads, vortex generation, tapping
or flapping instability, and is not located in a location where Present effects of channeling or shaking
due to the wake of obstructions in windward, which require special considerations. (g) The building
has a cross section approximately symmetrical in each direction and has
B-25
a flat roof or a gabled or hipped roof with an angle of inclination ÿ ÿ 45 . (h) The building
is exempt from the torsional load cases indicated in Note 5 of fig. B.6.5-7, or these cases do not control the
design of any of the SPRFV elements of the building.
B.6.4.1.2 — Components and Cladding — For the design of the components and cladding elements, the building
must meet all of the following conditions:
(a) The average height h is equal to or less than 18.0

m. (b) The building is enclosed as defined in section B.6.2 and meets the zoning provisions
hurricane prone in accordance with Section B.6.5.9.3. (c) The
building is of regular shape as defined in section B.6.2. (d) The building
has a flat roof, a pitched roof with ÿ ÿ 45 or a four-sided roof
waters with ÿ ÿ 27 .
B.6.4.2 — DESIGN PROCEDURE
(a) The basic wind speed V is determined according to section B.6.5.4. The wind should be assumed to come from
any horizontal direction. (b) The importance factor
I is determined according to section B.6.5.5. (c) The exposure category is
determined in accordance with section B.6.5.6. (d) Determine a coefficient of
adjustment for height and exposure, ÿ , according to fig. B.6.4-2.
B.6.4.2.1 — Main Wind Force Resisting System (SPRFV) — The simplified design wind pressures, ps , represent
the net pressure (sum of internal and external pressures) that must be applied to the horizontal and vertical
projections of the building surfaces as shown in fig.
B.6.4-2. For the horizontal pressure (zones A, B, C and D), ps is the combination of the net pressures to windward
and leeward, ps will be determined with the following Eq.:
p = ÿK IP
yeszt s10 (B.6.4-1)
where;
ÿ = adjustment factor for height and exposure, from fig. B.6.4-2 (continued).
Kzt = topographic factor as defined in section B.6.5.7 evaluated at the average height of the roof, h
equation B.6.5-1
= importance factor as defined in section B.6.5.5 I PS10 =
simplified design wind pressure for exposure category B , with h= 10m
from fig. B.6.4-2.
B.6.4.2.1.1 - Minimum Pressures - The loading effects of the design wind pressures of section B.6.4.2.1
shall not be less than the minimum load case of section B.6.1.3.1, assuming +0.40 kN/m2 for zones A, B,
C and D and 0 kN/m2 for zones E, F, G and H. pressures ps ,
B.6.4.2.2 — Cladding Elements and Components — For cladding elements and components designed using the
Simplified Method, the net design wind pressures, pnet
represent the net pressure (sum of internal and external pressures) that must be applied in the normal direction to
each building surface as shown in fig. B.6.4-3.
p net = ÿ K IP
ztnet10 (B.6.4-2)
where;
ÿ = adjustment factor for height and exposure, from fig. B.6.4-2

kzt = topographic factor as defined in section B.6.5.7 evaluated at the average height of
the cover, h
he
= importance factor as defined in section B.6.2
B-26
Pnet10 = net design wind pressure for exposure category B at h 10.0 = m
B.6.4.2.2.1 — Minimum Pressures — The positive and negative design wind pressures, Pnet
of section B.6.4.2.2 shall not be less than +0.4 kN/m2 and -0.4 kN/m2 , respectively.
B.6.4.3 — PERMEABLE LINING — The design wind loads in fig. B.6.4-3 shall be used for all pervious linings unless it is
shown through approved experimental data or other recognized literature that the loads are less for the type of lining being
considered.
B.6.5 – METHOD 2 - ANALYTICAL PROCEDURE

B.6.5.1 — SCOPE — A building whose design wind loads are determined in accordance with this section shall meet the
following conditions:
(a) The building or structure is of regular shape as defined in section B.6.2. (b) The
building or structure does not have response characteristics that give rise to transverse wind loads, vortex generation,
instability due to knocking or fluttering, and due to its location, the effects of channeling or shaking due to
movement should not deserve special consideration. wake produced by obstructions to windward.
B.6.5.2 — LIMITATIONS — The specifications in section B.6.5 consider the effect of increased loads due to resonance
between gusts and vibrations in the direction of the wind in flexible buildings and other structures. Buildings or structures that
do not meet the considerations in Section B.6.5.1, or those that have irregular shape or unusual response characteristics,
shall be designed using recognized literature documenting those effects of wind loads or shall be designed using the wind
tunnel procedure specified in section B.6.6.
B.6.5.2.1 — Protection of other buildings — No reductions in velocity pressures will be made as a result of
shielding other neighboring structures or as a result of the characteristics of the terrain.
B.6.5.2.2 — Pervious Linings — In determining the loads applicable to pervious linings, the specifications of
Section B.6.5 shall be used unless it is shown by approved tests or recognized literature that the loads are lower.
B.6.5.3 — DESIGN PROCEDURE
(a) The basic wind speed V , and the wind direction factor Kd will be determined according to the
section B.6.5.4.
(b) The importance factor l shall be determined in accordance with section B.6.5.5.
(c) One or more exposure categories Kz and an exposure coefficient for pressure per velocity Kh shall be determined
for each wind direction , in accordance with section B.6.5.6. (d) The topographic factor
Kzt , will be determined in accordance with section B.6.5.7. (e) The gust effect factor
G or Gf , as applicable, shall be determined in accordance with section B.6.5.8. (f) The enclosure classification
will be determined in accordance with section B.6.5.9. (g) The Internal Pressure Coefficient
GCpi shall be determined in accordance with section B.6.5.11.1. (h) The External Pressure Coefficient
Cp or GCpf or the Force Coefficients Cf , as applicable, shall be
determined in accordance with section B.6.5.11.2 or B.6.5.11.3 respectively.
(i) The pressure per velocity qz or qh , as applicable, shall be determined in accordance with section B.6.5.10.
(j) The Design Wind Load p or F shall be determined in accordance with sections B.6.5.12, B.6.5.13,
B.6.5.14 and B.6.5.15, as applicable.
B.6.5.4 — BASE WIND SPEED — The basic wind speed, V used in determining design wind loads for buildings and other
structures shall be taken from Fig. B.6.4-1, except as specified in sections B.6.5.4.1 and B.6.5.4.2. The wind will be assumed
to come from any horizontal direction.
B.6.5.4.1 — Special Regions for Wind — The basic wind speed will increase where
B-27
there are records or experience indicates wind speeds greater than those expressed in fig. B.6.4-1.
Hilly terrain, cliffs, and the special regions of Figure B.6.4-1 should be surveyed to determine if unusual wind
conditions exist. The respective authority will adjust the values in fig.
B.6.4-1 to reflect higher local wind speeds. This adjustment must be made based on meteorological information
and an estimate of the basic wind speed according to the specifications of section B.6.5.4.2.
B.6.5.4.2 — Estimation of Basic Wind Speed from Regional Climatic Information —

Regional climatic data may be used instead of the basic wind speeds given in Figure B.6.4-1 only when the
authority having jurisdiction considers that the following conditions have been met:
B.6.5.4.2.1 — Approved statistical procedures have been used for the analysis of extreme values in the
treatment of the data, and
B.6.5.4.2.2 — Record length, sampling error, average time, anemometer height, data quality, and terrain
exposure have been taken into account.
B.6.5.4.3 — Limitations — Tornadoes have not been considered in the basic wind speed calculations.
B.6.5.4.4 — Wind Direction Factor — The Wind Direction Factor, Kd , shall be determined from Table B.6.5-4.
This factor will only apply when used in conjunction with the load combinations specified in sections B.2.3 and
B.2.4.
B.6.5.5 — IMPORTANCE FACTOR — The importance factor, I , for the building or other structure shall be determined
from Table B.6.5-1. according to the use groups presented in section A.2.5
B.6.5.6 — EXPOSURE — For each considered wind direction, the windward exposure category will be determined based
on the roughness of the terrain, which in turn is determined by the natural topography, vegetation, and structures built on
it.
B.6.5.6.1 — Wind Directions and Sectors — For each wind direction selected for wind load assessment, the
building or structure exposure shall be determined for the two windward sectors extending 45o to each side. of
the chosen wind direction. Exposures in these two sectors must be determined in accordance with sections
B.6.5.6.2 and B.6.5.6.3. The exposure producing the highest wind loads will be used to represent the wind from
that direction.
B.6.5.6.2 — Terrain Roughness Categories — Choosing among the categories of this numeral, the roughness
of the terrain will be determined within each 45o sector for a distance upwind as defined in section B.6.5.6.3. This
is done for the purpose of assigning the land an exposure category as defined in section B.6.5.6.3.
Ground Roughness B — Urban and suburban areas, wooded areas, or other terrain with numerous obstructions
the size of, equal to, or greater than a single-family home and closely spaced between them.
Terrain Roughness C — Open terrain with few obstructions and heights less than 9.0 m. This category includes
open flat fields, grasslands, and all water surfaces in hurricane-prone areas.
Terrain Roughness D — Flat, unobstructed areas and water surfaces outside of hurricane-prone regions. This
category includes swamps, salt pans, and ice surfaces.
B.6.5.6.3 — Exposure Categories
Exposure B — Exposure category B applies when ground roughness, as defined in Ground Roughness B,
prevails for a distance of at least 800 m or 20 times the height of the building, whichever is greater, downwind .
EXCEPTION — For buildings whose average height is less than or equal to 9.0 m, the upwind distance may
B-28
be reduced to 460 m.
Exposure C — Exposure category C will apply for all cases where categories B and D do not apply.
Exposure D — Exposure category D applies when ground roughness, as defined in Ground Roughness D, prevails
for a distance greater than 1500 m or 20 times the height of the building, whichever is greater, in the windward
direction. Exposure category D will extend downwind of Rough Ground B or C areas for a distance of 200 m or 20
times the height of the building, whichever is greater.
For a building that is located in a transition zone between categories, the category that produces the greatest design
forces will be used.
EXCEPTION - It is allowed to use an intermediate exposure category between the previous categories in a transition
zone, as long as it is determined with an analytical process defined in the recognized literature.
B.6.5.6.4 — Exposure Categories for SPRFV
B.6.5.6.4.1 — Buildings and Other Structures — The wind loads for the SPRFV design determined from
fig. B.6.5-3 must be based on the exposure categories defined in section B.6.5.6.3., for each considered
wind direction.
B.6.5.6.4.2 — Low Buildings — Wind loads for the SPRFV design of low buildings shall be determined
using a pressure velocity qh based on the exposure category that produces the highest wind loads for any
wind direction where external pressure coefficients GCpf given in fig. B.6.5-7.
B.6.5.6.5 — Exposure Category for Cladding Components and Elements — Design pressures for cladding
components and elements, in buildings and other structures, shall be based on the exposure that results in the
greatest wind loads in any direction. of wind.
B.6.5.6.6 — Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficient — Based on the exposure category determined in Section
B.6.5.3, a velocity pressure exposure coefficient Kz or Kh , as applicable. For a building that is located in a transition
zone between exposure categories, that is, close to a change in terrain roughness, it will be allowed to take
intermediate values of Kz or Kh , as long as they are determined by means of a rational method of analysis. defined
in the recognized literature.
B.6.5.7 — TOPOGRAPHICAL EFFECTS
B.6.5.7.1 — Velocity Increase on Hills or Escarpments — The effects of increased wind speed on isolated hills, or
escarpments, that constitute abrupt changes in general topography, shall be included in the design. Buildings, site
conditions, and location must meet all of the following conditions:
(a) That the hill or escarpment is isolated and unobstructed to the windward side by other topographical
features close to 100 times its height (100H) or 3 km, whichever is less. The distance shall be measured
horizontally from the point from which the height H of the ridge, hill, or escarpment is measured.
(b) That the hill, or escarpment protrudes above the ground upwind by a factor of 2 or more, within a radius
of 3 km.
(c) That the structure is located in the upper half of the hill or near the crest of the escarpment, as shown in
fig. B.6.5-1. (d) That HL 0.2 h ÿ (e) H is greater
than or equal tom 4.5 .
for Exposure C and D and 18 m for Exposure B.
B-29
B.6.5.7.2 — Topographic Factor — The effect of increasing wind speed will be included in the calculation of design wind
loads using the Kzt factor :
( = + 1 2 3 zt )2
K 1 KKK (B.6.5-1)
Where K1 , K2 and K3 are given in Fig. B.6.5-1.
If the site or location of the structure does not meet the conditions specified in section B.6.5.7.1, then K 1.0 zt
= .
B.6.5.8 — BURST EFFECT FACTOR
B.6.5.8.1 — Rigid Structures — For rigid structures as defined in section B.6.2, the gust effect factor shall be taken as
0.85 or calculated with the following formula:
+
= 0.925 ÿ 1 1.7g IQÿ ) Qz
(ÿG
(B.6.5-2)
ÿ ÿ+ 1 1.7g Iÿz
ÿÿ ÿ
16
ÿ 10
ÿ=
I z ÿ ÿc (B.6.5-3)
ÿ ÿz
Where zI = the turbulence intensity at height z defined as 0.6h , where z = the equivalent height of the structure
for all building heightsvhg. will
For be
each exposure
taken as 3.4.min
Thezresponse
, but not less than
of the min z andQc is
environment are
defined
listed in
as:Table B.6.5-2; gQ and
1
Q = (B.6.5-4)
0.63
B ÿh +
ÿ +ÿ 1 0.62
ÿ
L
z ÿÿ
Where B and h are defined in section B.6.3; and Lz = integral length to scale of the turbulence (for scale models in wind
tunnel). Lz is defined by:
ÿ
ÿ ÿz =
Lz ÿÿÿÿ (B.6.5-5)
10
where and ÿ are constants defined in Table B.6.5-2.
B.6.5.8.2 — Flexible or Dynamically Sensitive Structures — For flexible or dynamically sensitive structures as defined
in section B.6.2, the gust effect factor shall be calculated using the expression:
22 22
ÿ 1 +1.7I g zQQgRR ÿ G+0.925
ÿ
= ÿ
(B.6.5-6)
F
1 +1.7g Iÿ z
ÿ ÿ
gQ and gÿ will be taken as 3.4 and gR will be calculated with the following equation:
0.577
gR. = (
2ln 3600n 1 )+ (B.6.5-7)
(
2ln 3600n 1 )
B-30
R. , the resonance response factor is calculated with the following equation:
=
1 RRRR 0.53 L ÿ+ (
0.47R
nhB ) (B.6.5-8)
7.47N 1
R.no = (B.6.5-9)
53
(1 +10.3N 1)
No.
= n1z
L
(B.6.5-10)
1
Vz
1 1
ÿÿ
R. =ÿ ÿ
2 (1e )2
for ÿ > 0 (B.6.5-11a)
ÿÿ 2
R 1 = for ÿ = 0 (B.6.5-11b)
Where the subscript in Eq. B.6-11a shall be taken as h defined in section , B and L respectively where h , B and L will
B.6.3.
= Natural frequency of the building

ÿ1
R Rh = taking ÿ = 4.6nh V 1 z
RR = taking ÿ = 4.6n EB V
B. 1 z
RR = taking ÿ = 15.4n LV
L 1 z
ÿ = percentage of critical damping average
= wind speed per hour at a height z determined with the equation:
vz
ÿ
ÿ ÿz =
Vb
z V
ÿÿ (B.6.5-12)
ÿ 10
ÿ
Where b and ÿ are constants listed in table B.6.5-2 and V is the basic wind speed in m/s.
B.6.5.8.3 — Rational Analysis — In lieu of the procedures defined in sections B.6.5.8.1 and B.6.5.8.2, the
determination of the gust effect factor is permitted by means of any rational method defined in recognized literature.
B.6.5.8.4 — Limitations — Where pressure coefficients and combined gust effect factors (GCp , GCpi , and GCpf )
appear in tables, the gust effect factor shall not be calculated separately.
B.6.5.9 — CLASSIFICATIONS OF WALLS
B.6.5.9.1 — General — For purposes of determining internal pressure coefficients, all buildings shall be classified as
enclosed, partially enclosed, or open in accordance with Section B.6.2.
B.6.5.9.2 — Openings — Openings in the building envelope shall be quantified to determine the enclosure
classification as defined in section B.6.5.9.1.
B.6.5.9.3 — Zones prone to hurricanes — The glass of buildings located in zones prone to hurricanes, must be
protected with an impact resistant coating or be impact resistant glasses in accordance with the requirements specified
in ASTM E1886 and ASTM E1996 standards. or other approved test methods and performance criteria.
EXCEPTIONS:
B-31
(a) Glass may not be protected in category II, III or IV buildings located more than 18.0 m above ground level
and more than 9.0 m above roofs with aggregate surfaces located 450 m inside the building. (b)
Unprotected glass is permitted in category I buildings.
B.6.5.9.4 — Multiple Classifications — If by definition a building meets the “open” and “partially enclosed” building
parameters, it will be classified as an “open” building. A building that does not meet the definitions of an “open” or
“partially enclosed” building will be classified as a “closed” building.
B.6.5.10 — PRESSURE PER VELOCITY — The pressure per velocity, qz , evaluated at the height z will be calculated with the
following expression:
2
0.613KKKV
z = l z zt d in (N/m2 ); V in m/s q (B.6.5-13)
Where Kd is the wind direction factor defined in section B.6.5.4.4, Kz is the velocity pressure exposure coefficient defined in
section B.6.5.6.6, Kzt is the topographic factor defined in section B.6.5 .7.2 and
qh is the pressure per velocity calculated using Equation B.6.5-13 at mean roof height, h .
The numerical coefficient 0.613 will be used whenever there are not enough climate records to justify the selection of another
value.
B.6.5.11 — PRESSURE AND FORCE COEFFICIENTS
B.6.5.11.1 — Internal Pressure Coefficient — Internal pressure coefficients, GCpi , shall be determined from Figure
B.6.5-2 based on the enclosure classification determined in Section B.6.5.9.
B.6.5.11.1.1 — Reduction Factor for High Volume Buildings, Ri — For a partially enclosed building
containing a single unpartitioned space, the internal pressure coefficient, GCpi , shall be multiplied by the
following reduction factor, Ri :
ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ
1
= i R 0.5 1 or
R 1.0 =+i ÿ 1.0 (B.6.5-14)
I
saw
1+
11000A og
ÿ ÿ
Where:
oog = total area of openings in the building envelope (walls and roofs, in m2 ) internal volume
= without partitions, in m3
Saw
B.6.5.11.2 — External Pressure Coefficients
B.6.5.11.2.1 — Main Wind Force Resistance Systems — The external pressure coefficients, Cp , for the
Main Wind Force Resistance Systems (SPRFV) are given in figs. B.6.5-3, B.6.5-4 and B.6.5-5. The
combinations between external pressure coefficients and gust effect factors, GPpf for low buildings are given
in fig. B.6.5-7. The pressure coefficients and gust effect factors in Fig. B.6.5-7 shall not be taken separately.
B.6.5.11.2.2 — Lining and Components — The combinations between external pressure coefficients and
gust effect factors, GCp , for lining elements and components are given in figs. B.6.5-8A to B.6.5-14. The
pressure coefficients and gust effect factors of fig.
B.6.5-7 should not be taken separately.
B-32
B.6.5.11.3 — Force Coefficients — In figs. B.6.5-17 to B.6.5-19 force coefficients are given, Cf .
B.6.5.11.4 — Roof cornices
B.6.5.11.4.1 — Main Systems of Resistance to Wind Forces — The windward eaves of the roofs will be
designed with a positive pressure on the lower face, product of the coefficient C 0.8 and the pressures
determined using= figs. B.6.5-3 and B.6.5-5. p
B.6.5.11.4.2 — Clad and Components —Eaves shall be designed for pressures determined from the
pressure coefficients given in figs. B.5.6-8B, C and D.
B.6.5.11.5 — Butts
B.6.5.11.5.1 — Main Systems of Resistance to Wind Forces — The pressure coefficients for the effect of
parapets on the SPRFV loads are given in section B.6.5.12.2.4.
B.6.5.11.5.2 — Sheathing and Components —Pressure coefficients for the design of sheathing elements
and parapet components are taken from the roof and wall pressure coefficient tables as specified in Section
B.6.5. 12.4.4.
B.6.5.12 — DESIGN WIND FORCES IN ENCLOSED OR PARTIALLY ENCLOSED BUILDINGS
B.6.5.12.1 — General
B.6.5.12.1.1 — Sign Convention — Positive pressures act toward the surface under study and negative
pressures act away from the surface under study.
B.6.5.12.1.2 — Critical Load Condition — The internal and external pressure values will be combined
algebraically to determine the most critical load case.
B.6.5.12.1.3 — Afferent Areas Greater than 65 m2 — Cladding elements and components that have an
afferent area greater than 65 m2 may be designed using SPRFV specifications.
B.6.5.12.2 — Main Wind Force Resisting Systems
B.6.5.12.2.1 — Rigid Buildings of Any Height — The design wind pressures for the SPRFV of buildings
shall be determined by the equation:
= ÿ
p qGC q GC i pi p ( ) (N/m2 ) (B.6.5-15)
Where:
q qz = for windward walls evaluated at a height z above the ground. q qh = for leeward
walls, side walls and roofs, evaluated at height h .
qq =ih for windward walls, side walls, leeward walls and building roofs
closed and for the evaluation of negative internal pressures in partially closed buildings. = for the
evaluation
z of positive internal pressures in partially enclosed buildings, where qq i z is the level of the
highest opening in the building that could affect the positive internal pressure.
For buildings located in regions where fragments can be dragged by the wind, the glass in the lower 20 m
that is not impact resistant or that is not protected with an impact resistant element must be treated as an
opening in the building. building in accordance with section B.6.5.9.3. For the evaluation of positive internal
pressure, qi can be conservatively evaluated at height ( hqq = = gust effect factor from section B.6.5.8
uh ).
G CP = external pressure coefficients from Figs. B.6.5-3 or B.6.5-5.
B-33
GCpi = internal pressure coefficients from Fig. B.6.5-2
q and qi shall be evaluated using the exposure defined in section B.6.5.6.3. Pressures shall be applied
simultaneously on windward and leeward walls and on decks as defined in Fig. B.6.5-3 and B.6.5-5.
B.6.5.12.2.2 — Low Buildings — Alternatively, design wind pressures for SPRFV in low buildings shall be
determined by the equation:
ÿ
( )(ff )
pq=GC GC h pi
ÿ ÿ
ÿ in (N/m2 ) ÿ (B.6.5-16)
Where:
what = pressure times velocity assessed at mean deck height, h using exposure
defined in section B.6.5.6.3
GCpf = external pressure coefficients from Fig. B.6.5-7 GCpi =
internal pressure coefficients from Fig. B.6.5-2
B.6.5.12.2.3 — Flexible Buildings — The design wind pressures for the Main Wind Force Resisting Systems
in flexible buildings shall be determined with the equation:
= C q GC ÿ fpi(pi
p qG ) in (N/m2 ) (B.6.5-17)
where q , qi and (q GC are

) pi defined in section 6.5.12.2.1 and Gf is equal to the gust effect factor
as defined in section B.6.5.8.2.
B.6.5.12.2.4 — Parapets — Design wind pressures that take into account the effect of parapets on the SPRFV
of rigid, low, or flexible buildings with flat, gabled, or hipped roofs shall be determined using the equation :
pq
pp=pn
GC in (N/m) (B.6.5-18)
Where:
pp = combined net pressure on the parapet produced by the combination of the net pressures on the
front and rear surfaces of the parapet. The positive (and negative) signs signify net pressures
acting toward the front of the parapet (and away from the exterior of the parapet).
= pressure by velocity evaluated at the highest part of the parapet
pq GCpn = Coefficient of net combined pressure = +1.5

for windward butt = -1.0 for leeward butt
B.6.5.12.3 — Design Wind Load Cases — The SPRFV of buildings of any height, whose wind loads have been
determined under the specifications of sections B.6.5.12.2.1 and B.6.5.12.2.3 , should be designed taking into account
the load cases defined in fig. B.6.5-6. The eccentricity e for rigid structures will be measured from the geometric center
of the face of the building in each
) eccentricity e for flexible structures will be determined by the following equation and will be
axis e,xye The
( will consider for each main axis ( )

e,e : xy
B-34
2 2
and
+ Q 1.7I
z QQ ( g Re
g RR
Qe ) + ()
and
= (B.6.5-19)
2 2
Q g(RR
1 +1.7I g zQ ) +( )
Where:
eQ
= eccentricity e for rigid structures according to fig. B.6.5-6 = distance
eR between the center of elastic shear and the center of mass for each story zI , gQ , Q , gR and
R are defined according to section B.6.5.8.
The eccentricity e will be positive or negative, whichever produces the more severe loading effect.
EXCEPTION — Buildings one story high with h less than 9.0 m, buildings two stories or less with lightweight frames, and
buildings two stories or less designed with flexible diaphragms may be designed only with load cases 1 and 3 of fig. B.6.5-6.
B.6.5.12.4 — Cladding Elements and Components
B.6.5.12.4.1 — Low Buildings and Buildings with h 18.0 < m — The design wind pressures for cladding
elements and components of low buildings and buildings with h 18.0 ÿ will be determined with the I know
expression:
pq=GC GC
ÿ
h pi
ÿ
p ( )( ) ÿ
ÿ in (N/m2 )
ÿ
(B.6.5-20)
Where:
what
= pressure times velocity evaluated at the average height of the building, h , using exposure
defined in section B.6.5.6.3
( ) GCp = external pressure coefficients specified in figs. B.6.5-8 to B.6.5-13 ( ) GCpi = internal
pressure coefficient from Fig. B.6.5-2
B.6.5.12.4.2 — Buildings with h 18.0 > m — The design wind pressures for cladding elements and components
of buildings with h 18.0 > m, will be determined with the equation:
= ÿ
(B.6.5-21)
pq GC q(GC
)( )piin
p (N/m2 ) Yo
Where:
q qz = for windward walls evaluated at a height z above the ground. q qh = for leeward
walls, side walls and roofs, evaluated at height h .
qq =ih for windward walls, side walls, leeward walls and building roofs
closed and for the evaluation of negative internal pressures in partially closed buildings.
= forz the evaluation of positive internal pressures in partially enclosed buildings, where qq i z is the level of the
highest
opening that could affect the positive internal pressure of the building. For buildings located in regions where the
wind can carry fragments, glass that is not impact resistant or that is not protected with an impact resistant element,
should be treated as an opening in the building in accordance with section B.6.5. .9.3. For the evaluation of the
positive internal pressure, qi can be evaluated at height ( hqq = GCp

() = Yo h ).
external pressure coefficient from Fig. B.6.5-14. ( ) GCpi = internal
pressure coefficient from Fig. B.6.5-2.
B-35
q and qi shall be evaluated using the exposure defined in section B.6.5.6.3.
B.6.5.12.4.3 — Alternative Design Wind Pressures for Cladding Elements and Components in
Buildings with 18.0 m < h < 27 m — As an alternative to the requirements of section B.6.5.12.4.2, the
design of cladding elements and building components with an average height greater than 18.0 and less
than 27 m, the values of figs may be used. B.6.5-8 to B.6.5-
14, provided that the height-width ratio is 1 or less than 1 (except as permitted by Note 6 to fig. B.6.5-14),
and if equation B.6.5-20 is used.
B.6.5.12.4.4 — Parapets — The design wind pressures on cladding elements and parapet components
shall be designed with the equation:
=
(
pq GC GC pi p p
ÿ
) (B.6.5-22)
Where:
= pressure per velocity evaluated at the top of the parapet
pq GCp = external pressure coefficient of figs. B.6.5-8 to B.6.5-14.

GCpi = internal pressure coefficient of fig. B.6.5-2, based on the porosity of the lining of the
parapet.
Two load cases will be considered. Load Case A: consists of applying the positive pressure on the walls of
fig. B.6.5-8A or from fig. B.6.5-14 to the front surface of the parapet while applying the respective negative
edge or corner zone pressure of figs. B.6.5-8 to B.6.5-14 to the posterior surface. Load Case B: consists of
applying the positive pressure on the walls of figs.
B.6.5-8A or fig. B.6.5-14 to the rear surface of the parapet and the negative pressure on the walls of figs.
B.6.5-8A or Fig. B.6.5-14 to the front surface of the parapet. The corner and edge areas will be taken
according to what is shown in figs. B.6.5-8 to B.6.5-14. GCp will be determined for the appropriate canopy
angle and effective wind area from figs. B.6-11 to B.6-17. If internal pressure is present, both load cases
should be evaluated under negative and positive internal pressures.
B.6.5.13 — DESIGN WIND LOADS IN OPEN BUILDINGS WITH SINGLE, DUAL AND GAPED ROOFS AND IN ARTESA
B.6.5.13.1 — General
B.6.5.13.1.1 — Sign Convention — Positive pressures act toward the surface under study and negative
pressures act away from the surface under study.
B.6.5.13.1.2 — Critical Load Condition — The net pressure coefficients CN include contributions from
the upper and lower surfaces. All load cases shown for each roof angle should be investigated.
B.6.5.13.2 — Main Systems of Resistance to Wind Forces — The net design pressure for the SPRFV in roofs
with one, two waters or trough roofs, will be determined by means of the equation:
pq GC
hN= (B.6.5-23)
what = pressure per velocity evaluated at average deck height, h , using Exposure,
defined in Section B.6.5.6.3, that results in the highest wind loads for any site wind direction.
G = gust effect factor from section B.6.5.8.

CN = net pressure coefficient determined from figs. B.6.5-15A to B.6.5-15D.
B-36
For free roofs with an angle ÿ less than or equal to 5o , containing fascia panels, these will be
considered as an inverted parapet. The load contribution to the SPRFV by the fascia will be determined
using section B.6.5.12.2.4 with pq equal to qh .
B.6.5.13.3 — Cladding Elements and Components — The net design pressure for cladding elements and
components of one or two pitched or trough roofs shall be determined with the equation:
pq GC = hN (B.6.5-24)
Where:
what = pressure per velocity evaluated at average deck height, h , using the exposure,
defined in Section B.6.5.6.3, that results in the highest wind loads for any site wind direction.
G = gust effect factor from Section B.6.5.8.

CN = net pressure coefficient determined from figs. B.6.5-16A to B.6.5-16C.
B.6.5.14 — DESIGN WIND LOADS IN FREE WALLS AND SOLID FENCES — The design wind force for free walls and solid
fences will be determined with the equation:
=
F q GC
fs A h in (N) (B.6.5-25)
Where:
what = pressure times velocity evaluated at height h (defined in fig. B.6.5-17), using the exposure, defined in section
B.6.5.6.4.1.
G. = gust effect factor from section B.6.5.8. = net
CF force coefficient of fig. B.6.5-17. = gross area of
Ace the free and solid wall or solid fence, in m2 .
B.6.5.15 — DESIGN WIND LOADS ON OTHER STRUCTURES — The design wind force for other structures will be
determined with the expression:
=
F q GC
ff A z in (N) (B.6.5-26)
Where:
qz = pressure times velocity evaluated at the height z of the centroid of the area Af , using the exposure, defined in
section B.6.5.6.3.
G. = gust effect factor from section B.6.5.8. = force
CF coefficients from Figs. B.6.5-18 to B.6.5-19. = projected area
to sf normal to the wind, except where Cf has been specified for the actual surface, in m2 .
B.6.5.15.1 — Structures and Equipment on Roofs in Buildings with h 18.0 ÿ m — The force in structures and
equipment on roofs, which have Af less than (0.1Bh) , located in buildings with m, will be determined with Eq. B.6-38,
h 18.0 ÿ multiplied by a factor of 1.9. This factor can be reduced
linearly from 1.9 to 1.0 as the value of Af is increased from (0.1Bh) to ( ) Bh .
B.6.6 — METHOD 3 — WIND TUNNEL PROCEDURE

B.6.6.1 — SCOPE —Wind tunnel tests shall be used where required in accordance with Section B.6.5.2. These tests shall be
permitted in lieu of Methods 1 and 2 for any building or structure.
B-37
B.6.6.2 — TEST CONDITIONS —Wind tunnel tests using fluids other than air to determine design wind loads for any
building or other structure shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of this section. The tests to determine
the variations and the average of the forces and pressures must meet the following conditions:
B.6.6.2.1 — The boundary layer for the natural atmosphere has been modeled taking into account the variation
of wind speed with height.
B.6.6.2.2 — The relevant macro- and micro-longitude scales of the longitudinal component of atmospheric
turbulence are modeled at approximately the same scale that has been used to model the building or structure.
B.6.6.2.3 — The modeled building or other structure and the surrounding structures and topography are
geometrically similar to their full-scale counterparts, except that, for low-rise buildings meeting the conditions of
Section B.6.5.1, the Tests shall be allowed for scaled buildings in a single exposure category as defined in
Section B.6.5.6.3.
B.6.6.2.4 — The projected area of the modeled building or other structure and its surroundings is less than 8% of
the test cross-sectional area unless corrected for blocking.
B.6.6.2.5 — The longitudinal pressure gradient in the test section of the wind tunnel must be considered.
B.6.6.2.6 — Reynolds number effects on pressures and forces are minimized.
B.6.6.2.7 — The response characteristics of the wind tunnel instrumentation are consistent with the required
measurements.
B.6.6.3 — DYNAMIC RESPONSE —Tests for the purpose of determining the dynamic response of the building or other
structure shall be in accordance with Section B.6.6.2. The structural model and the respective analysis must take into
account the distribution of mass, stiffness and damping.
B.6.6.4 — LIMITATIONS
B.6.6.4.1 — Limitations on wind speeds —Variation of basic wind speeds with direction shall not be permitted
unless the analysis for wind speeds is in accordance with the requirements of section B.6.5.4.2.
B-38
Wind threat zones

Figure B.6.4-1 basic wind speed
-80 -79 -78 -77 -76 -75 -74 -73 -72 -71 -70 -69 -68 -67 -66
13 13
-82
5 14
12 SAINT ANDRES AND 3 12
PROVIDENCE
RIOHACHA
SANTA MARTA
Region speed of
eleven
BARRANQUILLA 2 Wind 17 eleven
5
CARTAGENA m/s (60 km/h) 22 m/
4 VALLEDUPAR
1 s (80 km/h) 28 m/s
10 10
2 (100 km/h) 33 m/s (120
SINCELEJO
3 km/h) 36 m/s (130 km/
9 45 h) 9
HUNTING
2 1
3
8 CUCUTA
8
BUCARAMANGA ARAUCA
7 7
1 4
MEDELLIN 3
6 1
PUERTO CARRENO 6
QUIBDO 2
TUNJA
YOPAL
MANIZALES
5 PEREIRA
5
ARMENIA 3 BOGOTA
IBAGUE
VILLAVICENCE
4 INIRIDA PORT
4
2 4
CALI
3
3 3 NEIVA 3
POPAYAN
SAN JOSE OF GUAVIARE
2 1 2
FLORENCE
3 GRASS
See Note MY YOU
snot
1 1
0 0
-1 -1
-2 -2
-3 -3
-4 LETICIA
-4
-5 -5
-80 -79 -78 -77 -76 -75 -74 -73 -72 -71 -70 -69 -68 -67 -66
Note: these areas have not been studied and it is recommended to be conservative when evaluating the wind forces that
may occur in them. Until reliable data is available, they will be calculated based on a speed of 28 m/s (100 km/h).
B-39
Main Wind Force Resistance System (SPRFV) – Method 1 h 18.0 ÿ m

Figure B.6.4-2 Design Wind Pressures
Walls and Covers
Closed Buildings
Grades:
1. Pressures shown apply to vertical and horizontal projections for exposure category B, at height h 10.0 = m,
I 1.0 = and K 1.0 .=To adjust for other conditions, Equation B.6.4-1 should be used. zt
2. The load patterns shown must be applied to each corner of the building and each one will be taken as the reference corner (See
Figure B 6.5-7).
3. For the design of the longitudinal SPRFV use ÿ = 0 , and locate the border zone EF , GH half the length of the building.
4. Load cases 1 and 2 must be verified for 25 45 <ÿÿ . The load case 2 to 25 occurs only for interpolations between 25 and
30 .
5. The positive and negative signs mean pressures and suctions acting on the surfaces respectively.
6. Linear interpolation is allowed for slopes other than those shown.
7. The total horizontal load will not be less than that determined assuming p 0 = in zones
B and D.
yes
8. Pressure zones represent the following:

Horizontal Pressure Zones – Sum of the net pressures (internal and external) to windward and leeward, in the vertical projection of:
A – End zone of the wall C – Inner area of the wall
B – Final zone of the roof D – Inner area of the roof
Vertical Pressure Zones – Sum of the net pressures (internal and external), in the horizontal projection of:
E – Windward deck end zone G – Inner deck area to windward
F – End zone of deck to leeward H – Inner leeward deck area
9. When zones E or G are located at the eave on the leeward side of the building, EOH and GOH should be used for the pressure at the horizontal
projection of the eave. The pressure from the eaves on the lee side and on the sides will be the basic pressure of the zone.
10. Notation:
a : 10% of the smallest horizontal dimension or 0.4h , whichever is less. It must not be less than 4% of the shortest horizontal dimension or 0.9m.
h : average height of the roof in meters. When ÿ ÿ 10 ÿ : Roof , the height to the eave will be used.
inclination angle, in degrees.
B-40
Main Wind Force Resisting System – Method 1 Figure B.6.4-2 (Continued) h 18.0 ÿ m
Design Wind Pressures
Walls and Covers
closed buildings
Simplified Procedure: Basic Wind Pressure, ps10 (kN/m2 )

(Exposure B at height h 10.0 = m, K 1.0 zt = , with I 1.0 = )
Speed Angle of Zones

basic of Roof slope Case
of
Burden
Horizontal Pressures Vertical Pressures eaves
Wind m/s (degrees)
(km/h) TO B. C. D. AND F G. h EOH GOH
0 to 5 1 0.11 -0.05 0.07 -0.03 -0.13 -0.07 -0.09 -0.06 -0.18 -0.14
10 1 0.12 -0.05 0.08 -0.03 -0.13 -0.08 -0.09 -0.06 -0.18 -0.14
fifteen 1 0.13 -0.04 0.09 -0.02 -0.13 -0.08 -0.09 -0.06 -0.18 -0.14
17
twenty 1 0.15 -0.04 0.10 -0.02 -0.13 -0.09 -0.09 -0.07 -0.18 -0.14
1 0.13 0.02 0.10 0.02 -0.06 -0.08 -0.04 -0.06 -0.11 -0.09
25
(60) 2 ---- ---- ---- ---- -0.02 -0.04 -0.01 -0.03 ---- ----
1 0.12 0.08 0.09 0.06 0.01 -0.07 0.00 -0.06 -0.04 -0.05
30 to 45
2 0.12 0.08 0.09 0.06 0.05 -0.04 0.04 -0.03 -0.04 -0.05
0 to 5 1 0.19 -0.10 0.12 -0.06 -0.23 -0.13 -0.16 -0.10 -0.32 -0.25
10 1 0.21 -0.09 0.14 -0.05 -0.23 -0.14 -0.16 -0.11 -0.32 -0.25
fifteen 1 0.24 -0.08 0.16 -0.04 -0.23 -0.15 -0.16 -0.11 -0.32 -0.25
22
twenty 1 0.26 -0.07 0.17 -0.04 -0.23 -0.16 -0.16 -0.12 -0.32 -0.25
1 0.24 0.04 0.17 0.04 -0.10 -0.14 -0.08 -0.11 -0.19 -0.17
25
(80) 2 ---- --- --- --- -0.04 -0.08 -0.01 -0.05 --- ---
30 to 45 1 0.21 0.14 0.17 0.11 0.02 -0.13 0.00 -0.11 -0.07 -0.09
2 0.21 0.14 0.17 0.11 0.08 -0.06 0.07 -0.05 -0.07 -0.09
0 to 5 1 0.29 -0.15 0.19 -0.09 -0.35 -0.20 -0.25 -0.16 -0.49 -0.39
10 1 0.33 -0.14 0.22 -0.08 -0.35 -0.21 -0.25 -0.17 -0.49 -0.39
1 0.37 -0.12 0.25 -0.07 -0.35 -0.23 -0.25 -0.18 -0.49 -0.39
28
fifteen
twenty 1 0.41 -0.11 0.27 -0.06 -0.35 -0.25 -0.25 -0.19 -0.49 -0.39
1 0.37 0.06 0.27 0.06 -0.16 -0.22 -0.12 -0.18 -0.30 -0.26
(100) 25
2 ---- ---- ---- ---- -0.06 -0.12 -0.02 -0.08 ---- ---
1 0.33 0.23 0.26 0.18 0.03 -0.20 0.01 -0.17 -0.12 -0.13
30 to 45
2 0.33 0.23 0.26 0.18 0.13 -0.10 0.11 -0.07 -0.12 -0.13
0 to 5 1 0.42 -0.22 0.28 -0.13 -0.51 -0.29 -0.35 -0.22 -0.71 -0.56
10 1 0.48 -0.20 0.32 -0.11 -0.51 -0.31 -0.35 -0.24 -0.71 -0.56
fifteen 1 0.53 -0.18 0.35 -0.10 -0.51 -0.33 -0.35 -0.25 -0.71 -0.56
33
twenty 1 0.59 -0.15 0.39 -0.08 -0.51 -0.35 -0.35 -0.27 -0.71 -0.56
1 0.53 0.08 0.38 0.09 -0.24 -0.32 -0.17 -0.26 -0.44 -0.37
25
(120) 2 --- --- --- --- -0.09 -0.17 -0.03 -0.11 --- ---
1 0.48 0.32 0.38 0.26 0.04 -0.29 0.01 -0.25 -0.17 -0.19
30 to 45
2 0.48 0.32 0.38 0.26 0.18 -0.14 0.16 -0.10 -0.17 -0.19
0 to 5 1 0.50 -0.26 0.33 -0.15 -0.60 -0.34 -0.41 -0.26 -0.83 -0.65
10 1 0.56 -0.23 0.37 -0.13 -0.60 -0.36 -0.41 -0.28 -0.83 -0.65
fifteen 1 0.62 -0.21 0.41 -0.12 -0.60 -0.39 -0.41 -0.30 -0.83 -0.65
36
twenty 1 0.69 -0.18 0.46 -0.10 -0.60 -0.41 -0.41 -0.32 -0.83 -0.65
1 0.62 0.10 0.45 0.10 -0.28 -0.38 -0.20 -0.30 -0.51 -0.44
25
(130) 2 -- -- -- -- -0.10 -0.20 -0.03 -0.13 -- --
1 0.56 0.38 0.44 0.30 0.04 -0.34 0.01 -0.29 -0.19 -0.22
30 to 45
2 0.56 0.38 0.44 0.30 0.22 -0.17 0.19 -0.12 -0.19 -0.22
B-41
Main Wind Force Resistance System – Method 1 h 18.0 ÿ m
Figure B.6.4-2 (Continued) Design Wind Pressures

Walls and Covers
closed buildings
Adjustment Factor for

Building Height and Exposure, ÿ
Average height of Exposure

Building (m) B. C. D.
4.5 1.00 1.21 1.47

6.0 1.00 1.29 1.55
7.5 1.00 1.35 1.61
9.0 1.00 1.40 1.66
10.5 1.05 1.45 1.70
12.0 1.09 1.49 1.74
13.5 1.12 1.53 1.78
15.0 1.16 1.56 1.81
16.5 1.19 1.59 1.84
18.0 1.22 1.62 1.87
B-42
Components and Coatings – Method 1 h 18.0 ÿ m

Figure B.6.4-3 Design Wind Pressures
Walls and Covers
Closed Buildings
Flat roof 27 <ÿÿ )

Four Sided Roof ( 7
Gabled Roof ( ÿ ÿ 7 ) Gabled Roof ( 7 45 <ÿÿ )
Interior Zones End Zones Corner Zones

Roofs – Zone 1 Roofs – Zone 2 Roofs – Zone 3
Walls – Zone 4 Walls – Zone 5
Notes:
1. The pressures shown are applied in a direction normal to the surface, for exposure category B, at a height, h 10.0 = m,
I 1.0 = y K 1.0 To =adjust to other conditions, Equation B.6.4.2 must be used.
zt
2. The positive and negative signs represent pressure and suction on the surfaces respectively.
3. For hipped roofs with ÿ ÿ 25 4. For values of , in zone 3 it should be treated as Zone 2.
Effective Wind Areas between the data, it is allowed to interpolate or use the value associated with the Effective Wind Area
minor.
5.- Notation:
a : 10% of the smallest horizontal dimension or 0.4h , whichever is less. It must not be less than 4% of the shortest horizontal dimension or 0.9m.
h : average height of the roof in meters. When ÿ ÿ 10 ÿ : Roof , the height to the eave will be used.
inclination angle, in degrees.
B-43

Figure B.6.4 -3 (Continued) Net Design Wind Pressures Walls and Covers
closed buildings
Net Design Wind Pressure, pnet10 (kN/m2 )

Area of
Basic Wind Speed V m/s (km/h)
Zone Wind
Effective (m2 ) 17 (60) 22 (80) 28 (100) 33 (120) 36 (130)
1 1 0.05 -0.12 0.09 -0.21 0.14 -0.33 0.20 -0.48 0.23 -0.56
1 2 0.05 -0.12 0.08 -0.21 0.13 -0.32 0.18 -0.47 0.22 -0.55
1 5 0.04 -0.11 0.07 -020 0.12 -0.30 0.17 -0.45 0.19 -0.53
1 10 0.04 -0.11 0.07 -0.19 0.11 -0.30 0.15 -0.44 0.18 -0.51
2 1 0.05 -0.20 0.09 -0.36 0.14 -0.56 0.20 -0.80 0.23 -0.94
2 2 0.05 -0.18 0.08 -0.32 0.13 -0.50 0.18 -0.72 0.22 -0.84
degrees
Cover
with
7
ÿ
<
0
2 5 0.04 -0.15 0.07 -0.27 0.12 -0.42 0.17 -0.60 0.19 -0.71
2 10 0.04 -0.13 0.07 -0.23 0.11 -0.36 0.15 -0.52 0.18 -0.61
3 1 0.05 -0.30 0.09 -0.54 0.14 -0.84 0.20 -1.21 0.23 -1.42
3 2 0.05 -0.25 0.08 -0.45 0.13 -0.70 0.18 -1.00 0.22 -1.18
3 5 0.04 -0.18 0.07 -0.32 0.12 -0.50 0.17 -0.73 0.19 -0.85
3 10 0.04 -0.13 0.07 -0.23 0.11 -0.36 0.15 -0.52 0.18 -0.61
1 1 0.07 -0.11 0.12 -0.19 0.19 -0.30 0.28 -0.44 0.32 -0.51
1 2 0.06 -0.11 .011 -0.19 0.17 -0.30 0.25 -0.43 0.29 -0.50
1 5 0.06 -0.10 0.10 -0.18 0.15 -0.28 0.22 -0.41 0.26 -0.48
1 10 0.05 -0.10 0.09 -0.18 0.14 -0.28 0.20 -0.40 0.23 -0.47
2 1 0.07 -0.19 0.12 -0.34 0.19 -0.53 0.28 -0.76 0.32 -0.89
2 2 0.06 -0.17 0.11 -0.31 0.17 -0.49 0.25 -0.70 0.29 -0.82
degrees
with
roof
27
ÿ
<
7 2 5 0.06 -0.16 0.10 -0.28 0.15 -0.43 0.22 -0.62 0.26 -0.73
2 10 0.05 -0.14 0.09 -0.25 0.14 -0.39 0.20 -0.56 0.23 -0.66
3 1 0.07 -0.28 0.12 -0.50 0.19 -0.78 0.28 -1.13 0.32 -1.32
3 2 0.06 -0.26 0.11 -0.47 0.17 -0.73 0.25 -1.05 0.29 -1.24
3 5 0.06 -0.24 0.10 -0.43 0.15 -0.67 0.22 -0.96 0.26 -1.12
3 10 0.05 -0.22 0.09 -0.39 0.14 -0.61 0.20 -0.88 0.23 -1.04
1 1 0.11 -0.12 0.19 -0.21 0.30 -0.33 0.44 -0.48 0.51 -0.56
1 2 0.11 -0.11 0.19 -0.20 0.30 -0.31 0.43 -0.45 0.50 -0.53
1 5 0.10 -0.11 0.18 -0.19 0.28 -0.29 0.41 -0.42 0.48 -0.50
1 10 0.10 -0.10 0.18 -0.18 0.28 -0.28 0.40 -0.40 0.47 -0.47
2 1 0.11 -0.14 0.19 -0.25 0.30 -0.39 0.44 -0.56 0.51 -0.66
2 2 0.11 -0.13 0.19 -0.24 0.30 -0.37 0.43 -0.53 0.50 -0.63
degrees
Roof
with
45
27
ÿ
<
2 5 0.10 -0.13 0.18 -0.22 0.28 -0.35 0.41 -0.50 0.48 -0.59
2 10 0.10 -0.12 0.18 -0.21 0.28 -0.33 0.40 -0.48 0.47 -0.56
3 1 0.11 -0.14 0.19 -0.25 0.30 -0.39 0.44 -0.56 0.51 -0.66
3 2 0.11 -0.13 0.19 -0.24 0.30 -0.37 0.43 -0.53 0.50 -0.63
3 5 0.10 -0.13 0.18 -0.22 0.28 -0.35 0.41 -0.50 0.48 -0.59
Wall
3 10 0.10 -0.12 0.18 -0.21 0.28 -0.33 0.40 -0.48 0.47 -0.56
4 1 0.12 -0.13 0.21 -0.23 0.33 -0.36 0.48 -0.52 0.56 -0.61
4 2 0.11 -0.12 0.20 -0.22 0.32 -0.35 0.46 -0.50 0.54 -0.58
4 5 0.11 -0.12 0.19 -0.21 0.30 -0.32 0.43 -0.47 0.50 -0.55
4 10 0.10 -0.11 0.18 -0.20 0.28 -0.31 0.41 -0.45 0.48 -0.53
B-44

Figure B.6.4 -3 (Continued) Net Design Wind Pressures
Walls and Covers
closed buildings
Net Design Pressure, pnet10 (kN/m2 )
Area of
Wind Basic Wind Speed V m/s (km/h)
Zone
effective
(m2 ) 17 (60) 22 (80) 28 (100) 33 (120) 36 (130)
4 fifty 0.09 -0.10 0.16 -0.18 0.25 -0.28 0.36 -0.40 0.42 -0.47
5 1 0.12 -0.16 0.21 -0.28 0.33 -0.45 0.48 -0.64 0.56 -0.75
5 2 0.11 -0.15 0.20 -0.27 0.32 -0.41 0.46 -0.60 0.54 -0.70
Wall
5 5 0.11 -0.14 0.19 -0.24 0.30 -0.38 0.43 -0.54 0.50 -0.64
5 10 0.10 -0.12 0.18 -0.22 0.28 -0.35 0.41 -0.50 0.48 -0.58
5 fifty 0.09 -0.10 0.16 -0.18 0.25 -0.28 0.36 -0.40 0.42 -0.47
B-45
Figure B.6.4 -3 (Continued) Net Design Wind Pressures

Walls and Covers
closed buildings
Net Eave Design Pressure, pnet10 (kN/m2 )

(Exposure B at a height h 10.0 = m, with I 1.0 = )
Area of
Wind Basic Wind Speed V (km/h)
Zone
effective 17 22 28 33 36
(m2 ) (60) (80) (100) (120) (130)
2 1 -0.17 -0.31 -0.48 -0.69 -0.81
2 2 -017 -0.30 -0.47 -0.68 -0.79
degrees
2 5 -017 -0.29 -0.46 -0.66 -0.77
2 10 -0.16 -0.29 -0.45 -0.65 -0.76
3 1 -0.28 -0.51 -0.79 -1.14 -1.33

Covered
with
7
ÿ
<
0
3 2 -0.22 -0.40 -0.62 -0.89 -1.04
3 5 -0.14 -0.25 -0.39 -0.57 -0.67
3 10 -0.08 -0.15 -0.23 -0.33 -0.39
2 1 -0.22 -0.40 -0.62 -0.89 -1.05
2 2 -0.22 .0.40 -0.62 -0.89 -1.05
degrees
2 5 -0.22 -0.40 -0.62 -0.89 -1.05
2 10 -0.22 -0.40 -0.62 -0.89 -1.05
3 1 -0.38 -0.67 -1.04 -1.50 -1.76

Covered
with
27
ÿ
<
7
3 2 -034 -0.60 -0.94 -1.35 -1.59
3 5 -0.29 -0.52 -0.81 -1.16 -1.36
3 10 -0.25 -0.45 -0.70 -1.02 -1.19
2 1 -0.20 -0.36 -0.56 -0.81 -0.95
2 2 -0.20 -0.35 -0.55 -0.79 -0.93
2 5 -0.19 -0.34 -0.52 -0.76 -0.89

degrees
2 10 -0.18 -0.32 -0.51 -0.73 -0.86
3 1 -0.20 -0.36 -0.56 -0.81 -0.95

Covered
with
45
27
ÿ
<
3 2 -020 -0.35 -0.55 -0.79 -0.93
3 5 -0.19 -0.34 -0.52 -0.76 -0.89

3
10 -0.18 -0.32 -0.51 -0.73 -0.86
Adjustment Factor for Building Height and Exposure, ÿ
Average height of Exposure

Building (m) B. C. D.
4.5 1.00 1.21 1.47
6.0 1.00 1.29 1.55
7.5 1.00 1.35 1.61
9.0 1.00 1.40 1.66
10.5 1.05 1.45 1.70
12.0 1.09 1.49 1.74
13.5 1.12 1.53 1.78
15.0 1.16 1.56 1.81
16.5 1.19 1.59 1.84
18.0 1.22 1.62 1.87
B-46
Topographic Factor Kzt - Method 2

Figure B.6.5-1
Topographic Multiplier for Exposure C
Multiplier
K1 multiplier K3 multiplier
K2
H Lh Symmetrical
hxL All the hzL Symmetrical
Lom escarpment escarpment Knoll escarpment
Axial Hill Axial Hill
to 2-D 2-D 2-D others 2-D 2-D
3-D 3-D
cases
0.20 0.29 0.17 0.21 0.00 1.00 1.00 0.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
0.25 0.36 0.21 0.26 0.50 0.88 0.67 0.10 0.74 0.78 0.67
0.30 0.43 0.26 0.32 1.00 0.75 0.33 0.20 0.55 0.61 0.45
0.35 0.51 0.30 0.37 1.50 0.63 0.00 0.30 0.41 0.47 0.30
0.40 0.58 0.34 0.42 2.00 0.50 0.00 0.40 0.30 0.37 0.20
0.45 0.65 0.38 0.47 2.50 0.38 0.00 0.50 0.22 0.29 0.14
0.50 0.72 0.43 0.53 3.00 0.25 0.00 0.60 0.17 0.22 0.09
3.50 0.13 0.00 0.70 0.12 0.17 0.06
4.00 0.00 0.00 0.80 0.09 0.14 0.04
0.90 0.07 0.11 0.03
1.00 0.05 0.08 0.02
1.50 0.01 0.02 0.00
2.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Grades:
1. For values of H Lh , h x L , and h z L 2. For HL , other than those indicated, linear interpolation is permitted.
0.5 for the evaluation =
h > ,ofassume
K1 , and
HLsubstitute Lh for
h 2H
0.5 3. Multipliers for the evaluation of K2 , and K3
are
based on the assumption that the wind is approaching the hill or escarpment from the direction of steepest slope.
4. Notation: H :
Height of the hill or escarpment referred to the terrain located in windward, in m. distance
Lh : to windward, from the crest to the point where the elevation difference of the terrain is half the MMMM height of the hill or escarpment, in m. factor
that takes into account topographic
K1 : features and the effect of maximum speed increase. factor that accounts for the reduction in speed increase with distance
K2 : from the crest, to windward or leeward. factor that accounts for the reduction in speed increase with height above local terrain. distance (windward or
K3 : leeward) from the crest to the building site in m. height above local ground level, in m. horizontal attenuation factor.
x:
z:
ÿ:
ÿ: height attenuation factor
B-47
Topographic Factor Kzt - Method 2

Figure B.6.5-1 (Continued)
equations:
=+ 2
K(1K)
123 KK) zt
K1 is obtained from the table below
= ÿ x ÿ
k
2
ÿ
ÿ1ÿ ÿ
ÿÿLh
K e 3= ÿÿ z/Lh
Parameters for increasing Speed over Hills and Escarpments
K / (H / L ) 1 h ÿ
Exposure ÿ
to Toward
Hill Shape
windward leeward
B. C. D. or from or from
the crest the crest
Two-dimensional (2D) hills or valleys with 1.30 1.45 1.55 3 1.5 1.5
Negative H in K1 /(H/Lh)
Two-Dimensional (2D) Scarps 0.75 0.85 0.95 2.5 1.5 4
axialsymmetric three-dimensional hill 0.95 1.05 1.15 4 1.5 1.5
B-48
Main Wind Force Resisting System, Components and Claddings-Method 2 Figure B.6.5-2 all heights
Internal pressure coefficients, GCpi Walls and Covers

Open and Totally or Partially Closed Buildings
Enclosure Classification GCpi
open buildings 0.00
Partially Enclosed Buildings

0.55
-0.55
0.18
closed buildings
-0.18
Notes:
1. The positive and negative signs mean pressures and suctions acting on the internal surfaces, respectively. z q and hq as
2. GCpi values should be used with 3. Two cases specified in B.6.5.12.
should be considered in determining critical load requirements for the appropriate condition: (i) A positive GCpi value applied
to all internal surfaces. (ii) A negative value of GCpi applied on all internal
surfaces
B-49
Wind Force Resisting Main System – Method 2 all heights

Figure B.6.5-3 External pressure coefficients, Cp Walls and Covers
Totally or Partially Enclosed Buildings
B-50
Wind Force Resisting Main System – Method 2 all heights

Figure B.6.5-3 (Continued)
External pressure coefficients, Cp
Walls and Covers
Totally or Partially Enclosed Buildings
Pressure Coefficients in Walls, Cp

Wear
Surface L/B cp
with
windward wall all values 0.8 q2

0-1 -0.5
leeward wall
2 -0.3 hq
>4 -0.2
side walls
all values -0.7 what
Roof Pressure Coefficients, Cp , for use with hq

the
of
Windward Leeward
Wind
Address
Angle ÿ in degrees Angle ÿ in degrees
hL 10 fifteen twenty 25 30 35 45 >60# 10 fifteen >20
-0.70 -0.50 -0.30 -0.20 -0.20 0.0* 0.01

<0.25 0.40 -0.30 -0.50 -0.60
-0.18 0.0* 0.20 0.30 -0.30 0.40 ÿ
-0.90 -0.70 -0.40 -0.30 -0.20 -0.20 0.0* 0.01

ÿ>10º
for
0.50 -0.50 -0.50 -0.60
-0.18 -0.18 0.0* 0.20 0.20 0.30 0.40 ÿ
normal
ridge
to
-1.3** -1.00 -0.70 -0.50 -0.30 -0.20 0.0* 0.01 -0.70 -0.60 -0.60
>1.0
-0.18 -0.18 -0.18 0.0* 0.20 0.20 0.30 ÿ -0.70 -0.60 -0.60
Horizontal distance from the windward *Value given for interpolation purposes
cp
edge
0 ah/2 -0.9, -0.18
<0.5
h/2 ah -0.9, -0.18
**Value that can be reduced linearly with the area over
it's been 2h -0.5, -0.18
which it is applicable as follows:
ÿ<10º
for
all
> 2h -0.3, -0.18
Area (m2) ) Reduction Factor
0 ah/2 -1.3**, -0.18
Normal
ridge
for
to
parallel
ridge
and
the
to
>1.0 <10 1
20 0.9
>h/2 -0.7, -0.18 0.8
>100
Notes:
1. The positive and negative signs mean pressures and suctions acting on the surfaces, respectively.
,
2. Linear interpolation is allowed for values of LB h L and ÿ other than those indicated. The interpolation will only be carried out between values of the M same sign.
Where no values of the same sign are given, 0.0 will be taken for interpolation purposes.
3. Where two values of Cp appear , it indicates that the windward roof slope is subject to pressure or suction and the roof structure
should be designed for both conditions. In this case for intermediate values of h L ,
interpolation can only be performed between values of Cp that
have the same sign.
4. For roofs with a single slope, their total surface will be windward or leeward.
5. For flexible buildings, an appropriate Gf value should be used , as indicated in section B.6.5.8.
6. For domes (vaulted surfaces) figure B.6.5-4 should be used and for arched roofs figure B.6.5-5 should be used. 7.
Notation:
B : horizontal dimension of the building, in m, measured in the direction normal to the wind.
L : horizontal dimension of the building, in m, measured parallel to the wind.
h : average height of the roof in m, except that for ÿ ÿ 10 z : height , the eave height will be used.
above ground, in m.
G : factor of the gust effect. qz ,
qh : Wind speed pressure, in N/m2 , evaluated at the respective height.

ÿ : angle of the roof plane with respect to the horizontal, in degrees.
8. For mansard roofs, the upper horizontal surface and the inclined surface to leeward will be considered for purposes of using the table, as
leeward surface.
9. With the exception of the main system (SPRFV) on the roof, which consists of moment-resistant frames, the toral horizontal shear must not be less than the
determined by neglecting the wind forces on the roof surfaces.
# For roofs with angle ÿ ÿ 80 use C 0.8 p=
B-51
Wind Force Resisting Main System – Method 2 Figure B.6.5-4 all heights
External pressure coefficients, Cp Domes

(vaulted roofs)
Structures and Buildings Totally or Partially Enclosed
Grades:
1. Two load cases should be considered: Case A:
Values of Cp between A and B and between B and C should be determined by linear interpolation along the arcs of the dome parallel to the MM MM direction of the
wind.
Case B:
The value of Cp should be the constant value of A for ÿ ÿ 25 degrees, and it will be determined by linear interpolation from 25 degrees MM to B and from B to
c.
where h fD + is the height of the key of the dome.
2. The values of Cp are those that should be used with
( )D.h+f
what
3. The positive and negative signs mean pressures or suctions acting on the surfaces, respectively. 4.
The Cp value is constant on the surface of the dome for the arcs of the circles perpendicular to the wind direction; for example, the arc M passing through
through BBB and all arcs parallel to BBB.
5. For intermediate values of h D should be linearly interpolated.
D.
6. ÿ = 0 degrees at the start of the dome, ÿ = 90 degrees at the top point of the center of the dome (key); f will be measured from the boot up to the M key
7. The total horizontal shear must not be less than that calculated by neglecting the wind forces on the covered surface.
8. For values f D 0.05 < , use Figure B.6.5-3.
B-52
Main Wind Force Resisting System–Components and Claddings Method 2 Figure B.6.5-5 all heights
External pressure coefficients, Cp Arched Roofs

Totally and Partially Enclosed Buildings and Structures
cp
Conditions Relationship
room to room to
Height/Span, r Mid Center
Windward Leeward
0 < r < 0.2 -0.9 -0.7 -r -0.5
Roof on elevated structure
0.2 ÿ r< 0.3* 1.5r -0.3 -0.7 -r -0.5
0.3 ÿ r< 0.6 2.75r-0.7 -0.7 -r -0.5
Deck with start from ground

0<rÿ0.6 1.4r -0.7 -r -0.5
level
*When the height to length ratio is 0.2 r 0.3 ÿ ÿ windward , the alternative coefficients given by 6r 2.1 ÿ may also be used for fourth to
Notes:
1. Listed values will be used to determine average loads on main systems resisting wind forces.
2. The positive and negative signs indicate pressures and suctions acting on the surfaces, respectively.
3. For wind parallel to the ridge, use the pressure coefficients in Figure B.6.5-3 with wind parallel to the M
m summit.
4. For components and linings: (1) At the perimeter of the roof, use the external pressure coefficients given in figures B.6.5-
8 M with the angle ÿ measured from the base of the slope and (2) for the remaining deck areas, use the external pressure coefficients of M in this table multiplied by 0.87.
B-53
Main wind force resistant system – Method 2 all heights
Figure B.6.5-6 Design Wind Load Cases
Case 1. The totality of the design wind pressure acting on the projected area perpendicular to each principal axis of the structure,
considered separately for each main axis.
Case 2. Three quarters of the design wind pressure acting on the projected area perpendicular to each principal axis of the
structure, in conjunction with a torsional moment as shown and considered separately for each principal axis.
Case 3. Wind load as defined in case 1, but considering that it acts simultaneously with 75% of the specified value.
Case 4. Wind load as defined in case 2, but considering that it acts simultaneously with 75% of the specified value.
Grades:
1. The design wind pressures for the windward and leeward sides shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of B.6.5.12.2.1 and
B.6.5.12.2.3, applicable to buildings of all heights.
2. Diagrams show plan views of the building.
3. Notation:
Pwx , Pwy : Design wind pressure for the windward side acting on the principal x axis and the principal y axis , respectively
PLX , PLY ; Design wind pressure for the lee side acting on the principal x- axis and the principal y- axis , respectively
( xy
ee,e ) : Eccentricity for the principal x axis , and the principal y axis , respectively
MT : Torsional moment per unit height acting around a vertical axis of the building.
B-54
Main System Resisting Wind Forces - Method 2 Figure B.6.5-7 h 18.0 ÿ m
External pressure coefficients, GCpf Low-rise walls and

Roofs
Fully or partially enclosed buildings
B-55
Wind Force Resisting Main System - Method 2 Figure B.6.5-7 h 18.0 ÿ m
(Continued) External pressure coefficients, GCpf low height walls and

covers
Deck building surface

angle ÿ
1 2 3 4 5 6 1E 2E 3E 4E
(degrees)
0-5 0.40 -0.69 -0.37 -0.29 -0.45 -0.45 0.61 -1.07 -0.53 -0.43
20 0.53 -0.69 -0.48 -0.43 -0.45 -0.45 0.80 -1.07 -0.69 -0.64 0.56 0.27 -0.53 -0.48
30-45 0.21 -0.43 -0.37 -0.45 -0.45 0.69
90 0.56 0.56 -0.37 -0.37 -0.45 -0.45 0.69 0.69 -0.48 -0.48
Grades:
1. Positive and negative signs represent pressures and suctions acting on the surfaces.
2. For values of ÿ other than those shown, linear interpolation is allowed.
3. The building should be designed for all wind directions using the 8 load patterns shown. The charging patterns are
applied to each corner of the building called the reference corner.
4. Combinations of external and internal pressures (see figure B.6.5-2) shall be evaluated as required to obtain the most suitable conditions.
severe load.
5. For the torsional load cases shown below, the pressures in the zones designated with "T" (1T, 2T, 3T,4T) will be 25% of the
total design wind pressures (zones 1, 2, 3, 4).
Exception: In single-story buildings with h less than 9.0 m, framed buildings with two or fewer levels with
Light construction and buildings with two stories or less designed with flexible diaphragms are not required to be designed for the
torsional load cases.
Torsional loads shall be applied to the eight basic load patterns using the figures below, applied
to each reference corner.
6. Except for moment-resistant frames, the total horizontal shear shall not be less than that determined disregarding the forces
of wind on the roof surface.
7. For the design of the main system (SPRFV) lateral resistance must be provided in the direction parallel to the ridge or for the
flat M roofs, use ÿ = 0 and locate the boundary of zones 2 and 3 at half the length of the building.
8. The roof pressure coefficient GCpf , when it is negative in Zone 2 or 2E, will be applied in Zone 2/2E at a distance from the edge of
the roof equal to 0.5 times the horizontal dimension of the building parallel to the direction of the SPRFV being designed or 2.5 times the height
from the eaves,
h e ,on the windward wall, whichever is smaller; the remainder of Zone 2/2E that extends to the ridge will use the coefficient of
GCpf pressure for Zone 3/3E.

9. Notation:
a : 10% of the smallest horizontal dimension or 0.4h , whichever is less, but not less than 4% of the lesser horizontal dimension or 1.0 m.
h : Average height of the roof, in meters, except that for ÿ ÿ 10 ÿ : Angle of the , the eave height will be used.
roof with respect to the horizontal, in degrees.
CASES OF TORSIONAL LOAD
B-56
Figure B.6.5-8A External pressure coefficients, GCp walls

Grades:
1. Lar ordinates GCp , are the values to be used with hq .

2. The abscissas represent the effective areas exposed to the wind, in square meters.
3. The positive and negative signs mean pressures and suctions acting on the considered surfaces.
4. Each component will be designed for maximum pressures and suctions.
5. The GCp values for walls will be reduced by 10% when the angle ÿ ÿ 10 .
6. Notation:
a : 10% of the horizontal dimension or 0.4h , whichever is less, but not less than 4% of the lesser horizontal dimension or 1.0 m.
h : Average height of the roof, in meters, except that for ÿ ÿ 10 ÿ : Angle of the , the eave height will be used.
roof measured from the horizontal, in degrees
B-57
Figure B.6.5-8B External pressure coefficients GCp Gabled roofs

Totally or Partially Enclosed Buildings ÿÿ7
Grades:
1. The GCp ordinates are the values to be used with qh .

2. The abscissas represent the effective areas exposed to the wind, square meters.
4. Each component will be designed for the maximum pressures and suctions.
5. If there is a parapet with a height equal to or greater than 1.0 m around the roof with ÿ ÿ 7 ,
negative GCp values in Zone 3
shall be equal to those of Zone 2 and the positive GCp values in Zone 2 and 4 shall be equal to those given for walls
in Zones 4 and 5 respectively in Figure B.6.5-8A.
. 6. GCp values for roof eaves include pressure contributions from top and bottom surfaces.
7. Notation:
a : 10% of the horizontal dimension or 0.4h , whichever is less, but not less than 4% of the lesser horizontal dimension or 1.0 m.
h : The eave height will be used for ÿ ÿ 10 . ÿ :

Angle of the roof measured from the horizontal, in degrees.
B-58
Figure B.6.5-8C External Pressure Coefficients, GCp Two and four water roofs
Enclosed and Partially Enclosed Buildings 7 27 <ÿÿ
Grades:
1. The GCp ordinates are the values to be used with hq

2. The abscissas represent the effective areas exposed to the wind in m2 .
5. GCp values for roof eaves include pressure contributions from the bottom and top surfaces.
6. For hipped roofs with ÿ ÿ 27 7. Notation: , Zone 3 should be considered as Zone 2.
h : The average roof height in m, except that the eave height should be used for ÿ ÿ 10 . ÿ : roof angle
measured from the horizontal, in degrees.
B-59
Figure B.6.5-8D External Pressure Coefficients, GCp Gabled roofs
Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings 27 45 <ÿÿ
Grades:
1. The GCp ordinates are the values to be used with qh

5. GCp values for eaves include contributions from top and bottom surfaces.
6. Notation:
a : 10% of the smallest horizontal dimension or , whichever is less, but not less than 4% of the lesser horizontal dimension or 1.0 m.
0.4hh : The average height of the roof in m.
ÿ : roof angle measured from the horizontal, in degrees.
B-60
Figure B.6.5-9 External Pressure Coefficients, GCp Staggered Roofs

Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings
Grades:
1. In the flat lower level, the stepped roofs shown in Figure B.6.5-9, the zone designations and pressure coefficients of
Figure B.6.5-8B shall be used, except that for intersections of the top of the roof with the walls, Zone 3 shall be
treated as Zone 2, and Zone 2 as Zone 1. Positive GCp values equal to those for the walls in Figure B.6.5-8A should be used
in the hatched areas shown in Figure B.6.5-9..
2. Notation: b :
1 1.5h in Figure B.6.5-9, but not greater than 30.0 m
h : Average height of the roof, in m. hi : h1 or h2
in Figure B.6.5-9; hh h 1 W : width of the=building
+ ; h 3.0
2 1ÿ m; hh1 0.3
2 =0.7
to
in Figure B.6.5-9 Wi : W1 or W2 or W3 in
= the1 +
Figure B.6.5-9. WW W 2 ÿ : roof angle measured from or WWW =
123 + + ; WW 0.25 to 0.75
Yo
horizontal, in degrees.
B-61
Figure B.6.5-10 Gabled roofs with several spans

External Pressure Coefficients, GCp
Grades:

5. For ÿ ÿ 10 ,
the GCp values from Figure B should be used. 6.5-8
6. Notation:
h : The average height of the roof in m. except that the eave height should be used for ÿ ÿ 10 W : Width of the building
module, in m. ÿ : roof angle measured from the
horizontal, in degrees
B-62
Figure B.6.5-11A roofs of a slope

Enclosed and Partially Enclosed Buildings 3 10 <ÿÿ
Grades:

5. For ÿ ÿ 3 ,
the GCp values from Figure B.6.5-8B should be used
6. Notation:
h : The eave height should be used for ÿ ÿ 10 .

W : Width of the building, in
m. ÿ : Angle of the roof measured from the horizontal, in degrees.
B-63
Figure B.6.5-11B External Pressure Coefficients, GCp

roofs of a slope
Enclosed and Partially Enclosed Buildings
10 30 <ÿÿ
Grades:

2. The abscissas represent the effective areas exposed to the wind, A 3. The , in m2 .
positive and negative signs mean pressure and suction acting on the surfaces, respectively.
5. Notation:
h : Average height of the roof, in m.
m. ÿ : Angle of the roof measured from the horizontal, in degrees.
B-64
Figure B.6.5-12 External Pressure Coefficients, GCp

sawn roofs
Grades:

5. For ÿ ÿ 10 ,
the GCp values from Figure B.6.5-8 should be used
6. Notation:
m. ÿ : Angle of the roof measured from the horizontal, in degrees
B-65
Components and Coatings – Method 2 all heights

Figure B.6.5-13 External Pressure Coefficients, GCp
Covers in Domes
External Pressure Coefficient for Circular Base Domes
negative pressure positive pressure positive pressure

ÿ , degrees
0 - 90 0 - 60 61 - 90
GCP -0.9 +0.9 +0.5
Grades:
f + where h fD + is the height at the crest of the dome q ( ) hD
1. GCp values to be used with
4. Values apply for 0.0 h D 0.5 ÿ ÿ ÿ D. ÿ , 0.2 f D 0.5
5. ÿ = 0 at the base of the dome, ÿ = 90 at the center of the highest point of the dome, f is measured from the base of the dome to the top.
B-66
Components and Coatings – Method 2 h 18.0 ÿ m.

Figure B.6.5-14
Walls and Covers
ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ
Grades:
1. The GCp ordinates are the values to be used with hq or 2. The z what
abscissas represent the effective areas exposed to the wind, A 3. The positive , in m2 .
and negative signs mean pressures and suctions acting on the surfaces, respectively.
4. Use qz with the positive values of GCp and qh with the negative values of GCp
6. Coefficients are for roofs with ÿ = 10 , for other roof angles and geometry use GCp values from Figure B.6.5-8 and qh
based on exposure defined in B.6.5.6
7. If a parapet equal to or greater than 1.0 m is placed around the perimeter of a roof with ÿ ÿ 10 Zone 2. , Zone 3 should be considered as
8. Notation:
a : 10% of the shortest horizontal dimension but not less than 1.0 m.
h : Average roof height, in m, except that for ÿ ÿ 10 the eave height must be used. z : Height above the
ground, in m.\ ÿ : angle of the roof
B-67
Main System Resistant to Wind Forces 0.25h L 1.0 ÿ ÿ
Figure B.6.5-15A Net Pressure Coefficients, CN Roofs free of a slope

open buildings ÿÿ45 _ ,ÿ=0 , 180
Angle of Wind Direction ÿ = 0 Wind Direction ÿ = 180

the Case
Deck of wind flow wind flow wind flow wind flow
Burden Free Blocked Free Blocked
ÿ
CNW CNL CNW CNL CNW CNL CNW CNL
TO 1.2 0.3 -0.3 -1.2 1.2 0.3 -0.5 -1.2
0ÿ
B. -1.1 -0.1 -1.1 -0.6 -1.1 -0.1 -1.1 -0.6
TO -0.6 -1.0 -1 -1.5 0.9 1.5 -0.2 -1.2
7.5ÿ
B. -1.4 0.0 -1.7 -0.8 1.6 0.3 0.8 -0.3
TO -0.9 -1.3 -1.1 -1.5 1.3 1.6 0.4 -1.1
15ÿ
B. -1.9 0.0 -2.1 -0.6 1.8 0.6 1.2 -0.3
TO -1.5 -1.6 -1.5 -1.7 1.7 1.8 0.5 -1.0
22.5ÿ
B. -2.4 -0.3 -2.3 -0.9 2.2 0.7 1.3 0.0
TO -1.8 -1.8 -1.5 -1.8 2.1 2.1 0.6 -1.0
36ÿ
B. -2.5 -0.5 -2.3 -1.1 2.6 1.0 1.6 0.1
TO -1.8 -1.8 -1.5 -1.8 2.1 2.2 0.7 -0.9
37.5ÿ
B. -2.4 -0.6 -2.2 -1.1 2.7 1.1 1.9 0.3
TO -1.6 -1.8 -1.3 -1.8 2.2 2.5 0.8 -0.9
45ÿ
B. -2.3 -0.7 -1.9 -1.2 2.6 1.4 2.1 0.4
Grades:
1. CNW and CNL denote the net pressures (contributions from the top and bottom surfaces) for half of the roof surfaces
for windward and leeward respectively.
2. Free wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind flow with less than or equal to 50% blockage. Obstructed Wind Flow denotes objects below the roof that inhibit
wind flow (greater than 50% blockage).
4. For values of ÿ between 7.5º and 45º linear interpolation is allowed, for values of ÿ less than 7.5º use the coefficients of ÿ = 0 .
5. All load cases shown for each roof angle must be investigated.
6. Notation:
L : Horizontal dimension of the roof measured along the direction of the wind, in m. h : Average height
of the roof, in m. ÿ : Wind direction in degrees.
ÿ : roof angle measured from the
horizontal, in degrees.
B-68
Main System Resistant to Wind Forces 0.25hr

ÿ ÿ L 1.0
Figure B.6.5-15B Net Pressure Coefficients, CN Free gabled roofs, ÿ = 0

open buildings ÿÿ45 _ , 180
Wind Direction ÿ = 0 , 180

Roof Angle Case of
ÿ wind flow
Burden Free Wind Flow Blocked
CNW CNL CNW CNL

TO 1.1 -0.3 -1.6 -1.0
7.5º
B. 0.2 -1.2 -0.9 -1.7
TO 1.1 -0.4 -1.2 -1
15th
B. 0.1 -1.1 -0.6 -1.6
TO 1.1 0.1 -1.2 -1.2
22.5º
B. -0.1 -0.8 -0.8 -1.7
TO 1.3 0.3 -0.7 -0.7
30º
B. -0.1 -0.9 -0.2 -1.1
TO 1.3 0.6 -0.6 -0.6
37.5º
B. -0.2 -0.6 -0.3 -0.9
TO 1.1 0.9 -0.5 -0.5
45º
B. -0.3 -0.5 -0.3 -0.7
Grades:
2. Free wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind flow with less than or equal to 50% blockage. Obstructed wind flow denotes objects below
the roof that inhibit wind flow (greater than 50% blockage)
4. For values of ÿ between 7.5º and 45º linear interpolation is allowed, for values of ÿ less than 7.5º use the load factors for single slope roofs.
6. Notation:
L : Horizontal dimension of the roof measured along the direction of the wind, in m. h :
Average height of the roof, in m. ÿ : Wind
direction in degrees. ÿ : roof angle
B-69
Main System Resistant to Wind Forces 0.25h L 1.0 ÿ ÿ
Figure B.6.5-15C Net Pressure Coefficients, CN Covers in Artesa (inverted two

open buildings
waters)
ÿ ÿ 45 , ÿ = 0 , 180
Wind Direction ÿ = 0 , 180

Roof Angle Case of
ÿ wind flow
Burden Free Wind Flow Blocked
CNW LNC CNW CNL
TO -1.1 0.3 -1.6 -0.5
7.5º
B. -0.2 1.2 -0.9 -0.8
TO -1.1 0.4 -1.2 -0.5
15th
B. 0.1 1.1 -0.6 -0.8
TO -1.1 -0.1 -1.2 -0.6
22.5º
B. -0.1 0.8 -0.8 -0.8
TO -1.3 -0.3 -1.4 -0.4
30º
B. -0.1 0.9 -0.2 -0.5
TO -1.3 -0.6 -1.4 -0.3
37.5º
B. 0.2 0.6 -0.3 -0.4
TO -1.1 -0.9 -1.2 -0.3
45º
B. 0.3 0.5 -0.3 -0.4
Grades:
2. Free wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind flow with less than or equal to 50% blockage. Obstructed wind flow denotes objects below
the roof that inhibit wind flow (greater than 50% blockage)
4. For values of ÿ between 7.5º and 45º linear interpolation is allowed, for values of ÿ less than 7.5º use the load factors for single slope roofs.
6. Notation:
L : Horizontal dimension of the roof measured along the direction of the wind, in m. h :
Average height of the roof, in m. ÿ : Wind
direction in degrees. ÿ : roof angle
measured from the horizontal, in degrees
B-70
Main System Resistant to Wind Forces (SPRFV) 0.25 h ÿL 1.0 ÿ m
Figure B.6.5-15D Free covers in different shapes

Net Pressure Coefficients, CN
open buildings ÿ ÿ 45 , ÿ = 0 , 180
Distance Flow of Flow of

Horizontal Angle of the Wind Wind
Deck Case of
From the Free Blocked
Burden
windward ÿ
edge CN CN
TO -0.8 -1.2
all ways
ÿhr
B. 0.8 0.5
th
ÿÿ45 _
all ways TO -0.6 -0.9
>h, ÿ2h
B. 0.5 0.5
ÿÿ45 _
all ways TO -0.3 -0.6
> 2h
B. 0.3 0.3
ÿÿ45 _
Grades:
1. CN denotes the net pressures (contributions from the surfaces above and below)
2. Free wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind flow with less than or equal to 50% blockage. Obstructed wind flow denotes objects below the roof
that inhibit wind flow (greater than 50% blockage)
4. For roofs with a single slope of less than 5º, the CN values also apply for the cases of ÿ = 0 and 0.05 h L 0.25 ÿÿ , see
Figure B.6.5-15A for other values of h L
6. Notation:
L : Horizontal dimension of the roof measured along the direction of the wind, in m. h : Average
height of the roof, in m. ÿ : Wind direction in
degrees. ÿ : roof angle measured from
the horizontal, in degrees.
B-71
Components and Coatings 0.25 h L 1.0 ÿ ÿ m
Figure B.6.5-16A Net Pressure Coefficients, CN

Covers Free of a Slope
open buildings
Angle CN
of Effective Wind
Deck Free Wind Flow Obstructed Wind Flow
Area
ÿ zone 3 zone 2 Zone 1 zone 3 zone 2 Zone 1
ÿa2 2.4 -3.3 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 1 -3.6 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
0º > a2 , ÿ4.0a2 _ 1.8 -1.7 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 0.8 -1.8 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
> 4.0a2 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
ÿa2 3.2 -4.2 2.4 -2.1 1.6 -1.4 1.6 -5.1 1.2 -2.6 0.8 -1.7
7.5º > a2 , ÿ4.0a2 2.4 -2.1 2.4 -2.1 1.6 -1.4 1.2 -2.6 1.2 -2.6 0.8 -1.7
> 4.0a2 1.6 -1.4 1.6 -1.4 1.6 -1.4 0.8 -1.7 0.8 -1.7 0.8 -1.7
ÿa2 3.6 -3.4 2.7 -2.9 1.8 -1.9 2.4 -4.2 1.8 -3.2 1.2 -2.1
15th > a2 , ÿ4.0a2 2.7 -3.9 2.7 -2.9 1.8 -1.9 1.8 -3.2 1.8 -3.2 1.2 -2.1
> 4.0a2 1.8 -1.9 1.8 -1.9 1.8 -1.9 1.2 -2.1 1.2 -2.1 1.2 -2.1
ÿa2 5.2 -5 3.9 -3.8 2.6 -2.5 3.2 -4.6 2.4 -3.5 1.6 -23
30º > a2 , ÿ4.0a2 3.9 -3.8 3.9 -3.8 2.6 -2.5 2.4 -3.5 2.4 -3.5 1.6 -23
> 4.0a2 2.6 -2.5 2.6 -2.5 2.6 -2.5 1.6 -23 1.6 -23 1.6 -23
ÿa2 5.2 -4.6 3.9 -3.5 2.6 -23 4.2 -3.8 3.2 -2.9 2.1 -1.9
45º > a2 , ÿ4.0a2 3.9 -3.5 3.9 -3.5 2.6 -23 3.2 -2.9 3.2 -2.9 2.1 -1.9
>4.0a2 2.6 -23 2.6 -23 2.6 -23 2.1 -1.9 2.1 -1.9 2.1 -1.9
Grades:
1. CN identifies the net pressures (contributions from the upper and lower surfaces)
2. Free Wind Flow identifies relatively unobstructed wind flows with less than or equal to 50% blockage. choked flow of wind
identifies objects below cover that inhibit the flow of wind (blockage greater than 50%).
2. Each component will be designed for the pressure and suction coefficients shown.
4. Notation:
L : Horizontal dimension of the building, measured along the direction of the wind, in m. ÿ : roof angle
B-72
Figure B.6.5-16B Net Pressure Coefficients, CN Free Gabled Roofs

open buildings ÿÿ45 _
CN
Angle of
Deck Effective Free Wind Flow Obstructed Wind Flow
Wind Area
ÿ
zone 3 zone 2 Zone 1 zone 3 zone 2 Zone 1
ÿa2 2.4 -3.3 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 1 -3.6 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
0º > a2 , ÿ4.0a2 _ 1.8 -1.7 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 0.8 -1.8 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
>4.0a2 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
ÿa2 2.2 -3.6 1.7 -1.8 1.1 -1.2 1 -5.1 0.8 -2.6 0.5 -1.7
7.5º > a2 ,ÿ4.0 a2 1.7 -1.8 1.7 -1.8 1.1 -1.2 0.8 -2.6 0.8 -2.6 0.5 -1.7
>4.0a2 1.1 -1.2 1.1 -1.2 1.1 -1.2 0.5 -1.7 0.5 -1.7 0.5 -1.7
ÿa2 2.2 -2.2 1.7 -1.7 1.1 -1.1 1 -3.2 0.8 -2.4 0.5 -1.6
15th > a2 , ÿ4.0 a2 1.7 -1.7 1.7 -1.7 1.1 -1.1 0.8 -2.4 0.8 -2.4 0.5 -1.6
> 4.0a2 1.1 -1.1 1.1 -1.1 1.1 -1.1 0.5 -1.6 0.5 -1.6 0.5 -1.6
ÿa2 2.6 -1.8 2 -1.4 1.3 -0.9 1 -2.4 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
30º > a2 ,ÿ4.0 a2 2 -1.4 2 -1.4 1.3 -0.9 0.8 -1.8 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
>4.0a2 1.3 -0.9 1.3 -0.9 1.3 -0.9 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
ÿa2 2.2 -1.6 1.7 -1.2 1.1 -0.8 1 -2.4 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
45º > a2 ,ÿ4.0 a2 1.7 -1.2 1.7 -1.2 1.1 -0.8 0.8 -1.8 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
>4.0a2 1.1 -0.8 1.1 -0.8 1.1 -0.8 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
Grades:
2. Free Wind Flow identifies relatively unobstructed wind flows with less than or equal to 50% blockage. choked flow of wind
6. Notation:
a : 10% of the smallest horizontal dimension or , whichever is less, but not less than 4% of the lesser horizontal dimension or 1.0 m.
0.4hh : Average height of the roof, in m.
L : Horizontal dimension of the building, measured along the direction of the wind, in m. ÿ :
roof angle measured from the horizontal, in degrees.
B-73
Figure B.6.5-16C Net Pressure Coefficients, CN Covers in Artesa (inverted two

waters)
open buildings
ÿÿ45 _
Angle CN
of Effective Wind
Deck Free Wind Flow Obstructed Wind Flow
Area
ÿ zone 3 zone 2 Zone 1 zone 3 zone 2 Zone 1
ÿa2 2.4 -3.3 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 1 -3.6 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
0º > a2 , ÿ4.0a2 _ 1.8 -1.7 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 0.8 -1.8 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
> 4.0a2 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
ÿa2 2.4 -3.3 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 1 -4.8 0.8 -2.4 0.5 -1.6
7.5º > a2 , ÿ4.0a2 1.8 -1.7 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 0.8 -2.4 0.8 -2.4 0.5 -1.6
>4.0a2 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 0.5 -1.6 0.5 -1.6 0.5 -1.6
ÿa2 2.2 -2.2 1.7 -1.7 1.1 -1.1 1 -2.4 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
15th > a2 ,ÿ4.0 a2 1.7 -1.7 1.7 -1.7 1.1 -1.1 0.8 -1.8 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
>4.0a2 1.1 -1.1 1.1 -1.1 1.1 -1.1 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
ÿa2 1.8 -2.6 1.4 -2 0.9 -1.3 1 -2.8 0.8 -2.1 0.5 -1.4
30º > a2 ,ÿ4.0 a2 1.4 -2 1.4 -2 0.9 -1.3 0.8 -2.1 0.8 -2.1 0.5 -1.4
>4.0a2 0.9 -1.3 1.9 -1.3 0.9 -1.3 0.5 -1.4 0.5 -1.4 0.5 -1.4
ÿa2 1.6 -2.2 1.2 -1.7 0.8 -1.1 1 -2.4 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
45º > a2 ,ÿ4.0 a2 1.2 -1.7 1.2 -1.7 0.8 -1.1 0.8 -1.8 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
>4.0a2 0.8 -1.1 1.8 -1.1 0.8 -1.1 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
Grades:
2. Free Wind Flow identifies relatively unobstructed wind flows with less than or equal to 50% blockage. obstructed wind flow
6. Notation:
a : 10% of the smallest horizontal dimension or 0.4h h : , whichever is less, but not less than 4% of the lesser horizontal dimension or 1.0 m.
Average height of the roof, in m.
L : Horizontal dimension of the building, measured along the direction of the wind, in m. ÿ : roof angle
B-74
Other Structures – Method 2 all heights

Figure B.6.5-17 Force Coefficients, Cf
Free Walls and Solid Fences
Gauge
Cf CASE A AND CASE B
ratio Aspect Ratio, B/s

s/h
ÿ0.05 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 4 5 10 twenty 30 >45
1.80 1.70 1.65 1.55 1.45 1.40 1.35 1.35 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.30
1.
1.85 1.75 1.70 1.60 1.55 1.50 1.45 1.45 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40
0.9
1.90 1.85 1.75 1.70 1.65 1.60 1.60 1.55 1.55 1.55 1.55 1.55
0.7
1.95 1.85 1.80 1.75 1.75 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.75
0.5
1.95 1.90 1.85 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.85 1.85 1.85
0.3
1.95 1.90 1.85 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.85 1.90 1.90 1.95
0.2
1.95 1.90 1.85 1.85 1.80 1.80 1.85 1.85 1.85 1.90 1.90 1.95
ÿ0.16
B-75

Figure B.6.5-17 (continued) Force Coefficients, Cf Free Walls and Solid Fences
Cf CASE C
Horizontal Horizontal Relation of
distance
Aspect Ratio, B/s distance B/
Aspect ,
from the from the s >45
windward 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 windward 13
edge edge
0 ace 2.25 2.60 2.90 3.10* 3.30* 3.40* 3.55* 3.65* 3.75* 0 ace 4.00 4.30*
S to 2s 1.50 1.70 1.90 2.00 2.15 2.25 2.30 2.35 2.45 sa 2s 2.60 2.55
2s to 3s 1.15 1.30 1.45 1.55 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.85 2s to 3s 2.00 1.95
3s to 10s 1.10 1.05 0.95 The
1.05values 1.05
must be Multiplied
1.05 by1.00
the following 3s to 4s 1.50 1.85
reduction factors when there is a return corner or signal 4s to 5s 1.35 1.85
Distance Reduction 5s to 10s 0.90 1.10
Factor 0.90
lr
0.3
1.0 0.75 >10s 0.55 0.55
B.
wind >2. 0.60
Plan view of the wall or
fence, with return corner
Grades:
1. The term fences in the notes below also applies to loose walls.
2. Fences with openings of less than 30% of the total area are classified as solid. The force coefficients for solid fences with (
1 1 ÿ ÿÿ )) 1.5
.
openings must be multiplied by a reduction factor of (
3. To allow for perpendicular and inclined wind directions, the following cases must be considered:
For sh 1 < :
CASE A: The resultant force acts perpendicular to the face of the sign through the geometric center.
CASE B: The resultant force acts perpendicular to the face of the sign at a distance from the geometric center to windward equal to 0.2 times the average
width of the sign.
For Bs 2 ÿ , CASE C should be considered
CASE C: The resultant forces act perpendicular to the face of the fence through the geometric centers of each region.
For sh 1 = :
Same cases as above except that the vertical sites of the resultant of the forces occur at a distance above the geometric center equal to 0.05 times
the average height of the fence.
4. For CASE C when sh 0.8 > , the coefficients of the forces must be multiplied by a reduction factor of ( 1.8 sh ÿ ).
5. Linear interpolation is allowed for values of sh , B s and L s different from those shown.
6. Notation:
B : Horizontal dimension of the fence, in m. h :
Height of the fence in m. s :
Vertical dimension of the fence, in m. ÿ :
Ratio of solid area to total area.
L : Horizontal dimension of the return corner, in m
B-76
Figure B.6.5-18 Chimneys, Tanks, Equipment

Force Coefficients, Cf
Deck and Similar Structures
open buildings
Cross section hD
surface type
1 7 25
Square (Wind Perpendicular to the face) All 1.3 1.4 2.0 1.0
Square (Wind along the diagonal) All 1.1 1.5
Hexagonal or Octagonal All 1.0 1.2 1.4
Moderately Mild 0.5 0.6 0.7
Round D (q 2.5 z > )
Rough ( D1 /D=0.02) 0.7 0.8 0.9
2
( D q 5.3,
z > D in m,q in Nz m ) Very Rough ( D1 /D=0.08) 0.8 1.0 0.2
Round D q 2.5 ( z
ÿ )
All 0.7 0.8 1.2
2
( D q 5.3,z Dÿ in m,q in N m z )
Notes:
1. The design wind force should be calculated based on the area of the structure projected onto a plane perpendicular to the direction
of the wind. The force must be assumed to act parallel to the direction of the wind.
2. Linear interpolation is allowed for other values of h D than those shown.
3. Notation:
D : Diameter of the circular cross section and the smallest horizontal dimension of the square, hexagonal or octagonal cross
sections at the height considered, in m.
Dÿ : Depth of protruding elements such as reliefs, defenses, in m. h : Height
of the structure, in m. z q :
Pressure velocity evaluated at height z above the ground, in N/m2 .
B-77
open billboards , Porticos and Towers

Figure B.6.5-19 Force Coefficients, Cf
Round Members
ÿ
Plane sided
members D qz ÿ 2.5 Dqz > 2.5 _
D qz ÿ 5.3 Dqz > 5.3 _
<0.1 2.0 1.2 0.8
0.1 or 0.29 1.8 1.3 0.9
0.3 or 0.7 1.6 1.5 1.1
Notes:
1. Billboards or signs with openings of 30% or more of the total area are classified as open billboards.
2. The calculation of design wind forces must be based on the exposed area of all members and elements projected onto a plane perpendicular to the wind
direction. The forces must be assumed to act parallel to the direction of the wind.
3. The area of Af consistent with the force coefficients is the solid area projected perpendicular to the wind direction.
4. Notation:
ÿ : ratio of solid area to total area.
D : diameter of a typical round member, in m. z q :

pressure velocity evaluated at a height z from ground level, in N/m2 .
Tower section CF
2 40 5.9 4.0 ÿ ÿ ÿ+
Square
2 3.4 4.7 3.4 ÿ ÿ ÿ+

Triangular
Grades:
1. For all wind directions considered, the area Af consistent for the specified force coefficients shall be the solid area of the tower face projected onto the
plane of that face of the tower segment considered.
2. The force coefficients considered are for towers with structural angles or similar elements with flat sides.
3. For towers with round elements, it is acceptable to multiply the specified force coefficients by the following factor to determine the wind forces on those
elements:
2 0.51 0.57 ÿ + , but not greater than
1.0 4. Wind forces should be applied in directions that result in maximum forces and reactions in the elements. For towers with
square cross sections, the wind forces must be multiplied by the following factor when the wind is considered along the
diagonal of the tower: 1.0 0.75 + ÿ
, but not greater than 1.2
5. Wind forces on tower elements such as stairs, ducts, lights, elevators, etc. they must be calculated using the appropriate force coefficients for
those elements.
6. Notation:
ÿ : ratio of solid area to total area of one face of the tower for the segment being considered.
B-78
Importance Factor. I (Wind Loads)

Table B.6.5-1
Regions not prone to hurricanes, and

Regions with potential for
Category regions with the possibility of hurricanes of
V 40
s 45 = ÿ m/ hurricanes and V 45 > m/s
0.77
Yo 0.87
1.00
II 1.00
1.15
II 1.15
1.15
IV. 1.15
Notes:
1. The categories of buildings and structures are listed in section A.2.5 of these regulations.
B-79
Ground Exposure Constant

Table B.6.5 -2
to bˆ ÿ b c ÿ
zmin *
Exposure ÿ Zg (m) (m)
(m)
B. 7.0 365.8 1/7.0 0.84 1/4.0 0.45 0.30 97.5 1/3 9.0
C. 9.5 274.3 1/9.5 1.00 1/6.5 0.65 0.20 152.4 1/5 4.5
D. 11.5 213.4 1/11.5 1.07 1/9.0 0.80 0.15 198.1 1/8 2.0
* Zmin minimum height used to ensure that the equivalent height Z is greater than 0.6 h or Zmin
For buildings with h Zmin ÿ , Z should be taken as Zmin
B-80
Exposure Coefficients for Dynamic Pressure, , Kh and Kz

Table B.6.5-3
height Exhibition, Note 1

above
ground Z B. C. D.
Cases Cases
m Case 1 case 2
1 and 1 and
0 - 45 0.7 0.57 2 0.85 2 1.03
6.0 0.7 0.62 0.90 1.08

7.5 0.7 0.66 0.94 1.12
9.0 0.7 0.70 0.98 1.16
12.0 0.76 0.76 1.04 1.22
15.0 0.81 0.81 1.09 1.27
18.0 0.85 0.85 1.13 1.31
20.0 0.89 0.89 1.17 1.34
24.5 0.93 0.93 1.21 1.38
27.5 0.96 0.96 1.24 1.40
30.5 0.99 0.99 1.26 1.43
36.5 1.04 1.04 1.36 1.52
42.5 1.09 1.09 1.36 1.52
49.0 1.13 1.13 1.39 1.55
55.0 1.17 1.17 1.43 1.58
60.0 1.20 1.20 1.46 1.61
76.0 1.28 1.28 1.53 1.68
90.0 1.35 1.35 1.59 1.73
107.0 1.41 1.41 1.64 1.78
122.0 1.47 1.47 1.69 1.82
137.0 1.52 1.52 1.73 1.86
Grades: 152.0 1.56 1.56 1.77 1.89
1. CASE 1
to. All components and coatings
b. Main System Resisting Wind Loads in low-rise buildings designed using Fig. B.6.5-7 CASE 2 a. All Major Wind Load
Resisting
Systems of buildings except those of designed low-rise buildings
using Fig. B.6.5-7
b. All Main Systems Resisting Wind Loads on other structures.
. 2. The dynamic pressure exposure coefficient, Kz , can be determined from the following formula:
4.0m ZZ ÿ ÿ g For Z < 4.0m
ÿ ÿ
K 2.01
z = ZZ g ( )2
K 2.01 (
z = 4.0 Z g )2
Z should not be taken less than 9.0 m for case 1 in exposure B are tabulated in
Table B.6.5-2
3. ÿ and Zg
. 4. Linear interpolation is accepted for intermediate values of Z height
. 5. Exposure categories are defined in B.6.5-6
B-81
Wind Directionality Factor, Kd

Table B.6.5-4
Factor of
Wind
Structure Type Directionality,
K* d
Buildings
Main Resistance System of 0.85
Wind Loads
Components and Coatings 0.85
vaulted roofs 0.85
Chimneys, Tanks and Structures
Similar
square 0.90
hexagonal 0.95
round 0.95
Solid Notices 0.85
Open Ads and Rectangular Structure 0.85
Lattice Towers
Triangle, Square and Rectangular 0.85
All other cross sections 0.95
*
The directionality factor Kd has been calibrated with the specified
load combinations. This factor must be used when using the
corresponding B.2.3 B.2.4 combinations. and
B-82


NSR-10
TITLE C—CONCRETE
STRUCTURAL

NSR-10 – Chapter C.1 – General requirements
TITLE C
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
CHAPTER C.1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
C.1.1 — Scope
C.1.1.1 — Title C provides the minimum requirements for the design and construction of structural concrete elements of
any structure built to the requirements of NSR-10 of which Title C is a part. Title C also covers the strength evaluation of
existing structures.
For structural concrete, cfÿ should not be less than 17 MPa. No maximum value is established for cfÿ unless it is
restricted by a specific provision of Title C.
C.1.1.2 — Title C complements Regulation NSR-10, and governs all aspects related to the design and construction of
structural concrete.
C.1.1.3 — Title C governs everything related to the design, construction and properties of materials in all cases in which
it conflicts with the requirements contained in other standards referred to in it.
C.1.1.4 — The requirements of Title C must be used in the design of structural concrete elements that are part of
structures designed in a structural material other than the structural concrete covered by other Titles of NSR-10. When
the Title of NSR-10 corresponding to the material other than structural concrete requires something different from what is
contained in Title C, what is required therein shall apply to those structures.
C.1.1.5 — For special structures such as arches, hoppers and silos, tanks, ponds, explosion-resistant structures, and
chimneys, the provisions of Title C will apply when applicable. See also 22.1.3.
C.1.1.6 — Title C controls the structural design and installation of the portions of concrete piles, excavated piles, and
caissons that remain buried in the ground in Chapter C.15.
C.1.1.7 — Title C does not apply to the design and construction of slabs on the ground, unless the slab transmits vertical
loads or lateral forces from other parts of the structure to the ground.
C.1.1.8 — For the purposes of meeting the requirements of Title C of Regulation NSR-10, it is allowed to use the
document "Essential requirements for reinforced concrete buildings" developed by the Colombian Association of
Earthquake Engineering - AIS, the Colombian Institute of Technical Standards and Certification – Icontec, and the
American Concrete Institute – ACI, and published under the designation ACI IPS-1 in 2002 and by ACI as recently
updated ACI 314.1R. Use of this document is limited to buildings of up to five floors and less than 3000 m2 of area as
indicated in it and all the caveats given in the document regarding the use of simplified design procedures must be met.
C.1.1.9 — Concrete on permanent steel decks (steel form deck)
C.1.1.9.1 — The design and construction of structural concrete slabs, built on permanent boards of
steel considered as non-composite, is governed by Title C.
C.1.1.9.2 — Title C does not apply to the composite design of structural concrete slabs built on permanent steel
decks. The concrete used in the construction of such slabs must be governed by Chapters 1 through 6 of Title C, when
applicable. Sections of these slabs designed as reinforced concrete must be governed by Title C.
C.1.1.10 — Provisions for seismic resistance
C-1
C.1.1.10.1 — The assignment of the energy dissipation capacity used in the seismic design of a
structure is regulated by Title A of NSR-10.
The energy dissipation capacity in the inelastic range during the response to an earthquake of structural concrete structures
designed in accordance with the requirements of Title C of Regulation NSR-10, is defined as follows:
(a) – Minimum energy dissipation capacity (DMI) – When the structural concrete elements are designed in accordance with
the requirements of Chapters C.1 to C.19 of this Regulation, in addition to the applicable requirements for this type of structures
presented in Chapter C.21.
(b) – Moderate energy dissipation capacity (MOD) – When the structural concrete elements are designed in accordance with
the requirements of Chapters C.1 to C.19 and also meet the special requirements for structures with dissipation capacity of
moderate energy prescribed in Chapter C.21 of these Regulations.
(c) – Special energy dissipation capacity (DES) – When the structural concrete elements are designed in accordance with the
requirements of Chapters C.1 to C.19 and also meet the additional requirements for structures with dissipation capacity of
special energy prescribed in Chapter C.21 of these Regulations.
C.1.1.10.2 — All structures must comply with the applicable requirements of Chapter 21.
C.1.1.11 — The design and construction of tanks, pools and watertight compartments that are part of the building equipment are
covered by Chapter C.23.
C.1.2 — Drawings and specifications

C.1.2.1 — The minimum content of the plans, reports, studies and specifications must comply with the provisions of A.1.5 and in
the Resolutions issued by the "Permanent Advisory Commission for the Seismic Resistant Construction Regime" in accordance
with the prescribed by Paragraph 1 of Article 6 and Article 42 of Law 400 of 1997.
Copies of design drawings, typical details, and specifications for all structural concrete construction must bear the signature (or
registered seal) of a licensed design professional. These plans, details and specifications must include:
(a) Name and date of publication of the NSR Regulation and its supplements in accordance with which it is
made the design;
(b) Live load and other loads used in the design;
(c) Specified compressive strength of concrete at the established ages or construction stages for which each part of the
structure was designed;
(d) Specified strength or type of reinforcement steel;
(e) Dimensions and location of all structural elements, reinforcement and anchorages;
(f) Precautions for dimensional changes produced by creep, shrinkage and variation of
temperature;
(g) Magnitude and location of prestressing forces;
(h) Anchorage length of reinforcement and location and length of lap splices;
(i) Type and location of welded and mechanical reinforcement splices;
C-2
(j) Location and detailing of all contraction or expansion joints specified for plain concrete
in Chapter 22;
(k) Minimum compressive strength of concrete at the time of post-tensioning;
(l) Tensioning sequence of the post-tensioning tendons;
(m) Indication of whether a slab on ground has been designed as a structural diaphragm, see section
21.12.3.4.
C.1.2.2 — The calculations corresponding to the design must be submitted together with the plans when required by the
competent authority. Analysis and design can be done using computer programs provided the design assumptions, input data,
and output generated by the program are provided. Model analysis can be used to supplement the calculations.
C.1.3 — Technical supervision
C.1.3.1 — Concrete constructions must be inspected in accordance with Title I of NSR-10. Concrete constructions must be
inspected during all stages of the work by, or under the supervision of, a professional empowered to design or by a qualified
technical supervisor, except for the cases provided for by Law 400 of 1997, in which case the control The quality of the
materials used in the construction will be the responsibility of the builder.
C.1.3.2 — The technical supervisor must demand compliance with the plans and design specifications. Unless otherwise
specified in Title I of Regulation NSR-10, technical supervision records must include:
(a) Form of delivery, placement, and test reports documenting quantity, placement location, fresh concrete tests,
strength, and other tests for all classes of concrete mixes;
(b) Placement and removal of forms, falsework and shoring;
(c) Placement of reinforcement and anchors;
(d) Mixing, placing, and curing of concrete;
(e) Sequence of assembly and connection of precast elements;
(f) Tensioning of prestressing tendons;
(g) Any significant construction load applied to finished floors, members, or walls;
(h) General progress of the work.
C.1.3.3 — When the ambient temperature is less than 4 ºC or greater than 35 ºC, a record must be kept of the concrete
temperatures and of the protection given to the concrete during its placement and curing.
C.1.3.4 — The technical supervision records required in 1.3.2 and 1.3.3 must be kept by the technical supervisor during the
period established by Title I after the completion of the project.
C.1.3.5 — For special moment-resisting frames as designated in Chapter C.21, there must be continuous technical supervision
of reinforcement and concrete placement by a qualified inspector. The inspector must be under the direction of the technical
supervisor.
C.1.4 — Approval of special design or construction systems
C-3
Alternative design and construction systems may be used in structural concrete when the requirements established in
Chapter 2 of Title II of Law 400 of 1997 are met.
C.1.5 — Mandatory nature of the technical standards cited in Title C
C.1.5.1 – The Colombian Technical Standards NTC, cited in this Title of the Regulation, are part of it.
The NTC standards are promulgated by the Colombian Institute of Technical Standards and Certification ICONTEC, the
only national standardization body recognized by the Colombian government. (See A.1.6 and C.3.8).
C.1.5.2 – In those cases in which there is no NTC standard, the use of standards from the American Society for Testing
and Materials (ASTM) or from other institutions is accepted, which also make part of the Regulation when there is no
corresponding NTC standard.
C.1.5.3 – Next to the NTC standards, a standard from ASTM or from another institution has been placed in parentheses.
This is done for reference only and the mandatory standard will always be the NTC standard. This reference standard
corresponds to an ASTM standard, or of another institution, that is compatible with the corresponding requirements of the
Regulation, and does not necessarily correspond to the antecedent standard of the NTC standard.
The antecedent norms of the NTC norms are those that are consigned in the text of the same
rule.
C.1.5.4 – To be able to use in Title C of NSR-10 a standard different from the NTC standards listed in C.3.8 or the ASTM
standard mentioned in the text of the Regulation within Title C when there is no corresponding NTC norm, it is necessary
to obtain special authorization, as prescribed by Law 400 of 1997, through the Permanent Advisory Commission of the
Earthquake-Resistant Construction Regime, created by Law 400 of 1997 and attached to the Ministry of Environment,
Housing and Land Development.
C.1.6 – Unit system
C.1.6.1 – This Title of the Regulation is presented in the international measurement system (SI). In Appendix CF the
equivalence between the SI system, the mks system, and the English system of the non-homogeneous equations of Title
C of the Regulations is presented.
C-4
NSR-10 – Chapter C.2 – Notation and definitions
CHAPTER C.2 — NOTATION AND DEFINITIONS
C.2.1 — Notation of Title C of Regulation NSR-10
The terms in this list are used in Title C of Regulation NSR-10.
a = depth of equivalent rectangular stress block as defined in C.10.2.7.1, mm, Chapter

C.10
av= shear span, equal to the distance from the center of a concentrated load to (a) the face of support for continuous or
cantilevered members, or (b) the center of support for simply supported members, mm, Chapter C.11 , Appendix CA
Ab = area of an individual bar or wire, mm2 , Chapters C.10, C.12

Abrg = bearing area of the head of an anchor bolt or bolt, or headed rebar mm2 , Chapter
C.12, Appendix CD
Ac = area of the concrete section that resists shear transfer, mm2 , Chapters C.11, C.21
Acf = largest gross cross-sectional area belonging to the beam-slab strips that correspond to the two equivalent orthogonal frames
that intersect in a column of a slab in two directions, mm2 , Chapter
C.18
Ach = cross-sectional area of a structural element, measured between the outer edges of the reinforcement
cross section, mm2 , Chapters C.10, C.21
Acp = area enclosed by the outer perimeter of the concrete cross section, mm2 , see C.11.5.1,
Chapter C.11
Acs = sectional area of a strut at the end in a strut-tie model, measured perpendicular to the axis of the strut, mm2
, Appendix CA
Act = area of that part of the cross section between the face in tension due to bending and the center of gravity of the gross
section, mm2 , Chapter C.18
Acv = gross area of the concrete section limited by the thickness of the web and the length of the section in the
direction of shear force considered, mm2 , Chapter C.21
Acw = concrete sectional area of an individual stud, horizontal wall segment, or tie beam, resisting shear, mm2
, Chapter C.21
Af = area of reinforcing steel in a bracket or bracket that resists the factored moment, mm2 , see C.11.8,
Chapter C-11
Ag = gross area of the concrete section, mm2 . For a section with voids, Ag is the area of the concrete alone and not
includes area of voids, see C.11.5.1, Chapters C.9-11, C.14-16, C.21, C.22, Appendices CB, CC Ah = total area of
reinforcement for shear parallel to reinforcement main traction on a bracket or bracket, mm2 ,
see C.11.9, Chapter C.11 Aj
= effective cross-sectional area within a joint measured in a plane parallel to the plane of reinforcement
that generates shear in the joint, mm2 , see C.21.7.4.1, Chapter C.21 A =
total area of longitudinal reinforcement to resist torsion, mm2 , Chapter C.11
A,min = minimum area of longitudinal reinforcement to resist torsion, mm2 , see C.11.5.5.3, Chapter C.11
An = area of reinforcement in a bracket or bracket that resists the tensile force Nuc , mm2, see C.11.8, Chapter
C.11
Anz = area of a face of a node zone or of a section through a node zone, mm2 , Appendix CA
ANc = projected area of concrete failure in a single anchor or in a group of anchors, used to calculate tensile strength, mm2
, see CD.5.2.1, Appendix CD
ANco = projected failure area of the concrete at a single anchor, used to calculate tensile strength see CD.5.2.1,
when not limited by edge distance or spacing, mm2 ,
Appendix CD
Ao = gross area enclosed by the shear flow path, mm2 , Chapter C.11
C-5
Aoh = area enclosed by the axis of the outermost closed transverse reinforcement arranged to resist torsion,
mm2 , Chapter C.11
Aps = area of prestressed steel in the flexural tension zone, mm2 , Chapter C.18, Appendix CB As
= area of longitudinal reinforcement not prestressed in tension, mm2 , Chapters C.10-12, C.14, C.15, C.18,
Appendix CB =
ÿ
As area of compression reinforcement, mm2 , Appendix CA

Asc = area of main tensile reinforcement in a corbel or haunch, mm2 , see C.11.8.3.5, Chapter C.11
Ase,N = effective cross-sectional area of the anchor in tension, mm2 , Appendix CD
Ase,V = effective area of the cross section of the anchor in shear, mm2 , Appendix CD
Ash = total area of cross bracing (including shims) placed within spacing s
and perpendicular to dimension bc , mm2 , Chapter C.21
Asi = total area of surface reinforcement with a spacing forming an angle s placed in the row i that crosses a strut,
Yo
ÿi with the axis of the upright, mm2 , Appendix CA

As,min = minimum area of flexural reinforcement, mm2, see C.10.5, Chapter C.10
Ast = total area of non-prestressed longitudinal reinforcement (steel bars or profiles), mm2 , Chapters C.10, C.21
Asx = area of structural steel tube or profile in a composite section, mm2 , Chapter C.10
At = area of a leg of a closed stirrup that resists torsion with a spacing s , mm2 , Chapter C.11
Atp = area of prestressed steel in a tensioner, mm2 , Appendix CA
Atr = total area of all transverse reinforcement within a spacing s crossing the potential splitting plane through the reinforcement
being developed, mm2 , Chapter C.12
Ats = area of non-prestressed reinforcement in a tensioner, mm2 , Appendix CA
Av = area of shear reinforcement with a spacing s , mm2 , Chapters C.11, C.17
AVc = projected area of concrete failure of a single anchor or a group of anchors, used to calculate shear resistance, mm2
AVco = projected area of concrete failure of a single anchor, used to calculate shear resistance, when not limited by the influence
of corner, spacing, or element thickness, mm2
Avd = total area of reinforcement in each group of diagonal bars in a coupling beam with diagonal reinforcement, mm2
, Chapter C.21
Avf = area of friction shear reinforcement, mm2 , Chapters C.11, C.21
Avh = area of the shear reinforcement parallel to the flexural tension reinforcement mm2
with a spacing of 2s , ,
Chapter C.11
Av,min = minimum area of reinforcement for shear with a spacing s Chapter C.11 , mm2 , see C.11.4.6.3 and C.11.4.6.4,
A1 = loaded
area, mm2 , Chapters C.10, C.22
A2 = the area of the lower base of the largest frustum of the pyramid, cone or tapered wedge, entirely contained within the support
and whose upper base has the loaded area and lateral slopes of 1 vertical by 2 horizontal, mm2
, Chapters C.10, C.22
b = width of the compression face of the element, mm, Chapter C.10, Appendix CB bc = transverse
dimension of the element core measured between the outer edges of the transverse reinforcement with Ash area , mm, Chapter
C.21 bo = perimeter of the
critical section for shear in slabs and footings, mm, see C.11.11.1.2, Chapters C.11,
C.22
bs = width of a strut, mm, Appendix CA bt = width of
the part of the cross section containing the closed torsion resisting stirrups, mm,
Chapter C.11
bv = width of the cross section at the contact surface under investigation by horizontal shear, mm,
Chapter C.17
bw = width of the web or diameter of the circular section, mm, Chapters C-10-12, C.21, C.22, Appendix CB
C-6
b1 = dimension of the critical section bo measured in the direction of the span for which the moments are determined,
mm, Chapter C.13
b2 = dimension of the critical section bo measured in the direction perpendicular to b1 , mm, Chapter C.13 Bn =
nominal bearing resistance, N, Chapter C.22 Bu = factored bearing
load, N, Chapter C.22 c = distance measured from extreme fiber in
compression to neutral axis, mm, Chapters C.9, C.10, C.14, C.21 c = critical edge distance required to develop basic concrete
pullout
ac
strength of a post-installed anchor in uncracked concrete without supplementary reinforcement to control splitting, mm, see
CD.8.6, Appendix CD
c = maximum distance measured from the center of the shank of an anchor to the edge of the concrete, mm, Appendix CD
ac ,min
a,max = minimum distance measured from the center of the shank of an anchor to the edge of the concrete, mm, Appendix CD
ca1= distance measured from the center of the shank of an anchor to the edge of the concrete in one direction, mm.
If shear is applied to the anchor, c is measured
a1 in the direction of the applied shear force. If tension is applied to the
anchor, c is the minimum
a1 edge distance, Appendix CD
ca2= distance from the center of the shank of an anchor to the edge of the concrete in a direction perpendicular to
c a1 , mm, Appendix CD =
bc the lesser of: (a) the measured distance from the center of a bar or wire to the nearest surface of the concrete, or (b) one-half
the center-to-center spacing of the bars or wires to be develop, mm, Chapter C.12 c = free cover of reinforcement, mm,
see C.10.6.4,
Chapter
c
C.10 c = distance from the inside face of the column to the edge of the slab,
measured parallel to 1c , but without
you
exceed 1c , mm, Chapter C.21 =

1C
dimension of a rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital or corbel, measured in the direction of the span for which
moments are determined, mm, Chapters C.11, C .13, C.21
c2= dimension of a rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital or corbel, measured in the direction perpendicular to 1c ,
mm, Chapter C.13 C = cross section constant to define
torsion properties of slabs and beams , see C.13.6.4.2,
Chapter C.13
Ca,j = coefficient for moments in the short direction of slabs in two directions designed according to C.13.9.
Chapter C.13.
Cb,j = coefficient for moments in the long direction of slabs in two directions designed according to C.13.9.
Chapter C.13.
Cm = factor that relates the actual moment diagram to an equivalent uniform moment diagram,
Chapter C.10
d = distance from the extreme fiber in compression to the centroid of the longitudinal reinforcement in tension, mm, Chapters C.7,
C.9-12, C.14, C.17, C.18, C.21, Appendices CB, CC dÿ = distance from
the extreme fiber in compression to the centroid of the longitudinal reinforcement in compression, mm,
Chapters C.9, C.18, Appendix CC
da = outside diameter of an anchor or diameter of the shank of the headed bolt, headed screw, or
hook bolt, mm, see CD.8.4, Appendix CD.
ÿ
gives
= value that is replaced by da when an oversized anchor is used, mm, see CD.8.4,
Appendix CD
db = nominal diameter of a prestressing bar, wire or strand, mm, Chapters C.7, C.12, C.21 dp = distance from the
extreme fiber in compression to the centroid of the prestressing steel, mm, Chapters C.11, C.18, Appendix CB dpile = diameter of
the pile measured at
the base of the footing, mm, Chapter C.15 dt = distance from the extreme fiber in
compression to the centroid of the extreme longitudinal steel row in tension, mm, Chapters C .9, C.10, Appendix CC D = dead loads,
or corresponding internal forces and moments,
Chapters C.8, C.9, C.20, C.21, Appendix
DC
e = base of natural logarithms, Chapter C.18
C-7
= distance from the inside surface of the shank of a J- or L-shaped bolt to the outside of the bolt
I have
tip of J- or L-bolt, mm, Appendix CD

Neÿ = distance between the tension resultant in a group of anchors loaded in tension and the centroid of the group of
anchors loaded in tension, mm; Neÿ is always positive, Appendix CD
Veÿ = distance between the resulting shear load in a group of anchors loaded in shear in the same direction and the centroid
of the group of anchors loaded in shear in the same direction, mm, Veÿ is always positive, Appendix CD
E = loading effects produced by the earthquake or corresponding moments and internal forces, Chapters C.9, C.21,
Appendix CC Ec =
modulus of elasticity of concrete, MPa, see C.8.5.1, Chapters C.8-10 , C.14, C.19 Ecb = modulus
of elasticity of the concrete of the beam, MPa, Chapter C.13 Ecs = modulus
of elasticity of the concrete of the slab, MPa, Chapter C.13 EI = flexural
stiffness of a element in compression, N mm2 , see C.10.10.6, Chapter C.10 Ep
= modulus of elasticity of prestressing steel, MPa, see C.8.5.3, Chapter C.8 Es = modulus of
elasticity of reinforcement and structural steel, MPa, see C .8.5.2, Chapters C.8, C.10, C.14 cfÿ = specified compressive
strength of concrete, MPa, Chapters C.4, C.5, C.8-12, C.14, C .18, C.19, C.21, C.22, Appendices CAD cfÿ = square root of
specified compressive strength
of concrete, MPa, Chapters C.8, C.9, C.11, C.12 , C.18, C.19, C.21, C.22, Appendix CD f = effective compressive strength
of concrete in a strut or node zone, MPa,
Chapter
EC
C.15,
Appendix CA
fÿci = specified compressive strength of concrete at the time of initial prestressing, MPa, Chapters
C.7, C.18
fÿci = square root of the specified compressive strength of the concrete at the time of prestressing
initial strength, MPa,
Chapter
cr
C.18 fÿ = average required compressive strength of concrete, used as the basis for proportioning concrete, MPa,
Chapter C.5 f = average
tensile
ct
strength by splitting of lightweight concrete, MPa, Chapters C.5, C.9, C.11, C.12,
C.22
df = stress due to unfactored dead load at the extreme grain of a section in which the stress of
tension is produced by external loads, MPa, Chapter C.11
fDC= decompression effort; stress in the prestressing steel when the stress in the concrete
located at the same level as the centroid of the prestressing steel equals zero, MPa, Chapter C.18 f =
compressive
pc
stress in the concrete (after all prestressing losses have occurred) at the centroid of the cross section that
resists loads applied externally, or at the web and flange junction when the centroid is located within the flange,
MPa. (In a composite member, f is the resultant compressive stress at the centroid of the composite pc
section, or at
the junction of the web and flange when the centroid is within the flange, due to both prestressing and moments
resisted by the precast element acting individually), Chapter C.11
fbut
= compressive stress in concrete due solely to effective prestressing forces (after all prestressing losses have occurred)
at the end grain of a section in which tensile stresses have been produced by externally applied loads , MPa,
Chapter C.11 f = stress in the prestressing steel in the state of nominal flexural strength, MPa, Chapters
C.12,
$
C.18
fpu= specified tensile strength of prestressing steel, MPa, Chapters C.11, C.18
fpy= specified yield strength of prestressing steel, MPa, Chapter C.18
rf = modulus of rupture of concrete, MPa, see C.9.5.2.3, Chapters C.9, C.14, C.18, Appendix CB sf = stress
in reinforcement calculated for service loads, MPa, Chapters C. 10, C.18 sfÿ = stress in compressive
reinforcement under factored loads, MPa, Appendix CA
C-8
f HE= effective stress in the prestressing steel (after all losses have occurred
prestressed), MPa, Chapters C.12, C.18, Appendix CA
f = stress in the extreme tensile fiber in the pre-compressed tensile zone, calculated for the loads of
you
service using properties of gross section, MPa, see C.18.3.3, Chapter C.18
futa= specified tensile strength of anchor steel, MPa, Appendix CD
yf = specified yield strength of reinforcement, MPa, Chapters C.3, C.7, C.9-12, C.14, C.17-19, C.21,
Appendices CAC f
= specified yield strength in anchor steel, MPa, Appendix CD
already
f = specified yield strength and f of transverse reinforcement, MPa, Chapters C.10-12, C.21 F = loads due to
andt
weight and pressure of fluids with well-defined densities and maximum controllable heights, or
moments and corresponding internal forces, Chapter C.9, Appendix CC
Fn = nominal resistance of a strut, guy, or node zone, N, Appendix CA
Fnn = nominal resistance of one face of a node zone, N, Appendix CA
Fns = nominal resistance of a strut, N, Appendix CA
Fnt = nominal resistance of a tensioner, N, Appendix CA
Fu = factored force acting on a strut, tie, support area, or node zone in a strut-tie model,
N, Appendix CA
G = hail loads, or corresponding internal forces and moments, Chapter C.9 h = total thickness or
height of an element, mm, Chapters C.9-12, C.14, C.17, C. 18, C.20-22, Appendices CA, CC ha = thickness of an element in
which an anchor is placed, measured parallel to the axis of the anchor, mm,
Appendix CD
hef = effective depth of embedment of the anchor, mm, see CD.8.5, Appendix CD hv = height of
the cross section of a shear head, mm, Chapter C.11 hw = total height of a wall measured
from the base to the top or height of the considered wall segment, mm, Chapters C.11, C.21 hx = maximum horizontal spacing,
measured center to center, between
supplementary hooks or legs of
closed confinement stirrups on all faces of the column, mm, Chapter C.21 H = loads due to the
weight and pressure of the soil, water in the soil, or other materials, or moments and forces
corresponding internal dimensions, Chapter C.9, Appendix
CC I = moment of inertia of the section about the axis passing through the centroid, mm4 , Chapters C.10, C.11
bl = moment of inertia of the gross section of a beam about the axis passing through the centroid, mm4 ,
see C.13.6.1.6, Chapter C.13 =
he
cr
moment of inertia of the cracked section transformed to concrete, mm4 , Chapter C.9
I = effective moment of inertia for the calculation of deflections, mm4
and
, see C.9.5.2.3, Chapter C.9
gI = moment of inertia of the gross section of the element with respect to the axis passing through the centroid, without taking
reinforcement into account, mm4 , Chapters C.9, C.10, C.14 I
= Moment of inertia of the gross section of a slab with respect to the axis passing through the defined centroid mm4
yes
for the calculation of ÿf and ÿt , , Chapter C.13 I =

moment
HE
of inertia of the reinforcement with respect to the axis that passes through the centroid of the cross section of the
element mm4 , Chapter C.10
I sx= moment of inertia of a structural steel profile or tube, with respect to the axis that passes through the centroid of
the cross section of the composite element, mm4 , Chapter C.10
k = effective length factor for members in compression, Chapters C.10, C.14 kc = coefficient for
the basic pullout resistance of concrete in tension, Appendix CD kcp = coefficient for the resistance to pitching
breakout of the anchorage, Appendix CD K = coefficient of friction due to accidental deflection, per meter
of prestressing tendon, Chapter C.18 Ktr = transverse reinforcement index, see C.12.2.3, Chapter C.12
= span of the beam or slab in one direction; free projection of the cantilever, mm, see C.8.9, Chapter C.9 =
to
additional anchorage length beyond the center of the support or inflection point, mm, Chapter C.12 = length of
c
the element in compression in a frame, measured center to center of the portal nodes, mm, Chapter C.10, C.14, C.22
C-9
d
= development length in tension for deformed bars, deformed wires, electro-welded reinforcement of
plain or deformed wire, or prestressing strands, mm, Chapters C.7, C.12, C.19, C.21 =
DC
development length of deformed bars and deformed wires in compression, mm, Chapter C.12 = length development
dh
in tension of rebar or deformed wire with a standard hook, measured from the critical section to the outer end of the
hook (straight length embedded in the concrete between the critical section and the start of the hook [point of
tangency] plus the radius bend and a bar diameter), mm, see C.12.5 and C.21.7.5, Chapter C.12, C.21 =
development length in tension of headed deformed bars, measured from
dt
the critical section to the
head bearing face, mm, see C.12.6, Chapter C.12 = load bearing
and
length of an anchor for shear, mm, see CD.6.2.2, Appendix CD = free span measured between faces of
no
the supports, mm, Chapters C.8-11, C.13, C.16, C.18, C.21 = free span in the short direction
na
measured across faces of the supports for slab design in two directions according to C.13.9 , mm, Chapter C.13 = free
span in the long direction measured
nb
between the faces of the supports for slab design in two directions according to C.13.9, mm, Chapter C.13 = length,
measured from the face of the joint
either
along of the axis of the structural element, within which it must
be placed special transverse reinforcement, mm, Chapter C.21
px
= distance from the jack end of a prestressing steel element to the point under consideration, m,
see C.18.6.2, Chapter C.18
you
= span of the element subjected to the load test, taken as the smallest span in systems of slabs in two directions, mm.
The span is the smaller of: (a) the distance between the centers of the supports, and (b) the free distance between
the supports plus the thickness h of the element. The span of a cantilever shall be taken as twice the distance
between the face of the support and the end of the cantilever, mm, Chapter C.20 =
or
unsupported length of a compression member, mm, see C.10.10.1.1, Chapter C.10 = length of the arm of
v
the shear head measured from the centroid of the concentrated load or reaction,
mm, Chapter C.11
w
= length of the entire wall or length of the wall segment considered in the direction of the force of
shear, mm, Chapters C.11, C.14, C.21
1 = span in the direction in which the moments are determined, measured center to center of the supports, mm, Chapter
C.13
2
= span measured in the direction perpendicular 1 , center to center measurement of supports, mm, see C.13.6.2.3
to and C.13.6.2.4, Chapter

C.13 L = live loads, or corresponding moments and internal forces, Chapters C.8, C.9, C.20, C.21, Appendix C
C.
Le = loads due to ponding of water, or corresponding internal moments and forces, Chapter C.9 Lr = live roof
loads, or corresponding internal moments and forces, Chapter C.9 Ma = maximum moment due to
service loads present in the element in the stage for which the
deflection, N mm, Chapters C.9, C.14
Mas = factored moment in the short span direction used in the design of slabs in two directions according to
C.13.9. N mm, Chapters C.13
Mbs = factored moment in the long span direction used in the design of slabs in two directions according to
C.13.9. N mm, Chapters C.13
Mc = factored moment amplified by the effects of curvature of the element for use in the design of a
element in compression, N mm, see C.10.10.6, Chapter C.10 Mcr =
cracking moment, N mm, see C.9.5.2.3, Chapters C.9, C.14 Mcre = cracking
moment by bending in section due to externally applied loads, N mm,
Chapter C.11
Mm = factored moment modified to take into account the effect of axial compression, N mm, see C.11.2.2.2,
Chapter C.11
Mmax = maximum factored moment in section due to externally applied loads, N mm, Chapter C.11
Mn = nominal resistance to bending in the section, N mm, Chapters C.11, C.12, C.14, C.18, C.21, C.22
C-10
Mnb = nominal flexural resistance of the beam, including the effect of the slab when it is in tension, which reaches
a knot, N mm, see C.21.6.2.2, Chapter C.21
Mnc = nominal flexural resistance of the column reaching a node, calculated for the factored axial load, consistent with
the direction of the lateral forces considered, leading to the lowest flexural resistance, N·mm, see C.21.6. 2.2,
Chapter C.21 Mo = factored total static moment,
N mm, Chapter C.13 Mp = required plastic resisting moment in
the cross section of a shear head, N mm, Chapter
C.11
Mpr = probable flexural resistance of the members, with or without axial loading, determined using the properties of the
members at the joint faces assuming a tensile stress for the longitudinal bars of at least 1.25f and a reduction
factor of the resistance ÿ of 1.0, N mm, Chapter C.21
and
Ms = factored moment due to loads producing appreciable lateral displacement, N mm, Chapter
C.10
Mslab = fraction of the factored moment of the slab that is balanced by the moment at the support, N mm, Chapter
C.21
Mu = factored moment in section, N mm, Chapters C.10, C.11, C.13, C.14, C.21, C.22 Mua =
moment at half height of the wall due to factored lateral loads and eccentric verticals, not including the effects Pÿ , N mm,
Chapter C.14
Mv = resistance to moment contributed by the shear head, N mm, Chapter C.11 M1 = the
smallest factored moment of one of the ends of an element in compression, must be taken as positive if the element
presents simple curvature and negative if has double curvature, N mm, Chapter C.10 M1ns = factored
moment at the end of the element in compression on which M1 acts , and which is due to loads that do not cause an
appreciable lateral displacement, calculated by means of a structural analysis elastic of the first order, N mm,
Chapter C.10
M1s = factored moment at the end of the element in compression in which M1 acts, and which is due to loads that cause
an appreciable lateral displacement, calculated by means of a first-order elastic structural analysis, N mm,
Chapter C.10
M2 = the largest factored moment at the ends of an element in compression. If there is a transverse load between the
supports, M2 should be taken as the largest moment that occurs in the element. The value M2 is always positive,
N mm, Chapter C.10 M2,min =
minimum value of M2 , N mm, Chapter C.10 M2ns
= factored moment at the end of the element in compression on which M2 acts , due to to loads that do not cause
appreciable lateral displacement, calculated by means of a first-order elastic structural analysis, N mm, Chapter
C.10
M2s = factored moment at the end of the element in compression in which M2 acts , due to loads that cause an
appreciable lateral displacement, calculated by means of a first-order elastic structural analysis, N mm, Chapter
C.10
n = number of units, such as strength tests, bars, wires, anchorage devices for individual strands, anchors, or arms of a
shear head, Chapters C.5, C.11, C.12, C.18, Appendix CD
Nb = basic concrete breakout strength in tension of a single anchor in cracked concrete, N,

see CD.5.2.2, Appendix CD
Nc = tensile force in concrete due to unfactored dead plus live load, N, Chapter C.18 Ncb = nominal concrete breakout
strength in tension from a single anchor, N, see CD.5.2.1,
Appendix CD
Ncbg = nominal concrete breakout resistance in tension of a group of anchors, N, see CD.5.2.1,
Appendix CD
Nn = nominal tensile strength, N, Appendix CD
Np = Tensile slipout resistance of a single anchor in cracked concrete, N, see
CD.5.3.4 and CD.5.3.5, Appendix CD
C-11
Npn = nominal tensile slipout resistance of a single anchor, N, see CD.5.3.1,

Appendix CD
Nsa = nominal resistance of a single anchor or of a group of anchors in tension determined by the resistance
of steel, N, see CD.5.1.1 and CD.5.1.2, Appendix CD
Nsb = lateral breakout strength of a single anchor, N, Appendix CD Nsbg = lateral
breakout strength of a group of anchors, N, Appendix CD Nu = factored axial load normal to
cross section, occurring simultaneously with Vu or Tu ; should be taken as positive for compression and negative for
tension, N, Chapter C.11 Nua = factored tensile force applied to an anchor or group of
anchors, N, Appendix CD Nuc = factored horizontal tensile force acting simultaneously with Vu in the
top of a corbel or haunch, to be taken as positive for tension, N, Chapter C.11 = outer perimeter of concrete cross section,
mm, see C.11.5.1, Chapter C.11 = perimeter of axis of outermost closed transverse
ppc reinforcement arranged for torsion, mm, Chapter C.11 Pb = nominal axial strength under balanced
ph strain conditions, N, see C.10.3.2, Chapters
C.9, C.10, Appendices CB, CC

Pc = critical buckling load, N. see C.10.10.6, Chapter C.10 Pn =
nominal axial resistance of cross section, N, Chapters C.9, C .10, C.14, C.22, Appendices CB, CC Pn,max = maximum
allowable value of Pn , N, see C.10.3.6, Chapter C.10 Po = nominal axial
resistance for zero eccentricity, N, Chapter C.10 Ppj = prestressing force at the end of the
jack, N, Chapter C.18 Ppu = factored prestressing force at the anchoring
device, N, Chapter C.18 Ppx = prestressing force evaluated at a distance Ps = unfactored
axial load at the design section (half height), including the px from jack end, N, Chapter C.18
effects of self-weight, N,
Chapter C.14
Pu = factored axial force; should be taken as positive for compression and negative for tension, N, Chapters
C.10, C.14, C.21, C.22
qDu = factored dead load per unit area, Chapter C.13 = factored live
qLu load per unit area, Chapter C.13 = factored load per unit area,
Chapter C.13 qu Q = stability index of a story, see
C.10.10.5.2, Chapter C.10 r = radius of gyration of the cross section of an
element in compression, mm, Chapter C.10 s = spacing measured center to center of units such as
longitudinal reinforcement, transverse reinforcement,
prestressing tendons, wires, or anchors, mm, Chapters C.10-12, C.17-21, Appendix CD
s = center-to-center spacing of reinforcement in row i adjacent to the surface of an element, mm,
Yo
Appendix CA
you = center-to-center spacing of transverse reinforcement within a length = sample or , mm, Chapter C.21
H.H standard deviation, MPa, Chapter C.5, Appendix CD = center-to-center
spacing of longitudinal shear or torsion reinforcement, mm, Chapter C.11 2s Se = moment, shear force,
or axial load at the connection corresponding to the development of probable resistance at selected locations for creep to
occur, based on the dominant mechanism of lateral inelastic deformation, considering both gravity and seismic
loading effects, Chapter C.21 Sd = coefficient of environmental durability, Chapter C.23 Sm = elastic modulus of
the section,
mm3
, Chapter C.22
Sn = nominal flexural, shear or axial load resistance of the connection, Chapter C.21 Sy = yield
strength of the connection, based on yf , for axial force, moment or shear, Chapter C.21 t = wall thickness of a section
with voids, mm, Chapter C.11 T = cumulative effects of temperature variation,
creep, shrinkage, differential settlement, and shrinkage-compensated concrete shrinkage, Chapter C.9 , Appendix CC
C-12
Tn = nominal torsion resistance, N mm, Chapter C.11 Tu =

factored torsion in the section, N mm, Chapter C.11 U =
resistance required to resist the factored loads or corresponding moments and internal forces, Chapter C. 9, Appendix
CC v = nominal shear
resisting stress, MPa, see C.11.11.6.2, Chapters C.11, C.21 Vb = basic shear pullout strength of
no
a single anchor in cracked concrete, N, see C

D.6.2.2 and CD.6.2.3, appendix
CD Vc = nominal shear resistance provided by concrete, N, Chapters C.8, C.11, C.13, C.21 Vcb = nominal
pullout resistance of concrete single anchor shear concrete, N, see CD.6.2.1,
Appendix CD
Vcbg = nominal concrete breakout resistance to shear from a group of anchors, N, see CD.6.2.1,
Appendix CD
Vci = nominal shear resistance provided by the concrete when diagonal cracking occurs as
result of the combination of shear and moment, N, Chapter C.11
Vcp = nominal concrete breakout resistance by pitching of a single anchor, N, see CD.6.3.1,
Appendix CD
Vcpg = nominal concrete breakout resistance due to capping of a group of anchors, N, see C
D.6.3.1, Appendix CD
Vcw = nominal shear resistance provided by concrete when diagonal cracking occurs as a result of high tensile principal
stresses in the web, N, Chapter C.11 Vd = shear force in section due to unfactored
dead load, N , Chapter C.11 Ve = design shear force corresponding to the development of the
probable moment resistance of the element,
N, see C.21.5.4.1 and C.21.6.5.1, Chapter C.21
Vi = factored shear force in the section, due to externally applied loads that occur
simultaneously with Mmax , N, Chapter C.11
Vn = nominal shear resistance, N, Chapters C.8, C.10, C.11, C.21, C.22, Appendix CD Vnh =
nominal horizontal shear resistance, N, Chapter C.17 Vp = vertical
component of the effective prestressing force in a section, N, Chapter C.11 Vs = nominal shear
resistance provided by the shear reinforcement, N, Chapter C.11 Vsa = nominal shear resistance of
a single anchor or a group of strength-determined anchors
of steel, N, see CD.6.1.1 and CD.6.1.2, Appendix CD Vu =
factored shear force in section, N, Chapters C.11-13, C.17, C.21, C.22 Vua = factored
shear force applied to a single anchor or a group of anchors, N, Appendix CD.
Vug = factored shear force in the critical section of the slab due to behavior in two directions due to gravitational loads,
N, see C.21.13.6 Vus = factored horizontal
shear in one story, N, Chapter C.10 = density (weight unit) of normal
toilet weight concrete or equilibrium density of lightweight concrete, kg/m3 ,
Chapters C.8 and
C.9 = factored load per unit length of beam, or slab in one direction, Chapter C.8 wu W =
wind load, or corresponding internal moments and forces, Chapter C.9, Appendix CC x = smallest
dimension of rectangular part of a cross section, mm, Chapter C.13 = largest dimension of
and rectangular part of a cross section, mm, Chapter C.13 = distance from axis through centroid
of gross section to the extreme fiber in tension, without considering the reinforcement, mm, Chapters C.9, C.11 ÿ =
you and
angle that defines the orientation of the

reinforcement, Chapters C.11, C.21, Appendix CA = coefficient that defines the relative
ÿc contribution of the concrete resistance to the nominal shear resistance of the wall, see C.21.9.4.1, Chapter C.21 =
ratio between the flexural stiffness of a beam
ÿf section and the flexural stiffness of a strip of slab limited laterally by the center lines of adjacent panels (if any) on
each side of the beam, see C.13.6.1.6, Chapters C.9, C.13
C-13
ÿfm = average value of ÿf for all beams at the edges of a panel, Chapter C.9 1 , Chapter C.13 ÿf
=
ÿf1 of 2 , Chapter C.13 ÿf in the direction
=
ÿf 2 = angle between the in the direction of
ÿi axis of a strut and the bars in row i of reinforcement passing through that strut, Appendix CA = total angular change of
ÿpx tendon path from end of jack to any low point
consideration, radians, Chapter C.18
ÿs = constant used to calculate Vc in slabs and footings, Chapter C.11 = flexural
ÿv stiffness ratio between the arm of a shear head and the section of composite slab that
surrounds it, see C.11.11.4.5, Chapter C.11
ÿ = ratio of long to short dimension: of free spans for slabs in two directions, see C.9.5.3.3 and C.22.5.4; from the sides of a
column, concentrated load area or reaction area, see C.11.11.2.1; or from the sides of a footing, see C.15.4.4.2,
Chapters C.9, C.11, C.15, C.22 ÿb = ratio between the area of suspended
reinforcement in one section and the total area of reinforcement in traction of the
section, Chapter C.12
ÿdns = relationship used to calculate the reduction in column stiffness due to axial loads
permanent, see C.10.10.6.2, Chapter C.10
ÿds = ratio used to calculate the reduction in stiffness of columns due to lateral loads
permanent, see C.10.10.4.2, Chapter C.10
ÿn = factor to calculate the effect of anchoring the stay cables on the effective resistance to compression of an area
of node, Appendix CA
ÿp = factor used to calculate Vc in prestressed slabs, Chapter C.11 ÿs = factor to
account for the effect of confining reinforcement and cracking on the effective resistance to
compression of concrete in a strut, Appendix CA
ÿt = ratio between the torsional stiffness of the edge beam section and the flexural stiffness of a strip of slab whose width is
equal to the length of the span of the beam measured center to center of the supports, see C. 13.6.4.2, Chapter C.13
ÿ1 = factor relating the depth of the equivalent rectangular compressive stress block to the depth of the neutral axis, see
C.10.2.7.3, Chapters C.10, C.18, Appendix CB = factor used to determine the
fÿ _ transmitted unbalanced moment by bending in slab connections
column, see C.13.5.3.2, Chapters C.11, C.13, C.21 =
pÿ factor by type of prestressing steel, see C.18.7.2, Chapter C.18. = factor used to
ÿ yes
determine the portion of reinforcement to be located in the center band of a
footing, see C.15.4.4.2, Chapter C.15
ÿv = factor used to determine the unbalanced moment transmitted by shear eccentricity in
slab column connections, see C.11.11.7.1, Chapter C.11
ÿ = moment amplification factor to account for the effects of curvature between the ends of the element in compression,
Chapter C.10 ÿ = moment amplification
factor in frames not braced against lateral displacement, to account for lateral displacement caused by gravity and lateral loads,
yes
Chapter C.10
ÿ or= design displacement, mm, Chapter C.21 ÿcr = out-of-
plane deflection, calculated at half height of the wall, corresponding to the moment of cracking, Mcr ,
mm, Chapter C.14
ÿf p= increase in stress in prestressing steels due to factored loads, MPa, Appendix CA ÿf = stress in prestressing steel under
service
$
loads minus decompression stress, MPa,
Chapter C.18
ÿn = out-of-plane deflection calculated at half height of the wall corresponding to the nominal flexural capacity,
Mn , mm, Chapter C.14
ÿo = measured relative lateral displacement (drift) between the top and bottom of a story due to lateral forces, calculated by
first-order elastic structural analysis using stiffness values complying with C.10.10.5.2, mm, Chapter C.10
C-14
ÿr = difference between initial and final deflections (after load removal) in a load test or
repeat load test, mm, Chapter C.20
ÿs = maximum out-of-plane deflection calculated at or near half wall height due to service loads, mm, Chapter C.14
ÿu = calculated deflection at half height of the wall due to factored loads, mm, Chapter C.14 ÿ1 = maximum
deflection measured during the first load test, mm, see C.20.5.2, Chapter C.20 ÿ2 = maximum deflection
measured during the second load test, relative to the position of the structure when starting
the second load test, mm, see C.20.5.2, Chapter C.20
ÿ = net tensile strain in the extreme longitudinal steel in tension, in the nominal strength state, excluding strains caused
you
by effective prestressing, creep, setting shrinkage, and temperature variation, Chapters C.8-10, Appendix CC
ÿ = angle between the axis of a strut, compression diagonal, or compression field and the tensile chord of a member,
Chapter C.11, Appendix CA ÿ = modification
factor that takes into account the reduced mechanical properties of concrete from lightweight, relative to normal-weight
concretes of equal compressive strength, see C.8.6.1, C.11.7.4.3, C.12.2.4(d), C.12.5.2, Chapters C.9, C.11,
C.12, C.19, C.21, C.22 and Appendices CA and CD
ÿÿ = factor for additional deflections due to long-term effects, see C.9.5.2.5, Chapter C.9 = coefficient of
ÿ friction, see C.11.6.4.3, Chapters 1 C.1, C.21 = coefficient of friction
for post-tensioning curvature, Chapter C.18
ÿp ÿ = time-dependent factor for sustained loads, see C.9.5.2.5, Chapter C.9
ÿ = amount of reinforcement As evaluated over area bd , Chapters C.10, C.11, C.13, C.21, Appendix CB ÿÿ
= amount of reinforcement As evaluated over area bd , Chapter C.9, Appendix CB
ÿ
ÿb = amount of reinforcement As evaluated over the area bd that produces balanced deformation conditions
unitary, see C.10.3.2, Chapters C.10, C.13, C.14, Appendix CB
ÿ = ratio between the area of longitudinal reinforcement distributed to the gross area of concrete perpendicular to it
reinforcement, Chapters C.11, C.14, C.21
ÿp = amount of reinforcement Aps evaluated over the area bdp , Chapter
ÿs C.18 = ratio between the volume of reinforcement in the spiral and the total volume of the core confined by the spiral
(measured to the outer diameter of the spiral), Chapters C.10, C.21 =
ÿt amount of transverse reinforcement area distributed to the gross concrete area of a section perpendicular to
this reinforcement, Chapters C.11, C.14, C.21
ÿv = ratio between the area of the stirrups and the area of the contact surface, see C.17.5.3.3, Chapter C.17 =
= amount of reinforcement area As evaluated over area b dw , Chapter C.11 ÿw ÿ
factor of strength reduction, see C.9.3, Chapters C.8-11, C.13, C.14, C.17-22, CAD Appendices
= modification factor for the tensile strength of anchors based on the presence or absence of cracks ÿc,N
in concrete, see CD.5.2.6, Appendix CD =
modification factor for creep pullout resistance based on presence or ÿc,P
absence of cracks in concrete, see CD.5.3.6, Appendix CD
= modification factor for shear resistance of anchors based on the presence or absence of cracks ÿc,V in the
concrete and the presence or absence of supplementary reinforcement, see CD.6.2.7 for anchors subjected to shear,
Appendix CD
= modification factor for tensile strength of post-installed anchors used in non- ÿcp,N concrete
cracked and without supplementary reinforcement, see CD.5.2.7,
ÿe Appendix CD = modification factor for development length based on reinforcement cover, see C.12.2.4, Chapter
C.12 = modification
factor for strength tensile strength of anchors based on the eccentricity of the loads ÿec,N
applied, see CD.5.2.4, Appendix CD
= modification factor for the shear resistance of anchors based on the eccentricity of the loads ÿec,V
applied, see CD.6.2.5, Appendix CD
= modification factor for tensile strength of anchors based on proximity to edges of ÿed,N
concrete elements, see CD.5.2.5, Appendix CD
C-15
= modification factor for shear resistance of anchors based on proximity to edges of ÿed,V
concrete elements, see CD.6.2.6, Appendix CD
ÿh = modification factor for the shear resistance of anchors placed in concrete elements with
hto1.5c
a1 < , see CD.6.2.8, Appendix CD
ÿs = modification factor for development length based on reinforcement size, see C.12.2.4,
Chapter C.12
ÿt = modification factor for development length based on reinforcement location, see C.12.2.4,
Chapter C.12
ÿw = modification factor for development length of corrugated welded wire in tension, see
C.12.7, Chapter C.12
ÿ = index of tension reinforcement, see C.18.7.2, Chapter C.18, Appendix CB ÿÿ = index of
compression reinforcement, see C.18.7.2, Chapter C.18, Appendix CB = index of steel of
prestress, see CB.18.8.1, Appendix CB ÿp
= prestress steel index for flanged sections, see CB.18.8.1, Appendix CB ÿpw
= tension reinforcement index for flanged sections, see CB.18.8.1, Appendix CB ÿw ÿÿ =
compression
w reinforcement index for flanged sections, see CB.18.8.1, Appendix CB
C.2.2 — Definitions
The terms of general use in Title C of Regulation NSR-10 are defined below. Specialized definitions appear in the corresponding
chapters.
Drop Panel — A projection below the slab used to reduce the amount of negative reinforcement on a column or the minimum
thickness required for a slab, and to increase the shear strength of the slab. See C.13.2.5 and C.13.3.7.
Prestressing steel — High-strength steel element such as wire, bar, strand, or a bundle (tendon) of these elements, used to
apply prestressing forces to concrete.
Extreme tension steel — Reinforcement (prestressed or nonprestressed) furthest from the extreme compression fiber.
Additive (Admixture) — Material other than water, aggregates or hydraulic cement, used as a component of concrete, and that
is added to it before or during mixing in order to modify its properties.
Lightweight aggregate — Aggregate that meets the requirements of NTC 4045 (ASTM C330) and has a density when loose
and dry of 1120 kg/m3 or less, determined in accordance with ASTM C29.
Aggregate — Granular material, such as sand, gravel, crushed stone, and blast furnace iron slag, used with a cementing medium
to form hydraulic concrete or mortar.
Wire (Wire) - Steel element that complies with NTC 1907 (ASTM A496) and NTC 4002 (ASTM A82) standards used as
reinforcement, whose diameter is less than No. 2 (1/4") or 6M (6 mm). It can be smooth or corrugated.Its use is limited:
(a) as a component of electro-welded mesh, (b) individually

as shrinkage and temperature reinforcement of elements whose thickness prevents the use of
normal reinforcing bars,
(c) individually as flexural reinforcement in elements that are not part of the seismic resistance system and whose thickness
prevents the use of normal reinforcing bars.
Prestressing wire - Steel element conforming to NTC 159 (ASTM A421) used individually as prestressing steel.
Effective depth of section ( d ) — The distance measured from the extreme fiber in compression to the centroid of the
longitudinal reinforcement subjected to tension.
C-16
Settlement - Subsidence or lowering of the level of a structure due to compression and deformation of the soil or
foundation rock.
Slump (test) - Result of the workability test of a concrete mixture.
Competent Authority (Building official) - The official or other competent authority, in charge of administering and
enforcing this Regulation NSR-10, or its duly authorized representative.
Headed deformed bars — Deformed reinforcing bars with heads attached to one or both ends. The head shall be
attached to the bar end using welding or forging, threaded with compatible threads internal to the head and bar end, or
with a separate bolt-on nut that secures the head to the bar. The net area of support of a headed deformed bar is equal
to the gross area of the head minus the area of the bar and the area of any obstructions, whichever is greater.
Base of structure — The level at which the horizontal ground motions produced by an earthquake are assumed to be
imparted to the building. This level does not necessarily coincide with the ground level.
See Chapter C.21.
Energy dissipation capacity or toughness - It is the capacity of a structural system, a structural element, or a section
of a structural element, to work within the inelastic range of response without losing its resistance. It is quantified by
means of the strain energy that the system, element or section is capable of dissipating in consecutive hysteretic cycles.
When it refers to the seismic resistance system of the building as a whole, it is defined by means of the energy dissipation
capacity coefficient R . The degree of energy dissipation capacity is classified as special (DES), moderate (DMO) and
minimal (DMI).
Service load — The load, specified by Title B of Regulation NSR-10 (without load factors).
Factored Load — The load, multiplied by the appropriate load factors, used to design members using the NSR-10
Strength Design Method. See C.8.1.1 and C.9.2.
Dead load (Dead load) — Dead loads supported by an element, as defined in Title B of the NSR-10 Regulation (without
load factors).
Live load (Live load) — Live load specified in Title B of Regulation NSR-10 (without load factors).
Structural truss — Framework of reinforced concrete elements subjected primarily to axial forces.
Shoring (Shores) - Temporary structure of wood or metallic elements, of adequate shape, dimensions and safety for the
placement of reinforcement and concrete of a structural element, and to support them while the concrete acquires
adequate resistance.
Foundation (Foundation) - Set of structural elements intended to transmit the loads of a structure to the soil or
supporting rock.
Column — A member with a ratio of height to least lateral dimension greater than 3 used primarily to resist compressive
axial loading. For a tapered member, the shortest side dimension is the average of the top and bottom dimensions of the
shortest side.
Design load combination — Combination of factored loads and forces given in C.9.2.
Concrete (Concrete) — A mixture of portland cement or any other hydraulic cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate,
and water, with or without admixtures.
C-17
All-lightweight concrete —Lightweight concrete containing lightweight coarse and fine aggregate, and meeting the
specifications of NTC 4045 (ASTM C330).
Normal weight concrete (Normalweight concrete) — Concrete that contains aggregates that comply with the
specifications in NTC 174 (ASTM C33).
Structural concrete — All concrete used for structural purposes including plain and reinforced concrete.
Lightweight concrete — Lightweight aggregate concrete having an equilibrium density, as defined by NTC 4022 (ASTM
C567), between 1440 and 1840 kg/m3 . The lightweight concrete covered by Title C of Regulation NSR-10 corresponds
to a concrete whose components strictly comply with the requirements of this Title C. Lightweight concrete that does not
meet these requirements can only be used with prior authorization from the Permanent Advisory Commission of the
Seismic-Resistant Construction Regime, created by Law 400 of 1997 and attached to the Ministry of Environment,
Housing and Territorial Development, in accordance with what Law 400 of 1997 prescribes for the approval of materials
that are outside the scope of the Regulation NSR-10.
Sand-lightweight concrete of normal weight (Sand-lightweight concrete) — Lightweight concrete that contains normal-
weight fine aggregates and that comply with the specifications of NTC 174 (ASTM C33) and lightweight coarse aggregates
that comply with the specifications of NTC 174 (ASTM C33). NTC 4045 (ASTM C330).
Precast concrete — A structural concrete member constructed at a location other than its final location in the structure.
Prestressed concrete — Structural concrete to which internal stresses have been introduced in order to reduce potential
tensile stresses in the concrete caused by loading.
Reinforced concrete — Structural concrete reinforced with not less than the minimum amount of prestressing or
nonprestressing reinforcing steel specified in Chapters C.1 through C.21 and Appendices CA through CC.
Steel fiber-reinforced concrete — Concrete containing dispersed, randomly oriented steel fibers.
Plain concrete — Structural concrete without reinforcement or with less reinforcement than the specified minimum for
reinforced concrete.
Connection — A zone that joins two or more elements. In Chapter C.21, a connection also refers to a zone joining
elements in which one or more are precast, and to which the following more specific definitions apply:
Ductile connection — A connection in which creep occurs as a consequence of design displacements for seismic
events.
Strong connection — A connection that remains elastic when the connecting members yield as a result of seismic
design displacements.
Curing (Curing) - Process by means of which the concrete hardens and acquires resistance, once placed in its final
position.
Net Tensile Strain — Tensile strain when nominal strength is reached, excluding strains due to effective prestressing,
creep, shrinkage, and temperature.
Equilibrium density —Density of lightweight concrete after being exposed to 50 ± 5 percent relative humidity and a
temperature of 23 ± 2°C for a period of time sufficient to achieve a constant density (see NTC 4022 [ASTM C567]).
Design Story Drift Ratio — The relative difference in design drift between the top and bottom of a story, divided by the
story height. See Title A and Chapter C.21.
C-18
Shear cap — Projection under a slab used to increase the shear resistance of the slab. See C.13.2.6.
Design displacement — Total lateral displacement expected for the design earthquake, as required by Title A of
Regulation NSR-10. See Chapter C.21.
Structural diaphragm — A structural element, such as a floor or deck slab, that transmits forces acting in the plane of
the diaphragm to vertical elements of the seismic-resisting system. See Chapter C.21 for requirements for earthquake
resistant structures.
Basic monostrand anchorage device — An anchorage device used with any single strand or single bar 15 mm or less
in diameter, which satisfies C.18.21.1 and the requirements for industrially fabricated anchorage elements of the ACI
423.6.
Basic multistrand anchorage device — An anchorage device used with multiple strands, bars, or wires, or with bars
greater than 15 mm in diameter, that satisfies C.18.21.1 and the requirements for tensile strengths. bearing strength and
minimum plate stiffness from AASHTO Bridge Specification, Division I, Items C.9.21.7.2.2 through C.9.21.7.2.4
Anchorage device — In post-tensioning, the device used to transfer the post-tensioning force from the prestressing steel
to the concrete.
Special anchorage device — An anchorage device that meets C.18.15.1 and the AASHTO “Standard Specifications for
Highway Bridges,” Division II, Item C.10.3.2.3 acceptance tests.
Contract documents (Contract documents) — Documents, including plans and project specifications, necessary for
the work in question.
Post-Tensioning Duct (Duct) — Duct (smooth or corrugated) to place the prestressing steel required to apply post-
tensioning. Requirements for post-tensioned ducts are found in C.18.17.
Collector element — Element that acts in axial tension or compression to transmit the forces induced by the earthquake
between a structural diaphragm and the vertical elements of the resistance system against seismic forces. See Chapter
C.21.
Boundary element — Zones along the edges of walls and structural diaphragms, reinforced with longitudinal and
transverse reinforcement. Border elements do not necessarily require an increase in wall or diaphragm thickness. The
edges of openings in walls and diaphragms shall be provided with edge elements as required in C.21.9.6 or C.21.11.7.5.
See Chapter C.21.
Special boundary element — A boundary element required in sections C.21.7.6.2 or C.21.7.6.3.
Composite concrete flexural members — Precast concrete elements or cast-in-place elements subject to flexure,
fabricated in separate stages, but interconnected in such a way that all elements respond to loads as a unit.
Formwork and forms (Formwork) - Molds with the shape and dimensions of the structural elements, in which the
reinforcement is placed and fresh concrete is poured.
Unbonded Prestressing Tendon Wrap (Sheating) — A material that encapsulates the prestressing steel to prevent
adhesion of the prestressing steel to the surrounding concrete, to provide protection against corrosion, and to contain the
corrosion-inhibiting wrap.
Effort (Stress) — Force per unit area.
Stirrup (Stirrup) — Reinforcement used to resist shear and torsion forces in a structural element; usually consists of
bars, wires, or electro-welded wire reinforcement (smooth or deformed) either without
C-19
folds or folds in L-shape, U-shape or rectangular shapes, and placed perpendicular or at an angle to the longitudinal
reinforcement. (In English the term “stirrup” is normally applied to the transverse reinforcement of members subjected to
flexure and the term “tie” to those in members subjected to compression.) See also “Stirrup (Tie)”.
Tie — A bent bar or wire that encircles the longitudinal reinforcement. A continuous bar or wire bent into a circle, rectangle,
or other polygonal shape with no reentrant corners is acceptable. See also “Stirrup (Stirrup)”.
Closed Confinement Hoop — It is a closed hoop or a continuously rolled hoop. A closed confinement abutment can be
made up of several elements, each of which must have seismic hooks at its ends. A continuous rolled stirrup shall have
seismic hooks at both ends.
See Chapter C.21.
Load factor – Also called load coefficient. It is a coefficient that takes into account the unavoidable deviations of the real
loads with respect to the nominal loads and the uncertainties that are taken into account in the structural analysis when
transforming the loads into internal effects in the elements, and by the probability that more than one extreme load occurs
simultaneously. See B.2.1.
Strength reduction factor (ÿ) - Also called strength reduction coefficient. Coefficient that multiplies the nominal resistance
to convert it into design resistance.
See from B.2.1.
Curvature friction — Friction resulting from bending or curvature of the specified path of prestressing tendons.
Wobble Friction — In prestressed concrete, the friction caused by an unintentional deviation of the prestressed duct from
its specified profile.
Jacking force — In prestressed concrete, the force temporarily exerted by the device used to tension the prestressing
steel.
Seismic forces (Seismic forces) - These are the seismic forces prescribed in Title A of Regulation NSR-10.
Standard hook - A bend in the end of a reinforcing bar that meets the requirements of Chapter C.7.
Seismic hook — A hook at the end of a stirrup or supplementary hook that has a bend of more than 135 degrees, except
that in closed circular confinement stirrups they must have a bend of not more than 6d (but not less than 75mm ) . than
hooks must have an extension to hook the longitudinal reinforcement and project less b than 90 degrees. The seismic
towards the interior of the abutment or closed confinement abutment. See C.7.1.4 and Chapter C.21.
Crosstie Hook — Continuous reinforcing bar used as cross reinforcement made of No. 3 (3/8") or 10M (10 mm) diameter
bar or larger, having a seismic hook at its ends and permitted to one of its ends a hook not less than 90 degrees with a
minimum extension of six times the diameter at the other end is used. The hooks must embrace the peripheral longitudinal
bars. The 90 degree hooks of two successive supplementary hooks, which embrace the The same longitudinal bars must
be left with staggered ends. The supplementary stirrups must be manufactured with the same diameter and yield strength
as the main confining stirrups. See Chapters C.7, C.21.
Construction joint - Interruption of concrete placement, whether temporary, construction, or permanent.
Contraction joint — A notch that is molded, sawn, or machined into a concrete structure to create a plane of weakness
and regulate the location of cracking resulting from dimensional variations in different parts of the structure.
Expansion Joint (Isolation Joint) — Separation between adjacent parts of a concrete structure, usually a vertical plane,
at a defined location in the design such that it interferes to a minimum with the
C-20
behavior of the structure, and at the same time allow relative movements in three directions and avoid the formation
elsewhere of cracks in the concrete and through which part or all of the bonded reinforcement is interrupted.
Compression controlled strain limit — Net strain in tension under balanced strain conditions. See C.10.3.3.
Embedment length — The length of reinforcement embedded in the concrete that extends beyond a critical section.
Development length for a bar with a standard hook - It is the shortest distance between the critical section where the
bar must develop its full resistance, and a tangent to the outer face of the 90º or 180º hook .
Development length —The embedment length of the reinforcement, including prestressing strands, in the concrete that
is required to develop the design strength of the reinforcement at a critical section. See C.9.3.3.
Transfer length — The embedment length of the prestressing strand in the concrete that is required to transfer the
effective prestress to the concrete.
Span (Span length) — See C.8.9.
Cementitious materials — Materials specified in Chapter 3 that have cementitious properties by themselves when used
in concrete, such as Portland cement, blended hydraulic cements, and expansive cements, or such materials combined
with fly ash, other raw or calcined pozzolans, silica fume, and granulated blast furnace slag or both.
Calculations Memory - Technical justification of the dimensions, reinforcements and specifications of a structure, as
presented in the construction plans.
Modulus of elasticity — Ratio between the normal stress and the corresponding unit strain, for tensile or compressive
stresses less than the proportionality limit of the material.
See C.8.5.
Wall (Wall) — Element, generally vertical, used to enclose or separate spaces.
Structural wall — A wall designed to resist combinations of shear, moment, and axial forces. A shear wall is a structural
wall. A structural wall designed as part of the system resistant to seismic forces is classified as follows:
Special structural wall – DES (Special structural wall) — A wall built on site or precast with special energy dissipation
(DES) capacity that meets the requirements of C.21.1.3 through C.21.1.7, C.21.9 and C.21.10, as applicable, in addition
to the requirements for ordinary reinforced concrete structural walls with minimum energy dissipation capacity (DMI)
contained in Chapters C.1 through C.18.
Intermediate structural wall – DMO (Intermediate structural wall) — Wall built on site or precast with moderate energy
dissipation capacity (DMO) that meets all applicable requirements of Chapters C.1 through C.18, in addition to what is
specified in C.21.4.
Ordinary reinforced concrete structural wall – DMI (Ordinary reinforced concrete structural wall) — Wall with
minimum energy dissipation capacity (DMI) that meets the requirements of Chapters C.1 to C.18.
Ordinary structural plain concrete wall — Wall with no energy dissipation capacity that meets the requirements of
Chapter C.22.
Joint — Part of a structure that is common to the intersecting elements. The effective cross-sectional area within a joint
of a special moment-resistant frame with special energy dissipation capacity (DES), Aj , to calculate the shear resistance
is defined in C.21.7.4.1. See Chapter C.21.
C-21
Work (Work) — All construction or separately identifiable parts that must be built in accordance with the contract
documents.
Pedestal (Pedestal) — Element having a ratio of height to least lateral dimension less than or equal to 3, used primarily
to support axial compressive loads. For a tapered member, the smallest side dimension is the average of the top and
bottom dimensions of the smallest side.
Headed shear stud reinforcement — Reinforcement consisting of individual or grouped headed bolts, with anchorage
provided by one head at each end or by a common base consisting of a steel plate or profile .
Moment frame — Frame in which members and nodes resist forces through bending, shear, and axial force. Moment-
resistant frames designated as part of the seismic force resistance system are classified as follows:
Special moment frame – DES (Special moment frame) — Frame built on site that meets the special energy
dissipation capacity (DES) requirements contained in C.21.1.3 to C.21.1.7 and C.21.5 to C.21.7, or a special energy
dissipation capacity (DES) precast frame that meets the requirements of C.21.1.3 to C.21.1.7 and C.21.5. In addition,
the requirements for ordinary moment-resisting frames with minimum energy dissipation capacity (DMI) must be met.
Intermediate Moment Frame — A site-built frame that meets the moderate energy dissipation (MOD) capacity
requirements in C.21.3 and in addition to the requirements for ordinary moment-resisting frames with dissipation
capacity minimum energy (DMI).
Ordinary Moment Frame — A prefabricated or site-built frame that meets the requirements of Chapters C.1 through
C.18 and also meets the minimum energy dissipation capacity (DMI) requirements of the section C.21.2.
Post-tensioning — Method of prestressing in which the prestressing steel is stressed after the concrete has hardened.
Effective prestress — Stress in the prestressing steel after all losses have occurred.
Precast (Precast concrete) - Concrete element, with or without reinforcement, that is built in a place other than its final
position within the structure.
Prestressing (Pretensioning) — Method in which prestressing steel is stressed prior to concrete placement.
Licensed design professional — An individual who is licensed to practice structural design, as defined by Law 400 of
1997 and who is responsible for structural design.
Shores — Support members, vertical or inclined, designed to support the weight of the form, concrete, and construction
loads thereon.
Reshores — Reshores placed tightly under a concrete slab or other structural element after the original form and shores
have been removed from a significant area, thus allowing the new slab or structural element to deform and support its
own weight. and the existing construction loads prior to the installation of the reshores.
Specified concrete cover — Distance between the external surface of the embedded reinforcement and the nearest
external surface of the concrete indicated on the design drawings or project specifications.
Reinforcement —Material conforming to the specifications in C.3.5, excluding prestressing steel, unless explicitly
included.
C-22
Deformed reinforcement — Deformed reinforcement bars, bar mesh, deformed wire, welded wire reinforcement,
complying with C.3.5.3.
Welded wire reinforcement — Reinforcement elements composed of smooth or corrugated wires, which comply with
NTC 4002 (ASTM A82) or NTC 1907 (ASTM A496), respectively, manufactured in sheets or rolls in accordance with NTC
1925 (ASTM A185) or NTC 2310 (ASTM A497M), respectively.
Spiral reinforcement — Continuous reinforcement rolled into the shape of a cylindrical helix.
Plain reinforcement — Reinforcement that does not meet the definition of corrugated reinforcement. See C.3.5.4.
Transverse or lateral reinforcement - Reinforcement intended to resist the effects of shear and torsion stresses. It also
includes the one intended to prevent buckling of the main reinforcement in the columns or in the elements subjected to
compression forces, and the one that produces confinement.
Reinforcement of shrinkage and temperature (Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement) - In slabs, the one
intended to resist the efforts caused by temperature variation or by shrinkage of setting.
Confined region (Confinement region) - It is that part of the reinforced concrete elements confined by transverse
confining reinforcement that meets the special requirements given in Chapter C.21.
Plastic Hinge Region — Length of the frame element at which flexural yielding due to design displacements is expected
to occur, extending at least a distance h from the critical section where flexural yielding begins . See Chapter C.21.
Yield strength — The specified minimum yield strength, or yield point of the reinforcement. Yield strength or yield point
must be determined in tension, in accordance with applicable ASTM standards, as modified in C.3.5 of this Title C of
Regulation NSR-10.
Splitting tensile strength (fct) — Tensile strength of concrete determined in accordance with NTC 1907 (ASTM C496M),
as described in NTC 4045 (ASTM C330). See C.5.1.4.
Design strength — Nominal strength multiplied by a strength reduction factor ÿ . See C.9.3.
Specified compressive strength of concrete ( cfÿ ) — Compressive strength of concrete used in design and evaluated
in accordance with the considerations of Chapter 5, expressed in megapascals (MPa). When the quantity cfÿ is under a
radical sign, you want to indicate only the square root of the numerical value, so the result is in megapascals (MPa).
Nominal Strength — Resistance of an element or a cross section calculated with the provisions and assumptions of the
strength design method of this Title C of Regulation NSR-10, before applying any strength reduction factor. See C.9.3.1.
Required Strength — Resistance that an element, or a cross section thereof, must have to resist the factored loads or
the corresponding combined moments and internal forces as stipulated in this Title C of the NSR-10 Regulation. See
C.9.1.1.
Compression controlled section —Cross section in which the net tensile strain in the extreme steel in tension, at
nominal strength, is less than or equal to the compression controlled strain limit.
Tension controlled section —Cross section in which the net tensile strain in the extreme steel in tension, in the state of
nominal strength, is greater than or equal to 0.005.
C-23
Seismic-force-resisting system — Portion of the structure that is designed to resist the design seismic forces required
by Title A of the NSR-10 Regulation, complying with the provisions and applicable load combinations.
Technical Supervisor (Inspector) - See C.1.3.
Tendon (Tendon) — In prestressing applications, the tendon is the prestressed steel. In post-tensioning applications,
the tendon is the complete assembly consisting of anchors, prestressed steel, and casing for unbonded applications or
grouted ducts for bonded applications.
Bonded Tendon — A tendon in which the prestressing steel is bonded to the concrete either directly or with grout.
Unbonded Tendon — A tendon in which the prestressing steel is prevented from bonding to the concrete and is free to
move with respect to the concrete. The prestressing force is permanently transmitted to the concrete only at the ends of
the tendon through the anchors.
Strand (Strand) - Cable for prestressed concrete made up of seven high-strength steel wires twisted, which complies
with the NTC 2010 (ASTM A416) standard.
Transfer (Transfer) — Operation of transferring the stresses of the prestressing steel from the jacks or from the
tensioning bench to the concrete element.
Beam (Beam, girder) - Structural element, horizontal or approximately horizontal, whose longitudinal dimension is
greater than the other two and its main request is the bending moment, accompanied or not by axial loads, shear forces
and torsion.
Joist, or rib (Joist) - Structural element that is part of a ribbed slab, which works mainly in bending.
Anchorage zone — In post-tensioned members, the portion of the member through which the concentrated prestressing
force is transferred to the concrete and more evenly distributed throughout the section. Its extension is equal to the length
of the greatest dimension of its cross section. In anchorage elements located far from the end of an element, the
anchorage zone includes the disturbed zone in front of and behind the anchorage device.
Precompressed tensile zone —The portion of a prestressed member where flexural tension would occur if the
prestressing force were not present, calculated using gross section properties under unfactored dead and live loads.
C-24
NSR-10 – Chapter C.3 – Materials
CHAPTER C.3 — MATERIALS
C.3.1 — Materials tests

C.3.1.1 — To ensure that the materials used in the work are of the specified quality, the corresponding tests must be carried out
on representative samples of the construction materials. In the case of buildings that must be submitted to Technical Supervision
in accordance with that required by Law 400 of 1997, the Technical Supervisor will establish a quality control program in accordance
with the requirements of A.1.3.9, in this Title C, and in Title I of NSR-10. When the building does not require Technical Supervision,
what is required in Article 19 of Law 400 of 1997 must be complied with, being the responsibility of the builder to carry out and
document the quality controls of the materials required by the Regulation, which for structural concrete are contained in this
document. Title C, in addition to those required in Title I of the Regulations. (See A.1.3.9.6).
C.3.1.2 — Material and concrete tests must be carried out in accordance with the Colombian technical standards, NTC, promulgated
by the Colombian Institute of Technical Standards and ICONTEC Certification indicated in C.3.8. In the absence of these, the
standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), the American Welding Association (AWS), the American
Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), the Post-Tensioning Institute ( PTI), of the American Concrete
Institute (ACI) mentioned in Title C of this Regulation NSR-10. C.3.8 lists the NTC standards, promulgated by ICONTEC, ASTM,
AWS, AASHTO, PTI and ACI mentioned in this Title C of Regulation NSR-10, which are part of it. CR.3.8 lists the ASTM standards
mentioned in Title C of the Regulations. Consult C.1.5 regarding the mandatory nature of the technical standards mentioned in Title
C of Regulation NSR-10.
C.3.1.3 — The complete record of material and concrete tests must always be available for review during the development of the
work and kept in accordance with the provisions of Title I of Regulation NSR 10.
C.3.2 — Cementing materials
C.3.2.1 — The cementitious materials must comply with the relevant standards as follows:
(a) Cement manufactured under the NTC 121 and NTC 321 standards and the use of cements manufactured under the ASTM
C150 standard is also allowed.
(b) Blended hydraulic cements manufactured under ASTM C595, but Types IS (ÿ70) are excluded since they cannot be used
as primary cementing constituents in structural concrete.
(c) Expansive hydraulic cement manufactured under the NTC 4578 (ASTM C845) standard.
(d) Hydraulic cement manufactured under ASTM C1157.
(e) Fly ash, natural pozzolan and calcined materials that comply with NTC 3493 (ASTM C618).
(f) Ground granulated blast furnace slag complying with NTC 4018 (ASTM C989)
(g) Silica fume that complies with NTC 4637 (ASTM C1240).
(h) White cement that complies with the NTC 1362 standard
(i) The use of so-called masonry cements in the manufacture of concrete is prohibited.
C.3.2.2 — The cementing materials used in the work must correspond to those that have been taken as the basis for the selection
of the concrete dosage. See C.5.2.
C-25
C.3.3 — Aggregates
C.3.3.1 — Aggregates for concrete must comply with one of the following standards:
(a) Normal weight aggregate: NTC 174 (ASTM C33),
(b) Lightweight aggregate: NTC 4045 (ASTM C330).
The use of aggregates that have been shown through tests or practical experience to produce concrete of adequate strength and
durability is permitted, provided they are approved by the Technical Supervisor.
C.3.3.2 — The nominal maximum size of the coarse aggregate should not exceed:
(a) 1/5 of the smallest spacing between the sides of the form, nor
(b) 1/3 of the height of the slab, nor to
(c) 3/4 of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or wires, bar bundles, individual tendons, tendon bundles,
or ducts.
These limitations may be waived if, in the judgment of the licensed design professional, the workability and compaction methods are
such that the concrete can be placed without nesting, voiding, or segregation in the mix.
C.3.4 — Water
C.3.4.1 — The water used in mixing the concrete must comply with the provisions of the NTC 3459 (BS3148) standard or of the ASTM
C1602M standard when they are less demanding than those of the NTC 3459 standard.
C.3.4.2 — Mixing water for prestressed concrete or for concrete containing embedded aluminum elements, including that part of the
mixing water contributed by free moisture from the aggregates, shall not contain deleterious amounts of chloride ions. . See C.4.3.1.
C.3.5 — Reinforcing steel
C.3.5.1 — Reinforcement must be corrugated. The smooth reinforcement can only be used in stirrups, spirals or tendons, and
distribution and temperature reinforcement. In addition, the following can be used when Title C of the NSR-10 Regulation so allows:
reinforcement consisting of headed bolts for shear reinforcement, structural steel profiles or tubes, or tubular steel elements. Dispersed
deformed steel fibers are only permitted to resist shear under the conditions indicated in C.11.4.6.1(f).
C.3.5.2 — Welding of reinforcing bars must be carried out in accordance with NTC 4040 (AWS D1.4). The location and type of welded
splices and other required welds on reinforcing bars shall be indicated on the design drawings or project specifications. The NTC
standards for reinforcing bars, except NTC 2289 (ASTM A706M), must be supplemented to require a report of the necessary material
properties to meet the requirements of NTC 4040 (AWS D1.4).
C.3.5.3 — Corrugated reinforcement
C.3.5.3.1 — The deformed reinforcing bars must be made of low alloy steel that comply with the NTC 2289 (ASTM A706M)
standard. The use of stainless steel bars manufactured under the ASTM A955M standard is allowed as long as they also meet the
requirements of NTC 2289 (ASTM A706M). In addition, the following aspects must be taken into account:
(a) The yield strength shall correspond to that determined by tests on full-size bars. The stresses obtained by means of the tensile
test shall be calculated using the nominal area of the bar as indicated in Tables C.3.5.3-1 and C.3.5.3-2.
C-26
(b) The use of reinforcing corrugated steel manufactured under the NTC 245 standard, nor any other type of steel that has been cold worked
or drawn, is not allowed, unless it is explicitly allowed by the standard under which any is manufactured. of the materials allowed by Regulation
NSR-10.
TABLE C.3.5.3-1
NOMINAL DIMENSIONS OF REINFORCING BARS (Diameters based on
millimeters)
Bar Designation NOMINAL DIMENSIONS Area mm²
Diameter Perimeter Mass kg/m
(see note) mm mm 0.222
6M 6.0 28.3 18.85 0.394
8M 8.0 50.3 25.14 0.616
10M 10.0 78.5 31.42 0.887
12M 12.0 113.1 37.70 1.577
16M 16.0 201.1 50.27 1.996
18M 18.0 254.5 56.55 2.465
20M 20.0 314.2 62.83 2.982
22M 22.0 380.1 69.12 3.851
25M 25.0 490.9 78.54 5.544
30M 30.0 706.9 94.25 6.309
32M 32.0 804.2 100.53 7.985
36M 36.0 1017.9 113.10 12.477
45M 45.0 1590.4 141.37 18.638
55M 55.0 2375.8 172.79
Note: The M indicates that they are nominal diameters in mm.
TABLE C.3.5.3-2
eighths of an inch)
Reference Bar Diameter NOMINAL DIMENSIONS Area mm²
Designation Diameter (See Note) Inches mm 6.4 Perimeter Mass kg/m
9.5 12.7 15.9 19.1 22.2 mm 0.250
No. 2 1/4” 32 20.0 0.560
No. 3 3/8” 71 30.0 0.994
No. 4 1/2” 129 40.0 1.552
No. 5 5/8” 199 50.0 2.235
No. 6 3/4” 284 60.0 3.042
No. 7 7/8” 387 70.0 3.973
No. 8 1” 25.4 510 80.0 5.060
No. 9 1-1/8” 28.7 645 90.0 6.404
No. 10 1-1/4” 32.3 819 101.3 7.907
No. 11 1-3/8” 35.8 1006 112.5 11.380
No. 14 1-3/4” 43.0 1452 135.1 20.240
No. 18 2-1/4” 57.3 2581 180.1
Note: The No. of the bar indicates the number of eighths of an inch of the reference diameter.
C.3.5.3.2 — Deformed bars shall comply with one of the NTC or ASTM standards listed in C.3.5.3.1, except that for bars with yf greater than
420 MPa, the yield strength shall be taken as the stress corresponding to a unit strain of 0.35 percent. See C.9.4.
C.3.5.3.3 — Rebars conforming to ASTM A1035M are permitted to be used as transverse reinforcement in C.21.6.4 or spiral reinforcement in
C.10.9.3.
C.3.5.3.4 — Reinforcement grids for concrete must conform to NTC 2043 (ASTM A184M). the bars of
reinforcement, used in reinforcing grills, must comply with NTC 2289 (ASTM A706M).
C-27
C.3.5.3.5 — Corrugated wire for concrete reinforcement must comply with NTC 1907 (ASTM A496M), except that the
wire must not be smaller than size MD25 (5.6 mm in diameter) nor larger than size MD200 (16 mm in diameter), unless
permitted by C.3.5.3.7. For wire with yf greater than 420 MPa, the yield strength shall be the stress corresponding to a
0.35 percent strain. The use of individual wires, corrugated or smooth, is not allowed as reinforcement in the form of stirrups
or as longitudinal reinforcement in elements that are part of the seismic resistance system.
C.3.5.3.6 — The smooth electrowelded reinforcement wire must comply with NTC 1925 (ASTM A185M), except that for
wire with yf greater than 420 MPa, the yield strength must be the stress corresponding to a unit strain of 0.35 per hundred.
Welded intersections shall not be spaced more than 300 mm apart in the direction of calculated stress, except for welded
wire reinforcement used as stirrups in accordance with C.12.13.2.
C.3.5.3.7 — The electrowelded reinforcement of corrugated wire must comply with NTC 2310 (ASTM A497M), except
that for wires with yf greater than 420 MPa, the yield strength must be the stress corresponding to a unit strain of 0.35 per
hundred. Welded intersections shall not be spaced more than 400 mm apart, in the sense of calculated stress, except for
welded wire reinforcement used as stirrups in accordance with C.12.13.2. Corrugated wire with a diameter greater than
MD200 (16 mm diameter) is permitted when used in welded reinforcement that complies with NTC 2310 (ASTM A497M),
but must be treated as plain wire for splice development and design purposes.
C.3.5.3.8 — Galvanized reinforcing bars must comply with NTC 4013 (ASTM A767M). Epoxy coated reinforcing bars
shall comply with NTC 4004 (ASTM A775M) or with ASTM A934M. Bars to be galvanized or epoxy coated must comply
with NTC 2289 (ASTM A706M).
C.3.5.3.9 — Epoxy-coated wires and welded wire reinforcement shall comply with ASTM A884M. Wires to be epoxy
coated shall comply with C.3.5.3.4 and welded wire reinforcement to be epoxy coated shall comply with C.3.5.3.5 or
C.3.5.3.6.
C.3.5.3.10 — Corrugated stainless steel wire and electrowelded reinforcement of corrugated and plain stainless steel wire
for concrete reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A1022M, except that corrugated wire shall not be less than size MD25
(5.6 mm). in diameter) nor larger than size MD200 (16 mm in diameter), and ka yield strength of wire with yf greater than
420 MPa, the yield strength shall be taken as the stress corresponding to 0.35 percent strain . Corrugated wire larger than
size MD200 (16 mm diameter) is permitted when used in welded wire reinforcement meeting ASTM A1022M, but must be
treated as plain wire for splice design and development purposes. Welded intersections in the direction of calculated stress
shall not be spaced more than 300 mm apart for smooth welded wire or 400 mm apart for corrugated welded wire, except
for welded wire reinforcement used as stirrups in accordance with C.12.13.2 .
C.3.5.4 — Smooth reinforcement
C.3.5.4.1 — Smooth reinforcement is only allowed in stirrups, shrinkage and temperature reinforcement, or spiral
reinforcement and cannot be used as longitudinal flexural reinforcement, except when forming electrowelded meshes and
must comply with NTC 161 (ASTM A615M). ) or with the requirements for corrugated reinforcement specified in C.3.5.3.1.
C.3.5.4.2 — Smooth wires for spiral reinforcement must comply with NTC 4002 (ASTM A82M), except that for wires
with yf greater than 420 MPa, the yield strength must be taken as the stress corresponding to a unit strain of 0.35 percent.
C.3.5.5 — Headed bolts for shear reinforcement
C.3.5.5.1 — Headed bolts and their assemblies shall comply with ASTM A1044M.
C.3.5.6—Prestressing Steel
C.3.5.6.1 — Prestressed steel must comply with one of the following standards:
C-28
(a) Wire: NTC 159 (ASTM A421M). (b)

Low relaxation wire: NTC 159 (ASTM A421M). (c) Thoron:
NTC 2010 (ASTM A416M). (d) High
resistance bars: NTC 2142 (ASTM A722M).
C.3.5.6.2 — Wires, strands, and bars not specifically listed in NTC 159 (ASTM A421M), NTC 2010 (ASTM A416M), or
NTC 2142 (ASTM A722M) may be used, provided they are demonstrate that they meet the minimum requirements of these
standards, and that they do not have properties that make them less satisfactory than those of standards NTC 159 (ASTM
A421M), NTC 2010 (ASTM A416M), or NTC 2142 (ASTM A722M).
C.3.5.7 — Structural steel, steel tubes or pipes
C.3.5.7.1 — Structural steel used in conjunction with reinforcing bars in composite members subjected to
compression that meets the requirements of C.10.13.7 or C.10.13.8, must conform to one of the following standards:
(a) Carbon steel; NTC 1920 (ASTM A36M). (b)

High-strength low-alloy steel: NTC 1950 (ASTM A242M). (c) High resistance
low alloy steel to Columbia-Vanadium: NTC 1985 (ASTM A572M). (d) High strength low alloy steel of
345 MPa NTC 2012 (ASTM A588M). (e) Structural shapes: ASTM A992M.
C.3.5.7.2 — Steel tubes or pipes for composite members subjected to compression, which are formed from a concrete-
filled steel tube, meeting the requirements of C.10.13.6, shall comply with one of the following: rules:
(a) Black steel, hot-dip, zinc-coated, Grade B of NTC 3470 (ASTM A53M). (b) Cold formed, welded, seamless:
NTC 4526 (ASTM A500M). (c) Hot-formed, welded, seamless: NTC 2374
(ASTM A501).
C.3.5.8 — The steel used in the reinforcement for concrete composed of dispersed steel fibers must be corrugated and comply
with NTC 5214 (ASTM A820M). The steel fibers must have a length to diameter ratio of not less than 50 and not more than
100.
C.3.5.9 — Headed deformed bars shall comply with ASTM A970M, and obstructions or interruptions in the deforming of the
bar, if any, shall be no greater than 2d measured from the bearing face of the head.b
C.3.5.10 — Evaluation and acceptance of reinforcing steel
C.3.5.10.1 — Representative samples of the reinforcing steel used in the work must be taken and tested, with the frequency
and scope indicated in Title I of Regulation NSR-10. The tests must be carried out in accordance with what is specified in the
NTC standard, of those listed in C.3.8, corresponding to the type of steel.
C.3.5.10.2 — The tests must unequivocally demonstrate that the steel used complies with the corresponding NTC technical
standard and the laboratory that performs the tests must certify compliance with it. A copy of these certificates of conformity
must be sent to the Technical Supervisor and the structural designer engineer.
C.3.5.10.3 — The certificate of conformity issued by the laboratory must contain at least the following: (a) name and
address of the work (b) date of
receipt of the samples and date of performance of the tests, (c) manufacturer and
NTC standard under which the material was manufactured and under which the tests were carried out, (d)
weight per unit length of the reinforcing bar, wire, mesh or strand, and its compliance with permitted variations, and its
nominal diameter,
(e) characteristics of the rebar, in the case of corrugated steel, (f) results
of the tensile test, which must include: the yield strength and the ultimate resistance, evaluated using the nominal area of
the bar, wire, mesh or reinforcing strand indicated in the standard
Corresponding NTC, and the elongation percentage obtained from the test, (g)
bending test result,
C-29
(h) chemical composition when it is requested. (i)

conformity with the manufacturing standard and
(j) name and signature of the laboratory director.
C.3.6 — Additives
C.3.6.1 — Additives for water reduction and setting time modification must comply with NTC 1299 (ASTM C494M).
Admixtures to produce fluid concrete must comply with NTC 4023 (ASTM C1017M).
C.3.6.2 — Air-entraining additives must comply with NTC 3502 (ASTM C260).
C.3.6.3 — Admixtures used in concrete that do not comply with C.3.6.1 and C.3.6.2 must be submitted for prior approval
by the Technical Supervisor.
C.3.6.4 — Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chlorides that do not come from impurities in the admixture
components must not be used in prestressed concrete, in concrete containing embedded aluminum, or in concrete built in
permanent galvanized steel forms. . See C.4.3.1 and C.6.3.2.
C.3.6.5 — The admixtures used in the concrete that contain expansive cement that complies with the NTC 4578 (ASTM
C845) standard, must be compatible with the cement and not produce harmful effects.
C.3.7 — Storage of materials
C.3.7.1 — Cementing material and aggregates must be stored in such a way as to prevent their deterioration or the
introduction of foreign matter.
C.3.7.2 — Any material that has deteriorated or been contaminated must not be used in the concrete.
C.3.8 — Cited standards
C.3.8.1 — The NTC standards of the Colombian Institute of Technical Standards and Certification, ICONTEC that are
mentioned in this Title C of the NSR-10 Regulation are listed below with their series designation and are considered part of
the NSR-10 Regulation, as if fully reproduced here (see A.1.6 and C.1.5):
NTC standards promulgated by ICONTEC:
NTC 1 – Bending test for metallic products. (ASTM A370)
NTC 2 – Tensile test for steel products. (ASTM A370)
NTC 30 – Portland Cement – Classification and nomenclature.
NTC 121 – Portland Cement – Physical and mechanical specifications (ASTM C150).
NTC 159 – Steel wires, without coating, relieved of stress, for prestressed concrete. (ASTM A421)
NTC 161 – Smooth carbon steel bars for reinforced concrete. (Note: C.3.5.5 places limitations on the use of this type of
reinforcing steel.) (ASTM A615)
NTC 174 – Specifications of aggregates for concrete. (ASTM C33)
NTC 220 – Method to determine the compressive strength of hydraulic cement mortars using cubes with a side of 50 mm.
(ASTM C109)
NTC 245 – Cold worked carbon steel bars for reinforced reinforced concrete. (Note: C.3.5.3 prohibits the use of this type
of steel.)
C-30
NTC 248 – Corrugated carbon steel bars for reinforced reinforced concrete. (Note: C.3.5.3 prohibits the use of this type
of steel as rebar.) (ASTM A615)
NTC 321 – Portland cement – Chemical specifications.
NTC 396 – Test method to determine the settlement of concrete. (ASTM C143)
NTC 423 – Standard quality cold-finished carbon steel bars. (ASTM A108)
NTC 454 – Fresh concrete, sampling. (ASTM C172)
NTC 504 – Facing of cylindrical concrete specimens. (ASTM C617)
NTC 550 – Preparation and curing of concrete specimens on site. (ASTM C31)
NTC 673 – Compression resistance test of concrete cylinders. (ASTM C39)
NTC 722 – Indirect tensile test of concrete cylinders. (ASTM C496)
NTC 1032 – Test method for the determination of air content in fresh concrete. pressure method. (ASTM 231)
NTC 1299 – Chemical additives for concrete. (ASTM C494)

NTC 1377 – Preparation and curing of concrete specimens for laboratory testing. (ASTM C192)
NTC 1907 – Steel wire for reinforced concrete. (ASTM A496)
NTC 1920 – Structural steel. (ASTM A36)
NTC 1925 – Welded mesh made of smooth steel wire for reinforced concrete. (ASTM A185)
NTC 1950 – High-strength, low-alloy structural steel. (ASTM A242)
NTC 1985 – High-strength, low-alloy structural quality steel to Columbium (Nionium). (ASTM A 572)
NTC 2010 – Steel cords of seven wires, without coating, for prestressed concrete. (ASTM A416)
NTC 2012 – High-resistance, low-alloy structural steel with a minimum yield point of 345 MPa, in thicknesses up to 100
mm. (ASTM A588)
NTC 2240 – Aggregates used in masonry mortars. (ASTM C144)
NTC 2043 – Meshes made of corrugated steel bars for reinforced concrete. (ASTM A184)
NTC 2142 – High-strength steel bars, without coating, for prestressed concrete. (ASTM A722)
NTC 2289 – Corrugated bars and rolls of low-alloy and/or heat-treated steel for reinforced concrete in earthquake-resistant
constructions. (ASTM A706)
NTC 2310 – Welded mesh made of corrugated wire for concrete reinforcement. (ASTM A497)
NTC 2374 – Round, rectangular and square carbon steel tubes with or without seam, hot-formed for structural purposes.
(ASTM A501)
NTC 3318 – Ready-mixed concrete. (ASTM C94)
NTC 3330 – Test method to determine the longitudinal change of hydraulic cement mortars
exposed to a sulfate solution. (ASTM C1012)
NTC 3353 – Definitions and methods for mechanical testing of steel products. (ASTM A370)
C-31
NTC 3459 – Water for the preparation of concrete. (BS 3148)
NTC 3470 – Welded or seamless steel tubes coated with zinc by hot immersion, or blued.
(ASTM A53)
NTC 3493 – Natural, calcined or raw fly ash and pozzolans, used as mineral additives in Portland cement concrete.
(ASTM C618)
NTC 3502 – Air entraining admixtures for concrete. (ASTM C260)
NTC 3658 – Method for obtaining and testing extracted cores and sawn concrete beams. (ASTM C42)
NTC 4002 – Steel industry. Smooth steel wire for concrete reinforcement. (ASTM A82)
NTC 4004 – Reinforcing steel bars with epoxy coating for concrete reinforcement. (ASTM A775)
NTC 4013 – Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel bars for concrete reinforcement. (ASTM A767)
NTC 4018 – Granulated and ground blast furnace slag, to be used in concrete and mortars. (ASTM C989)
NTC 4022 – Unit mass of structural lightweight concrete. (ASTM C567)
NTC 4023 – Specifications for chemical additives used in the production of fluid concrete. (ASTM C1017)
NTC 4025 – Test method to determine the static modulus of elasticity and Poisson's ratio in compression concrete. (ASTM
C469)
NTC 4027 – Concrete made by volumetric batching and continuous mixing. (ASTM C685)
NTC 4034 – Fixing elements. Specification for Carbon Steel Screws and Bolts, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. (ASTM A307)
NTC 4040 – Welding procedures applicable to steel for concrete reinforcement. (ANSI/AWS D1.4)
NTC 4045 – Lightweight aggregates for structural concrete. (ASTM C330)
NTC 4049 – Method to determine the water-soluble chlorides present in concrete. (ASTM C1218)
NTC 4526 – Electro-welded steel mesh, made of corrugated wire, for concrete reinforcement.
(ASTM A500)
NTC 4578 – Expansive hydraulic cement. (ASTM C845)
NTC 4637 – Specifications for the use of microsilica as an addition to hydraulic cement mortar and concrete. (ASTM 1240)
NTC 5214 – Steel fibers for concrete reinforcement. (ASTM A820)
NTC 5541 – Fiber reinforced concrete. (ASTM C1116)
At the time of adoption of Regulation NSR-10, for the following ASTM standards mentioned in the
Regulation within Title C there was no corresponding NTC standard and therefore the following ASTM standards are
considered part of the NSR-10 Regulation:
ASTM C150-05 – Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM A421/A421M-05 – Standard Specification for Uncoated Stress-Relieved Steel Wire for Prestressed Concrete
ASTM A884/A884M-06 – Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement
C-32
ASTM A934/A934M-07 – Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars
ASTM A955/A955M-07a – Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Stainless-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
ASTM A970/A970M-06 – Standard Specification for Headed Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A992/A992M-06a – Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes
ASTM A1022/A1022M-07 – Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Stainless-Steel Wire and Welded Wire for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A1035/A1035M-07 – Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-Carbon, Chromium, Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A1044/A1044M-05 – Standard Specification for Steel Stud Assemblies for Shear Reinforcement of Concrete
ASTM C29/C29M-97 – Standard Test Method for Bulk Density (“Unit Weight”) and Voids in Aggregates
ASTM C595-07 Standard – Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements
ASTM C1157-03 – Standard Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement
ASTM C1602/C1602M-06 – Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement
Concrete
ASTM C1609/C1609M-06 – Standard Test Method for Flexural Performance of Fiber-Reinforced Concrete (Using
Beam With Third-Point Loading)
C.3.8.2 — Standard NTC 4040 (Structural Welding Code—Reinforcing Steel AWS D1.4/D1.4M:2005) is declared to be
part of this NSR-10 Regulation, as if fully reproduced here.
C.3.8.3 — “Specification for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons (ACI 423.7-07)” is declared to be a part of this NSR-10
Regulation as if fully reproduced here.
C.3.8.4 — It is declared that Sections C.9.21.7.2 and C.9.21.7.3 of Division I and Section C.10.3.2.3 of Division II of
AASHTO "Standard Specification for Highway Bridges" (AASHTO 17th Edition, 2002) form part of this NSR-10 Regulation
as if they were reproduced in full here, for the purposes cited in C.18.15.1.
C.3.8.5 — “Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete (ACI 355.2-07)” is declared to be a part of this
NSR-10 Regulation as if reproduced in its entirety herein, for the purposes cited in Appendix CD.
C.3.8.6 — The American Welding Society's “Structural Welding Code - Steel (AWS D 1.1/D.1.1M:2006)” is declared to
be a part of this NSR-10 Regulation as if reproduced in its entirety herein.
C.3.8.7 — “Acceptance Criteria for Moment Frames Based on Structural Testing (ACI 374.1-05)” is declared to be a part
of this NSR-10 Regulation as if reproduced in its entirety here.
C.3.8.8 — “Acceptance Criteria for Special Unbonded Post-Tensioned Precast Structural Walls Based on Validation
Testing (ACI ITG 5.1-07)” is declared to be a part of this NSR-10 Regulation as if reproduced in its entirety here.
C-33
Grades
C-34
NSR-10 – Chapter C.4 – Durability requirements
CHAPTER C.4 — DURABILITY REQUIREMENTS
C.4.1 — General
C.4.1.1 — The value of cfÿ shall be the greater of the values required: (a) by C.1.1.1, (b) for durability in Chapter C.4, and
(c) for the requirements of structural resistance; and shall be applied in the proportioning of the mixture of C.5.3 and for
the evaluation and acceptance of the concrete of C.5.6. Concrete mixes must be proportioned to comply with the maximum
water-cementitious material ratio (w/ mc) and other requirements based on the exposure class assigned to the concrete
structural element. All cementitious materials specified in C.3.2.1 and combinations of these materials shall be included in
the concrete mix w/ mc ratio calculations .
C.4.1.2 — The maximum w/ mc limits of Chapter C.4 do not apply to lightweight concrete.
C.4.2 — Exposure categories and classes
C.4.2.1 — The licensed design professional shall assign exposure classes according to anticipated exposure severity of
structural concrete members for each exposure category according to Table C.4.2.1.
TABLE C.4.2.1 — EXPOSURE CATEGORIES AND CLASSES
Category Severity Class Condition

It's not Concrete not exposed to freeze-thaw
F0
applicable cycles
Concrete exposed to freeze-thaw
moderate F1 cycles and occasional exposure
F to moisture
Concrete exposed to freezing and
Freeze F2
severe thawing cycles and in continuous
and thaw
contact with moisture
Concrete exposed to freeze-thaw
cycles that will be in continuous
very F3 contact with moisture and exposed to
severe
de-icing chemicals
Soluble
sulfates in
Sulfate (SO4 )
water (SO4 ) dissolved in water,
in soil, % by ppm
weight
Not
S S0 SO 0.10 <4 OS 150
4 <
applicable
Sulfate
moderate S1 0.10 SO ÿ < 0ÿ4150
4 SO 150 < 0
marine water
0.20 SO ÿ ÿ 2 4 1500 ÿSW

ÿ 4
severe S2
10000
very
severe S3 OS 2.004 > OS 410000 >
P Not In contact with water where low
P0
low applicable permeability is not required
required In contact with water where low
required P1 permeability is required
permeability
Not Dry or moisture-protected concrete
C0
applicable
C. Concrete exposed to moisture, but not
Moderate C1 to an external source of chlorides
Protection
of
corrosion Concrete exposed to moisture and an
external source of chlorides from de-
reinforcement severe C2 icing chemicals, salt, brackish
water, seawater, or splashes from the
same source
C-35
C.4.3 — Requirements for concrete mixes

C.4.3.1 — Based on the exposure classes assigned in Table C.4.2.1, concrete mixtures must meet the more stringent
requirements of Table C.4.3.1
TABLE C.4.3.1 — REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE ACCORDING TO EXPOSURE CLASS

Kind Rel. F
ÿ
of c
a/mc
max ± min.
Exposure MPa additional minimum requirements
limits on
the
cemen
Air content N/A table tants N/
F0 N/A 17 AN/
F1 0.45 31 C.4.4.1 table AN/
F2 0.45 31 C.4.4.1 A
table
F3 0.45 31 table C.4.4.1
C.4.4.2
Types of cementing material* Chloride
additive
ASTM ASTM ASTM
c150 C 595 C 1157
calcium
Without Without Without
S0 N/A 17 Without
restriction restriction restriction
restrictions
on type on type on type
IP(MS),
S1 0.50 28 II†‡ MS Without
IS(<70)
(MS) restrictions
IP(HS), Not
S2 0.45 31 V‡ HS
IS(<70)
allowed
(HS)
IP(HS)
and pozola
nas o
V human waste§ HS
puzola either
and puzola Not
S3 0.45 31
nas o IS(<70) nas o allowed
human waste§ (HS) human waste§
and
pozzolanas or
human waste§
P0 N/A P1 17 None
0.50 28 None
Maximum water
soluble chloride ion
(CI– ) content in
concrete, percent by
weight of cement
Reinforced
concrete Related
requirements
C0 N/A C1 17 1.00
None
0.50 7.7.6, 17 0.30
C2 0.40
18.16# 35 0.15 Prestressed Concrete 0.06 0.06 0.06
*Alternative combinations of cementitious materials other than those mentioned in table C.4.3.1 may be allowed provided they
are tested for sulphate resistance and the criteria of C.4.5.1 must be met. †
For exposure to seawater, other types of portland cement containing up to 10 percent tricalcium aluminate (C3A) are
permitted if the w/ mc ratio does not exceed 0.40.
‡
Other types of cement such as type III or type I are allowed in class S1 or S2 exposures if the C3A content is less
than 8 or 5 percent, respectively. §
The amount of the specific source of pozzolan or slag to be used should not be less than the amount that has been
determined by experience in improving sulfate resistance when used in concrete containing Type V cement.
Alternatively, the amount of the specific source of pozzolan or slag to be used must not be less than the amount tested
according to NTC 3330 (ASTM C1012) and must comply with the requirements of C.4.5.1.
ÿ
The content of water-soluble chloride ions from the ingredients including water, aggregates, cementitious materials,
and admixtures of the concrete mix shall be determined according to the requirements of the
NTC 4049 (ASTM C1218M), at ages ranging from 28 to 42 days
#
The requirements of C.7.7.5 see C.18.16 for unbonded prestress tendons shall be met.
±
For lightweight concrete see C.4.1.2
C-36
C.4.4 — Additional requirements for exposure to freezing and thawing
C.4.4.1 — Normal-weight and lightweight concrete exposed to exposure classes F1, F2, or F3 must be air-entrained, with
the air content indicated in Table C.4.4.1. The tolerance on the entrained air content should be ±1.5 percent. For cfÿ
greater than 35 MPa, the entrained air listed in Table C.4.4.1 may be reduced by 1 percent.
TABLE C.4.4.1 — TOTAL AIR CONTENT FOR CONCRETE EXPOSED TO FREEZE

AND THAW CYCLES
Nominal Maximum Air content, percent Exposure
Aggregate Exposure Class F1 Classes F2 and F3 6
Size* (mm) 9.5 12.5 7.5 5.5 7 5 6 4.5 6 4.5 5.5 4 5
19.0
25.0
37.5
50+
75+ 3.5 4.5
*See NTC 174 (ASTM C33) for larger size tolerances for various nominal maximum size designations.
+These air contents apply to the total mix. In testing these concretes, however, aggregate particles larger than 40 mm are
removed by sieving, and the air content in the sieved fraction is determined. (the tolerance on the entrained air content applies
to this value). The air content of the total mixture is calculated from the value determined in the sieved fraction that passes
the 40 mm sieve, indicated in NTC 1032 (ASTM C231).
C.4.4.2 — The amount of pozzolans, including fly ash, silica fume, and slag in concrete for class F3 exposure must not
exceed the limits established in Table C.4.4.2
TABLE C.4.4.2 — REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE SUBJECTED TO EXPOSURE CLASS F3

Maximum percentage
of total cementitious
materials by
weight*
cementitious materials
Fly ash or other pozzolans that comply
with NTC 3493 (ASTM 25
C618)
Slag that complies with NTC 4018 fifty
(ASTM C989)
NTC Compliant Silica Fume 10
4637 (ASTM C1240)
Total fly ash or other pozzolans, slag,
fifty†
and silica fume
Total fly ash or other pozzolans and
35†
silica fume
*
Total cementitious materials also includes ASTM C150, ASTM C595, NTC 4578 (ASTM C845) and ASTM
C1157. The above maximum percentages include: (a)
Fly ash or other pozzolans present in Type IP blended cements per ASTM C595 or ASTM C1157 (b) Slag used in the
manufacture of Type IS blended cements per ASTM C595 or ASTM C1157. (c) Silica fume, according to
NTC 4637 (ASTM C1240), present in added cements. † Fly ash or other pozzolans and
silica fume should not constitute more than 25 and 10 percent, respectively, of the total weight of cementitious materials.
C.4.5 — Alternative cementitious materials for exposure to sulfates
C.4.5.1 — The use of alternative combinations for the cementitious materials mentioned in Table C.4.3.1 is permitted
when sulphate resistance tests are carried out and the criteria of Table C.4.5.1 are met.
C-37
TABLE C.4.5.1 — REQUIREMENTS TO ESTABLISH THE SUITABILITY OF COMBINATIONS OF CEMENTING

MATERIALS EXPOSED TO WATER-SOLUBLE SULPHATES
Maximum expansion when tested
exposure using NTC 3330 (ASTM C1012)
class At 6 months At 12 months At 18 months 0.10
S1 percent 0.05
S2 percent 0.10 percent*
S3 0.10 percent
* The 12-month expansion limit only applies when the 6-month limit is not reached.
C-38
NSR-10 – Chapter C.5 – Concrete quality, mixing and placement
CHAPTER C.5 — QUALITY OF

CONCRETE, MIXING AND PLACING
C.5.1 — General
C.5.1.1 — Concrete shall be proportioned to provide an average compressive strength, fÿ set out in C.5.3.2, cr , is according
and shall meet the durability criteria of Chapter C.4. Concrete shall be produced in such a way that the frequency of
strength results less than cfÿ is minimized , as stated in C.5.6.3.3.
For concrete designed and constructed in accordance with Regulation NSR-10, cfÿ cannot be less than 17 MPa.
C.5.1.2 — The requirements for cfÿ shall be based on cylinder tests, made and tested as stated in
C.5.6.3.
C.5.1.3 — Unless otherwise specified cfÿ shall be based on 28 day tests. If the test is not at 28 days, the test age to obtain
cfÿ must be indicated on the design plans or specifications.
C.5.1.4 — When the design criteria of C.8.6.1, C.12.2.4(d) and C.22.5.6.1 indicate the use of a concrete split tensile
strength value, the laboratory tests in accordance with NTC 4045 (ASTM C330) to establish a value of fÿ corresponding to
cfÿ . ct
C.5.1.5 — Split tensile strength tests shall not be used as a basis for site acceptance of concrete.
C.5.1.6 — Steel fiber reinforced concrete must comply with NTC 5541 (ASTM C1116). The minimum cfÿ for steel fiber
reinforced concrete shall comply with C.5.1.1.
C.5.2 — Concrete Proportioning
C.5.2.1 — The proportioning of the materials for the concrete must be established to achieve:
(a) Workability and consistency to permit easy placement of the concrete within the form and around the reinforcement
under the conditions of placement to be used, without segregation or excessive bleeding.
(b) Resistance to special exposures, as required in Chapter C.4.
(c) Compliance with the endurance test requirements of C.5.6.
C.5.2.2 — When different materials are used for different parts of the proposed work, each combination must be evaluated.
C.5.2.3 — The proportion of the concrete must be established in accordance with C.5.3, or alternatively with C.5.4, and
must comply with the corresponding requirements of Chapter C.4.
C.5.3 — Proportioning based on field experience or trial mixes or both
C.5.3.1 — Sample standard deviation
C.5.3.1.1 — When a concrete plant has test records less than 12 months old, a sample standard deviation ss , shall be
established. Test records from which ss is calculated must meet the following conditions:
C-39
(a) Represent materials, quality control procedures, and conditions similar to those expected, and variations in materials
and proportions within the sample must not have been more restrictive than those of the proposed work.
(b) Represent a concrete produced to meet a specified compressive strength or strengths within 7 MPa of cf
. ÿ
(c) Consist of at least 30 consecutive trials, or two groups of consecutive trials totaling at least 30 trials as defined in
C.5.6.2.4, except as specified in C.5.3.1.2.
C.5.3.1.2 — When the concrete production facility does not have test records that conform to the requirements of
C.5.3.1.1(c), but does have test records that are less than 12 months old, based on For 15 to 29 consecutive tests, the sample
standard deviation ss shall be established as the product of the calculated sample standard deviation and the modification
factor from Table C.5.3.1.2. To be acceptable, test records must conform to requirements (a) and (b) of C.5.3.1.1, and must
represent a single record of consecutive tests spanning a period of not less than 45 consecutive calendar days.
TABLE C.5.3.1.2 — MODIFICATION FACTOR FOR THE SAMPLE STANDARD DEVIATION

WHEN LESS THAN 30 TRIALS ARE AVAILABLE
Modification factor for the
Number of trials* standard deviation of the
†
sample
Less than 15 Use table C.5.3.2.2 1.16 1.08
15
20
25 1.03
30 or more 1.00
*
Interpolate for a number of intermediate trials.
†
Modified sample standard deviation, ss , for use in the fÿ of C.5.3.2.1.
required average strength determination of
cr
C.5.3.2 — Required average strength
C.5.3.2.1 — The average compressive strength required, fÿ cr

, used as a base for dosing
Concrete shall be determined according to Table C.5.3.2.1, using the standard deviation, ss , calculated in accordance with
C.5.3.1.1 or C.5.3.1.2.
TABLE C.5.3.2.1 — AVERAGE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH REQUIRED WHEN DATA IS AVAILABLE TO

ESTABLISH A SAMPLE STANDARD DEVIATION
Specified
Average compressive strength required,
compressive
MPa
strength, MPa
Use the highest value obtained from
ÿ
equations (C.5-1) and (C.5-2)
ÿ
cf 35
ÿ ÿ
Fcr = f1.34s +
c yes
(C.5-1)
ÿ ÿ
Fcr = f c2.33s 3.5 + yes
ÿ
(C.5-2)
Use the highest value obtained with equations
ÿ
(C.5-1) and (C.5-3) ff 1.34s (C.5-1) +
>
cf 35
ÿ
= ÿ
cr c yes
ÿ ÿ
Fcr = 0.90f 2.33s
c + yes
(C.5-3)
C.5.3.2.2 — When a concrete production facility does not have field strength test records for the calculation of ss that
conforms to the requirements of C.5.3.1.1 or C.5.3.1.2, fÿ shall be determined of Table C.5.3.2.2,
cr and the documentation
regarding the average resistance must comply with the requirements of C.5.3.3.
C-40
TABLE C.5.3.2.2 — AVERAGE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH REQUIRED WHEN NO DATA IS AVAILABLE TO

ESTABLISH A SAMPLE STANDARD DEVIATION
Specified compressive strength, Average compressive strength
MPa cf 21 ÿ ÿÿ required, MPa
ÿ
< F
ÿ
= f7.0 +
ÿ
cr c
21 f 35 F
ÿ
= f8.3 +
ÿ
c cr c
ÿ
> F
ÿ
= 1.10f 5.0+
ÿ
cf 35 cr c
C.5.3.3 — Documentation of Average Compressive Strength
Documentation that the proposed concrete dosage will produce an average compressive strength equal to or greater than
the required average compressive strength, , (see C.5.3.2), shall consist of a record of strength F'
tests
cr in work, in various
records of resistance tests, or in test mixtures.
C.5.3.3.1 — When test records are used in accordance with C.5.3.1.1 or C.5.3.1.2 to show that fÿ (see C.5.3.2), these
concrete. will produce materials and conditions similar to those records
cr shall represent the proposed proportions for the
expected. The changes in the materials, conditions and dosages within the test records must not be more restrictive than
those of the proposed work. For the purpose of documenting potential average resistance, test records consisting of less
than 30, but not less than 10 consecutive tests may be accepted provided they cover a period of not less than 45 days. The
required proportion for concrete may be established by interpolation between the strengths and proportions of two or more
test records, provided the other requirements of this section are met.
C.5.3.3.2 — When an acceptable record of on-site test results is not available, it is permitted for the
Concrete dosage is established with trial mixes that meet the following requirements:
(a) The materials must be those proposed for the work.
(b) Test mixes should have a range of dosages that produce a range of compressive strengths spanning fÿ and that
meet the durability requirements
cr of Chapter C.4.
(b) The test mixes must have a slump within the range specified for the proposed work; and for air-entrained concrete,
the air content must be within the tolerance specified for the proposed work.
(c) For each test mix, at least two 150 by 300 mm cylindrical test pieces or three 100 by 200 mm test pieces must be
manufactured and cured in accordance with NTC 1377 (ASTM C192M). The specimens shall be tested at 28 days or at
the test age established for cfÿ .
(d) The results of the compressive strength tests of the test samples, at the established test age, shall be used to
establish the composition of the concrete mixture proposed for the work.
The proposed concrete mix must achieve average compressive strength as required by C.5.3.2 and meet the applicable
durability criteria of Chapter C.4.
C.5.4 — Dosage when there is no experience on site or test mixtures
C.5.4.1 — If the data required by C.5.3 is not available, the proportioning of the concrete shall be based on other experience
or information with the approval of the licensed design professional. The average strength fÿ of concrete produced with
materials
cr similar to those proposed for use shall be the compression required.
at least 8.3 MPa greater than cfÿ . This alternative should not be used if cfÿ is greater than 35 MPa.
C.5.4.2 — Concrete proportioned in accordance with this section shall conform to the durability requirements of Chapter C.4
and the compressive strength test criteria of C.5.6.
C-41
C.5.5 — Average Compressive Strength Reduction
As more data becomes available during construction, it is permissible to reduce the amount by which the required average
, (a) 30 or more tests are
strength shall exceed cfÿ , providedF'crthat:
available and the average of the results of tests exceeds that required by C.5.3.2.1, using a sample standard deviation
calculated in accordance with C.5.3.1.1, or (b) 15 to 29 tests are available and the average of the test results
is tests exceeds that required by C.5.3.2.1, using a sample standard deviation calculated in accordance with C.5.3.1.2, and
(c) The special exposure requirements of Chapter C.4 are met.
C.5.6 — Evaluation and acceptance of concrete
C.5.6.1 —Concrete shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of C.5.6.2 through C.5.6.5. Testing of fresh concrete
carried out on site, preparation of specimens that require curing under site conditions, preparation of specimens to be tested in
the laboratory, and recording of fresh concrete temperatures while preparing the strength specimens It must be carried out by
qualified technicians in field tests.
All laboratory tests must be performed by qualified laboratory technicians.
C.5.6.2 — Frequency of tests
C.5.6.2.1 — Samples (see C.5.6.2.4) for strength tests of each class of concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than
once per day, and not less than once per 40 m3 of concrete . , not less than once for every 200 m2 of surface of slabs or walls.
Similarly, at least one sample must be taken for every 50 mixing batches of each class of concrete.
C.5.6.2.2 — When in a given project the total volume of concrete is such that the frequency of tests required by C.5.6.2.1
provides less than five strength tests for each given class of concrete, the tests shall be made at least least in five randomly
selected mixing batches, or in each batch when fewer than five are used.
C.5.6.2.3 — When the total amount of a given class of concrete is less than 10 m3 , Strength tests
are not required when the evidence that the strength is satisfactory is approved by the Technical Supervisor.
C.5.6.2.4 — A strength test shall be the average of the strengths of at least two 150 by 300 mm specimens or of at least three
100 by 200 mm specimens prepared from the same concrete sample and tested at 28 days or at the test age established for the
determination of cfÿ .
C.5.6.3 — Standard Cured Specimens
C.5.6.3.1 — The samples for resistance tests must be taken in accordance with NTC 454 (ASTM C172).
C.5.6.3.2 — The cylinders for resistance tests must be manufactured and cured in the laboratory in accordance with NTC
550 (ASTM C31M), and must be tested in accordance with NTC 673 (ASTM C39M). Cylinders must be 100 by 200 mm or 150
by 300 mm.
C.5.6.3.3 — The resistance level of a determined class of concrete is considered satisfactory if it complies with
the following two requirements:
(a) Each arithmetic average of three consecutive strength tests (see C.5.6.2.4) is equal to or greater than cfÿ .
(b) No result of the strength test (see C.5.6.2.4) is less than cfÿ by more than 3.5 MPa when cfÿ is 35 MPa or less; or by
more than 0.10fÿ when cfÿ is greater than
c 35 MPa.
C-42
C.5.6.3.4 — When either of the two requirements of C.5.6.3.3 is not met, the necessary measures must be taken to
increase the average of the results of the following resistance tests. When the requirements of C.5.6.3.3(b) are not met,
the requirements of C.5.6.5 must be met.
C.5.6.4 — Field-cured specimens
C.5.6.4.1 — If required by the competent authority, resistance tests must be carried out on cured cylinders
in working conditions.
C.5.6.4.2 — Field-cured cylinders shall be field-cured in accordance with NTC 550 (ASTM C31M).
C.5.6.4.3 — Field-cured test cylinders shall be fabricated at the same time and using the same
material used in the manufacture of test cylinders cured in the laboratory.
C.5.6.4.4 — Procedures for protecting and curing concrete must be improved when the strength of field-cured
cylinders, at the test age established to determine cfÿ , is less than 85 percent of the strength of companion cured
cylinders in laboratory. The 85 percent limitation does not apply where the strength of those that were field cured exceeds
cfÿ by more than 3.5 MPa.
C.5.6.5 — Investigation of low strength test results
C.5.6.5.1 — If any strength tests (see C.5.6.2.4) of laboratory-cured cylinders are less than cfÿ by more than the
values given in C.5.6.3.3(b), or if the tests field-cured cylinders indicate a deficiency of protection and curing (see
C.5.6.4.4), steps must be taken to ensure that the load capacity and durability of the structure is not jeopardized.
C.5.6.5.2 — If the possibility that the concrete is of low strength is confirmed and the calculations indicate that the
capacity to bear the loads has been significantly reduced, tests of cores extracted from the area in question must be
allowed in accordance with NTC 3658 ( ASTM C42M). In such cases, three cores shall be taken for each strength test
result (see C.5.6.2.4) that is less than the values given in C.5.6.3.3 (b).
C.5.6.5.3 — The cores must be extracted, the humidity must be preserved by placing the cores inside hermetic
containers or bags, they must be transported to the laboratory and tested according to NTC 3658 (ASTM C42). Cores
should be tested no sooner than 48 hours and no later than 7 days after extraction, unless otherwise approved by the
licensed design professional. Whoever specifies the tests mentioned in NTC 3658 (ASTM C42M) must be a professional
authorized to design.
C.5.6.5.4 — Concrete in the zone represented by the cores is considered structurally adequate if the average of three
cores is at least equal to 85 percent cfÿ , and no core has a strength less than 75 percent cf'. cfÿ . When cores give
erratic values, additional cores should be allowed to be removed from the
same area.
C.5.6.5.5 — If the criteria in 5.6.5.4 are not met, and if structural safety remains in doubt, the authority having
jurisdiction is empowered to order load tests in accordance with Chapter C.20 for the doubtful part of the structure, or to
take other measures depending on the circumstances.
C.5.6.6 — Steel fiber reinforced concrete
C.5.6.6.1 —The acceptance of steel fiber reinforced concrete used in beams in accordance with C.11.4.6.1(f) shall be
determined by tests conducted in accordance with ASTM C1609. In addition, the strength test procedure shall comply
with C.5.6.1.
C.5.6.6.2 — Steel fiber reinforced concrete is considered acceptable for shear resistance if it meets conditions (a),
(b), and (c):
(a) The mass of corrugated steel fibers per cubic meter of concrete is greater than or equal to 60 kg.
C-43
(b) The residual strength obtained in the flexural test performed in accordance with ASTM C1609 when a deflection in
the center of the span equal to 1/300 of the span is reached, is greater than or equal to 90 percent of the strength. of
the first peak of resistance obtained in the bending test or of 90 percent of the resistance corresponding to ff
obtained by means of equation (C.9-10), whichever is greater; and
(c) The residual strength obtained in the flexural test performed in accordance with ASTM C1609 when a deflection in
the center of the span equal to 1/150 of the span is reached, is greater than or equal to 75 percent of the strength of
the span. first peak of resistance obtained in the bending test or 75 percent of the resistance corresponding to ff
obtained by means of equation (C.9-10), whichever is greater.
C.5.7 — Equipment and site preparation

C.5.7.1 — Preparation prior to concrete placement must include the following:
(a) All concrete mixing and conveying equipment must be clean;
(b) All debris and ice must be removed from the spaces to be occupied by the concrete;
(c) The form must be coated with a suitable release agent.
(d) Infill masonry units in contact with concrete must be adequately moistened;
(e) The reinforcement must be completely free of ice or other detrimental coatings;
(f) Free water must be removed from the concrete placement site before placing it, unless it is to be
use a pipe for placement under water (tremie) or as permitted by the competent authority;
(g) The surface of the hardened concrete must be free of laitance and other harmful materials or
crumbling before additional concrete is placed over it.
C.5.8 — Mixed
C.5.8.1 — All concrete must be mixed until a uniform distribution of materials is achieved and the mixer must be completely
unloaded before it is reloaded.
C.5.8.2 — Ready-mix concrete must be mixed and delivered in accordance with the requirements of NTC 3318 (ASTM
C94M) or NTC 4027 (ASTM C685M).
C.5.8.3 — Field-mixed concrete shall be mixed in accordance with (a) to (e):
(a) Mixing must be done in a mixer of an approved type; (b) The mixer
must be rotated at the speed recommended by the manufacturer; (c) Mixing must
continue for at least 90 seconds after all materials are in the drum, unless a shorter time is shown to be satisfactory by
mixing uniformity tests, NTC 3318 (ASTM C94M). (d) The handling, dosing and mixing of materials must comply
with the applicable provisions of NTC 3318 (ASTM
C94M).
(e) A detailed record must be kept to identify:

(1) Number of mixing batches produced;
(2) Dosage of concrete produced;
(3) Approximate location of final deposit in the structure;
(4) Time and date of mixing and placement;
C-44
C.5.9 — Transportation
C.5.9.1 — Concrete must be transported from the mixer to the final placement site using methods that prevent segregation
or loss of material.
C.5.9.2 — Transportation equipment must be capable of providing a supply of concrete at the placement site without
segregation of components, and without interruptions that could cause loss of plasticity between successive layers of
placement.
C.5.10 — Placement
C.5.10.1 — Concrete must be deposited as close as possible to its final location to avoid segregation due to handling or
displacement.
C.5.10.2 — Placement must be carried out at a rate such that the concrete maintains its plastic state at all times and flows
easily into the spaces between the reinforcement.
C.5.10.3 — Concrete that has partially hardened, or that has been contaminated with foreign material, shall not be placed
in the structure.
C.5.10.4 — Concrete to which water is added after preparation should not be used, or that has been mixed after its initial
setting, unless approved by the professional authorized to design.
C.5.10.5 — Once the concrete placement has begun, it must be carried out in a continuous operation until the filling of the
panel or section is completed, defined by its limits or predetermined joints, except as permitted or prohibited by C.6.4. .
C.5.10.6 — The top surface of layers placed between vertical forms should generally be level.
C.5.10.7 — When construction joints are required, they shall be made in accordance with C.6.4.
C.5.10.8 — All concrete must be carefully compacted by suitable means during placement, and must be fully accommodated
around reinforcement and embedded fixtures, and at form corners.
C.5.11 — Curing
C.5.11.1 — Unless curing is performed in accordance with C.5.11.3, concrete shall be maintained at a temperature above
10ºC and in moist conditions for at least the first 7 days after casting. placement (except for high initial strength concrete).
C.5.11.2 — High early strength concrete shall be maintained above 10ºC and in moist conditions for at least the first 3
days, except when cured in accordance with C.5.11.3.
C.5.11.3 — Accelerated cure
C.5.11.3.1 — Curing with high pressure steam, atmospheric pressure steam, heat and moisture, or other process
accepted, it can be used to speed up strength development and reduce curing time.
C.5.11.3.2 — The accelerated curing must provide a compressive strength of the concrete, in the stage of
load considered, at least equal to the design resistance required in said load stage.
C.5.11.3.3 — The curing procedure shall be such as to produce concrete with equivalent durability
at least that obtained using the curing methods indicated in C.5.11.1 or C.5.11.2.
C.5.11.4 — When required by the professional authorized to design, complementary tests must be carried out
strength, in accordance with C.5.6.4, to ensure satisfactory curing.
C-45
C.5.12 — Cold Weather Requirements
C.5.12.1 — Adequate equipment must be available in order to heat the materials for the manufacture of concrete and
protect it against freezing temperatures or close to it.
C.5.12.2 — All concrete component materials and all reinforcing steel, forms, fills, and soil with which the concrete is to
come in contact shall be free of frost.
C.5.12.3 — Frozen or ice-containing materials should not be used.
C.5.13 — Hot weather requirements
In hot weather, adequate attention should be given to component materials, production methods, handling, placement,
protection, and curing in order to avoid excessive temperatures in the concrete or evaporation of water, which could affect
the required strength or performance of the item or structure.
C-46
NSR-10 – Chapter C.6 – Formwork and falsework, embedments and construction joints
CHAPTER C.6 — SHORING AND FORMWORK, EMBEDDED

AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
C.6.1 — Formwork and falsework design
C.6.1.1 — The purpose of falsework and formwork is to obtain a structure that complies with the shape, levels and
dimensions of the elements as indicated in the design plans and specifications.
C.6.1.2 — The falsework and formwork must be essentially and sufficiently hermetic to prevent the escape of the mortar.
C.6.1.3 — The falsework and formwork must be adequately braced or tied together, in such a way that they maintain their
position and shape.
C.6.1.4 — The falsework and formwork and their supports must be designed in such a way that they do not damage the
previously built structure.
C.6.1.5 — The design of falsework and formwork must take into account the following factors:
(a) Speed and method of placing concrete; (b)

Construction loads, including vertical, horizontal and impact loads; (c) Special
requirements for falsework and forms for the construction of shells, folded slabs, domes,
architectural concrete or other types of similar elements;
C.6.1.6 — The falsework and formwork for prestressed concrete elements must be designed and constructed in such a
way that they allow movement of the element without causing damage during the application of the prestressing force.
C.6.2 — Striking, shoring and re-shoring
C.6.2.1 — Unshoring
Formwork must be removed in such a way that the safety or function of the structure is not adversely affected. Concrete
exposed by stripping must have sufficient strength not to be damaged by stripping operations.
C.6.2.2 — Removal of shores and re-shores
The requirements of C.6.2.2.1 to C.6.2.2.3 shall be met in beam and slab construction except when built on the ground.
C.6.2.2.1 — Prior to the start of construction, the builder shall define a procedure and schedule for shoring removal
and re-shoring installation, and for calculating the loads transferred to the structure during the process.
(a) The structural analysis and the data on the resistance of the concrete used in the planning and implementation of
the striking and removal of shoring must be delivered by the builder to the competent authority when required;
(b) Only when the structure, in its state of progress, together with the forms and shoring still existing, have sufficient
strength to safely support its own weight and the loads placed on it, may construction loads be supported on the
structure or unravel any portion of it.
(c) Demonstration that the strength is adequate must be based on a structural analysis that takes into account the
proposed loads, the strength of the formwork and falsework system, and the strength of the concrete. The
C-47
Concrete strength shall be based on tests of field-cured specimens or, when approved by the authority having jurisdiction, on other procedures for
evaluating the strength of concrete.
C.6.2.2.2 — Construction loads in excess of the sum of the dead plus live loads used in the design may not be supported on the structure without
falsework, unless through structural analysis it is shown that there is sufficient strength to support these additional charges.
C.6.2.2.3 — Forms for prestressed concrete members shall not be removed until sufficient prestress has been applied to allow the member to
support its own weight and anticipated construction loads.
C.6.3 — Embedded in concrete
C.6.3.1 — Embedding any materials that are not detrimental to the concrete and that fall within the limitations of 6.3 are permitted, with the prior approval
of the licensed design professional, provided they are not considered a structural replacement for the displaced concrete. , except as provided in 6.3.6.
C.6.3.2 — All types of aluminum embeds in structural concrete must be surface protected or coated to prevent concrete-aluminum reaction, or electrolytic
action between aluminum and steel.
C.6.3.3 — Ducts, pipes, and inserts that pass through slabs, walls, or beams must not significantly weaken the strength of the structure.
C.6.3.4 — Ducts and pipes, together with their connections, embedded in a column, must not occupy more than 4 percent of the cross-sectional area
that was used to calculate their resistance, or that required for protection. against fire.
C.6.3.5 — Except when the drawings of the ducts and pipes have been approved by the professional authorized to design, the pipes and ducts
embedded in a slab, wall or beam (other than those that only pass through these elements) must satisfy C.6.3.5.1 to C.6.3.5.3.
C.6.3.5.1 — They must not have exterior dimensions greater than 1/3 of the total thickness of the slab, wall or beam,
where they are embedded
C.6.3.5.2 — They must not be spaced less than 3 times their diameter or width measured center to center.
C.6.3.5.3 — They must not significantly affect the resistance of the element.
C.6.3.6 — Ducts, pipes, and inserts may be considered to be structural substitutes in compression for displaced concrete if they comply with C.6.3.6.1
through C.6.3.6.3.
C.6.3.6.1 — They are not exposed to corrosion or any other cause of deterioration.
C.6.3.6.2 — Are uncoated or galvanized steel or iron, with a thickness not less than that of the steel tube
standard 40 gauge.
C.6.3.6.3 — Have a nominal inside diameter of not more than 50 mm and are spaced not less than 3
diameters measured center to center.
C.6.3.7 — The pipes and their connections must be designed to resist the effects of the fluid, the pressure and the temperature to which they will be
subjected.
C.6.3.8 — No liquid, gas, or vapor, except water whose temperature and pressure do not exceed 32ºC or 0.35 MPa, respectively, shall be placed in the
pipes until the concrete has reached its design strength.
C.6.3.9 — In solid slabs, pipes shall be placed between the top and bottom layers of reinforcement, unless required to radiate heat or melt snow.
C-48
C.6.3.10 — The concrete cover for pipes, conduits, and their connections must not be less than 40 mm on concrete surfaces
exposed to the weather or in contact with the ground, nor less than 20 mm on those that do not are directly in contact with the
ground or exposed to the weather.
C.6.3.11 — Reinforcement must be placed in the normal direction of the pipe, with an area of not less than 0.002 times the
area of the concrete section.
C.6.3.12 — Pipes and ducts must be manufactured and installed in such a way that they do not require cutting, bending or
displace the reinforcement from its proper position.
C.6.4 — Construction joints
C.6.4.1 — The surface of concrete construction joints shall be clean and free of laitance.
C.6.4.2 — Immediately before beginning a new stage of concrete placement, all construction joints must be wetted and standing
water must be removed.
C.6.4.3 — Construction joints must be made and located so as not to impair the strength of the structure. Provisions must be
made for the proper transfer of shear and other forces through construction joints. See C.11.6.9.
C.6.4.4 — Construction joints in stories must be located within the central third of the span of the slabs, beams, and main beams.
C.6.4.5 — Construction joints in main beams must be offset a minimum distance of two times the width of the intersecting beams.
C.6.4.6 — Beams, main beams, or slabs supported on columns or walls shall not be constructed until the vertical support
concrete has hardened to the point that it is no longer plastic.
C.6.4.7 — Beams, main beams, column capitals, shear hangers, and charts must be built monolithically as part of the slab
system, unless otherwise indicated on the plans or specifications.
C-49
GRADES
C-50
NSR-10 – Chapter C.7 – Reinforcement details
CHAPTER C.7 — REINFORCEMENT DETAILS
C.7.1 — Standard hooks
The term “standard hook” is used in Title C of Regulation NSR-10 with one of the following meanings:
C.7.1.1 — 180º fold plus a 4d extension b , but not less than 65 mm at the free end of the bar.
C.7.1.2 — 90º bend plus a 12d extension at the free end of the bar.b
C.7.1.3 — For stirrups and stirrup hooks
(a) Bar No. 5 (5/8”) or 16M (16 mm) and smaller, 90º bend plus 6dbextension at the free end of the
bar, or
(b) Bar No. 6 (3/4”) or 20M (20mm), No. 7 (7/8”) or 22M (22mm), and No. 8 (1”) or 25M (25mm) , 90º bend plus 12d
extension at the free
b end of the bar, or
(c) Bar No. 8 (1”) or 25M (25 mm) and smaller, bend of 135º plus extension of 6dbat the free end of the bar.
C.7.1.4 — In the confinement stirrups required in Chapter C.21 in structures with moderate energy dissipation capacity
(DMO) and special (DES), for earthquake resistant construction, seismic hooks with a bend of 135º must be used or more,
with an extension of 6d but not less than 75 mm, which embraces theblongitudinal reinforcement of the element and projects
towards the interior of the section of the element. In supplementary hooks, the bend at the ends must be a seismic hook of
135º, or more, with an extension of , but not less than 75 mm, and it is allowed that a hook of 90º 6db
or_more is used at one of
the ends. , with an extension of seismic hooks are defined in C.2.2 6db. The
C.7.2 — Minimum bending diameters
C.7.2.1 — The bending diameter, measured on the inside face of the bar, except for stirrups with diameters No. 3 (3/8”) or
10M (10 mm) to No. 5 (5/8”) or 16M (16 mm), must not be less than the values in table C.7.2.
C.7.2.2 — The inside bending diameter for stirrups shall not be less than b 4d for bars No. 5 (5/8”) or 16M (16 mm) and
smaller. For bars larger than No. 5 (5/8”) or 16M (16 mm), the bending diameter must comply with the provisions of table
C.7.2.
C.7.2.3 — The inside diameter of bending in electrowelded reinforcement of wire (corrugated or smooth) for stirrups must
not be less than b 4d forcorrugated wire greater than MD40 (7.1 mm in diameter), and 2d for the other diameters
b of wire. No
bend with an inside diameter less than 4d from the nearest welded intersection.8dbmust be less than b
TABLE C.7.2 — MINIMUM BENDING DIAMETERS

Bar diameter Minimum bending diameter
No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10mm) to No. 8 (1”) or 25M (25mm) 6d b

No. 9 (1-1/8”) or 30M (30mm), No. 10 (1-1/4”) or 8d b
32M (32mm) and No. 11 (1-3/8”) or 36M (36mm)
No. 14 (1-3/4”) or 45M (45mm) and No. 18 (2-1/4”) or 55M (55mm) 10d b
C-51
C.7.3 — Folded
C.7.3.1 — All reinforcement shall be cold bent, unless otherwise permitted by the licensed design professional.
C.7.3.2 — No reinforcement partially embedded in concrete may be field bent, except as indicated on the design drawings or permitted by the
licensed design professional.
C.7.4 — Reinforcement surface conditions
C.7.4.1 — At the time the concrete is placed, the reinforcement must be free of mud, oil, or other nonmetallic coatings that reduce bond. Epoxy
coatings on bars that comply with the standards cited in C.3.5.3.8 and C.3.5.3.9 are permitted.
C.7.4.2 — Reinforcement, other than prestressing steel, with rust, scale, or a combination of both, shall be considered satisfactory if the minimum
dimensions (including height of ribs in the rebar) and weight of a sample cleaned using a steel wire brush, meets the applicable NTC (or ASTM
failing that) specifications listed in C.3.5.
C.7.4.3 — Prestressing steel must be clean and free of excessive rust, oil, dirt, scale, and pitting.
Light oxidation is permissible.
C.7.5 — Reinforcement placement
C.7.5.1 — Reinforcement, including tendons and prestressing ducts, must be accurately placed and adequately secured before concrete is placed,
and must be secured to prevent displacement within the acceptable tolerances given in C.7.5. 2.
C.7.5.2 — Unless otherwise specified by the licensed design professional, reinforcement, including tendons and prestressing ducts, shall be placed
at the specified positions within the tolerances indicated in C.7.5.2.1 and C.7.5. .2.2.
C.7.5.2.1 — The tolerance for d and for the concrete cover in elements subjected to flexure, walls and elements subjected to compression must be
the following:
tolerance in Tolerance on the

d specified
concrete cover -10
mm
d ÿ 200mm ± 10mm
d > 200mm ± 13mm -13mm
except that the tolerance for the clear distance to the bottom of the falsework must be less than 6 mm. In addition, the allowance for cover shall also
not exceed less than 1/3 of the concrete cover specified on the design drawings and project specifications.
C.7.5.2.2 — The tolerance for the longitudinal location of the bends and ends of the reinforcement must be ±50 mm, except in the discontinuous
ends of the brackets or brackets where the tolerance must be ±13 mm and in the discontinuous ends of other elements where the tolerance must be
±25 mm. The allowance for concrete cover in C.7.5.2.1 also applies to discontinuous ends of elements.
C.7.5.3 — Welded wire reinforcement (made from wire not larger than MW30 or MD30 or 6.2 mm in diameter) used in slabs with spans less than 3
m may be bent from a point near the face above the support, to another point located near the bottom face in the center of the span, as long as this
reinforcement is continuous on the support or is properly anchored in it.
C.7.5.4 — Intersecting bars are not allowed to be welded for the purpose of fastening the reinforcement, unless authorized by the licensed design
professional.
C-52
C.7.6 — Reinforcement spacing limits
C.7.6.1 — The minimum free distance between parallel bars of a layer must be db , but not less than 25 mm.
See also C.3.3.2.
C.7.6.2 — When the parallel reinforcement is placed in two or more layers, the bars of the upper layers must be placed
exactly over those of the lower layers, with a clear distance between layers of not less than 25 mm.
C.7.6.3 — In compression elements reinforced with spirals or stirrups, the free distance between longitudinal bars must not
be less than 1.5d b , nor 40mm. See also C.3.3.2.
C.7.6.4 — The clear distance limitation between bars shall also apply to the clear distance between a lap splice and adjacent
splices or bars.
C.7.6.5 — In walls and slabs, except for ribbed slabs, the separation of the main reinforcement by flexure must not be
greater than 3 times the thickness of the wall or slab, nor 450 mm, except that in critical sections of slabs in two directions
must not exceed 2 times the thickness of the slab (see Chapter C.13). In the case of temperature reinforcement in slabs,
the maximum separation must not exceed 5 times the thickness of the slab or 450 mm (see C.7.12).
C.7.6.6 — Busbar packages
C.7.6.6.1 — Groups of parallel bars arranged in a bundle to work as a unit, must

limited to 4 bars for each package.
C.7.6.6.2 — Bar bundles must be placed inside stirrups.
C.7.6.6.3 — In beams, bars larger than No. 11 (1-3/8”) or 36M (36 mm) must not be bundled.
C.7.6.6.4 — In members subjected to bending, each of the bars of a package that ends within the 40d span . b
must be finished in separate different places at least
C.7.6.6.5 — When spacing limitations and concrete cover requirements are based on bar diameter db , a bundle of bars
shall be considered as a single bar of equal diameter to that deducted from the total area of the bars. package bars.
C.7.6.7 — Tendons and ducts
C.7.6.7.1 — The end-to-center spacing of prestressing tendons on each side of a member shall not be less than b 4d for
strand or 5d for wire, except if the specified compressive strength
b of concrete at the time of initial prestressing is 28 MPa or
greater, the minimum spacing, measured center-to-center, of the strands F'ci , shall be 45 mm for strands 12.7 mm nominal
diameter or smaller, and 50 mm for strands 15.2 mm diameter. nominal diameter. See also C.3.3.2. Closer spacing or
bundling of tendons in the center of the span is permitted.
C.7.6.7.2 — Grouping of PT ducts is permitted if it is shown that the concrete can be satisfactorily placed, and measures
are taken to prevent the prestressing steel from breaching the gap between PT ducts when tensioned.
C.7.7 — Concrete protection for reinforcement
C.7.7.1 — Concrete cast in place (not prestressed)
Unless a greater concrete cover is required in C.7.7.6 or C.7.7.8, the specified cover for the reinforcement shall not be less
than the following:
C-53
Concrete cover,
mm (a) Concrete
placed against the ground and permanently exposed to it .................................... ............................ 75
(b) Concrete exposed to soil or weather:

Bars No. 6 (3/4”) or 20M (20 mm) to No. 18 (2-1/4”) or 55M (55 mm) ................ ........................................ fifty
No. 5 (5/8”) or 16M (16 mm) bars, MW200 or MD200 wire (16 mm diameter) and
smaller ................................ ................................................................ ................................................................ ............................ 40
(c) Concrete not exposed to weather or in contact with the ground:

Slabs, walls, joists:
Bars No. 14 (1-3/4”) or 45M (45 mm) and No. 18 (2-1/4”) or 55M (55 mm) .............. .................. 40 No. 11 (1-3/8”) or 36M (36
mm) and smaller Bars ..... ................................................................ .................. twenty
Beams, columns:
main reinforcement, stirrups, spirals.................................. ................................................................ .40
Folded shells and plates: Bar No. 6

(3/4”) or 20M (20 mm) and larger .......................... ................................................................ .... 20 Bars No. 5 (5/8”) or 16M
(16 mm), wires MW200 or MD200 (16 mm in diameter) and
smaller .................. ................................................................ ................................................................ .................... 13
C.7.7.2 — Concrete cast in place (prestressed)
Unless a greater concrete cover is required in C.7.7.6 or C.7.7.8, the specified cover for prestressed and nonprestressed reinforcement, ducts, and
end fittings shall not be less than the following:
Concrete cover,
mm (a) Concrete
placed against the ground and permanently exposed to it .................................... ............................ 75
(b) Concrete exposed to soil or weather:

Wall panels, slabs, joists .................................................. ................................................................ ................. 25 Other
items .................................... ................................................................ ................................................................ ........ 40
(c) Concrete not exposed to the weather or in contact with the ground: Slabs, walls,
joists .................................. ................................................................ ................................................. twenty
Beams, columns:
Main reinforcement .................................................. ................................................................ ............................. 40 Stirrups
and spirals .................. ................................................................ ................................................................ .... 25 Folded shells
and slabs: Bar No. 5 (5/8”) or 16M
(16 mm), wire MW200 or MD200 (16 mm diameter), and
smaller .......... ................................................................ ................................................................ ......................... 10 Other
reinforcements .................. ................................................................ ................................................................ .... db
but not less than ........................................ ................................................................ .......................... twenty
C.7.7.3 — Precast concrete (manufactured under plant control conditions)
Unless a greater concrete cover is required in C.7.7.6 or C.7.7.8, the specified cover for prestressed and nonprestressed reinforcement, ducts, and
end fittings shall not be less than the following:
Concrete cover,
mm
(a) Concrete exposed to the ground or weather:
Wall panels:
No. 14 (1-3/4”) or 45M (45 mm) and No. 18 (2-1/4”) or 55M (55 mm) bars, prestressing
tendons greater than 40 mm in diameter.... ................................................................ .... 40 Bars No. 11 (1-3/8”) or 36M
(36mm) and smaller, 40mm prestressing tendons
C-54
diameter and smaller, wires MW200 or MD200 (16 mm in diameter) and smaller .................. 20
Other elements:
No. 14 (1-3/4”) or 45M (45 mm) and No. 18 (2-1/4”) or 55M (55 mm) bars,
prestressing tendons greater than 40 mm in diameter. ................................................................ ....... fifty
No. 6 (3/4”) or 20M (20mm) to No. 11 (1-3/8”) or 36M (36mm) bars,

prestressing tendons larger than 16mm diameter up to 40mm diameter. ............40 No. 5 (5/8”) or 16M (16mm)
and smaller bars, prestressing tendons 16mm diameter and smaller, MW200 or MD200 wire
(16 mm diameter) and smaller .................... 30
(b) Concrete not exposed to the weather or in contact with the ground: Slabs, walls, joists:
Bars No. 14 (1-3/4”) or
45M (45 mm) and No. 18 (2- 1/4”) or 55M (55 mm), prestressing tendons greater than 40 mm
in diameter .................................... ................................................................ ......... 30 Prestressing tendons 40 mm
in diameter and smaller .................................... ................................. 20 No. 11 (1-3/8”) or 36M (36 mm) Bars and
smaller, wire MW200 or
MD200 (16 mm diameter) and smaller ................................................ ................................................................ ....16
Beams, columns:
Main reinforcement.................................................. ................................................................ ...................................
db but not less than 16 mm and not more than 40
mm Stirrups, spirals .................................................. ................................................................ .........................10
Shells, and folded slabs:
Prestressing tendons ................................................... ................................................................ ................... 20 Bars
No. 6 (3/4”) or 20M (20 mm) and larger ............ ................................................................ .......................... 16 Bars
No. 5 (5/8”) or 16M (16 mm) and smaller, Wire MW200 or
MD200 (16 mm diameter) and smaller ................................................ ................................................................ ....10
C.7.7.4 — Busbar packages
The specified minimum concrete cover for bar bundles shall not be less than the equivalent diameter of the bundle, but need not be
greater than 50 mm; except for concrete built against and permanently exposed to the ground, in which case the specified concrete
cover shall be not less than 75
mm.
C.7.7.5 — Headed bolts for shear reinforcement
For headed bolts for shear reinforcement, the specified concrete cover for the heads and common base shall not be less than that
required for reinforcement in the type of member in which the headed welded bolt is to be placed.
C.7.7.6 — Corrosive environments
In corrosive environments or other severe exposure conditions, the thickness of the concrete cover must be adequately increased
and must meet the relevant requirements for concrete, based on the applicable exposure categories of Chapter C.4, or another type
must be available. of protection.
C.7.7.6.1 — For prestressed concrete elements exposed to corrosive media or other severe exposure categories as defined in
Chapter C.4, and classified as Class T or C in C.18.3.3, the coating of specified concrete shall be not less than 1.5 times the cover
for prestressed reinforcements required by C.7.7.2 or C.7.7.3. This requirement can be waived if the pre-compressed zone of tension
is not in tension under the action of permanent loads.
C.7.7.7 — Future extensions
Exposed reinforcement, inserts and plates that are intended to be joined with future extensions must be protected against corrosion.
C-55
C.7.7.8 — Fire protection
If Title J of Regulation NSR-10 requires a fire protection cover thickness greater than the concrete cover given in C.7.7.1
to C.7.7.7, that greater thickness must be specified (see J.3.5. 2).
C.7.8 — Special reinforcement details for columns

C.7.8.1 — Bars bent due to section change
Longitudinal bars bent due to a change in section must comply with the following:
C.7.8.1.1 — The slope of the inclined part of a bar of this type must not exceed 1 to 6 with respect to the axis of the
column.
C.7.8.1.2 — The parts of the bar that are above and below the bend zone must be parallel to the axis of the column.
C.7.8.1.3 — Adequate horizontal support must be provided to the bar bent by change of section by means of cross ties,
spirals, or portions of the mezzanine system. The horizontal support shall be designed to resist 1.5 times the horizontal
component of the calculated force in the inclined portion of the bar. The transversal or spiral stirrups, if used, must be
placed at a distance of no more than 150 mm from the bending points.
C.7.8.1.4 — The bars in the section changes must be bent before their placement in the formwork. See C.7.3.
C.7.8.1.5 — When the face of a column is misaligned by 75 mm or more due to a change in section, the longitudinal
bars must not bend. Lap spliced dowels shall be provided with the longitudinal bars adjacent to the misaligned faces of the
column. Lap splices must comply with the specifications in C.12.17.
C.7.8.2 — Steel cores
The transmission of loads in the structural steel cores of composite elements subjected to compression must be provided
in accordance with the following:
C.7.8.2.1 — The ends of structural steel cores shall be accurately finished to contact the supports at the ends, and
adequate provision shall be made to align one core with respect to the other in concentric contact.
C.7.8.2.2 — The support load transfer capacity at the end splices shall be
consider as a maximum equal to 50 percent of the total compressive stress in the steel core.
C.7.8.2.3 — The transmission of forces between the base of the column and the footing must be designed in accordance with
as specified in C.15.8.
C.7.8.2.4 — The base of the structural steel section shall be designed to transmit the full load of the entire composite
element to the footing; o It must be designed to transmit only the load of the steel core, provided there is a large concrete
section capable of transferring to the footing the portion of the total load supported by the reinforced concrete section, by
means of compression. in concrete and by reinforcement.
C.7.9 — Connections
C.7.9.1 — In the connections of the main elements of frames (such as beams and columns) there must be confinement for
the splices of the reinforcement that continues and for the anchorage of the reinforcement that ends in such connections.
C-56
C.7.9.2 — Confinement at connections shall consist of exterior concrete, or interior closed abutments or spirals.
C.7.10 — Transverse reinforcement for compression members
C.7.10.1 — The transverse reinforcement of compression elements must comply with the provisions of C.7.10.4 and C.7.10.5
and when shear or torsion reinforcement is required, it must comply with the provisions of Chapter C. .eleven.
C.7.10.2 — The requirements for transverse reinforcement of composite members subjected to compression must comply
with the specifications in C.10.13. Transverse reinforcement of tendons shall comply with the requirements of C.18.11.
C.7.10.3 — The requirements for transverse reinforcement of C.7.10, C.10.13, and C.18.11 may be omitted when structural
tests and analysis show adequate strength and feasibility of construction.
C.7.10.4 — Spirals
Spiral reinforcement for compression members shall comply with C.10.9.3 and the following:
C.7.10.4.1 — Spirals shall consist of evenly spaced continuous bars or wires, with a
size and arrangement that allow its handling and placement without distortion of the design dimensions.
C.7.10.4.2 — For elements built on site, the diameter of the bar used in spirals must not be less than 10 mm.
C.7.10.4.3 — The free spacing between helices of the spiral must not exceed 75 mm nor be less than 25 mm.
See also C.3.3.2.
C.7.10.4.4 — The anchorage of the spiral shall consist of 1.5 additional turns of the bar or wire in each
end of the spiral.
C.7.10.4.5 — Spiral reinforcement shall be spliced, if required, by one of the following methods:
(a) Lap splice not less than 300 mm nor less than the length indicated in (1) to (5) below:
(1) uncoated corrugated bar or wire ................................................ .................................. 48d b
(2) uncoated smooth bar or wire ................................................ ................................................................ .... 72d b

(3) epoxy-coated corrugated bars or wires .................................................. ............................ 72d
b (4) uncoated smooth bars or wires with a standard stirrup hook
according to C.7.1.3 at their ends spliced by overlap. The hooks must be embedded
in the core confined by the spiral. ................................................................ ................... 48d b
(5) epoxy coated rebar or wire with a standard hook

of stirrup according to C.7.1.3 at their ends spliced by overlap. The hooks must be
embedded in the core confined by the spiral. ................................................................ ........ 48d b
(b) Mechanically spliced or fully welded in accordance with C.12.14.3.
C.7.10.4.6 — Spirals shall extend from the top of the footing or slab at any level to the height of the lowest horizontal
reinforcement of the supported member.
C.7.10.4.7 — When there are no beams or corbels on all sides of a column, stirrups must be placed
above the end of the spiral to the bottom of the slab, flat, or dropped for shear.
C.7.10.4.8 — On columns with a capital, the spiral must extend to a level at which the diameter or width of the
capital is twice that of the column.
C.7.10.4.9 — Coils must be kept firmly in place and well aligned.
C-57
C.7.10.5 — Stirrups
The stirrups for elements subjected to compression must comply with the following:
C.7.10.5.1 — All non-prestressed bars must be confined by transverse ties of at least No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm) diameter, for No. 10 (1-1)
longitudinal bars. /4”) or 32M (32mm) or smaller; and diameter No. 4 (1/2”) or 12M (12 mm) minimum, for longitudinal bars No. 11 (1-3/8”) or 36M (36
mm), No. 14 (1-3/4 ”) or 45M (45mm) and No. 18 (2-1/4”) or 55M (55mm) and bar bundles. No. 2 (1/4") or 6M (6 mm) bar ties are allowed in structures
with minimum energy dissipation capacity (DMI) when the columns support only one or two stories.
C.7.10.5.2 — Vertical spacing of stirrups shall not exceed 16 longitudinal bar diameters, 48
bar or wire diameters of the stirrups, or the smallest dimension of the element subjected to compression.
C.7.10.5.3 — Stirrups shall be arranged such that each longitudinal corner bar and alternate bar has lateral support provided by the corner of a
stirrup with an interior angle not greater than 135º, and no longitudinal bar shall be more than 150 mm free from a laterally supported bar. Where
longitudinal bars are located around the perimeter of a circle, the use of a full circular stirrup is permitted.
C.7.10.5.4 — The vertical distance between the abutments at the ends of the element and the upper part of the footing or mezzanine slab, or the
lowest horizontal reinforcement of the slab, upper abacus or dropped for shear, must be less than half the spacing between stirrups.
C.7.10.5.5 — When beams or corbels meet a column from four directions, it is allowed to place the
last stirrup not more than 75 mm below the lowest reinforcement of the lowest height beam or bracket.
C.7.10.5.6 — When anchor bolts are placed at the ends of columns or pedestals, the bolts must be surrounded by lateral reinforcement that also
surrounds at least four vertical bars of the column or pedestal. Transverse reinforcement must be distributed within 125 mm measured from the top of
the column or pedestal and must consist of at least two No. 4 (1/2”) or 12M (12 mm) bars or three No. 3 (3 /8”) or 10M (10mm).
C.7.11 — Transverse reinforcement for flexural members
C.7.11.1 — Compression reinforcement in beams shall be confined with ties meeting the size and spacing limitations of C.7.10.5, or with welded wire
reinforcement of equivalent area. Such stirrups shall be placed throughout the entire distance where compression reinforcement is required.
C.7.11.2 — Transverse reinforcement for frame elements subjected to reversible flexural or torsion stresses at the supports shall consist of closed or
spiral stirrups placed around the flexural reinforcement.
C.7.11.3 — Closed stirrups shall be made of a single piece with their end hooks placed overlapping encircling the same longitudinal bar, or they shall
be made of one or two pieces joined by a Class B lap splice (length of overlap of 1.3 ) or by anchoring them according to C.12.13.
d
C.7.12 — Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement
C.7.12.1 — In structural slabs where flexural reinforcement extends in only one direction, reinforcement normal to flexural reinforcement shall be placed
to resist stresses due to shrinkage and temperature.
C.7.12.1.1 — Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with C.7.12.2 or C.7.12.3.
C.7.12.1.2 — When shrinkage and temperature movements are significantly restricted,

The requirements of C.8.2.4 and C.9.2.3 must be considered.
C-58
C.7.12.2 — Corrugated reinforcement, complying with C.3.5.3, used as shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall be
placed in accordance with the following:
C.7.12.2.1 — The amount of shrinkage and temperature reinforcement must be at least equal to the values given below,
but not less than 0.0014:
(a) In slabs where Grade 280 or 350 deformed bars are used .................................... .................0020
(b) In slabs where Grade 420 deformed bars or welded wire reinforcement are used.... 0.0018
(c) In slabs where reinforcement with a higher yield strength is used

0.0018x420
than 420 MPa, measured at 0.35 percent strain .................................................. ........
F
and
C.7.12.2.2 — Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement must not be placed more than 5 times the thickness of the slab or 450
mm apart.
C.7.12.2.3 — In all sections where required, shrinkage and temperature reinforcement must be capable of developing yf in
tension in accordance with Chapter C.12.
C.7.12.3 — Prestressing steel, complying with C.3.5.6, used as shrinkage and temperature reinforcement, shall be furnished
in accordance with the following:
C.7.12.3.1 — Tendons shall be designed to produce a minimum average compressive stress of 0.7 MPa in the gross area
of the concrete using effective prestressing stresses, after losses, in accordance with C.18.6.
C.7.12.3.2 — The spacing between the tendons must not exceed 1.8 m.
C.7.12.3.3 — If the spacing between tendons exceeds 1.4 m, additional shrinkage and temperature bonded reinforcement
shall be placed, in accordance with C.7.12.2, between the tendons at the edges of the slab, in a zone that is extends from the
edge for a distance equal to the spacing between the tendons.
C.7.13 — Requirements for structural integrity

C.7.13.1 — The detailing of the reinforcement and connections must be such that the elements of the structure are effectively
joined together to guarantee the integrity of the entire structure.
C.7.13.2 — For structures built on site, the following requirements must constitute the required minimums:
C.7.13.2.1 — In joist construction, as defined in C.8.13.1 through C.8.13.3, at least one bottom bar shall be continuous or
shall be lap spliced with a 1/4-inch lap splice. Class B tension, or a mechanical or welded splice complying with C.12.14.3, and
in non-continuous supports shall be anchored to develop yf at the face of the support using a standard hook complying with
C.12.5 or rebar with head that complies with C.12.6.
C.7.13.2.2 — The perimeter beams of the structure must have continuous reinforcement throughout their length and at the
supports it must pass through the region circumscribed by the longitudinal reinforcement of the column, complying with (a) and
(b). ):
(a) at least one sixth of the required tensile reinforcement for negative moment at support, but not less than two bars; and
(b) At least one quarter of the required positive moment tension reinforcement at mid-span, but not less than two bars.
At non-continuous supports, the reinforcement shall be anchored to develop yf at the face of the support using a standard
hook complying with C.12.5 or a headed deformed bar complying with C.12.6
C-59
C.7.13.2.3 —The continuous reinforcement required in C.7.13.2.2 shall be surrounded by transverse reinforcement of
the type specified in C.11.5.4.1. Cross bracing shall be anchored as specified in C.11.5.4.2. It is not necessary for the
cross bracing to extend through the column.
C.7.13.2.4 — When splicing is required to satisfy C.7.13.2.2 the top reinforcement shall be lap spliced near or at mid-
span and the bottom reinforcement shall be lap spliced near or at the support. Splices shall be Class B tensile splices, or
mechanical or welded splices meeting the requirements of C.12.14.3.
C.7.13.2.5 — In beams other than perimeter beams, where transverse reinforcement as defined in C.7.13.2.3 is
placed, there are no additional requirements for longitudinal integrity reinforcement. Where this reinforcement is not
placed, at least one quarter of the required mid-span positive moment reinforcement, but not less than two bars, shall
pass at the support through the region circumscribed by the longitudinal reinforcement of the column and shall be
continuous or shall be lap spliced on or near the support with a Class B tension splice or with a mechanical or welded
splice in accordance with C.12.14.3. At non-continuous supports, reinforcement shall be anchored to develop yf at the
face of the support using a standard hook conforming to C.12.5 or headed deformed bar conforming to C.12.6.
C.7.13.2.6 — For the construction of non-prestressed two-way slabs, see C.13.3.8.5.
C.7.13.2.7 — For the construction of prestressed two-way slabs, see C.18.12.6 and C.18.12.7.
C.7.13.3 — For precast concrete construction, tension ties shall be provided in the transverse, longitudinal, and vertical
directions, and around the perimeter of the structure, to effectively join the members.
The provisions of C.16.5 shall apply.
C.7.13.4 — For the construction of hoisted slabs see C.13.3.8.6 and C.18.12.6.
C-60
NSR-10 – Chapter C.8 – Analysis and design - General Considerations
CHAPTER C.8 — ANALYSIS AND

DESIGN — GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
C.8.1 — Design methods
C.8.1.1 — In the design of structural concrete, the elements must be designed to have adequate resistance, in accordance with the provisions of this
Title of Regulation NSR-10, using load factors and resistance reduction factors. ÿ specified in Chapter C.9.
C.8.1.2 — Design of reinforced concrete using the provisions of Appendix CB is permitted.
C.8.1.3 — Anchors installed in concrete to transfer loads between connected elements included within the scope of Appendix CD shall be designed in
accordance with Appendix CD.
C.8.2 — Loads
C.8.2.1 — The design provisions of Title C of Regulation NSR-10 are based on the assumption that structures must be designed to resist all requested
loads.
C.8.2.2 — Service loads must comply with the requirements of Title B of Regulation NSR-10, including any live load reductions allowed therein.
C.8.2.3 — In design for wind and seismic forces, integral parts of the structure shall be designed to resist full lateral forces. The wind forces are
prescribed in Chapter B.6 of Title B of the NSR-10 Regulation and the seismic forces in Title A of the NSR-10 Regulation.
C.8.2.4 — Special attention should be paid to the effects of forces due to prestressing, overhead crane loads, vibration, impact, shrinkage, temperature
variation, creep, expansion of shrinkage-compensated concrete, and differential settlement of supports. .
C.8.3 — Methods of analysis
C.8.3.1 — All elements of frames or continuous structures shall be designed to resist the maximum effects produced by factored loads determined in
accordance with elastic analysis theory, except when modified in accordance with C.8.4.
C.8.3.2 — The use of strut-tie models for the design of structural concrete is permitted. See Appendix CA.
C.8.4 — Moment redistribution in continuous members subjected to bending
C.8.4.1 — Except when approximate values of the moments are used, it is permitted to decrease the factored moments calculated by means of the
elastic theory in the sections of maximum negative moment or maximum positive moment of any span of continuous members subjected to bending to
any presumed charge disposition, in no more than 1000ÿ percent, with a maximum of 20 percent.
you
C.8.4.2 — Moment redistribution should be done only if ÿ is equal to or greater than 0.0075 in the section in
you
which is reducing the moment.
C.8.4.3 — The reduced moment shall be used to calculate the redistributed moments in all other sections within the span. The static equilibrium must be
maintained after the redistribution of the moments for each arrangement of the loads.
C-61
C.8.5 — Modulus of elasticity
C.8.5.1 — The modulus of elasticity, Ec , for concrete can be taken as wc between 0.043
1.5 cÿ
c f (in MPa), for values w
1440 and 2560 kg/m3 . For normal-weight concrete, Ec can be taken as 4700 fÿ . c
C.8.5.2 — The modulus of elasticity, Es , for nonprestressed reinforcing steel may be taken as 200,000 MPa.
C.8.5.3 — The modulus of elasticity, Ep , for the prestressing steel shall be determined by testing or reported by the
manufacturer.
C.8.6 — Lightweight Concrete
C.8.6.1 — For the use of lightweight concrete, the modification factor ÿ must be used as a multiplier of cfÿ in all applicable
equations and sections of Title C of Regulation NSR-10, where ÿ = 0.85 for lightweight concrete for normal weight sand and
0.75 for other lightweight concretes. Interpolation between 0.75 and 0.85, based on volume fractions, is permitted when a
portion of the light-weight fine aggregate is replaced by normal-weight fine aggregate. Linear interpolation between 0.85 and
1.0 is permitted for concrete containing normal-weight fine aggregate and a combination of normal-weight and lightweight
coarse aggregates. For normal weight concrete ÿ = 1.0 . If the average tensile strength per split is specified
of lightweight concrete, f ct , then ÿ= f 0.56 f ct (

ÿ
)ÿ 1.0 .
c
C.8.7 — Stiffness
C.8.7.1 — Any set of reasonable assumptions is permitted to be made to calculate the bending and torsion stiffnesses of
columns, walls, and story and roof systems. Assumptions made should be consistent throughout the analysis.
C.8.7.2 — When determining moments and designing elements, the effect of haunches must be considered.
C.8.8 — Effective stiffness to determine lateral deflections
C.8.8.1 — Lateral deflections of reinforced concrete structural systems from lateral service forces shall be calculated by either
linear analysis using member stiffness calculated as 1.4 times the flexural stiffness defined in C.8.8. .2 and C.8.8.3, or using
a more detailed analysis.
The properties of the elements shall not be taken greater than the properties of the gross section.
C.8.8.2 — Lateral deflections of reinforced concrete structural systems from factored lateral forces shall be calculated either
by linear analysis with member stiffness defined by (a) or (b), or by using a linear analysis more detailed that considers the
reduced stiffness of all elements under loading conditions:
(a) by the section properties defined in C.10.10.4(a) through (c), or
(b) 50 percent of the stiffness values based on gross section properties.
C.8.8.3 — When two-way slabs without beams are designated as part of the seismic force-resisting system, the lateral
deflections resulting from factored lateral loads may be calculated using linear analysis. The stiffness of the slab elements
shall be defined with a model that is in substantial agreement with the results of representative experimental tests and
analyses, and the stiffness of the other structural elements, as defined in C.8.8.2. These systems are restricted in their use by
Title A of Regulation NSR-10.
C-62
C.8.9 — Span length

C.8.9.1 — The span of the elements that are not built monolithically with their supports must be considered as the free span plus
the height of the element, but it must not exceed the distance between the centers of the supports.
C.8.9.2 — In the structural analysis of frames or continuous elements to determine the moments, the span must be considered
as the distance between the centers of the supports.
C.8.9.3 — For beams built integrally with their supports, it is allowed to design based on the moments at the face of the supports.
C.8.9.4 — It is allowed to analyze solid or ribbed slabs built monolithically with their supports, with free spans no greater than 3
m, as continuous slabs on simple supports, with spans equal to the free spans of the slab, disregarding the width of the beams.
C.8.10 — Columns
C.8.10.1 — Columns shall be designed to resist the axial forces from the factored loads of all stories or decks, and the maximum
moment due to factored loads in a single adjacent span of the story or deck under consideration. The loading condition that
produces the maximum relationship between moment and axial load must also be considered.
C.8.10.2 — In frames or continuous elements, attention must be paid to the effect of unbalanced loads from floors or roofs, both
on the exterior and interior columns, and on eccentric loads due to other causes.
C.8.10.3 — To calculate the moments due to gravity loads in columns built monolithically with the structure, the far ends of the
columns can be considered embedded.
C.8.10.4 — The flexural resistance of the column at any story or on the deck shall be determined by distributing the moment
between the columns immediately above and below the story under consideration, in proportion to the relative stiffnesses of the
columns and as turn restriction conditions.
C.8.11 — Arrangement of live load

C.8.11.1 — It is allowed to assume that:
(a) the live load is applied only to the floor or deck under consideration, and
(b) The far ends of the columns built monolithically with the structure are embedded.
C.8.11.2 — It is permissible to assume that the live load arrangement is limited to combinations of:
(a) factored dead load in all spans with factored live load in two adjacent spans, and
(b) Factored dead load in all spans with factored live load in alternate spans.
C.8.12 — T-beam systems

C.8.12.1 — In T-beam construction, the flange and web must be built monolithically or otherwise effectively attached to each
other.
C.8.12.2 — The effective width of the slab used as the flange of T-beams shall not exceed 1/4 of the beam span, and the effective
overhang width of the flange on each side of the web shall not exceed:
C-63
(a) 8 times the thickness of the slab, and
(b) half the free distance to the next soul
C.8.12.3 — For beams having a slab on one side only, the effective overhang width of the flange shall not exceed:
(a) 1/12 of the span of the beam,
(b) 6 times the thickness of the slab, and
(c) half the free distance to the next soul.
C.8.12.4 — In isolated beams, where only the T-shape is used to provide additional compression area with the flange, the flange shall
have a thickness of not less than 1/2 the width of the web, and a width effective no greater than 4 times the width of the web.
C.8.12.5 — When the main flexural reinforcement in a slab considered as the flange of a T-beam (excluding joists) is parallel to the beam,
reinforcement perpendicular to the beam must be provided at the top of the beam. slab according to the following:
C.8.12.5.1 — The transversal reinforcement must be designed to resist the factored load acting on the flange assuming that it works
in cantilever. For isolated beams the full width of the flange must be considered. For other types of T-beams, it is only necessary to
consider the effective overhang width of the flange.
C.8.12.5.2 — The spacing of the transverse reinforcement must not exceed 5 times the thickness of the slab nor 450 mm.
C.8.13 — Joists in ribbed slabs

C.8.13.1 — The ribbed slab consists of a monolithic or precast combination of joists regularly spaced in one or two directions, and a slab
set on top that also acts in one or two orthogonal directions. The tile can be partially precast, but at least a part of its thickness must be
cast on site.
C.8.13.1 — The main ribs and transversal ribs or braces, of slabs ribbed in one direction, cannot be taken into account for stiffness
effects against horizontal forces of the seismic resistance system. The element, parallel to the joist, that links the columns, must meet the
requirements for beams given in Chapter C.21 and its stiffness can be taken into account in the analysis for horizontal loads.
C.8.13.2 — The width of the ribs must not be less than 100 mm at the top and their average width cannot be less than 80 mm; and must
have a height no greater than 5 times its average width.
C.8.13.3 — For slabs ribbed in one direction, the maximum separation between ribs, measured center to center, cannot be greater than
2.5 times the total thickness of the slab, without exceeding 1.20 m. For slabs ribbed in two directions, the maximum separation between
ribs, measured center to center, cannot be greater than 3.5 times the total thickness of the slab, without exceeding 1.50 m.
C.8.13.3.1 — In the case of ribbed slabs in one direction, transversal joists of

distribution with a maximum free separation of 10 times the total thickness of the slab, without exceeding 4.0 m.
C.8.13.3.2 — These transversal distribution joists must be designed, in bending and in shear, in such a way
that are capable of transporting the total load (dead plus live) of each rib to the two adjacent ribs.
C.8.13.3.3 — In the design of the elements where these transversal distribution joists are supported, the effect of the load that they
can carry should be considered, considering an afferent load equivalent to twice the total load carried by a typical main rib.
C.8.13.4 — Ribbed slabs that do not meet the limitations of C.8.13.1 through C.8.13.3 shall be designed as slabs and beams.
C-64
C.8.13.5 — When lightenings made of fired clay or concrete are used that have a unit resistance to compression at least
equal to the cfÿ of the joists:
C.8.13.5.1 — It is allowed to include the vertical wall of the lightening element that is in contact with the joist in the
shear resistance and negative moment calculations. No other part of the reliefs should be included in the strength
calculations.
C.8.13.5.2 — The cast-in-place portion of the upper tile must be at least 45 mm thick, but this must not be less than
1/20 of the free distance between the ribs. The thickness of the cast-in-place concrete slab over permanent reliefs of
concrete, fired clay, or precast slabs, the cast-in-place portion of the minimum thickness of the top slab may be reduced to
40 mm.
C.8.13.5.3 — In slabs ribbed in one direction, reinforcement must be provided in the slab normal to the ribs
as required in C.7.12.
C.8.13.6 — When using removable formwork or lightening that does not comply with C.8.13.5:
C.8.13.6.1 — The thickness of the slab must not be less than 1/12 of the free distance between the ribs, nor less than
50 mm.
C.8.13.6.2 — The slab must have reinforcement perpendicular to the joists that meets the requirements for bending,
considering load concentrations, if any, but not less than that stipulated in C.7.12.
C.8.13.7 — When embedded ducts or pipes are placed in the slab as permitted in C.6.3, the thickness at any point in the
slab must be at least 25 mm greater than the total height of the duct or pipe. Such ducts or pipes must not significantly
affect the resistance of the system.
C.8.13.8 — In ribbed slabs, Vc may be considered to be 10 percent greater than specified in Chapter C.11.
C.8.14 — Separate Floor Finish

C.8.14.1 — The floor finish shall not be included as part of a structural element, unless it is built monolithically with the slab
or designed in accordance with the requirements of Chapter C.17.
C.8.14.2 — Any concrete finish on a floor is permitted to be considered as part of the required cover, or full thickness, for
non-structural considerations.
C-65
Grades:
C-66
NSR-10 – Chapter C.9 – Strength and performance requirements
CHAPTER C.9 — STRENGTH AND PERFORMANCE

REQUIREMENTS
C.9.1 — General
C.9.1.1 — The structures and structural elements must be designed so that in any section they have a design resistance
at least equal to the required resistance, the latter calculated for the loads and forces factored in the conditions established
in Title C of Regulation NSR-10.
C.9.1.2 — Elements must also meet all other requirements of Title C of Regulation NSR-10 to ensure proper performance
at the service load level.
C.9.1.3 — Design of structures and structural elements using the combinations of load enhancement and strength
reduction factors in Appendix CC is permitted. It is not permitted to mix the load enhancement combinations of this Chapter
with the strength reduction factors of Appendix CC.
C.9.2 — Strength required
Important Note: The load combinations given in C.9.2.1 contain lower load factors than those prescribed by the NSR-98
Regulation, but at the same time in this new version of the Regulation (NSR-10) values of the resistance reduction
coefficients, ÿ, lower than those contained in the NSR-98 Regulation, the new values being consistent with the probability
of structural failure that the Regulation limits. It is therefore incorrect, and unsafe, to use the new load combination
equations from C.9.2.1 with the values of the resistance reduction coefficients, ÿ, contained in NSR-98.
C.9.2.1 — The required resistance U must be at least equal to the effect of factored loads in equations (C.9-1) to (C.9-7).
The effect of one or more loads not acting simultaneously must be investigated.
= DF
U 1.4 + ( ) (C.9-1)
=++DFT
U 1.2 +( )(1.6
) LH 0.5 L or G+ or
+ L ( r and
) (C.9-2)
and
+( 0.8W =+
U 1.2D 1.6 L or( Gr or L 1.0L)or ) (C.9-3)
U 1.2D
=+ ++1.6W
( 1.0L 0.5 L or G orr L and
) (C.9-4)
U 1.2D 1.0E 1.0L = ++ (C.9-5)
U 0.9D 1.6W 1.6H =+ + (C.9-6)
U 0.9D 1.0E 1.6H = ++ (C.9-7)
except that:
(a) The live load load factor L in Eqs. (C.9-3) to (C.9-5) is permitted to be reduced to 0.5, except for parking lots,
occupied areas such as places of public assembly, and at all areas where L0 , defined in B.4.2.1, is greater how I know
than 4.8 kN/m2 .
(b) When the wind loads prescribed in chapter B.6 of the NSR-10 Regulation are not reduced by the directionality factor
prescribed therein, it is allowed to use 1.3W instead of 1.6W in equations (C.9-4) and (C.9-6).
C-67
(c) Title A of the NSR-10 Regulation defines the forces by earthquake at the resistance level; therefore, in equations (C.9-5) and (C.9-7)
1.0E should be used . In equations (C.9-5) and (C.9-7) 1.4E can be used instead of 1.0E
, when E earthquake loading effects are based on service levels of seismic forces.
(d) The load factor for H , loads due to the weight and pressure of the soil, water in the soil, or other materials, should be set equal to zero
in Eqs. (C.9-6) and (C.9-7 ) if the structural action due to H neutralizes those caused by W or E . When lateral pressures exerted by soil
pressure provide resistance to structural actions from other forces, they should not be included in H but should be included in the design
resistance. ,
C.9.2.2 — If resistance to impact effects is taken into account in the design, these must be included in L .
C.9.2.3 — Estimates of differential settlement, creep, shrinkage, expansion of shrinkage-compensated concrete, or temperature variations
shall be based on a realistic assessment of such effects that may occur during the life of the structure. .
C.9.2.4 — For the design of post-tensioning anchorage zones, a factor of 1.2 must be used for the maximum prestressing force applied by the
jack.
C.9.3 — Design strength
C.9.3.1 — The design resistance provided by an element, its connections with other elements, as well as its cross sections, in terms of
bending, axial load, shear and torsion, shall be taken as the nominal resistance calculated in accordance with the requirements and
assumptions of Title C of Regulation NSR-10, multiplied by the strength reduction factors ÿ given in C.9.3.2, C.9.3.4. and C.9.3.5
C.9.3.2 — The strength reduction factor, ÿ , shall be as given in C.9.3.2.1 to C.9.3.2.7:
C.9.3.2.1 — Sections controlled by tension as defined in 10.3.4 (See also C.9.3.2.7) ................................................................ ..... 0.90
C.9.3.2.2 — Compression controlled sections as defined in C.10.3.3:
(a) Elements with spiral reinforcement according to C.10.9.3 .................................... .................................... 0.75
(b) Other reinforced elements. ................................................................ ................................................................ ..........0.65
For sections in which the net tensile strain in the extreme steel in tension at the nominal strength state lies between the limits for compression-
controlled sections and tension-controlled
, sections, ÿ is allowed to increase linearly from the value corresponding to compression-controlled
ÿt
_
sections up to 0.90, as t ÿ increases from the compression-controlled strain limit to 0.005.
Alternatively, when using Appendix CB, for members in which yf does not exceed 420 MPa, with symmetrical reinforcement, and when ( ) dd /
ÿ
h ÿ is not less than 0.70, it is allowed to increase ÿ linearly up to 0.90, in the as Pn ÿ decreases from 0.10f Aÿ to zero. For other reinforced
members ÿ may increase linearly to 0.90 as Pn ÿ decreases
cg from 0.10f Aÿ or Pb ÿ , whichever is less, to zero.
cg
C.9.3.2.3 — Shear and torsion ................................................................ ................................................................ ..................................... 0.75
C.9.3.2.4 — Bearing in concrete (except for post-tensioning anchors

and strut-tensioner models) ............................................ ................................................................ ................................................................ ....0.65
C.9.3.2.5 — Post-tensioning anchorage zones.................................................. ................................................................ .................85
C-68
C.9.3.2.6 — The strut-tie models (Appendix CA) and struts, ties,

node zones and support areas in those models ................................................................ ................................................................ . 0.75
C.9.3.2.7 — The flexural sections in prestressed elements where the strand embedment length is less than the
development length, as established in C.12.9.1.1:
(a) from the end of the elements to the end of the transfer length ...................................... 0.75
(b) From the end of the transfer length to the end of the development length, it must be allowed
Let ÿ be linearly increased from 0.75 to 0.9.
Where strand bonding does not extend to the end of the element, strand embedment should be assumed to start
at the end of the unbonded length. See also C.12.9.3
C.9.3.3 — The development lengths specified in Chapter C.12 do not require a ÿ factor .
C.9.3.4 — For structures with moderate (MOD) or special (DES) energy dissipation capacity that rely on structural walls,
built-in-place or precast, or moment-resisting frames to resist seismic effects, E , ÿ shall be modified according to what is
indicated in (a) through (c):
(a) In any structural element that is designed to resist E, ÿ for shear should be 0.60 if the nominal shear resistance
of the element is less than the shear corresponding to the development of the nominal flexural resistance of the
element. The nominal flexural resistance must be determined considering the most critical factored axial loads and
including E;
(b) In diaphragms ÿ for shear shall not exceed the minimum ÿ for shear used for the vertical elements of the primary
system for resistance to seismic forces;
(c) In joints and diagonally reinforced coupling beams ÿ for shear must be 0.85.
C.9.3.5 — In Chapter C.22, ÿ shall be 0.60 for flexure, compression, shear, and bearing in plain structural concrete.
C.9.4 — Design strength for reinforcement
The values of yf and ytf used in design calculations shall not exceed 550 MPa, except for steels of
prestressed y for spiral transverse reinforcements in C.10.9.3 and C.21.1.5.4.
C.9.5 — Control of Deflections
C.9.5.1 — Reinforced concrete members subjected to flexure shall be designed to have adequate stiffness to limit any
deflection that could adversely affect the strength or function of the structure.
C.9.5.2 — Elements reinforced in one direction (not prestressed)
C.9.5.2.1 — The minimum heights or thicknesses established in Table C.9.5(a) must be applied to members in one
direction that do not support or are attached to partitions or other types of elements susceptible to damage due to large
deflections, unless the calculation of the deflections indicates that a lesser thickness can be used without causing adverse
effects.
C.9.5.2.2 — When calculating the deflections, those that occur immediately with the application of the load must be
calculated using the usual methods or formulas for elastic deflections, taking into account the effects of cracking and
reinforcement on the stiffness of the element. .
C-69
C.9.5.2.3 — Unless stiffness values are obtained by more complete analysis, immediate deflections shall be calculated using the
concrete's modulus of elasticity, Ec , as specified in C.8.5.1 (for concrete of normal or light) and the effective moment of inertia, Ie, which is
indicated below, but without taking it greater than gl .
3 3
ÿÿm
cr ÿÿ ÿÿ
mcr ÿ
I I1=I ÿÿ ÿÿ + ÿg cr
(C.9-8)
and
m to ÿ
m to
ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿ ÿÿÿ
where
fI
m = rg
(C.9-9)
cr
and
you
and for normal weight concrete,
= f
f 0.62 ÿ
ÿ
(C.9-10)
r c
C.9.5.2.4 — For continuous members it is allowed to take I as the average of the values obtained from equation (C.9-8) for the positive
and
and negative moment critical sections. For prismatic elements, it is allowed to take I as the value obtained from equation (C.9-8) in the center
of the span for simple and continuous sections, and in the
and
support point for cantilevers.
C.9.5.2.5 — Unless values are obtained by more complete analysis, additional long-term deflection resulting from creep and shrinkage
of flexural members (normal or lightweight concrete) shall be determined by multiplying the immediate deflection caused by the permanent
load by the factor ÿÿ
ÿ ÿÿ = (C.9-11)
50+ ÿÿ 1
where ÿÿ is the value at half the span for simple and continuous sections and at the support point for cantilevers.
ÿ , the time-dependent factor for sustained loads, can be taken equal to:
5 years or more ................................................................ .................. 2.0

12 months ................................................................ ........................ 1.4
6 months ................................................................ .......................... 1.2
3 months ................................................................ .......................... 1.0
C.9.5.2.6 — Deflection calculated in accordance with C.9.5.2.2 to C.9.5.2.5 must not exceed established limits
in Table C.9.5(b).
TABLE C.9.5(a) — Minimum heights or thicknesses of nonprestressed beams or reinforced

slabs in one direction unless deflections are calculated
Minimum thickness, h
simply with one end Both ends
cantilever
supported continuous continuous
Items Elements that do NOT support or are linked to divisions or other types
of elements susceptible to damage due to large deflections.
Solid slabs in one
direction twenty 24 28 10
Beams or slabs ribbed

in one direction 16 18.5 twenty-one 8
NOTES: The values given in this table are to be used directly on 420 MPa grade reinforced normal
weight concrete members. For other conditions, the values must be modified as follows:
(a) For structural lightweight concrete with a wc density within the range of 1,440 to 1,840 kg/m3 ,
the table values should be multiplied by (1.65–0.0003wc), but not less than 1.09. (b)
For fy other than 420 MPa, the values in this table should be multiplied by (0.4 + fy/700).
C-70
C.9.5.3 — Elements reinforced in two directions (not prestressed)
C.9.5.3.1 — Section C.9.5.3 shall be used to define the minimum thickness of slabs or other two-way reinforced members
designed in accordance with the provisions of Chapter C.13 and conforming to the requirements of C. 13.6.1.2. The thickness
of slabs without interior beams extending between supports in all directions shall meet the requirements of C.9.5.3.2 or
C.9.5.3.4. The thickness of slabs with beams extending between supports in all directions shall meet the requirements of either
C.9.5.3.3 or C.9.5.3.4.
TABLE C.9.5(b) — Calculated Maximum Allowable Deflection
Type of element considered deflection deflection limit

Flat roofs that do not support or are attached to non- *
structural elements susceptible to damage due to large Immediate deflection due to live load, L 180
deflections.
Mezzanines that do not support or are linked to non-
structural elements susceptible to damage due to large Immediate deflection due to live load, L 360
deflections.
Mezzanine or roof system that supports or is linked to non- The part of the total deflection that occurs after the
structural elements susceptible to damage due to large nonstructural members are joined (the sum of the long- 480 ‡
deflections. term deflection due to all permanent loads, and
Mezzanine or roof system that supports or is linked to non- the immediate deflection due to any additional
structural elements not susceptible to damage due to live loads)† section 240
* large deflections.
This limit is not intended to constitute a safeguard against water stagnation. The latter should be verified by calculating proper deflections, including deflections due
to standing water, and considering the long-term effects of all permanent loads, camber, construction tolerances, and reliability in measurements taken for drainage.
†
Long-term deflections shall be determined in accordance with C.9.5.2.5 or C.9.5.4.3, but may be reduced by the calculated amount of deflection that occurs before
nonstructural members are joined. This quantity is determined based on acceptable engineering data corresponding to the time-deflection characteristics of elements
similar to those under consideration.
‡
This limit can be exceeded if adequate measures are taken to prevent damage to supported or attached elements.
§ But not greater than the tolerance established for non-structural elements. This limit can be exceeded if a camber is provided so that the total deflection minus
camber does not exceed this limit.
C.9.5.3.2 — The minimum thickness of the slabs without interior beams that extend between the supports and that have
a ratio between sides not greater than 2, must comply with the requirements of table C.9.5(c) and must not be less than the
following values:
(a) Slabs without abacuses as defined in C.13.2.5125 mm
(b) Slabs with abacuses as defined in C.13.2.5100 mm
C.9.5.3.3 — The minimum thickness h for slabs with beams extending between supports on all sides shall be:
(a) For ÿfm equal to or less than 0.2, the provisions of C.9.5.3.2 apply.
(b) For ÿfm greater than 0.2 but not greater than 2.0, h must not be less than:
ÿÿf and
no ÿ ÿ 0.8 +
ÿÿ)
1400
h= (C.9-12)
( 36+ 5ÿÿ ÿ fm 0.2
but not less than 125 mm.
(c) For ÿfm greater than 2.0, h must not be less than:
ÿÿf and
no
+
ÿ ÿ 0.8
h= ÿ ÿ 36 91400
(C.9-13)
+ÿ
and not less than 90 mm.
C-71
(d) In discontinuous edges, an edge beam must be provided that has a stiffness ratio ÿf not less than 0.80, or else increase the
minimum thickness required by equations (C.9-12) or (C.9-13), at least 10 percent on the panel that has a broken border.
TABLE C.9.5(c) — Minimum thicknesses of slabs without interior beams*

Without abacuses ‡ With diagrams ‡
interior interior
exterior exterior
panels panels panels panels
Without With Without With
yf,
Edge Beams Edge Beams§ Edge Beams Edge Beams§
MPa †
no no no no no no
280 33 36 36 36 40 40
no no no no no no
420 30 33 33 33 36 36
no no no no no no
520 28 31 31 31 3. 4 3. 4
*
For construction in two directions, n, is the free span in the direction
long, measured between the faces of the supports in slabs without beams and
between the faces of the beams, for slabs with beams or other supports in
other cases. †For fy between the values given in the table, the minimum
thickness must be obtained by linear
interpolation. ‡ Abacus, as defined in
C.13.2.5. § Slabs with beams between the columns along the outer edges.
The value of ÿf for the edge beam must not be less than 0.8.
The term no in (b) and (c) it corresponds to the free span in the long direction measured face to face of the beams. The ÿ term
in (b) and (c) it corresponds to the ratio of the free span in the long direction to the free span in the short direction of the slab.
C.9.5.3.4 — Slab thicknesses less than the minimums required in C.9.5.3.1, C.9.5.3.2, and C.9.5.3.3 may be used when the
calculated deflections do not exceed the limits in Table C.9.5(b ). Deflections must be calculated taking into account the size and
shape of the panel, the support conditions, and the nature of the restraints at the edges of the slab. The modulus of elasticity of
the concrete, Ec , shall be as specified in C.8.5.1.
The effective moment of inertia, Ie, should be that obtained by means of equation (C.9-8); Other values are permitted if the results
of the deflection calculation agree reasonably with the results of appropriate span tests. The additional long-term deflection shall
be calculated in accordance with C.9.5.2.5.
C.9.5.4 — Prestressed concrete elements
C.9.5.4.1 — For flexural members designed in accordance with Chapter C.18, the immediate deflections must be calculated
by the usual methods or formulas for elastic deflections, and it is allowed to use the moment of inertia of the total concrete
section , Ig, for Class U flexural members, as defined in C.18.3.3.
C.9.5.4.2 — For Class C and Class T flexural members, as defined in C.18.3.3, deflection calculations shall be based on a
transformed cracked section analysis. Calculations are permitted to be based on a bilinear moment-deflection relationship or on
an effective moment of inertia, I , as defined by equation (C.9-8).
and
C.9.5.4.3 — Long-term additional deflection in prestressed concrete members shall be calculated taking into account the
stresses in concrete and steel under permanent load, and including the effects of concrete creep and shrinkage, as well as the
relaxation of the steel.
C.9.5.4.4 — The deflection calculated in accordance with C.9.5.4.1 or C.9.5.4.2, and C.9.5.4.3 shall not exceed the limits
established in Table C.9.5(b).
C-72
C.9.5.5 — Composite elements
C.9.5.5.1 — Braced elements
If the composite members subjected to flexure are supported during their construction in such a way that after removal of
the temporary supports the dead load is supported by the total composite section, the composite member may be considered
equivalent to a monolithically constructed member for the calculation of the deflection. In nonprestressed members, the part
of the member in compression determines whether the values in Table C.9.5(a) for normal-weight or lightweight concrete
are used. If deflection is calculated, account must be taken of the curvature resulting from differential shrinkage of precast
and cast-in-place components, and the effects of creep along the axis of the prestressed concrete element.
C.9.5.5.2 — Unsupported elements
If the thickness of a nonprestressed precast element subject to flexure meets the requirements of Table C.9.5(a), calculation
of deflection is not required. If the thickness of a nonprestressed composite element meets the requirements of Table
C.9.5(a), the deflection that occurs after the element becomes composite need not be calculated; however, the long-term
deflection of the precast element should be investigated based on the magnitude and duration of the load prior to the actual
start of the composite action.
C.9.5.5.3 — The deflection calculated in accordance with the requirements of C.9.5.5.1 or C.9.5.5.2 shall not exceed the
limits established in Table C.9.5(b).
C-73
Grades:
C-74
NSR-10 – Chapter C.10 – Bending and axial loads
CHAPTER C.10 — BENDING AND AXIAL LOADS
C.10.1 — Scope
The provisions of Chapter C.10 shall be applied to the design of members subjected to bending or axial loads, or to the
combination of bending and axial loads.
C.10.2 — Design assumptions
C.10.2.1 — The design for resistance of elements subjected to bending and axial loads must be based on the assumptions
given in C.10.2.2 to C.10.2.7, and must satisfy the conditions of equilibrium and compatibility of deformations.
C.10.2.2 — Strains in reinforcement and concrete shall be assumed directly proportional to the distance from the neutral
axis, except that, for the high beams defined in C.10.7.1, an analysis shall be used that Consider a nonlinear distribution of
strains. Alternatively, it is permitted to use the strut-tie model. See C.10.7, C.11.7 and Appendix CA.
C.10.2.3 — The maximum usable strain in the extreme fiber subjected to concrete compression is assumed equal to 0.003.
C.10.2.4 — The stress in the reinforcement when less than yf shall be taken as Es times the steel strain. For strains greater
than those corresponding to yf , independent of strain and equal to yf . effort is considered
C.10.2.5 — The tensile strength of concrete shall not be considered in calculations of reinforced concrete members subjected
to flexure and axial loading, except when the requirements of C.18.4 are met.
C.10.2.6 — The relationship between the distribution of compressive stresses in the concrete and the strain in the concrete
shall be assumed to be rectangular, trapezoidal, parabolic, or any other shape that results in a matching strength prediction.
with the results of representative tests.
C.10.2.7 — The requirements of C.10.2.6 are satisfied with an equivalent rectangular distribution of stresses in the concrete,
defined as follows:
C.10.2.7.1 — A stress in concrete of 0.85fÿ

c uniformly distributed in an equivalent compression zone,
bounded by the edges of the cross section and by a straight line parallel to the neutral axis, at a distance c = ÿ from the fiber
of maximum
to compression strain.
1
C.10.2.7.2 — The distance from the maximum strain fiber to the neutral axis, c direction , should be measured in
perpendicular to the neutral axis.
C.10.2.7.3 — For cfÿ between 17 and 28 MPa, the factor ÿ1 shall be taken as 0.85. For cfÿ greater than 28 MPa, ÿ1
must be decreased linearly at a rate of 0.05 for every 7 MPa increase above 28 MPa, however, ÿ1 must not be less than
0.65.
C.10.3 — General principles and requirements
C.10.3.1 — The design of cross sections subjected to bending loads, or axial loads, or a combination of both (flexion-
compression) must be based on balance and deformation compatibility, using the assumptions of C.10.2 .
C-75
C.10.3.2 — The condition of balanced strain exists in a cross section when the reinforcement in tension
reaches the strain corresponding to yf at the same time that the concrete in compression reaches its assumed ultimate
strain of 0.003.
C.10.3.3 — Sections are called compression controlled if the net tensile strain in the extreme steel is equal to or less than
, the compression controlled strain limit in tension,
ÿt
_
when the concrete in compression reaches its assumed strain limit of 0.003. The compression controlled strain limit is the
net tensile strain of the reinforcement under balanced strain conditions. For Grade 420 reinforcement, and for all prestressed
reinforcements, it is permitted to set the compression-controlled strain limit to 0.002.
C.10.3.4 — Sections are controlled by tension if the net tensile strain in the extreme steel reinforcement in tension is equal
, the concrete in compression reaches its limit of ÿ between the limit of compression
to or greater than 0.005, just whenÿt
_
Assumed strain of 0.003. The sections with controlled unit strain and 0.005 constitute a transition region
you
between compression controlled sections and tensile controlled sections.
C.10.3.5 — For non-prestressed elements in flexure and non-prestressed elements with factored axial compression load
less than 0.10f Aÿ cg
, ÿ in the state of nominal resistance should not be less than 0.004.
you
C.10.3.5.1 — The use of compression reinforcement in conjunction with additional tensile reinforcement is permitted to
increase the resistance of elements subjected to bending.
C.10.3.6 — The axial design resistance Pn ÿ of members in compression shall not be taken greater than that calculated
Pn,max ÿ using equation (C.10-1) or (C.10-2).
C.10.3.6.1 — For spiral-reinforced non-prestressed members complying with C.7.10.4, or for

composite elements complying with C.10.13:
ÿ
ÿ 0.80
P ÿ =ÿ ÿ n max ( )0.85f cAA )+
( fg A ÿ yst st ÿ
ÿ
(C.10-1)
C.10.3.6.2 — For non-prestressed members with stirrups that comply with C.7.10.5:
ÿ P=ÿ ÿ n max
ÿ 0.75
( ) 0.85f cAA )+
( fg A ÿ yst st ÿ
ÿ
(C.10-2)
C.10.3.6.3 — For prestressed members, the design axial resistance, Pn ÿ , shall not be taken greater than 0.80 (for
spirally reinforced members) or 0.75 (for stirruped members) of the design axial load with zero eccentricity Po ÿ .
C.10.3.7 — Members subjected to axial compression loading shall be designed for the maximum moment that can
accompany axial loading. The factored axial force Pu , at a given eccentricity, shall not exceed that given in C.10.3.6. The
maximum factored moment Mu shall be increased for slenderness effects in accordance with C.10.10.
C.10.4 — Distance between the lateral supports of elements subjected to bending
C.10.4.1 — The spacing between the lateral supports of a beam must not exceed 50 times the lesser width b of the flange
or compression face.
C.10.4.2 — The effects of lateral eccentricity of the load must be taken into account when determining the spacing between
the lateral supports.
C-76
C.10.5 — Minimum reinforcement in elements subjected to bending
C.10.5.1 — In any section of an element subjected to bending when tensile reinforcement is required by analysis, except as
established in C.10.5.2, C.10.5.3 and C.10.5.4, the As provided does not must be less than that obtained by means of:
ÿ
0.25f c
A = bdw (C.10-3)
s,min
F
and
but not less than 1.4bdf

wy
C.10.5.2 — For statically determined elements with the flange in tension, As,min shall not be less than the value given by
equation (C.10-3) replacing bw by 2b or the width of the flange, whichever
w be less.
C.10.5.3 — The requirements of C.10.5.1 and C.10.5.2 need not be applied if in each section the As provided is at least
one third higher than that required by analysis.
C.10.5.4 — For structural slabs and footings of uniform thickness, As,min in the span direction shall be the same as required
by C.7.12.2.1. The maximum spacing of this reinforcement must not exceed three times the thickness, nor 450 mm.
C.10.6 — Flexural reinforcement distribution in beams and slabs in one direction

C.10.6.1 — This section establishes rules for the distribution of flexural reinforcement to control flexural cracking in beams
and in one-way slabs (slabs reinforced to resist flexural stresses in only one direction).
C.10.6.2 — The distribution of flexural reinforcement in slabs in two directions shall be done in accordance with the
provisions of C.13.3.
C.10.6.3 — Flexural tension reinforcement shall be properly distributed in the zones of maximum flexural tension of a
member's cross section, per the requirements of C.10.6.4.
C.10.6.4 — The reinforcement spacing closest to a surface in tension, s given by: , must not be greater than
ÿ ÿÿ 280
ÿ
ÿ
= s 380 ÿ
ÿ
2.5c c (C.10-4)
Fyes
than prestressed to 300(280 f ) , cwhere

is the shortest
c yes
distance from the surface of the reinforcement or steel of but not more
the face in tension. If the reinforcement closest to the face in extreme tension corresponds to a single bar or a single wire,
the value of s to use in equation (C.10-4) is the width of the face in extreme tension.
The calculated stress sf (MPa) in the reinforcement closest to the tensile face for service loads shall be obtained on the
basis of the unfactored moment. It is permissible to take sf as 2/3 of yf .
C.10.6.5 — The provisions of C.10.6.4 are not sufficient for structures that are exposed to very aggressive media, or when
they are designed to be waterproof. For such structures require special precautions and investigations.
C.10.6.6 — When T-beam flanges are in tension, part of the flexural tension reinforcement shall be distributed over an
effective flange width as defined in C.8.12 or a width equal to 1/10 of the span , whichever is less. If the effective width of
the flange exceeds 1/10 of the span, some longitudinal reinforcement must be placed in the outermost areas of the flange.
C-77
C.10.6.7 — Where h of a beam or joist is greater than 900 mm, longitudinal surface reinforcement shall be placed uniformly
distributed on both side faces of the element within a distance h 2 close to the face of
traction. The spacing s shall be that indicated in C.10.6.4, where the surface of c is the shortest distance measured from the
c
the reinforcement, or prestressing steel, is superficial to the lateral face of the element. Such reinforcement can be included in the
strength calculation only if a strain compatibility analysis is made to determine the stresses of individual bars or wires.
C.10.7 — High-rise beams

C.10.7.1 — High-rise beams are members loaded on one face and supported on the opposite face such that compression struts
can develop between the loads and the supports, and have:
(a) free light, n , equal to or less than four times the total height of the element, or
(b) Regions with concentrated loads less than twice the height of the member measured from the support section.
High-rise beams must be designed considering the non-linear distribution of unit strains or else Appendix CA (See also C.11.7.1
and C.12.10.6). Lateral buckling must be taken into account.
C.10.7.2 — Vn for high beams shall be in accordance with C.11.7.
C.10.7.3 — The minimum tensile reinforcement area, As,min , shall comply with the provisions of C.10.5.
C.10.7.4 — The minimum horizontal and vertical reinforcement on the side faces of high beams subjected to bending shall comply
with CA.3.3 or C.11.7.4 and C.11.7.5.
C.10.8 — Design dimensions for compression members (columns)

C.10.8.1 — Insulated compression members with multiple spirals
The outer limits of the effective cross section of a member in compression, with two or more interlocking spirals, shall be taken at a
distance outside the extreme limits of the spirals equal to the minimum concrete cover required in C.7.7.
C.10.8.2 — Compression elements built monolithically with walls
The outer limits of the effective cross section of a compression element with spirals or abutments, built monolithically with a
concrete wall or pillar, shall not be taken more than 40 mm outside the spiral or abutments of said element.
C.10.8.3 — Compression members of equivalent circular section
Instead of using the gross area for the design of a compression member of square, octagonal, or other geometric cross section, it
is permissible to use a circular section with a diameter equal to the least lateral dimension of the actual section. The gross area
considered, the amounts of reinforcement required and the design resistance must be based on said circular section.
C.10.8.4 — Section limits
For a compression member having a cross section greater than that required by loading considerations, it is permissible to use a
reduced effective area Ag , not less than half the total area, for the purpose of determining minimum reinforcement and strength.
This provision does not apply to elements (portals resisting moment or
C-78
structural walls) with moderate energy dissipation capacity (DMO) or special (DES) designed in accordance with Chapter
C.21.
C.10.9 — Limits of reinforcement of compression elements (columns)
C.10.9.1 — The area of longitudinal reinforcement, Ast , for non-composite elements in compression must not be less than
0.01Ag nor more than 0.04A .g For structures with moderate energy dissipation capacity (MOD) and that
(DES) in Chapter C.21 restricts the maximum allowable area.
C.10.9.2 — The minimum number of longitudinal bars in members subjected to compression shall be 4 for bars within
circular or rectangular ties, 3 for bars within triangular ties, and 6 for bars surrounded by spirals, which comply with C.
10.9.3.
C.10.9.3 — The volumetric amount of spiral reinforcement, ÿs , must not be less than the value given by:
ÿ TO
g ÿ ÿFÿc
ÿ= yes
0.45 ÿ
ÿ
1 (C.10-5)
A Fandt
ÿ ch ÿ
where the value of f to be used in equation (C.10-5) should not be greater than 700 MPa. For f greater than 420 MPa, no
andt andt
Lap splices in accordance with C.7.10.4.5(a) shall be used.
C.10.10 — Slenderness effects in compression members
C.10.10.1 — Slenderness effects are allowed to be ignored in the following cases:
a) in members subjected to compression not braced against lateral displacement when:
what
or
ÿ 22 (C.10-6)
r
b) in compression members braced against lateral displacement when:
what
or
ÿÿ 34 12MM 40 1 ( 2 )ÿ (C.10-7)
r
where the term M M1 2 is positive if the column is deflected in simple curvature and negative if the element has double
curvature.
Compression members are permitted to be considered braced against lateral displacement when the bracing members
have a total stiffness restraining lateral movement of that story of at least twelve times the gross stiffness of the columns
within the story.
C.10.10.1.1 — The unsupported laterally length of an element in compression, clear u , should be taken as the
distance between floor slabs, beams, or other elements capable of providing lateral support in the direction being
considered. When there are capitals or cartouches on the columns, it must be measured
or to the lower end of the capital or
cartouche on the plane considered.
C.10.10.1.2 — The radius of gyration, r , can be taken equal to 0.3 times the total dimension of the section in the
direction in which stability is being considered for the case of rectangular elements and 0.25 times the diameter for elements
circular in compression. For other forms, it is permissible to calculate r for the gross section of concrete.
C.10.10.2 — When slenderness effects are not ignored as permitted by C.10.10.1, the design of compression members,
restraint beams, and other support members shall be based on factored forces and moments from an analysis of second
order that complies with C.10.10.3, C.10.10.4 or C.10.10.5. These items should also
C-79
comply with C.10.10.2.1 and C.10.10.2.2. The cross-sectional dimensions of each element used in the analysis must be within 10
percent of the element dimensions noted on the design drawings, otherwise the analysis must be repeated.
C.10.10.2.1 — The total moments, including second-order effects, of compression members, restraint beams, or other structural
members shall not exceed 1.4 times the moments due to first-order effects.
C.10.10.2.2 — Second order effects must be considered along the length of the compression members. It is permitted to calculate
these effects using the moment magnification procedure described in C.10.10.6.
C.10.10.3 — Second order nonlinear analysis
The second order analysis should consider material nonlinearity, member curvature and drift, duration of load, shrinkage and creep,
and interaction with the foundation. The analysis procedure shall be shown to lead to a prediction of strength in substantial agreement
with the results of representative tests of statically indeterminate reinforced concrete structures.
C.10.10.4 — Second-order elastic analysis
The second order elastic analysis must take into account the section properties determined considering the influence of axial loads,
the presence of cracked regions along the element and the effects of load duration.
C.10.10.4.1 — The following properties are allowed for elements in the structure:
(a) Modulus of elasticity ............................................. ................................................................ ................ Eq of C.8.5.1
(b) Moments of inertia, l

Elements in compression:
Columns .................................................. ................................................................ ...................................... 0.70l g
Walls – not cracked ................................................ ................................................................ ..................... 0.70lg

– cracked ................................................ ................................................................ ........................ 0.35l g
Bending elements:
Beams .................................................. ................................................................ ............................................ 0.35l g
Flat plates and flat slabs ................................................... ................................................................ .......... 0.25l g
(c) Area ................................................ ................................................................ ................................................................ ..... 1.0A g
Alternatively, the moments of inertia of members in compression and in bending, l, are allowed to be calculated as follows: ,
Elements in compression:
ÿ MP st
ÿÿ ÿ
he
= ÿ 0.80 +25ÿÿ0.5
ÿ A 0.875l
Ph ÿÿ
P1 or or
he (C.10-8)
ÿ
g g
ÿ gu o ÿÿ ÿ
where Pu and Mu must come from the particular charge combination under consideration, or the combination of Pu and Mu
which results from the smallest value of l . There is no need to use a value of l smaller than 0.35l . g
Bending elements:
bw ÿ
( 25 1.2 0.2 =ÿ ) +ÿ ÿ
l 0.10
d
he
g
ÿ 0.5l
g
(C.10-9)
ÿÿ ÿÿ
C-80
For continuous members subjected to bending, let l be the average of the values obtained from Eq. (C.10-9) for positive
and negative moment critical sections. There is no need to use a value of l
less than 0.25l . g
The cross-sectional dimensions of each element used in the analysis should not depart more than 10 percent from the
dimensions shown on the construction drawings, otherwise the analysis must be repeated.
C.10.10.4.2 — For members subjected to compression, l shall be divided by 1+ ÿ when there

ds are sustained lateral
loads. The term ÿds is the ratio of the maximum factored sustained shear force within a story to the maximum factored
shear force associated with the same load combination, but shall not be greater than 1.0.
C.10.10.5 — Moment magnification procedure
Columns and stories in a structure must be designated as part of swaying (unbraced) or nonswaying (braced) structures.
Design of columns in non-sway (braced) structures shall be based on C.10.10.6. The design of columns in lateral offset
(unbraced) structures shall be based on C.10.10.7.
C.10.10.5.1 — A column within a structure may be assumed to be braced (without lateral displacement) if the increase
in the extreme moments of the column due to second-order effects does not exceed 5 percent of the moments first-order
extremes.
C.10.10.5.2 — A story in the structure may be assumed to be braced (without lateral displacement) if:
ÿ Puoÿ
Q = ÿ0.05 _ (C.10-10)
V us c
where ÿPu and Vus are the total vertical load and factored horizontal shear of the story, respectively, at the story under
consideration and ÿo is the first order relative lateral deformation (drift) between the top and bottom of the story due to
Vus .
C.10.10.6 — Moment magnification procedure — Structures without lateral displacement
Compression members shall be designed for the factored axial force Pu and for the factored moment amplified for element
curvature effects, Mc , as follows:
MM
c 2
=ÿ (C.10-11)
Where
C.m
ÿ= ÿ 1.0 (C.10-12)
Por
1 ÿ
0.75P c
and
2
the ÿ
Pc = 2
(C.10-13)
( what
or
)
C.10.10.6.1 — The must be taken as:
( 0.2ThecgIEI+ I know )
He = (C.10-14)
1 + ÿ dns
either
C-81
0.4EI
cg
He = (C.10-15)
1 + ÿ dns
Alternatively, El is allowed to be calculated using the l value of equation (C.10-8) divided by (1+ ÿdns ) .
C.10.10.6.2 — The term ÿdns is the ratio between the maximum factored sustained axial load within a story and the
maximum factored axial load associated with the same load combination, but shall not be greater than 1.0.
C.10.10.6.3 — It is allowed to consider the effective length factor, k , like 1.0.
C.10.10.6.4 — For members without transverse loads between the supports, Cm must be considered as:
m
1C =+M
m 0.6 0.4 (C.10-16)
2
term M M1 2 double it is positive if the column is bent in simple curvature and negative if the element has Where the
curvature. For members with transverse loads between supports, Cm shall be taken as 1.0.
C.10.10.6.5 — The factored moment, M2 , in equation (C.10-11) must not be less than
=
MP 15 0.03h +(2,min ) (Q.10-17)
or
on each axis separately, where 15 and h are in mm. For members in which M2,min , exceeds M2 , the value of Cm in
equation (10-16) must be equal to 1.0, or be based on the ratio of the calculated end moments, M M1 2 .
C.10.10.7 — Moment magnification procedure — Lateral displacement structures
The moments M1 and M2 at the ends of a single compression member are to be taken as:
= 1ns 1s+ÿ
MM1 M (C.10-18)
yes
= 2ns 2s+ÿ
MM2 M (Q.10-19)
where ÿ is calculated according to C.10.10.7.3 or C.10.10.7.4.

yes
C.10.10.7.1 — Bending members must be designed for all magnified extreme moments of
compression elements at the joint.
C.10.10.7.2 — The effective length factor k shall be determined using the values Ec e l given in
C.10.10.4 and must not be less than 1.0.
C.10.10.7.3 — The moment magnifier ÿ must be calculated as: yes
1 ÿ= ÿ 1
S
(C.10-20)
1Q
ÿ
If he ÿ calculated by equation (C.10-20) exceeds 1.5, the

yes
ÿ must be calculated using the elastic analysis of
yes
second order or C.10.10.7.4.
C.10.10.7.4 — Alternatively, it is allowed to compute ÿ as: yes
C-82
1
ÿ=
S
ÿ1 _ (C.10-21)
ÿP
or
1 ÿ
0.75Pÿ
c
where ÿPu is the sum of all factored vertical loads in a story and ÿPc is the sum of all columns that resist lateral displacement
in a story. ÿPu is calculated using equation (C.10-13) with the value k of given in C.10.10.7.2 and El of C.10.10.6.1 where ÿds
must replace ÿdns .
C.10.11 — Axially Loaded Members Supporting Slab Systems
Axially loaded members supporting a slab system included within the scope of C.13.1 shall be designed as provided in
Chapter C.10 and in accordance with the additional requirements of Chapter C.13.
C.10.12 — Load transmission of the columns through the mezzanine slabs
If the cfÿ of a column is 1.4 times greater than that of the story system for the case of interior or edge columns, or greater
than 1.2 times for the case of corner columns, the load transmission through the slab of mezzanine shall be made in
accordance with C.10.12.1, or C.10.12.2.
C.10.12.1 — The strength of the column at the joint can be calculated using an effective resistance of the concrete of the
column within the joint, ( ) c , and ofF'the,slab, ( ) c as a function of the concrete resistance of the column, ( c )c fÿ
calculated and
F' , So:
yes
(a) For interior columns:
0.25 ÿ ÿ 0.35 () ÿ() =ÿ +1.4

(Fc) c
ÿ ÿ ÿÿ
F F F (C.10-22)
()c and
ÿ ÿ (h / cc
c )sc
ÿ (h / c )
2 2 ÿ
In the previous equation, the quotient ( ) h c2 should not be less than one third, where h is the total thickness of the slab,
c is the least dimension of the column section. and 2
(b) For edge columns:
()Fc c()ecsc=()1.4f
ÿ ÿÿ
ÿ F (C.10-23)
(c) For corner columns:
()Fc c()ecsc=()1.2f
ÿ ÿÿ
ÿ F (Q.10-24)
In any of the cases (a) to (c), additional longitudinal bars and stirrups or spirals may be used, if required.
C.10.12.2 — Concrete of resistance equal to that specified for the column must be placed in the mezzanine in the area of the
column. The concrete top surface of the column shall extend 600mm into the slab from the face of the column. The column
concrete shall be monolithic with the floor concrete and shall be placed in accordance with C.6.4.6 and C.6.4.7.
C-83
C.10.13 — Composite members subjected to compression
C.10.13.1 — Composite members subjected to compression shall include all those members that are longitudinally reinforced
with structural steel shapes, pipes, or tubes, with or without longitudinal bars.
C.10.13.2 — The strength of composite members shall be calculated for the same limiting conditions that apply to common
reinforced concrete members.
C.10.13.3 — Any axial load resistance assigned to the concrete of a composite member shall be transmitted to the concrete by
members or brackets that bear directly on the concrete of the composite member.
C.10.13.4 — Any axial load resistance not assigned to concrete in a composite member shall be developed by direct connection
to the structural steel profile, pipe, or tube.
C.10.13.5 — For the evaluation of slenderness effects, the radius of gyration, r greater, of the composite section should not be
than the value given by
(IEcg5 IE ) + s sx
r = (C.10-25)
(AEcg 5 AE) + s sx
and as an alternative to a more precise calculation, EI in equation (C.10-13) should be taken either as indicated by equation
(C.10-14) or by means of
(IEcg5 )
IE = + IEs sx (C.10-26)
1 + ÿ dns
C.10.13.6 — Concrete core confined in structural steel
C.10.13.6.1 — For a composite element with a concrete core confined by structural steel, the thickness of the confining steel
shall not be less than:
F
b
and
, for each face of width b

3E yes
nor what:
F
h
and
, for circular sections of diameter h

8E yes
C.10.13.6.2 — Longitudinal bars located within the confined concrete core are permitted to be used in the calculation of Asx and
I. sx
C.10.13.7 — Spiral reinforcement around a structural steel core
A composite member, made of spiral-reinforced concrete around a structural steel core shall satisfy C.10.13.7.1 through
C.10.13.7.4.
C.10.13.7.1 — The design yield strength of the structural steel core shall be the resistance to
minimum specified yield strength for the grade of structural steel used, but not to exceed 350 MPa.
C.10.13.7.2 — The spiral reinforcement must comply with the specifications in C.10.9.3.
C.10.13.7.3 — Longitudinal bars located within the spiral must not have an area less than 0.01 nor more than 0.08 times the
net area of the concrete section.
C.10.13.7.4 — Longitudinal bars located inside the spiral are allowed to be considered in the calculation of Asx e
I sx
.
C-84
C.10.13.8 — Reinforcing stirrups around a structural steel core
A composite member, made of laterally confined concrete with ties around a structural steel core, shall comply with C.10.13.8.1.
to C.10.13.8.7.
C.10.13.8.1 — The design yield strength of the structural steel core shall be the resistance to
minimum specified yield strength for the grade of structural steel used, but not to exceed 350 MPa.
C.10.13.8.2 — Cross ties shall extend completely around the structural steel core.
C.10.13.8.3 — Transverse ties shall have a diameter not less than 0.02 times the greatest lateral dimension of the composite
element, except that ties shall not be less than ÿÿ. 10 and need not be greater than ÿÿ. 16. Welded wire reinforcement of equal
area may be used.
C.10.13.8.4 — The vertical spacing between the transversal stirrups must not exceed half of the smallest lateral dimension of
the composite element, nor 48 times the diameter of the stirrups, nor 16 times the diameter of the longitudinal bars.
C.10.13.8.5 — The longitudinal bars placed inside the stirrups must not be less than 0.01 nor
greater than 0.08 times the net area of the concrete.
C.10.13.8.6 — A longitudinal bar must be placed in each corner of a rectangular section, with other
Longitudinal bars spaced less than 1/2 the least lateral dimension of the composite element.
C.10.13.8.7 — Longitudinal bars placed inside the stirrups are allowed to be considered to calculate Asx and
I.
sx
C.10.14 — Crushing resistance
C.10.14.1 — The design crushing resistance of the concrete shall not exceed ( ÿ 0.85f Aÿ except when the )
c 1bearing surface is wider
on all sides than the loaded area, in which case, the resistance is allowed design to crush in the loaded area is multiplied by ( )
AA , but not more than 2. 2 1
C.10.14.2 — Section C.10.14 is not applicable to post-tensioning anchors.
C-85
Grades:
C-86
NSR-10 – Chapter C.11 – Shear and torsion
CHAPTER C.11 — SHEAR AND TORSION
C.11.1 — Shear resistance

C.11.1.1 — Except for elements designed in accordance with Appendix A, the design of cross sections subjected to shear
shall be based on
ÿVV
ÿ no or
(C.11-1)
where Vu is the factored shear force in the considered section and Vn is the nominal shear resistance calculated using
Vno
VV=cs+ (C.11-2)
where Vc is the nominal shear resistance provided by the concrete, calculated in accordance with C.11.2, C.11.3, or
C.11.11 and Vs is the nominal shear resistance provided by the shear reinforcement calculated in accordance with C.11.4 ,
C.11.9.9 or C.11.11.
C.11.1.1.1 — When determining Vn , the effect of any openings in the elements must be considered.
C.11.1.1.2 — In determining Vc , where applicable, the effects of axial tension due to creep and shrinkage in constrained
members and the effects of inclined flexural compression in members of variable height may be included.
C.11.1.2 — The values of cfÿ used in this Chapter shall not exceed 8.3 MPa except as permitted in
C.11.1.2.1.
C.11.1.2.1 — Values of cfÿ greater than 8.3 MPa are permitted to be used in calculating Vc , Vci and Vcw for reinforced
or prestressed concrete beams and ribbed concrete slabs with minimal web reinforcement in accordance with C.11.4 .6.3,
C.11.4.6.4 or C.11.5.5.2.
C.11.1.3 — It is permitted to calculate the maximum Vu at the supports in accordance with C.11.1.3.1 or C.11.1.3.2 when
all the following conditions (a), (b) and (c) are met:
(a) the support reaction in the direction of the applied shear introduces compression in the end zones of the element,
(b) the loads are applied at or near the top face of the element,
(c) no concentrated load is applied between the face of the support and the location of the critical section defined in
C.11.1.3.1 or C.11.1.3.2.
C.11.1.3.1 — For non-prestressed elements, it is permitted to design sections located at a distance less than d
measured from the face of the support for Vu calculated at distance d .
C.11.1.3.2 — For prestressed concrete elements, it is permitted to design sections located at a

distance less than h 2 from the face of the support for the Vu calculated for a distance h 2 .
C.11.1.4 — For high-rise elements, slabs and footings, walls, corbels and brackets, the special provisions of C.11.7 to
C.11.11 must be applied.
C-87
C.11.2 — Shear resistance provided by concrete in non-prestressed elements
C.11.2.1 — Vc shall be calculated following the requirements of C.11.2.1.1 to C.11.2.1.3, unless a more detailed calculation is
performed per C.11.2.2. Throughout this Chapter, except in C.11.6, ÿ shall be used as defined in C.8.6.1.
C.11.2.1.1 — For elements subjected to shear and bending only:
ÿ
= ÿ fbd
V 0.17 (C.11-3)
c ww
C.11.2.1.2 — For elements subjected to axial compression:
ÿ No. ÿ ÿ
or
V 0.17
=+ÿ1ÿÿ fbd (C.11-4)
c ww
14 TO
g ÿÿ
The amount NA g It must be expressed in MPa.

or
C.11.2.1.3 — For members subjected to significant axial tension, Vc shall be taken to be zero unless
do a more detailed analysis using C.11.2.2.3.
C.11.2.2 — It is permitted to calculate Vc by the more detailed method of C.11.2.2.1 to C.11.2.2.3.
C.11.2.2.1 — For members subjected to shear and bending only:
Vd
= 0.16 f 17 ÿ +ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿc cV
ÿ
or
ÿ ÿ db (C.11-5)
ww
m ÿ
or
than 1.0, and Mu but not greater

ww . Calculating Vc by means of equation (C.11-5), VdM ÿ 0.29 fbd
or or
should not be taken higher
occurs simultaneously with Vu in the considered section.
C.11.2.2.2 — For members subjected to axial compression, it is permitted to use equation (C.11-5) to calculate Vc with Mm
substituting for Mu and VdM or or
not limited to 1.0, where
ÿ=
ÿ ÿ 4h
ÿ ÿd
M MNÿ ÿ (C.11-6)
soooo
8
However, Vc should not be taken greater than
ÿ
0.29N or
=ÿ +
V c0.29 fbd 1 ww (C.11-7)
TO
g
The NA quantity or It must be expressed in MPa. When Mm calculated by means of equation (C.11-6) is negative,
g
Vc should be calculated using equation (C.11-7).
C.11.2.2.3 — For elements subjected to significant axial tension:
ÿ 0.29N or
ÿ ÿ
V c0.17 1 =+ ÿ fbd
ww (C.11-8)
TO
ÿÿ g ÿÿ
but not less than zero, where Nu is negative for traction. NA or g

It must be expressed in MPa.
C-88
C.11.2.3 — For circular elements, the area used to calculate Vc shall be taken as the product of the diameter and the effective
height of the concrete section. It is permitted to take d as 0.80 times the diameter of the concrete section.
C.11.3 — Shear resistance provided by concrete in prestressed elements
C.11.3.1 — In the requirements of C.11.3, d shall be taken as the distance from the extreme fiber in compression to the
centroid of longitudinal prestressed and unprestressed reinforcement in tension, if any, but need not be taken less than 0.80
a.m.
C.11.3.2 — For members having an effective prestressing force of not less than 40 percent of the tensile strength of flexural
reinforcement, unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance with C.11.3.3,
ÿVd up ÿ
4.8
ccÿ
=wÿ+ÿ ÿ V 0.05 f ÿ
bd (C.11-9)
m or
ÿ
but it is not necessary to consider Vc less than . Vc shall

givennotin
ÿ
bewwtaken greater than ÿ 0.17 fbd the value 0.42 fbd
ÿ ww
ÿ
nor
C.11.3.4 or C.11.3.5. Vd M that it should not be taken greater than 1.0, where Mu occurs simultaneously
up u
with Vu in the considered section.
C.11.3.3 — Vc can be calculated according to C.11.3.3.1 and C.11.3.3.2, and Vc must be the lesser of Vci and Vcw .
C.11.3.3.1 — Vci must be calculated by means of:
VM
(C.11-10)
ÿ
V 0.05 fbd
i = ÿ ++ ci V
cwp d
believe
m max
where dp should not be taken less than 0.80h and
ÿ ÿI
m believe
= ÿÿÿ ( 0.5ff ÿ
ÿ + ÿfc
but d ) (C.11-11)
ÿ and
you
and the values of Mmax and Vi must be calculated with the load combination that causes the maximum factored moment in
ÿ
the section. There is no need to take Vci less than ÿ 0.14 fbd ww
C.11.3.3.2 — Vcw must be calculated by means of
( )
ÿ
V 0.29f=0.3fbd
ww
ÿ+ + V pc wpp
c (C.11-12)
where there is no need to take dp less than 0.80h .
Alternatively, Vcw can be calculated as the shear force corresponding to the dead load plus the live load producing a principal
ÿ
tensile stress of at the centroidal axis of the element or0.33fÿ

at the_ web-flange
c intersection when the centroidal axis is in the flange. .
In composite members, the principal tensile stress must be calculated using the cross section that resists the live load.
C-89
C.11.3.4 — In a prestressed element in which the section at a distance h 2 measured from the face of the support is closer to
the end of the element than the transfer length of the prestressing steel, account must be taken of the prestress reduction
when calculating Vcw . This value of Vcw should also be considered as the upper limit for Eq. (C.11-9). The prestressing
force should be assumed to vary linearly from zero at the end of the prestressing steel to a maximum at a distance from the
end of the prestressing steel equal to the transfer length, which is assumed to be 50 strand diameters and 100 strand
diameters. individual wires.
C.11.3.5 — In a prestressed element where the bond of some tendons does not extend to the end of the element, a reduced
prestress shall be considered when calculating Vc in accordance with C.11.3.2 or C.11.3.3. The value of Vcw calculated using
reduced prestressing should also be taken as the upper limit for equation (C.11-9). The prestressing force due to tendons in
which the bond does not extend to the end of the member may be assumed to vary linearly from zero at the point where the
bond begins to a maximum at a distance from this point equal to the transfer length, assuming it is 50 diameters in strands
and 100 diameters in individual wires.
C.11.4 — Shear resistance provided by shear reinforcement
C.11.4.1 — Types of shear reinforcement
C.11.4.1.1 — Reinforcement for shear consisting of:
(a) Stirrups perpendicular to the axis of the element
(b) Electrowelded wire reinforcement with wires located perpendicular to the element axis.
(c) Spirals, circular stirrups and closed confinement stirrups.
C.11.4.1.2 — For non-prestressed members, shear reinforcement is permitted to also consist of:
(a) Stirrups forming an angle of 45º or more with the longitudinal tensile reinforcement.
(b) Longitudinal reinforcement with a bent part that forms an angle of 30º or more with the longitudinal tensile
reinforcement.
(c) Combinations of stirrups and longitudinal bent reinforcement.
C.11.4.2 — The values of yf and yt f used in the design of the reinforcement for shear must not exceed 420 MPa,
except that the value shall not exceed 550 MPa for welded corrugated wire reinforcement.
C.11.4.3 — When the requirements of C.11.5 are used in prestressed members, d shall be taken as the distance measured
from the extreme fiber in compression to the centroid of longitudinal reinforcement in tension, prestressed and unstressed, if
any, but there is no need to take it less than 0.80h .
C.11.4.4 — Stirrups and other bars or wires used as shear reinforcement shall extend to a distance d measured from the
extreme fiber in compression and shall be developed at both ends in accordance with C.12.13.
C.11.4.5 — Limits for shear reinforcement spacing
C.11.4.5.1 — The spacing of the shear reinforcement placed perpendicular to the axis of the element shall not
exceed d 2 in non-prestressed concrete elements, 0.75h in prestressed elements, nor 600 mm.
C.11.4.5.2 — Inclined stirrups and bent longitudinal reinforcement shall be spaced such that up to the reinforcement
each line at 45º, which extends towards the reaction from half the height of the element, d 2 longitudinal ,
tension, must be crossed by at least one line of shear reinforcement.
C-90
C.11.4.5.3 — Where Vs exceeds

ÿ
0.33 fbd ww the maximum separations given in C.11.4.5.1 and C.11.4.5.2 are
They should be cut in half.
C.11.4.6 — Minimum shear reinforcement
C.11.4.6.1 — A minimum area of reinforcement for shear, Av,min , must be placed in every reinforced concrete element
subjected to flexure (prestressed and nonprestressed) where Vu exceeds 0.5 Vÿ , except in: c
(a) Footings and solid slabs.
(b) Honeycomb elements with a total height, not including floor taper, not greater than 315 mm and honeycomb units where Vu
is not greater than 0.5 Vÿ . ww
(c) Ribbed concrete slabs with joists defined in 8.13.
(d) Beams with h not greater than 250 mm.
(e) Integral beams with slabs with h not greater than 600 mm, and not greater than the greater of 2.5 times the thickness of the
flange, or 0.5 times the width of the web.
(f) Beams constructed of steel fiber reinforced normal-weight concrete, with a cfÿ not exceeding 40 MPa, with an h not greater
than 600 mm, and Vu not greater than ÿ0.17 fbd
ÿ
.
ww
C.11.4.6.2 — The minimum shear reinforcement requirements of C.11.4.6.1 are permitted to be disregarded if it is shown by
testing that the required Mn and Vn can be developed when shear reinforcement is removed. Such tests shall simulate the effects of
differential settlement, creep, shrinkage, and temperature variation, based on a realistic assessment of the occurrence of such effects
under service conditions.
C.11.4.6.3 — When reinforcement is required for shear, in accordance with C.11.4.6.1 or for resistance and when C.11.5.1 allows
torsion to be neglected, Av,min for prestressed members (except as provided by C.11.4.6.4) and not prestressed must be calculated
using:
bs
TO = 0.062f ÿ
w
(C.11-13)
v ,min c
fyt _
But it must not be less than ( 0.35bsf .

) w andt
C.11.4.6.4 — For prestressed members having an effective prestressing force not less than 40 percent of the tensile strength of
flexural reinforcement, Av,min shall not be less than the smallest value given by Eqs. (C .11-13) or (C.11-14).
afpssd
pu
TO
v ,min
= (C.11-14)
80f db yt
w
C.11.4.7 — Design of reinforcement for shear
C.11.4.7.1 — Where Vu exceeds Vc ÿ , reinforcement for shear shall be provided in accordance with equations (C.11-1) and
(C.11-2), where Vs shall be calculated in accordance with C.11.4. 7.2 to C.11.4.7.9.
C.11.4.7.2 — Where reinforcement is used for shear perpendicular to the axis of the element:
af dv andt
V =
yes
(C.11-15)
yes
C-91
where Av is the area of reinforcement for shear within spacing s .
C.11.4.7.3 — Where circular stirrups, closed confinement stirrups, or spirals are used as reinforcement for shear, Vs shall be
calculated using Eq. (C.11-15), where d is defined in C.11.2.3 for circular elements. and Av shall be taken as twice the area of the bar
in a circular, closed confinement stirrup, or spiral with a spacing s f is the specified yield strength of the circular stirrup, closed
,
confinement stirrup, or spiral and s is measured in the direction parallel to the longitudinal reinforcement.
andt
C.11.4.7.4 — Where inclined stirrups are used as shear reinforcement:
(
A f sin cos dÿ+ ÿ v yt )
V = (C.11-16)
yes
yes
where ÿ is the angle between the inclined stirrups and the longitudinal axis of the element, and s is measured in the direction parallel to
the longitudinal axis.
C.11.4.7.5 — Where the shear reinforcement consists of an individual bar or a single group of bars
parallel, all bent at the same distance from the support:
VA f= sin ÿ s vy (C.11-17)
but not greater than 0.25 fbdww , where ÿ is the angle between the bent reinforcement and the longitudinal axis of the element.
C.11.4.7.6 — Where the shear reinforcement consists of a series of bent parallel bars or groups of bent parallel bars at different
distances from the support, Vs shall be calculated using Eq. (C.11-16).
C.11.4.7.7 — Only the central three-fourths of the inclined portion of any longitudinal bar
that is bent can be considered effective as reinforcement for shear.
C.11.4.7.8 — Where more than one type of shear reinforcement is used to reinforce the same portion of an element, Vs shall be
calculated as the sum of the values calculated for the various types of shear reinforcement.
C.11.4.7.9 — Vs should not be considered greater than

ÿ
0.66 fbdww .
C.11.5 — Design for torsion
Design for torsion shall be in accordance with C.11.5.1 to C.11.5.6, or C.11.5.7.
C.11.5.1 — Torque Threshold
It is permissible to neglect the effects of torsion if the factored torsional moment Tu is less than:
(a) in non-prestressed members
2 ÿ
ÿ TO
cop
ÿ
ÿÿ 0.083f c
ÿÿp
ÿ cp ÿÿÿ
(b) in prestressed members
ÿ ÿto 2 F
ÿ cp cop
ÿ ÿ0.083f
0.33 f ÿ ÿ ÿÿ + ÿ 1
c ÿ
p
ÿÿ cop c
C-92
(c) For non-prestressed members subjected to axial tension or compression forces:
ÿ to 2 ÿ No.
cp or
0.083f
ÿÿÿ + ÿÿ ÿ 1
c ÿ
ÿÿp 0.33Af
ÿ cp ÿ g c
In elements built monolithically with one slab, the overhanging width of the flange used to calculate Acp and pcp shall
comply with C.13.2.4. For a hollow section, Ag must be used instead of Acp in C.11.5.1 and at the outer limits of the
section they must comply with C.13.2.4.
C.11.5.1.1 — For isolated elements with wings and for elements built monolithically with one slab, the overhanging
width of the flange used to calculate Acp and pcp shall comply with C.13.2.4, except that flanges
2
Overhangs can be neglected when the parameter A p calculatedcp
for
cp
calculated for a flanged beam is less than
the same beam ignoring the flanges.
C.11.5.2 — Calculation of factored torque
C.11.5.2.1 — If the factored torque Tu in an element is required to maintain equilibrium and its value exceeds the
minimum given in C.11.5.1, the element shall be designed to support Tu in accordance with C.11.5. 3 to C.11.5.6.
C.11.5.2.2 — In a statically indeterminate structure, where a reduction in torsional moment in the member may occur
due to redistribution of internal forces after cracking, it is permitted to reduce the maximum Tu to the values given in (a),
(b) or (c) as appropriate:
(a) In non-prestressed members, in the sections described in C.11.5.2.4:
ÿ 2TO ÿ
ÿ
cop
ÿÿ 0.33f c
ÿÿÿ
p cop ÿÿÿ
(b) In prestressed members, in the sections described in C.11.5.2.5:
ÿ 2A ÿ F
pc
ÿÿ 0.33f ÿ ÿ cp ÿ p
c 1+ ÿ
ÿ cp ÿ0.33f _
ÿÿÿ c
(c) For non-prestressed members subjected to an axial tensile or compressive force:
ÿ 2A ÿ ÿ
ÿ No.
cop or
ÿÿ 0.33f c 1+ ÿ
p cop ÿ0.33Af
ÿÿ ÿÿÿ g c
In cases (a), (b) or (c), the bending moments and shear forces redistributed to adjacent elements shall be used in the
design of these elements. For hollow sections, Acp should not be replaced by Ag in
C.11.5.2.2.
C.11.5.2.3 — Unless determined by more exact analysis, loads are allowed to be taken
slab torsional stresses as uniformly distributed along the element.
C.11.5.2.4 — In non-prestressed members, sections located less than a distance d from the face of a support shall be
designed at least for Tu calculated at a distance d . If a concentrated torque occurs within that distance, the design critical
section should be the face of the support.
C-93
C.11.5.2.5 — In prestressed elements, sections located less than a distance h 2 from the face of a support must be
designed at least for Tu calculated at a distance h 2 . If a concentrated torque occurs within that distance, the design critical
section should be the face of the support.
C.11.5.3 — Resistance to torsional moment
C.11.5.3.1 — The dimensions of the cross section must be such that:
(a) in solid sections:
2 2
ÿÿV ÿ
ptuh ÿ ÿ V ÿ
ÿÿ or + ÿ ÿÿ
c 0.66f
ÿ
c (Q.11-18)
ÿÿbd + bd
ÿ2ÿ
w
1.7A oh ÿÿ ÿ w ÿÿ
(b) in hollow sections:
ÿÿV or ÿ
ptuh ÿ Vc ÿ
ÿÿ bd + 2 ÿÿÿ
ÿ ÿ0.66f
ÿ
c (Q.11-19)
ÿÿw 1.7A
ÿÿ oh db ÿ + ÿw ÿÿ
For prestressed members, d shall be determined in accordance with C.11.4.3.

C.11.5.3.2 — If the wall thickness varies along the perimeter of a hollow section, Eq. (C.11-19)
must be evaluated at the location where the left-hand side of Eq. (C.11-19) is maximum.
C.11.5.3.3 — If the wall thickness is less than A p oh h , the second term in equation (C.11-19) must
be taken as:
ÿÿÿÿ you
or
ÿÿ
1.7Atoh
where t is the thickness of the hollow section wall at the location where the stresses are being verified.
f used in reinforcement design for torsion shall not exceed 420 MPa.
C.11.5.3.4 — The values of yf and yt
C.11.5.3.5 — Where Tu exceeds the critical torsion, the section design shall be based on:
ÿ TT
ÿ no or
(C.11-20)
C.11.5.3.6 — Tn must be calculated by means of:
2A ot
toytf
you
no
= ÿ cot (C.11-21)
yes
where Ao is to be determined by analysis, except that it is permissible to take Ao equal to 0.85A ; ÿohshould not be taken
less than 30° nor more than 60°. We can take ÿ equal to:
(a) 45° in non-prestressed members or with a prestress less than that indicated in (b),
(b) 37.5° for prestressed members with an effective prestressing force of not less than 40 percent of the tensile strength
of the longitudinal reinforcement.
C.11.5.3.7 — The additional area of longitudinal reinforcement necessary to resist torsion, A , must not be less than:
C-94
to f ÿ ÿandt 2
TO = you
ÿh ÿ
cot ÿ (C.11-22)
yes
p F ÿ
ÿÿÿ and
where ÿ shall have the same value used in equation (C.11-21) and A s with equation you
should be taken as the calculated amount
(C.11-21) without modification according to C.11.5.5.2 or C.11.5.5.3; f trefers to transverse reinforcement and
closed for torsion and yf to longitudinal torsion reinforcement.
C.11.5.3.8 — The reinforcement needed for torsion must be added to that needed for shear, moment, and axial force acting in
combination with torsion. The more restrictive requirement for spacing and placement must be met.
C.11.5.3.9 — It is allowed to reduce the area of longitudinal reinforcement for torsion in the zone of flexural compression ) , where
in an amount equal to M 0.9df or ( and Mu occurs in the section simultaneously with Tu , but the reinforcement
provided shall not be less than that required by C.11.5.5.3 or C.11.5.6.2.
C.11.5.3.10 — In prestressed beams:
(a) the total longitudinal reinforcement, including prestressing steel, shall resist at each section Mu at that section plus an additional
concentric longitudinal tensile force equal to Af based on the value of and
,
You in that section, and
(b) Spacing of longitudinal reinforcement including tendons shall satisfy the requirements of C.11.6.6.2.
C.11.5.3.11 — In prestressed beams, it is allowed to reduce the area of longitudinal reinforcement for torsion, on the side
in compression due to bending of the element, below that required in C.11.5.3.10 in accordance with C.11.5.3.9.
C.11.5.4 — Torsion reinforcement details
C.11.5.4.1 — Torsional reinforcement shall consist of longitudinal bars or tendons and one or more of the
following types of reinforcement:
(a) closed stirrups perpendicular to the axis of the element, or
(b) a closed assembly composed of welded wire reinforcement, with transverse wires perpendicular to the axis of the element, or
(c) spiral reinforcement in non-prestressed beams.
C.11.5.4.2 — Transverse torsion reinforcement must be anchored by one of the following means:
(a) a standard 135° hook or a seismic hook, as defined in C.2.2, around a longitudinal bar, or
(b) In accordance with C.12.13.2.1, C.12.13.2.2, or C.12.13.2.3 in areas where the concrete surrounding the anchor is protected
from spalling by a flange, slab, or the like.
C.11.5.4.3 — Longitudinal torsion reinforcement must be developed at both ends.
C.11.5.4.4 — In torsionally hollow sections, the distance from the axis of the transverse reinforcement for torsion to the
inner face of the hollow section wall should not be less than 0.5A p . oh h
C.11.5.5 — Minimum reinforcement for torsion
C.11.5.5.1 — A minimum area of torsion reinforcement must be provided in any zone where Tu exceeds the
torque threshold value given in C.11.5.1.
C-95
C.11.5.5.2 — Where torsion reinforcement is required in accordance with C.11.5.5.1, the minimum area of closed stirrups shall be
calculated as:
bsw
(A vt2A+c 0.062f
)= ÿ
(C.11-23)
F
andt
But it must not be less than ( 0.35bsf .

) w andt
C.11.5.5.3 — Where torsion reinforcement is required in accordance with C.11.5.5.1, the total minimum area of longitudinal torsion
reinforcement, A,min , should be calculated as:
ÿ
0.42fA c cp ÿAÿf
= you andt
(C.11-24)
A ,min ÿ ÿ ÿ p ÿ ÿh
f yy
sf
where A s t should not be taken less than 0.175bf ; f refers to closed transverse reinforcement for torsion and yf to w yt
andt
Longitudinal reinforcement for torsion.
C.11.5.6 — Spacing of reinforcement for torsion
C.11.5.6.1 — The spacing of the transverse reinforcement for torsion must not exceed the lesser of p 8 h and
300mm.
C.11.5.6.2 — The longitudinal reinforcement required for torsion must be distributed along the perimeter of the closed stirrup with
a maximum spacing of 300 mm. The longitudinal bars or tendons must be inside the stirrups. There must be at least one longitudinal
bar or tendon at each corner of the stirrups. Longitudinal bars shall have a diameter of at least 0.042 times the stirrup spacing, but not
less than No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10mm) diameter.
C.11.5.6.3 — Torsion reinforcement must be arranged at a distance of at least ( bd t+ )

beyond the point at
that is required by analysis.
C.11.5.7 — Alternative design for torsion
For the torsion design of solid sections within the scope of this Title C of Regulation NSR-10 with a section shape ratio, h bt , of three
or more, another procedure may be used, the goodness of which has been demonstrated by analysis. and adequate agreement with
test results of appropriate scope. Sections C.11.5.4 and C.11.5.6 apply.
C.11.6 — Friction Shear

C.11.6.1 — The provisions of C.11.6 apply when it is appropriate to consider shear transmission through a given plane, such as an
existing or potential crack, a contact surface between dissimilar materials, or a contact surface between two concretes placed at
different times.
C.11.6.2 — The design of sections subjected to shear transfer, such as those described in C.11.6.1, shall be based on equation
(C.11-1), where Vn is calculated according to the provisions of C. .11.6.3 or C.11.6.4.
C.11.6.3 — It must be assumed that a crack occurs along the considered shear plane. The required area of frictional shear
reinforcement Avf , through the plane of shear, shall be designed using C.11.6.4 or any other shear transfer design method consistent
with the results of representative experimental tests.
C.11.6.3.1 — The provisions of C.11.6.5 to C.11.6.10 shall be applied for all shear transfer resistance calculations.
C-96
C.11.6.4 — Friction Shear Design Method
C.11.6.4.1 — Where the friction shear reinforcement is perpendicular to the shear plane, Vn shall be calculated
through:
Af=ÿ vf y
V no (C.11-25)
where ÿ is the coefficient of friction according to C.11.6.4.3.
C.11.6.4.2 — Where the friction shear reinforcement is inclined relative to the shear plane such that the shear stress
produces tension in the friction shear reinforcement, Vn shall be calculated by
VAno f=sin ÿ ÿ+ ÿ( )
vf and
cos (C.11-26)
where ÿ is the angle between the friction shear reinforcement and the shear plane.
C.11.6.4.3 — The coefficient of friction ÿ in equations (C.11-25) and (C.11-26) must be taken as:
For monolithically placed concrete ................................................... ................................................. 1.4 ÿ
Concrete placed over hardened concrete with intentionally rough surface as specified in
C.11.6.9 .................................. ................................................................ ........................................... 1.0ÿ
Concrete placed over hardened concrete not intentionally rough ............................................. 0.6 ÿ
Concrete anchored to structural steel by headed bolts or by reinforcing bars (see

C.11.6.10) .................................. ................................................................ ................................................................ .... 0.7ÿ
where ÿ = 1.0 for normal concrete, 0.75 for lightweight concrete in all its components. For other cases ÿ shall be determined
based on the volumetric proportions of the lightweight and normal weight aggregates as specified in C.8.6.1, but shall not
exceed 0.85.
C.11.6.5 —For normal-weight concrete whether placed monolithically or placed against hardened concrete with its surface
intentionally roughened as specified in 11.6.9, Vn shall not exceed the lesser of 0.2f Aÿ ( where Ac is the area of the DC ,
concrete
ÿ
3.30.08f A section
+ )c 11A
c that
, shear transfer in mm2 and 3.3 and 11.0 are in MPa For all other cases, Vn shall not exceed
resists
and
c
the lesser of 0.2f Aÿ or DC

5.5Ac(5.5
in MPa). If lower strength concrete is placed against higher strength concrete, the value of cfÿ should be the cfÿ for the
lower strength concrete.
C.11.6.6 — The value of yf used for friction shear reinforcement design must not exceed 420 MPa.
C.11.6.7— The net pull across the shear plane must be resisted by additional reinforcement. The permanent net compression
through the shear plane is permitted to be taken as additive to the force in frictional shear reinforcement, A f
vf and
, when calculating the required Avf .
C.11.6.8 — Friction shear reinforcement shall be properly placed along the plane of shear, and shall be anchored to develop
yf on both sides by a length embedded in the concrete, hooks, or welding to special devices.
C.11.6.9 — For the purposes of C.11.6, when concrete is placed over previously hardened concrete, the interface where
shear transfer occurs must be clean and free of laitance. When ÿ is assumed equal to 1.0ÿ
, the interface should be roughened to a full width of approximately 6 mm.
C-97
C.11.6.10 — When shear is transferred between rolled steel and concrete using headed dowels or welded reinforcing bars, the steel must be
clean and free of paint.
C.11.7 — High beams
C.11.7.1 — The provisions of C.11.7 shall be applied to elements with not exceeding four times the total
no height of the element or to regions of
the beam loaded with concentrated loads within twice the height of the element from support and that are loaded on one of their faces and
supported on their opposite face, in such a way that compression struts can develop between the faces and the supports. See also C.12.10.6.
C.11.7.2 — Tall beams shall be designed using nonlinear analysis as permitted by C.10.7.1 or Appendix CA.
C.11.7.3 — Vn for high beams must not exceed 0.83 fbd ww .
C.11.7.4 — The area of reinforcement for shear perpendicular to the flexural tension reinforcement, Av , shall not be less than
0.0025bsw, and s must not exceed the lesser of d 5 or 300 mm.
C.11.7.5 — The area of reinforcement for shear parallel to the flexural tension reinforcement, Avh , shall not be less than , and 2s shall not
0.0015bs w 2 exceed the lesser of d 5 or 300 mm.
C.11.7.6 — Reinforcement may be designed in compliance with the provisions of CA.3.3 instead of the minimum horizontal and vertical
reinforcement specified in C.11.7.4 and C.11.7.5.
C.11.8 — Special Provisions for Corbels and Gussets
C.11.8.1 — Appendix CA may be used in the design of corbels and gussets with a shear-to-height span ratio,
ad , less than 2. Corbels and haunches may be designed using C.11.8.3 and C.11.8.4, when:
v
(to) ad
v , not greater than 1, and
(b) When subjected to a factored horizontal tensile force, Nuc , not greater than Vu .
The requirements of C.11.8.2, C.11.8.3.2.1, C.11.8.3.2.2, C.11.8.5, C.11.8.6, and C.11.8.7 apply to the design of corbels and gussets. The
useful height d must be determined on the face of the support.
C.11.8.2 — The height at the outer edge of the landing area must not be less than 0.5d .
C.11.8.3 — The section at the face of the support must be designed to simultaneously resist Vu , a factored moment ÿ ÿ Va N hd
uv
+
uc ( ÿ
ÿ ) ÿ and a factored horizontal tensile force, Nuc .
C.11.8.3.1 — In all design calculations according to C.11.8, ÿ shall be taken equal to 0.75.
C.11.8.3.2 — Design of frictional shear reinforcement, Avf to resist Vu shall comply with C.11.6.
0.2fbd
ÿ
,
C.11.8.3.2.1 — For normal density concrete Vn shall not exceed the lesser of ww
(3.30.08fbd + 11bd , where 3.3 and 11 are in MPa.

ÿ
) cw and w
C.11.8.3.2.2 — For all-component lightweight concrete or normal weight sand-lightweight concrete v cw ) ÿ Vn shall not be taken
than the lesser of (0.2 0.07adfbd w ) or (5.5 1.9adbd where 5.5 and 1.9
ÿ
greater
are in
ÿ
v ,
MPa.
C-98
C.11.8.3.3 — The reinforcement Af to resist the factored moment ÿV to N

ÿ (hd)
uv ÿ+ ÿ ÿucmust
be calculated according to
with C.10.2 and C.10.3.
C.11.8.3.4 — The reinforcement An to resist the factored tensile force Nuc must be determined from Af N ÿ .
ÿny _ uc
0.2V or ,
The factored tensile force, Nuc , should not be taken less than unless special provisions are made to avoid tensile forces. Nuc
should be considered as a live load even when traction results from plastic flow restriction, shrinkage, or temperature variation.
— The area of main tensile reinforcement Asc , shall not be less than the greater of (AA C.11.8.3.5
F + ) and no
( vf3A + . )
2A no
C.11.8.4 — The total area, Ah , of closed abutments or abutments parallel to the main tension reinforcement must not be less
than ( 0.5 A Aÿ
Ah. must )
sc be evenly
no distributed within (23 d) adjacent to the main reinforcement
traction.
C.11.8.5 — Abd must not be less than 0.04 ff ( cy ) .

ÿ
sc
C.11.8.6 — At the front face of a corbel or haunch, the main tensile reinforcement shall be anchored in accordance with one of
the following methods:
(a) By structural welding to a crossbar of at least the same diameter; The weld shall be designed to develop yf of the main
tensile reinforcement.
(b) By folding back the main tensile reinforcement to form a horizontal loop or,
(c) By some other means of positive anchorage.
C.11.8.7 — The support area on a bracket or bracket must not project beyond the straight portion of the main tension reinforcing
bars, nor project beyond the inside face of the cross anchor bar (when it is exist).
C.11.9 — Special Provisions for Walls

C.11.9.1 — Design for shear forces perpendicular to the plane of the wall shall be in accordance with the provisions for slabs in
C.11.11. Design for horizontal shear forces in the plane of the wall shall be made in accordance with the provisions of C.11.9.2
to C.11.9.9. Alternatively, it is permitted to design walls with a maximum height not exceeding twice the length of the wall for
horizontal shear forces in accordance with Appendix CA and C.11.9.9.2 to C.11.9.9.5.
C.11.9.2 — The design of the horizontal section for shear in the plane of the wall must be based on equations (C.11-1) and
(C.11-2), where Vc must agree with C. 11.9.5 or C.11.9.6, and Vs must comply with the provisions of C.11.9.9.
C.11.9.3 — Vn at any horizontal section for shear in the plane of the wall shall not be taken greater than
ÿ
0.83f hd
c
, where h is the thickness of the wall and d is defined in C.11.9.4.
C.11.9.4 — For the design of horizontal shear forces in the plane of the wall, d should be considered equal to A larger 0.8 w
.
value of d may be used , equal to the distance from the extreme fiber in compression to the resultant of the forces of all
reinforcement in tension, when the location of the resultant is determined by a strain compatibility analysis.
C-99
C.11.9.5 — Unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance with C.11.9.6, Vc shall not be taken greater for walls subjected to axial
ÿ
than 0.17 f hd ÿc compression, nor shall Vc be taken greater than the value given in
C.11.2.2.3 for walls subjected to axial tension.
C.11.9.6 — Vc can be the lesser of the values calculated by means of equations (C.11-29) and (C.11-30).
ÿ
N.A.
or
c =ÿ +
V0.27f 4
hd c
(C.11-27)
w
either
ÿ ÿ N ÿ ÿ
ÿ
ÿ +ÿ 0.1
f 0.2 or
ÿÿ
w c
h
ÿÿ w ÿ
= ÿ+ÿ
V 0.05f hd (C.11-28)
c c m
wow ÿ
V2
ÿ or ÿ
where is the total length of the wall and Nu is positive for compression and negative for tension. Yes (MV 2 ) ÿ
w uu w
is negative, Equation (C.11-28) should not be used.
C.11.9.7 — Sections located closer to the base of the wall than one distance the height of the wall, whichever is less, are 2 or half
w
permitted to be designed for the same Vc calculated for a distance half the height. 2 or the
w
C.11.9.8 — Where Vu is less than 0.5 Vÿ , reinforcement

c shall be provided as specified in C.11.9.9, or in accordance with Chapter C.14. Where
Vu is greater than 0.5 Vÿ , wall reinforcement to resist shear shall be provided inc accordance with C.11.9.9.
C.11.9.9 — Design of reinforcement for shear in walls
C.11.9.9.1 — Where Vu exceeds Vc ÿ , reinforcement for horizontal shear shall be designed to satisfy the
equations (C.11-1) and (C.11-2), where Vs is to be calculated by:
afd
vy
V = yes
(C.11-29)
yes
where Av is the area of horizontal reinforcement for shear with spacing s , and d is determined according to C.11.9.4. Vertical reinforcement for
shear shall be provided in accordance with C.11.9.9.4.
C.11.9.9.2 — The amount of horizontal reinforcement for shear, ÿt , must not be less than 0.0025.
C.11.9.9.3 — The horizontal reinforcement spacing for shear shall not exceed the lesser of 450 mm, where w
5 , 3h , either
w is the total length of the wall.
C.11.9.9.4 — The amount of vertical reinforcement for shear, ÿ , must not be less than the greater of:
ÿÿ hw
0.5 2.5 0.0025
( ÿ+ÿÿ0.0025
= ÿ ÿÿ ÿ ÿ you
) (C.11-30)
w
and 0.0025, but need not be greater than ÿt required by C.11.9.9.1. In equation (C.11-30), wall and hw is the w is the total length of the
total height of the wall.
C-100
C.11.9.9.5 — The spacing of the vertical reinforcement for shear must not exceed the lesser of mm, where w 3 , 3h , or 450
w is the total length of the wall.
C.11.10 — Transmission of moments to columns
C.11.10.1 — When the load due to gravity, wind, earthquake or other lateral forces produce moment transmission in the connections
of the elements of the structure to the columns, the shear that derives from the moment transmission must be taken into consideration
in the design of the transversal reinforcement of the columns.
C.11.10.2 — Except for connections that are not part of a primary system resistant to seismic forces and that are confined on four
sides by beams or slabs of approximately equal height, connections shall have transverse reinforcement not less than that required
by the equation (C.11-13) within the column to a depth not less than the highest connection of the frame elements to the columns.
See also C.7.9.
C.11.11 — Provisions for slabs and footings

C.11.11.1 — The shear resistance of slabs and footings in the vicinity of the columns, concentrated loads or reactions is governed
by the more severe of the following two conditions:
C.11.11.1.1 — Behavior as a beam where each of the critical sections to be investigated extend in one plane through the full
width. For behavior as a beam, the slab or footing shall be designed in accordance with C.11.1 to C.11.4.
C.11.11.1.2 — For two-way behavior, each of the critical sections to be investigated

they must be located such that their perimeter, bo , is a minimum, but must not be closer than d 2 to:
(a) the edges or corners of columns, concentrated loads, or reaction areas, or
(b) Changes in the height of the slab, such as the edges of capitals, or abacuses, or sloping for shear.
For slabs or footings with behavior in two directions, the design shall be in accordance with C.11.11.2 to C.11.11.6.
C.11.11.1.3 — For square or rectangular columns, concentrated loads, or reaction areas, critical sections with four straight sides
are permitted.
C.11.11.2 — The design of a slab or footing with behavior in two directions is based on equations (C.11-1) and (C.11-2). Vc shall be
calculated according to C.11.11.2.1, C.11.11.2.2, or C.11.11.3.1. Vs must be calculated according to C.11.11.3. For slabs with shear
heads, Vn shall be in accordance with C.11.11.4.
When moment is transferred between a slab and a column, C.11.11.7 must be fulfilled.
C.11.11.2.1 — For non-prestressed slabs and footings, Vc shall be the lesser of (a), (b) and (c):
ÿÿ2
(a) ÿÿVc=0.17
+ÿ ÿ1ÿ ÿ fbd
co
ÿ
(C.11-31)
where ÿ is the ratio of the long side to the short side of the column, the concentrated load, or the reaction area,
ÿ ÿd _
= 0.083
ÿ (b)ÿ ÿc V
yes
ÿ 2 +ÿ
ÿ
fbd
co (C.11-32)
b either
ÿ
where ÿs is 40 for interior columns, 30 for edge columns, and 20 for corner columns, and
C-101
(c) V c0.33
= fbdÿ ÿ
co (C.11-33)
C.11.11.2.2 — In columns of prestressed slabs in two directions and footings that meet the requirements of C.18.9.3
( ÿ
V c = ÿÿ + f 0.3fbd
p pc
c V
op ) + (C.11-34)
where ÿp is the smaller of 0.29 and (ÿ 1.5+

0.083dbyes either
) , ÿs is 40 for interior columns, 30 for columns of
edge and 20 for corner columns, bo is the perimeter of the critical section defined in C.11.11.1.2, as the average fpcis taken
value of f for the two directions,
pc and Vp is the vertical component of all effective forces
of prestressing that cross the critical section. It is permissible to calculate Vc with Eq. (C.11-34) if the following is satisfied;
otherwise C.11.11.2.1 shall apply:
(a) no portion of the cross section of a column shall be closer to a discontinuous edge than 4 times the thickness of the
slab, and
(b) cfÿ used in equation (C.11-34) should not be taken greater than 0.5 MPa and
(c) fpcin each direction shall not be less than 0.9 MPa, nor be taken greater than 3.5 MPa.
C.11.11.3 — It is allowed to use shear reinforcement consisting of bars or wires and stirrups of one or more branches in slabs
and footings with d greater than or equal to 150 mm, but not less than 16 times the diameter of the reinforcing bar to the sharp
Shear reinforcement shall be in accordance with C.11.11.3.1 to C.11.11.3.4.
C.11.11.3.1 — Vn shall be calculated using equation (11-2), where Vc shall not be taken greater than ÿ 0.17 fbd
ÿ
co
, and
Vs must be calculated according to C.11.4. In equation (C.11-15), Av should be taken as the cross-sectional area of all
reinforcing branches on a peripheral line that is geometrically similar to the column section perimeter.
C.11.11.3.2 — Vn should not be considered greater than 0.5 fbd

co
. ÿ
C.11.11.3.3 — The distance between the face of the column and the first line of the legs of the stirrups that surround the
column must not exceed d 2 . The spacing between adjacent legs of stirrups at the first line of shear reinforcement shall not
exceed 2d measured in a direction parallel to the face of the column. The spacing between successive lines of shear
reinforcement surrounding the column should not exceed d 2
in a direction perpendicular to the face of the column.
C.11.11.3.4 — Shear reinforcement in slabs shall meet the requirements of C.12.13 and shall tie the
longitudinal bending reinforcement in the direction being considered.
C.11.11.4 — In slabs it is allowed to use reinforcement for shear consisting of structural I beams or steel channels (shear
heads). The provisions of C.11.11.4.1 to C.11.11.4.9 shall apply when gravity load shear is transmitted in interior support
columns. When moment is transferred to columns, C.11.11.7.3 shall apply.
C.11.11.4.1 — Each cutter head shall consist of welded steel profiles fabricated with full penetration welding forming
identical right-angle arms. The arms of the cutter head must not be interrupted within the column section.
C.11.11.4.2 — The height of the shear head must not be greater than 70 times the thickness of the web of the profile
steel.
C-102
C.11.11.4.3 — It is allowed to cut the ends of the arms of each element of the cutter head at angles not less than 30º with the
horizontal, provided that the plastic resistant moment of the remaining variable section is adequate to resist the force of shear attributed to
that arm of the shear head.
C.11.11.4.4— All compression flanges of steel shapes must be located within 0.3d of the
surface in compression of the slab.
C.11.11.4.5 — The relationship ÿv between the flexural stiffness of each arm of the shear head and the stiffness of the
section of the surrounding cracked composite slab, of a width (cd + ) , must not be
2 less than 0.15.
C.11.11.4.6 — The resistance to plastic moment Mp , required for each arm of the cutter head, must
be calculated according to:
V ÿ c ÿÿ
M = or
h 1
p
+ÿ ÿ
v vv ÿ ÿÿ
(C.11-35)
ÿ 2n
ÿ ÿÿ ÿ 2 ÿÿ
where ÿ is for tension controlled elements n is the number of arms and is the minimum length of each
v arm of the shear head required to
meet the requirements of C.11.11.4.7 and C.11.11.4.8.
C.11.11.4.7 — The critical section of the slab for shear must be perpendicular to the plane of the slab and must pass through each
arm of the shear head 3/4 of the distance ÿ ÿ (c 2)ÿ ÿ from the face of the column to the end ÿ of the arm of the cutter head. The critical
1 v
section shall be located such that its perimeter bo is a minimum, but need not be closer than the perimeter defined in C.11.11.1.2(a).
C.11.11.4.8 — Vn should not be taken greater than 0.33 fbd at the critical section defined in C.11.11.4.7. When
co
ÿ
shear heads are provided, the shear resistance Vn shall not be considered greater than 0.58 fbd critical section defined in in the
co
C.11.11.1.2(a).
C.11.11.4.9 — The resisting moment Mv contributed to each column strip of the slab by one head of
sharp should not be taken greater than:
V
ÿÿ vou c1 ÿ
mv = ÿ ÿvÿ (C.11-36)
2n ÿ 2 ÿÿ
where ÿ is for tension controlled elements, n is the number of shear head arms and length of each shear head arm actually is the
v
placed. However, Mv should not be taken greater than the lesser of:
(a) 30 percent of the total factored moment required for each column strip of the slab,
(b) the variation in length v from the moment of the column strip,
(c) Mp calculated by means of equation (C.11-35).
C.11.11.4.10 — When unbalanced moments are considered, the shear head must have adequate anchorage to transmit Mp to the
column.
C.11.11.5 — Headed bolts for shear reinforcement, located perpendicular to the plane of a slab or footing, are permitted in slabs and
footings described in C.11.11.5.1 through C.11.11.5.4. The total height of the headed bolt assembly shall not be less than the thickness of
the member less the sum of: (1) the concrete cover in the upper flexural reinforcement; (2) the concrete cover on the common base, and
(3) half the diameter of the reinforcing bar for bending in tension. Where there is reinforcement for tension bending at the base of the
section, such as a footing, the total height of the shear bolt device must not be less than the thickness of the element less
C-103
the sum of: (1) the concrete cover in the lower flexural reinforcement; (2) the concrete cover at the head of the bolt and (3)
one-half the diameter of the bottom reinforcing bar for flexure.
C.11.11.5.1 — For the critical section defined in C.11.11.1.2, Vn shall be calculated using equation (C.11-2); Vc and ÿ
Vn must not exceed 0.25 fbdco0.66, fbd , respectively.
ÿ
co
ÿ
Vs should be calculated using equation (C.11-

and 15) with Av equal to the cross-sectional area of all shear reinforcements in a peripheral line that is approximately parallel
to the perimeter of the column section, where s is the spacing of the lines ) should not be less than peripheral parts of the
headed weld bolt. af bs 0.17 fÿ .
vy o ( c
C.11.11.5.2 — The spacing between the face of the column and the first perimeter line of the shear reinforcement must
not exceed d 2 . The spacing between the peripheral lines of the shear reinforcement, measured in a direction perpendicular
to either face of the column, shall be constant. For prestressed slabs or footings that comply with C.11.11.2.2, this spacing
shall not exceed 0.75d ; for all other slabs and footings, the spacing shall be based on the value of the shear stress due to
the factored shear force and the unbalanced moment at the critical section defined in C.11.11.1.2, and shall not exceed:
(a) 0.75d where the maximum shear stresses due to factored loads are equal to or less than 0.5 f ÿ c
,
and
(b) 0.5d where the maximum shear stresses due to factored loads are greater than 0.5 f ÿ c
,
C.11.11.5.3 – The spacing between adjacent shear reinforcement elements, measured on the perimeter of the
first perimeter line of shear reinforcement must not exceed 2d .
C.11.11.5.4 – The shear force due to the factored shear force and moment shall not exceed 0.17 f ÿÿ at the critical
ÿ
section located
c d 2 outside the outermost perimeter line of the shear reinforcement.
C.11.11.6 — Openings in slabs
When the openings of the slabs are located at a distance from the zone of concentrated load or reaction less than 10 times
the height of the slab, or when the openings of the flat slabs are located within the strips of columns that are defined in In
Chapter C.13, the critical sections of the slab for shear, which are defined in C.11.11.1.2 and C.11.11.4.7, should be modified
as follows:
C.11.11.6.1 — In slabs without shear heads, that part of the perimeter of the critical section that is circumscribed by
straight lines that project from the centroid of the column, of the concentrated load or of the area of the reaction and that are
tangent to the boundaries of the openings.
C.11.11.6.2— In slabs with shear heads, the part of the perimeter that is considered ineffective must be 1/2
than that defined in C.11.11.6.1.
C.11.11.7 — Moment transfer at slab-to-column connections
C.11.11.7.1 — Where gravitational, wind, or seismic loading, or other lateral forces produce unbalanced moment
transmission Mu between a slab and a column, ÿf M shall be transmittedor by bending in accordance with C.13.5.3 . The
remainder of the unbalanced moment given by ÿ about the vou M is considered transferred by shear eccentricity
centroid of the critical section defined in C.11.11.1.2, where
ÿ v = ÿÿ1( F ) (C.11-37)
C.11.11.7.2 — The shear stress resulting from shear eccentricity moment transfer shall be assumed to vary linearly
about the centroid of the critical sections defined in C.11.11.1.2. The maximum shear stress due to Vu and Mu must not
exceed ÿv : no
C-104
(a) For members without reinforcement for shear
V bd
n co ( ) ÿ =ÿ v (C.11-38)
where Vc is defined in C.11.11.2.1 or C.11.11.2.2.
(b) For members with reinforcement for shear other than shear heads:
= ÿ + v) VV
ÿbd no c so ( (C.11-39)
where Vc and Vs are defined in C.11.11.3.1. The design must take into account the variation of the shear stress around the
column. The shear stress due to factored shear and moment shall not exceed at the critical section located d 2 outside the
ÿ
0.17f ÿÿ c outer line of the abutment legs surrounding the
column.
C.11.11.7.3 — When shear reinforcement consisting of I-beams or steel channels (shear heads) is provided, the sum of
the shear stresses due to the action of the vertical load on the critical section defined by C.11.11. 4.7 and the shear stresses
that result from the moment transferred by shear eccentricity ÿ ÿ 0.33 fÿ . around the centroid of the critical section defined in
C.11.11.1.2(a) and C.11.11.1.3 shall not exceed ÿ c
C-105
Grades:
C-106
NSR-10 – Chapter C.12 – Development lengths and reinforcement splices
CHAPTER C.12 — DEVELOPMENT LENGTHS AND

REINFORCEMENT SPLICES
C.12.1 — Development of reinforcement — General
C.12.1.1 — The calculated tension or compression in the reinforcement of each section of structural concrete elements must be developed
towards each side of said section by means of a length embedded in the concrete by means of a hook, headed deformed bar or mechanical
device. , or a combination of them. Headed hooks and rebars should not be used to develop bars in compression.
C.12.1.2 — The values of cfÿ used in this Chapter must not exceed 8.3 MPa.
C.12.1.3 — In addition to the requirements established in this Chapter that affect the detail of reinforcement, the structural integrity
requirements of C.7.13 must be met.
C.12.2 — Development of deformed bars and tensile deformed wires
C.12.2.1 — The development length for deformed bars and deformed wire in tension, from C.12.2.2 or C.12.2.3, d must be determined ,
with the modification factors of C.12.2.4 and C.12.2. 5, but d than 300 mm. must not be less
C.12.2.2 — For deformed bars or deformed wires, must be:

d
No. 6 (3/4”) or 20M

(20 mm) or smaller No. 7 (7/8”) or 22M
Spacing and covering bars and (22 mm) and larger
corrugated bars
wires
Clear spacing between bars or wires
being spliced or developed not
less than db , not less than db , and stirrups
minimum along length of less than Title C
No
d
F ÿ yte F ÿ yte ÿ
Regulation NSR-10 or d d
ÿ b ÿ b
ÿÿÿÿÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿ 2.1f ÿ ÿ1.7f
ÿÿ
ÿ c ÿ c ÿÿÿ
free spacing between bars or wires

being laid or spliced not less
than 2d and free cover not less than db
to
b
F ÿ yte ÿ F ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ d
Other cases ÿd yte
ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ1.4f
ÿÿ ÿb _
ÿ ÿ1.1f
ÿÿ ÿb _
ÿ c ÿ ÿ c ÿ
C.12.2.3 — For deformed bars and deformed wires must be:

d
ÿ F ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ d
ytes
d =ÿ b (C.12-1)
ÿ
ÿ c trKÿÿb+ÿ ÿ ÿ
1.1fÿ c
db
ÿ ÿ
C-107
where the term ( cKd

b + tr b ) should not be taken higher than 2.5 and
40A tr
k tr
= (C.12-2)
sn
where n is the number of bars or wires that are spliced or developed within the cleavage plane. K 0 can be used
tr
= as a design simplification even if cross bracing is present.
C.12.2.4 — The factors to be used in the expressions for the development length of deformed bars and wires in tension in C.12.2 are as
follows:
(a) When more than 300 mm of fresh concrete is placed below the development length or a splice for horizontal reinforcement, t ÿ = 1.3 .
Other situations t ÿ = 1.0 .
(b) Epoxy-coated bars or wires with less than 3d of coating, or free spacing less than
b ÿ = 1.5 . For all other epoxy-coated bars or wires, ÿ
6db
_
, = 1.2 . reinforcement without
and and
zinc-coated (galvanized) coating and reinforcement, ÿ = 1.0 . and
However, the product ÿ ÿt and

does not need to be greater than 1.7.
(c) For No. 6 (3/4”) or 20M (20 mm) or smaller bars and corrugated wires, ÿ = 0.8 . For bars No. 7 (7/8”) or yes
22M (22mm) and larger, ÿ = 1.0 . yes
(d) Where lightweight concrete is used, ÿ shall not exceed 0.75 unless f is specified (see C.8.6.1). ct
Where normal weight concrete is used, ÿ = 1.0 .
C.12.2.5 — Excess reinforcement
Reduction by ( As required)
d / ( As supplied) is permitted when the reinforcement in a member subjected to flexure exceeds that required
by analysis, except when anchorage or development is specifically required for yf or the reinforcement is designed per C.21.2.1.6.
C.12.3 — Development of deformed bars and compression deformed wires
C.12.3.1 — The development length for deformed bars and compression wire, from C.12.3.2 and the d.c. , must be calculated from
modification factors of C.12.3.3, but dc shall not be less than 200 mm.
C.12.3.2 — For deformed bars and deformed wires, DC

should be taken as the greater of
ÿ
( 0.24f ÿy cb fd ) and ( 0.043fd

) and b
, where ÿ is taken as indicated in C.12.2.4(d) and the constant 0.043 has the unit of
mm2 /N
C.12.3.3 — It is allowed to multiply the length DC

in 12.3.2 by the following factors:
a) The reinforcement exceeds what is required by the
analysis............................................ ................................................................ ....................... ( As Required)/( As Provided)
b) The reinforcement is confined by a spiral whose bar has a diameter not less than
of 6 mm and not more than 100 mm in pitch or within stirrups ÿÿ. 13 in accordance with C.7.10.5,
and spaced at distances not greater than 100 mm measured center to center .................................. ....0.75
C-108
C.12.4 — Development of busbar packages
C.12.4.1 — The development length of each individual bar within a bundle of bars subjected to tension or compression must be
that of the individual bar increased by 20 percent for a bundle of 3 bars and by 33 percent. for a pack of 4 bars.
C.12.4.2 — To determine the proper spacing and cover values in C.12.2.2, as well as the confinement parameter in C.12.2.3
and the factor ÿe in C.12.2.4(b), a package of bars must be treated as a single bar of a diameter derived from the equivalent
total area and with a centroid that coincides with that of the bundle of bars.
C.12.5 — Development of Standard Pull Hooks

C.12.5.1 — The development length for deformed bars in tension terminating in a standard hook (see C.7.1), shall be calculated
from C.12.5.2
dh and the modification factors from C.12.5.3, but dh should not be less than the greater of 8d and 150mm.
b
b)
ÿ
C.12.5.2 — For deformed bars, fd with ÿe equal to 0.75 for concrete with
dh should be ( 0.24fÿ ÿHey c
lightweight aggregates. For other cases, ÿe and ÿ should be taken equal to 1.0.
C.12.5.3 — The length dh

in C.12.5.2 may be multiplied by the following factors where applicable:
a) For bar hooks ÿÿ. 36 and smaller, with lateral cover (normal to the plane of the hook)
not less than 65 mm, and for 90º hooks, with cover in the extension of the bar beyond
the hook not less than 50 mm ....... ................................................................ ..........0.7
b) For 90º hooks of bars ÿÿ. 36 and smaller which are confined by stirrups perpendicular
to the developing bar, spaced not more than 3d along ; or, surrounded with stirrups
parallel to the
dh
developing bar and
b
spaced no more than 3d along the development
length of the hook end plus the b
bend............... ................................................................ ............................. 0.8
c) For 180º hooks from No. 11 (1-3/8”) or 36M (36 mm) bar and smaller that are
confined with stirrups perpendicular to the bar being developed, spaced no more
than 3d along . length of dh ................................................
b ............................. 0.8
d) When anchorage or development length is not specifically required

for f and , and a higher amount of reinforcement is available
to that required by analysis ................................................... ........................................ ( As required) / ( As provided).
In C.12.5.3(b) and C.12.5.3(c), db is the diameter of the hook bar, and the first stirrup shall confine the bent portion of the hook
to a distance of less than 2d from the outer edge . ofb the hook.
C.12.5.4 — For bars that are developed by a standard hook at discontinuous ends of members with cover above the hook of
less than 65 mm on both sides and at the top (or bottom) edge, the bar with the hook shall be confine with stirrups, perpendicular
to the developing bar, spaced not more than 3d a b along dh . The first stirrup shall confine the bent part of the hook to within
2d of the outside of the bend, where db is the diameter of the bar with the hook. In this case, the factors
b of C.12.5.3 shall not
be applied. (b) and (c).
C.12.5.5 — Hooks should not be considered effective for the development of compression bars.
C-109
C.12.6 — Development of deformed bars with head and mechanically anchored in

traction
C.12.6.1 — The development length in tension of headed deformed bars, C.12.6.2. The use of heads must be determined with dt ,
to develop deformed bars in tension shall be limited to conditions that satisfy (a) through (f):
(a) The yf of the bar must not exceed 420 MPa. (b) Bar size
must not be larger than No. 11 (1-3/8”) or 36M (36mm) (c) Concrete must be normal weight
(d) Area of head support abrg shall not be less
than (e) The free cover for the bar shall not be less than 4A b
2d , and b
(f) Clear spacing between bars must not be less than 4d. b
C.12.6.2 — For headed deformed bars complying with C.3.5.9, the development length in tension dt ,
must be from (
0.19 f cb
ÿ ey fd ) , where the value cfÿ used to calculate dt should not exceed 40 MPa, and the factor ÿe
should be taken as 1.2 for epoxy-coated reinforcements and 1.0 for other cases. Where reinforcement is in excess of that required by
analysis, except where development of yf is specifically required, it is permitted.
mm. be multiplied by ( As required)/( As delivered). The length that dt and 150 dt must not be less than the greater of 8d b
C.12.6.3 — Heads are not considered effective in the development of compression bars.
C.12.6.4 — Any fixing or mechanical device capable of developing the yf of the reinforcement is allowed , provided that the results of the
tests that demonstrate that said fixing or device is adequate, are approved by the competent authority. The development of the reinforcement
consisting of a combination of mechanical anchoring plus the embedment length of the reinforcement between the critical section and the
fixing or mechanical device is allowed.
C.12.7 — Development of electrowelded reinforcement of tensile corrugated wire
C.12.7.1 — The development length of welded corrugated wire reinforcement in tension, the point of critical section to measure from
d
the end of the wire, shall be calculated as the product of C.12.2.3 multiplied by a factor for welded wire reinforcement d, from C.12.2.2 or
ÿw obtained from C.12.7.2 or C.12.7.3. Reduction is permitted in accordance with C.12.2.5 where applicable, but d shall not be less than 200
mm, except for calculation
d of lap splices in accordance with C.12.18. When using ÿw of C.12.7.2, an epoxy coating factor ÿe equal to 1.0 is
permitted to be used for epoxy-coated corrugated wire electrowelded reinforcement in C.12.2.2 and C.12.2.3.
C.12.7.2 — For welded corrugated wire reinforcement with at least one cross wire within not less than 50 mm of the critical section ÿw d and
shall be taken as the greater of:
(f 240
and
ÿ
)
F
and
either
ÿ 5 db ÿ
yes
ÿÿ w ÿÿ
but need not be greater than 1.0, where s is the spacing between developing wires.
C-110
C.12.7.3 — For deformed wire electrowelded reinforcement without crosswires within the single wire less than d or with a
50 mm from the point of critical section, ÿw shall be taken to be 1.0, and d the same as for deformed must be determined
wire.
C.12.7.4 — When any smooth wires, or corrugated wires larger than MD200 (16 mm in diameter) are present in the
corrugated wire welded reinforcement in the development length direction, the wire welded reinforcement shall be developed
in accordance with C.12.8.
C.12.8 — Development of electrowelded reinforcement with smooth tensile wire
The yield strength of welded smooth wire reinforcement shall be considered to be developed by embedding 2 cross wires in
the concrete, with the nearest cross wire not less than 50 mm from the critical section. However,
d must not be less than:
= 3.3 ÿ to
ÿ ÿbf ÿ
d
and
ÿ
(C.12-3)
ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ Fc
yes
ÿÿÿ
where d is measured from the critical section to the farthest cross wire, s is the spacing between
wires to be developed, and ÿ is given in C.12.2.4(d). When the reinforcement provided exceeds that required, it may be d
reduced in accordance with C.12.2.5. The length of lap d must not be less than 150 mm except for the calculation of
splices in accordance with C.12.19.
C.12.9 — Development of prestressing strands
C.12.9.1 — Except as provided in C.12.9.1.1, seven-wire prestressing strands shall be attached beyond the critical section
by a distance of not less than:
ÿ ÿ ÿ ff
= ÿ FÿHEÿ d + ps se d (C.12-4)
dbb ÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿ
21 7
Expressions in parentheses are used as unitless constants.
C.12.9.1.1 — An embed less than d is permitted in a section of an element provided that the strand design stress for that
section does not exceed the values obtained from the bilinear relationship in Eq. (C.12-
4).
C.12.9.2 — It is permissible to limit the study to those cross sections closest to each end of the element that are required to
develop their full design strength under factored loads, except where the bond of one or more strands does not extend to the
end. of the element, or where concentrated loads are applied within the development length of the strand.
C.12.9.3 — When the strand bond does not extend to the end of the member, and the design includes tensions for the
service load in the pre-stressed zone of tension, as allowed by C.18.4.2, the specified duplicate shall be in C.12.9.1.
d
C.12.10 — Development of flexural reinforcement — General
C.12.10.1 — It is allowed to develop the tension reinforcement by folding it inside the web to anchor it or make it continuous
with the reinforcement on the opposite face of the element.
C-111
C.12.10.2 — The critical sections for the development of reinforcement in elements subjected to flexure are the points where
maximum stresses occur and points in the span where the adjacent reinforcement ends or bends. The provisions of C.12.11.3
must be complied with.
C.12.10.3 — Reinforcement shall extend beyond the point where it is no longer needed to resist bending for a distance equal
,
to d or 12d , whichever is greater, except at supports of simply supported beams and at the end. b free of overhangs.
C.12.10.4 — Continuous reinforcement shall have an embedment length not less than d beyond the point where tensile
reinforcement is not required to resist bending.
C.12.10.5 — Flexural reinforcement shall not terminate in a tension zone, unless C.12.10.5.1, C.12.10.5.2, or C.12.10.5.3 is
satisfied.
C.12.10.5.1 — Vu at the terminal point does not exceedVÿ

( ) .n 23
C.12.10.5.2 — That a stirrup area, in excess of that required for torsion and shear, be provided along each terminating bar
or wire for a distance from the reinforcement termination point equal to ( 34 d ) .
The excess area of the stirrups must not be less than 0.41bsf . The spacing
w andt
s must not exceed d 8( ) ÿb .
C.12.10.5.3 — For bars ÿÿ. 36 and smaller, in which the reinforcement that continues provides twice the area required by
the bending at the terminal point and Vu does not exceed ( ) 34 Vÿ .no
C.12.10.6 — In elements subjected to bending, an adequate anchorage must be provided for the tensile reinforcement, when
the effort in the reinforcement is not directly proportional to the moment, as occurs in inclined, stepped or variable section
footings; in corbels; in high-rise elements subjected to bending; or in elements in which the tension reinforcement is not parallel
to the compression face. See C.12.11.4 and C.12.12.4 on high-rise members subjected to bending.
C.12.11 — Development of reinforcement for positive moment

C.12.11.1 — At least 1/3 of the reinforcement for positive moment in simply supported members and 1/4 of the reinforcement
for positive moment in continuous members must extend along the same face of the member to the support. In the beams, said
reinforcement must be extended, at least 150 mm inside the support.
C.12.11.2 — When a member subjected to flexure is a fundamental part of a system that resists lateral loads, the reinforcement
for positive moment that is required to extend into the support, in accordance with C.12.11.1, shall be anchored. so that it is
capable of developing yf in traction on the support face.
C.12.11.3 — At simple supports and at inflection points, tension reinforcement for positive moment shall be limited to a diameter
such that d calculated for yf following C.12.2 satisfies Eq. (C.12-5), except that Equation (C.12-5) need not be satisfied for
reinforcements that terminate beyond the center line of simple supports by means of a standard hook or a mechanical
anchorage equivalent to at least a standard hook.
m
_
ÿd
no
+ (C.12-5)
V or to
Where:
Mn is calculated assuming that all the reinforcement in the section is subjected to yf .

Vu is calculated on the
to
section. at the support should be the embed length beyond the center of the support.
C-112
to at the inflection point it should be limited to d or 12d b , whichever is older.
It is allowed to increase the value of MVwildebeest

by by 30 percent when the ends of the reinforcement are confined by
a compression reaction.
C.12.11.4 — In simple supports of tall members subjected to flexure, the positive moment tension reinforcement shall be anchored
to develop yf in tension at the face of the support, unless the design is made using Appendix CA, the Positive tensile reinforcement
must be anchored in accordance with CA.4.3.. In internal supports of high-rise elements subjected to bending, the positive moment
tensile reinforcement must be continuous or joined with that of the adjacent span.
C.12.12 — Development of reinforcement for negative moment
C.12.12.1 — Negative moment reinforcement in a continuous, restrained, or cantilever element, or in any element of a rigid frame,
must be anchored into or through the supporting elements by means of an embed length, hooks, or mechanical anchors. .
C.12.12.2 — Negative moment reinforcement shall have an embedment length in the span as required in C.12.1 and C.12.10.3.
C.12.12.3 — At least 1/3 of the total tensile reinforcement in the support provided to resist negative moment shall have an
embedment length beyond the point of inflection, not less than d, whichever is greater. , 12d or b
16 ,
no
C.12.12.4 — In interior supports of very high beams subjected to bending, the tensile reinforcement due to negative moment must
be continuous with that of the adjacent spans.
C.12.13 — Development of the reinforcement of the soul
C.12.13.1 — Web reinforcement shall be placed as close to the tensile and compression surfaces of the element as cover
requirements and the proximity of other reinforcement allow.
C.12.13.2 — The ends of the individual branches of the U-shaped stirrups, simple or multiple, must be anchored according to what
is indicated in C.12.13.2.1 to C.12.3.2.5.
C.12.13.2.1 — For bars ÿÿ. 16 and MD200 wire (16 mm diameter) and smaller and for bars No. 6 (3/4”) or
20M (20 mm), No. 7 (7/8”) or 22M (22 mm) and No. 8 (1”) or 25M (25 mm) with f equal to 280 MPa or less, one standard hook
andt
around reinforcement longitudinal.
C.12.13.2.2 — For stirrups No. 6 (3/4”) or 20M (20 mm), No. 7 (7/8”) or 22M (22 mm) and No. 8 (1”) or 25M ( 25 mm) f greater
with than 280 MPa, a standard stirrup hook encircling a longitudinal bar plus an embed length between the midpoint of the element
andt
height and the outer end of the hook equal to or greater than
0.17df b
yt ( ) Fÿ .
ÿ
C.12.13.2.3 — For each branch of smooth wire electrowelded reinforcement that forms a simple U-shaped stirrup, either by:
(a) Two longitudinal wires placed 50 mm apart along the element at the top of the U.
(b) One longitudinal wire placed not more than d 4 from the compression face, and a second wire closer to the compression
face and spaced at least 50 mm from the first. The second wire is permitted to be placed in a leg of the stirrup after a bend, or
in a bend having a bend inside diameter of not less than 8d . b
C-113
C.12.13.2.4 — For each end of a stirrup of a branch of electrowelded reinforcement of wire, smooth or corrugated, two
longitudinal wires with a minimum separation of 50 mm and with the inner wire at least at d 4 or 50 mm , from d 2 . The outer
longitudinal wire in the tension face shall not be further from the face than the portion of the primary flexural reinforcement
closest to the face.
C.12.13.2.5 — In joists, as defined in C.8.11, for No. 4 (1/2”) or 12M (12 mm) bars and MD130 (12.9 mm diameter) or
smaller wire, one standard hook.
C.12.13.3 — Between the anchored ends, each bend in the continuous part of the U-shaped stirrups, simple or multiple,
must embrace a longitudinal bar.
C.12.13.4 — Longitudinal bars bent to serve as shear reinforcement, if they extend into a tension zone, shall be continuous
with the longitudinal reinforcement, and if they extend into a compression zone, they shall be anchored beyond than half the
, of f that is needed to satisfy Eq. (C.11-17).
useful height, d 2 as specified for the development length in C.12.2 for the fraction
andt
C.12.13.5 — Pairs of U-shaped stirrups placed to form a closed unit shall be considered adequately spliced when the length
of the lap splice is 1.3 . In elements with a useful height of at least 450 mm, the connections with A f b and t the legs of the
d
stirrups are extended over the total available height

of not greater than 40 kN per branch can be considered adequate if
the element.
C.12.14 — Reinforcement Splices — General

C.12.14.1 — In the reinforcement, it is only allowed to make splices when required or permitted by the design plans, the
specifications, or if authorized by the professional authorized to design.
C.12.14.2 — Lap Splices
C.12.14.2.1 — For bars greater than ÿÿ. 36, lap splices shall not be used, except as indicated in C.12.16.2 and C.15.8.2.3.
C.12.14.2.2 — Lap splices of bundles of bars shall be based on the required lap splice length for individual bars in the
bundle, increased in accordance with C.12.4. Lap splices of individual bars in the bundle must not overlap. Entire packages
should not be overlapped.
C.12.14.2.3 — In members subjected to flexure, the bars that are not in contact with each other should not be separated
transversely by the lesser of 1/5 of the required length of the lap splice or 150 mm.
C.12.14.3 — Welded and mechanical splices
C.12.14.3.1 — The use of welded or mechanical splices shall be permitted.
C.12.14.3.2 — A complete mechanical splice must develop in tension or compression, as required,

at least 1.25f from the bar.
and
C.12.14.3.3 — Except as provided by this Title C of the NSR-10 Regulation, all welding must be of
according to “Structural Welding Code—Reinforcing Steel” (ANSI/AWS D1.4).
C.12.14.3.4 — A totally welded splice must develop, at least, 1.25f from the bar.
and
C.12.14.3.5 — Welded or mechanical splices that do not meet the requirements of C.12.14.3.2 or
C.12.14.3.4 are permitted only for bars No. 5 (5/8”) or 16M (16 mm) and smaller and in accordance with C.12.15.4.
C-114
C.12.15 — Wire splices and tensile deformed bars

C.12.15.1 — The minimum length of the tension lap splice shall be that required for Class A or B lap splices, but not less
than 300 mm, where:
Class A Lap Splice .................................................. ................................................................ ............................ 1.0

d
Class B Lap Splice .................................................. ................................................................ ............................ 1.3

d
where d is calculated according to C.12.2 to develop yf , but without the 300 mm minimum of C.12.2.1 and without the
modification factor from C.12.2.5.
C.12.15.2 — Lap splices of wire and deformed bars in tension shall be Class B lap splices, except that Class A lap splices
are permitted when:
(a) the area of reinforcement provided is at least twice that required by analysis throughout the length of the lap splice,
and
(b) One-half, or less, of the total reinforcement is spliced within the required lap splice length.
C.12.15.3 — When lap splicing bars of different diameters in tension, the length of the lap splice shall be the greater of
that of the largest bar and the value of the length
d of the bar in tension smaller diameter.
C.12.15.4 — Welded or mechanical splices used where the area of reinforcement provided is less than twice that required
by the analysis shall meet the requirements of C.12.14.3.2 or C.12.14.3.4.
C.12.15.5 — Welded or mechanical splices not meeting the requirements of C.12.14.3.2 or C.12.14.3.4 are permitted for
No. 5 (5/8”) or 16M (16 mm) or smaller bars if they comply with C.12.15.5.1. to C.12.15.5.3:
C.12.15.5.1 — The splices must be staggered by at least 600 mm.
C.12.15.5.2 — When calculating the tensile forces that can be developed in each section, the stress in the spliced
reinforcement shall be taken as the specified strength of the splice, but not greater than yf . The stress in the non-spliced
reinforcement shall be taken as yf times the ratio of the shortest anchored length beyond the section to d , but not greater
than yf .
C.12.15.5.3 — The total traction force that can be developed in each section must be at least the
twice that required by analysis, and at least 140 MPa times the total area of reinforcement provided.
C.12.15.6 — Splices in tension lanyards shall be made with a full welded or mechanical splice in accordance with
C.12.14.3.2 or C.12.14.3.4, and splices on adjacent bars shall be staggered at least 750 mm.
C.12.16 — Deformed Compression Bar Splices
C.12.16.1 — The length of a compression lap splice shall be 0.071fd yb , for yf equal to 420 MPa
or less, or ( 0.13f 24 d ÿ by) for yf greater than 420 MPa, but not less than 300 mm. For cfÿ less than 21
MPa, the length of the lap splice should be increased by 1/3.
C.12.16.2 — When lap splicing bars of different diameters in compression, the length of the lap splice shall be the greater
of the largest size bar, or the length of the
DC
lap splice of the diameter bar. minor. No. 14 (1-3/4”) or 45M (45 mm) and No.
18 (2-1/4”) or 55M (55 mm) bars are allowed to be lap spliced with ÿÿ diameter bars. 36 and under.
C-115
C.12.16.3 — Welded or mechanical splices used in compression shall meet the requirements of C.12.14.3.2 or C.12.14.3.4.
C.12.16.4 — Butt Splices
C.12.16.4.1 — In bars that are only required for compression, it is allowed to transmit the compressive stress by direct
support through square cuts, maintained in concentric contact by means of a suitable device.
C.12.16.4.2 — The ends of the bars must end in flat surfaces that form a right angle with the axis of the bar, with a
tolerance of 1.5º, and must be adjusted with a tolerance of 3º with respect to the full support after the assembly.
C.12.16.4.3 — Butt splices shall be used only on members that have closed or spiral stirrups.
C.12.17 — Special requirements for splices in columns

C.12.17.1 — Lap splices, mechanical splices, butt weld splices, mechanical connections, or butt splices shall be used,
subject to the limitations of C.12.17.2 through C.12.17.4. Splices must meet the requirements for all column load combinations.
C.12.17.2 — Lap Splices in Columns
C.12.17.2.1 — When the stress in the bars due to the factored loads is compressive, the splices
by overlap shall comply with C.12.16.1, C.12.16.2, and when applicable C.12.17.2.4 or C.12.17.2.5.
C.12.17.2.2 — When the stress in the bars due to factored loads is tensile, and does not exceed 0.5f and
in tension, tension lap splices shall be Class B if more than half of the bars are spliced in any section, or Class A tension lap
splices if half or less of the bars are lap spliced in any section. section, and lap splices taken alternately are staggered a
distance
d.
C.12.17.2.3 — When the stress in the bars due to factored loads is greater than 0.5f in tension, and
pull-lap splices shall be Class B.
C.12.17.2.4 — In members subjected to compression in which the stirrups along the entire length of the lap splice have
an effective area of not less than 0.0015hs in both directions, it is permitted,to multiply the length of the lap splice by 0.83 ,
but the length of the lap splice should not be less than 300 mm. The stirrup legs perpendicular to dimension h shall be used
to determine the effective area.
C.12.17.2.5 — In elements subjected to compression with spirals, it is allowed to multiply the length of the splice
by overlapping the bars inside the spiral by 0.75, but said length must not be less than 300 mm.
C.12.17.3 — Welded or mechanical splices in columns
Welded or mechanical splices in columns shall meet the requirements of C.12.14.3.2 or C.12.14.3.4.
C.12.17.4 — Butt Splices in Columns
Butt splices complying with C.12.16.4 are permitted to be used for bars in columns subjected to compressive stress provided
that the splices are staggered or that additional bars are specified in the splice zones. The bars that continue on each face
of the column shall have a tensile strength, based on yf , 0.25f times the area of the vertical reinforcement on that face.
not less than and
C-116
C.12.18 — Electrowelded reinforcement splices of tensile corrugated wire

C.12.18.1 — The minimum length of the lap splice of corrugated wire reinforcement, measured between the ends of each
individual reinforcement, shall not be less than the greater of and 200 mm, and 1.3 the length of overlap measured
d
between the farthest cross wires from each individual welded reinforcement shall not be less than 50 mm, where
d is calculated to expand yf according to C.12.7.
C.12.18.2 — Welded reinforcing lap splices of corrugated wire, without a crosswire within the length of the lap splice,
shall be determined similarly to those for corrugated wire.
C.12.18.3 — When plain wire, or corrugated wires larger than MD200 (16 mm in diameter), are present in the
electrowelded reinforcement of corrugated wire in the direction of the lap splice, or when lap splicing a welded corrugated
wire reinforcement with a plain wire welded reinforcement, the welded reinforcement shall be lap spliced in accordance
with C.12.19.
C.12.19 — Electro-welded reinforcement splices with smooth tensile wire
The minimum length of smooth wire welded reinforcement lap splices shall comply with C.12.19.1 and C.12.19.2
C.12.19.1 — Where As supplied is less than 2 times that required by analysis at the splice zone, the length of the overlap,
measured between the farthest crosswires of each individual welded reinforcement, shall not be less than the largest of
a spacing of the cross wires plus 50 mm, , and d 1.5
150mm. d be calculated according to 12.8 to expand yf .
C.12.19.2 — Where As supplied is at least twice that required by analysis at the splice location, the length of the overlap,
measured between the farthest crosswires of each welded reinforcing sheet, shall not be less than the largest of 1.5 and
50 mm. must be calculated according to C.12.8 to expand dyf . d
C-117
Grades:
C-118
NSR-10 – Chapter C.13 – Slab systems in one and two directions
CHAPTER C.13 — SLAB SYSTEMS IN ONE

AND TWO DIRECTION
C.13.1 — Scope
C.13.1.1 — The provisions of Chapter C.13 shall be applied to the design of reinforced slab systems for bending in one or
two directions, with or without beams between supports.
C.13.1.2 — In a system of slabs supported on columns or walls, the dimensions 1c , 2 must be based on a c y effective
no
support area defined by the intersection of the lower surface of the slab, or the abacus or sloping for shear if any, with the
largest right circular cone, right pyramid, or wedge, whose surfaces are located inside the column and the capital or corbel,
and which are oriented at an angle not greater than 45° with respect to the axis of the column.
C.13.1.3 — Chapter C.13 includes solid slabs and ribbed slabs in one or two directions with permanent or removable relief
between the ribs or joists, with or without a lower tile.
C.13.1.4 — The minimum thickness of slabs designed in accordance with Chapter C.13 shall meet the requirements of 9.5.
C.13.1.5 — The slab system covered by the scope of this Chapter may be supported on beams or walls in the case of
slabs in one direction and on columns, beams or walls in the case of systems in two directions. In the case of slabs ribbed
in two directions supported on columns, including the cellular lattice, capitals or extensions must be formed in the area
surrounding the columns, which must have, at least, a dimension of one sixth of the length of the span. measured to the
center of the supports in each direction.
C.13.1.6 — A slab is considered to work in one direction when one of the following conditions occurs:
C.13.1.6.1 — When it has two free edges, without vertical support, and has beams or walls, on the other two edges
opposite approximately parallel.
C.13.1.6.2 — When the slab panel has an approximately rectangular shape with vertical support on all four sides, with
a ratio of long span to short span greater than 2.
C.13.1.6.3 — When a ribbed slab has its ribs mainly in one direction.
C.13.1.7 — The analysis of the slab systems can be carried out by any of the methods prescribed in Chapter C.8 and by
the methods indicated in this Chapter. When the method of analysis is an approximate method, redistribution of inelastic
moments is not permitted in accordance with the requirements of Chapter C.8 for reinforced concrete systems and Chapter
C.18 for prestressed concrete systems, unless otherwise indicated. explicitly the opposite.
C.13.1.8 — It is permitted to use precast elements as part of the slab systems, meeting the requirements of Chapters C.16
and C.17.
C.13.1.9 — When the slab systems are used as part of the seismic resistance system, as is the case of diaphragms, their
design must be carried out in compliance with the requirements of this Chapter, the requirements of Chapter C.21 and the
requirements of Title A.
C.13.1.9 — The use of slab-column systems, both solid and ribbed, as the main seismic resistance system, in which the
slab acts as a beam must meet the requirements of Title A of the Regulations, with respect to the seismic hazard zones
where it is allowed and the maximum heights that buildings built using this system can have. For purposes of analysis of
slab-column systems under horizontal loads, the requirements given in this Chapter must be used.
C-119
C.13.1.10 — Cellular lattice systems are considered lightweight slab-column systems and must be designed following the
requirements of this Chapter. These systems are subject to the same limitations regarding their use as main seismic
resistance systems given in C.13.1.9.
C.13.1.11 — Construction with ribs must meet all the requirements of C.8.13.
C.13.1.12 — When the maximum spacing between joists or main ribs of C.8.13 is exceeded, or when the minimum number
of ribs in the direction under consideration within the panel is less than 4, the ribs must be considered as isolated elements
and its analysis and design cannot be governed by the procedures of this Chapter. The slab between ribs in this case must
be analyzed and designed as a slab in one or two directions, as the case may be, meeting the corresponding requirements.
C.13.2 — General
C.13.2.1 — A column strip is a design strip with a width on each side of the column axis equal to 0.25 or whichever is less.
Column
2 1,
strips include beams, if any. 0.25
C.13.2.2 — A center strip is a design strip bounded by two column strips.
C.13.2.3 — A slab panel is bounded by the center lines of any columns, beams, or walls that exist at its edges.
C.13.2.4 — For monolithic or fully composite members, a beam includes that part of the slab that is located on each side of
the beam, at a distance equal to the projection of the beam up or down the slab, the that is greater, but not greater than 4
times the thickness of the slab.
C.13.2.5 — When a chart is used to reduce the amount of negative moment reinforcement on a column or the minimum
thickness required for a slab, the chart shall:
(a) project under the slab at least one quarter of the thickness of the adjacent slab, and
(b) extend in each direction from the center line of support for a distance of not less than one sixth of the length of the span
measured to the center of the supports in that direction.
13.2.6 — When a shear slap is used to increase the critical concrete section for shear at a slab-column joint, the shear slap
shall project under the slab and extend a minimum horizontal distance from the face of the column that is equal to the
thickness of the projection under the lower surface of the slab.
C.13.3 — Slab reinforcement
C.13.3.1 — The area of reinforcement in each direction for two-way slab systems shall be determined from moments at
critical sections, but shall not be less than required in C.7.12.2.1.
C.13.3.2 — Spacing of reinforcement at critical sections shall not exceed 2 times the thickness of the slab, except for those
portions of the slab surface that are ribbed or cellular. Slab reinforcement located over cellular spaces shall be placed as
required in C.7.12.
C.13.3.3 — Positive moment reinforcement perpendicular to a discontinuous edge must extend to the edge of the slab and
have a straight or hooked embedment length of at least 150 mm in perimeter beams, walls, or columns.
C.13.3.4 — The reinforcement for negative moment perpendicular to a discontinuous edge must bend, form hooks or be
anchored in the perimeter beams, walls or columns, so that it develops its tensile capacity on the face of the support, in
accordance with the provisions of Chapter C.12.
C.13.3.5 — When the slab is not supported by a perimeter beam or wall at a discontinuous edge, or when the slab cantilevers
beyond the support, anchorage of reinforcement within the slab is permitted.
C-120
C.13.3.6 — At the outside corners of slabs supported on edge walls or where one or more edge beams have an ÿf greater than
1.0, reinforcement shall be provided at the outside corners, both at the bottom and at the bottom. the top of the slab in
accordance with C.13.3.6.1 to C.13.3.6.4.
C.13.3.6.1 —Corner reinforcement at both the top and bottom of the slab must be sufficient
to resist a moment equal to the maximum positive moment per unit width of the slab panel.
C.13.3.6.2 — The moment must be assumed to act about an axis perpendicular to the diagonal from
the corner at the top of the slab and around an axis parallel to the diagonal at the bottom of the slab.
C.13.3.6.3 — Corner reinforcement shall be placed from the corner at a distance in each direction equal to 1/5 the length of
the largest span.
C.13.3.6.4 — Corner reinforcement shall be placed parallel to the diagonal at the top of the slab, and perpendicular to the
diagonal at the bottom of the slab. Alternatively, the reinforcement should be placed in two layers parallel to the edges of the
slab at both the top and bottom of the slab.
C.13.3.7 — When a chart is used to reduce the amount of negative moment reinforcement on a flat slab column, the chart
dimensions shall comply with C.13.2.5. In calculating the reinforcement required for the slab, the thickness of the drop below
the slab should not be considered more than one quarter of the distance from the end of the drop to the face of the column or
its capital.
Fig. C.13.3.8 — Minimum extensions of reinforcement in slabs without beam.

(See C.12.11.1 for extensions into supports)
C-121
C.13.3.8 — Details of reinforcement in slabs without beams.
C.13.3.8.1 — In addition to the other requirements of C.13.3, reinforcement in slabs without beams must have the following
minimum extensions prescribed in Figure C.13.3.8
C.13.3.8.2 — When the adjacent spans are not equal, the extension of the reinforcement for negative moment
beyond the edge of the support, as described in Figure C.13.3.8, should be based on the requirements of the largest span.
C.13.3.8.3 — Bent bars are permitted only when the height/span ratio allows the use of bends of 45° or less.
C.13.3.8.4 — In frames where two-way slabs act as major elements of the lateral load resisting system, reinforcement
lengths shall be determined by analysis, but shall not be less than those prescribed by Figure C.13.3. .8.
C.13.3.8.5 — All bottom bars or wires within the column strip in each direction shall be continuous or spliced with Class B
tensile splices, or mechanical or welded splices, complying with C.12.14.3 . Splices should be located as shown in Figure
C.13.3.8. At least two lower bars or wires of the column strip, in each direction, must pass through the region circumscribed by
the longitudinal reinforcement of the column and must be anchored in the external supports.
C.13.3.8.6 — In slabs with shear heads and in lift-slab construction where it is impractical to pass the bottom bars through
the column as indicated in C.13.3.8.5, at least two bars or attached bottom wires, in each direction, must pass through the
shear heads or lifting collars as close to the column as possible and must be continuous or spliced with Class A splices. On
exterior columns, reinforcement must be anchored at cutting heads or lifting collars.
C.13.4 — Openings in slab systems
C.13.4.1 — Openings of any size are permitted in slab systems if it is shown by analysis that the design strength is at least
equal to that required, taking into consideration C.9.2 and C.9.3, and that all operating conditions are met, including specified
limits for deflections.
C.13.4.2 — As an alternative to performing the special analysis required in C.13.4.1, in slab systems without beams it is
permitted to leave openings only in accordance with C.13.4.2.1 to C.13.4.2.4,
C.13.4.2.1 — It is allowed to leave openings of any size in the common area of two central strips that are
intersect, provided the full amount of reinforcement required for the non-opening slab is maintained.
C.13.4.2.2 — The common zone of two intersecting column strips must not be interrupted by openings of more than 1/8 of
the width of the column strip of either of the two spans. An amount of reinforcement equal to that interrupted by an opening
shall be added to the sides of the opening.
C.13.4.2.3 — The common zone of a column strip and a center strip not more than 1/4 of the reinforcement in each strip
may be interrupted by openings. An amount of reinforcement equal to that interrupted by the opening must be added to the
sides of the opening.
C.13.4.2.4 — The shear requirements of C.11.11.6 must be satisfied.
C.13.5 — Design procedures
C.13.5.1 — It is permitted to design a system of slabs by any procedure that satisfies the equilibrium and geometric compatibility
conditions, if it is shown that the design resistance in each section is at least equal to the resistance required in C.9.2 and
C.9.3, and all operating conditions including specified limits for deflections are met.
C-122
C.13.5.1.1 — The design for gravity loads of the slab system, including the slab and the beams (when present) between
supports, and the supporting columns or walls that form orthogonal frames, can be done using the Design Method method of
C.13.6 or the Equivalent Portal Method of C.13.7.
C.13.5.1.2 — For lateral loads, the analysis of the structure must take into account the effects of cracking and reinforcing steel
on the stiffness of the structural elements.
C.13.5.1.3 — It is allowed to combine the results of the analysis of gravity loads with the results of the
Lateral load analysis.
C.13.5.2 — The slab and beams (if any) between supports shall be designed for the dominant factored moments at each section.
C.13.5.3 — When gravity loading, wind, earthquake, or other lateral forces cause moment transfer between the slab and column,
a fraction of the unbalanced moment shall be transferred by bending, in accordance with C.13.5.3.2 and C.13.5.3.3.
C.13.5.3.1 — The fraction of the unbalanced moment not transmitted by bending, must be transmitted by
eccentricity of shear, according to C.11.11.7.
C.13.5.3.2 — A fraction of the unbalanced moment given by ÿf M must be considered

or transmitted by bending over a strip of
slab whose effective width is included between axes located one and a half times the thickness of the slab or abacus ( ) 1.5 h
outside opposite faces of the column or capital, where Mu is the transmitted factored moment and
1
ÿ F= (C.13-1)
( bb)1 2
1 +23
C.13.5.3.3 — For non-prestressed slabs with unbalanced moments transferred between the slab and the columns, it is allowed to
increase the value of f ÿ given in equation (C.13-1) according to the following:
(a) For edge columns with unbalanced moments about an axis parallel to the edge, f ÿ = 1.0 provided or at a support corner
does not exceed 0.75 Vÿ , 0.5 Vÿ . c does not exceed that Vu at the support edge c
(b) For unbalanced moments at interior supports, and for edge columns with unbalanced moments about an axis perpendicular to
the edge, f ÿ is allowed to be increased by up to 1.25 times the value given in Eq. (C.13- 1), but not more than f ÿ = 1.0 , provided
that the Vu at the support does not exceed 0.4 Vÿ . The net tensile strain ÿ calculated for the effective width of the slab, defined
c in
C.13.5.3.2, shall not be you
less than 0.010.
The value of Vc in letters (a) and (b) must be calculated according to C.11.11.2.1.
C.13.5.3.4 — Reinforcement over the column should be concentrated using closer spacing, or by
means of additional reinforcement, to resist the moment in the effective width of the slab defined in C.13.5.3.2.
C.13.5.4 — The design for load transmission from the slab to the supporting walls and columns by means of shear and torsion
must be in accordance with Chapter C.11.
C.13.5.5 — Approximate analysis for slabs in one direction
C.13.5.5.1 — Slabs that work in one direction, solid or light, built monolithically with their supports, can be analyzed as
continuous slabs on simple supports, with spans equal to the free spans of the slab and disregarding the width of the beams and
its torsional effect.
C.13.5.5.2 — When the torsional stiffness of the extreme support beam, or of the intermediate supports influences the
distribution of moments in the joist, this effect must be taken into account. The analysis can be carried out by any of the methods
prescribed in Chapter C.8, or use the approximate values of C.13.5.5.3.
C-123
C.13.5.5.3 — In lieu of detailed analysis, for slabs in one direction the following approximate moments and shears may be used in lieu of a more
exact method of analysis, provided the following requirements are met:
(a) There are two or more openings,
(b) The spans are approximately equal, without the largest of the adjacent spans exceeding the smallest by more than 20 percent,
(c) The charges are uniformly distributed,
(d) The non-factored live load L does not exceed 3 times the non-factored dead load D , and
(e) The elements are prismatic.
For the calculation of negative, adjacent moments. no is taken as the average of the free spans of the spans
positive moment
end spans
2 The dashed end is not constrained.................................................. ................................... w 11 a
2 The discontinuous end is monolithic with support.................................................. ........................ w 14 a
Interior openings .................................................. ................................................................ .......................... 2 aw 16
Negative moment on the outer face

of the first inner support 2 Two
spans .................................... ................................................................ ................................................................ .w
9
a
2 More than two spans ................................................... ................................................................ ........................... w 10

a
Negative moment in the other 2 faces of

internal supports.................................................. ................................................................ .....................
w 11 a
Negative moment on the face of all supports for:

Slabs with spans not exceeding 3 m, and beams in which the ratio between the
sum of the stiffness of the columns and the stiffness 2 of the beam exceeds 8 at
each end of the
span......... ................................................................ .......... w12 a
Negative moment on the inside face of the external supports for the elements built monolithically with their supports 2
When the support is an edge
beam ................................ ................................................................ ................. w 24
a
2 When the support is a column .................................................. ................................................................ ...... w16 a
Shear in end elements on the face of the first interior support.................................................. 1.15 w2 a
Shear on the face of all other supports .................................................. ..................................... w 2 a
C.13.6 — Direct design method
C.13.6.1 — Limitations
Slab systems meeting the limitations of C.13.6.1.1 through C.13.6.1.8 are permitted to be designed by the Direct Design Method.
C-124
C.13.6.1.1 — There must be a minimum of three continuous spans in each direction.
C.13.6.1.2 — The slab panels must be rectangular, with a ratio between the largest and smallest span, measured center to center of the panel
supports, no greater than 2.
C.13.6.1.3 — The lengths of contiguous spans measured center to center of the supports in each direction do not
they must differ from the larger span by more than one third.
C.13.6.1.4 — Columns may be misaligned up to 10 percent of the span (measured in the direction of the
misalignment) with respect to any axis passing through the center of successive columns.
C.13.6.1.5 — All loads must be gravitational only and uniformly distributed throughout.
the panel. The non-factored live load must not exceed 2 times the non-factored dead load.
C.13.6.1.6 — For a panel with beams between supports on all sides, Equation (C.13-2) must be satisfied for the two perpendicular directions.
2
ÿ
f1 2
0.2 ÿ 2 ÿ 5.0 (C.13-2)
ÿ
f2 1
ÿf 2 are calculated according to equation (C.13-3). where ÿf1 and
IEcbb
ÿ=f (C.13-3)
IEcs s
C.13.6.1.7 — Moment redistribution, as permitted by 8.4, shall not be applied to slab systems
designed using the Direct Design Method. See C.13.6.7.
C.13.6.1.8 — Variations from the limitations of C.13.6.1 are permitted, provided that it is demonstrated by
analysis that the requirements of C.13.5.1 are satisfied.
C.13.6.2 — Total factored static moment of span
C.13.6.2.1 — The total factored static moment, Mo , for a span must be determined in a limited range
laterally by the central axis of the panels adjacent to the axis that joins the supports.
C.13.6.2.2 — The absolute sum of the positive factored moment and the average of the factored moments
negatives, in each direction, must not be less than:
2
what u2n
m either
= (C.13-4)
8
where no
is the free light in the direction in which the moments are determined.
C.13.6.2.3 — When there is not the same transversal span in the panels on both sides of the central axis of those in equation (C.13-4), it must be
taken as the average of the adjacent transversal spans. props 2
C.13.6.2.4 — When considering the span adjacent to and parallel to an edge, the distance from the edge to the central axis
panel should replace 2 in equation (C.13-4).
C.13.6.2.5 — The free light no

must be considered face to face with the columns, capitals, corbels or walls. The used in equation (C.13-4)
value of no
must not be less than 0.65 . Circular or regular polygon shaped supports should be treated
1 as square supports having the same area.
C-125
C.13.6.3 — Negative and positive factored moments
C.13.6.3.1 — The factored negative moments must be determined at the edge of the supports, if they are rectangular. Circular
or regular polygon shaped supports should be treated as square supports having the same area.
C.13.6.3.2 — In an interior span, the total static moment, Mo , should be distributed as follows:
Factored negative moment ................................................ ................................................................ ........................0.65
Positive factored moment ................................................ ................................................................ ..........................0.35
C.13.6.3.3 — In an end span, the total factored static moment, Mo , continued: should be distributed as indicated below
(1) (2) (3. 4) (5)

Outer Slab Slab without Fully
edge with beams between restricted
No beams interior supports outer
no beam With edge edge
restricted between all edge beam
props
Inner
factored
negative
0.75 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.65
moment
positive
moment 0.63 0.57 0.52 0.50 0.35
factored
External
factored
negative
0 0.16 0.26 0.30 0.65
moment
C.13.6.3.4 — Sections subjected to negative moment shall be designed to resist the greater of the two internal factored negative
moments, determined for spans with a common support, unless an analysis is made to distribute the unbalanced moment
accordingly. with the rigidities of the concurrent elements.
C.13.6.3.5 — The edge beams or edges of the slab must be designed to resist their part of the
factored negative exterior moments.
C.13.6.3.6 — The moment for gravity load to be transmitted between the slab and an edge column in accordance with
C.13.5.3.1 shall be 0.3M . either
C.13.6.4 — Factored moments in column strips
C.13.6.4.1 — The column strips must be designed to resist the following fractions, in percentage,
of the internal factored negative moment:
twenty-one
0.5 1.0 2.0
( ÿf1 2 1 =0 75 75 75
(ÿf1 2 1 ) )ÿ1.0 _ 90 75 Four. Five
It should be linearly interpolated between the given values.
C.13.6.4.2 — Column strips must be designed to resist the following percentage fractions of the factored exterior negative
moment:
C-126
twenty-one
0.5 1.0 2.0
ÿ=0 100 100 100

(ÿf1 2 1 )=0 you
ÿ ÿ 2.5
you
75 75 75
ÿ=0 100 100 100
ÿ you
(ÿ f1 2 1 ) 1.0
ÿ ÿ 2.5
you
90 75 Four. Five
Linear interpolations should be made between the given values, where ÿt is calculated in equation (C.13-5) and C is calculated
in (C.13-6).
CE
cb
ÿ= (C.13-5)
2E csI s
you
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ 13xxy _
C. = 0.63 (C.13-6)
ÿÿÿ and 3
The constant C for T- or L-shaped sections can be evaluated by dividing the section into rectangular sectors, as defined in
C.13.2.4, and adding the values of C for each portion.
C.13.6.4.3 — When the supports consist of columns or walls that extend for an equal distance or the negative moments
greater than 0.75 2 used to calculate Mo , must be considered uniformly
distributed throughout 2.
C.13.6.4.4 — Column strips shall be designed to resist the following fractions, in percent, of
positive factored moments:
0.5 1.0 2.0

twenty-one
)=0 60 60 60
ÿf1 2 1
((( ) ÿ1.0 _ 90 75 Four. Five
ÿf1 2 1
It should be linearly interpolated between the given values.
C.13.6.4.5 — For slabs with beams between supports, the portion of the slab located in the strip of columns must
Be designed to resist that portion of the column span moments not resisted by the beams.
C.13.6.5 — Factored moments in beams
C.13.6.5.1 — The beams between the supports must be designed to resist 85 percent of the moments of the ) is equal to or
column strip if ( ÿf1 2 1 greater than one.
C.13.6.5.2 — For values of ( ÿf1 2 1 ) between 1.0 and zero, the ratio of the moments of the column fringe
that must be resisted by the beams must be obtained by linear interpolation between 85 and zero percent.
C.13.6.5.3 — In addition to the moments calculated for uniform loads, in accordance with C.13.6.2.2, C.13.6.5.1 and
C.13.6.5.2, the beams must be designed to resist the moments caused by concentrated loads or linear applied directly on them,
including the weight of the web that is projected above or below the slab.
C.13.6.6 — Factored moments in the central strips
C.13.6.6.1 — The fraction of the positive and negative factored moments not resisted by the strips of columns
they must be allocated proportionally to each half of the corresponding central stripes.
C.13.6.6.2 — Each central strip must be designed to resist the sum of the moments assigned to its two
center strip halves.
C-127
C.13.6.6.3 — A central strip adjacent to and parallel to an edge supported on a wall must be designed to resist twice the
moment assigned to half of the central strip corresponding to the first axis of interior supports.
C.13.6.7 — Modification of factored moments
Positive and negative factored moments are permitted to be modified by up to 10 percent, provided the total static moment for a
panel, Mo , in the direction considered, is not less than required in Eq. (C.13-4 ).
C.13.6.8 — Factored shear in beam-slab systems
C.13.6.8.1 — Beams with ÿf1 2 1 equal to or greater than 1.0, they must be designed to resist the shear produced
by factored loads in afferent areas limited by 45º lines drawn from the corners of the panel and by the center axes of adjacent
panels parallel to the long sides.
C.13.6.8.2 — When designing beams with ÿf1 2 1 less than 1.0 to resist shear, linear interpolation is allowed
assuming that the beam takes no load for f1 ÿ = 0 .
C.13.6.8.3 — In addition to the shears calculated in accordance with C.13.6.8.1 and C.13.6.8.2, all beams shall
be designed to resist the shears produced by the factored loads applied directly on them.
C.13.6.8.4 — Calculation of the slab shear resistance is permitted assuming the load is distributed to the support beams in
accordance with C.13.6.8.1 or C.13.6.8.2. Total shear resistance occurring in the panel must be provided.
C.13.6.8.5 — The shear strength must comply with the requirements of Chapter C.11.
C.13.6.9 — Factored moments in columns and walls
C.13.6.9.1 — Columns and walls built monolithically with a system of slabs must resist the
moments produced by factored loads acting on the slab system.
C.13.6.9.2 — At an interior support, the support members above and below the slab shall resist the factored moment specified
by equation (C.13-7) in direct proportion to their stiffnesses, unless a factored moment is performed. overall analysis.
2 ÿÿÿ 2ÿ
=+ ÿqq ÿ ÿÿ
( M 0.07 Du )
0.5q Mon 2nd du 2 n ( ) ÿÿ
(C.13-7)
ÿ ÿ ÿ
where qDu ,2 and

refer to the shortest span.
no
C.13.7 — Equivalent frame method

C.13.7.1 — Design of a slab system by the Equivalent Frame Method shall be based on the assumptions given in C.13.7.2 to
C.13.7.6, and all slab sections and support members shall be designed for the moments and shears thus obtained.
C.13.7.1.1 — When metallic capitals are used in the columns, it is allowed to take into account their contribution to the rigidity
and the resistance to flexion and shear.
C.13.7.1.2 — It is allowed to neglect the axial deformations in the columns and slabs due to direct forces, and the shear
deformations.
C-128
C.13.7.2 — Equivalent frame
C.13.7.2.1 — It must be considered that the structure is made up of equivalent frames along the axes
of longitudinal and transversal columns throughout the entire structure.
C.13.7.2.2 — Each frame must consist of a row of columns or supports and beam-slab strips limited laterally by the central
axis of the panel on each side of the axis of columns or supports.
C.13.7.2.3 — It must be assumed that the columns or supports are attached to the beam-slab strips by means of torsional
elements (see C.13.7.5.) transversal to the direction of the span for which the moments are being determined, extending to the
center lines of the adjacent panels on each side of the column.
C.13.7.2.4 — Frames adjacent to and parallel to an edge must be limited by that edge and the central axis
from the adjacent panel.
C.13.7.2.5 — Each equivalent frame can be analyzed as a whole. Alternatively, for gravity loads, an independent analysis
of each story or roof is permitted with the far ends of the columns considered to be embedded.
C.13.7.2.6 — When the beam-slabs are analyzed separately, it is allowed to determine the moment at a given support
assuming that the beam-slab is embedded in any support two spans distant from the considered one, as long as the slab
continues beyond that point. spot.
C.13.7.3 — Beams-slab
C.13.7.3.1 — It is allowed to determine the moment of inertia of the beam-slab system in any section
cross section out of the node or column capital using the gross area of concrete.
C.13.7.3.2 — The variation of the moment of inertia along the axes of the beam-slab systems must be taken into account.
C.13.7.3.3 — The moment of inertia of the beam-slab from the center of the column to the face of the column, bracket or
capital, must be assumed equal to the moment of inertia of the beam-slab system at the face of the column , corbel or capital,
divided by ( 1 c ÿ2 2 )2 , where are
2 measured transversely to the span direction for c and 2
which moments are determined.
C.13.7.4 — Columns
C.13.7.4.1 — It is allowed to determine the moment of inertia of the columns in any cross section outside
of nodes or column capitals, using the gross concrete area.
C.13.7.4.2 — The variation of the moment of inertia along the axes of the columns must be taken into account.
C.13.7.4.3 — The moment of inertia of the columns at the joint, from the top to the bottom of the beam-slab system, must
be assumed to be infinite.
C.13.7.5 — Torsional elements
C.13.7.5.1 — Torsional elements (C.13.7.2.3) shall be assumed to have a constant cross section throughout
its length, which consists of the greater of (a), (b), and (c):
(a) A portion of the slab having a width equal to that of the column, corbel, or capital, in the direction of the span for which
moments are determined, or
(b) For monolithic or fully composite systems, the portion of the slab specified in (a) plus the portion of the cross beam
above and below the slab and
(c) The cross beam, as defined in C.13.2.4.
C-129
C.13.7.5.2 — When the beams are attached to the columns in the direction of the span for which the moments are
determined, the torsional stiffness must be multiplied by the ratio between the moment of inertia of the slab with the beam and
the moment of inertia of the slab without the beam.
C.13.7.6 — Arrangement of live load
C.13.7.6.1 — When the load arrangement is known, the equivalent frame must be analyzed for that load.
C.13.7.6.2 — When the non-factored live load is variable but does not exceed 3/4 of the non-factored dead load, or the
nature of the live load is such that all panels are loaded simultaneously, it may be assumed that the maximum factored
moments occur in all sections with the total factored live load acting on the entire slab system.
C.13.7.6.3 — For load conditions other than those defined in C.13.7.6.2, the factored maximum positive moment near the
center of the panel span may be assumed to occur at 3/4 of the total factored live load placed on the panel and on alternate
panels; and it is allowed to assume that the maximum factored negative moment of the slab at a support occurs with 3/4 of
the total factored live load placed only on the adjacent panels.
C.13.7.6.4 — The factored moments should not be considered less than those that occur with the load
live total mayorada distributed in all panels.
C.13.7.7 — Factored moments
C.13.7.7.1 — At interior supports, the critical section for the factored negative moment (both in the column strip and in the
central strips) must be taken at the edge of the straight supports, but not more than 0.175 from the center of the column.
1
C.13.7.7.2 — In external supports provided with corbels or capitals, the critical section for the factored negative moment in
the span perpendicular to an edge, must be considered located at a distance from the edge of the support element no greater
than 1/2 of the projection of the corbel or capital beyond the face of the support element.
C.13.7.7.3 — Circular or regular polygon-shaped supports must be treated as square supports that
have the same area, in order to locate the critical section for the negative design moment.
C.13.7.7.4 — When analyzing slab systems meeting the limitations of C.13.6.1 by the Equivalent Frame Method, it is
permitted to reduce the resulting computed moments by a ratio such that the absolute sum of the positive moments and the
average of the negative moments used for the design do not exceed the value obtained with equation (C.13-4).
C.13.7.7.5 — The distribution of moments in the critical sections of the beam-slab strip of each frame to the column strips,
beams and central strips is allowed in accordance with the provisions of C.13.6.4, C. 13.6.5, C.13.6.6. if the requirements of
C.13.6.1.6 are met.
C.13.8 — Plastic methods of analysis and design

C.13.8.1 — Plastic methods of analysis and design of slabs may be used in one or two directions. The yield line method
(upper boundary kinematic method), and the fringe method (lower boundary static method) are recognized as appropriate.
C.13.8.1.1 — Use of the yield line or fringe method in design is permitted only when the net tensile strain ÿ is less than
0.0075. you
C.13.8.2 — When choosing the relationship between absolute values of negative moment and positive moment in a panel, it
must be taken into account that the adjacent panel is capable of resisting the negative moment thus fixed and, furthermore,
that the negative moments on a same support from two adjacent panels are the same, unless the requirements of C.13.8.3
apply.
C-130
C.13.8.3 — If the negative moments on the same support, calculated from two adjacent panels, are different, the relationship
between absolute values of negative moment and positive moment in one or both panels must be modified in such a way that
equality is achieved desired or the difference can be absorbed due to torsion of the support, if possible.
C.13.8.3.1 — When the difference between the negative moments calculated on the same support of two adjacent panels
is less than 25%, the average of the two calculated can be taken as the negative design moment, correspondingly adjusting
the positive moments of the two Adjacent lights in the direction of correction only.
C.13.8.4 — Supports must be sized for the magnitude and shape of the loads bounded by the defined portion of the yield lines.
C.13.8.5 — When the analysis of the slab is done by means of the yield lines method, all the positive reinforcement must
reach the supports, unless the trimming of part of the reinforcement has been taken into account in the analysis. respective
analysis.
C.13.9 — Slabs in two directions supported on walls or rigid beams

C.13.9.1 — The procedure of this section is only applicable to slabs whose panels are supported on their four edges on walls
or on rigid beams before vertical deflections.
C.13.9.1.1 — A beam is considered rigid when faced with vertical deflections, for purposes of applying this method, when
the parameter ÿf is greater than or equal to 2, or in solid slabs when the height of the beam is greater than or equal to three
times the thickness of the slab.
C.13.9.1.2 — In the case of ribbed slabs, the minimum number of ribs in each direction must be
greater than or equal to five, in order to apply the method of this section.
C.13.9.2 — The slab panels are divided, in each direction, into strips of columns and central strips according to what is
indicated in C.13.2.1 and C.13.2.2 respectively.
C.13.9.3 — In applying the method of this section, when the parameter m of a panel is less than 0.5, the slab can be
considered as a one-way slab and can be designed in accordance with the requirements of C. 13.5.5, except that the negative
reinforcement parallel to the long span must be that corresponding to a panel with m 0.5 = .
C.13.9.4 — When applying the method, two boundary conditions are considered for the effects of the flexural stiffness of the
slab at the edge support:
C.13.9.4.1 — When the edge support beam is torsionally rigid enough, the support can
be considered equivalent to a continuous central support.
C.13.9.4.2 — When the edge support beam has negligible torsional stiffness, the slab must be considered to have non-
continuous support. In the latter case, the negative design moment of the slab at the edge must be equal to one third of the
positive design moment.
C.13.9.5 — The critical sections for moment, in any of the two directions, are the following:
C.13.9.5.1 — For negative moments the edges of the panels on the faces of the supports.
C.13.9.5.2 — For positive moment the centers of the panels.
C.13.9.6 — Design moments in the center strip shall be calculated using Tables C.13.9-1 to C.13.9-3, using the following
equations:
2
M Cq =
ace a,jj na
(C.13-8)
C-131
2
bs =
M Cq b,jj nb (C.13-9)
where qj corresponds to qLu , qDu or qu as indicated in each of the tables C.13.9-1 to C.13.9-3.
C.13.9.7 — The design moments in the column strip shall be gradually reduced from their full Mas or Mbs value at the center
strip boundary to 1/3 of these values at the panel edge.
C.13.9.8 — When the negative moment on one side of the support is less than 80% of that corresponding to the other side of
the support, the difference must be distributed in proportion to the relative flexural stiffness of the slabs.
C.13.9.9 — The shear forces in the slab shall be calculated under the assumption that the load in the panel is distributed to
the supports in the proportion indicated in Table C.13.9-4.
C.13.9.10 — The loads on the support beams of the rectangular panel in two directions are calculated using the load
proportions, for each of the directions, indicated in Table C.13.9-4. These loads can be considered as uniformly distributed
loads over the entire length of the beam.
C.13.9.10.1 — In no case can the load on the beam that saves the short span be less than the afferent load of an area of
the slab contained by the beam and two lines drawn at 45º from the corners of the panel, and the equivalent load uniformly
distributed on the beam must be q a 3.
C-132
TABLE C.13.9-1
COEFFICIENTS FOR NEGATIVE MOMENT IN THE SLAB
= or
)
(In Equations C.13-8 and C.13-9 we use qq j
Relationship Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4 Case 5 Case 6 Case 7 Case 8 Case 9
na nb
m=
nb na
ca,neg 0.045 0.050 0.075 0.071 0.033 0.061

1.00
cb,neg 0.045 0.076 0.050 0.071 0.061 0.033
ca,neg 0.050 0.055 0.079 0.075 0.038 0.065

0.95
cb,neg 0.041 0.072 0.045 0.067 0.056 0.029
ca,neg 0.055 0.060 0.080 0.079 0.043 0.068

0.90
cb,neg 0.037 0.070 0.040 0.062 0.052 0.025
ca,neg 0.060 0.066 0.082 0.083 0.049 0.072

0.85
cb,neg 0.031 0.065 0.034 0.057 0.046 0.021
ca,neg 0.065 0.071 0.083 0.086 0.055 0.075

0.80
cb,neg 0.027 0.061 0.029 0.051 0.041 0.017
ca,neg 0.069 0.076 0.085 0.088 0.061 0.078

0.75
cb,neg 0.022 0.056 0.024 0.044 0.036 0.014
ca,neg 0.074 0.081 0.086 0.091 0.068 0.081

0.70
cb,neg 0.017 0.050 0.019 0.038 0.029 0.011
ca,neg 0.077 0.085 0.087 0.093 0.074 0.083

0.65
cb,neg 0.014 0.043 0.015 0.031 0.024 0.008
ca,neg 0.081 0.089 0.088 0.095 0.080 0.085

0.60
cb,neg 0.010 0.035 0.011 0.024 0.018 0.006
ca,neg 0.084 0.092 0.089 0.096 0.085 0.086

0.55
cb,neg 0.007 0.028 0.008 0.019 0.014 0.005
ca,neg 0.086 0.094 0.090 0.097 0.089 0.088

0.50
cb,neg 0.006 0.022 0.006 0.014 0.010 0.003
Note: A hatched edge indicates that the slab continues through, or is moment constrained by
stiffness, the support. A rough edge indicates that there is vertical support, but that this support gives
a negligible moment constraint.
C-133
TABLE C.13.9-2
COEFFICIENTS FOR POSITIVE MOMENT OF DEAD LOAD ON THE SLAB
= Du )
na nb
m=
na
nb
Ca,D pos ÿ 0.036 0.018 0.018 0.027 0.027 0.033 0.027 0.020 0.023
1.00
Cb,D pos ÿ 0.036 0.018 0.027 0.027 0.018 0.027 0.033 0.023 0.020
Ca,D pos ÿ 0.040 0.020 0.021 0.030 0.028 0.036 0.031 0.022 0.024
0.95
Cb,D pos ÿ 0.033 0.016 0.025 0.024 0.015 0.024 0.031 0.021 0.017
Ca,D pos ÿ 0.045 0.022 0.025 0.033 0.029 0.039 0.035 0.025 0.026
0.90
Cb,D pos ÿ 0.029 0.014 0.024 0.022 0.013 0.021 0.028 0.019 0.015
Ca,D pos ÿ 0.050 0.024 0.029 0.036 0.031 0.042 0.040 0.029 0.028
0.85
Cb,D pos ÿ 0.026 0.012 0.022 0.019 0.011 0.017 0.025 0.017 0.013
Ca,D pos ÿ 0.056 0.026 0.034 0.039 0.032 0.045 0.045 0.032 0.029
0.80
Cb,D pos ÿ 0.023 0.011 0.020 0.016 0.009 0.015 0.022 0.015 0.010
Ca,D pos ÿ 0.061 0.028 0.040 0.043 0.033 0.048 0.051 0.036 0.031
0.75
Cb,D pos ÿ 0.019 0.009 0.018 0.013 0.007 0.012 0.020 0.013 0.007
Ca,D pos ÿ 0.068 0.030 0.046 0.046 0.035 0.051 0.058 0.040 0.033
0.70
Cb,D pos ÿ 0.016 0.007 0.016 0.011 0.005 0.009 0.017 0.011 0.006
Ca,D pos ÿ 0.074 0.032 0.054 0.050 0.036 0.054 0.065 0.044 0.034
0.65
Cb,D pos ÿ 0.013 0.006 0.014 0.009 0.004 0.007 0.014 0.009 0.005
Ca,D pos ÿ 0.081 0.034 0.062 0.053 0.037 0.056 0.073 0.048 0.036
0.60
Cb,D pos ÿ 0.010 0.004 0.011 0.007 0.003 0.006 0.012 0.007 0.004
Ca,D pos ÿ 0.088 0.035 0.071 0.056 0.038 0.058 0.081 0.052 0.037
0.55
Cb,D pos ÿ 0.008 0.003 0.009 0.005 0.002 0.004 0.009 0.005 0.003
Ca,D pos ÿ 0.095 0.037 0.080 0.059 0.039 0.061 0.089 0.056 0.038
0.50
Cb,D pos ÿ 0.006 0.002 0.007 0.004 0.001 0.003 0.007 0.004 0.002
Note: A hatched edge indicates that the slab continues through, or is moment constrained by stiffness,
the support. A rough edge indicates that there is vertical support, but that this support gives a
negligible moment constraint.
C-134
TABLE C.13.9-3
COEFFICIENTS FOR POSITIVE LIVE LOAD MOMENT ON THE SLAB
= lu )
na nb
m=
nb na
Lime pos ÿ 0.036 0.027 0.027 0.032 0.032 0.035 0.032 0.028 0.030
1.00
Cb,L pos ÿ 0.036 0.027 0.032 0.032 0.027 0.032 0.035 0.030 0.028
Lime pos ÿ 0.040 0.030 0.031 0.035 0.034 0.038 0.036 0.031 0.032
0.95
Cb,L pos ÿ 0.033 0.025 0.029 0.029 0.024 0.029 0.032 0.027 0.025
Lime pos ÿ 0.045 0.034 0.035 0.039 0.037 0.042 0.040 0.035 0.036
0.90
Cb,L pos ÿ 0.029 0.022 0.027 0.026 0.021 0.025 0.029 0.024 0.022
Lime pos ÿ 0.050 0.037 0.040 0.043 0.041 0.046 0.045 0.040 0.039
0.85
Cb,L pos ÿ 0.026 0.019 0.024 0.023 0.019 0.022 0.026 0.022 0.020
Lime pos ÿ 0.056 0.041 0.045 0.048 0.044 0.051 0.051 0.044 0.042
0.80
Cb,L pos ÿ 0.023 0.017 0.022 0.020 0.016 0.019 0.023 0.019 0.017
Lime pos ÿ 0.061 0.045 0.051 0.052 0.047 0.055 0.056 0.049 0.046
0.75
Cb,L pos ÿ 0.019 0.014 0.019 0.016 0.013 0.016 0.020 0.016 0.013
Lime pos ÿ 0.068 0.049 0.057 0.057 0.051 0.060 0.063 0.054 0.050
0.70
Cb,L pos ÿ 0.016 0.012 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.013 0.017 0.014 0.011
Lime pos ÿ 0.074 0.053 0.064 0.062 0.055 0.064 0.070 0.059 0.054
0.65
Cb,L pos ÿ 0.013 0.010 0.014 0.011 0.009 0.010 0.014 0.011 0.009
Lime pos ÿ 0.081 0.058 0.071 0.067 0.059 0.068 0.077 0.065 0.059
0.60
Cb,L pos ÿ 0.010 0.007 0.011 0.009 0.007 0.008 0.011 0.009 0.007
Lime pos ÿ 0.088 0.062 0.080 0.072 0.063 0.073 0.085 0.070 0.063
0.55
Cb,L pos ÿ 0.008 0.006 0.009 0.007 0.005 0.006 0.009 0.007 0.006
Lime pos ÿ 0.095 0.066 0.088 0.077 0.067 0.078 0.092 0.076 0.067
0.50
Cb,L pos ÿ 0.006 0.004 0.007 0.005 0.004 0.005 0.007 0.005 0.004
Note: A hatched edge indicates that the slab continues through, or is moment constrained by
stiffness, the support. A rough edge indicates that there is vertical support, but that this support gives
a negligible moment constraint.
C-135
TABLE C.13.9-4
RELATION OF THE CHARGE qu IN THE DIRECTIONS na and nb TO DETERMINE
THE SHEAR OF THE SLAB AT THE SUPPORT AND THE LOAD ON THE SUPPORTS
na nb
m=
na
nb
qa 0.50 0.50 0.17 0.50 0.83 0.71 0.29 0.33 0.67

1.00
qb 0.50 0.50 0.83 0.50 0.17 0.29 0.71 0.67 0.33
qa 0.55 0.55 0.20 0.55 0.86 0.75 0.33 0.38 0.71

0.95
qb 0.45 0.45 0.80 0.45 0.14 0.25 0.67 0.62 0.29
qa 0.60 0.60 0.23 0.60 0.88 0.79 0.38 0.43 0.75

0.90
qb 0.40 0.40 0.77 0.40 0.12 0.21 0.62 0.57 0.25
qa 0.66 0.66 0.28 0.66 0.90 0.83 0.43 0.49 0.79

0.85
qb 0.34 0.34 0.72 0.34 0.10 0.17 0.57 0.51 0.21
qa 0.71 0.71 0.33 0.71 0.92 0.86 0.49 0.55 0.83

0.80
qb 0.29 0.29 0.67 0.29 0.08 0.14 0.51 0.45 0.17
qa 0.76 0.76 0.39 0.76 0.94 0.88 0.56 0.61 0.86

0.75
qb 0.24 0.24 0.61 0.24 0.06 0.12 0.44 0.39 0.14
qa 0.81 0.81 0.45 0.81 0.95 0.91 0.62 0.68 0.89

0.70
qb 0.19 0.19 0.55 0.19 0.05 0.09 0.38 0.32 0.11
qa 0.85 0.85 0.53 0.85 0.96 0.93 0.69 0.74 0.92

0.65
qb 0.15 0.15 0.47 0.15 0.04 0.07 0.31 0.26 0.08
qa 0.89 0.89 0.61 0.89 0.97 0.95 0.76 0.80 0.94

0.60
qb 0.11 0.11 0.39 0.11 0.03 0.05 0.24 0.20 0.06
qa 0.92 0.92 0.69 0.92 0.98 0.96 0.81 0.85 0.95

0.55
qb 0.08 0.08 0.31 0.08 0.02 0.04 0.19 0.15 0.05
qa 0.94 0.94 0.76 0.94 0.99 0.97 0.86 0.89 0.97

0.50
qb 0.06 0.06 0.24 0.06 0.01 0.03 0.14 0.11 0.03
Note: A hatched edge indicates that the slab continues through, or is moment constrained by stiffness, the
support. A rough edge indicates that there is vertical support, but that this support gives a negligible moment
constraint.
C-136
NSR-10 – Chapter C.14 – Walls
CHAPTER C.14 — WALLS
C.14.1 — Scope
C.14.1.1 — The provisions of Chapter C.14 shall be applied to the design of walls subjected to axial load, with or without flexure.
C.14.1.2 — Cantilever retaining walls are designed in accordance with the flexural design provisions of Chapter C.10, with minimum
horizontal reinforcement in accordance with C.14.3.3.
C.14.2 — General
C.14.2.1 — Walls shall be designed for eccentric loads and any lateral or other loads to which they are subjected.
C.14.2.2 — Walls subjected to axial loads shall be designed in accordance with C.14.2, C.14.3, and either C.14.4, C.14.5, or C.14.8.
C.14.2.3 — The design for shear must comply with the provisions of C.11.9.
C.14.2.4 — Unless otherwise shown by analysis, the horizontal length of a wall considered effective for each concentrated load
shall not exceed the lesser center-to-center distance of the loads, nor the greater support width. four times the thickness of the wall.
C.14.2.5 — Compression elements built monolithically with walls must comply with the provisions of C.10.8.2.
C.14.2.6 — The walls must be anchored to the elements that intersect them, such as floors or roofs; or to columns, pilasters,
buttresses, from other walls, and footings.
C.14.2.7 — The amount of reinforcement and thickness limits required by C.14.3 and C.14.5 are permitted to be waived when
structural analysis shows that the wall has adequate strength and stability.
C.14.2.8 — The transfer of forces to the foundation at the base of the wall shall be done in accordance with C.15.8.
C.14.3 — Minimum reinforcement
C.14.3.1 — Minimum vertical and horizontal reinforcement shall comply with the provisions of C.14.3.2 and C.14.3.3, unless a
greater amount is required per shear, in accordance with C.11.9.8 and C.11.9.9.
C.14.3.2 — The minimum amount for vertical reinforcement ÿ , is:
(a) 0.0012 for deformed bars not larger than No. 5 (5/8”) or 16M (16 mm) with yf not less than 420 MPa, or
(b) 0.0015 for other deformed bars, or
(c) 0.0012 for electrowelded wire reinforcement (smooth or corrugated) not greater than MW200 or MD200 (16 mm diameter).
diameter).
C.14.3.3 — The minimum amount for horizontal reinforcement, ÿt , is:
(a) 0.0020 for deformed bars not larger than No. 5 (5/8”) or 16M (16 mm) with yf not less than 420 MPa, or
(b) 0.0025 for other deformed bars, or
C-137
(c) 0.0020 for electrowelded wire reinforcement (smooth or corrugated) not greater than MW200 or MD200 (16 mm diameter).
diameter).
C.14.3.4 — Walls thicker than 250 mm, except basement walls, shall have reinforcement in each direction placed in two layers
parallel to the wall faces in accordance with:
(a) A layer consisting of not less than 1/2, and not more than 2/3 of the total reinforcement required for each direction shall be
placed not less than 50 mm and not more than 1/3 of the thickness of the wall from from the outer surface.
(b) The other layer, consisting of the remainder of the reinforcement required in that direction, must be placed not less than
20 mm and not more than 1/3 the thickness of the wall from the interior surface.
C.14.3.5 — Vertical and horizontal reinforcement must be spaced no more than three times the thickness of the wall, nor 450
mm.
C.14.3.6 — Vertical reinforcement need not be confined by side ties when the vertical reinforcement is not more than 0.01 times
the total concrete area, or when the vertical reinforcement is not required as compression reinforcement.
C.14.3.7 — Around window openings, doors, and openings of similar size, in addition to the minimum reinforcement required by
C.14.3.1, at least two No. 5 (5/8”) or 16M ( 16 mm) in all walls that have two layers of reinforcement in both directions and a No.
5 (5/8”) or 16M (16 mm) bar in walls that have a single layer of reinforcement in both directions. These bars must be anchored to
develop the yf in tension at the corners of the openings.
C.14.4 — Walls designed as members in compression
Except as provided in C.14.5, walls subjected to axial load or combined axial and flexural load shall be designed as members in
compression in accordance with the provisions of C.10.2, C.10.3, C.10.10, C. 10.11, C.10.14, C.14.2 and C.14.3.
C.14.5 — Empirical design method
C.14.5.1 — Walls of rectangular cross section without voids are permitted to be designed using the empirical provisions of
C.14.5, when the resultant of all factored loads is located within the central third of the total thickness of the wall, and is meet the
requirements of C.14.2, C.14.3 and C.14.5.
C.14.5.2 — The design axial resistance Pn ÿ of a wall that satisfies the limitations of C.14.5.1, shall be calculated using equation
(C.14-1), unless it is designed in accordance with C. 14.4.
ÿ
2ÿ
ÿ ÿÿk c
(C.14-1)
ÿ
ÿ= ÿnoP 0.55 f A 1 cg ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ 32h
ÿÿÿ ÿÿÿ
where ÿ corresponds to that of sections controlled by compression according to C.9.3.2.2. and the effective length factor k is:
For walls braced at the top and bottom to prevent lateral displacement and:
(a) Restrained against rotation at one or both ends (top or bottom or both) .................................... 0.8
(b) Not restrained against rotation at both ends .................................................. .................................... 1.0
For unbraced walls to prevent lateral displacement.................................................. ..................... 2.0
C-138
C.14.5.3 — Minimum thickness of walls designed by the empirical design method
C.14.5.3.1 — The thickness of load-bearing walls must not be less than 1/25 of the height or length of the wall, whichever is less, nor can it be
less than 100 mm.
C.14.5.3.2 — The thickness of the exterior walls of basements and foundations must not be less than 190 mm.
C.14.6 — Non-load-bearing walls
C.14.6.1 — The thickness of the walls that are not load-bearing must not be less than 100 mm, nor less than 1/30 of the minimum distance
between elements that provide lateral support.
C.14.7 — Walls used as foundation beams
C.14.7.1 — Walls designed as foundation beams shall have the top and bottom reinforcement required to resist bending moments, in accordance
with the provisions of C.10.2 to C.10.7. The shear design must comply with the provisions of Chapter C.11.
C.14.7.2 — Exposed areas of walls used as foundation beams that protrude above ground level must also meet the requirements of C.14.3.
C.14.8 — Alternative Design for Slender Walls
C.14.8.1 — When the tension caused by flexure controls the design of a wall out of plane, the requirements of C.14.8 are considered to satisfy
C.10.10.
C.14.8.2 — Walls designed in accordance with the provisions of C.14.8 shall comply with C.14.8.2.1 through C.14.8.2.6.
C.14.8.2.1 — The wall panel shall be designed as a simply supported, axially loaded element subjected to a uniform out-of-plane
(perpendicular to plane) lateral load, with maximum moments and deflections at mid-height.
C.14.8.2.2 — The cross section is constant throughout the height of the wall.
C.14.8.2.3 — The wall must be tension controlled.
C.14.8.2.4 — Reinforcement shall provide design reinforcement:
ÿmm
ÿ no cr (14-2)
where Mcr is to be obtained using the modulus of rupture given in Eq. (C.9-10).
C.14.8.2.5 — Concentrated gravity loads applied to the wall above the design section by
bending should be assumed distributed over a width:
(a) Equal to the width of the support, plus a width on each side that increases with a slope of 2 vertically to 1 horizontally towards the design
section; but
(b) no greater than the spacing of the concentrated loads; and
(c) not extending beyond the edges of the wall.
C.14.8.2.6 — The vertical force PA ug at half height of the wall must not exceed 0.06fÿ .
c
C.14.8.3 — The design moment resistance, Mn ÿ , for the combination of axial load and bending at mid-height must comply with:
C-139
ÿ mm
ÿ no or
(C.14-3)
where:
MM P = +ÿ (C.14-4)
or whoa whoa
Mua is the maximum factored moment located at mid-height of the wall, due to eccentric lateral and vertical loads, not including Pÿ effects ,
and ÿu is:
5M uc 2
ÿ= (C.14 - 5)
or
(0.75)48E cI cr
Mu should be obtained by iterating the deflections, or with Eq. (C.14-6)
m
m = uah
(C.14 - 6)
or
5P 2
1 ÿ uc
(0.75 )48E Ic cr
where:
EP c ÿ h ÿ 2
3
Yo = his w
ÿ A + ÿ+ s ÿ
(DC ) (C.14-7)
cr
AND f 2d ÿ 3
c ÿ and
and the value of EE yes c

should not be taken less than 6.
C.14.8.4 — The maximum out-of-plane deflection, ÿs , due to service loads, including the effect Pÿ must exceed 150 . If Ma , maximum , No
moment at half height of the wall due to lateral and vertical loads exceeds (
c
eccentrics, in service, including effects Pÿ 8): , 23M) cr , ÿs must be calculated with equation (C.14-
2/3M
to
ÿ
( ) cr
)
ÿ= ÿ + ( 2 3 ) cr
( ) ÿÿ
no
ÿ (23 ) cr
) (C.14-8)
( )
yes
((( 2/3M
no
ÿ
cr
Yes Ma , does not exceed ( 23M) cr , ÿs should be calculated with equation (C.14-9):
m to
ÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿ= ÿ ÿ cr (C.14-9)
yes
mcr ÿÿ
where:
2
5M cr c
ÿ =cr (C.14-10)
48EcgI
2
5M nc
ÿ =no (C.14-11)
48E Ic cr
I cr
must be calculated with equation (14-7) and Ma must be obtained by iterating the deflections.
ÿ
C-140
NSR-10 – Chapter C.15 – Foundations
CHAPTER C.15 — FOUNDATIONS
C.15.1 — Scope
C.15.1.1 - The provisions of Chapter C.15 must be used in the design of isolated footings and, when applicable, to
combined footings, footings on piles, foundation slabs, piles, caissons, walls and retaining structures and foundation tie
beams.
C.15.1.2 — Additional requirements for the design of combination footings and slab foundations are given in C.15.10, in
C.15.11 piles and caissons, in C.15.12 retaining walls and structures, and in C.15.13 foundation tie beams.
C.15.2 — Loads and reactions
C.15.2.1 — Footings must be designed to resist factored loads and induced reactions, in accordance with the appropriate
design requirements of this Regulation and in accordance with the provisions of Chapter C.15.
C.15.2.2 — The base area of the footing or the number and distribution of piles shall be determined from the unfactored
forces and moments transmitted to the soil or to the piles through the footing, and shall be determined using principles of
mechanics of soils the allowable resistance of the soil or the allowable capacity of the piles.
C.15.2.3 — The calculation of moments and shear stresses for footings supported on piles can be based on the
assumption that the reaction of any pile is concentrated in the center of the pile.
C.15.3 — Footings supporting circular or polygonal shaped columns or pedestals

regular
For the location of the critical sections for moments, shears, and development length of the reinforcement in the footings,
it is allowed to consider the circular or regular polygon shaped concrete columns or pedestals as square elements with
the same area.
C.15.4 — Moments in footings
C.15.4.1 — The external moment in any section of a footing shall be determined by passing a vertical plane through the
footing, and calculating the moment of the forces acting on the total area of the footing lying to one side of that vertical
plane.
C.15.4.2 — The maximum factored moment, Mu , for an isolated footing shall be calculated in the manner prescribed in
C.15.4.1, for critical sections located as follows:
(a) On the face of the column, pedestal, or wall, for footings supporting a column, pedestal, or wall of
concrete.
(b) At the midpoint between the central axis and the edge of the wall, for footings that support masonry walls. (c)
At the midpoint between the face of the column and the edge of the steel base plate, for footings supporting a column
with a steel base plate.
C.15.4.3 — In one-way footings and in two-way square footings, reinforcement shall be evenly distributed across the full
width of the footing.
C.15.4.4 — In rectangular footings in two directions, the reinforcement must be distributed as indicated in 15.4.4.1 and
15.4.4.2.
C.15.4.4.1 — Reinforcement in the long direction must be evenly distributed over the full width of the footing.
C-141
C.15.4.4.2 — For reinforcement in the short direction, a portion of the total reinforcement, ÿs s TO , should be distributed in the form
uniform on a strip (centered with respect to the axis of the column or pedestal) whose width is equal to the length of the short side of
distributed,in areas outside the
the footing. The remainder of the reinforcement required in the short direction, ( ) s 1 A ÿ ÿ must be evenly yes
center strip of the footing.
2
ÿ= (15-1)
yes
(ÿ+ 1)
where ÿ is the ratio of the long side to the short side of the footing.
C.15.5 — Shear in footings
C.15.5.1 — The shear resistance of footings resting on soil or rock must comply with the provisions of C.11.11.
C.15.5.2 — The location of the critical section for shear in accordance with Chapter C.11 shall be measured from the face of the
column, pedestal, or wall. For footings supporting a column or pedestal with a steel base plate, the critical section shall be measured
from the point defined in C.15.4.2(c).
C.15.5.3 — When the distance between the axis of any pile and the axis of the column is greater than two times the distance between
the top of the pile cap and the top of the pile, the pile cap shall comply with C.11.11 and C.15.5.4. Other pile caps must comply with
either Appendix CA, or both C.11.11, and C.15.5.4. If Appendix CA is used, the effective compressive strength of the concrete of the
struts, f
EC
, shall be determined using CA.3.2.2(b).
C.15.5.4 — The calculation of the shear in any section of a footing supported on piles must comply with C.15.5.4.1, C.15.5.4.2 and
C.15.5.4.3.
C.15.5.4.1 — It must be considered that the total reaction of any pile with its center located at d 2 or more
piled up
toward the outside of the section produces shear in that section.
C.15.5.4.2 — It must be considered that the reaction of any pile with its located center d 2 or more towards
piled up
the inside side of a section does not produce shear in that section.
C.15.5.4.3 — For intermediate positions of the center of the pile, the part of the pile reaction that produces shear in the section
shall be based on a linear interpolation between the total value a d 2 out of the section piled up
and the zero value corresponding to d pile 2 into the section.
C.15.6 — Development of reinforcement in footings
C.15.6.1 — The development of reinforcement in the footings must be done in accordance with Chapter C.12.
C.15.6.2 — The calculated tension or compression in the reinforcement at each section shall be developed on each side of that
section either by embedment length, hooks (tension only), or mechanical devices, or by a combination thereof. .
C.15.6.3 — Critical sections for reinforcement development must be assumed in the same planes defined in C.15.4.2 for the maximum
factored moment and in all other vertical planes in which section or reinforcement changes occur . See also C.12.10.6.
C-142
C.15.7 — Minimum height of footings
The height of the footings on the lower reinforcement must not be less than 150 mm for footings resting on the ground, nor less
than 300 mm in the case of footings resting on piles.
C.15.8 — Transmission of forces at the base of reinforced columns, walls or pedestals
C.15.8.1 — Forces and moments at the base of columns, walls, or pedestals shall be transmitted to the supporting pedestal or
footing through the concrete by crushing and by reinforcement, dowels, and mechanical connectors.
C.15.8.1.1 — The crushing stress at the contact surface between the support element and the supported element must not
exceed the crushing resistance of the concrete for any of the surfaces, in accordance with the provisions of C.10.14.
C.15.8.1.2 — Reinforcement, dowels, or mechanical connectors between supported and supporting elements must be adequate
to transmit:
(a) Any compressive force in excess of the concrete crushing strength of any of the
items.
(b) Any calculated tensile force across the interface.
In addition, reinforcement, transfer bars, or mechanical connectors must satisfy the provisions of C.15.8.2 or C.15.8.3.
C.15.8.1.3 — When the calculated moments are transmitted to the pedestal or footing, reinforcement, dowels, or mechanical
connectors shall have the necessary characteristics to satisfy the provisions of C.12.17.
C.15.8.1.4 — Lateral forces must be transmitted to the pedestal or footing in accordance with the provisions
friction shear of C.11.6, or by other appropriate means.
C.15.8.2 — In field-built structures, the reinforcement required to satisfy C.15.8.1 shall be provided either by extending longitudinal
bars into the support pedestal or footings, or by dowels.
C.15.8.2.1 — For field-built columns and pedestals, the area of reinforcement across the interface shall not
be less than 0.005 Ag , where Ag is the gross area of the supported element.
C.15.8.2.2 — For cast-in-place walls, the area of reinforcement across the interface shall not be less than the
minimum vertical reinforcement indicated in C.14.3.2.
C.15.8.2.3 — In the footings, the splicing by overlapping of the longitudinal bars of diameter ÿÿ is allowed. 43 and no. 57, in
compression only, with dowels to provide the required reinforcement to satisfy C.15.8.1. Dowels must not be larger than bars ÿÿ. 36
and must extend within the supported element for a distance not less than the greater of bars ÿÿ. 43 and no. 57, and the compression
lap splice length of the dowels, whichever is greater, and within the footing for a d.c.
distance
, of not less than dc from the dowels.
C.15.8.2.4 — When a connection that allows rotation (articulated) is provided in structures built in
work, said connection must comply with the specifications in C.15.8.1 and C.15.8.3.
C.15.8.3 — In precast construction, appropriate anchor bolts or mechanical connectors may be used to satisfy C.15.8.1. Anchor
bolts must be designed in accordance with Appendix CD.
C.15.8.3.1 — The connection between precast columns or pedestals and the support elements must comply with the
requirements of C.16.5.1.3(a).
C-143
C.15.8.3.2 — The connection between precast walls and support members shall meet the requirements of C.16.5.1.3(b)
and (c).
C.15.8.3.3 — Anchor bolts and mechanical connectors shall be designed to achieve their design strength before anchor
failure or failure of the surrounding concrete occurs. Anchor bolts must be designed in accordance with Appendix CD.
C.15.9 — Inclined or stepped footings
C.15.9.1 — On sloped or stepped footings, the angle of the slope, or the height and location of the steps shall be such that
the design requirements are satisfied in each section. (See also C.12.10.6)
C.15.9.2 — Sloping or stepped footings that are designed as a unit must be built to ensure such behavior.
C.15.10 — Combined Footings and Slab Foundations
C.15.10.1 — Footings supporting more than one column, pedestal, or wall (combined footings and slab foundations) must
be designed to resist factored loads and induced reactions, in accordance with the appropriate design requirements of this
Code.
C.15.10.2 — The Direct Method of Design of Chapter C.13 shall not be used for the design of combination footings and
slab foundations.
C.15.10.3 — Ground stress distribution under combination footings and slab foundations shall be in accordance with soil
properties and structure, and with established principles of soil mechanics.
C.15.10.4 — Minimum reinforcing steel in nonprestressed slab foundations shall meet the requirements of C.7.12.2 in
each principal direction. The maximum spacing should not exceed 450mm.
C.15.11 — Piles and foundation caissons
C.15.11.1 — Scope – The requirements presented in this section correspond to the minimum requirements for structural
reasons of concrete foundation piles and caissons, including driven piles, cast-in-place piles with steel sleeves, predrilled
piles and caissons. of foundations excavated manually and mechanically. The minimum reinforcements prescribed in this
section do not cover the effects of impact from driving, nor the requests derived from lateral thrusts and seismic effects on
the piles and foundation caissons, which must be defined by the geotechnical study in accordance with the provisions of
Title H.
C.15.11.2 — Reinforcement anchorage – The longitudinal reinforcement of the piles and foundation boxes must be
anchored in the footing or given, at least, a distance equal to the development length in tension, without reduction due to
excess reinforcement, defined in Chapter C.12.
C.15.11.3 — Maximum axial forces – The maximum allowable axial forces on the pile, or on the shaft in the case of
flared-base piles, are as follows:
(a) Compressive stresses caused by gravity loads (does not include driving effects):
ÿ
+ ÿAc
0.25f DL
g (C.15-2)
ÿ
1.2D 1.6L 0.35f Aÿ +
cg (C.15-3)
(b) Compressive stresses caused by gravity loads plus seismic effects:

ÿ
++ Ac
0.33f ÿ DL 0.7E
g (C.15-4)
C-144
ÿ
1.2D 1.0L 1.0E 0.35f A ++ÿ
cg (C.15-5)
(c) Tensile forces caused by seismic effects, when there is uplift (in this case the pile must be reinforced along its
entire length, unless the geotechnical study defines a shorter length):
ÿ +ÿ 1.0SD 0.9f A and st (C.15-6)
C.15.11.4 — Bending forces – When the pile may be subjected to bending moments due to lateral thrusts or seismic
effects, the design moments must be determined in accordance with the recommendations of the geotechnical study as
indicated in Title H. The flexural design of the pile must be carried out in accordance with the requirements of this Title C.
TABLE C.15.11-1 — MINIMUM LONGITUDINAL AND TRANSVERSAL QUANTITIES IN PILES AND FOUNDATION
CASES PASTED ON SITE Structures with a minimum energy dissipation capacity (DMI) of
17.5 MPa Structures with special (DES) and moderate
Requirement (DMO) capacity for energy
dissipation (see Note)
Minimum concrete strength , cfÿ 17.5MPa
Minimum longitudinal amount 0.0025 0.0050

Minimum number of longitudinal
4 4
bars
Longitudinal reinforcement length, unless the
geotechnical study indicates that a greater upper third of the length of the pile, but not less upper half of the length of the pile, but not less
length should be used than 4 m. than 6 m.
No. 2 (1/4”) or 6M (6 mm) for piles up to 500 No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm) for piles up to 750
stirrup bar diameter mm in diameter and No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm in diameter and No. 4 (1/2”) or 12M (12
mm) for piles over 500 mm in diameter. mm) for piles over 750 mm in diameter.
100 mm in the upper 600 mm of the 75 mm in the upper 1.20 m of the pile and 16 pile bar diameters
and 16 longitudinal bar diameters, along the longitudinal zone, along the longitudinally
stirrups maximum spacing
reinforced zone. armed longitudinally.
Note: When the design indicates that energy dissipation in the inelastic range will occur in the upper zone of the pile or box, the requirements given
in Chapter C.21 must be met and the necessary precautions must be taken to ensure that the plastic hinge occurs. in the confined area.
C.15.11.5 — Minimum amounts and minimum lengths of reinforcement – Unless greater reinforcement is required
in accordance with the provisions of Articles C.15.11.3 and C.15.11.4, the following amounts and minimum lengths must
be used arming:
C.15.11.5.1 — Piles and foundation caissons cast in situ – In piles and foundation caissons cast in situ, all
precautions must be taken to avoid strangulation caused by internal collapse within the pile at the time of casting the pile.
concrete. The minimum longitudinal and transversal amounts for piles and foundation caissons cast in place are those
given in Table C.15.11-1.
C.15.11.5.2 — Steel-jacketed piles – Same requirements as for cast-in-place piles and caissons. A steel jacket, No.
14 gauge (14 gauge) or larger, of the spiral welded type, may be considered to replace the confining effect of the stirrups;
as long as the protection against corrosion of the steel jacket is guaranteed.
C.15.11.5.3 — Concrete Filled Pipe – Longitudinal reinforcement with a minimum amount of 0.01 must be placed on
top of the pile for a distance equal to twice the anchorage length required for the reinforcement.
The necessary stirrups must be placed to ensure that the reinforcement remains in place during the concrete pour.
C.15.11.5.4 — Precast reinforced concrete piles – Longitudinal reinforcement must be placed with a minimum
amount of 0.01 along the entire length of the pile. Stirrups, or an equivalent spiral, must be placed with a minimum bar
diameter No. 2 (1/4”) or 6M (6 mm) with a maximum spacing of 100 mm in the upper 600 mm of the pile and 16
longitudinal bar diameters in the rest of the pile. It must be verified that the previous minimum reinforcement
C-145
be sufficient to guarantee the integrity of the pile during the driving process, and increase it in case a greater quantity is
required. The minimum compressive strength of the concrete before starting the driving must be = MPa. In structures with
ÿ
special energy dissipation capacity (DES) a spiral must be placed with cf 21 a minimum amount ÿ ÿ 0.006
yes
, instead of the stirrups indicated above.
C.15.11.5.5 — Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles – Abutments, or an equivalent spiral, shall be placed with a minimum
bar diameter No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm) with a maximum spacing of 100 mm at the top 600 mm of the pile. The connection
to the shoe or socket must be made by means of additional bars. The minimum compressive strength of the concrete before
ÿ
starting the driving must be cf 28 = MPa.
C.15.11.5.6 — Rolled steel section piles – In structures with special energy dissipation capacity (DES), the connection
with the footing or foundation socket must be capable of resisting a tensile force equal to 10 percent of the compressive
capacity of the pile.
C.15.12 — Walls and retaining structures

C.15.12.1 — Reinforced concrete retaining walls and elements must be designed in accordance with the appropriate
requirements of this Title C of Regulation NSR-10. The thrusts, active and passive pressures of the ground, thrusts induced
by seismic movements, and the other parameters required for the sizing of the retaining structures must be defined in the
geotechnical study, in accordance with the provisions of Title H.
C.15.12.2 — When retaining walls and members are connected to or support the seismic-resisting system of the building,
connections between the retaining system and the seismic-resisting system shall meet the appropriate requirements of Title
A and All precautions must be taken so that the containment elements have a behavior that is compatible with the degree of
energy dissipation in the inelastic range of the seismic resistance system of the building.
C.15.13 — Foundation tie beams

C.15.13.1 — Design forces – In the design of foundation tie beams, the following requirements must be met:
(a) Those of A.3.6.4.2 with respect to the axial forces that the tie beam must resist due to effects
seismic,
(b) The recommendations contained in the geotechnical study in this regard, and
(c) Those of Title H of the Regulations.
C.15.13.3 — Minimum dimensions – The dimensions of the tie beams must be established based on the stresses that affect
them, within which are counted the resistance to axial forces for seismic reasons and the rigidity and characteristics for effects
of differences of vertical load on the foundation elements and the possibility of occurrence of total and differential settlements.
C.15.13.3.1 — The tie beams must have a section such that their greatest dimension must be greater than or equal to the
span divided by 20 for structures with special energy dissipation capacity (DES), to the span divided by 30 for structures with
moderate energy dissipation capacity (DMO) and light divided by 40 for structures with minimal energy dissipation capacity
(DMI).
C.15.13.2 — Longitudinal Reinforcement – The tie beams on the ground that link the bases or footings must have continuous
longitudinal reinforcement, which must be capable of developing yf by means of anchorage in the external column of the final
span.
C.15.13.4 — Transversal Reinforcement – Closed stirrups must be placed along their entire length, with a spacing not
exceeding half the least dimension of the section or 300 mm. The mooring beams that resist bending moments from columns
must meet the requirements for separation and amount of transversal reinforcement established by the Regulations for the
level of energy dissipation capacity in the inelastic range of the seismic resistance system.
C-146
NSR-10 – Chapter C.16 – Precast concrete
CHAPTER C.16 — PRECAST CONCRETE
C.16.1 — Scope
C.16.1.1 — All the provisions of Regulation NSR-10 that are not specifically excluded and that do not contradict the
provisions of Chapter C.16, must be applied to structures that incorporate precast concrete structural elements.
C.16.2 — General
C.16.2.1 — The design of precast elements and their connections must include load and restraint conditions, from initial
fabrication to completion of the structure, including stripping, storage, transportation, and erection.
C.16.2.2 — When precast elements are incorporated into a structural system, the forces and deformations that occur
within and adjacent to the connections must be included in the design.
C.16.2.3 — Tolerances must be specified for both precast elements and interconnecting elements. The design of precast
elements and connections must include the effects of these tolerances.
C.16.2.4 — In addition to the requirements for drawings and specifications in 1.2, the following (a) and (b) must be
included in either contract documents or shop drawings:
(a) Detailed reinforcement, inserts, and lifting devices necessary to resist the temporary forces derived from handling,
storage, transportation, and assembly.
(b) Strength of concrete at established construction ages or stages.
C.16.3 — Distribution of forces between elements
C.16.3.1 — The distribution of forces perpendicular to the plane of the elements must be established by means of analysis
or tests.
C.16.3.2 — When system behavior requires in-plane forces to be transferred between elements of a precast wall or floor
system, C.16.3.2.1 and C.16.3.2.2 shall apply.
C.16.3.2.1 — The path of the forces in the plane must be continuous through both the connections and the elements.
C.16.3.2.2 — When tensile forces occur, a continuous path of steel or reinforcement shall be provided.
C.16.4 — Element design
C.16.4.1 — On one-way deck or floor slabs and on prestressed precast wall panels, with widths less than 12', and where
members are not mechanically connected so as to cause a restraint in the transverse direction, permitted that the
shrinkage and temperature reinforcement requirements of 7.12 in the direction normal to flexural reinforcement be
omitted. This omission does not apply to members that require reinforcement to resist transverse bending forces.
C.16.4.2 — In non-prestressed precast walls, reinforcement shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of
Chapters 10 or 14 except that the area of vertical and horizontal reinforcement shall each be not less than
C-147
0.001 Ag , where Ag is the gross area of the wall. Reinforcement spacing should not exceed 5 times the wall thickness nor
750mm for interior walls or 450mm for exterior walls.
C.16.5 — Structural integrity

C.16.5.1 — Except where controlling the provisions of C.16.5.2, the minimum structural integrity provisions of C.16.5.1.1
through C.16.5.1.4 shall apply to all precast structures:
C.16.5.1.1 — The longitudinal and transverse ties required by C.7.13.3 must connect the elements to
a system resistant to lateral loads.
C.16.5.1.2 — When precast elements form deck or floor diaphragms, the connections between the diaphragm and those
elements that are being laterally supported must have a nominal tensile strength of not less than 4.4 kN per linear meter.
C.16.5.1.3 — The vertical tension tie requirements of C.7.13.3 shall apply to all vertical structural members, except
face cladding, and shall be accomplished by specifying connections at horizontal joints in accordance with (a) to(c):
(a) Precast columns shall have a nominal tensile strength not less than columns with a cross section 1.4Agin N.in
greater than that required for loading considerations, a reduced effective area Ag based on the cross section required,
but not less than that is permitted. half of the total area.
(b) Precast wall panels must have a minimum of two ties per panel, with a nominal tensile strength of not less than 44
kN per tie.
(c) When the design forces do not generate tension in the base, the ties required by C.16.5.1.3(b) are permitted to be
anchored in a slab on the ground of appropriately reinforced concrete.
C.16.5.1.4 — Connection details should not be used that rely solely on friction caused by the
gravity loads.
C.16.5.2 — In structures with precast concrete load-bearing walls that are three or more stories high, the minimum
provisions of C.16.5.2.1 to C.16.5.2.5 shall apply.
C.16.5.2.1 — In floor and roof systems, transversal and longitudinal ties capable of offering a nominal resistance of 22
kN per meter of width or length must be specified. The ties must be placed on the supports of the interior walls and
between the elements and the exterior walls. Tie-downs must be located at or within 600mm of the plane of the deck or
floor system.
C.16.5.2.2 — Longitudinal ties parallel to the spans of the floor or deck slabs must be spaced at
not more than 3 m measured between centers. Provisions must be made to transfer forces around openings.
C.16.5.2.3 — The transversal ties perpendicular to the openings of the floor or roof slabs must have
a spacing no greater than the spacing of the load-bearing walls.
C.16.5.2.4 — Ties around the perimeter of each deck or deck, within 1.2 m of the edge, must provide a nominal tensile
strength of not less than 71 kN.
C.16.5.2.5 — Vertical tensile ties shall be provided on all walls, and shall be continuous throughout the height of the
building. They must also provide a nominal tensile strength of not less than 44 kN per horizontal meter of wall. Not less
than two ties must be provided for each precast panel.
C-148
C.16.6 — Design of connections and supports

C.16.6.1 — Forces are permitted to be transmitted between elements through mortar-injected joints, shear wrenches, mechanical connectors,
steel-reinforced connections, reinforced floor tapering, or a combination of these methods.
C.16.6.1.1 — The effectiveness of the connections to transmit forces between elements must be determined by means of analysis or
tests. When shear is the main imposed load, the provisions of C.11.6 are permitted to be used.
C.16.6.1.2 — When designing a connection using materials with different structural properties, their relative stiffnesses, strengths, and
ductility must be considered.
C.16.6.2 — Supports of precast deck or floor elements on simple supports shall satisfy C.16.6.2.1 and C.16.6.2.2.
C.16.6.2.1 — The allowable crushing stress at the contact surface between the support element and the supported element and between
any intermediate support element must not exceed the crushing resistance of any of the surfaces or the support element. The crushing
strength of concrete is given in C.10.17.
C.16.6.2.2 — Unless it is shown by analysis or testing that performance is not affected,

(a) and (b) must be fulfilled:
(a) Each element and its support system shall have design dimensions selected such that, after tolerances are considered, the distance
from the edge of the support to the end of the precast element in the direction of the span is at least
no
180 , but not less than:
For solid or alveolar slabs (hollow-core) ..................................... ................................. 50 mm For beams or elements
in the shape of an elongated T ....... ................................................................ .........75mm
(b) Backing pads on unreinforced edges must be offset a minimum of 13mm from the face of the bearing, or at least the chamfer
dimension on chamfered edges.
C.16.6.2.3 — The requirements of C.12.11.1 do not apply to reinforcement for positive moment in statically determined precast elements,
but at least one-third of such reinforcement shall extend to the center of support, taking allowable tolerances into account. in C.7.5.2.2 and
C.16.2.3.
C.16.7 — Embedded elements after concrete placement

C.16.7.1 — When approved by the licensed design professional, embedded elements (such as dowels or inserts) that protrude from the
concrete or are exposed for inspection are permitted to be embedded while the concrete is plastic, provided that C.16.7.1.1, C.16.7.1.2 and
C.16.7.1.3 are met.
C.16.7.1.1 — Embedded items are not required to be hooked or tied to reinforcement within the
concrete.
C.16.7.1.2 — Embeds are held in the correct position while the concrete is plastic.
C.16.7.1.3 — The concrete is adequately compacted around the embedded elements.
C.16.8 — Identification marks
C.16.8.1 — Every precast element must be marked to indicate its location and orientation in the structure and its date of manufacture.
C.16.8.2 — The identification marks must correspond to those on the assembly drawings.
C-149
C.16.9 — Handling
C.16.9.1 — The design of the elements must consider the forces and distortions that occur during curing, stripping,
storage and assembly, so that the precast elements are not overstressed or damaged in any way.
C.16.9.2 — Precast structures and elements must be adequately supported and braced during erection to ensure proper
alignment and structural integrity until permanent connections are completed.
C.16.10 — Evaluation of the resistance of precast structures
C.16.10.1 —A precast element that is converted to a composite element by concrete placed in place is permitted to be
tested as a flexural-insulated precast element in accordance with C.16.10.1.1 and C.16.10.1.2.
C.16.10.1.1 — Test loads shall be applied only when calculations indicate that compression or buckling is not critical
for the isolated precast element.
C.16.10.1.2 — The proof load shall be the load which, when applied to the isolated precast element, induces the
same total forces in the tensile reinforcement as would be induced by loading the composite element with the required
test loads. by C.20.3.2.
C.16.10.2 — The provisions of C.20.5 shall be the basis for acceptance or rejection of precast elements.
C-150
NSR-10 – Chapter C.17 – Concrete-concrete composite elements subjected to bending
CHAPTER 17 — COMPOSITE ELEMENTS

CONCRETE-CONCRETE SUBJECTED TO FLEXURE
C.17.1 — Scope
C.17.1.1 — The provisions of Chapter C.17 shall be applied to the design of flexural concrete composite elements, defined
as precast and/or cast-in-place concrete elements, built in different stages but interconnected in such a way that they
respond to loads as a single unit.
C.17.1.2 — All the provisions of Title C of the NSR-10 Regulation apply to composite members subjected to bending,
except as explicitly modified in Chapter C.17.
C.17.2 — General
C.17.2.1 — It is allowed to use elements composed in their entirety or parts of them, to resist shear and moment
C.17.2.2 — Individual items must be investigated for all critical stages of loading.
C.17.2.3 — If the specified strength, density, or other properties of the various elements are different, the properties of the
individual elements or the most critical values shall be used in the design.
C.17.2.4 — In calculating the resistance of composite elements, no distinction should be made between braced and
unbraced elements.
17.2.5 — All members shall be designed to resist the loads introduced before full development of the design strength of
the composite member.
C.17.2.6 — Reinforcement required to control cracking and prevent separation of individual elements of composite
members shall be designed.
C.17.2.7 — Composite members shall comply with the deflection control requirements given in C.9.5.5.
C.17.3 — Shoring
Where shoring is used, it should not be removed until the supported members have developed the required design
properties to resist all loads and limit defections and cracking at the time of shoring removal.
C.17.4 — Vertical shear resistance
C.17.4.1 — Where the vertical shear is considered to be resisted by the entire composite member, it shall be designed in
accordance with the requirements of Chapter C.11, as if it were a monolithically constructed member of the same cross
section.
C.17.4.2 — Shear reinforcement must be fully anchored within the interconnected elements, in accordance with the
provisions of C.12.13.
C.17.4.3 — It is allowed to consider the reinforcement for shear, anchored and prolonged, as stirrups to take the horizontal
shear.
C.17.5 — Resistance to horizontal shear
C-151
NSR-10 – Chapter C.17 – Concrete-concrete composite elements subjected to bending
C.17.5.1 — In a composite element, full transmission of horizontal shear forces must be ensured at the contact surfaces of the
interconnected elements.
C.17.5.2 — In the requirements of 17.5, d shall be taken as the distance from the extreme fiber in compression of the total
composite section to the centroid of longitudinal reinforcement in tension, prestressed and unprestressed, if it exists, but there
is no need to take it less than 0.8h for prestressed concrete elements.
C.17.5.3 — Unless calculated in accordance with C.17.5.4, the design of cross sections subjected to horizontal shear shall be
based on:
VV
or
nh
=ÿ (C.17-1)
where Vnh is the nominal horizontal shear resistance according to C.17.5.3.1 to C.17.5.3.4.
C.17.5.3.1 — Where contact surfaces are clean, free of laitance and have been roughened
intentionally, the shear strength Vnh should not be taken greater than 0.55bdv
.
C.17.5.3.2 — Where the minimum of stirrups is provided in accordance with C.17.6 and contact surfaces are clean and free
of laitance, but not intentionally roughened, Vnh shall not be taken greater than
0.55bd v
.
C.17.5.3.3 — Where the minimum of stirrups is provided in accordance with C.17.6 and contact surfaces are clean, free of
laitance and intentionally roughened to an amplitude of approximately 6mm,
1.8 0.6 fbd +ÿ ÿ , but not greater than 3.5bd . The indicated values of ÿ should be used
Vnh should be taken equal ) v and v v
( ) . in 11.6.4.3 and ÿv isvAto

bs( v
C.17.5.3.4 — Where Vu in the section under consideration exceeds ÿ( 3.5b dv ) , the horizontal shear design
must be done in accordance with C.11.6.4.
C.17.5.4 — As an alternative to C.17.5.3, the horizontal shear shall be determined by calculating the actual variation of the
compressive or tensile force in any segment, and provision shall be made to transfer that force as horizontal shear to the
supporting member. . The factored horizontal shear force shall not exceed the shear resistance Vnh ÿ as given in C.17.5.3.1 to
C.17.5.3.4, where the contact surface area shall replace b dv .
C.17.5.4.1 — Where stirrups provided to resist horizontal shear are designed to satisfy C.17.5.4, the relationship between
the area of the stirrups and the spacing along the element shall approximately reflect the shear stress distribution in the element.
C.17.5.5 — Where tension exists across any contact surface between interconnected elements, contact shear transmission is
only permitted when the minimum number of stirrups is provided in accordance with C.17.6.
C.17.6 — Stirrups for horizontal shear

C.17.6.1 — Where stirrups are placed to transfer horizontal shear, the area of the stirrups shall not be less than that required by
C.11.4.6.3, and their spacing shall not exceed 4 times the minor dimension of the supported member. , nor 600 mm.
C.17.6.2 — Horizontal shear resisting stirrups shall consist of individual bars or wire, multi-leg stirrups, or vertical legs of welded
wire reinforcement.
C.17.6.3 — All stirrups shall be fully anchored within interconnected elements in accordance with C.12.13.
C-152
NSR-10 – Chapter C.18 – Prestressed concrete
CHAPTER C.18 — PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE
C.18.1 — Scope
C.18.1.1 — The provisions of Chapter C.18 shall apply to members prestressed with wire, strand, or bars that meet the
requirements for prestressing steels of C.3.5.5.
C.18.1.2 — All provisions of Title C of Regulation NSR-10 not specifically excluded and that do not contradict the provisions
of Chapter C.18, must be considered applicable to prestressed concrete.
C.18.1.3 — The following provisions of this Title C of the NSR-10 Regulation shall not be applied to prestressed concrete
except when specifically indicated: C.6.4.4, C.7.6.5, C.8.12.2, C. 8.12.3, C.8.12.4, C.8.13, C.10.5, C.10.6, C.10.9.1 and
C.10.9.2; Chapter C.13; and sections C.14.3, C.14.5 and C.14.6, except that some sections of C.10.6 may apply as
indicated in C.18.4.4.
C.18.2 — General
C.18.2.1 — The prestressed elements must meet the resistance requirements specified in this Title C of the NSR-10
Regulation.
C.18.2.2 — The design of prestressed elements must be based on resistance and behavior in service conditions during all
load stages that will be critical during the life of the structure, from the moment the prestress is applied by first time.
C.18.2.3 — The stress concentrations due to prestressing must be considered in the design.
C.18.2.4 — Measures must be taken with respect to the effects on adjacent structures produced by plastic and elastic
deformations, deflections, changes in length and rotations caused by prestressing.
Effects due to temperature changes and shrinkage should also be included.
C.18.2.5 — The possibility of buckling of a member between the points where concrete and prestressing steel are in
intermittent contact in a duct larger than necessary must be considered, as well as the possibility of buckling of webs and
thin wings.
C.18.2.6 — When calculating the section properties before bonding of the prestressing steel, the effect of area loss due to
open ducts must be considered.
C.18.3 — Design assumptions
C.18.3.1 — Strength design of prestressed members for flexural and axial loads shall be based on the assumptions of
C.10.2, except that C.10.2.4 shall apply only to reinforcement complying with C. 3.5.3.
C.18.3.2 — For the study of stresses in transfer of prestressing, under service loads and in the state corresponding to
cracking loads, the elastic theory must be used with the assumptions of C.18.3.2.1 and C.18.3 .2.2.
C.18.3.2.1 — Strains vary linearly with height at all stages of loading.
C.18.3.2.2 — In the cracked sections the concrete does not resist traction.
C.18.3.3 — The elements prestressed in bending must be classified as Class U, Class T or Class C depending on ,
F corresponding to the stress calculated in the extreme fiber in tension in the pre-compressed area in tension,
you
calculated for service charges, as follows:
C-153
(a) Class U: ÿ 0.62

f f (b)
you
ÿ
Class T: ÿ
0.62 ff 1.0 f <ctÿ c
ÿ
(c) Class C: f 1.0 f >

you c
ÿ
The systems of prestressed slabs in two directions must be designed as Class U with f 0.50 f ÿ you c
C.18.3.4 — For members subjected to Class U and Class T bending, it is permitted to calculate the stresses for service loads using
the uncracked section. For members subjected to Class C bending, the stresses for service loads shall be calculated using the
transformed cracked section.
C.18.3.5 — Deflections of prestressed members subjected to bending shall be calculated in accordance with C.9.5.4.
C.18.4 — Performance requirements — Elements subjected to bending
C.18.4.1 — Stresses in concrete immediately after application of prestressing (before time-dependent prestressing losses).
(a) The stress in the extreme fiber in compression, except as permitted in (b), shall not exceed ............ 0.60fÿ ci
(b) The extreme fiber stress in compression at the ends of simply supported members shall not exceed
................................................................ ................................................................ ................................ 0.70fÿ
ci
(c) Where the calculated tensile stresses, Fyou

, exceed 0.5 fÿ at thec ends of elements simply
supported, or 0.25 fÿ atc other locations, additional bonded reinforcement (not prestressed or prestressed) must be placed in
the tension zone to resist the full tensile force in the concrete, calculated assuming uncracked section.
C.18.4.2 — For prestressed members subjected to Class U and Class T flexures, the stresses in the concrete under service loads
(after all prestressing losses have occurred) shall not exceed the following values:
(a) Stress in the extreme fiber in compression due to prestressing and loading
permanent over time ................................................... ................................................................ ..................................... 0.45fÿ c
(b) Stress in the extreme fiber in compression due to prestressing and all loads..................................... 0.60fÿ c
C.18.4.3 — The allowable concrete stresses indicated in C.18.4.1 and C.18.4.2 may be exceeded if it is shown by testing or
analysis that performance is not impaired.
C.18.4.4 — For prestressed members in Class C flexure not subjected to fatigue or aggressive exposure, the spacing of the
closest bonded reinforcement to the farthest edge in tension shall not exceed the value given in C.10.6.4.
For structures subjected to fatigue or exposed to corrosive media, special investigations and precautions are needed.
C.18.4.4.1 — Spacing requirements must be met for non-prestressed reinforcement and for attached tendons. The spacing of
the attached tendons should not exceed 2/3 of the maximum spacing allowed for non-prestressed reinforcements.
C-154
When both normal reinforcement and bonded prestressing tendons are used to meet spacing requirements, the space between a bar and a tendon shall
not exceed 5/6 of that allowed by C.10.6.4. See also C.18.4.4.3.
C.18.4.4.2 — When applying Equation (C.10-4) to prestressed tendons, ÿf shall be substituted for sf , where ÿf
$ $
shall be taken as the calculated stress in the prestressing steel due to service loading in a cracked section analysis minus the decompression stress f
equals the effective stress in the prestressing steel f . See also C.18.4.4.3.f . It can be considered dc DC
HE
C.18.4.4.3 — When applying equation (C.10-4) to prestressed tendons, the magnitude of ÿf must
$
not exceed
ÿ
250MPa. When ÿf is
$ less than or equal to 140 MPa, the spacing requirements of C.18.4.4.1 and C.18.4.4.2 do not apply.
apply.
C.18.4.4.4 — When h in a beam exceeds 900 mm, the area of longitudinal composite surface reinforcement
of reinforcement or attached tendons, shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of C.10.6.7.
C.18.5 — Allowable stresses in prestressing steel
C.18.5.1 — The tensile stresses in the prestressing steel must not exceed:
(a) Due to the force of the prestressing jack.................................................. ................................................................ ...... 0.94f py
but not greater than the minimum between 0.80f andpu

the maximum value recommended by the
manufacturer of the prestressing steel or anchoring devices.
(b) Immediately after the transfer of the prestress ............................................. .......................... 0.82f py
but not greater than 0.74f pu
(c) Post-tensioning tendons, in anchors and couplings, immediately after transfer ............ 0.70f pu
C.18.6 — Prestress losses
C.18.6.1 — To determine the effective stress in the prestressing steel, sources of prestressing losses. FHE , the following should be considered
(a) Settlement of prestressing steel during transfer;
(b) Elastic shortening of concrete;
(c) Creep flow of concrete;
(d) Shrinkage of concrete;
(e) Stress relaxation in the prestressing steel;
(f) Friction losses due to intentional or accidental bending of post-tensioning tendons.
C.18.6.2 — Friction losses in post-tensioning tendons
C.18.6.2.1 — Ppx , the force in the post-tensioning tendons at a force distance from the jack, must px from the end where the
be calculated by means of:
C-155
(k px p px
+ÿ ÿ )
P Pe pj=
px
(C.18-1)
when ( ) greater than 0.3, Ppx can be calculated by: Kpx p px

+ÿ ÿ is not
1
PP 1K = (
+ +ÿ ÿ pj px px
px p ) ÿ(C.18-2)
C.18.6.2.2 — Friction losses shall be based on experimentally determined coefficients of friction for accidental deflection K and
for curvature ÿp , and shall be verified during tensioning operations
of the tendon
C.18.6.2.3 — The values of K and ÿp used in the design must be placed on the design plans .
C.18.6.3 — When there is loss of prestress in an element due to its connection with an adjacent structure, said loss of prestress
must be taken into account in the design.
C.18.7 — Flexural strength
C.18.7.1 — The flexural design resistance for elements subjected to flexure must be calculated using the resistance design methods
of this Title C of the NSR-10 Regulation. For prestressing steel, f must replace $
a and f in strength calculations.
C.18.7.2 — As an alternative to a more precise determination of f based on $strain compatibility,

the following approximate values of f ps can be used , as long as f is not
HE less than 0.50f . pu
(a) For members with attached tendons.
ÿ ÿ fd pu ÿÿ
f ps =
f1 pu ÿ
ÿ
ÿp _
ÿ
+ ÿÿÿ ÿp ( ÿ
ÿ)ÿÿ
ÿ(C.18-3)
ÿ 1 tsp fd
ÿ ÿÿ ÿ
where ÿ is , ÿÿ is ÿÿ ff yc ÿ
ÿf and
fÿ c , and pÿ is 0.55 for ff notpyless
pu than 0.80; 0.40 for ff not less than p and pu
0.85, and 0.28 for ff not
py pu
less than 0.90.
When any compression reinforcement is taken into account in calculating f using Eq. (C.18-3)
$
the
term:
ÿ ÿd f
pu
ÿ ) pÿ ÿ + ÿÿÿÿ ÿ ÿ(
ÿ
fdc p
must be taken not less than 0.17 and dÿ must not be greater than 0.15d . p
(b) For members with unattached tendons and a span-height ratio of 35 or less:
ÿ
Fc
f =++ f 70 ÿ(C.18-4)
HE
ps 100 ÿp
of butin$ equation (C.18-4), should not be taken greater than the lesser fpyand (fHE420
+).f
(c) For members with unattached tendons and with a span-height ratio greater than 35:
C-156
ÿ
Fc
F$ =++
f HE70 ÿ(C.18-5)
300 ÿp _
equation
$ (C.18-5) should not be taken greater than the lesser of but fpyy (f 210
HE +
f in
).
C.18.7.3 — Non-prestressed reinforcement complying with C.3.5.3, when used concurrently with prestressing steel, may be
considered to contribute to the tensile force and is permitted to be included in flexural strength calculations with an effort
equal to yf . Other non-prestressed reinforcements are permitted to be included in strength calculations only if a strain
compatibility analysis is performed to determine the stresses in that reinforcement.
C.18.8 — Limits of reinforcement in elements subjected to bending
C.18.8.1 — Prestressed concrete sections shall be classified as tension-controlled, transition, or compression-controlled

sections in accordance with C.10.3.3 and C.10.3.4. The appropriate strength reduction factors, ÿ , from C.9.3.2 shall be used.
C.18.8.2 — The total amount of prestressed and non-prestressed reinforcement in elements with adhered prestressed
reinforcement must be that necessary to develop a factored load of at least 1.2 times the cracking load, calculated based on
the modulus of rupture. rf specified in C.9.5.2.3. Omitting this provision is permitted for members subjected to flexure with
shear and flexural strength of at least twice that required in C.9.2.
C.18.8.3 — Some or all of the bonded reinforcement consisting of bars or tendons shall be placed as close as possible to
the tension face in prestressed members subjected to flexure. In prestressed members with unbonded tendons, the minimum
bonded reinforcement consisting of bars or tendons shall meet the requirements of C.18.9.
C.18.9 — Minimum bonded reinforcement
C.18.9.1 — For all members subjected to flexure with unbonded tendons, a minimum area of bonded reinforcement shall be
provided, as required in C.18.9.2 and C.18.9.3.
C.18.9.2 — Except as provided in C.18.9.3, the minimum area of bonded reinforcement shall be calculated by
=
at 0.004A
yes
ct ÿ(C.18-6)
where Act is the area of the portion of the cross section between the tensile face in bending and the center of gravity of the
gross section.
C.18.9.2.1 — The bonded reinforcement required by equation (18-6) must be evenly distributed
over the pre-compressed tensile zone and as close as possible to the extreme fiber in tension.
C.18.9.2.2 — Bonded reinforcement is required regardless of stress conditions under service load.
C.18.9.3 — In two-way flat-slab systems, the minimum area and distribution of bonded reinforcement shall comply with the
requirements of C.18.9.3.1, C.18.9.3.2, and C.18.9.3.3.
C.18.9.3.1 — Bonded reinforcement shall not be required in positive moment zones where F , the effort of
you
stress in the extreme fiber in tension of the prestressed tension zone at the level of service loads, (after 0.17 fÿ . of
considering all prestressing losses) does not exceed c
C-157
C.18.9.3.2 — In positive moment zones where the calculated tensile stress in the concrete under load from the minimum area of the bonded
service exceeds 0.17 fÿ c , reinforcement shall be calculated by:
No.
c
TO
yes
= ÿ(C.18-7)
0.5f
and
where the value of yf used in equation (C.18-7) must not exceed 420 MPa. The bonded reinforcement should be evenly distributed over the pre-
compressed tensile zone, as close as possible to the extreme fiber in tension.
C.18.9.3.3 — In negative moment zones on support columns, the minimum area of bonded reinforcement, As , at the top of the slab in each
direction shall be calculated by:
= cf
A 0.00075A
yes
ÿ(C.18-8)
where Acf is the largest gross cross-sectional area of the beam-slab strips in the two orthogonal equivalent frames that intersect at the column in
a slab in two directions.
The bonded reinforcement required by Eq. (C.18-8) must be distributed between lines that are 1.5h away from opposite faces of the support
column. At least 4 bars or wires must be placed in each direction. The spacing of the bonded reinforcement should not exceed 300mm.
C.18.9.4 — The minimum length of bonded reinforcement required in C.18.9.2 and C.18.9.3 shall be as indicated in C.18.9.4.1, C.18.9.4.2 and
C.18.9.4.3.
C.18.9.4.1 — In positive moment zones, the minimum length of the bonded reinforcement must be 1/3 of the free span,
n , and be centered in the zone of positive moment.
C.18.9.4.2 — In negative moment zones, the adhered reinforcement must extend 1/6 of the free span, side of the support. no ,
to each
C.18.9.4.3 — When bonded reinforcement is provided to contribute to Mn ÿ in accordance with C.18.7.3, or for tensile stress conditions in
accordance with C.18.9.3.2, the minimum length shall also comply with the provisions of Chapter C.12.
C.18.10 — Statically indeterminate structures
C.18.10.1 — Frames and continuous prestressed concrete members shall be designed for satisfactory performance under service load conditions
and to provide adequate strength.
C.18.10.2 — The behavior under service load conditions must be determined by means of an elastic analysis, considering the reactions,
moments, shears and axial forces produced by prestressing, creep, shrinkage, temperature variations, axial deformation, restraint of adjacent
structural elements and foundation settlements.
C.18.10.3 — The moments used to calculate the required strength shall be the sum of the moments due to the reactions induced by the
prestressing (with a factor of 1.0) and the moments due to the factored design loads . It is allowed to adjust the sum of these moments as
indicated in C.18.10.4.
C.18.10.4 — Redistribution of moments in continuous elements prestressed in bending
C.18.10.4.1 — When bonded reinforcement is provided at supports in accordance with C.18.9, it is permitted to decrease the
Negative or positive moments calculated by means of elastic theory for any type of load, according to C.8.4.
C-158
C.18.10.4.2 — The reduced moment shall be used to calculate the redistributed moments in all other span sections.
Static equilibrium must be maintained after the redistribution of moments for each load arrangement.
C.18.11 — Compression members — Combined axial and bending load
C.18.11.1 — Prestressed concrete elements subjected to combined flexural and axial load, with or without non-prestressed
reinforcement, must be designed in accordance with the resistance design methods of this Title C of Regulation NSR-10
for non-prestressed elements . should include the effects of
prestressing, shrinkage, creep and temperature change.
C.18.11.2 — Limits of reinforcement in prestressed members subjected to compression
C.18.11.2.1 — Members with an average compressive stress in concrete due to effective prestressing force alone less
than 1.6 MPa shall be minimally reinforced in accordance with C.7.10, C.10.9.1, and C. 10.9.2 for columns, or with C.14.3
for walls.
C.18.11.2.2 — Except in the case of walls, members with an average compressive stress in concrete, due solely to the
effective prestressing force, equal to or greater than 1.6 MPa must have all tendons surrounded by spirals or stirrups. sides,
according to (a) to (d):
(a) The spirals must comply with what is indicated in C.7.10.4.
(b) Side ties shall be at least No. 10, or formed of welded wire reinforcement of equivalent area, and have a vertical
spacing not to exceed 48 times the diameter of the bar or wire, nor the smallest dimension. of the compression element.
(c) Stirrups shall be located vertically, above the top edge of the footing or slab of any story, at a distance of not more
than one-half the required stirrup spacing, and shall be spaced, as specified herein, up to a distance not more than half
the spacing below the lower horizontal reinforcement of the supported members located above.
(d) When there are beams or corbels that frame the column on all sides, it is allowed to finish the stirrups no more than
75 mm below the lower reinforcement of said beams or corbels.
C.18.11.2.3 — For walls with an average compressive stress in concrete due solely to the effective prestressing force
equal to or greater than 1.6 MPa, the minimum reinforcement requirements of C.14.3 may be waived when structural
analysis demonstrates a adequate strength and stability.
C.18.12 — Slab systems
C.18.12.1 — Factored moments and shears in prestressed slab systems, reinforced in bending in more than one direction,
shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of C.13.7 (excluding those mentioned in C.13.7.7.4 and C. 13.7.7.5)
or by more elaborate design procedures.
C.18.12.2 — The Mn ÿ in prestressed slabs required by C.9.3 for each section must be greater than or equal to Mu taking
into account C.9.2, C.18.10.3 and C.18.10.4. The Vn ÿ of prestressed slabs required by C.9.3 in the area surrounding the
columns must be greater than or equal to Vu taking into account C.9.2, C.11.1, C.11.11.2 and C.11.11.6.2.
C.18.12.3 — Under service loading conditions, all operating limitations, including specified limits for deflections, must be
met with due consideration of the factors listed in C.18.10.2.
C.18.12.4 — For uniformly distributed loads, the spacing of tendons or groups of tendons in at least one direction shall not
exceed the lesser of 8 times the thickness of the slab or 1.5 m. The spacing of the tendons must provide a minimum
effective average prestress of 0.9 MPa over the slab section afferent to the
C-159
tendon or group of tendons. For slabs with cross-sectional variation along the slab span, either parallel or perpendicular to the tendon or
group of tendons, a minimum effective average prestress of 0.9 MPa is required at each slab cross section afferent to the tendon or group.
of tendons along the span. Concentrated loads and openings in slabs must be considered when determining tendon spacing.
C.18.12.5 — In slabs with unbonded tendons, bonded reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with C.18.9.3 and C.18.9.4.
C.18.12.6 — Except as permitted in C.18.12.7, in slabs with unbonded tendons, seven-wire post-tensioned strands shall be provided, with
a minimum of 2 strands 12.7 mm in diameter or larger, in each direction in columns, either passing through or anchored within the region
circumscribed by longitudinal column reinforcement. Outside the outer faces of the column and unhinged for shear, these two structural
integrity tendons must pass under any orthogonal tendons in the adjacent spans. Where the two structural integrity tendons are anchored,
within the region circumscribed by the longitudinal reinforcement of the column, the anchorage must be placed outside the centroid of the
column and away from the anchored span.
C.18.12.7 — Prestressed slabs that do not comply with C.18.12.6 are permitted provided they contain lower reinforcement in each
direction, that passes within the region circumscribed by the longitudinal reinforcement of the column, and are anchored at the exterior
supports as required by C.13.3.8.5. The area of bottom reinforcement in each direction shall be not less than 1.5 times that required by
equation (C.10-3) and not less than 2.1bdf where bw is the width of the face of the column wy through, which it passes. the reinforcement.
The minimum extension of these bars beyond the face of the column or the slop for shear must be equal to or greater than the development
length of the bar, per C.12.2.1.
C.18.12.8 — On hoisted slabs, the bottom anchor reinforcement shall be detailed in accordance with C.13.3.8.6.
C.18.13 — Post-tensioned tendon anchorage zone
C.18.13.1 — Anchorage zone
The anchorage zone must be considered as composed of two sectors:
(a) The local zone is the rectangular prism (or equivalent rectangular for circular or oval anchors) surrounding the anchoring device
and any confining reinforcement.
(b) The general zone which is the anchor zone as defined in C.2.2 and includes the local zone.
C.18.13.2 — Local zone
C.18.13.2.1 — The design of local zones shall be based on the factored prestressing force, Ppu , and the requirements of C.9.2.5 and
C.9.3.2.5.
C.18.13.2.2 — Reinforcement must be provided to the local zone where required for proper operation.
proper anchorage device.
C.18.13.2.3 — The requirements for the local zone of C.18.13.2.2 are satisfied by C.18.14.1 or C.18.15.1 and C.18.15.2.
C.18.13.3 — General area
C.18.13.3.1 — The design of general zones shall be based on the factored prestressing force, Ppu , and on
the requirements of C.9.2.5 and C.9.3.2.5.
C.18.13.3.2 — Reinforcement shall be provided in the general area where required to resist bursting, spalling, and longitudinal edge
tensile forces induced by anchoring devices. The effects of abrupt changes in section must be considered.
C-160
C.18.13.3.3 — The requirements for the general zone established in C.18.13.3.2 are considered satisfied by
C.18.13.4, C.18.13.5, C.18.13.6 and when applicable, what is indicated in C.18.14.2, or C.18.14.3, or C.18.15.3.
C.18.13.4 — Nominal resistance of materials
C.18.13.4.1 — The tensile stress of bonded reinforcement at nominal strength is limited to yf for non-prestressed
reinforcement and f for prestressedpyreinforcement. The nominal tensile stress of the reinforcement does not
Prestressed bonded to resist tensile forces in anchorage areas should be limited to f = f+HE70
.
$
C.18.13.4.2 — Except in the case of concrete confined within spirals or closed confinement abutments that provide
confinement equivalent to that indicated by equation (C.10-5), the nominal compressive strength of the concrete in the general
zone must be limited a 0.7 f ÿ ci .ÿ
C.18.13.4.3 — The compressive strength of the concrete at the time of post-tensioning, , must be specified on
f'ci _
the design drawings. Unless oversized anchorage devices are used to compensate for the lower compressive strength or the
steel is stressed to no more than 50 percent of the final prestressing strength, the prestressing steel shall not be stressed until
the ultimate strength of the prestressing compression of concrete measured in tests consistent with the curing of the element,
either at least 28 MPa for multi-wire strands or at least 17 MPa for tendons of one strand or for bars.
C.18.13.5 — Design methods
C.18.13.5.1 — For general zone design, the following methods are permitted, provided the specific procedures used result
in strength predictions that substantially agree with wide-range test results:
(a) Equilibrium-based plasticity models ("strut-tie" models);
(b) Linear stress analysis (including finite element analysis or equivalent); either
(c) Simplified equations, when applicable.
C.18.13.5.2 — The simplified equations shall not be used in cases where the cross section of the member is not
rectangular, where discontinuities in or near the general zone cause deviations in the path of forces, where the distance
minimum to the edge is less than 1.5 times the lateral dimension of the anchorage device in that direction, or where multiple
anchorage devices are used that are not arranged as a single compact group.
C.18.13.5.3 — The stressing sequence must be specified on the drawings and considered in the design.
C,18.13.5.4 — Three-dimensional effects must be considered in the design and must be analyzed using
three-dimensional procedures or be approximated by considering the sum of the effects in two orthogonal planes.
C.18.13.5.5 — For anchor devices located away from the end of the member, bonded reinforcement must be provided to
transfer at least 0.35P to the section of concrete behindputhe anchor. Such reinforcement must be placed symmetrically around
the anchorage devices and must be fully developed both behind and in front of the anchorage devices.
C.18.13.5.6 — When tendons are bent in the general zone, except for one-wire tendons or where analysis shows
reinforcement is not required, bonded reinforcement shall be provided to resist splitting and radial forces.
C.18.13.5.7 — Except for single-strand tendons or where analysis shows reinforcement is not required, minimum
reinforcement shall be provided in orthogonal directions parallel to the posterior surface of all anchorage zones rated in tensile
strength. equal to 2 percent of each factored prestressing force in order to prevent spalling.
C.18.13.5.8 — The tensile strength of the concrete must be ignored when calculating the required reinforcement.
C-161
C.18.13.6 — Detailing requirements
The choice of reinforcement sizes, spacing, cover, and other details for the anchorage zones must consider tolerances in the bending, fabrication, and
installation of the reinforcement, the size of the aggregate, and the correct placement and consolidation of the concrete.
C.18.14 — Design of anchorage areas for 16 mm wire or bar tendons

diameter
C.18.14.1 — Local zone design
Single tendon anchorage devices or bars 16 mm or less in diameter and reinforcement of a local zone shall comply with the requirements in ACI 423.7 or
with the requirements for special anchorage devices in C.18.15.2.
C.18.14.2 — Design of the general area for slab tendons
C.18.14.2.1 — For anchoring devices for strands 13 mm in diameter or less in normal-weight concrete slabs, minimum reinforcement shall be
provided that meets the requirements of C.18.14.2.2 and C.18.14.2.3 , unless a detailed analysis complying with C.18.13.5 shows that such reinforcement
is not necessary.
C.18.14.2.2 — Two horizontal bars not less than ÿÿ must be arranged. 13 parallel to the edge of the slab. These bars are allowed to be in contact
with the front face of the anchorage device and must be within a distance h 2 in front of each device. These bars must extend at least 150mm on each
side of the outer edges of each device.
C.18.14.2.3 — If the spacing, center to center, of the anchorage devices is 300 mm or less, the anchorage devices shall be considered as grouped.
For each group of six or more anchorage devices, n 1 + closed hairpin bars or stirrups shall be provided at least ÿÿ. 10, where n is the number of
anchoring devices. A hairpin bar or stirrup should be placed between each anchorage device and one on each side of the group. Hairpin bars or stirrups
should be placed with the ends extending into the slab perpendicular to the edge. The central part of the hairpin bars or stirrups must be placed
perpendicular to the plane of the slab from 3h 8 to h 2 in front of the anchoring devices.
C.18.14.2.4 — For anchorage devices not conforming to C.18.14.2.1, the minimum reinforcement shall be based on detailed analysis that meets the
requirements of C.18.13.5.
C.18.14.3 — General zone design for single-wire tendon groups in main girders and
high schools.
The general zone design for single-wire tendon groups in primary and secondary girders shall meet the requirements of C.18.13.3 through C.18.13.5.
C.18.15 — Design of anchorage areas for multi-strand tendons

C.18.15.1 — Local zone design
Basic multi-strand anchorage devices and local zone reinforcement must meet the requirements established by AASHTO in “Standard Specification for
Highway Bridges” Division I, articles C.9.21.7.2.2 through C.9.21.7.2.4 .
The special anchoring devices must comply with the tests required in AASHTO “Standard Specification for Highway Bridges” Division I, article C.9.21.7.3
and described in AASHTO “Standard Specification for Highway Bridges” Division II, article C.10.3.2.3.
C-162
C.18.15.2 — Use of special anchorage devices
When special anchorage devices are to be used, supplemental surface reinforcement must be provided in the regions
corresponding to the anchorage zones, in addition to the confinement reinforcement specified for the anchorage device.
This supplemental reinforcement shall be equal in configuration and at least equivalent in volumetric amount to any
supplemental surface reinforcement used in tests to qualify the acceptance of the anchorage device.
C.18.15.3 — Layout of the general area
The general zone design for multi-strand tendons shall comply with the requirements set forth in C.18.13.3 through
C.18.13.5.
C.18.16 — Corrosion Protection of Unbonded Prestressing Tendons
C.18.16.1 — Unbonded prestressing steel shall be encapsulated in a post-tensioning duct. The prestressing steel must be
completely covered and the post-tensioning duct around the prestressing steel must be filled with a suitable material that
ensures corrosion protection.
C.18.16.2 — Post-tensioned duct must be waterproof and continuous throughout its unbonded length.
C.18.16.3 — For applications in corrosive environments, the post-tensioned duct must be connected to all anchors, whether
tensioning, intermediate or fixed, in a waterproof manner.
C.18.16.4 — Single-strand unbonded tendons shall be protected from corrosion in accordance with ACI publication 423.7.
C.18.17 — Ducts for post-tensioning
C.18.17.1 — Tendon ducts that are injected with grout must be impervious to the grout and nonreactive with concrete,
prestressing steel, grout, and corrosion inhibitors.
C.18.17.2 — Ducts for single-wire or single-bar strand injected tendons shall have an inside diameter at least 6 mm larger
than the diameter of the prestressing steel.
C.18.17.3 — Ducts for bundled wires, strands, or multiple bars to be injected with injection mortar must have an interior
cross-sectional area at least equal to twice the cross-sectional area of the prestressing steel.
C.18.17.4 — Ducts must be kept free of standing water if items to be injected with injection mortar are exposed to
temperatures below freezing before injection mortar is injected.
C.18.18 — Injection mortar for adhered tendons
C.18.18.1 — The injection mortar must consist of portland cement and water or portland cement, sand and water.
C.18.18.2 — The materials for the injection mortar must comply with the specifications in C.18.18.2.1 to C.18.18.2.4.
C.18.18.2.1 — Portland cement shall meet the requirements of C.3.2.
C.18.18.2.2 — The water must meet the requirements of C.3.4.
C.18.18.2.3 — If sand is used, it shall meet the requirements of ASTM C144, except that it is permitted
modify the grading as necessary to achieve satisfactory workability.
C-163
C.18.18.2.4 — The use of admixtures that comply with the provisions of C.3.6 which are known not to produce detrimental
effects on the injection mortar, steel or concrete is permitted. Calcium chloride should not be used.
C.18.18.3 — Dosage of injection mortar
C.18.18.3.1 — The dosage of the injection mortar must be based on one of the following conditions; (a) or (b):
(a) The results of tests of fresh and hardened injection mortar carried out before starting the injection operations; either
(b) Previous documented experience with similar materials and equipment and under comparable construction conditions.
C.18.18.3.2 — The cement used in the work must correspond to that on which the selection of the
dosing of the injection mortar.
C.18.18.3.3 — The water content must be the minimum necessary for adequate pumping of the mortar.
injection; however, the water-cement ratio should not exceed 0.45 by weight.
C.18.18.3.4 — Water must not be added in order to increase fluidity when it has decreased due to a delay in the use of the
injection mortar.
C.18.18.4 — Mixing and pumping of injection mortar
C.18.18.4.1 — The injection mortar must be mixed in equipment capable of continuous mechanical mixing and agitation that
produces a uniform distribution of the materials, it must be sieved and pumped in such a way that the ducts are completely filled.
C.18.18.4.2 — The temperature of the elements at the time of injection of the injection mortar must be above 2 ºC and must
be maintained above this temperature until the 50 mm cubes made with the same injection mortar and field-cured to achieve a
minimum compressive strength of 5.5 MPa.
C.18.18.4.3 — The temperature of the injection mortar must not exceed 32ºC during mixing and pumping.
C.18.19 — Protection of prestressing steel
Welding or heating operations in the vicinity of prestressing tendons must be performed in such a way that the prestressing steel
is not exposed to excessive temperatures, welding sparks, or electrical discharges.
C.18.20 — Application and measurement of the prestressing force
C.18.20.1 — The prestressing force must be determined by the following two methods:
(a) Measuring the elongation of the steel. The required elongation shall be determined from the average load–elongation
curves for the prestressing steel used;
(b) The measurement of the jack force on a calibrated manometer or load cell or through the use of a calibrated dynamometer.
The cause of any difference in force determination between methods (a) and (b) that exceeds 5 percent for prestressed members
or 7 percent for posttensioned constructions must be investigated and corrected.
C.18.20.2 — When the transfer of force from the ends of the prestressing bench is carried out by cutting the prestressing steel
with a torch, the cutting points and the cutting sequence must be predetermined in order to avoid undesired temporary stresses.
C-164
C.18.20.3 — Long sections of exposed prestressing strands should be cut as close to the member as possible to minimize
impacts to the concrete.
C.18.20.4 — Total prestress loss due to broken prestressing steel that is not replaced shall not exceed 2 percent of total
prestress.
C.18.21 — Anchors and connectors for post-tensioning
C.18.21.1 — Anchorages and connectors for bonded and unbonded tendons shall develop at least 95 per f when tested
under
pu nonbonded conditions, without exceeding the expected strain. for hundred of
Attached tendons, anchors and connectors should be placed so that f develops 100 percent atpucritical sections after the
prestressing steel is attached to the member.
C.18.21.2 — The connectors must be placed in the areas approved by the professional authorized to design and be
housed in boxes long enough to allow the necessary movements.
C.18.21.3 — In the case of unbonded elements subjected to repetitive loads, special attention must be paid to the
possibility of fatigue in the anchors and connectors.
C.18.21.4 — Anchorages, connectors, and auxiliary anchorage devices must be permanently protected against corrosion.
C.18.22 — External post-tensioning
C.18.22.1 — Post-tensioning tendons are permitted to be external to any section of a member. To evaluate the effects of
the forces of the external tendons in the concrete structure, the design methods for resistance and service conditions
indicated in this Title C of the NSR-10 Regulation must be used.
C.18.22.2 — When calculating flexural strength, external tendons shall be considered as unbonded tendons unless
precautions are taken to effectively adhere the external tendons to the concrete section for their entire length.
C.18.22.3 — External tendons shall be attached to the concrete element in such a way that the desired eccentricity
between the tendons and the controid of the concrete is maintained over the full range of expected deflections of the
element.
C.18.22.4 — External tendons and anchorage regions must be protected against corrosion and details of the protection
system must be indicated on the plans or project specifications.
C-165
GRADES
C-166
NSR-10 – Chapter C.19 – Shells and folded slabs
CHAPTER C.19 — SHELLS AND FOLDED SLABS
C.19.1 — Scope and definitions
C.19.1.1 — The provisions of Chapter C.19 shall apply to thin shells and folded concrete slabs, including ribs and edge
elements.
C.19.1.2 — All the provisions of this Title C of the NSR-10 Regulation that are not specifically excluded and that are not in
conflict with the provisions of Chapter C.19, must be applied to thin shells.
C.19.1.3 — Thin shells — Three-dimensional spatial structures, made of one or more curved slabs or folded slabs, the
thickness of which is small compared to its other dimensions. Thin shells are characterized by their three-dimensional load
behavior, determined by the geometry of their shapes, the way they are supported, and the nature of the applied load.
C.19.1.4 — Folded plates — A special class of shell structures, consisting of flat, thin plates joined along their edges to
create three-dimensional spatial structures.
C.19.1.5 — Ribbed shells — Spatial structures with material placed primarily along certain preferred rib lines, with the
area between ribs covered by thin slabs or open.
C.19.1.6 — Auxiliary members — Ribs or edge beams that serve to stiffen, reinforce, and support the shell. In general,
the auxiliary elements act in conjunction with the shell.
C.19.1.7 — Elastic analysis — Analysis of deformations and internal forces based on equilibrium, compatibility of
deformations, and the assumption of elastic behavior, and representing with suitable approximation the three-dimensional
action of the shell together with its auxiliary elements.
C.19.1.8— Inelastic analysis —Equilibrium-based internal force and deformation analysis, nonlinear stress-strain
relationships for concrete and reinforcement, consideration of cracking and time-dependent effects, and the compatibility
of the deformations. The analysis must represent with adequate approximation the three-dimensional action of the shell,
together with its auxiliary elements.
C.19.1.9 — Experimental analysis — Analysis procedure based on the measurement of deformations of the structure or
its model; experimental analysis is based on either elastic behavior or inelastic behavior.
C.19.2 — Analysis and design
C.19.2.1 — Elastic behavior can be an accepted basis for determining internal forces and displacements in thin shells.
This behavior can be established by calculations based on an analysis of the uncracked concrete structure, in which the
material is assumed to be linearly elastic, homogeneous and isotropic. Poisson's ratio of concrete can be assumed to be
zero.
C.19.2.2 — Inelastic analysis may be used when it can be shown that these methods provide a secure basis for design.
C.19.2.3 — Verifications of the balance of internal resistances and external loads must be made to ensure the consistency
of the results.
C.19.2.4 — Experimental procedures or numerical analysis may be used when it is shown that such procedures provide a
secure basis for design.
C.19.2.5 — Approximate methods of analysis are permitted when it can be shown that such methods provide a secure
basis for design.
C-167
C.19.2.6 — In prestressed shells, the analysis must also consider the behavior under loads induced during prestressing,
under the cracking load, and under factored loads. When tendons change direction and do not lie in the same plane within
the shell, the design must take into account the resultant force components on the shell caused by the tendon profile not
lying in a single plane.
C.19.2.7 — The thickness of a shell and its reinforcement shall be designed for the required strength and performance,
using either the strength design method of C.8.1.1 or the alternative design method of C.8.1.2 .
C.19.2.8 — Shell instability should be investigated and shown in the design that it has been avoided.
C.19.2.9 — The auxiliary elements must be designed in accordance with the applicable provisions of this Title C of the
NSR-10 Regulation. A portion of the shell equal to the width of the brim, as specified in C.8.12, may be assumed to act
with the auxiliary element. In said parts of the shell, the reinforcement perpendicular to the auxiliary element must be at
least equal to that established in C.8.12.5 for the flange of a T-beam.
C.19.2.10 — The resistance design of slabs that are part of shells for membrane stresses and flexure must be based on
the stress and strain distribution determined from an elastic or inelastic analysis.
C.19.2.11 — In a region where cracking in the membrane is expected, the nominal compressive strength in the direction
parallel to the cracks should be taken as 0.4fÿ . c
C.19.3 — Design strength of materials
C.19.3.1 — The specified compressive strength of concrete cfÿ at 28 days shall not be less than 21 MPa.
C.19.3.2 — The specified yield strength of non-prestressed reinforcement yf shall not exceed 420 MPa.
C.19.4 — Shell reinforcement
C.19.4.1 — Shell reinforcement shall be provided to resist tensile stresses caused by internal forces of the membrane, to
resist tension produced by bending and torsion moments, to control shrinkage cracking and temperature and to act as
special reinforcement at shell edges, at load application points and at shell openings.
C.19.4.2 — Tension reinforcement shall be arranged in two or more directions and shall be provided such that its
resistance in any direction equals or exceeds the internal stress component in that direction.
Alternatively, the reinforcement for membrane stresses in the slab can be calculated as the reinforcement required to
resist the axial tensile forces plus the tensile forces due to frictional shear necessary to transfer the shear through any
cross section of the membrane. The coefficient of friction, ÿ , must not exceed that specified in C.11.6.4.3.
C.19.4.3 — The area of shell reinforcement in any section, measured in two orthogonal directions, shall not be less than
the shrinkage or temperature slab reinforcement required by C.7.12.
C.19.4.4 — Shear reinforcement and bending moment about axes in the plane of the shell slab, shall be calculated in
accordance with Chapters C.10, C.11 and C.13.
C.19.4.5 — The area of shell tensile reinforcement shall be limited so that the reinforcement must flow before compression
concrete crushing or shell buckling occurs.
C.19.4.6 — In high tensile regions, reinforcement should be placed, where practical, in the general directions of the
principal membrane tensile forces. When this measure is not practical, the membrane reinforcement can be placed in two
or more directions for the components.
C-168
C.19.4.7 — If the direction of reinforcement varies more than 10º from the direction of the main tensile force of the
membrane, the amount of reinforcement must be reviewed with respect to cracking at the service load level.
C.19.4.8 — When the magnitude of the principal membrane tensile stress within the shell varies significantly within the shell
surface area, total tensile resisting reinforcement may be concentrated in regions of greatest tensile stress , where it can be
shown that this provides a secure basis for the design. However, the amount of shell reinforcement in any portion of the
tensile zone should not be less than 0.0035, based on the total thickness of the shell.
C.19.4.9 — Reinforcement required to resist shell bending moments shall be designed with due consideration to the
simultaneous action of membrane axial forces at the same location. When shell reinforcement is required on only one face
to resist bending moments, equal amounts should be placed near both shell surfaces, even if analysis does not indicate
reversal of bending moments.
C.19.4.10 — Shell reinforcement in any direction must not be spaced more than 450 mm, nor more than 5 times the
thickness of the shell. When the principal tensile stress of the membrane over the total concrete area, due to factored loads,
,
ÿ
exceeds f ÿÿ the reinforcement shall not be spaced more than 3ctimes

0.33 the thickness of the shell.
C.19.4.11 — Shell reinforcement at the junction of the shell with supporting elements or edge elements shall be anchored
or extended through such elements in accordance with the requirements of Chapter C.12, except that the shell Minimum
development length must be 1.2 , but not less dthan 450 mm.
C.19.4.12 — The development lengths of shell reinforcement splices shall be governed by the provisions of Chapter C.12,
except that the minimum length of splice per overlap of bars in tension shall be 1.2 times the value required in Chapter C.12,
but not less than 450 mm. The number of splices in the main tensile reinforcement should be kept to a practical minimum.
Where splices are necessary, they should be staggered at least
d , with not more than one third of the reinforcement spliced in any section.
C.19.5 – Construction
C.19.5.1 — When striking is based on a specific concrete modulus of elasticity, due to stability or deformation considerations,
the value of modulus of elasticity, Ec , used shall be determined by flexural testing of field-cured joists. . The professional
licensed to design must specify the number of specimens, the dimensions of the joists and the test procedures.
C.19.5.2 — Contract documents must specify tolerances for shell shape. When the construction has deviations from the
form greater than the specified tolerances, an analysis of the effect of the deviations must be made and the necessary
corrective measures must be taken to ensure safe performance.
C-169
Grades:
C-170
NSR-10 – Chapter C.20 – Evaluation of the resistance of existing structures
CHAPTER C.20 — ASSESSMENT OF THE STRENGTH

OF EXISTING STRUCTURES
C.20.1 — Resistance evaluation — General
C.20.1.1 — If there are doubts as to whether a part or all of a structure meets the safety requirements of Title C of Regulation NSR-10,
a resistance evaluation must be carried out as required by the professional licensed to design. or the competent authority.
C.20.1.2 — If the effect of a deficiency on strength is well understood and it is possible to measure the dimensions and properties of
materials that are required to perform an analysis, an analytical evaluation of strength based on these is sufficient. measurements.
The necessary data shall be determined according to C.20.2.
C.20.1.3 — In the event that the effects of a strength deficiency are not well understood or it is not possible to establish the dimensions
and properties of the material through measurements, a load test is required in the event that the structure will remain in service.
C.20.1.4 — If doubt regarding a part or all of a structure involves deterioration, and if the response observed during the load test
satisfies the acceptance criteria, the structure or part of it is permitted to remain in service for a specified period of time. If the
professional authorized to design considers it necessary, periodic reassessments must be carried out.
C.20.2 — Determination of dimensions and properties of materials

C.20.2.1 — The dimensions of the elements in the critical sections must be established
C.20.2.2 — The location and size of reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, or tendons shall be determined through
measurements. Reinforcement location can be based on available drawings if spot checks are made to confirm the drawing information.
C.20.2.3 — If required, the strength of the concrete shall be based on results of cylinder tests of the original construction or core tests
taken on the part of the structure whose strength is in question. To assess the strength of an existing structure, core or cylinder test
data can be used to calculate an equivalent cfÿ . The method to obtain and test the cores must be in accordance with NTC 3658
(ASTM C42M).
C.20.2.4 — If required, the strength of the reinforcement or prestressing steel shall be based on tensile tests of our representatives for
the material of the structure in question.
C.20.2.5 — If the required dimensions and material properties are determined through measurement or testing, and if calculations can
be performed in accordance with C.20.1.2, the value of ÿ may be increased with respect to the values given in C.9.3, but ÿ cannot be
greater than:
Tension controlled sections, as defined in C.10.3.4 .................................... ...........................1.0
Compression controlled sections as defined in C.10.3.3:
Elements with spiral that comply with C.10.9.3 ........................................ ......................................... 0.9
Other reinforced elements ................................................... ................................................................ .................8
Shear and/or torsion ................................................... ................................................................ ..................................... 0.8
Concrete crushing .................................................. ................................................................ ........................ 0.8
C-171
C.20.3 — Load test procedure
C.20.3.1 — Cargo arrangement
The number and arrangement of loaded spans or panels should be selected to maximize deflections and stresses in
critical areas of structural members whose strength is in question. More than one load pattern should be used if a single
pattern does not simultaneously produce maximum values of effects (such as deflection, rotations, or stresses) necessary
to demonstrate the suitability of the structure.
C.20.3.2 — Load intensity
The total test load (including the dead load already present) shall not be less than the greater of (a), (b) and (c):
( Gr or L + +
(to) 1.15D 1.5L 0.4 L or and
)
( Gr or L + +
(b) 1.15D 0.9L 1.5 L or and
)
(c) 1.3D
The load factor in the live load L in (b) may be reduced to 0.45, except in parking lots, occupied areas such as public
assembly places, and all areas where L is greater than 4.8 kN/m2 . L is allowed to be reduced in accordance with the
provisions of Title B of Regulation NSR-10.
C.20.3.3 — A load test shall not be performed until the portion of the structure to be subjected to the load is at least 56
days old. Testing can be done at a younger age if the owner of the structure, the builder, and all parties involved agree.
C.20.4 — Load criterion
C.20.4.1 — The initial value of all relevant response measurements (such as deflection, rotation, strain, slip, crack width)
shall be obtained no more than one hour before application of the first increment of burden. Measurements should be
made at locations where the maximum response is expected. Additional measurements should be made if required.
C.20.4.2 — The test load shall be applied in not less than four approximately equal increments.
C.20.4.3 — The uniform test load must be applied in such a way as to ensure its uniform distribution to the structure or
part of the structure being tested. The arc effect on the applied load must be avoided.
C.20.4.4 — A set of response measurements shall be made after each load increment is placed, and after the full load has
been placed on the structure for at least 24 hours.
C.20.4.5 — The entire test load shall be removed immediately after all response measurements defined in C.20.4.4 have
been made.
C.20.4.6 — A final set of response measurements shall be made 24 hours after the test load has been removed.
C.20.5 — Acceptance criteria
C.20.5.1 — The portion of the structure tested shall not show evidence of failure. The shelling and
crushing of compressed concrete should be considered as an indication of failure.
C-172
C.20.5.2 — The maximum measured deflections must satisfy one of the following conditions:
1
you
(C.20-1)
ÿÿ20000h _
ÿ1
ÿÿ _
r (C.20-2)
4
If the maximum measurement and the residual deflections, ÿ1 and ÿr , do not satisfy equations (C.20-1) or (C.20-2), the
load test can be repeated.
The repetition of the test must not be carried out before 72 hours from the removal of the load corresponding to the first
test. The portion of the structure tested in the retest shall be considered acceptable if the deflection recovery ÿr satisfies
the condition:
ÿ2
ÿÿ _
r (C.20-3)
5
where ÿ2 is the maximum deflection measured during the second test, relative to the position of the structure at the start
of the second test.
C.20.5.3 — The structural elements tested must not have cracks that indicate the imminence of a shear failure.
C.20.5.4 — In the areas of structural elements that do not have transversal reinforcement, the appearance of structural
cracks inclined with respect to the longitudinal axis and that have a horizontal projection greater than the height of the
element at the midpoint of the crack must be evaluated.
C.20.5.5 — In areas of anchorage or lap splices, the appearance along the line of reinforcement of a series of short
inclined cracks or horizontal cracks must be investigated.
C.20.6 — Provisions for acceptance of minor service loads

If the structure does not meet the conditions or criteria of C.20.1.2, C.20.5.2, or C.20.5.3, the structure may be used for a
lower level of load, based on the results of the load test. or analysis, provided it is approved by the competent authority.
C.20.7 — Security
C.20.7.1 — Load tests must be carried out in such a way that safe conditions for life and for the structure exist during the
test.
C.20.7.2 — No security measures should interfere with the load test procedures or affect the results.
C-173
Grades:
C-174
NSR-10 – Chapter C.21 – Seismic resistant design requirements
CHAPTER C.21 — EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
C.21.1 — General requirements

C.21.1.1 — Scope
C.21.1.1.1 — Chapter C.21 contains provisions for the design and construction of reinforced concrete elements of a
structure in which the design forces, related to seismic movements, have been determined based on dissipation of energy
in the nonlinear range of response.
C.21.1.1.2 — Title A of the NSR-10 Regulation designates the energy dissipation capacity of each system
Seismic resistance structure as indicated in C.1.1.9.1 for structural concrete structures.
C.21.1.1.3 — All items must meet the requirements of Chapters C.1 to C.19 and C.22. Structures assigned to minimum
(DMI), moderate (DMO), and special (DES) energy dissipation capabilities shall also comply with C.21.1.1.4 through
C.21.1.1.8 as applicable.
C.21.1.1.4 — Structures assigned the minimum energy dissipation capacity (DMI) must comply with C.21.1.2.
C.21.1.1.5 — Structures assigned Moderate Energy Dissipation (MOD) capability must comply
C.21.1.2 to C.21.1.8.
C.21.1.1.6 — Structures assigned special energy dissipation (DES) capacity must comply with C.21.1.2 to C.21.1.8,
and C.21.11 to C.21.13.
C.21.1.1.7 — Structural systems designated as part of the seismic resistance system must be limited to those
designated by Title A of Regulation NSR-10. The following requirements must be met by all structural systems designated
as part of the resistance system against seismic forces, regardless of their energy dissipation capacity:
(a) Ordinary moment-resisting frames with minimum energy dissipation capacity (DMI) shall comply with C.21.2.
(b) Ordinary reinforced concrete structural walls with a minimum energy dissipation capacity (DMI) need not meet any
requirement of Chapter C.21.
(c) Intermediate moment frames with moderate energy dissipation (MOD) capacity shall comply with C.21.3.
(d) Precast and site-built structural intermediate walls with moderate energy dissipation (MOD) capacity shall comply
with C.21.4.
(e) Special moment-resisting frames with special energy dissipation (DES) capacity shall comply with C.21.5 to C.21.8.
(f) Special structural walls with special energy dissipation (DES) capacity must comply with C.21.9.
(g) Special precast structural walls with special energy dissipation (DES) capacity shall comply with C.21.10.
All special moment-resisting frames and all special structural walls with special energy dissipation (DES) capacity shall
also comply with C.21.1.3 to C.21.1.7.
C.21.1.1.8 — A reinforced concrete structural system that does not meet the requirements of this Chapter may be
permitted if it is shown through experimental evidence and analysis that the proposed system has stiffness and toughness
equal to or greater than that of a monolithic structure. comparable reinforced concrete that meets this
C-175
Chapter. For this purpose, a special authorization must be obtained from the Permanent Advisory Commission of the
Seismic-Resistant Construction Regime, created by Law 400 of 1997 and attached to the Ministry of Environment, Housing
and Territorial Development.
C.21.1.2 — Analysis and design of structural elements
C.21.1.2.1 — The analysis must take into account the interaction of all structural elements and not
structures that affect the linear and non-linear response of the structure to seismic movements.
C.21.1.2.2 — Rigid elements not considered as part of a resistance system against seismic forces are allowed, provided
that their effect on the response of the system is considered and taken into account in the design of the structure. The
consequences of failure of structural and non-structural elements that are not part of the resistance system against seismic
forces must also be considered.
C.21.1.2.3 — The structural elements located below the base of the structure and that are required to transmit to the
foundation the forces resulting from seismic effects, must also comply with the provisions of Chapter C.21, which are
congruent with the system of resistance to seismic forces located above the base of the structure.
C.21.1.3 — Strength reduction factors
Strength reduction factors shall be as indicated in C.9.3.4.
C.21.1.4 — Concrete in structures with moderate energy dissipation capacity (DMO) and special (DES)
C.21.1.4.1 — The requirements of C.21.1.4 shall apply to special moment frames, special structural walls, and tie beams.
C.21.1.4.2 — The specified compressive strength of concrete, cfÿ , shall not be less than 21 MPa. Structures of up to
three stories whose seismic resistance system consists of load-bearing walls are exempted from this restriction (see
C.1.1.1).
C.21.1.4.3 — The specified compressive strength of lightweight concrete, cfÿ , shall not exceed 35 MPa unless it is
shown by experimental evidence that structural members made of such lightweight concrete provide strength and strengths
equal to or greater than those of comparable members made of normal-weight concrete of the same strength. The
modification factor ÿ for lightweight concrete in this Chapter shall be in accordance with C.8.6.1 unless specifically stated
otherwise.
C.21.1.5 — Reinforcement in structures with moderate energy dissipation capacity (DMO) and special (DES)
C.21.1.5.1 — The requirements of C.21.1.5 shall apply to special moment frames, special structural walls, and tie beams.
C.21.1.5.2 — All corrugated reinforcement (C.3.5.3.1) must resist axial and flexural forces induced by seismic elements
of frames, structural walls and coupling beams, must comply with the provisions of NTC 2289 (ASTM A706M ).
(a) The actual yield strength based on tests performed by the factory does not exceed yf by more than
125MPa;
(b) The ratio between the true tensile strength and the true yield strength is not less than 1.25.
C.21.1.5.3 — The prestressing steel that resists axial and bending forces induced by seismic elements of frames and
precast structural walls, must comply with the provisions of NTC 2010 (ASTM A416M) or NTC 2142 (ASTM A722M).
C.21.1.5.4 — The value of f used to calculate the amount of confinement reinforcement must not exceed 700
andt
MPa.
C-176
C.21.1.5.5 — The value of yf or f used in the design of shear reinforcement shall comply with C.11.4.2.
andt
C.21.1.6 — Mechanical splices in structures with moderate (DMO) and special (DES) energy dissipation capacity
C.21.1.6.1 — Mechanical splices must be classified as Type 1 or Type 2, according to the following:
(a) Type 1 mechanical splices shall comply with C.12.14.3.2;
(b) Type 2 mechanical splices shall comply with C.12.14.3.2 and shall develop the specified tensile strength of the spliced
bars.
C.21.1.6.2 — Type 1 mechanical splices shall not be used within a distance equal to twice the height of the member,
measured from the face of the beam or column for special moment-resisting frames, or where it is likely to occur reinforcement
creep as a result of inelastic lateral displacements. Type 2 mechanical splices may be used in any location.
C.21.1.7 — Welded joints in structures with moderate energy dissipation capacity (DMO) and special (DES)
C.21.1.7.1 — Welded splices of reinforcement resisting seismic induced forces shall comply with C.12.14.3.4 and shall not
be used within a distance equal to twice the height of the member, measured from the face of the beam or column for special
moment-resisting frames, or where reinforcement creep is likely to occur as a result of inelastic lateral displacements.
C.21.1.7.2 — You cannot weld stirrups, inserts, or other similar elements to the longitudinal reinforcement required by the
design.
C.21.1.8 — Anchorage to concrete
Anchorages that resist seismic induced forces in structures assigned Moderate (DMO) and Special (DES) energy dissipation
capacities shall meet the additional requirements of CD.3.3.
C.21.2 — Ordinary Moment-Resisting Frames with Minimum Energy Dissipation Capacity

(DMI)
C.21.2.1 — Scope
The provisions of C.21.2 are applicable to ordinary moment-resisting frames with a minimum energy dissipation capacity (DMI)
that are part of the seismic resistance system. When Title A of Regulation NSR-10 allows a system of slabs in two directions,
without beams, that is considered as part of a frame of the system of resistance to seismic forces with minimum capacity of
dissipation of energy (DMI), the details of the Reinforcement of any span that resists moments caused by E shall comply with
C.21.2.4.
C.21.2.2 — Beams must have at least two continuous longitudinal bars placed along both the top and bottom faces. These
bars must be developed on the support face.
C.21.2.3 — Columns having a free height less than or equal to five times dimension 1c shall be designed for shear in
accordance with C.21.3.3.
C.21.2.4 — Slabs in two directions without beams with minimum energy dissipation capacity (DMI)
C.21.2.4.1 — The factored moment of the slab at support associated with the seismic effect, E , must be determined
by the load combinations defined by Eqs. (C.9-5) and (C.9-7). Reinforcement provided to resist Mslab must be placed within
the column strip defined in C.13.2.1.
C-177
C.21.2.4.2 — Reinforcement placed within the effective width specified in C.13.5.3.2 shall resist ÿf slab effective slab width forM. _ He
exterior and corner connections shall not extend beyond the face of the column a greater distance a c measured perpendicular to the span
of the slab. you
C.21.2.4.3 — Not less than half of the reinforcement in the column strip at the support must be placed inside the
effective width of the slab specified in C.13.5.3.2.
C.21.2.4.4 — Not less than one quarter of the upper reinforcement at the support of the column strip must be continuous along the span.
C.21.2.4.5 — The bottom continuous reinforcement in the column strip must not be less than one third of the reinforcement
superior in the support in the column fringe.
C.21.2.4.6 — Not less than half of all lower reinforcement at the center of the span shall be continuous and shall develop yf at the face
of the support, as defined in C.13.6.2.5.
C.21.2.4.7 — At discontinuous edges of the slab, all top and bottom reinforcement at the support shall be developed on the face of the
support, as defined in C.13.6.2.5.
C.21.2.4.8 — In the critical sections for columns defined in C.11.11.1.2, the shear in two directions caused by factored gravitational
loads shall not exceed 0.4 Vÿ , where Vc shall be calculated as defined in C.11.11 .2.1 for non-c prestressed slabs and in C.11.11.2.2 for
prestressed slabs. This requirement can be waived if the slab design complies with C.21.13.6.
C.21.3 — Intermediate Moment-Resisting Frames with Moderate Bearing Capacity

power dissipation (BMD)
C.21.3.1 — Scope
The provisions of C.21.3 are applicable to moment-resisting intermediate frames with moderate energy dissipation capacity (MOD) that are
part of the seismic resistance system.
C.21.3.2 — Details of reinforcement in a frame element shall satisfy C.21.3.4 when the factored axial compression load of the element, Pu ,
cÿ does not exceed A f 10 . When Pu is greater, the reinforcement
details of the g frame shall comply with C.21.3.5.
C.21.3.3 — The Vn ÿ of beams and columns that resist seismic effects, E (b): , must not be less than the lesser of (a) and
(a) The sum of the shear associated with the development of the nominal moments of the member at each restricted end of the free
span and the calculated shear for factored gravitational loads.
(b) The maximum shear obtained from the design load combinations that include E as twice that prescribed by , recital E
Title A of Regulation NSR-10.
C.21.3.4 — Beams with moderate energy dissipation capacity (MOD)
C.21.3.4.1 — The element width, bw , must not be less than 200 mm.
C.21.3.4.2 — The eccentricity with respect to the column that supports it cannot be greater than 25% of the width
of the support measured in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the longitudinal axis of the beam.
C.21.3.4.3 — In any section of the beam, the upper and lower reinforcement must not have an amount, ÿ , less than that obtained with
equation C.10-3, nor must it exceed 0.025. There must be at least two continuous bars with a diameter equal to or greater than No. 4 (1/2”)
or 12M (12 mm), both above and below.
C-178
C.21.3.4.4 — The positive moment resistance on the face of the joint must not be less than one third of the negative moment
resistance provided on the same face of the joint. The negative or positive moment resistance, at any section along the length of
the member, shall not be less than one fifth of the maximum moment resistance provided at the face of any of the joints.
C.21.3.4.5 — Lap splices within nodes are not allowed.
C.21.3.4.6 — At both ends of the element, there must be closed confinement stirrups of at least No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm)
for lengths equal to 2h measured from the face of the support,element towards the light center. The first closed confinement
abutment must be located no more than 50 mm from the face of the support element. The spacing of the closed confinement
abutments shall not exceed the lesser of (a), (b), (c) and (d):
(a) d 4 .
(b) Eight times the diameter of the smallest confined longitudinal bar.
(c) 24 times the diameter of the bar of the closed confinement stirrup.
(d) 300mm.
C.21.3.4.7 — Where closed confinement abutments are required, longitudinal perimeter bars
must have lateral support per C.7.10.5.3.
C.21.3.4.8 — Abutments must be placed with seismic hooks at both ends spaced no more than d 2
along the entire length of the element.
C.21.3.5 — Columns with moderate energy dissipation capacity (MOD)
C.21.3.5.1 — The minor dimension of the cross section, measured on a straight line passing through the geometric centroid,
shall not be less than 250 mm. Columns in the form of T, C or I may have a minimum dimension of 0.20 m but their area may not
be less than 0.0625 m².
C.21.3.5.2 — The area of longitudinal reinforcement, Ast , shall not be less than 0.01A nor
g greater than 0.04A . g
C.21.3.5.3 — Mechanical splices shall comply with C.21.1.6 and welded splices shall comply with C.21.1.7.
Lap splices are only permitted in the center half of the element length and must be designed as tension splices.
C.21.3.5.4 — Spiral reinforcement, or restraint stirrups, shall be used as indicated below, unless greater amounts are required
for shear. When spiral reinforcement is used, C.21.3.5.5 shall be complied with. When restraint stirrups are used, C.21.3.5.6 to
C.21.3.5.11 must be complied with.
Section C.21.3.5.12 applies to all columns, and C.21.3.5.13 applies to all columns supporting discontinuous rigid members.
C.21.3.5.5 — The volumetric amount of spiral reinforcement or closed circular confinement stirrups must not be less than that
required by equation (C.21-1): ÿs ,
ÿ
Fc
ÿ = f 0.08
yes
(C.21-1)
andt
and must not be less than that required by equation (C.10-5).
C.21.3.5.6 — Closed confinement stirrups must be provided at both ends of the element with a measurement from the face of
spacing of os by a length less than (a), or , the joint. The spacing os should not exceed the
(b), (c) and (d):
(a) Eight times the diameter of the smallest diameter confined longitudinal bar.
C-179
(b) 16 times the diameter of the bar of the closed confinement stirrup.
(c) One third of the least dimension of the cross section of the column.
(d) 150mm.
The length or , must not be less than the greater of (e), (f) and (g):
(e) One sixth of the free span of the column.
(f) The largest dimension of the cross section of the column.
(g) 500mm.
C.21.3.5.7 — The total cross-sectional area of the reinforcement of closed confining abutments shall not be less than that
(C.21 -3). either
required by equations (C.21-2) and rectangular, Ash , placed in length
ÿ sb fA ÿÿÿÿ
g
ÿ ÿ
at 0.2= sh DC
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ1 (C.21-2)
fA ÿ ch ÿÿÿ
andt ÿÿ ÿÿ
ÿ
sb f
=
at 0.06 DC
(C.21-3)
sh
F
andt
C.21.3.5.8 — The transversal reinforcement must be provided by means of closed rectilinear confinement stirrups, with a
minimum diameter of No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm), with or without supplementary hooks. Supplementary hooks of the same
bar diameter with the same spacing of the closed confinement stirrups may be used.
Each end of the supplementary hook must link a perimeter bar of the longitudinal reinforcement. The ends of the consecutive
hooks must be staggered along the length of the longitudinal reinforcement. The spacing of straight restraining hooks or legs
within a member section shall not exceed 350mm center to center in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
structural member.
C.21.3.5.9 — As an alternative to what is indicated in C.21.3.5.7 and C.21.3.5.8, confinement stirrups with a diameter of
No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm) can be placed, with a f of 420 MPa, with a spacing s of 100 mm. If the horizontal distance between
andt
two parallel legs of stirrups is greater than half of the smallest dimension of the column section or 200 mm, as many
supplementary stirrups of diameter No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm) must be used. , f of 420 MPa, are necessary so that this
with separation between parallel branches does not exceed half the minor dimension of the column section or 200 mm. This
andt
alternate procedure can only be used in columns whose concrete has a cf' less than or equal to 35 MPa.
C.21.3.5.10 — The first closed confinement abutment must be located no more than os 2 from the face of the joint.
C.21.3.5.11 — Out of length bar or , confinement stirrups must be placed with the same disposition,
diameter and yield strength, fyt _
, with center-to-center spacing not to be greater than 2
times the spacing used in the length either
.
C.21.3.5.12 — Transverse reinforcement of the joint must comply with C.11.10.
C.21.3.5.13 — Columns that support reactions from discontinuous rigid elements, such as walls, shall be provided with
transverse reinforcement with spacing os , as specified in C.21.3.5.6,at their full height below the level at which they occur. the
discontinuity, when the part of the factored axial compression force in these elements, related to the seismic effect, exceeds A
f 10 . When the design forces have been g
cÿ
magnified to take into account the overresistance of the vertical elements of the resistance system against
C-180
seismic forces, the limit of A f 10 g

cÿ extended and must be increased
g to .Af
cÿ This
4 transverse reinforcement must be
above and below columns, as required in C.21.6.4.6(b).
C.21.3.6 — Minimum flexural resistance of frame columns with moderate dissipation capacity
energy (BMD)
C.21.3.6.1 — Portal columns with moderate energy dissipation capacity (MOD) must satisfy
C.21.3.6.2 or C.21.3.6.3.
C.21.3.6.2 — The flexural strengths of the columns must satisfy equation (C.21-4).
ÿ ÿ M 1.2 ÿ
nc M nb (C.21-4)
ÿMnc = sum of the nominal bending moments of the columns that reach the joint, evaluated on the faces of the joint. The
flexural strength of the column should be calculated for the factored axial force, congruent with the direction of the
lateral forces considered, leading to the lowest flexural strength. ÿMnb = sum of the nominal bending moments
of the beams that reach the joint, evaluated on the face of the joint. In T-beams, when the slab is in tension due to moment
at the joint face, the slab reinforcement within the effective slab width defined in 8.12 shall be assumed to
contribute to Mnb whenever the slab reinforcement is developed at the critical section for bending.
The bending strengths must be added in such a way that the column moments oppose the beam moments. Equation
(C.21-4) must be satisfied for beam moments acting in both directions in the vertical plane of the frame under consideration.
C.21.3.6.3 — When C.21.3.6.2 is not satisfied at a joint, the lateral resistance and stiffness of the columns supporting the
reactions from that joint shall be ignored in determining the calculated resistance and stiffness for the structure. . These
columns shall have the confining reinforcement required in c.21.3.5.5, or in C.21.3.5.7 to C.21.3.5.9 along the entire vertical
length of the column to the foundation from the joint where it is not satisfied. Non-compliance with the requirement is only
allowed for up to 10 percent of the columns on the same story.
If this percentage is exceeded, the columns and beams must be redesigned until compliance with the requirement contained
in C.21.3.6.2 is achieved.
C.21.4 — Intermediate structural walls with moderate energy dissipation capacity (MOD)
C.21.4.1 — Scope
The requirements of C.21.4 apply to intermediate structural walls constructed of precast or cast-in-place concrete that are
part of the system for resisting seismic forces in structures with moderate energy dissipation (MOD) capacity. Precast
structural walls shall comply with C.21.4.2 and C.21.4.3 in addition to the requirements for cast-in-place walls. Cast-in-place
walls shall comply with C.21.4.4.
C.21.4.2 — At connections between wall panels, or between wall panels and the foundation, creep must be restricted to
steel members or reinforcement.
C.21.4.3 — Connection elements that have not been designed for creep must resist at least 1.5S .
and
C.21.4.4 — Intermediate structural walls with moderate energy dissipation (MOD) capacity and their tie beams shall meet all
requirements of C.21.9 for cast-in-place special structural (DES) walls, with exceptions and modifications. which are
presented below:
C.21.4.4.1 — In C.21.9.6.2(a) for walls with moderate energy dissipation capacity (MOD), the quotient
ÿu wh in equation (C.21-11) should not be taken less than 0.0035.
C-181
C.21.4.4.2 — In C.21.9.6.3 for walls with moderate energy dissipation capacity (MOD) the edge elements must be placed when the maximum
compressive stress of the extreme fiber corresponding to factored forces including seismic effects E 0.3fÿ . Special edge elements may, however, be
discontinued where the calculated compressive stress is less than 0.22f' . The rest of the requirements
c in this section apply as it says there.
C.21.4.4.3 — For walls with moderate energy dissipation capacity (MOD), section C.21.9.6.4(c) must be replaced by:
(c) The transverse reinforcement of the special edge elements shall comply with the requirements specified in C.21.3.5.6 (a), (b), (c) and (d),
C.21.3.5.7 and C.21.3. 5.8 except that Equation (C.21-2) need not be satisfied and the transverse reinforcement spacing limit of C.21.3.5.6(c)
shall be at least one-half the lesser dimension of the edge element but there is no need to take it smaller than 150mm.
C.21.4.4.4 — Section C.21.9.9 need not be followed.
C.21.5 — Elements subjected to bending in special moment-resistant frames with special

energy dissipation capacity (DES)
C.21.5.1 — Scope
The provisions of C.21.5 are applicable to special moment-resisting frame members designed primarily to resist bending. These frame elements shall
also satisfy the conditions of C.21.5.1.1 to C.21.5.1.4.
C.21.5.1.1 — The factored axial compression force in the member, Pu , shall not exceed A f 10 g cÿ .
C.21.5.1.2 — The free span of the element, no , It must not be less than four times its useful height.
C.21.5.1.3 — The element width, bw , must not be less than the smallest of 0.3h and 250 mm.
C.21.5.1.4 — The width of the element, bw , must not exceed the width of the supporting element 2 c , plus a distance
on each side of the support element that is equal to the lesser of (a) and (b):
(a) Width of the support element, c , y 2
(b) 0.75 times the total dimension of the support element 1c .
C.21.5.2 — Longitudinal reinforcement
C.21.5.2.1 — In any section of a flexural member, except as provided in C.10.5.3, for both top and bottom reinforcement, the area of reinforcement
shall not be less than that given by equation (C .10-3) nor less than 1.4bdf and the amount of reinforcement, ÿ , must not exceed 0.025. At least two
bars must
wy be arranged in the form
continues both at the top and bottom.
C.21.5.2.2 — The positive moment resistance at the face of the joint must not be less than half the negative moment resistance provided on that
same face. The negative or positive moment resistance, at any section along the length of the member, shall be less than one quarter of the maximum
moment resistance provided at the face of any one of the joints.
C.21.5.2.3 — Lap splices of flexural reinforcement are only permitted when closed confining or spiral stirrups are provided in the length of the lap
splice. The spacing of the transverse reinforcement adjoining the lapped bars shall not exceed the lesser of d 4 and 100 mm. Lap splices should not be
used:
(a) Inside the nodes.
C-182
(b) At a distance of twice the height of the element measured from the face of the joint, and
(c) Where analysis indicates flexural creep caused by inelastic lateral displacements of the frame.
C.21.5.2.5 — When prestressing is used, it must comply with (a) to (d), unless it is used in a frame
special to moment as allowed by C.21.8.3:
(a) The average prestress of the F

pc
, calculated for an area equal to the least dimension of the cross section
member multiplied by the perpendicular transverse dimension shall not exceed the lesser of 3.5 MPa and cf 10
ÿ
.
(b) The prestressing steel shall not be bound in potential regions of plastic hinge, and the strain in the prestressing steel under
displacement design shall be less than 1 percent.
(c) Prestressing steel shall not contribute more than one quarter of the positive or negative flexural strength at the critical
section of a plastic hinge region and shall be anchored at or beyond the outer face of the joint.
(d) Post-tensioning tendon anchors resistant to seismic induced forces shall be capable of allowing the tendons to withstand
50 loading cycles, occurring within 40 and 85 percent of the specified tensile strength of the prestressing steel.
C.21.5.3 — Transverse reinforcement
C.21.5.3.1 — Closed confinement abutments must be provided in the following regions of the elements
belonging to porticos:
(a) In a length equal to twice the height of the element, measured from the face of the support element towards the center of
the span, at both ends of the element in bending.
(b) In lengths equal to twice the height of the element on both sides of a section where flexural yielding may occur due to
inelastic lateral displacements of the frame.
C.21.5.3.2 — The first closed confinement abutment must be located no more than 50 mm from the face of the support element.
The spacing of the closed confinement abutments shall not exceed the lesser of (a), (b), (c) and (d):
(a) d 4 ;
(b) Eight times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bars.
(c) 24 times the diameter of the bar of the closed confinement abutment, and
(d) 300mm.
C.21.5.3.3 — When closed confinement abutments are required, the longitudinal perimeter bars
must have lateral support per C.7.10.5.3.
C.21.5.3.4 — When closed confinement stirrups are not required, stirrups with hooks must be placed
seismic at both ends, spaced not more than d 2 along the entire length of the element.
C.21.5.3.5 — The stirrups that are required to resist shear must be closed confinement stirrups
placed in the places inside the elements described in C.21.5.3.1.
C-183
C.21.5.3.6 — Closed confinement stirrups in flexural elements are allowed to be made with up to two pieces of reinforcement:
one stirrup with a seismic hook at each end and closed by a supplementary hook. Consecutive supplementary hooks that link the
same longitudinal bar must have their 90º hooks on opposite sides of the element in flexion. If the longitudinal reinforcing bars
secured by the supplementary hooks are confined by a slab on only one side of the flexural member, the 90º hooks of the
supplementary hooks shall be placed on that side.
C.21.5.4 — Shear strength requirements
C.21.5.4.1 — Design forces
The design shear force, Ve , shall be determined from the static forces in the part of the member between the joint faces. It must
be assumed that moments of opposite sign corresponding to the probable resistance, Mpr , act on the faces of the nodes located
at the ends of the element, and that the element is also loaded with gravitational afferent loads factored along the span.
C.21.5.4.2 — Transverse reinforcement
Transverse reinforcement at locations identified in C.21.5.3.1 shall be designed to resist shear assuming V 0 = when (a) and (b)
occur
c simultaneously:
(a) The earthquake-induced shear calculated in accordance with C.21.5.4.1 represents half or more of the maximum shear
strength required in those zones;
(b) The factored compressive axial force, Pu , including seismic effects is less than A f 20 cÿ .
g
C.21.6 — Elements subjected to bending and axial load belonging to special moment-
resistant frames with special energy dissipation capacity (DES)
C.21.6.1 — Scope
The provisions of this section apply to members belonging to special moment-resisting frames (a) that resist forces induced by
earthquakes, and (b) that have a factored axial compressive force, Pu , under any load combination exceeding A f 10 . These
frame elements must also satisfy C.21.6.1.1 and C.21.6.1.2.
g cÿ
C.21.6.1.1 — The minor dimension of the cross section, measured on a straight line passing through the geometric centroid,
shall not be less than 300 mm. Columns in the form of T, C or I may have a minimum dimension of 0.25 m but their area may not
be less than 0.09 m².
C.21.6.1.2 — The ratio of the minor dimension of the cross section to the perpendicular dimension shall not be less than 0.4.
C.21.6.2 — Minimum flexural resistance of columns
C.21.6.2.1 — Columns must satisfy C.21.6.2.2 or C.21.6.2.3.
C.21.6.2.2 — The flexural strengths of the columns must satisfy equation (C.21-4), which is repeated
here for convenience.
ÿÿM
nc 1.2 M
ÿ
nb (C.21-4)
ÿMnc = sum of the nominal bending moments of the columns that reach the joint, evaluated on the faces of the joint. The flexural
strength of the column should be calculated for the factored axial force, congruent with the direction of the lateral forces
considered, leading to the lowest flexural strength.
C-184
ÿMnb = sum of the nominal bending moments of the beams that reach the joint, evaluated on the face of the joint. In T-beams, when the
slab is in tension due to moment at the joint face, the slab reinforcement within the effective slab width defined in 8.12 shall be
assumed to contribute to Mnb whenever the slab reinforcement is developed at the critical section for bending.
The bending strengths must be added in such a way that the column moments oppose the beam moments. Equation (C.21-4) must be
satisfied for beam moments acting in both directions in the vertical plane of the frame under consideration.
C.21.6.2.3 — When C.21.6.2.2 is not satisfied at a joint, the lateral resistance and stiffness of the columns supporting the reactions
from that joint shall be ignored in determining the calculated resistance and stiffness for the structure. . These columns must satisfy
C.21.13.
C.21.6.3 — Longitudinal reinforcement
C.21.6.3.1 — The area of longitudinal reinforcement, Ast , shall not be less than 0.01A and notg greater than 0.04A . g
Lap splices are permitted only within the center half of the element length, shall be designed as tension lap splices, and shall be confined
within the transverse reinforcement in accordance with C.21.6.4.2 and C.21.6.4.3.
C.21.6.4.1 — Transverse reinforcement in the amounts specified in C.21.6.4.2 through C.21.6.4.4, shall be provided in a length
measured from each face of the joint and on both sides of any section where yielding may occur. bending as a result of inelastic lateral
either
displacements of the frame. The length must not be less than the greater of (a), (b) and (c): either
(a) The height of the member at the face of the joint or at the section where flexural yielding may occur.
(b) One sixth of the free span of the element, and
(c) 450mm.
C.21.6.4.2 — The transverse reinforcement must be provided by means of simple or overlapping spirals, complying with C.7.10.4,
closed circular confinement stirrups or closed rectilinear confinement stirrups with or without supplementary hooks. Supplementary hooks
of the same or smaller bar diameter and with the same spacing as the closed confinement stirrups may be used. Each end of the
supplementary hook must link a perimeter bar of the longitudinal reinforcement. The ends of the consecutive hooks must be staggered
along the length of the longitudinal reinforcement. The spacing of straight restraining hooks or legs with straight confining stirrups, hx ,
within a member section shall not exceed 350 mm center to center.
C.21.6.4.3 — The spacing of the transverse reinforcement along the longitudinal axis of the element must not exceed the
less than (a), (b), and (c):
(a) The fourth part of the minimum dimension of the element.
(b) Six times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal reinforcing bar, and
(c) os , as defined in equation (C.21-5).
ÿ 350 ÿ ÿ xÿ
hours
= + ÿ100
ÿ (C.21-5)
either
3 ÿ
The value of os should not be greater than 150 mm and it is not necessary to take it less than 100 mm.
C-185
C.21.6.4.4 — Transverse reinforcement shall be provided in the amounts specified in (a) or (b), unless
that in 21.6.5 a greater quantity is required.
(a) The volumetric amount of spiral reinforcement or closed circular confinement stirrups, ÿs , must be less than that should not
required by equation (C.21-6):

ÿ
Fc
ÿ = f 0.12
yes
(C.21-6)
andt
and must not be less than that required by equation (C.10-5).
(b) The total cross-sectional area of the reinforcement of closed rectangular confining abutments, Ash , shall not be less than
that required by Eqs. (C.21-7) and (C.21-8).
ÿ sb fÿA ÿ ÿ
at 0.3=sh DC
ÿ
g ÿ
ÿ1
(C.21-7)
ÿytÿ ch
ÿ ÿÿ ÿf A ÿÿÿ ÿÿ
ÿ
sb f
=
to 0.09 DC
sh
F
(C.21-8)
andt
C.21.6.4.5 — Beyond longitude or , specified in C.21.6.4.1, the remainder of the column must contain reinforcement
in the form of a spiral or closed confinement stirrup, complying with C.7.10, with a spacing, s center to center, not to , measured
exceed the lesser of six times the diameter of the longitudinal bars of the column or 150 mm, unless that C.21.6.3.2 or C.21.6.5
require greater amounts of transverse reinforcement.
C.21.6.4.6 — Columns that support reactions of discontinuous rigid elements, such as walls, must satisfy (a) and (b):
(a) Transverse reinforcement, as specified in C.21.6.4.2 through C.21.6.4.4, shall be provided at full height, at all levels, below the level at which discontinuity
occurs, when the factored compressive force axial in these elements, related to the seismic effect, exceeds A f 10 . Where the design forces have been
magnified to calculate the overstrength of the vertical elements of the resistance system against seismic forces the limit of A cÿf 10 cÿ should be increased to
g
Af 4
g g
cÿ .
(b) Transverse reinforcement must extend at least d of the bar of the greater longitudinal column, within the
discontinuous element, where it d is determined according to C.21.7.5. If the lower end of the column
terminates in a wall, the required transverse reinforcement shall extend into the wall for at least the greater longitudinal d of the
bar of the column at the point where it terminates. If the column terminates in a footing or slab foundation, the required
transverse reinforcement must extend at least 300mm into the footing or slab foundation.
C.21.6.4.7 — If the concrete cover outside of the confining cross reinforcement, specified in C.21.6.4.1, C.21.6.4.5 and C.21.6.4.6,
exceeds 100 mm, additional cross reinforcement shall be placed. Concrete cover over additional cross bracing shall not exceed
100mm with spacing of additional cross bracing not more than 300mm.
C.21.6.5 — Shear resistance requirements
C.21.6.5.1 — Design forces
The design shear force, Ve , must be determined considering the maximum forces that can be generated in the faces of the
joints at each end of the element. These joint forces are to be determined
C-186
using the probable maximum flexural resistances Mpr at each end of the element, corresponding to the range of factored axial loads, Pu , acting
on it. The shear forces in the member need not be greater than those determined from the joint strength, based on Mpr of the transverse members
reaching the joint. In no case should Ve be less than the factored shear determined from the analysis of the structure.
C.21.6.5.2 — Transverse reinforcement
The transverse reinforcement in the length or , identified in C.21.6.4.1, must be designed to resist shear
assuming V 0 c = when (a) and (b) occur simultaneously:
(a) The seismic induced shear stress, calculated in accordance with C.21.6.5.1, represents half or more of the maximum shear strength required
within . either
(b) The factored compressive axial force, Pu , including the seismic effect is less than A f 20 g
cÿ .
C.21.7 — Nodes in special moment-resistant frames with special energy dissipation capacity
(DES)
C.21.7.1 — Scope
The requirements of C.21.7 apply to beam-column joints of special moment-resisting frames that are part of the seismic resistance system.
C.21.7.2 — General requirements
C.21.7.2.1 — The forces in the longitudinal reinforcement of beams at the joint face shall be determined assuming
that the resistance in the tensile reinforcement by bending is 1.25f . and
C.21.7.2.2 — The longitudinal reinforcement of a beam that ends in a column must extend to the most distant face of the confined core of the
column and be anchored, in tension, in accordance with C.21.7.5, and in compression of according to Chapter C.12.
C.21.7.2.3 — Where the longitudinal reinforcement of a beam passes through a beam-column joint, the dimension of the column parallel to the
beam reinforcement shall not be less than 20 times the diameter of the largest diameter beam longitudinal bar, for normal weight concrete. For
lightweight concrete, the dimension should not be less than 26 times the diameter of the bar.
C.21.7.3.1 — Transverse reinforcement of the joint must satisfy C.21.6.4.4(a) or C.21.6.4.4(b) and must also comply with
with C.21.6.4.2, C.21.6.4.3, and C.21.6.4.7, except as permitted in C.21.7.3.2.
C.21.7.3.2 — When there are elements that arrive on the four sides of the node and the width of each element measures at least three quarters of
the width of the column, transversal reinforcement must be provided equal to at least half the width of the column. the amount required in C.21.6.4.4(a)
or C.21.6.4.4(b), within h of the shortest element reaching the node. In these locations, the spacing specified in C.21.6.4.3 is permitted to be increased
to 150 mm.
C.21.7.3.3 — Transverse reinforcement passing through the joint shall be provided to provide confinement for longitudinal beam reinforcement
passing outside the column core, meeting the spacing requirements of C.21.5.3.2, and the requirements C.21.5.3.3 and C.21.5.3.6, when said
confinement is not provided by a beam reaching the joint.
C.21.7.4 — Shear resistance
C-187
C.21.7.4.1 — Vn at the joint shall not be greater than the values specified below, for normal weight concrete:
For nodes confined on all four faces..................................................... ........ 1.7fA ÿ

cj
For nodes confined on three faces or on two opposite faces..................... 1.2fA cÿ

j
For other cases .................................................. ................................................... 1.0fA cÿ

j
An element is considered to provide joint confinement if at least three quarters of the face of the joint is covered by the element leading
to the joint. Beam extensions that extend at least one full height h of the beam beyond the face of the joint are permitted to be
considered as confinement elements. Beam extensions shall comply with C.21.5.1.3, C.21.5.2.1, C.21.5.3.2, C.21.5.3.3, and
C.21.5.3.6. A joint is considered confined if such confining elements reach all faces of the joint.
Aj is the effective area of the cross section inside the joint, calculated as the product of the depth of the joint and its effective width.
The depth of the joint is the total height of the column section, h . The effective width of the joint shall be the full width of the column,
except that when the beam reaches a wider column, the effective width of the joint shall not exceed the lesser of (a) and (b):
(a) the width of the beam plus the height of the joint,
(b) Twice the smallest perpendicular distance from the longitudinal axis of the beams to the column side.
C.21.7.4.2 — For concrete with lightweight aggregate, the nominal shear strength of the joint must not exceed three-fourths of the
limits indicated in C.21.7.4.1.
C.21.7.5 — Development length of bars in tension.
C.21.7.5.1 — For bar sizes No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm) to No. 11 (1-3/8”) or 36M (36 mm), the length of dh for a standard 90°
development hook bar in normal-weight concrete shall not be less than the greater of
8db _ , 150 mm, and the length required by equation (C.21-9):
fd
= andb
dh ÿ
(C.21-9)
5.4f c
For lightweight concrete, dh for a bar with a standard 90° hook shall not be less than the greater of 190 mm, and 1.25 times the
10db _ , length required by Eq. (C.21-9).
The 90° hook must be located within the confined core of a column or edge element.
C.21.7.5.2 — For No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm) to No. 11 (1-3/8”) or 36M (36 mm) bars, d, the length of
development in tension for a straight bar, must not be less than the greater of (a) and (b):
(a) 2.5 times the length required in C.21.7.5.1 if the thickness of freshly placed concrete in a single operation under the bar does
not exceed 300 mm.
(b) 3.25 times the length required in C.21.7.5.1 if the thickness of freshly placed concrete in a single operation under the bar
exceeds 300 mm.
C.21.7.5.3 — Straight bars ending in a knot must pass through the confined core of the column or edge element. Any portion
outside of the confined core should be increased byda factor of 1.6.
C-188
C.21.7.5.4 — If epoxy-coated reinforcement is used, the development lengths from C.21.7.5.1 to C.21.7.5.3
they shall be multiplied by the corresponding factor specified in C.12.2.4 or C.12.5.2.
C.21.8 — Special moment-resistant frames built with precast concrete with

special energy dissipation capacity (DES)
C.21.8.1 — Scope
The requirements of C.21.8 apply to special moment-resisting frames constructed using precast concrete that forms part of
the seismic force-resisting system.
C.21.8.2 — Precast special moment-resisting frames with ductile connections shall comply with (a) and (b) and with all
requirements for field-built special moment-resisting frames:
(a) Vn for connections, calculated according to C.11.6.4 shall not be less according to 2V , where Ve is calculated from
and
C.21.5.4.1 or C.21.6.5.1.
(b) Beam reinforcement mechanical splices must be located not less than h 2 from the face of the joint and must comply
with the requirements of C.21.2.6.
C.21.8.3 — Precast special moment frames with strong connections shall meet all requirements for field-built special moment
frames as well as (a), (b), (c), and (d). ):
(a) The provisions of 21.5.1.2 shall apply to segments between zones where flexural creep is intended to occur due to
design displacements;
(b) The design resistance of the strong connection Sn ÿ must not be less than Se ;
(c) The main longitudinal reinforcement must be continuous along the connections and must develop outside both the
strong connection and the plastic hinge region, and
(d) In column-column connections, Sn ÿ should not be less than 1.4S . In column-column connections, Mn ÿ
and
must not be less than 0.4M for column within story height, and Vn ÿ of connection shall not be less than Ve
pr
determined by C.21.6.5.1.
C.21.8.4 — Special moment-resisting frames constructed using precast concrete and not meeting the requirements of
C.21.8.2 or C.21.8.3 shall comply with the provisions of ACI 374.1 and with the requirements (unless ) and (b) following:
(a) The details and materials used in the test specimens shall be representative of those used in the structure, and
(b) The design procedure used to design the test specimens must define the mechanism by which the frame resists the
effects of seismic and gravity, and must establish the acceptance values that guarantee that mechanism. Parts of the
mechanism that deviate from the provisions of Regulation NSR 10 must be covered in the test specimens and must be
tested to determine the upper limits of the acceptance values.
C.21.9 — Special structural walls and coupling beams with special capacity of
power dissipation (DES)
C.21.9.1 — Scope
The requirements of C.21.9 apply to precast or cast-in-place reinforced concrete special structural walls and tie beams that
are part of the seismic resisting system.
C-189
C.21.9.2 — Reinforcement
C.21.9.2.1 — The amounts of reinforcement distributed over the web, ÿ and ÿt , for structural walls shall not be less than 0.0025, except
ÿ
that if Vu does not exceed , ÿ and ÿt may be reduced to the values required in 14.3.
0.083A cv f ÿ Reinforcement
c spacing in each direction in structural walls
shall not exceed 450mm. The reinforcement contributing to Vn must be continuous and must be distributed across the shear plane.
C.21.9.2.2 — For buildings of Use Group I, as defined in A.2.5.1, up to three stories and intended exclusively for housing, it is allowed to
use the amounts ÿ and ÿt required in C.14.3.
C.21.9.2.3 — At least two layers of reinforcement must be used when Vu exceeds 0.17A f ÿ
ÿ
.
cv c
C.21.9.2.4 — Reinforcement in structural walls shall be developed or spliced for yf in tension, in accordance with Chapter C.12, except
that:
(a) The effective height of the element mentioned in 12.10.3 shall be allowed to be 0.8 w , for walls.
(b) The requirements of C.12.11, C.12.12, and C.12.13 may be waived.
(c) At locations where longitudinal reinforcement yielding is likely to occur as a result of lateral displacements, longitudinal reinforcement
development lengths should be 1.25 times the calculated values for yf in tension.
(d) Reinforcement mechanical splices shall comply with C.21.1.6 and reinforcement welded splices shall
comply with C.21.1.7.
C.21.9.3 — Design forces
Vu should be obtained from the analysis for lateral load according to the load enhancement combinations.
C.21.9.4.1 — Vu , of structural walls must not exceed:
VA f=
ÿ
no cv ( ÿ ÿc +ÿ c
f
ty ) (C.21-10)
where the coefficient ÿc is 0.25 for h hw w wow ÿ1.5 _ , 0.17 for h wow
= 2.0 , and varies linearly between 0.25 and 0.17 for
between 1.5 and 2.0
C.21.9.4.2 — In C.21.9.4.1 the value of the relation hw w used to determine Vn for segments of a wall must be the greater of that for the
entire wall and that for the considered wall segment.
C.21.9.4.3 — Walls must have distributed shear reinforcement that provides resistance in two orthogonal directions in the plane of the
wall. If hw w does not exceed 2.0, the amount of reinforcement ÿ must not be less than the amount of reinforcement ÿt .
C.21.9.4.4 — For all studs sharing a common lateral force, Vn shall not be taken greater than where Acv is the gross concrete area
0.66A fÿcv c , defined by the web width and the section length. For any of the individual studs, Vn shall not be assumed to be greater than
0.83A fÿ where Acw represents the concrete cross-sectional area of the stud considered. cwc
C-190
C.21.9.4.5 — For horizontal wall and tie beam segments, Vn shall not be assumed to be greater than 0.83A fÿ where Acw
represents
c w c the concrete section area of the horizontal wall or tie beam segment.
C.21.9.5 — Design for bending and axial load
C.21.9.5.1 — Structural walls and portions of such walls subjected to a combination of flexural and axial loading shall be
designed in accordance with C.10.2 and C.10.3, except that C.10.3.7 and the requirements shall not apply. of nonlinear
deformation of C.10.2.2. Concrete and longitudinal reinforcement developed within the effective width of the flange, edge
element, and web of the wall shall be considered effective. The effect of openings must be considered.
C.21.9.5.2 — Unless further analysis is performed, the effective flange width in sections with wings shall extend from the
face of the web a distance equal to the lesser of half the distance to the web of an adjacent wall and 25% of the total height
of the wall.
C.21.9.6 — Border elements for special structural walls
C.21.9.6.1 — The need to use special edge elements at the vertical limits of structural walls shall be evaluated in
accordance with C.21.9.6.2 or C.21.9.6.3. The requirements of C.21.9.6.4 and C.21.9.6.5 must also be satisfied.
C.21.9.6.2 — This section applies to walls and wall piers that are effectively continuous from the base of the structure to
the top of the wall and are designed to have a single critical section for bending and axial load. Walls that do not meet these
requirements shall be designed using C.21.9.6.3.
(a) Compression zones must be reinforced with special edge elements where:
w
c ÿ (C.21-11)
(
600hrsÿ wow )
Where c in equation (C.21-11) corresponds to the greatest depth of the neutral axis calculated for the factored axial force
and nominal moment resistance congruent with the design displacement ÿ . The quotient ÿu wh in equationor (C.21-11)
should not be taken less than 0.007
(b) Where special edge elements are required under C.21.9.6.2(a), the reinforcement of the special edge element shall
extend vertically from the critical section for a distance of not less than the greater of or w
M 4V .
or or
C.21.9.6.3 — Structural walls not designed in accordance with C.21.9.6.2 shall have special edge elements at the edges
and around structural wall openings when the maximum compressive stress of the extreme fiber corresponding to factored
forces including 0.2fÿ . Special edge elements may be discontinued where the seismic effects, E , exceed 0.15fÿ . Stresses
than using a linear elastic model and should
c be calculated so that the factored forces calculated compressive stress is less
C.21.9.5.2 shall be used. gross section properties.
c For walls with wings, an effective wing width as defined in
C.21.9.6.4 — Where special edge elements are required, in accordance with C.21.9.6.2 or C.21.9.6.3,
must comply with conditions (a) to (e):
(a) The edge element shall extend horizontally from the extreme fiber in compression to a distance not less than the
c 0.1 ÿ ofwthe axis ,and c 2 neutral calculated for the factored axial force and
greater of where c corresponds to the greatest depth
nominal resistance to moment consistent with the design displacement ÿ .
or
C-191
(b) In flanged sections, edge elements shall include the effective width of the flange in compression and shall extend at least
300 mm into the web.
(c) Transverse reinforcement of special edge elements shall comply with the requirements specified in C.21.6.4.2 to
C.21.6.4.4, except that Equation (C.21-7) need not be complied with and the limit The cross bracing spacing of C.21.6.4.3(a)
shall be at least one-third the minor dimension of the edge element.
(d) The transverse reinforcement of the edge elements at the base of the wall shall extend within the support to the in
less d , accordance with C.21.9.2.3, of the larger diameter longitudinal reinforcement of the special edge elements,
unless the special elements edge ends at a footing or foundation slab, where the transverse reinforcement of the special
edge elements must extend at least 300 mm into the footing or foundation slab;
(e) Horizontal reinforcement in the web of the wall must be anchored to develop yf within the confined core of the edge
element;
C.21.9.6.5 — When special edge elements are not required in accordance with what is indicated in C.21.9.6.2 or
C.21.9.6.3, (a) and (b) must be met:
(a) If the amount of longitudinal reinforcement at the edge of the wall is greater than 2.8f , the transverse reinforcement of
and
edge must comply with what is indicated in C.21.6.4.2 and C.21.9.6.4(a). The maximum longitudinal spacing of the transverse
reinforcement at the edge must not exceed 200 mm;
(b) Except when Vu in the plane of the wall is less than at the edges 0.083A f ÿ
cv c
, the transverse reinforcement that ends
of structural walls without edge elements, it shall have a standard hook that engages the edge reinforcement, or the edge
reinforcement shall be braced with U-ties that are spliced to the horizontal reinforcement and have the same size and spacing.
C.21.9.7 — Coupling beams
C.21.9.7.1 — The coupling beams with ( ) h 4 ÿ must meet the requirements indicated in 21.5. The requirements in
no
C.21.5.1.3 and C.21.5.1.4 are not required to be met if it can be shown by analysis that the beam has adequate lateral stability.
C.21.9.7.2 — Coupling beams with ( ) n h 2 < and with Vu exceeding 0.33 f A ÿ must be reinforced with two
ÿ
c cw
groups of diagonally intersecting bars, placed symmetrically about the center of the span, unless it can be shown that loss of
stiffness and strength of the tie beams will not weaken the vertical load-carrying capacity of the structure, or the evacuation of the
structure, or the integrity of the non-structural elements and their connections with the structure.
C.21.9.7.3 — Coupler beams not governed by C.21.9.7.1 or C.21.9.7.2 are permitted to be reinforced with two sets of
diagonally intersecting bars placed symmetrically about the center of span otherwise they must comply with C.21.5.2 through
C.21.5.4.
C.21.9.7.4 — Coupler beams reinforced with two groups of diagonally intersecting bars placed symmetrically with respect to
the center of the span must comply with (a), (b) and with (c) or (d). The requirements of C.11.7 do not apply.
(a) Vn must be determined by
V 2A
no
=f sin 0.83 f A vd y ÿÿ
c cw (C.21-12)
where ÿ is the angle between the diagonal bars and the longitudinal axis of the coupling beam.
C-192
(b) Each set of diagonal bars consists of a minimum of four bars placed in two or more layers. Diagonal bars shall be embedded in the wall not
less than 1.25 times the development length for yf
in traction.
(c) Each group of diagonal bars shall be confined by transverse reinforcement, with outside to outside dimensions not less than b 2 in the direction
parallel to bw and b 5 along the other sides, where bw is the width of the web of the coupling beam. Transverse reinforcement must comply with
w w
C.21.6.4.2 through C.21.6.4.4, and must have a spacing measured parallel to the diagonal bars that complies with C.21.6.4.3(c) without exceeding
six times the diameter of the diagonal bars, and shall have a spacing of the hooks or legs of the hooks measured perpendicular to the diagonal
bars not to exceed 350 mm. For the purpose of calculating Ag for use in Eqs. (C.10-5) and (C.21-7), concrete cover is assumed, as required in
C.7.7, on all four sides. of each group of bars placed diagonally. The cross brace, or its alternate cross brace that meets the spacing and volume
ratio requirements for cross braces along the diagonals, shall continue through the intersection of the diagonal bars. Additional longitudinal and
transverse reinforcement must be distributed around the perimeter of the beam, with the total area in each direction not less than 0.002bs and a
spacing not exceeding 300mm.
(d) Transverse reinforcement shall be provided for the entire cross section of the beam, complying with C.21.6.4.2, C.21.6.4.4, and C.21.6.4.7,
with longitudinal spacing not to exceed the lesser of 150 mm and six times the diameter of the diagonal bars, and with a spacing not exceeding
200 mm in the supplementary hooks or legs of the hooks, both vertically and horizontally, in the plane of the cross section of the beam. Each
supplementary hook and each leg of the hook must link a longitudinal bar of equal or greater diameter. It is permitted to configure the hooks as
specified in C.21.5.3.6.
C.21.9.8 — Construction joints
All construction joints in structural walls shall comply with C.6.4 and the contact surface shall be roughened as specified in C.11.6.9.
C.21.9.9 — Discontinuous walls
Columns that support discontinuous structural walls must be reinforced in accordance with what is indicated in C.21.6.4.6.
C.21.10 — Special structural walls constructed using precast concrete with special energy
dissipation (DES) capacity
C.21.10.1 — Scope
The requirements of C.21.10 apply to special structural walls constructed using precast concrete that is part of the seismic resisting system.
C.21.10.2 — Special structural walls constructed using precast concrete shall comply with all requirements of C.21.9 for special structural walls
constructed in situ, in addition to C.21.4.2 and C.21.4.3.
C.21.10.3 — Special structural walls constructed using precast concrete and post-tensioned tendons and not meeting the requirements of C.21.10.1
are permitted provided they meet the requirements of ACI ITG-5.1.
C.21.11 — Diaphragms and structural trusses assigned to the special capacity of

power dissipation (DES)
C.21.11.1 — Scope
The floor and roof slabs that act as structural diaphragms to transmit forces induced by seismic movements in structures assigned to the special energy
dissipation capacity (DES), must
C-193
be designed according to what is indicated in this section. This section also applies to collector elements and trusses that
serve as part of the seismic resisting system.
C.21.11.2 — Design forces
Seismic design forces for structural diaphragms must be obtained from Title A of Regulation NSR-10 using the applicable
provisions and load combinations.
C.21.11.3 – Trajectory of seismic forces
C.21.11.3.1 – All diaphragms and their connections must be designed and detailed so that they are capable of
transferring all the forces to the collector elements and the vertical elements of the system to resist seismic forces.
C.21.11.3.2 – Elements of a structural diaphragm system that are primarily subjected to axial forces and used to
transfer shear or bending forces from the diaphragm around openings or other discontinuities, shall meet the requirements
for the collectors of C.21.11.7.5 and C.21.11.7.6.
C.21.11.4 — Site-built composite topping acting as diaphragm
Use as a diaphragm of a site-constructed composite topping over a precast floor or deck is permitted provided the topping
is reinforced and the surface of the previously hardened concrete on which the topping is placed must be clean, free of of
grout and should be made intentionally rough.
C.21.11.5 - Topping built on site acting as a diaphragm
A non-composite site-built topping over a precast floor or deck is permitted to serve as a structural diaphragm provided the
site-built topping itself is designed and detailed to resist the design seismic forces.
C.21.11.6 —Minimum thickness of diaphragms
Concrete slabs and composite floor toppings that serve as structural diaphragms used to transmit seismic forces must
have a minimum thickness of 50 mm. Floor toppings placed over precast floor or deck elements, which act as structural
diaphragms and which do not rely on compound action with the precast elements to resist design seismic forces, shall
have a thickness of not less than 65 mm.
C.21.11.7 — Reinforcement
C.21.11.7.1 — The minimum amount of reinforcement for structural diaphragms must be in accordance with what is
indicated in C.7.12. Except for post-tensioned slabs, reinforcement spacing in both directions should not exceed 450mm.
When electrowelded wire reinforcement is used as distributed reinforcement to resist shear in the tapering floor placed on
precast floor and deck elements, the wires parallel to the direction of the precast elements shall be spaced not less than
250mm. The reinforcement provided for shear resistance must be continuous and must be evenly distributed across the
shear plane.
C.21.11.7.2 — Bonded tendons used as reinforcement to resist forces from collector elements or diaphragm shear or
flexural tension must be designed such that the stress due to design seismic forces does not exceed 420 MPa.
Precompression produced by unbonded prestressing tendons is allowed to resist diaphragm design forces if a path for
seismic loading is provided.
C.21.11.7.3 – Any reinforcement used to resist forces from the collector elements, shear in the diaphragm or
flexural tension must be developed or overlapped to resist yf in tension.
C.21.11.7.4 – Type 2 splices are required when mechanical splices are used to transfer forces between the
diaphragm and the vertical elements of the resistance system against seismic forces.
C-194
C.21.11.7.5 - Collecting elements with compressive stresses exceeding 0.2fÿ in any section must have transverse
c reinforcement along the
length of the element, as indicated in C.21.9.6.4 (c). Discontinuation of specified transverse reinforcement is permitted where the calculated
compressive stress is less than 0.15f' . Where the design forces have been amplified to account for the overstrength of the vertical
c elements of
the resisting system to seismic forces, the 0.2fÿ limit should be increased to 0.5fÿ 0.15fÿ
c c , and the limit of c
must be increased to 0.4fÿ .
c
C.21.11.7.6 – The longitudinal reinforcement for the collector elements in the splices and anchorage areas must
meet one of the following requirements:
(a) A minimum center-to-center spacing of three longitudinal bar diameters, but not less than 40 mm, and a minimum free concrete cover
of 2.5 longitudinal bar diameters, but not less than 50 mm; either
(b) Transverse reinforcement as required in C.11.4.6.3, except as required in C.21.11.7.5.
C.21.11.8 – Flexural resistance
Diaphragms and portions of diaphragms shall be designed for bending in accordance with C.10.2 and C.10.3, except that the nonlinear
distribution of stress requirements of C.10.2.2 for tall beams does not apply. The effects of openings must be considered.
C.21.11.9.1 — Vn in structural diaphragms must not exceed:
= fcv
VAno 0.17 ÿ +ÿ( c
ÿ
f
ty
) (C.21-13)
For diaphragms formed by site-constructed thinning floors placed over a precast floor or deck, Acv is calculated using the thickness of the
thinning floor only for diaphragms formed by noncomposite thinning floors and by the combined thickness of the precast elements and placed in
place for the refining diaphragms of composite floors. For diaphragms formed by tapering composite floors, the value of cfÿ used to determine
Vn shall not exceed the lesser of the cfÿ of the precast elements or the cfÿ of the tapering floor.
C.21.11.9.2 — The Vn of structural diaphragms must not exceed 0.66A fÿ . cv c
C.21.11.9.3 — Above the joints between precast elements in non-composite diaphragms, or with
compound flooring, Vn should not exceed
Af=ÿ vf y
V no (C.21-14)
where Avf is the total area of frictional shear reinforcement within the deck, including distributed and edge reinforcement, that is oriented
perpendicular to the joints in the precast system and the coefficient of friction, ÿ , is 1.0ÿ where ÿ is given by C.11.7.4.3. At least half of Avf must
, potential shear plane. The distribution reinforcement area in the tapered floor shall comply with
be uniformly distributed along the length of the
C.7.12.2.1 in each direction.
C.21.11.9.4 – Above joints between precast elements in non-composite diaphragms and with composite floor topping, Vn shall not exceed
the limits of C.11.6.5 with Ac calculated using only the thickness of the topping floor.
C.21.11.10 — Construction joints
All construction joints in diaphragms shall comply with C.6.4 and the contact surface shall be roughened as specified in C.11.6.9.
C-195
C.21.11.11 — Structural trusses
C.21.11.11.1 — Structural truss elements with compressive stresses in excess of any section shall have transverse reinforcement 0.2fÿc in
along the length of the element, as required in C.21.6.4.2 through C.21.6.4.4 and C.21.6. 4.7.
C.21.11.11.2 — All continuous reinforcement in structural truss elements must be developed and spliced for yf in tension.
C.21.12 — Foundations of structures assigned to the special energy dissipation capacity

(DES)
C.21.12.1 — Scope
C.21.12.1.1 — Foundations that resist seismic forces or that transfer seismic forces between the structure and the ground in structures
assigned to the special energy dissipation capacity (DES), must comply with what is indicated in C.21.12 and with the other applicable
requirements of Title H and Chapter C.15 of Regulation NSR-10.
C.21.12.1.2 — The requirements indicated in this section for piles, excavated piles, foundation caissons, and slabs on the ground
complement other applicable design and construction criteria of Title C of Regulation NSR-10. See C.1.1.6 and C.1.1.7.
C.21.12.2 — Footings, foundation slabs and pile caps
C.21.12.2.1 — Longitudinal reinforcement of structural columns and walls that resist forces induced by seismic effects must extend within
the footing, foundation slab, or pile cap, and must be fully developed by tension at the interface.
C.21.12.2.2 — The columns that are designed assuming embedment conditions in the foundation, must comply with what is indicated in
C.21.12.2.1 and, if hooks are required, the longitudinal reinforcement that resists bending must have 90 degree hooks. near the bottom of the
foundation, with the free end of the bars facing the center of the column.
C.21.12.2.3 — Columns or edge elements of special reinforced concrete structural walls that have a edge within a length equal to half the
depth of the footing shall have transverse reinforcement as indicated in C. 21.6.4.2 to C.21.6.4.4 placed under the top of the footing. This
reinforcement must extend into the footing, foundation slab or pile cap, and develop in tension and f of the longitudinal reinforcement.
C.21.12.2.4 — When seismic effects create uplift forces in edge elements of special reinforced concrete structural walls or columns, flexural
reinforcement shall be provided at the top of the footing, slab foundation, or pile cap to withstand design load combinations, and may not be
less than required in C.10.5.
C.21.12.2.5 — For the use of plain concrete in footings and foundation walls, refer to C.22.10.
C.21.12.3 — Beams and slabs on the ground
C.21.12.3.1 — Above-ground beams designed to act as horizontal ties between footings or pile caps shall have continuous longitudinal
reinforcement that must develop into or beyond the column, or be anchored within the footing or pile cap. piles in all discontinuities.
C.21.12.3.2 — Above-ground beams designed to act as horizontal couplings between footings or pile caps shall be designed such that the
least transverse dimension is equal to or greater than the clearance between connected columns divided by 20, but not it needs to be greater
than 450 mm. Should be
C-196
provide closed stirrups with a spacing not exceeding the lesser of one half of the lesser transverse dimension or 300 mm.
C.21.12.3.3 — The beams on the ground and the beams that are part of a foundation slab and are subjected to bending by the columns that are
part of the resistance system against seismic forces must comply with what is indicated in C.21.5.
C.21.12.3.4 — Slabs on ground that resist seismic forces from walls or columns that are part of the seismic resistance system shall be designed as
structural diaphragms in accordance with C.21.11. Design drawings must clearly specify that the slab on ground is a structural diaphragm and is part of
the seismic resisting system.
C.21.12.4 — Piles, piers and foundation caissons
C.21.12.4.1 — The specifications indicated in C.21.12.4 apply to piles, piles, and foundation caissons that support structures designed to have
seismic resistance.
C.21.12.4.2 — The piles, piles or foundation caissons that resist tensile loads must have continuous longitudinal reinforcement along the zone that
resists the tensile forces. Longitudinal reinforcement must be detailed to transfer tensile forces from the pile cap to the supported structural elements.
C.21.12.4.3 — When tensile forces induced by seismic effects are transferred, between the pile cap or foundation slab and a precast pile, through
reinforcing bars placed with injected mortar or post-installed on top of the pile, it shall be demonstrated by testing that the injection system develops at
least 1.25f of the bar.
and
C.21.12.4.4 — The piles, piers or foundation caissons must have transversal reinforcement in accordance with the
indicated in C.21.6.4.2 in the areas defined in (a) and (b):
(a) At the top of the element at least 5 times the transverse dimension of the element, but not less than 1.8 m below the bottom of the pile cap;
(b) For portions of piles in soils that are not capable of providing lateral support, or are in the air or in water, along the entire length of the
unsupported span plus the length required in C.21.12.4.4( to).
C.21.12.4.5 — For precast concrete driven piles, the length where the provided transverse reinforcement is placed shall be sufficient to account for
potential variations in the depth reached by the toe of the piles.
C.21.12.4.6 — The piles, piles or foundation caissons that support one or two-story buildings with light frame load-bearing walls are exempt from
the
Transverse reinforcement requirements indicated in C.21.12.4.4 and C.21.12.4.5.
C.21.12.4.7 — Pile caps incorporating inclined piles must be designed to resist the full compressive strength of inclined piles acting as short
columns. The slenderness effects of inclined piles must be considered within the portion of the pile in soil that is not capable of providing lateral support,
or that remains in the air or in the water.
C.21.13 — Elements that are not designated as part of the resistance system to
seismic forces
C.21.13.1 — Scope
The requirements of C.21.13 cannot be used in the design of new buildings and can only be used in the design of seismic rehabilitations in which the
original design used the subterfuge of using frame elements that were not designated as part of the resistance system. before seismic forces in
structures assigned to the capacity of dissipation of special energy (DES).
C-197
C.21.13.2 — Structural elements that are not supposed to contribute to lateral resistance must be detailed in accordance with
what is indicated in C.21.13.3 and C.21.13.4 depending on the magnitude of the moments induced in these elements when they
ÿ . If the effects
are subjected to the design displacement ÿ are not explicitly verified, the requirements ofofC.21.13.4 may apply. For two-way slabs
or or
without beams, the slab-column connections shall comply with the provisions of C.21.13.6.
C.21.13.3 — When the moments and shear forces induced by the design displacements ÿ combined with the factored
or
gravitational
shear forces and moments do not exceed the design shear and moment resistance of the element, the conditions of C.21.13 shall
be satisfied. 3.1, C.21.13.3.2 and C.21.13.3.3. For this purpose, the most critical gravity load combination between (1.2D 1.0L + )
or 0.9D should be used . The load factor for live load, L, may be reduced to 0.5 except for garages, occupied areas such as places
of public assembly, and all areas where L is greater ,than 4.8 kN/m2 .
C.21.13.3.1 — Members subjected to a factored gravitational axial force not exceeding A f 10 cÿ

must
g
satisfy C.21.5.2.1. The spacing of the stirrups must be less than d 2 along the element.
C.21.13.3.2 — Elements with a factored gravitational axial force greater than A f 10 cÿ

must satisfy
g
C.21.6.3.1, C.21.6.4.2 and C.21.6.5. The maximum longitudinal spacing of the closed confinement stirrups shall be os along the
entire length of the column. Spacing os shall not exceed the lesser of six diameters of the smallest diameter longitudinal bar or
150mm.
C.21.13.3.3 — Members with a factored gravitational axial force exceeding 0.35P must satisfy either
C.21.13.3.2 and C.21.6.4.7. The amount of transverse reinforcement supplied shall be one-half that required by C.21.6.4.4 without
exceeding the spacing os for the total height of the element.
ÿ if, the
C.21.13.4 — If the moment or shear induced by the design displacements, or Vn ÿ of the element, or exceeds
induced
Mnmoments
ÿ are
or
not calculated, the conditions of C.21.13.4.1, C.21.13.4.2 shall be satisfied. and C.21.13.4.3.
C.21.13.4.1 — Materials must comply with C.21.1.4.2, C.21.1.4.3, C.21.1.5.2, C.21.1.5.4, and C.21.1.5.5. The
mechanical splices must satisfy C.21.1.6 and welded splices must satisfy C.21.1.7.1.
C.21.13.4.2 — Members with a factored gravitational axial force less than A f 10 cÿ must satisfy g
C.21.5.2.1 and C.21.5.4. Stirrup spacing shall not be greater than d 2 along the entire length of the element.
C.21.13.4.3 — Elements with a factored gravitational axial force greater than A f 10 cÿ must satisfy
g
C.21.6.3, C.21.6.4, C.21.6.5 and C.21.7.3.1.
C.21.13.5 — Elements for precast concrete frames that are assumed not to contribute lateral resistance, including their
connections, shall comply with (a), (b), and (c), in addition to C.21.13.2 to C.21.13.4:
(a) The stirrups specified in .21.13.3.2 must be placed along the entire length of the column, including the height of the beams.
(b) Reinforcement for structural integrity must be provided as specified in C.16.5; and
(c) The support length of a beam shall be at least 50 mm greater than that determined by calculations using the bearing
resistance values of C.10.14.
C.21.13.6 — For slab-column connections of slabs in two directions without beams, reinforcement for slab shear that satisfies the
ÿ
0.29 fbd
requirements of C.11.12.3 and provides a Vs of not less than shall extend at least 4 times the thickness ,
co of the slab from the face
of the support, unless either (a) or (b) is satisfied:
(a) The requirements of C.11.11.7 using the design shear Vu and the induced moment transferred between the slab and the
column under the design displacement;
C-198
(b) The design floor drift does not exceed the greater of 0.005 and ÿ0.35 0.05ÿ VV c )ÿ ( u ÿ ÿ .
ÿ
The design story drift shall be taken as the greater of the design story drift of the adjacent stories, above and below the slab-
column connection. Vc is defined in C.11.11.2. Vug is the factored shear force in the critical section of the slab for an action
in two directions, calculated for the load combination 1.2D 1.0L 0.2S + +
.
It is permitted to reduce the load factor from L to 0.5, except for parking lots, occupied areas such as places of public
assembly, and all areas where L is greater than 4.8 kN/m2 .
C-199
Grades:
C-200
NSR-10 – Chapter C.22 – Simple structural concrete
CHAPTER C.22 — PLAIN STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
C.22.1 — Scope
C.22.1.1 — This chapter provides the minimum requirements for the design and construction of structural plain concrete
elements (cast-in-place or precast).
C.22.1.2 — Unless they are in conflict with the provisions of Chapter C.22 of this Title C of Regulation NSR-10, the
following requirements shall be applied to simple structural concrete elements: Sections C.1 to C.7.5, C.7.6.1, C.7.6.2,
C.7.6.4, C.7.7, C.9.1.3, C.9.2, C.9.3.5, Chapter C.20, C.21.12 .2.5, C.9.2, C.9.3.5 and Appendix CD.
C.22.1.3 — In special structures, such as arches, underground structures for public services, gravity walls, and protection
walls, the provisions of this chapter must be controlled when applicable.
C.22.2 —Limitations
C.22.2.1 — The use of structural plain concrete shall be limited to (a), (b) or (c):
(a) Elements that are supported continuously on the ground or that are supported by other structural elements capable
of providing them with continuous vertical support;
(b) Members in which the arc effect generates compression under all loading conditions;
(c) Walls and pedestals. See C.22.6 and C.22.8
The use of simple structural concrete columns is not allowed.
C.22.2.2 — This chapter does not control the design and installation of piles and piles built on site and embedded in the
ground.
C.22.2.3 — Minimum specified resistance
The specified compressive strength of structural plain concrete shall not be less than that stipulated in C.1.1.1 and the
durability requirements of Chapter C.4.
C.22.3 — Gaskets
C.22.3.1 — Contraction or isolation joints shall be provided to divide structural plain concrete elements into discontinuous
flexural elements. The size of each element must be chosen to limit the stress caused by the restriction of movements due
to the effects of creep, shrinkage and temperature variation.
C.22.3.2 — When determining the number and location of contraction or isolation joints, attention must be paid to:
influence of weather conditions; selection and dosage of materials; mixing, placing and curing of concrete; degree of
movement restriction; efforts due to the loads to which the element is subjected; and construction techniques.
C.22.4 — Design method
C.22.4.1 — Factored loads and forces must be combined as specified in C.9.2.
C-201
C.22.4.2 — When the required resistance exceeds the design resistance, reinforcement must be provided and the element must
be designed as a reinforced concrete element in accordance with the appropriate requirements of this Title C of Regulation NSR-10.
C.22.4.3 — The resistance design of simple structural concrete elements for flexure and axial loads must be based on linear stress-
strain relationships, both in tension and compression.
C.22.4.4 — In the design of structural plain concrete elements, the tensile strength of the concrete may be considered when the
provisions of C.22.3 have been followed.
C.22.4.5 — Strength shall not be assigned to steel reinforcement that may be present.
C.22.4.6 — Tension shall not be transmitted through the outer edges, construction joints, contraction joints, or isolation joints of an
individual plain concrete member. Continuity to flexure due to tension between adjacent plain structural concrete elements shall not
be assumed.
C.22.4.7 — When calculating the resistance to bending, bending and combined axial load, and shear, the complete section of an
element must be considered in the design, except for concrete built against the ground where the total height h must be taken as
50mm smaller than the actual dimension.
C.22.5 — Design for strength

C.22.5.1 — The design of cross sections subjected to bending must be based on:
ÿ mm
ÿ no or
(C.22-1)
where
=
M 0.42fS ÿ
ÿ
(C.22-2)
no cm
if you control traction, and for
= S
M 0.85f
ÿ
(C.22-3)
no cm
if it controls compression, where Sm is the elastic modulus of the corresponding section.
C.22.5.2 — The design of cross sections subjected to compression must be based on:
ÿ PP
ÿno or
(C.22-4)
where Pn is calculated as:
2
ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ
Pnc=1 32h
0.60f 1 ÿ
ÿ
c
TO (C.22-5)
ÿÿ ÿÿ
ÿÿÿ ÿÿÿ
and A1 is the charged area.
C.22.5.3 — Members subjected to a combination of bending and compressive axial loading shall be designed so that on the
compression face:
P.M
or
+ or
ÿ 1 (C.22-6)
ÿ P.M
ÿ no no
and on the tensile side:
C-202
PMor or
ÿÿÿ 0.42f c
ÿ
(C.22-7)
S mAÿ g
C.22.5.4 — The design of rectangular cross sections subjected to shear must be based on:
ÿ VV
ÿ no or
(C.22-8)
where Vn is calculated as:
= fbh ÿ
V no0.11 ww
ÿ
(C.22-9)
for the action as beam, and as:
ÿÿ2ÿ ÿ
fbh
co (C.22-10)
V no0.11
ÿ 1 ÿ = +ÿ ÿ ÿ
for action in two directions, but not greater than ÿ 0.22 fbhequation
. In (C.22-10), ÿ corresponds to the ratio of the long side to the short
co
ÿ
side of the concentrated charge or the area of the reaction.
C.22.5.5 — The design of bearing surfaces subjected to compression must be based on:
ÿ BB
ÿ no or
(C.22-11)
where Bu is the factored bearing load and Bn is the nominal bearing resistance of the loaded area calculated as:
A1 ,
= A c1
B no0.85f
ÿ
(C.22-12)
except when the bearing surface is wider on all sides than the loaded area, in which case Bn
must be multiplied by AA 1 , but
2 not by more than 2.
C.22.5.6 — Lightweight concrete
C.22.5.6.1 — In this chapter, the modification factor ÿ for lightweight concrete shall agree
with 8.6.1 unless otherwise specified.
C.22.6 — Walls
C.22.6.1 — Structural plain concrete walls must be continuously supported on the ground, on footings, foundation walls, foundation
beams, or other structural elements capable of providing continuous vertical support.
C.22.6.2 — Structural plain concrete walls shall be designed for the vertical, lateral, or other loads to which they are subjected.
C.22.6.3 — Structural plain concrete walls shall be designed for an eccentricity corresponding to the maximum moment that can
accompany axial loading, but not less than 0.10h . If the resultant of all factored loads is located within the center third of the total wall
thickness, design shall be in accordance with C.22.5.3 or C.22.6.5. Otherwise, the walls must be designed in accordance with C.22.5.3.
C.22.6.4 — Shear design shall be performed in accordance with C.22.5.4.
C-203
C.22.6.5 — Empirical design method
C.22.6.5.1 — Structural plain concrete walls of solid rectangular section can be designed by means of equation
(C.22-13), provided that the resultant of all factored loads is located within the central third of the total thickness. From the
wall.
C.22.6.5.2 — The design of walls subjected to axial compression loads must be based on:
ÿPP
ÿ no or
(C.22-13)
where Pu is the factored axial force and Pn is the nominal axial resistance, calculated as:
2
ÿ ÿ
ÿ c ÿ
(C.22-14)
ÿ
= A 1 cg
P no0.45f ÿ
ÿÿ
32h ÿÿ
ÿÿÿ ÿÿÿ
C.22.6.6 — Limitations
C.22.6.6.1 — Unless demonstrated by detailed analysis, the horizontal length of a wall considered to be effective for
each concentrated vertical load shall not exceed the center distance of the loads, nor the width of the bearing zone plus 4
times the thickness of the wall.
C.22.6.6.2 — Except as established in C.22.6.6.3, the thickness of load-bearing walls must not be less than 1/24
of the unsupported length or height, whichever is less, nor than 140 mm.
C.22.6.6.3 — The thickness of the exterior basement and foundation walls must not be less than 190 mm.
C.22.6.6.4 — Walls must be braced against lateral displacement. See C.22.3 and C.22.4.7.
C.22.6.6.5 — Not less than two No. 5 (5/8”) or 16M (16mm) bars shall be provided around all window and door openings.
Such bars must extend at least 600 mm beyond the corners of the openings.
C.22.7 — Footings
C.22.7.1 — Structural plain concrete footings must be designed for factored loads and induced reactions, in accordance
with the appropriate design requirements of this Title C of Regulation NSR-10 and as indicated in C.22.7.2 to C.22.7.8.
C.22.7.2 — The area of the base of the footing shall be determined from the unfactored forces and moments transmitted by
the footing to the ground and the allowable capacity of the soil determined in accordance with the principles of soil mechanics.
C.22.7.3 — Plain concrete shall not be used for footings on piles.
C.22.7.4 — The thickness of the simple structural concrete footings must not be less than 200 mm. See C.22.4.7.
C.22.7.5 — The maximum factored moments must be calculated in (a), (b) and (c):
(a) On the face of the column, pedestal or wall, for footings that support these elements.
(b) Halfway between the axis and the edge of the wall, in footings that support a masonry wall.
(c) Midway between the edge of the column and the edge of the steel base plate in footings supporting columns with a steel
base plate.
C-204
C.22.7.6 — Shear in plain concrete footings
C.22.7.6.1 — Vu shall be calculated in accordance with C.22.7.6.2, with the critical section located at the face of the
column, pedestal, or wall in footings that support these elements. In footings that support columns with a steel base plate,
the critical section must be located as defined in C.22.7.5(c).
C.22.7.6.2 — Vn ÿ of simple structural concrete footings, in the vicinity of concentrated loads or

reactions, is controlled by the more restrictive of the following two conditions:
(a) Action as a beam of the footing, with the critical section extending through the full width of the footing and located a
distance h from the edge of the concentrated load or reaction area. For this condition, the footing should be designed
according to Eq. (C.22-9).
(b) Two-way action of the footing, with the critical section perpendicular to the plane of the footing and located so that
its perimeter bo is a minimum, but need not be closer than h 2 to the perimeter of the concentrated load or area of
burden. For this condition, the footing should be designed according to equation (C.22-
10).
C.22.7.7 — For the location of the critical moment and shear sections, columns with a circular or regular polygon shape
can be treated as square elements of the same area.
C.22.7.8 — The factored bearing loads, Bu , in the concrete at the contact surface between bearing and supported
elements shall not exceed, on any surface, the design bearing resistance, Bn ÿ , for any of both surfaces as indicated in
C.22.5.5.
C.22.8 — Pedestals
C.22.8.1 — Plain concrete pedestals shall be designed for the vertical, lateral, or other loads to which they are subjected.
C.22.8.2 — The ratio of the unsupported height to the average of the least lateral dimension of plain concrete pedestals
shall not exceed 3.
C.22.8.3 — The maximum factored axial load, Pu , applied to plain concrete pedestals shall not exceed the design crush
resistance, Bn ÿ , given in C.22.5.5.
C.22.9 — Precast elements

C.22.9.1 — In the design of precast simple concrete elements, all load conditions must be considered from the initial
fabrication to the completion of the structure. Including stripping, storage, transport and assembly.
C.22.9.2 — The limitations of C.22.2 apply to precast plain concrete elements not only in their final condition but also
during manufacture, transportation, and erection.
C.22.9.3 — Precast elements must be securely connected so that they transfer all lateral forces to a structural system
capable of resisting those forces.
C.22.9.4 — Precast elements must be adequately braced and supported during erection to ensure proper alignment and
structural integrity until permanent connections are completed.
C-205
C.22.10 — Plain concrete in seismic resistant structures

C.22.10.1 — Structures with special energy dissipation capacity (DES) cannot have simple concrete foundation elements,
except when:
(a) In detached houses for one or two families, three stories or less in height with light frame load-bearing walls, plain
concrete footings without longitudinal reinforcement supporting the walls and isolated plain concrete footings may be
used;
(b) For all other structures, plain concrete footings supporting cast-in-place reinforced concrete walls or reinforced
masonry walls are permitted, provided the footings are longitudinally reinforced with not less than two continuous
bars, not less than No. 4 (1/2”) or 12M (12 mm) and with an area not less than 0.002 times the gross section of the
footing. Continuity of reinforcement must be provided at corners and intersections.
(c) In detached one- or two-family dwellings three stories or less in height with light-frame load-bearing walls, plain
concrete foundations or foundation walls may be used, provided the wall is not less than 190 mm wide and is not
containing more than 1.2 m of unbalanced fill.
C-206
NSR-10 – Chapter C.23 – Tanks and concrete environmental engineering structures
CHAPTER C.23 — TANKS AND CONCRETE

ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING STRUCTURES
C.23.0 — Application of Chapter C.23 of NSR-10
All NSR-10 Title C requirements are applicable to concrete environmental engineering structures except where modified in
this Chapter C.23. If C.23 does not refer to an ordinal of Title C, this requirement must be met and is equally applicable to
environmental structures. When a requirement contained in Title C is not applicable to environmental structures this is
explicitly stated in C.23.
In order to facilitate the application of the modifications for environmental structures to the rest of Title C, a nomenclature of
the sections of Regulation NSR-10 that is modified has been adopted, which is composed of "C.23-" followed by the ordinal
of the appropriate section of Title C being amended. Thus, for example, “C.1.2 – Plans and specifications” is modified for
environmental structures; the substitute text is referred to as "C.23-C.1.2 - Plans and specifications" within this Chapter C.23
and this means that for environmental engineering structures the requirements of C.1.2 must be replaced by the requirements
contained in C.23-C.1.2.
C.23-C.1.1 — Scope
C.23-C.1.1.1 — This Chapter covers what concerns tanks and watertight compartments such as swimming pools and
swimming pools that are part of the building equipment. The requirements given in this Chapter cover structures built with
reinforced cast-in-place concrete, precast concrete, and prestressed concrete.
The requirements of this Chapter are fully applicable to the design of environmental and sanitary engineering structures,
with the exception of primary structures to prevent the leakage of hazardous materials.
For this type of environmental and sanitary engineering structures, the specified minimum compressive strength cfÿ must
not be less than 28 MPa. A specified maximum compressive strength is not defined, unless explicitly stated in some section
of the NSR-10 Regulation.
C.23-C.1.1.2 — Environmental engineering concrete structures are defined as structures for storage, flow, and treatment of
liquids and other related materials such as solid waste. It also applies the name to secondary structures to prevent the
dispersion of hazardous materials, and auxiliary structures, when all of them require impermeability to liquids and gases, or
special durability properties.
The purpose of these requirements is to establish the design and construction methods that allow compliance with the
objectives of structural safety and also allow the concrete produced for environmental structures:
(a) Is designed to control cracking and fissuring to prevent the flow of liquids between the interior of the tank and its
exterior, (b) Is sufficiently dense
and impervious to prevent contamination of the liquids contained or
they contaminate,
(c) provide maximum resistance to the chemical elements contained in the liquid, and (d)
have smooth surfaces that minimize resistance to flow and allow meeting the objectives of
health.
Special care must be taken in the construction of this type of structure in order to avoid corrosion of the reinforcement and
obtain a concrete that is as impermeable as possible.
C.23-C.1.1.3 — This Chapter includes additional or substitute requirements to those given in the rest of Title C of Regulation
NSR-10 to be used in the design and construction of concrete structures for environmental engineering.
C.23-C.1.1.4 — The requirements of C.1.1.4 do not apply to environmental structures designed in accordance with Chapter
C.23.
C-207
C.23-C.1.1.7 — Slabs on ground of environmental structures may be designed following the requirements of C.23-C.15.14.
C.23-C.1.1.9 — Provisions for seismic resistance
The requirements of Chapter C.21, earthquake resistant design must be met in the design of all structures covered by the
scope of this chapter, with the modifications noted in this Chapter and following the requirements for the earthquake
resistant design of given environmental structures. in Appendix A-1 of Title A.
C.23-C.1.2 — Drawings and specifications

In the content of C.1.2.1, the literals (a) to (i) are maintained, the literals (j) to (m) are modified and the literals (n) to (p) are
added:
(j) The design level of liquid for any structure designed to contain liquids; (k) Sequence of
tensioning of the post-tensioning tendons; (l) Indication of whether a
slab on ground has been designed as a structural diaphragm, see section
21.12.3.4.
(m) Design gas pressure for structural elements that are subjected to pressurized gas or liquid; (n) Properties of
concrete and its components including the type of cement, the water-material ratio
cementitious, and if allowed additions, additives and pozzolans.
(o) Additional requirements such as limitations on allowable setting shrinkage. (p)
Requirements to test the impermeability and tightness before the surrounding fills are carried out.
C.23-C.1.2.2 — The requirements of C.1.2.2 must also be met in environmental structures.
C.23-C-2.2 — Definitions
Some terms used in the design and construction of environmental engineering structures are defined below, in addition to
those given in C.2.2.
Backer rod — A band or rod of compressible material placed between the preformed filler and the sealant, used for support
and to control sealant penetration.
Waterstop — A continuous tape of metal, rubber, plastic, or other material inserted through the joint to prevent the passage
of liquids through the joint.
Environmental Durability Factor — Coefficient used to control stresses in reinforcing steel and crack width in members
designed using the strength method.
Joint filler — A preformed compressible material used to fill an expansion joint to prevent debris infiltration and support
backer strip and sealants.
Joint sealant — A synthetic elastomeric material used to finish a joint and prevent it from filling with solid matter.
C.23-C.3.8 — Technical standards mentioned in Chapter C.23

The following standards are part of Regulation NSR-10 and must be added to those contained in C.3.8 when dealing with
environmental engineering structures.
As long as the Colombian Institute of Technical Standards and Certification, ICONTEC, issues the corresponding NTC
standard, the following technical standards must be used.
ASTM C 1138-97—Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Concrete (Underwater Method)
C-208
ASTM D 412-98aÿ1 — Standard Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension
ASTM D 746-98—Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact
ASTM D 1056-00—Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials—Sponge or Expanded Rubber
ASTM D 1149-99—Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration- Surface Ozone Cracking in a Chamber
ASTM D 1752-84 — Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint (Reapproved 1996)ÿ1
Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
ASTM D 2000-03—Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications
ASTM D 2240-03—Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hardness
ASTM E 96-00—Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
AWW C 652-92 — Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities of the American Water Works Association
CRD C 572 — US Army Corps of Engineers Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops (1999)
TT-S-227e(3) — Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, (1969) Multi-Component (for Calking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other
Structures), issued by the Federal Government of the United States of America.
TT-S-230c(2) — Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, (1970) Single Component (for Calking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other
Structures), issued by the Federal Government of the United States of America.
ACI 350.3/350.3R-06 “Seismic Design of Liquid-Containing Concrete Structures” from the American Concrete Institute
AASHTO T260-84 — Sampling and Testing for Total Chloride Ion in Concrete and Concrete Raw Materials of the
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
C.23-C.4 — Special Durability Requirements

This section presents the modifications that must be made to the durability requirements given in Chapter C.4 of Title C of NSR-10 to be
applicable to environmental concrete structures.
C.23-C.4.1.3 — Minimum content of cementing materials — The minimum content of cementing materials must be as indicated in Table C.23-C.1.1.
TABLE C.23-C.4.1.1 — MINIMUM CONTENT OF CEMENTING MATERIALS
Sieve passing Minimum

maximum aggregate coarse content of
size, aggregate cementitious
mm according materials
to NTC 174 (kg/m3 )
38 320
25 330
20 350
13 360
10 370
(ASTM C 33)* 467 57 67 7 8 *For coarse aggregate nominal sizes that are not indicated, interpolation between the indicated nominal sizes is al
C.23-C.4.2 — Exposure categories and classes for environmental concrete structures
Below, Table C.23-C.4.2.1 presents the categories and exposure classes for environmental concrete structures. This table modifies Table
C.4.2.1 to make it applicable to environmental structures.
C-209
TABLE C.23-C.4.2.1 — EXPOSURE CATEGORIES AND CLASSES
Category Severity Class Condition

Non Concrete not exposed to freeze-thaw
F0
applicable cycles
Concrete exposed to freeze-thaw cycles
moderate F1 and occasional exposure to moisture
F
Concrete exposed to freezing and
Freeze severe F2 thawing cycles and in continuous contact
and thaw with moisture
Concrete exposed to freeze-thaw cycles
that will be in continuous contact with
Very F3 moisture and exposed to de-icing
severe
chemicals
Soluble
sulfates in
Sulfate (SO4 )
water (SO4 ) dissolved in water,
in soil, % by ppm
weight
Not OS 150 <
S0 SO 0.10 < 4 4
S applicable
Sulfate 0.10 SO ÿ < 0 ÿ 150 SO 150 < 0
Moderate S1 4 4
sea water ÿ
0.20 SO ÿ ÿ2 _ 1500 ÿSW 4
severe S2 4
10000
Very S3 OS 2.00 > 4 OS 410000 >
severe
P Not In contact with water where low
P0
Requires applicable permeability is not required
low In contact with water where low
required P1 permeability is required
permeability
Not Dry or moisture-protected concrete
C0
applicable
C.
Concrete exposed to moisture, but not
Moderate C1 to an external source of chlorides
Protection
of
corrosion Concrete exposed to moisture and an
external source of chlorides from de-
reinforcement severe C2 icing chemicals, salt, brackish water,
seawater, or splashes from the same
source
Q Not Concrete that is not exposed to corrosive

Q0
applicable chemicals
Concrete exposed to different chemicals
Exposure severe Q1 corrosive of
to corrosive chemicals de-icers
C.23-C.4.3 — Requirements for concrete mixes
Next, in Table C.23-C.4.3.1, based on the exposure classes assigned in Table C.23-C.4.2.1, the requirements that
concrete mixtures for structures must have concrete environmental This table modifies Table C.4.3.1 to make it applicable
to environmental structures. Only the exposure classes that present modification with respect to Table C.4.3.1 of Chapter
C.4 are presented.
C-210
TABLE C.23-C.4.3.1 — REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE ACCORDING TO EXPOSURE CLASS

Kind Rel. F
ÿ
c
of a/mc
min.
max ±
Exposure MPa additional minimum requirements
limits on
the
cemen
air content table
F3 0.42 31 table C.4.4.1

C.4.4.2
Types of cementing material* Chloride
additive
ASTM ASTM ASTM
c150 C 595 C 1157
calcium
Without Without Without
S0 0.45 28 Without
restriction restriction restriction
restrictions
on type on type on type
IP(MS),
S1 0.42 31 II†‡ MS Without
IS(<70)
(MS) restrictions
IP(HS), Not
S2 0.40 35 V‡ HS
IS(<70)
allowed
(HS)
IP(HS) and
pozola
nas o
V human waste§ HS
puzola either
and puzola Not
S3 0.40 35
nas o IS(<70) nas o allowed
human waste§ (HS) human waste§
and
pozzolanas or
human waste§
P1 0.45 28 None
Q1 0.42 31 None
*Alternative combinations of cementitious materials other than those mentioned in table C.23-
C.4.3.1 may be allowed provided they are tested for sulphate resistance and the criteria of C.23-
C must be met. 4.5.1. †
For exposure to seawater, other types of portland cement containing up to 10

percent tricalcium aluminate (C3A) are permitted if the w/ mc ratio
does not exceed 0.40.
‡
Other types of cement such as type III or type I are allowed in class S1 or S2
exposures if the C3A content is less than 8 or 5 percent, respectively.
§
The amount of the specific source of pozzolan or slag to be used should not be less
than the amount that has been determined by experience in improving sulfate
resistance when used in concrete containing Type V cement. Alternatively, the
amount of the specific source of pozzolan or slag to be used must not be less than
the amount tested according to NTC 3330 (ASTM C 1012) and must comply with the
requirements
ÿ
of C.4.5.1.
The content of water-soluble chloride ions from the ingredients, including water,
aggregates, cementitious materials, and concrete mix additives, must be determined
according to the requirements of NTC 4049 (ASTM C 1218M), at ages ranging from
28 to 42 days ± For lightweight concrete see
C.4.1.2
C.23-C.4.5 — Exposure to sulfates

C.23-C.4.5.1 — Concrete exposed to water or sewage or sulfate-containing soils shall meet the requirements of Table
C.23-C.4.3.1, or shall be made of a strength-producing cement. to sulfates and that complies with the water/cementing
material ratio and the minimum compressive strength given in Table C.23-
C.4.4.1.
C.23-C.4.6 — Chemical Protection of Concrete

C.23-C.4.6.1 — Concrete that may be subjected to attack by chemical solutions or corrosive gases must be protected as
indicated in C.23-C.4.6.2, C.23-C.4.6 .3, and C.23-C.4.6.4.
C.23-C.4.6.2 — The concrete must be proportioned appropriately taking into account the type of cement, the mix,
C-211
placement, consolidation, finishing and curing in order to make it impervious to liquids and gases.
C.23-C.4.6.3 — Concrete exposed to solutions or soils containing sulfates shall meet the requirements of C.23-C.4.5.
C.23-C.4.6.4 — Concrete exposed to chemical attack by sulfates, or chemicals and corrosive gases must be protected as
follows:
(a) Concrete exposed to copper sulfate or iron sulfate, or both, shall be made of sulfate-resistant cement, or provided with
a protective coating or coating in accordance with C.23-C.4.9. (b) Concrete must be protected against corrosive
chemicals by a coating or coating of
protection according to C.23-C.4.9.
C.23-C.4.6.5 — The materials used in the joints, including waterproof barriers, expansion joints, and sealants, must be
resistant to chemical attack for the entire useful life of the structure. Materials shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 920
and US Federal Government Specification TT-S-00277E for sealants, and ASTM D 570, ASTM D 746, ASTM D 1149, and
CRD-C572 for impermeable barriers. PVC.
C.23-C.4.7 — Tests to establish the possibility of chemical attack
C.23-C.4.7.1 — The composition and temperature of the liquid or gas and its pH must be tested to establish its aggressiveness
with the concrete and the protective barrier system.
C.23-C.4.7.2 — The suitability of the protection against chemical attack must be confirmed by means of tests. The tests should
establish the need for and effectiveness of special cements, coatings and linings, and other protective measures.
C.23-C.4.7.3 — Aggregates shall be tested for reaction to etching in accordance with ASTM C 295.
C.23-C.4.8 — Protection against erosion
C.23-C.4.8.1 — Concrete must be protected from erosion damage when subjected to cavitation or abrasion.
C.23-C.4.8.2 — For protection against cavitation erosion, one of the following methods must be used:
(a) Reducing the speed and pressure of the flow by placing baffles or other similar structures. (b) Use of
structural shapes, surface finishes, and tolerances that lead to a reduction in
cavitation rate to acceptable levels below the level of incipient cavitation.
(c) Incorporate air into the flow such that the air/liquid ratio near the solid boundary is approximately 8% by volume.
(d) Use of erosion resistant materials that meet the requirements of C.23-C.4.8.3.
C.23-C.4.8.3 — Where the structure may be affected by abrasive erosion, aggregates must meet the requirements of NTC
174 (ASTM C 33), concrete must be tested in accordance with ASTM C 1138, and concrete must meet the following additional
requirements:
(a) Minimum cfÿ = 35 MPa at 28 days.

(b) Maximum water/cementing material ratio = 0.40. (c)
Maximum air content = 6%. If it will not be subjected to freezing and thawing, the maximum content of
air = 3%.
(d) Minimum content of cementing material per cubic meter of concrete = 380 kg. (e) Hard,
dense and clean aggregates.
Where additional protection is required liners and covers shall be used in accordance with C.23-C.4.9.
C-212
C.23-C.4.8.4 — Structures subjected to cavitation erosion must be constructed with high-strength concrete, low water/
cementitious material ratio, and must have a smooth surface finish with minor changes in inclination in the direction of flow .
C.23-C.4.8.5 — Where there is a possibility of cavitation, reinforcing bars closest to the surface shall be placed parallel to
the direction of flow.
C.23-C.4.8.6 — When there is a possibility of cavitation, the goodness of the protection methods against cavitation erosion
must be confirmed by means of tests carried out in accordance with ASTM C 1138.
C.23-C.4.9 — Coatings and covers
C.23-C.4.9.1 — General — When concrete is in contact with chemicals or corrosive gases that attack the concrete mortar
matrix or reinforcing steel, linings or coverings must be used. Coatings or covers to prevent contact of noxious chemicals
or gases with the concrete surface must be impervious and have good adhesion.
C.23-C.4.9.2 — Ozone Compatibility — Surface coatings or coatings must not be used in contact with ozone gas without
determining their compatibility through tests.
C.23-C.4.9.3 — Coating Tests — Coatings shall be specified for the type of exposure expected. The effectiveness of
coatings must be established by testing. The thickness of coatings should be measured using instruments suitable for
measuring thicknesses of film materials. Spark tests of the joints of the covers must be carried out.
C.23-C.4.9.4 — Vapor transmission through coatings and coverings — When the transmission of water vapor through
coatings and coverings is dangerous, they must have a vapor transmission of less than 1 x 10-6 cm/s (34 g/h/m2 ) when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 96.
C.23-C.4.9.5 — Selection of coatings and covers
C.23-C.4.9.5.1 — The selection of coatings and covers should take into account the chemicals to which
They must be resistant within those that may exist in the environmental structure and that come into contact with them.
C.23-C.4.9.5.2 — The coatings and covers must be capable of bridging existing cracks or joints in the sub-base.
C.23-C.4.9.5.3 — The lining or covering must comply with all national requirements and regulations,
departmental, district and municipal when used in facilities that handle drinking water.
C.23-C.4.10 — Gaskets
C.23-C.4.10.1—General
Joints to compensate for movements (expansion and contraction) and construction joints must be designed to prevent
cracking and corrosion of the reinforcement. The number, spacing, and details of joints should be designed taking into
account the physical properties and ability of fillers, sealants, and waterproof barriers to withstand deformation cycles.
C.23-C.4.10.2 — Impervious barriers
Materials used in impermeable barriers to prevent the flow of liquids or gases must be capable of accepting elongation
and contraction movements and deformations without permanent deformation or failure and must resist freezing and
thawing cycles, temperature variation and the effects of attack. chemical.
Barriers can be made of rubber, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), steel, or other material. The former are used in joints where
greater movements are expected. For rubber and PVC barriers, the minimum thickness is
C-213
9.5 mm and must have a minimum width of 220 mm for expansion joints and 150 mm for other joints, which will be divided half and half between the
two concretes next to the joint. When they are made of steel, they must be 6 mm (1/4”) plate and a minimum of 75 mm must be embedded on each side
of the joint and a central fold whose size will depend on the expected movement.
C.23-C.4.10.3 — Sealants
Joint sealants must be placed along the exposed perimeter of the joints to prevent the passage of liquids and gases; and to prevent solids from entering
the joint and affecting its function. Sealants must be designed to be capable of withstanding the pressures, temperatures, and movements and must not
lose their adhesion or be affected under the expected chemical or gas attack, and must also withstand the expected pressures, temperatures and
movements.
Preformed sealants serve the dual function of serving as a formwork for the second side of the joint to be poured and of preserving space where
expansion can occur. The ideal filler element should be capable of resisting compression up to half its thickness and subsequently expanding to fill the
original space when the elements next to the joint contract. In general, cork, neoprene, rubber, polyurethane (foaming plastic or styrofoam), and other
materials are used. Wood cannot be used as filler.
C.23-C.4.10.4 — Exposure to ozone
Sealants, preformed fillers, and waterproof barriers used must be tested for ozone compatibility. Contraction joints (control joints) that are designed in a
wedge shape or cut with a diamond wheel must be filled with a sealant to protect the reinforcing steel.
C.23-C.4.10.5 — Shear wrenches
Where shear wrenches are used in joints to compensate for movement, the joint should be designed to prevent spalling and splitting of the concrete
leading to leakage. In addition, they must be carefully constructed so that they do not interfere with the barriers against the passage of water.
C.23-C.4.10.6 — Construction joints
C.23-C.4.10.6.1 — Where construction indicates a need for waterproofing, construction joints

must have an integral impervious barrier.
C.23-C.4.10.6.2 — in environmental engineering structures, the minimum time between the emptying of units
adjacent must be at least 48 hours.
C.23-C.6.1 — Formwork and falsework design
C.23-C.6.1.7 — The moorings of the formwork elements in structures that are going to contain liquids must be appropriate to guarantee the tightness of
the structure.
C.23-C.6.1.7.1 — The mooring systems of the formwork elements in structures that are going to contain liquids must not leave metallic elements or
any other material other than concrete within a distance equal to 40 mm from the surface of the element.
C.23-C.6.4 — Construction joints
C.23-C.6.4.8 — Construction joints in elements that must be watertight in environmental structures shall have an integral watertight barrier.
C.23-C.6.4.9 — In environmental structures, the time that elapses between the emptying of adjacent sectors cannot be less than 48 hours.
C.23-C.6.5 — Joints to compensate for movements
C-214
C.23-C.6.5.1 — The design must take into account all volumetric changes that may occur and minimize damage to the
structure.
The following requirements must be met in defining the types of joints to be used to compensate for volumetric and
geometry changes caused by setting shrinkage, creep, variations in temperature and moisture content, and differential
settlements. :
C.23-C.6.5.2 — Expansion joints, where used, shall include a compressible preformed filler, a joint sealant, and when
required to be waterproof, a waterproof barrier.
C.23-C.6.5.3 — Contraction joints, where used, may be partial or full, depending on the reinforcement detail, and shall
include a notch or recess in the surface for placement of the joint sealant. The main function of contraction joints, or
shrinkage dissipation joints, is to reduce the stresses produced by concrete setting shrinkage. The requirements for
contraction, partial-depth, or full-depth joints are as follows:
(a) Full depth contraction joints — In full depth contraction joints the reinforcement is suspended 50mm from the joint.
On the face of the concrete that is emptied in the first stage of the joint, a compound is placed to prevent the
adhesion of this concrete with the second stage. The joint must have a barrier of the type indicated in C.23-C.4.10.2.
When shear stresses must be transferred from one side of the joint to the other, greased transfer bars (dowels)
can be used. The separation between these joints must not be greater than that indicated in table C.23-C.7.12.2.1
for all the minimum amounts listed there. (b) Partial-depth contraction joints — Partial-depth
contraction joints are used when it is desired to transfer part of the tensile stress through the joint to tie the two parts of
the structure together. The passing reinforcement cannot be more than 50 percent of the reinforcement
perpendicular to the joint.
These joints should be spaced on the order of 2/3 of the total depth joints.
C.23-C.7.7 — Concrete protection for reinforcement

The requirements of C.7.7.1, C.7.7.2 and C.7.7.3 are replaced by Table C.23-C.7.7.1 where the coatings to be used in
environmental structures are presented.
TABLE C.23-C.7.7.1 — CONCRETE PROTECTION FOR REINFORCEMENT IN

ENVIRONMENTAL STRUCTURES
Prestressed
concrete precast
built on site concrete poured
Condition concrete in place 75
Note 1
mm
(a) Concrete poured against the ground and in permanent contact with it (b) Concrete 75mm Does not 40 mm
slabs and joists 50mm apply 40 mm
exposed to the beams and Abutments and spirals 50mm 40 mm 50 mm
liquids, earth columns, Main reinforcement 65mm 40 mm 40 mm
outdoors, or in walls 50mm 50 mm 40 mm
slabs that footings and Cast surfaces against formwork 50mm Does not apply Does not apply
support foundation
earth fills Top surface of footings and base slabs 50mm Does not apply Does not apply
slabs
Shells and Folded Slabs No. 11 40mm 25 mm 25mm
(1-3/8”) or 36M (36mm) and smaller Bars No. 14 (1-3/4”) 20mm 20 mmNote-2 20mm
slabs
or 45M (45mm) and No. 18 (2-1 /4”) or 55M (55mm) 40mm 40mm Note-3 40mm
and joists
beams Stirrups and spirals 40mm 25mm 25mm

(c) Conditions and columns Main reinforcement 50mm 40mm 40mm
not covered in (a) Bars No. 11 (1-3/8”) or 36M (36 mm) and smaller Bars No. 20mm Note-2 20mm 20mm
or (b) walls 14 (1-3/4”) or 45M (45 mm) and No. 18 (1- Note-3
40mm 40mm 40mm
3/8”) or 36M (36 mm) and smaller No.
Shells and 5 (5/8”) or 16M (16 mm) bars, MW30 or MD30 wire (6.2 mm 13mm 20mm 20mm
folded diameter), or smaller No. 6 (3/ 4”) or 20M (20mm)
slabs and larger 20mm 25mm 25mm
Note-1 – Built under control conditions in a prefabrication plant
Note-2 – Includes prestressing ducts less than 40 mm in diameter
Note-3 – Includes prestressing ducts greater than or equal to 40 mm in diameter
C-215
C.23-C.7.12 — Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement
C.23-C.7.12.2.1 — In elements exposed to environmental conditions or that must be waterproof, including slabs and
walls, the shrinkage and temperature reinforcement area must comply, as a minimum, with the reinforcement area amounts
on the gross section given in Table C.23-C.7.12.2.1.
TABLE C.23-C.7.12.2.1 — MINIMUM QUANTITIES OF SETTING

SHRINKAGE AND TEMPERATURE VARIATION
Distance between Minimum amounts of reinforcement for setting
joints to shrinkage and temperature variation
compensate
for movements†
y f = 240 MPa y f = 420 MPa

less than 6 m 6 0.0030 0.0030
to less than 9 m 9 to 0.0040 0.0030
less than 12 m 0.0050 0.0040
12 m or more 0.0060* 0.0050*
†
The distance is between expansion joints and full depth contraction joints.
In the case of partial depth contraction joints, the minimum amounts must be
determined by multiplying the actual distance between partial depth contraction
joints by 1.5.
*Corresponds to the maximum amount to be used when joints are not

provided to compensate for movements.
For concrete sections that are greater than or equal to 600 mm thick, shrinkage and temperature reinforcement can be
determined based on a 300 mm thick layer of concrete on each of the member surfaces. The reinforcement on the
underside of slabs in contact with the ground may be reduced by 50% of that required by Table C.23-C.7.12.2.1.
C.23-C.7.12.2.2 — Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall not be spaced more than 300 mm apart and the
minimum bar size shall be No. 4 (1/2”) or 12M (12 mm). At least 1/3 of the area required for shrinkage and temperature
reinforcement shall be placed on either face of the member.
C.23-C.8.1 — Design methods
C.23-C.8.1.1 — The structural design of tanks, other watertight compartments and environmental structures must be
carried out for the limit states of resistance and operation, as defined in Title C of Regulation NSR-10 using the factors of
load and resistance reduction ÿ given in Chapter C.9. The design of environmental structures is particularly aimed at
minimizing cracking and fissuring, which gives rise to additional requirements.
C.23-C.8.2.5 — The effects caused by internal pressure within the structure, the movements of the joints and the separation
between them, and the filling and emptying of the contents of the tanks must be taken into account.
C.23-C.8.2.6 — The effects of groundwater pressures must be taken into account in the design, especially uppressures
on unoccupied tanks. Precautions must be taken to avoid tank failure due to buoyancy effects by providing adequate
ballasts. Likewise, and in the absence of adequate drainage, the effect that eventual leaks may have on the evaluation of
the water table must be considered.
C.23-C.8.2.7 — In buried tanks that are tested for tightness before external filling, this condition must be considered in
their structural design.
C.23-C.8.2.8 — Special care must be taken when defining the values of liquid pressures, ground pressures and all the
forces produced by the operation of the structure and any equipment on it.
C-216
C.23-C.9.2 — Strength required
C.23-C.9.2.6 — The required resistance U for sections that are not controlled by compression, as defined in C.10.3.3 must be
multiplied by the following coefficient of environmental durability Sd in those portions of environmental structures where
durability, tightness, or other operational considerations must be taken into account.
ÿF
and
Sd = ÿ 1.0 (C.23-1)
ÿF
yes
factored charge
where ÿ =
unfactored charge
and where sf is the allowable tensile stress in the reinforcement given below.
(a) In the case of shear design this coefficient Sd is applied only to the portion of the shear resistance that is carried by
the shear reinforcement. (b) The coefficient of
durability should not be used in designs that use service loads or stresses
admissible.
(c) The use of the environmental durability coefficient Sd is not required in load combinations that include
seismic forces E .
C.23-C.9.2.6.1 — Stress sf caused by bending: see C.23-C.10.6.4.
C.23-C.9.2.6.2 — Direct traction or annular tensile stresses in normal environmental exposure:

sf 140 = MPa
C.23-C.9.2.6.3 — Direct traction or annular traction forces in severe environmental exposure:

sf 120 = MPa
C.23-C.9.2.6.4 — Stresses in reinforcement for shear caused by shear in normal environmental exposure:
sf 170 = MPa
C.23-C.9.2.6.5 — Stresses in reinforcement for shear caused by shear in severe environmental exposure:
sf 140 = MPa
C.23-C.9.2.7 — Sd should be taken as 1.0 for the flexural design of sections controlled by compression, in the prestressed
reinforcement and in the anchorage zones of post-tensioned elements, regardless of environmental exposure.
C.23-C.10.5 — Minimum reinforcement in elements subjected to bending
C.23-C.10.5.3 — The requirements of C.10.5.1 and C.10.5.2 need not be applied if in each section the As provided is at least
one third higher than that required by analysis for the required resistance U without including the environmental durability
coefficient Sd .
C.23- C.10.6 — Flexural reinforcement distribution in beams and slabs in one and two
directions
C.23-C.10.6.1 — This section establishes rules for the distribution of flexural reinforcement and allowable stresses
C-217
used to control cracking in all sections that are not controlled by compression. The requirements of this section do not
apply to load combinations that include seismic forces,
C.23-C.10.6.2 — The distribution of flexural reinforcement in slabs in two directions shall be done in accordance with the
provisions of C.13.3. In environmental structures, for the application of C.23-C.10.6.4, slabs with a long side to short side
ratio not greater than 2 shall be considered members in two directions and slabs with a long side to short side ratio greater
that 2 should be considered elements in one direction.
C.23-C.10.6.3 — Flexural tension reinforcement shall be properly distributed in the zones of maximum flexural tension of
the cross section of an element, according to the requirements of C.10.6.4.
C.23-10.6.4 — The calculated stress in the reinforcement closest to the face in tension at service levels sf shall not exceed
the value given by equations (C.23-2) and (C.23-3) , nor should it exceed a maximum of 250 MPa:
C.23-10.6.4.1 — In areas of normal environmental exposure, as defined by C.23-C.10.6.4.5:
57,000
F
s, max
= (C.23-2)
2
s24 50 d 2 )
( ÿ+ + b
but it need not be less than 140 MPa for one-way members, nor less than 170 MPa for two-way members.
C.23-C.10.6.4.2 — In areas of severe environmental exposure, as defined by C.23-C.10.6.4.5:
46,500
F
s, max
= (C.23-3)
2 2
s 4 50 d 2
( ÿ+ + b )
but it need not be less than 120 MPa for one-way members, nor less than 140 MPa for two-way members.
C.23-C.10.6.4.3 — In equations (C.23-2) and (C.23-3) it is permitted to use a value of 15 625 for the term (
4 50 d 2 +
)2 b as a simplification.
C.23-C.10.6.4.4 — The strain gradient amplification factor is given by:
hc ÿ
ÿ= (C.23-4)
dc ÿ
where c is calculated at the level of service charges. Instead of this more precise computation, it is permissible to use ÿ
equal to 1.2 for h ÿ 400 mm and equal to 1.35 for h < 400 mm in equations (C.23-2) and (C.23-3).
C.23-C.10.6.4.5 — For sealed compartments, normal environmental exposure is defined as exposure to liquids with a
pH greater than 5, or exposure to solutions containing sulfates in amounts of 1000 ppm or less. Severe environmental
exposure occurs when the limits that define normal environmental exposure are exceeded.
C.23-C.10.6.4.6 — The flexural stress in the reinforcement at the level of service loads sf in MPa shall be calculated as
the unfactored moment divided by the product of the area of the steel reinforcement times the internal lever arm.
C.23-C.10.6.5 — Where the appearance of the concrete surface is important and the concrete cover exceeds 75 mm, the
flexural tensile stresses in the reinforcement at the level of service loads shall not exceed the values given in C.23-C.10.6.4
ni s for the reinforcement closest to the face in tension may exceed the value given by:
C-218
ÿ ÿÿ 280
ÿ
ÿ
= s 380 ÿ
ÿ
2.5c
c
(C.23-5)
Fyes
but it cannot be greater than 300 mm.
C.23-C.11.1 — Shear resistance
C.23-C.11.1.1 — The design of cross sections subjected to shear must be based on
ÿ VV
ÿ no or
(C.23-C.11-1)
where Vu is the factored shear force in the considered section and Vn is the nominal shear resistance calculated using
V
VV = + (C.23-C.11-2)
yes
no c
Sd
where Vc is the nominal shear resistance provided by the concrete, calculated in accordance with C.11.2, C.11.3, or C.11.11 and Vs is
the nominal shear resistance provided by the shear reinforcement calculated in accordance with C.11.4 , C.11.9.9 or C.11.11.
C.23-C.14 — Walls
C.23-C.14.1.1 — The provisions of Chapter C.14 shall be applied to the design of planar walls subjected to axial load, with or without
flexure, and to circular walls subjected to axial load and annular forces, with or without flexure.
C.23-C.14.3 — Minimum reinforcement
C.23-C.14.3.1 — Minimum vertical and horizontal reinforcement for setting temperature and shrinkage shall comply with the provisions
of C.23-C.14.3.2 and C.23-C.14.3.3.
C.23-C.14.3.2 — The minimum amount for vertical reinforcement ÿ is 0.0030.
C.23-C.14.3.3 — The minimum amount for horizontal reinforcement, ÿt , is a function of the distance between joints to compensate for
movement and must comply with C.23-C.7.12.2.1.
C.23-C.14.3.4 — Walls thicker than 250 mm shall have reinforcement in each direction placed in two layers parallel to the wall faces in
accordance with:
(a) A layer consisting of not less than 1/2, and not more than 2/3 of the total reinforcement required for each direction shall be
placed not less than the cover indicated in C.23-C.7.7 nor more than 1 /3 of the thickness of the wall from the outer surface. (b) The
other layer, consisting of
the remainder of the reinforcement required in that direction, shall be placed not less than the cover indicated in C.23-C.7.7 nor
more than 1/3 the thickness of the wall from the surface. inside.
C.23-C.14.3.5 — Vertical and horizontal reinforcement must be spaced no more than 300 mm apart.
C.23-C.14.3.6 — Vertical reinforcement need not be confined by side ties when the vertical reinforcement is not more than 0.01 times
the total concrete area, or when the vertical reinforcement is not required as compression reinforcement.
C.23-C.14.3.7 — In addition to the minimum reinforcement specified above, an amount of reinforcement equal to the reinforcement
interrupted by any opening shall be added to the sides of the opening. These bars should
C-219
extended to develop the yf in tension at the corners of rectangular openings and beyond the intersection with other bars for
replacement of interrupted reinforcement in circular openings, but not less than 600
mm.
C.23-C.14.5.3 — Minimum thickness of walls designed by the empirical design method
C.23-C.14.5.3.1 — The thickness of load-bearing walls whose vertical stability is not derived from the curvature of the wall in plan
must not be less than 1/25 of the height or length of the wall, whichever is less, nor it cannot be less than 200 mm either.
C.23-C.14.5.3.2 — This section does not apply to environmental structures.
C.23-C.14.6 — Minimum thickness of walls

C.23-C.14.6.1 — The thickness of the walls that are not load-bearing whose vertical stability is not derived from the curvature of
the wall in plan must not be less than 150 mm, nor less than 1/30 of the minimum distance between elements that provide lateral
support.
C.23-C.14.6.2 — The minimum thickness of conventional reinforced concrete walls built on site that are in contact with liquids and
are more than 3 m high must be 300 mm.
C.23-C.15.14 — Slabs on Ground in Environmental Structures

C.23-C.15.14.1 — Scope — In environmental structures, three types of slabs are considered on the ground:
1. Structural foundation slabs 2. Slabs on the

ground 3. Slabs-membrane
The requirements for structural foundation slabs are within the requirements contained in Title C of NSR-10. This section covers
the requirements for slab-on-ground and slab-membrane reinforced concrete environmental structures. The design of this type of
slabs is based on the premise that the slab transmits the loads directly to the sub-base without distributing them, or it only
distributes vehicle wheel loads to the sub-base like pavements.
C.23-C.15.14.2 — Sub-base — The sub-base must have sufficient strength, rigidity, and stability to support the loads to which it
will be subjected.
C.23-C.15.14.2.2 — The possibility of settlement of the sub-base must be taken into account in the design of the slab.
Points of greater or lesser resistance within the sub-base must be identified and taken into account in the design.
It should be considered the case that the slab is supported on more than one type of sub-base, such as part on cut and part on fill.
C.23-C.15.14.2.3 — Erosion of the sub-base caused by water flow under the slab must be prevented. The gradation of backfill
material should be selected to allow free flow of water without loss of fines or to provide a geo-textile in the event that liquid leaks
through a slab joint. If the soil in place is unsuitable, it should be removed and replaced with a fill of selected material.
C.23-C.15.14.2.4 — The subbase for slabs shall have uniform density and compressibility to minimize differential settlement
between the slab and footings on other portions of the structure. Loosely consolidated or remolded soil should be removed and
replaced with a properly compacted selected material. Excavation and replacement of the soil with a selected, properly compacted
material should be performed when the soils on the site are not suitable for the expected loads or do not provide uniform support.
C.23-C.15.14.2.5 — The level of the surface of the sub-base where the slab is to be placed must be between +0 mm and -25
mm in any section of 30 m length. All variations in level should be smooth and gradual.
C-220
C.23-C.15.14.3 — Slab thickness
C.23-C.15.14.3.1 — The minimum thickness for slabs on the ground is:
• 100 mm for slabs with only one layer of non-prestressed reinforcement. • 125 mm
for slabs with prestressed reinforcement. • 150 mm for slabs
with reinforcement, upper and lower.
C.23-C.15.14.3.2 — The minimum thickness of membrane slabs is:
• 75 mm with electro-welded reinforcement. •

100 mm for non-prestressed slabs with electro-welded beams or No. 4 (1/2”) or 12M (12 mm) or smaller reinforcing bars. Non-
prestressed slabs with reinforcing bars with a diameter greater than No. 4 (1/2”) or 12M (12 mm) shall have a minimum thickness
such that the cover requirements of C.23-
C.15.14.4.4; •
125 mm for prestressed slabs.
C.23-C.15.14.3.3 — The maximum thickness for membrane slabs is:
• 150 mm for non-prestressed slabs. • 175 mm

for prestressed slabs.
C.23-C.15.14.3.4 — The tolerances for the level of the finished surface of the slab are -0 mm and +20 mm, with a difference not greater
than ±6 mm in 3 m.
C.23-C.15.14.4 — Reinforcement
C.23-C.15.14.4.1 — Slabs on ground may be reinforced with one or two layers of reinforcement. Membrane slabs can only have one
layer of reinforcement. The minimum reinforcement cannot be less than that prescribed in C.23-
C.7.12. Prestressed reinforcement, if used, should not be less than the amount required to impose a compressive stress of 1.4 MPa on the
slab.
C.23-C.15.14.4.2 — The minimum amount of reinforcement on the gross section must be 0.0050 in each orthogonal direction in non-
prestressed membrane-slabs. Additional reinforcement must be placed at edges and other discontinuities in accordance with the design.
Welded reinforcement or corrugated reinforcing bars must be used.
The maximum spacing between parallel wires in the electrowelded reinforcement cannot be greater than 100 mm. The maximum spacing
between deformed bars shall be the lesser of 300 mm and twice the thickness of the slab.
C.23-C.15.14.4.3 — Prestressed membrane-slabs must have reinforcement in the two main orthogonal directions and must induce a final
compressive stress of 1.4 MPa. Prestressed reinforcement shall be placed within the center third of the slab thickness. Tendons should be
tensioned as soon as the strength of the concrete is adequate to resist the forces of the anchors. The minimum amount of non-prestressed
reinforcement must be 0.0015 in each orthogonal direction. Additional reinforcement must be placed at edges and other discontinuities in
accordance with the design.
C.23-C.15.14.4.4 — The reinforcement cover on the upper surface of the slab must not be less than 40 mm for slabs on the ground and
25 mm for membrane-slabs. The cover between the lower surface of the slab and the reinforcement must not be less than 40 mm in both
slabs on the ground and in slab-membrane when the subbase is stabilized in such a way that the concrete pour does not displace it or
when the sub-base is covered with a plastic barrier. The cover must not be less than 50 mm when the sub-base is not stabilized or when the
plastic barrier is not placed. Slabs on ground thicker than 200mm must meet the same cover requirements as foundation slabs. The
reinforcement should be held in a proper upright position by means of chairs or concrete cubes.
C.23-C.15.14.5 — Gaskets
C.23-C.15.14.5.1 — Impermeable barriers must be used at all slab joints in structures that will contain liquids. Slab pouring should be
done continuously in as large sections as possible to avoid the need for construction joints especially where there is no space to place the
waterproof barrier. Integral waterproof barriers should not be used on sections less than 125mm thick.
C-221
Integral waterproof barriers must have at least 25 mm of concrete between the surface of the barrier and the surface of the
concrete. Watertight barriers designed to be placed at the bottom of the joint must be placed in such a way that the surface
of the barrier is at least 25 mm away from the reinforcing steel.
C.23-C.15.14.5.2 — The design of slabs on the ground must take into account any thickening of the section
of the slab or the transitions that are required.
C.23-C.15.14.6 — Effect of uplift buoyancy
C.23-C.15.14.6.1 — Slabs that may be subjected to a buoyant effect caused by sub-slab uppressure shall be designed to
have adequate sub-slab drains to dissipate the uppressure, relief valves, or be designed to that resist subpressure. When
relief valves are designed, the slab should be designed to withstand the uppressure that occurs until the time the relief
valves open.
C.23-C.15.14.7 — Cured
C.23-C.15.14.7.1 — The concrete must be cured in accordance with the requirements of this Title C.
C.23-C.21 — Seismic resistant design requirements

C.23-C.21.1.1.2 — Appendix A-1 of Title A of the NSR-10 Regulation gives the earthquake resistant design requirements
for environmental structures, among others that have dynamic characteristics different from those of buildings or that stand
out the scope of Regulation NSR-10. There, the energy dissipation capacity of reinforced concrete environmental structures
is designated as minimum (DMI), moderate (DMO) or special (DES) and this designation governs the application to
environmental structures of the requirements contained in Chapter C.21.
C.23-C.21.1.1.9 — Special definitions for environmental structures
Liquid-containing structure — A primary or secondary environmental structure that is designed to contain materials in a
liquid or gaseous state. The structure may have any shape in plan and may have multiple stories and roofs.
Convective pressure — The hydrodynamic pressure on a liquid-containing structure during an earthquake caused by the
top of the wave occurring in the liquid.
Impulsive pressure — The hydrodynamic pressure on a liquid-containing structure during the earthquake caused by the
bottom of the contained liquid.
C.23-C.21.1.2.4 — Special considerations for the earthquake resistant design of environmental structures
The requirements for the determination of seismic forces and the corresponding analysis of reinforced concrete environmental
structures are found in Appendix A-1 of Title A of NSR-10.
The designer must take into account that in environmental structures, operational considerations prevent the environmental
structure from having excessive oscillations in the inelastic range. For this reason the values of the response modification
coefficient R for environmental structures are substantially lower than those for conventional buildings.
As indicated in C.23-C.9.2.6, there is no need to use the environmental durability coefficient Sd in the seismic resistant
design of environmental structures since load combinations that include seismic effects are used in it.
C.23-C.22 — Plain structural concrete

The use of simple structural concrete in environmental structures is not allowed.
ÿ
C-222
NSR-10 – Appendix CA – Strut-Tie Models
APPENDIX CA — STRUT-TIES MODELS
CA.1 — Definitions
Discontinuity — Abrupt change in geometry or load.
Strut-and-tie model — A truss model of a structural element, or of a D-region of that element, made with struts and ties
connected at the nodes, capable of transferring factored loads to the members. supports or to adjacent B-regions.
Node — In a strut-tie model, where the axes of the struts, ties, and concentrated forces acting at the node intersect.
Strut — A compression element in the strut-tie model. A strut represents the resultant of a parallel or fan-shaped compression
field.
Bottle-shaped strut — A strut that is wider in the center than at its ends.
B-region (B-region) — Part of an element in which the assumptions of plane sections, mentioned from the bending theory
in C.10.2.2, can be applied.
D-region (D-region) — The part of an element within a distance h of a force or geometric discontinuity.
Tie (Tie) — A tension element in the strut-tie model.
Deep beam — See C.10.7.1 and C.11.7.1.
Nodal zone — The volume of concrete around a node that is assumed to transfer the forces from the struts and ties through
the node.
CA.2 — Strut-tie model design procedure
CA.2.1 — It is permitted to design structural concrete elements, or D-regions in these elements, by modeling the element or
region as an idealized truss. The truss model must contain struts, ties, and nodes, as defined in CA1. The truss model must
be capable of transferring all factored loads to the adjacent supports or B-regions.
CA.2.2 — The strut-tie model must be in equilibrium with the applied loads and reactions.
CA.2.3 — To determine the geometry of the truss, the dimensions of the uprights, ties and nodal zones must be considered.
CA.2.4 — Turnbuckles are allowed to pass through the struts. Struts should cross or overlap at nodes only.
CA.2.5 — The angle, ÿ , between the axes of any strut and any tie entering a single node must not
shall be less than 25°.
CA.2.6 — The design of the struts, ties and nodal zones must be based on:
ÿFF
ÿ no or
(CA-1)
where Fu is the factored force acting on a strut or a tie, or on a face of a nodal zone; Fn is the nominal resistance of the
strut, tie rod or nodal zone; ÿ is specified in C.9.3.2.6.
C-223
CA.3 — Strength of props
CA.3.1 — The nominal resistance to compression of a strut without longitudinal reinforcement, Fns , must be taken as the
smaller value of
FfA = (CA-2)
ns ce cs
at the two ends of the strut, where Acs is the cross-sectional area at one end of the strut, and, the smaller of (a) f is the
EC
and (b):
(a) the effective compressive strength of the concrete at the prop given in CA.3.2,
(b) the effective compressive strength in the concrete in the nodal zone given in CA.5.2.
CA.3.2 — The effective compressive strength of the concrete, F

EC
, at a prop should be taken as
= f
f 0.85 ÿ sc
ÿ
(CA-3)
EC
CA.3.2.1 — For a strut with uniform cross section along its length ÿ = 1.0 yes
CA.3.2.2 — For struts located such that the midsection width of the strut is greater than the
width at nodes (bottle-shaped struts):
(a) With reinforcement that complies with CA.3.3 ................................................................ ....................................... ÿ = 0.75 yes
(b) Without reinforcement complying with CA.3.3 ................................................................ ....................................... ÿ= ÿ 0.60 yes
where ÿ is defined in C.8.6.1.
CA.3.2.3 — For uprights in elements subjected to tension, or flanges in

traction of the elements ................................................................ ................................................................ ...................... ÿ = 0.40
yes
CA.3.2.4 — For all other cases ................................................................ ..................................... ÿ= ÿ 0.60

yes
CA.3.3 — If the value of ÿs specified in C.3.2.2(a) is used, the axis of the upright shall be crossed by reinforcement designed
to resist the transverse tensile force resulting from the expansion of the compressive force in the strut. It is allowed to
assume that the compressive force expands in struts with a slope from 2 longitudinal to 1 transverse to the axis of the strut.
CA.3.3.1 — For a cfÿ not greater than 40 MPa, it is assumed that the provisions of CA.3.3 are satisfied when the axis of
the strut is crossed by rows of reinforcement that satisfy equation (CA-4).
TO
ÿ bsyes
Yeah
without ÿ ÿ 0.003
i (CA-4)
where Asi is the total area of surface reinforcement with a spacing s in the layer i of reinforcement with bars at an angle ÿi Yo
with respect to the axis of the strut.
CA.3.3.2 — The reinforcement required in CA.3.3 shall be placed in one of the following ways: in orthogonal directions at
angles ÿ1 and ÿ2 with respect to the axis of the upright, or in one direction at an angle ÿ with respect to the axis of the strut.
If the reinforcement is placed in only one direction, ÿ must not be less than 40°.
CA.3.4 — If documented by testing and analysis, the increased effective compressive strength of the strut due to confining
reinforcement is permitted to be used.
C-224
CA.3.5 — The use of compression reinforcement to increase the strength of a strut is permitted. Compression reinforcement shall
be placed within it, parallel to the axis of the strut, adequately anchored, and surrounded by stirrups or spirals complying with C.7.10.
In these cases, the nominal strength of a longitudinally braced upright
is:
f A=A fce+cs (CA-5)

ÿÿ
F ns H.H
CA.4 — Resistance of the tensioners
CA.4.1 — The nominal resistance of a tensioner, Fnt , must be calculated as
F ntAf =
A f + ts and tp se
+ÿ (
f
p
) (CA-6)
where ( p
)
FHE f + ÿ must not exceed f py , and Atp is equal to zero for non-prestressed elements.
In equation (CA-6), it is allowed to take ÿf equal to

p 420 MPa for the bonded prestressed reinforcement, or 70 MPa for
unbonded prestressed reinforcement. Other values of ÿf are permitted when justified

p
by analysis.
CA.4.2 — The axis of reinforcement in a tie must coincide with the axis of the tie in the strut-tie model.
CA.4.3 — The turnbuckle reinforcement shall be anchored by mechanical devices, post-tensioned anchorage devices, standard
hooks, or by straight bar development, as required by CA.4.3.1 to CA.4.3.4.
CA.4.3.1 — The nodal zones must develop the difference between the force in the tie on one side of the node and the force in the
tie on the other side of the node.
CA.4.3.2 — In nodal zones anchoring a single guy, the force in the guy must be developed at the point
where the centroid of the tensile reinforcement leaves the extended nodal zone and enters the lumen of the element.
CA.4.3.3 — In nodal zones that anchor two or more ties, the tether force in each direction must
develop at the point where the centroid of the tensile reinforcement leaves the extended nodal zone.
CA.4.3.4 — Transverse reinforcement required by CA.3.3 shall be anchored in accordance with C.12.13.
CA.5 — Resistance of nodal zones
CA.5.1 — The nominal compressive strength of a nodal zone, Fnn , shall be
FfA =
nn ce nz (A-7)
where f is the effective compressive strength of concrete in a nodal zone, as given in CA.5.2 and Anz is the lesser of (a) and (b):
EC
(a) the area of the face of a nodal zone where Fu acts , taken perpendicular to the line of action of
Fu , or
(b) the area of a section through the nodal zone, taken perpendicular to the line of action of the resultant force in the section.
CA.5.2 — Unless confining reinforcement is placed within the nodal zone and its effects are supported by testing and analysis, the
FEC , forces- tensor, must not exceed the value
effective compressive stresses, calculated on one face of a nodal zone due to strut model
given by:
C-225
ÿ
F
EC = ÿ0.85f nc (CA-8)
where the value of ÿn is given in CA.5.2.1 to CA.5.2.3.
CA.5.2.1 — In nodal zones limited by props or support areas, or both .............................. ÿ = 1.0 no
CA.5.2.2 — In nodal zones that anchor a tensioner ................................................................ .......................... ÿ no= 0.80
either
CA.5.2.3 — In nodal zones that anchor two or more ties ................................................................ ....... ÿ = 0.60
no
CA.5.3 — In a three-dimensional strut-tie model, the area of each face of a nodal zone shall not be less than that given in
CA.5.1, and the shape of each face of the nodal zones shall be similar to the shape of the projection of the end of the
struts on the corresponding faces of the nodal zones.
C-226
NSR-10 – Appendix CB – Alternative Design Provisions for Concrete Elements
Reinforced and Prestressed Subjected to Flexion and Compression
APPENDIX CB — ALTERNATIVE DESIGN PROVISIONS

FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE ELEMENTS AND
PRESTRESSED SUBJECTED TO FLEXURE AND COMPRESSION
CB.1 — Scope
Design for bending and axial loading is permitted in accordance with the provisions of Appendix B. When Appendix B is used
in the design, CB.8.4, CB.8.4.1, CB.8.4.2, and CB.8.4.3 should replace the correspondingly numbered sections of Chapter
C.8: CB.10.3.3 should replace C.10.3.3, C.10.3.4 and C.10.3.5, except C.10.3.5.1 which is retained ; CB.18.1.3, CB.18.8.1,
CB.18.8.2 and CB.18.8.3 replace the correspondingly numbered sections of Chapter C.18; CB.18.10.4, CB.18.10.4.1,
CB.18.10.4.2, and CB.18.10.4.3 shall replace C.18.10.4, C.18.10.4.1, and C.18.10.4.2. If any section of this appendix is
used, all sections in this appendix shall be substituted in the body of Title C of the NSR-10 Regulation, and all other sections
of the body of Title C of the NSR-10 Regulation are applicable.
CB.8.4 — Moment redistribution in continuous non-prestressed flexural members
For the application of criteria in the redistribution of moments for prestressed concrete elements, see CB.18.10.4.
CB8.4.1 — Except where approximate values for moments are used, factored moments, calculated by means of elastic
theory, are permitted to be reduced in sections of maximum negative moment or maximum positive moment and in any span
of continuous members in bending, for any load disposition, in no more than
ÿ ÿÿÿÿ ÿ
twenty 1ÿ ÿ
percent ÿ
ÿÿ ÿb _
CB.8.4.2 — The redistribution of moments must be performed only when the section in which it is being
reducing the moment has been designed in such a way that ÿ or ÿ ÿ ÿÿ is not greater than whereb0.50ÿ ,
ÿ 0.85ÿ f1 cÿ 600 ÿ
ÿÿ =
ÿb
(CB-1)
f 600f
and +ÿ and ÿÿÿ
CB.8.4.3 — The reduced moments shall be used to calculate the redistributed moments in all other sections within the
spans. Static equilibrium must be maintained after moment redistribution for each load arrangement.
CB.10.3 — General principles and requirements
CB.10.3.3 — In members subjected to bending and in members subjected to a combination of bending and compression
ÿ , axial loads, when Pn ÿ is less than the smaller of the amount of reinforcement,
0.10f
ÿ , cg
provided
Aÿ and Pb
should not exceed 0.75 of the
amount ÿb that would produce balanced strain conditions in the section subjected to bending without axial load. In members
with compression reinforcement, the part of ÿb
balanced by compression reinforcement need not be reduced by the factor 0.75.
C-227
CB.18.1 — Scope
CB.18.1.3 — The following provisions of this Title C of the NSR-10 Regulation do not apply to prestressed concrete, except
as specifically indicated: C.6.4.4, C.7.6.5, CB.8.4, C.8.12 .2, C.8.12.3, C.8.12.4, C.8.13, CB.10.3.3, C.10.5, C.10.6,
C.10.9.1, and C.10.9.2; Chapter C.13; and C.14.3, C.14.5, and C.14.6.
CB.18.8 — Limits of reinforcement in members subjected to bending
C-B18.8.1 — The amount of prestressed and non-prestressed reinforcement used to calculate the flexural resistance of an
(dd p )( ÿÿÿ
ÿ
ÿÿ+p
element, except as provided in C-B18.8.2, must be such that ÿp , ÿ ÿ)ÿ,
either
ÿ ÿ + pw ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ ) is not greater than 0.36ÿ ,1except as permitted in CB.18.8.2. ÿ

ÿ ()dd (
pww
The amount ÿp is calculated as ÿ f fÿ p. ps

Thec amounts ÿw and ÿpw are calculated as ÿ and ÿp , respectively, except that
when calculating ÿ and ÿp , bw must be used instead of b and the area of reinforcement or prestressing steel required to
develop the compressive strength of the web alone. should be used instead of As or Aps . The amount ÿÿ is calculated as
ÿÿw , except that when calculating ÿÿ , bw must be used instead of b .
C-B18.8.2 — When an amount of reinforcement greater than that indicated in C-B18.8.1 is used, the design flexural
strength shall not exceed the flexural strength based on the moment couple compressive force.
C-B18.8.3 — The total amount of reinforcement, prestressed and non-prestressed, shall be that necessary to develop a
factored load of at least 1.2 times the cracking load, calculated based on the modulus of rupture, rf , specified in C .9.5.2.3.
This provision can be omitted for:
(a) slabs in two directions with unbonded post-tensioning
(b) flexural members with a shear and flexural strength at least twice that required in C.9.2.
CB.18.10 — Statically indeterminate structures
C-B18.10.1 — Prestressed concrete frames and continuous members shall be designed for a
satisfactory behavior under service loads and to offer adequate resistance.
C-B18.10.2 — The behavior under service load must be determined through an elastic analysis, considering the
reactions, moments, shear and axial forces produced by prestressing, creep, shrinkage, temperature variations, axial
deformation, restraint caused by adjacent structural elements and foundation settlements.
C-B18.10.3 — The moments used to calculate the required strength shall be the sum of the moments due to the reactions
induced by the prestressing (with a factor of 1.0) and the moments due to the factored design loads . It is allowed to adjust
the sum of these moments as indicated by C-B18.10.4.
C-B18.10.4 — Redistribution of moments in continuous prestressed members subjected to bending
C-B18.10.4.1 — When bonded reinforcement is provided at supports in accordance with C.18.9, the negative or positive
moments calculated by elastic theory for any assumed loading arrangement are permitted to be increased or decreased
by no more than:
C-228
d
ÿ + ÿÿÿÿ
p d
( ÿ)ÿ
p
ÿ ÿ 20 1
ÿ
in percentage
0.36 ÿ 1
ÿ ÿ
C-B18.10.4.2 — The redistribution of moments must be done only when the section in which the ÿÿ + ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ (dd )( ) is
ÿÿ + dd )( ÿÿÿ ÿ either reduced , whichever
( moment is designed such that ÿp , ÿ p p ÿ)ÿ, pw applies,
pww ÿ ÿ ,
is not greater than 0.24ÿ 1.
C-B18.10.4.3 — Reduced moments shall be used to calculate redistributed moments in all other span sections. Static
equilibrium must be maintained after moment redistribution for each load arrangement.
C-229
Grades:
C-230
NSR-10 – Appendix CC – Alternative Resistance Derating and Load Factors
APPENDIX CC — LOAD FACTORS AND REDUCTION

ALTERNATIVE RESISTANCE
CC.9.1 — Scope
Design of structural concrete using the load combination and strength reduction factors of Appendix C is permitted. When Appendix
CC is used in design, CC.9.2.1 to CC.9.2.7 shall supersede C.9.2.1 to C.9.2.5, and CC.9.3.1 to CC.9.3.5 should replace C.9.3.1 to
C.9.3.5.
CC9.2 — Resistance required
CC9.2.1 — The required resistance U , which must resist the dead load D and the live load L that: , should not be less
=
U 1.4D 1.7L + (CC.9-1)
CC9.2.2 — For structures that also resist W , wind load, or E must be less than the , the effects of loading by earthquake, U not
greatest value obtained from equations (CC.9-1), (CC.9-2) and (CC.9-3 ):
U 0.75
= ++ 1.4D
( )( 1.7L 1.6W or 1.0E ) (CC.9-2)
and
=
U 0.9D 1.6W
+ ( or 1.0E ) (CC.9-3)
When W has not been reduced by a directionality factor, it is permissible to use 1.3W instead of 1.6W in equations (CC.9-2) and
(CC.9-3). When E is based on seismic forces at the service level, 1.4E should be used instead of 1.0E in equations (CC.9-2) and
(CC.9-3).
CC.9.2.3 — For structures that resist H , loads due to the weight and pressure of the soil, water in the soil, or other related materials,
U should not be less than the largest value obtained from equations (CC.9- 1) and (CC.9-4):
U 1.4D 1.7L 1.7H =++ (CC.9-4)
In Eq. (CC.9-4) where D or L reduce the effect of HL to determine the , 0.9D should replace 1.4D and use a zero value in
greatest required resistance U .
CC.9.2.4 — For structures resisting F , load due to weight, and fluid pressure with well-defined densities, the load factor for F should
be 1.4, and F should be added to all load combinations that include live load L
.
CC.9.2.5 — If resistance to impact effects is taken into account in the design, these must be included with L .
CC.9.2.6 — When the structural effects of differential settlement, creep, shrinkage, expansion of shrinkage-compensated concrete or
, (CC.9-5) and (CC.9-6):
temperature variations, T are significant U should not be less than the value obtained from the equations
U 0.75
= ++ 1.4D
( 1.4T 1.7L ) (CC.9-5)
= DT
U 1.4 +( ) (CC.9-6)
Estimation of differential settlement, creep, shrinkage, shrinkage-compensated concrete expansion, or temperature variations should
be based on a realistic assessment of such effects occurring during the service of the structure.
C-231
CC.9.2.7 — For the design of post-tensioning anchorage zones, a factor of 1.2 must be used for the maximum force of the pre-
stressing jack.
CC.9.3 — Design resistance
CC.9.3.1 — The design resistance provided by an element, its connections with other elements, as well as by its cross sections, in
terms of bending, axial load, shear and torsion, shall be taken as the nominal resistance calculated in accordance with the
requirements and assumptions of this Title C of Regulation NSR-10, multiplied by the ÿ factors of CC.9.3.2, CC.9.3.4. and CC.9.3.5.
CC.9.3.2 — The strength reduction factor, ÿ , shall be as follows:
CC.9.3.2.1 — Sections controlled by tension, as defined in C.10.3.4

(see also CC.9.3.2.7) .................................... ................................................................ ................................. 0.90
CC.9.3.2.2 — Compression controlled sections, as defined in C.10.3.3:
(a) Elements with spiral reinforcement complying with C.10.9.3 ................................................................ .......... 0.75
(b) Other reinforced elements ................................................................ ................................................................ .................. 0.70
For sections with net tensile strain in the extreme steel in tension at the nominal strength state being between the limits for
_ ,
compression-controlledÿtsections and tension-controlled sections, ÿ is allowed to increase linearly from the value for sections
compression controlled to 0.90 as t ÿ increases from the compression controlled strain limit to 0.005.
Alternatively, when Appendix CB is used for members where yf does not exceed 420 MPa, with symmetrical reinforcement, and
d dh )
ÿ
not less than 0.70, ÿ is allowed to increase linearly to 0.90 as Pn ÿ

ÿ
with ( yes
decreases from 0.10fcg

Aÿ to zero. For other reinforced members, ÿ is allowed to increase linearly up to
ÿ , 0.90 as Pn ÿ decreases from whichever is0.10f
less,Aÿ
cgto or
zero.
Pb
CC.9.3.2.3 — Shear and torsion ................................................................ ................................................................ .............. 0.85
CC.9.3.2.4 — Crushing in concrete (except for anchors of

post-tensioning and strut-tension models) ............................................ ................................................................ ................. 0.70
CC.9.3.2.5 — Post-tensioning anchorage zones ............................................. ................................................. 0.85
CC.9.3.2.6 — Strut-tie models (Appendix CA), struts, ties, nodal zones, and crush
areas in those models ................................................................ .......................... 0.85
CC.9.3.2.7 — In prestressed members, the bending sections without axial

load, where the confinement of the strand is less than the development length as
required by C.12.9.1.1 ................................................................ ................................................................ ....... 0.85
CC.9.3.3 — The development lengths specified in Chapter C.12 do not require a ÿ factor .
CC.9.3.4 — For structures with moderate (MOD) or special (DES) energy dissipation capacity that rely on structural walls, built-in-
place or precast, or moment-resisting frames to resist seismic effects, E , ÿ shall be modified according to what is indicated in (a)
through (c):
(a) For any structural element designed to resist E , ÿ for shear should be 0.60 if the nominal shear resistance of the element is
less than the shear corresponding to the development of the nominal resistance to
C-232
bending of the element. The nominal flexural strength must be determined considering the most critical factored axial
loads, including E ;
(b) For diaphragms, ÿ for shear shall not exceed the minimum ÿ for shear used for the vertical elements of the primary
system resisting lateral forces;
(c) For joints and diagonally reinforced coupling beams, ÿ for shear shall be 0.85.
CC.9.3.5 — In Chapter C.22 ÿ must be 0.65 for bending, compression, shear and crushing in simple structural concrete.
C-233
Grades:
C-234
NSR-10 – Appendix CD – Anchoring to concrete
APPENDIX CD — ANCHORING TO CONCRETE
CD.1 — Definitions
Anchor —A steel device either pre-installed prior to concrete placement or post-installed in a hardened concrete member
and used to transmit applied forces, including cap screws, hook-end (J or L) ), headed bolts, expansion anchors, or
anchors with overdrilled bases.
Undercut Anchor — A post-installed anchor that develops its tensile strength based on an interlocking mechanism
provided by overdrilling the concrete at the embedded end of the anchor. Overdrilling is accomplished with a special drill
prior to installing the anchor or alternatively, through the anchor itself during installation.
Expansion anchor — A post-installed anchor, embedded in hardened concrete that transfers loads to and from the
concrete by direct bearing or friction, or both. Expansion anchors can be controlled torsion, where the expansion is
obtained by means of a torque that acts on the screw or bolt; or displacement-controlled, where expansion is achieved
by impact forces acting on a sleeve or plug and expansion is controlled by the length of displacement of the sleeve or
plug.
Post-installed anchor — An anchor installed in hardened concrete. Expansion anchors and anchors with overdrilling at
their base are examples of post-installed anchors.
Cast-in anchor — A cap screw, cap bolt, or hook screw installed prior to placing concrete.
Projected area — The area on the free surface of the concrete element that is used to represent the major base of the
assumed straight-line failure surface.
Distance sleeve — A sleeve that encloses the center portion of an anchor element with an overdrill at its base, a
controlled-torque expansion anchor element, or a controlled-displacement expansion anchor element, but which does not
it expands.
Expansion sleeve — The outer part of an expansion anchor that is forced out through the center, either by applying
torque or impact, to bear against the sides of a pre-drilled hole.
Edge distance — The distance from the edge of the concrete surface to the center of the nearest anchor.
Ductile steel element — An element with an experimentally measured elongation in tension greater than 14 percent,
and a reduction in area of at least 30 percent. An element that complies with the provisions of NTC 4034 (ASTM A307) is
considered a ductile element.
Brittle steel element — An element with an experimentally measured tensile elongation of less than 14 percent, or a
reduction in area of less than 30 percent, or both.
Aattachment — A structural device, external to the concrete surface, that transmits or receives forces from anchoring
elements.
Anchor group — A group of anchor elements of approximately the same depth of effective embedment, in which each
anchor element is spaced at least 3h apart from one or more adjacent anchors when in tension,eff or 3c apart. one or more
adjacent anchors when subjected to shear. a1
Only those anchors that are susceptible to the particular failure mode under investigation can be included in the group.
Specialty inserts — Precast anchors to be installed prior to concrete placement, pre-engineered and precast, specially
designed to fix bolted or grooved connections. The
C-235
Special inserts are frequently used for handling, transporting and lifting, but they are also used to anchor structural
elements. These special inserts are not covered within the scope of this appendix.
Five percent fractile — A statistical term meaning 90 percent confidence that there is a 95 percent chance that actual
strength will exceed nominal strength.
Headed stud — A steel anchor meeting the requirements of AWS D1.1, attached to a plate or similar steel fixture, by the
arc welding process, prior to placing concrete.
Effective embedment depth — The total depth through which the anchor transfers forces to or from the surrounding
concrete. The effective depth of embedment is generally the depth to the failure surface of the concrete in tension
applications. For pre-installed cap screws and cap bolts, the effective embedment depth is measured from the head
bearing contact surface.
Supplementary reinforcement — Reinforcement placed to restrain the prism of potential concrete breakout failure, but
not designed to transfer the full design load from the anchors to the structural member.
Anchor reinforcement — Reinforcement used to transfer the full design force from the anchors to the structural element.
See CD.5.2.9 or CD.6.2.9.
Concrete breakout strength by anchor traction (Concrete breakout strength) — Resistance of a volume of concrete
surrounding the anchor or group of anchors, to break away from the element.
Anchor pullout strength — The strength of an anchor or a major component of an anchor device that will slide out of
concrete without breaking a substantial portion of the surrounding concrete.
Concrete Pryout Strength — Resistance that corresponds to the formation in short, rigid anchors of concrete spalling
behind elements and in the opposite direction of the applied shear force.
Side-face blowout strength — Strength of anchors with greater embedment depth, but with less thickness of the side
cover, which corresponds to flaking of the concrete surrounding the lateral face of the embed head, without major tearouts
to occur on top of the concrete surface.
Hooked bolt — An embedded pre-installed anchor anchored primarily by bearing a 90° bend (L-end) or 180° hook (J-
end) against the concrete, at its embedded end, with a minimum value h greater than 3d .
to
CD.2 — Range
CD.2.1 — This appendix provides design requirements for anchors in concrete used to transmit structural loads by means
of tension, shear, or combination of tension and shear, between (a) connected structural members; or (b) attachments
and structural elements related to safety. The safety levels specified are intended for life-time conditions rather than
situations during construction or short-duration operation.
CD.2.2 — This appendix refers to both pre-installed anchors prior to concrete placement and post-installed anchors.
Does not include special inserts, through bolts, multiple anchors connected to a single steel plate at the embedded end
of the anchors, glued or grouted anchors, or direct anchors such as bolts or nails installed pneumatically or using
gunpowder. The reinforcement used as part of the anchorage must be designed in accordance with other parts of this
Title C of Regulation NSR-10.
CD.2.3 — Headed bolts and headed screws are included, which have a geometry that has been shown to have a
resistance to pulling out by sliding in uncracked concrete equal to or greater than 1.4N . p
C-236
(where Np is given by equation (CD-15)). Included are hook bolts that have a geometry that has been shown to give a slip-
out resistance in uncracked concrete equal to or greater than 1.4N . p
without considering the benefit of friction (where Np is given by equation (CD-16)). Post-installed anchors that meet the
evaluation requirements of ACI 355.2 are included. The suitability of post-installed anchors for use in concrete shall be
demonstrated by ACI 355.2 prequalification tests.
CD.2.4 — Loaded applications that are predominantly high fatigue cycles or shock loads are not covered by this Appendix.
CD.3 — General requirements

CD.3.1 — Anchors and anchor groups shall be designed for the critical effects produced by factored loads determined by
elastic analysis. The plastic analysis approach is permitted when nominal strength is controlled by ductile steel members
and provided strain compatibility is taken into account.
CD.3.2 — The design strength of anchors shall equal or exceed the factored strength calculated with the load combinations
of C.9.2 or CC.9.2.
CD.3.3 — When the design of an anchorage includes seismic forces for structures with moderate dissipation capacity
(MOD) and special dissipation capacity (DES), the additional requirements of CD.3.3.1 to CD.3.3.6 shall be met.
CD.3.3.1 — The provisions of Appendix CD are not applicable to the design of anchorages in areas of
Plastic articulation of concrete structures subjected to seismic forces.
CD.3.3.2 — Post-installed structural anchors shall be rated for use in cracked concrete and shall comply with Simulated
Seismic Tests in accordance with ACI 355.2. The pullout resistance by sliding Np and the anchorage steel resistance in
shear Vsa must be based on the results of ACI 355.2 – Seismic Simulation Tests.
CD.3.3.3 — The design strength of the anchor associated with concrete failure modes shall be taken as 0.75 Nÿ and
0.75 Vÿ , where ÿ is given in CD.4.4 or CD.4.5 and Nn and Vn are determined according to CD.5.2 , CD.5.3, C D.5.4,
no no
CD.6.2 and CD.6.3 assuming that the concrete is cracked, unless it is shown that the concrete remains uncracked.
CD.3.3.4 — Anchors shall be designed so that they are controlled by the strength of the steel of a
ductile steel element in accordance with CD.5.1 and CD.6.1, unless CD.3.3.5 or CD.3.3.6 is met.
CD.3.3.5 — In lieu of CD.3.3.4, the attachment that the anchor connects to the structure shall be designed so that the
fastener will yield ductile at the load level corresponding to anchor forces not greater than the design strength of anchors
specified in CD.3.3.3.
CD.3.3.6 — As an alternative to CD.3.3.4 and CD.3.3.5, it is permitted to take the design strength of anchors as 0.4
times the design strength determined with CD.3.3.3. For the anchoring of light frame load-bearing walls, it is allowed to
take the design resistance of the anchors as 0.5 times the design resistance determined with CD.3.3.3.
CD.3.4— The modification factor ÿ for lightweight concrete in this appendix shall be in accordance with 8.6.1 unless
otherwise specified.
CD.3.5 — The values of cfÿ used for the calculations in this appendix shall not exceed 70 MPa for pre-installed anchors
and 55 MPa for post-installed anchors. Tests are required for post-installed anchors when used in concrete with cf' greater
than 55 MPa.
C-237
CD.4 — General requirements for the strength of anchors
CD.4.1 — Strength design of anchors shall be based on calculations using design models that satisfy the requirements of
CD.4.2, or based on test results, using a 5 percent percentile of test results. for the following:
(a) Tensile strength of the anchor steel (CD.5.1).
(b) Shear resistance of anchor steel (CD.6.1).
(c) Pullout resistance of tensile anchor concrete (CD.5.2).
(d) Shear concrete pullout resistance (CD.6.2).
(e) Resistance to pulling out by sliding of the tensile anchor (CD.5.3).
(f) Resistance to Lateral Breakout of Tension Anchor Concrete (CD.5.4), and
(g) Resistance to detachment of the concrete due to pitching of the anchor by shear (CD.6.3).
In addition, anchors must meet edge distances, spacing, and thickness to prevent split failure, as required by CD.8.
CD.4.1.1 — For the design of anchorages, except as required in CD.3.3,
ÿNN
ÿ no uah
(CD-1)
ÿVV
ÿno uah
(CD-2)
CD.4.1.2 — In equations (CD-1) and (CD-2), Nn ÿ and Vn ÿ are the lowest design strengths determined for all relevant
failure modes. Nn ÿ is the lowest tensile design resistance of an anchor or groups of anchors, determined based on
considerations of Nsa ÿ , nNpn ÿ , either Nsb ÿ or Nsbg ÿ , and Ncb ÿ or Ncbg ÿ . Vn ÿ is the lowest design resistance for
shear of an anchor or group of anchors determined from considerations of Vsa ÿ , either Vcb ÿ or Vcbg ÿ , and Vcp ÿ or
Vcpg ÿ .
CD.4.1.3 — When both Nua and Vua are present , interaction effects must be considered, in accordance with CD.4.3.
CD.4.2— Nominal strength for any anchor or group of anchors shall be based on design models that result in strength
predictions that are in substantial agreement with wide-range test results. The materials used in the tests must be compatible
with the materials used in the structure.
Nominal strength shall be based on the 5 percentile of the individual basic strength of the anchor. For nominal strengths
related to concrete strength, modifications due to the effects of size, number of anchors, effects of reduced anchor spacing,
proximity to edges, thickness of the concrete element, eccentric load groups, etc. must be considered. anchorages and the
presence or absence of cracking. Limits for edge distances and anchor spacing established in design models shall be
consistent with those used in tests used to verify the model.
CD.4.2.1 — In design models used to comply with CD.4.2, the effect of placed reinforcement may be included to restrain
concrete breakout. Where anchor reinforcement is placed, per CD.5.2.9 and C D.6.2.9, calculations for concrete pullout
resistance are not required, per CD.5.2 and CD.6.2.
CD.4.2.2 — For anchors with diameters not exceeding 50 mm, and embedment depths not exceeding 635 mm, the
requirements to prevent concrete pullout shall be considered satisfied if the design procedures of CD.5.2 are followed. and
CD.6.2.
C-238
CD.4.3 — For design for simultaneously acting tensile and shear loads, an interaction expression shall be used that results
in a strength consistent with the results of comprehensive tests. CD.7 should be considered to satisfy those requirements.
CD.4.4 — When the load combinations of C.9.2 are used, the strength reduction factors ÿ for anchors in concrete shall be:
a) Strength-controlled anchorage of a ductile steel member
i) Tensile loads .............................0.75 ii)

Shear force .............. .................65
b) Anchorage controlled by the resistance of a brittle steel element i)

Tensile loads ...........................0.65 ii)
Shear force. .............................0.60
c) Anchorage controlled by the resistance to pullout, lateral detachment, extraction by sliding or

detachment due to pitching of the anchor
Condition A Condition B
i) Shear loads ii) 0.75 0.70

Tension loads Pre-
installed capped bolts, cap screws or hook screws 0.75
0.70
Post-installed anchors in accordance with ACI 355.2 categories
Category 1 0.75 0.65 (Low sensitivity to

installation and high reliability)
Category 2 0.65 0.55

(Medium sensitivity to installation and medium reliability)
Category 3 0.55 0.45 (High sensitivity and

low reliability)
Condition A applies where supplementary reinforcement exists except for resistance to pullout or pitching out of the anchor.
Condition B applies where there is no supplementary reinforcement, or where it controls the resistance to pullout or pitching
out of the anchor.
CD.4.5 — When using the load combinations in Appendix C, the strength reduction factor ÿ for anchors in concrete shall
be:
a) Anchorage controlled by the resistance of a ductile steel element i)

Tensile loads ...........................0.80 ii)
Shear force. .............................0.75
b) Anchorage controlled by the resistance of a brittle steel element i)

Tensile loads ...........................0.70 ii)
Shear force. .............................0.65
c) Anchorage controlled by resistance to pullout, lateral detachment, slippage of the anchorage, or

detachment due to pitching of the anchor.
Condition A Condition B
i) Shear force ii) 0.85 0.75

Tensile loads
C-239
Embedded
connectors,
headed studs, or
hook studs 0.85 0.75
Post-installed anchors of any category, as determined by ACI 355.2
Category 1 0.85 0.75 (Low sensitivity to

installation and high reliability)

(Medium sensitivity to installation and medium reliability)

(high sensitivity and
low reliability)
Condition A applies where supplementary reinforcement exists except for resistance to pullout or pitching out of the anchor.
Condition B applies where there is no supplementary reinforcement, or where it controls the resistance to pullout or pitching out
of the anchor.
CD.5 — Design requirements for tension loads

CD.5.1 — Steel strength of an anchor in tension
CD.5.1.1 — The nominal strength of an anchor in controlled tension through steel, Nsa , must be evaluated
by calculations based on the properties of the anchor material and the physical dimensions of the anchor.
CD.5.1.2 — The nominal strength of a single anchor or group of anchors in tension, Nsa , shall not exceed:
nA=f se,N uta

N sa (CD-3)
Where n is the number of anchors in the group, Ase,N is the effective cross-sectional area of the anchor in tension, mm2 , and
futa
shall not be greater than the lesser of 1.9f or 860 MPa. already
CD.5.2 — Concrete pullout resistance of an anchor in tension
CD.5.2.1 — The nominal concrete breakout strength, Ncb or Ncbg of a single anchor or group of anchors in tension must not
exceed:
(a) for a single anchor:
TO
= nc
ÿ ÿÿ ed,N (CD-4)
Ncb _ cp,N b c,N No.
TO
NCO
(b) for a group of anchors:
TO
nc
N
cbg
= ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ec,N ed,N c,N cp,N b No. (CD-5)
TO
NCO
The factors ÿec,N , ÿed,N , ÿc,N , and ÿcp,N are defined in CD.5.2.4, CD.5.2.5, CD.5.2.6 and CD.5.2.7 respectively. ANc is the
projected area of the failure surface for a single anchor or group of anchors, which
C-240
shall be approximated to the base of the rectilinear geometric figure resulting from projecting the failure surface outward
1.5h from the eff
anchor axis line or, in the case of a group of anchors, from a line through a row of adjacent anchors. ANc
shall not exceed nANco , where n is the number of tension anchors in the group. ANco is the projected area of the failure
surface of a single anchor with an edge distance equal to or
greater than1.5h
ef .
2
atnco
9am =
eff (CD-6)
CD.5.2.2 — The basic concrete breakout strength of a single anchor in tension embedded in
cracked concrete, Nb , shall not exceed
1.5
N k fh=bcÿ efc
ÿ
(CD-7)
where
c = for pre-installed anchors, and
k10
k7c = for post-installed anchors.
The kc value for post-installed anchors shall be allowed to increase above 7 based on ACI 355.2 product-specific tests, but
in no case may it exceed 10.
Alternatively, for pre-installed headed bolts with 280 mm ÿ hef ÿ 635 mm , Nb must not exceed:
ÿ 5
N 3.93 fh
= ÿbc ef (CD-8)
CD.5.2.3 — Where anchorages are located less than 1.5h eff , of three or more edges, the value of hef used at 1.5
equations (CD-4) to (CD-11) must be greater between ac ,max and one-third of the maximum spacing between the
anchors within the group.
CD.5.2.4 — The modification factor for groups of anchors subjected to eccentric tension loads is:
1
ÿ = ec,N (CD-9)
ÿ 2eNo.
ÿÿ
1+
ÿÿ
3h eff ÿÿ
But ÿec,N should not be taken less than unity (1.0).
If the load on a group of anchors is such that only some anchors are in tension, only those anchors that are in tension should
be considered in determining the eccentricity Ne ÿ in equation (CD 9) and in calculating Ncbg in equation ( CD-5).
When eccentric loads exist around two axes, the modification factor, ÿec,N , must be calculated for each axis individually
and the product of those factors used as ÿec,N , in equation (CD-5).
CD.5.2.5 — The modification factor for edge effects for single anchors or groups of anchors in tension is:
1 ÿ = ed,N Yeah ÿ 1.5h (CD-10)

c a,min eff
c a,min
0.7 0.3
=+ ed,N 1.5h ef ÿ Yeah < 1.5h (CD-11)
ac ,min eff
C-241
CD.5.2.6 — For anchors located in a region of a concrete element, where analyzes indicate that they are not
there is cracking for service load levels, the following modification factor is allowed:
c,N ÿ = 1.25 for pre-installed anchors
c,N ÿ = 1.4 for post-installed anchors, where the value of kc used in equation (CD-7) is equal to 7.
When the value of kc used in equation (CD-7) is taken from ACI 355.2 for post-installed anchors, rated for use in cracked
and uncracked concrete, the values of kc and ÿc,N shall be based on the report for evaluation. of ACI 355.2 products.
When the value of kc used in Equation (CD-7) is taken from ACI 355.2 Product Evaluation Report for Post-Installed Anchors
Rated for Use Only in Uncracked Concrete, ÿc,N shall be taken as 1.0 .
When the analysis indicates cracking at service load levels, ÿc,N , should be taken equal to 1.0 for both pre-installed and
post-installed anchors. Post-installed anchors shall be qualified for use in cracked concrete in accordance with ACI 355.2.
Cracking in concrete shall be controlled by distributed flexural reinforcement in accordance with 10.6.4 or equivalent crack
control provided by confining reinforcement.
CD.5.2.7 — The modification factor for post-installed anchors designed for uncracked concrete in accordance with
CD.5.2.6 without supplemental reinforcement to control splitting, ÿcp,N shall be calculated as follows using
the critical distancecacas defined in CD.8.6:
cp,N ÿ = 1.0 if c a,min

c ÿ ac (CD-12)
c
a,min
ÿ = cp,N Yeah
cc < a,min
ac
(CD-13)
cac
But ÿcp,N determined by means of equation (CD-13) should not be taken less than 1.5hc
acwhere the distance ef
criticism cac _ , it is defined in CD.8.6.
For all other cases, including pre-installed anchors, ÿcp,N , should be taken as 1.0.
CD.5.2.8 — When an additional plate or washer is added to the head of the anchor, the projected area of the failure
surface can be calculated by projecting the failure surface 1.5h outside the effective
eff perimeter of the plate or washer. The
effective perimeter shall not exceed the value in a section projecting out more than the thickness of the washer or plate from
the outer edge of the anchor head.
CD.5.2.9 — Where anchor reinforcement is developed in accordance with Chapter C.21 on both sides of the breakout
surface, it is permitted to use the design strength of the anchor reinforcement to determine Nn ÿ , instead of the strength to
tearing out of the concrete. In the design of the anchor reinforcement, a strength reduction factor of 0.75 is permitted.
CD.5.3 — Resistance to sliding pullout of an anchor in tension
should not
CD.5.3.1 — The nominal pullout resistance of an anchor in tension, Npn , exceed:
No. N (CD-14)
pn = ÿ c,P p
where ÿc,P is identified in CD.5.3.6.
C-242
CD.5.3.2 — For post-installed expansion anchors and anchors with overdrilled bases, Np values shall be based on the 5
percent percentile results of tests performed and evaluated in accordance with ACI 355.2. It is not permitted to determine
the resistance to slipout for those anchors by calculation.
CD.5.3.3 — For pre-installed headed bolts and single headed screws, resistance to slipout may be evaluated using
D.5.3.4. For individual L-shaped or J-shaped end screws, the resistance to slip-out in tension can be evaluated using
CD.5.3.5. Alternatively, Np values based on test results with the 5 percentile percentile of tests performed and evaluated in
the same manner as ACI 355.2 procedures, but without the benefit of friction, may be used .
CD.5.3.4 — The pullout resistance of a single headed bolt or screw, Np , to be used in equation (CD-14) must not exceed:
ÿ
N 8A=f brg cp (CD-15)
CD.5.3.5 — The tensile slip-out resistance of a single hooked screw, Np , to be used in equation (CD-14) shall not exceed:
ÿ
= ch ap
N 0.9fed (CD-16)
where ÿ ÿ3d and 4.5d ah a
CD.5.3.6 — For an anchor located in a region of a concrete element, where analysis indicates that it is not
cracks exist for service load levels, the following modification factor is allowed:
c,P ÿ = 1.4
When the analysis indicates cracking at the level of service loads, ÿc,P should be taken as 1.0.
CD.5.4 — Lateral Breakout Resistance of Concrete in a Headed Anchor in Tension
CD.5.4.1 — For a single headed anchor with deep embedment near an edge h 2.5c nominal lateral breakouteff >
a1
, the
resistance, Nsb , shall not exceed:
N 13c=A f a1 brg
ÿ
ÿ (CD-17)
sb c
Yeah
ca2for single headed bolt is less than a1 3c , the value of Nsb must be multiplied by the factor
(1c c 4 ÿ 1.0 cc
) 3.0where
ÿ . + a2 a1 a2
CD.5.4.2 — For a group of deeply embeddable headed anchors located near an edge and with anchor spacing less than
eff
> 2.5c)
a1
6c ,
a1 the nominal strength of those anchors (h susceptible to concrete rupture failure Nsbg no must exceed:
ÿs=+ ÿ
N1 N ÿ (CD-18)
sbg sb
ÿ 6c a1 ÿÿ
where s is the spacing of the exterior anchors along the edge and Nsb is obtained from equation (CD-17) without
modification due to the distance perpendicular to the edge.
C-243
CD.6 — Design requirements for shear forces
CD.6.1 — Resistance of anchor steel subjected to shear
CD.6.1.1 — The nominal resistance of an anchor to shear when controlled by the steel Vsa shall be
evaluated by calculation based on the properties of the anchor material and the physical dimensions of the anchor.
CD.6.1.2 — The nominal resistance of an individual anchor or a group of anchors in shear, Vsa shall not
exceed the provisions of (a) to (c):
(a) For pre-installed connectors
nA=f se,V uta

V sa (CD-19)
where n is the number of anchors in the group, Ase,V is the effective cross-sectional area of the anchor in shear, mm2 , and
futa
shall not be taken greater than the lesser between 1.9f and 860 MPa.
already
(b) For pre-installed cap screw or hook anchors and for post-installed anchors where sleeves do not extend through the plane of
shear
V sa = f se,V uta
n0.6A (CD-20)
where n is the number of anchors in the group, Ase,V is the effective cross-sectional area of the anchor in shear, in2 , and f shall
not
uta be taken greater than the lesser of 1.9f or 860 MPa. already
(b) For post-installed anchors where sleeves extend through the plane of shear, Vsa shall be based on the results of tests
performed and evaluated in accordance with ACI 355.2. Alternatively, it is permissible to use equation (CD-20).
CD.6.1.3 — When anchors are used with mortar-injected bearing plates, the nominal strengths of CD.6.1.2 shall be multiplied
by a factor equal to 0.80.
CD.6.2 — Concrete pullout resistance of anchors in shear
CD.6.2.1 — The nominal concrete breakout resistance, Vcb or Vcbg , in shear of an individual anchor or a group of anchors
shall not exceed:
(a) For a shear force perpendicular to the edge on a single anchor:
TO
Vc
Vcb _
= ÿ ÿÿ
h,Ved,V
b c,V
V (CD-21)
TO
vco
(b) For a shear force perpendicular to the edge on a group of anchors:
TO
Vc
V
b = ÿ ÿ ÿÿ cbg ec,V ed,V c,V h,V V (CD-22)
TO
vco
(c) For a shear force parallel to an edge, let Vcb or Vcbg be twice the value of the shear force determined by Eqs. (CD-21)
or (CD-22), respectively, assuming that the shear force acts perpendicular to the edge with ÿed,V taken equal to 1.0.
(d) For anchors located at a corner, the nominal concrete breakout strength limit shall be determined for each edge, and the
minimum value shall be used.
C-244
The factors ÿec,V , ÿed,V , ÿc,V and ÿh,V are defined in CD.6.2.5, CD.6.2.6, CD.6.2.7 and CD.6.2.8, respectively. Vb is the
value of the basic resistance to concrete pullout by shear for a single anchor. AVc is the projected area of the failure surface on
one side of the concrete element at its edge, for an individual anchor or for a group of anchors. It is permitted to evaluate AV,c
as the projected area of the failure surface on the lateral face of the element for individual anchors and groups of anchors. It is
allowed to evaluate AV,c as the base of the half frustum of the pyramid projected to the lateral face of the element where the
top of the half pyramid is defined by the axis of the row of anchors selected as critical. The value of as the distance from the
edge to that axis. AV,c must not exceed nAVco , where n is the number of anchors in the group. ca1
should be taken
AVco is the projected area for a single anchor on a tall element with an edge distance equal to or greater than 1.5c in the
that direction
a1 perpendicular to the shear force. It is allowed to evaluate AVco as the base of a mean
pyramid with a side length parallel to the edge of 3c and a depth
a1 of 1.5ca1
:
At 4.5c=Vco (CD-23)
( )2 a1
When the anchors are located at different distances from the edge and the anchors are welded to the fixture in a way that
distributes the force to all the anchors, strength can be evaluated based on the distance from the edge to the furthest row of
anchors. In this case, one can base the value c on the a1 distance from the edge to the axis of the farthest row of anchors that
was selected as critical, and it must be assumed that the entire shear force will be resisted only by this critical row of anchors. .
CD.6.2.2 — The basic concrete shear strength of a single anchor in cracked concrete, Vb , shall not exceed:
0.2
ÿÿÿ 1.5
V 0.6= b d ÿ
ÿ
and
cdfÿ
to c a1( ) (CD-24)
ÿ ÿ to
where and is the load bearing length of the anchor in shear:
and
= h for
eff anchors of constant stiffness over the full embed length section, such as headed anchors and post-installed anchors with a tubular sleeve over
the full embed length,
and
= 2d for
to
torque-controlled expansion anchors with a spacer sleeve separate from the expansion sleeve, and
ÿ 8d in the other cases.

and to
CD.6.2.3 — For pre-installed capped bolts, capped screws or hook screws that are continuously welded to steel fittings, with
a minimum thickness equal to the greater of 10 mm and half the diameter of the anchor, The basic concrete pullout shear
strength of a single anchor in cracked concrete, Vb , shall not exceed:
0.2
ÿÿÿ 1.5
=
V 0.66b and
cdfÿ
ÿ
( )
ÿÿÿ
d to c a1 (CD-25)
to
where and is defined in CD.6.2.2 and provided that:
(a) For a group of anchors, the strength is determined based on the strength of the row of anchors furthest from the edge;
(b) the spacing of the anchors, s , not less than 65 mm.; and
C-245
(c) supplemental reinforcement is placed at the corners if c a2 1.5h

ef ÿ .
CD.6.2.4 — Where anchors are influenced by three or more edges, the value of c used in equations (CD-23)
a1 through
(CD-29) shall not exceed the greater of c 1.5 in any direction, h 1.5 anda2 one third of the maximum spacing
to
between anchors
within the group.
CD.6.2.5 — The modification factor for eccentrically loaded groups of anchors, ÿec,V , must be calculated
as
1
ÿ = ec,V ÿ
(CD-26)
2e v
1+
3c a1
But ÿec,V should not be taken greater than unity (1.0).
If the load on a group of anchors is such that only some anchors are loaded in shear in the same direction, only those anchors
that are loaded in shear in the same direction may be considered in determining the eccentricity Veÿ to be used in the
anchorage . equation (CD-26) and to calculate Vcbg in equation (CD-22).
CD.6.2.6 — Modification factor for edge effect for single anchors or groups of anchors
loaded in shear is:
ÿ 1.5c 1.0
ÿ=Ed,V
Yeah
c a2 a1 (CD-27)
c a2
0.7 a1
=+ ed,V 1.5c 0.3 ÿ Yeah
c a1
< a2 1.5c (CD-28)
CD.6.2.7 — For anchors located in a region of a concrete element where analysis indicates that there is no
cracking due to service loads, the following modification factor is allowed:
c,V ÿ = 1.4
For anchors located in a region of a concrete element, where analysis indicates cracking at service load levels, the following
modification factors are allowed:
c,V ÿ = 1.0 for anchors in cracked concrete without supplementary reinforcement or edge reinforcement smaller than a No. 4
(1/2”) or 12M (12 mm) diameter bar;
c,V ÿ = 1.2 for anchors in cracked concrete with reinforcement consisting of bars of diameter No. 4 (1/2”) or 12M (12 mm), or
greater, located between the anchor and the edge; and
c,V ÿ = 1.4 for anchors in cracked concrete with reinforcement consisting of a No. 4 (1/2”) or 12M (12 mm) diameter bar, or
greater, located between the anchor and the edge, and with the reinforcement confined by stirrups spaced not more than 100
mm.
CD.6.2.8 — For anchors located in a concrete element, where h 1.5c to

< a1 , ÿh,V must be calculated like this:
1.5c a1
ÿ = h,V (CD-29)
h to
But ÿh,V should not be taken less than unity (1.0).
C-246
CD.6.2.9 – Where the anchor reinforcement develops according to Chapter C.12, on both sides of the rupture surface,
or encloses the anchor and develops beyond the rupture surface, to determine Vn ÿ , it is permissible to use the design
strength of the anchor reinforcement instead of the concrete pullout strength. A strength reduction factor of 0.75 is
permitted to be used for anchor reinforcement design.
CD.6.3 — Resistance to concrete detachment due to anchor pitching subjected to shear
CD.6.3.1 — Nominal resistance to anchor pitch-out caused by shear Vcp or Vcpg

must not exceed:
(a) for a single anchor
V kN =
cp cb cp (CD-30)
(b) for a group of anchors
= cbg
V kN cp (CD-31)
cpg
where k
1.0 = 65
for<hmm, and
cop eff
k 2.0 =cpfor h 65 ÿ mm.

eff
Ncb and Ncbg must be determined by equation (CD-4) and equation (CD-5), respectively.
CD.7 — Interaction of tensile and shear forces

Unless determined in accordance with CD.4.3, anchors or groups of anchors that are subjected to both axial and shear
loads shall be designed to satisfy the provisions of CD.7.1 through CD.7.3. The value of Nn ÿ must be the one required
in CD.4.1.2. The value of Vn ÿ must be the one defined in CD.4.1.2.
CD.7.1 — If V 0.2 V ÿ ÿ , then

uah
it is
permissible to use the total tensile strength: NN
no
ÿÿ no uah
.
CD.7.2 — If N 0.2 N ÿ ÿ , then

uah
it is
permissible to use the total shear resistance: VV
no
ÿÿ. no uah
CD.7.3 — If V 0.2 V > ÿ , N

and
> ÿN, 0.2
then:
uah no uah no
NV
uah
+ uah
ÿ 1.2 (CD-32)
ÿ NV
ÿ no no
CD.8 — Edge distances, spacings, and thicknesses required to avoid splitting failures
Minimum spacings and edge distances for anchors, and minimum member thicknesses shall comply with CD.8.1 through
CD.8.6, unless supplemental reinforcement is placed to control splitting. Lower values are allowed for certain products
based on specific tests performed on
CD.8.1 — Unless determined by CD.8.4, the minimum anchor spacing on-center shall be 6d for pre-installed and post-
installed anchors that will4d
befor pre-installed
subjected anchors
to torsion.
to
that will not
accordance beACI
with subjected
355.2. to torsion, and to
CD.8.2 — Unless determined in accordance with CD.8.4, minimum edge distances for pre-installed headed anchors that
will not be twisted shall be based on the minimum cover requirements for the
C-247
reinforcement of C.7.7. For pre-installed headed anchors that will be subjected to torque, the minimum edge distance is
6dto.
CD.8.3 — Unless determined in accordance with CD.8.4, minimum edge distances for post-installed anchors shall be based on
the greater of the minimum cover requirements specified for reinforcements in C.7.7, or the requirements for the minimum
distance to the brim for products determined by tests in accordance with ACI 355.2, and shall not be less than 2.0 times the
maximum size of the aggregate. In the absence of product-specific test information according to ACI 355.2, the minimum edge
distance shall not be less than:
Anchors with overdrilling at their base Torque- ............ 6d to
controlled anchors .................................... 8d to
Displacement-Controlled Anchors ............ 10d to
CD.8.4 — For anchors where installation does not produce a splitting force and will not be subjected to torsion, if the edge
distance or spacing is less than specified in CD.8.1 through CD.8.3, calculations shall be made by substituting da for a smaller
ÿ
value gives that meets the requirements of CD.8.1 through CD.8.3. The calculated
forces applied to the anchor must be limited to the values that correspond to an anchor of diameter da
ÿ
.
CD.8.5 — The value of hef for a post-installed, expansion or overdrilled anchor at its base shall not exceed 2/3 of the element
thickness or the element thickness less 100 mm, whichever is greater.
CD.8.6 —Unless determined by tensile testing in accordance with ACI 355.2, the critical edge distance shall not be taken less
than: cac _
,
Anchors with overdrilling at their base ......... 2.5h eff

Controlled Torque Anchors ................................ 4h eff
Controlled Displacement Anchors ................ 4h eff
CD.8.7 — Project plans and specifications shall specify anchorages with the minimum edge distance assumed in the design.
CD.9 — Anchor Installation

CD.9.1 — Anchors shall be installed in accordance with the project plans and specifications.
C-248
NSR-10 – Appendix CE – Information about reinforcing steel
APPENDIX CE — INFORMATION ABOUT THE

REINFORCING STEEL
As an aid to users of the NSR-10 standard and the ACI Rules, information about the diameters, areas, and mass of the different
reinforcing steels is presented below.
TABLE C.3.5.3-1
NOMINAL DIMENSIONS OF REINFORCING BARS
(Diameters based on millimeters)
Bar designation NOMINAL DIMENSIONS Area mm²
(see note) Diameter Perimeter Mass kg/m
mm mm
6M 6.0 28.3 18.85 0.222

8M 8.0 50.3 25.14 0.394
10M 10.0 78.5 31.42 0.616
12M 12.0 113.1 37.70 0.887
16M 16.0 201.1 50.27 1,577
18M 18.0 254.5 56.55 1,996
20M 20.0 314.2 62.83 2,465
22M 22.0 380.1 69.12 2,982
25M 25.0 490.9 78.54 3,851
30M 30.0 706.9 94.25 5,544
32M 32.0 804.2 100.53 6,309
36M 36.0 1017.9 113.10 7,985
45M 45.0 1590.4 141.37 12,477
55M 55.0 2375.8 172.79 18,638
Note: The M indicates that they are nominal diameters in mm.
TABLE C.3.5.3-2
eighths of an inch)
Reference Bar Diameter NOMINAL DIMENSIONS Area mm²
Designation Diameter (see note) in inches mm Perimeter Mass kg/m
1/4” 6.4 mm
3/8” 9.5 1/2” 12.7 5/8” 15.9 3/4” 19.1 0.250
No. 2 7/8” 22.2 1” 25.4 1- 32 20.0 0.560
No. 3 1/8” 28.7 1-1/4” 32.3 71 30.0 0.994
No. 4 1-3/8” 35.8 1-3/4” 43.0 129 40.0 1.552
No. 5 2-1/4” 57.3 199 50.0 2.235
No. 6 284 60.0 3.042
No. 7 387 70.0 3.973
No. 8 510 80.0 5.060
No. 9 645 90.0 6.404
No. 10 819 101.3 7.907
No. 11 1006 112.5 11.380
No. 14 1452 135.1 20.240
No. 18 2581 180.1
Note: The No. of the bar indicates the number of eighths of an inch of the reference diameter.
C-249
NSR-10 – Appendix CE – Information about reinforcing steel
ASTM STANDARD PRESTRESSING TENDONS
Nominal
Guy* nominal Nominal
diameter, mm area, mm2 mass,
6.4 23.2 7.9 37.4 9.5 kg/m
51.6 11.1 69.7 12.7 92.9 0.182
Strand
15.2 139.4 9.53 54.8 0.294
seven wires
11.1 74.2 12.70 98.7 15.24 0.405
(Degree 1725)
140.0 4.88 18.7 4.98 19.5 0.548
6.35 31 7 7.01 38 6 19 0.730
284 22 387 25 503 29 639 1.094
Seven wire
32 794 35 955 15 181 20 0.432
strand
271 26 548 32 806 36 1019 0.582
(Degree 1860)
The availability of some 0.775
sizes must be investigated 1.102
prestressing beforehand. 0.146
wire 0.149
0.253
Prestressing
bars (smooth)
Prestressing 0.298
bars (corrugated) 2.23
3.04 3.97 5.03 6.21 7.52 1.46 2.22 4.48 6.54 8.28
*
ASTM STANDARD REINFORCING WIRE
As - mm2 per meter

MW and MD size Nominal Center to center spacing, mm
diameter, Nominal
corrugated mm mass, kg/m fifty 75 100 150 200 250 300
Smooth
either
MW 290 MD 290 19.22 2.27 5800 3900 2900 4000 2700 1900 1450 1160 970
MW 200 MD 200 15.95 1.5700 2000 2600 1700 1300 2400 1300 1000 800 670
MW 130 MD 130 12.90 1.0204 1600 1200 2000 1300 1000 870 650 520 430
MW 120 MD 120 12.40 0.9419 1800 1200 900 1600 1100 800 800 600 480 400
MW 100 MD 100 11.30 0.7849 1400 930 700 1300 870 650 670 500 400 330
MW 90 MD 90 10.70 0.7064 1200 800 600 1100 730 550 600 450 360 300
MW 80 MD 80 10.10 0.6279 1000 670 500 900 600 450 530 400 320 270
MW 70 MD 70 9.40 0.5494 800 530 400 700 470 350 600 470 350 280 230
MW 65 MD 65 9.10 0.5102 400 300 500 330 250 400 270 430 325 260 220
MW 60 MD 60 8.70 0.4709 200 300 200 150 200 130 100 400 300 240 200
MW 55 MD 55 8.40 0.4317 100 67 50 370 275 220 180
MW 50 MD 50 8.00 0.3925 330 250 200 170
MW 45 MD 45 7.60 0.3532 300 225 180 150
MW 40 MD 40 7.10 0.3140 270 200 160 130
MW 35 MD 35 6.70 0.2747 230 175 140 120
MW 30 MD 30 6.20 0.2355 200 150 120 100
MW 25 MD 25 5.60 0.1962 170 125 100 83
MW 20 5.00 0.15 70 130 100 80 67
MW 15 4.40 0.1177 100 75 60 50
MW 10 3.60 0.0785 70 50 40 33
MW 5 2.50 0.0392 33 25 20 17
C-250
NSR-10 – Appendix CF – Equivalence between the SI system, the mks system, and the English system
of the non-homogeneous equations of Title C of the Regulation
APPENDIX CF
Equivalence between the SI system, the mks system, and the English
system of non-homogeneous equations of Title C of the Regulations
System SI System mks English system

efforts in MPa stresses in pounds per
efforts in kgf/ cm²
square inch (psi)
1 MPa 10 kgf/cm² 142.2 psi

cfÿ = 21 MPa cfÿ = 210 kgf/cm² cfÿ = 3,000 psi
cfÿ = 40 MPa cfÿ = 420 kgf/cm² yf cfÿ = 6,000 psi
and f = 280 MPa = 2 800 kgf/cm² yf = 4 and f = 40,000 psi
and f = 420 MPa 200 kgf/cm² f = 17 600 y f = 60,000 psi

f = 1725 MPapu kgf/cm² f pu
= 250,000psi
pu
f = 1 860 MPapu f pu
= 19,000 kgf/cm² f pu
= 270,000psi
cfÿ to MPa 3.18 fÿ to

c kgf/cm² 12 fÿ to
c psi
0.313 fÿ to MPa 3.77 fÿ to

c cfÿ to kgf/cm² c psi
0.083 fÿ to MPa 0.27 fÿ to

c c kgf/cm² cfÿ in psi
0.17 fÿ to MPa 2 fÿ in
c 0.53 fÿ to
c kgf/cm² c psi
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
(C.5-2) F f 2.33s 3.5 =+ ÿ F = f2.33s35 + ÿ
F f 2.33s 500 =+ ÿ
cr c yes cr c yes cr c yes
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
F = +f7.0 F = f 70 + F f 1000 = +
cr c cr c cr c
Table ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
F = +f8.3
c F = f 84 + F f 1200 = + c
C.5.3.2.2 cr cr c cr
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
F = 1.10f 5.0+ F = 1.10f 50+ F = 1.10f 700+
cr c cr c cr c
Section ×
0.0018 420 ×
0.0018 4200 ×
0.0018 60,000
C.7.12.2.1(c) F F F
and and and
ÿ ÿ ÿ
Section 1.5 E
= w 0.043 f 1.5 E
= w 0.14 f 1.5 E
= w 33 f
cc c cc c cc c
C.8.5.1 E 4700f
=
ÿ
E15100f
=
ÿ
=
ÿ
c c c c E c57,000 f c
Section
C.8.6.1
ÿ= f 0.56 f( ct c ÿ1.0 _ ÿ= f 1.78 f( ct c ÿ1.0 _ (
ÿ= f 6.7 f ct c ) ÿ1.0 _
(1.65 0.0003w ÿ
))
ÿ 1.09 ÿ
(1.65 0.0003w 1.09 ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ

) c )ÿ (1.65 0.005w 1.09) ÿ
ÿ
Table
ÿ c 7000 ÿ c ÿ yf
yf yf
C.9.5(a) ÿ ÿ 0.4+ 0.4 + ÿ 0.4 +
ÿÿ
700 ÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ 100,000 ÿ
= f
f 0.62 ÿ
ÿ
f 2f = ÿ
ÿ
7.5=f ÿ f
ÿ
(C.9-10) r c r c r c
ÿ F and
ÿ ÿ F and
ÿ F and
no ÿ 0.8 + no 0.8 + no 0.8 +

(C.9-12) 1400 ÿ ÿ 14000 ÿ ÿ 200,000
ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ
h = ÿ 125mm h = ÿ 12.5cm h = ÿ 5 in.
( 36+5ÿÿ ÿ fm 0.2
ÿ) ( 36+5ÿÿ ÿ fm 0.2ÿ ) ( 36+5ÿÿ ÿ fm 0.2 ÿ )
ÿ F ÿ ÿ F ÿ ÿ F
no
ÿ 0.8 + and
no
ÿ 0.8+ and
no
ÿ 0.8 + and
(C.9-13) ÿ 1400 ÿ 14000 ÿ ÿ ÿ 200,000ÿ

h= h= h=
ÿÿ ÿÿ
ÿ 90mm ÿ 9cm ÿ 3.5in.
36 9+ ÿ 36 9+ ÿ 36 9+ ÿ
C-251
NSR-10 – Appendix CF – Equivalence between the SI system, the mks system, and the English system of non-

efforts in MPa stresses in pounds per square
inch (psi)
ÿ ÿ ÿ
0.25f c 1.4 0.8f c 14 3f c 200
(C.10-3) A = w ÿ
bdbd w A = bdwbdÿ w A = bdwbdÿ w
s,min s,min s,min
f Fand
f F and
f F
and
and and and
ÿÿ40,000
ÿ 40,000 = ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿ s 15 2.5c 12
ÿÿ280
ÿÿ 280 = ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿs 380 2.5c ÿÿ2800
ÿÿ 2800 = ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ s 38 f ÿÿ ÿÿ c
(C.10-4) 300 c 2.5c 30
c F F
F F ÿÿ ÿ yes yes
ÿÿf _ yes
ÿÿ yes yes yes
(Q.10-17) = +or2,min
MP 15 0.03h ( ) = +or2,min
MP 1.5 0.03h ( ) PM20.6
min
= +or
0.03h ( )
Section ÿ ÿ 2 ÿ
ÿ
cf 8.3MPa ÿ kgf/cm
cf 27 ÿ
cf 100psi
C.11.1.2
ÿ ÿ ÿ
(C.11-3) c
= fbd ÿ
V 0.17 ww c
= fbd ÿ
V 0.53 ww V2 =ÿ
fbd
c cw
No.or ÿ ÿ
No.or ÿ ÿ
ÿ No.or ÿ ÿ
(C.11-4) c ÿ =+ÿ ÿ V 0.17 1 14A fbd

ww ÿ ÿc Vÿ 0.53 1 =+ fbd
ww V 21
c =+ ÿÿ fbd
ww
140A 2000A
ÿg _ ÿÿ ÿg ÿÿ ÿg _ ÿÿ
ÿ ÿ
Vd
or ÿ ÿ ÿ
Vd
or ÿ ÿ ÿ
Vd
or ÿ
c c=wfw17
V 0.16 ÿ+ÿ bd V 0.5
= fÿ+ÿ
c cww 176 bd V 1.9
c = fÿ+
2500
ÿ cww bd
m or ÿ ÿ m or ÿ ÿ m or ÿ ÿ
ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ
(C.11-5)
ÿ ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿfbd
0.29 ww ÿ ÿfbd
0.93 ww ÿ ÿfbd
3.5 ww
ÿ
0.29Nor ÿ
No.or ÿ
No.or
(C.11-7) =ÿ fbd
V c0.29 + 1 ww =ÿ fbd
V c0.93 + 1 ww =ÿfbd
V c3.5 + 1 ww
TO g 35A g 500A g
ÿ 0.29N or
ÿ ÿ No.or
V 0.17
c 1 =+ ÿ fbd
ww0
ÿ
ÿ = 1
V 0.53
c ÿ ÿ +ÿÿ fbd
ww0
ÿ
No.or ÿ ÿ
(C.11-8) TO 35A g V2
c 1ÿ ÿ =+ ÿ fbww
d0 ÿ
ÿÿ g ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿ 500A
ÿg _ ÿÿ
Vd
up ÿ Vd
up ÿ
bd bd Vd
up ÿ
4.8ccÿw= ÿ+ÿ ÿ V 0.05 f ÿ 49ccÿw= ÿ+ÿ ÿ V 0.16 f ÿ
m m V 0.6
ccÿwf=700
ÿ+ÿ ÿÿ ÿ
bd
ÿ or
ÿ ÿ or
ÿ m or
ÿ
(C.11-9)
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿÿVÿc0.42
0.17 fbd w c fbd ww ÿ ÿÿVÿc1.33
0.53 fbd w c fbd ww ÿ ÿ
2 ÿfbd Vc5wfbd
c c wÿ ÿÿ
ÿ
VM
i believe ÿ
VM believe ÿ
VM
i believe
ci = fbd V ÿ++ d cwp
V 0.05 = fbd V ÿ++ d
i Vci0.16
cwp V 0.6=ÿ ++Vci d
fbd cwp
m max m max m max
(C.11-10) ÿ ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿfbd
0.14 ww ÿ 0.45 fbd
ÿ ww ÿ ÿfbd
1.7 ww
ÿ ÿYoÿ ÿ ÿ ÿYoÿ ÿ ÿ ÿYoÿ ÿ

(C.11-11) m believe
=
ÿÿ ( ÿ +ÿ 0.5
c fff dpe
ÿ
) m believe
=
ÿÿ (1.6ff ÿ + ÿfc ÿ
dpe ) m believe
=
ÿÿ ( 6f f ÿ +ÿc f ÿ
dpe )
and you and you and you
V 0.29f ( ÿ
) ( ÿ
)
V 3.5
ww f =
0.3fbd (
ÿ+ + V pc wpp
c
ÿ
)
ww =0.3fbd
ÿ+ + V pc wpp
c ww = ÿ+ + V 0.93 f c0.3fbd V pc wpp
(C.11-12)
ÿ ÿ
0.33fÿ _ c 1.1fÿ _ c ÿ
4fÿ c
Section ÿ ÿ ÿ
0.33 fbd ww 1.1 fbdww 4 fbdww
C.11.4.5.3
Section ÿ ÿ ÿ
ÿ0.17 fbd ww ÿ0.53 fbd ww ÿ2 fbd ww

C.11.4.6.1(f)
C-252

inch (psi)
ÿ
bsw ÿ
bsw ÿ
bsw
TO = 0.062f TO = 0.2f TO = 0.75f
v, min c v, min c v, min c
F F F
andt andt andt
(C.11-13)
bsw bsw 50bsw
ÿ 0.35 ÿ 3.5 ÿ
F F F
andt andt andt
ÿ ÿ ÿ
= ÿÿ 0.25 fbd VA f =sin ÿÿ 0.8 fbd s vy VA f =sin ÿÿ 3 fbd
(C.11-17) VA f sin Section
s vy ww ww s vy ww
C.11.4.7.9 ÿ ÿ ÿ
0.66 fbd 2.2 fbd 8 fb d
ww ww ww
2 ÿ 2 ÿ 2 ÿ
ÿ TO ÿ TO ÿ TO
Section cop cop
Fÿ cop
T0.083f
<ÿÿ ÿ T 0.27f
<ÿÿ ÿ you
< ÿÿ
or c or c or c
C.11.5.1 (a) ÿÿp ÿÿp ÿÿp
ÿ cp ÿÿÿ ÿ cp ÿÿÿ ÿ cp ÿÿÿ
ÿ 2A ÿ ÿ F 2 2
T0.083f
ÿ
cop
1+ pc ÿ A ÿ F ÿ A ÿ F
Section <ÿÿ c
ÿ
1+ pc
tf 1 < ÿÿ
ÿ
pc
or
p cop ÿ 0.33 you
or
< ÿÿ 0.27f c
ÿ cp ÿ p
or c
ÿ cp +
C.11.5.1 (b) ÿÿ ÿÿÿ
ÿ cp ÿ F
ÿ
ÿpÿ 4fÿ
ÿ
ÿÿÿ c cp ÿÿÿ c
2 2
ÿ to ÿ No.or ÿ to ÿ No.or
Section T0.083f
ÿ cp
1+ T or0.27f
ÿ cp
1+ ÿ 2A ÿ ÿ No.or
or <ÿÿ c <ÿÿ c ÿ cop
0.33A to f ÿ tf or1 < ÿÿ c +
C.11.5.1 (c) ÿÿp
ÿ cp g
ÿÿp
ÿ cp g ÿ4A fg
ÿ
ÿÿÿ ÿÿÿ
p cp c
ÿÿ ÿÿÿ
Section ÿ 2TO ÿ ÿ 2TO ÿ ÿ 2TO ÿ

ÿ ÿ
T or0.33f
=ÿ ÿ c ÿ cp you
or = ÿÿ Fc ÿ cp T4f
or =ÿ ÿ cÿ ÿ cp
C.11.5.2.2(a)
ÿp _ ÿp _ ÿp _
ÿ cp ÿÿÿ ÿ cp ÿÿÿ ÿ cp ÿÿÿ
2
ÿ to ÿ F 2
Section T or0.33f
ÿ cp
1+
pc ÿ 2A ÿ ÿ F ÿ TO ÿ F
=ÿ ÿ c
tf or1 = ÿÿ
ÿ cop
+
pc
T4f1
cop
+
pc
or =ÿ ÿ
ÿ
C.11.5.2.2(b) ÿÿp ÿ 0.33f c
c ÿ
c ÿ
ÿ cp ÿÿÿ
p cop ÿ Fc p cop ÿ4f c
ÿÿ ÿÿÿ ÿÿÿ ÿÿÿ
2
ÿ 2A ÿ No.or 2 ÿ A ÿ No.or
Section T or0.33f
ÿ
1+ ÿ ÿ No.or T4f1 +
=ÿ ÿ c
ÿ cp ÿ p ÿ Acp or cp =ÿ ÿ c
ÿ
0.33A tf or1 = ÿÿ c + ÿ4A fg

ÿ
C.11.5.2.2(c) ÿ cp
_
ÿg
ÿto gf
ÿ ÿÿp
ÿ cp
c
ÿÿÿ
p cp c
ÿÿÿ
ÿÿÿ ÿÿÿ
2 2 2 2 2 2
V ÿ ÿ ÿ + pt ÿ ÿ ÿV
ÿ+ÿ ÿ ptuh ÿ ÿ V ÿ ÿ ÿ + pt ÿ
or uh or or uh
ÿÿÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ bd ÿ
ÿÿÿ ÿ
1.7A 2 1.7A 2 ÿ 1.7A 2

ÿ ÿ ÿw bd 0h ÿ ÿÿ w 0h ÿ ÿ bd
w 0h ÿ
(Q.11-18)
V ÿ
ÿ V ÿ
ÿ V ÿ
ÿ
c c + c
ÿ ÿ ÿÿ 0.66f + c ÿ ÿ ÿÿ 2f c ÿ ÿ ÿÿ 8 f + c
ÿ dbw ÿÿ ÿ dbw ÿÿ ÿ dbw ÿÿ
ÿ V or
ÿ ÿ ÿ ptuh ÿ ÿ V or
ÿ ÿ ÿ ptuh ÿ ÿ V orTpÿ ÿ uh
ÿ
+ ÿ
+ ÿ
ÿ ÿ
bdw bdw bdw

ÿÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ 2 1.7A0h ÿ ÿÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ 2 1.7A0h ÿ ÿÿ + ÿ ÿ ÿ2 1.7A0h ÿ
(Q.11-19)
Vc ÿ
ÿ ÿ Vc ÿ
ÿ Vc ÿ
ÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿÿ 0.66 f + c ÿ ÿÿ2f + c ÿ ÿ ÿÿ8f + c

ÿ dbw ÿÿ ÿ dbw ÿÿ ÿ dbw ÿÿ
bsw bsw bsw

(A 2A
vt+c0.062f)
= ÿ
(A 2A c 0.2f )
vt +
= ÿ
(A 2A c 0.75f )
vt +
= ÿ
F F F
andt andt andt
(C.11-23)
0.35bsw 3.5bsw 50bsw
ÿ ÿ ÿ
F F F
andt andt andt
C-253

square inch (psi)
ÿ ÿ ÿ
0.42fA ÿAÿf 1.33fA ÿÿfA 5 fA ÿÿfA
TO = c cp you andt = c cp you andt = c cp you andt
,min ÿÿÿpÿ h A ,min ÿÿÿpÿÿf h A ,min ÿÿÿpÿÿf h

yy
ÿ f sf yy
sf yy
sf
(C.11-24)
at 0.175b at 1.75b to 25b
ÿ you w ÿ you w ÿ you w
yes F yes F yes F
andt andt andt
ÿ ÿ
(3.30.08f A + )c c ( 34+ 0.08fcA c ÿ) (480 0.08f A + ) c c

Section
11A 110A 1600A
c c c
C.11.6.5
5.5A 55A 800A
c c c
Section 0.83 fbd

ÿ
2.65 fbd
ÿ
10 fbd
ÿ
ww ww ww
C.11.7.3
ÿ ÿ
Section (3.30.08fbd + ) cw +
( 34 0.08fbd cw ÿ) (480 0.08fbd + ) cw
C.11.8.3.2.1 11bd 110bd 1600bd
w w w
Section ÿ ÿ to
ÿ v
ÿ ÿ to
ÿ v
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ 800 280
ÿ
to
v
ÿ ÿ 5.5 1.9 bd w ÿ ÿ 55 20 bd w bd w
C.11.8.3.2.2 ÿÿ d ÿÿ d ÿÿ d
Section 0.83f hd
ÿ
2.65f hd
ÿ
10f hd
ÿ
c c c
C.11.9.3
Section 0.17 f hd ÿ
ÿ
0.53 f hd ÿ
ÿ
2 f hd ÿ
ÿ
c c c
C.11.9.5
ÿ
N.A. ÿ
N.A. ÿ
N.A.
or or or
=ÿ hd
V0.27f +4 =ÿ hd
v0.88f +4 V3.3f=ÿhd
+4
(C.11-27) c c c c c c
w w w
ÿ 0.2N ÿ ÿ
0.2 ÿ 0.2N
0.1fÿ +ÿ ÿ0.33f _ + 1.25fÿ +ÿ
w c w c w c
ÿÿ w ÿÿ ÿÿ w
0.05ÿfÿÿÿ = ÿ+ÿ V 0.16ÿfÿÿÿ = ÿ+ÿ V 0.6 fÿÿÿ ÿ = ÿ+ÿ V
c c m c c m c c m
(C.11-28) wow ÿ wow
ÿ wow ÿ
V2 V2 V2
ÿ ÿÿ
or ÿ ÿÿ
or ÿ ÿÿ
or
ÿÿ2ÿ ÿ ÿ2ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿÿ4ÿ ÿ
V c0.17
ÿ ÿ ÿ1 ÿ V
= +ÿ
0.083
ÿ ÿ fbd V c0.53
+ÿ ÿ1ÿ=ÿ V 0.27 ÿ fbd V 2 ÿÿ =+ÿ ÿ ÿ fbd
(C.11-31) co co c co
ÿÿÿ
ÿ ÿd _ ÿ d ÿ ÿ d
= yes
ÿ 2 +ÿ fbd
ÿ
+ÿ b
yes
ÿÿ2= fbd
ÿ
V +ÿ b ÿ ÿ 2 =
yes
fbd
ÿ
(C.11-32) c
b co c co c co
0 ÿ 0 ÿ ÿÿ 0 ÿ
= fbd ÿ
V 0.33
ÿ
vfbd= ÿ
ÿ
V4= ÿ
f bd
ÿ
(C.11-33) c co c co c co
+ f(0.3fbd )
ÿ
V c3.16 = ÿÿ pV pc c0 +
( +p f 0.3fbd
V c = ÿÿ Vc 0 pc p
ÿ
) + p
( +p f 0.3fbd
V c = ÿÿ Vc pc 0 p
ÿ
) +
(C.11-34) Note: ÿ p has the same units
Note: ÿ has units p Note: ÿ has units p
as the SI version
Section ÿ
ÿ MPa cf 0.5
ÿ
2 ÿ
cf 5 kgf/cm ÿ ÿpsi _
ff 70
C.11.11.2.2
Section ÿ
0.17 fbd
ÿ
ÿ
0.53 fbd
ÿ
2 fbd ÿ
ÿ
co co co
C.11.11.3.1
Section 0.5 fbd
ÿ
1.6 fbd
ÿ
6 fbd
ÿ
co co co
C.11.11.3.2
ÿ ÿ ÿ
0.33 fbd 1.1 fbd 4 fbd
Section co co co
C.11.11.4.8 0.58 fbd

ÿ
1.9 fbd
ÿ
7 fbd
ÿ
co co co
C-254
NSR-10 – Appendix CF – Equivalence between the SI system, the mks system, and the English
system of non-homogeneous equations of Title C of the Regulations

square inch (psi)
ÿ ÿ ÿ
ÿ
0.25 fbd ÿ
0.8 fbd 3 fbd ÿ
co co co
Section 0.66 fbd
ÿ
2.1 fbd
ÿ
8 fbd
ÿ
C.11.11.5.1 co co co
0.17 fÿ 0.53 fÿ 2 fÿ
c c c
Section ÿ ÿ ÿ
0.5f ÿ c 1.6 f ÿ c 6fÿ c

C.11.11.5.2
Section 0.17 f ÿÿ
ÿ
0.53 f ÿÿ
ÿ
2 f ÿÿ
ÿ
C.11.11.5.4 c c c
Section ÿ ÿ
2 fÿÿ _
ÿ
0.17 f ÿÿ c 0.53 f ÿÿ c c
C.11.11.7.2
Section 0.33 f ÿÿ
ÿ
1.1 f ÿÿ
ÿ ÿ
c c 4 f ÿÿ c
C.11.11.7.3
Section ÿ ÿ
ÿ kgf/cm 2 ÿ
ÿ
cf 8.3
MPaÿ cf 26.5 cf 100psi
C.12.1.2
F ÿ yte ÿ ÿf _ ÿ yte ÿ F ÿ yte ÿ
Section ÿ ÿd = ÿd ÿ ÿd
d b d b d b
C.12.2.2 = ÿ2.1f
ÿÿ
ÿ
ÿ ÿ6.6f
ÿ
ÿ
ÿÿÿ
= ÿ ÿ 25f
ÿ
c ÿÿ c ÿÿ ÿ c
ÿ ÿ f ÿ yte ÿ ÿ ÿ f ÿ yte ÿ ÿ F ÿ yte

Section = d = d = d
d b d b d b
C.12.2.2 1.7fÿ
ÿ
5.3f ÿ
ÿ
20 fÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
ÿ
ÿ c ÿÿÿ ÿ c ÿÿÿ ÿ c
F ÿ yte ÿ F ÿ yte ÿ ÿ 3f ÿ yte ÿ

Section ÿ d ÿ d ÿ d
d b d b d b
C.12.2.2 ÿ ÿ ÿ=1.4
ÿ ÿf
ÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿ=4.4
ÿ ÿf
ÿ
ÿ = ÿ50ÿ fÿ
ÿ
c ÿÿÿ c ÿÿÿ c ÿÿÿ
F ÿ yte ÿ F ÿ yte ÿ 3f ÿ yte ÿ

Section ÿ ÿd ÿ ÿd ÿ ÿd
d d d
C.12.2.2 ÿ =ÿÿ1.1f
ÿ
ÿ
ÿb _
ÿ =ÿÿ3.5f
ÿ
ÿ
ÿb _
ÿ =ÿÿ40f
ÿ
ÿ
ÿb _
ÿ c ÿ ÿ c ÿ ÿ c ÿ
F ÿÿÿ F ÿÿÿ 3f ÿÿÿ
= and you
d = and you have
d = and you
d
d b d b d b
(C.12-1) 1.1 ÿfc K ÿÿ ÿ+ÿÿ ÿ K
3.5 fc ÿÿ ÿ+ÿÿ ÿ fc Kÿ
ÿ 40 ÿ+ÿÿ
cb tr cb tr cb tr
ÿÿ
d ÿÿ
d d
b b ÿÿ b
ÿ 0.24f ÿ0.075f _ ÿ0.02f _

Section ÿ and ÿ ÿd ÿ0.043fd
ÿ
b ( andb
) ÿ and ÿ ÿdbÿ_ ÿ ( 0.0044fd andb
) ÿ and ÿ ÿdbÿ_ ÿ ( 0.0003fd andb
)
C.12.3.2 ÿ F
ÿ
ÿ F
ÿ
ÿ F
ÿ
ÿÿ c ÿ ÿÿ c ÿ ÿÿ c ÿ
ÿ 0.24f ÿ ÿ ÿ0.075f _ÿ ÿ ÿ 0.02f ÿ ÿ

Section = ÿey ÿd = ÿey ÿ d =ÿ
ey
d
dh dh b dh b
C.12.5.2 ÿ F
ÿ
ÿb _
ÿ F
ÿ
ÿ F
ÿ
ÿ c ÿ ÿ c ÿ ÿ c ÿÿÿ
ÿ 0.19f ÿ ÿ ÿ 0.06f ÿ ÿ ÿ 0.016f ÿ ÿ

Section ÿ=ÿ
ey
ÿd =ÿ
ey
ÿd ÿ=
ey
ÿd
dh dh dh b
C.12.6.2 F
ÿ
ÿb _
F
ÿ
ÿb _
F
ÿ
ÿ c ÿ ÿÿ c ÿ ÿÿ c ÿ
ÿ f 240
ÿÿÿÿÿ ÿ f2460 ÿ
ÿ ÿ f35,000 ÿ
Section and and

ÿ
and
ÿ ÿÿ
C.12.7.2 F F F
ÿÿÿÿ and ÿÿ and ÿ ÿÿ and
ÿ
ÿ ÿto bf ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿto
b
f ÿ
ÿ ÿto bf ÿ
= 3.3 and
= and
= 0.27 and
(C-12-3) d ÿ
F
ÿ d
F
ÿ d ÿ
F
ÿ
ÿÿÿÿ yes
ÿÿ ÿ c ÿÿÿ
ÿÿ
yes
ÿ ÿÿ ÿ
ÿ c ÿÿÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿyes
c ÿÿÿ
F ÿ ÿFHE
se F ps ÿse
ÿÿ F ps ÿse
ÿÿd
= ÿ ÿÿÿd = ÿ ÿ ff = ÿ ÿ ff
ÿ ÿ ÿ
fps _
ÿdÿÿ + db bse ÿ ÿ d + d b se ÿ ÿ d + db
(C-12-4) dbb
7
21 ÿÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ70210 ÿÿÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ1000
3000 ÿÿ ÿ
Section bs
w bs
w bs
w
0.41 4.2 60
C.12.10.5.2 F
andt
F
andt
F
andt
C-255

inch (psi)
df df df
Section 0.17
b and t
0.053
b and t
0.014
b and t
C.12.13.2.2 ÿf ÿ ÿf ÿ ÿf ÿ
c c c
0.071fd 0.0073fd 0.0005fd

Section andb andb andb
C.12.16.1 ( 0.13f 24 d ÿ b)
and
( 0.013f 24 d ÿ b ) and
( 0.0009f 24d ÿ ) and
b
Section
0.55bd 5.6bd 80bd
C.17.5.3.1 v v v
and C.17.5.3.2
Section
(3.5bd
+ÿ ÿ ÿ 1.8 0.6 fbd
) v and v v ) (18+ÿÿ
0.6ÿfbd 35b
v and v d v ( 260+ÿÿ
0.6 fbd )v d
ÿ v and
500b v
C.17.5.3.3
ÿ ÿ ÿ
(a) Class U : f 0.62 f ÿ you c (a) Class U : f 2 f _

ÿt
c (a) Class U : f 7.5 f_ ÿt
c
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
(b) Class T : 0.62 ff 1.0 f <ÿ Class T : 2ff 3.2f < ÿ (b) (b) Class T: 7.5f < ÿ12
f f
Section ct c ct c ct c
C.18.3.3 (c) Class C : f 1.0 you

f >
ÿ
(c) Class C : f 3.2 you

f >
ÿ
(c) Class C : f 12 fyou >

ÿ
c c c
ÿ ÿ ÿ
ÿ f ci
f 0.50 ÿ f ci
f 1.6 f 6f ÿ ci
you you you
0.50 fÿ 1.6 fÿ 6 fÿ
Section ci ci ci
C.18.4.1(c) 0.25 fÿ 0.8 fÿ 3f ÿ

ci ci ci
ÿ ÿ ÿ
Fc Fc Fc
=++
f HE
70 =+f700
+HE f =+ + f 10,000
(C.18-4) fps _
100 ÿ fps _
100 ÿ ps se
100 ÿ
p p p
ÿ ÿ ÿ
Fc Fc Fc
=++HE
FF 70 =+ +
ff 700 f =+ + f 10,000
(C.18-5) ps se ps se
ps 300 ÿp 300 ÿ p 300 ÿ p
sections
C.18.9.3.1 0.17 fÿ 0.53 fÿ 2 fÿ
c c c
and C.18.9.3.2
Section 2.1bdw 21b d

w 300bdw
C.18.12.7 F F F
and and and
Section F = +f 70 F f700 = + F = +f 10,000

$ HE $ HE $ HE
C.18.13.4.1
Section 0.33 f ÿÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿ
c 1.1fÿÿ _ c 4 f ÿÿ c
C.19.4.10
1.4bd 14bd 200bd
Section w w w
C.21.5.2.1 F F F
and and and
350hrs
ÿ ÿ ÿxÿ 35 hours
ÿ ÿ ÿxÿ 2 p.m.
ÿÿÿÿ
s 100 s 10ÿ = ÿ ÿ s4ÿ = x
ÿ=ÿÿ
(C.21-2)
either
3 either
3 either
ÿÿ 3
100s MMM
150 ÿ ÿ 10 ÿcm
ÿ s 15 cm in. ÿ ÿ
4 s6 in.
either either either
1.7fA ÿc 5.3fA ÿ 20fA cÿ

j cj j
Section 1.2fA ÿ 4fAÿ 15fA ÿ
c j cj cj
C.21.7.4.1
1.0fA ÿ 3.2fA ÿ 12fA ÿ
cj cj c j
fd fd fd
= andb = andb = andb
(C.21-6) dh ÿ dh ÿ dh ÿ
5.4f 17.2f 65f
c c c
Section 0.083A fÿ
ÿ
0.27A fÿ
ÿ
to f ÿ
ÿ
cv c cv c cv c
C.21.9.2.1
Section 0.17A fÿ
ÿ
0.53A fÿ
ÿ
2A f ÿ
ÿ
cv c cv c cv c
C.21.9.2.2
C-256

inch (psi)
ÿ ÿ ÿ
VA f =
no
(
cv c ÿ ÿ +ÿ c
f
ty ) VA f =ÿ ÿ +ÿ
no cv ( c c
f
ty ) VA f =
no cv ( ÿ ÿc +ÿ c
f
ty )
hw hw hw
ÿ= c 0.25 for ÿ 1.5 ÿ= c 0.80 for ÿ 1.5 ÿ= c 3.0 for ÿ 1.5
(C.21-7)
w w w
hw hw hw
ÿ=
c 0.17 for ÿ 2.0 ÿ=
c 0.53 for ÿ 2.0 ÿ=
c 2.0 for ÿ 2.0
w w w
Section 0.66A fÿcv c 2.12 Afÿ cv c 8A fÿcv c
C.21.9.4.4
0.83A fÿc w c 2.65A fÿc w c 10A fÿc w c
Section
0.83A fÿc w c 2.65A fÿc w c 10A fÿc w c
C.21.9.4.5
Section
2.8f 28f 400f
C.21.9.6.5(a) and and and
Section ÿ ÿ ÿ
0.083A cv f ÿ c 0.27A cv f ÿ c to cv
f ÿ c
C.21.9.6.5(b)
Section ÿ ÿ
0.33 f A ÿ c cw ÿ f Aÿc cw 4 fA ÿ c cw
C.21.9.7.2
ÿ ÿ ÿ
= V 2A=f sin ÿÿ 2.65 f A vd y V 2A=f sin ÿÿ 10 f A vd y
(C.21-9) V 2A f sin ÿÿno0.83 f A you and c cw no c cw no c cw
(C.21-10) = f ÿ +ÿ
VAno 0.17 cv ( ÿ
c f
ty
) = f ÿ +ÿ
VAno 0.53 cv ( ÿ
c f
ty
) V A2f
no
= f ty
cv ( ÿ+ÿ c
ÿ
)
Section
0.66A fÿcv c 2.12 Afÿ cv c 8A fÿcv c
C.21.11.9.2
Section ÿ ÿ ÿ
0.29 fbd co 0.93 fbd co 3.5 fbd co
C.21.13.6
ÿ ÿ ÿ
(C.22-2) =
M 0.42fS ÿ =ÿ
M 1.33fS M 5nofS= ÿ
no cm no cm cm
PMor or ÿ
PMor or ÿ
PMor or ÿ
(C.22-7) ÿÿÿ 0.42f c ÿÿÿ 1.33f c ÿÿÿ5f _ c

Sm
Aÿ Sm
Aÿ S Aÿ
g g mg
ÿ
ÿ ÿ 4fÿ c
(C.22-9) = fbh
V 0.11 ÿ = fbh
V 0.35 ÿ
no ww no ww V no = bhw
3
ÿÿ2ÿV ÿ 2 ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ=+4 ÿ8 ÿÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
ÿfbh 0.22f V ÿfbh 2.66ÿ fb
0.11
no 1 ÿ = +ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ c0 ÿ ÿnoV+ÿ
0.35
ÿ ÿ1fbh
= 0.71 fÿÿ c0 no ÿÿ c0 c
(C.22-10) ÿÿ
33
f 1ÿc
ÿ ÿ 0.85 600 ÿ ÿ 1f cÿ
ÿ 0.85 6120 ÿ ÿ
ÿ 0.85ÿf187,000
C
ÿ
(CB-1) ÿb
ÿ= ÿ
ÿb
ÿ= ÿ
ÿb
ÿ= ÿ
600f 6120f
ÿ +f87,000
f + f + f
and ÿ and ÿ and ÿ and ÿ and and ÿ
ÿ 1.5 ÿ 1.5 ÿ 1.5

N k fh=bc
ÿ efc N k fh=bc
ÿ efc N k fh=bc
ÿ efc
(CD-7)
k10 = either
7 k10 = either
7 24k = either
17
c c c
ÿ 5 ÿ 5 ÿ 5
(CD-8) N 3.93fh
= bc
ÿ ef N 5.83fh
= bc
ÿ ef N 16 3fh=bc
ÿ ef
N 13c=A f brg = A f brg = A f brg

ÿ ÿ ÿ
(CD-17) ÿ N 42.5c ÿ N 160c ÿ

sb a1 c sb a1 c sb a1 c
0.2 0.2 0.2

ÿÿÿ ÿ 1.5 ÿÿÿÿ ÿ 1.5 ÿÿÿ ÿ 1.5
(CD-24) =
V 0.6b and
cdfÿ ( ) =
V 1.9b and
cdfÿ ( ) V 7 b= and
d fcÿ ( )
ÿÿÿ to c a1 ÿÿ to c a1 ÿÿÿ to c a1
d d d
to to to
0.2 0.2 0.2

ÿÿÿ ÿ 1.5 ÿÿÿ ÿ 1.5 ÿÿÿ ÿ 1.5
(CD-25) = bd
V 0.66 and
cdfÿ ( ) V 2.1= b d ÿ and
cdfÿ ( ) V ÿ8 b= ÿ ÿ and
d fcÿ ( )
ÿ to c a1 to c a1 to c a1
ÿÿ ÿÿ d
to to to
C-257
NSR-10 – Appendix CF – Equivalence between the SI system, the mks system, and the English system
of the non-homogeneous equations of Title C of the Regulation
Grades:
C-258
NSR-10 – Appendix CG – Alternative flexural design procedure by the allowable stress method
APPENDIX GC
ALTERNATE FLEXURE DESIGN PROCEDURE
BY THE ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD
CG.0 - NOMENCLATURE
As = area of the reinforcement, not prestressed, that works in tension, expressed in mm².
ÿ
Ace = area of compression reinforcement, expressed in mm². =

width of the compression face of the element, in mm.
bd = distance from the extreme fiber in compression to the centroid of the reinforcing steel in tension, in mm. dÿ =
distance from the extreme fiber in compression to the centroid of the reinforcing steel in compression, in mm.
Ec = modulus of elasticity of the concrete, expressed in MPa (see C.8.5.4).
Es = modulus of elasticity of the reinforcement, expressed in MPa (see C.8.5.5). cf =
compressive stress in the extreme fiber in compression of the concrete, expressed in MPa. cfÿ = nominal
compressive strength of concrete, expressed in MPa. sf = tensile stress in reinforcing
steel, expressed in MPa. sfÿ = compressive stress in the reinforcing steel in
compression, expressed in MPa and f = nominal yield strength in the reinforcing steel, expressed in
MPa.
n = modular elasticity ratio.
= EE yes c
ÿ = drag reduction coefficient (see C.9.3). = amount of

ÿ reinforcement not prestressed in tension (= A bd ) . yes
) A bd .
ÿ
=
ÿÿ = amount of compression reinforcement, ( yes
GC.1 - SCOPE
GC.1.1 - Non-prestressed concrete elements can be designed for flexure using service loads (without load factors) and allowable
stresses under service loads in accordance with the provisions of this appendix.
GC.1.2. - For the design of the elements that are not included in the CG appendix, the appropriate provisions of Title C of the
Regulations must be applied.
CG.1.3 - All applicable provisions of the Regulation for non-prestressed concrete, except C.8.5.12, must be applied to elements
designed by this alternative design method.
CG.1.4 - The elements subjected to bending must comply with the requirements for deflection control of C.9.5 and the
requirements C.10.4 to C.10.7 of this Regulation.
GC.2 - DEFINITIONS
GC.2.1 - Load factors and resistance reduction coefficients, ÿ , shall be taken as unity for members designed by this alternate
design method. (See B.2.3)
CG.2.2 - Elements can be dimensioned for 75% of the capacity required in other parts of appendix CG, when wind or seismic
forces combined with other loads are considered, as long as the resulting section is not less than that required for the combination
of live and dead load. (see B.2.3)
C-259
GC.2.3 - When the dead load reduces the effects of other loads, the members must be designed for 85% of the dead load in
combination with the other loads. (See B.2.3)
CG.3 - ALLOWABLE FORCES UNDER SERVICE LOADS
GC.3.1 - The stress in the concrete, cf , in the extreme fiber in compression, must not exceed 0.45fÿ , expressed
c in MPa.
CG.3.2 - The tensile stress in the reinforcement sf must not exceed:
Reinforcing steel with yf 240 ÿ MPa ..................................... ..................................... 120MPa
Reinforcing steel with yf 420 ÿ MPa and electro-welded wire

mesh (smooth or corrugated) .................................. ................................................................ ....170MPa
For reinforcing steel placed for bending of diameter No. 3

(3/8”) or 10M (10 mm) or less, in slabs in a span direction of less
than 3.50 meters, must not exceed ......... .......................................... 0.50fy or 210 MPa
CG.4 - BENDING
For the investigation of stresses under service loads, the elastic theory (for bending) should be used with the following
assumptions:
GC.4.1 - The deformations vary linearly with the distance measured from the neutral axis, except for high-rise elements
subjected to bending with ratios of total height to free span greater than 2/5 for continuous spans and 4/5 for single spans , in
which a non-linear distribution of unit strain must be considered. (see C.10.7).
GC.4.2 - The stress-strain relationship of concrete is a straight line under service loads within the allowable stress range.
CG.4.3 - In reinforced concrete elements, the concrete does not resist traction.
CG.4.4 - The modular relationship n EE = yes c can be taken as the nearest integer (but not less than 6).
Except in calculating deflections, the value of n for lightweight concrete shall be considered the same as for normal-weight
concrete of the same strength.
CG.4.5 - In doubly reinforced elements subjected to bending, an effective modular relationship of 2E E must be used to
transform
yesc the compression reinforcement into the stress calculation. The compressive stress in said reinforcement must not
exceed the allowable tensile stress.
CG.4.6 – The previous requirements can be considered satisfied when the stresses in the materials are determined by means
of the following equations:
Stresses in the reinforcing steel in tension:
m
F =
yes
ÿ F (CG-1)
s ( )admissible
to jd
yes
Stresses in the reinforcing steel in compression:
C-260
ÿ
d
ÿ
what
d
ÿ
f2f = ÿ F
ss s ( )allowable (GC-2)
1k ÿ
Efforts in compression concrete:
2M
Fc =
2
ÿ
cF( ) admissible (CG-3)
bd jk
where:
what
j1
=ÿ
(GC-4)
3
and for sections with tension reinforcement only:
what
= (noÿÿ)2ÿ 2n n ÿ + (CG-5)
or for sections with compression reinforcement:
2 ÿ d ÿÿ
=_
2kn (ÿ+ÿ + ÿ+ÿ
) ÿ 2nÿ+ÿ
ÿÿ ÿ
no ( ) (CG-6)
ÿ ÿÿ
ÿ d
C-261
Grades
C-262


NSR-10
TITLE D — MASONRY
STRUCTURAL

NSR-10 – Chapter D.1 – General requirements
TITLE D
STRUCTURAL MASONRY
CHAPTER D.1
D.1.1 — SCOPE
D.1.1.1 — SCOPE — Title D of this Regulation establishes the minimum design and construction requirements for masonry
structures and their elements. These structures have a level of safety comparable to structures made of other materials,
when designed and built in accordance with the requirements of this Regulation.
D.1.1.2 — SPECIAL STRUCTURES — For special structures such as arches, vaults, tanks, silos, and chimneys, the
requirements of Title D of this Regulation may be used when applicable, in the judgment of the designer engineer.
D.1.1.3 — PURPOSE — The requirements established in this Title are aimed at achieving appropriate behavior of structural
masonry constructions and their structural integrity under permanent or transient vertical load conditions, under conditions
of lateral force, wind or earthquake and under occasional states of abnormal forces.
D.1.1.4 — SUPPLEMENT — Title D is supplemented by the other Titles of this Regulation. In the event of a conflict between
one or several of the requirements, the most severe of them must be adopted as valid.
D.1.1.5 — MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS — The established procedures and specifications constitute the minimum
requirements that must be met by the design and construction of masonry structures, with the aim of protecting life and, as
far as possible, the material goods of the building users.
D.1.1.6 – DESIGN PROCEDURE – Masonry structures must be designed by the strength limit state method using the load
combinations, described in B.2.4, and the Title D requirements presented for this method. However, the design of masonry
structures is allowed by the allowable work stress method using the load combinations described in B.2.3 and for this
purpose the alternative requirements presented in Appendix D-1 – Design of structures must be used. of masonry by the
method of allowable work efforts. All design of the structure must be done by one of two methods.
D.1.2 — DRAWINGS AND REPORTS
D.1.2.1 — STRUCTURAL PLANS — In addition to the requirements established in A.1.5.2 of this Regulation, the following
must be specified and detailed in the plans:
(a) Characteristics of the masonry units used in the design, indicating the NTC standard, of the
allowed standards that are cited in section D.3.6, under which they must be manufactured.
(b) Value of the nominal compressive strength of the masonry used in the different structural elements, specified
with respect to the average net area of the section (fmÿ ) . (c) Definition of the
paste mortar as type H, M, S or N, of those indicated in section D.3.4, setting its
minimum compressive strength, measured as defined in that same section. (d) Location
of the cells and cavities that must be injected with filler mortar. (e) Definition of the type of
filler mortar, of those indicated in section D.3.5, prescribing its resistance
minimum compression, measured as defined in that same section.
(f) Size and location of all specified elements. (g) Specified size,
strength, type, and location of reinforcing steel, mechanical anchors, and
connectors used in the design.
D-1
(h) Location, size, and characteristics of control joints and construction joints. (i) Location and size of
inspection cells.
D.1.2.2 — REPORTS — The stipulations in this regard in A.1.5.3 must be complied with.
D.1.3 — TECHNICAL SUPERVISION
D.1.3.1 — OBLIGATORY TECHNICAL SUPERVISION — All buildings with a constructed area of more than 3,000 m² must undergo
Technical Supervision, as indicated by Law 400 of 1997. The Technical Supervisor must comply with the provisions of Title I,
Technical Supervision, of this Regulation. Given the susceptibility of structural masonry to defects in the quality of workmanship and
the quality of the materials used; In buildings of less than 3,000 m², it is recommended that any work carried out with this system be
built under the strict technical supervision of a suitable professional, a duly licensed Civil Engineer or Architect, or a competent
representative under their responsibility.
D.1.3.2 — SCOPE OF SUPERVISION — The technical supervisor must verify the consistency between the executed work and the
construction plans and specifications, in accordance with the provisions of section I.2.4 of these Regulations.
D.1.3.3 – RECORD OF SUPERVISION WORK - The Technical Supervisor must keep a written record of his work. In addition to
what is regulated in A.1.3.9 and in Title I, the technical supervisor must control and record the quality of the masonry units, the glue
and filler mortars, the arrangement of the reinforcements, anchors and connectors. It must also supervise mortar injection operations.
D.1.4 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL MASONRY STRUCTURES
D.1.4.1 — RESISTANCE BEFORE HORIZONTAL LOADS IN TWO ORTHOGONAL DIRECTIONS IN PLAN — Structural walls
are highly rigid elements for forces applied in their plane and low rigidity and resistance when forces are applied perpendicular to
their plane. For this reason, any structure made up of structural walls must have components in the two main orthogonal directions
of the building, through the arrangement of walls in the appropriate directions or through the use of composite elements whose floor
plan geometry generates rigidity in two main directions. .
D.1.4.1.1 — Difference in stiffness between the two main directions in plan — At any story in structural masonry
buildings with three levels or more, the stiffness provided by the set of existing structural elements in one direction cannot
be less than the 20% of the existing stiffness in the orthogonal direction. In one and two-story buildings, this ratio can be
reduced to 10%.
D.1.4.2 — MATHEMATICAL MODEL TO CARRY OUT THE ANALYSIS — The cantilever wall model embedded in the base and
laterally braced by the floor diaphragms can be used for structural analysis. Failing that, any alternative structural model compatible
with the actual operation of the construction may be used in the face of the stress analyzed, provided that the best precision of the
response determined with the alternative model is guaranteed by experimental or theoretical evidence.
D.1.4.3 — HORIZONTAL FLOOR DIAPHRAGMS — The floor system used as a diaphragm must be designed to meet the stresses
derived from its function, taking into account the provisions of A.3.6.8.
D.1.4.4 — INCONVENIENCE OF THE COMBINATION OF STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS — Due to the fact that the structure can be
subjected to working conditions in the inelastic range under severe earthquakes, the combination in height of structural systems of
different dissipation capacities is not considered convenient. of energy.
D.1.4.5 — REQUIREMENTS FOR THE COMBINATION OF STRUCTURAL MASONRY SYSTEMS — In the event that the
combination of different structural systems is used in plan, or in height, the requirements stated in sections A.3.2.4 must be met. and
A.3.2.5.
D.1.4.6 — DRIFT LIMITS FOR STRUCTURAL MASONRY SYSTEMS — The values of the drift limits for structural masonry
constructions are indicated in table A.6.4-1 of this document.
D-2
Regulation.
D.1.4.7 — REQUIREMENTS FOR MATERIALS — All materials used in the construction of masonry structures must
meet the standards and specifications listed in chapter D.3.
D.1.4.8 — ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS — When environmental conditions are out of the ordinary or may adversely
affect the specified characteristics of the materials, additional precautions must be taken to ensure the proper functioning
of the construction carried out under these conditions.
D.1.4.9 — LABOR IN MASONRY STRUCTURES — Special importance must be given to the use of qualified labor. The
initial and previous construction controls must be those specified, in order to be able to determine the most demanding
qualification of the personnel involved.
D-3
Grades
D-4
NSR-10 – Chapter D.2 – Classification, uses, standards, nomenclature and definitions
CHAPTER D.2
CLASSIFICATION, USES,
STANDARDS, NOMENCLATURE AND DEFINITIONS
D.2.1 — CLASSIFICATION OF STRUCTURAL MASONRY

These standards recognize the following types of masonry:
D.2.1.1 — REINFORCED CAVITY MASONRY — It is the construction made with two walls of masonry pieces with
parallel faces, reinforced or not, separated by a continuous reinforced concrete space, with composite operation and that
meets the requirements of chapter D. 6. This structural system is classified, for earthquake resistant design purposes, as
one of the systems with special energy dissipation capacity in the inelastic range (DES).
D.2.1.2 — REINFORCED MASONRY — It is the construction based on pieces of masonry with vertical drilling, joined by
means of mortar, internally reinforced with bars and steel wires and that meets the requirements of chapter D.7. This
structural system is classified, for earthquake resistant design purposes, as one of the systems with special energy
dissipation capacity in the inelastic range (DES) when all its cells are injected with filler mortar or when additional
requirements are met. of minimum reinforcements described in D.7.2.1.1, and as one of the systems with moderate
capacity for energy dissipation in the inelastic range (DMO) when only the vertical cells that have reinforcement are
injected with filler mortar.
D.2.1.3 — PARTIALLY REINFORCED MASONRY — It is the construction based on vertically perforated masonry
pieces, joined by means of mortar, internally reinforced with steel bars and wires and that meets the requirements of
chapter D.8. This structural system is classified, for earthquake resistant design purposes, as one of the systems with
moderate energy dissipation capacity in the inelastic range (BMD).
D.2.1.4 — UNREINFORCED MASONRY — It is the construction based on masonry pieces joined by means of mortar
that does not meet the minimum amounts of reinforcement established for partially reinforced masonry. It must meet the
requirements of chapter D.9. This structural system is classified, for earthquake resistant design purposes, as one of the
systems with minimum energy dissipation capacity in the inelastic range (DMI).
D.2.1.5 — MASONRY OF CONFINED WALLS — It is the construction based on masonry pieces joined by means of
mortar, mainly reinforced with reinforced concrete elements built around the wall, confining it and that meets the
requirements of chapter D. 10. This structural system is classified, for earthquake resistant design purposes, as one of
the systems with moderate energy dissipation capacity in the inelastic range (BMD).
D.2.1.6 — DIAPHRAGM WALL MASONRY — Masonry diaphragm walls are those walls placed inside a frame structure,
which restrict their free displacement under lateral loads. Diaphragm walls must meet the requirements of chapter D.11.
This type of construction is not allowed for new buildings, and its use is only allowed within the scope of Chapter A.10,
applicable to the addition, modification or remodeling of the structural system of buildings built before the validity of this
version of the Regulations. , or the evaluation of its seismic vulnerability.
D.2.1.7 — EXTERNALLY REINFORCED MASONRY — It is the masonry construction where the reinforcement is placed
inside a layer of render (pattern) fixing it to the masonry wall by means of connectors and/or nails and meets the
requirements described in D. 12. This structural system is classified, for earthquake resistant design purposes, as one of
the systems with minimum energy dissipation capacity in the inelastic range (DMI).
D.2.2 — USES OF STRUCTURAL MASONRY

D.2.2.1 — PERMITTED USES — In accordance with the Regulations, the use of structural masonry as a structural
system is permitted, as long as the caveats established in this Title are met, the
D-5
Use limitations for the different types of structural masonry in chapter A.3, according to the seismic hazard zone, the
building use group, and the type of structural system.
D.2.2.2 — COMBINATION OF STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS — The combination of structural systems that include structural
masonry has the same limitations and must comply with the requirements described in chapter A.3 of this Regulation.
D.2.2.3 — REINFORCED CONCRETE ELEMENTS INSIDE THE STRUCTURAL MASONRY — The use of reinforced
concrete elements embedded within the structural masonry, or in combination with it, is permitted in elements such as
lintels, beams, diaphragm collector elements , piers, etc., for cases other than those explicitly contemplated within each
of the types of structural masonry. The design of these elements must be carried out following the requirements of Title
C of the Regulation, for the same degree of energy dissipation capacity in the inelastic range in which the type of masonry
in which the reinforced concrete elements are placed is classified. The veneers made with masonry pieces when used
as forms to pour the concrete, can be considered as part of the coating of the reinforced concrete elements. The values
of the basic energy dissipation coefficient R0 , used in the design of these elements must be the same as those assigned
to the structural masonry system in chapter A.3.
D.2.3 — STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITED IN TITLE D OF THE REGULATION

The following Colombian Technical Standards NTC of the Colombian Institute of Technical Standards, ICONTEC, and of
the American Society for Materials Testing, ASTM, to which reference is made in Title D of this Regulation, and are an
integral part of it. Consult A.1.6 regarding the obligatory nature of the technical standards mentioned in this Title of the
Regulation.
NTC standards promulgated by ICONTEC
NTC 121 — Portland Cement — Physical and mechanical specifications.
NTC 161 — Smooth carbon steel bars for reinforced concrete. (Note: C.3.5.4 places limitations on the use of this type of
reinforcing steel.) (ASTM A615)
NTC 245 — Cold-worked carbon steel bars for reinforced reinforced concrete. (Note: The use of this type of steel is
prohibited).
NTC 248 — Corrugated carbon steel bars for reinforced reinforced concrete. (Note: C.3.5.3 imposes additional
requirements to those contained in this Standard). (ASTM A615)
NTC 296 — Modular dimensions of ceramic bricks.
NTC 321 — Portland cement — Chemical specifications.
NTC 673 — Test of resistance to compression of concrete cylinders (ASTM C39).
NTC 922 — Silico-calcareous bricks. (ASTM C73)
NTC 1925 — Welded mesh made of smooth steel wire for reinforced concrete. (ASTM A185)
NTC 2240 — Aggregates used in masonry mortars. (ASTM C144)
NTC 2289 — Corrugated bars and rolls of low-alloy and/or heat-treated steel for reinforced concrete in earthquake-
resistant design constructions. (ASTM A706)
NTC 2310 — Welded mesh made of corrugated wire for concrete reinforcement. (ASTM A497)
NTC 3329 — Specifications of the mortar for masonry units. (ASTM C270)
NTC 3356 — Long-life premixed mortar for masonry units. (ASTM C1142)
D-6
NTC 3495 — Resistance to compression of masonry prisms. (ASTM E447)
NTC 3546 — Test method for laboratory and on-site evaluation of mortars for simple and reinforced masonry units. Sampling and
testing of the glue mortar for masonry. (ASTM C780)
NTC 4002 – Steel industry. Smooth steel wire for concrete reinforcement. (ASTM A82)
NTC 4017 – Test method for fired clay masonry units. (ASTM C67)
NTC 4019 — Hydrated lime for masonry. (ASTM C207)
NTC 4020 — Aggregates for injection mortar for masonry. (ASTM C404)
NTC 4024 — Sampling and testing of non-reinforced, vibrocompacted precast concrete. (ASTM C140)
NTC 4026 — Concrete block and brick units for structural masonry. (ASTM C90)
NTC 4040 — Welding procedures applicable to steel for concrete reinforcement. (ANSI/AWS D1.4)
NTC 4043 — Sampling and testing of fluid concrete (Grouts). (ASTM C1019)
NTC 4046 — Quicklime (CaO) for structural purposes. (ASTM C5)
NTC 4048 — Grouts for masonry. (ASTM C476)
NTC 4050 — Cement for masonry. (ASTM C91)
NTC 4076 — Concrete blocks and brick units for non-structural masonry. (ASTM C129)
NTC 4205 — Fired clay masonry units (bricks and blocks) (ASTM C34, C56 and C62)
NTC 4383 — Terms and definitions on concrete masonry.
ASTM Standards
A 82 —Specification for Steel Wire, plain for concrete reinforcement. (NTC 4002)
A 185 —Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. (NTC 1925)
A 706 — Specification for low-alloy steel deformed bars for concrete reinforcement. (NTC 2289)
A 497 —Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. (NTC 2310)
C 5 — Specification for quicklime for structural purposes. (NTC 4046)
C 34 — Specification for structural clay load-bearing wall tile. (NTC 4205)
C 55 — Specification for concrete building brick. (NTC 4026)
C 56 — Specification for structural clay, non-load bearing tile. (NTC 4205)
C 62 — Specification for building brick (Solid masonry units made from clay or shale). (NTC 4205)
C 67 —Test methods of sampling and testing brick and structural clay tile. (NTC 4017)
C 73 — Specification for calcium silicate face brick (Sand-lime brick). (NTC 922)
C 90 — Specification for load-bearing concrete masonry units. (NTC 4026)
C 91 — Specification for masonry cement. (NTC 4050)
D-7
C 109 — Test method for compressive strength of hydraulic cement mortars (using 2-in. or 50-mm cube specimens).
(NTC 220)
C 129 — Specification for non-load-bearing concrete masonry units. (NTC 4076)
C 140 —Method of sampling and testing concrete masonry units. (NTC 4024)
C 144 — Specification for aggregate for masonry mortar. (NTC 2240)
C 150 —Specification for portland cement.
C 207 — Specification for hydrated lime for masonry purposes. (NTC 4019)
C 212 — Specification for structural clay facing tile. (NTC 4205)
C 216 — Specification for facing brick (Solid masonry units made from clay or shale). (NTC 4205)
C 270 — Specification for mortar for unit masonry. (NTC 3329)
C 404 —Specification for aggregate for masonry grout. (NTC 4020)
C 476 —Specification for grout for masonry. (NTC 4048)
C 595 —Standard specification for blended hydraulic cements.
C 652 — Specification for hollow brick (Hollow masonry units made from clay or shale) (NTC 4205)
C 780 — Test method for pre-construction and construction evaluation of mortars for plain and reinforced unit masonry.
(NTC 3546)
C 897 — Specification for Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement – Based Plasters.
C 926 —Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster.
C 1019 —Method for sampling and testing grout. (NTC 4043)
C 1142 —Specification for ready-mixed mortar for masonry. (NTC 3356)
E 447 — Test methods for compressive strength of masonry prisms. (NTC 3495)
AWS Standards:
"Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel" (ANSI/AWS D1.4-92) of the American Welding Society (NTC 4040).
D.2.4 — NOMENCLATURE
Aa = effective peak acceleration coefficient, see Title A.

Aci = sectional area of the confinement column i Act = total area , in mm². Chapter D.10.
of the confinement columns of the wall, in mm². Chapter D.10.
Ae = effective area of the masonry section, mm2 . See D.5.4.1.
Am = minimum area of the floor walls, which act in the same direction in plan. Within the area of the walls the confinement
columns are included, in m². Chapter D.10.
Amd = effective area of masonry for verification by crushing, in mm². Chapter D.10.
Amv = effective area to determine shear forces, mm2 . See D.5.4.5.
Ap = floor area at the considered level, in m². Chapter D.10.
D-8
Ase = effective area of tensile reinforcement, mm2 .

Ast = total area of reinforcing steel in the wall section, or total area of longitudinal reinforcing steel of the confinement element,
in mm².
As1 = area of tension reinforcement balanced by compression in the masonry, mm2 .
As2 = area of the tension reinforcement balanced by the compression reinforcement, mm2 .
Av = area of horizontal reinforcement that resists spaced shear at a spacing s measured vertically, mm2 . = depth of compression
to equivalent block (take as 0.85c ), mm. = depth of the equivalent block of compression
in balanced conditions, equation (D.5.1-2), mm. = effective width of the section, mm. See D.5.4.4. = depth of the neutral
bab axis in the compression zone, mm. = distance from the
c compression face to the centroid of the tension reinforcement, mm.
= distance from the centroid of the compression-flexion reinforcement to the extreme
d fiber in compression. = reduced seismic effects.
dÿ E Ecre = modulus of elasticity of the plaster or plaster mortar, MPa.

Em = modulus of elasticity of the masonry, MPa.
Er = modulus of elasticity of the filler mortar, MPa. = modulus
Es of elasticity of reinforcing steel, MPa.
Fs = seismic forces.
= specified compressive strength of the concrete of the confining elements, in MPa. = specified compressive
cfÿ fÿ cp strength of the adhesive mortar, MPa. = specified compressive strength of the
F'
cr filler mortar, MPa.
ÿ
F
believe
= specified compressive strength of the coating mortar or plaster, MPa. = specified compressive
F'
cu strength of the masonry unit measured over net area, MPa. = specified compressive strength of masonry, MPa.
ÿ
fm
ÿ
fm = square root of the compressive strength of the masonry, in MPa. = modulus of rupture
of the masonry, MPa. = yield strength of reinforcing
rf steel, MPa.
and f Gm = shear modulus of the masonry, MPa.
Gr = shear modulus of the filler mortar, MPa. = height of the
h masonry unit, in mm, to be used in equation (D.3.7-1). = effective height of the element to evaluate
hÿ buckling effects, mm, see D.5.4.3, or length of the diagonal of the wall panel between confining elements, or effective
height of the element to evaluate buckling effects in Chapter D.10 .
#! = height of the story located above the element under study, measured center to center between beams of
confinement, in mm. Chapter D.10.
I ct = moment of inertia of the confining columns of the wall, with respect to its centroid, in mm4 .
Chapter D.10.
K = reinforcement cover measured from the outer end of the masonry unit, mm. kp
= correction factor for unit absorption, dimensionless, in the determination of the resistance to
compression of the non-injected masonry. k 1.4
for concrete
= units p
k0.8p
=_ for clay or silico-calcareous units
kr = correction factor for unit absorption, dimensionless, in the determination of the resistance to
compression of the injected masonry. for
= concrete units k 0.90 r
k0.75r
= _ for clay or silico-calcareous units = span of a
beam or lintel, mm. = horizontal
c distance between confinement columns, measured center to center, for the confined wall section under study, in mm.
Chapter D.10.
D-9
w = horizontal length of the wall, mm, or total horizontal length of the wall, measured center to center between
edge confinement columns, in Chapter D.10.
M = acting moment that occurs simultaneously with V.
Mn = nominal bending resistance.
Mcr = moment of cracking of the masonry wall.
Mu = requested factored moment of wall design.
N = number of levels above the considered level, Chapter D.10.
Pb = nominal balanced axial load, N. =
Pn nominal resistance to axial load, N.
Pnc = nominal resistant axial force in compression on the confinement column, always positive, in N.
Pnt = nominal resistant axial force in traction on the confinement column, always negative, in N.
= maximum theoretical axial resistance, N.
Po = design axial force requested on the wall, in N.
Pu Puc = design axial force requested in compression on the confinement column, always positive, in
no.
Pud = axial force acting on the diagonal strut of the wall, in N. Chapter D.10.
Put = design axial force requested in traction on the confinement column, always negative, in N.
Chapter D.10.
ÿPui = absolute value of the increase in the axial force on the confining column i , caused by the
requested design moment, Mu , in N. Chapter D.10.
R = coefficient of energy dissipation capacity.
Re = coefficient used to take into account the effects of slenderness in compression elements.
Rm = parameter defined by means of equation (D.3.7-1).
R0 = basic coefficient of energy dissipation capacity. = ratio between
r the net area and the gross area of the masonry units, dimensionless. = spacing of shear reinforcement
yes
measured along the vertical axis of the wall, mm. = effective thickness of the section to evaluate
you
buckling effects, mm. See D.5.4.2.
V = acting shear force that occurs simultaneously with M .
Vn = nominal resistant shear force of the wall, in N.
Vnc = nominal resisting shear force for a reinforced concrete section, calculated according to the
requirements of Title C of the Regulations, in N. Chapter D.10.
Vm = nominal resistance for shear force contributed by the masonry, N.
Vu = requested factored shear force of the wall design, in N.
Vuc = Design requested factored shear force acting on the confining columns near the intersection with the confining beam, in
N. Chapter D.10.
vs. = nominal resistance for shear force contributed by the shear reinforcement, N. = distance
ix from the confining column i to the edge of the wall, in mm. Chapter D.10. = distance to the edge
x of the wall from the centroid of the areas of all the confining columns of the wall, in mm. Chapter D.10. = coefficient to be
used in equation
ÿ (D.5.8-1). = maximum allowable compression strain in the
ÿmu _ masonry ( ÿ = 0.003 ). = yield strain of reinforcing steel mu
yÿ
ÿ = coefficient of resistance reduction.
ÿ = amount of tensile reinforcement by bending, s ÿ = ( ) A bd .

bÿ = quantity corresponding to the balanced bending conditions. = amount of
nÿ horizontal reinforcement that resists shear in a wall in a plane perpendicular to the plane Amv ,
mm2 .
ÿ = efficiency factor of horizontal reinforcement
D-10
D.2.5 — DEFINITIONS
The following definitions correspond to the most commonly used terms in this title of this Regulation.
Those listed in A.13, in chapter C.2, and in standard NTC 4383 must also be consulted.
Absorption — Amount of water that penetrates the pores of the unit in relation to the dry weight.
Composite Action — Transfer of stress between components of an element designed to resist loads in such a way that
the components act together as a single element.
Adhesion — Adhesion and bonding of concrete or mortar to reinforcement or other surfaces adjacent to which it is placed.
Ability of the mortar to meet normal and tangential stresses to the surface that joins it in the structure.
Additive — Any substance, other than water, aggregates, cement, and reinforcement, used as an ingredient in concrete
or mortar and added to the mix immediately before or after mixing.
Effective Clear Height — Clear distance between elements that provide lateral support and used to calculate the
slenderness ratio of the wall or column.
Sill — Wall lower than the floor height that configures the lower part of a window, of a balcony.
Rigging — Masonry unit placement pattern.
Locked Bond — Pattern of placement of masonry units overlapping with the upper and lower units by at least one quarter
of the length of the piece.
Flask Rig — Pattern for placing masonry units vertically aligned with no overlap.
Fired clay (ceramic) — A mixture of clay, silica, and other minor components, molded and subjected to high temperatures
for long periods of time.
Gross Section Area — Area bounded by the outer edges of the masonry in the plane under consideration.
Net Section Area — It is the area of the masonry unit including filler mortars and excluding cavities, measured in the
plane under consideration, from the outer edges of the masonry.
Splice Bar — Reinforcement that transfers by adhesion the stress between the longitudinal reinforcement of a wall and
the supporting element, in which it is properly anchored.
Block — A type of masonry piece that has holes in it.
Horizontal Perforation Block — It is a concrete or clay block whose perforations are horizontal and sits on the face that
does not have holes.
Vertical Perforation Block — A block, concrete or fired clay, that has vertical perforations that form cells where
reinforcement is placed. Filling mortar must be placed in cells where there is vertical reinforcement.
Head — End part of a structural element.
Cell — Cavity continues inside the masonry.
Masonry Cement — Hydraulic cement produced for use in mortar and which generates greater plasticity and water
retention than those obtained using Portland cement alone.
Connector — Mechanical element to join two or more pieces, parts or members.
Amount — Ratio between the cross-sectional area of the reinforcement and the gross area of the section considered.
D-11
Nominal Dimensions — These are the modular dimensions of the masonry unit including glue and/or finish thicknesses.
They must not exceed the actual dimensions by more than 10 mm.
Actual Dimensions — These are the outside manufacturing dimensions of the part.
Composite element — Walls with wings of cross section in the shape of L, T, C, H, Z, I, Y, etc. that work with compound
action.
Edge Element — End regions of walls that are load-bearing in their plane, and that are reinforced and confined to meet
specific requirements and can be the same or greater thickness than the wall.
Control Joint — Any continuous separation that reduces stress transfer. It is placed to allow relative controlled offsets within
elements, or to suspend or constructively control the sizes of elements.
Glue joint — Layer of mortar in any direction, used to adhere masonry units
Glue Mortar — Plastic mixture of cementitious materials, fine aggregate, and water, used to bond masonry units.
Covering mortar or plaster (patch) — Plastic mixture of cementitious materials, fine aggregate and water, used to give a
smooth finish (plaster) masonry walls.
Filling Mortar — A fluid mixture of cementitious materials, aggregates, and water, with the proper consistency to be placed
without segregation in masonry cells or cavities.
Wall or prism — Assembly of mortared masonry pieces injected or not with mortar filler used as a test specimen to
determine the properties of the masonry
Structural wall — Structural element of considerable length in relation to its thickness, which handles loads in its plane in
addition to its own weight.
Non-structural wall — Element arranged to separate spaces, which handles loads solely due to its own weight.
Plasticity (paste mortar) — Ease with which the paste mortar spreads over a surface, without loss of its uniformity.
Normal Position — Typical way of placing the masonry unit in the wall of which it is a part.
Prism — Wall.
Masonry Compressive Strength (fmÿ ) — Minimum nominal compressive strength of masonry, measured over the net
cross-sectional area and upon which its design is based.
Water retention — Capacity of the mortar to prevent moisture loss, maintaining its plastic state.
Initial Absorption Rate — A measure of the amount of water absorbed by a unit of clay masonry in contact with water per
unit area, during one minute.
Tongue — This is a solid masonry unit. It can be made of baked clay, concrete or silico-calcareous.
Lock — Continuous and overlapping intersection of two walls.
Workability (paste mortar) — A measure of the plasticity of a mixture.
Masonry unit — Manual placement element, with stone characteristics and dimensional stability, which, joined with mortar,
forms the masonry wall.
D-12
NSR-10 – Chapter D.3 – Quality of materials in structural masonry
CHAPTER
D.3 QUALITY OF MATERIALS
IN STRUCTURAL MASONRY
ÿ
fm = nominal compressive strength of the masonry, MPa = compressive strength of

F'cr the filler mortar, MPa = specified compressive strength of the coating or
F'believe plaster mortar, MPa.
F'cu = specified compressive strength of the masonry unit measured over net area, MPa = specified compressive strength of the mortar,
F'cop MPa = height of the masonry unit, in mm, to be used in equation D.3.7- 1 = correction
h factor for unit absorption, dimensionless for concrete units, k 0.8 for clay or silico-calcareous units = correction
kp factor for unit absorption in the injected masonry. for concrete units, k 0.75 for
=
k 1.4p =
clay or silico-calcareous units Rm = parameter defined by means of equation D.3.7-1
p
kr
k r0.9= r
=
r = ratio of net area to gross area of masonry units, dimensionless
D.3.1 — GENERAL ASPECTS
D.3.1.1 — REQUIREMENTS FOR MATERIALS — The materials used in structural masonry constructions must meet the quality requirements
specified in this Chapter. This compliance must be verified by means of tests carried out on representative samples.
D.3.1.2 — QUALITY CONTROL TESTS OF MATERIALS — Material tests must be carried out following the procedures established in the respective
Colombian NTC technical standards. In the absence of them, the corresponding standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM,
mentioned in the Regulations, must be followed. D.2.3 indicates the standards adopted for this Title, which are part of it.
D.3.2 — CEMENT AND LIME
D.3.2.1 — The cement used in the work must be in appropriate conditions and must correspond in its type and class to that on which the dosages of
concrete and mortars are based. The following must be met
rules:
Portland cement: NTC 121 and NTC 321. The use of cements manufactured under ASTM C150
and C595 standards is allowed.
Masonry cement: NTC 4050 (ASTM C91)
Quicklime: NTC 4046 (ASTM C5)
hydrated lime: NTC 4019 (ASTM C270)
D.3.3 — REINFORCING STEEL
D.3.3.1 — The reinforcing steel must meet the same requirements of numeral C.3.5 of this Regulation and must comply with the production and use
standards mentioned there. At the time of placement, the surface must be clean, without corrosion and figured according to the plans.
D-13
D.3.4 — PASTE MORTAR
D.3.4.1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS — The adhesive mortars used in masonry constructions must comply with the NTC 3329 (ASTM C270)
standard and with what is specified in Table D.3.4-1. Premixed mortar for gluing masonry units must comply with NTC 3356 (ASTM C1142). The
adhesive mortars must have good plasticity, consistency and be able to retain the minimum water for the hydration of the cement and, in addition,
guarantee their adherence with the masonry units to develop their cementing action.
Table D.3.4-1
Classification of adhesive mortars by property or by proportion
Specification of mortars by property(1)

Specification of mortars by proportion
type Minimum Sand/Material

resistance to Retention Cement agent(5)
mortar Flow minimum of Cement
Compression in (%)(3) hydrated lime Masonry
Portland
fÿMPa _ (2) Water (4) Cement(7) Min. Max.
cop
h 22.5 115-125 75% 1 0.25 does not apply 2.00 2.5

0.25 does not apply 2.25 3.0
m 17.5 115-125 75%
eleven
does not 1 2.25 2.5
apply
1 does not apply 2.50 3.5
S 12.5 110-120 75% 0.25
0.5 to 0.50 does 1 2.50 3.0
not apply
1 does not apply 3.00 4.5
No(6) 7.5 105-115 75% 0.50
0 to 1.25 does not apply 1 3.00 4.0
Notes:
1. Only for the design of mortar mixes in the laboratory, based on the materials that will be used on site. The control
of mortars on site must be carried out in accordance with the NTC 3546 (ASTM C780) standard.
2. Compression resistance test at 28 days in cubes with a side of 50 mm 3. Test carried
out according to NTC 4050 (ASTM C91)
4. Type N or S powdered hydrated lime can be used.
5. For this calculation, lime is not included as a cementing agent.
Type N mortar is only allowed in systems with minimum energy dissipation capacity in the inelastic range (DMI)
6. 7. The type of masonry cement (M, S or N) will be the same as the type of mortar.
D.3.4.2 — DOSAGE OF THE GLUE MORTAR — The dosage of the components of the glue mortars must be based on previous laboratory
tests or on field experience in similar works and they are classified as H, M, S or N according to with the minimum dosage of its components and
with the resistance to compression, according to table D.3.4-1. The denomination of type H, M, S or N mortars is exclusively for masonry mortars
and should not be used to designate other types of mortars. The compressive strength is measured after 28 days on specimens taken in cubes
with a side of 50 mm, or in cylinders with a diameter of 75 mm and a height of 150 mm. The different types of mortar must meet the minimum
initial flow and water retention conditions established in table D.3.4-1. Table D.3.4-1 indicates two dosage alternatives for each type of mortar,
one using portland cement and hydrated lime, and the other using portland cement and masonry cement. Any of the two dosage alternatives can
be used, but dosages that simultaneously use hydrated lime and masonry cement are not allowed.
D.3.4.2.1 — Cylindrical specimens — If cylindrical specimens are used for compressive strength tests, their results must be correlated
with respect to those obtained in cubes with a side of 50 mm, which constitute the dosage reference, and must be tested accordingly .
with the provisions of Standard NTC 3546 (ASTM C780).
D.3.4.3 — USE OF LIME — The lime used in the preparation of the mortar must be hydrated lime and it must be verified that it is not detrimental
to any of the specified properties.
D.3.4.4 — AGGREGATES — The aggregates for the adhesive mortar must comply with the NTC 2240 (ASTM C144) standard and be free of
contaminating or crumbly materials that may deteriorate the properties of the adhesive mortar.
D.3.4.5 - WATER - The water used for the adhesive mortar must be clean and free from harmful amounts of oil, acids, alcohols, salts, organic
matter or other substances that may be harmful to the mortar or the
D-14
embedded reinforcement. The provisions of C.3.4 of these Regulations must be complied with.
D.3.4.6 — DYES AND ADDITIVES — The dyes and additives used in the preparation of the adhesive mortar must be
submitted for prior approval by the technical supervisor and must be demonstrated through laboratory tests or reliable
evidence from similar works, that they do not impair any of the desirable properties of the mortar or masonry units, nor do
they cause corrosion of the embedded reinforcement.
D.3.4.7 — ON-SITE PREPARATION — The preparation of the adhesive mortar with the previously established dosages
must be done using appropriate dry mechanical mixers or with sufficient mixing water to obtain the required plasticity. When
the components are mixed dry, the addition of water must be carried out by the mason until obtaining the required plasticity
and consistency. Mixing time should be long enough to obtain uniformity without segregation in the mix. Manual preparation
is only allowed for minor works not contemplated in A.1.6.1 of these Regulations.
D.3.4.7.1 — Dry-mixed-in-place mortars — Dry-mixed-in-place mortars shall be used before hydration of the
cement begins by contact with the natural water of the sand.
In no case can they be used after 2 and a half hours after being mixed, except for long-life mortars.
D.3.4.7.2 — Long-life premixed mortars — Long-life premixed mortars must be used in accordance with the
instructions and within the time specified by the manufacturer. It must be verified through tests that these mortars
do not present deterioration of their properties at the time of use.
D.3.5 — FILLING MORTAR
D.3.5.1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS — Filling mortars used in masonry constructions must comply with NTC 4048
(ASTM C476). They must be of good consistency and fluid enough to penetrate the injection cells without segregation.
D.3.5.2 — DOSAGE — The dosage of the components of the filler mortars must be based on previous laboratory tests or
field experience in similar works and its classification must be based on the fÿ minimum dosage of its components indicated
in table D.3.5-1. Resistance should be measured at 28 days cr ,
on test tubes taken in the cells of the hollow units or in prisms of units conveniently arranged, with the use of permeable
paper that allows the transfer of water between the filler mortar and the masonry units, preventing their adherence. The
procedure for taking samples and testing must be done in accordance with the NTC 4043 (ASTM C1019) standard. The
compressive strength can also be measured after 28 days on test pieces taken in cylinders 75 mm in diameter by 150 mm
in height, and must be tested in accordance with the provisions of Standard NTC 3546 (ASTM C780) for filler mortars. fine.
The thick-filled mortar can also be sampled and tested as established in C.5.6.3.1 and C.5.6.3.2 of this Regulation.
Table D.3.5-1
Classification and dosage by volume of filler mortars
Aggregates/Cement
Guy Cement
of Fine Thick (size < 10 mm)
Mortar
Portland min Max min Max
Fine 1 2.25 3.5 - -
Thick 1 2.25 3.0 1.0 2.0
D.3.5.3 — MAXIMUM VALUE OF COMPRESSION RESISTANCE — The compressive strength of the filler mortar measured
ÿ
after 28 days must have a maximum value of

F'
, times fm
cr1.5 and a minimum value of
ÿ
fm times 1.25, but in no case can the compressive strength at 28 days be less than 12.5 MPa.
D-15
D.3.5.4 — USE OF LIME — If lime is used, it must comply with the NTC 4019 (ASTM C207) standard with a maximum
dosage of 10% of the volume of cement.
D.3.5.5 — AGGREGATES — The aggregates for the filling mortar must comply with the NTC 4020 (ASTM C404) standard
and be free of contaminating or crumbly materials that may deteriorate the properties of the filling mortar.
D.3.5.6 — WATER AND ADDITIVES — The water and additives used must comply with the provisions of D.3.4.5 and
D.3.4.6 in accordance with C.3.4 and C.3.6 of these Regulations.
D.3.5.7 — MIXING AND TRANSPORTATION — The preparation of the filling mortar must be carried out using appropriate
mechanical mixers. Transport from the mixing site to the injection site must guarantee the preservation of the consistency
and plasticity of the mixture.
D.3.6 — MASONRY UNITS

D.3.6.1 — TYPES OF MASONRY UNITS — Masonry units used in structural masonry constructions may be concrete,
ceramic (fired clay), silico-calcareous, or stone. Depending on the type of structural masonry and the type of reinforcement,
the units can be vertical-drilled, horizontal-drilled, or solid, depending on the normal position of the piece in the wall. Solid
units are those whose cavities occupy less than 25% of the volume of the part.
D.3.6.2 — PRODUCTION AND QUALITY STANDARDS — All masonry units used in the design and construction of
masonry structures must comply with the following standards:
D.3.6.2.1 — Concrete units for masonry
(a) Units (block) of vertical load-bearing concrete for masonry must comply with NTC 4026 (ASTM C90)
(b) Solid load-bearing units (wedge) for
masonry, must comply with NTC 4026 (ASTM C90).
NTC 4026 (ASTM C55) standard
(c) Concrete units for non-structural masonry must comply with the NTC standard
4076 (ASTM C129)
D.3.6.2.2 — Clay Masonry Units
(a) Vertical drilling clay units (block) for structural masonry shall comply with NTC 4205-1 (ASTM C34)
(b) Solid clay units (wedge) for structural
masonry shall comply with NTC 4205-1 (ASTM C34)
NTC 4205-1 (ASTM C62, C652)
(c) Clay units for non-structural masonry must comply with NTC 4205-2.
(ASTM C56, C212, C216).
(d) Horizontally drilled clay units for structural masonry shall comply with NTC 4205-1 (ASTM C56, C212).
(e) Fired clay masonry units used in
facades must comply with the
NTC 4205-3 standard.
D.3.6.2.3 — Silico-calcareous units for masonry — Silico-calcareous units for masonry must comply with NTC
922 (ASTM C73).
D.3.6.3 — SPECIAL UNITS — For the construction of masonry elements such as walls, beams, etc., special units are
essential, which must meet the specifications adopted for typical units of the same material.
D.3.6.4 — VERTICAL-DRILLED MASONRY UNITS — Vertical-drilled masonry units (block) may be used in structural
masonry construction of all types classified in D.2.1. They can be made of concrete, clay or silico-calcareous. The following
requirements are also established for this type of units:
D-16
D.3.6.4.1 — Dimensions of cells and walls — The area of the vertical cells of the masonry piece in normal position,
cannot be greater than 65% of the cross-sectional area. The continuous vertical or horizontal cells where reinforcement
is placed cannot have a dimension less than 50 mm, nor less than 3000 mm² in area. The external and internal walls
cannot have a thickness less than that established in table D.3.6-1.
Table D.3.6-1
Minimum wall thicknesses in units (blocks) of vertically
drilled masonry (mm)
Minimum
external Minimum
thickness thickness
thickness of exterior walls of transversal partitions
with
nominal without secondary without

secondary vertical secondary
vertical perforationsperforations vertical perforations
80(1) 20 30 twenty
100 20 30 twenty
120 22 32 twenty
150 25 35 25
200 30 40 25
250 35 45 30
300 40 50 30
Note (1): The 80mm nominal external thickness unit is only permitted
on non-structural walls and cavity masonry side walls.
D.3.6.4.2 — Secondary perforations — Vertical perforation units in fired clay may have secondary perforations in
the walls, different from and parallel to the main cells. Perforations in the walls may not have a transverse dimension
greater than 20mm and may not be less than 10mm from the edge of the perforated wall.
D.3.6.5 — HORIZONTAL DRILLED UNITS — Horizontal drilled (block) masonry units may only be used in the following types
of masonry structures classified in D.2.1: confined wall masonry, reinforced cavity masonry, and masonry externally reinforced.
They can also be used in combination with vertical drilling units, in one and two-story buildings of use group I for unreinforced
masonry and partially reinforced masonry.
D.3.6.6 — SOLID MASONRY UNITS — Solid masonry units (wedge) may only be used in the following types of masonry
structures classified in D.2.1: confined wall masonry, reinforced cavity masonry, and externally reinforced masonry . They can
also be used in combination with vertical drilling units for partially reinforced masonry.
D.3.7 — DETERMINATION OF THE MASONRY RESISTANCE TO COMPRESSION

fm
ÿ
D.3.7.1 — DETERMINATION OF fm PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION — The value specified for the compressive strength of
, shall be determined according to one of the following procedures:
ÿ
masonry fm
(a) Through historical records D.3.7.3. (b) By

experimental determination on test walls D.3.7.4. (c) By means of tests on
individual materials D.3.7.5
ÿ
D.3.7.1.1 — Applicability of procedures — Values of fm defined in this section that are based
on the quality of materials, can only be used in pre-construction design and not for quality control.
D-17
D.3.7.2 — ELABORATION AND TEST OF THE WALLS — The preparation and testing of the walls that are used for the
ÿ
determination of fm , they must be carried out in accordance with NTC 3495 (ASTM E447); also
complying with the following requirements:
D.3.7.2.1 — Walls manufacturing requirements — The walls must be made with the same materials and under
the same conditions that are present in the structure. The moisture content of the materials must be the same as
that found in the structure at the time of construction. The quality of labor must be the same as that used in
construction. When in construction the mortar is placed only on the side walls of the vertical drilling units, the walls
must be made placing mortar only on the side walls and without mortar on the transversal walls, including the
terminals. See D.4.5.10.1 (b). Walls must be made, both with empty cells, and walls with filled cells, when specifying
partially or totally injected masonry.
ÿ ÿ
D.3.7.2.2 — Determination of the value of fm — The value of fm , for a sample must be the average obtained
from the test of 3 walls of the same origin, but it must not be greater than 125 percent of the lowest value obtained
in the tests.
D.3.7.2.3 — Area to determine the efforts — The value of each test is obtained by dividing the ultimate load
obtained by the net area of the masonry that has the tested wall.
D.3.7.2.4 — Dimensions of low walls — Low walls must have a minimum height of 300 mm and a height-width
ratio greater than or equal to 1.5 and less than or equal to 5. Vertical perforation block masonry walls must be at
least as long as a full piece. Small walls of other types must be at least 100 mm long. The width and type of
construction should be representative of the type of masonry to be used in the construction.
D.3.7.2.5 — Correction for slenderness — The value of fm it must be corrected by multiplying it by the
correction factor for slenderness of the wall given in table D.3.7-1.
Table D.3.7-1
ÿ
Slenderness correction factor for fm
Height/thickness ratio of the

wall 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0
Correction factor 0.86 1.0 1.04 1.07 1.15 1.22
D.3.7.2.6 — Curing of the low walls — The low walls must be stored for seven days in the air at a temperature of
21 degrees Celsius, plus/minus 5 degrees, at a relative humidity that exceeds 90 percent, and subsequently at the
same conditions, but with a relative humidity that can be between 30 and 50 percent, until its test 28 days after
manufacturing. The walls that are built on site must be stored under conditions that preserve humidity for a period
of 48 to 96 hours and after this time they can be taken to the laboratory.
D.3.7.2.7 — Facing and testing — The walls must be faced and tested under the NTC 3495 (ASTM E447) standard.
D.3.7.3 — STATISTICAL DETERMINATION OF fm — When there are reliable and sufficient historical records of test
results of samples of walls from previous constructions made with the materials specified for the work, carried out with
similar technical and supervision processes, in the event that the coefficient of variation of the results is less than or equal
ÿ
to 30%, it is allowed to select the value of fm based on

these records, according to the number of test results recorded and in accordance with:
D.3.7.3.1 — More than 30 historical tests — When the number of test results of recorded samples is greater than
ÿ
or equal to 30, fm can be selected as 75% of the average value of the log
results.
D-18
D.3.7.3.2 — Between 10 and 30 historical tests — When the number of test results of recorded samples is between
ÿ
10 and 30, fm can be selected as 70% of the average value of the log results.
D.3.7.3.3 — Less than 10 historical tests — When the number of recorded tests, with three or more walls per test,
is less than 10, historical records cannot be used for fm selection . ÿ
D.3.7.4 — EXPERIMENTAL DETERMINATION OF fm — The specified compressive strength of the masonry fm

ÿ
, It can be determined experimentally for the same materials that are going to be used, carrying out tests
on walls prior to the work, in accordance with what is indicated in numeral D.3.7.2, except for the number of walls per sample,
which must be the same. indicated below:
D.3.7.4.1 — More than 30 tests prior to the work — When the number of walls tested is greater than or equal to
ÿ
30, fm can be taken as 85% of the average value of the tests carried out.
D.3.7.4.2 — Between 10 and 30 tests prior to the work — When the number of walls tested is greater than 10 and
ÿ
less than 30, fm can be taken as 80% of the average value of the trials.
D.3.7.4.3 — Less than 10 tests prior to the work — When the number of walls tested is less than 10 but not less
ÿ
than 3, fm can be taken as 75% of the average value of the trials.
D.3.7.5 — VALUE OF fm
ÿ
BASED ON THE QUALITY OF THE MATERIALS — When fm do not select

ÿ
Through preliminary or historical wall tests, its value can be determined based on an appropriate correlation of the quality of
ÿ
the materials used. In the absence of such a correlation, the value of fm , It can be
determined by the following expression:
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ2 fp.m.
ÿÿ+ ÿ ÿÿ
ÿ ÿ 50k
R.
m
=+ÿcp 75 3h
75 3h cu ÿ ÿf 0.8f cu (D.3.7-1)
+ÿÿ
ÿ
=
f0.75R (D.3.7-2)
m m
The values used in equation D.3.7-1 must be indicated on the structural drawings and checked on site in accordance with the
ÿ
provisions of section D.3.8, but this does not exempt from the obligation to check the value of fm by
means of walls as indicated in section D.3.8.1.4.
D.3.7.6 — VALUE OF fm WHEN CELLS ARE INJECTED WITH MORTAR-FILLING, BASED ON THE QUALITY OF
THE MATERIALS — In reinforced-cavity or vertical-drilled masonry, injected with mortar-filling, the value of fm can be obtained
ÿ
in the following way:
ÿ ÿ
F = + ÿÿ ÿm
ÿ 0.75 rR 0.9k 0.94R (D.3.7-3)
m r (1 r)f ÿ
cr ÿ m
D.3.8 — EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF MASONRY

D.3.8.1 — FREQUENCY OF SAMPLING AND TESTS — The number of tests and their frequency must be at least the
following:
D.3.8.1.1 — Glue mortar — For the glue mortar, at least one compression resistance test must be carried out
(average of 3 test tubes) for every two hundred (200) square meters of wall or for each day of glue. Likewise, the
conditions of plasticity and water retention of the glue mortars used in the work must be verified weekly.
D.3.8.1.2 — Filling mortar — For the filling mortar, at least one compression resistance test must be carried out
(average of 3 test pieces) for every ten (10) cubic meters of injected mortar or for each day of injection. .
D-19
D.3.8.1.3 — Masonry units — For masonry units, the established initial absorption, total absorption, dimensional
stability and compressive strength tests must be carried out for at least five (5) units for each production batch up
to of 5,000 units or less, and not less than one unit for every two hundred (200) square meters of wall built.
, must be verified by
ÿ
D.3.8.1.4 — Low walls — The compressive strength of the masonry, fm

test of at least three (3) small walls for every five hundred (500) square meters of wall or fraction, made with the
materials and procedures used on site. For vertical drilling units, the effect of the filler mortar on the strength of the
masonry must be measured, through additional tests of walls injected with mortar, in the appropriate quantity and
frequency, in the opinion of the technical supervisor, in accordance with the provisions of Title I, but in no case in
less than 50% of the total number of specimens tested. Low walls should be taken and tested for all types of units
used.
D.3.8.1.5 — Reinforcing steel — The quality of the reinforcing steel shall be checked in accordance with the
requirements of C.3.5.10.
D.3.8.2 — ACCEPTANCE AND REJECTION CRITERIA — The following criteria must be applied to accept the quality of
the masonry:
D.3.8.2.1 — Minimum resistance — The quality of the masonry is considered satisfactory if simultaneously the
average of the results of the compressive strength of the adhesive mortars, filler mortars, units and walls is greater
than or equal to the specified resistance, and no individual value is less than 80% of the specified resistance.
D.3.8.2.2 — Corrective measures — If one or several of the above requirements are not met, the necessary
measures must be taken immediately to increase the average of the subsequent resistance evaluations.
D.3.8.2.3 — Low resistance results — If any individual compressive resistance result of the mortars, filler mortars,
units and walls is less than 80% of the specified value, the necessary measures must be taken to ensure that the
load capacity of the structure has not been compromised. If it is confirmed that the masonry is of low resistance and
if the calculations indicate that the load-bearing capacity of the structure has been significantly reduced, the
extraction test of cut portions of the affected walls can be used. In this case, 3 servings should be taken for each
affected batch. The minimum dimension of the extracted walls must comply with the specifications in D.3.7.2.4. The
average strength of the cut portions must be at least equal to 80% of the specified strength.
D.3.8.2.4 — Load Tests — If the criteria in D.3.8.2.3 are not met and structural safety remains in question, the
technical supervisor may order load tests as described in Chapter C. 20 for the doubtful part of the structure.
D-20
NSR-10 – Chapter D.4 – Construction requirements for structural masonry
CHAPTER
D.4 CONSTRUCTION
REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL MASONRY
db = diameter of the bar, mm. =
and f yield strength of reinforcing steel, MPa.
ÿ
fm = compressive strength of the masonry, MPa.

ÿ
fm = square root of the compressive strength of the masonry, in MPa. = development

length required for reinforcement, mm.
K = reinforcement cover measured from the outer end of the masonry unit, mm. ÿ
= coefficient of resistance reduction, given in Chapter D.5
D.4.1 — SCOPE
D.4.1.1 — SCOPE OF CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS — The construction requirements for structural masonry buildings
given in this Chapter cover the different structural masonry systems. When the requirements are specific to a single masonry
system, it is indicated in the text for which of them it is applicable. If this warning is not made, it is understood that the requirement
is mandatory for all types of structural masonry. Title E provides special requirements for one- and two-story houses built with
confined masonry.
D.4.2 — REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

D.4.2.1 — EMBEDDING OF REINFORCEMENT — All reinforcement used in the different types of structural masonry must be
embedded in concrete, mortar filler, or mortar, and must be located in such a way that cover requirements are met. minimum,
anchorage, adhesion, and minimum and maximum spacing with respect to masonry units and other reinforcements.
D.4.2.2 — MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM DIAMETERS ALLOWED FOR REINFORCEMENT — Reinforcements used in structural
masonry must meet the following minimum and maximum diameters:
D.4.2.2.1 — Longitudinal reinforcement in cells and cavities that are injected — Longitudinal reinforcement that is
placed inside cells of vertical drilling units, cells of special beam-type units, or cavities that are subsequently injected with
mortar must meet the following requirements :
(a) The minimum diameter is No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm).

(b) For walls with a nominal thickness of 200 mm or more, it cannot have a diameter greater than No. 8 (1”) or
25M (25 mm). (c) For
walls of less than 200 mm nominal thickness, it cannot have a diameter greater than No.
6 (3/4”) or 20M (20mm).
(d) The diameter cannot exceed 1/3 of the least free dimension of the cell.
D.4.2.2.2 — Joint reinforcement — The horizontal reinforcement placed in the mortar joints must meet the following
requirements:
(a) The diameter must be at least 4 mm.

(b) The diameter cannot exceed half the thickness of the mortar.
D.4.2.2.3 — Longitudinal and transversal reinforcement in confinement elements — The minimum and maximum
diameters that the longitudinal and transversal reinforcement must comply with in the confinement elements of confined
masonry must be consulted in Chapter D.10.
D-21
D.4.2.2.4 — Longitudinal and transverse reinforcement in reinforced concrete elements within masonry —
The minimum and maximum diameters that longitudinal and transverse reinforcement must meet in reinforced
concrete elements embedded in or used in combination with structural masonry, except the confinement elements of
the confined masonry must comply with what is specified in Title C of the Regulations, for the same degree of energy
dissipation capacity in the inelastic range (DES, DMO, or DMI) of the structural masonry system.
D.4.2.3 — LIMITS FOR THE PLACEMENT OF THE REINFORCEMENT — The following limits are established regarding the
placement of the reinforcement in the structural masonry:
D.4.2.3.1 — Number of bars per vertical cell — Only one vertical reinforcing bar per cell shall be placed in masonry
of vertical bore units. When the smaller dimension of the cell is greater than 140 mm, it is allowed to place two bars
per cell as long as their diameter is not greater than No. 5 (5/8") or 16M (16 mm).
D.4.2.3.2 — Bundled Bars — When two bars per cell are permitted in masonry vertical bore units, the bars may be
bundled and in contact to act as one unit. The breakpoints of individual bars in a bundle must be spaced a minimum
of 40 times the diameter of the bar.
D.4.2.3.3 — Distance between the bar and the inner edge of the cell — The thickness of the filler mortar between
the reinforcement and the masonry unit must not be less than 6.5 mm for thin mortar or 13 mm for thick mortar.
D.4.2.3.4 — Confined masonry — In the masonry of confined walls, the number of bars and the amount of
reinforcement depends on the section and the type of element designed for confinement. Additional construction
requirements for this system are defined in Chapter D.10.
D.4.2.4 — REINFORCEMENT COVER — The cover distance of reinforcing bars in masonry of vertical drilling units or
reinforced cavity masonry is as follows:
D.4.2.4.1 — Cover of bars placed in cells — Reinforcing bars shall have a cover, including mortar fill and the
masonry unit wall, of not less than the following:
(a) For masonry exposed to contact with the earth or weather: 50 mm for bars greater than No. 5 (5/8") or
16M (16 mm) or 40 mm for bars less than or equal to No. 5 (5/ 8") or 16M (16mm).
(b) For masonry not exposed to contact with the earth or weather: 40 mm
D.4.2.4.2 — Coverage of the joint reinforcement — The horizontal reinforcement placed in the glue joints must be
completely embedded in mortar with a minimum cover of 12 mm when the masonry is in contact with the earth or
weather, or 6 mm when It is not in contact with the earth or weather. The horizontal reinforcement must be protected
with anticorrosive products when the masonry is in contact with the earth or permanent water.
D.4.2.5 — DEVELOPMENT OF THE REINFORCEMENT EMBEDDED IN FILLING MORTAR
D.4.2.5.1 — General — The calculated tension or compression in the reinforcement in each section must be
developed on each side of the section by means of development length, hook, mechanical anchor, or a combination
thereof.
D.4.2.5.2 — Development length — The development length, d , for deformed bars embedded in filler mortar in
tension or compression, shall be determined by equation D.4.2-1. For smooth bars, the development length should
be taken as double that obtained for deformed bars.
2
1.5dfby
= ÿ 300mm (D.4.2-1)
d ÿ
Kf m
D-22
K is the cover of the reinforcement measured from the outer end of the masonry unit, and shall not exceed the
clearance between adjacent reinforcement splices, nor 5db.
D.4.2.5.3 — Lap Splice Length — The lap splice length shall be taken equal to the development length, d . Bars joined
by non-contact lap splices shall not be spaced transversely apart by more than one-fifth the required length of lap or more
than 200mm.
D.4.2.5.4 — Mechanical or welded splices — Mechanical or welded splices must be capable of resisting at least 1.25
times the yf of the bar. All welds must comply with NTC 4040 (ANSI/AWS D.1.4).
D.4.2.6 — DEVELOPMENT OF REINFORCEMENT EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE — The development of anchored or embedded

reinforcement in concrete is governed by the requirements of Title C of the Regulation. This is the case of splice bars anchored in
the foundation elements or reinforced concrete element bars embedded within the masonry or working in combination with it.
D.4.2.7 — STANDARD HOOKS — The term standard hook used in this section means:
(a) A 180 degree bend plus a straight extension of at least 4 times the diameter of the bar but not less than 64 mm at the
free end of the bar.
(b) A 90 degree bend plus a straight extension of at least 12 times the diameter of the bar at the
(c) A 135 degree bend plus a straight extension of at least 6 times the diameter of the bar at the
D.4.2.8 — MINIMUM BENDING DIAMETERS FOR REINFORCING BARS — The minimum bending diameter measured on the
inside of the reinforcing bars shall not be less than the values specified in Table D.4.2-1.
Table D.4.2-1
Bending diameters for reinforcing bars
Diameter ( ) db yf minimum diameter

No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm) to 5 db
240MPa
#7 (7/8”) or 22M (22mm)
No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm) to 6d b
420MPa
No. 8 (1”) or 25M (25mm)
D.4.3 — PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES

D.4.3.1 — STORAGE OF MATERIALS — All work materials must be stored in such a way that they remain protected against
abnormal deterioration or contamination and must be used at the scheduled times. Materials that show deterioration of their
physical properties below those specified must be rejected.
D.4.3.2 — STORAGE OF THE MASONRY UNITS — A space for the storage of the masonry units must be located on the job
site, preferably covered and ventilated, with external and internal access.
D.4.3.3 — PLACE FOR THE COLLECTION AND STORAGE OF SAMPLES — A space must be located in the work for the
collection of samples of the different specified materials, an appropriate space for their curing and storage under the conditions
established in the respective standards.
D-23
D.4.4 — CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR FOUNDATIONS

D.4.4.1 — GENERAL — The characteristics of foundations for structural masonry obey the conditions of the foundation
soil and the project itself. Its design and construction must comply with the provisions of this Regulation in Title C and Title
H.
D.4.4.2 — ANCHORING IN THE FOUNDATION OF THE REINFORCEMENT OF THE WALLS — All the vertical
reinforcements of the structural walls must be anchored in accordance with the provisions of Title C of this Regulation in
the foundation system, by means of splicing bars that protrude the necessary length to carry out the overlap, fixed to the
foundation reinforcement, in such a way that the displacements in the process of compaction and pouring of the foundation
concrete are within the tolerances established in numeral D.4.4.3
D.4.4.3 — LOCATION TOLERANCE OF THE REINFORCEMENT FOR SPLICE WITH THE WALL — The longitudinal
and transversal placement tolerance of the splice bar must be a maximum of one quarter of the cell dimension in each
direction. In case this tolerance is exceeded, the splice bar position can be corrected with smooth 1H:6V tilt. The sudden
correction of the position of the splice bar, and the cutting of partitions of the masonry units are prohibited.
D.4.4.4 — EMPTYING THE FOUNDATION ELEMENTS — The emptying of the structural elements of the foundation must
be carried out with the prior approval of the technical supervisor. The emptying joints must be vertical and located in the
central third between the openings free of walls.
D.4.4.5 — HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT — The frameworks and foundation slabs must be aligned and leveled on the upper
face, looking for modular heights of the walls.
D.4.4.6 — CORRECTION OF THE ALIGNMENT OF THE FOUNDATION — Once the pouring of the foundation is finished,
the alignments of the same and the final positions of the splicing bars must be verified. Vertical alignment differences can
be corrected as follows:
(a) If the error in the upper level of the foundation is less than 25 mm, it can be corrected by distributing it in the
glue joints of the first section taking into account the tolerances in table D.4.2-2. (b) If the error
in the upper level of the foundation is greater than 25 mm, the alignment can be corrected with a reinforced
concrete enhancement in such a way that its monolithic operation with the foundation is guaranteed.
D.4.5 — CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR MASONRY WALLS

D.4.5.1 — GENERAL — The construction requirements established in this section are fundamentally for masonry walls
made with vertical drilling units. For other structural masonry systems, additional special construction requirements are
established:
(a) For reinforced cavity masonry in Section D.6.5. (b) For confined
wall masonry in Section D.10.8
D.4.5.2 — MASONRY UNITS — The following construction requirements must be met in addition to D.3.6.
D.4.5.2.1 — Condition of the units prior to their placement — When the masonry units are placed, they must
be clean and free of imperfections that negatively affect the mechanical or physical properties of the wall. Fired
clay units that exceed an initial absorption rate of 0.15 grams per minute per cm² determined according to the NTC
4017 (ASTM C67) standard, must be suitably moistened before placing them. For initial absorption rate values
greater than 0.25 grams per minute per cm², the units must be moistened for 24 hours prior to placement. All units
must be placed without excess water on their surfaces, which must be removed by rubbing with a dry cloth.
Concrete units should always be placed dry.
D.4.5.2.2 — Special Units — The configuration of the wall and reinforcements, as well as control joints, caps,
lintels, sills, etc., require special units that must be available at the time of placement.
D-24
D.4.5.3 — PASTE MORTAR — Must meet the requirements of D.3.4.
D.4.5.4 — INJECTION MORTAR — Must comply with the requirements in D.3.5.
D.4.5.5 — REINFORCING STEEL — Reinforcing steel shall comply with the requirements of C.3.5, in addition to the
following provisions:
D.4.5.5.1 — Condition of the reinforcement surface — The reinforcement must have a surface clean of
grease, clay and other harmful substances. It must not present corrosion, although superficial oxidation may be
allowed, in the opinion of the technical supervisor.
D.4.5.5.2 — Dimensions — All reinforcement must comply with the dimensions, figuration and location indicated
in the plans.
D.4.5.5.3 — Partially Embedded Reinforcement Bending — Reinforcing steel that is already partially embedded
in mortar or concrete is not permitted to be bent; except in the flexible connectors which can be bent and in the
splice bars when what is indicated in D.4.4.3 is fulfilled.
D.4.5.6 — EMBEDDED PIPES — Pipes may be embedded in masonry walls as long as they are placed in non-injected
cells and have a diameter less than the smallest dimension of the cell.
D.4.5.6.1 — Raceways — The placement of pipes in the structural masonry walls of vertical drilling units through
raceways is prohibited.
D.4.5.6.2 — Exits to the surface of the wall — The exits of interior installation systems that use embedded
piping must be located in units specially designed for this purpose.
D.4.5.6.3 — Embedded pipes in injected cells — Embedded pipes can be placed in injected masonry walls in
the following cases:
(a) When they conduct liquids at a temperature below 65°C.

(b) When they are subjected to pressure of less than 0.4
MPa. (c) When the liquid they contain cannot be frozen below the service temperature. (d)
When the individual diameter or the pipe package is less than one third of the thickness
From the wall.
(e) When the manufacturing material does not react harmfully with the filler mortar. (f) When
there is no bar in the cell.
In no case are pipes allowed that occupy more than 5% of the cross-sectional area of the wall. Additionally, they
must be more than 5 pipe diameters center-to-center apart and cannot be placed in adjacent cells.
D.4.5.7 — POUCH RIG — The use of flask rigging on structural walls is prohibited. Its use is allowed only in buttresses
and isolated columns.
D.4.5.8 — LOCKED PARK — The placement pattern in the locked surface must allow continuity in the vertical cells that
are injected with filler mortar.
D.4.5.9 — CONTROL JOINTS — Control joints must be provided in the walls to allow for the relative movements foreseen
in the construction, in the following places:
(a) Where the height of the wall changes appreciably. (b) In

changes of thickness in the length of the wall. (c)
When its operation is thus foreseen in the design. (d) In ties
with structural elements with a different function and not integrated into the function of the wall. (e) Where
there are control joints in the foundation, in the slabs, or in the decks. (f) On window
sills when so provided.
D.4.5.9.1 — Distance between control joints — The maximum distance between control joints is 8 meters.
This distance between control joints can be increased in case there is technical evidence that
D-25
he allows it.
D.4.5.9.2 — Control Joint Configuration — The control joint is configured with the appropriate masonry units
for that function. In the absence of special joint units, this must be designed and detailed in the construction plans.
In all cases it must be guaranteed that there is no differential movement in the transversal direction, between the
walls separated by the joint.
D.4.5.10 — CONSTRUCTION OF THE WALL — The wall must be erected following the placement pattern of the units,
with the methodology appropriate to the performance of the workforce, without prejudice to compliance with the provisions
of this Regulation or the condition of adherence of the mortar with the masonry units. The tolerances for wall alignment
are established in table D.4.2-2.
D.4.5.10.1 — Mortar — Mortar must be placed in all joints between masonry pieces with the following special
requirements:
(a) In the horizontal joints of vertical drilling units, mortar must be placed on the side walls of the unit and
on its transverse partitions. (b) Alternatively, in horizontal joints, the placement of
the adhesive mortar is allowed only on the side walls of the unit, as long as the value of fm is verified.
ÿ
, required in D.3.8, is performed on walls that only have mortar attached to the side walls of
the masonry unit and this requirement is clearly indicated on the plans.
(c) At vertical joints of vertical drilling units, on the side walls of the
unit.
(d) When solid pieces or horizontal drilling blocks are used, the adhesive mortar must
be placed across the full width of the wall at vertical and horizontal joints.
(e) The advance of the mortar must be such that at the time of placing the units the plasticity of the mortar
placed has not been reduced. (f) The
maximum thickness of the glue joints must be 10 mm with the tolerances established in
Table D.4.2-2.
D.4.5.10.2 — Inspection and cleaning windows — Inspection and cleaning windows must be left at the base of
the walls in each cell to be injected and at a distance of no more than 1.0 meter in cavity masonry. Fulfilling the
following requirements:
(a) The dimensions of the windows must not be less than 75 mm x 75 mm, nor more than 100
mm x 100mm.
(b) When partial injections are made at height, the use of an inspection window is not required.
if the portion of the wall to inject does not exceed 1.4
meters. (c) Internal and external burrs of the glue joint shall be removed.
Table D.4.2-2
Construction tolerances for masonry walls
Element Tolerance
1. Dimensions of elements (section or elevation) - 6mm + 12.5mm
2. Mortar joint (10 mm) - 4mm + 4mm
3. Cavity or injection cell 4. - 6mm + 9mm
Variation of the level of the horizontal joint ± 2mm/meter (1/500)
Maximum ± 12.5mm
5. Variation of the support surface (upper face of the wall) ± 2mm/meter (1/500)
Maximum ± 12mm
6. Maximum wall plumb variation ± 2mm/meter (1/500)
± 12mm
7. Maximum Longitudinal Alignment ± 2mm/meter (1/500)
Variation ± 12mm
8. Tolerance of elements in plan ± 2mm/meter (1/500)
Maximum ± 20mm
9. Tolerance of elements in elevation ± 6 mm/floor
Maximum ± 20 mm
D-26
D.4.5.11 — HORIZONTAL REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT — Horizontal reinforcement in masonry walls of vertical drilling units
can be placed in two different ways depending on its function:
D.4.5.11.1 — Horizontal joint reinforcement — This reinforcement is mainly used to control cracking due to the effects
of temperature changes and setting shrinkage. It is placed inside the horizontal glue joints, meeting the following
requirements:
(a) This reinforcement can be taken into account for the effect of resistance to the shear stresses contributed by
the reinforcement. (b) The
area of the joint reinforcement can be taken into account in the fulfillment of the amounts
minimum horizontal reinforcement of the wall.
(c) Reinforcement of mortar joints shall not pass through control joints. It must be anchored using a standard hook
bent over the vertical reinforcement at each end of the wall and before the control joint.
D.4.5.11.2 — Embedded elements for placement of horizontal reinforcement — In the masonry walls of vertical drilling
units, the horizontal reinforcement that is placed to resist shear forces, and in those cases in which joint reinforcement
cannot be placed, It must be located within special masonry units, in accordance with the following requirements:
(a) Special units must externally have the same appearance as the units of
vertical drilling used in the rest of the wall.
(b) Special units must have transversal partitions of lower height to allow the
placement of horizontal reinforcement.
(c) The horizontal cavity that it forms must be injected with filler mortar to embed the
horizontal reinforcement, bringing it up to the top of the special unit.
(d) Before setting the special units, by placing an angeo, or metal mesh, or by means of another appropriate
procedure, the filler mortar must be prevented from falling into the vertical cells that are not injected; without
affecting the passage of the filler mortar in the vertical cells to be injected.
(e) The horizontal reinforcement that is placed inside the cell produced by the special units must meet the same
requirements for maximum and minimum diameters of the reinforcement that is placed in the vertical cells.
(f) Horizontal reinforcement placed inside the cell must terminate at its ends in a standard hook. The hook can
have its free extension positioned upwards, downwards, or horizontally, taking care not to obstruct the grout
injection operations.
When reinforcement ends in beams or columns, it must be fully anchored there.
D.4.5.12 — PLACEMENT OF THE VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT — The placement of the reinforcements and their arrangement
must take into account the following requirements, in addition to what is specified in D.4.2
D.4.5.12.1 — Tolerances — The reinforcement placement must meet the following tolerances:
(a) Transverse tolerance: One fourth of the transverse dimension of the cell. (b) Longitudinal
tolerance: One fourth of the longitudinal dimension of the cell.
D.4.5.12.2 — Location of bars in the cell — Vertical bars should preferably be placed in the center of the cell.
D.4.5.12.3 — Splices — In the splice zone, the overlapping bars may be in contact by locators, or they may be separated
by a distance of not less than 25 mm. Reinforcement may be spliced between adjacent cells, as long as both cells are fully
grouted.
D.4.5.12.4 — Securing the reinforcement — Prior to injection of the mortar, the reinforcement must be secured against
displacement by means of wire locators or similar devices.
D.4.5.12.5 — Changes — The change of position or dimension of the reinforcement can only be authorized by the person
in charge of the structural design or his delegate.
D-27
D.4.6 — CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR FILLING MORTAR
D.4.6.1 — PREPARATION OF THE FILLING MORTAR — The filling mortar prepared on site must be mixed for a period between 3 and 10 minutes
in mechanical equipment, with the amount of water required for the desired workability.
D.4.6.2 — FLUIDITY — At the time of placement of the filler mortar, it must present the required fluidity conditions without the initiation of hardening
by hydration of the cement, so that the filler mortar flows without segregation through the spaces to inject.
D.4.6.3 — MORTAR INJECTION — The filler mortar must be placed directly with a pump or manually with a funnel, taking care that the entire
injected space is homogeneous and compact, seeking an intimate link between the filler mortar and the units of masonry.
D.4.6.3.1 — Injection height — The maximum injection height will be determined taking into account the following aspects:
(a) Distance between overlaps of the vertical reinforcement.

(b) Resistant condition of the masonry units to the hydrostatic pressure of the mortar
stuffed.
(c) Injection height in one day with maximum intervals of one hour. (d) Size of the space
to be injected according to injection height (table D.4.6-1).
Table D.4.6-1
Maximum injection height according to the size of the injection space
Minimum cell
Minimum dimension (2)
injection height dimensions (3)
of cavity
required(1)
Fine Mortar 0.4 thick mortar (mm) (mm)
m 1.2 - 40x50 25
m 1.5 0.4 m 50x60 38
m 3.0 1.2 m 50x75 fifty
m 1.5 m 60x75 60
- 3.0 m 75x75 75
(1) Clearance between internal burrs.
(2) Refers to the space between walls in reinforced cavity masonry.
(3) The area of the reinforcement shall not occupy more than 6% of the area of the cavity.
D.4.6.3.2 — Suspension of the injection — When the injection process is suspended for more than one hour, a new filling mortar must
be poured with the noted precautions, such as inspection windows, etc.
D.4.6.3.3 — Partial injection — It is advisable to provide lateral flow controls for the filler mortar when the injection of the wall is partial.
For this purpose, the cells selected as a barrier can be filled with sand, or another appropriate mechanism can be used for this purpose.
D.4.6.3.4 — Joints between mortar injections — The pour joint between injection stages must be made at the same level with a
minimum of 40 mm below a mortar joint.
D.4.6.4 — COMPACTION — The filler mortar must be adequately compacted with a vibrator or smooth bar in portions 300 mm high or less. In cells
where there is vertical reinforcement, compaction can be carried out by vibrating the reinforcement bar.
D.4.6.4.1 — Recompaction — When the filler mortar is placed in portions of more than 300 mm in height and after a reasonable time of
about 5 minutes, it is necessary to recompact the filler mortar placed to guarantee adherence with the units, due to the reduction in volume
suffered by the mortar when losing the water sucked by the units. Alternatively a volume expansion additive can be used in the filler mortar.
D-28
D.4.7 — CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS FOR MEzzanine SLABS

D.4.7.1 — ACTION AS A DIAPHRAGM — Floor slabs used in structural masonry construction must meet the diaphragm
requirements of A.3.6.8 and C.21.11 of this Regulation.
D.4.7.1.1 — Flexible diaphragms — Flexible diaphragms that do not meet the requirements indicated in this
section can be used in buildings with 1 and 2 levels of use group I, meeting the requirements for displacement
control and special distribution of lateral loads. given in Title A.
D.4.7.2 — SUPPORT OF THE MEASUREMENT ELEMENTS — The elements of the mezzanine slab that rest directly
on the walls must be sufficiently supported during construction and adequately permanently attached to the walls.
D.4.7.3 – OVERTURNING OF THE SUPPORT COURSE - It must be guaranteed that the support of the slab does not
cause overturning in the support course due to excess eccentricity, nor that there is a possibility of the plate detachment
in the construction stage or in the service stage.
D.4.7.4 — PRECAST SLABS — When using precast slabs, the following conditions must be met:
(a) The nominal minimum thickness of the load-bearing wall is

120 mm (b) The requirements of A.3.6.8 and C.21.11 must be met, according to the dissipation capacity of
energy in inelastic range of the seismic resistance system.
(c) Provisional shoring of the plate must be used until the operation of the wall slab assembly is guaranteed. At
the intersection, the transfer of efforts between the slab and the wall must be guaranteed for both vertical load
and lateral load.
D.4.8 — SHORING OF WALLS
D.4.8.1 — When so required, the walls exposed to environmental conditions such as wind and humidity, must be protected
against their effects, provisionally or permanently.
D.4.9 — CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
D.4.9.1 — The construction joints between structurally independent buildings must be made allowing lateral displacements
without interference by knocking between them. Construction joints must be free of debris and other materials that limit
freedom of horizontal movement. Facade finishes should be suspended at construction joints using flexible elements to
prevent moisture.
D.4.10 — CURING MASONRY WALLS
D.4.10.1 — Masonry with concrete or silico-calcareous units — This type of masonry must be protected from rain,
wind, and excessive sun exposure for the first three days after the units are glued or the grout is injected. cells. This type
of masonry should not be cured by irrigating with water; Only if there is evidence of deficient hydration of the mortar
should it be cured by moistening the mortar joints with a wet brush, taking care not to wet the masonry units.
D.4.10.2 — Masonry with Clay Units — This masonry must be cured by providing adequate moisture and temperature
for at least 7 days after units are bonded or cells are injected.
D-29
Grades
D-30
NSR-10 – Chapter D.5 – General analysis and design requirements
CHAPTER D.5
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
= effective area of the masonry section, mm2 . See D.5.4.1.

Ae Amv = effective area to determine shear forces, mm2 . See D.5.4.5.
Ase = effective area of tensile reinforcement, mm2 .
Ast = total area of reinforcing steel in the wall section, mm2 .
As1 = area of tension reinforcement balanced by compression in the masonry, mm2 .
As2 = area of the tension reinforcement balanced by the compression reinforcement, mm2 .
Av = area of reinforcement for shear, mm2 . = depth
to of compression equivalent block (take as 0.85c ), mm. = depth of the equivalent
ab
compression block in balanced conditions, equation D.5.1-2, mm. = effective width of the section, mm. See D.5.4.4.
b = depth of the neutral axis in the compression zone, mm.
c = distance from the compression face to the centroid of the tension
d
reinforcement, mm. = distance from the centroid of the compression-flexion reinforcement
dÿ
to the extreme fiber in compression. = reduced seismic effects.
AND
Em = modulus of elasticity of the masonry, MPa.

Er = modulus of elasticity of the filler mortar, MPa. = modulus
Es of elasticity of reinforcing steel, MPa. = seismic forces.
Fs
ÿ
fm = compressive strength of the masonry, MPa. = square root

ÿ
fm of the compressive strength of the masonry, in MPa. = modulus of rupture of the

masonry, MPa. = yield strength of reinforcing steel,
MPa.
rf and f Gm = shear modulus of the masonry, MPa.
Gr = shear modulus of the filler mortar, MPa. hÿ = effective
height of the element to evaluate buckling effects, mm. See D.5.4.3. = span of a beam or lintel, mm.
= horizontal length of the wall, mm.
w
M = acting moment that occurs simultaneously with V.

Mcr = moment of cracking of the masonry wall.
Mn = nominal bending resistance.
Mu = requested design flexural strength Pb = nominal
balanced axial load, N.
Pn = nominal axial load resistance, N. = maximum
theoretical axial resistance, N.
Po Pu = requested design resistance to axial load, N.
R = coefficient of energy dissipation capacity. = coefficient used to
take into account the slenderness effect of elements in compression.
Re R0 = basic coefficient of energy dissipation capacity. = spacing of
yes
shear reinforcement measured along the vertical axis of the wall, mm. = effective thickness
of the section to evaluate buckling effects, mm. See D.5.4.2.
you
V = acting shear force occurring simultaneously with M = nominal strength for .

shear force, N.
Vn Vm = nominal resistance for shear force contributed by the masonry, N.
D-31
vou = requested design shear strength, N. = nominal strength

vs. for shear contributed by shear reinforcement, N. = coefficient to be used in equation
ÿ D.5.8-1. = maximum allowable compression strain in
ÿmu _ masonry (ÿ = mu 0.003)
= yield strain of reinforcing steel.
ÿy _
ÿ = coefficient of resistance reduction.

ÿ amount of tensile reinforcement by bending, ÿ = A bd ( ) = yes
ÿb = quantity corresponding to the conditions of balanced flexion. =

ÿn amount of horizontal reinforcement that resists shear in a wall in a plane perpendicular to the plane Amv ,
mm2 .
D.5.1 — ASSUMPTIONS AND GENERAL PRINCIPLES
D.5.1.1 — GENERAL — The analysis and design of the structural masonry must be carried out using rational methods
based on principles accepted by good engineering practice and that reflect the characteristics and properties of the
component materials, the construction methods used and the individual and joint behavior of the structural system.
D.5.1.2 — DESIGN METHODOLOGY BY STRENGTH LIMIT STATES — Title D analysis and design requirements are
based on the strength limit state method, using the load combinations described in B.2.4. However, the design of masonry
structures by the work stress method is allowed, using the load combinations described in B.2.3, and for this purpose the
alternate requirements presented in Appendix D-1 may be used. All design of the structure must be done by one of these
two methods
D.5.1.3 — REQUIRED RESISTANCE — The required resistance for structural masonry elements is obtained as the
maximum value, expressed in terms of load or moments and associated internal forces, resulting from applying the
different loads to the structure, such as dead loads. , live, seismic, wind and imposed by temperature changes, setting
shrinkage and plastic flow, earth or liquid pressure, etc.; combined and factored in accordance with B.2.4 of these
Regulations.
D.5.1.4 — DESIGN STRENGTH — The design resistance of an element, its connections with other elements and any
part or section of it, in terms of bending moments, axial load, shear and torsion, must be equal to its Nominal strength
calculated in accordance with the requirements and assumptions of this chapter, multiplied by a coefficient of strength
reduction, ÿ . Therefore:
Design Resistance = ÿ x Nominal ResistanceÿRequired Resistance = OR (D.5.1-1)
D.5.1.5 — ÿ VALUES — The resistance reduction coefficients must be the following:
D.5.1.5.1 — Gravitational Effects and Horizontal Forces Perpendicular to the Plane of the Wall — In the
design of structural masonry walls for gravitational effects alone or accompanied by horizontal forces perpendicular
to the plane of the wall, the following resistance reduction coefficients shall be used:
(a) Flexion and flexo-compression............................................ ........................ ÿ = 0.80

(b) Shear ................................................... ................................................ ÿ = 0.60
D.5.1.5.2 — Forces Parallel to the Plane of the Wall — In the design of structural masonry walls for effects
caused by horizontal forces parallel to the plane of the wall, the following resistance reduction coefficients shall
be used:
(a) Flexion ..................................... ................................................................ .ÿ = 0.85

(b) Compression and flexo-compression .......................................... ................ ÿ = 0.60
D-32
For symmetrically reinforced walls in which yf does not exceed 420 MPa, the value
of ÿ can increase linearly up to ÿ = 0.85 as ÿPn decreases from its injected cells, Pb
can be calculated using 0.10f AÿI
or 0.25Pb to zero. For walls with all
equation (D.5.1-2).
ÿ
mu
=
Pb0.80f
mb ba
ÿ
and =
atb0.85d (D.5.1-2)
F
and
ÿ+
mu
AND
yes
(c) Shear............................................... ................................................. ÿ = 0.60
This value can be raised to ÿ = 0.85 in walls where the nominal shear resistance
exceeds the shear corresponding to the development of its nominal flexural resistance
for the combination of factored forces.
D.5.1.5.3 — Values of ÿ for crushing stresses — The value of ÿ for crushing stresses should be ÿ = 0.60
D.5.1.6 — DESIGN ASSUMPTIONS — Structural masonry design by the strength limit state method is based on the
following assumptions:
D.5.1.6.1 — Masonry tensile strength — Masonry does not resist tensile stress.
D.5.1.6.2 — Strain Compatibility — The reinforcement is fully surrounded and adhered to the masonry materials
in such a way that they work as a homogeneous material.
D.5.1.6.3 — Planar sections remain planar — Strains in reinforcement and masonry shall be assumed
proportional to the distance from the neutral axis of the section. The nominal resistance of masonry wall sections
for flexo-compression conditions must be obtained from the application of the principles of equilibrium and
compatibility of deformations.
D.5.1.6.4 — Stress-Strain Relation for Reinforcing Steel — The stresses in the steel, for values less than the yield
stress, yf , should be considered linearly proportional to the strain multiplied by Es . For higher values of strain
corresponding to yield stress, the stress in the steel must be considered independent of the strain.
ÿ = fEyys ,
and equal to yf .
D.5.1.6.5 — Maximum Strain in Masonry — The maximum strain in the extreme compression grain of the
masonry shall be taken as 0.003. ÿ , mu
D.5.1.6.6 — Stress-strain relationship for masonry — In the design by the resistance method, a rectangular
distribution of compressive stresses in the masonry can be considered, defined as follows:
(a) A uniform compressive stress in the masonry can be assumed with an intensity of over an equivalent
zone limited by the edges of the effective section and a straight line 0.80fm
ÿ
parallel to the neutral axis of the

section. (b) The dimension of the equivalent zone of compression,, measured
a in the direction perpendicular to
the neutral axis from the fiber of maximum compression, it must be 85% of the compressed dimension, ,
c of the section in that direction (a 0.85c = ) .
D-33
D.5.2 — MODULES OF ELASTICITY AND SHEAR
D.5.2.1 — MODULE OF ELASTICITY — For the modulus of elasticity, the following values must be taken:
D.5.2.1.1 — Reinforcing steel — The value for the modulus of elasticity of the reinforcing steel shall be taken
as:
=
E 200000 MPa (D.5.2-1)
yes
D.5.2.1.2 — Masonry — The value for the modulus of elasticity of the masonry must be established by means
of laboratory tests of walls manufactured and tested as indicated in D.3.7.2, calculated on the stress-strain curve
ÿ
obtained in the test the slope of the secant from 0.05fm

up to 0.33fm . The historical records of the modulus of elasticity determined experimentally for projects under
ÿ
construction can be used in subsequent designs of works with similar materials. In the absence of experimental values,
the following may be used:
For concrete masonry
= ÿ
MPa (D.5.2-2)
m 20000 m ÿ
E900f
For clay masonry
= ÿ
MPa (D.5.2-3)
m 20000 m ÿ
E750f
D.5.2.1.3 — Mortar Filler — The value for the modulus of elasticity of the mortar filler shall be established by
means of laboratory tests of cylinders manufactured and tested as indicated in C.8.5.
In the absence of experimental values, the following can be used:
= f 20000 cr ÿ
E 2500
ÿ
MPa (D.5.2-4)
r
D.5.2.2 — SHEAR MODULE — For the shear modules, the following values must be taken:
Masonry
G0.4E
m
= m (D.5.2-5)
filler mortar
=
G0.5E
r r (D.5.2-6)
D.5.3 — LOADS
D.5.3.1 — REQUESTS TO BE USED — The masonry structures must be designed for the effects of the combined loads
specified in Title B of this Regulation. Likewise, in the evaluation of design efforts, the effects of loads on displacements
must be taken into account.
D.5.3.1.1 — Combination of forces — The different forces that must be taken into account are combined to obtain
the internal design forces of the structure, in accordance with the requirements of B.2.4 by the limit state method of
endurance. In each of the required load combinations, the stresses are multiplied by the load coefficient prescribed for
that combination in B.2.4. In the effects caused by the earthquake, the energy dissipation capacity of the structural
system is taken into account, which is achieved using reduced design seismic effects, E obtained by dividing the
,
seismic forces Fs , determined in accordance with the requirements of Title A of the Regulation, ) . The capacity
coefficient of by the capacity coefficientof energy dissipation RE FR energy dissipation, R
(= yes
, is a function of:
D-34
(a) The seismic resistance system according to the classification given in chapter A.3, (b) The
degree of irregularity of the building, (c) The
absence of redundancy as specified in A.3.3.8, and (d) The design
and detailed requirements of each type of structural masonry, for the corresponding degree of energy
dissipation capacity (DMI, DMO, or DES), as specified in this Title and in chapter A.3. .
D.5.3.1.2 — Other Effects — In addition to the specified vertical and horizontal load combinations, the structure
and its parts shall be rated to address the effects caused by shrinkage, expansion, creep, anticipated settlement,
and environmental operating conditions.
D.5.3.2 — LATERAL FORCE DISTRIBUTION — The lateral forces must be distributed to the structural system according
to the rigidity of the elements and of the diaphragm, as prescribed in Title A of the Regulations.
D.5.3.2.1 — Effect of section wings — The increase in element stiffness due to the wing effect can be considered
in walls that intersect monolithically. The effective width of the fin on each side (type T, I) must not exceed 6 times
the thickness of the intersected wall. The effective width of the fin on one side (type L, Z, C) must not exceed 6 times
the thickness of the intersected wall. The fin should not be considered in the shear resistance.
D.5.3.2.2 — Torsional effects — The distributed lateral loads must take into account the horizontal torsional
effects of asymmetry in the loads, masses or structure, as established in Title A of the Regulations.
D.5.3.3 — CONCENTRATED LOADS — The following aspects regarding concentrated loads must be taken into account
in the analysis and design.
(a) For the calculation of the crushing forces, in locked rigging, an area must be taken whose depth is the net
thickness of the support element and whose length cannot be greater than the width of the supported piece
plus four times the thickness of the support element. support, without being greater than the distance between
centers of the concentrated loads. For flask primed masonry, the length of the calculation area should be
taken as the size of the masonry unit in that direction.
(b) The crushing stresses under factored concentrated loads, evaluated over the area
specified in the previous literal, must not exceed ÿ 0.85fm
ÿ
.
(c) It is considered that the concentrated loads are distributed at an angle of 45o with the vertical in walls with
locked rigging and 30o on walls with flask rigging.
D.5.3.4 — ECCENTRIC LOAD — The stresses produced by loads with eccentricity parallel or normal to the plane of the
structural element must be considered in the design, taking into account their position relative to the center of rigidity of
the net section. Any effort that occurs must be within the limits established in each case.
D.5.3.4.1 — Provisional supports — In the evaluation of the efforts due to eccentric loads, the transitory
condition of their action and the permanent effects must be taken into account. When the effects of transitory
action are mitigated by means of provisional supports, these supports must be clearly specified in the construction
plans.
D.5.4 — EFFECTIVE DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
D.5.4.1 — EFFECTIVE AREA ( ) Ae — The effective area to be used to calculate the axial forces must be the sum of
the minimum contact area between the mortar and the masonry unit and the injected area. When the mortar joint is
grooved the effective area must be reduced proportionally. In confined masonry it includes the area of the confining
elements.
D.5.4.2 — EFFECTIVE THICKNESS TO EVALUATE THE BUCKLING EFFECT (t) — The effective thickness t to be used
to calculate the buckling reduction coefficient must be taken as follows:
(a) For walls without piers or bracing columns, the effective thickness is their actual thickness. (b) For
walls braced at regular distances by piers monolithically integrated into the wall, the
D-35
effective thickness is the product of the real thickness of the wall by the coefficient of table D.5.4-1 (c) Reinforced cavity walls
must be treated as a single wall with a real thickness measured between the external edges of the wall. set. (d) In rectangular section elements, the
dimension of the section in the considered direction must be
considered as effective thickness. For non-rectangular sections, the effective thickness in each direction must be considered as the thickness of a
rectangular section of equal width and equivalent inertia.
Table D.5.4-1
Coefficients for walls braced by butts (*)
Male thickness
butt spacing
Wall thickness
Male thickness
1.0 2.0 3.0
6 or less 8 1.0 1.4 2.0
1.0 1.3 1.7
10 1.0 1.2 1.4
15 1.0 1.1 1.2
20 or more 1.0 1.0 1.0
(*) Linearly interpolate for intermediate values.
D.5.4.3 — EFFECTIVE HEIGHT TO EVALUATE THE BUCKING EFFECT (hÿ) — The effective height hÿ of an element to calculate the buckling reduction
coefficient must be taken as follows:
(a) In elements supported laterally up and down in the direction considered, as the free distance
between supports.
(b) In members not supported at one end in the direction considered, as twice the dimension measured from the
support. (c) When
appropriately justified, a dimension less than the actual height may be used as the effective height.
free distance between supports.
D.5.4.3.1 — The ratio between effective height and effective thickness cannot be greater than 25 in structural
walls.
D.5.4.4 — EFFECTIVE WIDTH ( ) b — The effective width to be used in the calculations of the resistance to flexion and
flexo-compression of masonry walls built with vertical drilling units, must be taken as follows:
D.5.4.4.1 — Effective width b for bending perpendicular to the plane of the wall — When the direction of
horizontal forces is perpendicular to the plane of the wall, and they induce bending or flexing-compression about
an axis parallel to the wall, the effective width b that must be taken for the purpose of designing the section is,
for locked rigging, the greater between 6 times the nominal width of the wall and the center-to-center distance
between vertical reinforcements; and for flask rigging, the greater of 3 times the nominal width of the wall and
the center-to-center distance between vertical reinforcements. In masonry with all its injected cells, the section is
considered solid and there is no need to apply the reductions indicated above.
D.5.4.4.2 — Effective width b for bending parallel to the plane of the wall — When the direction of the
horizontal forces is parallel to the plane of the wall, and they induce bending or bending-compression about an
axis perpendicular to the plane of the wall, the effective width b that must be taken for the purposes of designing
the section is equal to the average solid width of the wall. The effective width b , corresponds to the effective area
divided by the horizontal length of the wall b A=
that one
.
D.5.4.5 — EFFECTIVE AREA TO DETERMINE SHEAR FORCES (Amv ) — The effective area to calculate shear forces
in masonry walls built with vertical drilling units must be taken as follows:
D.5.4.5.1 — Effective area Amv for shear in the direction perpendicular to the plane of the wall — When
D-36
the direction of the horizontal force is perpendicular to the plane of the wall, and induces shear stresses in that ( = ) ,
for shear is equal to AA A sticks only to the side walls of theit'sunit
except
mv when direction mortar is used, the effective area
It is
perforation, see D.4.5.10.1(b), in which case Amv corresponds to the sum of the portions of the wall injected with fill
mortar, including the walls of the masonry units that surround them and that have filler mortar. job.
D.5.4.5.2 — Effective area Amv for shear in the direction parallel to the plane of the wall — When the direction of the
horizontal forces is parallel to the plane of the wall, and induces shear stresses in that direction, only the web of the section
resists stresses shears and Amv is the net area of the web of the section.
Generally A b where
mv
b
= is the effective width of the web. However, when there are concentrations of cells injected with
In
,
filler mortar at the ends of the wall, the effective width for this purpose must be calculated in the central area of the web.
D.5.4.6 — DISTANCE BETWEEN SUPPORTS ON BEAMS AND LINKS — For beams and lintels, the maximum distance between
supports that give them lateral support must be 32 times the effective width.
D.5.4.7 — MINIMUM FLEXURAL STIFFNESS IN BEAMS AND LINKS — The minimum flexural stiffness of an element must
be such that elastic deflections greater than 500 do not occur under all unadulterated vertical design loads.
D.5.4.8 — HIGH SECTION BEAMS — Beams that have length/height ratios less than 1.25 in single spans and less than 2.5 in
continuous spans must be designed taking into account non-linear relationships in the stress distribution in the beam. section.
D.5.5 — STRENGTH FOR COMPRESSION AXIAL LOAD

D.5.5.1 — MAXIMUM THEORETICAL AXIAL RESISTANCE — The maximum theoretical axial resistance of the wall subjected
to axial load without eccentricity, Po , is obtained by means of the following expression:
(D.5.5-1)
ÿ ÿ
PO = ÿ+
0.80f ÿ stffyAm
AAA me
e( st
)
D.5.5.2 — REDUCTION OF AXIAL RESISTANCE DUE TO SLIMNESS — The effect of the slenderness of the wall on the
nominal resistance for axial load is obtained by means of the Re parameter :
2
ÿ h ÿÿÿ ÿ
R1 It is
=ÿÿÿ for ht 30 ÿ (D.5.5-2)
42t ÿ
2
ÿ 9 p.m ÿ ÿ
R for ht 30 >
It is
=ÿ
ÿ ÿhÿ ÿ
D.5.5.3 — NOMINAL RESISTANCE FOR AXIAL LOAD — The nominal resistance for compression axial load without
eccentricity and taking into account the effects of slenderness, cannot be greater than the value given to Pn , continuation:
= R
P n0.80P (D.5.5-3)
are you
D.5.5.4 — MAXIMUM DESIGN STRENGTH FOR AXIAL LOAD — The maximum design resistance for axial compression load
Pu , without eccentricity and taking into account slenderness effects, is given by the following expression
P in ÿÿ =ÿP0.80PR
n are you
(D.5.5-4)
D-37
D.5.6 — BENDING RESISTANCE WITHOUT AXIAL LOAD
D.5.6.1 — GENERAL — When the wall section is subjected to bending moment without the presence of axial load, the following condition
must be met:
MM ÿf (D.5.6-1)
in n
D.5.6.2 — SECTIONS WITH TENSILE REINFORCEMENT ONLY — When the wall section is simply reinforced, and its amount is
less than 75% of the amount for balanced conditions, the nominal flexural resistance Mn can be obtained by means of equation
(D.5.6-2).
a ÿ
M By=d ÿÿ (D.5.6-2)
and
ÿÿ ÿ 2ÿ
and
Af
and
a =
ÿ
(D.5.6-3)
0.80f bm
D.5.6.3 — SECTIONS WITH COMPRESSION REINFORCED — When the wall section has reinforcement working in compression,
and it can be proven that the compression reinforcement is in yielding, the nominal flexural resistance Mn , can be obtained by
means of equation D.5.6-4.
ÿ a ÿ
(D.5.6-4)
ÿ
n
= ÿ+
M From ÿ s1 y dd
d From s2 y ( )
ÿÿ
2 ÿÿ
D.5.7 — DESIGN OF WALLS IN THE DIRECTION PERPENDICULAR TO ITS PLANE
D.5.7.1 — GENERAL — The requirements of this section are used for the design by the limit state method of structural masonry walls of
vertical bore and reinforced cavity units for the effect of horizontal loads perpendicular to the plane of the wall, plus the vertical forces
acting on the wall.
D.5.7.2 — BENDING RESISTANCE FOR WALLS WITH AXIAL LOAD LESS THAN 0.10f Aÿ — When the me
axial load acting on the wall Pu in the section under study is less than 0.10f requested Aÿ , Mu , mustm e ,
design moment
meet the condition given by equation D.5.7-1:
M you
RM ÿf
and
(D.5.7-1)
where Re is given by equation D.5.5-2, and Mn is obtained by:
ÿ a ÿ
M By
n
=d
I know and ÿÿÿ
(D.5.7-2)
ÿ 2ÿ
By P +
and u
A with
= (D.5.7-3)
f
and
and
By P +
and u
a =
ÿ
(D.5.7-4)
0.80f bm
and the amount of flexural reinforcement

0.5ÿ
must
. (not
) exceed ÿ = A bd s b
D-38
D.5.7.3 — BENDING RESISTANCE FOR WALLS WITH AXIAL LOAD GREATER THAN 0.10f Aÿ — When the me
axial load acting on the wall Pu in the section under study is greater than 0.10f Aÿ the slenderness ratio of the
,
me
wall ht ÿ
must not be greater than 30, and the requested design moment, Mu , which accompanies the axial load Pu , must
satisfy the condition given by equation D.5.7-5:
M RM
ÿf
you and
(D.5.7-5)
where Re is given by equation D.5.5-2, and Mn is obtained taking into account the interaction between moment and axial load,
according to the principles stated in D.5.1.6 and using the resistance reduction coefficient, ÿ , appropriated from the dice in
D.5.1.5.1.
D.5.7.4 — SHEAR RESISTANCE IN THE DIRECTION PERPENDICULAR TO THE PLANE OF THE WALL — The following condition
must be met with respect to the shear force acting in the direction perpendicular to the plane of the wall:
V inV ÿ f n
(D.5.7-6)
where:
1
V nOff (D.5.7-7)
ÿ
=
mv m
6
where Amv is defined in D.5.4.5.1 and the value of the resistance reduction coefficient, ÿ , D.5.1.5.1. is given in
D.5.8 — DESIGN OF WALLS IN THE DIRECTION PARALLEL TO THEIR PLANE
D.5.8.1 — GENERAL — The requirements of this section are used for the design by the limit state method of structural masonry walls of
vertical bore and reinforced cavity units for the effect of horizontal loads parallel to the plane of the wall, plus the vertical forces acting on
the
wall.
D.5.8.2 — MINIMUM BENDING RESISTANCE — When the dominant failure mode of the wall is bending, the nominal bending
resistance of the wall, Mn , must comply with the following relationship:
Mn ÿ ÿMcr (D.5.8-1)
where ÿ = 1.8 for masonry with all its cells injected with filler mortar, ÿ = 3.0 for masonry where only the cells containing reinforcement are
injected and ÿ = 3.0 for reinforced cavity masonry.
Mcr is the cracking moment, which is obtained by means of equation D.5.8-2.
2
b
= In
M
cr
f
r
(D.5.8-2)
6
The modulus of rupture of the masonry, rf , is obtained from table D.5.8-1:
D-39
Table D.5.8-1
Modulus of rupture, rf (MPa)
Portland Cement
Direction of tensile stresses due to bending cement and lime mortars for
and type of masonry. mortars masonry
H, M, from S N H, M, from S N
Perpendicular to horizontal joints

- Solid Units 0.69 0.52 0.41 0.26
- Vertical drilling units(1)
- Unfilled 0.43 0.33 0.26 0.16
- Filled with injection mortars 1.12 1.09 1.06 1.00
Perpendicular to the vertical joint -

Solid Units - Vertical 1.38 1.03 0.83 0.52
drilling units - Unfilled - Filled and
partially filled 0.86 0.66 0.52 0.33
with injection mortars (1) For partially
1.38 1.03 0.83 0.52
injected masonry, the
modulus of rupture must be determined by linear interpolation of the values given for the units unfilled
and grout-filled vertical drill rigs based on the amount (percentage) grout-filled.
D.5.8.3 — BENDING-COMPRESSION RESISTANCE — The requested design moment, Mu , which accompanies the must meet the condition given
by equation D.5.8-2, for the load level Pu : axial load Pu ,
M inMÿ f n
(D.5.8-3)
Mn is obtained taking into account the interaction between moment and axial load, according to the principles enunciated in D.5.1.6, which allow to
calculate an interaction diagram of the wall, using the resistance reduction coefficient, ÿ , appropriate from those given in D.5.1.5.2, which, in turn,
depends on the level of axial load.
D.5.8.4 — SHEAR RESISTANCE IN THE DIRECTION PARALLEL TO THE PLANE OF THE WALL — The following condition must be
met with respect to the shear force acting in the direction parallel to the plane of the wall:
V inVÿ f n
(D.5.8-4)
and
VVVms
=+n (D.5.8-5)
If VVinÿ ÿ m , the reinforcement must take all the shear stress, and then:
In the above equations, Vm is calculated according to D.5.8.4.2 and Vs according to D.5.8.4.3.

Furthermore, the total nominal shear, Vn given by equation D.5.8-5 cannot exceed in any horizontal section of the wall the value given in D.5.8.4.4.
D.5.8.4.1 — Plastic Hinge Verification — If the nominal wall shear, Vn , exceeds the shear that occurs with the wall's nominal flexural
strength, Mn , there is a possibility that a plastic hinge will develop at the base. of the wall and special precautions must be taken within a
region from the base of the wall to a height equal to . All sections within this region must have a nominal shear resistance equal to:
In
V nV= s
(D.5.8-6)
D-40
The required shear resistance, Vu , for this region can be determined based on the resisting moment Mn in a section located at a height
equal to , but not more than half a story above 2 of the base of the wall. The spacing,
In
s between the base and a height equal to In the
remainder of the wall upwards, the nominal , of the horizontal shear reinforcement within this region included nor 600 mm.
shear resistance can be determined in , cannot exceed three times the nominal width of the wall, t ,
from Equation D.5.8-5.
D.5.8.4.2 — Value of Vm — The nominal shear resisted by the masonry, Vm , is calculated using the expressions given in table D.5.8-2,
where Mu is the moment that occurs simultaneously with Vu in the section under consideration. , and d can be taken as 0.8 in the
absence of a compatibility analysis of u ( ) must always be taken as positive
In
and deformations. Amv is defined in D.5.4.5.2. The ratio M
in Vd need not be greater than unity.
Table D.5.8-2
Value of nominal shear resisted by masonry, Vm
M in
Vm
V in
d
M in
ÿ 0.25
ÿ
Vm = f 0.25P +
0.30A mv m in
V in
d
M in
ÿ ÿ M ÿ ÿ
in ÿ
0.25 < < 1.00 Vm

0.33 0.13
=ÿ
A fmv0.25P +
m in
V in
d V in
d
ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ
M in
ÿ 1.00
ÿ
Vm = f 0.25P +
0.20A mv m in
V in
d
D.5.8.4.3 — Value of Vs — The nominal shear resisted by horizontal shear reinforcement, Vs , is calculated
using equation D.5.8-7:
V fA = ÿ and mv
s n
(D.5.8-7)
where yf is the yield strength of the shear reinforcement, and ÿn is the amount of reinforcement that contributes to resisting the shear
force, calculated according to equation D.5-8-8:
A in
ÿ=n the sb (D.5.8-8)
= Efficiency factor of horizontal reinforcement.

the
Av is the area of horizontal reinforcement that resists shear, spaced one spacing s measured vertically.
When Av is placed within horizontal elements embedded within the wall,
as described in D.4.5.11.2 ......................................... ....................................ÿ = 0.70 When Av , is the
horizontal joint reinforcement described in D.4.5.11.1 .............................ÿ = 0.35
D.5.8.4.4 – Maximum values of Vn – The nominal shear, Vn , cannot exceed the values given in table D.5.8-3, where Mu is the
moment that occurs simultaneously with Vu in the section under consideration, and d can be taken as in the absence of a compatibility
analysis of u ( ) must always be taken as positive and need0.8
not be
In
deformations. The ratio M Vd

in
greater than unity.
D-41
Table D.5.8-3
Maximum values for the nominal shear Vn
M in
V ind
maximum value allowed for Vn
M in
ÿ 0.25 0.50A fmv
mÿ
Vdin
M in
ÿÿÿÿM ÿ
in
0.25 < 1.00 ÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ 0.56 0.23 A f mv m
< in
Vd ÿÿ ÿ
Vd
ÿ
in
M
in ÿ 1.00 0.33Af mÿ
Vd mv
in
D.5.8.5 — EDGE ELEMENTS — Edge elements shall be used in the masonry walls of vertical bore units and reinforced
cavity masonry, when the failure mode of the wall is in flexure and the compressive stress of the extreme fiber under
ÿ
factored load conditions exceeds 0.20fm for
reinforced cavity masonry as defined in D.2.1.1 and for reinforced masonry as defined in D.2.1.2, and when it exceeds 0.30fm
ÿ
for partially reinforced masonry as defined in D.2.1.3. In addition, the following

requirements must be met:
(a) Edge members can be suspended from the section in which the compressive stress measured from
ÿ
sea inferior a 0.15fm , but they must not be suspended before reaching a height equal to in ,
the base of the wall.

(b) The stresses are calculated for factored forces, using a linearly elastic model and
considering the section as uncracked.
(c) The edge elements must have confining stirrups of diameter No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm), separated vertically
at 200 mm, or its equivalent, within the space injected with filler mortar. Cells must be at least 100mm x
100mm.
(d) In reinforced cavity walls, the edge elements must comply with the specifications for reinforced cavity walls.
concrete in C.21.9.6.
D-42
NSR-10 – Chapter D.6 – Reinforced cavity masonry
CHAPTER
D.6 REINFORCED CAVITY MASONRY
D.6.1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
D.6.1.1 — GENERAL — In addition to what is specified in this Chapter, reinforced cavity masonry structures must comply with Chapters
D.1, D.2 and D.3.
D.6.1.2 — DEFINITION — Reinforced cavity walls are classified as those that are built with two masonry side walls that leave a
continuous interior cavity, reinforced as indicated in this Chapter, which is subsequently injected entirely with mortar or flowable concrete.
D.6.1.2.1 — Masonry units — The masonry units used in the construction of the side walls can be made of concrete, baked
clay or silico-calcareous, solid, with vertical or horizontal perforation, and must comply with the standards established for the
masonry units in D.3.6.
D.6.1.2.2 — Glue mortar — The mortars for gluing the side walls must comply with the provisions of D.3.4 of these standards.
D.6.1.2.3 — Filling mortar — The filling mortars for the vertical cells of the walls must comply with the provisions of D.3.5.
These specifications must also be met in the filler mortar used in the continuous cavity, which must correspond to the type of
thick filler mortar, classified in table D.3.5-1. Alternatively, the continuous cavity can be injected with flowable concrete whose
maximum coarse aggregate size does not exceed one fifth of the thickness of the cavity and whose fluidity and consistency can
guarantee its placement without segregation.
D.6.1.3 — MINIMUM THICKNESS — Reinforced cavity masonry walls must have a total real thickness of not less than 190 mm, which
corresponds to a minimum real thickness of 70 mm (nominal thickness of 80 mm) on each side wall and 50 mm minimum thickness of
the cavity.
D.6.1.4 — CONNECTORS — The side walls must be connected horizontally with wires with a diameter of not less than 4 mm, spaced
vertically at a maximum of 600 mm and horizontally at a maximum of 800 mm. You can use truss, ladder, Z-shaped connectors or
rectangular stirrups with an opening of 100 to 150 mm.
D.6.1.4.1 — Purpose — The purpose of the connectors is to guarantee the joint compound action of the two side walls and the
cavity. Under certain circumstances these connectors may be insufficient to address the effects of the hydrostatic pressure of
the injection material on the side walls, therefore the requirements established in D.6.5.4 must be taken into account.
D.6.1.4.2 — Z Connectors — Zeta connectors may only be used when sidewalls are constructed with solid or horizontally
drilled units. In these connectors, the length of the leg must be 50 mm or more, which must be completely embedded in the
glue mortar. When using zeta connectors, the distances between them cannot exceed 400 mm vertically or 600 mm horizontally.
D.6.1.5 — CLEANING WINDOWS — Cleaning windows must be left on each wall with dimensions of not less than 75 mm by 75 mm,
spaced a maximum of 1 m from one end of the wall to the other and alternated on the walls.
D.6.1.6 — MINIMUM STRENGTH — The filler mortar or fluid concrete must have a minimum compressive strength of 12.5 MPa
measured at 28 days. The compressive strength of the masonry of the walls, fm
ÿ
It cannot be less than 6.25 MPa or 50% of the specified compressive strength for the cavity injection material, nor more than twice
,
the specified strength for the injection material.
D.6.2 — USES OF REINFORCED CAVITY MASONRY
D.6.2.1 — The use limitations and special seismic requirements of the reinforced cavity masonry system, used individually or as part of
a combined system, are governed by Chapter A.3. The
D-43
Reinforced cavity masonry is classified, for earthquake resistant design purposes, as one of the seismic resistant structural systems
with special energy dissipation capacity in the inelastic range (DES).
D.6.3 — REINFORCEMENT REQUIREMENTS
D.6.3.1 — GENERAL — The reinforcements used in the reinforced cavity masonry must comply with the specifications established in
Chapter D.2. The use, characteristics, handling and placement of the reinforcement must take into account the other provisions
established in this Title.
D.6.3.2 — MINIMUM REINFORCEMENT — The amount of reinforcement provided in the reinforced cavity walls cannot be less than
the following values:
(a) Continuous reinforcement, both horizontal and vertical, must be placed in the cavity, complying with the
following amounts evaluated on the gross area of the cavity:
Minimum vertical reinforcement................................................... ................................. 0015
Minimum horizontal reinforcement ................................................ ........................... 0020
(b) Adding the cavity reinforcement and the sidewall reinforcement, the amount of reinforcement provided in any direction may
not be less than 0.0007 of the full cross-sectional gross area. The sum of the vertical and horizontal amounts cannot be
less than 0.0020 measured with respect to the gross area of the complete cross section.
D.6.3.2.1 — Reinforcement spacing — Inside the cavity, the spacing of the reinforcement used cannot be greater than 400
mm nor less than 50 mm. The vertical reinforcement must have locators at distances not greater than 250 bar diameters or 3
m. Horizontal reinforcement must be supported at cross connectors.
D.6.3.3 — REINFORCEMENT IN OPENINGS — At each end of a reinforced cavity wall, a minimum of two No. 4 (1/2”) or 12M (12 mm)
bars must be placed along the entire height of the wall and anchored in the ends.
At least two No. 4 (1/2”) or 12M (12 mm) bars must be placed horizontally along the entire length of the wall at the top and at the start
of all reinforced cavity walls. These bars must be anchored at the ends. On each side of the door or window openings, there must be a
minimum of two bars No. 4 (1/2”) or 12M (12 mm) both horizontally and vertically, whose length must be such that each end of the bars
exceeds the edge of the opening a distance not less than the development length nor 500 mm.
D.6.3.4 — REINFORCEMENT IN COMPRESSION — When the vertical reinforcement of the cavity does not contribute to resisting the
compression efforts, its minimum diameter is No. 2 (1/4”) or 6M (6 mm). When the vertical reinforcement of the cavity contributes to the
compression efforts, its minimum diameter is N° 4 (1/2”) or 12M (12 mm). This reinforcement that works in compression must be
laterally supported by stirrups with a diameter of not less than No. 2 (1/4”) or 6M (6 mm), with a maximum spacing of 200 mm or 16
vertical bar diameters.
D.6.3.5 — MINIMUM DIAMETER — The diameter of the bars in the cavity cannot be greater than a quarter of their thickness.
D.6.3.6 — LAYERS OF REINFORCEMENT — The reinforcement must be arranged in a single layer for cavity thicknesses up to 150
mm. For greater thicknesses, two layers of reinforcement must be provided, which individually cannot contain more than 66% of the
total reinforcement of the cavity.
D.6.4 — DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
D.6.4.1 — GENERAL — Reinforced cavity walls shall be designed following the requirements of Chapter D.5 and Appendix D-1, taking
into account the mechanical properties of the specified materials and the dimensional characteristics of the composite section, and
following the appropriate procedures for the study of the distribution of efforts in elements of various materials. Additionally, the
requirements of this section must be taken into account for the design.
D-44
D.6.4.2 — ANALYSIS — Structural analysis of reinforced cavity masonry walls shall be based on the elastic transformed section of the
composite net section. The stresses evaluated in any portion of the composite masonry shall be within the limits established for the
material of that portion. The allowable stresses for the injection material must be determined with the same formulas used for masonry,
replacing the value of fm
ÿ
fÿcr when the design is made by the allowable work stress method.
D.6.4.3 — MODULE OF ELASTICITY — The modulus of elasticity of each component wall of the reinforced cavity masonry shall be
determined in accordance with D.5.2. When the relationship between the modules is greater than 2, or less than 0.5, the moduli of
elasticity must be determined by testing, taking the secant value between 0.05fÿ and 0.33fÿ respectively. 0.05fm
ÿ ÿ
y 0.33fm and between cr cr
D.6.4.4 — TRANSFORMED SECTION — When transforming the section, one of the materials must be taken as a base. The dimension
parallel to the neutral axis of the section must be the product of the modular relationship times the original dimension, without altering
the dimensions in the direction orthogonal to the neutral axis. Neither the effective height nor the length of the elements can be modified
due to the transformation of the section. The effective thickness considered must be that of the original section.
D.6.4.5 — MONOLITHIC — Reinforced cavity masonry shall be designed to have a monolithic function. Internal stresses derived from
volume changes and other rheological effects, if any, must be studied and addressed.
D.6.4.5.1 — Contact Shear Stress — The shear stress at the contact surface of the cavity with the masonry walls shall be
limited, in all cases, to 0.07 MPa.
D.6.5 — ADDITIONAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

In addition to what is established in Chapter D.4, the following additional requirements for reinforced cavity masonry constructions must
be taken into account:
D.6.5.1 — SIDE WALLS — The construction of the masonry side walls has the alignment tolerances established in this Title. Its
execution must be simultaneous, with a vertical offset between the walls of a maximum of 400 mm. The interior cavity must be free of
burrs, debris and mortar drips.
D.6.5.2 — HORIZONTAL REINFORCEMENT IN THE CAVITY — The horizontal reinforcement of the cavity must be placed as the
construction of the wall progresses, supported by the connectors and fixed to them.
D.6.5.3 — CAVITY INJECTION — Cavity injection must be done at least 3 days after the walls are built, guaranteeing bracing against
the hydrostatic pressure of the injection material.
D.6.5.3.1 — Injection Height — Injection of the cavity can be carried out after cleaning the bottom and once the vertical
reinforcement has been placed and secured. The injection process must be carried out on the same day with successive
heights of 1.2 m, leaving a time between 60 and 90 minutes between layers. At the end of each layer, after 5 minutes, the
mixture must be recompacted.
D.6.5.3.2 — Injection length — The horizontal injection length in a single operation must not exceed 8 meters. If necessary,
continuous vertical barriers should be placed to prevent the lateral flow of the injection material, to guarantee the monolithism
of the wall at the end of the construction.
D.6.5.4 — QUALITY CONTROL OF MATERIALS — The quality control of materials must be carried out in accordance with the
production standards of the different materials and with the frequencies indicated in D.3.8.
D-45
Grades
D-46
NSR-10 – Chapter D.7 – Reinforced masonry walls built with vertical drilling units
CHAPTER
D.7 REINFORCED MASONRY WALLS
CONSTRUCTED WITH VERTICAL DRILLING UNITS
D.7.1 — GENERAL
D.7.1.1 — Reinforced masonry wall buildings constructed with vertical drilling units must meet the requirements of this Chapter.
In addition, they must comply with what is established as general requirements in Chapter D.1, the standards and procedures
in Chapter D.2, the specifications for materials in Chapter D.3, and the construction requirements in Chapter D.4.
D.7.1.2 — Reinforced masonry walls shall be constructed using vertical bore units that meet the requirements of D.3.6.4.
D.7.1.3 — The walls of this type of masonry must have a minimum nominal thickness of 120 mm. Only the locked rig is allowed
and the use of type N mortars is not allowed.
D.7.1.4 — The compressive strength of the masonry fmÿ in this type of structural masonry cannot have a resistance less than
10 MPa, nor a resistance greater than 28 MPa.
D.7.2 — USES OF REINFORCED MASONRY

D.7.2.1 — The restrictions on the use of reinforced masonry are based on what is established in this regard in Chapter A.3.
This structural system is classified, for earthquake resistant design purposes, as follows:
D.7.2.1.1 — Reinforced masonry walls with special energy dissipation (DES) capacity
— When all the vertical cells, including those without reinforcement, are injected with filler mortar, the reinforced
masonry built with vertical perforation units (block) is classified for seismic resistant design purposes, as one of the
systems with special capacity of energy dissipation in the inelastic range (DES).
When the following additional minimum reinforcement requirements to those required in D.7.3 are met, the reinforced
masonry built with vertical drilling units is classified for seismic resistant design purposes, as one of the special energy
dissipation capacity systems in the inelastic range (DES):
(a) The horizontal spacing between vertical reinforcements shall be the lesser of one third of the length of the
wall, one third of the height of the wall or 120mm. (b) The horizontal
reinforcement required to resist the shear force in the direction parallel to the plane of the wall shall be evenly
spaced at a vertical distance of not more than one third of the length of the wall, one third of the height of
the wall or 120 mm and It must be embedded in filler mortar.
(c) The minimum area of vertical reinforcement shall be greater than one-third of the reinforcement required to
cutting.
D.7.2.1.2 — Reinforced masonry walls with moderate energy dissipation capacity (MOD)
— When only the vertical cells that are reinforced are injected with filler mortar, the reinforced masonry built with
vertical perforation units (block) is classified for seismic resistant design purposes as one of the systems with moderate
energy dissipation capacity in the inelastic range (BMD).
D-47
NSR-10 – Chapter D.7 – Reinforced masonry walls built with vertical drilling units
D.7.3 — REINFORCEMENT OF WALLS
D.7.3.1 — MINIMUM AMOUNT — The following minimum amounts must be met:
(a) The amount of reinforcement evaluated on the gross area of the wall section, in each of the
directions, vertical and horizontal, must not be less than 0.0007.
(b) The sum of both amounts, horizontal and vertical, cannot be less than 0.0020. (c) The amount of
vertical reinforcement cannot be less than half the amount of horizontal reinforcement. (d) In the evaluation of the
amounts, the reinforcements required in D.7.3.2 and D.7.3.3 can be taken into account,
as long as they are continuous in the section of the wall.
(e) Reinforcement required by shear placed in the embedded elements described in D.4.5.11.2 shall be
may be considered within the evaluation of the horizontal amount.
D.7.3.2 — MINIMUM VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT — The following requirements for vertical reinforcement must be met:
(a) The horizontal spacing between vertical reinforcements cannot be greater than 1200 mm.
(b) There must be a minimum of a No. 4 (1/2”) or 12M (12 mm) bar at each end of the wall. (c) A minimum of a No.
4 (1/2”) or 12M (12 mm) bar must be provided next to windows or interior openings greater than 600 mm horizontally or
vertically. This reinforcement must be continuous within the wall section.
D.7.3.3 — MINIMUM HORIZONTAL REINFORCEMENT — The following requirements for reinforcement must be met
horizontal:
(a) The diameter of horizontal reinforcement at horizontal glue joints may not be less than 4 mm and may not be spaced
vertically more than 600 mm. (b) Horizontal reinforcement
placed within elements embedded within masonry units
special, see D.4.5.11.2, may not be spaced more than 120 mm vertically.
(c) A minimum horizontal reinforcement of two No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm) bars must be placed at the top and
start of the walls, and at the level of the mezzanine slabs.
(d) A minimum horizontal reinforcement of two No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm) bars must also be placed at the top and bottom of
interior openings with dimensions greater than 600 mm. This reinforcement must extend into the wall for at least 600mm.
D.7.4.1 — Reinforced masonry structures built with vertical drilling units must be designed following the requirements of Chapters D.1 to
D.5, complying with the amounts of reinforcement given in this Chapter.
D.7.5 — CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
D.7.5.1 — The reinforced masonry structures of vertical drilling units must be constructed following the requirements of Chapter D.4.
D-48
NSR-10 – Chapter D.8 – Partially Reinforced Masonry Walls Constructed with Vertical Drilling Units
CHAPTER
D.8 PARTIALLY REINFORCED MASONRY
WALLS CONSTRUCTED WITH VERTICAL DRILLING UNITS
D.8.1 — GENERAL
D.8.1.1 — A partially reinforced masonry wall building is classified as such if it meets the requirements of this Chapter. In addition, it must
comply with what is established as general requirements in Chapter D.1, the standards and procedures in Chapter D.2, the specifications
for materials in Chapter D.3, and the construction requirements in Chapter D.4.
D.8.1.2 — Partially reinforced masonry walls shall be constructed using vertical bore units that meet the requirements of D.3.6.4.
D.8.1.2.1 — In one- and two-story buildings of use group I when fired clay pieces are used, vertical perforation units can be
,
combined at the vertical reinforcement sites, combined with solid or horizontal perforation units of equal modular coordination,
placed where vertical reinforcement is not required and using only locked rigging.
D.8.1.3 — The walls of this type of masonry must have a nominal minimum thickness of 120 mm, except for the minimum thicknesses
established in table E.3.5-1 for one- and two-story dwellings. The use of type N mortars is not allowed.
D.8.1.4 — Compressive strength of masonry, fm of this type of structural masonry cannot be less than 8 MPa.
D.8.2 — USES FOR PARTIALLY REINFORCED MASONRY CONSTRUCTED WITH VERTICAL

DRILLING UNITS
D.8.2.1 — The restrictions on the use of partially reinforced masonry must be based on what is established in this regard in Chapter A.3.
This structural system is classified, for earthquake resistant design purposes, as one of the systems with moderate energy dissipation
capacity in the inelastic range (BMD).
D.8.3 — REINFORCEMENT OF WALLS
D.8.3.1 — MINIMUM QUANTITY — The reinforcement amount in each of the directions, vertical or horizontal, must not be less than
0.00027, evaluated over the gross area of the wall section, taking into account in the evaluation of the amount only the reinforcement
that is continuous in the section of the wall.
D.8.3.2 — MINIMUM VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT — The following requirements for vertical reinforcement must be met:
(a) The spacing between vertical reinforcements cannot be greater than 2.40 m. (b) There
must be a minimum of one No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm) bar at each end of the wall (c) There must be a minimum of
one No. 3 (3/8” bar ) or 10M (10mm) next to windows or interior openings larger than 600mm horizontally or vertically. These
bars must be continuous within the wall section.
D.8.3.3 — MINIMUM HORIZONTAL REINFORCEMENT — The following requirements for reinforcement must be met
horizontal:
(a) Horizontal reinforcement at glue joints may not be spaced more than 800mm apart. (b) Horizontal
reinforcement placed within elements embedded within masonry units
special, see D.4.5.11.2, cannot be spaced vertically more than 3.00 m.
(c) There must also be a minimum horizontal reinforcement of two bars No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm) in the
D-49
NSR-10 – Chapter D.8 – Partially Reinforced Masonry Walls Constructed with Vertical Drilling Units
finishing and start of the walls, at the level of the mezzanine slabs
(d) At the top and bottom of interior openings greater than 600 mm. This reinforcement must extend into the wall
for at least 600mm.
D.8.4 — DESIGN OF PARTIALLY REINFORCED MASONRY CONSTRUCTED WITH VERTICAL

DRILLING UNITS
D.8.4.1 — Partially reinforced masonry structures built with vertical drilling units must be designed following the
requirements of Chapters D.1 to D.5, complying with the amounts of reinforcement given in this Chapter.
D.8.4.2 — When horizontal bore units or solid units are used as specified in D.8.1.2.1, the compressive strength of
built with these units must meet the strength specified
ÿ
masonry fm
for vertical drilling units.

D.8.5.1 — Partially reinforced masonry structures of vertical drilling units shall be constructed following the requirements
of Chapter D.4.
D-50
NSR-10 – Chapter D.9 – Unreinforced masonry walls
CHAPTER
D.9 UNREINFORCED MASONRY WALLS
D.9.1 — GENERAL
D.9.1.1 — An unreinforced masonry wall building is classified as such if it meets the requirements of this Chapter. In addition,
they must comply with what is established as general requirements in Chapter D.1, the standards and procedures in Chapter
D.2, the specifications for materials in Chapter D.3, and the construction requirements in Chapter D.4.
D.9.1.2 — When a masonry building does not meet all the requirements established by this Regulation for partially reinforced
masonry or reinforced masonry, it must be classified and designed as unreinforced masonry.
D.9.1.3 — The walls of this type of masonry must have a nominal minimum thickness of 120 mm, except for the minimum
thicknesses established in table E.3.5-1 for one- and two-story dwellings.
D.9.2 — USES OF UNREINFORCED MASONRY

D.9.2.1 — The restrictions on the use of unreinforced masonry must be based on what is established in this regard in Chapter
A.3 of these Regulations. Unreinforced masonry can only be used as a seismic resistance system in those regions of low
seismic hazard zones where the value of Aa is less than or equal to 0.05.
This structural system is classified, for earthquake resistant design purposes, as one of the systems with minimum energy
dissipation capacity in the inelastic range (DMI).
D.9.3 — DESIGN OF UNREINFORCED MASONRY

D.9.3.1 — Unreinforced masonry walls must be designed using the allowable work stress method, in accordance with the
provisions of Appendix D-1 of this Title.

D.9.4.1 — Unreinforced masonry structures must be constructed following the requirements of Chapter D.4.
D-51
NSR-10 – Chapter D.9 – Unreinforced masonry walls
Grades
D-52
NSR-10 – Chapter D.10 – Confined wall masonry
CHAPTER
D.10 MASONRY OF CONFINED WALLS
Aa = effective peak acceleration coefficient, see Title A.

Aci = sectional area of the confinement column i Act = total area ,
and mm².
of the confinement columns of the wall, in mm². = effective area of the

masonry section, in mm².
Ae Am = minimum area of the floor walls, which act in the same direction in plan. Within the area of the
walls include confinement columns, in m².
Amd = effective area of masonry for verification by crushing, in mm².
Amv = effective area to determine shear forces, see D.5.4.5, in mm².
Ap = floor area at the considered level, in m².
Ast = total area of the longitudinal reinforcing steel of the confinement element, in mm². bcf ÿ fÿ
= effective width of the wall section for effects in the plane of the wall, see D.5.4.4, in mm. =
compressive strength of the concrete of the confining elements, in MPa. = compressive
with strength of the masonry unit, in MPa. = compressive strength of the
ÿ
fm masonry, in MPa. = square root of the compressive strength

ÿ
fm of the masonry, in MPa. = yield strength of reinforcing steel, MPa.

yf
hÿ
= length of the diagonal of the wall panel between confinement elements, or effective height of the element
to evaluate buckling effects, in mm.
hp = height of the story located above the element under study, measured center to center between beams of
confinement, in mm. =
I ct moment of inertia of the confining columns of the wall, with respect to its centroid, in mm4 . = total horizontal
In length of the wall, measured center to center between edge confinement columns, in
mm.
c= horizontal distance between confinement columns, measured center to center, for the confined wall section under
study, in mm.
Mn = nominal resistant moment of the wall.
Mu = requested factored moment of wall design.
N = number of levels above the level considered Pnc = nominal
resistant axial force in compression on the confinement column, always positive, in N.
Pnd = nominal compressive resisting axial force of the masonry alone, in N.
Pnt = nominal resistant axial force in traction on the confinement column, always negative, in N. = design axial
Pu force requested in compression on the wall, in N.
Puc = design axial force requested in compression on the confinement column, always positive, in
N.
Pud = axial force acting on the diagonal strut of the wall, in N.

Put = design axial force requested in traction on the confinement column, always negative, in N. = coefficient used
Re to take into account the effects of slenderness in compression elements. = effective thickness of the
t element to evaluate buckling effects, mm. = nominal resistant shear force
Vn of the wall, in N.
See = requested factored shear force of the wall design, in N.
Vnc = nominal resisting shear force for a reinforced concrete section, calculated according to the
requirements of Title C of the Regulation, in N.
D-53
Vuc = Design requested factored shear acting on the confining columns near the intersection with the confining beam, in N.
x
i
= distance from the confinement column i to the edge of the wall, in mm. = distance
x to the edge of the wall from the centroid of the areas of all the confining columns of the wall,
and mm.
ÿPui = absolute value of the increase in the axial force on the confining column i requested design moment, Mu , , caused by the
in N. = resistance reduction coefficient.
Phi

D.10.1.1 — CLASSIFICATION — Confined masonry is classified as that which is built using masonry walls surrounded by reinforced
concrete elements, emptied after the execution of the wall and which act monolithically with it.
D.10.1.2 — SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS — The masonry structures of confined walls must meet the requirements given in
Chapters D.1, D.2, D.3, D.4 and D.5 of these Regulations, with the exceptions that are noted within this Chapter.
D.10.2 — USES OF MASONRY IN CONFINED WALLS
D.10.2.1 — The masonry of confined walls must comply with the limitations established in Chapter A.3 of these Regulations. This
structural system is classified, for earthquake resistant design purposes, as one of the systems with moderate energy dissipation
capacity in the inelastic range (BMD).
D.10.3 — REQUIREMENTS FOR CONFINED MASONRY WALLS

D.10.3.1 — GENERAL — Confined masonry structural walls shall meet the requirements of this section. Resistance to all loads is
obtained through structural walls, which must be confined. For a confined wall to be considered a structural wall, it must be continuous
from the foundation to its upper level and cannot have any type of opening. Walls that do not meet the above requirements are
considered as non-structural walls and must meet the requirements of Chapter A.9.
D.10.3.2 — PERMITTED MASONRY UNITS — Confined wall masonry shall be constructed using concrete, fired clay, or silico-
calcareous units. Masonry units can be vertical-drilled, horizontal-drilled, or solid and must meet the specifications set forth in D.3.6.
Minimum values for the resistance of the units, which are used in the fÿwith— The masonry units D.10.3.2.1 —
construction of confined masonry walls must have at least the minimum resistances given in table D.10.3- 1.
Table D.10.3-1
Minimum resistance of units for confined
masonry walls
Unit type fÿwith(MPa)

clay wand 15
Horizontal clay drilling block 3
Concrete or clay vertical drilling block 5

(over net area)
D.10.3.2.2 — Restriction on the use of the horizontal drilling block of clay — The use of the horizontal drilling block of
clay is only allowed in buildings with one and two floors and on both floors
D-54
tops of buildings with more than two floors, when its use is allowed, it will be limited to walls where PA 0.15 f is met
ÿ
ÿ .
ue m
D.10.3.3 — MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS — Confined masonry walls may in no case have a ratio between the free height of the wall
and its thickness greater than 25 and must have a nominal thickness of not less than 110 mm. In houses with one and two levels, the
minimum thicknesses established in table E.3.5-1 can be used.
D.10.3.4 — MINIMUM AREA OF WALLS CONFINED BY LEVEL — The minimum area of walls confined by level in each main direction
is limited by the following expression:
BY Aa p
Am ÿ (D.10.3-1)
20
D.10.4 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTAINMENT ELEMENTS

D.10.4.1 — CONCRETE STRENGTH — Both the columns and the confinement beams must be built using concrete whose minimum
compressive strength must be 17.5 MPa measured at 28 days.
D.10.4.2 — COMPATIBILITY WITH TITLE C — The development lengths, the lengths of lap splices, and the anchoring of the
reinforcement of the confinement elements are the same as those established in Title C, except for the minimum dimensions and the
minimum amounts of reinforcement established in this Chapter.
D.10.4.3 — INTERIOR REINFORCEMENT IN THE WALL — All reinforcement must be placed inside the confining columns and beams,
confinement reinforcements are not allowed to be placed inside vertical drilling units. The finishing beams of the walls are excepted,
which can be made in U-type units, injected with mortar with a compression resistance of not less than 14 MPa.
D.10.5 — CONTAINMENT COLUMNS

D.10.5.1 — GENERAL — Confinement columns are considered to be reinforced concrete elements that are placed on the two edges
of the confining wall and at intermediate points within the wall. Confinement columns must be continuous from the foundation to the top
of the wall and must be cast directly against the wall after the elevation of the structural walls of each story.
D.10.5.2 — MINIMUM DIMENSIONS — The minimum dimensions for the confinement elements must be the following:
D.10.5.2.1 — Minimum thickness — The minimum thickness of the confining elements must be the same as the confined
wall.
D.10.5.2.2 — Minimum Area — The minimum cross-sectional area of the confinement elements is 20,000 mm² (200 cm²).
D.10.5.3 — LOCATION — Containment columns must be placed in the following places:
(a) At the ends of all structural walls. (b) At intersections with

other structural walls. (c) At intermediate locations at distances
not greater than 35 times the effective thickness of the wall, 1.5 times the
vertical distance between horizontal confinement elements or 4 m.
D.10.5.4 — MINIMUM REINFORCEMENT — The minimum reinforcement of the confinement column must be the following:
(a) Longitudinal reinforcement - It must not be less than 3 bars No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm). The longitudinal reinforcement
area must be greater than or equal to 0.0075 times the gross section area of the element, but the longitudinal reinforcement
cannot be less than that required to meet the design stresses according to D.10.7.
D-55
(b) Transverse reinforcement – Transverse reinforcement consisting of closed stirrups of minimum diameter No. 2 (1/4”) or
6M (6 mm) must be used, spaced no more than 1.5 times the least dimension of the element, or 200 mm. In no case can
the transverse reinforcement be less than that required to meet the design stresses, in accordance with D.10.7.
D.10.5.5 — ANCHORING OF REINFORCEMENT — The vertical reinforcement of the confinement columns must be anchored to the
foundation system. Splice bars anchored to the foundation by 90° hooks can be used.
These bars should project the length of the lap splice from the top face of the foundation. The splices of the vertical reinforcement of the
confinement columns must meet the requirements established in Chapter C.12.
At the upper end of the confinement column, the longitudinal reinforcements must be anchored in a confinement element transverse to
its direction with a 90° hook.
D.10.5.6 — TRANSVERSE CONFINEMENT REINFORCEMENT — In high and intermediate seismic threat zones, closed abutments of
minimum confinement No. 2 (1/4”) or 6M (6 mm) must be used, spaced at 100 mm and whose Branches cannot be separated by
distances greater than 150 mm. The distance at each end of the element, measured from the transversal confinement element, in which
the confinement stirrups must be placed must be the greater of 450 mm, 3 times the greater dimension of the section of the element or
the sixth part of the light in question.
D.10.6 — CONTAINMENT BEAMS

D.10.6.1 — GENERAL — Confinement beams are considered reinforced concrete elements that are placed in the lower and upper part
of confined walls. The tie beams are emptied directly onto the adjoining structural walls. The foundation beam is considered a tie beam
and must meet the minimum requirements for tie beams.
D.10.6.2 — MINIMUM DIMENSIONS — The minimum dimensions for the confinement beams must be the following:
D.10.6.2.1 — Minimum thickness — The minimum thickness of the confining beams must be the same as the confined wall.
D.10.6.2.2 — Minimum Area — The minimum cross-sectional area of the confinement elements is 20,000 mm² (200 cm²). If a
solid mezzanine slab with a thickness greater than or equal to 100 mm is used, the tie beams can be dispensed with in the
area occupied by this type of slab, placing the reinforcement required for the beam inside the slab. In beams that require
plating, the specified width can be reduced by up to 75 mm, provided that its height is increased, in such a way that the cross-
sectional area is not less than the minimum.
D.10.6.3 — LOCATION — Horizontal confinement beams must be placed at the start and finish of the wall, at the floors and at free
vertical distances no greater than 25 times the thickness of the wall. The beams must be arranged forming closed rings in a horizontal
plane, interlocking the structural walls in the two main directions to form diaphragms with the help of the mezzanine or roof. Tie beams
should be located in the following places:
(a) At foundation level — The foundation system constitutes the first level of horizontal mooring. (b) At the story system
level — Tie beams must be part of the story system. (c) At deck trim level — Two options are presented for the location
of the tie beams and the configuration of the diaphragm: 1. 2.
Horizontal beams at the level of the lintels plus lashing straps as the finish of the butts.
Horizontal mooring beams on the walls without butts, combined with inclined mooring beams, configuring
the finials of the butts.
D.10.6.4 — MINIMUM REINFORCEMENT — The minimum reinforcement of the mooring beams must be the following:
(a) Longitudinal reinforcement — Longitudinal reinforcement must not be less than 3 No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm) bars. The
longitudinal reinforcement area cannot be less than 0.0075 times the gross section area. of the element. For widths less
than 110 mm, and in cases where the mezzanine is a solid slab, the minimum reinforcement must be two No. 4 (1/2”) or
12M (12 mm) bars. In no case, the longitudinal reinforcement
D-56
it may be less than that required to meet the design stresses, in accordance with D.10.7. (b) Transverse
reinforcement — The minimum transverse reinforcement shall consist of No. 2 (1/4”) closed stirrups or
6M (6mm), spaced at distances not greater than 200mm or 1.5 times the least dimension of the element. In no case can
the transverse reinforcement be less than that required to meet the design stresses, in accordance with D.10.7.
D.10.6.4.1 — Beams that continue outside the confined wall — When a tie beam continues outside the confined wall, and
functions as a lintel, as a support for the slab, or as a collecting element within the diaphragm, the beam must be designed
according to to Title C requirements.
D.10.6.5 — ANCHORING OF THE REINFORCEMENT — The reinforcement of the confinement beams must be anchored at the terminal
ends with 90° hooks inside a confinement element transverse to its direction.
D.10.6.6 — TIE BEAM ON THE FOUNDATION — A tie beam must be placed on the foundation that meets the minimum requirements
for confinement beams given in this section. When the foundation is built with reinforced concrete elements, these are considered
equivalent to the tie beam and only the minimum amounts must be met, but in no case can the reinforcement be less than that required
to meet the design efforts. , according to D.10.7.
D.10.6.7 — MOORING TAPES — Mooring straps are considered as supplementary elements to the mooring beams, usable in window
sills, in butt finishes, in parapet finishes, etc. Lashing straps must be constructed in such a way that monolithic work with the finishing
element is guaranteed. The longitudinal reinforcement of the lashing straps must be anchored at the terminal ends. Interchangeably, any
of the following elements can be used as a lashing tape:
(a) A reinforced concrete element with a height greater than or equal to 100 mm, with a width equal to the thickness of the
element that ends and reinforced with at least two longitudinal bars No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm). The transversal
reinforcement must be the one necessary to keep the longitudinal bars in the desired position.
(b) An element built with pieces of U-type masonry, longitudinally reinforced with at least two bars No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm)
or one bar No. 4 (1/2”) or 12M (12 mm), and injected with injection mortar with a compressive strength of not less than
14 MPa.
D.10.7 — ANALYSIS AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
D.10.7.1 — GENERAL — Confined wall masonry structures shall be analyzed and designed in accordance with the requirements given
in Chapter D.5 with the exceptions given in this section. The design must be carried out in accordance with the design method by limit
states of resistance.
D.10.7.2 — VALUES OF ÿ — Instead of the values of ÿ given in D.5.1.5, the following should be used:
(a) Compressive axial load, with or without bending.................................................. ........................ ÿ = 0.65

(b) Axial tensile load .................................................. ................................................................ ... ÿ = 0.85
(c) Bending without axial load............................................ ................................................................ ..... ÿ = 0.85
(d) Cortante .............................................. ................................................ ....................... ÿ = 0.50
D.10.7.3 — DESIGN ASSUMPTIONS — The following assumptions should be considered in the design of confined masonry walls:
(a) The design assumptions stated in D.5.1.6. (b) It must be

considered, in the case of confined wall masonry, that the wall is a homogeneous element that includes the masonry portion
and the confining elements. The mechanical properties of the wall, as a whole, are described through those of the masonry,
which, in turn, must be those defined in Chapter D.5.
(c) For purposes of applying the effective dimensional characteristics indicated in D.5.4, the confinement elements must be
considered to be equivalent to cells injected with filler mortar, unless something different is explicitly indicated within the
requirements of this Chapter. .
D-57
D.10.7.4 — DESIGN FOR AXIAL COMPRESSION LOAD — The wall, as a whole, must be verified for axial compression loads, in
accordance with what is indicated in D.5.5. The reinforcement area to be used there corresponds to that of the longitudinal steel of the
confinement columns. When design procedures require that the axial strengths of the confinement elements be verified, the following
nominal axial compressive strengths, Pnc , and axial tensile strengths, respectively, Pnt , may be used :
= 0.85f A
P 0.80 ÿ A f A ÿ+
ÿ( ci st y st ) ÿ
nc ÿ c ÿ (D.10.7-1)
P nt
fA y =ÿ
st (D.10.7-2)
The nominal compressive strength of the masonry alone, Pnd , confinement, is defined without contribution of the elements of
by:
ÿ
P 0.80
= 0.80f
( A R m md e )
(D.10.7-3)
nd
where Amd is the area of the masonry section, and Re is obtained by:
ÿÿÿh ÿ
R1 for ht 30 ÿ
It is = ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ 42t (D.10.7-4)
ÿ ÿÿ 21t
ÿ ÿ= ÿ
R for ht 30 >
It is ÿ h'
D.10.7.5 — DESIGN OF THE WALL IN THE DIRECTION PERPENDICULAR TO ITS PLANE — The requirements of this section are
used for design by the strength limit state method of confined masonry walls subjected to horizontal loads perpendicular to the plane of
the wall, in addition to the vertical forces acting on the wall.
D.10.7.5.1 — Resistance to flexo-compression — The resistance of the wall to flexion produced by horizontal forces
perpendicular to its own plane, must be evaluated based on the following requirements:
(a) The resistance to flexo-compression is contributed only by the confining columns. (b) As effective width, b in the
direction of the wall. only that of the confinement columns should be taken, measured
,
(c) The design is made entirely in accordance with the reinforced concrete requirements of Title
C.
(d) The axial load, Pu , acting on the confining element should be considered as double that obtained proportionally
to the masonry and confining column areas, unless a more detailed analysis is carried out, taking into account
account the modular relationships and the position of the charges that induce it.
D.10.7.5.2 — Shear Resistance — The resistance of the wall to shear produced by horizontal forces perpendicular to its own
plane must be evaluated based on the requirements of D.5.7.4.
D.10.7.6 — BENDING-COMPRESSION DESIGN OF THE WALL IN THE DIRECTION PARALLEL TO ITS PLANE — The requirements
of this section are used for bending-compression design, by the resistance limit state method, of confined masonry walls subjected to to
horizontal loads parallel to the plane of the wall, in addition to the vertical forces acting on it. The design can be done by one of the two
procedures given below:
D.10.7.6.1 — Resistance to flexo-compression neglecting the contribution of the masonry — In this procedure, the
contribution of the masonry to the flexo-compression resistance of the wall is neglected. The maximum requested axial,
compression Puc and tensile forces Put on each of the confinement columns must be calculated by means of equations
D.10.7-5 and D.10.7-6 respectively.
D-58
A
(D.10.7-5)
There
PP =
PP +D
uc in ui
A ct
A
(D.10.7-6)
There
P out = ÿÿ ÿ
PinP0 ui
A ct
Where Pu and ÿPui are always positive, and ÿPui is obtained by means of the following equation:
MAthere
xx i(
ÿ
)
DP=ui (D.10.7-7)
I ct
In the above equations,
A
ct A=ÿ There
(D.10.7-8)
i
ÿ Ax
those and
i
x = (D.10.7-9)
A ct
ÿÿ
I Axx = ct i There
(
)2
(D.10.7-10)
i
The following conditions must be met in each of the confinement columns of the wall:
P uc ÿ f P nc (D.10.7-11)
P ut ÿ f P nt (D.10.7-12)
When dealing with a confined wall that only has two equal confining columns at its edges, equations (D.10.7-5) to (D.10.7-7)
simplify to:
P in
P uc = +D P in (D.10.7-13)
2
P in
P0= ÿÿ ÿ 2
Pout in (D.10.7-14)
Where Pu and ÿPu are always positive, and ÿPu is obtained by means of the following equation:
M in
ÿ = inP (D.10.7-15)
In
D.10.7.6.2 – Resistance to flexo-compression taking into account the contribution of the masonry – The requested
design moment, Mu , which accompanies the axial load Pu , must meet the condition given by equation D.10.7-16, for the
charge level Pu :
MM
in ÿ f n (D.10.7-16)
Mn is obtained taking into account the interaction between moment and axial load, in accordance with the principles stated in
D.5.1.6 and D.10.7.3, which allow the calculation of an interaction diagram of the wall, using the reduction coefficient of
resistance, ÿ , appropriate from the given in D.10.7.2.
D-59
D.10.7.7 — SHEAR DESIGN OF THE WALL IN THE DIRECTION PARALLEL TO ITS PLANE — In confined wall masonry all shear
force on the wall must be resisted by the masonry, and it is assumed that there is no contribution to the resistance to cutting by the
confinement elements. The requested design resistance, Vu , must satisfy the following condition:
V Vÿ f (D.10.7-17)
in n
and the nominal diagonal tensile shear resistance is obtained from:
ÿÿ 11ÿÿ P
IN =+ ÿ ÿ 12f A fA
ÿ ÿ
in
n m mv m mv
(D.10.7-18)
3A ÿ 6
It is
where Pu , in this case, is the factored axial load acting simultaneously with the maximum requested factored shear force, Vu , for which
the design is made.
D.10.7.8 — VERIFICATION FOR CRUSHING OF THE WEB OF THE WALL — It must be verified that the wall cloth framed by the
confinement beams and columns does not fail due to crushing. For this purpose, a compression rod is considered in the diagonal of the
wall, which has an effective width equal to one fifth of the length of the diagonal. The condition must be met:
P ÿf P (D.10.7-19)
out nd
The axial force acting on the diagonal, Pud , is obtained by:
h
P Vÿ = (D.10.7-20)
out in
In
Where hÿ is the length of the diagonal of the wall panel between confining elements, it is the total length of theIn wall on which the
requested horizontal design shear Vu acts . The nominal crushing resistance is obtained by means of equation D.10.7-3. There, it is
necessary to use a length for buckling evaluation hÿ equal to the dimension of the diagonal of the wall in the panel under study, and an
effective thickness for buckling t , equal to the thickness of the wall. The area of the compression strut Amd is equal to the effective width
ÿ
of the strut, h 5 , multiplied by the effective thickness of the wall, b , for effects in the direction parallel to the plane of the wall, as defined
in D.5.4. 4.2.
D.10.7.9 — SHEAR VERIFICATION IN THE CONTAINMENT ELEMENTS OF THE WALL — The confinement elements receive the
force of the compression strut at the intersection corner between beams and confinement columns, therefore there is a need to verify that
they are capable of resisting as applied shear force, transversal to the longitudinal axis of the confinement element, at least a shear force
equal to half of the corresponding component of the compression force acting on the connecting rod.
The acting shear force, Vuc , on the confining column is:
IN = c
IN (D.10.7-21)
uc in
2
In
and the acting shear force, Vuc , on the confining beam is:
h
p
INuc = INin (D.10.7-22)
2
In
In both cases it must be fulfilled that:
V ucV ÿ f nc
(D.10.7-23)
D-60
where Vnc for the containment element must be calculated in accordance with the requirements of Title C of the Regulations,
Chapter C.11.
D.10.7.10 — DESIGN OF THE LONGITUDINAL STEEL OF THE CONTAINMENT BEAM — The horizontal component of the
compression strut that acts on the diagonal of the wall must be resisted as a tensile force in the confinement beam that
reaches the same corner of the wall. wall cloth where the compression rod acts. This tensile force is equal to the shear force
carried by the wall cloth. Therefore:
P V = ÿ utc (D.10.7-24)
in
In
The axial tensile force on the confinement beam must be totally resisted by the longitudinal reinforcing steel of the beam:
ÿ ÿ out
ÿÿ P P nt (D.10.7-25)
where Pnt , is obtained by means of equation D.10.7-2.
D.10.8.1 — GENERAL — The construction requirements given in Chapter D.4 of the Regulations must be met, except for the
following sections: D.4.2 and D.4.5.10, D.4.5.11, D.4.5.12 And D.4.6. In addition, the additional requirements given below must
be met:
D.10.8.2 — REINFORCEMENT DETAILS — All reinforcement must be placed in confinement elements. The reinforcement
must meet the requirements given in Title C.
D.10.8.3 — SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTAINMENT ELEMENTS — The specifications, requirements,

controls and tolerances of the confinement elements are the same as those established in Title C, except for the dimensions
and the minimum amounts of reinforcement established in Title C. present Chapter.
D.10.8.4 — CONSTRUCTION OF THE WALL — The construction of the wall must be done prior to emptying the columns,
leaving the space specified for them, following the procedures and controls established in Chapter D.4 of this title. The
constructive tolerances given in table D.4.2-2 must be observed. The adhesive mortar must meet the requirements of D.3.4.
D.10.8.5 — CONTROL JOINTS — Control joints are not permitted in the confined space between columns. If required, they
must be located between adjacent columns designed for that purpose.
D.10.8.6 — EMPTYING THE CONTAINMENT COLUMNS — Once the vertical reinforcement and the horizontal reinforcement
of the columns have been arranged, the lateral ends that constitute the formwork of the columns must be placed, allowing the
poured concrete to make contact with the Terminal surface of the confined wall, which must be free of burrs and materials that
restrict the bond between the concrete and the masonry. The vertical reinforcement of the column must protrude from the
leveling surface the necessary amount to make the splices by overlapping with the upper column, if any; the top of the vertical
reinforcement must be anchored on the upper face of the confinement beam, using 90° hooks.
D.10.8.7 — CONFINEMENT BEAMS — Once the confinement columns have been emptied, the slab or confinement beams
that go directly on the confined walls and in contact with them must be cast.
D-61
Grades
D-62
NSR-10 – Chapter D.11 – Diaphragm walls
CHAPTER D.11
DIAPHRAGM WALLS
D.11.1 — GENERAL
D.11.1.1 — SCOPE — Diaphragm walls are considered to be those continuous walls from the foundation to the upper
level of the building, completely surrounded by beams and columns of a reinforced concrete structure and that, being in
full contact with it, make it rigid. similar to the effect of concentric diagonals within a diagonal frame. In order for a wall to
be considered as a diaphragm, apart from the above, its name is limited to walls without openings or joints, so that the
diaphragm is a single body.
D.11.1.2 — ANALYSIS — In the structural analysis of structures that contain diaphragm walls, a mathematical model
adequately supported by previous experimental evidence must be used, which appropriately takes into account the
interaction of the diaphragm walls with the reinforced concrete frame that supports them. surrounds. In no case can the
mathematical model assume that the equivalent diagonal that simulates the effect of the diaphragm wall carries tensile
stress.
D.11.1.3 — MASONRY UNITS — In the masonry of diaphragm walls, the use of any type of masonry units that comply
with D.3.6 of this Regulation is allowed.
D.11.1.4 — MINIMUM THICKNESS, PRIMER AND MORTAR — The requirements established in Chapters D.1 to D.5
are considered mandatory in their entirety. The minimum nominal thickness of the diaphragm wall must be at least 120
mm. The primer must be locked and the mortar must meet the requirements of type M.
D.11.2 — USES OF DIAPHRAGM WALL MASONRY
D.11.2.1 — LIMITATIONS ON USE — This type of construction is not allowed for new buildings, and its use is only
allowed within the scope of chapter A.10, applicable to the addition, modification, or remodeling of the structural system
of built buildings. before the validity of this version of the Regulation, or in the evaluation of its seismic vulnerability. When
additions, modifications or remodeling of the structural system of existing buildings that contain diaphragm walls are
made, the verification and design of these elements can be carried out in accordance with the requirements of this
Chapter.
D.11.2.2 — VALUES OF R0 TO BE USED — The value of the basic coefficient of energy dissipation capacity, to be
used in the design and earthquake resistant verification of buildings that contain diaphragm walls as R0 , part of the
seismic resistance system, in no case can be greater than 2.0 (R 2.0 ÿ ) . 0
D.11.2.3 — DESIGN METHODOLOGY — Diaphragm walls shall be designed using the strength limit state method
described in B.2.4, and the load combinations given there shall be used.
D.11.3 — REINFORCEMENTS
D.11.3.1 — The minimum amount of interior reinforcement, its layout and detail must correspond to the type of masonry
used in the diaphragm wall and to the design and resistance requirements derived from its structural function.
D.11.4 — DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR MASONRY OF DIAPHRAGM WALLS

D.11.4.1 — MINIMUM CHECKS — Diaphragm walls must be designed to resist the stresses derived from their interaction
with the restraining structural frames. The failure conditions must be established in resistance values for the most
unfavorable effects on the wall among the following:
(a) Diagonal tensile shear failure, as indicated in D.11.4.2.
D-63
NSR-10 – Chapter D.11 – Diaphragm walls
(b) Diagonal crushing failure, taking for this purpose a maximum effective area of compression equal to one fifth of the
diagonal dimension of the wall multiplied by its effective thickness, for which the requirements established in Chapter D.5
must be used. . The value of the effective height for buckling effects, hÿ
must be equal to the diagonal dimension of the wall.
,
D.11.4.2 — MAXIMUM SHEAR — The diaphragm wall can take a maximum shear that must not exceed the following value:
Vuand
ÿf A
mm (D.11.4-1)
where:
See = horizontal shear applied to the diaphragm wall in N = shear
resistance of the masonry defined in table D.11.1-1, in MPa
vm Am = horizontal net area of diaphragm masonry (mm2) =
Phi
shear strength reduction coefficient (ÿ = 0.50)
In the definition of the value of vm in existing structures, values greater than those given in table D.11.1-1 cannot be used, unless
experimental tests are carried out, in a statistically representative quantity, to define an appropriate value.
Table D.11.1-1
Maximum values for vm in diaphragm walls (MPa)
masonry units vm values

• Solid concrete or clay units 0.35
• Vertical drilling units for concrete or clay • Horizontal 0.25
drilling units for clay 0.15
D.11.4.3 — COLUMNS AND BEAMS OF THE BRACED FRAME — The beams and columns of the frame braced by means of the
diaphragm walls must be capable of resisting the most unfavorable conditions established in the interaction with the diaphragm walls.
The design shear force in each member cannot be less than one quarter of the shear force established for the wall in equation D.11-1,
resisted in a zone equal to 25% of the length of the member.
D.11.4.4 — OTHER REQUIREMENTS — The structural system, in general, must meet the requirements indicated in Title A of this
Regulation. In addition, reinforced concrete frames must meet the requirements of Title C. In the absence of compliance with some Title
C requirements, the provisions of Chapter A.10 of the Regulations must be applied.
D.11.4.5 — CONSTRUCTION — Diaphragm walls can be built before, simultaneously with, or after the frames that surround them. In
the previous or simultaneous construction, it must be guaranteed that there is full contact between the wall and the elements of the
portico, without spaces that separate the environments. In subsequent construction, the edges of the wall must be filled with appropriate
mortar, so as to ensure full contact between the frame and the diaphragm wall.
D-64
NSR-10 – Chapter D.12 – Externally reinforced masonry
CHAPTER
D.12 EXTERNALLY REINFORCED MASONRY
Ecre = modulus of elasticity of the plaster or plaster mortar, MPa. cfÿ =

specified compressive strength of the concrete of the confining elements, in MPa. fÿ = specified compressive
strength
cp
of the adhesive mortar, MPa.
fÿcre= specified compressive strength of the coating mortar or plaster, MPa. = specified compressive
strength of masonry, MPa.
ÿ
fm
yf = yield strength of reinforcing steel, MPa.
D.12.1.1 — GENERAL — In addition to what is specified in this Chapter, externally reinforced masonry structures must
comply with Chapters D.1, D.2 and D.3 of this title.
D.12.1.2 — DEFINITION — Externally reinforced masonry walls are classified as those where the reinforcement consists
of electro-welded mesh that is placed inside the covering mortar or plaster (pattern) on both lateral faces of the walls,
fixing them to them by means of connectors. and/or steel nails with the specifications and procedures described in this
Chapter.
D.12.1.2.1 — Masonry Units — The masonry units used in this system may be concrete, baked clay, or
calcareous silicon, solid, vertically or horizontally drilled, and must meet the standards established for masonry
units established in D.3.6
D.12.1.2.2 — Glue mortar — Glue mortars for this masonry system must comply with the provisions of D.3.4.
D.12.1.2.3 — Rendering mortar — Covering or rendering mortars (patch) are similar to the glue mortars
described in D.3.4, but using fine sands that meet the specifications of ASTM C-926 and ASTM C-897.
D.12.1.3 — MINIMUM THICKNESS — The walls of this type of masonry must have a total real thickness of not less than
130 mm, which corresponds to a 90 mm real minimum thickness of the masonry wall and a 20 mm minimum thickness of
mortar. of plaster on each of the 2 sides of the wall.
it cannot be less than 8 MPa. The

ÿ
D.12.1.4 — MINIMUM STRENGTH — The strength of the masonry fm

Resistance of the coating mortar or rendering (paquete) fÿ mustcrebe at least 12.5 MPa.
D.12.2 — USES OF EXTERNALLY REINFORCED MASONRY
D.12.2.1 — The limitations on the use of externally reinforced masonry are based on what is established in this regard in
Chapter A.3 of these Regulations. This structural system is classified, for earthquake resistant design purposes, as one
of the seismic resistance structural systems with minimum energy dissipation capacity in the inelastic range (DMI).
D-65
D.12.3 — REINFORCEMENT REQUIREMENTS
D.12.3.1 — GENERAL — The reinforcement used in externally reinforced masonry shall comply with the specifications established in Chapter D.2.
The use, characteristics, handling and placement of the reinforcement must take into account the other provisions established in this Title.
D.12.3.2 — MINIMUM REINFORCEMENT — The amount of reinforcement provided in externally reinforced masonry walls cannot be less than
the following values:
On each side of the wall, an electro-welded mesh must be placed that meets the following amounts evaluated with respect to the total gross area
of the wall (includes the thickness of plaster mortar).
Minimum vertical reinforcement................................................... ................. 0.00035

Minimum horizontal reinforcement............................ .................................00035
D.12.3.2.1 — Reinforcement separation — Both the horizontal and vertical separation of the wires of the electro-welded mesh used as
reinforcement cannot be greater than 300 mm.
D.12.3.3 — REINFORCEMENT ANCHORING — Electro-welded wire mesh must be anchored to the
masonry in such a way that they can achieve their specified yield strength yf .
If the mesh is fixed to the masonry by means of connectors installed through a controlled power explosive charge (shot) or by means of steel nails,
the minimum number will be nine (9) per m2. The nails and shots must have a minimum diameter 3mm; the head of the nail or flue must protrude
from the wall by at least 10 mm.
The meshes can also be anchored by placing steel bar or wire connectors with a minimum diameter of 4.5 mm, in such a way that they cross the
masonry wall and embrace the 2 electro-welded meshes with a 90° hook at each end; the minimum number will be four (4) per square meter
The meshes must be tied to the connectors using number 16 galvanized wire (diameter equal to 1.3 mm).
The mesh should encircle the vertical edges of the walls and the edges of the openings and extend a minimum of 200mm beyond the end of the
wall edges.
The reinforcement must be continuous throughout the length and height of the walls (having the necessary overlaps) and must be adequately
anchored in the reinforced concrete foundation, complying with the development lengths and overlaps as specified in Title C.
D.12.4.1 — GENERAL — Externally reinforced walls must be designed following the requirements of this Regulation, taking into account the
mechanical properties of the specified materials and the dimensional characteristics of the composite section, and following the appropriate
procedures for the study of the distribution of efforts in elements composed of various materials.
Additionally, the requirements of this section must be taken into account for the design.
D.12.4.2 — ANALYSIS — Structural analysis of externally reinforced masonry walls shall be based on the elastic transformed section of the
composite net section. When the design is carried out by the allowable work stress method, the stresses evaluated in any portion of the composite
masonry must be within the limits established for the material of that portion. The allowable stresses for the covering material (render or plaster)
must be determined with the same formulas used for masonry, replacing the value of fm
by fÿ .
cre
D-66
D.12.4.3 — MODULE OF ELASTICITY — The modulus of elasticity of each component material of the externally reinforced masonry
shall be determined in accordance with D.5.2, but the modulus of elasticity of the plaster mortar may be taken as E 2000 f MPa . When
ÿ
the relationship between the modules is greater than

cre
2 or less than
=
cre
0.5, the moduli of elasticity must be determined by testing, taking the
secant value between 0.05fÿ and 0.33fÿ respectively. 0.05fm
ÿ ÿ
y 0.33fm and between cre cre
D.12.4.4 — TRANSFORMED SECTION — When transforming the section into a single material, one of them must be taken as a base.
The dimension parallel to the neutral axis of the section must be the product of the modular relationship times the original dimension,
without altering the dimensions in the direction orthogonal to the neutral axis. Neither the effective height nor the length of the elements
can be modified due to the transformation of the section. The effective thickness considered must be that of the original section.
D.12.4.5 — MONOLITHIC — Externally reinforced masonry shall be designed to have monolithic operation. Internal stresses derived
from volume changes and other rheological effects should be studied and addressed if they occur.
D.12.4.6 — SIMPLIFIED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN — The analysis and design of externally reinforced masonry walls can be done in a
simplified manner, neglecting the contribution to the resistance of the masonry portion, giving all the responsibility to the layers of mortar.
coating or plaster (paste). The analysis and design can be done meeting the requirements of Title C, as if it were concrete walls with a
thickness equal to the sum of the 2 thicknesses of the coating layers and with a specified resistance to compression ff
ÿ ÿ
=
.
c cre
All requirements of this Chapter must be met except those related to composite section.
D.12.5 — ADDITIONAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
D.12.5.1 — THICKNESS OF THE COATING MORTAR LAYER — The thickness of each of the coating mortar layers (render) may not
be less than 15 mm nor more than 45 mm. When the total thickness of the covering mortar layer is greater than 15 mm, said mortar must
be placed in successive layers with thicknesses between 10 and 15 mm until the total thickness is completed.
D.12.5.2 — MINIMUM COVERING OF THE REINFORCEMENT MESH — The electro-welded mesh placed as reinforcement in externally
reinforced masonry walls must have the following minimum coverings, which must be guaranteed during the construction process using
plastic or similar devices developed for such purpose: end:
• Minimum cover to the masonry surface = 5 mm • Minimum external cover

to the mesh = 10 mm
D.12.5.3 — CURING OF COVERING MORTAR OR RENDER — Covering mortar or render used in externally reinforced masonry walls
must be subjected to continuous moist curing for at least 7 days using the same procedures and techniques described and specified in
Title C.
D.12.5.4 — QUALITY CONTROL OF MATERIALS — The quality control of materials must be carried out in accordance with the
production standards of the different materials and with the frequencies described in D.3.8.
D-67
Grades
D-68
NSR-10 – Appendix D-1 – Design of structural masonry by the allowable work stress method
APPENDIX D-1
DESIGN OF STRUCTURAL MASONRY BY THE METHOD OF
ALLOWABLE WORK EFFORTS
D-1.0 - NOMENCLATURE
Ae = effective cross-sectional area of the element, mm².
Ast = area of longitudinal reinforcement of the element, mm².
Av = area of shear reinforcement, mm². b =

effective width of a rectangular section, mm. bw = width of the
web of the element, mm. = effective height of the
d section of the element, mm. = reduced seismic effects.
AND = allowable compressive stress
But due to axial load, MPa. = allowable compressive stress due to bending,
Fb MPa. = allowable stress in reinforcement, MPa., or seismic forces.
Fs
Ft = allowable tensile stress due to bending, MPa.

Fv = allowable shear stress, MPa.
of = stress caused by the axial force calculated with the effective area, MPa. =
bf compressive stress caused by bending calculated with the effective area, MPa. = compressive
ÿ
fm strength of the masonry, MPa. = requested shear stress, MPa.
= nominal yield stress of the reinforcement, MPa.

= effective height of the wall or column, mm. =
factor of the tension-compression lever arm, dimensionless.
vf yf hÿ j M = bending moment acting on the section due to the service load.
= allowable compressive axial force, N.
Pa R = coefficient of energy dissipation capacity. = coefficient used
to take into account the effects of slenderness in compression elements.
Re = spacing of the transverse reinforcement in a measure parallel to the axis of the element, mm. =
s
t effective thickness of the section to evaluate buckling effects, mm. See D.5.4.2.
V = shear force under service loads, N.
D-1.1 — ALCANCE
D-1.1.1 — It is allowed to design the structural masonry by the work stress method, using the load combinations described in
B.2.3, as an alternate procedure to the design procedures presented in Chapter D.5.
D-1.1.2 — Design of masonry structures by the work stress method described in B.2.3 is permitted.
D-1.2 — GENERAL PRINCIPLES
D-1.2.1 — The tensile strength in the masonry can be neglected for stresses induced by tensile axial loads and by bending
effects parallel or perpendicular to the plane of the wall.
D-1.2.2 — For purposes of applying this Appendix, a linear distribution can be considered between
D-69
stresses and deformations, with the materials working in the elastic range.
ÿ
D-1.2.3 — Allowable stresses for design shall be based on the selected value for fm according
D.3.7.
D-1.2.4 — The structural design of the masonry must comply with the principles of balance and compatibility of deformations, as
well as the mechanical characteristics of the material.
D-1.2.5 — The modulus of elasticity and shear prescribed in D.5.2 may be used for design by the methodology presented in this
Appendix.
D-1.3 — LOADS
D-1.3.1 — Masonry structures must be designed for the effects of the combined loads specified in Title B of this Regulation.
Likewise, in the evaluation of design efforts, the effects of loads on displacements must be taken into account.
D-1.3.2 — The different forces that must be taken into account are combined to obtain the internal design forces of the structure,
in accordance with the requirements of B.2.3 of the Regulation. In each of the required load combinations, the stresses are
multiplied by the load coefficient prescribed for that combination there. In the effects caused by the earthquake, the energy
dissipation capacity of the structural system is taken into account, which is achieved using reduced seismic effects, E obtained
by dividing the design seismic forces Fs , determined in accordance with the requirements of Title A of the Regulation, by the
,
coefficient of ) energy dissipation capacity RE FR

( = .
s
D-1.3.3 — In addition to the specified vertical and horizontal load combinations, the structure and its parts must be rated to
address the effects caused by shrinkage, expansion, creep, anticipated settlement, and environmental operating conditions.
D-1.3.4 — When transient lateral wind or earthquake loads have been included in the stress evaluation, the allowable stresses
can be increased following the provisions of B.2.3.4.
D-1.4 — EFFECTIVE DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
D-1.5.1 — All requirements of Section D.5.4 must be met in masonry design by the working stress method.
D-1.5 — DESIGN BY THE ALLOWABLE WORKING FORCES METHOD
D-1.5.1 — GENERAL — The maximum stresses calculated in the elements of masonry structures under service loads must not
exceed the values established in this section, using the dimensional characteristics and in the specified materials.
D-1.5.2 — ALLOWABLE FORCES FOR AXIAL COMPRESSION — The allowable axial compression forces ( ) Fa must not
exceed the following values:
masonry walls
ÿ
= fR
F 0.20
a me (D-1.5-1)
Masonry columns:
not reinforced
D-70
ÿ
= fR
F a0.20 me
(D-1.5-2)
reinforced
F yes
PA= (D-1.5-3)
where:
P 0.20
= ÿ+f A( Aÿ0.65
( A F R) ) (D-1.5-4)
a me st st s It is
2
ÿ ÿ hÿ ÿ
R1 for ht 30 ÿ
It is
= ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ 42t
(D-1.5-5)
2
ÿ ÿÿ 21t
ÿ ÿ= ÿ
R for ht 30 >
It is
ÿ h'
D-1.5.3 — ALLOWABLE FORCES FOR COMPRESSION BY FLEXURE — The value for the maximum allowable work effort for compression by
ÿ
bending (Fb ) should be taken as 0.33fm , but cannot be greater than 14

MPa.
F 0.33=f b
ÿ
ÿ 14 MPa (D-1.5-6)
m
D-1.5.4 — ALLOWABLE FORCES FOR TENSILE FLEXURE IN UNREINFORCED MASONRY — The tensile developed in mortar joints by flexion in
walls with bonded primer cannot exceed the values indicated in table D-1.5-1. When the mortar contains masonry cement, these values must be
reduced by 50%.
D-1.5.4.1 — It is not allowed to assume tensile strength in the joints, for efforts produced by tensile axial loads (not produced by bending
effects).
D-1.5.4.2 — The values prescribed in this section are not applicable to members without axial load, such as beams and lintels.
Table D-1.5-1
Allowable stresses for tensile flexion of masonry with locked primer Ft (MPa)
Mortars of Cement mortars

Direction of tensile stresses due to bending and
portland cement and for masonry
type of masonry. lime
H, M, from S N H, M, from S N
Perpendicular to horizontal joints

- Solid Units 0.28 0.21 0.17 0.10
- Vertical drilling units(1)
- Unfilled 0.17 0.13 0.10 0.06
- Filled with injection mortars 0.45 0.43 0.42 0.40
Perpendicular to the vertical joint - Solid

Units - Vertical drilling 0.55 0.41 0.33 0.21
units - Unfilled - Filled and partially filled
with injection 0.35 0.26 0.21 0.13
mortar 1. For partially injected masonry, the allowable 0.55 0.41 0.33 0.21
stresses must be determined
by linear interpolation of the values given for the drilling units vertical unfilled and those filled with mortar filler based
on the amount (percentage) filled with mortar filler.
D-71
D-1.5.5 — COMBINED STRESSES — FUNDAMENTAL EQUATION — When combining flexural and axial loading compressive stresses, an
appropriate procedure based on the principles of solid mechanics shall be used. Failing that, the efforts can be verified by means of the following
equation:
fa fb
+ ÿ 1.0 (D-1.5-7)
F aF b
D-1.5.6 — ALLOWABLE SHEER FORCES FOR BEAMS — For the allowable stress method in calculating shear in flexural elements (beams), the
following values must be used:
Requested shear force:
IN
f = (D-1.5-8)
in
bjd
Where j can be taken as 0.8 in case of not performing a deformation compatibility analysis. For members with T or I sections
,
b should be replaced by bw .
Allowable shear stress for members without shear reinforcement
f
m
F
in
= ÿ 0.35 MPa (D-1.5-9)
12
If the specified values are exceeded, the reinforcement must take the full shear and must be spaced at distances no greater than d 2 . In this case the
following limit must not be exceeded:
f
m
F = ÿ MPa 1.1 (D-1.5-10)
in
4
D-1.5.7 — ALLOWABLE FORCES FOR SHEAR IN WALLS — For the allowable stress method, in calculating the shear in masonry walls, the
following values must be used:
Requested shear force:
IN
f = (D-1.5-11)
in
bjd
Where j can be taken as 0.8 in case of not performing a deformation compatibility analysis.
For members with T or I sections ,
b should be replaced by bw .
(a) Allowable Shear Force in Unreinforced Masonry Walls:
f
m
F
in
= ÿ 0. 56 MPa (D-1.5-12)
40
The allowable stress Fv can be increased by 0.2fam , where fam is the compressive stress due to dead load only.
(b) Allowable Shear Stress in Reinforced Masonry Walls:
The masonry takes all the shear
D-72
M MM f ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ
< 1.0 F 4 ÿ ÿÿÿ
ÿ =ÿ ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ
m
0.6 0.3 MPa (D-1.5-13)
in
CEO CEO 40 CEO
M f
m
ÿ 1.0 F =ÿ MPa 0.25 (D-1.5-14)
in
Vd 12
The reinforcement takes all the shear
M MM f ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ m
< 1.0 F 4 =ÿ ÿ 0.84 0.3 MPa (D-1.5-15)
in
CEO ÿÿÿ ÿ CEO 24 CEO
M f
m
ÿ 1.0 F =ÿ MPa 0.52 (D-1.5-16)
in
Vd 8
D-1.5.8 — The amount of transverse reinforcement required must be calculated using the following expression:
fb s
= vw
A (D-1.5-17)
in
F
s
Where s is the spacing of the reinforcement at shear, which must not exceed 1.20 m nor d 2 , bw is the effective width of the web of the
section, Fs is the allowable stress in the shear reinforcement in MPa, vf is the shear stress of design in MPa and Av is the area of the
shear reinforcement in mm².
D-1.5.8.1 — The transversal shear reinforcement must be placed in special beam-type pieces, located maximum every 1.20 m.
and at distances not greater than d 2 . Within the transverse shear reinforcement area, the reinforcement placed in the mortar
joints of the masonry should not be included, which only fulfills functions of reducing cracking.
D-1.5.9 — CRITICAL SECTION FOR SHEAR — The design critical section for shear must be located taking into account the support
conditions, application of loads and the particular operating conditions of the element.
D-1.5.10 — ALLOWABLE STRESSES IN THE REINFORCEMENT — The following values will be taken for the maximum stresses in
the reinforcement ( ) Fs :
(a) Tensile, bending or shear stresses
corrugated bars
F 0.5f
= 170 ÿ MPa (D-1.5-18)
s and
smooth bars
140=y ÿ MPa F 0.4f (D-1.5-19)

s
wires
F 0.5f
= 210 ÿ y
MPa (D-1.5-20)
s
(b) Compressive stresses
in columns
D-73
= 170 ÿ MPa
F 0.4f (D-1.5-21)
s
and
In members subjected to flexure, the compressive strength of the reinforcing steel shall be neglected unless
the vertical reinforcement is provided with transverse reinforcement as indicated in Article D.4.2.
corrugated bars
170=y
s
ÿ MPa F 0.5f (D-1.5-22)
smooth bars
F 0.4f
s
= 140 ÿ Mpa (D-1.5-23)
and
D-74


NSR-10
TITLE E — HOMES OF ONE AND

TWO FLOORS

NSR-10 – Chapter E.1 – Introduction
TITLE E
ONE AND TWO-STORY HOUSES
CHAPTER E.1
INTRODUCTION
E.1.1 — GENERALITIES
E.1.1.1 — SCOPE — This title establishes the requirements for the earthquake-resistant construction of one and two-story
houses made of confined masonry and cemented bahareque. These requirements are of a general nature and are aimed
at all engineering and architecture professionals who work in housing construction, even if they are not specialists in
structural calculation. This Title establishes the structural conditions that allow proper functioning of one- and two-story
houses in the face of lateral and vertical loads in the different seismic threat zones.
E.1.1.1.1 — This title gives the minimum requirements that must be followed in the design and construction of one- and
two-story houses, built on masonry walls or cemented bahareque walls, which belong to use group I as defined in A.2.5.1.4
and within the limitations established in A.1.3.11, that is, one- and two-story buildings that are part of programs with a
maximum of 15 homes and less than 3,000 m2 of built area. However, if desired, for structured dwellings with masonry
walls, the design may be carried out following the requirements of Title A and Title D of these Regulations.
E.1.1.1.2 — One- and two-story houses that are built on structures other than masonry or cemented bahareque walls or
that belong to use groups II, III and IV as defined in A.2.5 of this regulations, warehouses and the like, must be designed
following the requirements of chapters A.1 to A.12 of these regulations.
E.1.2 — DEFINITIONS
Finish — Final state, natural or artificial, on the surface of a piece of wood or guadua. Final state of the coating or plaster.
Joint action — Participation of several structural elements with a separation of no more than 60 cm to support a load or
system of loads.
Alfarda — See “joist”.
Sawing — Process by which a log is cut to obtain pieces of wood of square or rectangular cross section.
Carrera — Upper slab that crowns a wall structure. Mooring beam.
Truss — It is a reticulated structural element designed to receive and transfer roof loads to the load-bearing walls. It has a
function equivalent to that of a leash.
Foundation — Framework (mesh or lattice) of reinforced concrete beams that transfers loads from the superstructure to
the ground.
Mooring tape — It is a complementary element to the mooring beams with a height of not less than 100 mm, and whose
width is the thickness of the element that ends.
Mooring column — It is a reinforced vertical element that is placed embedded in the wall.
Column in wood or column in guadua — Piece, generally vertical, whose main work is compression.
E-1
Cyclopean concrete — Concrete with aggregate addition of larger than current sizes (oversize).
Shrinkage — Reduction in the dimensions of a piece of wood caused by decreased moisture content.
Purlin — Horizontal component component of the roof structure.
Quadrant — Element that is placed diagonally to form a closed triangular shape in the corners of mezzanines and roofs, to limit
the deformation, in its own plane, of the diaphragms.
Butt — Part of the wall that forms the space between the roof and the lintels and that ends with the slope of the roof. Also called
a blade.
Diaphragm — Structural element that distributes the lateral inertial forces to the vertical elements of the seismic resistance
system, that is, to the walls.
Center to Center Distance — Distance from the center of a joining element to the center of the adjacent element.
Special foundation elements — These are atypical elements in this title and that solve in a particular way specific problems of
a construction in its foundation such as piles, micropiles, extensions, retaining walls and improved soil platforms.
Supplementary foundation elements — These are elements that complement the work of the foundation in its function of
transferring loads to the ground, such as closing elements of the rings in the mesh, stability elements of dividing elements, etc.
Framing — Primary, horizontal structural system of a building.
Fiber — Elongated cells with pointed ends and almost always thick-walled.
Swelling — Increase in the dimensions of a part due to an increase in its moisture content.
Slab-base — An element of concrete or mortar with sand or gravel placed on top of an affirmed material and that serves as a
support for the finished floor.
Subfloor tile — It is the element of concrete with fine aggregate less than or equal to 12.5 mm (1/2") or mortar made with
coarse sands, cast directly on compacted fill and that serves as the finished floor on the first level.
Treated wood and/ or guadua — Subjected to some type of procedure, natural or chemical, in order to extract moisture and/or
immunize it against the attack of xylophagous agents or rot.
Foundation mesh — Set of orthogonal elements in reinforced concrete or in cyclopean and reinforced concrete that form
rectangular rings in plan and transfer loads from the wall structure to the foundation soil. Framework.
Expanded Mesh — Mesh that is not based on weaving or welding wire but results from expanding a punched and perforated
sheet metal.
Mesh with structural vein — Mesh made from expanded and die-cut sheet, with continuous ridges that make it self-supporting.
Wall — Vertical laminar element that supports the horizontal diaphragms and transfers loads to the foundations.
Confined Walls — These are masonry walls framed by beams and tie columns.
Load-bearing walls — These are walls that, in addition to their own weight, carry other vertical loads from the mezzanine and
the roof. These walls must be tied to the diaphragm and must have vertical continuity.
Stiffness Walls — These are walls that serve to resist lateral forces in each principal direction of the
E-2
edification. When they are transversal to the load-bearing walls, they additionally serve to reduce their slenderness.
These walls must be tied to the diaphragm and must have vertical continuity.
Dividing walls — These are walls that do not carry more load than their own weight, do not fulfill any structural function
for vertical or horizontal loads and therefore can be removed without compromising the structural safety of the complex.
However, they must be attached to the upper part of the structural system, in order to prevent it from overturning in the
event of an earthquake.
Smear — Finishing mortar for the surface of a wall. Also called smoothing mortar, plaster, etc.
Parapet — These are the masonry walls above the roof. They must be tied as indicated in E.4.4.
Friend Foot — Oblique elements that transfer loads from horizontal elements to vertical elements.
Right-foot — Vegetal element of the structure of a cemented bahareque wall, in a vertical position.
Preservation — Treatment to prevent or counteract the action of destructive organisms.
Topdressing — Selected granular filler material, which is placed between the natural soil and the subfloor. This material
must be adequately compacted.
Setback — Mandatory space between building and lot line or between two buildings.
Overlay — Supplemental casting over a precast plate that benefits its work as a diaphragm.
Cemented bahareque wall covering — Material that makes up the faces of a wall.
Brace — Element that limits the deformability of a structure or components of a structure.
Render — (Plaster-Pañete-Enlucido) Exterior layer made up of a cement, water and sand mortar, which is applied to the
surface of a wall.
Round - Natural cylindrical state of bamboo or wood stems.
Drying — Natural or artificial process by which the moisture content of wood or guadua is reduced.
Screed — In cemented bahareque walls, it is the horizontal element that serves as the base for the structure of a wall and
integrates the loads of the footings. In masonry walls and cemented bahareque walls, it is also the finishing element of the
wall at roof level and which receives the loads transferred by the purlins.
Wall or roof finish.
Tie — Element that joins opposite faces of edge elements of mezzanines and roofs, in sections with significant lengths, to
prevent them from deforming outside the plane of the walls.
Wooden beam or guadua beam — Piece, generally horizontal, whose main work is bending.
Mooring beam — It is a reinforced concrete element of no less than 150 mm in height that is used to tie the walls of a
building at different levels. The tie beam can be embedded within the mezzanine slab when it is made of reinforced
concrete, and in this case it can have the same thickness as the mezzanine.
Crown beam — Reinforced concrete element complementary to the cyclopean concrete foundations, cast directly on top
of them and which fulfills the functions of mooring and load distribution.
Joist — Secondary structural element of the roof, which works in bending and shear.
E.1.3 — BASIC STRUCTURAL PLANNING CRITERIA

The good seismic behavior of a one and two-story building depends, to a large extent, on following some appropriate
general criteria in its structural planning, among which the most relevant are
E-3
indicate below:
E.1.3.1 — SEISMIC RESISTANCE SYSTEM — The seismic resistance system for the houses considered in this chapter
must guarantee adequate behavior, both individually and as a whole, against vertical and horizontal loads. This is achieved
through the following mechanisms:
(a) A set of structural walls arranged in such a way that they provide sufficient resistance against horizontal
seismic effects in the two main directions in plan, taking into account only the longitudinal stiffness of each
wall. The structural walls serve to resist the lateral forces parallel to their own plane, from the level where the
vertical loads due to the roof and the mezzanines, if any, and their own weight are generated up to the
foundation. Structural walls must be designed following the specifications given in chapter E.3 for confined
masonry walls, and in chapter E.7 for cemented bahareque walls.
(b) A system of diaphragms that forces the joint work of the structural walls, by means of moorings that transmit
to each wall the lateral force that it must resist. The mooring elements for the diaphragm action must be
located inside the roof and the mezzanines and designed according to the specifications given in chapter E.5.
(c) A foundation system that transmits to the ground the loads derived from the structural function of each wall.
The foundation system must have an appropriate rigidity, so that undesirable differential settlements are
prevented. The set of foundations must constitute a diaphragm and be designed in accordance with chapter
E.2.
E.1.3.2 — LAYOUT OF STRUCTURAL WALLS — Because individual walls primarily resist lateral loads parallel to their
plane, it is necessary to place walls in two orthogonal, or approximately orthogonal, directions in plan. The length of the
walls in the two directions should be approximately equal.
E.1.3.3 — SYMMETRY — In order to avoid torsion of the entire building, it must have a plan that is as symmetrical as
possible. The building as a whole and the modules that make it up must be symmetrical with respect to their axes. When
the asymmetric plan is unavoidable, the building must be divided into independent modules by means of joints, in such a
way that the individual modules are symmetrical. The symmetrical distribution of the walls should be verified using
equations E.3.6-2 and E.7.8-2, depending on whether the walls are built in confined masonry or cemented bahareque,
respectively.
E.1.3.4 — STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY
E.1.3.4.1 — General — Both the effectiveness of the diaphragm ties and the joint work of the walls depend on
the vertical continuity of the structural walls and the regularity of the structure, both in plan and in height. For this
reason it should be taken into account:
E.1.3.4.1.1 — Vertical continuity — To consider a wall as a structural wall, it must be anchored to the
foundation. Each structural wall must be continuous between the foundation and the diaphragm
immediately above it, be it the mezzanine or the roof. In two-story houses, the structural walls that
continue through the story must, in turn, be continuous up to the roof to be considered structural on the
second level, as long as their length is not reduced by more than half of the length that it has on the first
level and as long as the requirements of E.3.6 or E.7.8 are met at each level, depending on whether the
walls are built in confined masonry or cemented bahareque, respectively. Second story walls that do not
have continuity to the foundation cannot be considered as structural walls. If a wall anchored to the
foundation continues through the mezzanine and is continuous up to the roof, its length being greater on
the second story than on the first, it will be considered as a structural wall of the second story, only in the
length it has on the first. floor.
E.1.3.4.1.2 — Regularity in plan — Geometric irregularity in plan must be avoided. For this, it must be
verified that the limitations established in figure A.3-1 are met, for irregularities 2P and 3P and any other
form of irregularity in plan must be avoided. Irregular shapes may be converted, by decomposition, into
various regular shapes, complying with the specification for seismic joints given in E.1.3.4.3.
E.1.3.4.1.3 — Regularity in height — Geometric irregularities in elevation must be avoided.

For this, it must be verified that the limitations established in figure A.3-2 are met, for the
E-4
irregularities 3A and avoid any other form of irregularity in height. When the structure has an irregular shape in height, it can be
decomposed into isolated regular shapes, complying with the specification for seismic joints given in E.1.3.4.3.
E.1.3.4.2 — Additions — Exterior additions or interior reforms in materials and construction systems different from the rest of the building
must be avoided or suitably insulated. The façade of a bahareque construction should not be changed or modified by masonry. Likewise,
additions such as kitchens, bathrooms or additional rooms in masonry for buildings structured with bahareque should be avoided. All additions
and modifications to bahareque structures must be built with this same material, unless the addition or modification is adequately isolated
from the rest of the building, complying with the provisions of E.1.3.4.3, so that it works independently of the bahareque structure. bahareque,
resolving in itself its stability and resistance.
E.1.3.4.3 — Seismic joints
E.1.3.4.3.1 — Seismic joints are required in the following cases:
(a) When the ratio of length to width, in plan, exceeds 3:1. (b) When the land has slopes greater than
30%. The seismic joint must be placed in such a way that it separates each one of the houses without dividing walls
between two adjoining houses. (c) When in sets of party houses, bahareque houses coexist with others made of
different materials, such as
masonry, reinforced concrete, steel, etc.
(d) Independently built houses.
E.1.3.4.3.2 — The seismic joint must have a minimum dimension of j times the height of the building, measured up to the roof
ridge. The value of j must be established based on table E.1.3-1
Table E.1.3-1
Minimum separation space
Structure j (m/m)
Bahareque Masonry 0.015 0.020
Building with openings of more than 25% of the facades 0.010 0.015
Building with openings of less than 25% of the facades
E.1.3.4.3.3 — Buildings separated by a seismic joint may share foundations, but they must be separated from the level of the
foundation so that they act independently.
E.1.3.5 — WEIGHT OF THE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS — The forces generated by the earthquake are inertial forces and therefore, the greater
the mass, the greater the force generated. This aspect is especially important on roofs, where very heavy elements such as 1 m3 water tanks should
be avoided.
or more capacity
E-5
Grades
E-6
NSR-10 — Chapter E.2 — Foundations
CHAPTER
E.2 FOUNDATIONS
E.2.1.1 — MINIMUM INVESTIGATION — In all cases, the following minimum requirements must be met, which must be
recorded in a Responsibility Memorial signed by the professional responsible for the construction license:
(a) Verify the behavior of similar houses in the surrounding areas, verifying that there are no differential
settlements, cracks, loss of verticality, excessive compressibility, intermediate to high expandability,
collapsibility, etc., which allows us to conclude that the behavior of the houses similar has been appropriate.
(b) Verify in the vicinity of the sector to intervene the absence of mass removal processes, areas of active mining
activity, in recovery or suspended, erosion, bodies of water or others that may affect the stability and
functionality of the houses.
(c) A minimum of one pile must be made for every three units built or for every 300 m2 of construction, up to a
minimum depth of 2.0 m, in which the reasonable quality of the foundation soil is verified. (d) In the piles
indicated in (c) the
thicknesses of inconvenient materials for the direct and superficial support of the foundation must be determined,
such as: stripping material, rubble, organic matter, etc., which must be removed during construction.
construction.
In the event that the results of the minimum investigation indicate unsuitable conditions for the stability of the project, the
geotechnical studies indicated in numeral E.2.1.2 must be carried out.
E.2.1.2 — GEOTECHNICAL STUDY — A geotechnical study must be carried out that meets the requirements of Title H
of the regulation in the following cases:
(a) Soils that present lateral instability. (b) Soils

with slopes greater than 30%. (c) Soils with
excessive compressibility. (d) Soils with
intermediate to high expansibility. (e) Soils that
present collapsibility. (f) Soils in areas that
present mass removal processes, areas of active mining activity, in recovery or suspended, erosion, bodies of
water or others that may affect the stability and functionality of the houses.
E.2.1.3 — CLEANING OF THE GROUND — The ground must be cleaned of all organic material and the necessary
drainage must be carried out to ensure a minimum incidence of humidity.
E.2.1.4 — FOUNDATION SYSTEM — The foundation will be made up of a lattice system of beams that make up roughly
rectangular rings in plan, as illustrated in figure E.2.1-1, and that ensure the transmission of loads from the foundation.
superstructure to the ground in an integral and balanced manner. There must be a foundation beam for each structural
wall. No foundation element can be discontinuous.
E-7
Figure E.2.1-1 — Lattice system of beams configuring closed and continuous rings
E.2.1.5 — PLAN CONFIGURATION — If one of the rings of the foundation system has a length to width ratio greater than two, or if its
interior dimensions are greater than 4.0 m, an intermediate foundation beam must be built, so it does not serve as a support for any
wall, in which case its minimum dimensions can be reduced to 200 mm by 200 mm. The intersection of the foundation elements must
be monolithic and the reinforcements must be anchored with standard 90° hooks on the outer face of the Terminal cross element, as
shown in figure E.2.1-2.
Figure E.2.1-2 — Anchor hooks in transverse foundation beams
E.2.2 — STRUCTURING OF THE FOUNDATIONS
E.2.2.1 — GENERAL — The foundation beams must have upper and lower longitudinal reinforcement and confinement stirrups along
their entire length. The dimensions and reinforcement of the foundations are presented in table E.2.2-1:
Table E.2.2-1
Minimum values for dimensions, resistance of materials and reinforcement of foundations
System Endurance
A floor Two floors
Structural Minimum, MPa
Masonry 250 mm 300 mm cf
Width
bahareque 200 mm 250 mm yf
Masonry 200 mm 300 mm
Height
bahareque 150 mm 200 mm
longitudinal steel 4 No. 3 (or 10M) 4 No. 4 (ó 12M) 420 No. 2 17
stirrups No. 2 a 200 mm a 200 mm 240
Steel for anchoring Masonry walls No. 3 No. 3
412
bahareque No. 3 No. 4
E-8
E.2.2.2 — ECCENTRIC FOUNDATIONS — The foundations can be placed eccentric in cases where there is a party wall
or seismic joint. Its geometry and reinforcement must be equal to the minimums specified in E.2.2.2.
E.2.2.3 — FOUNDATIONS ON INCLINED GROUND — When the inclination of the land requires the execution of cuts
for the construction of the project and/or containment systems, these must be designed according to the provisions of
Title H and providing the additional elements required for resist the lateral loads specified therein.
E.2.2.3.1 — For slopes greater than 20%, the stability of the foundation must be guaranteed, using procedures
such as concrete pillars of circular section, arranged in the corners of the lower edge of the slope, at distances
no greater than 5 m between centers. and anchored not less than 1 m in the natural soil. The corner of the
foundation mesh corresponding to each pillar must be anchored by 4 No. 4 (1/2”) or 12M (12 mm) bars, forming
a 150 mm x 150 mm basket that must penetrate the pillar at least 500 mm and anchored in the elements of the
foundation mesh. The configuration of the columns and their reinforcement is illustrated in Figure E.2.2-1.
Figure E.2.2-1 — Piers to stabilize slopes greater than 20%
E.2.2.4 — OVERHEADS — The bottom level of the foundation joists shall be a minimum depth of 500 mm below the first
floor finish level. A footing shall be built on them, which may be made with confined masonry or reinforced masonry,
following the requirements of Title D or Chapters E.3 and E.4 of Title E, or with concrete, in accordance with the
requirements of Title C. , that protrudes, minimum 80 mm. The foundation must be properly anchored to the foundation
by means of reinforcing bars. The masonry foundations must be finished off with tie beams that guarantee the formation
of a diaphragm at the subfloor level, structured in accordance with the provisions of numeral E.4.4. From then on, the
mezzanine of the first useful floor is built.
E.2.2.4.1 — When the terrain is sloping, with a slope greater than 5%, the foundation must be built with a
constant height on the walls parallel to the contour lines and a variable or staggered height on the walls
perpendicular to the curves of level. Foundation beams should not be constructed that have inclined surfaces in
contact with the ground.
E.2.2.4.2 — When the depth of the competent soil layer is greater than 700 mm, the height of the foundation can
be reduced, placing the foundation beam on a cyclopean concrete fill. This padding must have a minimum width
of 300 mm and a minimum height of 200 mm. For the preparation of cyclopean concrete, stone material must be
used with a maximum size equal to half the width of the fill but not exceeding 250 mm. The volume occupied by
this aggregate must not exceed 40% of the total volume of the cyclopean fill. The remainder of the volume must
be filled with concrete of the same or better quality than the concrete of the foundation beams.
E-9
E.2.2.5 — The subfloor slab must be laterally insulated from the foundation on which the walls rest, must not be
structurally connected to the foundation structure and in no case must it be considered as an integral part of the foundation.
E.2.3 — HYDROSANITARY INSTALLATIONS
E.2.3.1 — Plumbing installations must be placed above the structural foundation mesh, through the overhang or below
the foundation mesh, in which case the vertical distance between the bottom of the mesh and the upper edge of the pipe
must be greater than 100 mm. The intersection between the elements of the foundation mesh and the installation trench
must be filled with a lean concrete. In no case can plumbing installations be embedded in the foundation beams.
E.2.4 — SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS
E.2.4.1 — JOINTS — The foundation must contain joints at distances not greater than 30 m, unless a complete
geotechnical study carried out in accordance with Title H specifications results in different distances.
E.2.4.2 — NONSTRUCTURAL PARTITION WALLS —Nonstructural partition walls shall be supported on foundations
similar to those for structural walls, except that they may have the dimensions specified for one-story buildings, regardless
of the number of stories in the building.
E-10
NSR-10 – Chapter E.3 – Confined Masonry
CHAPTER
E.3 CONFINED MASONRY
E.3.1.1 — ACCORDING TO ITS FUNCTION — The walls of one and two-story houses, in confined masonry, contemplated
within the scope of this Title of the Regulation, are classified into two large groups:
E.3.1.1.1 — Structural confined walls — Structural walls are considered those that resist the horizontal forces
caused by the earthquake, or the wind, in addition to supporting the vertical, dead and live loads, in the event that
they constitute support for the mezzanine and /or cover
E.3.1.1.2 — Non-structural walls — Are those walls that fulfill the function of separating spaces inside the house
and that do not support any additional load to their own weight.
E.3.1.2 — CONFINED STRUCTURAL WALLS — Only those walls that present vertical continuity from the foundation to the
upper diaphragm of the level considered, that do not have any type of openings, and that are confined are considered as
structural walls at a given level. .
E.3.1.3 — FIXING OF NON-STRUCTURAL WALLS — Non-structural walls, interior or façade, must be tied or locked with
the walls perpendicular to their plane and the diaphragms.
E.3.1.4 — LOSS OF SECTION — When a structural wall loses at any point more than 50 percent of its section due to a
downspout or some other element belonging to the interior installations, it must be considered that the wall has been divided
into two walls, which must be analyzed and designed as independent elements, confining each of them independently.
E.3.2 — MASONRY UNITS
E.3.2.1 — The masonry units used in one- and two-story houses can be made of concrete, fired clay, or silica. The masonry
units can be vertically perforated, horizontally perforated or solid and must meet the specifications established in the NTC
standards issued by the Colombian Institute of Technical Standards and Certification, ICONTEC, which are listed below:
E.3.2.1.1 — Concrete units
(a) Units (block) of load-bearing concrete vertical drilling must comply with the standard
NTC 4026 (ASTM C90)
(b) The solid bearing units of concrete (wedge) must comply with the NTC 4026 standard.
(ASTM C55)
(c) Low class resistance concrete units must comply with the NTC 4076 standard.
(ASTM C129)
E.3.2.1.2 — Clay units
(a) Units (block) of vertical clay drilling must comply with NTC 4205
(ASTM C34)
(b) Solid clay units (whet) shall comply with NTC 4205 (ASTM C62,
C652)
(c) Low class strength clay units must comply with NTC 4205 (ASTM
C56, C212, C216).
E.3.2.1.3 — Silico-calcareous units — Silico-calcareous units must comply with NTC 922 (ASTM C73).
E-11
E.3.3 — HANDLE DEATH
E.3.3.1 — The adhesive mortars used in one and two-story constructions must have good plasticity and consistency and must
guarantee minimum water retention for cement hydration. Its main function is to adhere the masonry units and for this purpose
appropriate dosages must be established to guarantee their quality. Its minimum compressive strength after 28 days must be 7.5
MPa (75 kgf/cm2 ), measured in cylinders 75 mm in diameter by 150 mm in height. Its dosage between cementing material
(cement and lime) with respect to the sand sieved by mesh No. 8, cannot be less than 1:4 in volume.
E.3.4 — OPENINGS IN WALLS
E.3.4.1 — Openings in walls must be small, well spaced, and cannot be located in the corners. The area of the openings of a wall
must not be greater than 35% of the total area of the wall.
E.3.4.2 — MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN OPENINGS — There must be a sufficient distance between the openings of the
same wall. The minimum distance between openings must be greater than 500mm. And in no case should it be less than half the
minimum dimension of the opening.
E.3.4.3 — REINFORCEMENT OF OPENINGS — Openings shall be reinforced with reinforced concrete beams and columns
around the openings and the total plan length of the openings shall be less than half the total plan length of the wall
E.3.4.3.1 — Continuous openings should not be left in the upper part of the wall, near the confinement columns, because
the short column effect may occur.
E.3.5 — THICKNESS OF WALLS
E.3.5.1 — DUE TO CLEAR HEIGHT — For structural walls the vertical free distance between diaphragms cannot exceed 25
times the effective thickness of the wall. In the case of roofs that constitute inclined diaphragms, the vertical measurement can be
taken as the free distance between the lower mezzanine or foundation diaphragm and the average height of the diaphragm; and
when there are tie beams at the height of the lintel, the vertical distance can be taken up to this level, verifying both the distance
below the lintel and the distance to the highest point of the finishing butt, which must have a tape of moor at its auction.
E.3.5.2 — DUE TO HORIZONTAL FREE LENGTH — For structural walls the horizontal free distance cannot exceed 35 times
the effective wall thickness. The horizontal free distance between the mooring columns or between transversal walls locked with
the wall under consideration must be taken as the free horizontal distance.
E.3.5.3 — MINIMUM THICKNESS OF CONFINED STRUCTURAL WALLS — In no case may the nominal thickness of load-
bearing structural walls be less than that established in table E.3.5-1. These nominal minimum thicknesses can be decreased only
when the complete design of the building is carried out in accordance with the requirements of Title A and Title D of this Regulation.
Table E.3.5-1
Nominal minimum thicknesses for structural
walls in one- and two-story houses (mm)
Area of Number of building levels

Threat And Two floors
seismic Floor 1st Level 2nd Level
high 110 110 100
Intermedia 100 110 95
Low 95 110 95
Note: For these minimum nominal thicknesses, the panels and finishes must
not be taken into account.
E-12
E.3.6 — LENGTH OF CONFINED WALLS

E.3.6.1 — GENERAL — In order to guarantee that the building has the capacity to dissipate energy in the inelastic range, a minimum length
of confined walls must be provided in each of the main plan directions. Confined walls can be load-bearing walls or rigidity transverse walls.
E.3.6.2 — LOCATION — In order to guarantee that the individual and group behavior is adequate, the confined walls must be located
looking for the best symmetry and the greatest torsional rigidity of the building. This is achieved by arranging symmetrical confined walls as
close as possible to the periphery.
E.3.6.3 — NUMBER OF WALLS IN EACH DIRECTION — To provide an even distribution of responsibility for resisting seismic forces in the
inelastic range, confined walls in each of the principal directions should be of similar lengths. The lengths of those confined walls that are in
the same vertical plane must not add up to more than half of the total length of walls confined in that direction.
E.3.6.4 — MINIMUM LENGTH OF CONFINED WALLS — The length of confined walls required in each of the main directions of the building,
in meters, cannot be less than that obtained by means of equation E.3.6- 1
= M Cloud p (E.3.6-1)
Lmin
t
where:
Lmin = minimum length of structural walls in each direction (m)

Mo = coefficient that is read in table E.3.6-1 = effective
t thickness of structural walls at the level considered (mm)
Ap = is considered in m2 as follows:
(a) Equal to the area of the roof in one-story buildings with a concrete slab roof. (b) Equal to the deck area for
second level walls in two-story buildings, when the deck is a concrete slab.
(c) Equal to the roof area plus the mezzanine area for first-level walls in two-story buildings.
covered floors consisting of a concrete slab.
(d) When a lightweight deck is used, the area values determined for slab decks
concrete according to (a), (b), or (c), can be multiplied by 2/3.
Table E.3.6-1
Coefficient Mo for minimum length of confined structural walls *
Threat Zone Aa values Mo values

seismic
0.40 33.0
0.35 30.0
high
0.30 25.0
0.25 21.0
0.20 17.0
Intermedia
0.15 13.0
0.10 8.0
Low
0.05 4.0
(*) The values of Aa depend on the seismic zone where the project is
built. To do this, consult the map in figure A.2.3.2 and table A.2.3-2.
E.3.6.5 — WALLS TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT TO COMPLY WITH THE MINIMUM LENGTH — For purposes of counting the length of walls
confined in each main direction, only those walls that are confined, which are continuous from the foundation to the deck, and that do not
have any opening between confinement columns.
E-13
E.3.6.6 — SYMMETRICAL LAYOUT OF WALLS — Walls should be roughly symmetrical in layout. Therefore, Equation
E.3.6-2, taken in its absolute value, must hold:
ÿ ÿ ÿ (L b) mi B
ÿÿÿ
L 2 mi ÿ
ÿÿ
ÿ 0.15 (E.3.6-2)
B
Where:
Lmi = length of each wall (in m) in the i direction . b

= the perpendicular distance (in m) from each wall in the i direction, to one end of the smaller rectangle
that contains the area of the roof or mezzanine (see figure E.3.6-1).
B = length of the side (in m), perpendicular to the i direction , of the smaller rectangle that contains the area of the
deck or mezzanine.
AP
Smaller rectangle that

Ap = Plant of contains the roof or
the building
mezzanine area
Figure E.3.6-1 — Description of the smaller rectangle that contains the area of the roof or mezzanine
E.3.6.7 — VERIFICATION OF THE STRENGTH OF WALLS — In cases in which the requirements expressed in E.3.6.4 are
not met, the total length of walls must be increased in each direction, at each level, unless it is demonstrated, by means of a
structural analysis procedure, based on Titles A and D of this Regulation, that a length of walls less than that specified by
equation E.3.6-1, is sufficient to resist the calculated horizontal loads.
E.3.6.8 — VERIFICATION OF THE ASYMMETRY OF THE WALLS IN PLAN — In the cases in which the requirements
expressed in E.3.6.6 are not met, the distribution of the walls in plan must be redone until achieving compliance with the
equation E.3.6-2. If in this process the total length of walls is reduced in any direction and any of the levels, compliance with
equation E.3.6-1 must be verified again, in accordance with the provisions of E.3.6.5.
E-14
NSR-10 – Chapter E.4 – Confinement elements in confined masonry
CHAPTER
E.4 CONTAINMENT ELEMENTS IN CONFINED MASONRY
E.4.1.1 — In one and two-story buildings that are built following the requirements of this Title of the Regulation, the structural walls are
confined masonry walls. The provisions established in this chapter must be followed for the confinement elements (columns, beams
and tapes), which correspond to an empirical design procedure. In the event that variations are desired with respect to what is required
here, the entire design must be carried out in accordance with Title D of the Regulations.
E.4.2 — MATERIALS
E.4.2.1 — MINIMUM SPECIFICATIONS — The following are the minimum specifications established for the
Materials that can be used in the construction of confinement elements:
(a) Concrete —Concrete shall have a 28-day compressive strength,fc , equal to or greater than
17.5 MPa.
(b) Reinforcing Steel —Longitudinal reinforcing steel may be smooth or corrugated. In no case, the
Reinforcing steel may have a yield point, fy less than 240 MPa.
E.4.3 — CONTAINMENT COLUMNS

E.4.3.1 — GENERAL — In general, confinement columns are constructed of reinforced concrete. The confinement columns must be
anchored to the foundation, being able to use lap splices at the base of the column, and they must be finished off by anchoring the
reinforcement in the upper tie beam. When a column has two levels, a lap splice may be made at each level. The confinement columns
must be emptied after the elevation of the structural walls and directly against them.
E.4.3.2 — DIMENSIONS — The cross section of the mooring columns must have an area of not less than 20
000 mm² (200 cm2 ), with a thickness equal to that of the confining wall.
E.4.3.3 — LOCATION — Tie columns shall be placed at the ends of selected structural walls, at intersections with other structural
walls, and at intermediate locations at distances no greater than 35 times the effective thickness of the wall, 1.5 times the distance
vertical between horizontal confinement elements or 4 m.
E.4.3.4 - MINIMUM REINFORCEMENT - The minimum reinforcement of the confinement column must be the following:
(a) Longitudinal reinforcement — It must not be less than 4 bars No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm) or 3 bars No. 4 (1/2”) or 12M
(12 mm). (b) Transversal
reinforcement — Transversal reinforcement consisting of closed stirrups of minimum diameter No. 2 (1/4”) or 6M (6 mm)
must be used, spaced at 200 mm. The first six stirrups must be spaced at 100mm in the areas adjacent to the horizontal
lashing elements.
E.4.4 — CONTAINMENT BEAMS

E.4.4.1 — In general, the confinement beams are made of reinforced concrete. The reinforcement of the confinement beams must be
anchored at the terminal ends with 90° hooks. The tie beams are emptied directly onto the adjoining structural walls.
E.4.4.2 — DIMENSIONS — The minimum width of the tie beams shall be equal to the thickness of the wall, with a minimum cross-
sectional area of 20,000 mm2 (200 cm2 ). In beams that require plating, the specified width can be reduced by up to 75 mm, as long as
its height is increased, in such a way that the cross-sectional area is not
E-15
NSR-10 – Chapter E.4 – Confinement elements in confined masonry
inferior a 20 000 mm² (200 cm2 ).
E.4.4.3 — LOCATION — Tie beams must be arranged forming closed rings in a horizontal plane, interlocking the structural
walls in the two main directions to form diaphragms with the help of the mezzanine or roof. Moorings should be located in the
following places:
(a) At foundation level — The foundation system constitutes the first level of horizontal mooring. (b) At the level
of the mezzanine system in two-story houses — The tie beams can be embedded in the mezzanine slab. If a solid
slab with a thickness greater than or equal to 75 mm is used, the tie beams can be dispensed with in the area
occupied by this type of slab, placing the reinforcement required for the beam inside the slab. (c) At deck trim
level — Two options are presented for the location of
the tie beams
and the configuration of the
diaphragm. • Horizontal beams at the level of the lintels plus lashing straps as the end of the butts.
• Horizontal tie beams on the walls without butts combined with inclined tie beams, configuring the ends of the
butts. In this case, it must be verified, in accordance with E.3.5.1, the need or not of lashing at the lintel level.
E.4.4.4 — MINIMUM REINFORCEMENT — The minimum reinforcement of the mooring beams must be the following:
(a) Longitudinal reinforcement — The longitudinal reinforcement of the tie beams must be arranged symmetrically
with respect to the axes of the section, in at least two rows. The longitudinal reinforcement must not be less
than 4 bars No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm), arranged in a rectangle for beam widths greater than or equal to 110
mm. For widths less than 110 mm, and in cases where the mezzanine is a solid slab, the minimum reinforcement
must be two No. 4 (1/2”) or 12M (12 mm) bars with yield limit, f and no
inferior a 420 MPa.
(b) Transversal reinforcement — Considering as span the space between tie columns located in the axis of the
beam, or between structural walls transversal to the axis of the beam, No. 2 (1/4”) bar stirrups must be used.
or 6M (6mm), spaced 100mm apart on the first 500mm from each end of the span and spaced 200mm on the
remainder of the span.
E.4.4.4.1 — When a tie beam fulfills additional functions to those indicated here, as a lintel or support service for the
slab, it must be designed in accordance with the requirements of Title C of this Regulation, adding to the reinforcement
required by the loads required here for the mooring function.
E.4.5 — MOORING STRAPS

E.4.5.1 — The lashing straps are considered as supplementary elements to the lashing beams, usable in window sills, in butt
finishes, in parapet finishes, etc. Interchangeably, any of the following elements can be used as a lashing tape:
(a) A reinforced concrete element with a height greater than or equal to 100 mm, with a width equal to the thickness
of the element that ends and reinforced with at least two longitudinal bars No. 3 (3/8”) or 10M (10 mm). The
transversal reinforcement must be the one necessary to keep the longitudinal bars in the desired position.
(b) An element built with U-type masonry pieces, longitudinally reinforced with a minimum of two bars No. 3 (3/8”) or
10M (10 mm) or one bar No. 4 (1/2”) or 12M (12 mm), and injected with injection mortar with a compressive
strength of not less than 7.5 MPa.
E.4.5.2 — The lashing straps must be built in such a way that the monolithic work with the element that ends is guaranteed.
The longitudinal reinforcement of the lashing straps must be anchored at the terminal ends.
E-16
NSR-10 – Chapter E.5 – Floor slabs, roofs, dividing walls and parapets
CHAPTER E.5
INTERFACE SLABS, ROOFS,
DIVIDING WALLS AND BARAPETS
E.5.1 — MEzzanine SLABS
E.5.1.1 — GENERAL — The mezzanine must be designed for the vertical loads established in Title B of this Regulation. It must
have enough rigidity in its own plane to guarantee its work as a diaphragm.
When the mezzanine system used does not guarantee the diaphragm work, this Title cannot be used for the design of the building.
E.5.1.2 — REQUIREMENTS — The subfloor systems that work as a diaphragm must be built monolithically. The following
requirements must be met:
(a) The reinforced concrete mezzanine slabs must comply with the provisions of Title C of this
Regulation.
(b) Contact stresses from concentrated loads of lintels, beams, or plate members may not exceed 40% of the gross strength
specified for masonry units. (c) When precast plates are used, the actual minimum thickness of the wall
must be 120 mm and the support of the plate cannot be less than 20 mm. To consider it as a diaphragm, a coating with a
minimum thickness of 25 mm must be used with a compressive strength of at least 7.5 MPa at 28 days and reinforced
at least in the direction transverse to the load direction. The elements of the slab must be provisionally propped up until
the joint work of the slab and wall is guaranteed.
E.5.1.3 — MINIMUM THICKNESS OF SLABS — The minimum thickness of a slab depends on the subfloor system used and the
type of support or support elements according to table E.5.1-1
Table E.5.1-1
Minimum thickness of slabs
SUPPORT CONDITION
SLAB TYPE
Simply supported Single continuous support Continuous with cantilever
solid L/20 L/24 L/10
Lightened (joists in one L/16 L/18.5 L/8
direction)
E.5.1.3.1 — If the slab is built with precast elements, these must be joined together and must be connected to the beams
that surround the house
E.5.1.4 — SOLID SLABS — Solid slabs are made up of a single section of concrete, which is reinforced in both directions. The slab
must have at least two supporting walls and these must always be opposite. For slabs supported on all four sides, the main direction
will be the shortest direction.
E.5.1.4.1 — Minimum reinforcement — The minimum steel reinforcement to be placed in the solid slab shall be that
stipulated in Table E.5.1-2. The indicated reinforcement can only be used for load conditions of use group I structures.
E-17
Table E.5.1-2
Minimum reinforcement in solid slabs
Design span (m) Minimum thickness Minimum reinforcement

1.0 (mm) Principal Secondary
– 2.0 2.1 80 1 N° 4 cada 300 mm 1 N° 2 cada 200 mm
– 2.5 2.6 100 1 N° 4 cada 300 mm 1 N° 2 cada 150 mm
– 3.0 3.1 120 1 N° 4 cada 250 mm 1 N° 3 cada 250 mm
– 3.5 150 1 N° 4 cada 250 mm 1 N° 3 cada 200 mm
1 No. 2 every 150 mm,
3.6 – 4.0 180 1 N° 4 cada 200 mm
top and bottom
E.5.1.4.2 — Lights greater than those indicated in table E.5.1-2 are not recommended for solid slabs and their design must be carried
out with the procedures established in Title C of this Regulation.
E.5.1.5 — LIGHTENED SLABS — Lightened slabs are used to span larger spans than solid slabs. This system replaces part of the concrete
section with lightening material, which could be wooden boxes, guadua mat caissons, bricks or blocks.
E.5.1.5.1 — Components of a lightweight slab — Generally, a lightweight slab is made up of four main components. A lower concrete
cake, the lightening elements, the upper plate and the joists in reinforced concrete.
E.5.1.5.1.1 — The lower cake — The lower cake is built with a sand-cement mortar with a minimum dosage of one part of
cement to three parts of sand. It must have a minimum thickness of 20 mm and a maximum of 30 mm. It must be reinforced
with wire rod every 300 mm in both directions or with chicken wire with a 25 mm eye
E.5.1.5.1.2 — Lightening elements — These elements are placed in such a way that they form the cavities of the joists.
E.5.1.5.1.3 — Top Plate — Is a cast concrete monolithic with the floor system.
The thickness of the plate should be 50 mm. The plate must be reinforced with rod No. 2 every 300 mm in both directions or
with electro-welded mesh equivalent to the previous amount.
E.5.1.5.1.4 — The joists — These are the elements that contain the main reinforcement of the slab. The width of the joists
must be a minimum of 80 mm and their maximum spacing between axes will be 600 mm.
E.5.1.5.2 — Minimum reinforcement — The minimum steel reinforcement that must be placed in the lightened slab will be that
stipulated in Table E.5.1-3. The indicated reinforcement can only be used for load conditions for structures of use group I.
Table E.5.1-3
Minimum reinforcement for lightened slab joists
Total plate Complementary Complementary upper

Continuous Continuous
lower lower reinforcement reinforcement for multi-span stirrups
Light (m) in the center of the upper beams at internal supports
reinforcement reinforcement
thickness (mm) span
N° 2 cada
1.0– 2.5 150 1 N° 4 1 N° 4
80 mm
N° 2 cada
2.6 – 3.5 200 1 N° 4 1 N° 4
80 mm
N° 2 cada
3.6 – 4.5 280 1 N° 4 1 N° 3 1 N° 4 1 N° 3
120 mm
N° 2 cada
4.6 – 5.5 350 1 N° 4 1 N° 3 1 N° 4 1 N° 3
150 mm
E-18
E.5.1.5.2.1 — The reinforcements specified in table E.5.1-3 are only applicable for a dead load of walls
and finishes of maximum 1 kN/m2 , and a live load of 1.8 kN/m2 . For load conditions
other than those expressed in this numeral, the design of the plate must be made as stipulated in Title C
of this Regulation.
E.5.2 — ROOFS
E.5.2.1 — GENERAL — Roof-bearing elements, of any material, must form a stable assembly for lateral loads. Therefore,
anchoring systems must be provided at the supports and sufficient bracing elements such as braces, wind braces, braces,
etc. that guarantee the stability of the whole.
E.5.2.2 — FLOORS — The purlins or elements that transmit roof loads to load-bearing structural walls must be designed
so that they can transfer both vertical and horizontal loads and must be anchored in the floor that serves as anchor to the
wall. confined (beam or lashing tape).
E.5.2.3 — CONCRETE ROOFS — When the roof is built in reinforced concrete, it must meet the requirements of E.5.1.
Precautions must be taken to prevent direct exposure to solar radiation from causing expansions and contractions that
damage the integrity of the structural walls.
E.5.2.4 — SECTIONS AND SPACING OF ROOF-BEARING ELEMENTS — The values given in tables E.9.2-1 and
E.9.2-2 can be used for the construction of roofs with guadua belts and wooden belts, respectively.
E.5.3 — DIVIDING WALLS

E.5.3.1 — GENERAL — Dividing walls only fulfill the function of separating spaces within the building and therefore are
not considered structural. They must be able to withstand the forces that the earthquake imposes on them under their own
weight. The masonry dividing walls must be adhered to the general structure of the building by means of glue mortar at
the contact edges with the upper and lower diaphragms and with the adjacent structural walls. All precautions must be
taken to prevent these dividing walls from overturning in the event of an earthquake, especially when they are not full
height and do not reach the structural diaphragm at the top. When the dividing wall consists of a single insulated panel, it
must be anchored to the upper diaphragm by means of tensile-resistant reinforcements that prevent it from overturning.
Dividing elements in more flexible materials (wood, gates, cardboard and plaster, plastic, etc.) must be anchored to the
main structure.
E.5.4 — BARAPETS AND BASELINES

E.5.4.1 — GENERAL — Parapets act as cantilever elements subjected to a horizontal force perpendicular to their own
plane.
E.5.4.1.1 — Parapets — All types of parapets with a height equal to or less than 1.5 m must be anchored to the
immediately lower diaphragm by means of a finishing tape and mooring columns located at distances of no more
than 3 m, always having a column of tie at each end. Parapets higher than the indicated heights must be designed
following the prescriptions of Title D.
E.5.4.1.2 — Sills — Masonry balcony sills must be anchored to the lower diaphragm by finishing tape and columns
located at the corners, at the ends, and at intermediate distances no greater than 1.5 m.
E-19
Grades
E-20
NSR-10 – Chapter E.6 – Additional recommendations for confined masonry construction
CHAPTER
E.6 ADDITIONAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR CONFINED
MASONRY CONSTRUCTION
E.6.1.1 — Because the provisions established in the previous chapters are of a very general nature and because they do
not require special technical supervision for the constructions established herein, construction activities must be especially
careful in order to ensure that the planned operation of the work in seismic events is appropriate. The degree of
generalization involved does not exempt from quality checks on the materials used, from compliance with the tolerances
established throughout this regulation, nor from the work procedures carried out at the best possible level. Below are
established, in a simplified and also general way, the construction execution procedures.
E.6.2 — FOUNDATIONS
E.6.2.1 — SUITABILITY OF THE LAND — In this phase, materials that are not suitable for supporting the building must
be removed, such as rubble, plant material, loose soil, etc. Likewise, the necessary internal and lateral drainage must be
carried out and the necessary levels of pipes and the foundation mesh must be determined. If necessary, the improved
soil platforms must be executed, compacted in layers of no more than 150 mm and no less than 100 mm.
E.6.2.2 — TRENCHES — The trenches required for the installations and for the foundation mesh must be made
simultaneously. From the bottom of the trenches for the structural elements, the loose material must be removed and a
poor cleaning mortar about 40 mm thick must be placed.
E.6.2.3 — PLACEMENT OF THE REINFORCEMENTS — Both the longitudinal reinforcements and the transversal
reinforcements must be separated from the natural soil by not less than 50 mm in dry soil, nor less than 75 mm in wet
soil. The tolerances in coatings and placement of the reinforcements with respect to what is indicated in the plans must
be 10 mm. Once the foundation reinforcements have been placed, the starting reinforcements of the columns must be
fixed and anchored in the places indicated on the plans.
E.6.2.4 — CONCRETE PLACEMENT — The concrete of the foundation mesh must be placed beginning with the axes of
the load-bearing walls and continuing with the transversal axes in a continuous sweep. The provisional suspension of the
pouring of the concrete must be done by means of vertical joints in the axes of the rigidity walls (transversal to those of
load). During the compaction of the placed concrete, any modification in the position of the starting reinforcements of the
columns must be avoided.
E.6.3 — STRUCTURAL WALLS AND CONTAINMENT COLUMNS

E.6.3.1 — In the execution of the walls, the following procedure must be used.
(a) Overlay courses — The top of the cyclopean concrete where the first course mortar is placed must be
chipped, cleaned and moistened. This mortar must contain an integral waterproofing. The first course of
overlay, or godmother course, must be finished off with mortar that also contains integral waterproofing.
(b) Execution of the wall — The construction of the wall must be executed following the placement pattern of
the units, taking care to leave the spaces required for the confinement columns. At the time of the execution
of the wall, the flexible connectors established for the intersections with non-structural walls must be placed.
E.6.3.2 — EXECUTION OF THE CONTAINMENT COLUMNS — Once the vertical reinforcement and the horizontal
reinforcement of the columns have been arranged, the lateral ends that constitute the formwork of the columns must be
placed, allowing the cast concrete to make contact with the terminal surface of the confined wall, which must be free of
burrs and materials that restrict the bond between the concrete and the masonry. He
E-21
NSR-10 – Chapter E.6 – Additional recommendations for confined masonry construction
vertical reinforcement of the column must protrude from the leveling surface the necessary amount to make the splices
by overlapping with the upper column if any; the top of the vertical reinforcement must be anchored, bringing it up to the
top of the confinement beam, using 90° hooks. The upper part of the hook must be at a distance of no more than 50 mm
from the upper face of the beam or finishing strip.
E.6.3.3 — EXECUTION OF THE SUB-FLOOR — Once the confinement columns of the first floor have been emptied, the
complementary topdressing fills must be executed between the natural soil and the sub-floor tile. On the leveled surface
of the dressing, the reinforcement of the tile must be placed, to proceed to empty the material from it, (concrete with fine
aggregate or mortar with coarse sand), always taking it up to the face of the structural walls and the columns.
E.6.3.4 — EXECUTION OF NON-STRUCTURAL WALLS — In the places indicated on the plans, the first course must
be built, with mortar placed directly on the subfloor. The connections required for intersections must be anchored in the
corresponding glue joints.
E.6.4 — MEASUREMENT SLAB
E.6.4.1 — The placement of the prefabricated elements of the mezzanine, if any, and of the forms, falsework, end walls,
etc. It must be done according to the plans.
E.6.4.2 — Once the beam reinforcements, special mechanical connections, slab reinforcements, etc. have been placed,
the mezzanine concrete can be poured and compacted, subjecting it to an adequate curing process. At least 24 hours
must have elapsed between the emptying of the confinement columns and the emptying of the mezzanine slab.
E.6.4.3 — From the execution of the mezzanine slab, the execution process of the second level is identical to that of the
first level up to the height of the lintels.
E.6.5 — STOCKS, TIE-DOWNS AND COVERS
E.6.5.1 — In this phase of the construction process, the mooring beams, the screeds, the lateral butts (blades) and the
roof anchors must be executed. The columns must be previously emptied up to the height of the lintels, leaving the
reinforcement length for splices or with the total length of the same up to the finishing level.
E.6.5.2 — The finishes of all types of longitudinal reinforcement of columns, tie beams or straps, must end in standard
90° hooks, anchoring each reinforcement of an element, in the element that is transversal to it.
E.6.6 — COMPLEMENTS
E.6.6.1 — The construction aspects provided herein can be complemented with what is established in chapters D.4 and
D.10 of this Regulation.
E-22
NSR-10 – Chapter E.7 – Cemented Bahareque
CHAPTER
E.7 BAHAREQUE STAINED
E.7.1 — INTRODUCTION
E.7.1.1 — This chapter contains the minimum requirements necessary to grant one- and two-story cemented bahareque
houses a degree of seismic resistance such that the possibility of the construction collapsing during strong low-level
seismic events is minimized. probability of occurrence, that suffers minimal structural damage during moderate seismic
events and that does not suffer structural damage during mild seismic events with a high probability of occurrence.
E.7.1.2 — This document does not replace the intervention and professional competence of Engineers and Architects,
whose responsibility and participation in the design and construction of buildings is regulated in Title VI of Law 400 of
1997.
E.7.2 — SCOPE
E.7.2.1 — This chapter provides the minimum requirements that must be followed in the design and construction of one-
and two-story homes, made of cemented bahareque, belonging to use group I, as defined by A. 2.5.1.4 and within the
limitations established in A.1.3.11, that is, one- and two-story buildings that are part of programs with a maximum of 15
homes and less than 3,000 m2 of built area.
E.7.2.2 — For the design and construction of one- and two-story housing programs with more than 15 units or more than
3,000 m2 of constructed area, complete analysis and structural design studies are required in accordance with the
following course: (a) Geotechnical
studies in accordance with Title H (b) Concrete
foundations in accordance with Title C (c) On concrete
foundations in accordance with Title C. (d) On masonry foundations
in accordance with Title D. (e) Structural analysis in accordance with
the provisions for earthquake resistant design of Title A, the requirements for load calculation of Title B, and the
analysis requirements of Appendix EA (f ) Design and construction of mezzanines and roofs of
wood, in accordance with the requirements for design and
construction of Title G.
(g) Design and construction of components in cemented bahareque, not regulated by the foregoing, will be
carried out based on the provisions of this chapter.
E.7.3.1 — DEFINITION — Cemented bahareque is a structural wall system that is based on the manufacture of walls
built with a skeleton of guadua, or guadua and wood, covered with a cement mortar render applied over wire mesh ,
nailed to a guadua mat which, in turn, is nailed to the skeleton of the wall.
E.7.3.2 — CONSTITUTION — The cemented bahareque is a system made up of two main parts: the framework and the
covering. Both parts are combined to form a composite material.
E.7.3.2.1 — Framework — The framework is made up of two sills or horizontal elements, lower and upper, and
studs or vertical elements, connected to each other with nails or screws. The framework of the framework, that
is, the soleras and the exterior foot-rights, can be built with guadua or with sawn wood. The rest of the framework
is built with guadua. It can contain slashes.
E.7.3.2.2 — Overlay — Overlay is made with cement mortar applied over wire mesh as specified in E.7.4.5. The
mesh must be nailed on a guadua mat, or on a board. The mat must be anchored to the right feet by means of
nails and sweet wire braided between the nails.
E-23
E.7.4 — MATERIALS
E.7.4.1 — GUADUA
E.7.4.1.1 — The predominant material of this construction system is guadua, whose best quality is achieved in
plants in a mature state, that is, those older than 4 years. Guadua cannot be used with more than 20% moisture
content or less than 10%. In any case, the moisture content must be close to the environmental equilibrium
moisture for wood, as defined in Figure 2.3, of section “2.2.1. Influence of drying on the Wood Elements”, from the
Andean Group Wood Design Manual.
E.7.4.1.2 — The guadua must be immunized to avoid the attack of xylophagous insects. The immunization does
not constitute protection against other environmental effects, so that the guadua cannot be exposed to the sun or
to water, in any part of the building, since the action of ultraviolet rays produces drying, cracking, discoloration and
loss of shine, and changes in humidity can cause rot.
E.7.4.2 — WOOD AND COMPLEMENTARY
E.7.4.2.1 — The quality of the sawn timber and the metallic elements of union must be governed by G.1.3 of this
Regulation.
E.7.4.2.2 — The mechanical classification of the wood used in walls, floors and roofs must correspond, as a
minimum, to group ES6, according to G.1.3.5 of this Regulation.
E.7.4.3 — MORTAR
E.7.4.3.1 — The quality of the cement mortar for plastering walls and for filling tubes will be governed by D.3.4.
The minimum classification required will be that corresponding to type N mortar, with a volume ratio of a maximum
of 4 parts of sand to one part of cementing agent.
E.7.4.3.2 — The qualities of cement and lime, if added, are those indicated in section D.3.2 of the Regulations.
E.7.4.4 — CONCRETE AND REINFORCING STEEL
E.7.4.4.1 — The qualities of concrete and reinforcement for foundations, tie beams and masonry confinement
elements, where applicable, shall be governed by the provisions of Chapter C.3.
E.7.4.5 — REINFORCEMENT MESH PLASTER
E.7.4.5.1 — The following types may be used:
(a) Twisted wire mesh with a maximum diameter of 1.25 mm (BWG 18 gauge), opening
hexagonal no mayor a 25,4 mm.
(b) Electro-welded wire mesh with a maximum diameter of 1.25 mm (BWG 18 gauge), opening
square no larger than 25.4 mm.
(c) Plaster mesh of expanded metal sheet, without structural vein. (d)
Plaster mesh of expanded metal sheet, with structural vein.
E.7.4.5.2 — The use of the meshes listed in the previous numeral does not exempt the use of guadua mat or
wooden decking, unless it is demonstrated, through experimental tests, that the behavior of the resulting material
is, when less, equivalent to the material with the mat or the boarding, in accordance with the provisions of articles
13 and 14 of Law 400 of 1997.
E-24
E.7.5 — CLASSIFICATION OF WALLS

The walls of a house with one or two floors of cemented bahareque, within the scope of this Chapter, are classified into
three types.
E.7.5.1 — STRUCTURAL WALLS WITH DIAGONALS — They are structural walls, or segments of walls, made up of a
lower screed, upper screed (or run), studs, inclined elements and a cement mortar-based coating, placed on wire mesh,
nailed on guadua mat or wooden decking. These walls receive vertical loads and resist horizontal forces of earthquake or
wind. Structural walls with diagonals should be placed at the corners of the building and at the ends of each set of
structural walls.
E.7.5.2 — STRUCTURAL WALLS WITHOUT DIAGONALS — They are structural walls, or segments of walls, made up
of a lower screed, upper screed (or race), studs and cement mortar coating, placed on wire mesh, nailed on a guadua
mat and lacking inclined elements. They should only be used to resist vertical loads. They should not be made into
segments of the ends of walls.
E.7.5.3 — Both structural walls with diagonals and those without diagonals must be built supported on foundation beams
or on shorings, themselves supported on foundation beams. Structural walls must have continuity from the foundation to
the upper diaphragm with which they are connected.
E.7.5.4 — NON-STRUCTURAL WALLS — Walls that do not support loads other than their own weight are known as non-
structural walls. These walls have no other function than to separate spaces within the house. The interior non-structural
walls must be connected to the upper diaphragm by means of a connection that restricts their overturning, but that
prevents the transmission of shear or vertical load between the roof or the mezzanine and the non-structural wall. Non-
structural walls do not need to be continuous and do not need to be anchored to the foundation system.
E.7.6 — COMPOSITION OF WALLS

E.7.6.1 — The cemented bahareque walls must be made up of a framework of guaduas or guaduas and wood, made up
of horizontal elements called soleras (the upper solera is also called carrera), vertical elements called foot-rights and
mortar coating. of cement. The guaduas should not have a diameter less than 80 mm. The horizontal spacing between
feet-rights must not be less than 300 mm nor more than 600 mm, between axes.
E.7.6.2 — The mortar coating must be applied on a fine wire mesh (diameter not greater than 1.25 mm), which in turn is
nailed onto a guadua mat, as specified in E.7.4. 5.
E.7.6.3 — The section of the screeds will have a minimum width equal to the diameter of the guaduas used as studs and
a height of no less than 100 mm. It is preferable to build the lower and upper screeds of each wall in sawn wood, since
their joints allow greater rigidity and are less susceptible to crushing than the guadua elements.
E.7.6.4 — Cemented bahareque walls may be covered on both sides. If this is not possible, the effective length of the
single-sided clad wall shall be considered as half its actual full length, for purposes of the requirements specified in E.7.8.1
and E.7.8.2.
E.7.7 - DIAPHRAGM
E.7.7.1 — The screeds must form a diaphragm together with the floors and the roof structure that transfers the horizontal
loads to the structural walls. Unions or links must be provided between the walls and the diaphragms, as indicated in
numeral E.8.3 of this Title.
E.7.7.2 — Tie rods and quadrants must be placed at the upper screed level of each story, to guarantee the diaphragm
effect. Quadrants are sufficient when the rectangular spaces between walls do not exceed a ratio of 1.5 to 1 between the
longest side and the shortest side. For larger ratios, braces must be placed that divide rectangular spaces into spaces
with ratios less than 1.5 to 1.
E-25
E.7.7.3 — Diaphragms must exist at foundation, story, and roof levels.
E.7.8 — LENGTH OF WALLS IN EACH DIRECTION

In order to provide a uniform distribution of the responsibility to resist the seismic forces in the inelastic range, the structural walls
that are arranged in each of the main directions must comply with the following conditions:
E.7.8.1 — MINIMUM LENGTH — The length of walls in each direction must satisfy Equation E.7.8-1
ÿ
L CA i Bp (E.7.8-1)
Where:
That = total minimum length of continuous walls (in m), without openings, in the i direction
CB = coefficient (in m-1), specified in Table E.7.8-1, as a function of the spectral acceleration Aa for the
construction site, according to A.2.3.
Ap = roof area (in m2 ), for one-story homes, or for the second-story walls in two-story homes. (Can be substituted for 2 3A
if lightweight roofing materials are used, such
p as fiber cement or sheet metal, without a mortar base.)
= area of the mezzanine plus area of the roof (in m2 ), for the walls of the first floor in houses with two
floors
Table E.7.8-1
Values of the density coefficient of cemented
bahareque walls, CB
Seismic Threat Aa CB
0,40 0.32
high 0.35 0,28

0.30 0.24
0.25 0.20
0.20 0.16
Intermedia
0.15 0.16
0.10 0.16
Low
0.05 0.16
E.7.8.2 — SYMMETRICAL LAYOUT OF WALLS — Walls should be roughly symmetrical in layout. Therefore, Equation E.7.8-2,
taken in its absolute value, must hold:
ÿ ÿ ( )Lweb B
ÿÿÿ
ÿ L2
ÿ ÿ we
ÿ 0.15
(E.7.8-2)
B
Where:
Lmi = length of each wall (in m) in the i direction .
b = the perpendicular distance (in m) from each wall in the i direction , to one end of the rectangle
smaller that contains the area of the roof or mezzanine (See figure E.7.8 -1).
E-26
B = length of the side (in m), perpendicular to the direction i roof , of the smaller rectangle that contains the area of the
or mezzanine.
Smaller rectangle
Ap = Plant of Ap that contains the
the building roof or mezzanine
area
Figure E.7.8-1 — Description of the smaller rectangle that contains the area of the roof or mezzanine
E.7.8.3 — VERIFICATION OF THE STRENGTH OF WALLS — In cases where the requirements expressed in E.7.8.1 are not
met, the total length of walls must be increased in each direction, at each level, unless it is demonstrated, by means of a
structural analysis procedure, such as that contained in Appendix EA of this Chapter, that a length of walls less than that
specified by equation E.7.8-1, is sufficient to resist the calculated horizontal loads.
E.7.8.4 — VERIFICATION OF THE ASYMMETRY OF THE WALLS IN PLAN — In the cases in which the requirements
expressed in E.7.8.2 are not met, the distribution of the walls in plan must be redone until achieving compliance with the
equation E.7.8-2. If in this process the total length of walls is reduced in any direction and any of the levels, compliance with
equation E.7.8-1 must be verified again, in accordance with the provisions of E.7.8.3.
E.7.8.5 — WALL VENEERS — Heavy veneers on facades should be avoided. In bathrooms, the wet area must be completely
veneered, for which it is recommended to place the veneer glued with waterproof mortar. All façade veneer must be adequately
fixed to prevent it from coming off during earthquakes.
E.7.9 — GUADUA COLUMN

Columns are structural elements provided to resist vertical loads, in isolation or in combination with structural walls. Columns
should not be considered components of the seismic resistance system in cemented bahareque houses.
E.7.10 — LOCATION AND DESIGN OF COLUMNS
E.7.10.1 — The columns will be located in points of the building where the magnitude or position of the vertical loads transmitted
by roofs or mezzanines exceed the capacity of the structural walls, or where they are not available, as is the case of open
galleries, corridors and eaves.
E.7.10.2 — If the columns are built in guadua, the direct action of the sun and water must be avoided.
They must necessarily be isolated from the floor by means of a concrete or masonry die and a joint, as indicated in numeral
E.8.5.2 of this Title.
E.7.10.3 — The number of guaduas required for each column must be estimated based on table E.7.10-1.
Table E.7.10-1
E-27
Admissible load in Guadua Columns (kN)*
Number of guaduas
Height (m) 1 2 3 4
1.0 43.1 86.2 129.3 172.4
1.5 38.6 77.2 115.8 154.4
2.0 28.7 57.4 86.1 114.8
2.5 18.4 36.8 55.2 73.6
3.0 12.8 25.6 38.3 51.1
3.5 9.4 18.8 28.2 37.6
4.0 7.2 14.4 21.6 28.

*
For guaduas of more than 100 mm in diameter and 10 mm in
wall thickness
E.7.10.4 — If more than one guadua is required to form the column, they must be connected to each other with straps with spacings that do not exceed
one third of the height of the column.
E.7.10.5 — If columns are constructed of wood, they must be designed in accordance with Title G.
E.7.10.6 — If columns are constructed of steel, they must be designed in accordance with Title F.
E.7.10.7 — If columns are constructed of concrete, they must be designed in accordance with Title C.
E.7.10.8 — If columns are constructed of masonry, they must be designed in accordance with Title D.
E.7.11 — TIE-DOWNS AND CONTINUITY OF COLUMNS
E.7.11.1 — Columns must connect to each other and to neighboring structural walls. In addition, the columns must be connected to the diaphragm they
support with an articulated joint, which does not transmit bending stress.
E-28
NSR-10 – Chapter E.8 –Mezzanines and joints in cemented bahareque
CHAPTER
E.8 FLOORS AND JOINTS IN CEMENTED BAHAREQUE
E.8.1 — MEzzanine floors
The mezzanine must support the vertical loads established in Title B. It must have sufficient rigidity in its own plane to guarantee its work as a
diaphragm and must consist of:
(a) Stringers, joists or rafters that support the covering or floor. (b) The lining must resist
the shear force and may be made of:
1. Guadua mat, electro-welded reinforcement mesh and cement mortar, 2. Expanded mesh, electro-
welded reinforcement mesh and cement mortar, or 3. Wooden boards nailed to the mezzanine
support structure.
(c) The soleras or races, which frame the diaphragm and are part of the resistance system on its plane.
E.8.1.1 — As stated in E.7.7, the floors must form a diaphragm that works as a whole. For this, the elements of the mezzanine must be properly linked.
However, it is not necessary for the mezzanine to function as an infinitely rigid diaphragm in its own plane.
E.8.1.2 — Concrete slab mezzanines are not allowed for homes in cemented bahareque built in accordance with this Chapter.
E.8.2 — COMPOSITION OF MASS FLOORS
E.8.2.1 - In the construction with cemented bahareque, the mezzanine, the screeds and races, will be built with structural wood with a classification of,
at least, Group ES6, in accordance with G.1.3.5. Alternatively, in the case of building the mezzanine structure in guadua, double guaduas must be
placed, one on top of the other, strapped together, acting as stringers at the distances indicated in table E.8.2-1. A wooden beam with a vertical section
equivalent to the height of the two guaduas that make up the stringers must be placed as an edge frieze, and between each stringer, made up of two
stacked guaduas, a wooden block, in such a way as to reduce the risk of crushing the guaduas. The tubes where the guaduas rest and those that
come into contact with the walls should be filled with cement mortar. Transverse bracing or intermediate berths are required between the stringers.
Table E.8.2-1
Sections required for mezzanines with guadua joists*
ÿÿ
Spacing S (m)
Light (m) 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.00

2 tablespoons 2 pounds V 2 gallons V
2,0 1 guadua V 2 2
2.5 2 guaduas 2 tablespoons pounds V 3 gallons V 3

V V
3.0 2 guaduas 2 tablespoons pounds V 3 gallons V 3

V V
3.5 2 guaduas 3 tablespoons pounds V 3 gallons V

V V
4.0 2 guaduas 3 tablespoons pounds V —
V V
4.5 3 guaduas 3 tablespoons — —
IN V
*For a dead load of 1.1 kN/m2 and a live load of 1.8 kN/m2
* Guaduas 110mm in diameter and 10mm wall thickness V=
guaduas arranged in a vertical arrangement.
E.8.2.2 — A cement mortar reinforced with electro-welded mesh can be used as a covering for the mezzanine.
E-29
D50 or equivalent, that is, it provides around 0.5 cm2 of steel area per linear meter of mesh. Light-weight finishes such as integrated stains,
paints, or vinyl tile should be placed over the mortar. Cement tile or other heavy, rigid flooring should not be used unless complete structural
analysis and design is performed for the entire home.
E.8.2.3 — If the mezzanine is built with sawn wood, the sections and spacing will be those indicated in tables E.8.2-2a, E.8.2.2b, E.8.2.2c,
E.8.2.2d and E .8.2.2e. The covering must be made of wooden strips or planks with a minimum thickness of 15 mm. Intermediate berths
are required to prevent buckling of the stringers.
Table E.8.2-2a
Sections required for floors with wooden joists ES1 and ES2* (mm)
Spacing S (m) 0.50 0.75

Light (m)
0.25 1.00
2.0 50 X 100 60 X 120 75 X 150 75 X 150 60 X 120 75 X
2.5 150 75 X 150 50 X 200 75 X 150 50 X 200 50 X 200
3.0 100 X 200 75 X 150 100 X 200 100 X 20 0 60X 250
3.5 50X 200 100 X 200 60 X 250 120 X 250 100 X 200
4.0 60 X 250 120 X 250 120 X 250 100 X 200 120 X 250
4.5 120 X 250 — *For a dead load of 1.6 kN/m2 and a live
5.0 load of 1.8 kN/ m2
*For wood of structural group ES1 and ES2
Table E.8.2-2b
Sections required for floors with ES3* wooden joists (mm)
Spacing S (m) 0.50 0.75

Light (m)
0.25 1.00
2.0 60 X 120 75 X 150 75 X 150 75 X 150
2.5 60 X 120 75 X 150 50 X 200 100 X 200
3.0 75 X 150 50 X 200 100 X 200 100 X 200
3.5 50 X 200 100 X 200 60 X 250 120 X 250
4.0 100 X 200 60 X 250 120 X 250 120 X 250
4.5 100 X 200 120 X 250 120 X 250 —
5.0 60 X 250 120 X 250 — —
*For wood of structural group ES3
Table E.8.2-2c
Spacing S (m) 0.50 0.75

Light (m)
0.25 1.00
2.0 60 X 120 75 X 150 75 X 150 75 X 150
2.5 75 X 150 75 X 150 50 X 200 100 X 200
3.0 75 X 150 50 X 200 100 X 200 100 X 200
3.5 50 X 200 100 X 200 120 X 250 120 X 250
4.0 100 X 200 60 X 250 120 X 250 120 X 250
4.5 100 X 200 120 X 250 — —
5.0 60 X 250 120 X 250 — —
E-30
Table E.8.2-2d
Spacing S (m) 0.50 0.75

Light (m)
0.25 1.00
2.0 60 X 120 75 X 150 75 X 150 50 X 200
2.5 75 X 150 50 X 200 50 X 200 100 X 200
3.0 75 X 150 100 X 200 100 X 200 60 X 250
3.5 50 X 200 100 X 200 120 X 250 120 X 250
4.0 100 X 200 120 X 250 120 X 250 —
4.5 100 X 200 120 X 250 — —
5.0 120 X 250 — — —
Table E.8.2-2e
Spacing S (m) 0.25 0.50

Light (m)
0.75 60 X 120 75 X 150 75 X 150 50 1.00
2.0 X 200 75 X 150 50 X 200 100 X 200 100 X 200 50 X 200
2.5 100 X 200 60 X 250 120 X 25 0 100X200 60X250 120 X
3.0 250 120 X 250 100 X 200 120 X 250 — 60 X 250 120 X
3.5 250 — 120 X 250 —
4.0 —
4.5 —
5.0 — —
E.8.2.4 — The cantilevers must be built with continuous elements, made of wood or guadua, joined together with an edge element that
guarantees the joint work of the cantilever elements and a better distribution of the imposed load.
E.8.2.5 — If a ceiling is built below the sub-story structure, a draft must be provided to the interior spaces.
E.8.3 — JOINTS
E.8.3.1 — All members and structural elements must be anchored, braced, spliced, and installed in such a way as to guarantee the strength
and rigidity necessary to resist loads and transmit them safely to the foundation.
E.8.3.2 — This chapter lists some connections between constituent elements of the construction system with cemented bahareque walls.
These unions have been experimented with nails, bolts, rods and plates.
Other different ones can be used, as long as their suitability is demonstrated, by experimental means.
E.8.4 — TYPES OF JOINTS ACCORDING TO THE CONNECTION MATERIAL
Depending on the material used for the connection between guaduas or between wood and guaduas, the joints are classified as:
E.8.4.1 — NAILED JOINTS — These are reserved for very low stresses between sawn wood and guadua elements, such as the right foot
to the screed in the wall. They are not accepted for joining two or more plump guadua elements, since the penetration and impact of the nails
cause cracking of the guadua due to the preponderance of longitudinal fibers. Nailed joints should only be used for temporary adjustment of
the system during assembly and should not be considered as strength connections between structural elements.
E-31
E.8.4.2 — BOLTED JOINTS — When it is necessary to drill the guadua to introduce bolts, a high-speed drill must be used
and impacts should be avoided.
E.8.4.2.1 — All pipes through which bolts or bars are passed must be filled with cement mortar.
E.8.4.2.2 — The mortar must be fluid enough to fully penetrate into the pipe. Mortar filler should be provided with
the minimum amount of water necessary to obtain sufficient fluidity to be injected with very little pressure, and not
to exceed a 4 to 1 ratio, by volume, between fine aggregate and cement. Non-corrosive mixing water reducing
additives may be used.
E.8.4.2.3 — To empty the mortar, the guadua must be drilled using a high-speed drill at points close to the
partitions of each of the two ends of the pipe to be filled. The mortar will be injected through one of the holes,
pressing it through a funnel or with the help of a manual pump. The hole at the opposite end is for the escape of
trapped air.
E.8.4.2.4 — Bolts may be made from field-threaded reinforcing bars or commercially-threaded, continuous-thread
bars.
E.8.4.3 — STRAPED JOINTS — Strapped joints may be used to fabricate pinned connections.
For connections that must resist tension, the tape should be designed to ensure that it is not the weak link in the joint. The
connection must not work, in total, with more than 10 kN of tensile effort.
E.8.5 — TYPES OF JOINTS ACCORDING TO FUNCTION

The joints between the elements of guadua and wood within the bahareque walls can be nailed joints. The unions of
bahareque walls with each other and of the bahareque components with the foundation and with the roof must fulfill
structural functions, both of rigidity and resistance. The joints between components, according to their function, are
classified as:
E.8.5.1 — FOUNDATION-WALL JOINT — The walls must be effectively connected to the foundation, either in direct
contact with the foundation beams or through the foundations.
E.8.5.1.1 — Union with sawn wood screeds — When sawn wood is used for the screeds, the connection with
the foundations will be made with threaded bars, anchored to them and in such a way that they cross the screeds
and are fixed to them , with nuts and washers. Wood should be separated from concrete or masonry with
waterproof paper or other similar barrier.
E.8.5.1.2 — Union with guadua screeds — For walls made only with guadua elements, the walls must be
connected to the foundations by fixing the necessary footings, in accordance with E.7.8.3, to the foundation, such
as it is established for guadua columns in E.7.26.2.
E.8.5.2 — COLUMN-FOUNDATION JOINT — The guadua should not be in direct contact with the ground, masonry or
concrete. The guadua will be supported on a metal separator or other impermeable material, as shown in Appendix EB.
E.8.5.2.1 — Compressive forces must be transmitted through the spacer to the foundation. Tensile forces must
be transmitted through bolted connections. A bolt must go through the first or second pipe of the guadua. The
through pipe and any pipe below it should be filled with mortar. The pipe must have a knot at its lower end. The
bolt must be anchored to the foundation through plates or bars with eyelets, or bent bars, at each of its ends. The
bolt and the clamping bars will have a minimum diameter of 9.5 mm, while if plates are used, they must be at least
3.2 mm thick and 50 mm wide. This connection must resist tension and is not suitable for resisting moment and is
shown in Appendix EB.
E.8.5.2.2 — The spacer must also act as a shear resistant element, that is, as a stop for the horizontal movement
between the wall and the foundation. To do this, the separator must embrace the guadua element. There must be
a complete joint at least every 1.5 m, at the ends of walls, at the edges of door openings and at the midpoint of
the wall if its length is greater than 1.5 m and less than 3 m. He
E-32
separator-retainer can be a steel plate bent into a U shape, or a tube into which the guadua is embedded, as illustrated
in Appendix EB.
E.8.5.2.3 — When the connection is not required to resist traction, the guadua can be embedded in the concrete and
separated from it by means of a bituminous membrane, such as tar or asphalt.
E.8.5.2.4 — The connections with the foundations described are also used to anchor columns formed with more than
one guadua.
E.8.5.3 — COLUMN-COVER JOINT — The union of the guaduas with the cover must be made in a similar way to that described
in numeral E.8.5.5 for the right-footings of the walls. Columns made up of more than one guadua must be connected to the
upper run of the mezzanine or roof, by means of a sawn wood element that guarantees complete contact between the horizontal
element and the cross section of all the guaduas that make up the column. .
E.8.5.4 — UNION BETWEEN WALLS
E.8.5.4.1 — In-Plane Walls — In-Plane Walls are attached to each other using bolts, nuts, and washers, as illustrated
in Appendix EB. There should be at least two connections per joint, placed every third of the height of the wall. The bolt
must be at least 9.5mm in diameter. If the right feet are made of guadua, the crossed pipes must be filled with mortar.
E.8.5.4.2 — Walls in Perpendicular Planes — When the walls to be joined are in different planes, perpendicular to
each other, they may be joined directly with bolts, nuts, and washers in only one direction, or through an additional
element at the intersection of the walls, using bolts, nuts and washers, in both directions, as illustrated in Appendix EB.
The vertical spacing of the joints is the same as specified in E.8.5.4.1.
E.8.5.5 — UNION BETWEEN WALLS AND ROOF.
E.8.5.5.1 — The connection of the purlins with the walls must be done with the right feet. This is achieved by means of
an embedded bolt inside the last complete tube of the upper end of the right-foot, which goes through the solera and
the strap. Both the complete pipe, as well as any segment of pipe above it, must be filled with cement mortar and
confined with a band in order to avoid longitudinal cracking of the guadua due to shear stresses from horizontal loads.
If the screed and/or the belt is made of guadua, the tubes crossed with the connecting bolt must be filled.
E.8.5.5.2 — When the walls are made using panels, a continuous element must be placed joining the runs of the
panels. The connection with the roof, carried out in a similar way to that described in numeral E.8.5.5.1, by means of a
bolt embedded in the panel's right-hand feet, going through both the upper panel race and the continuous element, also
serves as an element union between them.
E.8.5.5.3 — Tiles must be strapped together to form a set.
E.8.5.5.4 — If a porch is built attached to the exterior walls, with guadua columns, the roof must be provided with an
eave with the necessary dimensions so that the guadua is not directly exposed to the action of the sun and water.
E.8.5.5.5 — For eaves with more than 500 mm, an inclined support or footing must be built, from the outer end of the
eaves to the guadua columns to be protected, but with an inclination of not less than 60º with the horizontal . The lower
end of the friend's foot must rest on a different guadua from the ones that form the columns, but which is strapped to
them and shares the foundation cube with them. The columns must be spaced with distances not greater than 3 m.
E-33
Grades
E-34
NSR-10 – Chapter E.9 – Roofs for cemented bahareque construction
CHAPTER
E.9 ROOFS FOR CONSTRUCTION
IN CEMENTED BAHAREQUE
E.9.1 — GENERAL
The load-bearing elements of the roof must form a stable set for vertical and lateral loads, for which they will have the required anchors and bracing
as indicated in numeral E.8.5.5 of this chapter.
E.9.2 — ROOF COMPOSITION AND ITS CONNECTIONS
E.9.2.1 — The purlins and other elements that transmit roof loads to the structural walls must be fixed together and connected with the upper race or
screed that serves as mooring of the structural walls, in accordance with numerals E.8.3. to E.8.5.
E.9.2.2 — The purlins can be made of sawn wood or guadua. When the purlins are built in guadua, the tubes in direct contact with the wall must be
filled with cement mortar. Table E.9.2-1 indicates the composition and spacing for guadua purlins.
Table E.9.2-1
Sections required for roofs with guadua belts*
Spacing S (m) 1.50 2.00

Light (m)
0.50 1.00 2.50 3.00
2.0 1 pound 2 pounds V 2 pounds V 2 pounds V 2 pounds V 2 pounds V 2 2 tablespoons V 2 tablespoons V
2.5 pounds V 2 pounds V 2 pounds V 3 pounds V 2 pounds V 3 pounds V 3 2 tablespoons V 3 tablespoons V
3.0 pounds V 3 pounds V 2 pounds V 3 quads V 3 quads V 3 quads V 3 quads 3 tablespoons V 3 tablespoons V
3.5 V 3 quads V 3 quads V — * For a dead load of 1.25 kN/m2 and a live load 3 tablespoons V 3 tablespoons V
4.0 of0.5 kN/m2 — —
4.5 — —
* Guaduas with a minimum diameter of 110mm and a minimum wall thickness of 10mm
V= guaduas arranged in a vertical arrangement
E.9.2.3 — When the purlins are made of sawn wood, the sections and spacing will be those indicated in tables E.9.2-2a. to E.9.2.2e
Table E.9.2-2a
Sections required for decks with wooden purlins ES1 and ES2* (mm)
Spacing S (m) 0.50 0.75

Light (m)
0.25 1.00
2.0 50 X 100 50 X 100 60 X 120 60 X 120
2.5 50 X 100 60 X 120 75 X 150 75 X 150
3.0 60 X 120 75 X 150 75 X 150 50 X 200
3.5 75 X 150 75 X 150 50 X 200 100 X 200
4.0 75 X 150 50 X 200 100 X 200 100 X 200
4.5 75 X 150 100 X 200 100 X 200 60 X 250 50 X 200 100 X 200
5.0 120 X 250 120 X 250 *For a dead load of 1.2 kN/ m2 and a live
load of 0.5 kN/m2
*for wood of structural groups ES1 and ES2
E-35
Table E.9.2-2b
Required sections for decks with ES3* wooden purlins (mm)
Spacing S (m) 0.50 0.75

Light (m)
0.25 1.00
2.0 50 X 100 60 X 120 60 X 120 75 X 150
2.5 60 X 120 75 X 150 75 X 150 75 X 150
3.0 60 X 120 75 X 150 50 X 200 50 X 200
3.5 75 X 150 50 X 200 100 X 200 100 X 200
4.0 75 X 150 100 X 200 100 X 200 60 X 250 50 X 200 100 X 200
4.5 120 X 250 120 X 250 100 X 200 60 X 250 120 X 250 120 X 250
5.0 * For a dead load of 1.2 kN/m2 and a live load of 0.5 kN/m2
*for wood of structural group ES3
Table E.9.2-2c
Spacing S (m) 0.25 0.50

Light (m)
0.75 1.00 50 X 100 60 X 120 60 X 120 75 X 150 60 X
2.0 120 75 X 150 75 X 150 75 X 150 75 X 150 75 X 150 50 X 200
2.5 100 X 200 75X 150 50X 200 100 X 200 100 X 200 75 X 150
3.0 100 X 200 100 X 200 120 X 250 50 X 200 100 X 200 120 X
3.5 250 120 X 250 100 X 200 120 X 250 120 X 250 — *For a dead
4.0 load of 1.2 kN / m2 and a live load of 0.5 kN/m2
4.5
5.0
Table E.9.2-2d
Spacing S (m) 0.25 0.50

Light (m)
0.75 1.00 50 X 100 60 X 120 60 X 120 75 X 150 60 X
2.0 120 75 X 150 75 X 150 50 X 200 75 X 150 75 X 150 50 X 200
2.5 100 X 200 75X 150 50X 200 100 X 200 100 X 200 50 X 200
3.0 100 X 200 60 X 250 120 X 250 50 X 200 100 X 200 120 X 250
3.5 120 X 250 100 X 200 120 X 250 120 X 250 — *For one dead
4.0 load of 1.2 kN / m2 and a live load of 0.5 kN/m2
4.5
5.0
Table E.9.2-2e
Spacing S (m) 0.25 0.50

Light (m)
0.75 1.00 50 X 100 60 X 120 75 X 150 75 X 150 60 X
2.0 120 75 X 150 75 X 150 50 X 200 75 X 150 50 X 200 100 X
2.5 200 100 X 200 75X 150 100X 200 100 x 200 60 x 250 50 x
3.0 200 100 x 200 120 x 250 120 x 250 100 x 200 120 x 250 120 x
3.5 250 - 100 x 200 120 x 250 - *For a dead load of 1.2 kn/m2 and
4.0 a living load of 0.5 kN/m2
4.5
5.0 —
E-36
E.9.3 — COVERING MATERIALS

E.9.3.1 — The materials used to close the roof must guarantee sufficient impermeability to protect the guaduas and the
wood of the support structure from humidity.
E.9.3.2 — When clay tile roofs are used, their direct contact with the guadua or wood must be avoided, preventing the
transmission of humidity due to the effect of capillarity.
E.9.3.3 — The use of concrete or mortar slabs as roofs for one and two-story houses on cemented bahareque walls built
in accordance with this Title is not allowed.
E.9.4 — SKY-SATIN
E.9.4.1 — The ceiling must be built in lightweight materials, anchored to the mezzanine or roof structure and must allow
ventilation of structural and non-structural elements
E-37
Grades
E-38
NSR-10 – Appendix EA – Verification of the resistance of cemented bahareque walls
APPENDIX EA
VERIFICATION OF THE RESISTANCE OF WALLS
OF BAHAREQUE CEMENTED
EA.1 — SCOPE
EA.1.1 — The minimum resistance verification requirements of the walls of one and two-story houses whose structural system
consists of cemented bahareque walls are established. The structuring and other design and construction requirements must comply
with the provisions of chapter E.7 of this Title, except for the requirement for the number of walls in each direction expressed in
E.7.14.1, for which this procedure can be used in alternative way.
EA.2 — MATHEMATICAL MODEL TO CARRY OUT THE ANALYSIS
EA.2.1 — For the structural analysis, the cantilever structural wall model embedded in the base and laterally braced by the mezzanine
and roof diaphragms will be used. Failing that, any other alternative model compatible with the behavior of the construction in the
face of the stress analyzed can be used, provided that the adequate precision of the response obtained with the alternative model is
guaranteed by experimental or theoretical evidence.
EA.3 — DESIGN PROCEDURE
EA.3.1 — The resistance verification of cemented bahareque walls is based on the work stress method.
EA.4 — REQUESTS CONSIDERED
EA.4.1 — LOAD COMBINATIONS — The cemented bahareque wall system shall be designed for the effects of the combined loads
specified in B.2.3. In the effects caused by the earthquake, the energy dissipation capacity of the structural system is taken into
account, using some reduced design effects obtained by dividing the seismic force Fs, determined in accordance with the
,
requirements of Title A, by the E
coefficient of power dissipation capacity R , =
E FR s
.
EA.4.2 — ENERGY DISSIPATION COEFFICIENT, R — The energy dissipation capacity coefficient, R should be taken as 1.5 for
cemented bahareque walls.
,
EA.4.3 — DETERMINATION OF SEISMIC FORCES — The determination of seismic forces will be made as established in chapter
A.4, Equivalent horizontal force method, based on the evaluation of the seismic threat following the provisions of chapter A. 2.
EA.4.4 — FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD OF THE BUILDING — For purposes of calculating Sa using equation A.2-1, the fundamental
period of the building may be taken as the period resulting from the application of equation A.4-2, with a value of C 0.25t
= .
EA.4.5 — WIND FORCES — They must be calculated in accordance with chapter B.6 of these regulations.
EA.5 — DISTRIBUTION OF FORCES
EA.5.1 — LATERAL FORCE — Lateral earthquake forces shall be distributed, in each direction, in proportion to the lengths of
structural walls parallel to that direction.
EA.5.2 — VERTICAL FORCE — Vertical forces due to gravity loads should be distributed in
E-39
NSR-10 – Appendix EA – Verification of the resistance of cemented bahareque walls
proportion to the afferent areas of the structural walls, with respect to the total area of the level considered.
EA.6 — RESISTANCE OF CEMENTED BAHAREQUE WALLS
EA.6.1 — The values obtained from the stresses on each of the walls, by vertical load and by horizontal load, in the direction under consideration, must be less
than the admissible work values expressed in table EA-1, according to with the structuring characteristics and materials used in each type of wall.
EA.6.2 — The values expressed assume that the walls will be anchored to the foundation, and to each other, in accordance with the provisions of sections E.7.24
to E.7.26 of this chapter. If values less than or equal to those established in table EA-1 are not achieved, the length of walls must be increased in the direction
under consideration, until compliance is obtained.
Table EA-1
Admissible values of work in cemented bahareque walls
allowable Allowable Maximum allowable Allowable

shear, compressive vertical tensile force, T
V stress, Fc load (kN/m) (kN)
(kN/m) (MPa)
VERIFICATION SECTION Horizontal Net section of the extreme Horizontal section of wall end anchor
section of right foot of the the lower edge of the
the lower wall wall
edge of the
wall
WALL COMPOSITION
Guadua and wood framework. Group
With two diagonals, one at each ES1 and 15.0 39
end of the wall, leaning in opposite 15 ES2*
directions. Minimum 40% of studs Group
in sawn wood. End studs in sawn 13.0 37
ES3*
wood. Screed and career in sawn
Group 15
wood. Covering with mat, mesh 12 10.0 35
ES4
and cloth on both sides.
Group
10 8.0 33
ES5
Group
7 5.0 31
ES6
Guadua framework. With two diagonals,
one at each end of the leaning in opposite
directions.wall,
Floor and race in guadua.
Covering with mat, mesh and cloth on both 8 8 41 10
sides * Classification for sawn wood, in
accordance with Title G of these regulations.
E-40


NSR-10
TITLE F — STRUCTURES
METALLIC

NSR-10 – Chapter F.1 – General requirements
TITLE F
METALLIC STRUCTURES
CHAPTER F.1
F.1.0 — GENERAL
F.1.0.1 — SCOPE — The standards contained in Title F of this Regulation are applicable to the design of structures made
up of steel or aluminum elements, welded, bolted, or riveted.
F.1.0.2 — SEISMIC ZONES — The requirements for metallic structures that are given in this Title of this Regulation must
be applied to each one of the Seismic Hazard Zones that are defined in A.2.3 of Title A of this Regulation.
F.1.1 — LIMITS OF APPLICABILITY

F.1.1.1 — STEEL STRUCTURES — The term structural steel used in this standard refers to structural steel elements
essential to resist design loads.
The design of steel structures with members made of rolled sections is covered by Chapters F.1 to F.3. Such members
are enumerated in general form in 2.1 of the "Standard Code of Practice for Metal Structures" of the American Institute for
Steel Construction (AISC).
The design of metallic structures with cold-formed members is dealt with in Chapter F.4.
F.1.1.2 — ALUMINUM STRUCTURES — The term structural aluminum used in this standard refers to structural aluminum
elements essential to resist design loads.
The design of metal structures with structural aluminum elements will be done in accordance with Chapter F.5.
F-1
NSR-10 – Chapter F.1 – General requirements
Grades
F-2
NSR-10 – Chapter F.2 – Steel structures with rolled, reinforced and structural tubular profiles
CHAPTER F.2
STEEL STRUCTURES WITH ROLLED, REINFORCED
AND STRUCTURAL TUBULAR SECTIONS
F.2.1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS

This clause establishes the scope of Chapter F.2, lists the codes, specifications and standards used for reference and
provides requirements for materials and contractual documents.
The following sections are included:
F.2.1.1 — Scope
F.2.1.2 — Definitions
F.2.1.3 — Nomenclature
F.2.1.4 — Specifications, Codes and Reference Standards F.2.1.5
— Materials F.2.1.6
— Drawings and Specifications of Structural Design
F.2.1.1 — SCOPE — Chapter F.2 is applicable to the design of structures made up of structural steel elements in the
manufacture of which rolled profiles, reinforced profiles or structural tubular profiles (PTE) are used, including systems
where steel and concrete act as a composite section.
This Chapter establishes criteria for the design, manufacture and assembly of buildings and other structural steel
constructions, where the denomination "other constructions" includes those structures designed, manufactured and
assembled in a similar way to buildings and made up of similar elements resistant to vertical and lateral loads.
When conditions that are not covered by this Chapter occur, the designs will be allowed to be based on tests or analysis
based on alternative criteria, subject to the approval of the Permanent Advisory Commission for the Seismic Resistant
Construction Regime.
For the design of cold-formed structural members other than structural tubular profiles (PTE), with elements with a
thickness not greater than 25.4 mm, Chapter F.4 of this Regulation must be applied.
F.2.1.1.1 — Seismic Provisions — For the design of the systems of resistance to seismic loads of the structures
covered by the scope of this Chapter, the provisions of Chapter F.3 must be applied.
It is not allowed to apply the provisions of numeral F.2.15 "Design with Inelastic Analysis" to the seismic design
of buildings and other steel constructions.
F.2.1.2 — DEFINITIONS
Composite Action — Condition in which steel and concrete elements and members attend as a unit the distribution of
internal forces.
Tension Field Action — Behavior of a panel stressed by shear, where diagonal tensile forces in the web and compressive
forces in the transverse stiffeners develop, similar to the forces in Pratt truss.
Structural steel — Steel elements as defined in section 2.1 of the Code of Standard Practices for Metallic Structures,
Colombian Technical Standard ICONTEC
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistant Steel — High-strength, low-alloy steel that, with proper precautions, can be used in
normal atmospheric (non-marine) conditions without the application of protective paint.
Direct Bond — In a composite section, load transmission mechanism between steel and concrete by bond.
F-3
Bolt Grip — Thickness of the materials through which the bolt passes.
Elastic Analysis — Structural analysis that is based on the assumption that the structure recovers its original geometry
once the applied loads are removed.
First-order analysis — Structural analysis in which equilibrium conditions are formulated on the undeformed structure, that
is, second-order effects are neglected.
Second-order analysis — Structural analysis in which equilibrium conditions are formulated on the structure in its deformed
configuration, so that second-order effects are taken into account.
Elastic Analysis — Structural analysis that is based on the assumption that the structure recovers its original geometry
once the applied loads are removed.
Structural analysis — Determination of the effects of loads on members and connections, based on the principles of
structural mechanics.
Inelastic analysis — Structural analysis that takes into account the inelastic behavior of the material, including plastic
analysis.
Plastic analysis — Structural analysis that is based on the assumption of rigid-plastic behavior, that is, it assumes that
equilibrium is satisfied over the entire structure and that the stress is equal to or less than the yield stress.
Effective Width — Reduced width of a flat element over which a uniform distribution of stress is assumed such that its
effect on the behavior of the structural member is equivalent to that produced by the actual, non-uniform distribution of
stress in the actual element.
Flat Width — For a rectangular structural hollow section (STE), the nominal width of one face minus two times the outside
corner radius. When this radius is not known, the value of the total width minus three times the thickness of the wall can be
taken as the flat width.
Average Rib Width — Average between the maximum and minimum widths of the concrete rib in a metal deck system.
Bearing — In a bolted connection, the limit state for the transmission of load by pressure between the shank of the bolt and
the face of the bore.
Crushing (Local Compressive Yield) — Local compressive yield limit state due to the action of a member bearing on the
cross section or surface of another member.
Sidewall Crushing — Limit state based on the crushing resistance of the lateral faces of a main member in a PTE
connection.
Concrete crushing — Compressive failure limit state of concrete when it reaches ultimate deformation.
Rocker Support — Support with a curved surface on which the supported member can balance.
Roller type support — Round steel bar that when rolled allows the displacement of the member that rests on it.
Snug Tightness — In a bolted joint, a tightness obtained with a few blows of an impact wrench or maximum effort by an
operator using a common wrench, so that the connected parts are in firm contact.
Net Area — Gross area reduced to account for material removed.
Net Effective Area — Net area modified by the shear lag effect.
Torsional Bracing — Bracing that restrains the twisting of a beam or column.
F-4
Lateral Bracing — Diagonal braces, shear walls, or other equivalent systems that provide in-plane lateral stability.
Sidewall creasing — Limit state of creasing of the lateral faces of a main member in a PTE connection.
Web wrinkling — Limit state consisting of local failure of the web sheet in the zone of application of a concentrated load
or reaction.
Eye Bar — A member in tension of uniform thickness, connected with a pin through a forged or flame cut head and of
greater width than the body of the member. Its dimensions should be such that the resistance is approximately equal on
the body and on the head.
Fire barrier — Construction element made of fire-resistant materials and tested in accordance with ASTM E119 or another
approved fire resistance test to demonstrate its compliance with this Regulation.
Fillet Edge — For a fillet weld, the line where the face of the fillet and the base metal meet. For a rolled profile, line of
tangency of a fillet.
Fire Resistance Rating — The period of time during which a building element, component, or system maintains its ability
to contain a fire or continues to fulfill its structural function, as determined by test or test-based methods.
Shim — Sheet used to fill gaps in connections or supports.
Rotational Capacity — Ratio between the maximum inelastic rotation achieved and the idealized elastic rotation for the
yield initiation condition.
Concrete Cap — A section of solid concrete in a composite deck-to-metal floor system, which is formed when the deck is
interrupted on either side of the beam.
Load — Force or other action resulting from the weight of construction materials, occupants and their belongings, or from
environmental effects, differential motion, or restricted dimensional changes.
Design Load — Load applied to the structure, obtained based on an appropriate load combination.
Punching Load — In a PTE connection, the component of force in a branch member in a direction perpendicular to the
main member.
Notional Load — Under the Direct Analysis Method, a virtual load that is applied in structural analysis to account for
destabilizing effects that are not otherwise being considered in the design.
Gravitational Load — Load acting in the direction of gravity, such as live loads or dead loads.
Lateral Load — A load, such as that produced by an earthquake or wind, that acts in a lateral direction.
Factored Load — Product of a rated load times the corresponding load factor.
Nominal loads — are the loads specified in numerals B.3 to B.6 of this Regulation. The dead, live and wind loads given
in Title B are nominal loads, that is, they have not been multiplied by the load coefficients.
Enclosure — Set of exterior covering elements of a structure.
Amplifying Coefficient — A value that multiplies the results of a first-order analysis to account for second-order effects.
F-5
Load coefficient — Coefficient that reflects the deviations of the real loads with respect to the nominal loads, the
inaccuracies in the analyzes that are carried out to obtain the effects that they produce, and the probability that more than
one load will occur with its maximum value simultaneously.
Strength reduction coefficient — Coefficient that takes into account the unavoidable deviations of the actual strength
from the nominal strength of the element, as well as the type of failure and its consequences.
Column — Structural member whose primary function is to resist axial loads.
Filled Profile Type Composite Column — Composite construction column consisting of a tubular section profile filled
with structural concrete.
Profile-Clad Composite Column — A column of composite construction consisting of a section of structural concrete
with one or more steel profiles embedded therein.
Dependent Column — Column designed to support gravity loads only, that is, its connections are not intended to provide
resistance to lateral loads.
Subdivision — Enclosure of spaces in a building with elements that have a specific fire resistance.
Structural Component — Member, connector, weld, or connecting element.
Stress Concentration — A condition of localized stress, considerably greater than average in magnitude (even in
uniformly loaded cross sections of uniform thickness), generated by sudden changes in geometry or by concentrated loads.
Connector — General name to refer to bolts, rivets and other connecting devices.
Connector — In a composite construction member, it is a headed dowel, bolt, channel, plate, or other profile welded to
the steel profile and embedded in the concrete, to transmit forces between the two materials.
Connection — Combination of connection elements, connectors, and parts of connected members involved in the
transmission of forces between two or more members.
Moment Connection — Connection that transmits bending moments between the connected members.
Partially Restrained Moment Connection — Connection that transfers moment, with no rotation between the connected
members being negligible.
Fully Restrained Moment Connection — A connection capable of transferring moment with negligible rotation between
the connected members.
Separated connection — In PTE reinforcement, connection where the branch members are connected on the face of the
main member, leaving a separation between them.
Slip-Critical Connection — Bolted connection that has been designed to prevent relative displacement between the
connected parts, through the friction that is generated at the contact surface under the action of the tightening force of the
bolts.
Cross Connection — For PTE, a connection in which the forces in branch members or other connected elements
transverse to the main member are essentially balanced by forces in branch members or other connecting elements on
the opposite face of the main member.
K - connection — For PTE, a connection in which the forces in branch members or connected elements transverse to the
main member are essentially balanced by forces in other branch members or connected elements on the same face of the
main member.
Tee Connection — For PTE, a connection in which the branch member or connected element is perpendicular to the main
member and forces transverse to the main member are balanced primarily by shear forces in the main member.
F-6
Y - Connection — For PTE, a connection in which the branch member or connected element is not perpendicular to the
main member and forces transverse to the main member are balanced primarily by shear forces in the main member.
Simple connection — Connection in which the momentum transmitted between the connected members is negligible.
Bearing Type Connection — Bolted connection in which shear forces are transmitted by bearing the bolt against the
connecting elements.
Lapped Connection — For PTE reinforcement, a connection in which the branch members overlap at their intersection.
Restrained Construction — Individual beams and floor and roof systems of a building, for which the surrounding or
supporting structure is capable of withstanding significant thermal expansions over the range of expected elevated
temperatures.
Unrestrained Construction —Individual beams and floor and roof systems of a building that can be considered unrestrained
to rotation and thermal expansion over the range of expected elevated temperatures.
Counterflection — Curvature introduced into a beam or truss to compensate for expected deflections from loads.
Fusion Cut — Cut with gas, plasma or laser.
Cover Plate — Plate that is welded or bolted to the flange of a member to increase its cross-sectional area, section
modulus, or moment of inertia.
Simple curvature — Characteristic of the deformed silhouette of a beam that has no inflection points along the span.
DCCR (Design with Coefficients of Load and Resistance) — Method by which structural elements are designed so that
their design resistance is equal to or greater than the required resistance obtained under the action of combinations with
factored loads.
Drift — Lateral deflection of a structure.
Creep —In a bolted connection, the limit state of relative displacement between connected parts that occurs before the
design strength of the connection is reached.
Uncut — A cut executed in a structural member to remove a fin and conform to the shape of an intercepting member.
Diaphragm — Roof, deck, or other type of membrane or bracing system that transfers applied loads in its plane to the
lateral load resisting system.
Nominal Dimension — Theoretical dimension, such as those listed in the section properties tables.
Design for Performance — A structural design approach based on a prior definition of performance objectives, engineering
analysis, and a quantitative evaluation of alternatives against those design objectives, using accepted engineering tools,
methodologies, and performance criteria.
Prescriptive design — Design method based on the demonstration of compliance with the general criteria established by
a standard.
Nonuniform Load Distribution — For a PTE connection, a condition in which the load is not distributed across the cross
sections of the connected elements in a way that can be directly determined.
Double curvature — Deformation condition of a beam with one or more points of inflection about the span.
F-7
Effect of Loads — Forces, stresses, and deformations that occur in a structural component as a result of the application
of loads.
Leverage — Amplification of the tensile force in a bolt caused by leverage between the point of application of the load, the
bolt, and the reaction on the connected member.
P ÿ ÿ Effect — Second order effect that takes into account the action of loads on deformed geometry along a member.
Effect P ÿ ÿ — Second order effect that takes into account the action of the loads on the joints in their displaced position.
Length Effects —Considerations associated with reducing the strength of a member as a result of its unsupported length.
Second-order effects — Effects produced by loads acting on the structure in its deformed configuration, such as the P ÿ
ÿ and P ÿ ÿ effects .
Geometry Axis — Axis parallel to the fin or web of a profile.
Major Axis — Centroidal axis associated with maximum inertia in a cross section.
Minor Axis — Centroidal axis associated with the minimum inertia in a cross section.
Unstiffened Member — A flat compression member that, along one of its edges parallel to the direction of stress, lacks
out-of-plane elements that act as stiffeners.
Stiffened element — A flat compression element that, along its two edges parallel to the direction of stress, has out-of-
plane elements that act as stiffeners.
Splice — Connection between two structural elements that are butted at their ends to form a longer element.
Ponding of water — Accumulation of water due solely to the deflection of the structure of a flat roof.
Non-destructive testing — Inspection procedures in which there is no destruction of material or affect the integrity of any
material or component.
Roll Scale — A surface coating of oxide that forms on steel from the hot rolling process.
Stress — Force per unit area, due to axial, moment, shear, or torsion forces.
Design Stress — Stress value associated with the design strength.
Yield stress — Concept applicable both to materials that have a well-defined yield point, and to those that do not; in the
latter case it corresponds to the stress value for which a specified limit deviation is reached with respect to the proportional
behavior between stresses and deformations.
Minimum Specified Yield Stress — Specified lower limit for the yield stress of a material.
Design Wall Thickness — For PTE, the thickness used in the calculation of cross-sectional properties.
Entering Corner — In a beam rip or weld access hole, cut at a point of abrupt change of direction, where the exposed
surface is concave.
F-8
Limit State — Condition beyond which a structure or one of its components is no longer adequate to fulfill its function
(serviceability limit state) or reaches its ultimate load capacity (resistance limit state).
Strength limit state — Limit condition that affects the safety of the structure when the ultimate load capacity is reached.
Serviceability Limit State — Limit condition in which the structure's ability to maintain functionality, appearance, ease of
maintenance, durability, and occupant comfort is affected.
Node eccentricity — For a connection in PTE reinforcement, the perpendicular distance from the point of intersection of
the lines of work of the branch members to the centroidal axis of the main member.
Unframed End — An end of a member whose rotation is not constrained by stiffeners or connecting elements.
Effective Length Factor "K" — Ratio of the effective buckling length to the unbraced length of a member.
Distortional failure — Limit state for a PTE connection in a truss, characterized in that the cross section of a rectangular
PTE main member acquires a rhomboid shape.
Fatigue — Limit state of initiation and progression of a crack as a result of the repeated application of live loads.
Local bending — Limit state consisting of appreciable deformation of a fin under the action of a concentrated tensile load.
Yield — Limit state of inelastic deformation that occurs when the yield stress of the material is reached.
Yield (yield moment) — The condition of yielding at the extreme grain of the cross section of a member, which occurs
when the bending moment reaches the yield moment value.
Yield (plastic moment) — A condition of yielding in all fibers in the cross section of a member, which occurs when the
bending moment reaches the value of the plastic moment.
Tensile Yield — Creep that occurs under the action of tensile stresses.
Torsional Yield — Yield that occurs under the effect of torsional stress.
Local creep — Creep that occurs in a localized zone of an element.
Shear Yield — Yield produced by shear stresses.
Shear Yield (Punch Out) — In a PTE connection, limit state based on the out-of-plane shear resistance of the main
member wall onto which the branch members are connected.
Heat flux — Radiant energy per unit area.
Simple Concentrated Force — A tensile or compressive force applied perpendicular to the flange of a member.
Double Concentrated Forces — Two forces of equal magnitude and opposite directions that form a couple on the same
side of a loaded member.
Horizontal Shear Force — Force acting between the steel and concrete surfaces in a composite beam.
Gauge — Transverse distance to lines of drill centers.
Ignition — Rapid transition to a state involving the entire surface in a room fire of combustible materials.
F-9
Fire — Destructive fire manifested by any of the following characteristics: light, flame, heat, or smoke.
Design fire — Set of conditions that define the development of a fire and the diffusion of combustion products through a
building or a part of it.
In-Plane Instability — Limit state for a beam-column bending about its major axis and having a lateral bracing system
that restrains lateral or lateral-torsional buckling.
Joint — Area at which two or more ends, surfaces, or edges of elements connect. It is characterized by the type of
connector or solder used and by the method of force transfer.
Pretensioned Joint — A joint with high-strength bolts that are tightened to the specified minimum pretension.
Lap Joint — Joint between two overlapping connection elements.
Unbraced Length — Distance between two successive sections at which bracing is provided for a member, measured
between the centroids of the bracing members.
Mechanism — Structural system that includes real or plastic hinges in such a number and arrangement that they allow it
to adopt different articulated forms under the consideration of rigid members.
Filler metal — Metal that is added when making a welded joint.
Weld Metal — The area of a weld that has completely melted in the process of making it; contains filler metal and base
metal components.
Direct Analysis Method — Design method for stability that accounts for the effects of residual stresses and initial
deflection from verticality in a frame, by reducing stiffness and applying fictitious loads in a second-order analysis .
Deformation compatibility method — In a composite section, method to determine the stresses considering for each
material its respective stress-strain relationship and its location with respect to the neutral axis of the cross section.
Nut Twist Method — A high-strength bolt installation procedure in which the specified prestress load is obtained by
applying, from the snug-tight condition, a twist of a specified magnitude to the portion of the connector to be broken.
Plastic Method of Stress Distribution — For composite section members, a method by which the stresses are determined
assuming fully plastic behavior of the steel profile and concrete in cross section.
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Member — Profile manufactured by press bending or roll forming from strips of sheet cut
from rolls or sheets. In both cases, the bending process is carried out at room temperature, that is, without the application
of heat.
Parent Member — For PTE connections, is a column, truss chord, or other PTE element to which branch members or
other elements are connected.
Branch Member — For PTE connections, a member that connects to a parent member.
Framed Members or Shapes — Members or shapes fabricated from structural steel members that are bolted or welded
together.
Effective Section Modulus — Reduced section modulus to account for buckling of slender members in compression.
F-10
Yield Moment — For a member stressed by bending, the value of the moment for which the yield stress is reached at the
extreme fiber
Plastic Moment — The resisting moment that theoretically develops in a cross section with all its fibers in yielding.
Shear Wall — A wall that, in its own plane, provides the structural system with stability and resistance to lateral loads.
Buckling — Limit state of sudden change in the geometry of a structure, or one of its components, under a critical load
condition.
Web buckling — Limit state of lateral instability of the web.
Web compression buckling — Limit state of out-of-plane web buckling under compressive stresses due to a concentrated
compressive load.
Out-of-plane buckling —Limit state of a column beam flexed about its major axis and subjected to lateral or torsional
buckling in a section without lateral bracing.
Lateral Buckling of Web — For beams with concentrated loads, limit state of lateral buckling of the flange in tension
opposite the point of application of a concentrated compressive load.
Lateral-torsional buckling — A mode of buckling of a member stressed by bending in which displacement normal to the
plane of bending and twisting about the center of shear of the cross section occur simultaneously.
Local Buckling — Limit state consisting of the buckling of an element of a cross section when it is stressed by compression.
Shear Buckling — A mode of buckling in which a shell member, such as a beam web, deforms under pure shear applied
in the plane of the shell.
Flexural Buckling — A mode of buckling in which a member in compression deflects laterally without twisting or change
in cross-sectional shape.
Flexural-torsional buckling — A mode of buckling in which a compression member simultaneously flexes and twists
without a change in cross-sectional shape.
Torsional Buckling — A mode of buckling in which a compression member is twisted about an axis through its center of
shear.
End Panel — A web panel that only has an adjacent panel on one side.
Pitch — Longitudinal center-to-center spacing of two consecutive boreholes. Center-to-center spacing between threads
along the length of a bolt.
Nominal depth of the rib — Dimension of the metal deck taken from the exterior of its upper and lower elements
Structural Hollow Section (STE) — A hollow section of structural steel, square, rectangular, or circular in shape, produced
in accordance with a specification for tubular products.
Veneer plate — Reinforcing plate attached to the web of a beam or column to increase its resistance to concentrated
loads.
Yield — in a PTE connection, a limit state associated with an out-of-plane bending mechanism that occurs on the face of
the main member to which a branch member is connected.
Diaphragm Plate — Plate with rigidity and shear resistance in its plane, used to transfer forces to supporting elements.
F-11
Filler Plate — Plate used to supplement the thickness of an element.
Percent Elongation — A measure of ductility, determined as the ratio of maximum elongation to original length in a tensile
test.
Braced Frame — Vertical reinforcement that provides stability and resistance against lateral loads to the structural system
of which it is a part.
Gravity Loading Frame — Portion of the structure that is not part of the lateral load resisting system.
Moment Resisting Frame — Frame system that provides stability and resistance to lateral loads primarily through internal
shear and bending forces in members and connections.
Clip — Plate that is rigidly connected to two parallel components of an assembled column or beam and is designed to
transmit shear between such components.
Active Protection — Building materials and systems that are activated by fire to mitigate adverse effects or alert people
to take action to mitigate adverse effects.
Passive protection — Construction materials and systems that have the property of resisting the effects of fire without
requiring external activation mechanisms.
V-Groove Charpy Impact Test — Standard dynamic test for measuring the groove toughness of a specimen.
Yield Point — For a material, the stress value beyond which the strain continues to increase without the stress value
increasing.
Welded joint root — Zone of a joint where the elements to be welded are closest to each other.
Stress Range — Difference between the maximum and minimum stresses produced by the repeated application and
removal of service live loads. Where stress reversal occurs, it is taken as the numerical sum of the maximum tension and
compression stresses.
Design Stress Range — Maximum allowable value of the stress range for fatigue design purposes.
Fillet Weld Reinforcement — A fillet weld used to reinforce a groove weld.
Properly Developed Reinforcement — Detailed reinforcing bars to flow ductilely before concrete crushing occurs. The
bars that comply with the provisions of Title C of this Regulation in relation to development lengths, separation and covers
will be considered adequately developed.
Transverse reinforcement — In a composite section, steel reinforcement in the form of closed stirrups or mesh whose
function is to confine the concrete surrounding the coated steel profile.
Corner Cap — The extension of a fillet weld around a corner in the same plane.
Breaking strength — In a connection, limited strength by breakage in tension or shear.
Tensile Strength of a Member — Maximum tensile force that a member is capable of withstanding.
Material Tensile Strength — Maximum tensile stress that the material is capable of withstanding.
Specified Minimum Tensile Strength — Specified lower limit for the tensile strength of a material.
Fire resistance — Property of systems that allows them to prevent or retard the excessive passage of heat, hot gases, or
flames under conditions of use and still fulfill the required function.
F-12
Buckling resistance — Nominal resistance for the limit states of buckling or instability.
Design resistance — Result of multiplying the nominal resistance, Rn , by the corresponding resistance reduction
coefficient ÿ .
Connector Strength — The limit state at which a connector reaches its strength, governed by the crush of the connector
against the concrete of the slab or by the tensile strength of the connector material.
Nominal Resistance — Resistance of a structure or component to address the effects of loads, calculated in accordance
with this Chapter, before multiplying by the resistance reduction coefficient.
Postbuckling Resistance — Load or force that can be resisted by an element, member, or structure after initial buckling
has occurred.
Required Strength — Forces and stresses acting on a structural component, obtained from structural analysis for
applicable load combinations.
Required Fire Resistance — A measure of the length of time a material or system continues to show resistance against
fire.
Stiffness — Resistance of a member or structure to being deformed, measured by the relationship between the applied
force (or moment) and the corresponding displacement (or rotation).
Stiffness to Soul Distortion — Stiffness of the soul to bending out of its plane.
Tight Bearing Stiffener — A stiffener that coincides with a bearing or concentrated load and fits closely against one or
both beam flanges so that the load is transmitted by bearing.
Diagonal Stiffener — Web stiffener in the column panel area, oriented diagonally from the flanges, on one or both sides
of the web.
Transverse Stiffener — Web stiffener, connected to the web and oriented perpendicular to the flanges.
Stiffener — Structural element, usually an angle or plate, that is incorporated into a member to distribute load, transfer
shear, or prevent buckling.
Diagonal Brace — In a braced frame, an inclined structural member that is primarily stressed by axial loading.
Nodal Brace — A brace that prevents lateral displacement or twist without relying on other bracing elements at adjacent
points. (See relative brace)
Relative Brace — A brace that controls the relative offset between two adjacent bracing points along a beam or column,
or the relative lateral offset between two stories of a frame (see nodal brace).
Plastic Hinge — Yield zone formed in a section of a structural member when the plastic moment is reached such that, for
additional loads, that section is considered to act as a hinge.
Tension failure — Limit state of failure due to tensile stress.
Shear failure — Limit state of failure due to shear forces.
Block Tear Failure — In a connection, a limit state involving tension failure along one line(s) of stress and creep or shear
failure along another line(s) of stress. efforts.
Tension and Shear Failure — For a bolt, the limit state of failure due to the simultaneous action of tension and shear
forces.
F-13
Compact Section —Section that is capable of fully developing a plastic stress distribution and possesses a rotational
capacity of approximately 3.0 before local buckling occurs.
Section with slender elements —Cross section that includes shell elements of slenderness great enough for local
buckling to occur in the elastic range.
Noncompact Section — Section whose compression members can reach yield stress before local buckling occurs,
without developing a rotational capacity of 3.0.
Combined System — Structure comprising two or more different lateral load resistance systems.
Vertical Bracing System — A system of shear walls, braced frames, or both, that extends over one to several stories of
a building.
Structural system — An assembly of load-bearing components connected together in such a way that they act
interdependently.
Lateral Load Resisting System — Structural system designed to resist lateral loads and provide stability to the structure
as a whole.
Undercut — A relatively smooth groove or cavity in the surface of a weld, caused by plastic deformation or material
removal.
Groove Weld — A weld applied in a groove generated between connected elements. See AWS D1.1.
Full Penetration Groove Weld — A groove weld in which the weld metal extends through the full thickness of the joint,
except under special considerations permitted in PTE connections.
Partial Penetration Groove Weld —A groove weld in which the penetration is intentionally less than the full thickness of
the connected element.
Convex Half-V Groove Weld — A weld in a groove formed by the curved surface of a member and a flat surface to which
it connects.
Convex V-groove Weld — A weld in a groove formed between the curved surfaces of two members.
Fillet Weld — A weld of generally triangular section that joins two intersecting or overlapping surfaces.
Groove Weld — A weld that connects two overlapping members by depositing filler metal in an elongated hole or groove
made in one of them.
Plug weld — A weld that connects two overlapping elements by depositing filler metal in a circular hole made in one of
them.
Planed Surface — A surface that has been machined to a smooth, flat surface.
Contact surface — Contact surface of connecting elements that transmit a shear force.
Metal deck — In composite construction, a cold-formed sheet with a suitable profile to function as a permanent concrete
form.
Elevated Temperatures — Conditions of heating experienced by a building structure or elements as a result of a fire that
are greater than normal ambient conditions.
Material Groove Toughness — Ability of the material to absorb energy at a given temperature, obtained with the V-
groove Charpy impact test.
F-14
Convective heat transfer — Transfer of thermal energy from a point of higher temperature to a point of lower temperature
through the movement of a medium.
Heat Transfer Rate — Rate at which thermal energy is generated in a burning material.
Beam — Structural element basically requested by bending moments.
Beam-column — Structural element requested simultaneously by axial forces and bending moments.
Panel Zone — The region of the web bounded by the extensions of the beam and column flanges in a beam-to-column
connection.
F.2.1.3 – NOMENCLATURE
ABM = cross-sectional area of base metal, mm² = for spaced

Ab double angles with welded connectors, connector area, mm2
Ab = nominal area, before threading, of a bolt or threaded part mm2
Abi = cross-sectional area of the lapping branch in a lapped connection, mm2
Abj = cross-sectional area of the overlapping branch, mm2
And = area of concrete, mm2
And = for a concrete slab, the area of the section included within the effective width, mm2
But = effective net area, mm2
But = sum of the effective areas of the elements of the cross section, calculated based on
the reduced effective widths, be , = mm2
Afc compression flange area, mm2
Afg = gross area of flange in tension, mm2
Afn = net area of fin in tension, mm2
Aft = fin area in tension, mm2
At = gross area of the member, mm2
At = gross area of a composite section, mm2
Agv = gross area subjected to shear, mm2
Ai = for spaced double angles with welded connectors, area of one angle, mm2
An = net area of a member, mm2
An = area of directly connected elements
Ant = net area subjected to stress, mm2

Anv = net area subjected to shear, mm2
Apb = area of support in projection, mm2
As = cross-sectional area of a steel profile, mm2
Asc = cross-sectional area of a headed barbed steel connector, mm2
Acp = cross-sectional area of a bolt-type steel connector, mm2
Asf = shear area for the failure path, mm2
Asr = area of continuous reinforcing bars, mm2
Asr = area of properly developed longitudinal reinforcing steel within the effective width of the concrete slab, mm2
At = net area at stress, mm2

Well = area of the web, product of the depth of a section by the thickness of the web, dtw , mm2
Awe = effective area of a weld, mm² = effective
Awe area in the plane of the throat for element "i" of a weld, mm2
A1 = area of concrete on which a load is applied, mm²
F-15
A1 = area of steel that is supported concentrically on a concrete base, mm² = maximum area of a zone
A2 of the support surface geometrically similar and concentric with the
loaded area, mm2
B = total width of a member in rectangular PTE, measured perpendicular to the plane of the connection,
mm
B = total width of a rectangular section, measured on the face on which the load is transferred, mm = total width of a
Bb rectangular PTE branch, measured at 90° to the plane of the connection, mm = total width of the overlapping
Bbi branch, mm = total width of the overlapped
BB branch, mm = width of a plate, measured at 90°
Bp to the plane of the connection, mm = coefficients used to determine Mu , based
B1 , B2 on the results of a first order analysis, when there is a combination bending and axial force. B1 takes into account the effects
P ÿ ÿ and B2
takes into account P ÿ ÿ effects .
C = torsional constant of a PTE
Cb = modification factor for lateral-torsional buckling, applicable when the diagram of
moments on the beam segment between two braced points = coefficient that relates the
Cd stiffness of a relative bracing to the curvature of the beam = constant from Table F.2.17.1, for the stress
Cf category under consideration = coefficient associated with a condition without lateral translation
Cm of the frame = for ponding analysis, coefficient of flexibility for main members in a
Cp roof
flat =
Cr constant for lateral buckling of the web = coefficient
Cs of embedment flexibility for main members in a flat roof = coefficient of shear in the web = constant of warpage,
Cv
mm6
Cw
C1 = coefficient for calculating the effective stiffness of a profile-type composite member clad a
compression
C3 = coefficient for calculating the effective stiffness of a compression-filled profile composite member = nominal dead load =
D outside diameter of a circular
D PTE, mm = outside diameter of a branch in a circular
Db PTE, mm = for slip-critical connections, a factor that reflects
Of the relationship between the average value of the

tension in the installed bolts and the specified minimum pretension for them
AND = modulus of elasticity of steel = 200,000 MPa
1.5
Ec modulus of elasticity of concrete = 0.043w fÿ
c
= c
,
MPa
Ec(T) = modulus of elasticity of concrete at elevated temperatures, MPa

= modulus of elasticity of steel = 200,000 MPa
Is
E(T) = modulus of elasticity of steel at elevated temperatures, MPa = effective
EIeff stiffness of a composite section, N mm2

Fca = design resistance to axial forces at the point under consideration, MPa
Fcbw , Fcbz = design resistance to flexural stresses at the point under consideration, MPa = critical stress,
MPa
Fcr = critical lateral torsional buckling stress for the section, determined analytically, MPa
Fcr = critical bending stress about the "y" axis ,
MPa
Fcry = critical stress for torsion buckling, MPa

Fcrz
FEXX= filler metal rating strength, MPa
= elastic buckling stress, MPa
Fe =
Fe(T) elastic buckling stress at elevated temperatures, MPa
F-16
Fex = elastic flexural buckling stress about the major axis, MPa = elastic flexural buckling
Fey stress about the axis of symmetry, MPa
Fey = elastic buckling stress due to bending about the minor axis, MPa
He did = elastic buckling stress due to torsion, MPa.F.2.5.4 = nominal

END bond strength per unit area, 0.40 MPa = value of flexural stress in the
FL compression flange used to determine the nominal strength for limit states local buckling of the flange and torsional lateral
buckling, MPa = nominal resistance per unit area, MPa = nominal resistance to tension per unit area, Fnt ,
Fn or to shear per unit area, Fnv , given in
Fn
Table F.2.10.3-2, MPa =

FnBM nominal strength of base metal per unit area, MPa = nominal tensile
Ft strength per unit area, from Table F.2.10.3-2, MPa = nominal tensile strength per unit area,
Fntÿ modified to include stress effects
shear, MPa
Fnv = nominal shear strength per unit area, from Table F.2.10.3-2, MPa = nominal weld metal
Fnw strength per unit area, MPa = nominal weld metal strength per unit area, sin increase
Fnw due to
directionality, MPa
Fnwi = nominal resistance per unit area in the ith element of the weld, MPa = component "x" of the nominal
Fnwix resistance Fnwi , MPa
Fnwiy = component "y" of the nominal resistance Fnwi , MPa
Fp(T) = limit of proportionality at elevated temperatures, MPa
FSR = design stress range, MPa = threshold stress

FTH range, maximum stress range for which a service life is allowed
indefinite. See table F.2.16.1, MPa
It was = specified minimum tensile strength, MPa = specified
Fu(T) minimum tensile strength of steel at elevated temperatures, MPa = specified minimum yield stress,
My MPa. In Chapter F.2, "yield stress" denotes either the specified minimum yield point (for those steels that have a yield point)
or the specified minimum yield strength (for steels that do not have a yield point). ) specified minimum yield stress of
the branch material in PTE, MPa.
Fyb =
Fybi = Specified Minimum Yield Stress of Lapping Leg Material, MPa
Fybj = Specified Minimum Yield Stress of Lapped Leg Material, MPa
Five = Specified minimum yield stress for flange, MPa Specified minimum
Phyp = yield stress of plate, MPa Specified minimum yield stress for
Fysr = reinforcing bars, Specified minimum yield stress of stiffener material MPa, Specified
Fist = minimum yield stress of stiffener material, MPa Specified minimum yield stress of
Fy(T) = stiffener steel at elevated temperatures, MPa
Live = specified minimum yield stress for web, MPa

G = steel shear modulus of elasticity = 77200 MPa = for ponding study
G purposes only, nominal load due to rainwater or hail, not including the contribution of ponding itself, MPa
G = nominal hail load = floor shear,

H in the direction of the considered translation, resulting from the lateral loads used
to calculate ÿH ,
N
H = depth of a member in rectangular PTE, measured in the plane of the connection, mm = depth of a
Hb branch in rectangular PTE, measured in the plane of the connection, mm = depth of the branch
Hbi that overlaps, mm
F-17
I = moment of inertia about the bending axis, mm4

bI = for spaced double angles with welded connectors, moment of inertia of the connector
associated with bending in the plane of the two connected angles, mm4
Ic = moment of inertia of the concrete section taken about the elastic neutral axis of the section
composite, mm4
Of = moment of inertia (per meter) of the metal deck that rests on the secondary members,
mm4
pI = moment of inertia of the main members, mm4
I s = moment of inertia of secondary members, mm4
I s = moment of inertia of the steel profile with respect to the elastic neutral axis of the composite section,
mm4
I sr = moment of inertia of the reinforcing bars with respect to the elastic neutral axis of the section
composite, mm4
I
st = moment of inertia of the transverse stiffeners, calculated about an axis through the center of the web for paired
stiffeners, or about an axis along the line of contact with the web for single stiffeners, mm4
I
st1 = minimum required moment of inertia of transverse stiffeners to develop strength
of the web to shear buckling in accordance with numeral F.2.7.2.2, mm4
I
st2 = minimum moment of inertia required of the transverse stiffeners to develop the resistance of the web to shear
= mm4
buckling plus the resistance due to action of the tension field, VV r c2 ,
xI , yI = moments of inertia about the principal axes, mm4

I
and
= moment of inertia for bending out of plane, mm4
I
yc = moment of inertia of the compression flange about the "y" axis , = moment mm4
I With of inertia for the minor principal axis, mm4 = torsional
J constant, mm4
K = effective length factor =
K x effective length factor for flexural buckling about the "x" axis
K
and = effective length factor for flexural buckling about the "y" axis
Kz = effective length factor for torsion buckling = effective
At length factor in the bending plane, calculated assuming no lateral translation; should be taken as 1.0 unless
analysis indicates a lower value can be used
L = story factor, mm =
L length of a member, mm = nominal
L live load = unbraced
L length of a member in the plane in which buckling is considered, mm = length of a span, mm =
L length of a member measured
L between the work points on the axis of the main member of the
armor, mm
Lb = unbraced length, between two points that are braced either against lateral displacement of the compression
flange or against torsion of the cross section, mm = for spaced double angles with welded connectors,
Lb connector length measured between the centroids of angles, mm = greatest distance without lateral bracing for
any of the flanges at the point of
Lb application of the
load, mm
Lt = free distance, in the direction of the force, between the edge of the perforation considered and the edge of
the adjacent perforation or the edge of the material, mm
Lm = maximum length without lateral bracing for which redistribution of
moments in beams according to F.2.2.3.7
Lp = maximum length without lateral bracing for which the limit state of
yielding (plastic moment) under the uniform moment condition, mm = length of
Lp main members, m
F-18
Lpd = maximum laterally unbraced length for which a plastic analysis can be performed, mm
Lr = maximum unbraced length for which the limit state of lateral buckling is reached
inelastic range, mm = length of
Ls secondary members, m = distance between points
Lv of maximum shear and zero shear, mm = absolute value of moment at quarter length of
AND segment between points
braced, N mm
MB = absolute value of the moment at the midpoint of the segment between braced points,
N·mm
MC = absolute value of the moment at three quarters of the length of the segment between points
braced, N mm
Mcx , Mcy = design flexural resistance calculated according to F.2.6, N mm Mcx
= design resistance to bending about the major axis for the limit state of torsional lateral buckling,
determined according to F.2.6 using C 1.0
b
= ,
N·mm
Mcx = design resistance to bending about the major axis for the limit state of failure of the flange in tension,
N·mm
Me = elastic lateral-torsional buckling moment, N mm = moment
Mlt associated with frame lateral displacement only, obtained from an analysis of
first order, N mm
Mmax = absolute value of the maximum moment in the segment between braced points, N mm = moment at the midpoint
mmid of the unbraced length, N mm = nominal flexural resistance, N mm = moment
Mn obtained from a first order analysis assuming
Mnt no lateral translation of the
frame, N mm =
Mp plastic moment, N mm = moment
Mp corresponding to a plastic distribution of stresses over the cross section

composite, N mm
Mr = required flexural strength, N mm = required
Mr flexural strength by second order analysis, N mm = moment restraint that the bracing
Hi must be able to provide, N mm = required in-plane flexural strength for a PTS branch, N·mm =
Mr ip ÿ required flexural resistance out of plane for a PTS branch, N·mm = required flexural
Mr on ÿ resistance in a section containing perforations; positive when the fin in
Mrx
consideration is in tension, negative when in compression, N mm = required
In flexural strength, N mm = moment
My corresponding to extreme fiber yield, without considering residual stresses,
for each bending axis, N mm
Myc = moment corresponding to the yield of the extreme fiber in compression, N mm
Myth = moment corresponding to the yield of the extreme fiber in tension, N mm
Ml
ÿ
= effective moment at the end of the unsupported length opposite M2 , N mm
Ml = lowest magnitude extreme moment over the unbraced length in the low bending plane
consideration, N mm
M2 = extreme moment of greatest magnitude over the unbraced length in the low bending plane
consideration, N mm =
In additional lateral load, N =
applied fictitious lateral load at level i = overlap N
In ,
Ov ratio at a connection = critical elastic buckling

On load calculated according to F.2.3 or F.2.21, N
F-19
Pev = critical elastic buckling load for buckling about the weak axis, N = critical elastic buckling load
For of the member in the bending plane, N = axial force obtained from a first-order analysis,
Plt associated with the lateral displacement of the frame
only, N
Pmf = for one story, total vertical load in the columns that are part of the frames resistant to
moment in the direction of translation under consideration, N
Pn = nominal resistance to axial force, N = nominal
Pn resistance to compression, N = axial force obtained
Pnt from a first order analysis, restraining lateral displacements, N = nominal resistance for loads supported directly on the concrete, N
Pp
Pr = external applied load required to be transferred between steel and concrete in a composite section member, N
Prb = required resistance of the bracing, N = for PTE

Pro construction, required resistance to axial load for a main member in a connection, on the side of the connection where the least
compressive stress occurs, N = required resistance to axial load in the member main for PTE construction, N =
Could required compressive strength, N = resistance of a member to yield under axial load, N = total reduction factor for a
Could section having slender compression-stressed
Py elements = reduction factor for a section, associated with slender stiffened
Q members = design strength in tension, N

Qa
Qct
Qcv = design shear resistance, N

Qf = stress interaction parameter in a main member at PTS = nominal resistance of a headed or
Qn channel-type connector, N = nominal resistance to tension of a headed-type connector, N = nominal
qnt shear resistance of a headed-type connector headed dowel, N = required tensile strength, N =
Qnv required shear strength, N = reduction factor for a section, associated with slender unstiffened
Qrt members = coefficient of modification of the
Qrv seismic response = radius of the surface at a
Qs joint, mm = reduction factor for joints where only one pair of transverse fillet welds is used = coefficient that
R takes into account the group effect for connectors
R
RFIL
Rg
RM = coefficient that takes into account the influence of P ÿ ÿ effects on P ÿ ÿ effects

Rm = parameter of monosymmetry of the cross section = nominal resistance,
Rn specified in F.2.2 to F.2.11 = nominal resistance for the slip limit state, N = total nominal
Rn resistance of longitudinally loaded fillet welds, determined from
Rnw1
according to table F.2.10.2-5, N

Runt = total nominal strength of transversely loaded fillet welds, determined from
according to table F.2.10.2-5 without applying the alternative of numeral F.2.10.2.4(a), N
Rnx = horizontal component of the nominal resistance of a group of welds, N = vertical component of the
Rny nominal resistance of a group of welds, N
Rp = factor that takes into account the effect of position for a connector = web yielding factor
Rpc
Rpg = bending strength reduction factor
RPJP = reduction factor for reinforced or unreinforced partial penetration groove welds,
transverse to the direction of stress
F-20
Rpt = plasticity factor of the web corresponding to the yield limit state of the flange in tension
Ru = required resistance =
S elastic section modulus, mm3
S = spacing of secondary members, m = elastic modulus
Sc for edge in compression, relative to bending axis, mm3
Se = effective section modulus for the major axis, mm3
Sip = effective elastic section modulus of welds for in-plane bending, mm3
Smin = smallest modulus of elastic section relative to the bending axis, mm3
Sop = effective elastic section modulus of welds for out-of-plane bending, mm3
Sxt = modulus of elastic section referred to the tension fin, mm³
Sxc = modulus of elastic section referred to the compression fin, mm³ mm3
Sx = elastic modulus of section about the x axis = elastic ,
Sy modulus of section about the y axis . For one channel, the minimum section modulus, mm3
T = nominal forces and deformations due to design fire = minimum bolt stress
Tb given in tables F.2.10.3-1 and F.2.10.3-1M, kN = nominal torsional resistance, N mm
Tn = required torsional resistance , N mm =
Tr tensile force due to factored load combinations,
That kN = reduction factor due to shear lag = utilization ratio
IN
IN
Ubs = reduction coefficient used in the calculation of the resistance to rupture by tearing in
block
Up = embedment stress index for main members
Us = Ponding stress index for secondary members = Design shear resistance,
Vc N = the lesser of the design shear
Vcl resistances in adjacent web panels, with Vn
defined in numeral F.2.7.2.1, N
Vc2 = the lesser of the design shear resistances in adjacent web panels, with Vn
defined in numeral F.2.7.3.2, N
Vn = nominal shear resistance, N = the
Vr greater of the required shear resistances in adjacent panels, N = required shear resistance, N
Vr = shear force to be transferred by
connectors, N = gravity load applied to level i in the combination
ÿ
Vr
Do of corresponding load, N = plastic section modulus about the bending axis, mm3
WITH
Zb = plastic section modulus of the branch in PTS with respect to the bending axis, mm3 =
Zx plastic section modulus around the x- axis = plastic mm3 ,
Zy section modulus around the y- axis , = free distance mm3

a between transverse stiffeners, mm = distance between
a connectors in a member assembled, mm = shortest distance between
a the edge of the pin hole and the edge of the member, measured parallel to the direction of force, mm = half the length
of the unwelded root face, measured in the
a thickness direction from deck to
tension, mm.
of = ratio between twice the area of the compression web area when only one bending moment is applied about the
major axis, and the area of the compression flange components
aÿ = length of weld along both edges from end of cover plate to beam, mm = width of compression flange, mm
b
F-21
b = for I -section flanges ,

half the total width of the wing, bf ; for channel fins, the
nominal overall width of flange, mm =
b overall width of largest flange in an angle, mm = width of a
b compression stiffened or non-stiffened member, mm = width of flange resisting
b shear, mm = width of flange of a column, mm = reduced effective
bcf width for a member, mm = for pin-connected
be tension members, the effective edge distance for calculating
be the
breaking strength, mm
beoi = effective width of face of PTS branch welded directly to main member, mm = effective width of face of overlapping
beov PTS branch welded to overlapping branch, mm = width of flange, mm
bf
bfc = width of flange in compression, mm = width

bft of flange in tension, mm = length of major
bl flange of an angle profile, mm = length of minor flange of an
bs angle profile, mm = width of a stiffener, for stiffeners placed on
bs one side of the web only, mm = nominal diameter of a bolt, mm = depth of a section, mm = nominal depth
d of a T section = depth of a rectangular bar,
d mm = width of a dowel, mm = depth
d of a beam, mm = nominal diameter of a bolt in mm ,
d the non-threaded part, mm = depth of a column,

d mm = eccentricity in a truss
db connection, positive away from
db the legs, mm = distance between the edge of the shank of a connector
dc dowel type with head and web of
It is metal deck, taken at half the depth of the rib and in the direction of the force exerted by the connector (i.e.,
e mid ht ÿ
in the direction of the maximum moment for a simply supported beam), mm
= specified minimum compressive strength for the concrete, MPa = stress produced
cfÿ of by the load combination D G+ (rated dead load + rated load per
rain or hail, not including the effect of waterlogging), MPa = required
f day resistance to axial forces at the point under consideration, MPa = required resistance to
ffrbz
rbw , flexural forces at a specific point of the cross section, MPa = compressive strength for concrete at elevated
ÿ
fcm temperatures, MPa = required shear resistance per unit area, MPa = center-to-center
vf transverse spacing between gauge lines, mm = spacing between legs,
g measured on the face of the main member in a K- connection with
g
spacing, not taking into account welds, mm

= width of a compression element, mm = factor of a
shear element, mm = for rolled sections, twice
hh hc the distance from the center of gravity of the section to the inside face of the compression flange minus the fillet or radius of
the corner; for reinforced profiles, twice the distance from the center of gravity of the section to the nearest line of
connectors or to the inside face of the compression flange when welds are used, mm
= distance between fin centroids, mm = twice the

hp _ distance from the plastic neutral axis to the nearest line of connectors on the
compression flange or to the inside face of the compression flange when welding is used, mm = nominal rib factor,
hr mm = distance from the outside face of the
k flange to the toe of the fillet on the web, mm = coefficient for elements not stiff slender, mm
kc
F-22
ksc = coefficient for combined tension and shear in a slip-critical connection = web buckling coefficient in shear =
sq length of connection in direction of load, mm = length of
l support, mm = length of channel connector, mm = length total
l effective groove and fillet welds
b
l
c to rectangular PTE, for weld strength calculation
l purposes, mm = length of the overlap between two legs, projected to the connection face on the member
It is
l
ov
main, measured on this face, mm = projected

l length of the branch that overlaps the chord, mm = for spaced double angles with
p
n welded connectors, shape factor for deformations due to

cutting
n = number of nodal bracing points within the span = number of bolts supporting
nb the applied stress = number of planes on which friction must be
ns overcome for slip to occur
in connection
nSR = number of charging cycles during the service life
p = pitch, mm per thread =
pi ratio between the deformation of element i and its deformation under maximum stress = radius of gyration
r associated with the considered buckling mode, mm = distance from the
r cr instantaneous center of rotation to the weld element with the minimum
ratio ÿ r ui ,
mm
r = minimum radius of gyration of an individual component of an assembled member, mm = distance from
i
r
i the instantaneous center of rotation to the i -th weld element, mm
or = polar radius of gyration about the center of shear, mm = effective radius
rt of gyration for lateral buckling, calculated as the radius of gyration about the " y" axis of the flexural compression flange
components plus one-third of the area of the web working in compression when only one bending moment is applied about
the major axis, mm = effective radius of gyration used in the calculation of Lr for the limit state of lateral-
r
ts torsional buckling under bending about the major axis, in I -sections of compact section and double symmetry and in profiles in
channel of compact section = radius of gyration around the "x" axis
xr
xr = radius of gyration around the geometric axis parallel to the attached blade, mm = radius of
the gyration around the "y" axis , mm
zr = radius of gyration for the minor principal axis of an angle profile, mm = center-to-
s
center longitudinal spacing (pitch) of two consecutive holes, mm = thickness of an element, mm = wall thickness,
t mm = thickness of the flange of a
t Angular profile, mm = width of
t the rectangular bar (parallel to the bending axis), mm =
t thickness of the connected material, mm = thickness of the plate, mm = design
t thickness of the wall for structural hollow sections
t (STE), equal to 0.93 times the
t nominal thickness for pipe manufactured by the electric resistance welding process, and equal to the nominal thickness when
using the submerged arc process, mm
t = total thickness of the infill plates, mm = design thickness

bt of the wall of a branch in PTE, mm = thickness of the overlapping branch,
I'm
sorry mm = thickness of the overlapping branch, mm
t
bj
t = thickness of the fin of a column, mm = thickness of

cf
t
f the fin, mm
F-23
tf = for the local bending limit state in the flange, thickness of the loaded flange, mm = thickness of the
tf flange of a channel connector, mm = thickness of the flange in
t
fc compression, mm = thickness of a plate, mm
pt
pt = thickness of a plate in tension, mm
t st = thickness of a web stiffener, mm = thickness of the
wt web, mm = minimum effective
wt throat of the weld around a branch or plate, mm = thickness of the web of a channel connector, mm
wt = width of a cover plate, mm = size of a fillet, mm = subscript

In relative to bending around the main major
In axis = width of a plate, mm = size
In of a reinforcing or contour fillet, in the thickness direction of a plate in tension,
In mm = weight of concrete per unit
In volume (1500 w 2500 ) kg/m3
wc ÿ ÿc =
wr average width of the capital or concrete rib, mm = subscript relative to
x bending about the major axis = "x" component of = coordinates of
x
i the center of shear measured r i mm ,
x
o , the
and
from the centroid, mm = eccentricity of the connection, mm = subscript relative to bending
x about minor axis = "y" component of =
and subscript relative to bending about major minor axis = spacing ratio
iy for compression assembled r

i ,
mm
With
members h 2rib
a
b = reduction factor for longitudinal fillet welds = ratio of widths; ratio of branch
b diameter to main member diameter for circular PTEs; ratio of full width of branch to full width of main member for rectangular PTEs
= total stiffness of the bracing, N·mm/radian = required stiffness of the bracing, N/mm = ratio of effective widths; the sum of
the perimeters
TV of the two branches in a K connection
b br
b eff
divided by eight times the width of the main member

b eop = effective outer punching parameter = web distortional
b sec stiffness, including the effect of transverse stiffeners, N mm/radian = required torsional stiffness of a nodal bracing, N mm/
ÿTb radian = section property for angle profiles of uneven fins, positive when fin a
wÿ
compression is the short flange and negative when the compression flange is the long flange
D = first-order story drift due to design loads, mm = story drift due to lateral loads,
ÿH obtained from a first-order analysis, mm = deformation of weld elements at intermediate stress levels, linearly
ÿi proportional to the critical deformation based on the distance from the instantaneous center of rotation,
r
i ,
mm
ÿmi = deformation of a weld element for the maximum stress, mm = deformation of a weld element
ÿui for the ultimate stress (break), which usually occurs
at the element most distant from the instantaneous center of rotation, mm
c = slenderness ratio of the main member wall; ratio of half diameter to wall thickness for a circular PTE; ratio of half width to wall
thickness for a rectangular PTE
g = separation ratio; ratio of the spacing between the branches of the K connection to the width of the
principal member = g B for a rectangular PTE
F-24
the = load length parameter, applicable only to rectangular PTEs; equal to the ratio between the contact length of
the branch with the main member, in the plane of the connection, and the width of the main member =
slenderness
l parameter = limit
p slenderness parameter for a compact element
l = limit slenderness parameter for plastic design = limit
pd
k
pf slenderness parameter for a compact flange = limit
l slenderness parameter for a compact web
pw
l r
= limit slenderness parameter for a non-compact element = limit
ÿ rf slenderness parameter for a non-compact flange = limit
l rw
slenderness parameter for a non-compact web = average
m coefficient of friction for Class A or B surfaces, as applicable, or as obtained by
essays
Phi = resistance reduction coefficient according to numerals F.2.2 to F.2.11 =
Bf resistance reduction coefficient for support on concrete = resistance
f b
reduction coefficient for bending = resistance reduction
Phic
coefficient for compression = resistance reduction coefficient
Phic
for columns of axially loaded composite sections = coefficient of resistance reduction for headed spigot
Phi s
connectors stressed by tension = coefficient of resistance reduction for shear over failure path = coefficient of
Phi sf
resistance reduction for torsion = coefficient of resistance reduction for tension =
Tel coefficient of resistance reduction for shear = coefficient
_t of resistance reduction for headed spigot connectors
Phi in
requested by
Phi in
shear =
r sr
minimum amount for longitudinal reinforcement
st ÿ = the greater of FF and 1.0angle
yw yst =
i of load application, measured from the longitudinal axis of the weld, degrees = acute angle
ÿ between branch and main member, degrees = angle of
ÿi application of the load, measured from the longitudinal axis of the i -th element of the
weld, degrees =
bt bending stiffness reduction parameter using direct analysis method
F.2.1.4 — SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND REFERENCE STANDARDS — This Chapter refers to the following
specifications, codes and standards, in addition to the other chapters of this Regulation:
Colombian Institute of Technical Standards (ICONTEC)
• Code of Standard Practices for Metallic Structures, Colombian Technical Standard ICONTEC
ASTM International (ASTM)
• A6/A6M-09 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat Bars, Plates, Profiles and Sheet Piling
structural steel laminates.
• A36/A36M-08 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. • A53/
A53M-07 Standard Specification for Steel Pipe, Black and Hot-Dipped Galvanized,
welded or seamless.
• A193/A193M-08b Standard Specification for Alloy Steels and Stainless Steels for Bolts with Service Conditions at
Elevated Temperatures or High Pressures and Other Special Applications. • A194/
A194M-09 Standard specification for nuts in carbon and alloy steels, to be used with bolts subjected to high service
pressures or high temperatures, or both.
F-25
• A216/A216M-08 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Castings, Suitable for Fusion Welding,
For service at elevated temperatures.
• A242/A242M-04(2009) Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel. • A283/A283M-03(2007) Standard Specification
for Low and Intermediate Carbon Steel Plate
tensile strength.
• A307-07b Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Dowels, Tensile Strength 60,000
psi.
• A325-09 Standard Specification for Steel Structural Bolts, Heat Treated, with a Minimum Tensile Strength of 120/105 ksi.
• A325M-09 Standard Specification for Structural Steel Bolts, Heat Treated, Strength
minimum tensile strength of 830 MPa (metric version).
• A354-07a Standard Specification for Bolts, Spigots, and Other Externally Threaded Connectors in Alloy Steel
Hardened and tempered.
• A370-09 Standard test methods and definitions for mechanical tests of steel products. • A449-07b Standard Specification for Steel
Hex Head Screws, Bolts, and Dowels, Treated
thermally, with a minimum tensile strength of 120/105/90 ksi, for general applications.
• A490-08b Standard Specification for Structural Bolts of Heat-Treated Alloy Steels, with
minimum tensile strength of 150 ksi.
• A490M-08 Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural Steel Connections (Metric Version). • A500/
A500M-07 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Structural
Tubes, in Circular and Polygonal Sections, Cold-Formed and Welded or Seamless. • A501-07 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Structural Tubing,
Hot-Formed and Welded or
seamless.
• A502-03 Standard Specification for Structural Steel Rivets. • A514/A514M-05 Standard
Specification for High-Strength Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate
to flow, suitable for welding.
• A529/A529M-05 Standard Specification for Quality High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel
structural.
• A563-07a Standard Specification for Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel Nuts. • A563M-07 Standard Specification for
Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric Version). • A568/A568M-09 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Carbon
Steel and Carbon Steel Sheet
high strength and low alloy, hot rolled and cold rolled. • A572/A572M-07 Standard
Specification for High-Strength Low-Columbian Alloy Structural Steel
vanadium.
• A588/A588M-05 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel, with Minimum Yield Strength up to 50 ksi [345 MPa], Resistant to
Atmospheric Corrosion. • A606/A606M-09 Standard Specification for High-Strength, Low-Alloy Steel Sheet
and Strip,
hot rolled and cold rolled, with improved resistance to atmospheric corrosion.
• A618/A618M-04 Standard Specification for High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Tubing, Formed in
hot, welded or seamless.
• A668/A668M-04 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel Forgings, for
general industrial applications.
• A673/A673M-04 Standard Specification for Sampling Procedures for Impact Testing on Steel
structural.
• A709/A709M-09 Standard Specification for Structural Steel for Bridges. • A751-08 Standard Test
Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products. • A847/A847M-05 Standard Specification for High-Strength, Low-
Alloy Structural Tubing Formed in
cold, welded or seamless, with improved resistance to atmospheric corrosion.
• A852/A852M-03(2007) Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plates with a Minimum Yield Strength of 70 ksi
[485 MPa], in Thicknesses Up to 4 Inches [100mm]. • A913/A913M-07 Standard specification for high-strength, low-alloy steel sections, of
structural quality, manufactured by quenching and self-tempering (QST) processes. • A992/A992M-06a Standard specification for structural steel
sections. • A1011/A1011M-09a Standard Specification for Sheet and Strip Steel, Hot-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural-Grade, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Malleability, and Ultra-High-Strength .
• A1043/A1043M-05 Standard Specification for Structural Steel with Low Yield Stress Ratio to
breaking strength for use in buildings.
F-26
• E29-08 Standard Practice for the Use of Significant Figures in Test Data to Determine Conformance
with specifications.
• E119-08a Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests for Building Constructions and Materials. • E165-02 Standard Test
Methods for Penetrant Inspection E709-08 Standard Guide for
magnetic particle inspection.
• F436-09 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. • F436M-09
Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers (Metric Version). • F606-07 Standard test
methods to determine the mechanical properties of connectors with external or internal thread, washers, direct tension
indicators and rivets. • F606M-07 Standard test methods to determine the
mechanical properties of threaded connectors
external or internal, washers, direct tension indicators and rivets (metric version). • F844-07a
Standard Specification for Steel Flat Washers, Unhardened, for General Purpose. • F959-09 Standard
Specification for Direct Compressible Washer-Type Tension Indicators for Use with
structural bolts.
• F959M-07 Standard Specification for Direct Compressible Washer-Type Tension Indicators for Use with
structural bolts (metric version).
• F1554-07a Standard Specification for Steel Anchor Bolts with Yield Strengths of 36, 55, and 105
ksi.
ASTM F1554 is the most commonly referenced specification for anchor bolts. Grade and weldability must be specified.
• F1852-04 Standard Specification for Bolt/Nut/Washer Systems with Tension Control Mechanism, of
heat treated steel with minimum tensile strength of 120/105 ksi
• F2280-08 Standard Specification for Bolt/Nut/Washer Systems with Tension Control Mechanism, of
heat-treated steel with a minimum tensile strength of 150 ksi
American Welding Society (AWS)
• AWS A5.1/A5.1M–2004 Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Stick Arc Welding
coated.
• AWS A5.5/A5.5M-2004 Specification for Low Alloy Steel Electrodes for Arc Welding with
Coated electrode.
• AWS A5.17/A5.17M-1997(R2007) Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Welding Fluxes
submerged arc.
• AWS A5.18/A5.18M-2005 Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Filler Metals for Gas Shielded Arc Welding. •
AWS A5.20/A5.20M-2005
Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Arc Welding with
flux in the core.
• AWS A5.23/A5.23M-2007 Specification for Low Alloy Steel Electrodes and Welding Fluxes
submerged arc.
• AWS A5.25/A5.25M-1997(R2009) Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes, Carbon Steel Electrodes,
low alloy and fluxes for electroslag welding.
• AWS A5.26/A5.26M-1997(R2009) Specification for Carbon Steel and Low Alloy Steel Electrodes
for gas shielded arc welding.
• AWS A5.28/A5.28M_2005 Specification for low alloy steel electrodes and filler metals for
gas shielded arc welding.
• AWS A5.29/A5.29M-2005 Specification for Low Alloy Steel Electrodes for Arc Welding with
flux in the core.
• AWS A5.32/A5.32M-1997(R2007) Specification for Welding Shielding Gases • AWS B5.1-2003
(errata 2007) Specification for Welding Inspector Qualification. • AWS D1.1/D1.1M-2008 Code of
Structural Welding in Steel (with errata 2009). • AWS D1.3-2008 Structural Welding Code –
Sheet Steel
Research Council for Structural Connections (RCSC)
• Specification for Structural Bolted Joints ASTM A325 or A490, 2009.
F.2.1.5 — MATERIALS
F-27
F.2.1.5.1 — Structural Steel — The certified reports issued by the steel mill, or the test reports carried out by the manufacturer or by a
recognized laboratory, will constitute sufficient evidence of conformity of the material with one of the specifications listed in numeral F.
2.1.5.1.1. For hot-rolled structural shapes, plates, and flat bars, such tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of ASTM
A6; for sheets such tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM A568/A568M; for pipes, tests shall be performed in accordance with the
requirements of the ASTM standards listed above that are applicable to these products.
F.2.1.5.1.1 — ASTM Designations — Structural steels that meet any of the following ASTM specifications are suitable for use
under this Chapter: Hot Rolled Structural Shapes ASTM A36/A36M ASTM A529/A529M ASTM A572/
(a) A572M ASTM A588/A588M ASTM A709/A709M ASTM
A913/A913M ASTM
A992/A992M ASTM
A1043/1043M
(b) structural pipe

ASTM A500
ASTM A501
ASTM A618/A618M
ASTM A847/A847M
(c) Tubería circular

ASTM A53/A53M, Gr. B
(d) irons
ASTM A36/A36M
ASTM A242/A242M
ASTM A283/A283M
ASTM A514/A514M
ASTM A529/A529M
ASTM A572/A572M
ASTM A588/A588M
ASTM A709/A709M
ASTM A852/A852M
ASTM A1011/A1011M
ASTM A1043/A1043M
(It is) flat bars

ASTM A36/A36M
ASTM A529/A529M
ASTM A572/A572M
ASTM A709/A709M
(f) foils
ASTM A606/A606M
ASTM A1011/A1011M SS, HSLAS y HSLAS-F
F.2.1.5.1.2 — Unidentified Steel — In the fabrication of members or details whose failure does not compromise the strength of
the structure, either locally or globally, unidentified steel may be used, provided it does not present unacceptable defects. . This
use will be subject to approval by the controller.
F.2.1.5.1.3 — Heavy rolled sections — Hot rolled ASTM A6/A6M sections, with fins thicker than 51 mm, are considered heavy
rolled sections. When sections of this type are used as members subjected to primary (calculated) tensile stresses (due to
F-28
tension or bending), and are spliced or connected with full penetration groove welds where the fusion extends
through the entire thickness of the fins, or of the fins and web, such profiles shall be specified as follows.
The contract documents will require that such profiles be supplied with an impact test result report in
accordance with ASTM A6/A6M, Supplemental Requirement S30, “Charpy V-Groove (CVN) Impact Test for
Structural Shapes – Alternate Core Location”. The impact test must satisfy a minimum average value of 27
N·m (27 J) of absorbed energy at a maximum temperature of +21ºC.
The above requirements do not apply if the splices and connections are bolted. When a heavy rolled profile
is welded to the surface of another profile using groove welds, the above requirement applies only to the
profile that has weld metal molten across its cross section.
In numerals F.2.10.1.5, F.2.10.1.6, F.2.10.2.6 and F.2.13.2.2 additional requirements for joints in heavy
rolled profiles are presented.
F.2.1.5.1.4 — Heavy reinforced profiles — The reinforced profiles made from plates with a thickness
greater than 51 mm are considered heavy reinforced profiles. When profiles of this type are used as members
subject to (calculated) primary tensile stresses (due to tension or bending), and are spliced or connected
with full penetration groove welds where the fusion extends through the entire thickness of the fins, or of the
fins and web, such profiles shall be specified as follows. The contract documents will require that the steel
be supplied with a report of the results of the impact test performed in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M,
Supplemental Requirement S5, “V-Groove Charpy Impact Test”. The impact test must be carried out in
accordance with ASTM A673/A673M, Frequency P, and must satisfy a minimum average value of 27 N·m
(27 J) of absorbed energy at a maximum temperature of +21ºC.
When a heavy reinforced profile is welded to the surface of another profile using groove welds, the above
requirement applies only to the profile that has weld metal molten through its cross section.
Additional requirements for joints in heavy armored members are given in F.2.10.1.5, F.2.10.1.6, F.2.10.2.6,
and F.2.13.2.2.
F.2.1.5.2 — Steel castings and forgings — Cast steel shall meet ASTM A216/A216 M, Gr. WCB, with the
supplementary requirement S11. The forged parts must conform to the ASTM A668/A668 M specification. The test
reports generated in accordance with the cited specifications will constitute sufficient evidence of compliance with
such standards.
F.2.1.5.3 — Bolts, Washers, and Nuts — Under this Chapter, the use of bolts, washers, and nuts that meet any of
the following specifications is approved:
(a) Bolts
ASTM A307
ASTM A325
ASTM A325M
ASTM A354
ASTM A449
ASTM A490
ASTM A490M
ASTM F1852
ASTM F2280
(b) Nuts
ASTM A194/A194M
ASTM A563
ASTM A563M
(c) Sconces
ASTM F436
F-29
ASTM F436M
ASTM F844
(d) Direct Compressible Washer Type Strain Indicators

ASTM F959
ASTM F959M
Producer certificates will constitute sufficient evidence of compliance with the standards.
F.2.1.5.4 — Anchor bolts and threaded rods — Under this Chapter, the use of anchor bolts and threaded rods that meet any
of the following specifications is approved:
ASTM A36/A36M
ASTM A193/A193M
ASTM A354
ASTM A449
ASTM A572/A572M
ASTM A588/A588M
ASTM F1554
ASTM A449 material is acceptable for high-strength anchor bolts and threaded rods in any diameter.
Anchor bolt and threaded rod threads shall comply with ASME B.18.2.6 “Unified Standard Series” specifications and shall have
Class 2A tolerances.
Producer certificates will constitute sufficient evidence of compliance with the standards.
F.2.1.5.5 — Filler metal and flux for welding — The filler metal and flux shall meet one of the following American Welding
Society (AWS) specifications:
AWS A5.1/A5.1M
AWS A5.5/A5.5M
AWS A5.17/A5.17M
AWS A5.18/A5.18M
AWS A5.20/A5.20M
AWS A5.23/AWS A5.23M
AWS AWS A5.25/AWS
A5.25M AWS A5.26/AWS
A5.26M AWS A5.28/
A5.28M AWS A5.29/
A5.29M AWS A5.32/A5.32M
Producer certificates will constitute sufficient evidence of compliance with the standards. Filler metals and fluxes will be chosen
that are suitable for the intended application.
F.2.1.5.6 — Spigot Connectors — Headed spigot connectors shall meet the requirements of the Structural Steel Welding Code,
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
The producer's certificates will constitute sufficient evidence of compliance with the standards of the AWS D1.1 standard.
F.2.1.6 — PLANS AND STRUCTURAL DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS — The plans and design specifications must comply with the
requirements of the Code of Standard Practices for Metallic Structures, Colombian Technical Standard ICONTEC, except for the deviations
expressly indicated in said plans and specifications. design.
The following are some of the specifications that Chapter F.2, through its provisions, requires to include in the plans: • Section F.2.1.5.1.3
Requirements
for toughness of the CVN test, with alternate location of the core. • Section F.2.1.5.1.4 Requirements for toughness of the
CVN test
F-30
• Section F.2.10.3.1 Location of connections that require pretensioned bolts.
F.2.2 — DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
This numeral contains general requirements for the analysis and design of steel structures, applicable to all the numerals of
Chapter F.2.
F.2.2.1 — General Provisions

F.2.2.2 — Loads and Load Combinations F.2.2.3
— Basis for Design F.2.2.4 —
Member Properties F.2.2.5 — Manufacturing,
Assembly and Control F.2.2.6 — Assessment of Existing
Structures
F.2.2.1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS — The design of members and connections must be consistent with the expected behavior
of the structural system and with the assumptions made in the structural analysis.
F.2.2.2 — LOADS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS — The loads and load combinations will be those applicable to the Design
for Resistance Limit States according to Title B of this Regulation.
F.2.2.3 — BASIS FOR DESIGN
F.2.2.3.1 — Required Strength — The required strength of each of the structural members and connections shall be
determined based on the structural analysis for the appropriate load combinations per F.2.2.2.
Designing based on elastic, inelastic, or plastic analysis is permitted. The provisions for inelastic analysis and plastic
analysis are established in section F.2.15, Design with Inelastic Analysis.
F.2.2.3.2 — Limit states — The design will be based on the principle that no strength or serviceability limit state will
be exceeded when the structure is subjected to each of the applicable load combinations.
F.2.2.3.3 — Design for Resistance Limit States — The design is considered to satisfy the requirements of this
Chapter when the design resistance of each structural component is greater than or equal to the required resistance
calculated in accordance with numeral F.2.2. .3.1. This condition is translated into equation F.2.2.3-1:
R inRÿ f n
(F.2.2.3-1)
where:
Ru = required resistance Rn =
nominal resistance, according to F.2.2 to F.2.11 ÿ = resistance reduction
coefficient according to F.2.2 to F.2.11 = design resistance Rn ÿ
F.2.2.3.4 — Design for stability — The stability conditions of the structure and its elements will be determined in
accordance with the requirements of numeral F.2.3.
F.2.2.3.5 — Design of connections — Connection elements shall be designed in accordance with the requirements
of F.2.10 and F.2.11. The forces and deformations used in the design must be consistent with the expected
performance of the connection and with the assumptions made in the structural analysis. Self-limited deformations are
allowed in the connections. At their points of support, beams and trusses shall be restrained against rotation about
their longitudinal axis, except where analysis can show that such a restraint is not necessary.
F-31
F.2.2.3.5.1 — Simple connections — A connection is considered simple when the moment transmitted through it is
negligible. In structural analysis it can be assumed that simple connections allow unrestricted relative rotation between
the connected elements. A simple connection should have sufficient rotation capacity to allow the twist required by the
structural analysis.
F.2.2.3.5.2 — Moment Connections — Two types of moment connections are allowed, TR and PR
,
defined below:
F.2.2.3.5.2.1 — Fully Restrained Moment Connections ( ) TR — A Totally Restrained (TR) moment

connection is one that transfers moment with negligible relative rotation between the connected members. In
the analysis of the structure, this connection can be idealized considering that the relative rotation is zero. an
SRT connection
It shall have sufficient strength and stiffness to maintain the angle between the connected members when the
strength limit states are reached.
F.2.2.3.5.2.2 — Partially Restrained (PR) Moment Connections — Partially Restrained (PR) moment
connections transfer moment, without neglecting rotation between the connected elements. When analyzing
the structure, the characteristics of the force-deformation response of this type of connections must be
introduced. The characteristics of this response must be documented in the technical literature or established
analytically or experimentally. The elements that make up a PR connection must have sufficient resistance,
stiffness and deformation capacity when the resistance limit states are reached.
F.2.2.3.6 — Moment Redistribution in Beams — Beams and joists made up of compact sections as defined in Section
F.2.2.4.1 and satisfying the unbraced length requirements of Section F.2.6.13.5, may be designed for 90% of the negative
moments that the gravitational loads produce in the supports, calculated by means of an elastic analysis that satisfies the
requirements of numeral F.2.3, provided and when the maximum positive moment increases by a value equal to 10% the
average of the negative moments. This reduction is not allowed for moments in members with a Fy
greater than 450 MPa, for hybrid members, for moments produced by cantilever loads, for designs where partially restrained
moment connections are used, nor for a design based on inelastic analysis in accordance with F.2.15.
The required resistance to axial load in beam-columns must not exceed 0.15 FA ÿ cyg
,
where:
Ag = gross area of the member, mm2
Fy = specified minimum creep stress, MPa ÿ
c
= coefficient of strength reduction for compression = 0.90
F.2.2.3.7 — Diaphragms and manifolds — Diaphragms and manifolds shall be designed for the forces resulting from the
application of the loads prescribed in numeral F.2.2.2. The design will adjust to the provisions of numerals F.2.3 to F.2.10 as
applicable.
F.2.2.3.8 — Design for Service Conditions — Both the structure as a whole and each of its members and connections must
be verified for service conditions. The performance requirements for service conditions are stipulated in numeral F.2.12.
F.2.2.3.9 — Design for standing water — The roof system will be verified through structural analysis to ensure that its strength
and stability are adequate under standing conditions, unless the roof surface has a slope of 2 % or greater to points of free
drainage, or that an adequate drainage system is provided to prevent the accumulation of water.
In numeral F.2.16, Ponding, methods of verification of ponding are presented.
F-32
F.2.2.3.10 — Fatigue Design — Fatigue shall be considered in accordance with F.2.17, Fatigue Design, in members and
connections subjected to repeated loads. In conventional buildings, it is not necessary to consider fatigue due to seismic effects
or effects of wind loads, neither on the lateral load resistance system nor on the enclosure components.
F.2.2.3.11 — Design for Fire Conditions — In section F.2.18, Design for Fire Conditions, two design methods are presented
for this eventuality: Analytical Methods and Qualification Tests.
F.2.2.3.12 — Design for Corrosion — Where corrosion may affect the strength or serviceability of a structure, structural
components shall be designed to tolerate or be protected against such corrosion.
F.2.2.3.13 — Anchors to concrete — The anchorage between steel elements and concrete in composite action must be
designed in accordance with numeral F.2.9. The design of column bases and anchor bolts will be done in accordance with
numeral F.2.10.
F.2.2.4 — MEMBER PROPERTIES
F.2.2.4.1 — Classification of sections for local buckling — Sections stressed in compression are classified as sections
without slender elements or with slender elements. A section is classified as a section without slender elements if the width to
thickness ratio does not exceed the ÿ limit of Table F.2.2.4-1a in any of its elements. If this limit is exceeded
r
in any of the
elements of the section, it is classified as a section with slender elements.
The sections requested in bending are classified as compact, non-compact or slender sections. A section is classified as
compact if its flanges are continuously connected to the web(s) and the width-to-thickness ratio does not exceed the ÿ limit of
Table F.2.2.4-1b in any of its sections. p
compression elements. If the width to thickness ratio exceeds the ÿ limit of table F.2.2.4-1b
p
at any
of the compression elements, without exceeding the ÿ limit of the same tabler in any of them, the section is classified as a non-
compact section. If the width to thickness ratio of any compression element exceeds the ÿr limit of Table F.2.2.4-1b, it is
classified as a section with slender elements.
F.2.2.4.1.1 — Non-stiffened members — For non-stiffened members, that is, those with a free edge along one of
their edges parallel to the direction of the compressive force, the width is taken as follows: ( a) For I- and T- section
fins , bf
the width b is equal to half the total width of the
,
(b) For angle fins and channel and zeta fins, the width b is equal to the dimension
nominal total.
(c) For plates, the width b is the distance from the free edge to the first row of studs or weld line
(d) For the soul of a T , d is taken as the nominal depth of the section
F.2.2.4.1.2 — Stiffened Elements — For stiffened elements, that is, those with support along both edges parallel to
the direction of the compressive force, the width is taken as follows:
(a) For webs of rolled profiles and formed profiles, h is the free distance between flanges h is twice the
minus fillet or corner radius on each fin; centroid of the distance
c
between the
section and the internal face of the compression flange minus the fillet or radius of the corner.
(b) For webs of reinforced sections, h is the distance between adjacent lines of connectors or the free
distance between flanges when welding is used, and hc is twice the distance from the centroid of the
section to the nearest line of connectors. on the compression flange or to the inside face of the
compression flange when welding is used; hp is twice the distance from the plastic neutral axis to the
closest line
F-33
next to connectors on the compression fin or to the inside face of the compression fin when
soldering is used. (c) For cover plates
or diaphragm plates in reinforced profiles, the width b is the distance between adjacent lines of
connectors or between lines of welding. (d) For rectangular section
structural hollow section (STE) flanges, the width b is the free distance between the webs minus
the inside radius of the corner on each side.
For webs of the same profiles, h is the free distance between the flanges minus the radius
of the corner on each side. If the radius of the corner is not known, b and h should be taken
as the corresponding external dimension minus three times the thickness. The is taken as
F.2.2.4.2. , the design thickness of the wall, as indicated in the thickness, t numeral
(e) For perforated coverplates, b is the transverse distance between the nearest lines of
connectors, and the net area of the coverplate is taken over the widest perforation.
For rolled section flanges with a slope on their inner face, the nominal value at the midpoint between the free
edge and the corresponding face of the web is taken as thickness.
Table F.2.2.4-1a
Limit Values of the Width to Thickness Ratio for Axial Compression Member Elements (to apply in
numeral F.2.5)
Width/thickness ratio limit

Case
Relationship
values
Item Description width to examples
l r
Thickness
(not slender/slender)
I -rolled section fins , projecting

plates in I- rolled profiles
protruding fins of pairs of ,
b
1
angles in continuous contact, 0.56 EF
t and
channel fins and T

-section fins
Wings of I- reinforced
Unstiffened
Elements
2
profiles , and plates or wings b
0.64 k E F (a)
c
of salient angles in I- t and
reinforced profiles
Single angle fins, double angle

fins with spacers, and other non-
stiffened elements not included b
3 0.45 EF
in cases 1, 2 and 4 t and
d
4 T -section webs 0.75 EF
t and
Double Symmetry I - Profile h

5 Webs and t
1.49 IF and
In
Channel Webs
Structural hollow section walls
b
6 (PTE) and box profiles, 1.40 IF
t and
rectangular section and uniform

thickness
Fin cover plates and diaphragm

plates between lines of connectors b
7 1.40 IF
or welds. t and
F-34
Table F.2.2.4-1a (continued)

Limit Values of the Width to Thickness Ratio for Axial Compression Member Elements (to apply in
numeral F.2.5)
Case
Width/thickness ratio limit
Relationship values
Item Description width to examples
Thickness l r
(not slender/slender)
All other stiffened elements b

8 1.49 IF
t and
Elements
Stiff
Structural hollow
D 0.11E / F
9 sections (PTE) of circular
t and
section
Tabla F.2.2.4-1b
Limit Values of the Width to Thickness Ratio for Compression Elements in Flexural Members (to apply
in numerals F.2.6 and F.2.15)
Case
Width/thickness
Relationship ratio limit values
Description of
Element
width to
Thickness
p l r
examples
(compact/not
compact) (not compact/slender)
fins of profiles
rolled in I ,
b
10 0.38 EF y 1.0 IF
channels t and
and T -sections
fins of Double
or simple symmetric I- , b 0.95 k E F
11 0.38 EF c L
shaped reinforced profiles t and

(a) (b)
Unstiffened
Elements
12
single angle fins b
0.54 EF 0.91 EF
t and and
Fins of all types of I- shaped

profiles and channels in
13 b
bending on their axis 0.38 EF 1.0 IF
t and and
smaller
Souls of sections in d
AND AND
14 0.84 1.03
T t F F
y and
I -shaped webs
h
15 double symmetry and 3.76 EF y 5.70 IF
t and
channels In
Elements
Stiffened
hE c
h
hF
16 I -shaped webs c
py ÿl
5.70 IF
2 r
of simple symmetry(c) t ÿMÿp
and
In 0.54 ÿ ÿ0.09
ÿ
M
ÿ and ÿ
F-35
Table F.2.2.4-1b (continued)

Limit Values of the Width to Thickness Ratio for Compression Elements in Flexural Members (to apply in numerals F.2.6
and F.2.15)
Case
Relationship
Description of Width/thickness ratio limit
width to examples
Element values
Thickness
Structural Hollow Sections
Fins
(PTE) and box profiles, b
17 1.12 IF 1.40 IF
rectangular section and t and and
thickness
uniform
Fin cover plates and

diaphragm plates between b
18
lines of connectors or solders t
1.12 IF and
1.40 IF and
Structural hollow section

Elements
Stiffened
webs
b
19 (PTE) and box profiles,
t
2.42 IF and
5.70 IF and
rectangular section
Structural hollow sections

(PTE) of D
20 0.07 EF y 0.31EF
circular section t and
For tables F.2.2.4.1a and F.2.2.4.1b:

4
(a) k = but it will not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than 0.76 (see cases 2 and 4)
c
ht In
(b) F 0.7F
L
= for bending about the axis of least inertia, bending about the axis of greatest inertia in reinforced I- sections with a slender web,
and
S
xt
and bending about the axis of greater inertia in I sections reinforced with a compact or non-compact core with ÿ ;0.7
S
xc
F LF S= S xt xc
( y ) ÿ0.5F and _ for bending about the axis of greatest inertia in reinforced I sections with a compact or non-compact core
S
xt
with 0.7 (see case 11) <
S
xc
(c) My : yield moment determined with the minimum elastic modulus of the section (N-mm)
Mp : plastic moment of the section (N-mm)

E : modulus of elasticity of steel (MPa)
Fy : minimum specified yield strength (MPa)
F.2.2.4.2 — Design Wall Thickness for Structural Hollow Sections (PTE) — In calculations involving the wall thickness of a PTE, a
design thickness, t , equal to 0.93 times the nominal thickness shall be used. from the wall if the PTE was fabricated by Electric
Resistance Welding (ERW), and equal to the nominal wall thickness if the PTE was fabricated by Submerged Arc Welding (SAW).
The ERW process is used in the production of ASTM A500 and ASTM A53 Grade B pipes. ASTM A53 Grade B quality pipe may be
designed using the provisions of this Chapter for circular PTEs. The SAW welding process is applied in the production of pipes with
cross sections of dimensions greater than those allowed by the ASTM A500 standard.
F.2.2.4.3 — Determination of gross area and net area
F.2.2.4.3.1 — Gross area — The gross area, Ag , of a member is the total area of the section
transversal.
F-36
F.2.2.4.3.2 — Net area — The net area, An , of a member is the sum of the products of the thickness times the net
width of each of the elements that make up its cross section, calculated taking into account the following
considerations:
When calculating the net area of tension and shear stress elements, the width of a hole should be taken 1.6 mm
larger than the nominal dimension of the hole.
For a string of perforations extending in a diagonal or zigzag line through an element, the net width of the element
shall be obtained by deducting from the total width the sum of the diameters or dimensions of the grooves (see F
.2.10.3.2) of all the perforations in the chain and adding, for each gauge change in the chain, the quantity s 4g .
2
where:
s = center-to-center longitudinal spacing (pitch) of two consecutive bores, mm = center-to-center transverse
g spacing between gauge lines, mm
For angular profiles, the separation between the adjacent gauge lines on one and the other fin will be taken as the
sum of the gauges on both sides of the edge minus the thickness of the profile.
For a slotted structural hollow section (STE) welded to a connecting plate, the net area, An , is equal to the gross
area minus the product of the section thickness times the total width of material removed to form the slot.
In calculating the net area through plug or groove welds, no weld metal contribution to the net area shall be considered.
For members without perforations, the net area, An , is taken to be equal to the gross area, Ag .
For splice plates with perforations, the value of An is limited to a maximum of according to F.2.10.4.1(b) . 0.85Ag
F.2.2.5 — MANUFACTURING, ASSEMBLY AND QUALITY CONTROL — The shop drawings, manufacturing, in-plant painting and
assembly must meet the requirements stipulated in section F.2.13, Manufacturing and Assembly. Quality control and quality assurance
must comply with the provisions of section F.2.14, Quality Control and Quality Assurance.
F.2.2.6 — EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES — The requirements for the evaluation of existing structures are presented in
numeral F.2.19, Evaluation of Existing Structures.
F.2.3 — DESIGN FOR STABILITY

This numeral presents the requirements for the design of structures for stability. The approach presented here is that of the direct
analysis method; in numeral F.2.21 alternative methods are presented
F.2.3.1 — General Requirements for Design for Stability F.2.3.2 —

Calculation of Required Strength F.2.3.3 —
Calculation of Available Strength
F.2.3.1 — REQUIREMENTS FOR DESIGN FOR STABILITY
Stability must be ensured for the structure as a whole and for each of its elements. The analysis should consider the effects on the
stability of the structure and its elements of each of the following factors: (1) bending, shear, and axial load strains in the members, and
any other strains that contribute to displacements of the structure; (2) second order effects (including P ÿ ÿ and P ÿ ÿ effects ); (3)
geometric imperfections; (4) the reduction of the rigidity of the members due to the effects of
F-37
inelastic behaviour; and (5) uncertainties in stiffness and strength. All load dependent effects shall be calculated for
factored load combinations.
Any rational method of design for stability that considers all of the factors listed above is permitted; including the methods
described in F.2.3.1.1 and F.2.3.1.2.
For structures designed based on an inelastic analysis, the provisions of F.2.15 shall be satisfied.
F.2.3.1.1 — Direct Analysis Method — The design method by direct analysis, which consists of the calculation
of the required resistances in accordance with numeral F.2.3.2 and the calculation of the design resistances in
accordance with the numeral F.2.3.3, is considered valid for all types of structures.
F.2.3.1.2 — Alternative Methods — The effective length method and the first-order analysis method, which are
presented in F.2.21, are valid as alternative methods instead of the direct analysis method for structures that
satisfy the limitations established in said numeral.
F.2.3.2 — CALCULATION OF THE REQUIRED STRENGTHS — For the design method by direct analysis, the required
resistances of the components of the structure will be determined from an analysis carried out in accordance with numeral
F.2.3.2.1. This analysis shall include consideration of initial imperfections in accordance with F.2.3.2.2 and stiffness
adjustments in accordance with F.2.3.2.3.
F.2.3.2.1 — General Analysis Requirements — The analysis of the structure must comply with the following
requirements:
(1) The analysis shall take into account bending, shear, and axial load strains in members, and any other
strains in components and connections that may contribute to displacements of the structure. The
analysis will incorporate the applicable reductions in all the stiffnesses that are considered to
contribute to the stability of the structure, as specified in numeral F.2.3.2.3.
(2) A second-order analysis will be performed that considers both P ÿ ÿ effects and P ÿ ÿ effects , except
that P ÿ ÿ effects on the response of the structure are allowed to be neglected when the following
conditions are satisfied: (a ) The structure supports gravity loads mainly through columns, walls and
vertical frames; (b) the ratio between the maximum drift of the second-order analysis and the
maximum drift of the first-order analysis (both obtained using factored loads, with stiffnesses adjusted
as specified in F.2.2.3) is less than or equal to than 1.7 for all floors; and (c) not more than one-third
of the total gravity loads on the structure are supported by columns that are part of frames resisting
moments in the direction of travel under consideration. It is necessary to consider in all cases the
effects P ÿ ÿ for the evaluation of individual members under compressive and flexural loads.
A second-order analysis with P ÿ ÿ effects only (ie neglecting P ÿ ÿ effects on the response of the
structure) is allowed under the enumerated conditions. The requirement to consider P ÿ ÿ effects
when evaluating individual members can be satisfied by applying the factor B1 defined in F.2.22.
The use of the approximate second-order analysis method presented in F.2.22 is permitted as an
alternate method instead of a rigorous second-order analysis.
(3) The analysis will consider all gravity loads and other applied loads that influence the stability of the
structure.
It is important to include in the analysis all gravity loads, including loads acting on dependent columns
and other elements that are not part of the lateral load resisting system.
(4) The second order analysis will be performed for factored load combinations.
F-38
F.2.3.2.2 — Consideration of Initial Imperfections — The effect of initial imperfections in the structure will be taken into
account either by directly introducing said imperfections into the model for analysis as specified in F.2.3.2.2.1. or by applying
dummy loads as specified in section F.2.3.2.2.2.
The imperfections that are considered in this numeral are those related to the points of intersection of members. In typical
building structures, the most important imperfection of this type is the collapse of the columns. Deviation from the initial
straightness of the individual members is not dealt with in this numeral; it is taken into account in the design provisions for
compression members of numeral F.2.5 and does not need to be explicitly considered in the analysis as long as it is within the
limits defined in the Code of Standard Practices for Metallic Structures (ICONTEC).
F.2.3.2.2.1 — Direct Modeling of Imperfections — In all cases, it is permissible to incorporate the effect of initial
imperfections through the direct inclusion of such imperfections in the analysis. The structure will be analyzed with the
points of intersection of the members displaced from their nominal positions. The magnitude of the initial displacements
will be the maximum considered in the design; the pattern of initial displacements will be such as to produce the
maximum destabilizing effect.
When modeling the imperfections, initial displacements must be considered that correspond to a deformed silhouette
similar to that produced by the applied loads and the silhouettes associated with the expected buckling modes. The
magnitude of said initial displacements must be based on the construction tolerances, as specified in the Code of
Standard Practices for Metallic Structures (ICONTEC), or on the actual magnitudes of the imperfections when they are
known.
In the analysis of structures that support gravity loads mainly through columns, walls and vertical frames, where the
relationship between the maximum drift from the second-order analysis and the maximum drift from the first-order
analysis (both obtained using factored loads, with the stiffnesses adjusted as specified in numeral F.2.3.2.3) is equal
to or less than 1.7 for all stories, it is allowed to include initial imperfections only in the analysis of combinations that
exclusively include gravity loads and not include them in analysis of combinations that include applied lateral loads.
F.2.3.2.2.2 — Use of Dummy Loads to Represent Imperfections — For structures that support gravity loads
primarily through columns, walls, and vertical frames, it is permissible to use dummy loads to represent the effects of
initial imperfections, in accordance with the requirements of this section. The fictitious loads will be applied to a model
based on the nominal geometry of the structure.
The concept of fictitious load is applicable to all types of structures, but the specific requirements of numerals
F.2.3.2.2.2(1) to F.2.3.2.2.2(4) are applicable only to structures with particular characteristics. described above.
(1) Fictitious loads will be applied as lateral loads at all levels, in addition to other lateral loads when they
exist. These loads will apply in all load conditions, except as indicated in item (4) below. The magnitude
of the dummy load will be:
N i 0.002Y
=
i
(F.2.3.2-1)
where:
Ni = fictitious lateral load applied at level i ,
N
Yi = gravitational load applied at level i for the load case at

consideration, No.
Fictional loads can generate additional fictitious shears at the base of the structure, usually of small
magnitude. The correct values of the horizontal reactions in the foundations can be obtained by applying
an additional horizontal force at the base of the structure, of equal magnitude and in the opposite direction
to the sum of all the applied fictitious loads, and distributed among the elements that resist the loads.
F-39
verticals in proportion to the gravity loads supported by said elements. The dummy loads can
also generate additional overturning effects, which in this case are not dummy.
(2) At any level, the virtual load, Ni , will be distributed in the same way as the gravity loads at that
level. The dummy loads shall be applied in the direction in which they produce the maximum
destabilizing effect.
For most building structures, the requirement regarding the direction of application of the
notional loads can be satisfied as follows: • for load combinations not
including lateral loads, consider two alternative orthogonal directions, and for each of these
directions consider the action of the dummy loads in one direction and the other,
simultaneously taking the same direction and direction at all levels;
• For load combinations that include lateral loads, apply all fictitious loads in the direction of the
resultant of all lateral loads in the respective combination.
(3) The coefficient used in the expression of the virtual load, formula F.2.3.2-1, equal to 0.002, is
based on the assumption that there is an initial collapse of 1/500 at each level.
Where a smaller slump can justifiably be assumed, the fictional load factor may be adjusted
proportionately.
The value of 1/500 corresponds to the maximum collapse of a column allowed by the Code of
Standard Practices for Metallic Structures, ICONTEC. In some cases they may control other
specified tolerances, such as those relative to the position of the columns in plan, and tighter
tolerances on the verticality of the columns may be required.
(4) In structures where the relationship between the maximum drift from second-order analysis and
the maximum drift from first-order analysis (both obtained using factored loads, with stiffnesses
adjusted as specified in F.2.2.3) is equal to or less than 1.7 for all stories, it is allowed to apply
the fictitious loads, Ni , for combinations of gravitational loads only, and not to apply them in
combination with other lateral loads.
F.2.3.2.3 — Stiffness Reduction — In the analysis of the structure to obtain the required resistances of the
components, reduced stiffnesses will be used, as follows:
(1) A factor of 0.8 will be applied to the values of all the stiffness parameters that are considered to
contribute to the stability of the structure. It is acceptable to extend the application of this
reduction factor to all stiffness parameters of the structure.
Applying stiffness reduction to some members and not applying it to others can, in some cases,
result in artificial distortion of the structure under load and lead to unwanted redistribution of
forces. This can be avoided by applying the reduction to all members, including those that do
not contribute to the stability of the structure.
(2) An additional factor, bÿ , will be applied to the flexural stiffness of all members whose flexural
stiffness is considered to contribute to the stability of the structure.
(a) When PP 0.5 ÿ

Uy
bÿ = 1.0 (F.2.3.2-2a)
(b) When PP 0.5 >

Uy
4Pÿ P 1 PP ÿ=( buy hey

ÿ
ÿ
ÿ)ÿ
(F.2.3.2-2b)
F-40
where:
Fcr = required resistance to axial compression, N
P OF
= yy
, member yield strength, N
Taken together, conditions (1) and (2) require using in the analysis 0.8ÿ times the nominal
elastic
b flexural stiffness, and 0.8 times the other nominal elastic stiffnesses, for structural
steel members.
(3) In structures in which numeral F.2.3.2.2.2 is applicable, instead of using bÿ < 1.0 where there is
>
PP 0.5 , it is allowed to use bÿ = 1.0 for
Uy all members, as long as it is applied in all levels a dummy
,
charge equal to with Yi as defined in F.2.3.2.2.2(1), and with the address 0.00lY i specified in
addition section F.2.3.2.2.2(2), in all load combinations. These fictitious loads will be applied in
,
to those used to take into account the initial imperfections and will not be subject to the provisions
of section F.2.3.2.2.2(4).
(4) Where it is considered that some components in materials other than structural steel contribute to
the stability of the structure and the respective sections of this Code require a greater reduction
in stiffness for said materials, such reductions in stiffness must be applied to those components.
F.2.3.2 — CALCULATION OF DESIGN STRENGTHS — For the design method by direct analysis, the design resistances of
the members and connections shall be calculated in accordance with the provisions of numerals F.2.4, F.2.5, F. .2.6, F.2.7,
F.2.8, F.2.9, F.2.10 and F.2.11, as applicable, without other considerations for global stability of the structure, The effective
length factor, K, will be taken equal to 1.0 for all members, except when a lower value can be justified through rational analysis.
When there are elements designed to function as braces that determine the unbraced length of beams and columns, the bracing
system that they form must have sufficient stiffness and resistance to control the displacement of the member at the bracing
points.
Methods to satisfy bracing requirements are presented in F.2.20, Bracing for Beams and Columns. The requirements of F.2.20
are not applicable to bracing elements that are included in the global analysis of the structure as part of the lateral load resistance
system.
F.2.4 — DESIGN OF TENSION MEMBERS
This clause applies to members stressed by axial tension caused by static forces acting along the centroidal axis.
F.2.4.1 — Slenderness Limits

F.2.4.2 — Design Strength in Tension F.2.4.3
— Effective Net Area F.2.4.4
— Assembled Members F.2.4.5
— Members Connected with Pins F.2.4 .6 — Eye
Bars
For cases not included in this numeral, the following numerals apply:
• F.2.2.3.10 Members requested by fatigue loads • F.2.8 •

F.2.10.3 Members requested by combined axial stress and bending.
• F.2.10.4.1 threaded bars
Connection elements requested by tension • F.2.10.4.3 Resistance
to block tearing in end connections of members requested by
strain
F-41
F.2.4.1 — SLIMNESS LIMITS — No maximum limit is established for the slenderness ratio of members to
strain.
For members whose design is based on stresses in tension, the slenderness ratio should preferably not exceed 300. This recommendation
does not apply to rods or hangers in tension.
F.2.4.2 — DESIGN TENSION STRENGTH — The design resistance for members stressed by tension, ÿt nP , shall be taken as the lowest
value among those obtained for the limit states of yield stress on the gross area and stress rupture. over the net area.
(a) For Tension Yield over Gross Area:

PnFA
=
which
(F.2.4.2-1)
ÿ t= 0.90
(b) For stress breakage over the net area:

PuFA
=
ue (F.2.4.2-2)
ÿ t= 0.75
where:
Ae = effective net area, mm2

Ag = gross member area, mm2
Fy = specified minimum yield stress for the type of steel used, MPa
Fu = minimum tensile strength specified for the type of steel used, MPa
For members without perforations connected entirely by welds, the effective net area for formula F.2.4.2-2 shall be taken
according to F.2.4.3. Applying the same formula for members that include perforations and are connected at their ends by welds,
and for connections with plug or groove welds, the effective net area through the perforations shall be taken.
F.2.4.3 — EFFECTIVE NET AREA
The gross area, Ag , and the net area, An , of a member in tension shall be determined as specified in F.2.2.4.3.
The effective net area of a member in tension is calculated as follows:
TO =TO
It is n
(F.2.4.3-1)
where the shear lag reduction factor, U ,

is calculated as shown in table F.2.4.3-1.
For open sections such as W, M, S, C, HP, WT, ST or similar and single or double angles, it is not required to take a value of U the shear
lag factor, less than the ratio between the gross area of the connected elements and the gross area of the section. This provision does not
,
apply to closed sections such as structural hollow sections (STPs) or plates.
For splice plates with perforations, the An value is limited to a maximum of 0.85A according to F.2.10.4.1(b). g
F-42
Table F.2.4.3-1
Shear Lag Factors for Connections in Tension Members
Case Shear lag factor

item description IN examples
1 All members in tension where the load is transmitted
directly to each of the members of the cross section
In 1.0 =
by means of bolts or welds (except for cases 4, 5 and 6)
2 All members in tension, except plates and PTEs, where

the tension load is transmitted to some but not all cross-
sectional members by welds
O
In 1 = ÿ x
longitudinal bolts, or by a combination of longitudinal and
transverse welds (for W, M, S HP and similar rolled
sections case 7 may alternatively be applied. For angles
,
case 8 may be applied).
3 All members in tension where the force is transmitted by In 1.0 =

transverse welds to only some but not all members of the and
cross section
An = area of the elements
directly connected
4 ÿ in In 1.0 =
Plates where the tension force is transmitted welds
through 2w 1.5w > ÿ In 0.87 =
longitudinal only.
1.5ww > ÿ In 0.75 =
5 Circular PTEs with single and concentric connection plate ÿ 1.3D In 1.0 =
D 1.3D ÿ < x
In 1 = ÿ
x D= p
6 ÿH
with single concentric

2
B2BH + In 1 = ÿ x
connection plate
x =
4B( H + )
ÿH
rectangular PTE
In 1 = ÿ x
with two side connection
plates
2
B
x =
4B( H + )
7 Perfiles W, M, S , flange connection, with 3 or

HP or similar rolled more bolts per line in load b f2 3d ÿ In 0.90 =
profiles, and direction web connection, b f2 3d < In 0.85 =
profiles with 4 or more bolts per
T derived from them (it is line in load direction
allowed to calculate U
according to case 2 and In 0.70 =
take the largest value)
F-43
Table F.2.4.3-1(continued)
Shear Lag Factors for Connections in Tension Members
Case Shear lag factor

item description examples
IN
8 Simple angles (it is With 4 or more bolts
allowed to calculate per line in the direction In 0.80 =
U according to case of the load
2 and take the largest With 3 bolts per line in
value) the direction of the load
(for less than 3 bolts
In 0.60 =
per line in the direction
of the load use case 2)
= length of connection, mm
l w = width of the plate, mm
x = eccentricity of the connection, mm
B = total width of a rectangular PTE member, measured perpendicular to the plane of the connection, mm
H = depth of a member in rectangular PTE, measured in the plane of the connection, mm
F.2.4.4 — ASSEMBLED MEMBERS — When a plate and profile, or two plates, are used in continuous contact, the longitudinal
spacing of the connectors between the two elements shall comply with the limitations given in F.2.10.3.5. .
Both perforated cover plates and clips without diagonals may be used on the open faces of tension-stressed frame members.
Clips shall be no less than 2/3 of the distance between the lines of welds or bolts connecting them to the member components.
The thickness of said clips shall not be less than 1/50 of the distance between said lines. Longitudinal spacing of intermittent
welds or bolts on clips must not exceed 150mm
Preferably, the longitudinal spacing of the connectors should be such that the slenderness ratio of any component between one
connector and another does not exceed 300.
F.2.4.5 — MEMBERS CONNECTED WITH PINS
F.2.4.5.1 — Tensile strength — The tensile design strength, ÿt nP , for members connected with dowels, shall be the
lowest value among those obtained for the limit states of tension failure, shear failure, crushing, and creep. .
(a) For stress failure over effective net area:

= F
Pn2tb eu (F.2.4.5-1)
ÿ = 0.75
t
(b) For shear failure over the effective area:

=
Pn0.60F A u sf (F.2.4.5-2)
ÿ sf= 0.75
where:
A sf2t=ad 2+
( ) , area over the path of shear failure, mm2
a = shortest distance between the edge of the pin hole and the edge of the member, measured
parallel to the direction of force, mm , mm, but not greater
the part, than the actual distance between the edge of the hole and the edge be = 2t 16 + of
measured in the direction normal to the applied force
d = diameter of the pin, mm =
t thickness of the plate, mm
(c) For crushing over the projected area of the pin, see F.2.10.7
F-44
(d) For yield over full section, see F.2.4.2(a).
F.2.4.5.2 — Dimensional requirements — The pin hole must be located, on the direction normal to the applied
force, equidistant between the edges of the member. Where the pin is expected to allow relative movement
between the connected parts under the action of full load, the diameter of the hole shall not exceed the diameter
of the pin by more than 1mm.
The plate must have, at the height of the pin hole, a width of not less than 2b d + and must extend beyond the
It is
contact end of the hole, in a direction parallel to the axis of the member, in a length "a" not 1.33b . smaller than
It is
Corners beyond the pin hole may be cut at 45° to the axis of the member, provided that the net area beyond the
pin hole, on a plane perpendicular to the cut, is not less than that required beyond the hole. of the pin in a direction
parallel to the axis of the member.
F.2.4.6 — EYE BARS
F.2.4.6.1 — Tensile Strength — The design tensile strength for eye bars shall be determined in accordance with
F.2.4.2, taking Ag as the cross-sectional area of the body of the bar.
For calculation purposes, the width of the body of the eye bar shall not be taken greater than eight times its
thickness.
F.2.4.6.2 — Dimensional requirements — Eye bars must be of uniform thickness, without reinforcement in the
pin holes, and have a circular head with a concentric periphery with the pin hole.
The radius of the transition between the circular head and the body of the eye bar must not be less than the
diameter of the head.
The diameter of the pin should not be less than 7/8 of the width of the body of the eye bar, and the diameter of the
pin hole should not exceed the diameter of the pin by more than 1 mm.
For steels with Fy greater than 485 MPa, the diameter of the hole must not exceed five times the thickness of the
plate and the width of the body of the eye bar must be reduced proportionally.
A thickness of less than 13mm is permitted only if external nuts are provided to allow the pin plates and filler plates
to be tightened so that they are in firm contact. The width between the edge of the hole and the edge of the plate,
measured perpendicular to the direction of the applied load, must be greater than 2/3 of the width of the body of
the eye bar, but for calculation purposes it will be taken as a maximum. the ¾ of said width of the body of the eye
bar.
F.2.5 — DESIGN OF COMPRESSION MEMBERS
This clause applies to members stressed by axial compression through the centroidal axis.

F.2.5.2 — Effective Length
F.2.5.3 — Flexural Buckling of Members without Slender Elements
F.2.5.4 — Torsional Buckling and Flexo-Torsion Buckling of Members without Slender Elements
F.2.5.5 — Single Angle Members in Compression
F.2.5.6 — Assembled Members
F.2.5.7 — Members with Slender Elements
F-45
• F.2.8.1 to F.2.8.3: Members requested by combined axial compression and bending. • F.2.8.4: Members
requested by axial compression and torsion. • F.2.10.4.4: Compressive design
resistance of connection elements • F.2.9.2: Axially loaded composite section members
F.2.5.1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS — The design compressive strength will be taken equal to ÿc nP , where: ÿ = 0.90
and the nominal compressive strength, will be the lower of the values obtained for the buckling limit states.
Pn , for bending, torsional buckling, and flexural-torsional buckling
Table F.2.5.1-1 presented below serves as a guide to identify the numerals applicable to different types of sections:
Table F.2.5.1-1
Selection of applicable numerals for compression design
Without Slender Elements With Slender Elements

Cross section Numeral limit states Numeral limit states
Applicable Applicable
PL
F.2.5.3 PF
F.2.5.7 PF
F.2.5.4 PT
PT
PL
F.2.5.3 PF
F.2.5.7 PF
F.2.5.4 PFT
PFT
PL
F.2.5.3 PF F.2.5.7
PF
PL
F.2.5.3 PF F.2.5.7
PF
PL
F.2.5.3 PF
F.2.5.7 PF
F.2.5.4 PFT
PFT
F.2.5.6 PL
PF F.2.5.6
F.2.5.3 PF
PFT F.2.5.7
F.2.5.4 PFT
F.2.5.5 F.2.5.5
F-46
Table F.2.5.1-1 (continued)

Selection of applicable numerals for compression design
Without Slender Elements With Slender Elements

Cross section Numeral States Numeral limit states
Applicable limits Applicable
F.2.5.3 PF THAT THAT
Non-symmetric shapes other than PL

F.2.5.4 PFT F.2.5.7
simple angles PFT
Nomenclature:
PF = Flexural Buckling
PT = Torsion Buckling
PFT = Flexo-Torsion Buckling
PL = Local Pandeo
F.2.5.2 — EFFECTIVE LENGTH — The effective length factor, K KL r ,

for calculating the slenderness of the column,
, It will be determined based on numeral F.2.3, or on numeral F.2.21, with:
L = unbraced length of the member in the plane in which buckling is considered, mm = radius of gyration
r associated with the buckling mode considered, mm
Preferably, the slenderness ratio, KL r , for compression designed members should not exceed 200.
F.2.5.3 — FLEXURAL BUCKING OF MEMBERS WITHOUT SLEEK ELEMENTS — This section applies to compression members
without slender elements according to the definitions given in section F.2.2.4.1 for members under uniform compressive stresses.
When the unbraced length against torsion is greater than the unbraced length against bending, F.2.5.4 may control the design of wide-fan
columns and other similar sections.
The nominal compressive strength, Pn , for the flexural buckling limit state, will be taken as:
P FA
= cr g
(F.2.5.3-1)
n
where the flexural buckling stress, Fcr , is calculated as follows:
AT AND
ÿ AM
4:71 F 0.44F
ÿ y )
(a) When r F from (
It is
and
ÿ FF yes ÿ
F 0.658 F
cr =ÿÿ ÿÿ
y (F.2.5.3-2)
at AND
> 4.71
(b) When F 0.44F <
It is
)
r F from ( and
and
Fcr0.877F
=
It is (F.2.5.3-3)
where:
Fe = critical elastic buckling stress calculated according to formula F.2.5.3-4, F.2.21.2.3(b),
or by elastic buckling analysis, as applicable, MPa.
F-47
2
Pi AND
F It is
=
2
(F.2.5.3-4)
( KL r )
The two formulas for the calculation of the limits of applicability of the cases F.2.5.3(a) and F.2.5.3(b), one based on KL r and the other
based on Fe , produce the same result.
F.2.5.4 — TORSIONAL BUCKING AND FLEXOR-TORSIONAL BUCKING OF MEMBERS WITHOUT SLEEK ELEMENTS — This clause applies
to single symmetrical members and non-symmetrical members, and to some double symmetrical members such as cross-shaped or reinforced
columns. , without slender elements according to the definitions of numeral F.2.2.4.1 for elements under uniform compression forces. In the case
of single angles, these requirements shall apply when bt 20 >
.
The nominal compressive strength, Pn , for the limit states of flexure-torsion buckling and torsion buckling, will be determined as follows:
P nFA= cr g (F.2.5.4-1)
with the critical stress, Fcr , calculated as follows:
(a) For compression members at double angles arranged in T with a spacing such that the warpage constant Cw is negligible, and T
sections :
ÿ ÿ
ÿ FF+ ÿÿ
4F FH
crz ÿ
cry crz ÿ
F = 11 ÿÿ
(F.2.5.4-2)
cr
cry ÿ 2h
2
ÿ ÿ ( Fcry
F + )
ÿ crz ÿ
where Fcry is taken as the Fcr of the formula F.2.5.3-2 or F.2.5.3-3, for flexural buckling )m around the axis of symmetry “y”,
with KL r KL r = according to the F.2.5.6 for double angles and

for T sections , and with KL r KL= r(
arranged in T , and
GJ
F = (F.2.5.4-3)
crz 2
Ar
go
(b) For all other cases, Fcr shall be determined according to formula F.2.5.3-2 or F.2.5.3-3, using the
elastic buckling stress due to torsion or bending-torsion, Fe , calculated as follows: for members with
(i) double symmetry:
ÿ
ÿ 2 EC ÿ
1ÿ
In
F = GJ (F.2.5.4-4)
+ ÿ + ÿ I xI
It is
2
ÿÿ(ÿ
at ) and
With
(ii) For members of simple symmetry where "y" is the axis of symmetry, including double angles
spaced such that the roll constant Cw is not negligible:
ÿ FÿF ÿeyÿ + ÿ 4F FH
no ÿ
=
ÿ 11
oh this
F ÿÿ
(F.2.5.4-5)
It is
ÿ 2h 2
ÿ ( FF+ )
ey no
ÿ ÿ
(iii) For non-symmetric members, Fe , is the smaller of the roots of the following cubic equation:
F-48
2 2
ÿÿx o ÿÿ )
and
F F F F )(F F FF F )(FF F 2 2 O = 0
(
ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿ
is this
) ( )
ÿÿ
ÿ
(
e e ex
ÿ
ÿÿ (F.2.5.4-6)
ÿÿrO
and ex and ey a dog
ÿÿro
where:
Ag = gross member area, mm2

Cw = roll constant, mm6
2
p E
F ex =
2
(F.2.5.4-7)
( KL r )
x
2
Pi AND
F
ey
=
2
(F.2.5.4-8)
( KL r )
and
ÿ 2 ÿÿ
ÿ EC In
1
F = + GJ (F.2.5.4-9)
no 2
at ) Ar
ÿ2
ÿÿ(ÿ With ÿ go
G = shear modulus of elasticity of steel = 77200 MPa
2 2
+
x Oy 2 O
H1 =ÿ
(F.2.5.4-10)
r
O
I
I x
,
y = moments of inertia about the principal axes, mm4
J = torsional constant, mm4 =
K x
effective length factor for flexural buckling about the x-axis = effective length
this factor for flexural buckling about the y-axis
Kz
= effective length factor for torsion buckling = coordinates of
x
o , the
and
center of shear measured from centroid, mm
or = polar radius of gyration around the center of cut, mm
I + I
2 22 x y
rorxy
yes =++ (F.2.5.4-11)
A g
xr = radius of gyration around the “x” axis, mm =

the radius of gyration around the “y” axis, mm
2
For sections in I with double symmetry, Cw can be taken as Ih4 yo , where ho is the distance
between the centroids of the fins.
Table F.2.5.4-1 is provided as a guide for the application of formulas F.2.5.4-2 to F.2.5.4-6.
F-49
Table F.2.5.4-1
Selection of applicable formulas for Torsional Buckling and Flexo-Torsional Buckling
Case of Formula to
Cross Section Type section apply
F.2.5.4
Double angles arranged in T with negligible Cw and
tee sections
F.2.5.4-2
(a)
y F.2.5.4-3
All sections with double symmetry; Z sections
(b)(i) F.2.5.4-4
Sections of simple symmetry, except double angles arranged

in T with negligible Cw and sections in T
(b)(ii) F.2.5.4-5
asymmetrical profiles
(b)(iii) F.2.5.4-6
F.2.5.5 — SINGLE ANGLE MEMBERS IN COMPRESSION — The nominal compressive strength, Pn , axially loaded single angle of
members shall be determined in accordance with F.2.5.3 or F.2.5.7, as corresponds. For simple angle profiles with b / t 20 >, numeral
F.2.5.4 must also be applied.
The effects of load eccentricity on an angle profile can be neglected, and evaluated as axially loaded members, given the following
conditions:
(1) Compressive forces are applied through the same fin at both ends of the member; (2) the members are connected
by welds or by a minimum of two bolts at each end; and (3) no intermediate transverse loads are applied.
and using an effective slenderness relationship, Kl r below: , calculated as described in subparagraphs (a) and (b) to
(i) For equal flange angles, or unequal flange angles connected by their major flange, used as individual members or as
diagonal members of a flat truss in which adjacent diagonal members are connected by the same face of the connecting
plate or the main member:
L
When ÿ:
80
rx
at L
=+
72 0.75 (F.2.5.5-1)
r rx
F-50
L
When > :80
rx
at L
= +32r 1.25 (F.2.5.5-2)
r x
Formula F.2.5.5-2 is valid for KL r less than or equal to 200.
For unequal wing angles with a wing width ratio less than 1.7 connecting at the smaller wing, the KL r value
of formulas F.2.5.5-1 and F.2.5.5-2 shall be
ÿ ÿ in any case KL r of the member being taken less than ÿ ÿ ,
ÿ increased by adding ( ÿ ÿ 4 bb l1s without
)2
that 0.95L r . With
(ii) For equal flange angles, or unequal flange angles connected by their major flange, used as diagonal members of
box reinforcements or space reinforcements in which adjacent diagonal members are connected by the same
face of the flange. connecting plate or main member:
L
When ÿ 75
rx
at L
= +60 0.8 (F.2.5.5-3)
r rx
L
When > 75
rx
at L
= +45 (F.2.5.5-4)
r rx
Formula F.2.5.5-4 is valid for KL r less than or equal to 200.
For unequal wing angles with a wing width ratio less than 1.7 and connected by the smaller wing, the KL r
value of formulas F.2.5.5-3 and F.2.5.5-4 must be increased ÿ ÿ 6 bb 1 without in any case KL r of the
ÿ adding to itmember
(ÿÿ l being
)2 taken less than 0.82L r ÿ ÿ ,
s With
,
where:
L = length of the member measured between the working points on the axis of the main reinforcement
member, mm = major
flange of the angle profile, mm bl bs =
minor flange of the angle profile, mm
xr = radius of gyration around the axis parallel to the attached vane, mm = radius of
zr gyration for the minor principal axis, mm
Simple angular profile members with end conditions other than those described in F.2.5.5(a) and F.2.5.5(b), with a
flange width ratio greater than 1.7, or with application of transverse loads, they must be evaluated for the combination
of axial load and bending according to the requirements of numeral F.2.8.
F-51
F.2.5.6 — ARMORED MEMBERS
F.2.5.6.1 — Compressive Design Strength — This section applies to assembled members composed of two or more shapes
that may (a) be bolted or welded together, or (b) form a section with at least one open side, on which the profiles are
interconnected by perforated or diagonal cover plates and clips. The end connections shall be welded or connected by means of
prestressing bolts with Class A or Class B contact surfaces.
At the ends of a compression assembled member it is acceptable to use bolted connections, with the bolts bearing designed for
the full compression load; however, bolts must be pretensioned even when service conditions do not require a slip-critical
connection.
The nominal compression resistance of reinforced members composed of two or more profiles connected to each other by
means of bolts or welds, will be calculated in accordance with numerals F.2.5.3, F.2.5.4 or F.2.5.7, applying the following
modification. If the buckling mode generates in the individual profiles deformations that produce shear forces in the elements
that connect them, KL r will be replaced by ( )m KL r
determined as follows, when no more exact analysis is made:
(a) For bolted intermediate connectors in a tight-tight condition:
2 2
ÿÿatÿÿ ÿ ÿ a
ÿÿr ÿÿ = ÿÿ KL
ÿÿ + ÿ ÿ (F.2.5.6-1)
ÿ ÿ rr m 0i
(b) For intermediate connectors welded or with prestressed bolts, not including double angles
distanced:
2
ÿÿatÿÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿÿat
2
ÿÿ = ÿÿ ÿÿ + ÿ ÿ 2
ÿ ÿa
+ 0.82 ÿ (F.2.5.6-2)
2
rr r ibm 0
( 1 )
(c) For spaced double angles with welded connectors:
2 2
ÿÿat ÿÿ a KL 2 ÿ
ÿ ÿa AaL
a anA
ÿ
ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ +a ÿ 0.82ÿ ÿ1.65
ÿ ÿ =+ + 51.32
i
ÿ
(F.2.5.6-3)
r m
r 0 ( 1
2
) r ib I
b
+ A bb
ÿ ÿ
where:
( )m KL r = modified slenderness for the reinforced member ( )o
KL r = slenderness of the reinforced member, treated as a unit in the considered buckling direction = distance between
a connectors, mm = minimum radius of
r
i gyration of an individual component, mm = radius of gyration of an
r ib individual component relative to its centroidal axis parallel to the buckling axis
of member, mm =
a spacing ratio = h 2rib
h = distance between the centroids of the individual components, measured perpendicular to the
pandeo axis of the member, mm =
Ai area of an angle, mm2
Lb = length of the connector measured between the centroids of the angles, mm =
bI inertia of the connector associated with bending in the plane of the two connected angles, mm4
n = shape factor for shear deformations = 3.33 for angular
section connectors = 1.2 for rectangular section
connectors
F-52
= 1.11 for circular connectors = connector

Ab area, mm2
F.2.5.6.2 — Dimensional requirements — The individual components of compression members composed of two or more
profiles shall be connected to each other at intervals “a” such that the effective slenderness ratio Ka ri of each of the components,
taken between connectors , do not exceed ¾ parts of the slenderness ratio that controls for the armed member. The smallest
radius of gyration should be used to calculate the slenderness ratio of each component. r
i
,
The connections at the ends must be welded or with prestressed bolts, and the contact surfaces must be Class A or Class B,
without this condition excluding the possibility of designing the end bolted connection based on the bolts working under bearing.
At one end of a compression-loaded member supported by a base plate or planed surface, all components in contact with one
another shall be connected together by welds having a length of not less than the maximum width of the member, or by bolts
over a distance equal to 1½ times the maximum width of the member and spaced longitudinally at a maximum of four diameters.
Along the span between the above required end connections for a compression-loaded reinforced member, the longitudinal
spacing between the intermittent welds or bolts must be appropriate to provide for the transfer of the calculated forces. The
limits for the longitudinal spacing of connectors between elements in continuous contact, whether they are a plate and a profile
or two plates, are defined in numeral F.2.10.3.5. When overlapping plates are provided as part of a compression-loaded member
and intermittent welds along the edges are used as connectors, or bolts over all gauge lines in each section, the maximum
spacing shall not exceed 0.75 EF times . the thickness of the thinnest superimposed plate, nor 305 mm. When bolts are
arranged staggered, the maximum spacing on each gauge line should not exceed 1.12 EF times the thickness of the thinnest
overlay plate or 460 mm.
and
and
The open sides of reinforced members applied by compression, composed of plates or profiles, will be provided with perforated
continuous cover plates with a succession of access holes. The unsupported width of such cover plates at the height of the
access holes, as defined in F.2.2.4.1, may be counted on to contribute to the design strength of the member, provided the
following requirements are met :
(1) The width-thickness ratio must comply with the limitations of numeral F.2.2.41.
It is conservative to take the limit from Case 7 of table F.2.2.4-1a with the width, b, taken as the transverse distance
between the nearest connector lines. The net area of the cover plate is taken where the widest hole is found. Instead
of this approach, the limit on the width/ thickness ratio can be obtained by analysis.
(2) The ratio of the length (in the direction of stress) to the width of the hole must not exceed
of 2.0.
(3) The free distance between holes in the direction of stress must not be less than the distance
transverse between the nearest lines of connecting bolts or welds.
(4) The minimum radius at any point on the periphery of the holes must be 38 mm.
As an alternative to the perforated cover plates, the use of a lattice is allowed, arranging clips at the ends and at
intermediate points where the lattice is interrupted. The bartacks will be as close to the ends as possible. In main
members requested by calculated forces, the end clips shall have a length not less than the distance between the lines
of bolts or welds that connect them to the components of the member. Intermediate clips shall be no less than half this
distance in length. The thickness of the clips shall not be less than 1/50 of the distance between the lines of welds or
bolts that connect them to the member components. In welded construction, the total length of weld
F-53
on each connecting line of a bartack should not be less than 1/3 the length of the bartack. In bolted construction, the
spacing between bolts in clips, measured in the direction of stress, shall not be greater than 6 diameters, with a
minimum of 3 connecting bolts between the clip and each component.
The elements of the lattice, including plates, angles, channels or other profiles that make it up, must be spaced in
such a way that the ratio L r of the component included between the connection points does not exceed three quarters
of the slenderness that governs the design. of the member as a whole. The truss shall be designed to provide a shear
force resistance, in a direction normal to the axis of the member, equal to 2% of the design compressive strength of
the member. The ratio L r of the truss bars will not exceed 140 in simple systems, nor 200 in double trusses. The
double truss bars will be connected at their intersections. For compression-loaded truss bars, L can be taken as the
unsupported length between the connectors or welds that join them to the components of the reinforced member in
the case of a simple truss, and as 70% of that length in the case of a single truss. of a double lattice.
The inclination of the truss bars with respect to the axis of the member will preferably be not less than 60° for single
trusses and 45° for double trusses. Whenever the distance between the welding or connector lines on the components
is greater than 380 mm, it will be preferable to use double lattices or angle profiles.
For additional spacing requirements, see F.2.10.3.5.
F.2.5.7 — MEMBERS WITH SLIM ELEMENTS — This numeral applies to compression members whose section includes slender
elements, according to the definitions of numeral F.2.2.4.1 for members under uniform compressive stresses.
The nominal compressive strength, Pn , will be determined based on the limit states of flexural buckling, torsional buckling, and flexural-
torsional buckling, as the product:
PnFA
= (F.2.5.7-1)
cr g
where Fcr is calculated as follows:
At AND
(a) When ÿ am
4.71
from (
F 0.44QF ÿ
It is
)
r QF and
and
ÿ QF F ye ÿ
F
F Q 0.658 = ÿ ÿ
cr ÿÿ
y (F.2.5.7-2)
at AND
(b) When > 4.71 from

(F 0.44QF ) <
It is
and
r QF and
=
F cr0.877F It is
(F.2.5.7-3)
where:
Fe
= critical elastic buckling stress calculated using Formulas F.2.5.3-4 and F.2.5.4-4 for double symmetrical members,
Formulas F.2.5.3-4 and F.2.5.4-5 for members of simple symmetry, and Equation F.2.5.4-6 for non-symmetrical
members, except for simple angles with b / t 20 >
where Fe is calculated using the formula F.2.5.3-4, MPa.
Q = 1.0 for members with non-slender sections, according to the definitions of numeral F.2.2.4.1 for
elements under uniform compression stresses. for
members with slender sections, according to the definitions of F.2.2.4.1 for members = Q Qs a under uniform
compression stresses.
F-54
For cross sections where the "slender" condition occurs only in unstiffened members,
=
"slender"
s ( )=. For cross sections where the “slender” condition occurs only at QQQ 1.0 ) . For cross sections where the
tocondition
stiffened elements, QQQ 1.0= a s(
=
occurs in both unstiffened and stiffened elements, Q QQs a . For cross sections containing =several slender unstiffened
elements, it is conservative to take Qs as the smallest value, corresponding to the slenderest element.
F.2.5.7.1 — Slender non-stiffened elements, Qs — The reduction factor for slender non-stiffened elements, Qs , is
defined as follows:
(a) For flanges, angles, or plates protruding from columns or other members in profiles
compression laminates:
b AND
(i) When 0.56

ÿ
t F
and
=
Q 1.0 s
(F.2.5.7-4)
(ii) When 0.56 EF and

< <b 1.03 E F and
ÿ ÿF b and
=
Q 1.415
s 0.74 ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ t E
ÿ
(F.2.5.7-5)
b
(iii) When ÿ 1.03 IF and
0.69E
Q s
=
2
(F.2.5.7-6)
F bt
(
and
)
(b) For fins, angles, or plates protruding from columns or other assembled members
under compression:
b I
When 0.64
ÿ
c
t F and
Q 1.0=s
(F.2.5.7-7)
I b I
When 0.64 c
< ÿ 1.17
c
Ft F
and and
=
ÿbÿ F and
Q 1.415
s
0.65 ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
(F.2.5.7-8)
t Ek c
b I
When > 1.17 c
t F
and
0.90Ek c
Q s
=
2
(F.2.5.7-9)
F bt
and
( )
F-55
where:
4
k =
c , but it will not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than 0.76
ht In
(c) For oblique angles
b AND
When ÿ
0.45
t F
and
=
Q 1.0 s (F.2.5.7-10)
When 0.45 EF bt 0.91 EF < ÿ and and
ÿbF ÿ
= and
ÿ Q 1.34 0.76 ÿ t E
ÿ
s (F.2.5.7-11)
ÿ ÿÿÿ
When bt 0.91 EF > and
0.53E
=
Q s
2 (F.2.5.7-12)
F bt(
and
)
where: b
=
total width of the largest angle fin, (mm)
(d) For T -section webs :
d AND
When ÿ 0.75
t F
and
=
Q 1.0 s (F.2.5.7-13)
AND AND
When 0.75 ÿ <d t 1.03

F F
y and
ÿ ÿd F
= and
Q 1.908 1.22 ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
ÿ
s (F.2.5.7-14)
tE
AND
When dt 1.03 >

F
and
0.69E
=
Q s
2 (F.2.5.7-15)
F dt(
and
)
where:
b = width of the unstiffened compression element, as defined in numeral
F.2.2.4, mm =
d
nominal depth of the tee, mm =
t
thickness of the element, mm
F-56
F.2.5.7.2 — Slender Stiffened Members, Qa — The reduction factor for a section with members is defined as follows: slender
stiffened, Qa ,
A
= It is
(F.2.5.7-16)
Q a
A
where:
A = total area of the cross section of the member, mm2

Ae = sum of the effective areas of the elements of the cross section, calculated based on
in the reduced effective widths, be , mm2
The reduced effective width for an element, be , is calculated as follows:
(a) For slender members under uniform compressive stress, with bt 1.49 E f , except ÿ
fins of square or rectangular sections of uniform thickness:
E 0.34
ÿ E1ÿfÿ ÿ
= ÿÿ ÿ b 1.92tb (F.2.5.7-17)
( bt f)
It is
ÿÿÿ
where:
f =
Fcr calculated based on Q 1.0 = .
(b) For fins of square or rectangular sections with slender elements of thickness
uniform where bt 1.40 Eÿ f :
E 0.38
ÿ E ÿ = ÿÿ ÿ
b 1.92t
1)ÿÿ
It is ÿ b (F.2.5.7-18)
f
ÿÿ
( bt f
where:
f PA n=eff
Instead of calculating f PA eff

=n , which requires an iterative process, can be easily
conservatively take f equal to Fy .
ED E (c) For
axially loaded circular sections, when 0.11 0.45 << :
Ft F
and and
0.038E 2
Q ==
Q + F Dt 3(a
)
(F.2.5.7-19)
and
where:
D = outside diameter, mm = wall
thickness, mm t
F.2.6 — DESIGN OF BENDING MEMBERS

This numeral applies to members requested by simple bending with respect to one of their main axes. This condition occurs when the
loads act in a plane that is parallel to one of the principal axes and said plane passes through the center of cut of the section or,
alternatively, when the member is restrained against torsion at the points of application of the load. loads and supports.
F-57
F.2.6.1 — General Provisions F.2.6.2

— Members of Compact Section in I with Double Symmetry and Channels, Requested by Bending Around
its Major Axis
F.2.6.3 — I -shaped Section Members with Double Symmetry, with Compact Web and Non-Compact or Slender Fins,
Requested by Bending Around its Major Axis
F.2.6.4 — Other I -Section Members with Compact or Non-Compact Web, Requested by Bending Around
of its Major Axis
F.2.6.5 — Section Members in I with Double or Simple Symmetry, with Slender Web, Requested by Bending
Around its Major Axis F.2.6.6
— I -Section Members and Channels Required by Bending Around its Minor Axis F.2.6.7 — Square or Rectangular
Structural Hollow Sections (STS) and Box Section Members F.2.6 .8 — Circular Structural Hollow Sections (STP) F.2.6.9 — T
Sections and Double Angles Loaded in the Plane of Symmetry
F.2.6.10 — Simple Angular Sections F.2.6.11 — Rectangular Bars and Circular Bars F.
2.6.12 — Non-Symmetrical Sections F.2.6.13
— Beam Sizing
• F.2.8.1, F.2.8.3 — Members stressed by biaxial bending or by combined bending and axial forces. • F.2.8.4 — Members
requested by bending and torsion. • F.2.17 — Members subject
to fatigue • F.2.7 — Design provisions for
shear.
Table F.2.6-1 serves as a guide to determine the appropriate numeral to be applied for each case.
Table F.2.6-1
Selection of applicable numerals for flexural design
Numeral Fin slenderness slenderness of

Cross section limit states
Applicable the soul
F.2.6.2 C C F, PLT
F.2.6.3 NC, E C PLT, PLA
F.2.6.4 C, NC, E NC F, PLT, PLA, FAT
F-58
Table F.2.6-1 (continued)

Selection of applicable numerals for flexural design
Numeral Fin slenderness slenderness of

Cross section limit states
Applicable the soul
F.2.6.5 C, NC, E AND

F, PLT, PLA, FAT
F.2.6.6 C, NC, E N/A F, PLA
F.2.6.7 C, NC, E C, NC F, PLA, PLa
F.2.6.8 N/A N/A F, PL
F.2.6.9 C, NC, E N/A F, PLT, PLA
F.2.6.10 N/A N/A F, PLT, PLAL
F.2.6.11 N/A N/A F, PLT
F.2.6.12 non-symmetric shapes N/A N/A

All limit states
Nomenclature:
F= Yield, PLT= Lateral-torsional buckling, PLA= Local buckling of the flange, PLa= Local buckling of the web, FAT= Yield of
the flange in tension, PLAL= Local buckling of the flange of an angular profile, PL = Local buckling, C = Compact, NC = Not
compact, E= Slender.
F.2.6.1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS — The flexural design resistance will be equal to ÿb n M the provisions of this numeral: , where for all
(1) The resistance reduction factor will be:
ÿb= 0.90
and the nominal resistance to flexion, Mn , will be determined in accordance with the numerals F.2.6.2 to F.2.6.13.
F-59
(2) It starts from the premise that the support points of the beams are constrained against rotation about their longitudinal axis.
(3) The basic expressions of the nominal resistance correspond to a condition of uniform moments about the length without
lateral support. To account for non-uniform moment conditions over this length, the factor Cb is introduced:
Cb
= modification factor for lateral-torsional buckling, applicable when there is a non-uniform moment diagram on the beam
segment between two braced points:
12.5M max
Cb = R 3.00
m ÿ
(F.2.6.1-1)
2.5m 3m +++
max4m 3m ABC
where:
Mmax = absolute value of the maximum moment in the segment between braced points,
N·mm
MA = absolute value of the moment at a quarter of the length of the segment between points
braced, N. mm
MB = absolute value of the moment at the midpoint of the segment between points
braced, N. mm
MC = absolute value of the moment at three quarters of the length of the segment between
braced points, N. mm Rm =
monosymmetry parameter of the cross section = 1.0 for double symmetric
members = 1.0 for single symmetric members
bent in single curvature
=
0.5 2 II +( yc y )2
for members of simple symmetry bent in double curvature
I = moment of inertia around the principal axis "y" , mm4

and
I
yc = moment of inertia of the fin in compression, or of the smallest fin when the curvature
is double, around the "y" axis , mm4
In general it is allowed to conservatively assume a value of C 1.0 . Cantilevers with

b = free end unbraced, C 1.0
b = .
For double symmetrical members without transverse loads between the braced points, the formula F.2.6.1-1 results in a
value of 1.0 for end moments of equal magnitude and opposite direction (uniform moment diagram), of 2.27 for moments of
end of equal magnitude and direction (double curvature) and 1.67 when the moment is zero at one of the ends.
(4) In members with simple symmetry bent in double curvature, the resistance to
lateral-torsional buckling for both wings. The flexural design resistance must be greater than or equal to the maximum
flexural stress that produces compressive stresses in the flange under consideration.
F.2.6.2 — MEMBERS OF COMPACT I- SECTION WITH DOUBLE SYMMETRY AND CHANNELS, STRESSED BY BENDING AROUND
THEIR MAJOR AXIS — This numeral applies to members of I -section with double symmetry and channels flexed about their major axis,
with compact core and compact fins as defined in numeral F.2.2.4.
The nominal flexural resistance, Mn , will be taken as the lower of the values obtained for the limit states of section plasticization (plastic
moment) and lateral-torsional buckling.
F-60
F.2.6.2.1 — Section yielding (plastic moment)
= p yx =
M Mn FZ (F.2.6.2-1)
where:
My = minimum yield stress specified for the type of steel used, MPa = plastic modulus
Zx of section about the x-axis, mm3
F.2.6.2.2 — Lateral-torsional buckling
(a) When LL b
ÿ
p
, lateral-torsional buckling limit state does not apply
(b) When LLL <pbrÿ

ÿ ÿ Lÿ L
ÿÿb
M Cn M M 0.70F S b pp
= ÿÿ
( yx ) ÿp ÿÿÿ
ÿ M (F.2.6.2-2)
L rLÿ ÿ p
ÿÿ ÿ p ÿ ÿ
(c) When LL b > r
M FS = ÿp
M (F.2.6.2-3)
n cr x
where:
Lb = length between two points that are braced either against lateral displacement of the compression flange
or against torsion of the cross section,
mm
2
2
WHAT
bÿ L Jcÿ ÿ b
F cr = 0.078 ÿÿ1 (F.2.6.2-4)
( L brts )
2
+ Sh r xo ÿ ÿts
where:
E = modulus of elasticity of steel =200,000 MPa = torsional
J constant, mm4
Sx = elastic modulus of section around the x-axis, mm3 ho =
distance between centroids of fins, mm
The radical term of formula F.2.6.2-4 can be conservatively taken equal to 1.0.
The length limits Lp and Lr are calculated as follows:
AND
=
L p1.76r
y
(F.2.6.2-5)
My
2 2
ÿ E Jc = ++ Jc ÿ ÿ 0.7F ÿ
L 1.95r
ÿ 6.76
and
(F.2.6.2-6)
r ts
0.7F S h ÿ S xo
h ÿÿ
AND
ÿÿ ÿÿ
y xo
where:
IC
is
2r
ts
= (F.2.6.2-7)
S
x
F-61
and the factor c is determined as follows:
(a) For double symmetric I -sections :
c1= (F.2.6.2-8a)
(b) For channels:
h OI
c =
and
(F.2.6.2-8b)
2C In
2
Ih
they
For double symmetrical I -sections, with rectangular flanges, C In
= and thus the formula F.2.6.2-7 becomes
4
becomes:
Ih
they
2 ts
r =
2S x
rtscan be conservatively approximated to the radius of gyration of the section formed by the compression flange plus one sixth of
the web:
bf
r ts =
ÿ ht In ÿ
12 1 +
ÿÿ
6b ftf ÿÿ
F.2.6.3 — DOUBLE SYMMETRICAL I- SECTION MEMBERS WITH COMPACT WEB AND NON-COMPACT OR SLEEK FINS,
REQUESTED BY BENDING AROUND THEIR MAJOR AXIS — This numeral applies to double symmetric I -section members, requested
by bending around its major axis, with a compact web and non-compact or slender fins, according to the definitions of numeral F.2.2.4.1
for bending.
The nominal flexural resistance, Mn , will be the lower of the values obtained for the limit states of lateral-torsional buckling and local
buckling of the compression flange.
F.2.6.3.1 — Lateral-torsional buckling — For lateral-torsional buckling, the provisions of numeral F.2.6.2.2 shall be applied.
F.2.6.3.2 — Local buckling of compression flange
(a) For sections with non-compact ribs
ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿÿÿ pf
M M =ÿÿ
M 0.7F
ÿ S( ) ÿ ÿ
(F.2.6.3-1)
n p p yx
ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿ rf pf
ÿ ÿ ÿ
(b) For sections with slender fins.
0.9Ek Sc x 2
M =n (F.2.6.3-2)
l
where:
b
f
ÿ=
2t f
ÿpf = ÿp , slenderness limit for a compact fin, table F.2.2.4-1b ÿ = ÿ
rf r
, slenderness limit for a non-compact fin, table F.2.2.4-1b
F-62
4
kc = , but it will not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than 0.76
ht
In
h = distance defined in numeral F.2.2.4.1.2, mm
F.2.6.4 — OTHER I -SECTION MEMBERS WITH COMPACT OR NON-COMPACT WEB REQUESTED BY BENDING AROUND ITS ,
MAJOR AXIS — This numeral applies to: (a) double symmetric I -section members with non-compact web, requested by bending about
its major axis; and (b) I -section members with simple symmetry, with a compact or non-compact web as defined in numeral F.2.2.4 and
connected to the flanges by their midlines, stressed by bending around their major axis.
I- section members to which this section applies may be designed conservatively using F.2.6.5.
The nominal flexural resistance, Mn , will be taken as the lowest value among those obtained for the limit states of yielding in the
compression flange, lateral-torsional buckling, local buckling in the compression flange and creep in the tension flange.
F.2.6.4.1 — Yield in compression flange
M R M= R FS pc yc pc
= y xc
(F.2.6.4-1)
n
(a) When LL ÿ , the lateral-torsional buckling limit state does not apply.
b p
(b) When LLL <ÿ

pbr
ÿ ÿ L Lÿ ÿ ÿ
M nC =RÿÿMÿxcRÿM FS b pc
( yc pc yc L
ÿ ÿ
p
ÿÿÿ
RM (F.2.6.4-2)
)b
ÿ
LL ÿ
pc yc
ÿ r p ÿ ÿ
(c) When LL b
> r
M FS =R M pc yc ÿ (F.2.6.4-3)
n cr xc
where:
= y xc
M FS yc (F.2.6.4-4)
2
Pi b
WHAT
2
LJ b ÿÿ
F = 1 0.078 ÿÿÿÿ (F.2.6.4-5)
cr
( Lrbt )
2 + Sh r
xc o t
For II 0.23 ÿ yc and , J will be taken equal to zero.
where:
I yc = moment of inertia of the compression flange with respect to the y axis, mm4
The effort FL is determined as follows:
For SS 0.7 ÿ
xt xc
= y
F 0.7F
L (F.2.6.4-6a)
F-63
For SS 0.7
xt <
xc
S xt
F F ÿ= 0.5F (F.2.6.4-6b)
Ly y
S
xc
The limit of the unbraced length for the yield limit state in the compression flange, Lp ,
is:
AND
=
L 1.1r
p t (F.2.6.4-7)
F
y
The limit of the unbraced length for the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling in the inelastic range, Lr ,
is:
2 2
EJ J = ++ ÿ L 1.95r
ÿÿÿ ÿ F
L
r 6.76 ÿÿÿÿ (F.2.6.4-8)
t
FLSh Sh
xc o ÿ xc o ÿÿ
AND
The web yield factor, Rpc , is calculated as follows:
When II and
c and
0.23 > :
hc
For ÿl
pw
t In
M p
R pc (F.2.6.4-9a)
M= yc
hc
For >l
pw
t In
ÿ MM ÿ ÿÿÿÿÿ ÿ ÿ ÿÿÿ M
R =ÿÿ ÿ pp pw 1 p
(F.2.6.4-9b)
pc MM ÿ ÿÿ M
ÿÿ yc ÿ ÿÿ yc yc rw pw ÿÿÿ ÿ
When II and 0.23 ÿ :

c and
=
R 1.0 pc
where:
MZF 1.6SF
= x
ÿy
y xc
p
Sxc , Sxt = elastic modulus of the section referred to the ribs in tension and compression,
respectively, mm³
ÿ = h ct w
ÿ =ÿ pw p
= slenderness limit for a compact web, table F.2.2.4-1b =
ÿ =ÿ slenderness limit for a non-compact web, table F.2.2.4-1b = for rolled
rw r
hc sections, twice the distance between the centroid of the section and the internal face of
the compression flange minus the fillet or radius of the corner;
F-64
for reinforced profiles, twice the distance from the centroid of the section to the nearest line
of bolts in the compression flange, or to the inside face of the compression flange when
welding is used, mm.
The effective radius of gyration for lateral-torsional buckling, r

t
, is calculated as follows:
(i) For I -sections with their rectangular section compression flange:
b
r = fc
t
(F.2.6.4-10)
ÿ h 1hÿ+ 2 ÿ
O a
ÿ 12
In
d 6 hd
ÿ O ÿ
where:
hctw
a In = (F.2.6.4-11)
btfc fc
bfc = width of compression flange, mm
t
fc
= thickness of compression fin, mm
(ii) For I -sections with channels or cover plates superimposed on the compression flange:
r
t
= radius of gyration about the “y” axis of the components of the flange in compression due to
bending plus one third of the area of the web that works in compression when only one bending
moment is applied about the major axis, mm = ratio between twice of the area
of of the web zone working in compression when only a bending moment is applied about the major
axis and the area of the compression flange components.
For I -sections with rectangular compression flange, r can be conservatively

t
approximated as the radius of gyration of the
compression flange section plus one-third of the compression web area, that is:
b
r = fc
t
ÿ 1 ÿ 12 1 ÿ
+a In
ÿ6 ÿÿ
(a) For sections with compact fins, the local buckling limit state does not apply.
(b) For sections with non-compact fins ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ ÿ

ÿ
M nR =ÿÿ
M RÿM FS pf
( ) (F.2.6.4-12)
pc yc pc yc L xc ÿ ÿ ÿÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ rf pf
(c) For sections with slender ribs 0.90Ek S

c xc
M =n (F.2.6.4-13)
2
l
where:
the is defined in formulas F.2.6.4-6a and F.2.6.4-6b FL , is

web plasticization factor, determined by formulas F.2.6.4-9 Rpc ,
F-65
4
k = , but it will not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than 0.76
c
ht In
b fc
ÿ=
2t fc
ÿ =ÿ pf p , slenderness limit for compact fins, table B.4-1
ÿ =ÿ rf , slenderness limit for non-compact fins, table B.4-1
r
F.2.6.4.4 — Yield of flange in tension
(a) For SS ÿ , the yield limit state of the flange in tension does not apply
xt xc
(b) For SS <

xt xc
M RM
n
=pt yt (F.2.6.4-14)
where:
M FS yt= y xt
The plasticization factor of the web corresponding to the yield limit state of the flange in tension, is calculated as follows:
Rpt ,
(i) for ht c w pw ÿ l
M p
R pt (F.2.6.4-15a)
M= yt
(ii) Para ht c w pw > l
ÿ MM ÿ ÿÿÿ
ÿÿ ÿ ÿ ÿÿÿ M
R =ÿÿ ÿ pp pw 1 p
(F.2.6.4-15b)
pt MM ÿ ÿÿ M
ÿÿ ÿ ÿÿ yt yt yt rw pw ÿÿÿ ÿ
where:
ÿ = ht
cw
ÿ =ÿ
pw p
, slenderness limit for a compact web, defined in table B.4-1b
ÿ =ÿ r, slenderness limit for a non-compact web, defined in table B.4-1b
rw
F.2.6.5 — I- SECTION MEMBERS WITH DOUBLE OR SIMPLE SYMMETRY, WITH A SLEEK WEB, REQUESTED BY BENDING AROUND THEIR
MAJOR AXIS — This numeral applies to I -section members with double or simple symmetry, with a slender web as defined in numeral F.2.2.4.1 and
connected to the fins by their midlines, stressed by bending around their major axis.
The nominal flexural resistance, Mn , will be taken as the lowest value among those obtained for the limit states of yielding of the flange in compression,
lateral-torsional buckling, local buckling of the flange in compression and creep of the flange in tension.
F.2.6.5.1 — Compression flange yield
M R FS
= p g y xc (F.2.6.5-1)
n
= p g cr xc
M Rn FS (F.2.6.5-2)
F-66
ÿ (a) For LL b p
, the lateral-torsional buckling limit state does not apply.
(b) Para LLLpbr

<ÿ
ÿ LL
b
ÿÿ
p
ÿ cr
ÿ F C F 0.3F ÿ (c)( Para
=ÿ ) ÿ F (F.2.6.5-3)
b yy y LL ÿÿÿÿ
ÿÿÿ
r p ÿ ÿÿ
LL >
b r
2
THIS
b
Pi
F cr = ÿ F (F.2.6.5-4)
2 and
( L br t )
where:
Lp is calculated according to formula F.2.6.4-7

AND
L rr =p t (F.2.6.5-5)
0.7F and
ÿ
h E ÿ
and w c
R 1 pg =ÿ ÿ
5.7 ÿ ÿ 1.0 (F.2.6.5-6)

1200 300a
+ t F
wwÿ ÿy ÿ
(flexural strength reduction factor)
wa is defined by formula F.2.6.4-11 but shall not exceed 10, and r is the effective
radius
t of gyration for lateral buckling as defined in F.2.6.4.
M Rn FS
= p g cr xc (F.2.6.5-7)
(a) For sections with compact flanges, the local buckling limit state of the flange does not apply to
compression
(b) For sections with non-compact ribs
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ
pf
F cr ÿ = ÿFÿ0.3F
ÿ ( ) ÿ (F.2.6.5-8)
and and
ÿ ÿÿ ÿ rf
pf ÿÿ ÿ
(c) For sections with slender fins
0.9Ek c
F cr = (F.2.6.5-9)
2
( b2t
f f
)
where:
4
k = , but it will not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than 0.76
c
ht In
b fc
ÿ=
2t fc
ÿ =ÿ pf p , slenderness limit for compact fins, table F.2.2.4-1b
ÿ =ÿ rf r , slenderness limit for non-compact fins, table F.2.2.4-1b
F-67
F.2.6.5.4 — Yield of flange in tension
(a) For S xt
ÿ S xc
, the yield limit state in the flange in tension does not apply.
(b) For S xt
< S xc ,
M FS =y xt (F.2.6.5-10)
n
F.2.6.6 — I - SECTION MEMBERS AND CHANNELS STRESSED BY BENDING ABOUT THEIR MINOR AXIS — This numeral applies
to I -section members and channels stressed by bending about their axis.
smaller.
The nominal resistance to flexion, Mn , will be taken as the lowest value among those obtained for the limit states of plasticization of the
section (plastic moment) and local buckling of the fin.
MMFZ 1.6FS == ÿ pyy yy

n
(F.2.6.6-1)
F.2.6.6.2 — Local buckling of the flange
(a) For sections with compact flanges, the local buckling limit state of the flange does not apply to
compression
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
M nM=ÿÿ
M 0.7F
ÿ S( )
pf
(F.2.6.6-2)
p p yy
ÿ ÿÿ pf
ÿ ÿÿ rf ÿ ÿ
M FS =cr y (F.2.6.6-3)
n
where:
0.69E
F cr = (F.2.6.6-4)
2
( b ft f )
ÿ = bt
f
ÿ =ÿ pf , slenderness limit for compact fins, table F.2.2.4-1b

p
AND
ÿ = rf , slenderness limit for non-compact webs, table F.2.2.4-1b

F
and
b = for I -section flanges half the total width of the flange, bf ; for channel fins, the total width of the fin, mm
,
t
f = thickness of the fin, mm
Sy = elastic section modulus with respect to the y axis, mm3 . For a channel it will be taken as the
minimum section module.
F.2.6.7 — SQUARE OR RECTANGULAR STRUCTURAL TUBULAR SECTIONS (PTE) AND BOX SECTION MEMBERS — This
numeral applies to square or rectangular PTE, and box section members with double symmetry, requested by bending on any of their
axes , with compact or non-compact webs and compact, non-compact or slender ribs as defined in F.2.2.4.
F-68
The nominal flexural resistance, Mn , will be the lowest value among those obtained for the limit states of section plasticization (plastic
moment), local buckling of the flange and local buckling of the web under pure bending.
For long rectangular PTEs, stressed by bending about the major axis, the torsional lateral buckling limit state can be reached, however, a
formula for the resistance corresponding to this limit state is not given here, taking into account that it will generally be the deflection of
the beam that controls for these cases.
MM ==
FZ
n py
(F.2.6.7-1)
where:
Z = Plastic section modulus about the bending axis, mm3
F.2.6.7.2 — Local buckling of the flange
(a) For compact sections, the local buckling limit state of the flange does not apply.
ÿ
bF ÿ
M M M F S 3.57( p py t E
=ÿ ÿ ÿ
and ÿ
4.0 M ÿ ÿ
(F.2.6.7-2)
n ) p
ÿ ÿ
MFS =
n ye
(F.2.6.7-3)
where:
Se is the effective section modulus, calculated with the effective width of the compression flange equal to:
E 0.38
ÿÿ
Eÿ
= ÿÿ
b 1.92t f ÿ1ÿÿ b (F.2.6.7-4)
It is
F bt F
theÿ ÿmy
F.2.6.7.3 — Local buckling in the web
(a) For compact sections, the local buckling limit state of the web does not apply. (b) For sections
with non-compact webs
ÿ
hF ÿ
M M M F S 0.305
( p py x t E
=ÿ ÿ ÿ
and ÿ
0.738 M ÿ ÿ
(F.2.6.7-5)
n ) p
ÿ In ÿ
F.2.6.8 — CIRCULAR STRUCTURAL TUBULAR SECTIONS — This numeral applies to circular PTE with D t ratios less than 0.45EF
and .
The nominal flexural resistance, Mn , will be taken as the lowest value among those obtained for the limit states of section plasticization
(plastic moment) and local buckling.
MM ==
FZ
n py
(F.2.6.8-1)
F-69
F.2.6.8.2 — Local buckling
(a) For compact sections the limit state of local buckling does not apply
(b) For non-compact sections:
ÿ 0.021E FS ÿ
M =
n
+
and (F.2.6.8-2)
Dt
ÿÿ ÿÿ
(c) For sections with slender walls:
MFS
n
=
cr
(F.2.6.8-3)
where:
0.33E
F cr = (F.2.6.8-4)
Dt
S = elastic section modulus, mm3

D = outer diameter, mm
t = wall thickness, mm
F.2.6.9 — T SECTIONS AND DOUBLE CHARGED ANGLES IN THE PLANE OF SYMMETRY — This numeral applies to T sections and
double charged angles in the plane of symmetry.
The nominal resistance to flexion, Mn , will be taken as the lowest value among those obtained for the limit states of plasticization of the
section (plastic moment), lateral-torsional buckling and local buckling of the fin. fnv .
MM
n
p= (F.2.6.9-1)
where:
=
MFZ 1.6M p yx y when the soul is tense (F.2.6.9-2)
M FZ =M ÿ when the soul is under compression (F.2.6.9-3)
p yx y
Pi NO GJand 2
M nM= cr
= ÿ
B ++
1B ÿ
(F.2.6.9-4)
Lb ÿÿ ÿÿ
where:
ÿ ÿd I and
B 2.3
=±ÿÿ (F.2.6.9-5)
ÿ Lÿ bJ
B is positive when the web is in tension and negative when the web is in compression. If the end fiber of the web is in
compression at any point along the unbraced length, the negative value of B shall be used .
F.2.6.9.3 — Local buckling of flanges in T -sections
(a) For sections with compact fins stressed in compression by flexure, the state does not apply
local buckling limit in the flange.
(b) For sections with non-compact fins applied to compression by bending,
F-70
ÿ lÿl ÿ
pf
ÿ ÿ M M M 0.7F (S ÿ
=ÿÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿ 1.6M (F.2.6.9-6)
n pp y xc ÿ ) ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿ and
pf rf ÿ ÿ
(c) For sections with slender ribs stressed in compression by bending, 0.7ES
xc
M n
=
2
(F.2.6.9-7)
( b2t
f f
)
where:
Sxc = is the elastic section modulus referred to the compression fin, mm3
b f
ÿ=
2t f
ÿ =ÿ pf slenderness limit for compact fins, table F.2.2.4-1b
p
ÿ rf=ÿ slenderness
r limit for noncompact souls, table F.2.2.4-1b
For double angles in which the flanges perpendicular to the axis of symmetry are stressed by compression, the
nominal resistance Mn for local buckling shall be determined using the provisions of numeral F.2.6.10.3, with the bt of
said flanges and taking numeral F. .2.6.10-1 as upper limit.
F.2.6.9.4 — Local buckling of the web of T -sections applied to compression by bending
MFS
n
=
cr x (F.2.6.9-8)
where Sx is the elastic section modulus and the critical stress, Fcr , is determined as follows:
d AND
For ÿ 0.84
t
In
F
and
F crF =
and
(F.2.6.9-9)
And E < ÿ
For 0.84 1.03
Ft F
is the
ÿ
ÿ
dF
= 1.84 t E
F 2.55 F (F.2.6.9-10)
ÿ and
ÿ
cr and
ÿÿ In ÿ
d AND
For > 1.03
t In F
and
0.69E
F cr =
2
(F.2.6.9-11)
( dt In
)
For double angles in which the flanges that make up the web are stressed by compression, the nominal resistance Mn for local
buckling must be determined using the provisions of numeral F.2.6.10.3, with the bt of said flanges and taking formula F.
2.6.10-1 as the upper limit.
F.2.6.10 — SINGLE ANGLE SECTIONS — This numeral applies to simple angle sections with or without continuous lateral
restraint along their length.
F-71
Simple angle sections with continuous restraint against lateral-torsional buckling along their length may be designed based on
bending about the geometric axes (x, y). Simple angle sections that do not have such a restriction shall be designed using the
provisions for bending about the main axes except when the requirements for bending about a geometric axis are allowed to be
used.
When the resulting moment has components on both main axes, whether or not there is an axial load, or when the moment acts
on a main axis in combination with an axial load, the combined stress ratio shall be determined by applying the provisions of
numeral F.2.8. 2.
For design with respect to the geometric axes, the properties calculated for the “x” and “y” axes of the angle, with directions
parallel and perpendicular to the fins, must be used. For design with respect to the principal axes, the section properties calculated
for the major and minor principal axes of the angle should be used.
The nominal resistance to flexion, Mn , will be taken as the lower of the values obtained for the limit states of plasticization of the
section (plastic moment), lateral-torsional buckling and local buckling in the fins of the angular profile.
For bending about the minor axis, only the limit states of section yielding (plastic moment) and local buckling of the flange apply.
=
M 1.5M
n and
(F.2.6.10-1)
where:
My = yield moment about the bending axis, N·mm.
F.2.6.10.2 — Lateral-torsional buckling — For single angle sections without continuous restraint against lateral-
torsional buckling along their length:
(a) For MM ÿ
It is
and
0.17m ÿ
ÿ ÿ M =0.92 ÿ M
It is
(F.2.6.10-2)
ÿ
n It is
M
and ÿ
(b) For MM It is
>
and
ÿ M ÿ
=ÿ ÿ M 1.92 1.17 M 1.5M and
ÿ
(F.2.6.10-3)
n
M yy
ÿÿ
It is
ÿ
where:
Me , The elastic lateral-torsional buckling moment is calculated as follows:
(i) For bending about the main major axis of an angular profile with equal fins:
22
0.46Eb t C b
M It is
= (F.2.6.10-4)
L
(ii) For bending about the major principal axis of an unequal finned angle profile: ÿ ÿ
2 ÿ
4.9EI Cz b 2
ÿ ÿ Lt
M he w
=
2
b+ 0.052 ÿ +b
ÿ
(F.2.6.10-5)
L ÿ ÿr
With
ÿ ÿ
where:
Cb
= is calculated using formula F.2.6.1-1 with a maximum value of 1.5.
F-72
L = unbraced length of a member, mm = moment of inertia for the

I minor principal axis, mm4
With
zr = radius of gyration for the minor principal axis, mm =

t thickness of the flange of the angle profile, mm =
wÿ property of the section for angle profiles of unequal flanges, positive for the short compression flange
and negative for the long compression flange. If the long flange is in compression at any point
along the unbraced length of the member, the negative value of ÿw shall be used .
The formula for wÿ and commonly used values are presented in the comments to ANSI/ AISC 360.
(iii) For bending around one of the geometric axes in an angular profile of equal fins, without an axial load
acting:
No restraint against lateral-torsional buckling:
(a) With maximum compression at the edge of the fin

4 ÿ 2 ÿ
0.66Eb tC b ÿ 1ÿ Lt
M It is
= +ÿ 2 0.78 ÿ ÿ 1 ÿ
(F.2.6.10-6a)
2
L ÿ bÿ
ÿÿ ÿ
(b) With maximum tension at the fin edge ÿ ÿ ÿ

4 2 ÿ
0.66Eb tC b ÿ Ltÿÿ
M It is
= ++ 2 L 1 0.78 1ÿ ÿ
(F.2.6.10-6b)
2
ÿÿb
ÿ
My will be taken equal to 0.80 times the yield moment calculated using the elastic section modulus
for the geometric axis
Mn can be taken equal to My for simple angle profiles that have the edge of their vertical fin in
compression and a span/ fin ratio less than or equal to
2
1.64E t y ÿ ÿF ÿ
.
ÿ ÿ 1.4
Fb E
and
ÿÿ
With restraint against lateral-torsional buckling at the point of maximum moment only:
Me will be taken as 1.25 times the Me calculated using formula F.2.6.10-4a or F.2.6.10-4b.
My shall be taken equal to the yield moment calculated using the elastic section modulus for the
geometry axis.
F.2.6.10.3 — Local buckling of flange — The local buckling limit state applies when the flange edge is in compression.
(a) For compact sections, the limit state of local buckling of the flange does not apply.
(b) For sections with non-compact fins ÿ ÿ ÿ
=
ÿ
ÿb
ÿEM
F S 2.43 1.72 ÿ
ÿ
ÿÿÿ (F.2.6.10-7)
ÿ t F
n yc
ÿ and
F-73
MFS
n
=
cr c (F.2.6.10-8)
where:
0.71E
F cr =
2
(F.2.6.10-9)
( bt )
b = width of the compression flange, mm Sc =

elastic section modulus for the compression edge, relative to the bending axis, mm3 .
For bending about one of the geometric axes of an equal flange angle without restraint against lateral-
torsional buckling, Sc shall be taken as 0.80 times the section modulus for the geometric axis.
F.2.6.11 — RECTANGULAR BARS AND CIRCULAR BARS — This numeral applies to rectangular bars requested by bending around
any of their geometric axes and to circular bars.
The nominal flexural resistance, Mn , will be the lowest value among those obtained for the limit states of section plasticization (plastic
moment) and lateral-torsional buckling.
F.2.6.11.1 — Section yielding (plastic moment) — For rectangular bars with stresses by bending about their major axis,
L dbt 0.08E2Fÿy , rectangular bars stresses by
bending about its minor axis and circular bars:
1.60M== ÿ MyM F Z
n py (F.2.6.11-1)
0.08E 1.9EL
b
d
(a) For rectangular bars with <
2
ÿ requested by bending about its axis
F t F
and and
mayor:
ÿ ÿ ÿL d F
b and
ÿ
M C 1.52 0.274 =ÿ ÿ nb ÿÿÿÿ2 ÿ

MM and p
(F.2.6.11-2)
ÿÿ tE ÿ
Ld
b
1.9E
(b) For rectangular bars with 2
> requested by bending about its major axis:
t F
and
M FS =M p ÿ (F.2.6.11-3)
n cr x
where:
1.9EC b
F cr = (F.2.6.11-4)
L bd
2
t
t = width of the rectangular bar (dimension parallel to the bending axis), mm = depth of
d the rectangular bar, mm
Lb = length between points that are braced against lateral displacement of the zone to
compression, or torsionally braced cross section, mm
(c) For rectangular bars stressed by bending about their minor axis and circular bars, no
it is required to consider the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling.
F.2.6.12 — NON-SYMMETRICAL SECTIONS — This numeral applies to all non-symmetrical profiles, except simple angles.
F-74
The nominal flexural resistance, Mn , will be the lowest value among those obtained for the yield limit states (yield moment), lateral-
torsional buckling and local buckling, being:
MFS =
n n min (F.2.6.12-1)
where:
Smin = minimum elastic section modulus for the bending axis considered, mm3
F.2.6.12.1 — Yield (yield moment)
FF y= (F.2.6.12-2)
n
FF F=yÿ (F.2.6.12-3)
n cr
where:
=
Fcr analytically determined lateral-torsional buckling stress, MPa
For the case of members with section in Z , It is recommended to take Fcr as 50% of the Fcr of a channel section
having fins and web of the same dimensions.
F.2.6.12.3 — Local buckling
FF F = ÿ (F.2.6.12-4)
n cr and
where:
=
Fcr analytically determined local buckling stress, MPa
F.2.6.13 — SIZING OF BEAMS
F.2.6.13.1 — Resistance reduction for members with holes in the flange in tension — This numeral applies to rolled or
reinforced profiles and beams with cover plates, which have perforations and are sized based on the flexural resistance of the
gross section.
In addition to the limit states specified in other sections of this numeral, the evaluation of the nominal flexural strength, Mn , will
consider the limit state of tension failure of the flange in tension.
(a) Para FA YF
u fn A ÿ ty fg , the limit state of stress failure does not apply
(b) Para FA YF <
u fnA ty fg ,
the nominal flexural resistance, Mn , in a section containing holes in the flange in
tension, shall not be taken greater than:
BUT
= u fn
M n
S
x (F.2.6.13-1)
A
fg
where:
Afg = gross area of the fin in tension, calculated according to the requirements of F.2.2.4.3.1, mm2
Afn = net area of the fin in tension, calculated according to the requirements of numeral F.2.2.4.3.2, mm2
ÿ
Yt = 1,0 para FF 0.8 yu
= 1.1 otherwise
F.2.6.13.2 — Limits for the dimensioning of I -section members — Simple symmetrical I -section members shall satisfy the
following limit:
F-75
I
ÿ ÿ I yc
0.10 0.90 (F.2.6.13-2)
and
I -section members with slender webs must also satisfy the following limits:
(a) For ah 1.5 ÿ
ÿ ÿÿh ÿ AND
= 12.0 (F.2.6.13-3)
t F
ÿ ÿ In max and
(b) For ah 1.5 >
ÿÿh 0.40E
ÿÿ= (F.2.6.13-4)
F
ÿ tÿIn max and
where:
a = free distance between transverse stiffeners, mm
In unstiffened beams, h tw shall not exceed 260. The ratio of web area to compression flange area shall not
exceed 10.
F.2.6.13.3 — Cover Plates — The thickness and width of welded beam flanges may be varied by splicing a series of
plates or by using cover plates.
The total cross-sectional area of cover plates on bolted beams shall not exceed 70% of the total flange area.
High-strength bolts or welds connecting the flange to the web, or the cover plate to the flange, shall be designed to
resist the full horizontal shear force resulting from the bending forces in the beam. The longitudinal distribution of
these bolts or intermittent welds will be done in proportion to the intensity of the shear force, without their spacing in
that direction exceeding the maximum allowed for compression or tension members in numerals F.2.5.6 or F.2.4 .4
respectively. Bolts or welds connecting the flange to the web shall further be designed so that they can transmit to
the latter any load applied directly to the flange, unless provision is made to transmit such loads by direct support.
Part-length cover plates shall be extended beyond the point where they are theoretically no longer required, and the
extended portion shall be connected to the beam with high-strength bolts in a slip-critical connection, or with fillet
welds. This connection must be adequate, with the applicable design resistance according to numerals F.2.10.2.2,
F.2.10.3.8 or F.2.2.3.10, to develop the portion of the flexural resistance of the beam that corresponds to the cover
plate at the theoretical point of suspension.
In welded cover plates, the welds connecting the final section of the cover plate to the beam shall be continuous on
both edges of the cover plate for a length aÿ defined below, and shall be adequate to develop that portion of the
,
design strength of the beam. which corresponds to the cover plate at that distance aÿ measured from its end.
(a) When there is a continuous weld through the end of the plate, of size greater than or equal to ¾ of its
thickness:
and' w= (F.2.6.13-5)
where:
in = cover plate width, mm
(b) When there is a continuous weld across the end of the plate of size less than
¾ of its thickness:
F-76
a' 1.5w = (F.2.6.13-6)
(c) When there is no cross weld at the end of the plate:
a' 2w = (F.2.6.13-7)
F.2.6.13.4 — Armored Beams — Whenever two or more beams or channels are used side by side to form a flexural member,
they shall be connected together in accordance with F.2.5.6.2. In the presence of concentrated loads that are transferred from
one beam to the other, or distributed among them, diaphragms welded or bolted to the beams and rigid enough to distribute the
load shall be used.
F.2.6.13.5 — Unsupported length for moment redistribution — For moment redistribution in beams in accordance with
F.2.2.3.7, the unbraced length, Lb , of the compression flange in the area adjacent to the point where the moment that is
redistributed acts must not exceed the value Lm calculated as follows:
(a) For section members in I of simple or double symmetry, with the compression flange greater than or equal to
,
fin in tension, loaded on the web plane:
=
ÿ
M Eÿ1ÿ ÿ
ÿ mÿ L 0.12 0.076 ÿ
ÿÿÿÿÿ r
ÿÿ
ÿ
(F.2.6.13-8)
ÿÿ +ÿ M 2F ÿ
ÿ
and
and
where:
=
My specified minimum yield stress for compression flange, MPa
M1 = smallest end moment for the unbraced length of the beam, N mm largest end moment
M2 = for the unbraced length of the beam, N mm radius of gyration about the y- axis ,
= mm
the
(
) M M1 2 it is positive when the moments produce double curvature and negative for simple curvature.
(b) For solid rectangular bars and symmetrical box girders requested by bending about their major axis:
ÿ ÿ ÿ MÿEÿÿ1 ÿÿ AND
L m0.17 0.10 ÿ r 0.10 ÿ=+ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿÿ ÿ r (F.2. 6.13-9)

ÿÿ
MF2yF
ÿyÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ
and and
There is no limit on Lb for members with a circular or rectangular cross section or for a beam of any cross section subjected to bending
about its weak axis.
F.2.7 — DESIGN OF ELEMENTS BY SHEAR

This numeral applies to web design for double or single symmetric members subject to shear in the plane of the web, to design for shear
of single angles and structural hollow sections (STPs), and to design for weak direction shear in sections. double or simple symmetry.
The following sections are included: F.2.7.1

— General Provisions F.2.7.2 —
Members with Stiffened or Unstiffened Webs F.2.7.3 — Tensioned
Field Action F.2.7.4 — Simple Angles F.2.7.5
— Structural Tubular Sections
(PTE) of Rectangular Section and Box Members F.2.7.6 — Circular Structural Tubular Sections (PTE) F.2.7.7
— Shear in the Weak Axis for Double or Simple Symmetry Profiles
F.2.7.8 — Beams with Openings in the Web
F-77
For conditions not included in this numeral, see the following numerals:
• F.2.8.3.3 Non-symmetrical sections •

F.2.10.4.2 Shear resistance of connection elements • F.2.10.10.6 Shear
in the area of the web panel
F.2.7.1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS — Two methods for calculating shear resistance are presented below. The method presented in
F.2.7.2 does not use the post-buckling resistance of the member (action of the stressed field). The method presented in F.2.7.3 uses the
action of the stressed field.
The design resistance to shear will be ÿv n numeral IN , where for all the provisions of numeral F.2.7, except the
F.2.7.2.1a, it will be taken:
ÿ in= 0.90
F.2.7.2 — MEMBERS WITH RIGIDIZED OR NON-RIGIDIZED WEBS
F.2.7.2.1 — Nominal resistance to shear — This numeral applies to the webs of members with double or simple symmetry
and to channels requested by shear in the plane of the web.
The nominal shear resistance, Vn , of stiffened or unstiffened webs, for the limit states of shear yield and shear buckling, will be
taken as:
=
V 0.60F AC (F.2.7.2-1)
n is
(a) For member webs in I -section rolled sections with ht In

ÿ 2.24 EF y :
ÿ in= 1.00
y
C 1.0
= (F.2.7.2-2)
in
(b) For webs of all other single and double symmetrical shapes and channels, not including circular section structural
hollow sections (STPs), the web shear coefficient, Cv , is determined as follows :
h kE
i) for t
ÿ 1.10 in
F
In y
=
C 1.00 (F.2.7.2-3)
in
k inE k E h
ii) For 1.10 < ÿ 1.37 in
Ftis the
F
1.10 k EinF
(F.2.7.2-4)
and
C =
in
ht In
h kE
iii) For t
> 1.37 in
F
In y
1.51k E
C = in
in
(F.2.7.2-5)
2
ÿ h ÿ
F
t y
ÿÿ ÿÿ
In
where:
mm2of the web, product of the depth of the section by the thickness of the web, dtw ,
Aw = area
F-78
h = for rolled profiles, the free distance between fins minus the fillet or radius at the web-fin joint, mm = for
profiles reinforced with
welding, the free distance between fins, mm = for profiles reinforced with bolts, the
distance between lines of connectors, mm = for T sections the depth, mm wt = thickness of the
web, mm. ,
The buckling coefficient of the web, kv , is determined as follows:
(i) For webs without transverse stiffeners and with ht 260 In

<:
k 5in =
except for T section webs in which case k 1.2 = .

in
(ii) For webs with transverse stiffeners:
5
k in5 = + (F.2.7.2-6)
2
( a )
h
2
260 ÿ
> inÿ k
=5when ah 3.0 > or ah ÿ ht
( ÿÿ In ÿ ) ÿÿ
where:
a = free distance between transverse stiffeners, mm
F.2.7.2.2 — Transverse stiffeners — Transverse stiffeners are not required when or when the required shear strength is less
ht In ÿ 2.46 EF y , than or equal to the design strength
a shear calculated according to F.2.7.2.1 for k 5 = .

in
The transverse stiffeners used to develop the design shear resistance in the web, as required in numeral F.2.7.2.1, must meet
the following condition:
3
I stbt ÿ j In (F.2.7.2-7)
where:
I
st = moment of inertia of the transverse stiffener with respect to an axis located in the median plane of the web in the case
of a pair of stiffeners, and with respect to the face in contact with the web in the case of simple stiffeners. = the
smaller of the dimensions a and h
b
and:
2.5
j = ÿÿ 2 0.50 (F.2.7.2-8)
( ah )2
Transverse stiffeners can be interrupted before reaching the flange in tension as long as they do not have to transmit a
concentrated load or reaction. The weld connecting a transverse stiffener to the web shall terminate at a distance, from the near
edge of the weld joining the web and the flange, not less than four times and not more than six times the thickness of the web.
When simple stiffeners are used, and the compression flange consists of a rectangular plate, they should be connected to the
flange to resist any uplift due to torsion in the flange.
When bolts are used to connect the stiffeners to the web of the beam, they shall be spaced no more than 305mm center to
center. If intermittent fillet welds are used, the free distance between welds must be less than or equal to 16 times the thickness
of the web, without exceeding 250 mm.
F-79
F.2.7.3 — TENSIONED FIELD ACTION
F.2.7.3.1 — Limitations on the use of the Tensioned Field Action — The tensioned field action is permitted for flanged
members when the web deck is supported on all four sides by flanges or stiffeners. This action is not allowed in the following
cases:
(a) end decks on members with transverse stiffeners; ÿ > ÿ ah

2
260 ÿ
(b) members with ah 3 > or ;
ht
ÿ ) ÿÿ
In
(d)fc( members
members with 2A AA 2.5 in ( ÿÿ ft) with
+ > ;h(c)
bfc or hb 6.0 ft >
where:
Afc = compression flange area, mm2
Aft = area of fin in tension, mm2
bfc = width of flange in compression, mm bft =
width of flange in tension, mm
In these cases, the nominal shear resistance, Vn , will be determined in accordance with the provisions of numeral
F.2.7.2.
F.2.7.3.2 — Nominal shear resistance with action of the stressed field — When, according to numeral F.2.7.3.1, it is allowed
to consider the action of the stressed field, the nominal shear resistance with action of the stressed field, Vn , for The limit state
of yield stress will be:
(a) for ht In
ÿ 1.10 k E / F
in
y
=
V n0.60FA (F.2.7.3-1)
is
(b) Money ht w vy
> 1.10 k E / F
ÿ ÿ
1C
ÿ
in
=
V n0.60F AC ÿ
+
ÿ
(F.2.7.3-2)
is v 2
1.15 1 + ( )
ÿ ÿ
where kv and Cv are those defined in numeral F.2.7.2.1
F.2.7.3.3 — Transverse stiffeners — The transverse stiffeners subject to the action of the stressed field shall meet the
requirements of numeral F.2.7.2.2, in addition to the following limitations:
AND
( bt ) st ÿ 0.56 (F.2.7.3-3)
F
extreme
V r Vÿ ÿ c1ÿ
II stI ÿ+ ÿ (
st1 st2 st1 I (F.2.7.3-4)
ÿ )Vÿc2V
ÿc1ÿ ÿ
where:
( )st bt = width-thickness ratio of the stiffener

Fyst = specified minimum yield stress of the stiffener material, MPa
F-80
I st = moment of inertia of the transverse stiffener with respect to an axis located in the median plane of the web in the case of a
pair of stiffeners, and with respect to the face in contact with the web in the case of simple stiffeners, mm4 .
I
st1 = minimum moment of inertia required in the transverse stiffener to develop the resistance of the web to shear buckling
according to numeral F.2.7.2.2, mm4 . = minimum moment of inertia required in
I st2 the transverse stiffener to develop the resistance to shear buckling in the web plus the resistance associated with the action of
the tension field, VV
r
=
c2
mm4 .
,
1.5
4 1.3 ÿÿ
h ÿ st Live
=
40 and
ÿÿÿÿÿÿ
(F.2.7.3-5)
Vr = the greater of the required shear resistances in the web panels adjacent to the
stiffener, N
Vc1 = the smallest of the available shear resistances in the web panels adjacent to the stiffener, with Vn calculated according to
F.2.7.2.1, N.
Vc2 = the smallest of the available shear resistances in the web panels adjacent to the stiffener, with Vn calculated according to
F.2.7.3.2, N.
= F / F 1.0 ÿ
ÿst is a stretch
Fyw = specified minimum yield stress for the web material, MPa.
F.2.7.4 — SINGLE ANGLES — The nominal shear strength, Vn , of the single angle flange shall be determined using Formula F.2.7.2-1 and
F.2.7.2.1(b) with bt In
= ,
where:
b = width of flange resisting shear, mm = thickness of angle flange,

t mm h/tw = bt
= 1.2 k
in
F.2.7.5 — STRUCTURAL TUBULAR SECTIONS (PTE) WITH RECTANGULAR SECTION AND BOX MEMBERS — The nominal shear strength,
Vn , of rectangular section PTE and box members, shall be determined using the provisions of numeral F.2.7. 2.1 with A 2ht
=
In
,
where:
h = width of the face that resists the shear force, taken as the free distance between the flanges minus the inside radius of the corner at each
end, mm = design thickness of the wall, equal to 0.93 times
t the nominal thickness of the wall if PTE was fabricated by Electric Resistance Welding (ERW), and equal to nominal wall thickness if PTE
was fabricated by Submerged Arc Welding (SAW), mm wt = t = 5
k in
If the corner radius is not known, h shall be taken as the corresponding outside dimension minus 3 times the thickness.
F.2.7.6 — CIRCULAR STRUCTURAL TUBULAR SECTIONS (PTE) — The nominal shear resistance of circular PTE, for the limit states of shear
yield and shear buckling, shall be taken as: Vn ,
V F A= /2 cr g (F.2.7.6-1)
n
where:
Fcr is the greater of the following values:
F-81
1.60E
F cr = (F.2.7.6-2a)
54
L inD ÿ ÿ
ÿÿÿ
D tÿ
and
0.78E
F cr = (F.2.7.6-2b)
32
( Dt )
not exceeding 0.60F .
Ag = gross (total) cross-sectional area of the member, mm2

D = outside diameter, mm Lv =
distance between the points of maximum shear and zero shear, mm = design wall thickness for
t PTE, equal to 0.93 times the nominal thickness for pipe manufactured by the electric resistance welding process, and equal to the
nominal thickness when using the submerged arc process, mm
The formulas for shear buckling, F.2.7.6-2a and F.2.7.6-2b, control for D t ratios greater than 100, high-strength steels, and considerable
lengths. For standard sections, the shear strength calculation will usually be controlled by the shear yield limit state.
F.2.7.7 — SHEAR ON THE WEAK AXIS FOR SINGLE OR DOUBLE SYMMETRY PROFILES — For single or double symmetric profiles
loaded on the weak axis, without torsion, the nominal shear resistance, Vn , must be determined for each of the the elements that resist
the shear force using formula F.2.7.2-1 and h F.2.7.2.1(b) with A bt t
=
w ff
= b and ink =1.2
,
t ,
In f
where:
b = for flanges of I -section members the overall ,
half the total width of the wing, bf ; for channel fins,
nominal dimension of the flange, mm
For all W profiles , S , M and HP according to ASTM A6, C 1.00 = ÿ

when F 345 and MPa.
in
F.2.7.8 — BEAMS WITH OPENINGS IN THE WEB — The effect of all openings in the web on the nominal shear strength of steel or
composite construction beams shall be determined. When the required strength exceeds the design strength in a section of a member
where there is an opening, the necessary reinforcement shall be provided to make up for the deficiency.
F.2.8 — DESIGN OF MEMBERS STRESSED BY COMBINED FORCES AND

TORSION
This clause applies to members stressed by axial loading and bending about one or both axes, with or without torsion, and to members
stressed solely by torsion.
F.2.8.1 — Members with Double or Single Symmetry Required by Bending and Axial Force F.2.8.2 —
Asymmetric Members and Other Members Required by Bending and Axial Force F.2.8.3 — Members
Required by Torsion or a Combination of Torsion, Bending, Shear or Axial Force F.2.8.4 — Breakage of Fins with Perforations
under Tension Forces
For members of composite construction, see F.2.9.
F.2.8.1 — MEMBERS WITH DOUBLE OR SIMPLE SYMMETRY REQUESTED BY BENDING AND AXIAL FORCE
F.2.8.1.1 — Double or single symmetric members stressed by bending and compression — The interaction of bending
and compression in double symmetric members, and in single symmetric members
F-82
that satisfy the relationship 0.1 ÿII and

( c
and ) , constrained so that bending occurs around ÿ 0.9
geometric axes ("x" or "y"), will be limited by equations F.2.8.1-1a and F.2.8.1-1b, where I is the moment of inertiaycof
the compression flange with respect to the axis "y", mm4 .
It is allowed to use numeral F.2.8.2 instead of the provisions of this numeral
P
in
(a) Para f ÿ 0.2
P
n
P ÿM8 M ÿ
Uy
in
+ +ÿ ÿ 1.0ux (F.2.8.1-1a)
P9 M M bnxb
fff nÿ ny ÿÿ
P
in
(b) Para f < 0.2
P
n
P M Mÿ ÿ
Uy
in ux
++ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿ 1.0 (F.2.8.1-1b)
2P M M
n ÿ b nx the b ÿÿ
where:
Could
= required compressive strength, N = ÿc nP
Pn f design compressive strength, determined in accordance with F.2.5,
N Mu = required flexural strength, N mm ÿb n M =

design flexural strength determined in accordance with F.2.6, N mm
x = subscript relative to bending about the major axis =
and subscript relative to bending about the minor axis =
Phi c coefficient of reduction of resistance for compression = 0.90 = coefficient
Phi b of reduction of resistance for bending = 0.90
F.2.8.1.2 — Double or Single Symmetrical Members Restrained by Flexure and Tension — The interaction of
bending and tension in single or double symmetrical members constrained such that bending occurs about the geometric
axes ("x " or "y"), will be limited by equations F.2.8.1-1a and F.2.8.1-1b, taking:
Pu
= required resistance in tension, N = ÿt
Pn ÿ nP = design resistance in tension, determined according to F.2.4, N
Mu = required flexural strength, N·mm ÿb n M = design flexural strength, determined in accordance with
numeral
F.2.6, N·mm ÿ
t
= coefficient of resistance reduction for tension (see F.2.4.2) = coefficient of resistance
Phi b reduction for bending = 0.90
P
in
For members with double symmetry, the coefficient Cb of F.2.6 can be multiplied by 1 +
P
ey
when you have an axial tensile force acting concurrently with bending,
where:
2
p NO
y
P =
ey 2
L b
F-83
It is permissible to use a more detailed analysis of the interaction of bending and stress instead of Equations F.2.8.1-1a and
F.2.8.1-1b.
F.2.8.1.3 — Members in rolled sections with double symmetry and compact section, stressed by compression and
bending about an axis — For members in rolled sections with double symmetry and ÿ ( compact section, with ( ) KL KL
basically on the major axis ( With

and ),
requested by bending and compression, where the bending moment acts
M / M 0.05
Phi
< uy the ) The two states can be considered separately.
independent limits (in-plane instability and out-of-plane buckling or lateral-torsional buckling), as follows, instead of using the
combined approach presented in F.2.8.1.1:
(a) For the in-plane instability limit state, use equations F.2.8.1-1 with Pn ÿ , Mux and ÿb nx M calculated in the
bending plane.
(b) For the limit state of out-of-plane buckling and lateral-torsional buckling:
2
PinPM ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ
ÿ 1.5ÿ0.5
ÿ+ ÿ in ux 1.0 (F.2.8.1-2)
P CM
ÿ It's
ÿÿp.cÿ the c ÿ ÿ b b nx ÿÿ
where:
Phi
c nP
and
= design resistance to compression for buckling outside the bending plane, N = modification
Cb
coefficient for the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling, calculated according to F.2.6.1 Mcx = design
resistance for the limit state
of lateral buckling torsional, with bending about the major axis, determined in accordance with Section F.2.6 and using
C 1.0 = N·mm ,
b
For members with significant moments about both axes ( MM 0.05 ), the provisions ÿ
of numeral
Phi F.2.8.1.1 must be
Uy Uy
applied.
Eq. F.2.8.1-2, C Mb nx the beam Phi can be greater than ÿb In M

px
. The yielding condition of the section of
column is controlled by Eqs. F.2.8.1-1.
F.2.8.2 — ASYMMETRICAL MEMBERS AND OTHER MEMBERS STRESSED BY BENDING AND AXIAL FORCE — This section refers
to the interaction of axial and bending forces for sections not covered in F.2.8.1. It is permitted to use the provisions of this clause in lieu
of the provisions of F.2.8.1 for any cross section.
The following relationship must be satisfied:
ff f
day
++ÿ rbw
FF rbz
F 1.0 (F.2.8.2-1)
that cbw cbz
where:
f = required resistance (axial force due to applied factored loads) at the point where
day
consideration, MPa F
Fca terms, determined= design resistance to axial load at the point under consideration, expressed in = ÿc cr F or ÿt t stress
according to F.2.5 for compression and F.2.4.2 for tension, MPa
ff rbw , rbz = required resistance (flexural stresses due to applied factored loads) at a point
specific to the cross section, MPa Fcbw , Fcbz
= ÿb n MS = design resistance to bending at the point under consideration, expressed in terms of stresses, determined according to F.2.6,
MPa. The section modulus corresponding to the specific location in the cross section must be used and the sign of
stress must be considered. = subscript relative to bending about the major axis = subscript relative to bending about
In the minor axis
With
F-84
c = resistance reduction coefficient for compression = 0.90 = resistance reduction

FF
t coefficient for tension (section F.2.4.2) = resistance reduction coefficient for bending =
Phi
b 0.90
Equation F.2.8.2-1 must be evaluated using the principal bending axes and considering the direction of the bending stresses for the critical
points of the cross section. The terms associated with bending are added or subtracted from the term associated with the axial load as
appropriate. When the axial force is compression, second order effects must be included in accordance with the provisions of Section F.2.3.
It is permissible to use a more detailed analysis of the interaction of bending and stress instead of Equation F.2.8.2-1.
F.2.8.3 — MEMBERS STRESSED BY TORSION OR BY A COMBINATION OF TORSION, BENDING, SHEAR OR AXIAL FORCE.
F.2.8.3.1 — Resistance to Torsion of Rectangular and Circular Structural Hollow Sections (PTE) — The design resistance to
torsion, ÿT nT , for rectangular and circular PTE, will be determined based on:
Tÿ = 0.90
and the nominal resistance to torsion calculated as:
=
T FC
n cr (F.2.8.3-1)
for torsional yield and torsion buckling limit states,
where:
C is the torsional constant for the PTE and the critical stress Fcr is determined as follows:
(a) For a circular PTE, Fcr will be the greatest value between
1.23E
F =
cr 54 (F.2.8.3-2a)
L Dÿ ÿ ÿ
D tÿ ÿ
ÿ
and
0.60E
F =
cr 32
(F.2.8.3-2b)
( Dt )
but should not be taken greater than 0.6F and ,
where:
L =
element length, mm outer
D =
diameter, mm
(b) For a rectangular PTE:
(i) Para h t 2.45 E F ÿ and
F 0.6F
= y
(F.2.8.3-3)
cr
(ii) For 2.45 E F h t 3.07 E F < ÿ

and and
= 2.45 E F (h t y
F cr0.6F )( )
and
(F.2.8.3-4)
F-85
(iii) For 3.07 EF ht 260 < ÿ and
2
=
Fcr0.458 E ht p.m ( )2 (F.2.8.3-5)
where:
h = flat width of the longest side, as defined in F.2.2.4.1b(d), mm = design thickness of the wall, as
t defined in F.2.2.4.2, mm
The torsional shear constant, C , can be taken conservatively as follows:

ÿ ÿ( )2 Dt t
For a circular PTE: C =
2
3 Prepare a rectangular PTE: C 2 B t( H tt 4.5

)( 4 t ÿÿ) .
=ÿ
ÿÿ
( )
F.2.8.3.2 — Structural Hollow Sections (STP) requested by a combination of torsion, shear, bending and axial force —
When the required resistance to torsion, Tu , is less than or equal to T 20% of the design resistance to torsion, ÿT n a PTE
shall be determined according to F.2.8.1 and torsional , interaction of torsion, shear, bending, or axial force to
effects shall be neglected. when you
T
exceeds 20% of ÿT n the interaction of torsion, shear, bending and axial force, at the point under consideration, will be limited
,
by:
2
ÿ PM
ÿÿ
in
ÿVT
ÿÿ ÿuh uhÿÿ ÿ
ÿÿPM
ÿ +VT++ ÿ 1.0 (F.2.8.3-6)
n bn v n Tn Phi ÿÿ
where:
= required axial load resistance, N = design
Pu resistance in tension or compression, according to F.2.4 and F.2.5, N
Pn ÿ Mu = required flexural strength, N mm
ÿbMn= design flexural strength according to F.2.6, N mm Vu ÿv n V = design
= required shear resistance, N
shear strength according to F.2.7, N Tu ÿT nT = design resistance to
= required torsion resistance, N mm
torsion according to F.2.8.3.1, N mm
F.2.8.3.3 — Resistance of members other than Structural Hollow Sections (PTE) requested by Torsion and Combined
Forces — The design resistance to torsion, ÿT nT , for members other than PTE will be the lesser of the values obtained for
the limit states of yield stress under normal stress, shear creep under shear stress, and buckling, using:
Tÿ = 0.90
and based on the following design efforts:
(a) For the yield limit state under normal stresses
FF y= (F.2.8.3-7)
n
(b) For the shear yield limit state under shear stresses
F 0.6F
= y (F.2.8.3-8)
n
(c) For the buckling limit state
F-86
F nF= cr
(F.2.8.3-9)
where:
Fcr = buckling stress for the section determined by analysis, MPa.
Some degree of restricted local creep is allowed in the vicinity of zones that remain elastic.
F.2.8.4 — BREAKAGE OF FINS WITH PERFORATIONS UNDER TENSION STRESSES — Where there are perforations in a fin under
tension stresses due to the combination of axial load and bending about the major axis, the tensile strength of the fin will be limited by
equation F.2.8.4-1. Each fin requested for tension under axial load and bending shall be verified separately.
PinM ux
ÿ 1.0 (F.2.8.4-1)
Phit
P M+ f
n b nx
where:
Could
= required resistance to axial load for the member in the section where the perforations are found, positive for tension, negative
for compression, N = design resistance to axial load for
ÿt nP the limit state of failure in tension by the net area in the section where where the perforations are located, determined in
accordance with numeral F.2.4.2(b), N Mux = required flexural strength in the section where the perforations
are located, positive for tension in the flange under consideration, negative for compression, N·mm ÿb nx M = design resistance to
bending about the x- axis for the limit state of failure by tension of the fin, determined
according to numeral F.2.6.13.1. When the limit state of rupture is not applicable, calculated without
bending stress, should be taken as nominal resistance, Mn take into , the plastic moment, Mp ,
account the perforations, N·mm. = coefficient of
Phit
reduction of resistance for rupture in tension = 0.75 = coefficient of reduction of
Phi b
resistance for bending = 0.90
F.2.9 — DESIGN OF COMPOSITE SECTION MEMBERS

This numeral applies to composite members, made up of rolled profiles, reinforced profiles or structural tubular profiles (PTE) that act
together with a section of structural concrete, and steel beams that support a reinforced concrete slab, the beams and the slab being
interconnected. in such a way that they act together to resist bending. Includes simply supported or continuous composite beams with
connectors and concrete-filled or encased profile-type beams, constructed with or without temporary shoring.
F.2.9.1 — General Provisions F.2.9.2

— Axial Force F.2.9.3 —
Bending F.2.9.4 —
Shear F.2.9.5 —
Combination of Axial Force and Bending F.2.9.6 —
Transfer of Forces F.2.9.7 — Composite
Diaphragms and Collector Beams F.2.9.8 — Steel Connectors
F.2.9.9 — Special Cases
F.2.9.1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS — To determine the effects of loads on the members and connections of a structure that includes
composite members, the effective sections at the time of application of each load increment must be considered.
F.2.9.1.1 — Concrete and Reinforcing Steel — The material properties, design, and detailing related to the concrete and
reinforcing steel that are part of the composite construction shall comply with
F-87
with the corresponding design specifications of Title C of this Regulation, with the following exceptions and limitations:
(a) Completely exclude numerals C.7.8.2 and C.10.13 and Chapter C.21 of this
Regulation.
(b) The limitations for the materials of concrete and longitudinal reinforcing steel will be those specified in numeral
F.2.9.1.3.
(c) The limitations for transversal reinforcement will be those specified in numeral F.2.9.2.1.1(2),
in addition to those established in Title C of this Regulation.
(d) The minimum amount of longitudinal reinforcement for profile-clad composite members shall be as specified in Section
F.2.9.2.1.1(3).
It is intended that the concrete and reinforcing steel that are part of the composite section members be detailed applying the provisions
for non-composite construction of Title C of this Regulation, modified as indicated in this Chapter F.2.
F.2.9.1.2 — Nominal Strength of Composite Sections — To determine the nominal strength of composite sections, the plastic stress
distribution method or strain compatibility method shall be used, as presented below.
In determining the nominal strength of composite members, the tensile strength of the concrete shall be neglected.
For compression-filled profile-type members, the effects of local buckling must be taken into account as established in section F.2.9.1.4.
Consideration of local buckling effects is not required for clad section type members.
F.2.9.1.2.1 — Plastic Method of Stress Distribution — For the plastic method of stress distribution, the nominal strength
shall be calculated assuming that the steel components have reached a stress equal to Fy in either tension or compression,
and that the concrete components under compressive stresses due to axial or bending loads have reached a stress of 0.85fÿ .
For circular structural hollow sections (STE) filled with concrete, the effect of confinement allows to use a stress of concrete
components under compressive stresses due to flexuralc or axial load solicitations.
0.95fÿc in the
F.2.9.1.2.2 — Strain Compatibility Method — For this method, a linear distribution of strains through the section will be
assumed, with a maximum strain of 0.003 mm/mm in compressive concrete. Stress-strain relationships for steel and concrete
shall be obtained from tests or published results for similar materials.
For irregular sections and in those cases in which the steel does not present an elasto-plastic behavior, the nominal resistance
must be determined using the Deformation Compatibility Method. Title C of this Regulation and the AISC Design Guide No. 6
present the general guidelines for applying the deformation compatibility method to concrete-lined profile-type columns
requested by axial load, bending, or a combination of both.
F.2.9.1.3 — Material Limitations — Concrete and reinforcing bars used in composite systems shall be subject to the following
limitations, except when other criteria are justified by testing or analysis:
(1) For purposes of calculating the design resistance, a compressive design resistance, cfÿ , will be taken for the concrete ,
not less than 21 MPa nor more than 70 MPa if it is normal weight concrete and not less than 21 MPa nor more than 42
MPa for lightweight concrete.
Higher values of concrete strength can be used for stiffness calculations, but cannot be relied on for strength calculations
unless the results are justified by testing or analysis.
F-88
(2) In calculating the strength of a composite column, the specified minimum yield stresses for structural
steel and reinforcing bars shall not be taken to be greater than 525 MPa.
F.2.9.1.4 — Classification of Filled Profile Type Composite Sections for Local Buckling — For compression
design purposes, filled profile type composite sections are classified as compact, noncompact, or with slender
elements. A filled profile type composite section is classified as compact if the width to thickness ratio does not
exceed the ÿp limit of Table F.2.9.1-1a in any of its compression steel elements. If the width to thickness ratio
exceeds the ÿp limit of table F.2.9.1-1a in any of the compression steel elements, without exceeding the ÿr limit
of the same table in any of them, the composite section shall be classified as non-compact. If the width to
thickness ratio of any compression steel element exceeds the ÿr limit of Table F.2.9.1-1a, the section is classified
as a section with slender elements. The values of the width to thickness ratio will be limited to the maximums
specified in the same table.
For flexural design purposes, filled profile type composite sections are classified as compact, non-compact, or
with slender elements. A filled profile type composite section is classified as compact if the width to thickness ratio
does not exceed the ÿp limit of Table F.2.9.1-1b in any of its compression steel elements. If the width to thickness
ratio exceeds the ÿp limit of table F.2.9.1-1b in any of the compression steel elements, without exceeding the ÿr
limit of the same table in any of them, the composite section shall be classified as non-compact. If the width to
thickness ratio of any compression steel element exceeds the ÿr limit of Table F.2.9.1-1b, the composite section
is classified as a section with slender elements. The values of the width to thickness ratio will be limited to the
maximums specified in the same table.
The definitions of width ( b or D ) and thickness (t) for rectangular and circular PTEs are presented in tables
F.2.2.4.1a and F.2.2.4.1b.
Tabla F.2.9.1-1a
Limit Values of the Width to Thickness Ratio for Compression Steel Elements in Members of Composite
Construction Requested by Axial Compression Load (to apply in numeral F.2.9.2.2)
limit values
Relationship
p ÿr
Item Description width to Maximum
Thickness (Compact/No (No Permitted
Compact) Compact/Slim)
Walls made of structural
tubular profiles (PTE) and box b
2.26 EF y 3.0 EF y 5.0 IF
profiles, with a rectangular t and
section and uniform thickness

filled circular sections D 0.15EF 0.19EF y 0.31EF
t and and
F-89
Table F.2.9.1-1b
Limit Values of the Width to Thickness Ratio for Compression Steel Elements in Members of Composite
Construction Requested by Bending (to apply in numeral F.2.9.3.4)
limit values
Relationship
p ÿr
Item Description width to Maximum
Thickness (Compact/No (No Permitted
Compact) Compact/Slim)
Fins made of structural
tubular profiles (STP) and box b 2.26 EF y 3.0 EF y 5.0 IF
t and
profiles, with a rectangular

section and uniform thickness
Webs of structural tubular
profiles (PTE) and box profiles, h 3.0 EF y 5.70 EF y 5.70 IF
t and
with a rectangular section and

uniform thickness
D 0.09EF y 0.31EF y
filled circular sections 0.31EF
t and
F.2.9.2 — AXIAL FORCE — This numeral applies to two types of composite members requested by axial force: concrete-lined
profiles and concrete-filled profiles.
F.2.9.2.1 — Clad profile type composite columns
F.2.9.2.1.1 — Limitations —For a member to qualify as a clad profile type composite column, the following
limitations must be met:
(a) The cross-sectional area of the steel core must comprise at least 1% of the total composite cross-
section.
(b) The concrete lining of the steel core must be reinforced with bars
continuous longitudinal and stirrups or spirals.
When stirrups are used, a minimum of 9.5mm diameter rods spaced 305mm o.c., or 12.7mm
diameter or larger rods spaced 406mm o.c., shall be furnished. The use of corrugated wire or
electro-welded mesh with an equivalent area is allowed.
In no case should the spacing of the stirrups be greater than 0.5 times the least dimension of the
column.
(c) The minimum area ratio for continuous longitudinal reinforcement, ÿsr , will be 0.004,
where ÿsr is given by:
A
sr
ÿ sr
= (F.2.9.2-1)
A
g
where:
Asr = area of continuous reinforcing bars, mm2
Ag = gross area of the composite section, mm2
See numerals C.7.10 and C.10.9.3 of this Regulation for additional provisions referring to stirrups and
reinforcing spirals.
F.2.9.2.1.2 — Design Compressive Strength — The design compressive strength, P ÿc n , for axially
loaded double symmetrical clad profile composite members shall be
F-90
determined for the flexural buckling limit state based on the slenderness of the column, taking:
ÿ c= 0.75
and with Pn calculated as follows:
(a) When P 0.44P ÿ It is no
0.658 = ÿ ÿ ÿ ( P P P no
P e
(F.2.9.2-2)
n no ÿ)ÿ
ÿ
(b) When: P 0.44P < It is no
P0.877P
n
=
It is
(F.2.9.2-3)
where:
ÿ
PAFAF 0.85A f =+ + and sr ysr

no cc
(F.2.9.2-4)
2
Pi ( NO )
eff
P It is
=
2
(F.2.9.2-5)
( at )
(critical elastic buckling load, calculated according to numeral F.2.3 or numeral F.2.21 of this Chapter)
and:
Ac = area of concrete, mm2

As = area of the steel section, mm2
Asr = area of continuous longitudinal reinforcement bars, mm2
Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete =
1.5
0.043w fÿc c
,
MPa
EIeff = effective stiffness of the composite section, N mm2
NOeffNO 0.5EICEI
ss =+sr+ 1cc
(F.2.9.2-6)
where:
A ÿ
ÿ ÿ C1 0.1 2 =+
s
ÿ 0.3 (F.2.9.2-7)
AA
+ÿ c s ÿÿ
(Coefficient for calculating the effective stiffness of a compression coated profile type composite member)
Es = modulus of elasticity of steel = 200,000 MPa = specified

compressive strength of concrete, MPa cfÿ Fy = specified minimum
yield stress for steel section, MPa Fysr = specified minimum yield stress for reinforcing bars,
MPa
Ic = moment of inertia of the concrete section with respect to the elastic neutral axis of the composite
section, mm4
sI = moment of inertia of the steel section with respect to the elastic neutral axis of the composite section,
mm4 = moment of inertia of
I sr the reinforcing bars with respect to the elastic neutral axis of the composite section, mm4
K = effective length factor = length

L of member without lateral support, mm = weight of
wc concrete per unit volume (1500 w 2500 ) kg/m3 ÿ ÿc
F-91
When calculating the design compressive strength, the one obtained for the uncoated steel section based on numeral
F.2.5 can be taken as a minimum.
Formulas F.2.9.2-6 and F.2.9.2-10 were developed based on data from double symmetric composite sections. Criteria
on the effect of deviations from symmetry in applying these equations are provided in the ANSI/ AISC 360 Specification
Comments.
F.2.9.2.1.3 - Tensile strength - The design tensile strength, ÿt nP , for coated profile-type composite members, shall
be determined for the yield limit state taking:
ÿ t= 0.90
and
PnOFF OFF
s = +y sr ysr (F.2.9.2-8)
F.2.9.2.1.4 — Load transfer — Loads applied to axially loaded coated section composite members shall be transferred
between the steel and the concrete in accordance with the requirements established in F.2.9.6.
F.2.9.2.1.5 — Detailing Requirements — The minimum separation between the steel section and the longitudinal
reinforcement rods will be 1.5 times the diameter of the rods, with a minimum of 38 mm.
If the composite cross section includes two or more coated steel shapes, these should be connected to each other by
means of a lattice, clips, or similar components to prevent buckling from occurring in the individual shapes as a result
of the application of loads before the concrete is set. has set.
F.2.9.2.2 — Filled Profile Type Composite Members
F.2.9.2.2.1 — Limitations — The cross-sectional area of the steel profile shall comprise at least 1% of the total
composite cross-section. Filled profile type composite members shall be classified in accordance with F.2.9.1.4 for
local buckling effects.
F.2.9.2.2.2 — Design compressive strength — The design compressive strength, ÿc n , for axially loaded double
symmetrical
P filled profile composite members shall be determined for the limit state of flexural buckling based on
numeral F.2.9.2.1.2, applying the following modifications:
For compact sections:
Pno=P p (F.2.9.2-9a)
where:
AND ÿ
P OF Cf +AA
ÿ =+ ÿÿ 2c c sr
s
(F.2.9.2-9b)
p and AND
ÿ c ÿÿ
= 2
C 0.85 for rectangular sections and 0.95 for circular sections.
For non-compact sections:
Pp
Py ÿ
PPnop =ÿ
2
( lÿl p )2
(F.2.9.2-9c)
( ÿ ÿÿ
r )
p
where:
F-92
l , ÿp and ÿr are the slenderness ratios determined according to Table F.2.9.1.1a, and Pp is obtained from
formula F.2.9.2-9b
AND
s
ÿ
and
ÿ =+ +andÿÿ P A F 0.7f
c A Ac sr (F.2.9.2-9d)
AND
ÿ c ÿÿ
For slender sections:
AND
s
ÿ
no ÿ =+ +
s crÿÿ P A F 0.7f
c A Ac sr (F.2.9.2-9e)
AND
ÿ c ÿÿ
where:
9E s
F cr = for filled rectangular sections (F.2.9.2-10)
2
( b/t )
0.72F
and
F cr =
0.2
for filled circular sections (F.2.9.2-11)
ÿ F ÿ
( D )
and
tE s
ÿÿ ÿÿ
The effective stiffness of the composite section, EIeff , will be taken as follows for all kinds of
sections:
NO EIEICEI =+ + eff 3 ccsss sr (F.2.9.2-12)
where:
A s
ÿ
ÿ ÿ3 CA0.6
A 2 =+ ÿ ÿ 0.9 (F.2.9.2-13)
+ÿ c s ÿ
(coefficient for calculating the effective stiffness of compression-filled profile-type composite members)
The minimum value for the design compressive strength may be taken as that calculated for the uncoated
steel member in accordance with F.2.5.
F.2.9.2.2.3 — Tensile strength — The design tensile strength, ÿt nP , for filled profile type composite
members, shall be determined for the yield limit state taking:
Tÿ = 0.90
y
PnOFF OFF= +y sr ysr
s
(F.2.9.2-14)
F.2.9.2.2.4 — Load transfer — Loads applied to axially loaded infill profile composite members shall be
transferred between the steel and the concrete in accordance with the requirements established in F.2.9.6.
F.2.9.3 — FLEXURE —This clause applies to three types of flexural composite members: composite beams with steel
connectors that may be headed dowel, bolt, or channel type, concrete-lined profile-type members, and concrete-lined members.
profile type filled with concrete.
F.2.9.3.1 — General
F.2.9.3.1.1 — Effective Width — The effective width of the concrete slab will be the sum of the effective
widths to the side and side of the beam axis, each of which must not exceed:
F-93
(a) One eighth of the span of the beam, measured between centers of
supports; (b) Half the distance to the axis of the adjacent beam; or
(c) the distance to the edge of the concrete slab
F.2.9.3.1.2 — Strength During Construction — When temporary shoring is not used during construction, the steel
section considered in isolation shall have adequate strength to support all loads applied before the concrete reaches
75 % of its specified resistance cfÿ . The design resistance to bending of the steel section will be determined in
accordance with numeral F.2.6.
F.2.9.3.2 — Composite Beams with Headed Dowel, Bolt-Type, or Channel-Type Connectors
F.2.9.3.2.1 - Positive Moment Strength - The positive moment design strength, ÿb n will be determined for the M ,
yield limit state based on:
ÿ b= 0.90
and Mn calculated as follows:
h E 3.76 ÿ F
(a) to t
:
In and
Mn will be determined from the plastic stress distribution in the composite section for the limit state of plasticization of
the section (plastic moment).
h > E 3.76 F y
(b) For t
:
In
Mn will be determined by superimposing the elastic stresses, considering the effects of propping, for the ultimate fiber
yield point state (yield moment).
F.2.9.3.2.2 — Resistance to Negative Moment — The design resistance to negative moment, M ÿb n will be
determined for the steel section considered in isolation, according to the requirements of numeral F.2.6.
,
Alternatively, the design resistance to negative moment can be determined from the plastic distribution of stresses in
the composite section, for the limit state of plasticization of the section (plastic moment), with:
ÿ b= 0.90
given the following conditions:
(a) The steel beam is compact and adequately braced in accordance with numeral
F.2.6
(b) There are headed dowel-type, bolt-type or channel-type connectors that join the concrete slab to the steel
beam in the region of negative moment (c) the reinforcement of the
slab parallel to the steel beam, within the effective width of the slab, is
properly developed.
F.2.9.3.2.3 — Composite Beams with Slab on Metal Deck
(a) General — The flexural design resistance of a composite system made up of a concrete slab cast on a
metal deck, with the slab connected to the steel beams, will be determined in accordance with the
applicable provisions of numerals F .2.9.3.2.1 and F.2.9.3.2.2, meeting the following requirements:
F-94
• The ribs of the metal deck must not have a depth greater than 76 mm.
The average width of the concrete rib, wr , shall not be less than 50 mm, and for
calculation purposes shall not be taken as greater than the minimum free width at
the top of the metal deck. • The
concrete slab will be connected to the steel beam by means of welded headed spike
connectors, with a diameter less than or equal to 19 mm (AWS D1.1).
The dowels can be welded either through the sheet or directly to the steel beam.
The dowels, once installed, must extend at least 38 mm above the top level of the
metal deck, and must have a concrete cover of at least 13 mm above its upper end.
• The thickness of the slab above the metal deck will not be less than 50 mm. • The
metal deck will be anchored to all support members at spaces not exceeding 460 mm.
Such anchorage shall be provided by headed spigot connectors, a combination of
spigot and washer connectors with plug welds, or other system specified by the
designer.
Some of these dimensional limits are shown in Figure F.2.9.3-1.
hr ÿ 76 mm
hr ÿ 76 mm
hr ÿ 76 mm
hr ÿ 76 mm
Figure F.2.9.3-1 Dimensional limits for composite beams with metal deck
(b) Metal Deck Ribs Perpendicular to Steel Beam —When the ribs are oriented perpendicular
to the steel beams, concrete below the top level of the steel deck shall not be considered in
determining the section properties. compound nor to calculate Ac .
F-95
(c) Metal Deck Ribs Parallel to Steel Beam —Concrete below the top level of steel deck may be included
when determining composite section properties, and must be included when calculating Ac .
On the support beams, the ribs of the metal deck may be cut longitudinally and separated to form a
concrete capital.
When the nominal depth of the metal deck is 38 mm or greater, the average width of the capital or rib
supported by the beam, wr , shall not be less than 50 mm for the first dowel plus 4 dowel diameters for
each additional dowel in the cross row.
F.2.9.3.2.4 — Load Transfer between Steel Beam and Concrete Slab
F.2.9.3.2.4.1 — Load Transfer for Positive Moment — It shall be assumed that the entire horizontal shear
force at the interface between the steel beam and the concrete slab is transferred through the connectors,
except for type beams. coated profile as defined in numeral F.2.9.3.3. For a composite section beam where
the concrete is subjected to flexural compression, the total horizontal shear force, Vr
ÿ
between ,
the point of maximum positive moment and the point of zero moment will be taken as the lowest value among
those obtained for the limit states of concrete crushing, creep by tension of the steel section and resistance
of the connectors to shear, calculated as follows :
(a) Crush of Concrete V 0.85f A

ÿ ÿ
=
r cc (F.2.9.3-1a)
(c) Yield of steel section

ÿ
V FA = (F.2.9.3-1b)
r ys
(c) Resistance of the connectors = ÿ

ÿ
V Qr n (F.2.9.3-1c)
where:
And = sectional area of the concrete slab included within the effective width, mm2
= cross-sectional area of the steel profile mm2 As ÿ Qn = sum of

the nominal resistances of the connectors between the point of maximum positive moment
and the point of zero moment, N.
F.2.9.3.2.4.2 — Load Transfer for Negative Moment —In continuous composite beams where longitudinal
reinforcing steel is considered to act in conjunction with the steel beam in regions of negative moment, the
total horizontal shear force between point of maximum negative moment and the point of zero moment shall
not be greater than the lesser of the values of the design resistance corresponding to the following limit
states:
(a) Yield in tension of the reinforcement of the slab.

ÿ
W rOF=sr ysr (F.2.9.3-2a)
where:
Asr = area of properly developed longitudinal reinforcing steel within the effective width of
the concrete slab, mm2
Fysr = specified minimum yield stress for reinforcing steel,
MPa.
F-96
(b) Shear strength of spigot-to-head or channel-type connectors (F.2.9.3-2b)

ÿ
V rQ= ÿ n
F.2.9.3.3 — Composite Covered Profile Members — The design flexural strength of coated profile members in concrete, ÿb n
M will be determined based on:
,
ÿ b= 0.90
and Mn calculated using one of the following methods:
(a) The superposition of elastic stresses in the composite section, considering the effects of propping, for the yield limit
state in the extreme fiber (yield moment). (b) The plastic stress distribution in the steel section, taken in
isolation, for the state
plasticity limit of the section (plastic moment).
(c) The plastic stress distribution over the composite section, or the strain compatibility method, for the plasticity limit
state (plastic moment) of the composite section, provided steel connectors are used.
F.2.9.3.4 — Filled Profile Type Composite Members
F.2.9.3.4.1 — Limitations — Filled profile type composite members shall be classified for local buckling effects in
accordance with numeral F.2.9.1.4.
F.2.9.3.4.2 — Flexural Strength — The design flexural strength of a filled profile type composite member, ÿb n shall
be determined based on:M ,
ÿ b= 0.90
and Mn calculated as follows:
(a) For compact sections:
MM
n p
= (F.2.9.3-3a)
where:
Mp = moment corresponding to the plastic distribution of stresses on the
composite cross section, N mm.
(b) For non-compact sections:
MM
n
= p
MM
p
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
( yprp
ÿ
ÿ
ÿÿÿ ÿ ÿÿ )( ) (F.2.9.3-3b)
where:
l , ÿp and ÿr are the slenderness ratios obtained from table F.2.9.1-1b
My = yield moment, corresponding to the yield of the flange in tension and the beginning of yield in the
flange in compression, N·mm. The capacity at the beginning of creep will be calculated
assuming a linear and elastic distribution of stresses, limiting the maximum compressive
stress in the concrete to 0.7fÿ. c
and the maximum stress in the steel at Fy .
(c) For slender sections, Mn will be obtained as the moment for which creep begins. The stress in the
compression flange will be limited to the value of the local buckling stress, Fcr , determined using
equations F.2.9.2-10 and F.2.9.2-11. The
F-97
Stress distribution in the concrete will be linear and elastic, with the maximum stress being 0.7fÿ .
compression limited to c
F.2.9.4 — SHEAR
F.2.9.4.1 — Filled or Clad Profile Type Composite Members — The design strength shall be determined based on one of the
following criteria:
(a) The design shear resistance of the steel section taken in isolation, as
specified in numeral F.2.7.
(b) The design shear resistance of the reinforced concrete section (concrete plus reinforcing steel) taken in isolation,
as specified in Title C of this Regulation, using a combined resistance factor, ÿ, equal to 0.75 .
in
(c) The nominal shear resistance of the steel section as specified in numeral F.2.7 plus the nominal resistance of the
reinforcing steel calculated as specified in Title C of this Regulation, multiplied by a combined resistance factor,
ÿ , equal to 0.75. in
F.2.9.4.2 — Composite Beams with Slab on Metal Deck — The design shear resistance of composite beams with headed
dowel-type or channel-type steel connectors will be determined based on the properties of the steel section taken in isolation,
from according to numeral F.2.7.
F.2.9.5 — AXIAL AND BENDING FORCE COMBINATION — The interaction between axial and bending forces in composite members
shall be considered for purposes of stability analysis as required in F.2.3. The design resistance to compression, ÿc n , and the design
P
resistance to bending, ÿb n will be determined as defined in numerals F.2.9.2 and F.2.9.3, respectively. To account for the effectsM with
,
of length on the resistance of the member to axial load, the nominal resistance shall be obtained in accordance with F.2.9.2.
For composite members of the coated profile type or filled profile with compact sections, the interaction between the axial force and the
bending will be evaluated based on the interaction equations of numeral F.2.8.1.1 or by one of the methods defined in numeral F. 2.9.1.2.
For filled profile type composite members with non-compact or slender sections, the interaction between axial force and bending will be
evaluated based on the interaction equations of numeral F.2.8.1.1.
Methods for determining the capacity of composite section beam columns are presented in the Comments to ANSI/ AISC 360 Specification.
F.2.9.6 — TRANSFER OF FORCES
F.2.9.6.1 — General Requirements — When external forces are applied to an axially loaded lined profile or filled profile type
composite member, the introduction of such forces into the member and the transfer of longitudinal shears through the member
shall be evaluated in accordance with the force allocation requirements that are presented in this numeral.
The design resistance for the applicable load transfer mechanisms, Rn ÿ , determined in accordance with numeral F.2.9.6.3,
must be equal to or greater than the longitudinal shear force that is required to be transferred, Vr
ÿ
determined in accordance with numeral F.2.9.6.2.

,
F.2.9.6.2 — Force Assignment — Force will be assigned based on the distribution of the external force, according to the
The provisions for the resistance to crushing under the application of external forces are established in numeral F.2.10.8. For
filled profile type composite members, the AA term of formula F.2.10.8-2 can be taken equal 2to 2.0, taking into account the effect
1
of confinement.
F-98
F.2.9.6.2.1 — External Force Applied to Steel Section — When the external force is fully applied to the steel section,
ÿ
the force required to be transferred to the concrete, Vr with

,
will determine as follows:
ÿ OF ÿ
ÿ
and
In P1= ÿÿ ÿ (F.2.9.6-1)
r r
P
ÿ no ÿ
where:
Pr = external force applied to the composite member, N Pno =
nominal axial load resistance, without considering length effects, calculated according to formula F.2.9.2-4 for clad
profile composite members, and according to formula F .2.9.2-9a for filled profile composite members, N
F.2.9.6.2.2 — External Force Applied to Concrete — When the external force is applied entirely to the concrete
ÿ
lining or fill, the force that must be transferred to the steel, Vr ,

with
determine as follows:
VPrOF= P r
( )
(F.2.9.6-2)
and no
F.2.9.6.2.3 — External force applied simultaneously to steel and concrete — When the external force is applied
simultaneously to the steel section and the concrete lining or fill, Vr
ÿ
It will be determined as the force required to establish equilibrium at the cross section.
An acceptable method of determining the longitudinal shear force required to establish equilibrium at cross section is
presented in the Comments to ANSI/ AISC 360 Specification.
F.2.9.6.3 — Force Transfer Mechanisms — The nominal resistance, Rn , provided by direct bonding mechanisms, connectors,
and direct support shall be determined in accordance with this section.
The use of the force transfer mechanism that provides the greatest nominal resistance is allowed, but the overlapping of the
different mechanisms is not allowed.
For coated profile type composite members, the use of the force transfer mechanism by direct adhesion is not allowed.
F.2.9.6.3.1 — Direct Support — When in a lined or filled profile-type composite member the force is transferred by
direct support through internal support mechanisms, the design crushing resistance of the concrete, ÿB n R
will be determined based on:
,
Bÿ = 0.65
y
ÿ
=
R 1.7f
n c1A (F.2.9.6-3)
where:
A1 = area of the concrete receiving the load, mm2
An example of force transfer through an internal bearing mechanism is the use of steel plates within a filled profile
composite member.
F.2.9.6.3.2 — Shear connection — When in a shear type composite member, when the force is transferred through a
shear mechanism, the design shear resistance provided by headed pin type connectors, type bolt or channel type, Ra ,
will be determined as follows: with
F-99
R a =ÿ Q cv
(F.2.9.6-4)
where:
ÿ Qcv = sum of the design resistances of the headed, bolt-type or channel-type steel connectors,
determined in accordance with numeral F.2.9.8.3. The considered connectors must be
installed within the “introduction length of the load" defined in numeral F.2.9.6.4, N.
F.2.9.6.3.3 — Direct Bond — When in a filled profile composite member the force is transferred through
direct bonding, the design bond strength between steel and concrete, Rn ÿ , shall be obtained based on :
ÿ = 0.45
and Rn calculated as follows:
For rectangular steel sections filled with concrete:
2
R BC
n
=F
in in (F.2.9.6-5)
For circular steel sections filled with concrete:
= D C F ÿ in in
2 Rn 0.25 (F.2.9.6-6)
where:
Cin = 2, if the filled profile composite member extends only to one side of the point of
force transfer.
= 4, if the filled profile composite member extends to both sides of the point of
force transfer.
Rn = nominal adhesion resistance, N.
Fin = nominal adhesion stress = 0.40 MPa.
B = total width of the rectangular steel section along the face on which the
transfers force, mm.
D = diameter of the circular structural tubular profile (PTE), mm.
F.2.9.6.4 — Detailing Requirements
F.2.9.6.4.1 — Clad Profile Type Composite Members — Steel connectors used to transfer longitudinal
shear shall be distributed over the “load introduction length” which shall not extend beyond two times the
dimension minimum cross section of the clad profile composite member above and below the load
transfer zone. The connectors used to transfer the longitudinal shear must be installed on at least two of
the faces of the steel profile with an approximately symmetrical arrangement in relation to the axis of the
profile.
The spacing of the steel connectors, both within the "load introduction length" and outside of it, must
comply with the provisions of section F.2.9.8.3.5.
F.2.9.6.4.2 — Filled Profile Type Composite Members — When required, steel connectors used to
transfer longitudinal shear shall be distributed over the “load introduction length” which shall not extend
beyond twice the minimum transverse dimension in the case of a rectangular profile, or twice the diameter
in the case of a circular profile, above and below the load transfer zone.
The spacing of the steel connectors within the "load introduction length" must comply with the provisions
of section F.2.9.8.3.5.
F-100
F.2.9.7 — COMPOSITE SECTION DIAPHRAGMS AND COLLECTOR BEAMS — Diaphragm slabs and collector beams shall
be designed and detailed to transfer loads between the diaphragm, diaphragm edge members and collector members, and the
elements of the diaphragm system. resistance to lateral loads.
Design guidelines for diaphragms and composite section header beams are provided in the Comments to ANSI/ AISC 360
Specification.
F.2.9.8 — STEEL CONNECTORS
F.2.9.8.1 — General Requirements — The diameter of the dowels shall not be greater than 2.5 times the thickness
of the flange of the beam to which they are welded, unless they are located on the web.
F.2.9.8.2 applies to flexural members of composite section in which the steel connectors are embedded in a solid
concrete slab or cast on a metal deck. F.2.9.8.3 applies to all other cases.
F.2.9.8.2 — Steel Connectors in Composite Beams — The length of headed spike-type or bolt-type connectors,
measured from its base to the top of the head after installation, shall not be less than four diameters of the spike.
F.2.9.8.2.1 — Strength of headed dowel-type steel connectors — The nominal strength of a headed dowel-
type steel connector embedded in a solid concrete slab or cast on a metal deck shall be taken as:
ÿ
= ÿ (F.2.9.8-1)
Q 0.5A
n
f ERRAF
sc cc g p sc u
where:
Asc = cross-sectional area of spigot connector, mm² = specified compressive strength of
concrete, MPa cfÿ 0.043w fÿ Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete = Fu = specified
minimum tensile strength of headed spigot connectors , MPa Rg 1.5

MPa
c c ,
= 1.0 for:
(a) a headed spike-type steel connector welded into a rib of the metal deck, with the ribs oriented
perpendicular to the steel profile; (b) any number of steel headed spike connectors
welded in a row
directly to the steel profile;
(c) any number of steel headed dowel connectors welded in a row through the sheet metal, with ribs
parallel to the steel profile and the ratio of average width to rib depth ÿ 1.5. = 0.85 for:
Rg
(a) two headed spike-type steel connectors welded into a rib of the metal deck, with the ribs oriented
perpendicular to the steel profile; (b) A steel headed dowel connector welded through the
sheet metal, with ribs parallel to the steel profile and the ratio of average width to rib depth < 1.5.
Rg = 0.70 for:
for three or more headed spike-type steel connectors welded into a rib of the metal deck, with the
ribs oriented perpendicular to the steel profile = 0.75 for:
Rg
(a) headed spike-type steel connectors welded directly to the steel profile; (b) steel headed
dowel connectors welded into a composite slab with the metal deck oriented perpendicular to the
beam and (c ) steel headed dowel connectors embedded in e mid ht ÿ mm; 50 ÿ
a composite slab with the metal deck oriented parallel to the beam, welded through the metal deck,
or through a sheet used as an adjustment between the metal deck and the beam flange.
F-101
= 0.6 for steel headed spigot connectors welded into a composite slab with the
Rg
metal deck oriented perpendicular to the beam y = distance between ht ÿ
ÿ mm.
50 e mid
e mid ht
ÿ
the edge of the shank of the dowel and the web of the metal deck, taken at half the depth of the rib and in the direction
of the force exerted by the connector (i.e., in the direction at maximum moment for a simply supported beam), mm
wc = weight of concrete per unit volume (1500 w 2500 ÿ ÿc ) kg/m3
The concepts of weak position and strong position are illustrated e mid ht and location of the connector in
ÿ
in Figure F.2.9.8-1.
Figure F.2.9.8-1 — Concepts of e mid ht

ÿ
and location of the connector in a weak position and in a
strong.
The following table presents the values of Rg and Rp for various cases.
Condition Rg Rp
*
Without top 1.0 0.75
Metal top oriented parallel to the steel profile wh 1.5 ÿ
1.0 0.75
rr
w rhr 1.5 < 0.85** 0.75
Metal board oriented perpendicular to the profile of

steel
Number of spikes that occupy the same valley of the metal board:
1.0 0.6+
1 0.85 0.6+
2 3 or more 0.7 0.6+
hr = nominal depth of the rib, mm

= average width of the rib or capital (as defined in F.2.9.3.2.3), mm wr
**
for a simple spike
+ this value can be increased to 0.75 when mid ht ÿ mm
ÿ
50 e
F.2.9.8.2.2 — Strength of bolt-type connectors — The use of bolt-type connectors shall be limited to solid concrete slabs on
steel profiles. The nominal resistance of a bolt-type connector embedded in a concrete slab will be taken as:
0.25
ÿ
' S
Q n= 0.14A f E cp c c ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ OF (F.2.9.8-2)
ÿÿd
share
ÿ cp ÿ
where:
dcp = nominal diameter of a bolt type connector, mm
F-102
Acp = cross-sectional area of the bolt-type connector, mm2

Fu = specified minimum tensile strength for bolt-type connectors, MPa = center-to-center longitudinal
spacing between bolt-type connectors, mm
S = specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa
cfÿ
1.5
Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete = 0.043w fÿ
c c ,
MPa
wc = weight of concrete per unit volume (1500 w 2500 ÿ ÿc ) kg/m3
Bolts shall have a minimum strength equivalent to SAE J429 Grade 2 bolts, and be fillet welded all the way around in
accordance with AWS D1.1 standards.
F.2.9.8.2.3 — Strength of Channel-Type Steel Connectors — The nominal strength of a channel-type connector
embedded in a solid concrete slab shall be calculated as follows:
=
Q n0.3 t 0.5t
+ (lf f E
)
w c cc
ÿ
(F.2.9.8-3)
where:
= length of channel connector, mm cl =
thickness of channel connector flange, mm wt = thickness of
tf
channel connector web, mm
The strength of the channel-type connector must be developed by welding it to the beam flange, for a force equal to Qn
and considering the eccentricity.
F.2.9.8.2.4 — Required number of steel connectors — The number of connectors required between the section of
maximum bending moment, positive or negative, and the adjacent section of zero moment shall be obtained by dividing
the horizontal shear force, determined according to the numerals F.2.9.3.2.4.1 and F.2.9.3.2.4.2, between the nominal
resistance of a connector, determined according to numeral F.2.9.8.2.1 or numeral F.2.9.8.2.2. The number of steel
connectors required between the point of application of a concentrated load and the nearest point of zero moment shall
be sufficient to develop the maximum moment required at the point of application of that load.
F.2.9.8.2.5 — Detailing Requirements — The connectors required on each side of a point of maximum bending
moment, positive or negative, shall be distributed uniformly between that point and the adjacent points of zero moment,
except when the design indicates otherwise. different.
Except for connectors installed in the ribs of a metal deck, steel connectors shall have a minimum of 25mm concrete
side cover in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the shear force. The minimum distance from the center of a
connector to a free edge in the direction of the shear force will be 200 mm when using normal weight concrete and 250
mm when using lightweight concrete. Instead of using these values, it is allowed to apply the provisions of Appendix
CD of Title C of this Regulation.
The minimum center-to-center spacing between spike-type connectors shall be 6 diameters along the longitudinal axis
of the composite beam, and 4 diameters in a direction transverse to the longitudinal axis of the beam, except in the ribs
of a metal deck oriented perpendicular to the beam, in which case the center-to-center spacing may be reduced to 4
diameters in either direction.
The maximum center-to-center spacing of the steel connectors shall not exceed 8 times the total thickness of the slab
or 900 mm.
F.2.9.8.3— Steel Connectors in Composite Section Components — This clause applies to the design of headed spigot-type
and channel-type steel connectors in composite section members.
Instead of the provisions presented here, it is allowed to apply the provisions of Appendix CD of Title C of this Regulation.
The provisions for calculating the resistance of headed spike-type steel connectors presented in this section are applicable to
connectors basically located in the transfer zone.
F-103
load-bearing (connection) of columns and beam-columns, clad profile beams and filled profile beams, and composite section
walls, where there is a compound action between steel and concrete. These provisions are not intended for hybrid construction
where steel and concrete do not work in compound action.
Section F.2.9.8.2 specifies the resistance of steel connectors embedded in a solid concrete slab or in a concrete slab on a metal
deck, for composite section beams.
Limit states for the steel shank of the connector and for detachment from a concrete block under shear are dealt with directly in
this clause. Additionally, the spacing and dimensional tolerances provided in these provisions prevent the occurrence of limit
states of concrete leverage for shear-stressed connectors and concrete rupture for connectors loaded in tension, as defined in
the provisions. of Appendix CD of Title C of this Regulation.
For normal-weight concrete — Headed dowel-type steel connectors stressed for shear only shall have a length of not less than
five times the diameter of the dowel. Headed spike-type steel connectors stressed by tension or under the interaction of shear
forces and tension shall have a length of not less than eight times the diameter of the spike. For these purposes, the length is
measured from the base of the dowel to the top level of the head on the installed dowel,
For lightweight concrete — Headed dowel-type steel connectors stressed solely by shear shall have a length of not less than
seven times the diameter of the dowel. Headed steel spigot connectors stressed by tension shall have a length of not less than
ten times the diameter of the spigot. For these purposes, the length is measured from the base of the spigot to the top level of
the head on the installed spigot, The nominal strength of headed spigot-type steel connectors under the interaction of shear and
tensile forces in composite construction with lightened concrete will be determined in accordance with the provisions of Appendix
CD of Title C of this Regulation.
The diameter of the head in headed spike-type steel connectors stressed by tension, or under the interaction of shear forces and
tension, shall be greater than or equal to 1.6 times the diameter of the shank.
The following table presents the minimum values of the hd ratio for headed spigot-type steel connectors, corresponding to
different conditions covered in Chapter F.2:
Weight Concrete
Load Condition Normal lightened concrete
Cutting h/d ÿ 5 h/d ÿ 7
Strain h/d ÿ 8 h/d ÿ 10
Shear + Tension h/d ÿ 8 NA*
hd = ratio between the length of the spigot-to-head connector, measured from the base of the
spigot to the top of the head on the installed bolt, and the diameter of the spigot.
*
See the provisions of Appendix CD of Title C of this Regulation for the calculation
of the effects of interaction in the connectors embedded in lightweight concrete.
F.2.9.8.3.1 — Shear Strength of Steel Headed Dowel-Type Connectors in Components of Composite Construction
— When the peel strength of a concrete block under shear is not an applicable limit state, the design strength at shear
of a headed spike-type steel connector, ÿv nv will be calculated by taking: Q ,
ÿ in= 0.65
y Qnv OFF
=
sc u
(F.2.9.8-4)
where:
Qnv = nominal shear resistance of headed barb connector, N
Asc = cross section of headed spigot connector, mm2
Fu = specified minimum tensile strength, MPa
F-104
When the peel strength of a concrete block under shear is an applicable limit state, the design shear strength of a
headed dowel-type steel connector, ÿv nv shall be calculated based on one of the following methods :
Q,
(a) When the anchorage reinforcement for the steel connector is developed in accordance with Chapter
C.12 of Title C of these Regulations on both sides of the concrete detachment surface, it will be taken
as nominal shear resistance for the connector. , Qnv , the minimum between the nominal shear
resistance of the steel, according to formula F.2.9.8-3, and the nominal resistance of the anchor
reinforcement. (b) As specified in Appendix CD of Title C of these
Regulations.
If the resistance to detachment of a concrete block under shear is an applicable limit state (for example, when the
volume that can be detached is not restricted by an adjacent steel plate, fin, or web), the application of the
provisions of this numeral assumes the existence of adequate anchorage reinforcement. Alternatively, the
provisions of Appendix CD of Title C of these Regulations may be applied.
F.2.9.8.3.2 — Tensile Strength of Headed Steel Dowel-Type Connectors in Components of Composite

Construction — When the distance from the center of a connector to a free edge of concrete, measured in a
direction perpendicular to the height of the connector , is greater than or equal to 1.5 times the height of the
connector, measured to the top of the head, and the center-to-center spacing between connectors is greater than
or equal to 3 times the height of the connector measured to the top of the head, the design tensile strength for a
headed spike-type steel connector, ÿt nt shall be calculated by taking: Q ,
ÿ t = 0.75
and
=
Q ntOFF sc u (F.2.9.8-5)
where:
Qnt = nominal tensile strength of the connector, N
When the distance from the center of a connector to a free edge of the concrete, measured in a direction
perpendicular to the height of the connector, is less than 1.5 times the height of the connector, measured to the
top level of the head, or the center-to-center spacing. center between connectors is less than 3 times the height of
the connector measured to the top of the head, the nominal tensile strength for a steel headed spike connector,
Qnt , shall be calculated based on one of the following methods :
C.12 of Title C of this Regulation on both sides of the concrete detachment surface, it will be taken
as the nominal tensile strength for the connector. , Qnt , the minimum between the nominal tensile
strength of the steel, according to formula F.2.9.8-4, and the nominal strength of the anchor
reinforcement. (b) As specified in Appendix CD of Title C of these
Regulations.
It is recommended that supplemental confining reinforcement be provided around the anchor reinforcement for
headed steel dowel connectors stressed by tension or by combined shear and tension, to avoid edge effects or
effects caused by close spacing between connectors. See the Comments to the ANSI/ AISC 360 Specification and
numeral C D.5.2.9 of Title C of this Regulation for design recommendations.
F.2.9.8.3.3 — Strength of Steel Head Dowel Connectors to Combined Shear and Tension in Components of
Composite Construction — When the peel strength of a concrete block under shear is not a design-controlling
limit state , and the distance from the center of the connector to a free edge of the concrete, measured in a direction
perpendicular to the height of the connector, is greater than or equal to 1.5 times the height of the connector
measured to the top level of the head, and the center spacing the center between connectors is greater than or
equal to 3 times the height of the connector measured to the top of the head, the
F-105
Nominal resistance for the interaction of shear and tension in a headed spike-type steel connector shall be
calculated based on the following equation:
ÿ ÿ Qÿÿrt ÿ 53 Qÿ
rv
53 ÿ
ÿ ÿÿ ÿ + ÿÿ 1.0 (F.2.9.8-6)
ÿ ÿÿt nt ÿ ÿ
Phi Q Phi Q
v nv ÿ
where:
Qrt = required resistance to tension, N Qnt =
nominal resistance to tension, calculated according to numeral F.2.9.8.3.2, N Qrv =
required resistance to shear, N Qnv = nominal
resistance to shear, calculated according to numeral F .2.9.8.3.1, N ÿ
t
= resistance factor for tension = 0.75 = resistance
Phi
in
factor for shear = 0.65
Where the resistance to breakout of a concrete block under shear is a design-controlling limit state, or the distance
from the center of the connector to a free edge of the concrete, measured in a direction perpendicular to the height
of the connector, is less than 1.5 times the height of the connector measured to the top of the head, or the center-
to-center spacing between connectors is less than 3 times the height of the connector measured to the top of the
head, the nominal resistance for shear and Stress in a headed spike-type steel connector shall be calculated based
on one of the following methods:
C.12 of Title C of this Regulation on both sides of the concrete detachment surface, apply equation
F.2.9.8-6 taking: • for the nominal shear resistance of the connector, Qnv ,
the minimum between the nominal shear resistance of the steel, according to formula F.2.9.8-4,
and the nominal resistance of the anchor reinforcement, and • for the resistance tensile
strength of the connector, Qnt , the minimum
between the nominal tensile strength of the steel, according to formula F.2.9.8-5, and the nominal
strength of the anchor reinforcement.
(b) As specified in Appendix CD of Title C of these Regulations.
F.2.9.8.3.4 — Shear resistance of channel-type steel connectors in Composite Construction Components

— The design shear resistance for channel-type steel connectors shall be calculated based on the provisions of
numeral F.2.9.8.2 .3, taking the resistance factor, ÿ
in
equal to 0.75.
,
F.2.9.8.3.5 — Detailing Requirements for Components of Composite Construction — Steel connectors shall
have at least 25 mm of concrete side cover. The minimum center-to-center spacing between steel headed spike
connectors shall be four diameters in either direction. The maximum center-to-center spacing between steel headed
spigot connectors shall be 32 times the shank diameter. The maximum center-to-center spacing between channel-
type steel connectors shall be 600 mm.
The detailed requirements presented in this numeral are absolute limits. See F.2.9.8.3.2 and F.2.9.8.3.3 for
additional constraints that take edge and group effects into account.
F.2.9.9 — SPECIAL CASES — When the composite construction does not conform to the requirements of F.2.9.1 to F.2.9.8, the
strength of the steel connectors and the construction details shall be established by essays.
F-106
F.2.10 — DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS
This clause applies to connecting elements, connectors, and affected elements of connected members not subjected to
fatigue loading.
F.2.10.1 — General Requirements

F.2.10.2 — Welding
F.2.10.3 — Bolts and Threaded Parts.
F.2.10.4 — Affected Elements of the Connected Members and Connection Elements
F.2.10.5 — Filler Plates
F.2.10.6 — Splices
F.2.10.7 — Crush Resistance F.2.10.8 —
Column Bases and Supports on Concrete F.2.10.9 —
Anchor Bolts and Embedded Elements F.2.10.10 — Fins
and Webs with Concentrated Forces
• Section F.2.11: Design of Connections for structural hollow sections (STP) and Box Members • Section F.2.16:
Fatigue Design
F.2.10.1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
F.2.10.1.1 — Design basis — The design resistance of the connections, Rn ÿ , in accordancewill be determined from
with the provisions of this section and of section F.2.2.
The required strength of the connections shall be determined based on a structural analysis for the specified
design loads, consistent with the type of construction specified, or shall be taken as a proportion of the design
strength of the connected members when so specified.
When the centroidal axes of intersecting axially loaded members do not coincide at one point, the effects of
eccentricity must be considered.
F.2.10.1.2— Simple Connections — Simple beam or reinforcement connections shall be designed as flexible
connections and may be designed for shear reactions only, except where otherwise indicated in the design
documents. Flexible connections shall allow rotation of the ends of simply supported beams. To this end some
degree of inelastic deformation is allowed, as long as it is limited, in the connections.
F.2.10.1.3 — Moment Connections — Twist-restrained connections at beam and truss ends shall be designed
for forces resulting from the combined effects of moments and shears induced by the stiffness of the connections.
The behavior criteria for moment connections are given in F.2.2.3.5.2.
In numerals F.2.3 and F.2.21 the analysis requirements are presented to establish the resistance and stiffness
required for the design of connections.
F.2.10.1.4 — Compression Members with Crush Splices — Compression members that rely on direct support
for load transfer shall meet the following requirements:
(a) Whenever columns rest on base plates, or have a finish that allows bearing loads to be transmitted at
the splices, sufficient connectors shall be provided to hold all parts strongly secured in place.
(b) When there are compression members, other than columns, with finishes such that the loads are
transmitted by crushing, the splicing elements and their connectors must be arranged in such a way
that they keep all the parts aligned and they will be designed to meet one of the two conditions below.
The use of the less severe of the two conditions is permitted:
F-107
(i) an axial tensile force equivalent to 50% of the required compressive strength
of the member; either
(ii) the moment and shear force resulting from the application of a transverse load equal to 2%
of the required compressive strength for the member. The transverse load will be considered
applied at the splice site, without considering other loads acting on the element. The
member will be treated as pinned for purposes of determining shear and moment at the
splice.
All compression joints shall also be designed to resist any tensile force developed by the load combinations
stipulated in F.2.2.2.
F.2.10.1.5 — Heavy Section Splices — When tensile forces (due to the application of tension or bending) must
be transmitted through a heavy section splice, as defined in F.2.1.3.1. 3 and F.2.1.3.1.4, using full penetration
groove welds, the material toughness requirements for the V -groove Charpy impact test shall be applied
according to said numerals, the details of the access holes for welding according to F.2.10.1.6, the requirements
for filler metals in F.2.10.2.6, and the requirements for preparation and inspection of fusion cut surfaces in
F.2.13.2.2. The above requirements are not applicable to splices of elements in reinforced profiles when they are
welded before assembling the profile.
When full penetration groove welds are used in heavy section splices, deleterious effects of weld shrinkage can
occur. Members designed in compression that are also subject to tensile forces may be less susceptible to
shrinkage damage if spliced using partial penetration groove welds on the flanges and fillet-welded platens on
the web, or by using bolts on some members. or in the entire splice.
F.2.10.1.6 — Welding Access Holes — All access holes required to facilitate welding operations shall be
detailed to provide sufficient clearance to install a backup plate when required. The hole must have a length,
measured from the heel of the weld preparation, not less than 1½ times the thickness of the material in which
the hole is made, nor less than 38 mm. The height of the access hole will be at least equal to the thickness of
the material where the access hole is opened, wt , but it must not be less than 19mm nor need it be more than
50mm.
For rolled or pre-cut shapes, the edge of the web shall follow a curved or sloping line from the flange surface to
the recessing surface of the manhole. In sections that are hot rolled, or assembled with full penetration groove
welds between the web and the flange, all beam shears and welding access holes shall be free of notches and
sharp reentrant corners. No arc of a weld access hole shall have a radius of less than 10 mm.
In profiles assembled with fillet welds or partial penetration groove welds between web and flanges, all beam
shears and welding access holes shall be free of notches and sharp reentrant corners. Access holes are
permitted to terminate perpendicular to the fin, provided the weld is interrupted at a distance, measured from the
edge of the access hole, at least equal to the size of the weld.
For heavy sections as defined in F.2.1.3.1.3 and F.2.1.3.1.4, fusion-cut surfaces in beam shears and weld access
holes shall be polished to bright metal and inspected for either by magnetic particle or ink penetrating methods,
prior to depositing the butt welds. When a curved portion of a transition in an access or ripping hole has been
obtained from a pre-drilled or sawn hole, that portion need not be ground. Access holes and beam shears in
other profiles do not need to be polished nor do they require inspection with dye penetrant or magnetic particle
methods.
Table F.2.10.1-1 summarizes some of these requirements.
F-108
Alternative 1 Alternative 2 Alternative 3
Rolled profiles and reinforced profiles that are assembled before cutting the Reinforced profiles that are
access hole assembled after cutting the access hole
Note: Typical details are shown for a joint welded from one side, with backing plate. Other alternatives can be considered for these details.
1.5t or 38mm,
whichever isIn greater.
1) Minimum width:
2) Minimum height:1.0t orIn19mm, but need not be greater than 50mm.
3) Minimum radius R : 10 mm. The surfaces cut by fusion in heavy sections, defined in the numerals F.2.1.3.1.3 and
F.2.1.3.1.4, must be polished.
4) The slope “a” forms a transition from the web to the fin. The slope 'b' can be horizontal.
5) The bottom of the upper wing must be contoured to allow a full fit where bars are to be used.
back.
6) Web-to-flange welds on assembled members must be set back a distance at least equal to the
weld size from the edge of the access hole.
Figure F.2.10.1-1 — Geometry of Weld Access Holes
F.2.10.1.7 — Arrangement of Welds and Bolts — Groups of welds or bolts that transmit axial forces to the
ends of a member shall be arranged so that the center of gravity of the group coincides with the center of gravity
of the member unless otherwise specified. the stresses produced by the eccentricity are taken into account. The
foregoing does not apply to connections at the ends of single angle members, double angles, or similar members.
F.2.10.1.8 — Bolts in combination with welds — Where bolts are used in combination with welds, the two
types of connectors shall not be considered to share the load, except when there are shear connections with
bolts of one of the qualities permitted by F.2.1.3.3, installed in standard bores or slot bores transverse to the
direction of the load, in combination with longitudinally loaded fillet welds. In such connections, the design
strength of the bolts shall not be taken to be greater than 50 percent of their design strength in bearing-type
connections.
When modifications are made to a structure using welding, pre-existing high-strength bolts and rivets, torqued to
requirements for slip-critical connections in the case of bolts, may be used to accommodate the loads present at
the time of modification and in this way the weld should supply only the additional resistance required.
F.2.10.1.9 — High-strength bolts in combination with rivets — In slip-critical connections designed in

accordance with the stipulations of numeral F.2.10.3, it is permitted to consider that high-strength bolts share
loads with rivets, both for new jobs and modifications.
F-109
F.2.10.1.10 — Limitations on Welded and Bolted Connections — Joints with pretensioned bolts or welded
joints shall be used for the following connections:
(a) Column splices in all multi-story structures over 38 m in height. (b) All connections from beams
and joists to columns, and all connections between beams and joists on which the bracing of the columns
depends, in structures greater than 38 m in height.
(c) In all structures that support bridge cranes with a capacity of more than 50 kN: splices in deck
reinforcements and connections of reinforcements to columns, column splices, column bracing, foot-
of-friends and supports of the crane bridge. (d) Connections to support
moving machinery or other impacting live loads
or investment of effort.
In other cases and unless otherwise indicated, connections may be designed using ASTM A307 bolts or high-
strength bolts with tight torque.
F.2.10.2—WELDS— All provisions of the American Welding Society Structural Welding Code, AWS D1.1, shall be
followed, except that the following requirements of Chapter F.2 shall apply in lieu of code sections Corresponding AWS:
Section F.2.10.1.6 instead of AWS D1.1 — Section 5.17.1

Section F.2.10.2.2.1 instead of AWS D1.1 — Section 2.3.2
Table F.2.10.2-2 instead of AWS D1.1 — Table 2.1
Table F.2.10.2-5 instead of AWS D1.1 — Table 2.3
Table F.2.17-1 instead of AWS D1.1 — Table 2.4
Items F.2.2.3.10 and F.2.17 instead of AWS D1.1 — Section 2, Part C Number
F.2.13.2.2 instead of AWS D1.1 — Sections 5.15.4.3 and 5.15.4.4
F.2.10.2.1 — Groove welds
F.2.10.2.1.1 — Effective Area — The effective area of a grooved weld shall be taken as the product of
the length of the weld times the effective thickness of the groove.
The effective throat thickness of a full penetration groove weld shall be the lesser of the thicknesses of
the parts being joined.
The effective thickness of the throat of a partial penetration groove weld shall be that indicated in Table
F.2.10.2-1.
The effective throat thickness for a partial penetration groove weld depends on the process used and the
position in which the weld is made. Contract documents must indicate either the effective throat or the
required strength of the weld, and the manufacturer must detail the joint considering the welding process
and the position in which the joint will be welded.
The effective throat thickness for convex half-V or convex-V welds that fit the contour of circular bars, 90°
bends in cold-formed shapes, or rounded corners of rectangular section structural hollow sections (STPs),
It will be the one indicated in Table F.2.10.2-2 when it is filled flush, unless the validity of other values is
demonstrated by means of tests. The effective throat thickness for convex half-V or convex-V welds not
reaching flush fill shall be as given in Table F.2.10.2-2 minus the greatest distance between the weld
surface and an a line. flush to the base metal surface, measured perpendicular to the latter. Values of
effective throat thicknesses greater than those specified in Table F.2.10.2-2 are permitted provided the
manufacturer can demonstrate, through qualification, that such values can be consistently obtained. The
qualification consists of taking sections of the weld, normal to its axis, in the middle and at the ends of its
length. Such sectioning should be performed on a number of material size combinations that is
representative of the range used in fabrication.
F.2.10.2.1.2— Limitations — The effective throat thickness of a partial penetration groove weld shall not
be less than the size required to transmit the calculated forces.
F-110
nor less than the minimum according to table F.2.10.2-3. The minimum size of the weld is determined
by the thinner of the two parts being joined.
Table F.2.10.2-1
Effective Throat Thickness for Partial Penetration Groove Welds
Channel type Thickness

Position of
Welding process (AWS D1.1, Cash of the
Welding
Figure 3.3) Throat
Arc Welding with Stick Electrode
(SMAW) J
Gas Arc Welding (GMAW) All IN

Arc Welding with Flux in the Core V and 60°
(FCAW)
J channel depth
Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) The plan

U media-V a 60°
V and 60°
Gas Arc Welding (GMAW)
plan,
Arc Welding with Flux in the Core media-V a 45°
Horizontal
(FCAW))
Arc Welding with Stick Electrode
All
(SMAW) Channel depth
Gas Arc Welding (GMAW) media-V a 45° minus 3
Upright, Envelope mm
Arc Welding with Flux in the Core
Head
(FCAW)
Table F.2.10.2-2
Effective throat thickness for half-V convex or V convex welds
Half-V Welding (a) V-welding

Welding process
convex convex
GMAW and FCAW-G 5/8R 3/4R
SMAW y FCAW-S 5/16R 5/8R
SAW 5/16R 1/2R
(a)
For convex half-V welds with R 10 < mm use only with fillet of
reinforcement over flush fill.
General Note:
R = Radius of the joint surface (can be assumed as 2t for PTE)
Table F.2.10.2-3
Minimum effective throat thickness for partial penetration groove welds
Thickness of the thinnest part to be joined, Minimum Effective Throat Thickness(a)

mm ,
mm
Up to and including 6.4 3
greater than 6.4 to 12.7 5

greater than 152.4 16
(a)
See table F.2.10.2-1.
F.2.10.2.2 — Fillet welds
F.2.10.2.2.1 — Effective Area — The effective area of a fillet weld shall be the effective length multiplied
by the effective throat. The effective throat of a fillet weld shall be the shortest distance between the root
and the schematic outer face of the fillet. It is permissible to take a higher value for the effective throat if,
through tests combining production process and procedural variables, it is shown that penetration
beyond the schematic root of the fillet is consistently obtained.
F-111
For fillet welds in holes and grooves, the effective length shall be the length of the axis of the weld measured along
the midline of the plane of the throat. When the fillets overlap, the effective area shall not exceed the nominal cross-
sectional area of the hole or groove in the plane of the contact surface.
F.2.10.2.2.2— Limitations — The size of a fillet weld shall not be less than the size required to transmit the
calculated forces nor less than the minimum per Table F.2.10.2-4. These requirements do not apply to fillet welds
used as reinforcement of partial or full penetration groove welds.
Table F.2.10.2-4
Minimum Size of Fillet Welds
Thickness of the thinnest part to be Minimum Weld Size

joined, mm Filete(a) mm
Up to and including 6.4 3
greater than 12.7 6
greater than 19.1

(a)
8 Dimension of the fillet weld side. It must be applied in a single pass.
Note: See F.2.10.2.2.2 for the maximum size of fillet welds.
The maximum size of fillet welds shall be:
(a) Along the edges of a material with a thickness less than 6 mm: the thickness of the
material.
(b) Along the edges of a material with a thickness of 6 mm or more: the thickness of the material minus
1.6 mm; except where the weld has been detailed on the plans to obtain the full thickness of the
throat. In the executed weld, the distance between the edge of the base metal and the heel of the
weld is allowed to be less than 1.6 mm as long as the size of the weld is clearly verifiable.
The length of the fillet welds designed based on their strength must be at least four times their nominal size or,
otherwise, the size of the weld shall not exceed 1/4 of its effective length. If only longitudinal fillet welds are used in
tension-loaded flat bar end connections, the length of each fillet shall not be less than the perpendicular distance
between them. To consider the effect that the length of longitudinal fillet welds used in end connections has on the
effective area of the connected member, see F.2.4.3.
For longitudinal fillet welds, parallel to the direction of stress, that transmit the force to the end of a member stressed
by axial load, with a weld length up to 100 times the size of the fillet, it is allowed to take the effective length equal
to the actual length. When the length of such welds exceeds 100 times the fillet size, the effective length shall be
determined by multiplying the actual length by the reduction factor, ÿ , calculated as follows:
(
ÿ= ÿ ÿ 1.2 0.002 lw )1.0 (F.2.10.2-1)
where:
l = actual length of weld, mm = fillet size,
In mm
When the length of the weld exceeds 300 times the size of the fillet, w shall be taken equal , the effective length
to 180w .
Intermittent fillet welds can be used to transfer calculated stresses across a joint or between mating surfaces and
to join components of reinforced members. The effective length of any intermittent fillet weld segment shall not be
less than four times the size of the weld, with a minimum of 38mm.
F-112
In overlapping joints, the minimum length of the overlap will be equal to five times the thickness of the
thinnest between the parts that connect, but not less than 25 mm. In lapped joints joining plates or bars
stressed by axial forces and where only transverse fillet welds are used, these shall be applied along the
ends of both lapped parts, except where the deflection of the lapped parts is sufficiently restricted to
prevent the joint from opening under the action of the maximum load.
At completion, fillet welds may be interrupted before the ends or extended to the ends or sides of the
connecting parts, except where the following limitations apply:
(a) For lap joints in which one of the connected parts extends beyond an edge of another
connected part that is subjected to calculated tensile stresses, fillet welds shall break at a
distance, measured from that edge, not less than fillet size. (b) For connections where
flexibility of projecting
members is required and caps are used at corners, the length of these caps shall not exceed 4
times the nominal weld size or half the width of the member.
(c) Fillet welds joining transverse stiffeners to webs 19.1 mm or less thick in reinforced beams
shall be interrupted at a distance between four and six times the thickness of the web,
measured from the edge of the web-flange weld, except where the ends of the stiffeners
are welded to the fin. (d) Fillet welds located on opposite faces of a common plane
shall be interrupted at the corner common to both welds.
The termination of a fillet weld should be located at a distance approximately equal to the size of the weld
from the edge of the connection to avoid undercutting the parent material. However, the occurrence of
fillet welds ending at the end of the joint does not require corrective action, except in the case of
connections of stiffeners to beam webs.
Fillet welds in holes or grooves may be used to transmit shear and resist loads perpendicular to the plane
of contact in lap joints, to prevent buckling or separation of lap members, and to join components of
reinforced members. Such fillets may overlap, subject to the provisions of F.2.10.2. Fillet welds in holes
or grooves are not to be considered as plug or groove welds.
F.2.10.2.3 — Plug and groove welds
F.2.10.2.3.1 — Effective Area — In plug and groove welds, the nominal area of the hole or groove in
the plane of the contact surface is considered as the effective area to resist the shear force.
F.2.10.2.3.2— Limitations — Plug and groove welds may be used to transmit shear in lapped joints, to
prevent buckling or separation of lapped parts, and to join components of an assembled member together.
The diameter of the hole for a plug weld shall not be less than the thickness of the part that contains it
plus 8 mm, rounded up to the highest even millimeter, nor greater than that minimum diameter plus 3
mm or 2.25 times the thickness of the weld.
The minimum distance between plug weld centers will be four times the diameter of the hole.
The length of the groove shall not exceed 10 times the thickness of the weld. The width of the groove
must not be less than the thickness of the part that contains it plus 8 mm, rounded up to the next higher
even mm, nor more than 2.25 times the thickness of the weld. The ends of the slot shall be semicircular
or have rounded corners, with a radius not less than the thickness of the part that contains it, except
when such ends extend to the edge of the element.
F-113
The minimum distance between lines of groove welds, in a transverse direction to its length, will be 4 times
the width of the groove. On any line, the minimum longitudinal spacing between centers of welds shall be twice
the length of the groove.
The thickness of plug or groove welds in materials 16 mm or less thick shall be equal to the thickness of the
material. In materials thicker than 16 mm, the thickness of the weld shall be at least equal to half the thickness
of the material but not less than 16 mm.
F.2.10.2.4 — Design resistance — The design resistance of a weld, Rn ÿ , will be the lower of the values obtained for
the resistance of the base material, determined according to the limit states of failure by tension and failure by shear ,
and for the strength of the weld metal, determined at the ultimate limit state, with Rn calculated as follows:
For the base metal:
RFA =
n nBM BM (F.2.10.2-2)
For weld metal:
RFA =
n nw we (F.2.10.2-3)
where:
FnBM = nominal strength per unit area for the base metal, MPa = nominal
Fnw strength per unit area for the weld metal, MPa = cross-sectional area of the base
ABM metal, mm² = effective area of the weld, mm²
Awe
Table F.2.10.2-5 sets out the values of ÿ , FnBM and Fnw , and the applicable constraints.
Table F.2.10.2-5
Design Strength of Welded Joints, N
Endurance
Type of Load and Nominal per effective area Required Level of
metal unit area
Address Relative to Phi
( ABM o Awe ) Metal Resistance
under consideration
Weld Shaft ( FnBM or Fnw ) mm2 contribution(a)(b)
MPa
FULL PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS
Compatible filler metal must
be used. For T -joints
and in a corner with a backing
Normal stress to the
axis of the weld The strength of the joint is controlled by the base metal. that is not removed, filler
metal that meets groove
toughness is required.
See numeral F.2.10.2.6.
The use of filler metal with a
strength level equal to,
Compression Normal to
The strength of the joint is controlled by the base metal. or immediately
the axis of the weld
below, that of the compatible
filler metal is permitted. The
use of filler metal with a strength
Tension or Compression Tension or compression acting on the connected parts in a direction level less than or equal
parallel to the axis of parallel to the weld does not need to be considered in the design of said to that of the compatible filler
the weld weld. metal is permitted.
Cutting Compatible filler metal must be

The strength of the joint is controlled by the base metal.
used.(c)
F-114

Design Strength of Welded Joints, N
Endurance
Nominal per effective area Required Level of
Type of Load and Direction metal Resistance of the
unit area
Relative to the Axis of the under consideration
Phi ( ABM o Awe ) metal of
Welding ( FnBM or Fnw ) mm2 contribution(a)(b)
MPa
PARTIAL PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS INCLUDING HALF-V CONVEX AND CONVEX WELDS
5 flat
Metal Base ÿ = 0.75 It was
See F.2.10.2.4
Normal stress to the axis of the
weld See The use of filler metal
Welding ÿ = 0.80 0.60F EXX
F.2.10.2.1.1 with a strength level
less than or equal
Compression: Columns to Base
to that of the compatible
Plates and column
Compressive stress is not required to be considered in the design of welds joining the parts. filler metal is
splices designed per
F.2.10.1.4(a) permitted.
Compression: Connections My
Metal Base ÿ = 0.90 See F.2.10.4
designed to transmit crush loads
in members other than columns,
per F.2.10.1.4(b) See
Welding ÿ = 0.80 0.60F EXX
F.2.10.2.1.1
The use of filler metal

Compression: Connections not Metal Base ÿ = 0.90 My See F.2.10.4
with a lower resistance
designed to transmit
See level or
crushing loads Tension or Welding ÿ = 0.80 0.90F
EXX
F.2.10.2.1.1
Compression
same as that of
parallel to the axis of the The tension or compression acting on the connected parts in a direction parallel to the weld
the compatible filler
weld that joins them does not need to be considered in the design of said weld.
metal.
Metal Base Controlled by F.2.10.4
Cutting 0.60F See
Welding ÿ = 0.75 EXX
F.2.10.2.1.1
FILLET WELDS INCLUDING FILLETS IN HOLES AND SLOTS AND OBLIQUE T-JOINTS
Metal Base Controlled by F.2.10.4 The use of filler metal
Cutting 0.60F
(d) See with a strength level
Welding ÿ = 0.75 EXX
F.2.10.2.2.1 less than or equal
to that of the compatible
Tension or Compression The tension or compression acting on the connected parts in a direction parallel to the weld
filler metal is
parallel to the axis of the that joins them does not need to be considered in the design of said weld.
permitted.
weld
PLUG AND GROT WELDS

Metal Base Governed by F.2.10.4 The use of filler metal
Cutting with a strength level
less than or equal
Parallel to the contact surface
0.60F to that of the compatible
over the effective area Welding ÿ = 0.75 EXX See F.2.10.2.3.1
filler metal is
permitted.
(a) For compatible filler metal see AWS D1.1, Section 3.3. (b) Filler
metal with the strength level immediately higher than that of the compatible weld is permitted. (c) For groove welds
transferring shear forces between the web and flanges of framed members, or in applications where significant restraint is critical, filler metal with a
less than compatible strength level may be used. In these applications, the detailing and design of the weld will be made taking the thickness
of the material as the effective throat, ÿ = 0.80 and
0.60F as nominal resistance.
EXX
(d) Alternatively, the provisions of F.2.10.2.4(a) may be applied as long as the strain compatibility of the different elements of the weld is considered.
F.2.10.2.4 (b) and (c) are presented as special applications of F.2.10.2.4(a) that provide deformation compatibility.
Alternatively, the design strength for fillet welds, Rn ÿ , can be determined based on:
ÿ = 0.75
and Rn calculated as follows:
F-115
(a) For a group of welds, all in a line or all parallel, loaded in its own plane a
through its center of gravity
RFA =
n nw we (F.2.10.2-4)
where:
nw = +ÿ F 0.60F 1.0
( 0.50sen EXX (F.2.10.2-5)
) 1.5
and
FEXX = classification number of the electrode, corresponding to the minimum resistance

specified, MPa = angle
i of application of the load, measured from the longitudinal axis of the weld
(b) For members of a weld group analyzed using an instantaneous center of rotation method, the nominal strength components, Rnx and
Rny , and the nominal moment capacity, Mn , can be determined as follows:
R FA nwix
nx = ÿ ÿ wei R BUT=nwiy
ÿ wei the (F.2.10.2-6)
M FA
n
=
x FA
ÿ ÿ y nwiy wei () i
ÿ
nwix wei i ÿ ( ) ÿ (F.2.10.2-7)
where:
Awe = effective area in the plane of the throat for element "i" of a weld, mm2
1.5 F 0.60F 1.0 0.50sen

hair EXX ( = +ÿ ) f(p) i (F.2.10.2-8)
0.3
f pÿ ()ii( ip=1.9
ÿ
ÿ 0.9p ÿ)ÿ (F.2.10.2-9)
Fnwi = nominal stress in the ith element, MPa = component in "x" of the
Fnwix stress Fnwi

Fnwiy = component in "y" of the effort Fnwi
Di
=
p i , relationship between the deformation of an element i and its deformation under the maximum stress
ÿ mi
r cr = distance from the instantaneous center of rotation to the weld element with the
minimum relationship ÿ r ui i ,
mm
ri = distance from the instantaneous center of rotation to the ith weld element,
mm
x
i = component x of = ri
iy component y of ri
ÿi = deformation of the weld elements at intermediate stress levels, linearly proportional to the critical deformation based on the
distance from the instantaneous center of rotation,

ri mm ,
= r i ruiDcr
ÿ
0.32
ÿmi
= 0.209 ( ÿ + 2 w)
i , deformation of the weld element for the maximum stress,
mm
ÿ
0.65
= 1.087 ( ÿ+ ÿ 6w) 0.17w i deformation of the welding element for the ultimate stress (break), which generally
ÿui ,
occurs in the element most distant from the instantaneous center of rotation, mm
i i = angle of the load measured from the longitudinal axis of the i-th weld element,
degrees.
F-116
(c) For groups of concentrically loaded fillet welds consisting of members with the same weld size oriented both
longitudinally and transversely relative to the direction of load application, the combined strength of the group of
fillet welds
, R n , will be determined as the greater value between:
RRn R= + nw1 nwt

(F.2.10.2-10a)
y
n
=
R 0.85R 1.5R + nw1 nwt
(F.2.10.2-10b)
where:
Rnw1 = total nominal resistance of longitudinally loaded fillet welds, determined according to table F.2.10.2-5, N
Runt
= total nominal strength of transversely loaded fillet welds, determined in accordance with Table F.2.10.2-5
without applying the alternative of F.2.10.2.4(a), N
F.2.10.2.5 — Combination Welds — If two or more of the general types of welds (groove, fillet, plug, groove) are combined in
the same joint, the design strength of each is calculated separately with relative to the axis of the group to determine the
resistance of the group.
F.2.10.2.6 — Requirements for electrode selection — The selection of electrodes to be used in full penetration groove welds
requested by stress normal to the effective area shall conform to the requirements for compatible filler metals given in the Code
of the American Welding Society, AWS D1.1.
Table F.2.10.2-6 presents an excerpt from table 3.1 of the AWS code. For a complete list of compatible base metals and filler
metals see AWS D1.1. In all cases it should be verified if other restrictions apply.
Table F.2.10.2-6
AWS D1.1 Table 3.1 Basic Cases
Metal Base Compatible filler metal

A36 t ÿ 19.1 mm 60 & 70 ksi electrodes
A36 t > 19.1 mm
A572 (Gr. 50 & 55)
A913 (Gr. 50) SMAW: E7015, E7016, E7018, E7028
A588*
A992 Other processes: 70 ksi electrodes
A1011
A1018
A913 (Gr. 60 & 65) Electrodes 80 ksi
*For situations where corrosion resistance and color similar to the base metal are required see AWS
D1.1, Section 3.7.3
Notes:
(a) Electrodes shall meet the requirements of AWS A5.1, A5.5, A5.17, A5.18,
A5.20, A5.23, A5.28 y A5.29.
(b) In joints with base metals of different strengths, use either a filler metal compatible with the higher
strength base metal or a filler metal compatible with the lower strength base metal and which
produces low hydrogen deposition.
A filler metal with a toughness of 27 J at 4ºC based on the Charpy V-groove impact test shall be used in the following welded
joints:
(a) Tee and corner joints with full penetration groove welds using non-removable backing plate, subjected to stress
normal to effective area, unless joints are designed using nominal strength and strength reduction coefficient
corresponding to a partial penetration weld.
(b) Splices with full penetration groove welds subjected to stress normal to the effective area in heavy sections as
defined in F.2.1.5.1.3 and F.2.1.5.1.4.
F-117
The Certificate of Conformity of the weld producer will be sufficient evidence of compliance with this requirement.
F.2.10.2.7 — Mixed Weld Metal — When a V-groove Charpy impact test toughness rating is required, all
consumables for weld metal, tack welds, root passes and subsequent passes deposited into the joint must be
compatible to ensure the toughness of the resulting mixed weld metal.
F.2.10.3 — BOLTS AND THREADED PARTS.
F.2.10.3.1 — High-Strength Bolts — The use of high-strength bolts shall conform to the requirements of the
Structural Connections Research Council Specification for Structural Bolted Joints ASTM A325 or A490, hereinafter
referred to as the RCSC specifications. , except where F.2.10 defines other requirements. For the purposes of
Chapter F.2, high-strength bolts are grouped by material strength as follows:
Grupo A – ASTM A325, A325M, F1852, A354 Grado BC y A449

Group B – ASTM 490, A490M, F2280 and A354 Grade BD
When the structure is assembled, all joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the washers, shall be free of scale,
except for non-protruding mill scale.
Bolts may be installed with tight torque when used in:
(a) Crush type connections, except as provided in F.2.5.6 or F.2.10.1.10

(b) Connections under tensile loads, or combined shear and tension loads, for group A bolts only, when
loosening or fatigue conditions due to vibrations or load fluctuations are not expected.
Tight-fitting condition is defined as the tightness required for the connected parts to come into firm contact. Bolts
that are to be tightened to a level other than the snug condition shall be clearly identified on the design and erection
drawings.
All high-strength bolts specified in the plans for use in prestressed or slip-critical joints shall be tightened to a tension
not less than that indicated in Tables F.2.10.3-1 and F.2.10.3-1M . Installation should be done by one of the following
methods: nut turn method, direct tension indicators, calibrated wrench, or alternate design bolts.
There are no specific requirements for minimum or maximum values of tension in bolts to be installed with snug fit.
The use of pretensioned bolts such as F1852 or F2280 is permitted except where prohibited by design drawings.
Table F.2.10.3-1
Minimum Bolt Installation Tension, kilonewtons* Bolts with
diameter in inches
Group A B Group
Bolt Size mm
ASTM A325 Bolts, ASTM A490 Bolts,
(inches) ASTM F1852 ASTM F2280
12.7 (1/2") 53 67
15.9 (5/8”) 84 107
19.1 (3/4”) 125 156
22.2 (7/8”) 173 218
25.4 (1”) 227 285
28.6 (1 1/8”) 249 356
31.8 (1 ¼”) 316 454
34.9 (1 3/8”) 378 538
38.1 (1 ½”) 458 658
*
Equal to 0.70 times the minimum tensile strength of the bolts, rounded to the nearest kN, as stated in the ASTM
Specifications for A325 and A490 Bolts with UNC Threads.
F-118
Table F.2.10.3-1M
Minimum Bolt Installation Tension, kilonewtons* Bolts with
diameter in millimeters
Bolt Size, mm Group A B Group

Bolts ASTM A325 91 ASTM A490 Bolts 114
M16 179
M20 142 221
M22 176 257
M24 205 334
M27 267 408
M30 326 595
M36 475
*
Equal to 0.70 times the minimum tensile strength of the bolts, rounded to the nearest kN,
as stated in ASTM Specifications for A325 and A490 Bolts with UNC Threads.
When, within the framework of the Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) specifications, and due
to the conditions applicable to lengths exceeding 12 times the diameter or to diameters exceeding 38mm, the
requirements for bolts cannot be met, the Allows the use of bolts or threaded rods conforming to Group A or B
materials provided the provisions for threaded rods in Table F.2.10.3-2 are met.
When ASTM A354 Gr. BC, A354 Gr. BD, or A449 bolts or threaded rods are used in slip-critical connections, the
geometry of the bolt, including characteristics such as thread pitch, thread length, and head dimensions and the
nut(s) shall be equal (or proportional if the diameter is larger) to that required by the Research Council for Structural
Connections (RCSC). The installation must comply with all the requirements of the RCSC specifications, with the
modifications that, to provide the design pretension, are required due to the effect of the increase in diameter or
length.
Table F.2.10.3-2
Nominal Strength for Bolts and Threaded Parts, MPa
Rated resistance to
Rated resistance to Shear in Type Connections
Description of the connectors Flattening
voltage Fnt (MPa)
Fnv (MPa)(a)
A307 bolts (b) 310 188(b) (c)
Group A bolts (type A325), with threads included 620 372

in the shear planes Group A bolts
(type A325), when threads are excluded from the shear 620 457
planes Group B bolts (type A490), with threads
included in the planes Group B bolts (type A490), 780 457
when the threads are excluded from
the shear planes Threaded parts satisfying the 780 579
requirements of F.2.1.3.4, with threads included
in the shear planes Threaded parts satisfying the
requirements of F.2.1.3.4 F.2.1.3.4, when the threads 0.75F in 0.450F in
are excluded from the
cutting planes
0.75F in 0.563F in
(a) For end connections having a hole pattern longer than 965mm, Fnv will be reduced to 83.3% of the tabulated values. The length of the hole
pattern is the maximum distance parallel to the line of force measured on the center line of the bolts. (b) For A307 bolts, the tabulated values
shall be reduced by 1 percent for each 1.6 mm above 5 bolt
diameters.
grip length. (c) Threads
are accepted in the cut planes.
F.2.10.3.2 — Size and conditions of use of the Perforations — The maximum sizes of the perforations for bolts
are established in tables F.2.10.3-3 and F.2.10.3-3M, except that in the detail of Column bases may be drilled
larger to accommodate tolerances inherent in the location of anchor bolts in concrete foundations.
F-119
Standard or short-slot holes transverse to the direction of the load shall be used in connections between members,
except where the use of enlarged holes, short-slot parallel to the load, or long-slot holes is approved. In slip-
critical connections designed based on standard perforations, open slot filler plates may be used, with a thickness
of up to 6.4 mm, without the nominal shear strength of the connector having to be reduced to that specified for
slot perforations.
Enlarged perforations may be used in some or all of the layers comprised by a slip-critical connection, but in no
case in bearing-type connections. Hardened washers should be installed over the enlarged holes on the outside
faces of the splices.
Short slot perforations may be used in some or all of the layers comprised by a slip critical or bearing type
connection. In slip-critical connections, the use of these holes is allowed regardless of the direction of the load,
but in bearing-type connections the major dimension must be perpendicular to the direction of the load. Washers
shall be installed over short slot holes on the outside face of a splice; when high-strength bolts are used, such
washers must be hardened, in accordance with ASTM F436.
When Group B bolts with diameters greater than 25.4 mm are used in enlarged or slotted holes located on
exterior faces, a hardened steel washer meeting ASTM F436 shall be used, except that its thickness shall be a
minimum of 7.9 mm. , instead of a standard washer.
The requirements for washers are presented in Section 6 of the Research Council for Structural Connections
(RCSC) specifications.
Long slot bores may be used in only one of the connected parts at each contact surface, whether it is a slip
critical connection or a crush connection.
In slip-critical connections, long-slot drilling is permitted regardless of the direction of the load, but in bearing-type
connections the slot must be perpendicular to the direction of the load. When long slot holes are used in an outer
plate, plate washers or continuous plates shall be provided with standard holes, large enough to completely cover
the slot. In high-strength bolted connections, such washers or continuous plates shall be not less than 7.9 mm
thick and of a structural grade material, but need not be hardened.
Where hardened washers are required for use with high-strength bolts, such washers shall be placed on the
outer surface of such a plate or continuous plate washer.
Table F.2.10.3-3
Nominal Dimensions of Bolt Holes with
diameter in inches
Bolt Diameter Drilling Dimensions Short Slot Drilling

mm (in.) Standard (Width x Length) mm 14.3 x 17.5 17.5 x Long Slot (Width x
12.7 bore mm 14.3 enlarged mm 22.2 20.6 x Length)
(1/2”) 15.9 17.5 15.9 25.4 23.8 x mm 14.3 x 31.8
(5/8”) 19.1 20.6 20.6 28.6 27.0 x 17.5 x 39.7
(3/4”) 22.2 23.8 23.8 33.3 (d + 20.6 x 47.6
(7/8”) 25.4 27.0 27.0 3.2) x (d + 23.8 x 55.6
(1”) ÿ d+ 31.8 9.5) 27.0 x 63.5
28.6 (ÿ1 1/8” ) 3.2 d + 7.9 (d + 3.2) x (2.5 xd)
F-120
Table F.2.10.3-3M
Nominal Dimensions of the Perforations Bolts
with diameter in mm
Drilling Dimensions
diameter of
Standard Enlarged hole Short slot (W x L) mm 18 x Long Slot (Width x Length)
Pin mm
drilling mm mm 20 24 28 30 35 22 22 x 26 24 mm 18 x 40 22
16 18 38 x 30 27 x 50 24
20 22 d x 32 30 x 55 27
22 24 +8 x 37 33 x 60 30
24 27 x 40 (d + x 67 33
27 30 3) x (d + x 75 (d +
30 33 10) 3) x 2.5d
ÿ36 d+3
F.2.10.3.3 — Minimum spacing — The distance between centers of standard, enlarged or slotted perforations
may not be less than 2 2/3 times the nominal diameter of the connector, d ; it is recommended to use at least 3d .
F.2.10.3.4 — Minimum Edge Distance — The distance from the center of a standard bore to any edge of the
connected part, in any direction, shall not be less than the applicable value in Table F.2.10.3-4 or F. 2.10.3-4M nor
the one required in numeral F.2.10.3.10. The distance from the center of an enlarged hole or slot to an edge of the
connected part shall not be less than that required for a standard hole plus the applicable increment C2 from table
F.2.10.3-5 or F.2.10.3- 5M.
The edge distances in tables F.2.10.3-4 and F.2.10.3-4M are minimum distances based on standard manufacturing
practices and manufacturing tolerances. The applicable requirements of numerals F.2.10.3.10 and F.2.10.4 must
also be met.
F.2.10.3.5 — Maximum values of spacing and edge distance — The maximum distance from the center of any
bolt or rivet to the nearest edge of the parts in contact shall be equal to 12 times the thickness of the connected
part under consideration, not exceeding 150 mm. The longitudinal spacing of connectors between two elements in
continuous contact, in the case of a plate and a profile or two plates, will be:
(a) For painted members or unpainted members that are not subject to corrosion, the spacing shall not be
greater than 24 times the thickness of the thinnest plate nor 300 mm. (b) For unpainted members
of atmospheric corrosion resistant steel exposed to corrosion, the spacing shall not be greater than 14
times the thickness of the thinnest plate nor 180 mm.
Tabla F.2.10.3-4
(b)
Minimum Edge Distance(a), from the center of a standard perforation to the edge of the connected part
Inch diameter bolts
Bolt Diameter Minimum edge distance

mm (inches) 12.7 mm
(½”) 15.9 19.1
(5/8”) 19.1 22.2
(¾) 22.2 25.4
(7/8”) 25.4 28.6
(1”) 28.6 31.8
(1 1/8”) 31.8 (1 38.1
¼”) greater 41.3
than 31.8 ( 1 ¼”) 1.25 x d
a) Edge distances less than those given in this table are permitted if the applicable provisions
of F.2.10.3.10 and F.2.10.4 are satisfied, however distances less than (1) bolt diameter
are not permitted without approval of the structural designer.
b) For enlarged or slotted holes, see table F.2.10.3-5.
F-121
Tabla F.2.10.3-4M
(b)
Minimum Edge Distance(a), from the center of a standard perforation to the edge of the connected part
Bolts with diameter in millimeters
Bolt Diameter Minimum edge distance

mm (inches) 16 mm
22
20 26
22 28
24 30
27 34
30 38
36 46
greater than 36 1.25 x d
(a) Edge distances less than those given in this table are permitted if the applicable
provisions of F.2.10.3.10 and F.2.10.4 are satisfied, however distances less than
(1) bolt diameter are not permitted. . (b) For enlarged or slotted holes,
see Table F.2.10.3-5M.
Table F.2.10.3-5
Values of the C2 edge distance increment
Inch diameter bolts
slot holes
Connector Nominal perforations
Slot Perpendicular to Edge Parallel Slot
Diameter mm enlarged
Short Slots Edge Slots
(in.) mm
mm long
ÿ22.2 (ÿ7/8”) 1.6 3.2
25.4 (1”) 3.2 3.2 0.75d 0
ÿ28.6 (ÿ1 1/8”) 3.2 4.8

(a) When the length of the slot is less than the maximum allowable (see table F.2.10.3-3), it is allowed
reduce the value of C2 by half the difference between the maximum and actual lengths of the slot.
Table F.2.10.3-5M
Values of the C2 edge distance increment
Bolts with diameter in mm
Slotted Holes
Connector Nominal perforations
Slot Perpendicular to Edge Groove Parallel to
Diameter (mm) enlarged (mm)
Short Slots (mm) 3 Long Slots(a) Edge
35
ÿ22 2
24 3 0.75d 0
ÿ27 3
(a) When the slot length is less than the maximum allowable (see table F.2.10.3-3M), it is allowed to reduce the value of C2
by half the difference between the maximum and actual slot lengths .
F.2.10.3.6 — Tension and shear design resistance of bolts and threaded parts — The tensile or shear design resistance,
f , for high-strength bolts or threaded parts, tightly tightened or pretensioned, shall be determined in accordance with the limit
states of failure due to tension and failure due to shear, based on:
ÿ = 0.75
and
RFA= (F.2.10.3-1)
n nb
where:
= nominal resistance to tension, Fnt , or to shear, Fnv , given in table F.2.10.3-2, MPa.
Fn
Ab = nominal area of the bolt or threaded part before threading, mm2 .
F-122
The required tensile strength shall include any stress resulting from the leverage produced by the deformation of the
connected parts.
F.2.10.3.7 — Combined Shear and Tension Stresses in Bearing Type Connections — The design tensile strength
of a bolt subjected to a combination of tensile and shear stresses shall be determined in accordance with the tensile
and shear limit states of failure. sharp, based on:
ÿ = 0.75
and R FA
n = nt b
ÿ
(F.2.10.3-2)
where:
Fntÿ = nominal tensile strength per unit area, modified to include stress effects
shear, MPa
F
F nt
ÿ
=ÿ ÿ
1.3F nt nt f Fin nt
(F.2.10.3-3)
F nv
Phi
Fnt = nominal tensile strength per unit area from table F.2.10.3-2, MPa.
Fnv = nominal shear resistance per unit area from table F.2.10.3-2, MPa. = required shear resistance per unit area,
MPa. vf
The design shear resistance per unit area of the connectors will be greater than or equal to the required shear
resistance per unit area, vf .
When the required resistance per unit area, f , either in shear or in tension, is less than or equal to 30 percent of the
corresponding design resistance per unit area, the combined stress effects need not be verified. Formula F.2.10.3-3
can be rewritten to express the nominal shear resistance per unit area, Fnv
as a function of the required tensile strength per unit area,
ÿ
f t.
F.2.10.3.8 — High-strength bolts in slip-critical connections — Slip-critical connections shall be designed to

prevent slippage and also to the limit states applicable to crush-type connections. In the case of bolts passing through
filler plates, all slippery surfaces must be prepared to achieve design slip resistance.
The design resistance for the slip limit state, Rn ÿ , resistance reduction will be determined based on the
coefficient, ÿ , and the nominal resistance, Rn , calculated as follows.
For standard or short slot drilling perpendicular to the direction of the load:
ÿ = 1.00
For enlarged or short slot holes parallel to the direction of the load:
ÿ = 0.85
For long slot holes:
ÿ = 0.70
The nominal resistance will be equal to:
R DhTn = ÿ n ufbs (F.2.10.3-4)
F-123
where:
m = average coefficient of friction for Class A or B surfaces, as applicable, taken from the cases presented below
or obtained from tests: = 0.30 for Class A surfaces (unpainted steel
surfaces free of mill scale, blast-treated surfaces coated with a Class A coating or hot-dip galvanized and
rough-processed surfaces)
= 0.50 for Class B surfaces (unpainted blasted steel surfaces or blasted surfaces coated with a Class B
coating) = 1.13; a factor that reflects the relationship between the
Of average value of the tension in the installed bolts and the minimum pretension specified for them, except
when the specifications allow another value
Tb = minimum bolt stress given in tables F.2.10.3-1 and F.2.10.3-1M, kN = factor

hf associated with the use of filler plates, as follows: (a) When bolts
=
are added to distribute loads in filler plate(s) h 1.0 (b) When bolts are not added to distribute floads
in filler plate(s)
=
• For one filler plate between the connected parts h 1.0 • For two or
f
=
more filler plates between the connected parts h 0.85 f
ns = number of planes on which slip must occur for the connection to slip.
F.2.10.3.9 — Combined Shear and Tension Stresses in Slip-Critical Connections — When a tension force acts
on a slip-critical connection that reduces the net clamping force, the design slip resistance per bolt, calculated from
the numeral F.2.10.3.8, will be multiplied by the ksc factor , calculated as follows:
T in
k sc
1 =ÿ
(F.2.10.3-5)
D ubb
Tn
where:
nb = number of bolts supporting the applied stress = minimum
Tb bolt installation stress given in table F.2.10.3-1 or F.2.10.3-1M, kN = tensile force due to factored
That load combinations, kN
F.2.10.3.10 — Resistance to crushing in bolted holes — The design resistance to crushing in bolted holes, Rn ÿ ,
shall be determined based on:
ÿ = 0.75
the R n calculated as follows:
(a) For a bolt in a standard, enlarged, or short-slot hole, regardless of the direction of load application, or in a
long-slot hole with the slot parallel to the direction of bearing force:
(i) When the strain around the bolt hole, under service loads, is
a design consideration:
= tF 2.4dtF
R 1.2L
n with
ÿ in (F.2.10.3-6a)
(ii) When the deformation around the bolt hole, under service loads, does not
is a design consideration:
= tF 3.0dtF
R 1.5L
n with
ÿ in (F.2.10.3-6b)
(b) For a bolt in a long-slot hole with the slot perpendicular to the direction of the
force:
= tF 2.0dtF ÿ
R 1.0L
n with in (F.2.10.3-6c)
F-124
(c) For connections where bolts completely pass through an unstiffened box member or
a PTE, see F.2.10.7 and formula F.2.10.7-1,
where:
d = nominal diameter of the bolt, mm
Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of the connected material, MPa
Lc = free distance, in the direction of the force, between the edge of the perforation considered and the edge
of the adjacent perforation or the edge of the material, mm =
t thickness of the connected material, mm
For a connection, the bearing resistance shall be taken as the sum of the bearing resistances of the bolts
taken individually.
The crush resistance shall be verified for both crush connections and slip critical connections. The use of
enlarged bores and long or short slot parallel to the direction of force is limited to slip-critical connections by
F.2.10.3.2.
F.2.10.3.11 — Special bolts — The nominal resistance of special bolts other than those presented in table F.2.10.3-2
must be verified by tests.
F.2.10.3.12 — Tension Bolts — When there are bolts or other tension-loaded connectors that connect to the wall of
a box section or an unstiffened PTE, the strength of the wall shall be determined by rational analysis.
F.2.10.4 — AFFECTED ELEMENTS OF THE CONNECTED MEMBERS AND CONNECTION ELEMENTS — This numeral
applies to the elements of the members in the connection area and to the connection elements such as plates, brackets,
angles and brackets.
F.2.10.4.1 — Element resistance to tension — The design resistance, Rn ÿ , affected by the of the elements
members and the connection elements requested by tension will be the lower of the values obtained for the limit
states of yield by tension and rupture. by tension.
(a) For tension creep in connection elements: ÿ = 0.90
RFA=
n which
(F.2.10.4-1)
(b) For stress breakage in connection elements: ÿ = 0.75
RFA=
nue
(F.2.10.4-2)
where:
Ae = effective net area defined in numeral F.2.4.3, mm2 . For bolted splice plates,
AA =0.85A
ÿ
in g
The effective area of the connection plate may be limited by the stress distribution; this effect is taken into
account by applying criteria such as the Withmore section.
F.2.10.4.2 — Resistance of elements to shear — The design resistance, Rn ÿ , affected by the of the elements
members and the connection elements requested by shear shall be the lower of the values obtained for the limit
states of yield by shear and rupture. for sharp.
(a) For shear yield of the element:
ÿ = 1.00
= A y gv
R 0.60F
n
(F.2.10.4-3)
F-125
where:
Agv = gross area subjected to shearing, mm2
(b) For shear failure of the element: ÿ = 0.75
=
R n0.60F A u nv
(F.2.10.4-4)
where:
Anv = net area subjected to shearing, mm2
F.2.10.4.3 — Tear Block Strength — The design strength, Rn ÿ , for the limit state of block tear along one or more shear
fault lines and one tension fault line in the opposite direction. perpendicular, will be calculated taking:
ÿ = 0.75
y
= A U F A 0.6F A U F A + ÿ+ bs u nt bs u nt y gv
R 0.60F (F.2.10.4-5)
n u nv
where:
Agv = gross area subjected to shearing, mm2
Ant = net area subjected to tension, mm2
Anv = net area subjected to shearing, mm2
When the tensile stress is uniform, we will take U 1 bs = ; otherwise, U 0.5 will be taken bs
= .
F.2.10.4.4 — Resistance of compression elements — The design resistance of compression connection elements, Rn
ÿ , for the yield and buckling limit states shall be determined as follows:
Para KL r 25 ÿ
PnFA
= (F.2.10.4-6)
which
ÿ = 0.90
For KL r 25 > the requirements of numeral F.2.5 apply.
F.2.10.4.5 — Resistance of flexural elements — The design resistance of affected elements of the members shall be the
lower of the values obtained for the limit states of yield strength due to flexure, local buckling, lateral-torsional buckling due
to flexure and failure due to flexion.
F.2.10.5 — FILLING SINKS
F.2.10.5.1 — Welded filler plates — Whenever it is necessary to use filler plates in joints through which load is transferred,
filler plates and connection welds shall meet the requirements of F.2.10. 5.1.1 or F.2.10.5.1.2, as applicable.
F.2.10.5.1.1 — Thin filler plates — Filler plates less than 6.0 mm thick shall not be used to transfer stresses.
When the thickness of the filler plates is less than 6.0 mm, or when the thickness of the filler plate is greater than
or equal to 6.0 mm but is not adequate to transfer the applied load between the connected parts, the filler plate
shall be flush with the edges of the splice plate or connected outer part, and the size of the weld will increase,
above the size required to transmit the load, by an amount equal to the thickness of the filler plate.
F.2.10.5.1.2 — Thick filler plates — When the thickness of the filler plates is adequate to transfer the applied load
between the connected parts, such plates shall extend outside the splice plate or external connected part. The
welds that join the
F-126
Splice plate or outer part connected to the filler plate must be sufficient to transmit the force to the filler plate
and the area of the latter that receives the applied force must be sufficient so that the stresses are not
excessive. The welds that join the filler plate to the connected inner part must be adequate to transmit the
applied force.
F.2.10.5.2 — Bolted Filler Plates — When a load-transmitting bolt passes through filler plates with a total thickness
less than or equal to 6.4 mm, no reduction in shear strength is required. Conversely, when the total thickness of such
plates is greater than 6.4 mm, one of the following requirements shall apply:
(a) The shear strength of the bolts will be multiplied by a factor equal to ÿ ÿ 1 0.0154 t 6 ÿ (
ÿ
ÿ)ÿ,
but not less than 0.85, where t is the total thickness in mm of the filling plates; (b) Filler
plates shall extend beyond the splice and this extension shall be secured with a sufficient number of bolts to
distribute, evenly over the combined cross section of the connected member and filler plates, the total
force acting on the connected item.
(c) The size of the joint will be increased to accommodate a number of bolts equal to the number
total required in point (b); either
(d) The joint shall be designed to prevent slippage in accordance with F.2.10.3.8, using either class B or
class A surfaces, with tightening controlled by the turn-nut method.
F.2.10.6 — SPLICES — Splices with groove welds in girders and reinforced full-web girders shall be designed to develop the
nominal strength of the smallest of the connected sections. Other types of splices in girder cross sections and reinforced solid
web girders shall be designed to develop the strength required by the forces acting at the splice point.
F.2.10.7 — CRUSHING RESISTANCE — The design resistance to crushing of surfaces in contact, Rn ÿ , shall be determined
for the crushing limit state (local compressive creep) based on:
ÿ = 0.75
the nominal crushing resistance, defined as follows for the different types of support: and Rn ,
(a) For machined surfaces, dowels in reamed or drilled holes and in ends of
adjusted support stiffeners:
= A y pb
R 1.8F
n
(F.2.10.7-1)
where:
= specified minimum yield stress, MPa.
Fy Apb = area of support in projection, mm2 .
(b) For rockers and rollers:
(ii) Si d 635 ÿ mm
R 1.2= F 90 l d 20 n yb)
ÿ(
(F.2.10.7-2)
(iii) Si d 635 > mm

= F 90 l d 20 n yb )
R 30.2
ÿ(
(F.2.10.7-3)
where:
d = diameter of the roller or rocker, mm bl =
support length, mm
F.2.10.8 — COLUMN BASE AND CRUSHING ON CONCRETE — The proper transmission of loads and moments from the
columns to the bases and foundations must be provided.
F-127
The design resistance to crushing for the limit state of concrete crushing, ÿc pP , can be calculated based on:
ÿ = 0.65
the nominal crushing resistance, calculated as follows: and Pp ,
(a) On a concrete support loaded in its entire area: P 0.85f A p

(F.2.10.8-1)
ÿ
=
cl
(b) On a concrete support loaded only in part of its area:

(F.2.10.8-2)
ÿ ÿ
= AAA 1.7f A ÿ cl 2 1 c1 p
P 0.85f
where:
A1 = area of steel concentrically supported on a concrete base, mm²
A2 = maximum area of a support surface zone geometrically similar and concentric with the loaded area, mm²
F.2.10.9 — ANCHOR BOLTS AND EMBEDDED ELEMENTS — Anchor bolts shall be designed to provide the required
resistance at the base level of the columns of the structure, including the net stress components of any bending moment that
may result from the load combinations stipulated in numeral F.2.2.2. Anchor bolts shall be designed in accordance with the
requirements for threaded parts in table F.2.10.3-2.
The design of the column bases and the anchor bolts for the transfer of forces to the concrete foundation, including the support
on the concrete elements, must satisfy the requirements of Title C of this Regulation.
The horizontal forces at the column bases may be resisted by crushing against concrete elements or by friction between the
column base plate and the foundation. When anchor bolts are designed to resist horizontal force, the design shall take into
account the size of the base plate holes, the bolt installation tolerances, and the horizontal displacement of the column.
Larger circular or slot holes are permitted in base plates when adequate support for the nut is provided using ASTM F844
washers or sheet washers to act as a bridge over the hole.
F.2.10.10 — FINS AND WEBS WITH CONCENTRATED FORCES — This numeral applies to single and double concentrated
forces applied perpendicular to the flange(s) of wide-flange I- sections and similar reinforced profiles. A simple concentrated
force can be either tension or compression. Double concentrated forces consist of a tensile and a compressive force, which
form a couple on the same side of the loaded member.
When the required resistance exceeds the design resistance determined by the limit states considered in this numeral,
stiffeners or plate plates dimensioned to address the difference between the required resistance and the design resistance for
the applicable limit state will be provided. The design of the stiffeners must also satisfy the requirements of numeral F.2.10.10.8.
The veneer plates must also satisfy the design requirements of numeral F.2.10.10.9.
See F.2.20.3 for applicable requirements at ends of cantilever members.
At the non-framed ends of beams, transverse stiffeners are required in accordance with the requirements of numeral
F.2.10.10.7.
F.2.10.10.1 — Local bending of fins — This clause applies to both single concentrated forces of tension and the
tension component of double concentrated forces.
The design resistance for the local bending limit state of the fin, Rn ÿ , will be determined based on:
F-128
ÿ = 0.90
and
=
2 Rn 6.25t F f yf (F.2.10.10-1)
where:
Fyf = specified minimum yield stress for the fin, MPa
tf = thickness of loaded fin, mm
If the length of the loaded zone measured across the flange width is less than 0.15b member f
,
where bf is the
flange width, then formula F.2.10.10-1 need not be checked.
When the concentrated force to be withstood is applied at a distance less than f from the end of the member, Rn
10t
must be reduced by 50%.
When required, a pair of transverse stiffeners shall be provided.
F.2.10.10.2 — Local web yield — This clause applies to both single concentrated forces and both components of double
concentrated forces.
The design resistance for the local yield limit state of the web will be determined based on:
ÿ = 1.00
Rn , the nominal resistance, calculated as follows: and
(a) When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at a distance, measured from the
end of the member, greater than the depth d of the member,
R n5k= l+F(t ) (F.2.10.10-2)
b is w
(b) When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at a distance, measured from the
end of the member, less than or equal to the depth d of the member,
R n2.5k
= ( l F t + ) (F.2.10.10-3)
b is w
where:
k = distance from the outer face of the fin to the toe of the fillet on the web, mm = specified minimum
yield stress for the web, MPa. = support length (not less than k for end
Live
bl reactions in beams), mm = web thickness, mm

wt
When required, a pair of transverse stiffeners or a veneer plate will be provided.
F.2.10.10.3 — Web wrinkling — This clause applies to both single concentrated compressive forces and the compression
component of double concentrated forces.
The design resistance for the limit state of local wrinkling of the web will be determined based on:
ÿ = 0.75
(a) When the concentrated compressive force to be supported is applied at a distance, measured from the end of
the member, greater than or equal to d 2 : ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿ
1.5
l t
ÿ
EF t
= is f
R 0.80t
n
13 2
In ÿ ÿÿ ÿ
+ b In ÿ
(F.2.10.10-4)
ÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿ dtf t ÿ In
F-129
(b) When the concentrated compressive force to be supported is applied at a distance, measured from the end of the member,
less than d 2 : Si bl d 0.2 ÿ
(i)
1.5
ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿ l b t
In
ÿ
EF ist f
R n0.40t
= 1 3 In2 + ÿ (F.2.10.10-5a)
ÿ ÿÿ ÿ
dt t
ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿ f In
ÿ
(ii) ÿ Si bl d 0.2 >

1.5
ÿ
ÿ 4 (l )b ÿÿ ÿt In ÿ
EF ist f
2R
n
=0.40t
+ÿ ÿ1 In 0.2 ÿÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿ (F.2.10.10-5b)
ÿÿ
dtt ÿ f In
ÿ ÿ
where:
d = depth of member, mm = thickness
tf of flange, mm
When required, one or two transverse stiffeners, or a veneer plate, shall be provided, which shall extend to at least half the depth of the web.
F.2.10.10.4 — Web lateral buckling — This clause applies only to simple concentrated compressive forces acting on members in which,
for the section at which the concentrated force is applied, relative lateral movement between them is unrestricted. the tension fin and the
compression fin, which receives the load.
The design resistance of the web will be determined based on:
ÿ = 0.85
the R n , the nominal resistance for the lateral buckling limit state of the web, calculated as follows:
(a) If the compression vane is restrained against rotation:

h t In
(i) For ÿ 2.3
L bbf
3 ÿ
= t3
Ctrwf ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ 1 0.4 ht In
ÿ
Rn (F.2.10.10-6)
2h
ÿ
+ L bÿ bf ÿÿ
ÿÿ
h t In
(ii) For >
2.3 , The web lateral buckling limit state does not apply.
L bbf
When the required web strength exceeds the design strength, Rn ÿ , local lateral bracing must be provided to the flange
in tension, or provide a pair of transverse stiffeners or a clad plate.
(b) If the compression vane is not restrained against rotation:

h t In
(i) For ÿ
1.7
L bbf
3 ÿ
= t3
Ctrwf ÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿ 0.4 ht In
ÿ
Rn (F.2.10.10-7)
2h ÿÿÿ L bbf ÿÿ
ÿÿÿ
ht
(ii) couple in >
1.7 , The web lateral buckling limit state does not apply.
l bf
When the required web strength exceeds the design strength, Rn ÿ , provide local lateral bracing to both must be
flanges at the point of application of the concentrated force.
The following definitions apply to formulas F.2.10.10-6 and F.2.10.10-7:
= 6.62 x 10 when
6
MM
Cr in
< at the point of load application, MPa.
and
F-130
= 6
3.31 x 10 when MM in
ÿ
and
at the point of load application, MPa.
Mu = required moment resistance, N mm = the greatest

Lb length without lateral support along any of the flanges in the
point of application of the load, mm = width of the
bf flange, mm = free distance
h between flanges minus the fillet or the radius of the web-flange transition for rolled sections; distance
between adjacent lines of connectors, or free distance between flanges when welding is used, for
reinforced profiles, mm = flange thickness, mm = web thickness, mm
t
f
wt
In numeral F.2.19, criteria are given for the design of elements that can provide an adequate restriction.
F.2.10.10.5 — Compression web buckling — This numeral applies to a pair of compression forces acting on both flanges in the
same section of a member, whether they are simple concentrated forces or the compression components of a member. couple of
double concentrated forces.
The design resistance for the local buckling limit state of the web shall be determined by taking:
ÿ = 0.90
and
3
24h InIF
is
Rn = (F.2.10.10-8)
h
When the couple of concentrated compressive forces to be resisted is applied at a distance, measured from the end of the member,
less than d 2 , Rn will be reduced by 50%.
When required, one or two transverse stiffeners, or veneer plate, shall be provided and shall extend over the full depth of the web.
F.2.10.10.6 — Shear in web panel area — This clause applies to double concentrated forces acting on one or both flanges of a
member at the same location.
The design resistance of the web panel area for the shear yield limit state will be determined based on:
ÿ = 0.90
(a) When the effect of the deformation of the panel area on the stability of the frame is not considered in the analysis:
(i) Para P 0.4P

in
ÿ
and
= d t y cw
R 0.60F
n
(F.2.10.10-9)
(ii) For P 0.4P> and

in
P ÿ
0.60F=d t 1.4 ÿÿÿR in

(F.2.10.10-10)
n ÿ y cw P
ÿ and
ÿÿÿ
(b) When the effect of plastic deformation of the panel area on the stability of the frame is considered in the analysis:
(i) For P 0.75P

in
ÿ
and
F-131
2
3b t ÿ
= dt1 cf cf
R 0.60F
n y cw
ÿ+ÿ ÿ
(F.2.10.10-11)
ddt
ÿ b cw ÿ
(ii) For P 0.75P

>
in and
2
3b tcfcf ÿÿ 1.2P ÿ
in
ÿ R 0.60F
= +ÿ ÿd ddt
t 1 b cw ÿÿ 1.9 ÿ
(F.2.10.10-12)
n y cw P
ÿ ÿÿ and ÿ
In formulas F.2.10.10-9 to F.2.10.10-12 the following definitions apply:
A = cross-sectional area of the column, mm². bcf = width of column flange, mm db dc Fy Pu
Py
= depth of beam, mm =
depth of column, mm = specified
minimum yield stress of column web, MPa. = required strength, N. Yield
strength of the column under
= F Ay , axial load, N.
t cf = thickness of the column flange, mm =
wt thickness of the column web, mm
When required, veneer plate(s) or a pair of diagonal stiffeners shall be used within the limits of the
rigid connection of two or more members whose webs are in the same plane.
See F.2.10.10.9 for veneer plate design requirements.
F.2.10.10.7 — Unframed ends of beams and joists — At the unframed ends of beams and joists that are not
otherwise restrained against rotation about their longitudinal axis, a pair of transverse stiffeners shall be provided
that extend over all the depth of the soul.
F.2.10.10.8 — Additional requirements for stiffeners for concentrated loads — Stiffeners required to resist
concentrated tensile forces shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of F.2.10.4.1 and welded to the
flange receiving the load and to the flange. soul. Welds to the fin shall be sized for the difference between the
required strength and the design strength for the applicable limit state. The welds from the stiffener to the web shall
be dimensioned to transfer to the web the algebraic difference between the tensile forces at one end of the stiffener
and the other.
The stiffeners required to resist concentrated compressive forces shall be designed as specified in F.2.10.4.4, shall
be welded to the web and may alternatively be in direct contact with or welded to the loaded flange. Welds to the fin
shall be sized for the difference between the required strength and the design strength for the applicable limit state.
The weld to the web will be dimensioned to transfer to it the algebraic difference between the compression forces at
one end of the stiffener and the other. For the design of tight fitting stiffeners, where the load is transferred by
contact, see F.2.10.7.
Transverse stiffeners that extend over the full depth of a hot rolled or reinforced beam to accommodate compressive
forces applied to the flange(s) shall be designed as axial compression members (columns) in accordance with the
requirements of numerals F.2.5.6.2 and F.2.10.4.4. The properties of such columns will be determined using an
effective length of 0.75h and considering a cross section composed of two stiffeners and a web strip having a width
of 25t for interior stiffeners or 12t for beam end stiffeners.
In In
The weld connecting a support stiffener to the web shall be sized to transmit to the latter the difference between the
compression forces at either end of the stiffener.
The transverse and diagonal stiffeners must also satisfy the following criteria:
F-132
(a) The width of each stiffener plus one-half the thickness of the column web shall not be less than one-
third the width of the flange or plate of the connection at the moment transmitting the concentrated
force.
(b) The thickness of a stiffener shall not be less than half the thickness of the flange or plate of the
connection at the moment transmitting the concentrated force, nor less than the width divided by 16.
(c) Transverse stiffeners shall extend at least halfway down the

member depth except as specified in F.2.10.10.5 and F.2.10.10.7.
F.2.10.10.9 — Additional requirements for veneer plates under concentrated loads — The veneer plates
required for compressive strength must be designed in accordance with the requirements of numeral F.2.5.
The veneer plates required for tensile strength must be designed in accordance with the requirements of numeral
F.2.4.
The veneer plates required for shear resistance (see F.2.10.10.6) shall be designed in accordance with the
requirements of F.2.7.
In addition, veneer plates must meet the following criteria:
(a) Veneer plates of adequate thickness and extension shall be used to supply the material
allowance to meet or exceed strength requirements.
(b) The veneer plate shall be welded so as to develop the proportion of the total force that
is transmitted to her.
F.2.11 — DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS OF STRUCTURAL TUBULAR SECTIONS (PTE)

AND BOX MEMBERS
This numeral covers design considerations applicable to connections for members made of Structural Hollow Sections
(STE) or box section with uniform wall thickness.
The design of the connections frequently controls the dimensioning of the members in PTE, in particular the thickness of
the main members of the reinforcements, and must therefore be considered from the initial design.
F.2.11.1 — Forces Concentrated on PTE

F.2.11.2 — Connections from PTE to PTE in Trusses
F.2.11.3 — Moment Connections from PTE to PTE
F.2.11.4 — Welds to branches
See also F.2.10 for additional requirements for bolted connections to PTEs. For through bolts, see F.2.10.3.10(c)
Connection dimensions must be within the applicability range. Verification of a limit state is required only when the
geometry of the connection or the load are within the parameters given in the description of the limit state.
The design resistance of the connections, Rn ÿ , shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of this section and
the provisions of section F.2.2.
The definitions of some of the parameters used in this clause are illustrated in Figure F.2.11-1.
F-133
Figure F.2.11-1 — Notation for connections in PTE
F.2.11.1 — CONCENTRATED FORCES ON PTE
F.2.11.1.1 — Parameter definitions
At = gross (total) cross-sectional area of the member, mm2

B = total width of member in rectangular PTE, measured at 90 degrees to the plane of connection, mm =
Bp plate width, measured at 90 degrees to the plane of connection, mm =
D outer diameter of member in circular PTE, mm = yield
My stress specified minimum of member material in PTE, MPa
Fyp = specified minimum yield stress of the plate, MPa
It was = specified minimum tensile strength of PTE material, MPa
H = depth of the member in rectangular PTE, measured in the plane of the connection, mm bl
= load bearing length, measured parallel to the axis of the member in PTE, (or measured across the width
of the PTE in the case of loaded end caps), mm
t = design thickness of the wall of a PTE member, mm = plate
pt
thickness, mm
F.2.11.1.2 — Circular PTEs — The design resistance of connections with concentrated loads within the limits of
table F.2.11.1-1A shall be taken as shown in table F.2.11.1-1.
F-134
Table F.2.11.1-1
Design resistance for the connection of a plate to a circular PTE
Connection type Design resistance of the connection Platen Flexion
T- and cross- connections with cross plate Limit state: local creep of PTE
Axial load on the plate:
ÿÿÿÿ
5.5 Out of plane M

2
ny f ÿ ÿ ÿ = R sen F t Q In the plane 0.5BR= pn
n
ÿB
p
ÿ 1 0.81
ÿÿÿÿÿ D
(F.2.11.1-1)
ÿ = 0.90
tee connections , Y- and cross-shaped
with longitudinal plate
Limit state: PTE plasticization
Axial load on the plate:
Rs _ 2 ÿ= ÿ
ÿl b ÿ
M nbn
0.8
= (l R
)
5.5F +
t 1 0.25 Q ÿ __
D ÿÿ
(F.2.11.1-2)
ÿ = 0.90
T -connections with longitudinal shear plate
Limit States: creep of the plate and shear failure

(punching) in the
PTE
Maximum thickness of the plate:

F in __ __
t ÿ t
p
F
yp
(F.2.11.1-3)
Connections on end caps
Limit state: local creep of PTE
End load:
Rn2F
ÿ =t +ÿ
5t
andÿlbp
OFand ÿ ÿ
__ __
(F.2.11.1-4)
ÿ = 1.00
F-135

Design resistance for the connection of a plate to a circular PTE FUNCTIONS
= for connection to a live surface on the PTE.

Q1
f
=ÿ +
1 0.3U 1 U ( ) for connection to a compression surface on the PTE (F.2.11.1-5)
P inM in
IN = + ,
where Pu and Mu are obtained on the side of the joint that has the least compressive stress.
OFgcSF
c
Pu and Mu refer to the forces in the PTE (F.2.11.1-6)
Table F.2.11.1-1 A
Application limits from table F.2.11.1-1
1. Angle of application of the load on the plate ÿ ÿ 30

2. Slenderness ratios of the wall of the PTE D t 50 ÿ for T connections with plates at axial load or moment.
D t 40 ÿ for cross connections with plates under axial load or moment. for connections with
D t 0.11E F ÿ y shear plate.
D t 0.11E F ÿ y for compression cap connections
3. Width ratio 0.2 BD 1.0 ÿ < p For connections with cross plate.
4. Strength of material F 360 ÿ Mpa

and
5. Ductility FF 0.8 ÿ (ASTM A500 Gr. C material is acceptable)

yu
F.2.11.1.3 — Rectangular PTE — The design resistance of connections with concentrated loads within the limits of table F.2.11.1-2A shall
be taken as the lower value among the limit states applicable according to table F. 2.11.1-2.
Table F.2.11.1-2
Design resistance for the connection of a plate to a rectangular PTE
Connection type Design resistance in the connection

Limit state: local creep of the plate, for any value of ÿ
10
R = ÿ F ytB (F.2.11.1-7)
n pFtB yes pp
Bt
ÿ = 0.95
Limit state: shear yield (punching) in the PTE, when ÿ ÿÿ
Tee and cross connections with cross plate under axial load on the
0.85BBB 2t p
plate
= t 2t 2B +ÿ y p ep
R 0.6F (F.2.11.1-8)
n
ÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿ = 0.95
Limit state: local yield of the PTE wall, when ÿ = 1.0
R 2F=t 5k l y ÿÿ + (F.2.11.1-9)
n b
ÿ ÿ ÿ = 1.00
Limit state: wrinkling of the PTE wall, for connections when ÿ = 1.0 and the plate
and T is in compression,
,
3 l( b ) ÿ
2
= ÿ
ÿ Rn 1.6t 1ÿÿ ÿ+ EF Q yf (F.2.11.1-10)
where H 3tÿ ÿ ÿ
Bp ÿ = 0.75
b=
B
Limit state: wrinkling of the PTE wall, for cross connections, when ÿ = 1.0 and the
plate is in compression,
= ÿ ÿ3 ÿ
ÿ ÿ 48t
R ÿÿÿÿ EF Q yf (F.2.11.1-11)
n
H 3t
ÿ = 0.90
F-136

Y and cross type of Design resistance in the connection

tee connections , connection under axial load on the plate .
Limit state: plasticization of the PTE wall
2
Ft 2 (l b) t ÿ
Rn ÿ ÿ ÿ=
and
+ÿ 41Q
p
f
ÿ (F.2.11.1-12)
ÿ 1 (tBp B ÿ
ÿ
B
you ) ÿÿ
ÿ = 1.00
T and Y connections , with through longitudinal plate, low

axial load on the plate
Limit state: plasticization of the PTE wall
()
2
2F t ÿ2l t ÿ
b p
R you
n
ÿ= )
and
ÿ + 41Q ÿ
f
ÿ (F.2.11.1-13)
ÿ 1 tB
( B ÿ
ÿ
B
p ÿÿ
ÿ = 1.00
T -connections with longitudinal shear plate under shear force on the plate.
Limit states: creep in the plate and shear failure (punching) in

the PTE.
F
in
tÿp t (F.2.11.1-3)
F
yp
Connections on end caps under axial load Limit state: creep at the side walls
R 2F =t 5t l + p ÿb y ÿ 5t l B(F.2.11.1-14)
+< )
n ÿ ÿ, when ( pb
R AF=new , 5t l B+bÿp )
when (
ÿ = 1.00
Limit state: local wrinkling of the side walls when the plate is in
compression.
1.5
ÿ ÿ
6 ÿl ÿb ÿ ÿ ÿ t( ) t
p
R =
1.6t 1+
2
ÿ
ÿ IF when
n
Bt and
t
ÿ
ÿ ÿp ÿÿ
lBb (F.2.11.1-15)
( 5t p +)<
ÿ = 0.75
F-137

FUNCTIONS
= for connection to a live surface in the PTE.
Q 1.0
f
=
In
1.3 0.4 1.0 ÿ
ÿ
for connection of a cross plate to a surface to
ÿ compression in the PTE (F.2.11.1-16)

= 2
1 Uÿ for connection of a longitudinal plate or a longitudinal plate
through to a compression surface in the PTE (F.2.11.1-17)
PM
in in
IN = + where Pu and Mu are obtained on the side of the joint that has the
OF SF
gc c
higher compressive stress (F.2.11.1-6)

Pu and Mu refer to the forces in the PTE
10B
= p
B ÿ B (F.2.11.1-18)
ep p
Bt
k = outer radius at PTE corner, ÿ 1.5t
Table F.2.11.1-2A Application limits from table F.2.11.1-2
1. Load application angle ÿ ÿ 30

2. Slenderness ratios of the PTE wall: B t or H t 35 ÿ for the loaded wall, in connections with transversal plate.
B t or H t 40 ÿ for the loaded wall, in connections with longitudinal plate or through plate ( ) B 3t t ÿ or ( ) H 3 ÿ yt 1.40 EF
for the loaded wall, when the plate is loaded by shear.

ÿ
and
3. Width ratio: ÿ ÿconnections

1.00 for 0.25 BB with cross plate.
p
4. Strength of material F 360 ÿ MPa

and
5. Ductility: FF 0.8 (ASTM A500

ÿ Gr. C material is acceptable)
yu
F.2.11.2 — REINFORCE PTE TO PTE CONNECTIONS — Reinforcement PTE to PTE connections are defined as those
connections made up of one or more branches that are welded directly to a continuous main member that passes through
the connection. They are classified as follows:
(a) When the punching load (P sin ÿ) of a branch

r is balanced by beam shear forces in the main member, the
connection is classified as a T -connection if the branch is perpendicular to the main member, and as a T-
connection. And in other cases. (b) When the punching
load (P sin ÿ) of one branch is substantially balanced
r (within 20 percent variation) by loads in other branch(es)
located on the same side of the connection, it is classified as a connection in k . The relevant spacing is
taken between the primary branch members whose loads are balanced. Included here is the case of a
connection in k
where one branch is perpendicular to the main member, usually called an N -connection. (c)
When the punching load (P sin ÿ) is transmitted rthrough the main member and is balanced by branches on the
opposite side, the connection is classified as cross connection. (d) When more than two primary
branches arrive at a connection, or branches arrive in more than one plane, the
connection is classified as a general or multiplanar connection.
Examples of connection classification are given in Figure F.2.11.2-1.
F-138
Figure F.2.11.2-1 — Examples of PTE to PTE connection classification
When a branch transmits a part of its load as a connection in k and another part through T , Y or cross connection mechanisms, the
nominal resistance will be determined in proportion to the participation of each type of connection over the total.
,
For the purposes of numeral F.2.11, the axis lines of the branches and main members will be in a common plane. For rectangular
PTE connections there is the additional limitation that all members are oriented with two walls parallel to the plane. For trusses
fabricated from PTE, with the legs welded to the main members, eccentricities are allowed within the limits of applicability without the
resultant moments being required to be considered in the connection design.
Figure F.2.11.2-2 presents some typical failure modes for PTE to PTE connections in trusses.
F-139
(a) Plasticization of the main member (b) Shear failure (punchout) in the main member
(d) Non-uniform distribution of the load in the compression

(c) Non-uniform distribution of the load in the branch under tension
branch
(e) Shear yield over gap in main member

(f) Failure in the side wall of the main member
Figure F.2.11.2-2 — Typical limit states for PTE to PTE connections in trusses
At = gross (total) cross-sectional area of the member, mm2

B = total width of the main member in rectangular PTE, measured at 90 degrees to the plane of the
connection, mm
Bb = total width of branch in rectangular PTE, measured at 90 degrees to plane of connection, mm = outside
D diameter of main member in circular PTE, mm = outside diameter of
branch in circular PTE, mm = specified minimum yield
stress for material of the main member in PTE, MPa.
Db Fy Fyb = specified minimum yield stress for branch material in PTE, MPa. =
specified minimum tensile strength for the PTE material, MPa.
Fu H = depth of the main member in rectangular PTE, measured in the plane of the connection, mm
F-140
Hb = cant of the branch in rectangular PTE, measured in the plane of the connection, mm %
Ov = l l x100 ov p ,
It is = eccentricity in a rebar connection, positive away from the legs, mm = spacing between legs, measured
on the face of the main member in a K connection ,
sin
g
consider welds, mm = length of

l ov overlap between two legs, projected to the connection face on the member
principal, measurement on this face, mm
= projected length, on the main member, of the overlapping branch, mm = design thickness of
pl
t the wall of a main member in PTE, mm = design thickness of the wall of a branch in
bt PTE, mm = ratio of widths; ratio of branch diameter to main member
ÿ diameter = circular DD PTE; Ratio of full width of branch to full width of main member = rectangular BB PTE. ÿeff
b
for
= effective width ratio; equal to the sum of the perimeters of the two legs in a K connection divided by eightb for
times the width of
the main member. slenderness ratio of the main member wall; ratio between half diameter and wall thickness = D 2t for circular
PTE; ratio between half width and wall thickness = B 2t for rectangular PTE.
c
the
= load length parameter, applicable only to rectangular PTE; relation between the contact length of the branch with the
main member, in the plane of the connection, and the width of the main member = bl B ÿ . l H sin bb = acute angle
between branch and where
main member
, =
=ratio;
separation
(degrees)
i ratio of the spacing between the branches of the connection in K to the
g width
of the main member = g B for a rectangular PTE.
F.2.11.2.2 — Circular PTEs — The design resistance of PTE to PTE connections in reinforcements that are within the limits of
table F.2.11.2-1A shall be taken as the lesser of the applicable limit states. which are presented in table F.2.11.2-1.
Table F.2.11.2-1
Design resistance of armor type connections between circular PTEs
Connection type Design resistance of the connection at axial load Limit state:
General check shear yield (punching) ÿ + ÿ ÿ
For T -in- Y connections , in cross and in K with
,
1 sen
separation Pn0.6F
yb 2 t D
= (F.2.11.2-1)
ÿÿÿ ÿÿ
2 sen ÿ
when D ( D 2t < ÿ )
( ) b tens comp ÿ = 0.95
T and Y connections
Limit state:
yielding of the main member
2 0.2
ÿ=n P sen
2 F t 3.1ÿ 15.6y+ ÿ ÿ Q f
(F.2.11.2-2)
ÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿ = 0.90
F-141

Design resistance of armor type connections between circular PTEs
cross connection
Limit state: plasticization of the main member.
2 ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ5.7
Qÿÿ1
P sen Fÿ t=ny f 0.81 (F.2.11.2-3)
bÿ
ÿ = 0.90
K connections with gap or overlap
Limit state: plasticization of the main member.
ÿ D ÿ
( Pn it ) ÿ =+ ÿ 2 F t 2.0 11.33 b comp

ÿ QQ (F.2.11.2-4)
compression branch and
D gf
ÿ ÿ
(n
P sen ÿ =ÿ
) ( P it
(F.2.11.2-5) ramal )
na compression
live branch
ÿ = 0.90
FUNCTIONS
= for connection to a live surface on the PTE.
Q f1.0
=ÿ +
1.0 0.3 1 U ( ) for connection to a compression surface in the PTE (F.2.11.1-5)
PinM in
IN = + ,
where Pu and Mu are obtained on the side of the joint that has the
OF SF
gc c
least compressive stress Pu and (F.2.11.1-6)

Mu refer to the forces in the main member.
ÿ ÿ
ÿ 1.2
0.024 c
ÿ
0.2
1
Q
g
=c + (F.2.11.2-6)
ÿ 0.5g ÿ ÿ
ÿ
exp ÿ 1.33 1 +
ÿ t ÿ ÿ
x
(nota: vehicle exp
( )= )
F-142
Table F.2.11.2-1 A
Table F.2.11.2-1 application limits
Joint eccentricity: ÿÿÿ 0.55 and D 0.25 for connections in K
branch angle: ÿ ÿ 30
Chord wall slenderness ratio: D t 50 ÿ for T -connections ,

in Y , and in K
D t 40 ÿ for cross connections
Slenderness ratio of the branch wall: D tbb ÿ 50 for live branches D bt 0.05Eÿ F yb for compression branches
b
width ratio 0.2 DD 1.0b ÿ teeconnections ÿ ,

in Y , cross and K with overlap
1.0 bÿ ÿ 0.4 D D for K -connections with separation.
Separation: gt ÿt + b comp b tens
for K connections with separation
Overlap: 25% orÿ100%

in
ÿ for K -connections with overlap
Branch thickness: tt ÿ b overlapping branch for branches in K -connections with overlap
b overlapping branch
Material resistance: ÿ MPa
Fy and F
Mr360
Ductility: FF yu and FF 0.8 ÿ (ASTM A500 Gr. C material is acceptable) yb ub
F.2.11.2.3 — Rectangular PTEs — The design resistance of PTE to PTE connections in reinforcements that are within the
limits of table F.2.11.2-2A shall be taken as the lesser of the applicable limit states. which are presented in table F.2.11.2-2.
Table F.2.11.2-2
Design resistance of armor type connections between rectangular PTEs
Connection type Design resistance of the connection to axial load Limit state:
plasticization of the wall, when ÿ ÿ 0.85
4 ÿ
2 2h
P sen Fÿ=
t ny + ÿQf (F.2.11.2-7)
tee connections , in Y and in cross 1
ÿ ( ) ÿÿ
ÿb
1
ÿ ÿ ÿÿ
ÿ = 1.00
Limit state: shear yield (punching), when ÿ ) or B t 10 < (F.2.11.2-8)

0.85 < ÿ ÿ ÿ 1( 1
Pnsen 0.6F
ÿ= tB 2 2 and h+ b eop
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ ÿ ÿ = 0.95
Limit state: local yield of the side walls of the main member when ÿ
= 1.0
P senÿ=2F t 5k l+ [ ] (F.2.11.2-9)
n yb
ÿ = 1.00
Limit state: local wrinkling of the side walls of the main member,
when ÿ = 1.0 and the branch is stressed by compression, for T or Y
connections
2
ÿÿ 3 (lb )
Pnsen 1.6t
ÿ= 1 +ÿÿÿ (F.2.11.2-10)
EF yf
Q
ÿ H 3t
ÿÿÿ
ÿ = 0.75
F-143

Design resistance of armor type connections between rectangular PTEs
Limit state: local wrinkling of the side walls of the main member, when ÿ =
1.0 and the branch is stressed by compression, for cross connections
Case that requires verification of the shear limit state in the side walls of the main
3
ÿ ÿ 48t
member:
Pnit ÿ=ÿÿÿÿÿÿ EF yf
Q (F.2.11.2-11)
H 3t
ÿ
ÿ = 0.90
Limit state: local creep of the branch or branches due to an uneven load
distribution, when ÿ > 0.85
P nF =
t 2H
+ÿ 2b
ÿ ybÿ b b eoi
4t b (F.2.11.2-12)
ÿ ÿ ÿ = 0.95
10 Fÿ t ÿ
b_
= ÿ
and
BB
b
ÿ
b
(F.2.11.2-13)
Bt F tÿ
ÿ yb b ÿÿÿ
Limit state: shear on the side walls of the main member, for cross
connections with ÿ < 90 where a separation projection is generated (see figure).
Determine P sin nÿ according to F.2.7.5
Limit state: plasticization of the wall of the main member, for all ÿ . ÿ Q ÿ ÿ =
0.90
t 9.8 b c2
Pnsen Fÿ= ÿ
eff
0.5
f
(F.2.11.2-14)
and ÿ
Separated K- fittings
Limit state: shear yield (punching), when BB 2t b
< ÿ This verification is not required for branches in PTE
square P sen 0.6F tB

ÿ=2 ÿ+ÿ+ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ Q (F.2.11.2-15)
n and eop ÿ f
= 0.95
Limit state: shear on the side walls of the main member in the zone of
separation.
Determine P sin nÿ according to F.2.7.5
This verification is not required for branches in square PTE Limit state:
local yielding of the branch or branches due to uneven load distribution. This
verification is not required for branches in square PTE or when B t 15 ÿ
P nF t 2H B b 4t
ÿ = ++ ÿ yb b
ÿ (F.2.11.2-16)
b b eoi b
ÿ ÿ ÿ = 0.95
10 Fÿ t ÿ
b
eoi
= and
ÿ
BB
b
ÿ
b
(F.2.11.2-13)
Bt F t
ÿÿÿ yb b ÿÿ
F-144
Limit state: local yield of the branch or branches due to a

uneven distribution of the load.
ÿ = 0.95
K -connections with overlap When 25% or 50% ÿ < :
in
ÿ Oin ÿ
P = Ft ( 2H 4tÿ++bb ) eoi
bi bi (F.2.11.2-17)
n, branch that overlaps y bi bi eov
ÿÿ
50 ÿÿ
When ÿ < 50% or 80%

in
P
n, branch that overlaps
=F t 2H
ÿ++
ybi bi
ÿ ÿ 4t bb with a with a eoi eov ÿ ÿ (F.2.11.2-18)
When 80% or
ÿ <100%
in
P
n, branch that overlaps
= F t 2Hÿ4t
++Bÿbÿeov ÿ ÿ (F.2.11.2-19)
ybi bi with a with a with a
10 Fÿ t ÿ
b eoi
=
and
ÿ
BB with a
ÿ
with a
(F.2.11. 2-20)
Bt F t ybi bi
ÿÿÿ ÿÿ
10 F t ÿ
ybj bj
ÿ
b eov
= ÿ
BB with a
ÿ
with a
(F.2.11.2-21)
B bjt bjFt
ybi bi ÿÿÿ ÿÿ
Note that the directions of the forces can be reversed; “i” and “j” The subscript i refers to the branch that overlaps.
determine the identification of the members The subscript j refers to the overlapping branch
ÿ OF ÿ
= P bj ybj
P
n, branch that overlaps n, branch that overlaps OF
ÿ (F.2.11.2-22)
ÿÿÿ bi ybi ÿÿ
FUNCTIONS
= for a connection to a live surface on the PTE
Q f1.0
IN
=ÿ1.3
ÿ for
0.4a 1.0
connection to a compression surface on the member
b
main, for tee connections in Y and in cross
, (F.2.11-16)
=ÿIn
ÿ for
1.3a0.4 1.0
connection to a compression surface on the member
b eff
main, for K -connections with separation (F.2.11.2-23)
PinM in
IN = + ,
where Pu and Mu are obtained on the side of the joint that has the largest
OF SF
gc c
compressive stress Pu (F.2.11.1-6)
and Mu refer to the forces in the main member. ÿ () () ÿ= + ÿ
5ÿbb
ÿ =bb + db
BH + 4B
ÿ
eff ÿÿ (F.2.11.2-24)
compression branch live branch ÿ
eop
(F.2.11.2-25)
c
F-145
Table F.2.11.2-2 A
Joint eccentricity: ÿÿ ÿ 0.55 and H 0.25 for connections in K .

Slenderness ratio of the main member wall:
B t and H t 35 ÿ for connections in K with separation, in T , in Y and cross.
Slenderness ratio of the branch wall:
B t 30 ÿ for overlapping K connections .
H t 35 ÿ for overlapping K connections . bb and

Bt
H t 35 ÿ forb the
b live
branch. ÿ 1.25 EF for the
compressionMrbranch in connections in K with separation, in T , in and in
cruz.
ÿ 1.1 EF for the compression branch in K connections with overlap.
Mr
Width Ratio: BB ÿ andconnections

HB 0.25 for in K with overlap, in T in Y and cross.
b b ,
Aspect Ratio: ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ 0.5 H B 2.0 y 0.5 H B 2.0

bb
Overlap: ÿ ÿ 100% for overlapping K -connections

25% OR in
Branch Width Ratio: BB 0.75 with a

bj
ÿ for overlapping K connections where the subscript i refers to the stud that
overlaps, and the subscript j refers to the overlapped wall.
Branch thickness ratio: tt 1.0 ÿ bi bj that overlaps,
the and for overlapping K connections, where the subscript i refers to the branch
subscript j refers to the overlapping branch.
ÿ MPa
Material strength: Fy y F 360 y FF 0.8Mrÿ
Ductility: FF yu (ASTM A500
C Gr.
material is acceptable) yb ub
Additional Limitations for Separated K -Connections
Bb Hb c
Width ratio: y ÿ +0.1
B B 50
ÿ ÿeff0.35
( ) ÿÿ
ÿ
Separation ratio: ÿ = g B 0.51 1 e
Separation: ÿgt t +b compression branch b tension branch
Leg size: the smaller Bb , but need not be taken less than 0.63 (the larger Bb ) if both legs are square.
Note: The maximum separation will be controlled by the limit of e H . If the gap is large, it should be analyzed as two wye connections .
F.2.11.3 — PTE TO PTE MOMENT CONNECTIONS — PTE to PTE moment connections are defined as those connections that
consist of one or two branches that are directly welded to a continuous main member that passes through the connection, being the
member or the branches requested by bending moments.
A connection will be classified:
(a) As a T connection when there is a branch and it is perpendicular to the main member, and as a Y connection when there
is a branch but it is not perpendicular to the main member. (b) As a cross connection when there is a
branch on each of the two opposite sides of the member
principal.
For the purposes of numeral F.2.11, the axes of the branch or branches and the main member must be in a common plane.
Ag = gross (total) cross-sectional area of the member, mm2

B = total width of the main member in rectangular PTE, measured at 90 degrees to the plane of the
connection, mm
F-146
Bb = total width of the branch in rectangular PTE, measured at 90 degrees with respect to the plane of the
connection, mm
D = external diameter of the main member in circular PTE, mm = external
Db diameter of the branch in circular PTE, mm = design
Fc resistance per unit area, = Fy , MPa
My = specified minimum yield stress of the main member in PTE, MPa
Fyb = specified minimum yield stress of branch at PTE, MPa = ultimate strength of
It was member at PTE, MPa
H = depth of the main member in rectangular PTE, measured in the plane of the connection, mm
Hb = cant of the branch in rectangular PTE, measured in the plane of the connection, mm
Zb = plastic section modulus of the branch with respect to the applicable bending axis, mm3 = design
t thickness of the wall of the main member in PTE, mm = design thickness of
bt the wall of the branch in PTE, mm = ratio of widths; ratio of
ÿ branch diameter to main member diameter = circular DD PTE; ratio of overall branch width to main memberb for
width = rectangular BB . b for PTE
c = slenderness ratio of the main member wall; ratio between half diameter and wall thickness = D 2t for
circular PTE; ratio between half width and wall thickness = B 2t for rectangular PTE.
the
= load length parameter, applicable only to rectangular PTE; ratio between the contact length of the branch with the
main member in the plane of the connection and the width of the main member where ÿ
= l bB , l bH sen = b
i = acute angle between branch and main member (degrees)
F.2.11.3.2 — Circular PTEs — The design resistance of moment connections that are within the limits of table F.2.11.3-1A
shall be taken as the lesser of the values calculated for the applicable limit states that they are presented in table F.2.11.3-1.
Table F.2.11.3-1
Design resistance of moment connections between circular PTEs
Connection type Design resistance at time of connection

Branches requested by bending in the plane, in Limit state: yielding of the main member
connections in T, in Y , and in cross 2 0.5
5.39F
n tÿ=
DQÿÿM
= 0.90
sen and
bf (F.2.11.3-1)
Limit state: creep by shear (piercing), when

DD 2tÿ
b <
)
2 ( 3sen
ÿ + ÿÿ 1
M n0.6F
yb 2 tD
=
ÿÿÿÿÿ (F.2.11.3-2)
4sen
ÿ = 0.95
F-147

Design resistance of moment connections between circular PTEs
Connection type Design resistance at moment of connection Limit state: yielding

Branches requested by bending out of plane, in T, of main member 3.0
Y , and cross connections 2 ÿÿÿÿQÿ
M sen F ÿt D
= n yb ÿ 1ÿ 0.81
ÿ ÿ = 0.90 f (F.2.11.3-3)
Limit state: shear yield (punching) when (

DD <2tÿ b
2 ) sin
ÿ + ÿÿ 3
M 0.6F
= tD ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ(F.2.11.3-4)
ÿ=
n yb 2
4sen
0.95
For T, Y , and cross connections , with the branch or branches stressed by a combination of axial load, in-plane bending,
and out-of-plane bending: ÿ ÿ
PPMMMM
in ÿ ÿn ÿ+ 1.0
ÿ ÿ ÿ n ip ÿÿ+ ÿ ÿ
(F.2.11.3-5)
u ip
ÿÿ ÿ
ÿÿ you up n up
ÿ
Pn ÿ = design resistance obtained from table F.2.11.2-1

ÿ Mn i ÿ p = design resistance for in-plane bending Mn op ÿ ÿ = design
resistance for out-of-plane bending.

=
Q f1.0 for connection to a live surface in the PTE.
=ÿ +
1.0 0.3U 1 U ( ) for connection to a compression surface on the main member (F.2.11.1-5)
PinM in
IN = + (F.2.11.1-6)
OF SF
gc c
where = Pu and Mu refer to the forces in the main member.
Table F.2.11.3-1 A
- Ramal angle: ÿ ÿ 30
- Slenderness ratio of the main member wall: D t 50 ÿ for T and Y connections
D t 40 ÿ for cross connections.
- Slenderness ratio of the branch wall: D t 50 ÿ
bb
D t 0.05Eÿ F b yb
b
- Ratio of widths: 0.2 D D 1.0 < ÿ

b
ÿ MPa
- Resistance of the material: Fy and F 360
Mr
Ductility : FFyu ÿ y FF 0.8 (ASTM A500 Gr. C material is acceptable) yb ub
F.2.11.3.3 — Rectangular PTEs — The design resistance of the moment connections that are within the limits of table F.2.11.3-2A shall be
taken as the lesser of the applicable limit states presented in Table F.2.11.3-2.
F-148
Table F.2.11.3-2
Design resistance of moment connections between rectangular PTEs
Type of Design resistance at the time of connection.

Limit state: plasticization of the wall of the main
connection Branch(es) requested by bending in the plane, for T -connections
and in cross. member, when ÿ ÿ 0.85
ÿ 1 2 = ++ the
ÿ
M FtHÿnyb
( ÿ ÿ2 1 ÿ (F.2.11.3-7)
f
2 1 ÿÿ ÿÿQ )
ÿÿ n
ÿ = 1.00
Limit state: local yield of the side wall, when ÿ > 0.85
* 2
M 0.5F
= t H 5t ( + (F.2.11.3-8)
)
n yb
ÿ = 1.00
Limit state: local creep of the branch or branches, due to an

uneven load distribution, when ÿ > 0.85
ÿ b
MFZÿ1BHT
ÿ yp
= ÿÿ ÿÿ
eoi
ÿ ÿ (F.2.11.3-9) ÿÿ
n b B bbb
ÿÿ b
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ = 0.95
Branch(es) stressed by bending out of plane, for tee and cross Limit state: plasticization of the wall of the main
connections. member when ÿ ÿ 0.85
0.5H 1 +ÿ ÿ b 2BB 1 ( +ÿ ÿ)
2 ÿ) b
M Ft = ÿÿ + ÿ
f (F.2.11.3-10)
( 1 ÿb
() 1 ÿÿ ÿQÿ )
( ÿ = 1.00
Limit state:
local yield of the side wall, when
ÿ > 0.85
*
MF t B=ÿ+
t H 5t(F.2.11.3-11)
b( the ) )
( ÿ = 1.00
Limit state: local creep of the branch or branches due to uneven load
distribution, when ÿ > 0.85
ÿ ÿb ÿ
2
MFZ 0.5 1
n eoi ÿ = ÿÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
Bt ÿ ÿ (F.2.11.3-12 )
yb b bb
B
ÿÿ b ÿ ÿÿ
ÿ = 0.95
Limit state: distortional failure of the main member, for tee

connections and unbalanced cross connections
M 2F t H t BHtÿ B H = ++ n yb (
ÿ ÿ ) ÿ (F.2.11.3-13)
ÿ = 1.00
F-149

Design resistance of moment connections between rectangular PTEs
For tee and cross connections , with branch(es) stressed by a combination of axial load, in-plane bending, and out-of-plane bending: ÿ
ÿ ÿ+ ÿ ÿ ÿ
ÿ PinP M Mn M M 1.0unipip ÿÿ+ you up n up
ÿ ÿ (F.2.11.3-14)
ÿ ÿÿ Phi
ÿÿ ÿ ÿ
= design resistance obtained from table F.2.11.2-2

Pn f
Mn ip ÿ ÿ
= design resistance for bending in the plane (see above)
opMn
ÿÿ
= design strength for out-of-plane bending (see above)
FUNCTIONS
Q f1.0
= for connection to a tension surface on the main member
In
ÿ 1.0
1.3 0.4 =ÿ for connection to a compression surface on the main member (F.2.11.1-16) ÿ
PinM in
IN = + (F.2.11.1-6)
OFgcSF
c
where Pu and Mu refer to the forces in the main member.

*
FF =
y y for tee connections
= 0.8F for cross connections.

and
10 Fÿ yt ÿ
b eoi = ÿ
BB
b ÿ b (F.2.11.2-13)
Bt F t yb b
ÿ
ÿÿÿ ÿ
Table F.2.11.3-2 A
Slenderness of the wall of the main member B t and H t 35 ÿ
Slenderness of the branch wall ÿB bt by H t 35 b b
AND
ÿ 1.25
F
Mr
Width ratio: BB 0.25 ÿ
b
Aspect Ratio: 2.0 ÿÿ ÿ 0.5 H B y 0.5 H

ÿ B 2.0 b b
ÿ MPa
Material resistance: Fy and F 360 Mr
Ductility: FF yu andub
FF 0.8 (note:
ÿ the ASTM A500 Gr. C material is acceptable) yb
F.2.11.4 — BRANCH WELDS — When designing the welds to the branches, due consideration shall be given to the condition of non-
uniformity in load transfer along the weld line, due to differences in stiffnesses. of the walls of the PTE in connections from PTE to
PTE and of transverse plates to PTE, This requirement must be satisfied by calculating, as presented below, the design resistance of
the connection welds of the branches and comparing it with the resistance required:
=
RFntInw we (F.2.11.4-1)
M FS nw=ip
n ip
ÿ
(F.2.11.4-2)
M nw
FS n
onon
= ÿ
(F.2.11.4-3)
To consider interaction effects, see equation F.2.11.3-14.
For fillet welds: ÿ = 0.75
F-150
For partial penetration groove welds: ÿ = 0.80
where:
Fnw = nominal resistance per unit area (see F.2.10) without increasing resistance for load direction considerations, MPa.
Sip = effective elastic section modulus of welds for in-plane bending (see table F.2.11.4-1),
mm3
Sop = effective elastic section modulus of welds for out-of-plane bending (see table
F.2.11.4-1), mm3
he = total effective length of groove and fillet welds to rectangular PTEs for calculation purposes
of the resistance of the weld, mm
wt = smallest value of the effective throat of the weld around the branch or plate, mm
Table F.2.11.4-1
Welding resistance in armor type connections between rectangular PTEs
Connection type Solder resistance at the connection

Tee and cross connections with cross plate under axial load on the plate
Effective welding properties ÿ

ÿ 10 F ÿ
yt
ÿ
I 2 =ÿ ÿ ÿ B 2B (F.2.11.4-4)
ÿ ÿ pp
ÿ
Bt F t
It is
ÿÿ
ÿÿ oops ÿ
where:
I = total effective length of the weld for welds on both sides
It is
of the cross plate
tee connections , in Y and in cross subjected to axial load or

moment in the branch
Effective welding properties

2h b
I = + 2beoi (F.2.11.4-5)
i
It is
its
tH
wbÿÿ ÿÿ
2
H
b
=
+(F.2.11.4-6) tb
S
ip ÿÿ ÿÿ w eoi ÿ it
ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿ 3 sen
ÿÿ H tw2w ( t 3B b)( b
ÿ
)3
St Bw= ÿ+ÿÿ ÿÿ bb ÿon Bb
its 3 Bb
(F.2.11.4-7)
ÿ 10 F yt ÿ
b_ = BB
bbÿ (F.2.11.2-13)
ÿ ÿ Bt Ft
ÿ yb b ÿÿÿ
When ÿ > 0.85 or ÿ > 50 , b 2 eoi must not be greater than

2t
F-151

Weld resistance in armor type connections between rectangular PTEs
Connections in K with separation requested by axial load in the branch
Effective welding properties

When ÿ ÿ 50 :
2H( 1.2t
bb
ÿ
)
I It is
= +ÿ 2 (B 1.2t
bb
) (F.2.11.4-8)
its i
When ÿ ÿ 60 :
2H( 1.2t
bb
ÿ
)
I It is
= +ÿ 2 (B 1.2t
bb
) (F.2.11.4-9)
ÿ it
when 50 60 <ÿ< :
Determine I using linear interpolation.
It is
Effective weld properties for the overlapping leg (all dimensions refer
to the overlapping leg, i )
When ÿ < 25% or 50% :
in
I =
and, overlapping branch
ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿ
K connections with overlap requested 2o ÿÿ AWAKE

ÿÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿ + 100 H
in in in
ÿÿ
1 ÿ with a with a ÿÿ)
++bb
eoi
eov
by axial load in the branch 50 100 sen its ÿ +ÿ j
ÿ ÿÿ ÿ ii (
i
ÿÿÿ ÿ ÿ
(F.2.11.4 -10)
When 50% orÿ <

80%
in
I =
and, overlapping branch
ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿ
ÿ OHin Oh
ÿÿ would ÿ in
H with a
21 ÿ ÿ
ÿ
ÿ ÿ
++beoi
b eov
ÿ
ÿÿ 100
ÿÿ its ÿ ÿ i + ÿ 100 ÿ its ( ÿ +ÿ ij
ÿÿ ÿ) ÿ ÿ
(F.2.11.4-11)
10 Fÿ yt
ÿ
b_
= ÿ
BB
bi biÿ (F.2.11.2-20)
Bt F t ÿ
ÿ y bi bi ÿÿÿ
10 F t ÿ
ybj bj
ÿ
b eov = BB
bi biÿ (F.2.11.2-21)
B t Ft
bj bj ybi bi ÿÿÿ ÿÿÿ
When BB 0.85 > bi b O ÿ > 50 i , b 2 eoi shall not be

greater than 2t , and when BB 0.85 bj > O
with a
ÿÿ ÿÿ > 50
j )i b eov
2 2t
(180 ,
shall not be greater than bj
The subscript i refers to the branch that overlaps

The subscript j refers to the overlapping branch.
F-152

Weld resistance in armor type connections between rectangular PTEs

Note that the direction of the forces shown can be reversed; the marks
“i” and “j” determine the identification of the element. Effective weld properties for the lap leg (all dimensions refer to
the lap leg, j)
2h
l = b
+ 2b
It is
eoj
(F.2.11.4-13)
it ÿ
10 Fÿt ÿ
b = and
BB
eos
ÿ ÿ
ÿ
(F.2.11.4-14)
Bt F t ÿ ÿ bj bj
ÿ ybj bj ÿ
When BB 0.85 > bj O ÿ > 50 : j
l 2 H 1.2t bj bj ÿ
) its j ÿ
It is
=(
effective welding
When a lap K -connection has been designed in accordance with Table F.2.11.2.2 and the components of the branch forces acting in a direction
perpendicular to the main member are 80% balanced (i.e. when the components perpendicular to the face of the main member do not differ by more
than 20%), the weld “hidden” under the lapping leg may be omitted if the other welds to the lapping leg are sufficient to develop the full capacity of this
leg.
When the welds are sufficient to develop the full capacity of the branch or plate, the verifications required by Table F.2.11.4.1 for said welds may be
omitted.
The approach used in this clause to decrease the size of welds assumes the use of a constant weld size around the entire perimeter of the branch in
PTE, including all “non-effective” areas, except where omitting the “hidden” weld is permitted. ” under the overlapping branch. Particular attention should
be paid to connections between PTEs of equal or approximately equal widths combining partial penetration groove welds along mating edges with fillet
welds that will generally be used across the face of the member. major.
F.2.12 — DESIGN FOR SERVICE LIMIT STATES

This numeral establishes the design requirements for serviceability limit states.
F.2.12.1 — General Provisions F.2.12.2 —

Countershaft F.2.12.3 —
Deflections F.2.12.4 — Drift
F.2.12.5 — Vibration
F.2.12.6 — Wind Induced
Movement F.2.12. 7 — Expansion and Contraction
F.2.12.8 — Slip at Connections
F.2.12.1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS — The service conditions guarantee that, under normal use, the functionality, appearance, ease of maintenance
and durability of a building are preserved, as well as the comfort of its occupants. The limit values of the structural response to ensure functionality (for
example, maximum deflections, accelerations) will be adopted taking into account the function for which the structure is intended. The service conditions
will be evaluated using the appropriate load combinations for the identified serviceability limit states.
F-153
F.2.12.2 — COUNTER SHAFT — Where the use of a counter shaft is foreseen to achieve appropriate positioning and
location conditions for the structure, its magnitude, direction and location must be specified in the structural plans.
Beams and trusses detailed without a camber being specified shall be fabricated such that any camber that results after
erection, caused by the rolling process or shop assembly, is upward.
In general, trusses with a span of 25 meters or more will be given a camber that approximately counteracts the deflection
due to the dead load. Overhead cranes with a span of 23 meters or more will be given a camber that approximately
compensates for the deflection caused by the dead load plus half the deflection caused by the live load.
F.2.12.3 — DEFLECTIONS —Deflections that occur in structural members and systems under the applicable service load
combinations shall not impair the functionality of the structure.
Conditions to be considered include leveling of floors, alignment of structural members, integrity of building finishes, and
other factors that affect the normal use and operation of the structure. For members of composite construction, additional
deflections due to shrinkage and expansion of the concrete must be considered.
F.2.12.4 — DRIFT — The drift of a structure shall be evaluated under service loads to ensure the functionality of the
structure, including the integrity of interior partitions and exterior cladding. The calculated drift under load combinations for
resistance shall not cause collision with adjacent structures nor exceed the limit values specified by this Regulation for
such drifts.
F.2.12.5 — VIBRATION — Due consideration shall be given to the effects of vibration on occupant comfort and the
functionality of the structure. Vibration sources to be considered include loads from foot traffic, vibrating machinery, and
others identified for the structure.
F.2.12.6 — MOVEMENT INDUCED BY WIND — The effect of movement induced by wind in a building must be considered
insofar as it may affect the comfort of its occupants.
F.2.12.7 — EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION — The effects of thermal expansion and contraction in a building shall be
considered. Damage to building cladding can allow water penetration and lead to corrosion.
F.2.12.8 — SLIP IN CONNECTIONS — The effects of slip in bolted connections will be considered in the design whenever
such slip may cause deformations that impair the functionality of the structure. Where appropriate, the connection shall be
designed to prevent slippage. See F.2.10.3.8 and F.2.10.3.9 for the design of slip-critical connections.
For more information on the design of slip-critical connections, see the Research Council on Structural Connections
(RCSC) "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
F.2.13 — MANUFACTURING, ASSEMBLY AND QUALITY CONTROL
This numeral presents the requirements that must be met for the shop drawings, manufacturing, shop painting, assembly
and quality control.
F.2.13.1 — Workshop and Assembly

Drawings F.2.13.2 —
Manufacturing F.2.13.3 —
Workshop Painting F.2.13.4 — Assembly
F-154
F.2.13.1 — WORKSHOP AND ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS — Before manufacturing a structure, workshop drawings must
be prepared that provide all the information necessary for the manufacture of each of the components, including the
location, type, and dimensions of welds and studs. Likewise, the assembly plans will be prepared prior to the assembly
and must provide the necessary information for the assembly of the structure. Shop drawings and erection drawings shall
clearly distinguish between shop and field welds and bolts and clearly identify high strength bolted connections that must
be slip critical or prestressed. The workshop and assembly plans must be executed taking into account agility and economy
in manufacturing and assembly.
F.2.13.2 — MANUFACTURING
F.2.13.2.1 — Camber, Curvature, and Straightness Generation — Local application of heat or mechanical
means to generate or correct camber, curvature, and straightness is permitted. The temperature in the heated
areas, as measured by approved methods, shall not exceed 593ºC for A514/A514M and A852/A852M steels or
649ºC for other steels.
F.2.13.2.2 — Fusion Cut — Fusion cut edges shall meet the requirements of AWS D1.1, Sections 5.15.1.2,
5.15.4.3, and 5.15.4.4, except that free fusion cut edges that are not to be subject to fatigue shall be free from
round bottom scours more than 5mm deep, and from any sharp V-notches.
Undercuts greater than 5mm deep and indentations remaining after cutting should be ground or repaired by
welding.
Incoming corners should have a curved transition. The radius of this transition need not be greater than that
required for the connection fit. The surface that results when two free flame cuts meet at one point is not
considered a curved transition. The use of a discontinuous entering corner is permitted when the materials to
either side of it are connected to a joint that prevents deformation and associated stress concentrations.
A recessed corner with a radius of 9.5 mm is suitable for static loads. For parts that require a snug fit, the use of
a discontinuous entering corner is considered acceptable if the parts connect close to the corner and on both
sides of the corner. The slots that are cut in structural tubular profiles (PTE) to insert plates can be executed with
their semicircular ends, or with rounded corners. Right angle ends are acceptable as long as the edge of the plate
is welded to the PTE.
Beam strippers and welding access holes must comply with the geometric requirements of numeral F.2.10.1.6.
When used on profiles to be galvanized, beam strippers and weld access holes should be ground. For profiles
with a fin thickness not exceeding 51 mm, the fusion cut surfaces in beam shears shall not have a surface
roughness value greater than 50 µm as defined in ASME B46.1. For stripping and welding access holes in ASTM
A6/A6M hot rolled profiles with a fin thickness greater than 51 mm, and in welded framed profiles with a material
thickness greater than 51 mm, in which the curved part is cut by fusion, a preheating temperature of not less than
66 ºC will be applied before cutting. The surfaces of thermally cut access holes in ASTM A6/A6M hot rolled
sections with a fin thickness greater than 51 mm, and in reinforced sections with a material thickness greater than
51 mm, shall be polished.
F.2.13.2.3 — Edge Planing — Planing or grinding of sheared or fusion cut edges on plates or profiles is not
required unless specifically required in project documents or provided for in edge preparation stipulated for the
welder.
F.2.13.2.4 — Welded Construction — The welding technique, workmanship, appearance, and quality of the
weld, as well as the methods to be used in correcting nonconforming work, shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1.
except according to the modifications noted in numeral F.2.10.2.
F.2.13.2.5 — Bolted Construction — Bolted member parts shall be well pinned or bolted and rigidly attached
during assembly.
The use of assembly pins in the holes during assembly shall not distort the metal or enlarge the holes. Poor
alignment of the perforations will be cause for rejection.
F-155
Bolt holes shall comply with the provisions of RCSC Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490
Bolts, Section 3.3, except that fusion-cut holes shall be permitted provided the surface roughness profile does not
exceed 25 µm, such as defined in ASME B46.1. Grooves deeper than 1.6mm are not acceptable. Perforations
executed with a water jet are also allowed.
The use of filler plates with slots, fully inserted, with a total thickness of no more than 6 mm is allowed in splices,
without requiring the design of the connection to modify the calculated resistance according to the type of
perforations. The orientation of such filler plates is independent of the direction of load application.
The use of high-strength bolts will comply with the requirements of the RCSC Specifications for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, except for the modifications noted in numeral F.2.10.3.
F.2.13.2.6 — Compression Joints — In compression joints whose bearing capacity depends totally or partially
on crush contact, the contact surfaces of the individually fabricated pieces shall be prepared by planing, saw
cutting, or other appropriate means.
F.2.13.2.7 — Dimensional Tolerances — Dimensional tolerances will be in accordance with the Standard
Practice Code for Metallic Structures, Colombian Technical Standard ICONTEC.
F.2.13.2.8 — Column Base Finish — Column bases and base plates shall be finished in accordance with the
(a) Steel base plates with a thickness less than or equal to 51 mm may be used without machining as
long as satisfactory contact is obtained at the support. Steel base plates with a thickness greater than
51 mm but not more than 102 mm may be straightened by means of presses or, when these are not
available, by grinding the bearing surfaces (except as specified in subparagraphs 2 and 3 of this
numeral), to obtain a satisfactory contact in the support. Contact surfaces on steel base plates thicker
than 102 mm must be ground (except as specified in subparagraphs 2 and 3 of this section).
(b) It is not necessary to grind the bottom surfaces of base plates or column bases when mortar is used
to obtain full contact surface on footings.
(c) It is not necessary to grind the top surfaces of the base plates when full penetration groove welds are
provided between the columns and the base plates.
F.2.13.2.9 — Anchor Bolt Holes — Fusion cutting of anchor bolt holes is permitted in accordance with the
provisions of F.2.13.2.2.
F.2.13.2.10 — Drainage Holes — When there is a risk of water accumulating inside PTE or box members, both
during construction and in service, members shall be sealed, provided with a drainage hole. at the base, or
protected by other appropriate means.
F.2.13.2.11 — Requirements for Galvanized Members — Members and parts to be galvanized shall be
designed, detailed, and fabricated to ensure flow and drainage in both surface preparation and zinc immersion
baths, as well as to prevent pressure buildup in hermetic parts.
See the American Galvanizing Association document “Design of Products to be Hot-Dip Galvanized After
Fabrication” and ASTM A123, A153, A384 and A780 for useful information on the design and detailing of
galvanized members. See numeral F.2.13.2.2 for the requirements for stripping members that are going to be
galvanized.
F-156
F.2.13.3 — SHOP PAINTING
F.2.13.3.1 — General Requirements — Surface preparation and workshop painting will be in accordance with
the provisions of the Standard Practice Code for Metallic Structures, Colombian Technical Standard ICONTEC.
Shop paint application is not required unless specified in project documents.
F.2.13.3.2 — Inaccessible Surfaces — With the exception of contact surfaces, surfaces that are inaccessible
after shop assembly shall be previously cleaned and painted when required by the design documents.
F.2.13.3.3 — Contact Surfaces — In crush-type connections, the application of paint on the contact surfaces is
allowed. For slip-critical connections, contact surface requirements shall be in accordance with RCSC Specifications
for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, Section 3.2.2 (b).
F.2.13.3.4 — Machined Finished Surfaces — Machined finished surfaces shall be protected by a corrosion-
inhibiting coating that can be removed prior to assembly, or that has characteristics that make removal unnecessary.
F.2.13.3.5 — Surfaces Adjacent to Field Welds — Unless otherwise specified in the design documents, areas
within 50 mm of any field weld shall be free of any material that may prevent proper welding execution or produce
unacceptable fumes during the process.
F.2.13.4 — ASSEMBLY
F.2.13.4.1 — Alignment of Column Bases — Column bases shall be level and at the correct elevation and in full
contact with concrete or masonry surfaces as specified in the Code of Standard Practices for Metal Structures ,
Colombian Technical Standard ICONTEC.
F.2.13.4.2 — Stability and Connections — The steel structure of the buildings must be erected plumb and with
the required alignments within the limits defined by the Code of Standard Practices for Metallic Structures,
Colombian Technical Standard ICONTEC. As erection progresses, steps must be taken to enable the structure to
withstand dead, erection, and other loads expected during the erection period. Temporary bracing must be placed,
in accordance with the requirements of the aforementioned code, whenever they are necessary to resist all the
loads to which the structure may be subjected, including the equipment and loads associated with its operation.
Such bracing should be left in place for as long as necessary to ensure the safety of the structure.
F.2.13.4.3 — Alignment — The final tightening of the bolts will not be applied, nor will the definitive welds be
executed until the areas of the structure included within the area of influence of the respective connection have
been properly aligned.
F.2.13.4.4 — Adjustment of compression joints in columns and base plates — A lack of adjustment in the
contact zone will be accepted as long as the separation does not exceed 1.6 mm, regardless of the type of splice
used (bolted or with partial penetration groove weld). If the gap exceeds 1.6mm, but is less than 6.4mm, and if
proper investigation shows that there is insufficient contact surface, the gap will be filled with steel filler plates of
constant thickness. The filling plates may be made of common steel, regardless of the quality of the main material.
F.2.13.4.5 — Field Welds — Surfaces at and adjacent to joints to be field welded shall be adequately prepared to
ensure weld quality. This preparation shall include surface treatment necessary to correct any damage or
contamination that may have occurred after fabrication.
F-157
Field welds on elements embedded in concrete must be executed in such a way as to avoid excessive thermal
expansion of said embedded elements, which could cause cracking or cracking of the concrete or induce
excessive stress in the anchors.
F.2.13.4.6 — Field Painting — Field painting, touch-up painting, and structural cleaning shall be performed in
accordance with accepted practices, which shall be explicitly stated in the design documents.
F.2.14 — QUALITY CONTROL AND TECHNICAL SUPERVISION
This numeral presents the minimum requirements for quality control, technical supervision and inspection by non-
destructive testing for steel structures and steel members of composite construction members for buildings and other
structures.
F.2.14.1 — Scope
F.2.14.2 — Manufacturer and Assembler Quality Control Program F.2.14.3
— Manufacturer and Assembler Documents F.2.14.4
— Personnel in charge of Inspection and Tests F.2.14.5 — Minimum
Requirements for Inspection of Structural Steel Buildings F.2.14.6 — Minimum
Requirements for Inspection of Composite Construction F.2.14.7 — Certified
Fabricators and Assemblers F.2.14.8 — Materials
and Nonconforming Labor
Quality control and technical supervision for reinforcement, materials and concrete pouring for composite construction
members are not included in this section. Quality control and technical supervision for surface preparation and coatings
are also not included.
F.2.14.1 — SCOPE — Within the scope of numeral F.2.14, quality control will be the responsibility of the manufacturer
and the assembler, while technical supervision will be the responsibility of others when required. Non-destructive tests
will be carried out by the firm responsible for technical supervision, except as permitted in section F.2.14.7.
The quality control and technical supervision requirements of F.2.14 are considered adequate and effective for most steel
structures, and their application is recommended. When the use of a quality assurance plan is required, this section
presents the minimum requirements that are considered effective to provide satisfactory results in the construction of
steel structures. In some cases, additional inspections may be advisable. Additionally, when the manufacturer's or
assembler's quality control program has demonstrated its capacity to execute some of the tasks that said plan has
assigned to the technical supervisor, a modification of the same may be considered, subject to the approval of the
structural designer.
Under the scope of numeral F.2.14, the producers of materials according to the standards cited in numeral F.2.1.3, nor
the manufacturers of metal panels are not considered as manufacturers or assemblers.
F.2.14.2 — MANUFACTURER AND ASSEMBLER QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM — The manufacturer and
assembler shall establish and maintain quality control procedures and perform inspections to ensure that their work is
performed in accordance with Chapter F.2 of this Regulations and with the project documents.
The materials identification procedures must comply with the requirements of the Standard Practice Code for Steel
Structures, Colombian Technical Standard ICONTEC, and must be monitored by the manufacturer's quality control
inspector.
The manufacturer's quality control inspector shall inspect at least the following items, as applicable:
(a) Shop welds, use of high-strength bolts, and detailed in accordance with F.2.14.5. (b) Surfaces cut and
finished in the shop, in accordance with numeral F.2.13.2.
F-158
(c) Heating in the workshop to straighten, countershaft or bend, in accordance with numeral F.2.13.2.1. (d) Tolerances for workshop
manufacturing, in accordance with the Code of Standard Practices for Steel Structures, Colombian Technical Standard ICONTEC.
The assembler's quality control inspector must inspect at least the following points, as applicable:
(a) Field welds, use of high-strength bolts, and detailed in accordance with F.2.14.5. (b) Location and installation of metal boards and headed
spigot connectors in accordance with the
numeral F.2.14.6.
(c) Surfaces cut in the field, in accordance with numeral F.2.13.2.2. (d) Heating in the workshop
to straighten, countershaft or bend, in accordance with numeral F.2.13.2.1. (e) Tolerances for field assembly, in accordance with the Code
of Standard Practices for Steel Structures, Colombian Technical Standard ICONTEC.
F.2.14.3 — MANUFACTURER AND ASSEMBLER DOCUMENTS
F.2.14.3.1 — Submission of documents — Before starting the respective activities, the manufacturer or erector will send the documents
listed below to the structural designer or his delegate, in accordance with the Code of Standard Practices for Steel Structures , Colombian
Technical Standard ICONTEC:
(a) Shop drawings, except when these have been supplied by others. (b) Assembly plans, except
when these have been supplied by others.
F.2.14.3.2 — Availability of documents — The following documents shall be kept available in electronic or printed format for review by the
structural designer or his delegate, prior to fabrication or erection activities, as applicable:
(a) For principal structural steel members, copies of the test reports of the
materials in accordance with numeral F.2.1.3.1.
(b) For forgings and castings, copies of test reports for casting materials.
according to numeral F.2.1.3.2.
(c) For connectors, copies of the producer's certificates in accordance with numeral F.2.1.3.3. (d) For metal panel connectors,
copies of product specifications or catalogs published by the manufacturer. The specifications shall include the description
of the product, limitations of use and installation recommendations. (e) For anchor bolts and threaded rods, copies of
the test reports for the materials of
according to numeral F.2.1.3.4.

(f) For welding consumables, copies of the producer's certificates in accordance with the
numeral F.2.1.3.5.
(g) For headed spigot connectors, copies of the manufacturer's certificates in accordance
with numeral F.2.1.3.6. (h) For
filler metals and soldering fluxes, copies of data sheets
product specifications or catalogs published by the manufacturer. The specifications shall include the description of
the product, limitations of use, typical or recommended welding parameters, and storage and exposure
conditions, including the use of ovens when applicable. (i) Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS). (j) Procedure
Qualification Records (PQR) for
procedures not included among those prequalified by the AWS D1.1/D1.1M
standard, or by the AWS D1.3/D1.3M standard, as applicable.
(k) Welders Qualification Records (WPQR) and Continuity Records. (l) Written quality control manual of
the manufacturer or assembler, as applicable, that
must include at least:
(i) Material control procedures
(ii) Inspection procedures
(iii) Treatment of nonconformities
(m) Qualification of the quality control inspectors of the manufacturer or the assembler, as applicable.
applicable.
F-159
F.2.14.4 — PERSONNEL IN CHARGE OF INSPECTION AND NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING
F.2.14.4.1 — Qualification of quality control inspectors — Welding quality control inspection personnel shall be
qualified in accordance with the manufacturer's or assembler's quality control program, as applicable, and according to
one of the following requirements:
(a) As defined in AWS B5.1, Standard for the Qualification of Inspectors of

welding, the
(b) According to the provisions of the AWS D1.1/D1.1M standard, article 6.1.4,
or (c) That is qualified by the Colombian Association of Welding and Non-Destructive Testing,
ACOSEND as Inspector of Welded Constructions Level I
Quality control inspection personnel for bolting shall be qualified based on documented training and experience in the
inspection of bolted structural connections.
F.2.14.4.2 — Qualification of technical supervision inspectors — Welding technical supervision inspection

personnel shall be qualified in accordance with the documented practice of the technical supervision firm, and in
accordance with one of the following: requirements:
(a) As defined in AWS B5.1, Standard for the Qualification of Inspectors of

welding, the
(b) According to the provisions of the AWS D1.1/D1.1M standard, article 6.1.4,
or (c) That is qualified by the Colombian Association of Welding and Non-Destructive Testing,
ACOSEND, as Level II Welded Construction Inspector
Technical supervision inspection personnel for bolts shall be qualified based on documented training and experience in
the inspection of bolted structural connections.
F.2.14.4.3 — Qualification of personnel for non-destructive testing — The personnel in charge of non-destructive
testing, other than visual inspection, must be qualified in accordance with the documented practice of the firm to which
they belong, a practice that shall meet or exceed the criteria of AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Steel Welding Code,
Article 6.14.6, in addition to one of the following requirements:
(a) Recommended Practice for the Qualification and Certification of Personnel for Testing No
Testing Standards, SNT-TC-1A, of the American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT), or (b)
Standard for the Qualification and Certification of Personnel for Nondestructive Testing, ASNT
CP-189, o
(c) That it is qualified by the Colombian Association of Welding and Non-Destructive Testing,
ACOSEND, as Non-Destructive Testing Inspector, level II
F.2.14.5 — MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR THE INSPECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
F.2.14.5.1 — Quality control — Quality control activities shall be performed by the manufacturer's quality control
inspector or the assembler, as applicable, in accordance with numerals F.2.14.5.5, F.2.14 .5.7 and F.2.14.5.8.
The activities presented in tables F.2.14.5-1 to F.2.14.5-3 and in tables F.2.14.5.4 to F.2.14.5-6 under the heading
Quality Control are those inspections that You must run the quality control inspector to ensure that the work is done
according to the project documents.
For quality control inspection, applicable project documents will be shop drawings and erection drawings, and any
applicable referenced specifications, codes, and standards.
F.2.14.5.2 — Technical supervision — The inspection by the technical supervisor of the manufactured elements must
be carried out at the manufacturer's plant. The technical supervision inspector shall schedule his work in such a way
that interruptions to the manufacturer's work are minimized.
The inspection of the technical supervisor for the assembled steel structure will be executed at the project site.
The technical supervision inspector will schedule his work in such a way that interruptions to the assembler's work are
minimized.
F-160
The technical supervision inspector will review the test reports and certificates of the materials according to the
list in numeral F.2.14.3.2 and will verify their adjustment to the project documents.
The inspection activities of the technical supervisor will be in charge of the technical supervision inspector, in
accordance with numerals F.2.14.5.5, F.2.14.5.7 and F.2.14.5.8.
The activities presented in tables F.2.14.5-1 to F.2.14.5-3 and in tables F.2.14.5-4 to F.2.14.5-6 under the heading
Technical Supervision are those inspections to be executed by the technical supervisor to verify that the work is
carried out in accordance with the project documents.
Concurrently with the sending of its reports to the auditor or the owner, the technical supervision firm must send
the manufacturer and the assembler:
• Inspection reports • Non-

destructive test reports
F.2.14.5.3 — Coordination of inspection activities — When an activity involves both the quality control inspector
and the technical supervision inspector, both parties are allowed to coordinate so that only one of them performs
such activity. The approval of the inspector or the structural designer is required when it is the quality control
inspector who performs the inspection tasks and the technical supervision inspector relies on them.
F.2.14.5.4 — Welding Inspection — Observation of welding operations and visual inspection of welds in progress
or completed shall be the basic method of confirming that materials, procedures, and workmanship are in
accordance with contract documents. project. For structural steel, all provisions of the AWS D1.1/D1.1M standard
apply.
Section F.2.10.2 of this Regulation contains exceptions to the provisions of the AWS D1.1/ D1.1M standard.
As a minimum, weld inspection activities shall be performed in accordance with Tables F.2.14.5-1 through
F.2.14.5-3. In these tables, the inspection tasks will be applied as follows:
O – Observe randomly. Operations should not be delayed pending these inspections.
P – Practice these tasks on each welded joint or member
Table F.2.14.5-1
Pre-Weld Inspection Activities
Control of Supervision
Inspection activities prior to welding Quality technique
Availability of Welding Procedures (WPS) P P
Availability of producer certificates for welding consumables P P
material identification O O
Welders identification system (traceability) O O
Adjustment of groove welds (Including geometry)
- Preparation of the meeting
- Dimensions (alignment, root opening, root face, chamfer)
O O
- Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces)
- Spotting (quality and location of welding points)
- Type and adjustment of the back plates
Access hole configuration and finishing O O
Adjustment of fillet welds
- Dimensions (alignment, separation at the root)
O O
- Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces)
- Spotting (quality and location of welding points)
Review of welding equipment O -
F-161
Table F.2.14.5-2
Inspection Activities During Welding
Inspection Activities During Welding
Quality technique
Employment of qualified welders O O

Control and handling of welding consumables
- Packing O O
-
exposure control
Control to avoid welding over cracked welding points O O
Environmental conditions
- Wind speed below the limit O O
-
Precipitation and temperature
Compliance with Welding Procedures (WPS)
- Selection of parameters in the welding equipment
- forward speed
- Use of selected welding materials
O O
- Type and rate of gas flow
- Preheating
- Temperature maintenance between passes (min/max)
- Proper position
welding techniques
- Cleaning between passes and final cleaning
O O
- Adjustment to the dimensions of the profile in each pass
- Compliance with quality requirements in each pass
Table F.2.14.5-3
Inspection Activities on the Completed Weld
Inspection Activities on the Finished Weld
Quality technique
Cleaning O O
Size, length and location of welds P P
Visual acceptance criteria cracks - fusion
-
weld -
base metal weld profiles - weld size -
-
undercut - porosity P P
bow strikes P P
Welds in the “k zone” (when the welds of veneer plates, continuity plates or stiffeners involve the “k zone”, the
web in this zone must be visually inspected up to a distance of 75 mm from the weld to detect the presence of
P P
cracks)
Removal of backup plates and weld points, when required P P

repair activities P P
Documentation of board or member acceptance or rejection P P
F.2.14.5.5 — Non-destructive tests for welded joints
F.2.14.5.5.1 — Procedure — When required, ultrasonic, magnetic particle, ink penetrant, and
radiographic tests will be performed by technical supervision and in accordance with the AWS D1.1/
D1.1M standard. The acceptance criteria will be those defined in this same standard for statically loaded
structures, except when the design plans or project specifications indicate otherwise.
F.2.14.5.5.2 — Non-destructive tests for full penetration grooved joints — For structures of use
group IV according to A.2.5.1 and Seismic Resistance Systems of any use group, ultrasonic tests must
be performed in all full penetration grooved, butt, tee , or corner joints in materials 3/8" (7.9 mm) or
thicker and
F-162
that are stressed by tension loads applied transversely. For joints with the same characteristics in
structures of use groups II and III that are not part of the Seismic Resistance System, said ultrasonic tests
will only be carried out on 10% of the joints. These tests will form part of the technical supervision.
Non-destructive testing is not required for full penetration grooved joints in use group I structures that are
not part of the Seismic Resistance System.
These tests are also not required for full penetration grooved joints in materials less than 7.9 mm thick,
regardless of the use category of the structure.
F.2.14.5.5.3 — Non-destructive tests for access holes — The surfaces cut by fusion in access holes
must be inspected for magnetic particles or penetrating inks, when the thickness of the fin is greater than
51 mm in rolled profiles, or the thickness of the web is greater than 51 mm in reinforced profiles. No crack
will be acceptable, regardless of its size or location. These tests will form part of the technical supervision.
See numeral F.2.13.2.2.
F.2.14.5.5.4 — Welded joints subject to fatigue — When required according to table F.2.17-1 of
numeral F.2.17, those welded joints for which ultrasonic or radiographic tests are required shall be
inspected as part of technical supervision. It is not accepted to apply a reduction to the percentage of
joints that are tested by ultrasound.
F.2.14.5.5.5 — Reduction in Percentage of Joints Ultrasonically Tested — When approved by the

structural designer, a reduction in the percentage of joints ultrasonically tested is permitted. When the
basic percentage is 100%, it is allowed to reduce to 25% for each welder, as long as the percentage of
rejections, calculated based on the number of welds in which unacceptable defects are found and the
number of welds executed, be less than 5% for that welder. For this purpose, a sample of at least 40
complete welds must be taken. To evaluate the percentage of rejects in continuous welds of more than 1
m in length, with an effective throat of 25 mm or less, each increment of 300 mm or fraction shall be
considered as one weld. To evaluate the percentage of rejects in continuous welds of more than 1 m in
length, with an effective throat of more than 25 mm, each increment of 150 mm or fraction shall be
considered as one weld.
F.2.14.5.5.6 — Increase in the percentage of joints that are tested by ultrasound — For structures in
use groups II and III, where the basic percentage of ultrasonic tests is 10%, the basic percentage of tests
for a welder will be increased to 100% whenever the percentage of rejects, calculated based on the
number of welds in which unacceptable defects are found and the number of welds executed, is greater
than 5% for said welder. For this purpose, a sample of at least 20 complete welds must have been taken
before applying this increase. When, after a sample of at least 40 complete welds, the rejection rate has
dropped to 5% or less, rework may be performed on a 10% joint tested basis. To evaluate the percentage
of rejects in continuous welds of more than 1 m in length, with an effective throat of 25 mm or less, each
increment of 300 mm or fraction shall be considered as one weld. To evaluate the percentage of rejects
in continuous welds of more than 1 m in length, with an effective throat of more than 25 mm, each
increment of 150 mm or fraction shall be considered as one weld.
F.2.14.5.5.7 — Documentation — All non-destructive tests performed must be documented. For shop
fabrication, the non-destructive testing report must identify the inspected welds by part number and
location on the part. For field work, the non-destructive testing report must identify the welds inspected by
their location in the structure, the number of the part and the location on it.
When a weld is rejected based on a non-destructive test, the respective record must indicate the location
of the defect and the reason for the rejection.
F.2.14.5.6 — Inspection of high-strength bolts — Observation of the bolt supply and installation process will be
the basic method to confirm that the materials, procedures, and workmanship
F-163
works incorporated into the construction comply with the project documents and with the “Specifications for
structural joints using high-strength bolts” of the Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC).
(a) For bolts installed with tight torque, the pre-installation verification tests and the following of the
installation procedures indicated in tables F.2.14.5-4 and F.2.14.5-5 respectively, do not apply. Also,
quality control inspectors and technical supervision are not required to be present during bolting into
tight-fitting joints.
(b) For pre-tensioned joints and slip-critical joints where the installer is using the permanently marked
twist-nut method, direct tension indicators, or tension-controlled bolting, the installation procedures
will be followed as indicated. in table F.2.14.5-5. Quality control inspectors and technical supervision
are not required when these methods are used for bolt installation. (c) For pre-stressed joints and slip-
critical joints where the installer is using calibrated wrenches or the turning-nut method
without permanent markings, the installation procedures will be followed as indicated in Table F.2.14. 5-5.
When these methods are used for the installation of bolts, monitoring by quality control inspectors
and technical supervision is required during the execution of the works.
The inspection of the supply and installation of the bolts must include at least what is indicated in tables F.2.14.5-4
to F.2.14.5-6. In these tables, the inspection tasks will be applied as follows:
P – Practice these tasks on each bolted joint.
Table F.2.14.5-4
Inspection Activities Prior to Bolt Installation
Control of Quality assurement

Inspection activities prior to bolt installation Quality
Availability of manufacturer's certificates for bolts, nuts and washers O P

Marking of bolts according to ASTM standards O O
Adequate selection of the bolts for the joint detail (grade, type, adequate length when the threads must be
O O
excluded from the cutting plane)
Proper Selection of Installation Procedure for Joint Detail O O
Review of connection elements, including adequate preparation of contact surfaces, when required
O O
Pre-installation calibration and verification tests, by installation personnel, for nut and bolt assemblies
and the methods to be used, observed and documented P O
Proper storage of bolts, nuts, washers and other components O O
Table F.2.14.5-5
Inspection Activities During Bolt Installation

Inspection Activities During Bolt Installation Quality
Bolt and nut assemblies in proper condition, installed in all bores and positioned as required
O O
Gasket brought to tight tightening condition before pretensioning O O
Restricting the rotation of the connector component to which no rotation is applied O O
Bolts pre-tensioned in accordance with an RCSC-approved method, progressively progressing from the stiffest
O O
point towards the free edges
F-164
Table F.2.14.5-6
Inspection Activities Post-Installation of Bolts

Inspection Activities Post-Installation of Bolts
Quality
Report of acceptance or rejection of bolted joints. P P
F.2.14.5.6 — Other Inspection Activities — The fabricator's quality control inspector shall inspect fabricated
steel for conformance to details shown on shop drawings, such as proper application of joint details on each
connection. The erector's quality inspector will inspect the assembled structure to verify compliance with the details
shown in the erection drawings, such as braces, stiffeners, location of members and connection details.
The technical supervision inspector must verify the proper installation of the anchor bolts and other embedded
elements on which the structural steel rests, so that they conform to the project documents. As a minimum, the
diameter, material, type and length of the anchor bolt or embed should be verified prior to concrete placement.
The technical supervision inspector must inspect the manufactured parts or the assembled structure, as the case
may be, to verify compliance with the details shown in the project documents, such as braces, stiffeners, location
of the members and details of the connections.
F.2.14.6 — MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR THE INSPECTION OF COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION — The inspection
of structural steel and sheet metal used in a composite construction must comply with the requirements established in this
section.
To weld spike-type steel connectors with a head or according to the SAE J429 Grade 2 bolt standard, the provisions of the
AWS D1.1/D1.1M “Structural Welding Code – Steel” standard shall apply.
For sheet metal welding, observation of welding operations and visual inspection of welds in progress and completed shall
be the basic method to confirm that materials, procedures, and workmanship are in accordance with project documents.
All applicable provisions of AWS D1.3/D1.3M “Structural Welding Code – Sheet” shall apply. The inspection of the welds
of the metallic board must include the previous verification of the welding consumables, the specifications of the welding
procedures and the qualification of the welders, the observation of the welds during their execution to confirm that the
installation is done according to with the manufacturer's recommendations, and a visual inspection once installation is
complete.
In table F.2.14.6-1, the inspection tasks will be applied as follows:

P – Practice these tasks on each board joint or connector.
For those quality control activities marked with an annotation "O" in this table, the quality control inspection will be
performed by the assembler's quality control inspector.
Table F.2.14.6-1
Inspection activities of steel elements in composite construction prior to concrete pouring
Inspection activities of steel elements prior to concrete pouring Control of Quality assurement
Quality
Placement and installation of the metal board P P
Placement and installation of connectors P P
Report of acceptance or rejection of steel elements P P
F.2.14.7 — NON-CONFORMING MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP — At any stage of the development of the works,
materials or labor that do not conform to the project documents may be identified and rejected. However, this provision
does not exonerate the owner or the inspector from their obligation to carry out inspections.
F-165
scheduled and sequential as jobs progress. The existence of such non-conforming materials or workmanship must be
reported to the manufacturer or assembler, as the case may be, immediately.
Correction of nonconforming conditions in materials or workmanship must be approved by the structural designer.
Concurrently with the sending of its reports to the auditor or the owner, the technical supervision firm must send the
manufacturer and the assembler:
• Reports of non-conformity •
Reports of repairs, replacements or acceptance of non-conforming items.
F.2.15 — DESIGN BASED ON AN INELASTIC ANALYSIS

This section deals with the design based on an inelastic analysis, considering the redistribution of forces and moments in
the members and connections that occurs when a localized creep occurs.

F.2.15.2 — Ductility Requirements
F.2.15.3 — Analysis Requirements
F.2.15.1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS — The design resistance of the structural system, its members and connections must
be equal to or greater than the required resistance determined from the inelastic analysis. The provisions of numeral F.2.15
are not applicable to a seismic design.
The inelastic analysis shall consider: (1) bending, shear, and axial load strains in members, and all other strains in
components and connections that contribute to displacements of the structure; (2) second order effects (including P ÿ ÿ and
P ÿ ÿ effects ); (3) geometric imperfections; (4) the reduction in stiffness resulting from inelastic behavior, including the
effects of residual stresses and partial yielding in the cross section; and (5) uncertainties in the stiffness and strength of the
system, members, and connections.
Strength limit states that can be identified by an inelastic analysis incorporating all of the above requirements are not subject
to the corresponding provisions of Chapter F.2 when such analysis provides a comparable or higher level of reliability.
Strength limits that cannot be detected by inelastic analysis shall be evaluated using the corresponding provisions of F.2.4,
F.2.5, F.2.6, F.2.7, F.2.8, F.2.9, F.2.10 and F. .2.11.
The connections must comply with the requirements of numeral F.2.2.3.5.
Members and connections subject to inelastic deformation must be verified to have adequate ductility, consistent with the
behavior expected of the structure. Redistribution of forces on the basis of a member or connection failing by fracture is not
permitted.
Any method based on inelastic analysis is permitted to be used to size members and connections to satisfy these general
requirements. This is the case for a design method based on an inelastic analysis that satisfies the strength requirements
above, the ductility requirements of F.2.15.2, and the analysis requirements of F.2.15.3.
F.2.15.2 — DUCTILITY REQUIREMENTS — The members and connections that have elements that can yield must be
dimensioned in such a way that in each of them the total inelastic deformation demand is less than or equal to the respective
inelastic deformation capacity. As an alternative to the explicit demonstration of this condition, the following requirements
must be satisfied for those members in which plastic hinges can be formed:
F.2.15.2.1 — Materials —Members in which plastic hinges are expected to occur shall have a specified minimum
yield stress of not more than 450 MPa.
F-166
F.2.15.2.2 — Cross Section — At a point in a member where a plastic hinge can be formed, the cross section shall be
doubly symmetric and none of its compression elements shall have a width-thickness ratio greater than ÿpd , where ÿpd pd
ÿ is equal to ÿp defined in Table F.2.2.4-1b with the following
modifications:
(a) For the width-thickness ratio (h tw ) in the web of I -section members , rectangular structural hollow sections
(STEs), and box sections stressed by combined flexure and compression:
(i) For PP 0.125

u cyÿ ÿ
AND ÿ 2.75P in
ÿ
ÿ= 3.76 pd ÿ 1ÿ (F.2.15.2-1)
F P
y ÿÿ cy ÿÿ
(ii) For PP 0.125

u cyf >
And ÿ P in ÿ AND
ÿ= 1.12 pd ÿÿ 2.33 ÿ 1.49

ÿ
(F.2.15.2-2)
F PF Phi
and cy ÿÿ and
where:
AND
= modulus of elasticity of steel = 200 000 MPa minimum
=
My specified yield stress for the type of steel used, MPa as defined in Section F.2.2.4.1,
=
h mm required compressive strength, N yield
=
Could
strength of member = F Ay g web
= N
Py thickness, mm coefficient of strength reduction ,
=
wt for bending = 0.90
=
ÿ c
(b) For the width-to-thickness ratio (b t) of box section and PTE flanges, flange cover plates, and diaphragm plates
between lines of bolts or welds:
ÿ = 0.94 EF pd y (F.2.15.2-3)
where:
b = as defined in section F.2.2.4.1, mm = as defined in
t section F.2.2.4.1, mm
(c) For the diameter-thickness ratio (D t) of circular PTEs in bending:
ÿ = 0.045EF pd (F.2.15.2-4)
and
where:
D = outer diameter of the circular PTE (mm)
F.2.15.2.3 — Unbraced Length — On a segment of a prismatic member containing plastic hinges, the unbraced length,
Lb , shall not be greater than Lpd , calculated as follows. For members stressed by bending only, or by bending and axial
tension, Lb shall be taken as the length between points braced against lateral displacement of the compression flange, or
between points braced to prevent torsion of the cross section. For members stressed by bending and axial compression, Lb
will be taken as the length between braced points both against lateral displacement in the direction of the minor axis and
against torsion of the cross section.
(a) For I -section members stressed by bending about the major axis:
F-167
'
ÿ ÿ ÿM E1 ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ
L
pd
= 0.12 0.076
ÿ
ÿ r
and
(F.2.15.2-5)
M F2
ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿ and
where:
the = radius of gyration about the y- axis , mm
(i) When the magnitude of the bending moment at any point along the length is not
braced is greater than M2 :
ÿ
MM1 1 = +2 (F.2.15.2-6a)
Otherwise:
(ii) When M MMmid

2 >( 1 2
)
M 2M
1
M M = mid
ÿ< 2 2 (F.2.15.2-6b)
(iii) Cuando 1000mid

2 <( 1 2
)
M M 1= 1 (F.2.15.2-6c)
where:
M1 = smallest end moment for the unbraced length, N mm M2 = largest end
moment for the unbraced length, N mm. Is taken
positive in all cases.
Mmid = moment at the midpoint of the unbraced length, N mm M1
ÿ
= effective moment at the end opposite M2 of the unbraced length, N mm
The moments M1 and Mmid are taken individually as positive when they cause compression on the
same flange as M2 and as negative otherwise.
(b) For solid rectangular bars, rectangular PTEs and box section beams requested by
bending about its major axis:
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ M E ÿ ÿ ÿ0.17
ÿ ÿ1 ÿ0.10 r ÿ ÿAND
L
pd
=ÿ
0.10 ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ MF F r
and and
(F.2.15.2-7)
ÿÿÿÿ 2y y
For all types of members requested by axial compression and containing plastic hinges, the lengths
without lateral bracing for the major and minor axes of the cross section must not exceed 4.71r EF
respectively. 4.71r EF and x and and and
In the following cases, a limit is not established for the value of Lpd in members that contain plastic
hinges:
• Members with a circular or rectangular cross section stressed only by bending or

by combined bending and tension.
• Limbs requested only by bending around their minor axis, or by a combination
tension and bending about its minor axis.
• Members requested only for tension.
F.2.15.2.4 — Axial Strength — To ensure adequate ductility in compression members containing plastic hinges, the
required resistance to axial compression load must be less than or equal to 0.75FA . yg
F-168
F.2.15.3 — ANALYSIS REQUIREMENTS — The structural analysis must satisfy the general requirements of F.2.15.1. It is allowed
to demonstrate compliance with these requirements through a second-order analysis that meets the requirements of this numeral.
As an exception, the use of a first-order inelastic or plastic analysis is permitted for continuous beams not stressed by axial
compression, in which case the requirements of F.2.15.3.2 and F.2.15.3.3 do not apply.
F.2.15.3.1 — Material Properties and Yield Criteria — The specified minimum yield stress, Fy , and the stiffness of all members
and connections shall be multiplied by a reduction factor equal to 0.90 for purposes of analysis, except as what is specified in numeral
F.2.15.3.3.
The influence of the axial load, the bending moment about the major axis and the bending moment about the minor axis must be
included in the calculation of the inelastic response.
The plastic resistance of the cross section of the member will be represented in the analysis either by an elastic – perfectly plastic
yield criterion, expressed in terms of the axial force, the bending moment about the major axis and the bending moment about the
minor axis, or through explicit modeling of the stress-strain response of the material as elastic – perfectly plastic.
F.2.15.3.2 — Geometric Imperfections — The analysis must include the effects of initial geometric imperfections. This shall be done
by explicitly modeling the imperfections as specified in F.2.3.2.2.1 or by applying equivalent dummy loads as specified in F.2.3.2.2.2.
F.2.15.3.3 — Effects of Residual Stresses and Partial Yield — The analysis must take into account the influence of residual
stresses and partial yielding. This must be done by explicitly modeling these effects in the analysis or by reducing the stiffness of all
components as specified in F.2.3.2.3.
When the provisions of numeral F.2.3.2.3 apply:
(a) Instead of reducing the stiffness by the factor of 0.90 specified in F.2.15.3.1, the elastic modulus E shall be multiplied by
a factor of 0.80 , as specified in F.2.3.2.3, and
(b) The elastic-perfectly plastic behavior criterion, expressed in terms of the axial force, the bending moment about the major
axis, and the bending moment about the minor axis, must satisfy the resistance limit of the cross section defined by the
equations F.2.8.1-1a and F.2.8.1-1b, taking ÿ = nP 0.9Py , ÿ
= =
c ÿ M 0.9M y bnpxM 0.9M py
b nx and
.
F.2.16 — IMPOSITION
This clause provides methods for determining whether a roof system has adequate stiffness and strength to prevent pitting failure.
F.2.16.1 — Simplified Method for embedment design.

F.2.16.2 — Complete Method for design by embedment.
F.2.16.1 — SIMPLIFIED METHOD FOR DESIGN BY POUNDING — The roof system will be considered stable for embedment and
will not require further revisions if the following two conditions are met:
C 0.9C 0.25 + sp ÿ (F.2.16.1-1)

4
dI 3940S ÿ (F.2.16.1-2)
where:
4
504L L
sp
C =
p
I
p
F-169
4
504SL S
C =
S
I S
Lp = spacing of the columns in the direction of the main beams (length of the members
main), m
LS = spacing of the columns in the direction perpendicular to the main beams (length of the
secondary members), m
S = spacing of secondary members, m = moment of
pI inertia of main members, mm4
I s
= moment of inertia of secondary members, mm4
Of = moment of inertia per meter of the metal deck that rests on the secondary members,
mm4 .
For trusses and lattice steel girders, the calculation of the moments of inertia pI e I to be used in
s
previous formulas must include the effects of the deformations in the web of the member.
When the moment of inertia is calculated based solely on the areas of the main members of the truss or the truss, the
reduction in the moment of inertia due to deformations in the web can be taken as a typical value of 15%. .
A metal deck will be considered as a secondary member when it is directly supported by the primary members.
F.2.16.2 — COMPLETE METHOD FOR POUND DESIGN — When a more accurate calculation of deck stiffness is
required, the provisions presented below may be used instead of the method in F.2.16.1.
The effort index is defined as:
ÿ 0.8F f ÿ ÿ ÿO
IN =ÿ
and
for main members F.2.16.2-1

p
fO
ÿ ÿ
p
and as: ÿ
0.8F f ÿÿÿ
IN s = ÿ
they
for secondary members F.2.16.2-2
fO
ÿ ÿ s
where:
= stress produced by the load combination (D R+ )
of D = nominal dead load R =
nominal load due to rainwater or hail, not including the contribution of ponding, MPa.
In a roof structure made up of main and secondary members, the combined stiffness will be adequate to prevent ponding
if:
• For the main member, the value of the flexibility constant, Cp , calculated according to the previous numeral, is
less than the corresponding upper limit obtained from figure F.2.16-1 from the stress index of the main
member, Up , and the coefficient of flexibility of the secondary members, Cs , and
• For the secondary member, the value of the flexibility constant, Cs , calculated according to the previous
numeral, is less than the corresponding upper limit obtained from figure F.2.16-2 from the stress index of the
secondary member, Us , and the coefficient of flexibility of the main members, Cp .
When the combined stiffness is not sufficient, the stiffness of the main beams, or the secondary beams, or both, must be
increased to satisfy the required conditions.
F-170
Index
Effort
Up
Upper limit of the coefficient of flexibility Cp
Figure F.2.16.2-1 - Upper limit of the flexibility coefficient for the main members.
stress
index
Us
Upper limit of the flexibility coefficient Cs
Figure F.2.16.2-2 — Upper bound of the flexibility coefficient for secondary members.
For a roof structure consisting of a series of equally spaced beams supported on walls, the stiffness will be evaluated considering the beams
as secondary members supported on an infinitely rigid main member. For this case, Figure F.2.16-2 is entered with the calculated stress
index, Us . The limit value of Cs is determined by the intersection of a horizontal line corresponding to the value of Us with the curve for C 0
= .
F-171
The pooling deflection due to the metal deck is usually a very small part of the total pooling deflection of the roof panel,
so it is usually sufficient to limit its moment of inertia (by 3940l mm4 / m, where l is the span . meter of width normal to its
4
span) to
For a roof structure consisting of metal decks supported by beams that in turn are supported by columns, the stiffness
will be evaluated based on Figure F.2.16-1 or F.2.16-2, taking Cs as the flexibility constant for 1 m width of the roof panel
(S 1.0 = ) .
F.2.17 — FATIGUE DESIGN

This section applies to members and connections subjected to a high number of load cycles, in the elastic range of
stresses, and with sufficient frequency and magnitude to initiate cracking and progressive failure at what is defined as the
fatigue limit state.
F.2.17.1 — General
F.2.17.2 — Calculation of Maximum Stresses and Allowable Stress Ranges
F.2.17.3 — Allowable Stress Range F.2.17.4
— Bolts and Threaded Parts F.2.17.5
— Special Requirements Manufacturing and Assembly
F.2.17.1 — GENERAL — This section applies to stresses calculated for service conditions. The maximum stress allowed
under service loads (not factored) is 0.66F .
the
The stress range is defined as the magnitude of the stress variation due to the application or removal of the service live
load. In the case of stress reversal, the stress range is calculated as the numerical sum of the maximum tensile and
compressive repeated stresses or the numerical sum of the maximum shear stresses in opposite directions at the point
of probable crack initiation.
In the case of full penetration groove welds, the maximum allowable stress range calculated using formula F.2.17.3-1
applies only to welds that have been inspected by radiography or ultrasound and whose quality meets the requirements
of the AWS D1 code. 1.
It is not required to evaluate fatigue resistance in the following cases:
(a) When the range of live load stresses is less than the threshold allowable stress range, FTH . See table
F.2.17-1.
(b) For members fabricated from shapes or sheets when the number of cycles of application of the live load
is less than 20,000.
(c) For members fabricated from structural hollow sections (STEs) in building-type structures subject to
wind loads.
The resistance to cyclic load determined in this numeral is applicable to structures exposed only to normal corrosive
environments, or with adequate corrosion protection systems, and subjected to temperatures that do not exceed 150ºC.
The structural designer shall provide full details of the connections, including weld sizes, or specify the expected number
of load cycles and the maximum ranges of moments, shears, and axial loads at the connections.
F.2.17.2 — CALCULATION OF MAXIMUM STRESSES AND STRESS RANGES — The calculated stresses will be
obtained based on an elastic analysis. These stresses will not be amplified by stress concentration factors associated
with geometric discontinuities.
For bolts and threaded bars subjected to axial tension forces, the calculated stresses must include leverage effects, if
any. In the case of axial loads combined with bending, the maximum values for each type of effort will be determined
taking into account the concurrent conditions of the applied loads.
F-172
For members of symmetrical cross section, bolts and welds shall be distributed symmetrically around the axis of the member, otherwise the range of
total stresses shall include stresses due to generated eccentricities.
For axially loaded angle members, where the center of gravity of the connecting welds is located between the line of center of gravity of the angle
cross section and the center of the connected flange, the effects can be ignored. of eccentricity. If the center of gravity of the connecting welds is
located outside this zone, the total stresses, including those due to joint eccentricity, must be considered in the calculation of the stress range.
F.2.17.3 — ALLOWABLE STRESS RANGE — The stress range under service loads must be less than or equal to the allowable stress range
calculated as follows:
(a) For stress categories A, B, B', C, D, E, and E', the allowable stress range, FSR , with
will be determined by the formula:
0.333
ÿ C 329 ÿ
= f
F
SR
ÿ F
TH
(F.2.17.3-1)
n
ÿÿ SR ÿÿ
where:
FSR = allowable stress range, MPa Cf = constant from
table F.2.17-1, for the category under consideration = number of load cycles during the
nSR
service life.
FTH = allowable stress range threshold, maximum stress range for which
admits an indefinite useful life. See table F.2.17-1, MPa
(b) For the stress category F formula: ,

The range of allowable stresses, FSR , will be determined by means of the
0.167
ÿ 4C x11x10 ÿ ÿ ÿ
F = f ÿ F
SR
ÿ
TH
(F.2.17.3-2)
n
SR ÿ
(c) For a plate stressed by tension loads, connected at its ends by cross, tee, or corner details, with full penetration groove welds, partial
penetration groove welds, fillet welds, or combinations thereof, being the welds transverse to the direction of stress, the range of
allowable stresses in the cross section of the plate requested by tension, on the edge line of the weld, will be determined as follows:
(i) Based on the fact that the crack starts from the edge of the weld in the tension plate, the allowable stress range, FSR , will be
determined with the formula F.2.17.3-3, for stress category C
, as follows:
0.333
ÿ 14.4x10 ÿ ÿ 11 ÿ
F = ÿ 68.9
SR
ÿ
(F.2.17.3-3)
n
SR ÿ
(ii) Based on the fact that the crack starts from the root of the weld in the tension plate, when partial penetration groove welds
are used, transverse to the direction of stress, with or without reinforcing or contour fillets, the allowable stress range,
FSR , on the cross section taken by the edge of the weld, will be calculated with the formula F.2.17.3-4, for the stress
category Cÿ ÿ ÿ
, as follows:
0.333
11
ÿ 14.4x10 ÿ
FSRR =
PJP
(F.2.17.3-4)
n
ÿ SR ÿ
F-173
where:
RPJP is the reduction factor for reinforced or unreinforced partial penetration groove welds, transverse
to the direction of stress, calculated as follows:
ÿ 1.12 1.01 2a t ÿ ÿ (
ÿ
)p + 1.24 w (t
p ÿ)
R = ÿ
ÿ 1.0
PJP 0.167
t
p ÿ
Si R 1 = , stress category C must be used . 2a = length of

PJP
the unwelded root face, measured in the direction of the plate thickness
to tension, mm
w = size of reinforcing or contour fillet, if any, in the direction of the tension plate thickness, mm
pt = thickness of the tension plate, mm
(iii) Based on crack initiation from the roots of a pair of transverse fillet welds on opposite sides of the tension
plate, the allowable stress range, FSR, over the cross section taken along the edge of the welds , will be
calculated with the formula F.2.17.3-5, for the category of efforts Cÿÿ
as follows: ,
0.333
11
ÿ 14.4x10 ÿ ÿ ÿ
FR
SR
=
IN ÿ (F.2.17.3-5)
n
SR ÿ
where:
RFIL is the reduction factor for joints where only one pair of transverse fillet welds is used.
ÿ 0.10 1.24+ w t (
ÿ)p
R = ÿ
ÿ 1.0
IN 0.167
t
ÿÿ
p ÿ
If R 1.0
IN
=stress
the category C must be used .
F.2.17.4 — BOLTS AND THREADED PARTS — The range of stresses for service loads will be limited by the range of allowable
stresses as follows:
(a) For connections with mechanical connectors, loaded in shear, the range of stresses under service loads in the connected
material must be less than or equal to the range of allowable stresses calculated with formula F.2.17.3-1, where Asr
and Asr must be obtained from section 2 of table F.2.17-1.
(b) For high-strength bolts, common bolts, and anchor bolts with rolled or cut threads, the range of tensile stresses over the
net area for tension due to the applied axial load and moment plus the effect of the action of lever, must be less than
or equal to the allowable stress range calculated with formula F.2.17.4-1. The factor Asr will be taken as 3.9 x 108 (as
for the stress category E'). The threshold stress range, Asr , will be taken as 48 MPa (as for stress category D).
0.333
11
ÿ 1.28x10 ÿ ÿ ÿ
F
SR
=
ÿ
ÿ 48.0 (F.2.17.4-1)
n
SR ÿ
The net area under stress is given by the following formula:

Pi
=
A dt 0.9382p 4( b
ÿ
)2
(F.2.17.4-2)
F-174
where:
p = thread pitch, mm =
db nominal bolt diameter, mm
For joints in which some material other than steel may be present between the members included in the grip, or
for non-stressed joints according to the requirements of Table F.2.10.3-1, it shall be assumed that all axial loads
and moments applied to the joint plus the effects of leverage will be exclusively taken care of by the bolts or
threaded rods.
For joints in which the gripping material is limited to steel, and which are stressed in accordance with the
requirements of Table F.2.10.3-1, an analysis of the relative stiffnesses of the connected parts and of the joints
is permitted. bolts to determine the range of tensile stresses in pretensioned bolts under axial loading, moment,
and prying effects associated with service live loads. Alternatively the range of stresses in the bolts can be
assumed to be equal to the stress which, over the net area in tension, would cause 20% of the absolute values
of the axial load and moment associated with all service loads, including live load. , dead load and other loads.
F.2.17.5- SPECIAL MANUFACTURING AND ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS - It is allowed to leave the longitudinal
support plates without removing them. Whenever used, these plates must be continuous. When flushing is required in
long joints, the longitudinal backing plates shall be joined with full penetration butt welds and the reinforcement shall be
polished prior to joint assembly.
In transversal joints subjected to tension where backing plates are used, they must be removed, search for the root and
weld on the backing.
In full penetration transverse tee and corner joints, a reinforcing fillet weld, 6mm or greater, shall be added at the reentrant
corners.
In flame cut edges that can be subjected to load cycles with ranges of tensile stresses, the surface roughness must be
less than 25 microns.
Recessing corners in cuts, ripping and welding access holes must have radii greater than or equal to 10 mm, obtained
by drilling or punching to a smaller diameter to be later reamed, or by using thermal cutting to form the cutting radius. If
the radiused portion is formed by thermal cutting, the cut surface should be polished to a bright metal surface.
For transverse butt joints in areas with significant tensile stresses, extension plates should be used so that the end of the
weld is outside the joint. These extension plates shall be removed and the end of the weld shall be finished flush with the
edge of the member. Containment plates will not be used at the ends.
See Section F.2.10.2.2.2 for requirements applicable to end returns in some fillet welds subjected to cyclic service loading.
Table F.2.17-1
Parameters for Fatigue Design
Effort Category Threshold Asr Potential crack

Description Constant A1
MPa initiation point
SECTION 1- MATERIAL IN AREAS AWAY FROM WELDING
1.1 Base metal, except steel resistant to
atmospheric corrosion without
painting, with a rolled finish or surface
cleaning. Flame cut edges with a Away from all
surface roughness value of 25 A 250 × 108 165 welds or structural
microns or less, but no recessed connections
corners.
F-175

Parameters for Fatigue Design

1.2 Steel base metal resistant to atmospheric
corrosion, unpainted, with a clean
surface finish. Flame cut edges with a
surface roughness value
O of 25 microns Away from all
or less, but no recessed corners. B 120 × 108 110 welds or structural
connections
1.3 Members with rhymed drilled perforations.

O
Entering corner members
with in cuts, cuts
On any external edge
and other geometric discontinuities, or on the perimeter
executed according to the requirements B 120 × 108 110
of the perforation.
of F.2.17.5, not including weld access
holes.
1.1 Rolled sections with weld access holes

meeting the requirements of Sections
F.2.10.1.6 and F.2.17.5. In the corner of the
weld access hole or in
Members with
drilled or reamed holes for attachment C 44 × 108 69 any small holes (may
of light bracing, where there is a small contain a bolt for
longitudinal component of force in the minor connections.
brace
SECTION 2 - MATERIAL CONNECTED IN MECHANICALLY CONNECTED JOINTS

2.1 Gross area of base material Lap
in joints connected with high-
strength bolts, for joints that meet Through the gross section
all the requirements applicable to B 120 × 108 110 close to the bore.
slip-critical connections.
2.2 Base metal in net section of high-

strength bolted joints designed for
bearing, but manufactured and
In the net section,
installed with all applicable B 120 × 108 110 starting at the sides of the
requirements for slip-critical
connections. perforation.
2.3 Base metal in net section of other

mechanically connected joints, not In the net section,
including eye bars and dowel plates. D 22 × 108 48 starting at the sides of the
perforation.
2.1 Base metal in the net section of eye In the net section,
bars or dowel plates. AND 11 × 108 31 starting at the sides of the
perforation.
F-176

Fatigue Design
Illustrative Examples
SECTION 1- MATERIAL IN AREAS AWAY FROM WELDING

1.1 and 1.2
1.3
1.4
View removing the
overlapping plate
SECTION 2 - MATERIAL CONNECTED IN MECHANICALLY CONNECTED JOINTS

2.1
View removing the
overlapping plate
Note: Figures apply to slip critical bolted connections.

2.2
View removing the
overlapping plate
Note: Figures apply to bearing-designed bolted connections, meeting the requirements for slip-critical connections.
2.3
Note: Figures apply to bolts, rivets, or other tight-torque mechanical connectors.

2.4
F-177

fatigue design
Effort Category Potential point of

Description Constant A1 Threshold Asr MPa
initiation of crack
SECTION 3- WELDED JOINTS BETWEEN COMPONENTS OF ASSEMBLED MEMBERS.
3.1 Base metal and weld metal in
members without accessories,
reinforced from plates or profiles
connected with continuous
longitudinal welds. In surface or internal
B 120 × 108 110 discontinuities in the weld,

These welds can be groove welds, away from the end of the weld.
full penetration, root seeking and
backing, or fillet welds.
3.2 Base metal and weld metal in

members without accessories,
reinforced from plates or profiles
connected with continuous In superficial or internal
longitudinal welds, these being full
discontinuities in the welds,
penetration groove welds, with
including the fixing
backing plate not removed, or B’ 61 × 108 83
welds of the
partial penetration groove welds .
backup plates.
3.3 Base metal and weld metal at the

end of longitudinal welds, over weld
the access holes From the end of the weld to
in members D 22 × 108 48 the web or fins.
armed that are spliced.

3.4 Base metal at segment ends of On material connected to the
longitudinal intermittent fillet welds. AND 11 × 108 31
beginning and end of any
weld segment.
3.5 Base metal at ends of partial-length

welded cover plates, narrower than
flange, with rectangular or reduced- On the fin over the
width ends, and with or without end edge of the end weld, or
transverse welds; and cover plates on the fin where the
wider than the fin with transverse longitudinal weld ends, or
welds at the ends. on the edge of the fin for wide
in cover plates.
Flange thickness ÿ 20 mm AND 11 × 108 31

Flange thickness > 20 mm 3.1 And` 3.9 × 108 18
Base metal at the ends of part-length
welded cover plates, wider than the At the edge of the fin at the
flange, without cross-end welds. AND' 3.9 × 108 18 end of the cover plate weld.
in
F-178

fatigue design
Effort Category Potential crack initiation

Description Constant A1 Threshold Asr MPa
point
SECTION 4—END CONNECTIONS WITH LONGITUDINAL FILLET WELDS 4.1 Base metal at the joint between axially loaded
members using longitudinal end welds.
Beginning at the end of any

weld termination and extending
Welds should be located on into the base metal.
either side of the axis of the

member in order to have
balanced stresses in the
welds. t 12 ÿ
mm t 12 > AND 11 × 108 31
mm AND' 3.9 × 108 18

fatigue design

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
F-179

fatigue design
3.6
SECTION 4- END CONNECTIONS WITH LONGITUDINAL FILLET WELDS

4.1

fatigue design
Description Effort Category Constant A1 Threshold Asr MPa Potential point of initiation of
crack SECTION 5.
WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO THE DIRECTION OF STRESS 5.1 Base metal and weld metal in, or adjacent to,
splices with full penetration groove welds,
rolled or reinforced profiles, with the
polished welds parallel to the
direction of stress. Weld quality
must be verified byinradiographic or
ultrasonic inspection in accordance
From internal discontinuities
with the requirements of AWS D1.1. in the weld metal or along
B 120 × 108 110
the face of the fusion.
5.2 Base metal and weld metal at, or

adjacent to, splices with full-
penetration groove welds, with
welds polished parallel to the
direction of stress, with transitions
From internal discontinuities
in width or thickness with a slope
not greater than 1:2.5 . Weld quality in the weld metal or along
shall be verified by radiographic or the face of the fusion or at
the beginning of the transition
ultrasonic inspection in accordance
with the requirements of sections when Cf
6.12 and 6.13 of AWS D1.1.
MPa
F 620
MPa
< y B 120 × 108 110
F 620
MPa
ÿ y B’ 61 × 108 83
F-180

fatigue design
Description Effort Category Constant A1 Threshold Asr MPa Potential point of crack
initiation
5.3 Metal base con F 620 y ÿ
MPa and adjacent weld metal

in, O splices with a,
full penetration groove welds, with
the welds polished parallel to the
direction of stress, at transitions in
width made with a radius of not less
than 600 mm with the point of From internal discontinuities
tangency at the end of the weld. in the weld metal or
grooved weld. Weld quality verified discontinuities
B 120 × 108 110
by radiographic or ultrasonic along the face of the
inspection in accordance with the fusion.
requirements of sections 6.12 and
6.13 of AWS D1.1.
has to to be
5.4 Base metal and weld metal at, or

adjacent to, the edge of splices and
T- or corner-joints, full penetration,
with or without transitions in
thickness, with a slope of not more
than 1:2.5 when not specified. From surface discontinuities
remove the weld override. at the weld toe extending into
the base metal or
,
C 44 × 108 69
along the fusion face.
Weld quality must be verified by

radiographic or ultrasonic inspection
in accordance with the requirements
of AWS D1.1.
5.5 Base metal and weld metal in end Starting from the
transverse connections in tension- geometric
loaded plates using butt, tee, or discontinuity at the edge of
corner joints with partial penetration, the weld and
fillet, or contour welds. FSR extending into the base
metal, or starting at the root
of the weld in
tension and extending
outward.
shall be the lesser of the stress
up and then out through
ranges for the edge or root crack. the weld.
Crack starting from the edge of the C 44 × 108 69

weld.
Crack starting from the root of the C’ Ec. F.2.17.3-4 not provided
weld
F-181

Fatigue Design
SECTION 5. WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO THE DIRECTION OF EFFORTS

5.1
5.2
5.3
Fy= 620 MPa

Cat.B’
5.4
Potential crack due to

bending tensile stresses
5.5
F-182

fatigue design
Description Effort Category Constant A1 Threshold Asr Potential crack initiation

MPa point
SECTION 5. WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO THE DIRECTION OF STRESS (cont.)

5.6 Base metal and weld metal in tension- Starting from the
stressed end transverse connections geometric
of platens, using a pair of fillet welds discontinuity at the edge
on opposite sides of the by of the weld and
platen. extending into the base
metal, or starting
at the root of the weld in
FSR will be the lesser of the stress tension and extending
ranges for the edge or root crack. over the
weld and then out of the
weld.
Crack starting from the edge of the weld. C 44 × 108 69
Crack starting from the root of the weld C” Ec. F.2.17.3-5 not provided
5.1 Base metal in tension-stressed plates From

and in beam flanges or webs, on the geometric
edge of transverse fillet welds
adjacent to welded transverse C 44 × 108 69
discontinuities to the edge
stiffeners. of of the fillet
and extending into the
base metal
SECTION 6- BASE METAL IN TRANSVERSE WELDED CONNECTIONS TO MEMBER

6.1 Base metal in details joined with full
penetration groove welds,
subjected to longitudinal loading
only, when the detail contains a Close to the point of
radius tangency of the radius
with the edge of the
member
R transition with a zero polished
finish on the weld.
R ÿ 600 mm B 120 × 108 110

600 mm > R ÿ 150 mm 150 C 44 × 108 69
mm > R ÿ 50 mm 50 mm > D 22 × 108 48
R AND 11 × 108 31

Fatigue Design

5.6
F-183

Fatigue Design

5.7
SECTION 6- BASE METAL IN TRANSVERSE WELDED CONNECTIONS TO MEMBER

6.1

fatigue design
Effort Category Threshold Asr Potential crack initiation point

MPa SECTION 6-
BASE METAL IN TRANSVERSE WELDED CONNECTIONS TO THE MEMBER (cont.)

6.2 Base metal in details of the same
thickness joined by full penetration
groove welds, subjected to transverse
loads with or without longitudinal loads
when the detail contains
a
a transition radius R
with a polished zero finish on the weld.
Weld quality must be verified by
radiographic or ultrasonic inspection
in accordance with the requirements
of AWS D1.1.
When removing the weld reinforcement:
R ÿ 600 mm B 120 × 108 110 Near the points of tangency of

600 mm > R ÿ 150 mm 150 C 44 × 108 69 the radius or in the weld or in the
mm > R ÿ 50 mm 50 mm > D 22 ×108 48 fusion face or in the member or in
the bonded element
R AND 11 × 108 31
When weld reinforcement is not removed:
R ÿ 600 mm C 44 × 108 69 At the edge of the weld, either along

600 mm > R ÿ 150 mm 150 C 44 × 108 69 the edge of the member or the
mm > R ÿ 50 mm 50 mm > D 22 × 108 48 bonded element
R AND 11 × 108 31
F-184

fatigue design
Effort Category Threshold Asr Potential crack initiation

MPa point
SECTION 6 - BASE METAL IN TRANSVERSE WELDED CONNECTIONS TO MEMBER (cont.)
6.3 Base metal in details of
different thickness joined by
full penetration groove welds
subjected to transverse
loads, with or without
longitudinal loads, when the
detail contains a radius of
R transition with a zero

polished finish on the weld.
The quality of the weld must
be verified by radiographic
or ultrasonic inspection
according to the requirements
of the AWS D1.1 standard.
with
When removing the weld reinforcement:
Over the edge of the
R > 50 mm D 22 × 108 48 weld along the edge of the

thinner material
R ÿ 50 mm AND 11 × 108 31 At the completion of

welding in small radii
When weld reinforcement is not AND 11 × 108 31 Over the edge of the
removed, for any radius: weld along the edge of the
thinner material
F-185

Fatigue Design

6.2
6.3
F-186

fatigue design
Effort Category Threshold Asr Potential crack initiation

MPa point

6.1 Base metal subjected to longitudinal stresses At the termination of the
in cross members, with or without weld or from the edge of
transverse stresses, joined by fillet welds the
or partial penetration groove welds parallel welding and
to the direction of stress, when the detail extending into the member
contains a
transition radius, R zero ,

with a
polished finish on welds.
R > 50 mm D 22 × 108 48
R ÿ 50 mm AND 11 × 108 31
SECTION 7- BASE METAL IN SHORT FITTINGS1
7.1 Base metal subjected to longitudinal load in

fittings joined by fillet welds parallel or
transverse to the direction of stress,
without transition radius, and with a detail
length in the direction of stress, a, and a On the member at the end
thickness of the fitting, normal to the of the weld
member surface, b:
a < 50 mm 50 C 44 × 108 69
mm ÿ a ÿ 12b o 100 mm, el que
D 22 × 108 48
be less
a 100 > mm
when b > 20 mm a > 12b
or 100 mm, whichever is AND 11 × 108 31
smaller
when b ÿ 20mm AND' 3.9 × 108 18
7.1 Base metal subjected to longitudinal stress, At the termination of the
in fittings joined by fillet welds or partial weld and extending
penetration groove welds, with or without into the member
transverse load on the fitting, when the
detail contains a transition radius R with a
polished zero finish on the weld :
R > 50 mm D 22 × 108 48
R ÿ 50 mm AND 11 × 108 31
1
"Accessory " is used here to define any detail of steel welded to a member which, by its mere presence and regardless of its load, causes discontinuities in the
flow of stresses in the member and therefore reduces its resistance to fatigue.
F-187

Fatigue Design
SECTION 6- BASE METAL IN TRANSVERSE WELDED CONNECTIONS TO MEMBER (cont.) 6.4
SECTION 7- BASE METAL IN SHORT FITTINGS

7.1
7.2
F-188

fatigue design

SECTION 8 - MISCELLANEOUS MEETINGS
8.1 Base metal spigot- in
Over the edge of the weld
type connectors joined by C 44 × 108 69 in the base metal
fillet or fusion welds.
8.2 Shear stress in the throat of

fillet welds, continuous or 150 × 1010
intermittent, longitudinal In the throat of the weld.
F 55
transverse.
Ec. F.2.17-2
O
8.3 Base metal plug or in At the end of the weld

groove welds. AND 11 × 108 31 in the base metal.
8.4 Shear stress in plug or groove 150 × 1010

F 55
on the contact surface.
welds.
Ec. F.2.17-2
8.5 High-strength prestressed
bolts, no
common bolts,
threaded anchor rods,
and hanger bars with
rolled cut threads. The
range of stresses in the At the root of the
area under O threads
G 3.9 × 108 48
tension due to live load and extending into the
plus leverage when area in tension
applicable should be taken.
sea
F-189

Fatigue Design
SECTION 8 - MISCELLANEOUS MEETINGS
8.1 Addition of detail in (b)
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
F.2.18 — DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS

This Chapter provides criteria for the design and evaluation of structural steel components and systems for fire conditions. Criteria are
prescribed to determine the design temperature, thermal expansion and degradation in the mechanical properties of materials at
elevated temperatures, which cause the progressive decrease in the resistance and rigidity of components and structural systems
subjected to elevated temperatures.
F.2.18.1 — General provisions

F.2.18.2 — Structural design for fire conditions by analytical methods F.2.18.3 — Design by
qualification tests
F.2.18.1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS
F-190
F.2.18.1.1 — Performance Objectives — Structural components of the building shall be designed such that they
maintain their function of carrying loads during the design fire, while meeting the other performance objectives required
for the use of the building.
Deformation criteria will be applied whenever the means that provide the fire resistance of the structure, or the design
criteria for fire barriers, depend on limiting the deformations of the supporting structure.
Within the enclosure where the fire originates, the forces and deformations associated with the design fire must not
create a breach in the horizontal or vertical compartmentation.
F.2.18.1.2 — Design by Analytical Methods — The analysis methods of F.2.18.2 are permitted to be used to
document the expected behavior of a steel structure subjected to design fire. The methods in said section are sufficient
evidence of compliance with the performance objectives established in F.2.18.1.1.
The structural design for fire conditions based on numeral F.2.18.2 must be executed in accordance with the provisions
of numeral F.2.2.3.3.
F.2.18.1.3 — Design by qualification tests — It is allowed to use the qualification test methods of section F.2.18.3 to
establish the fire resistance of a structure in accordance with the standards required by this Regulation.
F.2.18.1.4 — Required Strength and Load Combinations — The required strength of a structure and its members
shall be determined from the following combination of gravity loads:
[ 0.9 ó 1.2] D T 0.5L 0.2G ++ + (F.2.18-1)
where:
D = rated dead load
L = rated live load
G = rated hail load
T = nominal forces and deformations caused by the design fire defined in numeral
F.2.18.2.1
To the previous combination of loads, a lateral fictitious load must be added, N 0.002Y defined ini =numeral i ,
as if
F.2.3.2.2, where Ni is the lateral fictitious load applied to the structure at level i and Yi
is the gravitational load applied at level i according to the combination F.2.18-1. DL and G will be the nominal loads
,
specified in Title B of this Regulation.
F.2.18.2 — STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS BY ANALYTICAL METHODS — Members, components, and
general building structures are permitted to be designed for elevated temperatures in accordance with the requirements of this
section.
F.2.18.2.1 — Design Fire — A design fire shall be defined that represents the heating conditions for the structure.
These heating conditions must be derived from the combustible materials and the characteristics of the room where
the supposed fire occurs. The fire load must be based on the use defined in Title J of this Regulation. The heating
conditions will be specified either in terms of a heat flux or of the temperature in the upper layer of gas generated by
the fire. The variation of heating conditions with time throughout the fire shall be determined.
When the analytical methods of numeral F.2.18.2 are used to demonstrate the equivalence of alternative materials or
methods as allowed by this Regulation, the design fire shall be determined in accordance with ASTM E119.
F.2.18.2.1.1 — Concentrated Fire — When the rate of heat transfer from a fire is insufficient to cause ignition,
fire exposure shall be assumed.
F-191
concentrated. In such cases, the fuel composition, fuel distribution, and occupied floor area should be
used to determine the radiated heat flux to the structure from the flame and smoke plume generated.
F.2.18.2.1.2 — Post-ignition fires — When the rate of heat transfer from a fire is sufficient to cause
ignition, a post-ignition fire in the considered room shall be assumed. The determination of the fire
temperature-time curve should include the fire load, the natural or mechanical ventilation characteristics
in the space, the dimensions of the enclosure, and the thermal characteristics of the enclosure boundaries.
The duration of the fire in a particular area will be determined considering the total combustible mass, that
is, the available fire load in the enclosure. In the case of concentrated fires or fires after ignition, the
duration will be determined as the total mass of fuel divided by the rate of mass loss.
F.2.18.2.1.3 — Exterior Fires — Exposure of the exterior structure to projected flames through windows
and other wall openings as a result of a post-ignition fire in a room shall be considered, in conjunction with
the radiation generated by the interior fire through the openings. The profile and length of the flame
projection, together with the distance between the flame and the outer steel, shall be used to determine
the heat flux into the steel.
To model the characteristics of the fire within the enclosure, the method indicated in section F.2.18.2.1.2
shall be used.
F.2.18.2.1.4 — Active Protection Systems — When specifying the design fire, the effects of active fire
protection systems shall be considered.
When automatic smoke and heat vents are installed in rooms without sprinklers, the resulting smoke
temperature shall be determined by calculation.
F.2.18.2.2 — Temperatures in structural systems subjected to fire — The temperatures caused by the design
fire in the structural elements, components and structures in general must be determined by a heat transfer
analysis.
Table F.2.18.2-1
Steel properties at elevated temperatures
=
kE /E
Steel temperature
AND
(T)
= p(T) y p
k F /F = y(T) y y
k F /F k in = u(T) y
F /F
O
C = G /G
(T)
20 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00

93 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
204 0.90 0.80 1.00 1.00
316 0.78 0.58 1.00 1.00
399 0.70 0.42 1.00 1.00
427 0.67 0.40 0.94 0.94
538 0.49 0.29 0.66 0.66
649 0.22 0.13 0.35 0.35
760 0.11 0.06 0.16 0.16
871 0.07 0.04 0.07 0.07
982 0.05 0.03 0.04 0.04
1093 0.02 0.01 0.02 0.02
1204 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
F.2.18.2.3 — Resistance of materials at elevated temperatures — The properties of materials at elevated

temperatures shall be determined by means of tests. When these data are not available, it is permissible to use
the material properties stipulated in this section. These data do not apply to steels with a yield strength greater
than 448 MPa or to concrete with a specified compressive strength greater than 55 MPa.
F.2.18.2.3.1 — Thermal expansion — The expansion coefficients will be taken as follows:
F-192
Thermal expansion of structural and reinforcing steels — for calculations at temperatures above
65ºC, the coefficient of thermal expansion will be 14X10-6/ºC
Thermal expansion of normal weight concrete — for calculations at temperatures above 65ºC, the
coefficient of thermal expansion will be 18X10-6/ºC
Thermal expansion of lightweight concrete — for calculations at temperatures above 65ºC, the
coefficient of thermal expansion will be 7.9X10-6/ºC
F.2.18.2.3.2 — Mechanical properties at elevated temperatures — The degradation of the resistance

and rigidity of the elements, components and structural systems must be taken into account in the
structural analysis. The values of Fy(T) , Fp(T) , Fu(T) , fÿ E(T) , G(T) , , Ec(T) and cu(T) at elevated
e
temperatures are allowed to be used in structural analysis , expressed as a proportion of these c T( )
same properties at room temperature, assumed to be 20ºC, according to tables F.2.18.2-1 and F.2.18.2-2.
Interpolation between these values is allowed.
Table F.2.18.2-2
Properties of concrete at elevated temperatures
ÿ ÿ
k f /fT(
= c) ÿ % cu(T)
c c
Steel temperature E /E c(T)

O c Normal weight
C normal weight lightened
concrete concrete
concrete
20 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.25
93 0.95 1.00 0.93 0.34
204 0.90 1.00 0.75 0.46
288 0.86 1.00 0.61 0.58
316 0.83 0.98 0.57 0.62
427 0.71 0.85 0.38 0.80
538 0.54 0.71 0.20 1.06
649 0.38 0.58 0.092 1.32
760 0.21 0.45 0.073 1.43
871 0.10 0.31 0.055 1.49
982 0.05 0.18 0.036 1.50
1093 0.01 0.05 0.018 1.50
1204 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.50
F.2.18.2.4 — Requirements for structural design
F.2.18.2.4.1 — General integrity of the structure — The structure must provide adequate resistance
and deformation capacity to address the effects developed during the fire, complying with the prescribed
deformation limits. The structural system should be designed to accept some degree of local damage but
remain stable as a whole.
Continuous load paths must be provided that transfer all forces from the exposed region to the ultimate
point of resistance. The foundation will be designed to resist the forces and tolerate the deformations
developed during the design fire.
F.2.18.2.4.2 — Strength requirements and limits for deformations — Compliance of the structural
system with these requirements shall be demonstrated by building a mathematical model of the structure
based on the principles of structural mechanics and evaluating this model for internal forces and strains
that develop in structural members as a result of design fire temperatures.
Individual members shall resist shear forces, axial forces, and moments determined in accordance with
these provisions.
Connections shall be designed to develop the strength of the connected members or the forces indicated
above. When deformation criteria are required to provide fire resistance, they must not exceed the
prescribed limits.
F-193
F.2.18.2.4.3 — Methods of analysis
F.2.18.2.4.3.1 — Advanced Analysis Methods — The analysis methods in this section are permitted to be used for
the design of all types of steel structures under fire conditions. The design fire must be determined in accordance with
numeral F.2.18.2.1. The analysis will include the thermal response and the mechanical response to the design fire.
The thermal response will produce a temperature field in each structural element as a result of the design fire and will
include temperature-dependent thermal properties for structural elements and fire-resistant materials in accordance
with Section F.2.18.2.2.
The mechanical response results in forces and deflections in the structural system subjected to the thermal response
calculated from the design fire. The mechanical response should explicitly consider the degradation of strength and
stiffness with increasing temperature, the effects of thermal expansions, and large deformations. The boundary
conditions and the restriction in the connections must be representative of the proposed structural design. Material
properties will be defined in accordance with Section F.2.18.2.3.
The resulting analysis shall consider all relevant limit states, such as excessive deflections, connection fractures, and
local or global buckling.
F.2.18.2.4.3.2 — Simplified Methods of Analysis — The methods of analysis presented in this section are permitted
for use in evaluating the performance of individual members at elevated temperatures during fire exposure.
It can be assumed that the constraints and support conditions (forces, moments and boundary conditions) applicable at
normal temperatures remain unchanged during the fire exposure.
When the temperature of the steel is less than 204°C, the design resistances of the members and connections may be
calculated without considering the effects of temperature.
Otherwise, they must be calculated according to the provisions of this section.
At temperatures below 204°C, it is not required to consider the degradation of the steel properties for the calculation of
the resistances of the members under the simplified analysis method, however, the forces and the forces must be taken
into account. deformations resulting from elevated temperatures.
F.2.18.2.4.3.2.1 — Members in Tension — The thermal response of a member in tension is permitted to be

modeled using a one-dimensional heat transfer equation, with heat input corresponding to the design fire in
accordance with Section F. .2.18.2.1.
The design resistance of a member in tension shall be determined using the provisions of Section F.2.4, with
the steel properties specified in F.2.18.2.3, and assuming a uniform temperature across the cross section,
equal to the maximum temperature. in the steel...
F.2.18.2.4.3.2.2 — Compression Members — The thermal response of a compression member is permitted

to be modeled using a one-dimensional heat transfer equation, with heat input corresponding to the design
fire in accordance with Section F. .2.18.2.1.
The design resistance of a member in compression shall be determined using the provisions of Section F.2.5,
with the steel properties stipulated in Section F.2.18.2.3, and using the formula F.2.18.2-1 instead of the
formulas F.2.5.3-2
F-194
and F.2.5.3-3 to calculate the nominal compressive strength for the limit state of flexural buckling:
F = ÿ 0.42 F F F ÿ y(T) e(T) y(T)

ÿ
(F.2.18.2-1)
cr(T) ÿ
where Fy(T) is the yield stress at elevated temperatures and Fe(T) is the critical elastic buckling
stress calculated with formula F.2.5.3-4, using the elastic modulus at elevated temperatures,
E(T) . To obtain Fy(T) and E(T) they must
use the coefficients of table F.2.18.2-1.
F.2.18.2.4.3.2.3 — Members in flexure — It is permitted to model the thermal response of

members in flexure using a one-dimensional heat transfer equation to calculate the temperature
of the lower fin and assume that it is constant over all depth. of the member.
The design resistance of a member in flexure shall be determined using the provisions of section
F.2.6, with the steel properties stipulated in section F.2.18.2.3 and using the formulas F.2.18.2-2
to F.2.18 .2-9 instead of formulas F.2.6.2-2 to F.2.6.2-6 to calculate the nominal flexural
resistance for the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling of doubly symmetrical members without
lateral bracing.
(a) Para L L br(T)

ÿ
ÿ ÿ xc
M C M M M 1L L = +ÿ ÿ n(T) b r(T) r(T) r(T) ( b
) ÿ ÿ (F.2.18.2-2) ÿ ÿ ÿ
p(T)
ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿ
(b) Para L L br(T)

>
M (T)
n F S cr(T) x
= (F.2.18.2-3)
where:
2 2
WHAT ÿ J L ÿ ÿb
b (T)
= c
F 0.078 ÿÿ1 (F.2.18.2-4)
cr(T)
( Lr )
2 + Sh r xo ÿ ÿts
b ts
2 2
AND
J J ÿ ÿ F ÿ
(T) c c L(T)
ÿ = ts
L 1.95r r(T) ++ ÿ ÿ 6.76 (F.2.18.2-5)
F Sh Sh ÿ
ÿ And
L(T) xo xo ÿÿ ÿ (T) ÿÿÿ
=
M SF r(T) x L(T) (F.2.18.2-6)
F L(T) = F and
k 0.3k
(
py ÿ
) (F.2.18.2-7)
=
M ZF p(T) x y(T) (F.2.18.2-8)
T
c x0.6
ÿ 3.0
=+ 250 ( T in degrees Celsius) (F.2.18.2-9)
The material properties at elevated temperatures ( Fy(T) and E(T) ) and the coefficients kp and
ky are calculated according to Table F.2.18.2-1. The other terms correspond to those defined in
section F.2.6.
F.2.18.2.4.3.2.4 — Composite Construction Story Members — The thermal response of

flexural members supporting a concrete slab is permitted to be modeled using a one-dimensional
heat transfer equation to calculate the bottom flange temperature . Said temperature will be
taken as constant from the lower fin to half the depth of the soul, decreasing
F-195
linearly by not more than 25% from half the web depth to the top flange of the beam.
The design resistance of a composite member in flexure shall be determined using the conditions of Section
F.2.9, with yield stresses in the steel reduced consistently with variation in temperature.
F.2.18.2.4.4 — Design Strength — The design strength shall be determined from

according to section F.2.2.3.3. The nominal resistance, Rn , properties of the materials will be calculated using the
stipulated in section F.2.18.2.3, at the temperature that develops under the design fire.
F.2.18.3 — DESIGN BY QUALIFICATION TESTS
F.2.18.3.1 — Qualification Standards — Structural members and components of a steel building shall be qualified for fire resistance in
accordance with ASTM E119. Demonstration of compliance with these requirements is permitted using the procedures for steel construction
specified in Section 5 of SEI/ASCE/SFPE 29-05, Standard Methods of Calculation for Fire Protection of Structures.
F.2.18.3.2 — Restrained Construction — Floor or roof systems, as well as individual beams in buildings, are considered restrained when
the surrounding or supporting structure is capable of resisting actions caused by thermal expansion in the range of the expected temperatures.
Beams, joists, and steel assemblies that support concrete slabs and that are welded or bolted to the main structure shall be considered
thermal expansion restricted construction.
F.2.18.3.3 — Unrestrained Construction — Steel beams, joists, and load-bearing structures not supporting concrete slabs shall be
considered unrestrained from thermal expansion unless bolted or welded to a surrounding structure specifically designed and detailed to
resist thermal expansion. actions caused by thermal expansion.
A single-span or end-span steel member of a multi-span system supported by walls shall be considered unrestrained unless the wall has been
designed and detailed to resist the effects of thermal expansion.
F.2.19 — ASSESSMENT OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

This numeral applies to the evaluation of the resistance and stiffness of existing structures under gravity loads by means of structural analysis, load
tests or a combination of both. For such evaluation, the steel is not limited to the qualities listed in section F.2.1.5.1. This section is not applicable to load
tests whose object is the evaluation of the effects of seismic or mobile (vibration) loads.
F.2.19.1 — General Provisions F.2.19.2 —

Material Properties F.2.19.3 — Evaluation
Through Structural Analysis F.2.19.4 — Evaluation Through Load
Tests F.2.19.5 — Evaluation Report
F.2.19.1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS — These provisions are applicable when the evaluation of an existing steel structure is required for:
(a) verify specific design load conditions (b) determine the design strength of a
structural member or system.
This evaluation can be done by structural analysis (F.2.19.3), by load tests (F.2.19.4), or by a combination of both. When load tests are used, the
structural engineer must first analyze the
F-196
structure, plan the test, and write a procedure to prevent the occurrence of excessive permanent deformation or collapse
during the test.
F.2.19.2 — MATERIAL PROPERTIES
F.2.19.2.1 — Determination of Required Tests — The structural engineer shall determine what specific tests
are required under Sections F.2.19.2.2 through F.2.19.2.6 and specify the location of the tests. When information
is available on the design and construction of the building, the required tests may be reduced or eliminated.
F.2.19.2.2 — Properties of the material in tension — For the evaluation by structural analysis or load tests, the
properties in tension of the members must be considered. These properties include yield stress, tensile strength,
and percent elongation. When there are certificates from the steel mill or test reports carried out by the
manufacturer or by a laboratory complying with the ASTM A6/A6M or A568/A568M standards, as applicable,
these documents will be sufficient for evaluation purposes. Otherwise, tests must be carried out that comply with
ASTM A370 from test pieces cut from the components of the structure.
F.2.19.2.3 — Chemical Composition — When welding is anticipated to be used to repair or modify existing
structures, the chemical composition of the steel shall be determined in preparation for welding procedures. When
steel mill certificates or test reports performed by the manufacturer or by a laboratory complying with the applicable
ASTM standards are available, these documents will be sufficient for evaluation purposes. Otherwise, analysis
must be carried out in accordance with the ASTM A751 standard from the specimens used for the resistance tests
or specimens taken in the same location.
F.2.19.2.4 — Base Metal Toughness — When, in a heavy profile or heavy plate, as defined in Section F.2.1.5.1d,
there is a tension welded splice that is critical to the performance of the structure, the V-groove Charpy impact
test toughness shall be obtained in accordance with the provisions of Section F.2.1.5.1d. If the toughness thus
obtained does not meet the requirements of said section, the structural engineer will determine if corrective
measures are required.
F.2.19.2.5 — Weld Metal — When structural performance depends on existing welded connections, representative
samples of the weld metal shall be taken. The characteristics of the weld metal must be determined by chemical
analysis and mechanical tests. The magnitude and eventual consequences of the detected imperfections must
also be determined. If the requirements of AWS D1.1 are not met, the structural engineer will determine if
corrective action is required.
F.2.19.2.6 — Bolts and Rivets — An inspection of a representative sample of bolts shall be performed to classify
them. When bolts cannot be properly identified visually, some representative samples will be removed and tested
for tensile strength in accordance with ASTM F606 or ASTM F600M to properly classify them.
Alternatively, the bolts may be assumed to be ASTM A307. Rivets may be assumed to be of ASTM A502 Grade
1 quality, unless a higher grade can be established by documentation or testing.
F.2.19.3 — EVALUATION THROUGH STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS
F.2.19.3.1 — Dimensions — All dimensions required for evaluation, such as spans, column heights, member
spacing, bracing locations, cross sections, thicknesses, and connection details, shall be obtained from a survey.
In place. Alternatively, when structural or manufacturing plans are available, it will be allowed to start from them
to determine such dimensions, after verification of the critical values.
F.2.19.3.2 — Strength Evaluation — The forces in members and connections shall be determined by means of
a structural analysis appropriate for the type of structure being evaluated. The effects of the loads will be
determined for the load combinations specified in Title B of this Regulation.
The design resistance of the members and the connections will be determined from the requirements of numerals
F.2.2 to F.2.11 of this Chapter.
F-197
F.2.19.3.3 — Evaluation of service conditions — When required, deformations under service load shall be calculated and
reported.
F.2.19.4 — EVALUATION BY LOAD TESTS
F.2.19.4.1 — Determination of Load Capacity by Tests —To determine the load capacity of an existing floor or roof
structure by tests, a test load shall be applied incrementally in accordance with the structural engineer's specifications. . The
structure shall be visually inspected for signs of overstress or impending failure for each load increment. In case these or
other unusual conditions are detected, appropriate measures must be taken.
The capacity of the structure, obtained from the test, will be taken as the sum of the maximum load applied plus the dead
load in place. The live load capacity of a floor structure shall be determined by equating said structure capacity obtained
from the test to 1.2D 1.6L + where D is the rated dead load and L is the rated live load capacity for the structure. The nominal
,
live load capacity of the floor structure shall not be taken greater than that calculated by applying the requirements of this
Chapter. For roof structures, Lr and G will be used . More severe load combinations should be applied when required.
, as defined in Title B, instead of L
When the level of service loads has been reached and once the start of inelastic behavior has been detected, periodic
unloading cycles must be carried out, in order to document the degree of permanent deformation and the magnitude of the
inelastic deformations. The deformations of the structure, such as the deflections of the members, shall be monitored at the
most critical points during the test, and be referenced to the initial position before loading. It must be verified that, when the
maximum test load is maintained for one hour, that the deformation of the structure does not increase by more than 10%
above that corresponding to the beginning of said period. When deemed necessary, it is permitted to repeat the loading
sequence to demonstrate compliance with this condition.
Likewise, the deformations of the structure must be documented 24 hours after the test load has been removed to determine
the magnitude of the permanent deformations. Since the magnitude of the acceptable permanent deformation depends on
the structure under consideration, no limit is established for the permanent deformations under the maximum load. When it
is not possible to carry out the load test for the entire structure, an area must be selected that has an extension of not less
than one full module and is representative of the most critical conditions.
F.2.19.4.2 — Evaluation of service conditions — When carrying out load tests, the structure shall be loaded in increments
until the service load is reached. The deformations must be monitored for a period of one hour. The structure must then be
unloaded and its deformation documented.
F.2.19.5 — ASSESSMENT REPORT — When the assessment of an existing structure has been completed, the structural engineer
shall prepare a report documenting the assessment. The report must indicate whether the evaluation was carried out by structural
analysis or by load tests or by a combination of the two methods. When tests have been carried out, the report must also include the
loads and combinations of loads used and the load-deformation and time-deformation curves recorded. All the relevant information
obtained from the structural plans, the steelwork certificates and the complementary tests of the materials must also be reported.
Finally, the report must indicate whether the structure, including all its members and connections, is adequate to resist the effects of
the loads.
F.2.20 — BRACING OF COLUMNS AND BEAMS

This section specifies the minimum required strength and stiffness of elements used as bracing so that they are effective in generating
braced points in columns, beams, and beam-columns.
F-198

F.2.20.2 — Column Bracing F.2.20.3 — Beam
Bracing F.2.20.4 — Beam-Column
Bracing
The requirements for the stability of braced structural systems are specified in F.2.3. The requirements of this section apply to bracing
elements used to stabilize individual members.
F.2.20.1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS — Columns that are braced at their ends and at intermediate points and are designed in
accordance with the requirements of F.2.20.2 may be calculated based on the unsupported length, L taken between the braced
points, with an effective length factor K 1.0 = . Beams with intermediate braced points that are designed in accordance with the
,
requirements of F.2.20.3 may be calculated based on the unsupported length, Lb , taken between the braced points.
When the bracing is perpendicular to the braced members, the formulas in sections F.2.20.2 and F.2.20.3 apply directly. When the
bracing is oriented at an angle to the member being braced, the strength of the brace (force or moment) and its stiffness (force per
unit displacement or moment per unit rotation) shall be adjusted for the angle of inclination. The evaluation of the stiffness provided
by a brace must consider the properties of the member and its geometry, as well as the effects of the connections and anchorage
details.
In F.2.20 two systems are considered, relative bracing and nodal bracing, for columns and beams with lateral bracing. For beams with
torsional bracing, two systems are equally considered, nodal bracing and continuous bracing.
A relative brace controls the movement of the braced point with respect to adjacent braced points. A nodal bracing controls the
movement of the braced point without direct interaction with adjacent braced points. A continuous bracing consists of a system that
connects along the entire length of the member, however, a regularly spaced nodal bracing over the member can be modeled as a
continuous system.
The design strength and stiffness of the brace shall be equal to or greater than those required, unless analysis indicates that lesser
values can be used. It is permissible to use a second order analysis that includes the initial deflections of the member to obtain the
strength and stiffness of the brace, instead of the requirements of this section.
F.2.20.2 — COLUMN BRACING — An individual column is permitted to be braced at its ends and at intermediate points along its
length, by means of nodal or relative bracing systems.
F.2.20.2.1 — Relative Bracing — The required bracing strength is:
=
Pbr0.004P in
(F.2.20.2-1)
The required stiffness of the bracing is:
1 2P
ÿ in
ÿ
ÿ br= ÿ ÿ ÿ (F.2.20.2-2)
L b ÿÿ
donde:
ÿ = 0.75
Lb = distance between braces, mm Pu
= required compressive strength for the braced member, N
F.2.20.2.2 — Nodal Bracing — The required resistance of the bracing is
=
P 0.01P br in
(F.2.20.2-3)
F-199
The required stiffness of the bracing is
1 8p
ÿ
in
ÿ
ÿ br
=ÿÿÿ (F.2.20.2-4)
L b ÿÿ
donde:
ÿ = 0.75
Pu = required compressive strength for the braced member, N
These formulas start from the premise that the nodal bracings are evenly spaced along the length of the column.
In formula F.2.20.2-4, Lb can be taken as a minimum equal to the maximum effective unsupported length, KL, that the
column could have to provide the required resistance Pu .
F.2.20.3 — BRACING OF BEAMS — Beams and trusses shall be restrained against rotation about their longitudinal axis at points of
support. When an intermediate braced section is assumed in the design between the supports, lateral bracing, torsional bracing, or a
combination of the two shall be provided to prevent relative displacement between the upper and lower flanges, i.e., torsion. from the
section. In members subjected to double curvature bending, the point of inflection shall not be considered a bracing point except
where such bracing is physically provided.
F.2.20.3.1 — Lateral Bracing — Bracing shall be connected near the compression flange, except in the following cases:
(a) At the free end of cantilever members, where a brace is to be placed near the flange
top (flap under tension).
(b) In braced beams stressed by bending with double curvature along the length between the braces, the lateral
bracing closest to the point of inflection shall be connected to both flanges.
F.2.20.3.1.1 — Relative Bracing — The required bracing strength is:
Pbr =
0.008M Ch out O
(F.2.20.3-1)
1 ÿ4M C out ÿ
ÿ br
=ÿÿÿ (F.2.20.3-2)
L be
h ÿÿ
donde:
ÿ = 0.75
ho = distance between the centroids of the flanges, mm Cd =
1.0 except in the following case = 2.0 for the
bracing closest to the point of inflection in a beam under bending with
double curvature.
Lb = distance between bracing points, mm Mu = required
flexural strength in the braced member, N mm
F.2.20.3.1.2 — Nodal Bracing — The required resistance of the bracing is:
Pbr =
0.02M Chudo (F.2.20.3-3)
F-200
1 ÿ10M C ÿ
out
ÿ br
=ÿÿÿ (F.2.20.3-4)
Lh
be ÿÿ
donde:
ÿ = 0.75
Mu = required flexural strength in the braced member, N mm
In formula F.2.20.3-4, Lb can be taken as a minimum equal to the maximum unsupported length that the
beam could have to provide the required resistance Mu .
F.2.20.3.2 — Torsional Bracing — Bracing may be connected at any level on the cross section, without being
required to be installed near the compression flange.
Torsional bracing can be provided by means of a beam with moment connections, a cross truss, or another element
that acts as a diaphragm.
F.2.20.3.2.1 — Nodal Bracing — The required resistance of the bracing is:
0.024M Lin
M br
=
(F.2.20.3-5)
nC bL b
bT
ÿ Tb
=ÿ (F.2.20.3-6)
ÿ1 ÿ
ÿ Tÿ ÿ
bÿ sec ÿ
where:
2 ÿ
ÿ 1 2.4LMin
ÿ=ÿÿÿÿ
(F.2.20.3-7)
ÿ
T 2
nEI Mr
C ÿÿ
ÿ33
3.3E 1.5HTTP ÿ
sec
h
ÿ o w st s ÿ= + ÿ
12 12
ÿ
(F.2.20.3-8)
O ÿ
donde:
ÿ = 0.75
L = length of the span, mm n =
number of points with nodal bracing within the span E = modulus of
elasticity of the steel = 200 000 MPa I y
= moment of inertia for bending out of plane, mm4
Cb = modification factor defined in Chapter F.2.6 wt = thickness
of the web of the beam, mm = thickness of
t st
the stiffener, mm = width of the
bs stiffener for stiffeners placed only on one side of the web (use double for paired stiffeners), mm ÿT =
stiffness of the brace not including web
distortion, N mm/radian ÿsec = stiffness at web distortion, including the effect
of transverse stiffeners,
N·mm/radian
Mu = required flexural strength, N mm
When ÿ < ÿ sec

theT ,result of formula F.2.20.3-6 is negative, indicating that the torsional bracing of the beam will
not be effective due to insufficient web distortion stiffness.
F-201
When required, web stiffeners shall extend over the full depth of the braced member and shall be connected to the
flange if the torsional brace is also connected to the flange. Alternatively, it is permitted to interrupt the stiffener at a
distance equal to 4t from any beam flange not directly connected to the torsional brace. In
F.2.20.3.2.2 — Continuous Torsional Bracing — For continuous bracing, Formulas F.2.20.3-5 and F.2.20.3-6
shall be used, with the following modifications:
(a) L / n 1.0 = ;
(b) Lb is to be taken equal to the maximum unsupported length the beam could have to provide the
required resistance Mu , and
(c) The web distortion stiffness shall be taken equal to:
3
3.3Et In
b=
sec
12h O
(F.2.20.3-9)
F.2.20.4 — BRACING OF BEAM-COLUMNS — For beam-columns, the required strength and stiffness for axial load shall be obtained
as specified in F.2.20.2, and the required strength and stiffness for bending they must be obtained as specified in numeral F.2.20.3.
The values thus determined shall be combined as follows:
(a) When relative lateral bracing is used, the required resistance shall be taken as the sum of the values obtained using
formulas F.2.20.2-1 and F.2.20.3-1, and the required stiffness shall be taken as the sum from the values obtained
using the formulas F.2.20.2-2 and F.2.20.3-2. (b) When nodal lateral bracing is used,
the required resistance shall be taken as the sum of the
values obtained using formulas F.2.20.2-3 and F.2.20.3-3, and the required stiffness shall be taken as the sum of the
values obtained using formulas F.2.20.2-4 and F.2.20.3 -4. In formulas F.2.20.2-4 and F.2.20.3-4, Lb for beam-
columns shall be taken equal to the actual unbraced length, and the provisions of F.2.20.2.2 and F shall not apply.
.2.20.3.1.2 that indicate taking Lb as a minimum equal to the maximum length allowed based on the values of Pu
and Mu .
(c) When torsional bracing for flexure is provided in conjunction with relative or nodal bracing for axial force, the required
strength and stiffness shall be combined or distributed in such a way as to be consistent with the strength provided by
the actual detail elements of the bracing.
F.2.21 — ALTERNATE METHODS OF DESIGN FOR STABILITY
This numeral presents alternatives to the Direct Analysis Method for stability design, defined in numeral F.2.3. The two alternate
methods presented are the Effective Length Method and the First Order Analysis Method.
F.2.21.1 — General Stability Requirements F.2.21.2

— Effective Length Method F.2.21.3 — First
Order Analysis Method
F.2.21.1 — GENERAL STABILITY REQUIREMENTS — The general requirements of section F.2.3.1 shall apply. As an alternative to
the Direct Analysis Method (defined in F.2.3.1 and F.2.3.2) for the design of structures for stability, it is permitted to design either
according to the Effective Length Method, specified in F.2.21.2, or the First Order Method of Analysis, specified in F.2.21.3, subject to
the limitations defined in these clauses.
F-202
F.2.21.2 — EFFECTIVE LENGTH METHOD
F.2.21.2.1 — Limitations — The use of the Effective Length Method will be limited to the following conditions:
(a) The structure supports gravity loads primarily through columns, beams, or
nominally vertical frames.
(b) The ratio between the maximum drifts obtained from the second-order analysis and the maximum drifts obtained
from the first-order analysis (both obtained for factored load combinations) is less than or equal to 1.5 for all
stories.
F.2.21.2.2 — Required Strengths — The required component strengths shall be obtained from an analysis in accordance
with the requirements of F.2.3.2.1, except that the reduction in stiffness indicated in F.2.3 shall not be applied. .2.1(2), that
is, the nominal stiffnesses of all structural components shall be used. The fictitious loads will be applied in the analysis in
accordance with numeral F.2.3.2.2.2.
Bearing in mind that the condition specified in numeral F.2.3.2.2.2(4) will be fulfilled in all cases where the effective length
method is applicable, it will be necessary to apply the fictitious loads only to exclusively gravitational load cases. .
F.2.21.2.3 — Design Resistances — The design resistances of the members and connections shall be calculated in
accordance with the provisions of numerals F.2.4, F.2.5, F.2.6, F.2.7, F.2.8, F. .2.9, F.2.10 and F.2.11, as applicable,
The effective length factor for members subjected to compression, K (a) or (b) , shall be taken as specified in
below, as applicable.
(a) In braced frame systems, shear walls, and other structural systems where lateral stability and resistance do not
depend on the flexural stiffness of the columns, the effective length factor of members subjected to compression,
K shall be taken equal to 1.0, unless a structural analysis shows that a lower value is appropriate. (b) In
,
moment-resisting frame systems and other structural systems in which the

flexural stiffnesses of the columns, or some of them, are considered to contribute to lateral stability and resistance
to lateral loads, the effective length factor , K , and the critical elastic buckling stress, K , for those contributing
columns shall be obtained from a lateral displacement buckling analysis of the structure; If there are columns
whose flexural stiffness is not considered to be contributing to lateral stability and resistance to lateral loads, a
value of K equal to 1.0 will be taken for them.
Exception — K 1 = is allowed to be used in the design of all columns if the ratio of the maximum second-order drift to the
maximum first-order drift (both obtained for factored load combinations) is less than or equal to 1.1 for all floors.
When there are elements designed to function as braces that determine the unbraced length of beams and columns, the
bracing system that they form must have sufficient stiffness and resistance to control the displacement of the member at the
bracing points.
Methods to satisfy bracing requirements are presented in F.2.20, Bracing for Beams and Columns. The requirements of
F.2.20 are not applicable to bracing elements that are included in the global analysis of the structure as part of the lateral
load resistance system.
F.2.21.3 — FIRST ORDER ANALYSIS METHOD
F.2.21.3.1 — Limitations — The use of the First Order Analysis Method will be limited to the following conditions:
(a) The structure supports gravity loads primarily through columns, beams, or
nominally vertical frames.
F-203
(b) The ratio between the maximum drifts obtained from the second-order analysis and the maximum drifts
obtained from the first-order analysis (both calculated for factored load combinations) is less than or equal to
1.5 for all stories.
The ratio between the second order drift and the first order drift in a story can be taken equal to the coefficient
B2, calculated as specified in F.2.22.
(c) The required compressive strengths of all members whose flexural stiffnesses are considered to contribute to
the lateral stability of the structure satisfy the following relationship:
ÿ
PP 0.5 hey (F.2.21.3-1)
where:
Pu = required axial compressive strength, N. member
P OF
= yy , yield strength, N
F.2.21.3.2 — Required Resistances — The required resistances of the components will be obtained from a first order
analysis, with the additional requirements (1) and (2) presented below. The analysis must consider the deformations of the
members due to bending, shear and axial loads, and any other deformations that contribute to the displacements of the
structure.
(a) All load combinations must include an additional lateral load, Ni , applied at
combination with the other existing loads at each level of the structure:
=
N 2.1 ( D )L ÿ
Y 0.0042Y (F.2.21.3-2)
i The The
where:
Yil = gravitational load applied to level i (factored loads), N
D
= maximum ratio of ÿ to L between all stories in the structure for the combination of
L
loads under consideration
ÿ = first order floor drift due to the combination of factored loads, mm.
When ÿ varies over the floor plan, it will be taken as the weighted average drift in proportion to the
vertical loads or, alternatively, as the maximum drift.
L = floor height, mm
The additional lateral load at any level, Ni , will be distributed over that level in the same way as gravity loads.
Additional lateral loads will be applied in the direction in which they have the greatest destabilizing effect.
For most building structures, the requirement for the direction of application of the notional loads can be
satisfied as follows:
• For load combinations that do not include lateral loads, consider two alternative orthogonal directions, and
for each of these directions consider the action of the fictitious loads in one direction and the other,
simultaneously taking the same direction and direction at all levels; • For load combinations that include
lateral loads, apply all fictitious loads in the
direction of the resultant of all lateral loads in the respective combination.
(b) The amplification of moments in beam-columns for the condition without lateral displacement must be taken
into account, by applying the B1 amplifier of numeral F.2.22 to the total moments of the member.
F-204
F.2.21.3.3 — Design Resistances — The design resistances of the members and connections shall be calculated in
accordance with the provisions of numerals F.2.4, F.2.5, F.2.6, F.2.7, F.2.8, F. .2.9, F.2.10 and F.2.11, as applicable,
The effective length factor, K , will be taken equal to 1.0 for all members.
When there are elements designed to function as braces that determine the unbraced length of beams and columns, the
bracing system that they form must have sufficient stiffness and resistance to control the displacement of the member at the
bracing points.
Methods to satisfy bracing requirements are presented in F.2.20, Bracing for Beams and Columns. The requirements of
F.2.20 are not applicable to bracing elements that are included in the global analysis of the structure as part of the lateral
load resistance system.
F.2.22 — APPROXIMATE SECOND-ORDER ANALYSIS PROCEDURE
This numeral presents, as an alternative to a rigorous second-order analysis, a procedure that takes into account second-order
effects through amplification of the required resistances obtained from a first-order analysis.
F.2.22.1 — Limitations F.2.22.2

— Calculation procedure
F.2.22.1 — LIMITATIONS — The use of this procedure is limited to structures that support gravity loads primarily through nominally
vertical columns, beams, or frames, except that its application is permitted for the determination of P ÿ ÿ effects for any individual
member in compression.
F.2.22.2 — CALCULATION PROCEDURE — The required resistance to second-order bending, Mu , and the required resistance to
second-order axial load, Pu , shall be determined as follows:
M BM
in
= BM +
1 nt 2 lt (F.2.22.2-1a)
PinPnt
BP = + 2 lt (F.2.22.2-1b)
where:
B1 is an amplifying coefficient that takes into account the second order effects due to intermediate displacements between
nodes (P ÿ ÿ) , calculated for each member subjected to compression and bending, for each direction of bending, according
to numeral F. 2.22.2.1. B1 will be taken equal to 1.0 for members not subject to compression.
B2 is an amplifying coefficient that takes into account the second order effects due to displacements of the nodes ( ) P ÿ ÿ
calculated for each story of the structure and in each direction of lateral displacement of the story according to numeral
,
F.2.22. 2.2.
Mu = required flexural strength by second order analysis for the load combination
factored into consideration, N mm
Mnt = moment obtained from a first order analysis for the combination of loads factored in
consideration, assuming that there is no lateral translation of the structure, N mm
Mlt = moment associated with the lateral displacement of the frame only, obtained from an analysis of
first order for the factored load combination under consideration, N mm = required
Could resistance to axial load by the second order analysis for the load combination
mayoradas under consideration, N
F-205
Pnt = axial force obtained from a first order analysis, for the combination of factored loads in
consideration and assuming that there is no lateral translation of the structure, N
Plt = axial force associated with lateral displacement of the frame only, obtained from an analysis of
first order for the factored load combination under consideration, N
Formulas F.2.22.2-1 are applicable to all members in any type of structure. However, it should be noted that values of B1
other than 1.0 apply only to moments in beam-columns; while the B2 coefficient is applied to the moments and axial forces
in the components of the system resistant to lateral loads (including columns, beams, braces and shear walls).
F.2.22.2.1 — Amplifying coefficient B1 for effects (P ÿ ÿ) — The amplifying coefficient B1 shall be obtained for each
member subjected to compression and for each direction of bending as follows:
Cm
B 1
= (F.2.22.2-2)
P in
1 ÿ
P e1
where:
Cm = coefficient associated to a condition without lateral translation of the frame, whose value should be taken as
follows:
(a) For beam-columns without transverse load between support points in the bending plane,
C m0.60
= 0.40 M M 12
( ÿ
) (F.2.22.2-3)
where M1 and M2 , obtained from a first-order analysis, are respectively the moments of smallest
and largest magnitude at the ends of the unbraced portion of the member in the bending plane
under consideration. M M1 2 is positive when bending produces a double curvature in the limb,
and negative when the curvature is simple.
(b) For beam-columns with a transverse load between the support points, the value of Cm may be
determined by analysis or taken conservatively as 1.0 for all cases.
Pe1 = Critical elastic buckling load of the member in the bending plane,
calculated assuming no lateral displacement, N
* ÿ2 NO
P
e1
=
2
(F.2.22.2-4)
( at 1
)
where:
EI* = flexural stiffness to be used in the analysis ( = ÿ 0.8 EI for use with theb
analysis method as defined in F.2.22; = EI for use with the effective length and first
order analysis methods.)
E = modulus of elasticity of steel (200,000 MPa) = moment of
I inertia in the bending plane (mm4 )
L = height of the floor, (mm)
K1 = factor of effective length in the bending plane, calculated assuming no lateral translation of
the ends of the members, to be taken as 1.0 unless an analysis indicates that a smaller
value can be used.
F-206
It is permissible to use the first order estimate of Pu (ie, PPP = + ) in formula inF.2.22.2-2.
nt lt
F.2.22.2.2 — Amplifying coefficient B2 for effects P ÿ ÿ — The amplifying coefficient B2 shall be obtained for each story
and for each direction of lateral displacement as follows:
1
B 2
= (F.2.22.2-5)
ÿ P floor
1 ÿ
ÿ P and floor
where:
Pstory = total vertical load supported by the story (factored loads), including loads acting on columns that are not
part of the lateral load resisting system, N = critical elastic buckling load for the story in the direction of
Pe travel in
story consideration, determined by lateral displacement buckling analysis, or calculated as follows, N:
HL
PMR= and (F.2.22.2-6)
floor DH
where:
R 1 0.15
M
=ÿ
PP mf floor ( ) (F.2.22.2-7)
L = height of the floor, (mm)
Pmf = total vertical load in the story columns that are part of frames resisting moment in the direction of
displacement considered, when they exist (=0 for braced frame systems), N
ÿH = story drift in the direction of displacement under consideration, produced by lateral loads and obtained from a
first-order analysis (mm) using the applicable stiffnesses (reduced stiffnesses according to F.2.3.2.3
when using the method direct analysis). When ÿH varies over the plan of the structure, the weighted
average drift in proportion to the vertical load or, alternatively, the maximum drift will be taken as ÿH .
H = story shear resulting from the lateral loads used to calculate ÿH , N
In formula F.2.22.2-6, H and ÿH may be based on any lateral loading condition that provides a representative value
of lateral story stiffness, H ÿH .
F-207
Grades:
F-208
NSR-10 – Chapter F.3 – Seismic provisions for steel structures with rolled,
reinforced sections and structural tubing
CHAPTER
F.3 SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STEEL STRUCTURES WITH
ROLLED AND REINFORCED SECTIONS AND STRUCTURAL PIPES

This numeral establishes the scope of Chapter F.3, the definitions and acronyms, as well as the symbology, and provides
requirements for the materials and the plans and specifications of the project.
F.3.1.1 — Scope
F.3.1.2 — Definitions and acronyms
F.3.1.3 — Symbology
F.3.1.4 — Materials
F.3.1.5 — Structural Design Drawings and Specifications
F.3.1.1 — SCOPE — These special seismic requirements must be applied in conjunction with Chapter F.2 and are applicable to the
design, manufacture, and assembly of members and connections of seismic resistance systems, as well as splices and foundations.
columns in systems for gravity loads, in buildings with moment-resistant frames, braced frames and shear walls, built with steel profiles
only or with steel profiles acting in a composite way with reinforced concrete.
Composite seismic resisting systems include those in which at least some profile steel members act in composite section with
reinforced concrete, as well as systems in which profile steel and reinforced concrete members act together to form a composite
system. .
Reinforced concrete members must be designed in accordance with Title C of this Regulation.
When the structural analysis is carried out based on an elastic analysis, the stiffness properties of the members in a composite or
reinforced concrete system must reflect the condition of significant yielding of the structure, that is, the reinforced concrete elements
must be modeled with cracked section, and those of steel with complete section, in which case the reduction in drifts of numeral
A.6.4.1.1 may be used. If the full section of concrete is used, this reduction should not be made.
F.3.1.2 — DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS — The special terms used in this Chapter have the following meanings:
ACI — American Concrete Institute
Story Drift Angle — The offset of the story divided by the story height, in radians.
Link Rotation Angle — Inelastic angle between the link and the portion of the beam outside the link when the total story drift is equal
to the design drift.
Area k – Area located on the web and at the junction of the web with the flange, measured from the point of tangency on the web and
the fillet joining the flange and web, to a distance of 38 mm measured on the web a from the point of tangency. In this zone the
toughness is frequently lower than in the rest of the section.
Diagonal Bracing — A sloped structural member that bears primarily axial load and is used to enable a structural frame to act as a
truss to resist horizontal loads.
ASTM — American Society for Testing of Materials
F-209
Face Stiffeners — Stiffeners welded to structural steel beams embedded in reinforced concrete columns or walls. The plates are
located on the face of the reinforced concrete to provide confinement and transfer loads to the concrete through direct contact.
Construction Reinforcing Bars — Reinforcing steel in composite members that is not designed to transmit loads, but rather to
facilitate construction or provide anchorage to abutments. Generally, such reinforcement does not require overlaps to be continuous.
Column Base — Set of plates, connectors, bolts and anchors at the base of the column, used to transmit the forces between the
steel superstructure and the foundation.
Amplified seismic load — It is the horizontal component of the seismic load E multiplied by ÿo .
Full Charge Cycle — A rotation cycle taken from zero charge to zero charge, including a positive and a negative peak.
Composite Column — Section of structural steel embedded or filled with concrete, which is used as a column.
Embedded Composite Column — Structural steel column fully embedded in reinforced concrete.
Closing Column — Vertical strut connecting the intersection of a brace in a V -braced frame
inverted, from one level to another.
Exempt Column — Column that need not meet the requirements of Equation F.3.5.3-1 for PRM-DES.
Concrete-Filled Composite Columns — Structural, circular or rectangular hollow sections filled with concrete.
Partially Restrained Composite Connection — A partially restrained connection, as defined in Section F.2.2.3.5.2.2, that connects
partially or fully composite beams to steel columns with a flexural strength provided by a couple formed by the steel. of reinforcement
of the concrete plate and a connection of seat angle or similar in the lower flange of the beam.
Tested connection — Connection that meets the requirements of section F.3.10.2.
Prequalified Connection — A connection that meets the requirements of section F.3.10.1.
DES — Seismic systems with special energy dissipation capacity — Seismic system designed to withstand significant inelastic
action caused in some members due to the design earthquake.
DMI — Seismic systems with minimum energy dissipation capacity — Seismic system designed to withstand a limited inelastic
action that is caused in some members due to the design earthquake.
DMO — Seismic systems with moderate energy dissipation capacity — Seismic system designed to withstand a moderate
inelastic action that is caused in some members by the design earthquake.
Collecting element — Member that serves to transfer loads between the floor diaphragm and the members of the seismic resistance
system.
Horizontal Edge Element — A beam connected to one or more web plates in an MCA system.
Intermediate Edge Element — A member other than a beam or column that provides strength for a web plate adjacent to an opening
in MCA systems.
Vertical Edge Element — A column connected to one or more web plates in an MCA system.
F-210
Expected Yield Stress — The yield stress of the material, equal to the specified minimum yield stress, Fy , multiplied by
Ry .
Brace Test Specimen — An isolated element of a restrained buckling brace used for laboratory testing intended to model
the brace on the prototype.
Seismic response modification factor, R — Factor that reduces the effects of seismic load at the resistance level as
specified in Title A of these standards.
Strength factor, ÿ — Factor that takes into account the unavoidable deviations of the actual strength from the nominal
and the type and consequences of failure.
Overresistance Factor, ÿo — Factor specified by this standard for the purpose of determining the amplified seismic load.
MCA — Special Energy Dissipation Steel Plate Shear Walls — Shear wall systems that meet the requirements of
Section F.3.8.5.
MCAC — Steel Plate Shear Walls, Composite —Shear wall systems that meet the requirements of Section F.3.8.6.
MCC — DES — Shear walls composed of reinforced concrete and structural steel profiles, with special energy
dissipation capacity — Composite shear walls that meet the requirements of section F.3.8.5.
MCC — DMI — Shear walls composed of reinforced concrete and structural steel profiles, with minimum energy
dissipation capacity — Composite shear walls that meet the requirements of section F.3.8.4.
Bracing Member — A member that provides stiffness and strength to control out-of-plane movement of another framing
member at the braced points.
Edge Member — That portion of the edge of a wall or diaphragm that is reinforced with structural steel members or
longitudinal and transverse reinforcing steel.
Lateral Bracing Members — A member designed to prevent lateral or lateral torsional buckling of the main members of
a frame.
High ductility member — Member requested by large plastic rotations (greater than 0.02rad) under the design earthquake.
Member of moderate ductility — Member requested j moderate plastic rotations (0.02 rad or less) under design
earthquake.
Composite Shear Wall — A wall consisting of a steel sheet encased with concrete on one or both faces, providing out-of-
plane stiffness to prevent local buckling of the steel sheet, and meeting the requirements of Section F.3.8. 6.
Steel Core — The element of the braces that resists the axial force in PAPR. The steel core comprises a yield segment
and the connections to transfer its axial force to the joining elements; projections outside the lining and transition segments
between the projections and the flowing segment could also be included.
PA — Braced Frame — System consisting essentially of a vertical truss that provides resistance to lateral forces and
stability to the structural system.
F-211
PACC — DMI — Braced Composite Frame with Minimum Energy Dissipation Capacity — Braced Composite Frame
that meets the requirements of Section F.3.8.1.
PACC — DES — Concentrically Braced Composite Frame with Special Energy Dissipation Capability — Braced
Composite Frame that meets the requirements of Section F.3.8.2.
PAC — DES — Concentrically Braced Frame with Special Energy Dissipation — A braced frame where all members
of the bracing system are stressed primarily by axial forces, and which shall meet the requirements of F.3.6.2.
PAC — DMI — Minimal Energy Dissipation Concentrically Braced Frame — A braced frame where all members of the
bracing system are stressed primarily by axial forces, and which shall meet the requirements of F.3.6.1.
ECP — Eccentrically Braced Frame — A diagonally braced frame in which at least one end of each brace is connected
to the beam, a short distance from a beam-to-column connection or another beam-to-brace connection. The eccentrically
braced frame shall meet the requirements of F.3.6.3.
PAEC — Eccentrically Braced Composite Frame — A braced composite frame that meets the requirements of Section
F.3.8.3.
PAPR — Restrained Buckling Braced Frame — Diagonally braced frame meeting the requirements of Section F.3.6.4, in
which all members of the bracing system are stressed primarily by axial forces and in which the limit state of Compression
buckling of the braces is prevented for forces and strains corresponding to 2 times the design story drift.
PCD — Frames with ductile trusses — Moment-resistant frames with ductile lattice truss whose central section, called
the special segment, is designed to act as an energy dissipating element, so that all elements other than the special
segment remain in elastic range , and that meets the requirements of section F.3.5.4.
Composite Plate — Concrete plate cast on a cooperating sheet, which acts as a diaphragm and transfers the loads to the
elements of the seismic resistance system.
Continuity plates — These are column stiffeners at the top and bottom of the panel zone; also known as transverse
stiffeners.
Material Test Plates — Test specimen from which test coupons are machined to determine mechanical properties.
K -braced frame — A configuration in which the braces are attached to the column outside the diaphragm or at another
point where there are no restrictions on movement outside the plane of the bracing.
X - braced frame — A concentrically braced frame (with special or minimal energy dissipation capability), where a pair of
diagonal braces intersect at approximately the midpoint of the bracing.
V - braced frame — A concentrically braced frame in which a pair of diagonal braces located above or below a beam
connect to a single point within the beam span. When the diagonal braces are connected below to the beam it is also often
called an inverted V braced frame .
Y - Bracked Frame — Eccentrically braced frame, where the stem of the Y is the link of the eccentrically braced frame
system.
PRMC — DES — Moment-resisting composite frame with special energy dissipation capacity —
Composite moment-resisting frame that meets the requirements of Section F.3.7.3.
PRMC — DMI — Moment Resisting Composite Frame with Minimum Energy Dissipation Capability —
Composite moment-resisting frame that meets the requirements of Section F.3.7.1.
F-212
PRMC — DMO — Moment Resisting Composite Frame with Moderate Energy Dissipation Capability
— Moment-resisting composite frame that meets the requirements of Section F.3.7.2.
PRMC — PR — Partially Restrained Moment-Resisting Composite Frame — Moment-resisting composite frame that
meets the requirements of Section F.3.7.4.
PRM — DES — Moment-Resisting Frame with Special Energy Dissipation — Moment-resisting frame system that
meets the requirements of Section F.3.5.3.
PRM — DMI — Moment-Resisting Frame with Minimal Energy Dissipation — Moment-Resisting Frame System that
meets the requirements of Section F.3.5.1
PRM — DMO — Moment-Resisting Frame with Moderate Energy Dissipation — Moment-Resisting Frame System that
meets the requirements of Section F.3.5.2
PTE — Structural Hollow Sections
Prototype — Design of the connection or brace to be used in the building.
Load Transfer Reinforcement — Composite member reinforcement that is designed and detailed to resist required loads.
Adjusted Brace Strength — The strength of a brace in PAPR for strains corresponding to 2 times the design story drift.
Design Strength — Resistance (either force, moment, or stress, as appropriate) supplied by an element or a connection;
is the product of the nominal resistance multiplied by the coefficient of resistance, Rn ÿ .
Link Shear Design Strength — The minimum link shear design strength developed by the link moment or shear strength.
Expected Yield Strength — Tensile yield strength of a member, which is equal to the expected yield stress multiplied by
the gross area of the member, Ag .
Expected Tensile Strength — The tensile strength of a member, which is equal to the specified minimum tensile stress,
Fu , multiplied by Rt .
Static Yield Strength — The strength of a structural member or connection determined on the basis of tests performed
using slowly applied monotonic loads until failure.
Nominal Strength — Strength of the structure or its components (not including strength factor) to counteract the effects of
applied loading in accordance with these specifications.
Required Strength — Forces, stresses, and strains produced in a structural component, determined by structural analysis
using applicable load combinations.
Brace Liner for PAPR — Element that resists forces transverse to the axis of the brace, thereby restricting buckling of the
steel core. The lining requires means of transmission of this force to the rest of the system restricted to buckling. The liner
resists little or no forces on the axis of the brace.
Intermediate Link Web Stiffeners — Vertical web stiffeners placed inside the link in PAE.
Composite Brace — Section of structural steel embedded or filled with concrete, which is used as a brace.
F-213
Restrained Buckling Brace — A precast element consisting of a steel core and a system that prevents buckling as
described in F.3.6.4 and qualified by a test in accordance with F.3.10.3.
Plastic Hinge — Zone of plasticization that forms in a structural member when the plastic moment is reached to continue
rotating as if it were hinged.
Reduced Beam Section — A reduction in the cross section of the beam over a given length that creates a zone of
inelastic behavior in the member.
Design earthquake — It is the earthquake represented by the response of the design spectrum in accordance with title A
of this Regulation.
Seismic load resistance system — It is that part of the structure that, according to the design, provides the resistance
required to resist seismic loads, including elements such as props, collectors, diaphragms and trusses.
Buckling Restraint System — System with restraints that limit buckling of the steel core in frames with buckling restrained
bracing (PAPR). This system comprises the lining of the steel core and the structural elements attached to their
connections. The buckling restraint system is intended to allow transverse expansion and longitudinal contraction of the
steel core for strains corresponding to 2 times the design story drift.
Welding with critical demand — Welding whose demand for inelastic deformations and the consequence of its failure in
the seismic resistance system requires special quality control.
SRS — Seismic Resistance System.
SCV — DMI — SRS in which the seismic forces are resisted by one or more columns cantilevered from the foundation or
lower diaphragm level and meeting the requirements of F.3.5.5.
SCV — DES — SRS in which the seismic forces are resisted by one or more columns cantilevered from the foundation or
lower diaphragm level and meeting the requirements of F.3.5.6.
Minimum Anticipated Service Temperature — The minimum average temperature in one hour with a recurrence interval
of 100 years.
Composite beam — Structural steel beam that works in a composite section with reinforced concrete, either by bonding
or by shear connectors.
Embedded Composite Beam — Structural steel beam fully embedded in reinforced concrete.
Unembedded Composite Beam — A composite beam in which the steel section is not completely embedded in reinforced
concrete and is provided with mechanical connectors for composite action with either the reinforced concrete plate or the
plate with colaborative sheet.
Coupler Beam — A structural or composite steel beam that connects adjacent reinforced concrete walls so that they act
together to resist lateral forces.
Partially Composite Beam — Unembedded composite beams with a nominal flexural strength controlled by the strength
of the shear connectors.
Fully Composite Beam — A composite beam having a sufficient number of shear connectors to develop the nominal
plastic flexural strength of the composite section.
Link — In eccentrically braced frames is the beam segment, located between the end of a diagonal brace and a column
or between the ends of two diagonal braces of the braced frame
F-214
NSR-10 – Chapter F.3 – Seismic provisions for steel structures with
rolled, reinforced sections and structural tubing
eccentrically. The link length is defined as the free distance between the ends of the diagonal brace and the face of the
column or between the ends of the two diagonal braces.
Panel Zone — Web area in a beam-to-column connection bounded by the beam and column flanges.
Protected zone — Sector of the member in which limitations on the manufacture and location of accessories must be
met.
F.3.1.3 — SYMBOLOGY
The following nomenclature applies in this Chapter.
Ab = cross-sectional area of a horizontal border element, mm2

And = cross-sectional area of a vertical edge element, mm2
Of = area of the member flange, mm2
At = gross area, mm2
Call = web area of the link (not including wings), mm2
As = cross-sectional area of the steel core, mm2
As = area of transfer reinforcement in a coupling beam mm2
Asc = area of the yield segment of the steel core, mm2
Ash = minimum stirrup area, mm2
Asp = horizontal area of stiffened steel plate for composite steel walls, mm2
Ast = area of link stiffener, mm2
Atb = area of transfer reinforcement in coupling beams, mm2
That = ratio between the required resistance and the design resistance =
Cd coefficient that relates the relative stiffness of the brace and its curvature =
D
dead load due to the self-weight of the elements of the structure and of all construction materials or equipment
permanently incorporated to it, N = external diameter of round
D
structural hollow sections PTE, mm = design seismic force = modulus of
AND elasticity of steel 200 000
AND MPa = minimum specified yield strength of the
My type of steel to be used, MPa
Fyb = Fy of a beam, MPa
Fyc = Fy of a column, MPa =
Phew specified minimum yield strength of the stirrups = specified
Misc minimum yield strength of the steel core, or actual yield strength of the
steel core as determined in a test, MPa
It was = minimum specified tensile strength, MPa = story
H height, which can be taken as the vertical distance between consecutive horizontal center lines of the frame or
as the vertical distance between the tops of consecutive story slabs, mm = free story height , which
Hc can be taken as the distance between the bottom of the flange of the beam above and the top of the flange of
the beam below, or the top of the slab, if any,
mm
l = moment of inertia, mm4
I c = moment of inertia of a vertical edge element (EBV) taken perpendicular to the direction of the
web plate line = effective
K
length coefficient for prismatic members = center center distance
L of vertical edge elements, mm = truss span, mm
L
F-215
Lb = length between bracing points to control the lateral displacement of the compression flange or the
torsion of the cross section, mm
Lcf = free distance between flanges of vertical edge elements (EBV), mm = embed
The distance of the coupling beam, mm = distance between
Lh plastic hinges, mm = limit length without transversal
Lp bracing that allows the development of plastic resistance to bending,
with uniform moment, mm =
limiting length without transverse bracing for plastic analysis, mm
Lpd = length of the special segment, mm Ls Mn =
nominal flexural resistance, N-mm Mnc = nominal
flexural resistance of the chord of the special segment, N-mm MnPR = nominal flexural
resistance of a partially restrained connection for a rotation of 0.02rad, mm Mp = nominal plastic moment in bending, N-mm Mpc =
nominal plastic moment in bending modified by axial load, N-
*
mm Mpb = nominal plastic moment in bending of the beam, N-mm Mpc = nominal plastic
resistance to column flexure, N-mm Mpcc = nominal flexural strength of a
reinforced concrete or composite column considering the required axial strength,
*
N-mm = expected plastic moment, N-mm
Mp esp
Mp = expected flexural strength at the intersection of the beam and column axes ,
N-mm
Mr esp = expected flexural strength, N-mm

Mu = required flexural strength, N-mm = expected
In esp required flexural strength, N-mm
Muv = additional moment caused by the amplification of the shear from the plastic hinge to the axis of the
column, N-mm =
Pb required resistance of lateral bracing at the end of the link, N = design axial resistance of
Pb the wall for the balanced condition, N = design axial resistance of a column, N
Pc
Pn = nominal axial resistance of a column, N

Pn = nominal compressive strength of the composite column calculated in accordance with Chapter F.2, N = nominal axial
Pnc compressive strength of diagonal members of the special segment, N = nominal axial tensile strength of
Pnt diagonal members of the special segment, N = nominal axial strength of a composite column with zero
P0 eccentricity, N = required compressive strength, N = required axial strength of a column =
Pr required axial compression strength of a
Could column, N = nominal axial yield strength of a member ,
N
puc = F Ay g = axial yield strength of the steel core, N

Py ,
N
Mouth
Q1 = axial forces and moments generated by at least 1.25 times the expected nominal shear strength
of the link
R = seismic coefficient of response modification = radius of a
R hole in a beam web, mm = nominal strength of a member, N
Rn
Rt = ratio of expected tensile strength to specified minimum tensile strength Fu = required strength, N
Ru
F-216
Rv = nominal shear strength in the panel zone, N = ratio of the

Ry expected yield strength Fye to the specified minimum yield strength
of the type of steel to be used, Fy = nominal
Vn comp shear resistance of a coupling beam, N = nominal shear resistance
Vn of a member, N = expected vertical shear resistance of
Vne the special segment, N = nominal shear resistance of steel plate for
Vns composite steel shear walls, N = nominal shear strength of an active link, N
Vp
Vpa = nominal shear strength of an active link, modified by the magnitude of the axial load, N
See = required shear strength of a member, N = distance from
Ycon the top of the steel beam to the top of the concrete slab or
coating, mm,
YPNA = maximum distance from the fiber at maximum compression in the concrete to the plastic neutral axis, mm
WITH
= plastic section modulus of a member, mm3
Zb = plastic section modulus of a beam, mm3
Zc = plastic section modulus of a column, mm3
Zx = plastic section modulus with respect to the x axis ,
mm3
ZRBS = minimum plastic section modulus in the reduced section of the beam, mm3
b = width of a compression member, mm = width of
bcf a column flange, mm = width of the flange,
bf mm = width of the concrete
bw cross section minus the width of the steel profile measured perpendicular to the
direction of shear, mm =
bw width of wall, mm = depth
d
of beam, mm = depth of
dc column, mm = nominal diameter of
dp bolt, mm
dz = total height of the panel area between continuity plates, mm = length of
It is
the link in an eccentrically braced frame, mm = free distance between wings
h
minus the fillet or corner radius for rolled profiles; for reinforced profiles, the distance between lines of adjacent bolts or the
free distance between flanges when welding is used; for T -sections the total height; and for rectangular PTEs, the
clear distance between fins minus the inside radius of the corners on each side, mm = distance between center axes
,
of horizontal edge elements, mm = distance between centroids

h
of fins, mm
ho
hcc = distance in cross section of confined core in composite columns measured center to center
of the transverse reinforcement, mm
l = unbraced length between connectors of reinforced bracing members, mm = unbraced length of
l compression or bracing members, mm = governing radius of gyration, mm = radius of
r gyration about the y-axis, mm = spacing
the of transverse reinforcement measured along
s
the longitudinal axis of the composite member, mm = thickness of the connected part, mm = thickness of the element, mm
t
= thickness of the web of the column or
t
veneer plates, mm ,F.3.1.8 =
t thickness of the flange of a beam, mm = effective thickness of the web plate,
t bf
mm = thickness of the flange of a column,
t
eff mm = thickness of the flange, mm
t
cf
t
f
F-217
pt = thickness of the panel zone including the veneer plates, mm = thickness

wt of the web, mm = width of
wz the panel zone between the column flanges, mm
ZRBS = minimum plastic section modulus in the reduced section of the beam, mm3
ÿ Atb = total area of the transfer reinforcement, mm²
*
ÿMpc = moment at the intersection of the axis of the beam and that of the column, determined by the sum of the
Projected nominal plastic moments of column, reduced by axial force PA top and bottom of uc
,
from
g
connection to beam moment, N-mm. ÿMpb = moment at the

*
intersection of the central axes of the beam and column, determined by the projection
of the maximum moments developed in the beam, measured at the face of the column.
the maximum moments developed must be obtained from the results of the tests, N-mm ÿMpcc = sum of
*
the nominal flexural resistances of the composite column, above and below the joint, in the
intersection of the axes of the beam and column, N-mm.
*
ÿMp esp = sum of the expected flexural resistance of the steel or embedded beams at the intersection of the
axis of the beam and column, N-
a mm. = angle of diagonal members with the horizontal =
a angle of web yield, in radians, measured with respect to the vertical =
b compressive strength adjustment factor, = design
D story drift, mm = strain used for
b stress control load of test specimens (total rotation of the end of the brace for the assembly of the test specimen;
total axial deflection in the bracing for the test specimen), mm
ÿbm = strain, ÿb , corresponding to the design drift, mm = strain, ÿb ,

ÿby
at the first significant yield of the specimen, mm = overresistance factor for
ÿo ÿ the horizontal component of the earthquake = strain used to control the
ÿÿ loading of the specimens = ratio of the stress due to the required
axial resistance P /A in g
and stress due to resistance to
required shear V /A
your
of a link
ÿhd , ÿmd = slenderness limit parameters for compression members of high and moderate ductility, respectively =
resistance factor
f
f b
= resistance factor for bending =
f c
resistance factor for compression = factor
f in
of shear resistance of the panel zone for beam-to-column connections = factor of shear
f in
resistance
fi = story drift angle in radians = link rotation
total c angle = strain hardening adjustment
oh factor
F.3.1.4.1— Material Specifications — Steel used in seismic load resisting systems shall meet the requirements
specified in F.3.1, except as modified in this section.
The specified yield strength for steel members in which inelastic behavior is expected shall not exceed 345 MPa
for structural systems as defined in F.3.5, F.3.6, F.3.7, F.3.8 or 380 MPa for the systems defined in F.3.5.1 and
F.3.6.1, F.3.7.1, F.3.8.1 and F.3.8.4 unless the behavior of the material is properly tested and certified, except
that the minimum yield stress of steel shall not exceed 450MPa for columns in systems defined in sections
F.3.5.3, F.3.5.4, F.3.7.3, F.3.8.1, F.3.8.2, F.3.8.3 and for columns in all systems of F.3.6.
F-218
The steel used in the seismic load resisting systems described in F.3.5, F.3.6, F.3.7 and F.3.8 shall be limited to those that
meet one of the following NTC 1920 (ASTM A36/A36M) specifications, ( ASTM A53/A53M), NTC 1986 (ASTM A500 Grades
B or C), NTC 2374 (ASTM A501),(ASTM A529/A529M), NTC 1985 (ASTM A572/A572M Grades 42, 50 or 55), NTC 2012
(ASTM A588/A588M), (ASTM A913/A913M Grades 50, 60 or 65), (ASTM A992/A992M), (ASTM A1011 Grade 55), (ASTM
A1043/A1043M) . Steel used for column base plates must comply with one of the preceding NTC (or ASTM) specifications,
or with NTC2633 (ASTM A283/A283M Grade D).
Other steels or materials are permitted in PAPR as long as the requirements of sections F.3.6.4 and F.3.11.3 are met.
F.3.1.4.2 — Expected Strength of Material — When called for in these requirements, the required strength of an element,
member, or connection shall be determined from the expected yield strength R Fy and of the member or adjacent member,
as applicable. , where Fy is the minimum yield strength specified for the steel grade to be used in the member, and Ry is the
ratio of the expected yield stress to the minimum yield stress Fy .
When it is required to determine the nominal resistance, Rn , for limit states in the same member in which the required
resistance is determined, it is allowed to use the expected yield stress, R Fy y , and the expected resistance at break, R Ft
in , instead of Fy and Fu , respectively, where Fu is the specified minimum tensile
strength and Rt is the ratio of the expected tensile strength to the minimum tensile strength Fu of that material.
There are several cases in which a member or a limit state at the connection of that member must be designed for forces
corresponding to the expected strength of the material. Such cases involve the determination of the nominal resistance Rn
of the beam outside the link in PAE, limit states of failure in diagonal braces (shear block and net area failures in PAC –
DES), etc. In such cases it is permissible to use the expected strength of the material in determining the design strength of
the member. For connected elements and other members the specified strength of the material must be used.
The values of Ry and Rt for various steels and concretes are shown in Table F.3.1.4 -1. The use of other values of Ry and
Rt is permitted if they are determined by similar tests on dimensions and provenance of the material used, in accordance
with the requirements for the specified steel grade.
Tabla F.3.1.4-1
Ry and Rt values for steels and concrete
Application Ry Rt
Hot rolled sections in bars:
• ASTM A36/A36M • ASTM 1.5 1.2
A1043/A1043M Grado 36 • ASTM A572/572M 1.3 1.1
Grado 50 o 55, • ASTM A913/A913M Grado 50, 1.1 1.1
60 o 65 • ASTM A588/A588M, 1.1 1.1
1.1 1.1
ASTM A992/A992M, A1011 HSLAS Grado 55 • ASTM 1.1 1.1
A1043/A1043M Grado 50 • ASTM A529 Grado 1.2 1.1
50 • ASTM A529 Grado 55 1.2 1.2
1.1 1.2
Structural Hollow Sections (STE): • ASTM A500
(Grade B or C), ASTM A 501 1.4 1.3
Steel pipe:
• ASTM A53/A53M 1.6 1.2
F-219
NSR-10 – Chapter F.3 – Seismic provisions for steel structures with rolled, reinforced
sections and structural tubing

Ry and Rt values for steels and concrete
Application Ry Rt
Plates and sheets: •

ASTM A36/A36M 1.3 1.2
• ASTM A1043/A1043M Grado 36 1.3 1.1
• ASTM 1011 HSLA Grade 50 1.1 1.1
• ASTM A572/A572M Grade 42 1.3 1.0
• ASTM A572/A572M Grade 50 o 55, • ASTM A588/ 1.1 1.2
A588M 1.1 1.2
Reinforcing steel: •
1.25 1.25
ASTM A615, A706
To see To see
Concrete: •
ASCE/SEI ASCE/SEI
Structural concrete
41-06 41-06
F.3.1.4.3 — Heavy sections — In addition to the requirements of section F.2.3.1.3, when using members in the seismic resistance system
with flanges 38 mm thick or greater, and plates with thickness greater than 50 mm , shall have a minimum V-notch Charpy test toughness
of 27 Nm at 21ºC, measured at locations permitted by ASTM A673, Frequency P, when the plate is used for the following:
(a) Members made of plates. (b) Connection

plates where seismic loading is expected, such as gussets that act as hinges to allow out-of-plane buckling of diagonal braces,
some bolted cover plates for moment connections, some end plates for moment connections, bolted moment, and some
column base plates designed as pin. (c) The steel core in PAPR.
F.3.1.4.4 — Welding consumables
F.3.1.4.4.1— Seismic Resistive System Welds — All welds used in seismic resistance members and connections shall be made
with filler metals meeting the requirements specified in Table F.3.1.4 - 2.
Table F.3.1.4-2
Properties for filler metal classification in welds of seismic resistance systems
Classification
Properties
480 MPa 550 MPa
Yield strength, (MPa) 400 min 470 min
Ultimate Strength, (MPa) 480 min 550 min
Elongation, % 22 min 19 min
Charpy Tenacity, (J) 27 min @ - 18°Approx
a
Filler metals rated to meet 27 J min at temperatures less than -18°C also meet this requirement.
In addition to the above, welds that are designated as critical demand must be made with filler metals that meet the requirements
specified in table F.3.1.4 -3
F-220
Table F.3.1.4-3
Mechanical properties for critical demand welds
Classification
Properties
480 MPa 550 MPa
Yield strength, (MPa) 400 min 470 min
Ultimate Strength, (MPa) 480 min 550 min
Elongation, % 22 min 19 min
Charpy Tenacity, (J) 54 min @ 20°Cb,c
b
For expected minimum service temperature of 10°C. For lower temperatures consult AWS D 1.8,
numeral 6.3.6.
c
Tests performed in accordance with AWS D 1.8 annex A that meet 54 J at temperatures less than
20°C also meet these requirements.
F.3.1.4.5 — Concrete and reinforcing steel — Concrete and reinforcing steel used in DMO and DES composite seismic-
resisting systems, in Sections F.3.7.2, F.3.7.3, F.3.7 .4, F.3.8.2, F.3.8.3, F.3.8.5, and F.3.8.6 shall meet the requirements
of Title C, Chapter 21. Concrete and reinforcing steel used in strength systems Seismic DMI composites in sections
F.3.7.1, F.3.8.1, and F.3.8.4 shall meet the requirements of C.21.1.1.5
F.3.1.5 — STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
F.3.1.5.1 — General — Structural drawings shall include the information specified in A.1.5.2.1, as well as the following
information:
(a) Designation of the seismic load resistance system. (b)

Designation of the members and connections that are part of the load resistance system
seismic.
(c) Location and dimensions of protected areas. (d) Connection
details between the diaphragm and the steel elements in the resistance system
seismic.
(e) Workshop and assembly plans not indicated in section F.3.9.1.
F.3.1.5.2 — Steel structures — In addition to what was requested in the previous numeral, the structural plans and the
specifications for steel structures must include the following concepts:
(a) Configuration of the connections. (b)

Specifications and sizes of connecting material. (c) Location of
critical demand welds. (d) Location of connection plates
that must be detailed to allow for inelastic rotations. (e) Location of connection plates requiring Charpy
toughness in accordance with section
F.3.1.4.3.
(f) Minimum expected service temperature of the steel structure, if the structure were not coated and maintained
at a temperature of 10°C or higher.
(g) Sites where backing plates must be removed. (h) Locations where
supplementary fillet welds are required where the backing plate can be left in place. (i) Location where fillet welds
must be used to
reinforce butt welds to
improve the geometry of the connection.
(j) Location where weld extensions are to be removed. (k) Location of splices
where gradual transitions are required. (l) The geometry of the welding access holes, in
case they are special. (m) Joints or groups of joints in which a specific order of assembly, sequence of
welding, soldering technique or other special precautions.
F.3.1.5.3 — Composite construction — In addition to what is requested in numeral F.3.1.5.1, and the requirements of
the previous numeral, if applicable to steel components in reinforced concrete or composite elements, the structural plans
and specifications for composite construction must include the following concepts:
F-221
(a) Location of reinforcing steel, cuts, laps and mechanical splices, hooks and anchors
mechanical, stirrups and other cross reinforcements.
(b) Requirements for dimensional change resulting from temperature changes and shrinkage. (c)
Location, magnitude, and sequence of any applied prestressing or poststressing. (d) Location of
headed steel anchors and anchors with welded reinforcing steel.
F.3.2 — GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

This numeral establishes the general requirements for the seismic design of steel structures used under this Chapter.
F.3.2.1 — General seismic design requirements.

F.3.2.2 — Loads, Load Combinations, and Nominal Resistances
F.3.2.3 — System Type
F.3.2.1 — GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
F.3.2.1.1 — Seismic hazard zones — The requirements for structures made with rolled structural steel sections
given in this Title of this Regulation must be applied in each of the seismic hazard zones, as defined in A.2.3. of
Title A, thus:
F.3.2.1.1.1 — Zones of low seismic threat — Structures made with steel profiles and their elements,
located in zones of low seismic threat, as defined in A.2.3.1, must meet the requirements of Title A of this
Regulation with the limitations given in Chapter A.3 and as a minimum must be structures with minimum
energy dissipation capacity (DMI) as defined by F.3.2.1.2.1, although the use of structures of structural
steel with moderate dissipation capacity (DMO) and special (DES).
F.3.2.1.1.2 — Intermediate seismic hazard zones — Structures made with steel profiles and their
elements, located in intermediate seismic hazard zones, as defined in A.2.3.2 must meet the requirements
of Title A. of this Regulation with the limitations given in Chapter A.3 and at least must be structures with
moderate energy dissipation capacity (DMO) as defined by F.3.2.1.2.2, although the use of structures
with capacity special energy dissipation (DES).
F.3.2.1.1.3 — Zones of high seismic threat — Structures made with steel profiles and their elements,
located in zones of high seismic threat, as defined in A.2.3.3 must meet the requirements of Title A. of
this Regulation with the limitations given in Chapter A.3 and can only be structures with special energy
dissipation capacity (DES) as defined by F.3.2.1.2.3.
F.3.2.1.2 — Energy dissipation capacity requirements — The energy dissipation capacity in the inelastic range
of structures made with steel profiles designed in accordance with the requirements of Title F of this Regulation,
is defined as follows manner:
F.3.2.1.2.1 — Minimum energy dissipation capacity (DMI) — That offered by structural steel elements
when designed in accordance with the requirements of Chapters F.1 and F.2 of these standards, as well
as the F.3.1.10 for moment-resisting frames and F.3.1.13 for concentrically braced frames.
F.3.2.1.2.2 — Moderate energy dissipation capacity (MOD) — That offered by structural steel members
when designed in accordance with the requirements of Chapters F.1 and F.2 and in addition the
requirements are met of F.3.1.9 for frames resisting moments.
F.3.2.1.2.3 — Special energy dissipation capacity (DES) — That offered by structural steel elements
when designed in accordance with the requirements of Chapters F.1 and F.2 and
F-222
In addition, the requirements of F.3.1.8 for frames resistant to moments F.3.1.11 for frames with ductile trusses,
F.3.1.12 for concentric braced frames, F.3.1.14 for eccentric braced frames, F.3.1 are met. .15 for frames with
restrained buckling braces and F.3.1.16 for structures with steel plate shear walls.
F.3.2.2 — LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS, AND REQUIRED STRENGTH
F.3.2.2.1 — Loads and load combinations — The loads and load combinations stipulated in B.2.4 shall be taken into account.
In addition, the following requirements shall be fulfilled: Orthogonal effects of the earthquake
shall be included in the analysis according to A.3.6.3 unless otherwise specified.
When in this Chapter it is requested to carry out the revisions with amplified seismic loads, the horizontal component of the
load of the earthquake E, obtained in accordance with Title A of these standards, will be multiplied by the coefficient of
overresistance ÿo defined in A. 3.3.9.
F.3.2.2.2 — Required Strength — The required strength of structural members and their connections shall be the
greater of: (a) The required
strength determined by structural analysis with combinations
appropriate load of Title B, and numeral F.3.3. (b) The
required strength given in F.3.4, F.3.5, F.3.6, F.3.7 and F.3.8.
F.3.2.3 — SYSTEM TYPE — The seismic resistance system must contain one or more PRM, PAC or MC according to the seismic
system requirements specified in F.3.4, F.3.5, F.3.6, F. 3.7 and F.3.8.
F.3.3 — ANALYSIS
This numeral establishes the requirements related to the analysis.
F.3.3.1 — General requirements.

F.3.3.2 — Additional requirements
F.3.3.3 — Nonlinear analysis.
F.3.3.1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS — An analysis shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Title B and Chapter
F.2.
When designing based on elastic analysis, member stiffness properties in steel systems should be based on elastic sections, and
composite systems should include the effects of cracked sections.
F.3.3.2 — ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS — Additional analyzes must be performed as specified in F.3.5, F.3.6, F.3.7 and F.3.8.
F.3.3.3 — NONLINEAR ANALYSIS — When nonlinear analysis is performed to satisfy the requirements of this Chapter, it must be
performed in accordance with Title F.2.
F.3.4 — GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
This numeral establishes the requirements related to the design of members and connections
F.3.4.1 — Member requirements F.3.4.2 —

Connections F.3.4.3 —
Deformation compatibility for non-BSS members and connections.
F.3.4.4 — Steel piles
F-223
F.3.4.1 — REQUIREMENTS FOR MEMBERS — Members of the PRM, PAC and MC structures of the SRS must meet
F.3.4.1.1 — Classification of sections by ductility — Some BSS members in which inelastic deformations are
expected under the design earthquake are classified in this section as members with moderate ductility or
members with high ductility. When required for the systems described in F.3.5, F.3.6, F.3.7, F.3.8 and F.3.4.4,
these members shall comply with this section.
F.3.4.1.1.1 — Section requirements in ductile members — Steel shapes in members with moderate
ductility and high ductility must have flanges continuously connected to the web or webs. Embedded
composite columns shall meet the requirements of F.3.4.1.4.2.1 for moderate ductility members and
F.3.4.1.4.2.2 for high ductility members.
Concrete-filled composite columns shall meet the requirements of F.3.4.1.4.3 for members with moderate
and high ductility. Reinforced concrete members must meet Title C requirements.
F.3.4.1.1.2 — Width limits — thickness of steel or composite profiles — For members classified as
moderate ductility, the slenderness of the compression elements must be less than the slenderness limits
ÿdm , from table F.3.4- 1. For members classified as highly ductile, the slenderness of the compression
elements must be less than ÿda , from table F.3.4-1.
Table F.3.4-1
Limit values of the Width-Thickness Ratio for Compression Elements
limit slendernesses
Width -
ÿda ÿdm
item description thickness Example
ratio High ductility Members of
members moderate ductility
Fins of rolled profiles channels and

, Sections in IT .
Single or double angle fins with bt 0.30 IF and

0.38 EF and
spacers.
Unstiffened
Elements
Protruding fins of pairs of angles in

continuous contact
H -shaped steel pile flanges (F.3.4.4) bt 0.45 EF and

THAT
[a]
T section webs dt 0.30 EF yr 0.38 EF and
F-224
Table F.3 4-1 (continued)

Limit Values of the Width-Thickness Ratio for Compression Elements
limit slendernesses
Width -
ÿda ÿdm
item description Example
thickness ratio High ductility Members of
members moderate ductility
Rectangular PTE walls bt

Fins in sections of
boxed I profiles or assembled bt
drawers [b] []c
0.55 EF yr 0.64 EF and
Side plates I profiles

boxes and walls of reinforced ht
boxes used as diagonals
Webs of rolled or I -reinforced For C 0.125

ÿ For C 0.125
ÿ
a
profiles used as h tw
a
[]d
2.45 E Fy (1 0.93C ÿ a ) 3.76 E Fy (1 2.75C ÿ a )
beams and columns
For C 0.125
>
a For C 0.125
>
a
Lateral plates in I profiles 0.77 E F 2.93 -( C y

ht a) 1.12 EF 2.33
( - C is )
boxed used as beams and
columns ÿ 1.49 IF ÿ 1.49 IF
and and
Webs of reinforced box P

in
P
in
where: = where: =
ht C C
elements
stiffened
sections used for beams and a

P
a
P
columns Phi
by Phi
by
I -shaped webs
laminated or reinforced used h tw 1.49 EF y 1.49 IF and
as riostras
Steel pile webs in 0.94 EF

H h tw and
THAT
Circular PTE walls Dt 0.038E F and 0.044E F [It is]
and
Filled Rectangular
bt 1.4 IF 2.26 IF
Member Walls and and
compound
elements
Walls of filled round Dt 0.076E F 0.15E F

members and and
F-225
[]a
For T sections in compression, the limit width - thickness ratio for the web can be increased up to: 0.38 EF and
If the following two conditions are met:

(1) Buckling of the compression member occurs about the plane of the web of the tee
(2) The compressive load is transferred in the end connections only to the outer face of the flange of the tee, resulting in a connection
eccentric that transmits reduced compression forces at the tip of the web.
[]b
The limit width - thickness ratio of fins of boxed I profiles or reinforced box profiles for columns in PRM-DES systems must not be greater than 0.6 EF
and
[]c
The limiting width-thickness ratio in walls of rectangular PTE members, boxed I section fins and box fins
reinforcements used as beams and columns must not be greater than 1.12 EF
and
[]
d For I -beams in PRM-DES systems, where Ca is less than or equal to 0.125, the minimum slenderness h tw shall not be greater than 2.45 EF . For I- beams
in PRM - DMO systems, where Ca is less than or equal to 0.125, the minimum slenderness h tw shall not be greater
and
than 3.76 EF
and
[ ] and
The limit diameter-thickness ratio for circular PTEs used as beams or columns should not be greater than 0.07EF and
F.3.4.1.2 — Bracing for Beam Stability — When required in F.3.5, F.3.6, F.3.7, and F.3.8, lateral torsional buckling bracing
shall be provided to steel shapes or embedded shapes requested by bending, according to what is specified in the following
numerals:
F.3.4.1.2.1 — Members with moderate ductility
(a) Bracing of moderately ductile steel members shall meet the requirements
(i) Both flanges of the beam shall be laterally braced or torsionally braced in cross section.
(ii) The beam bracing shall meet the bracing requirements of F.2.19 for lateral or torsional
bracing of beams where the expected flexural resistance of the member shall be: M = R ZF
u yy
F.3.4.1-1
Cd defined in F2.19 will be adopted as the unit (iii) The

bracing of the beam must be spaced at maximum
L b0.17r
= EF F.3.4.1-2
yy
(b) Bracing of moderately ductile embedded composite beams shall satisfy the following requirements: (i)
Both flanges of the beam shall be
laterally braced or their cross section torsionally braced.
(ii) The bracing shall meet the bracing requirements of Title F.2 for the beam as specified.
lateral or torsional bracing of beams, with MM in
=
p esp
specified in numeral F.3.7.2.2, and C 1 (iii) The

= d
.
bracing must have a maximum spacing of L 0.17r EF F.3.4.1-3

=
b yy
The properties of the steel section will be used and the calculation of yr in the buckling
plane should be based on the elastic transformed section.
F.3.4.1.2.2 — Members with high ductility — In addition to the requirements of numerals F.3.4.1.2.1 (1) (i) and
(ii), and F.3.4.1.2.1 (2) ( i) and (ii), the bracing of beams with high ductility must have a maximum spacing of L
0.086r EF . For embedded composite beams,=b and y must be
use the properties of the steel section and the calculation of yr in the buckling plane should be based on the elastic
transformed section.
F-226
F.3.4.1.2.3 — Special Bracing at Plastic Hinges — Special bracing shall be provided adjacent to areas where a plastic hinge is
expected to develop, as required in F.3.5, F.3.6, F.3.7, and F.3.8. (a) For steel beams, such bracing shall satisfy the following
requirements:
(i) Both flanges of the beam must be laterally braced or the section
torsionally braced transverse.
(ii) The required strength of the lateral bracing to one side of the plastic hinge
must be: P
0.06R
= ZF h F.3.4.1-4
in and and
O
where:
ho = distance between centroids of flanges, mm The
required resistance of the torsional bracing to one side of the plastic hinge must be: M 0.06R ZF
= F.3.4.1-5
u yy
(iii) The required stiffness of the brace shall meet the requirements for braces of F.2.20 for lateral or torsional
= F.3.4.1 - 6 MR ZF
bracing of C 1 beams , and where the expected flexural strength of the beam shalld be:
yy
=
in
(b) For concrete-embedded composite beams, such bracing shall satisfy the
(i) Both flanges of the beam must be laterally braced or the section
torsionally braced transverse.
(ii) The required strength of the lateral bracing to one side of the plastic hinge
should be:
P 0.06M
= h F.3.4.1-7
in p esp O
where:
is determined in accordance with numeral F.3.7.2.6.4 Mp esp
The
resistance required for the torsional bracing to one side of the plastic hinge must be M 0.06M
= of the beam
in p esp
(iii) The required stiffness of the brace shall meet the bracing requirements of F.2.20 for lateral or torsional
bracing of beams, and where MM of the =
in p esp
beam is determined according to section F.3.7.2.6.4, and C 1 = .

d
F.3.4.1.3 — Protected Areas — The discontinuities specified in section F.3.9.2.1 that result from manufacturing and assembly procedures,
or from the installation of accessories, cannot be made in the area of a connecting member or element. that has been designated as a zone
protected by these provisions.
Exception — Spigot, weld, and other connections are only permitted if included in connections prequalified in accordance with Section
F.3.11.1, F.3.11.2, and F.3.11.3.
F.3.4.1.4 — Columns — Those that are part of PRM systems, braces, and shear walls must meet the requirements of this section.
F.3.4.1.4.1 — Required Strength — The required strength of BSS columns must satisfy the following requirements:
(1) The effects of loads resulting from the analysis requirements for applicable systems in Sections F.3.5, F.3.6, F.3.7,
and F.3.8, except that F.3.4.1.4.1 does not apply to sections F.3.7.1, F.3.8.1 and F.3.8.4.
(2) The compressive strength using the Title B load combinations, including the amplified seismic load. Applied moments
may be neglected unless they result from a load applied to the column between points of lateral support. The
compressive strength does not need to be greater than the following values:
F-227
(a) The maximum load transferred to the column by the system, including the effects of
material overstrength and strain hardening. (b) The forces corresponding to
the resistance of the foundation to uplift by overturning.
F.3.4.1.4.2 — Embedded Composite Columns — Columns for composite seismic systems in Sections F.3.7
and F.3.8 shall meet the requirements of F.2.9 in addition to the requirements of this section, for members with
moderate ductility and high.
(1) Members with moderate ductility

Embedded composite columns with moderate ductility must satisfy the following requirements:
(i) The maximum spacing of cross reinforcement at the top and bottom
must be taken as the lesser of the following:
(a) Half the minor dimension of the section. (b) 8 times
the diameter of the longitudinal bar. (c) 24 times
the diameter of the transverse reinforcement. (d)
300mm. (ii)
These spacings must be maintained at a vertical distance equal to or greater than the
following lengths, measured from the face of the joint and on either side of any section
where a plastic hinge is expected to occur.
(a) 1/6 of the free height of the column.
(b) The maximum dimension of the cross section. (c)
450mm. (iii)
The spacing in the remaining length of the column must not exceed twice
of the spacings mentioned in (i).
(iv) Splices and end details for DMI embedded composite columns of Sections F.3.7.1,
F.3.8.1, and F.3.8.4 shall meet the requirements of Section C.7.8.2 The design shall
comply with sections C.21.1.6 and C.21.1.7. Design must consider the unfavorable
effects of abrupt changes in member stiffness and nominal tensile strength. Abrupt
changes are transitions to reinforced concrete sections without embedded steel members,
transitions between sections other than steel members, and column bases.
(v) Electro-welded mesh will not be allowed as transversal reinforcement in members with
moderate ductility.
(2) Members with high ductility

High ductility embedded composite columns shall satisfy the following requirements, in addition
to those of (1) above. (i) Load-transmitting longitudinal
reinforcement shall meet the requirements of Section C.21.6.3. (ii) The transversal
reinforcement will
be made up of confinement stirrups as
defines C.21 and must comply with the following requirements:
(a) The minimum transverse reinforcement area Ash shall comply with the
following:
ys
ÿÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ FA f
c
=
0.09h s1 cc ÿA ÿÿ ÿshÿ (F.3.4.1-8)
ÿ
ÿÿ ÿ
Pn F ÿ ÿ yh
where:
hcc = dimension of the confined cross section of the core, measured center
to center of the cross reinforcement, mm = spacing of the cross
s reinforcement measured along the
longitudinal axis of member, mm
Fy = minimum yield stress of the structural steel core, MPa
As = cross-sectional area of the structural steel core, mm2
F-228
Pn = nominal resistance to axial compression of the column

composite, N
cfÿ = compressive strength of concrete, MPa
Fyh = minimum yield strength of the transverse reinforcement,
MPa
Equation (F.3.4.1-8) need not be satisfied if the nominal strength of the insulated
section of structural steel embedded in reinforced concrete is greater than that
obtained from the combination 1.0D 0.5L + ( b ) The spacing Maximum transverse
reinforcement along the .
length of the column shall be the lesser of 6 longitudinal load transfer bar diameters or 150
mm.
(c) In the specifications of Section F.3.4.1.4.2 (1)(ii), (iii), or (iv), the maximum spacing of
the transverse reinforcement shall be the lesser of ¼ of the least dimension of the
member. or 100mm. For transverse reinforcement, cross ties, and other confining
reinforcement should be spaced no more than 350mm o.c. in the transverse direction.
(iii) Embedded composite columns that are part of a braced frame with nominal
compressive
loads greater than 0.2 times Pn must have transverse reinforcement as specified in Section
F.3.4.1.4.2(2)(ii)(c) in its entire length. It is not necessary to satisfy this requirement if the nominal
resistance of the insulated section of embedded structural steel is greater than the effect of the
load for the combination 1.0D 0.5L +
(iv) Composite columns that support member reactions that have discontinuity in stiffness, such as
walls or braced frames, must have transverse reinforcement as indicated in Section F.3.4.1.4.2(2)
(ii)(c) in the full length below the level of the discontinuity, if the compressive axial force exceeds
0.1 times Pn . In discontinuous members, transverse reinforcement shall extend into the
discontinuous member for at least the length required to develop the full yield of the profile and
longitudinal reinforcement. It is not necessary to satisfy this requirement if the nominal resistance
of the insulated section of embedded structural steel is greater than the effect of the load for the
combination 1.0D 0.5L + (v) The composite columns embedded in PRMC-DES must meet the
requirements
.
(a) Transverse reinforcement shall meet the requirements of section F.3.4.1.4.2(2)(ii) above
and below the column in the region specified in section F.3.4.1.4.2( 1)(ii). (b) The
strong column – weak beam design
requirements described in Section F.3.7.3.4.1 must be met. The base of the columns must
be detailed so that it can develop a plastic joint. (c) The required shear strength of
the column shall meet the requirements of ACI 318 21.6.5.1.
(vi) When the column terminates in a slab foundation or footing, the transverse reinforcement
specified in this section shall extend a minimum of 300 mm into the footing or slab foundation.
When the column terminates in a wall, the transverse reinforcement shall extend into the wall
for at least the length required for full yield development of the embedded steel section and
longitudinal reinforcement.
F.3.4.1.4.3 — Filled Composite Columns — This section is applicable to columns that meet the limitations of F.2.9.2
and must be designed in accordance with Chapter F.2, except that the nominal shear strength of the column Composite
will be the one that corresponds to the isolated steel section, based on its effective shear area.
F.3.4.1.5 — Composite Diaphragms — The design of composite floor or ceiling diaphragms shall meet the following
requirements for seismic effects.
F-229
F.3.4.1.5.1 — Load Transfer — Details for transferring loads between diaphragms and edge members,
header elements, and BSS elements must be determined.
F.3.4.1.5.2 — Nominal Shear Resistance — The nominal in-plane shear resistance of composite
diaphragms with or without metal decks shall be taken as the nominal shear strength of reinforced
concrete over the crest of the metal deck in accordance with the Title C
Alternatively, this resistance can be determined by in-plane shear tests on concrete diaphragms.
F.3.4.2 — CONNECTIONS
F.3.4.2.1 — Scope — The connections, joints, and bolts that are part of the SRS must comply with the
requirements specified in section F.2.10, plus the following additional requirements.
Splices and column base plates that are not part of the SRS shall meet the requirements of Sections F.3.4.2.5.1,
F.3.4.2.5.3, and F.3.4.2.6.
When there are protected zones in connection elements, in accordance with what is specified in this Chapter,
the requirements of sections F.3.4.1.3 and F.3.9.2.1 must be met.
F.3.4.2.2 — Bolted Joints — Bolted joints shall meet the following requirements:
(1) All bolts must be fully tensioned high-strength bolts. All surfaces shall be prepared as required for
Class A slip critical joints in accordance with F.2.10.3.8.
Exception — Connection faces may have coatings that have not been tested for slip resistance, or
with paints with a slip coefficient less than Class A surface, for the following cases:
(a) End plate moment connections, in accordance with the requirements of numeral
F.3.5.1.
(b) Bolted connections in which the effects of seismic loading are transferred by tension in the
bolts or by compression between plates but not by shear in the bolts.
(2) Bolts must be installed in standard holes or slits perpendicular to

the applied load.
Exception — For braces specified in F.3.6.1, F.3.6.2, F.3.6.3, and F.3.6.4, enlarged holes may be
permitted when the connection is designed as a slip-critical joint, and the holes are only on one
plate.
Diagonal brace connections with enlarged holes must also satisfy other limit states such as bearing
and bolt shear to obtain the required connection strength. Other types of drilling may be permitted
for prequalified connections in accordance with sections F.3.11.1, F.3.11.2 and F.3.11.3.
(3) The design shear resistance of bolted connections made with standard bores shall be calculated as
a bearing type connection in accordance with Sections F.2.10.3.6 to F.2.10.3.10. The nominal
bearing resistance at bores shall not be taken greater than 2.4dtF .
in
(4) Studs and welds shall not be designed to share a force or their components in a connection. The
force in a member, such as an axial force in a brace, must be completely resisted by one type of
joint (all bolted, or all welded).
In a connection in which the bolts resist a force normal to that resisted by the welds, it is not
considered that the bolts and the weld can share the stress,
F-230
as in the case of a moment connection in which the welded flanges transmit the bending and the bolted web
resists the shear.
F.3.4.2.3 — Welded Joints — Welds shall be designed in accordance with Section F.2.10.
F.3.4.2.4 — Continuity plates and stiffeners — The design of continuity plates and stiffeners located in the web of rolled sections
must consider the reduced contact lengths of the flanges and the web of the member based on the dimensions of the fillet of corner
of section F.3.9.2.4.
F.3.4.2.5 — Column splices
F.3.4.2.5.1 — Location of splices — For all columns in the building, including those not part of the BSS, column splices
must be located at a distance of 1.2 meters or more from the flanges of the beam connection - column.
Exceptions:
(a) When the free height of the column between flanges of the beam-column connection is less than 2.4
meters, the splice must be at half the free height.
(b) Column splices in which the flanges and web are connected by full penetration welds shall be at a distance from the
flanges of the beam-column connection greater than the depth of the column. (c) Splices of composite columns.
F.3.4.2.5.2 — Required Strength — The required strength of SRS column splices shall be the greater of:
(a) The required strength of the columns, including that determined in F.3.5, F.3.6, F.3.7 and F.3.8, and
section F.3.4.1.4.1.
(b) The required strength determined using the Title B load combinations including the amplified seismic load. The
required resistance need not be greater than the maximum loads that can be transferred to the splice by the system.
Additionally, welded column splices that are subjected to a given stress with the load combination that includes the
amplified seismic load must satisfy the following two requirements:
(a) In case partial penetration butt welds are used, the design strength shall be at least 200% of the required strength.
(b) The design strength of each flange splice shall be equal to or greater than 0.5R F b t y y ,
ff
where R Fy y is the expected yield stress in the column material y b tf f is the area
of the fin of the smallest connected column.
(c) When the splices are made with full penetration groove welds and the tensile stress at any point on the thinnest flange
is greater than gradual transitions between flanges of different thickness or width are required. Such 0.3F with,
and
a transition must be performed in accordance with AWS D1.8 clause 4.2.
F.3.4.2.5.3 — Required shear resistance — For all the columns of the building, including those that are not part of the
SRS, the required shear resistance of the column splices with respect to their orthogonal axes must be MH where Mpc
is the least nominal plastic resistance to bending of the column section
pc for the considered direction, and H is the story
,
height.
The required shear resistance of the SRS column splices shall be the greater of the above requirements or the required
shear resistance determined in Section F.3.4.2.5.2(a) and (b).
F-231
F.3.4.2.5.4 — Shape Steel Splice Configuration — Splices in column shape steel may be bolted or
welded, or welded on one column and bolted on the other. Splice configurations must meet all the specific
requirements of Sections F.3.5, F.3.6, F.3.7, and F.3.8.
On SRS columns that have plate or channel splices, these must be used on both sides of the column web.
For splices with butt-welded groove joints, the weld extensions shall be removed in accordance with AWS
D1.8 clause 6.10. It is not necessary to remove backing plates from groove welds.
F.3.4.2.5.5 — Splices in embedded composite columns — In these cases the splices must be made
according to section F.3.4.1.4.2 and C.21.6.3.2
F.3.4.2.6 — Column Bases — The required strength of column base plates shall be calculated in accordance with
this section.
The design strength of the steel elements at the base of the column including base plates, anchor bolts, stiffeners
and shear keys shall be designed in accordance with Chapter F.2.
When columns are welded to base plates by groove welds, weld extensions and backing plates shall be removed,
except that backing welds located on the inside of flanges or the web of I sections do not require removal if they
are welded . add an 8mm fillet weld at the junction of the backing weld and base plate.
The design strength of the concrete elements at the base of the columns, including the embedment depth of the
anchor bolts and reinforcing steel, shall be determined in accordance with Appendix CD of Title C.
When using concrete reinforcing steel in the design of the embedment depth, it is important to consider the failure
modes of the bolts and provide reinforcement on both sides of the expected failure surface. See Appendix CD,
figure C-RD.1 and section CD.4.2.1, including its comment.
F.3.4.2.6.1 — Required Axial Strength — The required axial strength of the BSS column base plates,
including their foundation anchors, shall be the sum of the vertical components of the required strength of
the steel members. that are connected to the base of the column, but not less than the greater of the
following values:
(a) The axial load calculated using Title B load combinations, including
the amplified seismic load.
(b) The required axial strength of column splices, as described in
F.3.4.2.5.
The vertical components may include the axial load of the columns and the vertical component of the axial
load of diagonal members attached to the base of the column. Section F.3.4.2.5 includes references to
section F.3.4.1.4.1 and sections F.3.5, F.3.6, F.3.7 and F.3.8. When diagonal braces are attached to both
sides of the column, the effects of compression brace buckling must be considered in the sum of the
vertical components. See section F.3.6.2.3.
F.3.4.2.6.2 — Required shear resistance — The required shear resistance of the column bases, including
those that are not part of the SRS, and their anchorages to the foundation, must be the sum of the
horizontal components of the required strength of the steel elements that are connected to the base of the
column as follows:
(a) For diagonal braces, the horizontal component shall be determined by the resistance required
by the brace connections to the SRS. (b) For columns,
the horizontal component shall be equal to the required shear strength of the column splice
described in F.3.4.2.5.2.
F-232
The horizontal components may include the shear force of the columns and the horizontal component of
the axial load of diagonal members attached to the base of the column. Section F.3.4.2.5 includes
references to section F.3.4.1.4.1 and sections F.3.5, F.3.6, F.3.7 and F.3.8.
F.3.4.2.6.3 — Required flexural resistance — When the connection of the column bases to the
foundation are designed as moment connections, the required flexural resistance of the column bases that
are part of the SRS, including its anchors to the foundation, must be the sum of the required resistance of
the steel elements that are connected to the base plate as follows:
(a) For diagonal braces, the required flexural strength shall be at least the
required strength of the brace connections.
(b) For columns, the required flexural resistance must be at least equal to the lesser of the
following values: 1.1RFZ
of the column.
yy
(i) (ii) The moment calculated using the load combinations that include the load
amplified seismic.
The moments from the column to the base connections, designed as hinges, can be ignored.
F.3.4.2.7 — Composite Connections — This section applies to connections in buildings using steel-concrete
composite systems, in which seismic loads are transferred between structural steel components and reinforced
concrete. Methods for calculating connection resistance must meet the requirements of this section. Unless the
strength of the connection is determined by analysis or testing, the model used for the design of the connections
must satisfy the following requirements:
(1) Force must be transferred between structural steel and reinforced concrete by:
(a) Direct contact through internal crushing mechanisms. (b) Shear
connections. (c) Shear by
friction with the necessary grip force by means of reinforcement normal to the plane of shear transfer.
(d) The combination of the
previous means.
The contribution of different mechanisms can be combined only if the stiffness and deformation
capacity of the mechanisms are compatible. Potential bond between structural steel and reinforced
concrete shall not be considered for the force transfer mechanism of the connection.
(2) The nominal crushing and friction shear resistance shall comply with Chapters C.10 and C.11 of Title
C. Unless a higher resistance is supported by cyclic testing, the nominal crushing and friction shear
resistance Friction must be reduced by 25% for the composite SRS described in F.3.7.3, F.3.8.2,
F.3.8.3, F.3.8.5 and F.3.8.6.
(3) When beams are embedded in reinforced concrete columns or walls, face stiffeners, consisting of
plates connected to beam flanges, shall be placed on the face of the columns or walls.
(4) The nominal shear resistance of the panel area of the structural steel embedded in reinforced concrete
in the beam-column connections shall be calculated as the sum of the nominal resistances of the
structural steel and the confined reinforced concrete as defined in F. 3.5.3.6.5 and C.21.7 respectively.
(5) Reinforcement shall be provided to resist all tensile forces in the reinforced concrete components of
the connections. Additionally, the concrete must be confined with cross reinforcement. All reinforcement
shall be of the appropriate development length in tension or compression and to the point where it is
no longer required to resist the forces. Development lengths must be determined in accordance with
Chapter C.12. Additionally, the development lengths for the systems described in F.3.7.3, F.3.8.2,
F.3.8.3, F.3.8.5 and F.3.8.6 shall meet the requirements of C.21.7.5 (6) Composite connections must
meet the following additional
requirements:
F-233
(a) When the plate transfers in-plane diaphragm forces, plate reinforcement shall be designed and
anchored to conduct in-plane tension forces at all critical sections of the plate, including
connections to bus beams, columns, braces and walls. (b) For connections between structural
steel or composite beams and reinforced concrete or composite columns embedded in concrete,
transverse bracing ties shall be placed at the connection regions using the requirements of ACI
21.7, with the following modifications: ( i ) Structural steel beams can be considered to provide
confinement in a width
equal to the profile height with face stiffeners that are welded to the beam flanges.
(ii) Lap splices for perimeter reinforcing bars are permitted when confinement of the lap is
provided by face stiffeners or other means that prevent spalling of the concrete lining in
the systems described in F.3.7.1, F.3.7.2 , F.3.8.1 and F.3.8.4.
(iii) The size and arrangement of longitudinal bars of reinforced concrete and composite
columns should be detailed to reduce bar slippage at beam-column connections due to
the high transferred forces associated with changing column moments. at the height of
the connection.
F.3.4.2.8 — Anchor Bolts — When dowel anchors or welded reinforcing bars are used as part of the DMO or
DES SRS of Sections F.3.7.2, F.3.7.3, F.3.7.4, F.3.8.2, F.3.8.3, F.3.8.5 and F.3.8.6, its resistance to shear and
tension must be reduced by 25% of the resistance specified in F.2.9.
The above 25% reduction is not required for gravity components and collectors in DMO and DES structures
designed for amplified seismic loading.
F.3.4.3 — DEFORMATION COMPATIBILITY OF MEMBERS AND CONNECTIONS NOT PART OF THE BSS — When
deformation compatibility of members and connections not part of the BSS is required, these elements shall be designed
to resist the combination of effects of gravity loads and the effects of deformations that occur with the design story drift
calculated in accordance with Title A.
F.3.4.4 — STEEL PILES
F.3.4.4.1 — Design requirements — The design of piles must comply with the requirements of Chapter F.2 on
design of members requested by combined loads. The piles must also meet the requirements of Section F.3.4.1.1
for high ductility members.
F.3.4.4.2 — Inclined piles — When both inclined and vertical piles are used in a group of piles, the vertical piles
shall be designed to resist the combined effects of dead and live loads without regard to inclined piles.
F.3.4.4.3 — Pile in tension — The tension in each pile shall be transferred to its head by mechanical means
such as shear wrenches, reinforcing rods, or connectors welded to the embedded portion of the pile.
F.3.4.4.4 — Protected zone — For each pile, a length equal to the superelevation of the pile cross section below
the pile head shall be considered as a protected zone and meet the requirements of F.3.4.1.3 and F. 3.9.2.1.
F.3.5 — MOMENT-RESISTING FRAMES (PRM)
This numeral establishes the design bases, and the requirements for the analysis, the system, members and connections
for PRM-DMI, DMO, DES and frames with ductile trusses (PCD), and steel cantilever column systems (SCV).
F.3.5.1 — Moment-Resisting Frames with Minimum Energy Dissipation Capability (PRM-DMI)

F.3.5.2 — Moment-Resisting Frames with Moderate Energy Dissipation Capability (PRM-DMO)
F-234
F.3.5.3 — Moment-resistant frames with special energy dissipation capacity (PRM-DES).

F.3.5.4 — Frames with ductile trusses (PCD)
F.3.5.5 — Cantilever column systems with minimum energy dissipation capacity (MCS-DMI).
F.3.5.6 — Cantilever column systems with special energy dissipation capacity (SCV-DES).
F.3.5.1 — MOMENT-RESISTING FRAMES WITH MINIMUM ENERGY DISSIPATION CAPACITY (PRM-DMI)
F.3.5.1.1 — Scope — Moment-Resisting Frames with Minimum Energy Dissipation Capacity (PRM-DMI) shall be
designed in accordance with this section.
F.3.5.1.2 — Design Basis — PRM-DMIs are designed to resist minimal inelastic deformations in their members and
connections.
F.3.5.1.3 — Analysis — No special analysis requirements are specified.
F.3.5.1.4 — System requirements — No special system requirements are specified.
F.3.5.1.5 — Members — No special requirements are specified for the width-thickness or bracing ratios for the stability
of beams or joints, in addition to those required in Title F.2, for PRM-DMI members. They are also not considered
protected areas in this system. The use of beams formed with steel profiles compounded with reinforced concrete
plates to resist gravity loads is allowed.
F.3.5.1.6 — Connections — Beam-column connections may be fully restrained (TR) or partially restrained (PR) in
accordance with this section.
F.3.5.1.6.1 — Demand Critical Welds — Full penetration groove welds from beam flanges to columns are
demand critical welds and shall meet the requirements of Section F.3.1.3.4.2.
F.3.5.1.6.2 — Fully Restrained Moment (TR) Connections — Fully constrained connections that are part
of the BSS must satisfy at least one of the following conditions:
(1) They must be designed for a required flexural resistance equal to 1.1RM of they beam.
p
The required shear resistance Vu of the connection shall be based on Title B load combinations
including amplified seismic load, in which the effect of horizontal forces including overresistance
shall be taken as:
E 2 1.1R M L cf y p (F.3.5.1-1)
mh =( )
where:
Ry = ratio of the expected yield stress and the specified minimum, Fy
Mp = F Zy , N-mm
Lcf = free length of the beam, mm
(2) TR connections must be designed for a required flexural strength and a required shear strength
equal to the maximum moment and its corresponding shear that can be transmitted to the
connection by the system, including the effects of material overstrength and strain hardening.
Factors that can limit this maximum moment and its corresponding shear include: (a) The
resistance of the column (b) The resistance of the foundation to uplift
F-235
For options (1) and (2) of this numeral, continuity plates must be placed as specified in
numerals F.2.10.10.1, F.2.10.10.2 and F.2.10.10.3. The moment used to check the continuity
plates must be the same as that used for the design of the beam-column connection; in other
words, 1.1RM or the maximum yp moment that can be transferred to the connection by the
system.
(3) TR connections between beams and columns must satisfy the requirements of section
F.3.5.2.6 or F.3.5.3.6, or meet the following requirements:
(a) All beam-column connection welds shall meet the requirements of Chapter 3 of ANSI/AISC
358. (b) Beam flanges shall be connected
to column flanges using full penetration groove welds. (c) The shape of the access holes must
be in accordance with section 6.9.1.2 of
AWS D1.8 and the quality requirements of clause 6.9.2 thereof. (d) Continuity plates shall meet
the requirements of F.3.5.3.6.6, except that welds from continuity plates to
column flanges may be full penetration groove, partial penetration groove on two sides. , or
steaks on both sides. The required strength of these joints shall not be less than the design
strength of the contact area of the plate with the column flange.
(e) The web of the beam shall be connected to the flange of the column by a full penetration
groove weld between access holes, or by a single bolted shear plate connection designed
for the required shear resistance of Eq. F.3.5.1-1
For TR connections, the panel zone resistance must be checked according to F.2.10.10.6.
The required shear resistance of the panel zone shall be based on the moments at the end
of the beam calculated with the Title B load combinations, not including the amplified seismic
load.
F.3.5.1.6.3 — Partially Restrained (PR) Moment Connections — Partially restrained connections shall meet
(1) These connections must be designed for the maximum and shear moment of the load combinations
of F.3.2.2 and F.3.2.3.
(2) The stiffness, strength, and deformation capacity of the connection at the moment PR must be
considered in the design, including its effect on the overall stability of the structure.
(3) The nominal flexural resistance of the connection, MnPR , must not be less than 0.5M of p
the connected beam, except for one-story structures where MnPR should not be
smaller than 0.5M from the connected column.
p
(4) For PR connections, Vu shall be determined according to F.3.5.1.6.2 (1)

taking MnPR as Mp in equation F.3.5.1-1.
F.3.5.2 — MOMENT-RESISTANT FRAMES WITH MODERATE ENERGY DISSIPATION CAPACITY (PRM-DMO)
F.3.5.2.1 — Scope — PRM-DMOs shall be designed in accordance with this section.
F.3.5.2.2 — Design Basis — PRM-DMOs must be capable of developing a limited inelastic deformation capacity from
flexural yield of the beams and columns, and shear yield of the panel zone in the column. . The design of the beam-
column connections, including the panel zone and its continuity plates, must be based on tests that guarantee the
performance required in F.3.5.2.6.2, and demonstrate their conformity as required in F.3.5. 2.6.3.
F.3.5.2.3 — Analysis — No special design requirements are specified.
F-236
F.3.5.2.4 — System requirements
F.3.5.2.4.1 — Bracing for Beam Stability — Beams shall be braced to satisfy the moderate ductility
member requirements of F.3.4.1.2.1.
Additionally, unless otherwise indicated by testing, beam bracing shall be placed near concentrated forces,
at changes in cross section, and at other locations where analyzes indicate that a plastic hinge may form
during deformation. inelastic of the PRM-BMD. Bracing placement shall be consistent with that documented
for a connection prequalified in accordance with ANSI/AISC 358, or as determined in a connection
prequalification in accordance with Section F.3.11.1 or in a connection qualification test program. according
to F.3.11.2.
The required strength of the lateral bracing adjacent to the plastic hinges shall be as required in F.3.4.1.2.3.
F.3.5.2.5 — Members
F.3.5.2.5.1 — Basic Requirements — Members for beams and columns shall meet the requirements of
F.3.4.1 for members with moderate ductility, unless required by qualification tests.
Profile steel beams can be compounded with a reinforced concrete plate to resist gravity loads.
F.3.5.2.5.2 — Beam flanges — Abrupt changes in the beam flange are not permitted in plastic hinge
areas. Punching in the fin or cutting out the width of the fin is also not permitted unless qualification tests
demonstrate that the resulting configuration can develop stable plastic hinges. The configuration shall be
consistent with that for a connection prequalified in accordance with ANSI/AISC 358, or as determined in
a connection prequalification in accordance with section F.3.11.1 or in a qualification test program in
accordance with F.3.11.2.
F.3.5.2.5.3 — Protected Zones — The region at each end of the beam that is subject to inelastic
deformations is a protected zone, and must satisfy the requirements of F.3.4.1.3. The extent of the
protected zone shall be in accordance with ANSI/AISC 358, or as determined in a connection
prequalification in accordance with section F.3.11.1 or in a qualification test program in accordance with
F.3.11. 2.
The areas of plastic hinges at the ends of beams in PRM-DMO must be treated as protected areas. The
plastic hinge zones must be established from a prequalification or qualification program for the connection,
in accordance with numeral F.3.5.2.6.3. In general, for unreinforced connections, the protected zone is
located from the face of the column and up to a distance equal to half the depth of the beam, beyond the
plastic hinge.
F.3.5.2.6 — Connections
F.3.5.2.6.1 — Critical Demand Welds — The following welds shall be considered critical demand and
meet the requirements of F.3.1.3.4.2:
(1) Grooved welds in column splices.

(2) Column-base plate connection welds, except where it can be shown that the formation of the hinge
at or near the column base plate can be prevented by restraints, and in the absence of net
stresses under the load combinations that include the amplified seismic load.
(3) Full penetration groove welds of beam flanges and beam webs to columns, unless otherwise
specified in ANSI/AISC 358, or as determined by connection prequalification in accordance with
Section F .3.11.1 or in a qualification test program in accordance with F.3.11.2.
F-237
F.3.5.2.6.2 — Beam-column connection requirements — The BSS beam-column connections shall meet the
(1) The connection must be capable of accommodating a floor drift angle of 0.02 radians as
Minimum.
(2) The measured flexural strength of the connection, determined at the face of the column, shall be at least
0.8M of the connected beam
p
at a story drift angle of 0.02 radians.
F.3.5.2.6.3 — Connection validation — The BSS beam-column connection shall satisfy the requirements of
section F.3.5.2.6.2 by one of the following conditions:
(1) Use of PRM-DMO connections in accordance with ANSI/AISC 358.

(2) Use of a PRM-DMO prequalified connection in accordance with F.3.11.1.
(3) Specifications of cyclic qualification test results in accordance with F.3.11.2.
At least two tests of the connection must be carried out and may be based on one of the following
considerations: (a) Tests
reported in research articles or documented tests carried out for other projects that represent the
conditions of the project, with the limits specified in numeral F .3.11.2.
(b) Tests specifically focused for the project that are representative of the sizes of the members,
resistance of the material, configuration of connections, construction processes of the connection,
with the limits specified in F.3.11.2.
F.3.5.2.6.4 — Required Shear Resistance — The required shear resistance Vu of the connection shall be based
on Title B load combinations including amplified seismic load, in which the effect of horizontal forces including
overresistance should be calculated as:
E 2 1.1R M L h y p
mh =( ) (F.3.5.2-1)
where:
Mp = F Zy , Lh N-mm
= distance between plastic hinges, mm.
In lieu of Equation F.3.5.2-1, the required shear strength of the connection shall be as specified in ANSI/AISC 358,
or as determined in a connection prequalification in accordance with Section F.3.11. .1 or in a qualification test
program in accordance with F.3.11.2.
F.3.5.2.6.5 — Panel Zone — No special requirements are specified.
The resistance of the panel zone must be checked according to F.2.10.10.6. The required shear resistance of the
panel zone shall be based on the moments at the end of the beam calculated with the Title B load combinations,
not including the amplified seismic load.
F.3.5.2.6.6 — Continuity plates — Continuity plates must be provided in accordance with what is specified in
F.5.3.6.6.
F.3.5.2.6.7 — Column Splices — Column splices shall meet the requirements of Section F.3.4.2.5. Where welds
are used to make the splice, they shall be full penetration grooved.
When column splices are made with bolts, they must have a required flexural strength at least equal to the RFZ of
the smallest column. The required shearyikes
resistance of
F-238
The column web splices must be at least equal to ÿMH where ÿMpc is the sum of thepcnominal flexural plastic ,
resistances of the columns above and below the splice.
Exception— The required strength of the column splice need not be greater than that determined by a nonlinear
analysis as specified in F.3.3, considering appropriate stress concentration factors or fracture mechanics stress
intensity factors.
F.3.5.3 — MOMENT-RESISTANT FRAMES WITH SPECIAL ENERGY DISSIPATION CAPACITY (PRM-DES)
F.3.5.3.1 — Scope — PRM-DES shall be designed in accordance with this section.
F.3.5.3.2 — Design Basis — The PRM-DES must be capable of developing a significant inelastic deformation capacity from
the flexural yield of the beams and a shear-limited yield of the panel area. Except as otherwise permitted in this section,
columns shall be designed to be stronger than beams at full yield and strain hardening. Flexural creep of the columns at the
base is allowed. The design of the beam-column connections, including the panel zone and its continuity plates, must be
based on tests that guarantee the performance required in F.3.5.3.6.2, and demonstrate their conformity as required in F.3.5.
3.6.3.
F.3.5.3.3 — Analysis — No special design requirements are specified.
F.3.5.3.4.1 — Moment relationship — The following relationships must be satisfied at beam-column connections:
*
ÿ M
pc
*
> 1 (F.3.5.3-1)
ÿ M
pb
where:
*
ÿMpc = sum of the projections to the axis of the beam, of the nominal flexural resistance of the columns (including
brackets if they are used) above and below the joint reduction due to the axial force of the ,
with a
column. It can be calculated as:
*
ÿÿM
pc
ZF PA yc =
c
( ÿ
uc g
) (F.3.5.3-2)
When the axes of opposite beams in the same connection do not coincide, the intermediate line between axes must
be used. ÿMpb = sum
*
of the projections to the axis of the column of the expected resistance to bending of the beams in the plastic hinge.
It can be calculated as:
( ÿ ÿpb M 1.1R F Z M
=
y yb b
+
uv
) (F.3.5.3-3)
determined prequalified in accordance with ÿMpb consistent with connection design Alternatively, it can be
ANSI/AISC 358, or as determined in a connection prequalification in accordance with section F.3.11.1 or in a
qualification test program according to F.3.11.2.
When using connections with reduced section beams, it can be calculated as:
F-239
*
ÿÿM
pb
=1.1R F Z M(
y yb RBS
+ uv
)
(F.3.5.3-4)
Ag = gross area of the column, mm2 .

Fyc = minimum specified yield stress of the column, MPa.
Muv = additional moment in the axis of the column due to amplification by the shear from the
plastic hinge up to the axis of the column, N-mm.
Puc = required compressive strength (absolute value), N.
Zb = plastic section modulus of the beam, mm3 .
Zc = plastic section modulus of the column, mm3 .
ZRBS = minimum plastic section modulus in the reduced section of the beam, mm3 .
Exception — This requirement does not apply if both of the following conditions are met:
(1) For columns with P 0.3P < for all combinations except those that include the load
uc c
amplified seismic and meeting any of the following conditions: (a) Columns of one-
story buildings or the top story of a multi-story building. (b) Columns where: (1) the sum of the
design shear resistances of all the story columns to which the exception will apply is less than 20% of the sum
of the design shear resistances of all the columns of frames resistant to moment in the floor and that act in
the same direction; and (2) the sum of the design shear resistances of all the columns to which the
exception will be applied in each axis of columns of frames resistant to moments in said story is less than
33% of the design shear resistance of all structure columns in that column axis. For purposes of this
exception, the axis of columns is defined as a line of columns or parallel lines of columns separated by
less than 10% of the planar dimension perpendicular to the axis of columns.
For purposes of this exception, the design resistance of the columns must be calculated as the limit
resistance considering the flexural resistance at each end and limited by the flexural resistance of the
connecting beams, or by the flexural resistance of the columns themselves. divided by H , where H is the
height of the story in mm.
where:
= yc g
P cFA N
, (F.3.5.3-5)
Puc = required compressive strength, N
(2) Columns in any story have a ratio of design shear strength to required shear strength 50% greater than the story
immediately above.
F.3.5.3.4.2 — Bracing for Beam Stability — Beams shall be braced to satisfy the high ductility member
requirements of F.3.4.1.2.2.
Additionally, unless otherwise indicated by testing, beam bracing shall be placed near concentrated forces, changes
in cross section, and other locations where analyzes indicate that a plastic hinge may form during inelastic
deformation of the PRM. -OFF. Bracing location shall be consistent with that documented for a connection
prequalified in accordance with ANSI/AISC 358, or as determined in a connection prequalification in accordance
with Section F.3.11.1 or in a connection qualification test program. according to F.3.11.2.
The required strength of the lateral bracing adjacent to the plastic hinges shall be as required in F.3.4.1.2.3.
F.3.5.3.4.3 — Bracing for stability of beam-column connections
(1) Braced Connections — Column flanges in beam-column connections only need lateral bracing at the
level of the top beam flanges, when the
F-240
beam webs are in the same plane, and it is shown that the column will remain in the elastic
range outside the panel zone. It can be assumed that the column remains in an elastic state
when the ratio calculated with equation F.3.5.3 -1 is greater than 2.
When it cannot be demonstrated that the column remains in an elastic state outside the
panel zone, the following requirements apply:
(a) Column flanges shall be laterally braced at the top and bottom level of the beam flanges.
Lateral bracing can be direct or indirect.
Direct lateral support of column flanges is achieved through the use of braces or other
members, or a cooperating sheet and its slab, anchored to the column flange at or near
the point to be braced to prevent buckling. side.
Indirect lateral support refers to a bracing that is achieved thanks to the rigidity of the
members and the connections that are not directly anchored to the flanges of the
column, but rather acts through the web of the column or the stiffeners.
(b) Column lateral bracing shall be designed for a required resistance of 2% of the design
resistance of the beam flange Fbt yf bf .
(2) Unbraced Connections — Column having a beam-column connection without transverse

lateral bracing to the seismic frame shall be designed using the distance between adjacent
lateral braces as the height of the column for transverse buckling to the seismic frame and
shall comply with the specifications in F.2.8 with the following exception:
(a) The required column strength shall be determined using the Title B load combinations,
except that it includes the amplified seismic load.
In determining the effect of amplified seismic loading that includes overstrength, Emh is
not required to be greater than 125% of the design strength of the frame, based on the
design flexural strength of the beam or the design shear strength. from the panel area.
(b) The slenderness L r of the column should not be greater than 60.
(c) The required flexural strength of the column transverse to the seismic frame shall include
the moment caused by the application of the beam flange force specified in Section
F.3.5.3.4.3(1)(b), in addition to the second order moments due to the resulting
displacement of the column fin.
F.3.4.1.1 for members with high ductility, unless required by qualification tests.
Profile steel beams can be compounded with a reinforced concrete plate to resist gravity loads.
F.3.5.3.5.2 — Beam Wings — Abrupt beam wing changes are not permitted in plastic hinge areas.
Punching in the fin or cutting out the width of the fin is also not permitted unless qualification tests
demonstrate that the resulting configuration can develop stable plastic hinges to withstand the required
floor drift angle. The configuration must be consistent with that corresponding to a connection prequalified
according to
F-241
with ANSI/AISC 358, or as determined in a connection prequalification in accordance with Section F.3.11.1
or in a qualification test program in accordance with F.3.11.2.
deformations is a protected zone, and must satisfy the requirements of F.3.4.1.3. The extent of the
protected zone shall be in accordance with ANSI/AISC 358, or as determined in a connection
prequalification in accordance with section F.3.11.1 or in a qualification test program in accordance with
F.3.11. 2.
Plastic hinge zones at beam ends in PRM-DES must be treated as protected zones. The plastic hinge
zones must be established from a prequalification or qualification program for the connection, according
to numeral F.3.5.3.6.3. In general, for unreinforced connections, the protected zone is located from the
face of the column and up to a distance equal to half the depth of the beam beyond the plastic hinge.

(2) Column-base plate connection welds, except where it can be shown that the formation of the hinge
at or near the column base plate can be prevented by restraints, and in the absence of net
stresses under the load combinations that include the amplified seismic load.
(3) Full penetration groove welds of beam flanges and beam webs to columns, unless otherwise
specified in ANSI/AISC 358, or as determined by connection prequalification in accordance with
Section F .3.11.1 or in a qualification test program in accordance with F.3.11.2.
F.3.5.3.6.2 — Beam-Column Connections — The BSS beam-column connections shall meet the
(1) The connection must be capable of withstanding a floor drift angle of 0.04 radians
As minimum.
(2) The measured flexural strength of the connection, determined at the face of the column, shall
be at least 0.8M of the connected
p beam at a story drift angle of 0.04
radians.
F.3.5.3.6.3 — Connection validation — The BSS beam-column connection shall satisfy the requirements
of section F.3.5.3.6.2 by one of the following:
(1) Use of PRM-DES connections in accordance with ANSI/AISC 358.

(2) Use of a PRM-DES prequalified connection according to F.3.11.1.
(3) Specifications of cyclic qualification test results in accordance with F.3.11.2. At least two tests
of the connection must be carried out and may be based on one of the following considerations:
(a) Tests reported in research articles
or documented tests carried out for other projects that represent the conditions of the project,
with the limits specified in numeral F .3.11.2.
(b) Tests specifically focused for the project that are representative of the sizes of the
members, resistance of the material, configuration of connections, construction processes
of the connection, with the limits specified in F.3.11.2.
F.3.5.3.6.4 — Required Shear Resistance — The required shear resistance Vu of the connection shall
be based on Title B load combinations including amplified seismic load, in which the effect of horizontal
forces including the resistance should be calculated as:
F-242
E 2 1.1R M L h y p
mh =( ) (F.3.5.3-6)
where:
Mp = F Zy , Lh N-mm
= distance between plastic hinges, mm.
In lieu of Equation F.3.5.2-1, the required shear strength of the connection shall be as specified in ANSI/AISC 358,
or as determined in a connection prequalification in accordance with Section F.3.11. .1 or in a qualification test
program in accordance with F.3.11.2.
F.3.5.3.6.5 — Panel area
(1) Shear Resistance — The required thickness of the panel zone shall be determined from the sum of
the moments in the column faces, calculated by projecting the expected moments at the plastic hinge
points to the column face. . The design shear resistance shall be ÿv n ÿ = 1.0 and the nominal V shear
with determined in accordance with
resistance Vn shall be calculated for the shear yield limit state
,
in
F.2.10.10.6.
(2) Panel zone thickness — The individual thicknesses, t ,

of the souls of the
column and veneer plates, if used, must meet the following requirement:
ÿ +90
tdw (
With With
) (F.3.5.3-7)
where:
t = thickness of the web of the column or of the veneer plate, mm.
dz = height of the panel area between continuity plates, mm.
wz = width of the panel zone between column fins, mm.
Alternatively, when local buckling of the column web and plate plate is prevented by joining them by
plug welds, and splitting the plate to satisfy Equation F.3.5.3-7, the total thickness of the panel zone
shall satisfy equation F.3.5.3-7. When plug welds are required, a minimum of 4 must be supplied.
(3) Veneer plates in panel zone — Veneer plates shall be placed directly on the web of the column when
the web does not comply with Section F.3.5.3.6.5(2). Otherwise the plates can be connected directly
to the web of the column, or separate from the web.
(a) Cladding plates in contact with the web — Shall be welded to the column flanges by full
penetration groove welds or fillet welds that are capable of developing the full design shear
strength of the clad plates. When continuity plates are not used, veneer plates shall be fillet
welded along the top and bottom to develop the portion of the total force transmitted to the veneer
plate, unless the plates of veneer and the soul comply with numeral F.3.5.3.6.5(2).
(b) Plating plates separated from the web — Plating plates shall be placed in symmetrical pairs
located between 1/3 and 2/3 of the distance between the edge of the beam flange and the center
line of the column, and shall be attached with a full penetration groove weld to the column fins in
such a manner as to develop the full design strength of the veneer lacquers. (c) Veneer Plates
with Continuity Plates — Each veneer plate shall be welded to the continuity
plates to develop the portion of the total force transmitted by the veneer plates.
F-243
(d) Cladding plates without continuity plates — When continuity plates are not used, the clad
plates shall extend a minimum of 150 mm above and below the top and bottom of the
moment-connected deepest girder.
When a clad plate interferes with continuity plates connected directly to the column web, the
designer must ensure a load transfer pattern that satisfies ANSI/AISC 358 section 2.4.4b. This
can be accomplished by sizing the clad plate. in such a way that it is capable of developing the
required resistance of the continuity plates to the connection of the web of the column.
Alternatively, the veneer plates can be suspended inside the continuity plates. A similar pattern
of loading can develop when a beam web plate perpendicular to a column web is connected to
a veneer plate.
F.3.5.3.6.6 — Continuity plates
(1) Continuity plate requirements — Continuity plates must be provided

except for the following cases: (a)
When so determined in a prequalified connection in accordance with section F.3.11.1, or as
determined by a qualification test program in accordance with section F.3.11.2. (b) When
the flange of the beam is
welded to the flange of a rolled or reinforced I- section column that has a thickness that satisfies
Eqs. F.3.5.3-8 and F.3.5.3-9, no plates are required. of continuity:
FR
yb yb
t cf
ÿ 0.4
bf bf 1.8b t (F.3.5.3-8)
FR
yc yc
b bf
t cf ÿ (F.3.5.3-9)
6
where:
t cf= minimum required column flange thickness when not fitted
continuity plates, mm. bbf =
width of the beam flange, mm. t = thickness
ofbf the beam flange, mm.
Fyb = minimum specified yield stress of column flange, MPa
Ryb = ratio of the expected yield stress of the beam material and the
minimum specified yield stress.
Ryc = ratio of the expected yield stress of the column material and the
minimum specified yield stress. (c) When
the flange of the beam is welded to the flange of a column formed by a boxed I section and
which has a thickness that complies with equations F.3.5.3.10 and F.3.5.3.11, continuity
plates are not required.
ÿ b b bf bfÿ ÿb 0.4 FR
ÿ 1 t ÿÿ ÿ cf
cf ÿ
yb yb
ÿ b cf ÿ ÿÿ ÿ 1.8bt bf bf ÿ (F.3.5.3-10)
2 4 FRÿ
yc yc
b
t cf ÿ f
(F.3.5.3-11)
12
(d) For bolted connections, ANSI/AISC 358 specifications shall apply.

(2) Thickness of continuity plates — When continuity plates are required, the thickness shall be
determined as follows: (a) For exterior
connections (on one side of the column) the thickness of the continuity plate shall be half the
girder flange thickness as a minimum.
F-244
(b) For interior connections (on both sides of the column) the thickness of the continuity plate
must be equal to the thickest thickness of the flanges on both sides of the column.
Continuity plates must also meet the requirements of F.2.10.10.

(3) Continuity Plate Welds — Continuity plates shall be welded to the column flanges using full
penetration groove welds.
Continuity plates shall be welded to the column web using groove or fillet welds. The required
resistance of the sum of the welded joints of the continuity plates to the web of the column
shall be the lesser of the following: (a) The sum of the design resistances in tension of
the contact areas of the continuity plates with column flanges having connected beam flanges.
(b) The design shear resistance of the contact area of the plate with the web of the
column.
(c) The design shear resistance of the panel area of the column. (d) The
sum of the expected yield strengths of the flanges of the beam that
They transmit the force to the continuity plates.
F.3.5.3.6.7 — Column Splices — Column splices shall meet the requirements of Section F.3.4.2.5.
Where welds are used to make the splice, they shall be full penetration grooved.
When column splices are made with bolts, they must have a required flexural strength at least equal to
the RFZ of the smallest column. Theyyrequired
x shear resistance of
The column web splices must be at least equal to ÿMH where ÿMpc is the sumpcof the nominal flexural
,
plastic resistances of the columns above and below the splice.
Exception— The required strength of the column splice need not be greater than that determined by a
nonlinear analysis as specified in F.3.3, considering appropriate stress concentration factors or fracture
mechanics stress intensity factors.
F.3.5.4 — FRAMES WITH DUCTILE FRAMES (PCD)
F.3.5.4.1 — Scope — PCDs must meet the requirements of this section.
F.3.5.4.2 — Design Basis — PCDs must have a capacity to withstand significant inelastic deformations, within a
specially designed truss segment. The PCD must be limited to spans between columns not greater than 20 m and
total cant not greater than 1.8 m. The columns and truss segments outside the special segment are designed to
remain elastic under the loads generated by the full yield and strain hardening of the special segment.
F.3.5.4.3 — Analysis — The PCD analysis must satisfy the following requirements.
F.3.5.4.3.1 — Special Segment — The required vertical shear resistance of the special segment
must be calculated for Title B load combinations.
F.3.5.4.3.2 — Non-special segment — The required resistance of elements outside the special segment
and its connections must be calculated based on Title B load combinations including the amplified seismic
load. To determine the amplified seismic load, the effect of the horizontal force, including overresistance,
must be taken into account, from the lateral forces necessary to develop the vertical shear resistance
Emh , expected from the special segment, acting in the center of the span . as defined in F.3.5.4.5.2.
Second order effects must be included for maximum design drift.
F-245
F.3.5.4.4.1 — Special segment — Each horizontal truss that is part of the BSS must have a special segment
located in the central zone between 0.25 and 0.75 of the span of the truss.
The length of the special segment must be between 0.1 and 0.5 times the span of the truss. The length-height ratio
of any panel in the special segment must not exceed 1.5 nor be less than 0.67.
The panels within the special segment must be all vierendeel or all X -braced panels ; the combination of the
previous ones is not allowed nor the use of other configurations of truss diagonals. When diagonal members are
used in the special segment, they must be arranged in an X -shape separated by vertical elements. The diagonals
of the truss in the special segment must be made with plates of the same section. Said diagonal members must
interconnect at the points where they intersect. The interconnection shall have adequate design strength to
withstand a force of at least 0.25 times the nominal tensile strength of the diagonal member. Bolted connections
for web members must not be used within the special segment.
The tie of the members of the ropes is not allowed inside the special segment, nor at a distance less than half the
length of the panel outside the special segment.
The required axial resistances due to live and dead loads of the diagonal members in the special segment must
not exceed 0.03FA . yg
F.3.5.4.4.2 — Bracing for Truss Stability — Each flange of the top and bottom chords of the truss shall be
laterally braced at the ends of the special segment. The required resistance of the lateral brace must comply with:
=
P 0.06R F A yy f
in (F.3.5.4-1)
where:
Af is the gross area of the flange of the chord member of the special segment, mm2
F.3.5.4.4.3 — Bracing for Stability of Truss-Column Connections — The column shall be laterally braced at
the level of the top and bottom chords of the trusses connected to the columns. Side braces shall have a required
strength of:
= P y nc
P 0.02R
in (F.3.5.4-2)
where:
Pnc is the nominal compressive strength of the chord members at the ends, N
F.3.5.4.4.4 — Stiffness of Bracing for Stability — The required stiffness of the brace shall meet the requirements
of F.2.20
where:
=y nc
PRP
r (F.3.5.4-3)
F.3.5.4.5.1 — Members of the special segment — The design shear resistance of the special segment is
calculated as the sum of the design shear resistance of the members of the chord in flexure, and the shear
resistance corresponding to the design tensile strength and 0.3 times the design compressive strength of the
diagonal members, when used. The members of the upper and lower chords in the special segment shall be of the
same section and shall provide at least 25% of the required vertical shear resistance.
F-246
The design resistance Pn ÿ determined according to the limit state of creep by tension, must be equal to or greater
than 2.2 times the required resistance, with ÿ = 0.9 .
where:
P nFA=yg (F.3.5.4-4)
F.3.5.4.5.2 — Expected vertical shear resistance of the special segment — The expected vertical shear
resistance of the special segment Vne to the center of the span is given as:
3.60R M 0.036EI(L
y nc L)
ÿ
s
INit is = + ++ a nt 3 IDR (0.3P cents
and
nc
) (F.3.5.4-5)
L s L s
where:
Mnc = nominal flexural resistance of a member of the chord of the special segment, N-mm
E = modulus of elasticity of a member of the chord of the special segment, N/mm2
I = moment of inertia of a member of the chord of the special segment, mm4
L = span of the truss, mm
Ls = length of the special segment, mm
Pnt = nominal tensile strength of a diagonal member of the special segment, N
Pnc = nominal resistance to compression of a diagonal member of the special segment, N ÿ = angle that
a diagonal member forms with the horizontal, degrees
F.3.5.4.5.3 — Width-Thickness Ratio Limits — Chord members and diagonal web members within the special
segment shall meet the requirements of Section F.3.4.1.1.2 for ductility members. high. The width-thickness ratios
of the diagonal member plates shall not be greater than 2.5.
F.3.5.4.5.4 — Reinforced chord members — The joint spacing for reinforced chord members in the special
segment shall not be greater than 0.04Er F where yr is the radius of gyration of they yindividual components about
their axis. weak.
F.3.5.4.5.5 — Protected zones — The region at each end of a chord member within the special segment is a
protected zone that shall meet the requirements of F.3.4.1.3. The protected zone extends a length equal to twice
the depth of the chord member from the connection to the truss web members. The vertical and diagonal end-to-
end web members of the special segment are protected zones.
F.3.5.4.6.1 — Critical Demand Welds — The following welds are critical demand and must meet the requirements
of F.3.1.3.4.2.
(1) Grooved welds at column splices (2) Welds at column-

base plate connections, except where it can be shown that the formation of a hinge at or near the column
can be prevented by restraints, and in the absence of stresses net under load combinations that
include the amplified seismic load.
F.3.5.4.6.2 — Diagonal Member Connections in Special Segment — Diagonal member end connections in the
special segment shall have a required strength at least equal to the expected yield strength in tension of the
members. diagonal members, RFA
.
yy g
F-247
F.3.5.4.6.3 — Column Splices — Column splices shall meet the requirements of Section F.3.4.2.5.
Where welds are used to make the splice, they shall be full penetration grooved.
When column splices are made with bolts, they must have a required flexural strength at least equal to the RFZ of
the smallest column. The required shearyyresistance
x of
The column web splices must be at least equal to ÿMH where ÿMpc is the sum of thepcnominal flexural plastic
,
resistances of the columns above and below the splice.
Exception— The required strength of the column splice need not be greater than that determined by a nonlinear
analysis as specified in F.3.3, considering appropriate stress concentration factors or fracture mechanics stress
intensity factors.
F.3.5.5 — CANTILEVER COLUMN SYSTEMS WITH MINIMUM ENERGY DISSIPATION (SCV-DMI)
F.3.5.5.1 — Scope — SCV-DMIs must be designed in accordance with this section
F.3.5.5.2 — Design Basis — The SCV-DMI are expected to have a minimum capacity to withstand inelastic drift due to
column flexural creep.
F.3.5.5.4.1 — Columns — Columns shall be designed using load combinations that include the amplified seismic
load. The required axial strength, Prc , shall not exceed 15% of the design axial strength, Pc , for these load
combinations only.
F.3.5.5.4.2 — Bracing for column stability — No special requirements specified.
F.3.5.5.5.1 — Basic requirements — No special requirements are specified.
F.3.5.5.5.2 — Column flanges — No special requirements are specified.
F.3.5.5.5.3 — Protected zones — No protected zones are specified.
F.3.5.5.6.1 — Demand Critical Welds — Demand critical welds are not specified.
F.3.5.5.6.2 — Column Bases — No requirements are specified for base columns.
F.3.5.6 — CANTILEVER COLUMN SYSTEMS WITH SPECIAL ENERGY DISSIPATION (SCV-DES)
F.3.5.6.1 — Scope — SCV-DES must be designed in accordance with this section.
F.3.5.6.2 — Design Basis — The SCV-DES are expected to have a limited ability to withstand inelastic drift due to column
flexural creep.
F-248
F.3.5.6.4.1 — Columns — Columns shall be designed using load combinations that include the amplified
seismic load. The required axial strength, Prc , shall not exceed 15% of the design axial strength, Pc , for
these load combinations only.
F.3.5.6.4.2 — Bracing for Column Stability — Columns shall be braced to meet the requirements for beams
classified as moderate ductility members in Section F.3.4.1.2.1.
F.3.5.6.5.1 — Basic Requirements — Column members shall meet the requirements of Section F.3.4.1.1
for high ductility members of Section F.3.4.1.1
F.3.5.6.5.2 — Column fins — Abrupt changes in column fins designated as protected zones in
numeral F.3.5.6.5.3 are prohibited.
F.3.5.6.5.3 — Protected zones — The region at the base of the column subject to inelastic deformations is
a protected zone, and must satisfy the requirements of F.3.4.1.3. The length of the protected zone is twice
the cant of the column, unless otherwise determined by testing.
F.3.5.6.6.1 — Critical Demand Welds - The following welds are critical demand and must satisfy the
(1) Grooved welds in column splices
(2) Welding of column-base plate connections
F.3.5.6.6.2 — Column Bases — Column bases shall be designed in accordance with F.3.4.2.6.
F.3.6 — BRACED SYSTEMS AND SHEAR WALLS

This numeral establishes the design bases, and the requirements for the analysis, the system, members and connections for
PAC-DMI, PAC-DES, PAE and PAPR, as well as MCA-DES.
F.3.6.1 — Concentrically Braced Frames with Minimum Energy Dissipation Capacity (PAC-DMI)
F.3.6.2 — Concentrically Braced Frames with Special Energy Dissipation Capability (PAC-DES)
F.3.6.3 — Eccentrically Braced Frames (PAE)
F.3.6.4 — Braced Restrained Buckling Frames (PAPR)
F.3.6.5 — Steel shear walls (MCA-DES).
F.3.6.1 — CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES WITH MINIMUM ENERGY DISSIPATION CAPACITY (PAC-DMI)
F.3.6.1.1 — Scope — Concentrically Braced Frames with Minimum Energy Dissipation Capacity (PAC-DMI) shall be
designed in accordance with this section. On seismically isolated structures, PAC-DMIs shall meet the requirements
of Sections F.3.6.1.4.2, F.3.6.1.5, F.3.6.1.6, and F.3.6.1.7 and are not required to meet the requirements of numeral
F.3.6.1.4.1.
F.3.6.1.2 — Basis of Design — This section applies to braced frames having concentrically braced members.
Eccentricities less than the superelevation of the beam are allowed if they are taken into account in the design of the
members by determining the moments produced by the eccentricity, evaluated with the amplified seismic load.
PAC-DMI must have the capacity to support limited inelastic deformations in its members and connections.
F-249
F.3.6.1.4.1 — V-braced and inverted-V braced structures — Beams shall be continuous at the brace connections
when they occur outside the beam-column connection and must meet the following requirements:
(1) The required strength shall be determined based on Title B load combinations assuming that the braces do
not provide live and dead load support. For combinations that include the effects of earthquake, the seismic
effect E shall be determined as follows: (a) The forces in the braces in tension shall be assumed to be the
lesser of the
following:
(i) The expected yield strength of the tension brace, RFA yy g
.
(ii) The effect of loading based on amplified seismic loading. (iii) The
maximum force that can be developed by the system. (b) The forces in
the compression braces are to be assumed equal to 0.3P . n
(2) At least one set of lateral braces is required at the point of intersection of these bracings, unless the member
has sufficient out-of-plane strength and stiffness to ensure stability between adjacent bracing points.
F.3.6.1.4.2 — K -braced structures — K -bracing is not permitted for PAC DMI.
F.3.6.1.5.1 — Basic Requirements — The braces shall meet the requirements of F.3.4.1.1 for members with
moderate ductility.
F.3.6.1.5.2 — Slenderness — Braces with V or inverted V configurations must comply with KL r 4 EF ÿ

and
F.3.6.1.6.1 — Diagonal Brace Connections — The required connection strength is the effect corresponding to the
amplified seismic load, but need not be greater than the following:
(1) The maximum force that can be developed by the system.

(2) In tension, the expected yield strength of the brace determined as RFA (3) In compression, yy
theg .
expected strength of the brace in compression, which can be calculated as the lesser of RFA where Fcre is
determined in F.2.5 using the 1.14F A cre
yy g and
g ,
equations for Fcr but using the expected yield stress R Fy y instead of Fy . The strut length used to
determine Fcre shall not be greater than the distance between strut ends.
(4) When enlarged boreholes are used, the required bolt slip limit state resistance need not be greater than the
effect of loading considering Title B combinations not including amplified seismic loading.
F.3.6.1.7 — PAC-DMI on systems with seismic isolators
F.3.6.1.7.1 — System Requirements — Beams in V and Inverted V configurations must be continuous between
columns.
F-250
F.3.6.1.7.2 — Members — The braces must have a slenderness ratio KL r 4 EF ÿ

and
F.3.6.2 — CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES WITH SPECIAL ENERGY DISSIPATION CAPACITY (PAC-DES)
F.3.6.2.1 — Scope — Concentrically Braced Frames with Special Energy Dissipation Capability (DES-PAC) shall be designed in
accordance with this section.
F.3.6.2.2 — Basis of Design — This section applies to braced frames having concentrically braced members. Eccentricities less
than the depth of the beam are permitted if they have been considered in the design of the resulting member and its connecting
forces, and do not change the source of expected inelastic deformation capacity.
PAC-DES must be capable of withstanding significant inelastic deformations primarily from brace buckling and brace yielding in
tension.
F.3.6.2.3 — Analysis — The required strength of columns, beams, and connections shall be based on Title B load combinations
including amplified seismic load. In determining the latter, the effect of the horizontal forces including the overresistance, Emh ,
must be calculated as the greater force determined from the following two analyses:
(1) An analysis in which braces are assumed to act with forces corresponding to their expected strength in compression or
tension.
(2) An analysis in which it is assumed that braces in tension act with forces corresponding to their expected resistance and all
braces in compression are assumed to act with their expected resistance to postbuckling.
The determination of whether the braces are in compression or tension must be made without including the effects of gravity loads.
The analysis must consider the two directions of loads on the structure.
The expected tensile strength of the brace is RFA yy g
.
The expected resistance of the brace in compression, which can be calculated as the lesser of RFA yy g
and
1.14F A cre ,
where Fcre is determined in F.2.5 using the equations for Fcr but using the stress at
g
expected creep R Fy y instead of Fy . The strut length used to determine Fcre shall not be greater than the distance between strut
ends.
The expected post-buckling resistance of the brace shall be calculated as a maximum of 0.3 times the expected resistance of the
brace in compression. Braces with a slenderness of 200 (the maximum allowed in F.3.6.2.5.2) buckle elastically; the value of 0.3F
for such braces is 15 MPa. This value may be used in F.3.6.2.3(2)
cr for braces of any slenderness as a conservative estimate of the
required strength of framing members. Alternatively a value of 0 can be used to simplify the analysis.
Exceptions:
(1) It is allowed to neglect the bending moments resulting from the seismic drift in the previous calculations. But if the moments
resulting from loads applied to the column between points of lateral support must be considered.
(2) The required strength of the columns need not be greater than the lesser of the following:
(a) Forces determined using Title B load combinations including amplified seismic load, applied to a structural model of
the building in which all compression braces have been removed.
(b) The forces corresponding to the resistance of the foundation to uplift. (c) The forces
determined by a nonlinear analysis as defined in F.3.3.3.
F-251
F.3.6.2.4.1 — Distribution of Lateral Forces — Braces shall be arranged along any bracing axis in
alternate directions, in such a way that for any direction of force, parallel to the bracing, at least one 30
percent, but not more than 70 percent of the total horizontal force is resisted by tension braces, unless the
nominal resistance Pn
of each brace in compression is greater than the required resistance, Pu , which results from applying the
load combinations using the amplified seismic load. For the purpose of this section, a bracing axis is
defined as a single axis or parallel axes that do not deviate in plan by more than 10 percent of the
dimension of the building perpendicular to the bracing axis.
F.3.6.2.4.2 — V- and Inverted-V Braced Structures — Beams that are intercepted by braces at points
remote from the beam-column connection must meet the following requirements:
(1) Beams must be continuous between columns.

(2) The beams connected to the braces must satisfy the requirements for members of moderate
ductility in F.3.4.1.2.1.
At a minimum, one set of lateral braces is required at the point of intersection of these bracings,
unless the member has sufficient out-of-plane strength and stiffness to ensure stability between
adjacent bracing points.
One way to demonstrate this is to apply the force defined in Equation F.2.19-7 on each fin in such
a way that a torque is formed; this load must be applied together with the bending forces defined
in point 1 above. The stiffness of the beam and its supports with respect to this torsional load must
be sufficient to satisfy Equation F.3.1.19-8.
F.3.6.2.4.3 — K -braced structures — K -bracing is not permitted for PAC DES.
F.3.6.2.4.4 — Frames with Tension Braces Only — Structures with tension braces only are not permitted
for PAC-DES.
F.3.6.2.5 - Members
F.3.6.2.5.1 — Basic Requirements — Columns and braces shall meet the requirements of F.3.4.1.1 for
high ductility members. The beams shall meet the requirements of F.3.4.1.1 for members of moderate
ductility.
F.3.6.2.5.2 — Diagonal Braces — Braces must meet the following requirements:
(1) Slenderness KL r 200 ÿ
(2) Armored braces: The spacing of connectors must be such that the slenderness ratio lr of the
individual elements between the connectors does not exceed 0.4 times the governing slenderness
of the assembled member.
The sum of the design shear resistance of the connectors must be equal to or greater than the
design tension resistance of each element. Connector spacing should be even and no fewer than
two connectors should be used. Bolted connectors shall not be placed in the middle quarter of the
free length of the brace.
Exception — When the buckling of the braces about their critical buckling axis does not generate
shear in the connectors, the spacing of these must be such that the slenderness ratio lr of the
individual elements between the connectors does not exceed 0.75 times the slenderness ratio of
the governing fabricated member.
F-252
(3) The effective net area of the brace shall not be less than the gross area. When used
Reinforcement in the braces shall meet the following requirements: (a) The
specified minimum yield strength of the reinforcement shall be at least the yield strength of the brace.
(b) Reinforcement-to-brace connections shall be of sufficient strength to develop the expected strength of
the reinforcement on each side of the reduced section.
F.3.6.2.5.3 — Protected zones — The PAC-DES protected zone must satisfy the numeral of F.3.4.1.3 and include
the following: (1) For braces, the
central quarter of the length of the brace and in the adjacent zone of each connection equal to the
superelevation of the brace in the plane of buckling.
(2) Elements that connect the braces to beams and columns.
F.3.6.2.6.1 — Demand Critical Welds — The following welds are considered demand critical and must meet the
requirements of Section F.3.1.3.4.2.

(2) Column-base plate connection welds, except where it can be shown that the formation of the hinge at or
near the column base plate can be prevented by restraints, and in the absence of net stresses (uplift
forces) under the load combinations that include the amplified seismic load.
(3) Welds in the beam-column connections according to numeral F.3.6.2.6.2(2).
F.3.6.2.6.2 — Beam-Column Connections — When a diagonal member or its haunch connects both the beam
and the column, the connection must meet one of the following conditions:
(1) The connection must be simple and meet the requirements of F.2.2.3.6.1, where the
required rotation should be taken as 0.025 radians; either,
(2) The connection must be designed to resist a moment equal to the lesser of the following: (a) A
moment corresponding to 1.1RFZ of the beam.y y
(b) A moment corresponding to ÿ(1.1RFZ yy ) of the

column.
This moment must be considered in combination with the required strength of the brace connection
and the beam connection including the amplified forces of the manifold diaphragm.
F.3.6.2.6.3 — Required Strength of Brace Connections — The required resistance in tension, compression, and
bending of the brace connections (including beam-column joints if part of the bracing system) shall be determined
as is required right away. These required resistances can be considered independently without interaction between
them.
(1) Required Tensile Strength — The required tensile strength shall be the lesser of
following values: (a) The
expected tensile yield strength of the brace, determined as RFA yy g
,
except that the braces need not meet the requirements of Equations F.2.10.4-1 and F.2.10.4-2 for this
load. This exception applies to braces where the section is reduced or when the net section is
effectively reduced due to lag shear. A typical case is the connection of a slotted PTE to a connection
plate. F.3.6.2.5.2 requires that braces with holes or slots be reinforced in such a way that the effective
net area is greater than the gross area. The strength of the brace used to check the limit states of the
connection, such as block shear, shall be determined using the expected material properties as
permitted by F.3.1.3.2 (b) The maximum force that the system can be transferred to the calculated
brace by means of a
rational analysis.
F-253
When enlarged boreholes are used, the required bolt slip limit state resistance need not be greater than
the effects based on Title B load combinations, including amplified seismic load. For other limit states, the
loads of subparagraphs (a) and (b) above apply.
(2) Required Compressive Strength — Brace connections shall be designed for a required compressive
strength based on buckling limit states at least equal to 1.1 times the expected brace strength in
compression, where the expected compressive strength is defined in section F.3.6.2.3(2).
(3) Restraints on Brace Buckling — Brace connections must be designed to resist the bending moments or
rotations imposed by brace buckling. Connections that satisfy either of the following two requirements
are considered to meet this requirement: (a) Required Flexural Strength: Brace connections designed to
withstand the bending
moments imposed by brace buckling must have a minimum design strength of 1.1RM of the brace with
respect to the critical axis of buckling. (b) Rotation Capacity: Brace connections designed to tolerate
rotations imposed by buckling of the brace shall have sufficient rotation capacity to
yp
tolerate the rotation required for design story drift. Inelastic rotation of the connection is allowed. Inelastic
rotation tolerance is typically verified with the use of a single gusset to which the brace is welded so
that between the end of the brace and the yield line (the line at which the yielding of the gusset
occurs). ), there is at least a distance equal to twice the thickness of the gusset
F.3.6.2.6.4 — Column splices — They must comply with the requirements of numeral F.3.4.2.5.
When groove welds are used to make the splice, they must be full penetration. Column splices shall be designed
to develop at least 50% of the least design flexural strength of the connected members.
The manufacturing and assembly drawings must also satisfy the requirements of numeral F.3.1.4.3. The required
shear resistance must be ÿMH pc
c,
where:
ÿMpc = the sum of the nominal plastic flexural resistance F Zyc c of the columns above and below the splice, N-
mm.
Hc = free height of the column between beam connections, including the slab, if any, mm.
F.3.6.3 — ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (PAE)
F.3.6.3.1 — Scope — Eccentrically Braced (EBC) frames shall be designed in accordance with this section.
F.3.6.3.2 — Basis of design — This section is applicable to braced frames in which one end of each brace intersects a
beam with an eccentricity from the intersection of the center lines of the beam and an adjacent brace or column, forming a
link that is subjected to shear and bending. Eccentricities less than the superelevation of the beam are permitted at the far
link brace connection, if the resultant forces in the member and connection are considered in the design, and do not change
the expected source of inelastic deformation capacity.
It is expected that the PAEs designed in accordance with this numeral guarantee a significant inelastic deformation capacity
through the shear creep of the links.
When links are connected directly to columns, the link-column connection design shall ensure the performance required in
F.3.6.3.6.5(1) and demonstrate conformance with the requirements of F.3.6.3.6.5. (2).
F-254
F.3.6.3.3 — Analysis — The required strength of diagonal braces and their connections, out-of-link beams, and columns shall be based
on Title B load combinations that include the amplified seismic load. In determining the amplified seismic load, the effect of horizontal
forces including overstrength, Emh , shall be calculated as the forces developed in the member assuming that the forces at the link ends
correspond to the adjusted shear strength of the link. . The adjusted shear resistance of the link shall be calculated as Ry times the nominal
shear resistance of the link, Vn , given in F.3.6.3.5.2(2) multiplied by 1.25 for I-section links and 1.4 for I -section links. drawer sections.
Exceptions:
(1) The effect of the horizontal forces that include the overresistance, Emh , can be taken as 0.88 times the forces determined in the
previous paragraph for the design of the following members: (a) The part of the beams outside the link. (b) Columns in
structures of 3 or more stories.
(2) Bending moments resulting from drift can be neglected in these calculations. But if the moments resulting from loads applied to the
column between points of lateral support must be considered.
(3) The required strength of the columns need not be greater than the lesser of the following values:
(a) The forces corresponding to the resistance of the foundation to uplift. (b) The forces determined from a
nonlinear analysis as defined in F.3.3.3.
The inelastic angle of rotation of the link shall be determined from the inelastic portion of the design story drift. Alternatively, the inelastic
angle of rotation of the link can be determined from a non-linear analysis as defined in F.3.3.3.
The effect of the seismic load Emh used in the design of PAE members, such as the axial resistance required for the equations in F.3.6.3.5,
must be calculated from the analysis described above.
F.3.6.3.4.1 — Link rotation angle — The link rotation angle is the inelastic angle between the link and the beam outside of it,
when the total story drift is equal to the design story drift . The link rotation angle must not exceed the following values:
(a) 0.08 radians when the links have a length of 1.6MV the smallest. pp
(b) 0.02 radians when links are 2.6MV or greater in length. pp
(c) In the case of links with lengths between 1.6MV and 2.6MV el pp
p p
limit must be set by linear interpolation
F.3.6.3.4.2 — Link Bracing — Bracing shall be provided on both link wings at the link ends for I sections . The bracing shall
have adequate design strength and stiffness to develop the plastic hinge in accordance with F.3.4.1.2.2 for members with high
ductility.
F.3.6.3.5.1 — Basic Requirements — Bracing members shall meet the width-thickness limits of F.3.4.1.1 for members with
moderate ductility.
When the beam outside the link is of a different section from the link, the beam must satisfy the width-thickness limits of numeral
F.3.4.1.1 for members with moderate ductility.
The diagonal brace and beam segment outside the link are dimensioned to remain essentially elastic under the forces generated
by the link flowing fully and with
F-255
strain hardening. Both the diagonal brace and the beam segment outside the link are typically stressed by a combination
of large axial forces and bending moment, and therefore must be treated as beam-columns in design, where the design
strength is defined at F .2.8.
When the beam outside the link is in the same member of the link, its strength shall be determined using the expected
material properties as permitted by F.3.1.3.2.
F.3.6.3.5.2 — Links — Beam-links subjected to bending and shear due to eccentricities between the intersections of
the axes of the braces and the beam (or between the intersection of the axes of the brace and beam and the column
axis for links connected to columns). Link length shall be considered to be measured as the clearance between brace
connections for center links and the clearance between the brace connection and the face of the column for links
adjacent to columns, except as specified in F. 3.6.3.6.3.
(1) Limitations — Links must be I sections (laminated or reinforced), or sections

assembled in drawer Links should not be used with PTE.
The links must meet the requirements of numeral F.3.4.1.1 for members with high ductility.
Exception — I section link flanges with lengths to meet the requirements for e 1.6MV ÿ pp they can
members with moderate ductility.
The soul or souls of a bond must be in one piece. Reinforcements with veneer plates or perforations in the
soul are not allowed.
For links made with reinforced sections, full penetration groove welds must be used to connect the web(s) to
the flanges.
The links of reinforced box sections must have a moment of inertia, with respect to an axis in the I in ,
with
plane of the PAE such that I with respect to the axis in 0.67I > x ,
where I xis the moment of inertia
perpendicular to the plane of the PAE.
(2) Shear resistance — The design shear resistance of the link, ÿv n IN with
ÿ in
= 0.9 ,
It must be the lowest value obtained according to the limit states of shear yield in the web and flexural yield in
the total section. For both limit states: (a) For shear yield:
VVn p= (F.3.6.3-1)
where:
=
V 0.6FA p and lw for PP Uy ÿ (F.3.6.3-2)
=
V p0.6FA 1 PP light ÿ
(
)2
for PP 0.15
Uy > (F.3.6.3-3)
Ad
lw2t=t ÿf (w ) for links with section I (F.3.6.3-4)
A 2 d =2t t lw
ÿ (f w ) for links section drawer (F.3.6.3-5)
Pu = required axial resistance, N

,
N (F.3.6.3-6)
Py = nominal axial yield strength = F Ay g
F-256
(b) For flexural creep:
V n2M= e p (F.3.6.3-7)
where:
M FZ =p for PP 0.15 (F.3.6.3-8)

and Uy ÿ
ÿ 1PP
ÿ
Uy
M FZ = ÿ ÿ for PP 0.15 (F.3.6.3-9)
py Uy > ÿ
0.85
ÿÿ
e = length of the link defined as the free distance between the ends of two diagonal braces or
between the diagonal brace and the face of the column,
mm.
(3) Link length
PP 1.5 > hey , the length of the link should be limited to the following:
When ÿ ÿ´ 0.5
1.6M
p
It is ÿ (F.3.6.3-10)
IN
p
When ÿ > 0.5
1.6M
p
andÿ ( 1.15 0.3 ÿp
'
) (F.3.6.3-11)
V
p
where:
PP
´ hey
ÿ= (F.3.6.3-12)
VV Uy
Vu = required shear resistance, N

Vy = nominal yield shear strength = 0.6FA y
lw
, N (F.3.6.3-13)
For links with low axial forces there is no upper limit to the length of the link. The limits on the angle of link
rotation in F.3.6.3.4.1 are practically a lower limit on the length of the link.
(4) Link Stiffeners for I Sections — Stiffeners shall be provided to the web of the link, at its full height and on
both sides of the web, at the ends of the diagonal brace.
b2t
These stiffeners shall have a combined width not less than ( and a thickness of 0.75t
fw or 10mm,
)
whichever ÿ
respectively. is greater,
In
where bf and wt are the flange width not less than and the link web thickness,
Links must have intermediate web stiffeners that meet the following:
(a) Links of lengths equal to 1.6MV or less must have intermediate web stiffeners spaced at intervals not
p p
to exceed ( link rotation angle is 0.08 radians or (52t d 5 ÿ ) when said angle 30t dIn 5 ÿ ) when the
In
F-257
be 0.02 radians or less. In the case of rotations between 0.02 and 0.08 radians, it must be linearly
interpolated. (b) Links with a
length greater than 5M V must be 2.6MV and less than pp p p
intermediate web stiffeners placed 1.5b apart as measured from each end of the link. f
(c) Links of length between 1.6MVy 2.6MV must have p

p p_ p
intermediate web stiffeners meeting the requirements of (a) and (b) above.
(d) Intermediate web stiffeners are not required in links with lengths
greater than pp 5M V
(e) In the links the intermediate stiffeners must extend to their full height. In the case of links with a height of
less than 635 mm, stiffeners are only required on one side of the web. The thickness of such stiffeners
shall not be less than wt or 10 mm, whichever is greater, and the width shall not be less than (b2 t w )
ÿ . In links with heights greater than or equal to 635 mm, similar f intermediate stiffeners are required, on
both sides of the web.
The required strength of the fillet welds connecting the stiffeners to the link web is A Fst where Ast is the
area of the stiffener. The required strength of the fillet welds joining the stiffener to the link wings is AF 4
and
,
st y
(5) Link Stiffeners for Box Sections — Stiffeners shall be provided to the link web, along its full height and on one
side of each link web, at the diagonal brace connection. These stiffeners can be welded on the inside or
outside of the webs of the link. Each stiffener must have a width of not less than b 2 where b is the inside
width of the box. These stiffeners must have a thickness of not less than 13 mm, whichever is greater. ,
0.75t Ino
Links must have intermediate web stiffeners that meet the following:
(a) Links with lengths equal to 1.6MV or less, and with slender
p p
webs
h tw greater than or equal to 0.64 EF and , must have intermediate stiffeners on one side
web spaced at intervals not to exceed 20t In ÿ ÿd 2t( 8 f .
) (b) Links with lengths equal to 1.6MV or less, and with pslender
p
webs
h tw less than 0.64 EF and , do not require intermediate stiffeners.
(c) Links with a length greater than 1.6MVp does

p
not require stiffeners
intermediates.
(d) Intermediate stiffeners in links shall extend to their full height and may be welded to the inside or outside
face of the link webs.
The required strength of the fillet welds connecting the stiffeners to the link web is A Fst where Ast is the
area of the stiffener. Stiffeners in box section links do not need to be welded to the box flanges.
and
,
F.3.6.3.5.3 — Protected Zones — SAP links are protected zones and must satisfy the requirements of section
F.3.4.1.3.
F.3.6.3.6.1 — Critical Demand Welds - The following welds are critical demand and must meet the requirements of
Section F.3.1.3.4.2:
F-258

(2) Welds of the column-base plate connection, except where it can be shown that the formation of
the hinge at the column or near the base plate can be prevented by restraints, and in the absence
of net stresses (from uplift forces). under the load combinations that include the amplified seismic
load.
(3) Beam-column connection welds in accordance with numeral F.3.6.3.6.2(b).
(4) Welds connecting the link flanges and the link web to the column when the
link is connected to columns.
(5) Welds connecting webs to flanges at ties to reinforced beams.
F.3.6.3.6.2 — Beam-Column Connections — When a brace or gusset connects to the beam and column,
the connection must meet one of the following conditions:
(1) The connection must be simple (not moment), and meet the requirements of F.2.2.3.6.1, where
the required rotation is taken as 0.025 radians (2) The
connection must be designed to resist a simultaneous moment with the required strength of the brace
connection, equal to the lesser of the following: (a) A moment
corresponding to 1.1RFZ of the beam. yy
(b) A moment corresponding to ÿ(1.1RFZ yy ) the

of column
This moment shall be considered in combination with the required strength of the brace and beam
connection, including the amplified forces of the manifold diaphragm.
F.3.6.3.6.3 — Brace Connections — When enlarged bores are used, the required resistance to bolt slip
limit state need not be greater than the load effects based on Title B load combinations, including the
amplified seismic load.
Brace connections designed to resist the portion of the moment at the end of the link must be considered
fully restrained.
When groove welds are used to make the splice, they must be full penetration. Column splices shall be
designed to develop at least 50% of the least design flexural strength of the connected members.
The required shear resistance must be ÿMH pc c,
where:
ÿMpc = the sum of the nominal plastic flexural resistance F Zyc c of the columns above and below the
splice, N-mm.
F.3.6.3.6.5 — Link-column connections
(1) Requirements — Link-column connections must be fully restrained moment (TR) connections and
must satisfy the following requirements:
(a) The connection must be able to sustain the angle of rotation of the link
specified in F.3.6.3.4.1.
(b) The shear resistance of the connection, measured for the required angle of link rotation,
shall be at least equal to the expected shear resistance of the link, Vn , as defined in
F.3.6.3.3.
(c) The flexural resistance of the connection, measured for the angle of rotation of the link,
must be at least equal to the moment corresponding to the nominal shear resistance of
the link, Vn , as defined in F.3.6. 3.5.2.2(2).
F-259
(2) Connection Validation — Connections from the link to the column must satisfy the
above requirement by one of the following procedures: (a) Use a
prequalified connection for eccentrically braced frames, of
according to section F.3.11.2.
(b) Adhering to the cyclic qualification test result specifications in accordance with F.3.11.2.
At least two tests of the connection must be carried out and may be based on one of the
following considerations: (i) Tests reported in research
articles or documented tests carried out for other projects that represent the conditions
of the project, with the limits specified in numeral F .3.11.2.
(ii) Tests focused specifically for the project that are representative of the sizes of the
members, resistance of the material, configuration of connections, construction
processes of the connection, with the limits specified in F.3.11.2.
Exception — Cyclic tests of the connection are not required if the following requirements are met:
(1) A reinforcement of the beam-column connection is made in the link that excludes the
yielding of the beam over the reinforced length.
(2) The design strength of the reinforced section and the connection is equal to or greater than
the required strength calculated based on the adjusted shear strength of the link as described
in F.3.6.3.3.
(3) the length of the link (taken as the beam segment from the end of the reinforcement to the
connection of the brace) does not exceed 1.6MV pp
(4) Stiffeners are used at the interface between the link and the reinforced section as required in
Section F.3.6.3.5.2(4).
F.3.6.4 — FRAMES WITH RESTRICTED BUCKLING BRACES (PAPR)
F.3.6.4.1 — Scope — PAPRs shall be designed in accordance with this section.
F.3.6.4.2 — Basis of Design — This section applies to structures with braces concentrically connected to specially
fabricated beams and columns. Eccentricities less than the depth of the beam are permitted if the member forces
and the resulting connections are considered in the design and do not change the expected source of inelastic
deformation capacity.
PAPRs designed in accordance with these requirements are expected to provide significant deformation inelastic
capacity, primarily through brace yielding in tension and compression. The design of the braces shall provide the
performance required by F.3.6.4.2.1, and demonstrate its conformance in accordance with F.3.6.4.5.2(3). The
braces must be designed, tested and detailed to meet the expected deformations. The expected deformations are
those corresponding to a story drift of at least 2% of the story height or two times the design story drift, whichever
is greater, in addition to brace deformations resulting from deformation of the structure due to gravitational loading.
PAPRs should be designed so that inelastic deformations under the design earthquake occur primarily as brace
yielding in tension and compression.
F.3.6.4.2.1 — Brace Strength — The adjusted brace strength shall be established based on tests as
described in this section.
When required in these provisions, the connections of the brace and adjacent members shall be designed
to resist the forces calculated based on the adjusted strength of the brace.
The adjusted resistance of the brace in compression shall be ÿÿR Py ysc
where
F-260
ÿ = compressive strength adjustment factor ÿ = strain

hardening adjustment factor
Pysc = axial creep strength of steel core, MPa
The adjusted resistance in tension must be ÿR Py ysc .
Exception: The Ry factor need not be applied , if Pysc is determined using the yield stress obtained from
a test.
The compressive strength adjustment factor, ÿ , is calculated as the ratio of the maximum compressive
force and the maximum tensile force of the test specimen measured from the qualification tests specified
in F.3.11.3.4. 3, for the expected deformations. The value of ÿ to be used is the larger of the two brace
qualification tests. In no case should ÿ
be less than one.
The strain hardening adjustment factor, ÿ shall be calculated as the ratio of the maximum tensile strength,
,
measured from the qualification tests specified in F.3.11.3.4.3 (for the range of expected strains) and the
measured yield strength, R Py y sc of the test specimen. The highest value of ÿ obtained in the two
qualification tests should be used. When the tested material of the steel core does not coincide with that
of the prototype, ÿ must be calculated based on the tests of the prototype material.
F.3.6.4.3 — Analysis — PAPRs should not be considered as a resistive system for gravitational forces.
The required strength of columns, beams, and connections in PAPR shall be based on Title B load combinations
that include the amplified seismic load. In determining the amplified seismic load, the effects of horizontal forces
including overstrength, Emh , shall be taken as the forces developed in the member assuming that all forces
correspond to its adjusted resistance in compression or tension.
It must be determined whether the braces are in compression or tension, neglecting the effects of gravity loads.
The analyzes must consider the two directions of loads in the structure.
The adjusted strength of the tension brace shall be as described in F.3.6.4.2.1.
Exceptions:
(1) It is permissible to neglect bending moments resulting from seismic drift in this determination. The moments
resulting from the loads applied to the column between points of lateral support must be considered.
(2) The required strength of the columns need not be greater than the lesser of the following
values:
(a) The forces corresponding to the resistance of the foundation to uplift. (b) Forces
determined from a nonlinear analysis as defined in F.3.3.
The brace deflection shall be determined from the inelastic portion of the design story drift and shall
include the effects of the vertical flexibility of the beam. Alternatively, the brace deformations can be
determined from the non-linear analyzes defined in F.3.3.
F.3.6.4.4.1 — V and Inverted V Braces — These must meet the following requirements:
(1) The required resistance of beams intercepted by braces, their connections and support
members, must be determined based on the load combinations of Title B of
F-261
this Regulation assuming that the braces do not take live or dead loads. For load combinations that
include seismic effects, the vertical and horizontal seismic effects, E on the beam shall be determined
from the adjusted brace resistances in tension and compression.
,
(2) Beams must be continuous between columns. Both beam flanges must be laterally braced to satisfy
the moderate ductility member requirements of Section F.3.4.1.1. A minimum of one set of lateral
braces is required at the point of intersection of these braces, unless the beam has sufficient out-of-
plane strength and stiffness to ensure stability between adjacent bracing points.
The beam has sufficient out-of-plane stiffness and strength if the capacity of the beam in the horizontal plane meets
the required strength and stiffness for column nodal bracing prescribed in Section F.2.19. Pu can be taken as the
required compressive strength of the brace.
For bracing design and testing purposes, the calculated maximum deformation of the braces shall be increased to
include the effect of vertical deflection of the beam under the load defined in Section F.3.6.4.4.1(1).
F.3.6.4.4.2 — K -braces — K- type bracing is not permitted in PAPR .
F.3.6.4.4.3 — Brace to Beam-Column Connections — These connections shall be designed to resist an out-of-
plane seismic force E equal to 6% of the adjusted compressive strength of the brace. The required stiffness of the
brace shall meet the requirements of equation F.2.20.2-4, where Pu is the adjusted compressive strength of the
brace.
F.3.6.4.5.1— Basic Requirements — Beam and column members shall meet the requirements of Section F.3.4.1.1
for high ductility members.
F.3.6.4.5.2 - Riostras
(1) Assembly — The braces are composed of a structural steel core and a system
which restricts the buckling of the core.
(a) Steel core — Plates used in steel core that are 50mm thick or greater must meet the minimum
toughness of F.3.1.3.3.
Splices are not allowed in the steel core.
(b) Buckling Restraint Systems — The buckling restraint system consists of a cover for the steel
core. In stability calculations, the beams, columns, and tie plates connecting the core are
considered part of this system. The buckling restraint system must limit the local and general
buckling of the steel core for the expected deformations. Compliance with these provisions is
validated through the tests described in section F.3.6.4.2.2.
(2) Design Strength — The steel core must be designed to resist the axial force
complete in the brace.
The design axial strength of the brace, Pysc ÿ yield , in tension and compression, according to the
limit state, shall be determined as follows:
P FA =ysc ysc (F.3.6.4-1)

sc
ÿ = 0.9
where,
Fysc = specified minimum yield strength of the steel core, or actual resistance to
the yield of the steel core determined from a test, MPa
F-262
Asc = net area of the steel core, mm2 .
The effects of loads calculated on the basis of the adjusted brace resistances should not be
amplified by the overresistance factor, ÿ0 .
(3) Validation of the connection — The design of the braces shall be made based on the results of
cyclical qualification tests in accordance with the procedures and acceptance criteria of
F.3.11.3. The results of the qualification tests must consist of at least two satisfactory cycle
tests; one is required to test a bracing system, including a brace connection requested by
rotational demands that meet the requirements of F.3.11.3.2, and the other may be either a
uniaxial test or a truss test. system that must meet the requirements of F.3.3.3. Both types of
assays can be validated by fulfilling one of the following conditions:
(a) Essays obtained in the literature of tests prepared for other projects similar to the one being
carried out.
(b) Tests that are carried out specifically for the project.
Interpolation or extrapolation of test results for members of different sizes shall be justified by
a rational analysis that demonstrates the consistency of the distribution of stresses and internal
strains, that is less severe than the conditions tested, and that considers the effects adverse
effects of variations in material properties. Extrapolation of test results shall be made based on
similar combinations of steel core sizes and buckling restraint systems. To allow a design to be
qualified by testing, F.3.11.3 must be met.
F.3.6.4.5.3 — Protected Zones — Protected zones shall include the steel core of the braces and the
elements connecting it to the beams and columns, and shall meet the requirements of F.3.4.1.3.
F.3.6.4.6.1 — Critical Demand Welds - The following welds are critical demand and must meet the
requirements of Section F.3.1.3.4.2:

(2) Welds of the column-base plate connection, except where it can be shown that the formation of
the hinge at or near the column can be prevented by restraints, and in the absence of net
stresses (from uplift forces). ) under the load combinations that include the amplified seismic
load.
(3) Welding of beam-column connections according to numeral F.3.6.3.6.2(b).
F.3.6.4.6.2 — Beam-Column Connections — When a brace or gusset connects to the beam and
column, the connection must meet one of the following conditions:
(1) The connection must be simple (not moment), and meet the requirements of F.2.2.3.6.1, where
the required rotation is taken as 0.025 radians (2) The
connection must be designed to resist a simultaneous moment with the required strength of the
brace connection, equal to the lesser of the following: (a) A
moment corresponding to 1.1RFZ of the beam. yy
(b) A moment corresponding to ÿ(1.1RFZ yy ) of the column

This moment shall be considered in combination with the required strength of the brace and
beam connection, including the amplified forces of the manifold diaphragm.
F-263
F.3.6.4.6.3 — Brace connections
(1) Required Strength — The required strength of the connection of the braces in tension and compression
(including beam-column connections if they are part of the braced structural system) shall be 1.1 times
the adjusted strength of the brace in compression, where the strength of the brace is defined in F.3.6.4.2.1.
When enlarged boreholes are used, the required resistance to bolt slip limit state need not be greater
than the effects of Title B load combinations, including amplified seismic load.
(2) Gusset Gusset Requirements — Connection design must include local and general buckling
considerations. Lateral bracing consistent with that used in the tests on which the design is based shall
be used.
These requirements can be met by designing the connection plate for a transverse force consistent with
the transverse forces of the bracing determined in the tests, by adding stiffeners to it to resist this force,
or by providing bracing to the connection plate. When the tests do not include cross bracing, it is not
required to be supplied. Any bracing accessory must be included in the fabrication test.
The required shear resistance Vu must be ÿMH pc c,
where:
mm.
F.3.6.5 — STEEL SHEAR WALLS (MCA)
F.3.6.5.1 — Scope — MCAs shall be designed in accordance with this section.
F.3.6.5.2 — Basis of Design — This section applies to structures made up of steel sheets connected to beams and
columns.
MCAs designed in accordance with these requirements are expected to provide significant deformation inelastic capacity,
primarily through web plate yielding and plastic hinge formation at the ends of horizontal edge elements (EBHs).
F.3.6.5.3 — Analysis — MCA webs should not be considered to resist gravity loads.
The required strength of EBHs, EBVs, and MCA connections must be based on Title B load combinations that include the
amplified seismic load. In determining the amplified seismic load, the effect of the horizontal forces including the
overresistance, Emh , must be determined from an analysis in which it is assumed that all the webs resist the forces
corresponding to their expected resistance in tension acting with the angle ÿ determined in numeral F.3.6.5.5.2, and the
EBH the actions resulting from applying moments equal to 1.1RM at each end . The tension in the webs must be found
,
without considering the effects of gravitational loads.

yp
F-264
The expected yield stress of the web should be taken as R Fy y . When walls with perforations are used, the expected
effective tensile stress is defined in F.3.6.5.7.1.
The shear forces from Equation F.3.5.1-1 must be included in the analysis. It should be noted that in some cases the
forces obtained from Title B load combinations may govern the design of EBHs.
Shear forces in beams and columns can be very large, and shear yield could be the dominant limit state.
F.3.6.5.4.1 - Stiffness of the edge elements – The EBVs must have moments of inertia with respect to the
4
not less
axis perpendicular to the plane of the web, 0.0031th L . The
c
,EBHsthan
must I have moments
In of inertia about the
axis perpendicular to the plane of the web, I 0.0031L h times the difference of the in
, not less than
4
thicknesses of the web plate above and below.
where:
wt = web thickness, mm. h = EBH
wheelbase, mm I
in = moment of inertia of an EBH with respect to the axis perpendicular to the plane of the plate of the
soul, mm4
Ic
= moment of inertia of an EBV about the axis perpendicular to the plane of the plate of the
soul, mm4
L = EBV wheelbase, mm.
F.3.6.5.4.2 — EBH-EBV Connection Moment Ratios — The beam-column moment ratios of Section
F.3.5.3.4.1 shall be met for all edge element intersections without considering the effects of the souls
F.3.6.5.4.3 — Bracing — EBHs shall be braced so as to satisfy the requirements for members with moderate
ductility in Section F.3.4.1.2.1.
F.3.6.5.4.4 — Web openings — Web openings shall be framed on all sides by intermediate border elements
extending the full width and height of the panel, unless otherwise justified by means of of tests and analysis,
or as permitted in F.3.6.5.7.
F.3.6.5.5.1 — Basic Requirements — EBHs, EBVs, and intermediate edge elements shall meet the
requirements of F.3.4.1.1 for high ductility members.
F.3.6.5.5.2 — Webs — The design shear resistance of the panel, Vn ÿ , accordingto the shear yield limit
state, shall be determined as follows:
=
V n0.42F t L sen 2 ÿ is cf (F.3.6.5-1)
ÿ = 0.9
where:
Ab = cross-sectional area of an EBH, mm2
Ac = cross-sectional area of an EBV, mm2
I = moment of inertia of an EBV about the axis perpendicular to the plane of the web plate, mm4
c
L = EBV wheelbase, mm.
F-265
Lcf = free distance between column fins, mm. h = EBV

wheelbase, mm. wt = web thickness, mm. ÿ
= web yield angle in degrees,
measured relative to the vertical. The angle of inclination, ÿ can be taken as 40°, or calculated as follows:
tL
In
1 +
2a
c
4 tan a = (F.3.6.5-2)
3
ÿÿ 1 h
1 th
++
In ÿÿ
A 360I
b
L
ÿÿ c
F.3.6.5.5.3 — Protected zone — The MCA protected zone shall comply with section F.3.4.1.3, and includes the
following:
(1) The souls of MCA.

(2) The elements that connect the souls to the EBH and the EBV.
(3) The plastic hinge zones at each end of the EBH, in a region from the face of the column to a
distance equal to one superelevation from the face of the column, or as specified in F.3.5.3.5. 3.
of Section F.3.1.3.4.2:

(2) Welds of the column-base plate connection, except where it can be shown that the formation of the
hinge at the column or near the base plate can be prevented by restraints, and in the absence of net
stresses under the load combinations which include the amplified seismic load.
(3) The welds of EBH-EBV connections.
F.3.6.5.6.2 — EBH-EBV connections — These connections shall meet the requirements of F.3.5.1.6.
(1) Required Strength — The required shear strength of an EBH-EBV connection shall be based on Title
B load combinations that include the amplified seismic load. In determining the amplified seismic load,
the effect of the horizontal forces that include the overstrength Emh , should be taken as the shear
calculated with equation F.3.5.1-1 together with the shear resulting from the expected yield strength
at tension of the webs at an angle ÿ .
(2) Panel zone — The EBV panel zone near the top and bottom of the EBH
of the MCA must comply with the requirements of numeral F.3.5.3.6.5.
F.3.6.5.6.3 — Web connections to edge elements — The required strength of the web connections to the
surrounding EBHs and EBVs shall be equal to the expected yield strength of the web in tension, at an angle ÿ .
The required shear resistance Vu must be ÿMH pc

c,
where:
F-266
mm.
Hc
= free height of the column between beam connections, including the slab, if any, mm.
F.3.6.5.7 — Perforated webs
F.3.6.5.7.1 — Normal Circular Perforation Configuration — It is permissible to use a perforated plate as the
core of an MCA as long as it complies with this section. Perforated webs shall have a regular pattern of holes of the
same diameter evenly spaced throughout the area of the web plate in an arrangement in which the perforations are
aligned diagonally at a uniform angle to the vertical. The edges of the openings must have a surface roughness of
13 microns or less.
(1) Strength — The design shear strength of the panel, Vn ÿ , according to the shear yield limit state,
shall be determined as follows for perforated webs:
=
V n0.42F t L 1 0.7DS diag is cf ) (F.3.6.5-3)
ÿ(
ÿ = 0.9
where:
D = diameter of the perforations, mm.
Sdiag = minimum center-to-center distance between holes, mm.
(2) Spacing — Sdiag spacing must be a minimum of 1.67D . The distance between the first perforations
and the web connections to the EBH and EBV must be D
,
at least but not more than D 0.7S + diag
(3) Stiffness — The stiffness of regularly drilled plates shall be calculated using an effective web plate
thickness, t eff given by: ,
Pi ÿ D ÿ
+ÿ1 ÿ
4S ÿ ÿ
= ÿ diag ÿ
t
ef
t
In
(F.3.6.5-4)
Pi ÿÿ
D ÿÿ N Dsen ÿ ÿ ÿ a
r
1 ÿ
1 ÿ
4S ÿ ÿ
H
diag ÿÿ ÿ ÿÿ c
where:
Hc = free height of the column (and of the web plate) between flanges, mm. wt =
web plate thickness, mm.
Nr = number of horizontal rows of perforations. ÿ = angle
with respect to the vertical of the shortest center-to-center line in the
arrangement of openings, degrees.
(4) Expected effective tensile stress — The expected effective tensile stress to be used in lieu of
effective tensile stress for analysis in accordance with
section F.3.6.5.3 is RF 1 0.7DS diag
yy (ÿ ).
F.3.6.5.7.2 — Reinforced Corner Web Holes — Quarter circle holes are permitted in the corners of webs if they
are connected to a curved reinforcing plate bordering the hole. Plates shall be designed to allow the full strength of
the web to develop and maintain its strength when subjected to deformations.
F-267
corresponding to the design floor drift. This can be achieved if the following conditions are met:
(1) Design in Tension — The curved plate shall have a design strength that develops the axial
tensile force resulting from web plate tension in the absence of other forces.
2
R Ft R
it is
P in = (F.3.6.5-5)
4e
where:
R = radius of the perforation, mm.
=ÿ(
e R1 22 ),
mm. (F.3.6.5-6)
EBHs and EBVs must be designed to resist axial tensile forces at the end of the curved reinforcement.
(2) Design for Beam-Column Connection Forces — Curved plates shall have a design strength
capable of developing the combined effects of axial force and moment in the plane of the web
that result from deformation of the connection in the absence of other forces. The force is:
15 D
P in =
2
and
(F.3.6.5-7)
4e H
The moment is:
PinR
M in = (F.3.6.5-8)
2
where:
E = modulus of elasticity, MPa
I = moment of inertia of the plate, mm4
and
H = floor height, mm ÿ = design

floor drift, mm
F.3.7 — FRAMES RESISTING COMPOUND MOMENTS (PRMC)

This clause provides the design basis and requirements for analysis, system, members, and connections for DMI, DMO, DES, and
Partially Restrained (PR) compound moment-resistant frames.
F.3.7.1 — Frames Resisting Composite Moments with Minimum Energy Capacity (PRMC-DMI)
F.3.7.2 — Moderate Energy Capacity Composite Moment Resisting Frames (PRMC-DMO)
F.3.7.3 — Frames Resisting Composite Moments with Special Energy Capacity (PRMC-DES)
F.3.7.4 — Partially Restrained Composite Moment Resisting Frames (PRMC-PR)
F.3.7.1 — COMPOSITE MOMENT-RESISTING FRAMES WITH MINIMUM ENERGY CAPACITY (PRMC-DMI)
F.3.7.1.1 — Scope — PRMC-DMI systems shall be designed in accordance with this section. This section is applicable to
moment-resisting frames with totally restrained (TR) connections that
F-268
consist of composite or reinforced concrete columns and beams, either steel, embedded in concrete, or composite.
F.3.7.1.2 — Basis of Design — PRMC-DMIs designed in accordance with these specifications are expected to
provide minimum inelastic deformation capacity in their members and connections.
F.3.7.1.3 — Analysis — No special requirements are specified for analysis.
F.3.7.1.5 — Members — No additional requirements to those in Chapter F.2 are specified for steel or composite
members. Reinforced concrete columns must meet the requirements of Title C, excluding numeral C.21.
F.3.7.1.6 — Connections — Connections must be fully restricted (TR). Connections shall be designed for the
applicable load combinations described in F.3.2.2 and F.3.2.3. The design resistances of the beam-column
connections shall be determined according to F.2 and F.3.4.2.7.
F.3.7.2 — COMPOSITE MOMENT FRAMES WITH MODERATE ENERGY CAPACITY (PRMC-DMO)
F.3.7.2.1 — Scope — PRMC-DMO systems shall be designed in accordance with this section. This section is
applicable to moment-resisting frames with totally restrained (TR) connections consisting of composite or reinforced
concrete columns and beams either of structural steel, embedded in concrete, or composite.
F.3.7.2.2 — Design Basis — PRMC-DMO designed in accordance with these specifications are expected to
provide limited inelastic deformation capacity, through flexural yield of beams and columns and shear yield in
zones of column panel. The design of the beam-column connections, including the panel area, continuity plates
and diaphragms must be based on connection tests that guarantee the performance required in numeral F.3.7.2.6.2,
and demonstrate their compliance with numeral F. .3.7.2.6.3.
F.3.7.2.4.1 — Bracing for Beam Stability — Beams shall be braced to satisfy the moderate ductility
member requirements of F.3.4.1.2.1.
Additionally, unless otherwise indicated by testing, beam bracing shall be located near concentrated
forces, at changes in cross section, and at other locations where analyzes indicate that a plastic hinge
may form during the inelastic deformation of the PRMC-DMO. The required strength of the lateral bracing
adjacent to the plastic hinges shall be as specified in F.3.4.1.2.3.
F.3.4.1.1 for members with moderate ductility.
F.3.7.2.5.2 — Beam Wings — Abrupt beam wing changes are not permitted in plastic hinge areas.
Punching in the fin or cutting out the width of the fin is also not permitted unless qualification tests
demonstrate that the resulting configuration can develop stable plastic hinges.
deformations is a protected zone, and must satisfy the requirements of F.3.4.1.3.
F-269
The areas of plastic hinges at the ends of beams in PRMC-DMO must be treated as protected areas. In general,
for unreinforced connections, the protected zone is located from the face of the column and up to a distance
equal to half the depth of the beam after the plastic hinge.
F.3.7.2.6.1— Critical Demand Welds — Critical demand welds are not required.
F.3.7.2.6.2 — Beam-Column Connections — The BSS beam-column connections shall meet the following
requirements:
(1) The connection must be able to accommodate a floor drift angle of 0.02 radians
As minimum.
(2) The measured flexural resistance of the connection, determined at the face of the column, shall be
at least 0.8M of the connected beam,
p
for a story drift angle of
0.02 radians, where Mp is defined as the nominal flexural strength of steel girders, embedded or
composite girders and shall satisfy the requirements of F.2.9.
F.3.7.2.6.3 — Connection validation — The BSS beam-column connection shall satisfy the requirements of
section F.3.7.2.6.2, through connection tests or calculations justified by mechanical models and design criteria.
for limit states of its components in accordance with these specifications.
F.3.7.2.6.4 — Required Shear Resistance — The required shear resistance Vu of the connection shall be
based on Title B load combinations including amplified seismic load, in which the effect of horizontal forces,
including on resistance, it should be taken as:
E 2 1.1R M L h y p, esp
mh =( ) (F.3.7.2-1)
where Mp, esp is the expected plastic flexural resistance of steel beams, embedded or composite. For
must be calculated using the distribution
embedded or composite beams, Mp, plastic esp of efforts or the
method of compatibility of deformations. Ry factors should be used
appropriate for the different elements of the cross section, establishing the balance of forces in the section and
calculating the flexural resistance. Lh is the distance between plastic hinges on the beam, mm. For steel beams,
Mp, sp in Equation F.3.7.2-1 can be taken as R My p of the beam.
F.3.7.2.6.5 — Diaphragm and Continuity Plates — Plates may be used for connecting diaphragms for
composite columns filled both inside and outside the column.
When diaphragm plates are used, the thickness of the diaphragm plates must be at least equal to the thickness
of the beam flange.
Diaphragm plates shall be welded around the entire perimeter of the column using full penetration welds or fillet
welds on both sides. The required strength of these joints shall not be less than the design strength of the
contact area of the plate with the sides of the column.
Internal diaphragms shall have circular openings sufficient for concrete placement.
F.3.7.2.6.6 — Column Splices — In addition to the requirements of section F.3.4.2.5, column splices shall
comply with the requirements of this section. When they are used
F-270
groove welds to make the splice, these must be full penetration. When column splices are not made with groove welds,
they shall have a required flexural strength that is at least equal to the nominal flexural strength, Mpcc , of the smaller
composite column. The required shear strength of the column web splices must be at least equal to ÿMH where ÿMpcc
is the sum of the nominal flexural strengths of the composite columns above and below the splice. For composite columns
the nominal flexural resistance must satisfy the requirements
pcc of F.2.9 considering the required axial resistance, Puc .
,
F.3.7.3 — COMPOSITE MOMENT-RESISTING FRAMES WITH SPECIAL ENERGY CAPACITY (PRMC-DES)
F.3.7.3.1 — Scope — PRMC-DES systems must be designed in accordance with this section. This section is applicable to moment-
resisting frames with totally restrained (TR) connections consisting of composite or reinforced concrete columns and either concrete-
embedded steel or composite beams.
F.3.7.3.2 — Basis of Design — PRMC-DES designed in accordance with these specifications are expected to provide significant
inelastic deformation capacity through flexural yielding of the beams and shear-limited creep in panel zones. the columns. Except
where otherwise permitted in this section, columns shall generally be designed to be stronger than fully plasticized strain-hardened
beams. Flexural plastification is allowed in the columns at their base. The design of the beam-column connections, including the
panel area, the continuity plates and the diaphragms, must be based on connection tests that guarantee the performance required
in numeral F.3.7.3.6.2, and demonstrate their conformity with numeral F.3.7.3.6.3.
F.3.7.3.4.1 — Moment relationships — The following relationships must be satisfied at beam-column connections:
*
ÿ M pcc
*
> 1 (F.3.7.3-1)
ÿ M p, esp
where:
*
ÿMpcc = sum of the projections to the axis of the beams, of the nominal flexural resistance of the columns (including
brackets if they are used) above and below the joint with a reduction due to the axial force in the
column. For composite columns, the nominal flexural resistance, Mpcc , shall satisfy the requirements
of F.2.9 considering the required axial resistance Puc . For reinforced concrete columns, the nominal
flexural resistance, Mpcc , must be calculated based on the provisions of Title C considering the
required axial resistance Puc . When the axes of opposite beams at the same joint do not coincide,
the median line between the two axes must be used. ÿMp,esp = sum of the moments in the steel or
concrete embedded beams at the intersection of the beam and column axes. It is determined as the
sum of the expected
*
flexural resistance of the beams in the plastic hinge, referred to the axis of
*
= 1.1M M + p,esp )
column. It can be taken ( ÿ ÿ Mp,esp
the uv ,
where Mp,esp is calculated
according to section F.3.7.2.6.4 = moment
Bee due to amplification by shear from the position of the hinge
plastic up to the axis of the column
F-271
Exception— The exceptions in F.3.4.3.4.1 shall apply except that the force limit in F.3.5.3.4.1 shall be P 0.1P
< .
uc c
F.3.7.3.4.2 — Bracing for Beam Stability — Beams shall be braced to satisfy the high ductility member
Additionally, unless otherwise indicated by testing, beam bracing shall be located near concentrated forces,
changes in cross section, and other locations where analyzes indicate that a plastic hinge may form during
inelastic deformation of the beam. PRMC-DES.
F.3.7.3.4.3 — Bracing for Stability of Beam-Column Connections — Composite columns with unbraced
connections shall meet the requirements of Section F.3.5.3.4.3(2).
F.3.7.3.5.1 — Basic Requirements — Steel and composite members shall meet the requirements of F.3.4.1.1 for
members with high ductility.
Exception— Beams embedded in reinforced concrete shall meet the requirements of F.3.4.1.1 for members with
moderate ductility if the concrete cover is 50 mm or greater and confinement by means of stirrups is provided in
regions where formation is expected. of plastic hinges under the deformations caused by the earthquake. The stirrups
shall meet the requirements of C.21.5.3.
Concrete embedded composite beams that are part of the PRMC-DES must also satisfy that the distance from the
highest compression concrete fiber to the plastic neutral axis is not greater than:
Yd +
= with
AND
PNA (F.3.7.3-2)
ÿ 1700F ÿ
and
1 +ÿ
AND
ÿ ÿÿ
where:
My
= specified minimum yield stress of the steel beam, MPa. = elastic modulus
of the steel beam, MPa.
E Ycon = distance from the top of the steel beam and the top of the concrete, mm.
d = total depth of the beam, mm.
F.3.7.3.5.2 — Beam flanges — Abrupt changes in the beam flange are not permitted in plastic hinge areas.
Punching in the fin or cutting out the width of the fin is also not permitted unless qualification tests demonstrate
that the resulting configuration can develop stable plastic hinges.
F.3.7.3.5.3 — Protected Zones — The region at each end of the beam that is subject to inelastic deformations
is a protected zone, and must satisfy the requirements of F.3.4.1.3.
The areas of plastic hinges at the ends of beams in PRMC-DES must be treated as protected areas. In
general, the protected zone is located from the face of the composite column and up to a distance equal to
half the superelevation of the beam after the plastic hinge.
F.3.7.3.6— Connections — Connections must be fully restricted (TR) and meet the requirements of section F.3.4.2
with all its subparagraphs, in addition to this section.
F.3.7.3.6.1 — Critical Demand Welds — The following welds shall be considered critical demand and meet
the requirements of F.3.1.3.4.2:
F-272
(1) Grooved welds in column splices. Except where it can be shown that hinge formation at the column or near
the base plate can be prevented by restraints, and in the absence of net stresses under load combinations
including the amplified seismic load.
(2) Column-base plate connection welds, (3) Full penetration

groove welds of beam flanges, diaphragm plates that serve as continuation of beam flanges, shear plates
within the superelevation of the beam that serves as a transition from the beam to an embedded profile,
and the webs from beams to columns.
F.3.7.3.6.2 — Beam-Column Connections — The BSS beam-column connections shall meet the following
requirements:
(1) The connection must be capable of accommodating a story drift angle of 0.04 radians as
Minimum.
(2) The measured flexural resistance of the connection, determined at the face of the column, must be at least
0.8M from the connected beam,
p
for a story drift angle of 0.04
radians, where Mp is calculated according to F.3.7.2.6.2.
F.3.7.3.6.3 — Connection Validation — The BSS beam-column connection shall satisfy the requirements of
section F.3.7.3.6.2 by:
(1) When the beams are interrupted at the connection, the connection shall be qualified using cyclical
qualification test results in accordance with F.3.11.2. At least two tests of the connection must be carried
out and may be based on one of the following considerations: (a) Tests reported in research articles or
documented
tests carried out for other projects that represent the conditions of the project, with the limits specified in
numeral F .3.11.2. (b) Tests specifically focused for the project that are representative of the sizes of
the members, resistance of the material,
configuration of connections, construction processes of the connection, with the limits specified in F.3.11.2.
(2) When the beams are not interrupted or continuous through the reinforced concrete or composite column,
and welded joints to the beam flanges are not used, nor is the connection susceptible to premature
fracture, the requirements shall be met. of performance of numeral F.3.7.3.6.2(a).
Connections are permitted that can accommodate the required story drift angle in the connection elements and
provide the measured flexural and shear resistance specified in F.3.5.3.6.4. In addition to the above, the design
must demonstrate that any additional drift due to deformation of the connection can be supported by the structure.
The design must include an analysis that considers the stability effects of the entire structure, including second
order effects.
F.3.7.3.6.4 — Required Shear Resistance — The required shear resistance Vu of the connection shall be based
on Title B load combinations that include the amplified seismic load, in which the effect of horizontal forces, including
the overresistance should be calculated as:
E 2 1.1R M L h y p,esp
mh =( ) (F.3.7.3-3)
where Mp,sp is the expected flexural strength of steel, embedded or composite beams.
For embedded or composite beams, Mp,sp shall be calculated according to section F.3.7.2.6.4 and Lh is the
distance between plastic hinges on the beam, mm.
F-273
F.3.7.3.6.5 — Continuity and Diaphragm Plates — Continuity or diaphragm plates used for moment
connections with packed columns shall meet the requirements of Section F.3.7.2.6.5.
F.3.7.3.6.6 — Column Splices — Column splices shall meet the requirements of Section F.3.7.2.6.6.
F.3.7.4 — FRAMES RESISTING TO PARTIALLY RESTRICTED MOMENTS (PRMC-PR)
F.3.7.4.1 — Scope — PRMC-PR systems must be designed in accordance with this section. This section is
applicable to moment frames with partially restrained (PR) connections consisting of steel columns and composite
beams meeting the requirements of F.2.2.3.5.2.2.
F.3.7.4.2 — Design Basis — PRMC-PRs designed in accordance with these specifications are expected to
provide significant inelastic deformation capacity through yielding in the ductile components of composite PR beam-
column moment connections. Limited creep is allowed elsewhere, such as flexural creep at the base of columns.
The design of the beam and column connections must be based on connection tests that guarantee the
performance required in numeral F.3.7.4.6.3, and demonstrate their conformity with numeral F.3.7.4.6.4.
F.3.7.4.3 — Analysis — The flexibility of the connection and the action of the composite beam must be considered
in the determination of the dynamic characteristics, resistance and drifts of PRMC-PR.
For analysis purposes, the stiffness of the beams must be determined with the effective moment of inertia of the
composite section.
F.3.7.4.4 — System Requirements — No special requirements are specified.
F.3.7.4.5.1— Columns — Steel columns shall meet the requirements of F.3.4.1.1 for members with high
ductility.
F.3.7.4.5.2— Beams — Composite beams shall be non-embedded and fully composite, and shall meet
the requirements of F.3.4.1.1 for high ductility members. A solid concrete plate must exist up to a distance
of 300 mm from the face of the column in the direction of moment transfer.
F.3.7.4.6 — Connections — Connections must be PR and must satisfy all the requirements of F.3.4.2 and this
clause.
(1) Grooved welds in column splices, except where it can be shown that the formation of the hinge in
the column or near the base plate can be prevented by restraints, and in the absence of net
stresses under load combinations including load amplified seismic.
(2) The welds of the column-base plate connection,
F.3.7.4.6.2 — Required Strength — The required strength of beam-column connections at moment PR

shall be determined considering the effects of connection flexibility and second-order moments.
Additionally, composite connections must have a nominal strength at least equal to 50% of Mp , where
Mp is the nominal plastic flexural strength of the connected steel beam without considering compound
action.
F.3.7.4.6.3 — Beam-column connections — The BSS beam-column connections shall satisfy the
F-274
(1) The connection must be capable of accommodating a floor drift angle of 0.02 radians as
Minimum.
(2) The measured flexural strength of the connection, determined at the face of the column, should be
increase monotonically to a value of at least withinp 0.5M of the connected beam,
for a story drift angle of 0.02 radians, where Mp is defined as the nominal flexural strength of the
composite beam and shall satisfy the requirements of F.2.9.
F.3.7.4.6.4 — Connection Validation — The BSS beam-column connection shall satisfy the requirements of
section F.3.7.4.6.3 through qualification, using the results of cyclical qualification tests in accordance with
F.3.11.2. At least two tests of the connection shall be performed and may be based on one of the following
considerations:
(1) Tests reported in research articles or documented tests carried out for other projects that represent
the conditions of the project, with the limits specified in numeral F.3.11.2.
(2) Tests focused specifically for the project that are representative of the sizes of the members, resistance
of the material, configuration of connections, construction processes of the connection, with the limits
specified in F.3.11.2.
F.3.7.4.6.5 — Connection resistance — The nominal connection resistance, Mn,PR shall be taken as the
flexural resistance for 0.02 radians during the first cycle in which this rotation is exceeded.
F.3.7.4.6.6— Column Splices — Composite column splices shall meet the requirements of Section F.3.7.2.6.6.
F.3.8 — COMPOSITE BRACED SYSTEMS AND SHEAR WALLS

This numeral establishes the design bases, and the requirements for the analysis, the system, members and connections for
PACC-DMI, PACC-DES, PAEC and MCC-DMI, MCC-DES as well as MCAC.
F.3.8.1 — Concentrically Braced Composite Frames with Minimum Energy Dissipation Capacity
(PACC-DMI)
F.3.8.2 — Concentrically Braced Composite Frames with Special Energy Dissipation Capability
(PACC-DES)
F.3.8.3 — Eccentrically Braced Composite Frames (PAEC)
F.3.8.4 — Minimum Energy Capacity Composite Shear Walls (MCC-DMI)
F.3.8.5 — Composite Shear Walls with Special Energy Capacity (MCC-DES)
F.3.8.6 — Composite Steel Shear Walls (MCAC).
F.3.8.1 — CONCENTRICALLY BRACED COMPOSITE FRAMES WITH MINIMUM ENERGY DISSIPATION CAPACITY
(PACC-DMI)
F.3.8.1.1— Scope — Concentrically Braced Composite Frames with Minimum Energy Dissipation Capacity (PACC-
DMI) shall be designed in accordance with this section. Columns must be steel, embedded, filled or reinforced concrete.
Beams must be structural steel or composite.
The braces can be steel sections or concrete-filled composite members. This section applies to braced structures
consisting of concentrically connected members in which at least one of the elements (columns, beams, or braces) is
a composite member.
F.3.8.1.2 — Basis of Design — This section applies to braced frames consisting of concentrically braced members.
Eccentricities less than the superelevation of the beam are allowed if they are taken into account in the design of the
members determining the moments due to eccentricity.
F-275
PACC-DMI must have the capacity to accommodate limited inelastic deformations in its members and connections.
The PACC-DMI must satisfy the requirements of numeral F.3.6.1, except as modified in this section.
F.3.8.1.5.1 — Basic requirements — No special requirements are specified.
F.3.8.1.5.2 — Columns — No special requirements are specified for steel or composite columns.
Reinforced concrete columns must meet the requirements of C.21
F.3.8.1.5.3 — Braces — No special requirements are specified for steel or filled composite braces.
F.3.8.1.6 — Connections — Connections shall satisfy the requirements of F.3.4.2.7.
F.3.8.2 — CONCENTRICALLY BRACED COMPOSITE FRAMES WITH SPECIAL ENERGY DISSIPATION CAPACITY
(PACC-DES)
F.3.8.2.1— Scope — Concentrically Braced Composite Frames with Special Energy Dissipation Capability (PACC-
DES) shall be designed in accordance with this section. Columns must be embedded or padded. Beams must be
structural steel or composite. Braces should be steel sections or concrete-filled composite members. This section
applies to braced structures consisting of concentrically connected members.
F.3.8.2.2 — Basis of Design — This section applies to braced frames consisting of concentrically braced
members. Eccentricities less than the depth of the beam are permitted if they have been considered in the design
of the resulting member and its connecting forces, and do not change the source of expected inelastic deformation
capacity.
PACC-DES must be capable of accommodating significant inelastic deformations primarily from brace buckling
and brace yielding in tension.
F.3.8.2.3— Analysis — Composite columns and steel and composite braces shall meet the requirements of
Section F.3.5.2.3.
F.3.8.2.4 — System requirements — The system requirements for PACC-DES must comply with those given in
F.3.5.2.4.
F.3.8.2.5.1— Basic Requirements — Composite columns and steel or composite braces shall meet the
requirements of F.3.4.1.1 for high ductility members.
Steel or composite beams shall meet the requirements of F.3.4.1.1 for members of moderate ductility.
To satisfy the moderate compactness requirements of F.3.5.2.5.1, the width-thickness ratio of square
and rectangular filled braces must be multiplied by the factor (
0.264 +0.0082Kl r ) , for Kl r between 35 and 90, where Kl r is the effective slenderness of the brace.
F.3.8.2.5.2 — Diagonal Braces — Steel and filled composite braces shall meet the requirements of
Section F.3.6.2.5.2. The radius of gyration in such a section should be taken as that of the isolated steel
section.
F-276
F.3.8.2.6 — Connections — Connection design shall be based on section F.3.4.2 and those mentioned in this
section.
F.3.8.2.6.1 — Demand Critical Welds — The following welds are considered demand critical and must
meet the requirements of Section F.3.1.3.4.2.
(1) Grooved welds in column splices. Except when it can be shown that the formation of the hinge at
stresses under load combinations that include the amplified seismic load.
(2) The welds of the column-base plate connection, (3) The

welds in the beam-column connections that comply with numeral F.3.8.2.6.2(2).
F.3.8.2.6.2 — Beam-Column Connections — When a brace or its connection plate connects to both the
beam and the column, the connection must meet one of the following conditions:
(1) The connection must be simple (non-moment) and meet the requirements of F.2.2.3.6.1, where
the required rotation must be taken as 0.025 radians, or (2) The beam-column
connections must satisfy the requirements specified in F.3.4.2 and F.3.7.2.6.4, F.3.7.2.6.5, F.3.7.2.6.6
and F.3.7.3.6.1 for connections at TR moment.
F.3.8.2.6.3 — Required Strength of Brace Connections — The required strength of brace connections
shall meet the requirements of Section F.3.6.2.6.3.
F.3.8.2.6.4 — Column splices — They must comply with the requirements of numeral. F.3.7.2.6.3
F.3.8.3 — ECCENTRICALLY BRACED COMPOSITE FRAMES (PAEC)
F.3.8.3.1 — Scope — Eccentrically braced frames (ECFs) shall be designed in accordance with this section.
Columns must be composite embedded or filled. Beams must be steel or composite. The links must be made of
steel. Braces shall be steel or composite members filled with concrete. This section is applicable to braced frames
in which one end of each brace intersects a beam with an eccentricity from the intersection of the center lines in
the beam and an adjacent brace or column.
F.3.8.3.2 — Basis of Design — PAECs shall meet the requirements of section F.3.6.3.2, except as modified in
this section. This section is applicable to braced frames in which one end of each brace intersects a beam with an
eccentricity from the intersection of the center lines in the beam and an adjacent brace or column, forming a link
that is subject to shear and bending. Eccentricities less than the superelevation of the beam are permitted at the
brace connection far from the link if the resultant forces in the member and connection are considered in the
design, and do not change the expected source of inelastic deformation capacity.
PAECs designed in accordance with this clause are expected to provide significant inelastic deformation capacity
through shear creep of the links.
The design strength of members shall meet the requirements of Chapter F.2, except as modified in this section.
F.3.8.3.3 — Analysis — The PAEC analysis shall satisfy the requirements of F.3.6.3.3.
F.3.8.3.4 — System Requirements — The PAEC system requirements shall be as specified in F.3.6.3.4.
F.3.8.3.5 — Members — Must meet the requirements of F.3.6.3.5.
F.3.8.3.6 — Connections — Shall meet the requirements of F.3.6.3.6, except as specified below.
F-277
F.3.8.3.6.1 — Beam-Column Connections — When a brace or haunch is connected to the beam and column,
the connection must meet one of the following conditions:
(1) The connection must be simple (not moment) and meet the requirements of F.2.2.3.6.1, where the
required rotation is taken as 0.025 radians.
(2) The beam-column connections must satisfy the requirements specified in numerals F.3.4.2 and
F.3.7.2.6.4, F.3.7.2.6.5 and F.3.7.2.6.6 for connections at moment TR .
F.3.8.4 — SHEAR WALLS COMPOSED OF REINFORCED CONCRETE AND STEEL PROFILES WITH
MINIMUM ENERGY DISSIPATION CAPACITY (MCC-DMI)
F.3.8.4.1 — Scope — MCC-DMIs shall be designed in accordance with this section. This section applies where
reinforced concrete walls are composed of structural steel elements, including structural shapes or composite
sections that act as edge elements for the walls, and structural steel or composite tie beams that connect two or more
concrete walls. adjacent reinforced.
F.3.8.4.2 — Design Basis — It is expected that the MCC-DMI designed in accordance with this numeral guarantee a
limited inelastic deformation capacity through creep in reinforced concrete walls and steel or composite elements.
Reinforced concrete walls shall be designed to develop inelastic deformations for design story drift consistent with that
specified in Title C, excluding C.21. Steel and composite tie beams shall be designed to develop inelastic deformations
for flexural yield drift. Steel and composite edge elements shall be designed to develop inelastic deformations for design
story drift through creep produced by axial forces.
Reinforced concrete walls must meet the requirements of Title C, excluding what is modified in this section.
F.3.8.4.3 — Analysis — The MCC-DMI analysis must satisfy the requirements of Title C with the modifications included
in this section.
(1) For elastic analysis, the effective uncracked stiffnesses must be assigned in accordance with C.10 for walls
and composite tie beams.
(2) When concrete embedded profiles are used as edge members, the analysis shall be based on the
transformed section using the elastic properties of the material.
(3) The flexibility of the connection between coupler beams and walls must be taken into account, as well as the
effect of the shear distortions of the coupling beam and walls.
F.3.8.4.4 — System Requirements — For coupled walls, the coupler beams are allowed to plasticize over the full height
of the structure, the coupler beam-wall connection must develop the expected flexural shear strength of the coupling
beam. It is allowed to redistribute the forces in the tie beam vertically to the adjacent floors. The shear of any individual
coupling beam shall not be reduced by more than 20% of the elastically determined value. The sum of the shear
resistance of the coupling beams throughout the height of the building must be greater than or equal to the elastically
determined values.
F.3.8.4.5.1 — Border members — Border members shall satisfy the following requirements:
(1) The required axial strength of the edge element shall be determined assuming that the shear forces are
taken by the reinforced concrete wall and all gravitational and overturning forces are taken by the edge
members in conjunction with the shear wall.
(2) When the concrete embedded steel rim member qualifies as a composite column as defined in F.2.9, it
must be designed as a composite column that satisfies the requirements of F.2.9.
F-278
(3) Dowel connectors or welded reinforcing anchors must be installed to transfer the required shear resistance
between the steel edge members and the reinforced concrete walls. If spigot connectors are used, they
must meet the requirements of F.2.9. If welded reinforcement is used, it must meet AWS D.1.4 requirements.
F.3.8.4.5.2 — Coupling beams
(1) Steel tie beams — Steel tie beams used between adjacent reinforced concrete walls shall meet the
requirements of F.2 and this section.
The following requirements apply to I -section beams .
(a) Steel tie beams shall meet the requirements of Section F.3.4.1.1 for members with moderate
ductility.
(b) The expected shear resistance, Vn , for steel coupling beams shall
calculated with equation F.3.8.4-1
2R M
= yp
INn ÿ RVyp (F.3.8.4-1)
g
where:
Atw = area of the soul of the steel beam, mm2
Mp = F Zy , Vn N-mm.
= expected shear resistance of a steel coupling beam, N.
0.6F A y N.
Vp = = tw ,
g free distance of the coupling beam, mm.
(c) The embedment length, Le , must be calculated using equation F.3.8.4-2. The embedment length
shall be considered to start inside the first layer of confining reinforcement of the wall edge
member.
0.66
ÿ ÿÿ b ÿ ÿ 0.58 0.22 ÿ ÿ
ÿ
b ÿ1 ÿ
= In
Vn0.004 f ' b ÿ cÿ b 1fbe L (F.3.8.4-2)
+
f 0.88g 2L It is ÿ
where:
Le = length of embedment, mm bw =
thickness of concrete wall, mm bf = width of
beam flange, mm cfÿ = compressive strength
of concrete, MPa ÿ1 = factor relating depth of rectangular
stress block of equivalent compression and the depth of the neutral axis as defined in the
Title C
(d) A vertical reinforcement in the wall whose nominal axial strength equals the expected shear
strength of the tie beam shall be placed over the embedment length of the beam with two-thirds
of the reinforcing steel located over the first half. of the embedment length. This wall reinforcement
shall extend a distance at least equal to the development length in tension, both above and below
the flanges of the tie beam. Vertical reinforcement for other purposes, such as vertical edge
members, may be supplied as part of the required vertical reinforcement.
(2) Composite tie beams — Composite tie beams embedded in concrete shall meet the requirements of
Section F.3.8.4.5.2(1) as modified in this section:
F-279
(a) Tie beams shall have a length of embedment within the reinforced concrete wall that is sufficient
to develop the expected shear strength, Vn,comp ,
calculated with equation F.3.8.4-3.
=
2m p,esp ÿ
V
n,comp INcomp (F.3.8.4-3)
g
where:
Mp,sp = expected flexural strength of the composite coupling beam. For embedded or composite
beams it must be calculated using the plastic stress distribution or the deformation
compatibility method.
Appropriate Ry factors must be used for the different elements of the cross section,
establishing the balance of forces of the section and calculating the flexural
resistance.
Vcomp = expected limit shear resistance of the composite coupling beam
embedment calculated with equation F.3.8.4-4, N.
ÿ
ÿ OFs ytd c ÿ
VRV 0.166 fbd y p

=+ + comp c wc c ÿ
(F.3.8.4-4)
ÿÿ s ÿ
where:
As = area of transverse reinforcement, mm.
Fyt = yield stress of transverse reinforcement, MPa. bwc = width
of concrete, mm. dc = effective depth
of concrete, mm s = spacing of transverse
reinforcement, mm.
(b) The required embedment length must be calculated with equation F.3.8.4-2
using Vn,comp instead of Vn .
F.3.8.4.6 — Connections — No additional requirements to those in section F.3.8.4.5 are specified.
F.3.8.5 — SHEAR WALLS COMPOSED OF REINFORCED CONCRETE AND STEEL PROFILES WITH SPECIAL ENERGY
DISSIPATION CAPACITY (MCC-DES)
F.3.8.5.1 — Scope — MCC-DES shall be designed in accordance with this section. This section applies where reinforced
concrete walls are composed of structural steel elements, including structural shapes or composite sections that act as edge
elements for the walls, and steel or composite tie beams that connect two or more reinforced concrete walls. adjacent.
F.3.8.5.2 — Design Basis — It is expected that the MCC-DES designed in accordance with this numeral guarantee a
significant inelastic deformation capacity through creep in reinforced concrete walls and steel or composite elements.
Reinforced concrete walls shall be designed to develop inelastic deformations for design story drift consistent with that
specified in Title C, excluding C.21. Steel and composite tie beams shall be designed to develop inelastic deformations for
story design drift by flexural yielding. Steel and composite tie beams should be designed to develop inelastic strains for story
drift through flexural yielding. Tie beam connections and wall design must take into account the expected strength, including
strain hardening of the tie beams. Steel and composite edge elements shall be designed to develop inelastic deformations
for design story drift through creep produced by axial forces.
F-280
Reinforced concrete walls shall meet the requirements of Section F.3.8.4 and the shear wall requirements of Title
C, including C.21, except as modified in this section.
F.3.8.5.3 — Analysis — MCC-DES analysis shall satisfy the requirements of F.3.8.4.3, with the following
exceptions.
(1) For the elastic analysis, the effective stiffnesses of cracked sections must be assigned according to
with C.10 for walls and composite tie beams.
(2) The effect of shear distortions of the coupling beam and walls must be taken into account.
F.3.8.5.4 — System Requirements — The requirements of section F.3.8.4.4 must be met with the following
exceptions:
(1) For coupled walls, the coupler beams must be plasticized over the entire height of the structure.
followed by plastification at the base of the walls.
(2) For coupled walls, the axial design resistance of the wall in balanced conditions, Pb , shall
be greater than or equal to the required axial compressive strength of the wall, calculated as the sum of
the required strengths attributed to the walls from the gravity load components of the lateral load
combination, plus the sum of the shear strength of beams increased by a factor of 1.1 to reflect the effects
of strain hardening
( 1.1RV
in
of) all the coupling beams that connect to the walls.
F.3.8.5.5.1— Ductile Members — Coupling beams are protected zones, and must meet the requirements
of Section F.3.4.1.3. Welds on steel tie beams for stiffening are permitted, as required in F.3.6.3.5.2(4).
F.3.8.5.5.2 — Edge Members — Unembedded steel columns shall meet the requirements of F.3.4.1.1
for members with high ductility and section F.3.8.4.5.1(1).
In addition to the requirements of Section F.3.8.4.3(2) and F.3.8.4.5.1(2), the requirements of this section
shall apply to walls with embedded steel edge elements. Steel edge members embedded in reinforced
concrete that qualify as composite columns in accordance with chapter F.2.9, must additionally comply
with what is established in F.3.4.1.4.2(2) for high ductility members; otherwise, the members shall be
designed as compression composite members complying with C.10.13 including the special seismic
requirements for edge members in C.21.9.6. Transverse reinforcement for the confinement of composite
edge members shall extend a distance 2h into the wall, where h is the total depth of the edge member in
the plane of the wall.
Dowel shear connectors or welded reinforcing bars specified in Section F.3.8.4.5.1(3) shall be ,
as if
supplied.
F.3.8.5.5.3 — Steel Coupler Beams — In addition to the parameters of F.3.8.4.5.2, structural steel
coupler beams shall comply with the provisions of F.3.6.3.5.2. When required in chapter F.3.6.3.5.2(4),
the coupling beam rotation shall be assumed to be 0.08 radians, unless a lower value is justified by
rational analyzes of expected inelastic deformations under drift. design floor. Stiffeners should be placed
on both sides of the tie beam to face against the reinforced concrete wall. These stiffeners shall meet the
requirements of section F.3.6.3.5.2(4).
Steel tie beams shall meet the requirements of Section F.3.4.1.1 for high ductility members.
The expected shear resistance for which the embedment length is calculated with Equation F.3.8.4-1
should be increased by a factor of 1.1 to reflect the effects of
strain hardening (1.1R Vy n ) .
F-281
Vertical wall reinforcement as defined in F.3.8.4.5.2(1)(e) shall be confined by transverse reinforcement that meets
the provisions for edge members in C.21.9.6.
Embedded steel members shall have two regions of vertical transfer reinforcement anchored to the top and bottom
flange of the embedded member. The first region should be located to match the location of the longitudinal wall
reinforcing bars close to the face of the wall. The second must be located at a distance not less than d 2 from where
the embedment length ends. All transfer reinforcing bars must be at their full development length when they wrap
around the tie beam flanges. Straight, hook or mechanical anchors can be used to provide such development. Metal
couplings welded to the fins can be used to anchor the vertical transfer bars. The required vertical transfer
reinforcement area is calculated with equation F.3.8.5-1:
A 0.03f
tb
L b F ÿ c e f ytf (F.3.8.5-1)
where:
Atb = area of transition reinforcement required in the first and second regions, anchored to both the upper and
lower flange, mm2
Fytf = yield stress of transfer reinforcement, MPa
Le = embedment length, mm bf = beam
flange width, mm cfÿ = compressive strength
of concrete, MPa
The area of the vertical transfer reinforcement must not exceed that calculated by equation F.3.8.5-2:
<
ÿ A 0.08L
tb bA ews
ÿ
(F.3.8.5-2)
where:
ÿ Atb = total area of the transfer reinforcement supplied for the first and second regions,
anchored to the upper and lower fin, mm.
= area of longitudinal reinforcement of the wall along the entire length of embedment Le , = mm2 .
As
bw width of the wall, mm.
F.3.8.5.5.4 — Composite Coupler Beams — Embedded composite sections serving as coupler beams shall meet
the requirements of F.3.8.5.5.3, except the requirements of F.3.6.3.5.2. (4), and Equation F.3.8.5-3 should be used
instead of Equation F.3.8.4-4.
is:
For all embedded composite beams, the expected shear resistance, Vcomp ,
ÿ
ÿ
OF d
s yr c
ÿ
V 1.1R=+V+ comp
1.56y p0.166
c wc c f b dÿ ÿ (F.3.8.5-3)
ÿ s ÿ
of Section F.3.1.3.4.2:
(1) Grooved welds in column splices. Except when it can be shown that the formation of the hinge at the
column or near the base plate can be prevented by restraints, and in the absence of net stresses under
load combinations that include the amplified seismic load.
(2) The welds of the column-base plate connection,
F.3.8.5.6.2 — Column Splices — Shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of F.2.7.2.6.6.
F-282
F.3.8.6 — COMPOSITE STEEL SHEAR WALLS (MCAC)
F.3.8.6.1 — Scope — MCACs shall be designed in accordance with this section. MCACs consist of steel plates with
reinforced concrete cover on one or both sides of the plate, steel plates on both sides of a reinforced concrete fill, and
structural steel or composites in edge members.
F.3.8.6.2 — Basis of Design — MCACs designed in accordance with these requirements are expected to provide
significant deformation inelastic capacity, primarily through web plate yielding. Horizontal edge elements (EBH) and
vertical edge elements (EBV) adjacent to composite webs shall be designed to remain essentially elastic under the
maximum forces that can be generated by fully plasticized steel webs together with reinforced concrete webs after
that the steel core has completely plasticized, except that the formation of plastic hinges is allowed at the ends of the
EBH.
F.3.8.6.3 — Analysis
F.3.8.6.3.1 — Webs — Steel webs shall be designed to resist the seismic load E
determined from the analysis required by Title B. The analysis must take into account openings in the web.
F.3.8.6.3.2 — Other members and connections — Columns, beams, and connections in MCAC shall be
designed to resist seismic forces determined from an analysis that includes the expected resistance of steel
webs to shear, , and any portion of concrete 0.6R F A y
y sp
on the active wall for floor layout drift. EBV can be plasticized at the base.
F.3.8.6.4.1 — Steel plate thickness — Plates with thickness less than 9.5mm are not allowed.
F.3.8.6.4.2 — Stiffness of vertical edge elements — EBVs shall meet the requirements of F.3.6.5.4.1.
F.3.8.6.4.3 — Moment ratio at EBH-EBV connection — The beam-column ratio shall satisfy the requirements
of F.3.6.5.4.2.
F.3.8.6.4.4 — Bracing — Bracing shall meet the requirements of F.3.6.5.4.3.
F.3.8.6.4.5 — Web Openings — Edge members shall be installed around shear wall web openings as
required by analysis.
F.3.8.6.5.1— Basic Requirements — Steel and composite EBH and EBV shall meet the requirements of
F.3.4.1.1 for high ductility members.
F.3.8.6.5.2 — Webs — The deck design shear resistance, Vn ÿ , for the shear yield limit state of a composite
plate complying with Section F.3.8.6.5.3, shall be determined as go on:
= F sp y
V 0.6A
n
(F.3.8.6-1)
ÿ = 0.9
where:
Asp = horizontal area of the stiffened steel plate, mm2
F-283
My = specified minimum yield stress of steel plate, MPa.

Vn = nominal shear resistance of the steel plate, N
The design strength of MCACs with a plate that does not meet the stiffness requirements of F.3.8.6.5.3
shall be based on the plate strength specified in F.3.6.5.5 and meet the requirements of F.2.7. .2 and
F.2.7.3.
F.3.8.6.5.3 — Concrete Stiffening Elements — The steel plate shall be adequately stiffened by a cover
of a reinforced concrete deck. Validation of this requirement can be demonstrated by elastic buckling plate
analysis showing that the composite wall can resist a nominal force equal to Vns .
The concrete thickness should be at least 100mm on each side when concrete is placed on both sides of
the steel plate and 200mm when concrete is placed on one side of the steel plate, dowel connectors or
other connectors should be installed mechanical measures that prevent local buckling and separation of
the plate and reinforced concrete. Horizontal and vertical reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete
cover that meets or exceeds the requirements of C.14.3. The amount of reinforcement in both directions
must not be less than 0.0025. The maximum spacing between bars should not be greater than 450 mm.
F.3.8.6.5.4— Edge Members — Steel and composite edge members shall be designed to resist an action
equal to the expected shear strength of the steel plate and any reinforced concrete portion of the wall
active for the derived from floor design. Composite edge members and reinforced concrete edge members
shall also meet the requirements of Section F.3.8.5.5.2. Steel edge members shall also meet the
requirements of Section F.3.6.5.
F.3.8.6.6.1 — Critical Demand Welds — The following welds are critical demand and must meet the
requirements of Section F.3.1.3.4.2:
(1) Grooved welds in column splices. Except when it can be shown that the formation of the hinge at
stresses under load combinations that include the amplified seismic load.
(2) The welds of the column-base plate connection, (3) The

welds of EBH-EBV connections.
F.3.8.6.6.2 — EBH-EBV connections — These connections shall meet the requirements of F.3.6.5.6.2.
F.3.8.6.6.3— Steel Plate to Edge Member Connections — The steel plate shall be continuously welded
or bolted at all edges to the steelwork or edge members, or the steel component of the edges. compound
edge members. High slip-critical strength welds or studs are required to develop the nominal shear strength
of the plate.
F.3.8.6.6.4 — Plate to reinforced concrete deck connections — Steel anchors between the plate and
the reinforced concrete deck shall be designed to prevent buckling. Steel anchors must be designed to
satisfy the following conditions:
(1) Tension in Connector — The steel anchor must be designed to resist the force of
Stress resulting from local inelastic buckling of the steel plate.
(2) Shear at Connector — Steel anchors shall be designed together to transfer the shear resistance
of the steel plate or reinforced concrete panel, whichever is less.
F-284
F.3.8.6.6.5 — Column splices — They must comply with the requirements of numeral F.3.7.2.6.6.
F.3.9 — MANUFACTURING AND ASSEMBLY
This numeral establishes the requirements for manufacturing and assembly. All the requirements of F.2.13 must be met,
except as specifically modified in this section.
F.3.9.1 — Manufacturing and assembly plans.

F.3.9.2 — Fabrication and assembly
F.3.9.1 — MANUFACTURING AND ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS
F.3.9.1.1 — Fabrication drawings for steel construction — The fabrication drawings must indicate the work to be
carried out and include the aspects required by Chapter F.2, the ICONTEC Code of Standard Practices for Steel
Structures, and the applicable requirements of F.3.1.4.1 and F.3.1.4.2, as well as the following, if applicable:
(1) Location of pretensioned bolts.

(2) Location of surfaces with special finishes, class A or better.
(3) End plates drawn to scale when designed to allow inelastic rotations.
(4) Access hole dimensions, surface profile, and finish.
(5) Sites where backing plates must be removed.
(6) Locations where fillet welds are required when platens are allowed to be left
back.
(7) Locations where fillet welds are required to reinforce groove welds, or where
need to improve the geometry of the connection.
(8) Sites where the welding extensions must be removed (9) Non-
destructive tests that must be carried out by the manufacturer.
F.3.9.1.2 — Erection drawings for steel construction — The erection drawings must indicate the work to be carried
out and include the aspects required by Chapter F.2, the ICONTEC Code of Standard Practices for Steel Structures,
and the applicable requirements of F.3.1.4.1 and F.3.1.4.2, as well as the following, when applicable:
(1) Location of pretensioned bolts.

(2) Sites where backing plates must be removed.
(3) Sites where supplementary fillet welds are required where the weld can be left installed.
backup plate.
(4) Locations where fillet welds are required to reinforce groove welds, or where
need to improve the geometry of the connection.
(5) Sites where welding must be removed.
(6) Joints or groups of joints in which a specific order of assembly, sequence of
welding, soldering technique or other special precautions.
F.3.9.1.3 — Fabrication and erection drawings for composite construction — Fabrication and erection drawings
for steel components of steel-concrete composite construction shall meet the requirements of F.3.9.1.1 and F.3.9.1.2 .
The manufacturing and assembly drawings must satisfy the requirements of F.3.1.4.3.
F.3.9.2 — MANUFACTURING AND ASSEMBLY
F.3.9.2.1 — Protected zone — When a zone is designated as protected in these provisions, it must comply with the
following:
(1) Discontinuities created by fabrication or assembly, such as temporary welds,

Assembly aids and torch cutting must be repaired.
F-285
(2) Placement of welded shear connectors and co-sheet fasteners that penetrate the flange of the beam
within the protected zone is not permitted. The fixing of the metallic board is only allowed by plug
welding.
(3) Welded, bolted, self-drilling studs, or shot-out fixture fixings for facades, partitions, ducts, and pipes may
not be placed within the protected zone.
F.3.9.2.2 — Bolted Joints — Bolted joints shall meet the requirements of Section F.3.4.2.2.
F.3.9.2.3 — Welded Joints — Welds and welded connections shall comply with AWS D.1.1 and AWS D.1.8
specifications.
Weld extensions shall be in accordance with AWS D.1.1 6.10, except that weld extensions from the outer edges of
continuity plates to columns are not required to remove the weld extensions within 6 mm of the edge of the plate. a
continuity board.
The AWS D.1.8 specifications should apply to both shop and field welds.
F.3.9.2.4 — Continuity plates and stiffeners — The corners of continuity plates and stiffeners placed in the web
of rolled sections must be detailed in accordance with AWS D.1.8 numeral 4.1.
F.3.10 — QUALITY CONTROL AND TECHNICAL SUPERVISION FOR STRUCTURES OF

THE SEISMIC RESISTANCE SYSTEM
This numeral establishes the requirements for quality control and technical supervision of the seismic resistance
system. All the requirements of F.2.14 must be met, except as specifically modified in this section.
F.3.10.1 — Alcance.
F.3.10.2 — Inspection of welds.
F.3.10.3 — Inspection of bolts.
F.3.10.1 — Scope — The requirements and responsibilities for compliance with a quality plan must be in accordance with
this Regulation (including Title I) and the specifications given by the structural engineer.
The inspections and tests necessary to establish that the construction complies with these provisions must be included in a
quality plan. Said quality plan must include the minimum tests and inspections, in addition to those required by Chapter F.2,
which are presented in this section.
F.3.10.2 — Inspection of welds — The requirements of AWS D.1.8 shall be met, in addition to what is specified in this
clause.
F.3.10.2.1— Visual Inspection — Visual inspection of welds shall be the primary method used to confirm that the
procedures, materials, and workmanship used in construction match those specified and approved for the project.
Visual inspection must be carried out by qualified personnel, in accordance with written procedures.
As a minimum, the visual inspection should include the following activities:
(1) Visual inspection before welding.

(a) Conditioning of groove welds.
- Joint preparation -
Dimensions (alignment, root opening, root shoulder, chamfer).
- Cleaning of the surfaces to be welded.
- Welding points (location and quality).
- Backing plates and their conditioning. (b) Shape
and finish of weld access holes.
F-286
NSR-10 – Chapter F.3 – Seismic provisions for steel structures with rolled, reinforced sections
and structural tubing
(c) Conditioning of weld fillets.

- Dimensions (alignment, root openings).
- Cleaning of the surfaces to be welded.
- Welding points (location and quality).
(2) Visual inspection during welding. (a) Follow-up of
the welding procedure.
- Welding equipment parameters.
- Advance speed.
- Selected welding materials.
- Type and flow of shielding gas.
- Preheat applied.
- Temperature between welding passes (min/max)
- Proper welding position (flat, vertical, horizontal, overhead).
- Mixture of filler metals as approved. (b) Qualified welding operators. (c) Control
and management of welding consumables.
- Packaging and conservation.

- Application temperature and handling at room temperature, as well as conditions
environmental exposure. (humidity, pollution, etc.) (d) Environmental
conditions.
- Wind speed.
- Rain and ambient temperature. (e) Welding
techniques.
- Cleaning between passes and final.
- Control of tolerances of each pass.
- Quality requirements of each pass. (f) Review of
cracks in weld points.
(3) Visual inspection after the application of the weld. (a) Cleaning of the weld. (b)
Legible identification of the welding
operator. (c) Verification of the size, length and location of the
weld. (d) Visual inspection of welds in accordance with acceptance criteria.
- No cracks.
- Adequate fusion between weld and base metal.
- Size of craters.
-
Weld profile.
- Welding size.
- Scour.
- Porosity.
(e) Location of reinforcing threads. (f) Removal
and finishing of backing plates and weld extensions (if required). (g) Repairs, if required.
F.3.10.2.2 — Inspection with non-destructive tests — Non-destructive tests on welding must be carried out in accordance with the following
criteria:
(1) Procedures
(a) Ultrasound tests — Must be performed in accordance with AWS specifications
D1.1 in force.
(b) Magnetic particle tests — Shall be performed in accordance with current AWS D1.1 specifications.
(2) Non-destructive testing required

(a) Area "k" — When welding veneer plates, continuity plates, or stiffeners in area "k", magnetic particle tests must be
performed to detect cracks up to a distance of 75 mm from the weld. (b) Full Penetration Groove Welds — Ultrasonic
testing shall be performed on 100 percent of full penetration groove welds in materials with thicknesses
equal to or greater than 8 mm. In materials with thicknesses
F-287
NSR-10 – Chapter F.3 – Seismic provisions for steel structures with rolled, reinforced sections
and structural tubing
smaller than 8 mm, radiographic tests should be performed. Magnetic particle testing shall be performed on 25 percent
of all full penetration grooved beam-column welds. (c) Lamella tearing and laminations in the base material — In
base materials greater than 38
mm that have tensile loads in the direction perpendicular to the lamination, for T and corner joints with materials greater
than 19 mm, with groove welds full penetration, ultrasonic testing shall be performed to detect discontinuities behind
and adjacent to the fusion line of the weld. Any discontinuity in the base material found up to t 4
of the surface must be evaluated according to the criteria of AWS D1.1 table 6.2, where t is the thickness of the part
subjected to the deformations through the thickness. (d) Beam shears and access holes — In welded
connections and splices, the surfaces of beams sheared or with access holes made by means of fusion cutting shall be
tested with magnetic particles or penetrating dyes when the thickness of the flange is greater than 38 mm for rolled
profiles, or when the thickness of the core is greater than 38 mm for assembled profiles.
(e) Repairs to Reduced Section Beams — Magnetic particle testing shall be performed on all welds and areas adjacent
to the region of the plastic hinge of the reduced section that have been repaired by welding, or on the base metal if
protrusions have been removed. with polisher. (f) Solder extension removal sites — Magnetic particle tests shall be
performed at the termination of welds from which
the extension has been removed, except for continuity plates.
(g) Reduction of the percentage of ultrasound and radiographic tests - The percentage of tests may be reduced to 25
percent for a given operator if it is shown that he has less than 5 percent rejections. For purposes of this evaluation, in
continuous welds, every 150 mm of weld will be considered a weld.
(h) Reduction of the magnetic particle test percentage — The test percentage may be reduced to 10 percent for a
given operator if it is shown to have less than 5 percent rejects. For purposes of this evaluation, in continuous welds
every 150 mm of weld will be considered a weld. This reduction is not allowed for welding in area “k”, repairs, removal
of backs and extensions, and access holes.
(3) Documentation — All nondestructive testing performed must be documented and

identified by weld, mark, and location on the part and on the structure.
F.3.10.3 — Inspection of bolts — The main method to confirm that the procedures, materials and labor used in the construction comply with what is
specified for the project will be the observation of bolting operations. As a minimum, the following concepts should be reviewed:
(1) Inspection before bolting. (a) Correct

selection of the specified bolts for the joint. (b) Selection of the proper bolting
procedure for the joint. (c) Correct fabrication of the connection elements, including the type
of surface preparation. (d) Bolting procedure qualification tests. (e) Adequate storage of bolts, nuts, and washers if required.
(2) Inspection during bolting. (a) Correct

placement of bolts, and washers if required, in all holes. (b) Verification of initial tightening of the bolts. (c) Guarantee of
non-rotation of one of the bolt components by means of a
spanner. (d) Verification of pre-stressing to comply with what is specified in F.2.10.3.1, in accordance with
the tensioning method used.

(e) Verification that the bolts are tightened from the point of greatest rigidity of the joint towards
the free edges.
(3) Inspection after bolting.
F-288
(a) Document accepted or rejected connections.
F.3.11 — TESTS FOR CONNECTION QUALIFICATION
This numeral establishes the requirements for the qualification of connections through tests.
F.3.11.1 — Prequalification of beam-column and link-column connections.

F.3.11.2 — Cyclic tests for qualification of beam-column and link-column connections.
F.3.11.3 — Cyclic qualification tests for restrained buckling braces.
F.3.11.1 — PREQUALIFICATION OF BEAM-COLUMN AND LINK-COLUMN CONNECTIONS
F.3.11.1.1 — Scope — This section contains the minimum requirements for the prequalification of beam-column moment-
resistant connections in moment-resistant frames with special and moderate energy dissipation capacity and link-column
connections in braced frames eccentrically. It is allowed to use prequalified connections that are within the limits applied in
the prequalification tests, without the need to carry out additional cyclical qualification tests. When the prequalification limits
or design requirements for prequalified connections contradict the requirements of these provisions, the prequalified
connection requirements will govern.
F.3.11.1.2 — General requirements
F.3.10.1.2.1 — Basis for prequalification — The prequalification of the connection shall be based on the test data
described in section F.3.10.1.3, supported by analytical studies and design models. Test evidence shall be sufficient
to ensure that the connection can withstand the story drift angle required for PRM-DES and PRM-DMO, or the link
rotation angle required in PAE systems, on a consistent and consistent basis. reliable, within specified prequalification
limits. All limit states applicable to the connection that affect the stiffness, strength and deformation capacity of the
connection and the seismic resistance system must be identified. This includes limit states of fracture, stability, and
all other limit states relevant to the connection under consideration. The effects of the design variables are listed in
section F.3.10.1.4.
F.3.11.1.2.2 — Prequalification Authorization — Prequalified connections from ANSI/AISC Standard 358

“Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic Applications” or more
recent may be used. Failing that, the Permanent Advisory Commission for the Seismic Resistant Construction
Regime will be responsible for approving the prequalification of a connection and its associated limits.
F.3.11.1.3— Test Requirements — Data used to support prequalification of the connection shall be based on tests
performed in accordance with F.3.10.2 A sufficient number of tests shall be performed on different specimens to demonstrate
that the connection it has sufficient capacity and reliability to address the story drift required for moment frames with special
and moderate energy dissipation, or the link rotation angle required for PAE systems, when the link is adjacent to the
columns. The limits on the dimensions of the members for prequalification will not be greater than those specified in
F.3.10.2.5.2.
F.3.11.1.4 — Prequalification variables — For prequalification purposes, the effects of the following variables on the
connections must be considered:
(1) Beam or link parameters:

(a) Shape of the cross section: width of fin, box or other. (b) Method of
manufacturing the member: rolled, assembled or other profile. (c) Cant. (d) Weight
per unit
length. (e) Thickness of the fin. (f)
Material specification.
F-289
(g) Span/elevation ratio (for moment-resisting frames with special and moderate energy dissipation
capacity) or link length (for eccentrically braced frames).
(h) Width-thickness ratio of the section elements. (i) Lateral bracing.

(j) Other parameters relevant
to the specific connection considered.
(2) Parameters of the column: (a)

Shape of the cross section: width of fin, box or other. (b) Method of
manufacturing the member: rolled, assembled or other profile. (c) Cant. (d) Weight
per unit
length. (e) Fin thickness. (f) Material
specification. (g) Span/
elevation ratio (for moment-
resisting frames with special and moderate energy dissipation capacity) or link length (for eccentrically
braced frames).
(h) Width-thickness ratio of the section elements. (i) Lateral bracing.

(j) Orientation of the column
with respect to the beam or link: connected to the flange, to the
soul, fin and soul, etc.
(k) Other parameters relevant to the specific connection considered.
(3) Beam (link) – Column relations

(a) Resistance of the panel area (b)
Details of the veneer plates. (c) Relation of
Beam (link)-Column moments.
(4) Continuity plates:

(a) Identification of the conditions under which continuity plates are required. (b) Thicknesses, widths
and lengths. (c) Details of connection to
the web and to the fins.
(5) Welds: (a)

Location, length (including returns), type (full penetration, fillet, plug, partial penetration, or other weld),
and any reinforcement or contour required. (b) Strength and toughness of the filler metal. (c)
Details and treatment of welds or backing plates and
extensions. (d) Weld access holes: dimensions, geometry and finish. (e) Additional quality controls
to those specified in F.3.1.17.
(6) Bolts:
(a) Diameter of the bolt.
(b) Bolt grade: ASTM A325, A490, other. (c)
Installation requirements: pretensioning, normal tightening, other. (d)
Type of perforation: standard, enlarged, short slot, long slot, other. (e) Method of
manufacturing the perforation: drilling, punching, sub-punching and reaming,
other.
(f) Other parameters relevant to the connection considered
(7) Manufacturing: all manufacturing parameters relevant to the considered connection that
exceed Title F or AWS requirements, such as:
(a) Surface roughness in fusion cuts or polished edges. (b) Cutting tolerances.
(c) Reinforcement or weld
profile (d) Presence of holes, bolts or
welds for accessories.
(8) Additional connection details: all parameters relevant to the connection under consideration.
F-290
F.3.11.1.5 — Design procedure — A complete and detailed design procedure for the connection must be
submitted, applying all limit states within the prequalification parameters.
F.3.11.1.6 — Prequalification Record — A prequalified connection must be provided with a written qualification
record that includes the following information:
(1) General description of the prequalified connection with graphics that clearly identify the
relevant aspects and the components of the connection.
(2) Description of the expected behavior of the connection in the elastic and inelastic range, location of
the inelastic zone and a description of the limit states that control the resistance and deformation
capacity of the connection.
(3) List of systems for which the connection is prequalified: moment-resistant frames with special or
moderate energy dissipation capacity or eccentrically braced frames.
(4) List of the limits for all the qualification variables stated in section F.3.10.1.4.
(5) List of critical demand welds.
(6) Definition of the region of the connection that must be considered as a protected zone.
(7) Detailed connection design procedure, as required in F.3.10.1.5.
(8) List of references or test reports, research reports or other publications that present the bases for
prequalification.
(9) Summary of required quality control procedures
F.3.11.2 — CYCLIC TESTS FOR QUALIFICATION OF BEAM-COLUMN AND LINK-COLUMN CONNECTIONS
F.3.11.2.1 — Scope and purpose — This section includes the requirements for cyclical qualification tests of
beam-column connections for PRM-DES and PRM-DMO, and link-column connections in PAE. The purpose of
the test described in this section is to provide evidence that the beam-column or link-column connection meets
the strength and story drift or link angle of rotation requirements of this Chapter.
This section provides the minimum recommendations for simplified test conditions.
F.3.11.2.2 — Symbols
i = drift angle = total

c total angle of link rotation
F.3.11.2.3 — Test set requirements — The test set must reproduce as closely as possible the conditions that
will occur in the prototype when subjected to seismic loads. The test suite should include the following aspects:
(1) The test specimen shall consist of at least a single column with beams or ties attached to one or both
sides of the column.
(2) The inflection points in the test set should approximately coincide with the points
inflection foreseen in the prototype when subjected to seismic action.
(3) Lateral bracing of the test assembly near points of load application or reactions is permitted when
required to provide lateral stability of the test assembly. The use of additional bracing is not allowed,
unless they reproduce the conditions that are used in the prototype.
F.3.11.2.4 — Essential test variables — The test specimen must reproduce, as closely as possible, the design,
detailing, construction aspects and material properties of the prototype. The following variables must be
reproduced in the test specimen.
F.3.11.2.4.1 — Sources of inelastic rotation — Inelastic rotation in the test specimen shall be
developed by the inelastic action of the same members and connection elements used for the prototype,
that is, in the beam or the link, in the panel area of the column, in the column outside the panel area, or
between connecting elements, under the limits described below. The portion of total inelastic rotation
developed in the test specimen for each
F-291
member or connecting element, must be within 25% of the expected portion of total inelastic rotation that
occurs in the corresponding member or connecting element of the prototype.
F.3.11.2.4.2— Member Size — The size of the beam or link used in the test specimen shall be within the
following limits:
(1) The depth of the test beam or link shall not be less than 90% of the depth of the
beam or prototype link.
(2) The weight per unit length of the beam or link tested must not be less than
75% of the weight per unit length of the prototype beam or link.
The size of the column used in the test specimen shall appropriately represent the inelastic action in the
column, as required by Section F.3.11.2.5.1. Additionally, the depth of the test column should not be less
than 90% of the depth of the prototype column.
Extrapolation outside the limits of this section is allowed as long as the structural engineer considers it so
and approves the Permanent Commission of the Seismic-Resistant Construction Regime.
F.3.11.2.4.3 — Connection details — The connection details used in the test specimens shall represent
as closely as possible the connection details of the prototype. The connection elements used in the test
specimen shall be a full-scale representation of the connection elements used in the prototype, for the
sizes of members tested.
F.3.11.2.4.4 — Continuity Plates — The sizes and connection details of the continuity plates used on
the test specimen shall be provided to represent, as closely as possible, the sizes and connection details
of the continuity plates. continuity used in the prototype.
F.3.11.2.4.5 — Strength of material — Each connecting member or element of the test specimen that
provides inelastic rotation by creep must comply with the following additional requirements:
(1) The yield stress shall be determined by testing the actual materials used in the test specimen,
as specified in Section F.3.11.2.8. The use of yield stress values reported on steel mill quality
certificates is not permitted for the purposes of this section.
(2) The yield stress of the beam must not be more than 15% below R Fy and for the grade of steel
to be used for the element corresponding to the prototype. The yield stresses of the columns
and connecting elements must not be more than 15% above or below R Fy and for the steel
grade to be used for the corresponding element in the prototype. R Fyy
must be determined according to section
F.3.1.5.2.
F.3.11.2.4.6— Welds — Test specimen welds shall satisfy the following requirements:
(1) Welds must be executed in strict accordance with welding procedures as required by AWS
D1.1. The essential variables of the welding procedure must meet the requirements of AWS
D1.1 and must be within the parameters established by the filler metal manufacturer. The
tensile strength of welds and the minimum Charpy V -groove test toughness used in the test
assembly shall be determined in materials tests as specified in Section F.3.11.2.8.3. The
minimum Charpy V -groove test weld strength and toughness reported on the weld
manufacturer's quality certificate shall not be used unless the reported results meet the
requirements of F.3.1.17.
F-292
(2) The minimum tensile strength specified for the filler metal used in the test specimen shall be
the same as that used for the corresponding welds in the prototype. The tensile strength tested
in the proof test weld shall not be more than 125 MPa above the filler metal tensile strength
specified for the prototype.
(3) The specified minimum Charpy toughness for the filler metal used in the test specimen shall
not exceed the specified minimum Charpy toughness of the filler metal to be used in the
corresponding prototype welds. The Charpy toughness used in the test specimen shall not be
more than 50%, or 34 kJ, whichever is greater, above the minimum Charpy toughness to be
used in the prototype.
(4) The positions in which the test specimen welds are made shall be those
same as those required in the prototype welds.
(5) The details of the backing plates, weld extension plates, access holes, and the like used to
make the welds on the test specimen shall be the same as those used on the corresponding
welds on the prototype. Backup and extension plates shall not be removed from the test
specimen unless the corresponding plates are removed from the prototype.
(6) Inspection methods, nondestructive testing, and weld acceptance standards for the test
specimen shall be the same as those used on the prototype.
F.3.11.2.4.7 — Bolts — The bolted parts of the test specimen shall reproduce the bolted parts of the
prototype as closely as possible. Additionally, the bolted parts of the test specimen shall satisfy the
(1) The grade of bolts (eg, ASTM A325, ASTM A325M, ASTM A490, ASTM A490M, ASTM F1852)
used in the test specimen shall be the same as that to be used in the prototype, except that
ASTM A325 bolts may be superseded by ASTM F1852, and vice versa. It is not allowed to
replace A325 bolts with Sae Gr 5, nor A490 with SAE Gr 8.
(2) The type and orientation of the bolt holes (standard, enlarged, short slot, long slot, or other)
used in the test specimen shall be the same as those to be used in the corresponding prototype
bolt holes.
(3) When inelastic rotation by creep or sliding must be developed in the bolted part of the
connection, the method used to make the holes (drilling, punching and reaming, or other) in
the test specimen shall be the same as that will use in the corresponding holes of the prototype.
(4) The bolts in the test specimen shall have the same degree of torque (pretensioning or other)
and contact surface preparation (slip resistance not specified, slip resistance class A or B, or
other) as that it will be used for the corresponding bolts of the prototype.
F.3.11.2.5 — Charge history
F.3.11.2.5.1— General Requirements — The test specimen shall be subjected to cyclic loading in
accordance with the requirements prescribed in section F.3.11.2.5.2 for beam-column connections in
PRM, and section F. 3.11.2.5.3 for link-column connections in PAE.
Loading sequences other than those specified in sections F.3.11.2.5.2 and F.3.11.2.5.3 may be used
when proven to be equivalent or more severe.
F.3.11.2.5.2 — Loading sequence for moment-resisting beam-column connections — Cyclic tests

for the qualification of beam-column moment connections in PRM shall be carried out controlling the drift
angle, ÿ , imposed on the specimen from test as follows:
(1) 6 ciclos a ÿ = 0.00375 rad

(2) 6 ciclos a ÿ = 0.005 rad
(3) 6 ciclos a ÿ = 0.0075 rad
(4) 4 ciclos a ÿ = 0.01 rad
(5) 2 ciclos a ÿ = 0.015 rad
F-293

Continue charging at ÿ = 0.01 rad increments, with two charging cycles at each step.
F.3.11.2.5.3 — Loading sequence for link-column connections — Cyclic tests for qualification of link-
column connections in PAE shall be carried out by controlling the angle of rotation of the link, , imposed
on the test specimen,cas shown indicates below:
total
(1) 6 cycles a ÿ = total

0.00375 rad.
0.005 rad.
0.0075 rad.
0.01 rad.
0.015 rad.
0.02 rad.
0.03 rad.
(8) 1 cycle a ÿ = total
0.04 rad.
(9) 1 cycle a ÿ = total
0.05 rad.
(10) 1 cycle a ÿ =total0.07 rad.
(11) 1 cycle a ÿ =total0.09 rad.
Continue charging with ÿ = 0.02 rad increments

total
, with one charging cycle at each step.
F.3.11.2.6— Instrumentation — Sufficient instrumentation shall be provided on the test specimen to permit
measurement or calculation of the quantities listed in F.3.11.2.8.
F.3.11.2.7 — Materials testing requirements
F.3.11.2.7.1 — Requirements for Steel Tension Tests — Tension tests shall be carried out on steel
samples taken from the material adjacent to each test specimen. Results of tensile tests from steel mill
quality certificates shall be reported but may not be used in lieu of specimen tests for the purposes of
this section. The results of the tensile tests shall be based on tests that are carried out in accordance
with section F.3.11.2.7.2. Tensile tests shall be performed and reported for the following parts of the test
specimen:
(1) The flange(s) and web(s) of the beams and columns in standard locations.
(2) Any element of the connection that develops inelastic rotation through creep.
F.3.10.2.7.2— Methods for Tensile Tests on Steel — Tensile tests shall be carried out in accordance
with ASTM A6/A6M, ASTM A370, and ASTM E8, with the following exceptions:
(1) The yield stress Fy obtained from the test shall be based on the definition of yield strength in
ASTM A370, using the parallel method at 0.002 strain.
(2) The speed of application of the load for the tensile test shall reproduce, as nearly as possible,
the speed of application of the load that will be used for the test specimen.
F-294
F.3.11.2.7.3 — Weld Metal Test Requirements — The tensile strength of welds and minimum Charpy V
-groove test toughness used in the test assembly shall be determined by materials tests as specified in
,
F.2.3.17. The tensile strength of welds and the minimum tensile strength in Charpy V -groove test reported by
the weld manufacturer's quality certificate shall not be used unless these specifications meet the requirements ,
of F.2.3.17 .
If the test specimen welding procedure is within ± 0.8kJ/mm of the test plate welding procedure, a single test
shall be used.
F.3.11.2.8 — Test Report Requirements — A written report meeting the requirements of this section shall be prepared
for each test specimen. The report must fully document all key characteristics and test results. The report must include
the following information:
(1) A drawing or a clear description of the test assembly, including essential dimensions, boundary conditions
at the load and reaction points, and the location of the lateral braces.
(2) A connection detail drawing showing member sizes, steel grades, sizes of all connecting elements, weld
details including filler metal, hole size and location for bolts, the size and grade of the bolts, and any
other pertinent details of the connection.
(3) A listing of all other essential variables for the test specimen, as listed
listed in section F.3.11.2.4.
(4) A listing or graph showing the applied load or displacement history of the
test specimen.
(5) A listing of all critical demand welds.
(6) The definition of the regions of the connection that comprise the protected zones.
(7) A plot of the applied load versus the displacement of the test specimen. The displacement on this graph
should be measured at or near the point of load application. The measured loads and displacements
on the test specimen shall be clearly identified.
(8) A plot of beam moment as a function of drift for moment-resisting beam-column connections; or a plot of
link shear versus angle of link rotation for link-column connections. For beam-column connections, the
beam moment and drift must be calculated about the column axis.
(9) The drift angle and the total inelastic rotation developed by the test specimen.
Components of the test specimen that contribute to total inelastic rotation due to creep or slip must be
identified. The part of the total inelastic rotation that each component of the test specimen develops
shall appear in the report. The method used to calculate inelastic rotations must be clearly shown.
(10) A chronological listing of significant test observations, including observations on creep, slip, instability, and
fracture of any part of the test specimen.
(11) The mode that controls the failure of the test specimen. If the trial was terminated before the
fails, the reason must be clearly stated.
(12) The results of the material tests specified in section F.3.11.2.7.
(13) Welding procedures and inspection reports thereof.
Additional drawings, data, and discussion about the test specimen or test results may be included in the report.
F.3.11.2.9— Acceptance Criteria — The test specimen must satisfy the strength and drift angle of the story or the
angle of rotation of the link. The test specimen shall sustain the drift angle or link rotation angle for a minimum of one
full load cycle.
F.3.11.3 — CYCLIC QUALIFICATION TESTS FOR BRACING RESTRICTED TO BUCKLING
F.3.11.3.1 — Scope — This section includes the requirements for cyclical qualification tests of individually or as a whole
buckling-restrained braces. The purpose of the brace-alone test is to provide
F-295
evidence that the buckling-restrained bracing satisfies the strength and inelastic deformation requirements of this
Chapter F.3; it also allows the determination of the maximum forces in the brace for purposes of the design of the
adjacent elements. The purpose of the brace assembly test is to provide evidence that the brace design can
satisfactorily withstand the strain and rotation demands associated with the design. In addition, the assembly test
seeks to demonstrate that the hysteretic behavior of the brace within the assembly is consistent with that of individual
brace elements with uniaxial testing.
F.3.11.3.2 — Symbols
b = amount of strain used to control specimen loads (total brace end rotation for the assembly specimen: total
axial strain of the brace for the brace specimen) ÿbm = value of the amount of strain ÿb , corresponding
drift from
design story ÿby = value of the amount of deformation ÿb , at the first significant yield of the test specimen
F.3.11.3.3 — Assembly test specimen — The assembly test specimen shall satisfy the following requirements:
(1) The mechanism to support the inelastic rotations of the brace assembly specimen shall be the same as
for the prototype. Rotational and strain demands on the assembly must be equal to or greater than on the
prototype.
(2) The axial yield strength of the steel core, Pysc of the brace in the assembly specimen shall not be less
than that of the prototype, where both strengths are based on the area of the core, Asc , multiplied by the
yield strength determined on a test coupon.
(3) The cross section and orientation of the projection of the steel core of the specimen from the
The strut assembly should be the same as the prototype strut.
(4) The same documented design methodology must be used for the assembly design and for the prototype,
in order to allow comparison of rotational and deformation demands.
In the stability calculation, the beams, columns and plates that connect the core will be considered as part
of this system.
(5) The calculated safety margins for the prototype connection design, steel core projection stability, general
buckling, and other relevant construction details of the test assembly, excluding the connection plate for
the prototype, shall be equal to or greater than those of the test specimen in the assembly.
(6) The lateral bracing of the assembly test shall replicate the lateral bracing in the
prototype.
(7) The assembly test specimen and the prototype must be manufactured in accordance with the same quality
processes and procedures.
F.3.11.3.4 — Brace Test Specimen — The brace test specimen shall reproduce as closely as possible the design,
detailing, construction aspects, and material properties of the prototype.
F.3.11.3.4.1 — Brace Test Specimen Design — The same documented design methodology shall be used
for the test specimen and the prototype. The calculations must demonstrate, as a minimum, the following
requirements:
(1) The calculated factor of safety for the general buckling stability of the prototype shall be equal to or
greater than that of the brace test specimen.
(2) The safety factors of the test specimen and the prototype must take into account differences in
material properties, including yield and ultimate stresses, ultimate strain, and toughness.
F.3.11.3.4.2 — Brace Test Specimen Fabrication — The brace test specimen and the prototype shall be
fabricated in accordance with the same quality processes and procedures.
F-296
F.3.11.3.4.3 — Similarity of Brace Test Specimen and Prototype — The brace test specimen shall
meet the following requirements:
(1) The cross section and orientation of the steel core should be the same as in the
prototype.
(2) The steel core axial yield strength, Pysc of the brace test specimen shall not vary by more
than 50 percent from the prototype, where both strengths are based on the core area Asc ,
multiplied by the yield strength determined on a test coupon.
(3) The material and method of spacing between the steel core and the buckling restraint
mechanism in the brace test specimen shall be the same as in the prototype.
F.3.11.3.4.4— Connection details — The connection details used in the brace test specimen shall
represent the connection details of the prototype as closely as possible.
F.3.11.3.4.5 — Materials
(1) Steel core: The steel core must meet the following requirements for the
brace test specimen: (a) The
specified minimum yield strength shall be equal to that of the prototype. (b) The
measured yield stress in the steel core material of the brace test specimen shall be at
least 90 percent of that of the prototype determined on test coupons. (c) The
specified minimum ultimate stress
and strain of the steel core of the brace specimen shall not be greater than that of the
prototype.
(2) Buckling Restraint Mechanism—The materials used in the buckling restraint mechanism of the
brace test specimen shall be the same as those used in the prototype.
F.3.11.3.4.6— Connections — The welded, bolted, and doweled joints of the test specimen shall
replicate those of the prototype as closely as possible.
F.3.11.3.5 — Load history
F.3.11.3.5.1— General Requirements — The test specimen shall be subjected to cyclic loading in
accordance with the requirements of Section F.3.11.3.6.2 and F.3.11.3.6.3. Additional load increments
beyond those described in F.3.11.3.6.3 are allowed. Each cycle must include full forays into the zone of
tension and compression up to the prescribed strain.
F.3.11.3.5.2 — Test control — The test shall be conducted by controlling the level of axial or rotational
strains ÿb imposed on the test specimen. Alternatively, the maximum rotational strain can be applied and
maintained if the axial strain protocol is followed.
F.3.11.3.5.3— Load Sequence — Loads shall be applied to the test specimen to produce the following
strains, where the strain corresponds to the axial strain of the steel core for the test specimen, and the
strain demand rotational for the assembly test specimen:
(1) Two load cycles at a strain corresponding to ÿb b =D and
(2) Two load cycles at a deformation corresponding to ÿb = ÿ 0.5

=D
bm (3) Two load cycles at a deformation corresponding to ÿb bm (4)
Two load cycles at a deformation corresponding to ÿb = ÿ 1.5
bm (5) Two load cycles at a deformation corresponding to ÿb = ÿ2 bm
F-297
(6) Additional complete cycles of load to the deformation corresponding to ÿb = ÿ 1.5 bm

as required for the brace test specimen to achieve a cumulative inelastic axial strain of at
least 200 times the yield strain (not required for the assembly test specimen).
The story design drift cannot be taken to be less than 0.01 times the story height for ÿbm
calculation purposes . Other loading sequences are permitted to be used to qualify the test
specimen when they prove to be equal or more severe in terms of maximum and cumulative
inelastic deformation.
F.3.11.3.7— Instrumentation — Sufficient instrumentation shall be provided on the test specimen to permit
measurement or calculation of the quantities listed in F.3.11.3.9.
F.3.11.3.8 — Test material requirements
F.3.11.3.8.1 — Requirements for tensile tests — Tensile tests must be carried out on steel samples
taken from the same material that is used for the manufacture of the steel core.
The tensile test results of quality certificates shall be reported but may not be used in place of specimen
testing for the purposes of this section. The results of the tensile tests shall be based on tests carried
out in accordance with section F.3.11.3.2.
F.3.11.3.8.2 — Tension Test Methods — Tension tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM
A6, ASTM A370, and ASTM E8, with the following exceptions:
(1) The yield stress reported in the tests shall be based on the ASTM A370 definition of yield
strength, using the parallel method for a strain of 0.002.
(2) The loading rate for tensile tests shall reproduce, as nearly as possible, the loading rate used
on the test specimen.
(3) The coupon must be machined in such a way that its longitudinal axis is parallel to the axis
length of the steel core.
F.3.11.3.9 — Test Report Requirements — A report meeting the requirements of this section shall be produced
for each test specimen. The report should extensively document all important aspects and results of the trial.
The report must include the following information:
(1) A drawing or clear description of the test specimen, including important dimensions, boundary
conditions and loads at reaction points, and location of lateral bracing, if any.
(2) A connection details drawing showing member dimensions, steel grade, connection element
measurements, weld details including filler metal, site and location of bolt holes or pins, connector
dimensions and grade, and any other pertinent connection details.
(3) A list of the other essential variables listed in Section F.3.11.3.4 and F.3.11.3.5, as
be appropriate.
(4) A listing or graph showing the history of applied loads or displacements.
(5) A graph of the applied loads as a function of the deformations ÿb . The method used to determine
the strains must be clearly shown. The location where the test loads and deformations of the test
specimen were measured shall be clearly identified.
(6) A chronological list of significant test observations, including observations on creep, slip, instability,
transverse displacement along the test specimen, and fracture in any part of the test specimen and
its connections, as applicable.
(7) The results of the tests of materials specified in section F.3.11.3.8 (8) The quality
control and quality plan used for the manufacture of the specimen. Welding procedures and inspection
reports should also be included.
F-298
Additional drawings, data, and discussion of the test results may be included in the report.
F.3.11.3.10 — Acceptance Criteria — At least one test of the assembly must be performed that satisfies the requirements
of Section F.3.11.3.4. At least one bracing test shall be performed that satisfies the requirements of Section F.3.11.3.5.
Within the required protocol range, all assays must satisfy the following requirements:
(1) The plot showing applied load vs. displacement history should exhibit stable and repetitive behavior with
increasing stiffness.
(2) There must be no fracture, instability in the brace, or failure of the connection at the end of the brace.
(3) For brace tests, the maximum tensile and compressive forces shall not be less than the nominal strength of the
core in each cycle for a strain greater than ÿby .
(4) For brace tests, the ratio of the maximum compressive force and the maximum tensile force shall not be greater
than 1.3, for a deformation greater than ÿby .
F-299
Grades:
F-300
NSR-10 – Chapter F.4 – Steel structures with cold-formed sheet profiles
CHAPTER
F.4 STEEL STRUCTURES WITH
COLD-FORMED SHEET PROFILES

F.4.1.1 — SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS
F.4.1.1.1 — Scope and limits of applicability — This Specification shall apply to the design of structural
members of low carbon (mild steel) or low alloy steel, the section of which has been cold formed, from sheets,
coils, strips, plates or bars with a thickness less than or equal to 25.4 mm (1 inch) and used to support loads in:
(a) Buildings, in which the design must be done in accordance with the specifications of the method
DCCR (Design with Coefficients of Load and Resistance) or the DEA method (Design by Efforts
Eligible), where explicitly stated1
(b) Other types of structures, other than buildings, taking into account the conditions
generated by dynamic effects.
F.4.1.1.2 — Terminology — The following are the meanings of the different terms used throughout this
specification:
Virgin Steel — The material as received from the steel producer or warehouse before it is cold formed as a result
of manufacturing operations.
Flange of a Flexural Section — The flat width of a flange including any intermediate stiffeners plus adjacent
corners.
Web — In a member subject to bending, that part of the section that is attached to both flanges, or is attached to
a single flange and passes through the neutral axis.
Rational Engineering Analysis — Analysis based on a theory that is appropriate to the situation, on available
test results that are relevant, and on good engineering judgment.
The minimum resistance factors that should be used when doing such an analysis are as follows:
For members: ÿ = 0.80

For connections: ÿ = 0.65
Design Effective Width — The flat width of an element reduced for design purposes, also known simply as the
effective width
Plane Width — The width of an element excluding corners measured along its plane.
Cross Section Area:
Effective Area — The effective area, is calculated using the effective widths of the elements
Ae , components in accordance with section F.4.2. The effective area will be equal to the gross area or
the net area, whichever is applicable, if the effective widths of all component elements, determined in
accordance with Section F.4.2, are equal to the actual flat widths.
ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ
The design method with load and resistance coefficients, DCCR, will be the valid design procedure under the provisions of this Regulation. Only the
design method by allowable efforts, DEA, will be allowed in numeral F.4.7, referring to the design of Metal Boards for Work in Composite Section.
F-301
Total Area — It is the total or complete, unreduced area, A calculated without reducing the widths of the component
,
elements to their effective widths. This may be a gross unreduced area or a net unreduced area, depending on
where applicable.
Gross area — The gross area, Ag , is the area where reductions for holes, openings and cuts are not considered.
Net Area — The net area, W , is equal to the gross area minus the area of holes, openings, and cutouts.
Guide Channel — A member of a lattice consisting of only one web and two (2) fins. The height of the web must be
measured inside the wings.
Service Loads — Load under which the limits of the Serviceability State are evaluated
Factored Load — Product of nominal load and factor of factor (load factor)
Nominal Loads — They are the magnitudes of the loads specified by this applicable Regulation, not including the factors of
increase.
Connection — Combination of structural elements and joints (or joints) used to transmit forces between two or more
members.
Purlin — Horizontal structural member which supports a deck deck and is subject primarily to flexure under applied loads
such as snow, wind, or dead loads.
DCCR — Design with Coefficients of Load and Resistance — Is a method of dimensioning structural components
(members, connectors, connecting elements and assemblies) such that the design resistance equals or exceeds the required
resistance of the component under the action of the load combinations for Design with Load Coefficients and Resistance.
This is the method that will be used in these specifications.
DEA — Design by Allowable Efforts — Is a method of dimensioning structural components (members, connectors,
connecting elements and assemblies) such that the allowable resistance equals or exceeds the required resistance of the
component under the action of the load combinations for Design by Efforts DEA admissible. This method will not be used in
these specifications, unless otherwise stated.
Diaphragm — Roof, floor, or other membrane or bracing system that transfers forces in the direction of its own plane to the
lateral force-resisting system.
Lintel — A horizontal member that is part of a structural frame used over floor, roof, or wall openings to transfer loads around
the opening to supporting structural members.
Load Effect — Forces, stresses, and strains produced in a structural component due to applied loads
Multi-Stiffened Element — An element stiffened between webs, or between a web and a stiffened edge, by means of
intermediate stiffeners parallel to the direction of stress.
Unstiffened Compression Members — Planar compression member stiffened on only one edge parallel to the direction of
stress.
Stiffened or Partially Stiffened Compression Members — A flat compression member (for example, the flat compression
flange of a flexural member or a web or flange of a compression member) in which both edges parallel to the direction of
stress are stiffened by one or another of the following elements: web, flange, stiffening flange or stiffening lip, intermediate
stiffener, or the like.
F-302
Performance Test — Test performed on structural members, connections, and assemblies where their
performance cannot be determined by the provisions given in this specification or its references.
Verification Test — Test carried out, when required, on members, connections and assemblies, designed
according to the provisions of Chapter F.4 of this specification, or its references, in order to compare the real
behavior with the calculated one.
Stress — Stress as used in this specification means force per unit area.
Yield Stress — A generic term to denote either the yield point or the yield strength, as appropriate for the material
Published Specification — Requirements for a steel listed by a manufacturer, processor, producer, trader, or
other entity, which 1. Are generally available in the public domain or upon request, 2. Are established before the
steel is ordered, and 3. They specify at least the minimum mechanical properties, the limits of the chemical
composition and, if coated, the properties of the coating.
Thickness — The , of any element or section will be that of the base steel, not including any type
thickness, t of cover.
Increasing Factor — Factor that takes into account deviations between actual load and nominal load due to
uncertainties in the analysis that transform loading into a load effect, and the probability that more than one
extreme load will occur simultaneously.
Strength Factor, ÿ — It is a factor that takes into account unavoidable deviations between actual strength and
nominal strength as well as the manner and consequences of failure.
Safety Factor, ÿ — Factor that takes into account deviations between actual and nominal resistance, deviations
between actual load and nominal load, uncertainties in the analysis that transforms load into a load effect, and
the manner and consequences of the failure. This factor will only be defined in those parts where the DEA
method is used.
Fatigue — Limit state of crack initiation and growth, resulting from the repeated application of live loads.
Grade — A designation used for the minimum yield stress.
Stringer — A horizontal structural member which supports wall panels and is primarily subject to flexure under
applied horizontal loads, such as wind loads.
Web Member — A structural member in a truss that connects to the top and bottom chord, but is not a chord
member.
Chord Member — A structural member that makes up the top or bottom component of a truss.
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Member — Sections manufactured by mechanical pressure on flat parts from
sheets, cut lengths of coils or plates, or by cold-rolled forming of cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel coils or sheets.
Both forming operations are performed at room temperature, which indicates that no heat is introduced, as is
done with the hot forming process.
Yield Moment — In a member subject to bending, it is the moment at which the most extreme fiber reaches first
yield.
Curtain Wall — A wall that transfers transverse loads (out of plane) and is limited to a superimposed vertical
load, not including the weight of deck material, not greater than 1.46 kN/m (100 lb/ft), or a superimposed vertical
load not more than 0.89 kN (200 lb)
F-303
Shear Wall — A wall that provides resistance to lateral loads in the plane of the wall and also stability for the
structural system.
Buckling — Limit state of sudden change in the geometry of a structure or any of its elements under a critical
load condition.
Distortional Buckling — It is a buckling mode that involves changes in the shape of the cross section, excluding
local buckling.
Bending Buckling — A mode of buckling in which a compression member bends laterally without twisting or
change in cross-sectional shape.
Flexo-Torsional Buckling — A mode of buckling in which a member in compression bends and rotates about its
axis (torsional) simultaneously with no change in cross-sectional shape.
Local Buckling — Limit state of buckling for an element in compression where the connection line between
elements remains upright and the angles between elements do not change.
Lateral Torsional Buckling — A mode of buckling of a member in bending that involves deflection out of its
plane of bending occurring simultaneously with torsion about the center of shear of the cross section.
Parallel — Vertical member of a framework in a wall system or assembly.
Curtain Wall Post — A member in an exterior steel wall system that transfers transverse (out-of-plane) loads and
is limited by a superimposed axial load, exclusive of the cladding materials, not more than 1460 N/m (100 lbs. /ft),
or a point superimposed axial load of not more than 890 N (200 lb) per stud.
Virgin Steel Properties — Mechanical properties of virgin steel such as yield point, ultimate strength, and
elongation.
Yield Point — The yield point is the first stress in the material at which an increase in strain occurs without any
increase in stress, as defined by the corresponding NTC.
Specified Minimum Yield Point — The lower limit of the yield point in a specified test to qualify a batch of steel
as suitable, for use in cold-formed steel structural members, designed at that yield point.
Panel Point — Region of connection between a web member and a chord member in a truss.
Break Point — Connection region between two truss chord members where there is a change in grade, not
including the heel.
Plane Width-Thickness Ratio — The Plane width of an element measured along its plane, divided by its
thickness.
Yield Strength — Stress in which the material exhibits a specified limit deviation from the proportionality between
stress and strain as defined by the corresponding NTC.
Allowable Resistance — It is the nominal resistance divided by the factor of safety, Rn ÿ . It will only be used in
those sections of these Regulations where it is indicated.
Design Resistance — It is the nominal resistance multiplied by a resistance factor, Rn ÿ .
Available Strength — Design strength or allowable strength, as the case may be.
F-304
Nominal Resistance — Resistance of a structure or component (without applied resistance factors or factors of
safety) to withstand the effects of loads, as determined in accordance with the provisions of this specification.
Required Resistance — Are the forces, stresses, and deformations acting on a structural component, determined
either by a structural analysis, for load combinations by DEA or DCCR, as appropriate, or as specified in this
Regulation.
Ultimate Strength — Maximum stress achieved by a material in tensile testing.
Mother Roll — A continuous roll without welded joints as handled by a hot mill, cold mill, metal coating line, or
paint line and identifiable by a unique roll number. This roll can be cut or strapped into smaller rolls, however the
latter can be said to come from the same Master Roll if, according to traceability, the Original Roll number can
be determined.
Asymmetric Section — A section that is not symmetric about any axis or point.
Point Symmetry Section — It is a symmetric section about a point (centroid) such as a Z section with equal
wings.
Double Symmetry Section — It is a symmetric section about two orthogonal axes that pass through its centroid.
Simple Section of Symmetry — It is a section symmetric about only one axis through its centroid.
SS (Structural Steel) — ASTM designation for certain flat steels intended for structural applications
Subelement of a Multi-Stiffened Element — Portion of a multi-stiffened element between adjacent intermediate

stiffeners, between the web and an intermediate stiffener, or between the edge and intermediate stiffener.
Heel — Connection region between the top and bottom chords of a truss with non-parallel chords
F.4.1.1.3 — Units — This specification has been developed in such a way that any compatible system of units
can be used, except in those situations where something else is explicitly stated. The work units considered in
this section are those determined by the International SI System (force in Newtons, length in millimeters and
pressure or effort in Megapascals, MPa).
F.4.1.2.1 — Applicable Steels — This Specification requires the use of structural grade steel as defined in the
following ICONTEC NTC or American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM specifications.
NTC 6 (ASTM A1011/A1011M SS Grados 30 (205MPa), 33 (230MPa), 36 (250MPa) Tipos 1 y 2, 40

(275MPa), 45 (310MPa), 50 (340MPa), and 55 (380MPa); HSLAS Classes 1 and 2, Grades 45 (310MPa), 50
(340MPa), 55 (380MPa), 60 (410MPa), 65 (450MPa), and 70 (480MPa); HSLAS-F Grades 50 (340MPa), 60
(410MPa), 70 (480MPa), and 80 (550MPa)) Hot-rolled flat products of steels, carbon, structural, high-strength
low-alloy and high-strength low-alloy with deformability –
stamped
NTC 1920 ASTM A36/A36M Carbon structural steel.
NTC 1950 (ASTM A242/A242M) High-strength, low-alloy structural steel.
NTC 1985 (ASTM A572) High-strength, low-alloy steels with columbium and vanadium, of structural quality.
F-305
NTC 2012 (ASTM A588/A588M) High-strength, low-alloy structural steel with a minimum yield stress of 345MPa and
up to 100mm (4in.) thick.
NTC 3325 (ASTM A283/A283M) Thick carbon steel sheets with low and intermediate tensile strength.
NTC 4007 (ASTM A529/A529M) Specifications for carbon-manganese steel of high strength and structural quality.
NTC 4009 (ASTM A606) High-strength, low-alloy, cold-rolled and hot-rolled steel sheets and strips with improved
corrosion resistance.
NTC 4011 (ASTM A653/A653M SS Grades 33 (230MPa), 37 (255MPa), 40 (275MPa), and 50 (340MPa) Class 1
and Class 3; HSLA types A and B, grades 40 (275MPa), 50 (340MPa ), 60 (410MPa), 70 (480MPa) and 80 (550MPa))
Flat steel products coated with zinc - galvanized - or coated with zinc iron alloy - galvano-annealed - by hot-dip
processes.
NTC 4015 (ASTM A792/A792M (Grades 33 (230MPa), 37 (255MPa), 40 (275MPa), and 50 class 1 (340MPa class
1)) Flat steel products coated with 55% Aluminum-Zinc alloy, by the process hot dip.
NTC 4526 (ASTM A500) Cold-formed carbon steel structural tubing, with and without seam, round and other shapes.
NTC 5091 (ASTM A1008/A1008M SS Grades 25 (170MPa), 30 (205MPa), 33 (230MPa) Types 1 and 2, and 40
(275MPa) Types 1 and 2; HSLAS Classes 1 and 2, Grades 45 (310MPa), 50 (340MPa), 55 (380MPa), 60 (410MPa),
65 (450MPa), and 70 (480MPa); HSLAS-F Grades 50 (340MPa), 60 (410MPa), 70 (480MPa), and 80 (550MPa)
Flat, cold-rolled steel products: carbon, structural, high-strength low-alloy and high-strength low-alloy with deformability
- stamping
ASTM A847 High-strength, low-alloy, cold-formed, welded, and seamless structural tubing with improved resistance
to environmental corrosion.
ASTM A875/ A875M (SS Grades 33 (230MPa), 37 (255MPa), 40 (275MPa), and 50 (340MPa) class 1 and class 3;
HSLAS Types A and B, Grades 50 (340MPa), 60 (410MPa), 70 (480MPa) and 80 (550MPa)) Flat steel products
coated with 5% Aluminum zinc alloy, through the hot-dip process.
ASTM A1003/ A1003M (ST Grados 50 (340MPa) H, 40 (275MPa) H, 37 (255MPa) H, 33 (230MPa) H)

Flat steel products, carbon steel, with metallic and non-metallic coatings for cold-formed members for use in framing.
ASTM A1039/ A1039M (SS Grades 40 (275MPa), 50 (340MPa), 55 (380), 60 (410MPa), 70 (480MPa), and 80
(550MPa)) Standard Specifications for Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Sheet Steel , commercial and structural, manufactured
using the cast twin-roll process. Thicknesses of Grade 55 (380) and greater that do not meet the 10% minimum
elongation requirement are limited by section F.4.1.2.3.2.
F.4.1.2.2 — Other Steels — The list given in F.4.1.2.1 does not exclude the use of steels up to 25.4 mm (1 inch)
thick, ordered or produced to other specifications, provided that :
(1) Steels must meet the mechanical and chemical requirements of any of the
specifications listed above, or other published specification.
(2) The mechanical and chemical properties will be determined by the producer, supplier, or seller, according
to the following specifications: For coated sheets, NTC 39402 ; for hot and cold rolled steel, in coils and
sheets, NTC 73 ; for plates and bars, ASTM
A6/A6M; for hollow structural sections, the tests shall be carried out in accordance with
2
Documento Referencia ASTM A924/A924M for coated sheets.
3
Documento Referencia ASTM A568/A568M for hot-rolled or cold-rolled sheet and strip.
F-306
the requirements of NTC 45264 (for carbon steel) or ASTM A847 (for high strength low alloy steel,
HSLA)
(3) The properties of the coating on steels will be determined by the producer, supplier or
the seller in accordance with the provisions of NTC 3940
(4) The steel must meet the requirements of Section F.4.1.2.3.
(5) If the steel is to be welded, its suitability for the intended welding process shall be established by the
producer, supplier, or vendor in accordance with AWS D1.1 or D1.3 (American Welding Society)
specifications, as applicable. the case.
If identification and documentation of steel production have not been established, then in addition to the above
five points, the manufacturer of the cold-formed steel product shall establish (to his supplier or to whomever it may
be) that the yield stress (yield point ) and the ultimate tensile strength of the parent roll are at least 10% greater
than that given in the published specification
reference.
F.4.1.2.3— Ductility — Steels not listed in F.4.1.2.1 and used for structural members and connections in
accordance with F.4.1.2.2 shall meet one of the following ductility requirements:
F.4.1.2.3.1 — The ratio of tensile strength to yield stress shall not be less than 1.08, and the total
elongation shall not be less than 10% in a 50 mm or 7% witness length on a 200 mm control length of the
standard specimen tested in accordance with ASTM A370. If these requirements cannot be met, the
following criteria must be satisfied: 1. the local elongation in a length of 12.7 mm through the fracture
must not be less than 20%, 2. the uniform elongation in the region external to the fracture should not be
less than 3%. When the ductility of the material is determined based on local and uniform elongation
criteria, its use is restricted to the design of purlins5 and stringers in accordance with F.4.3.3.1.1(a),
F.4.3.3.1.2, F.4.4.6.1.1, F.4.4.6.1.2 and F.4.4.6.2.1. For curtain wall purlins, stringers , and studs, subject
to combined axial load and bending moment (section F.4.3.5), PP shall not be greater than 0.15.
Phi
u cn
F.4.1.2.3.2 — Steels conforming to ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade 80 (550MPa), ASTM A1008/A1008M

SS Grade 80 (550MPa), A792/A792M Grade 80 (550MPa), A875/A875M SS Grade 80 (550MPa) and
ASTM A1039 Grade 55 (380MPa), 60 (410MPa), 70 (480MPa) and 80 (550MPa) thicknesses that do not
meet the 10% minimum elongation requirement, and other steels that do not meet the stipulated in
numeral F.4.1.2.3.1 shall be allowed for use in compression members of concentrically loaded closed
box sections as described in Exception 1, below, and in multiple web configurations such as roofs,
cladding and decks. floor as described in Exception 2 described in this section, provided that:
(1) The yield stress, Fy , used for the determination of the nominal resistance given in F.4.2, F.4.3,
F.4.4 and F.4.5 is taken as the lower value between 75% of the Minimum Yield Point Specified
and 410 MPa.
(2) The ultimate tensile strength, Fu , used to determine the nominal strength in F.4.5, is taken as
the lower of 75% of the specified minimum ultimate strength and 427 MPa.
Alternatively, the applicability of such steels for multi-web configuration shall be demonstrated by
means of load tests, in accordance with the provisions of Section F.4.6.1. The design strengths
based on these tests shall not exceed the available strengths calculated in accordance with F.4.2
to F.4.8, using the specified minimum yield stress, Fsy , and the specified minimum ultimate
strength Fu .
4
ASTM A500-03A Reference Document for carbon steel
5
Horizontal structural members that support roof decks or deck panels and loads applied primarily by bending.
F-307
Exception 1 — For configurations with multiple webs, the use of a specified reduced minimum yield
stress, R Fb , shall be permitted for the determination of the nominalandflexural resistance (resistance to
moment) in numeral F.4.3.3.1.1(a ), for which the reduction factor, Rb must be determined as follows:
(a) Stiffened and partially stiffened compression flanges
For wt 0.067EF ÿ sy
= b
R 1.00
Para 0.067EF wt 0.974EF

< sy<
and
0.4
R 1b 0.26 wF tE 0.067
=ÿ ÿ
ÿ and
() ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
(F.4.1.2-1)
Para 0.974EF wt 500 ÿ ÿ sy

=
R 0.75
b
(b) Unstiffened compression flanges
Para wt 0.0173EF ÿ sy
= b
R 1.00
For < ÿ 0.0173EF wt 60 sy
b
= 0.6 wF tE and
R 1.079 ÿ
() (F.4.1.2-2)
Where:
E = modulus of elasticity = specified
Fsy
minimum yield point as described in section
F.4.1.6.1 ÿ 550 MPa =
t thickness of the section w =
flat width of the fin in compression
The aforementioned exception does not apply to steel decks for use in a composite section
with a concrete slab because the deck acts as a tension reinforcement for this case.
Exception 2 — For concentrically loaded, closed box-section members in compression, the

use of a reduced yield stress of in place of Fy shall be permitted in Equations F.4.3.4-2,
F.4.3.4- 3 and 0.9F and ,
F.4.3.4-4 for the determination of axial resistance in section F.4.3.4. A reduced radius of
gyration ( )( ) R r will be used in the equation
r F.4.3.4-5 when the value of the effective length
KL is less than 1.1L F.4.1.2-3 and Rr is given by O
,
where Lo is given by the equation
the equation F.4.1.2-4.
L r EF = ÿ (F.4.1.2-3)
O cr
0.35 (AM )
R r0.65
= + (F.4.1.2-4)
1.1L O
F-308
Where:
It = length at which the local buckling stress equals the bending buckling stress =
radius of
r gyration of the full unreduced cross section = minimum critical buckling
Fcr stress for the section, calculated from
according to equation F.4.2.2-5.
= reduction factor
Rr
KL = effective length
F.4.1.2.4 — Minimum thickness delivered — The minimum thickness of uncoated steel, of the cold-formed product as
delivered to the work must not be at any point less than 95% of the thickness, t used in its design; however, thicknesses ,
may be less at bends, such as corners, due to cold forming effects.
F.4.1.3 — LOADS
F.4.1.3.1 — Nominal Loads — The nominal loads will be determined in accordance with the specifications established in
Title B of this Regulation.
F.4.1.4 — DESIGN BY ALLOWABLE STRESSES
F.4.1.4.1 — Design Basis — The design specifications given under this section of the Regulations are based on the
principles of Design by Allowable Efforts. The requirements of this method will not apply in any section of this Regulation,
except for metal boards for work in composite section (Section F.4.7) The design bases for this Regulation will be in
accordance with what is registered in section F.4.1.5 , developed for the DCCR method.
F.4.1.4.1.1 — Requirements for Design by Allowable Efforts — This method, in the case that it is specified as
the design procedure, will satisfy the requirements of this Regulation when the allowable resistance of each
structural component equals or exceeds the resistance required allowable load, determined based on rated loads,
for all applicable load combinations.
The design under this method must be done according to the following equation:
R Rÿ ÿ (F.4.1.4-1)
n
Where:
R = Allowable Required strength, used where indicated. = Specified
Rn Nominal A resistance given in F.4.2 to F.4.8. = specified factor of
ÿ Safety, used where indicated.
Rn ÿ = Allowable Design Stress, used where indicated.
F.4.1.4.1.2 — Load combinations for Allowable Effort Design — The load combinations for the Allowable Effort
Design method are stipulated in Title B of this Regulation.
F.4.1.5 — DESIGN WITH COEFFICIENTS OF LOAD AND RESISTANCE (DCCR)
F.4.1.5.1 — Design Basis — The design specifications given under this section of the Code are based on the principles of
Design with Coefficients of Load and Resistance (DCCR). All the requirements of this section must apply for design with
structural members. cold formed, except where otherwise specified.
F.4.1.5.1.1 — Design Requirements with Coefficients of Load and Resistance (DCCR)

— The design will satisfy the requirements of this Regulation when the design resistance of each structural
component equals or exceeds the required resistance determined based on the nominal loads multiplied by the
appropriate load enhancement coefficients, for all applicable load combinations.
F-309
The design must be carried out according to the following equation:
RR ÿf (F.4.1.5-1)
IN n
Where:
RU = required resistance Rn =
nominal resistance specified in F.4.2 to F.4.8 ÿ Rn ÿ
= resistance coefficient specified in F.4.2 to F.4.8 = design
resistance
F.4.1.5.1.2 — Load coefficients and combinations for DCCR — The load coefficients and their combinations
for the DCCR method are stipulated in Title B of this Regulation.
F.4.1.6 — INCREASE IN YIELD POINT AND STRENGTH DUE TO COLD FORMING WORK
F.4.1.6.1 — Yield Strength — The yield stress used in the design, Fy , shall be a value not greater than the minimum
specified yield strength of the steels listed in Sections F.4.1.2.1 or F.4.1.2.3 .2, or the one established in F.4.6, or
increased by effect of the cold formation work described in section F.4.1.6.2.
F.4.1.6.2 — Increase in strength due to cold forming work — The increase in strength due to cold forming work
will allow the substitution of Fya for Fy , where Fya is the average yield stress of the section complete. Such increase
shall be limited to in accordance with sections F.4.3.2, F.4.3.3.1 (excluding section F.4.3.3.1.1 (b)), F.4.3.4, F.4.3.5,
F.4.4.4 and F.4.4.6.1.
The limitations and methods used in the determination of Fya are the following:
(a) For axially loaded compression members and flexural members for which their proportions are such that
the quantity ÿ for the determination of resistance is equal to unity (1.00), calculated according to section
F.4.2.2 of this Regulation for each of the component elements of the section, the design yield point, Fya ,
of the steel will be determined based on one of the following methods:
(1) Full section tensile tests (See paragraph (a) of section F.4.6.3.1)
(2) Tests on short columns (See paragraph (b) of section F.4.6.3.1)
(3) Calculated as follows:
F CF 1 CFF = +ÿ( ÿ yf ya) yc

uv
(F.4.1.6-1)
Where:
Fya = average yield stress of the full unreduced section for members
in compression or sections with full flanges for members in flexure = ratio between
c the total area of the corners and the total cross-sectional area of the full section, for members
in compression; or ratio between the total area of the corners of the controlling flange and
the total area of the controlling flange, for members in flexion.
Fyf = is the weighted average of the yield point under tension of the flat portions established in
accordance with section F.4.6.3.2 of this Regulation or the yield point of virgin steel if
tests are not carried out.
F BF =Rt c yv
yc ( )m (F.4.1.6-2)
The above expression defines the tensile yield stress of the corners.
F-310
This equation is applicable only when FF 1.2 ÿ , Rt 7 ÿ , and the included angle is
uv yv
ÿ 120
B c3.69 F F 0.819 F F =ÿ ÿ uv yv uv( yv )2 1.79 (F.4.1.6-3)
= F F 0.068 uv
m 0.192 ( ( yv )) ÿ
(F.4.1.6-4)
Where:
R = internal radius of bending =
thickness of the section t
Fyv = yield stress in tension of virgin steel specified in section F.4.1.2
of this Regulation or as established in F.4.6.3.3.
Fuv = tensile strength of virgin steel specified by Section F.4.1.2 or established in accordance with Section
F.4.6.3.3
(b) For axially loaded members in tension, the yield point of the steel shall be determined by either method 1 or method
3 prescribed in paragraph a) of this section.
(c) The effect of welding on the mechanical properties of a member shall be determined based on tests on full-section
specimens containing, within the witness length, the type of weld that the manufacturer intends to use. Necessary
steps must be taken to account for such an effect on the structural use of the member.
F.4.1.7 — SERVICEABILITY OF THE STRUCTURE — A structure will be designed to carry out the required functions during its expected
life. Serviceability limit states must be chosen based on the intended function of the structure, and must be evaluated using realistic loads
and load combinations.
F.4.1.8 — REFERENCE DOCUMENTS — The following documents are the references and the basis of this Regulation:
American Iron and Steel Institute. (AISI), 1140 Connecticut Avenue, NW, Washington, DC20036:
AISI S100-07, North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members
AISI S200-07, North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – General Provisions
AISI S210-07, North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Floor and Roof System Design
AISI S211-07, North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Wall Stud Design
AISI S212-07, North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Header Design
AISI S214-07, North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Truss Design
AISI S901-02, Rotational-Lateral Stiffness Test Method for Beam-to-Panel Assemblies
AISI S902-02, Stub-Column Test Method for Effective Area of Cold-Formed Steel Columns
AISI S906-04, Standard Procedures for Panel and Anchor Structural Tests
AISI S213-07, North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Lateral Design
AISI S908-04, Base Test Method for Purlins Supporting a Standing Seam Roof System
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE), 1801 Alexander Bell

Drive, Reston VA, 20191: ASCE/SEI 7-05, Minimun Design Loads in Buildings and Other Structures
American Welding Society (AWS), 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, Florida 33135:
F-311
AWS D1.3-98, Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel
AWS C1.1/ C1.1M–2000, Recommended Practices for Resistances Welding
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (Sociedad Americana de Ingenieros Mecánicos), ASME B46.1-2000
“Surface Texture, Surface Roughness, Waviness, and Lay”
NTC Standards (Colombian Technical Standards) of ICONTEC or ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)
as applicable:
NTC 6 (ASTM A1011/A1011M-05a) Flat, hot-rolled steel products: carbon, structural, high-strength low-alloy and high-
strength low-alloy with deformability – stamping –
NTC 1920 (ASTM A36/A36M-00a) Carbon structural steel.
NTC 1950 (ASTM A242/A242M-00a) High-strength, low-alloy structural steel.
NTC 1985 (ASTM A572/A572M-06) High-strength low-alloy structural quality steels Niobium (Columbium) – vanadium
NTC 2012 (ASTM A588/A588M-05) High-strength, low-alloy structural steel with a minimum yield strength of 345MPa in
thicknesses up to 100mm
NTC 2633 (ASTM A283/A283M-00) Medium and low tensile strength carbon steel sheets and bars
NTC 3353 (ASTM A370-05) Definitions and methods for mechanical tests of steel products.
NTC 4007 (ASTM A529/A529M-05) Specifications for carbon-manganese steel of high strength and structural quality.
NTC 4009 (ASTM A606-04) High-strength, low-alloy cold- and hot-rolled steel sheets and strips with improved corrosion
resistance.
NTC 4011 (ASTM A653/A653M-06) Flat steel products coated with Zinc - galvanized - or coated with zinc iron alloy -
galvano-annealed - by hot-dip processes.
NTC 4015 (ASTM A792/A792M-05) Flat steel products coated with 55% aluminum-zinc alloy, using the hot-dip process.
NTC 4028 (ASTM A490M-04a) Fixing elements. High strength steel bolts, class 10.9 and 10.9.3 for structural steel joints
– metric system –
NTC 4029 (ASTM A325M-06) Fixing elements. High strength bolts intended for structural steel joints – metric system –
NTC 4031 (ASTM F436M-04) Fixing elements. Hardened Steel Washers – Metric
NTC 4034 (ASTM A307-00) Fixing elements. Specification for screws and bolts of carbon steel with 490 MPa tensile
strength.
NTC 4035 (ASTM A194/A194M-00b) Specification for carbon and alloy steel nuts for high pressure and high temperature
services.
NTC 4479 (ASTM A449-04b) Quenched and tempered carbon steel screws and bolts.
NTC 4511 (ASTM A563M-04) Specifications for alloy and carbon steel nuts – metric system –
NTC 4512 (ASTM A354-04) Screws, bolts and other externally threaded fasteners, quenched and tempered, made of
alloy steel.
F-312
NTC 4526 (ASTM A500-03a) Cold-formed carbon steel structural tubing, with and without seam, round and other shapes.
NTC 4701 (ASTM F959-04) Fixing elements. Direct compressible washer type strain gauges for use with structural fasteners.
NTC 4965 (ASTM A563-00) Carbon steel and alloy steel nuts.
NTC 5091 (ASTM A1008/A1008M-05b) Flat, cold-rolled steel products: carbon, structural, high-strength low-alloy and high-strength
low-alloy with deformability (stamping)
ASTM A325-06 Steel Structural Bolts, Heat Treated, Minimum Ultimate Strength of 835/735ksi
ASTM A490-06 Thermally (heat) treated steel structural bolts with minimum ultimate strength of 1050MPa.
ASTM A847/ A847M-05 High-strength, low-alloy, cold-formed, welded, and seamless structural tubing with improved environmental
corrosion resistance
ASTM A875/ A875M-05 Flat steel products coated with 5% Aluminum zinc alloy, using the hot dip process.
ASTM A1003/ A1003M-05 Flat steel products, carbon steel, with metallic and non-metallic coatings for cold-formed members for
use in framing.
ASTM A1039/ A1039M-04 Standard Specifications for Sheet, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Commercial, and Structural Steel, Manufactured
by the Twin-Roll Casting Process
ASTM E1592-01 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Metal Roofing and Enclosure Systems by Static Uniform Air
Pressure Difference
ASTM F436-04 Fasteners. Tempered steel washers.
ASTM F844-04 Washer, General Purpose Steels and Flat Products, Non-Hardened
ASTM F959M-05a Fasteners. Direct Compressible Washer Type Strain Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners – Metric
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), 1140 Connecticut Avenue, NW, Washington, DC20036:
ANSI/AISC 360-05, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
Steel Deck Institute. Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks, publication No 30, 2000
Steel Deck Institute. Composite Deck Design Handbook, March 1997
Steel Deck Institute. Manual of Construction with Steel Deck, 1991
F.4.2 — ELEMENTS
F.4.2.1 — LIMITS AND DIMENSIONAL CONSIDERATIONS
F.4.2.1.1 — Considerations for the flat width-fin thickness ratio
F.4.2.1.1.1 — Maximum flat width-thickness ratios of fins — The maximum admissible flat width-thickness
ratios, wt without considering intermediate stiffeners and taking the actual thickness of the element as t , must
,
be the following:
(1) Stiffened compression member with only one longitudinal edge connected to a web or flange element
and the other edge stiffened by:
F-313
Single lip or flange ................................................ ........... wt 60 ÿ

Any other class of stiffener (i) when II
< ........................................
s a
.................. wt 60 ÿ
(ii) when II ÿ ............................................
a
s ............. wt 90 ÿ
Where:
I = actual moment of inertia of the complete stiffener around its own axis
s
centroid parallel to the element to be stiffened.

aI = adequate moment of inertia of the stiffener, such that each element
component will behave like a stiffened element.
(2) Stiffened compression element with both longitudinal edges connected to each other
rigid elements……………………………………………..... wt 500 ÿ
(3) Unstiffened compression element……………………. ...... wt 60 ÿ
Note: Unstiffened compression members having a wt greater than approximately 30 and stiffened
compression members having a wt
greater than about 250 are susceptible to developing a perceptible deformation under the total resistance
available (strength multiplied by a factor), without affecting the ability of the member to develop the
required resistance (effect of factored loads).
Stiffened members with wt ratios greater than 500 may be used with adequate design strength to support
the required loads; however, significant deformations of such elements will invalidate the design equations
specified in this Regulation.
F.4.2.1.1.2 — Inward Deflection of Full Length of Flange — When the flange of a flexed member is unusually
wide, and it is desired to limit maximum curvature or movement of the flange toward the neutral axis, the following
equation applies to flanges in compression and tension regardless of whether they are stiffened or not:
w f0.061tdE
= f of
4 ( 100cf d ) (F.4.2.1-1)
Where:
wf
= width of the fin that projects beyond the web; or half the distance between souls
for box or U girders =
t flange thickness = beam
d height = amount of
c
f
displacement by curvature of the flange toward the neutral axis = average stress
f of across unreduced flange width (if members are designed using the effective width procedure, the average
stress is equal to the maximum stress multiplied by the ratio of the effective design width to the actual
width)
F.4.2.1.1.3 — Effects of variation due to shear (Short spans supporting concentrated loads) — When the
beam span is less than 30w ( wf as defined below) and the width f
2wf
supports a concentrated load or several loads spaced at a distance greater than the effective design ,
of any flange, whether in tension or compression, shall be limited in accordance with Table F.4.2.1-1
F-314
Table F.4.2.1-1
Short spans and wide wings. Maximum allowable ratio between
effective design width (b) and actual width (w)
Relationship Relationship
L wf b L wf b
30 1.00 14 0.82
25 0.96 12 0.78
20 0.91 10 0.73
18 0.89 8 0.67
16 0.86 6 0.55
Where:
L = total span for simple beams; o distance between inflection points for continuous beams; or the
twice the length for cantilever beams. = width of
wf flange projecting beyond web for I-beams and similar sections; or half the distance between webs for box or U
sections.
For I-beam flanges and similar sections stiffened by flanges or lips at the outer edges, wf shall be taken as the sum of the
projection of the flange beyond the web and the width of the flange or lip.
F.4.2.1.2 — Maximum web height-thickness ratio — The ratio ht in bending must not ,
of the souls of the members
exceed the following limits:
(a) For unreinforced webs (b) For ( )max ht 200 =

webs provided with bearing stiffeners that satisfy the requirements of F.4.3.3.7.1: (1) When bearing stiffeners only
are used ( )max ht (2 ) When bearing stiffeners and intermediate ( )max ht 260 =
stiffeners are used

300 =
Where:
h = height of the flat portion of the web, measured along the plane of the web t = thickness of
the web
When the web consists of two or more sheets, the ratio ht must be calculated for each one
F.4.2.2 — EFFECTIVE WIDTHS OF RIGIDIZED ELEMENTS
F.4.2.2.1 — Stiffened members under uniform compression
(a) Determination of resistance
The effective width, will be determined from the following equations: (F.4.2.2-1)
,
bb w= when ÿ ÿ 0.673
bw = ÿ when ÿ > 0.673 (F.4.2.2-2)
Where:
w = flat width as shown in figure F.4.2.2-1 ÿ
= local reduction factor
=( 1 0.22 ÿ min) (F.4.2.2-3)
ÿ is a slenderness factor determined as follows:

ÿ=fF (F.4.2.2-4)
cr
F-315
Where:
f = compressive stress in the element calculated as follows:
For limbs in flexion:
(1) If procedure 1 of Section F.4.3.3.1.1 is used: (a) When the initial

yield is in compression in the member under consideration, fF= and
(b) When the initial yield is in tension, the compressive stress, f in the element
,
under consideration must be determined based on the effective section for the moment My
(moment that causes the initial yield).
(2) If procedure 2 of section F.4.3.3.1.1 is used, f is the stress in the element under consideration for the
moment Mn determined based on the effective section.
(3) If Section F.4.3.3.1.2.1 is used, f is the stress Fc as described under that clause for the determination
of the effective section modulus Sc .
For compression members f is taken equal to Fn , as determined in F.4.3.4.
2 2
Etp ÿÿÿÿ
F crk = (F.4.2.2-5)
2
12 1( ÿ m ) ÿ In
ÿ
Where:
k = plate buckling coefficient
= 4 for stiffened elements supported by a web at each longitudinal edge. Values of k for the different
types of elements are given in the applicable sections .
E = modulus of elasticity of the steel =
t thickness of the stiffened element under uniform compression. =
m
Poisson's ratio of steel
(b) Determination of the State of Service (deflections):
The effective width, bd , used to determine the serviceability of the structure must be calculated as follows:
= when ÿ ÿ 0.673 bw d (F.4.2.2-6)

b w d= ÿ when ÿ > 0.673 (F.4.2.2-7)
Where:
w = flat width =
r reduction coefficient determined by one of the following procedures:
(1) Procedure 1.
A low estimate of the effective width can be obtained from Equations F.4.2.2-3 and F.4.2.2-4 where
df stands for f where df is the compressive stress in the member under consideration.
,
(2) Procedure 2.
For stiffened elements supported by a web at each longitudinal edge, an improved estimate of the
effective width can be obtained by calculating ÿ as follows:
ÿ = 1.00 when ÿ ÿ 0.673
ÿ= 1.358 0.461 l l
ÿ
) when 0.673 < ÿ<ÿ c
(F.4.2.2-8)
ÿ= ((
0.41 0.59 F f 0.22 + y d ÿ
ll ) when ÿ ÿ ÿc (F.4.2.2-9)
ÿ ÿ 1.00 for all cases
F-316
Where:
ÿ= + 0.256 0.328 w t F E
c
)
(F.4.2.2-10)
and
( ÿ is defined by equation F.4.2.2-4, except that df replaces f .
Figure F.4.2.2-1 — Rigidized elements
F.4.2.2.2 — Stiffened members under uniform compression with circular and non-circular voids
For circular holes:
The effective width, b , must be determined as follows:
For 0.50 dw 0ÿ,hand

h
wt 70
ÿ ÿ and the distance between hole centers is ÿ 0.50w and ÿ 3d
b wd = ÿ h
when ÿ ÿ 0.673 (F.4.2.2-11)
( ) 0.22 ( ) 0.8d
h
( 0.085dh )
ÿ
ÿÿ +
ÿ ÿ in 1 ÿÿ
ÿ w
ÿ wl
b = when ÿ > 0.673 (F.4.2.2-12)
l
In all cases b wd ÿ ÿ h
Where:
w = flat width = element
thickness t
dh = diameter of holes ÿ is
defined in section F.4.2.2.1
For non-circular voids — An element stiffened in uniform compression with non-circular voids shall be
assumed to consist of two unstiffened strips of flat width, c , adjacent to the voids (see Figure F.4.2.2-2). The
effective width, b of each unstiffened strip adjacent to the hole shall be determined in accordance with Section
,
F.4.2.2.1(a), except that the plate buckling coefficient, k shall be taken as 0.43 and w as c . These specifications
will be applicable within the following limits: ,
(1) Center-to-center spacing of holes, s 610 ÿ mm ( 24 inches)

(2) Clear distance between the hole and the ends, S 254
end ÿ mm (10 inches)
(3) Height of the gap, d 63.5

h (ÿ mm
2.5 inches)
(4) Length of hole, L 114 ÿ mm ( 4.5
h inches)
(5) Relationship between the height of the hole, dh , and the width between the outer edges, wo ,
d hw 0.5Oÿ
F-317
Alternatively, determination of the effective width, b shall be permitted in the , through tests in
laboratory on short columns in accordance with the AISI S902 test procedure.
Figure F.4.2.2-2 — Stiffened members under uniform compression with non-circular voids
(b) Serviceability (deflections) — The effective width, bd used in the determination of serviceability shall be equal
to b calculated in accordance with procedure 1 of section F.4.2.2.1(b), except that df replaces the value of f
where df is the calculated compressive stress on the element under consideration.
,
F.4.2.2.3 — Webs and other elements stiffened under stress gradient — The following notation is used in this section:
b1 = effective width, dimension defined in Figure F.4.2.2-3 = effective

b2 width, dimension defined in Figure F.4.2.2-3 = effective width b
be determined according to section F.4.2.2.1 with 1f replacing to f and with
k determined as defined in this section.
= width of the fin in compression between outer edges as defined in Figure F.4.2.2-4. bo 1f , 2f = stresses
shown in Figure F.4.2.2-3 calculated on the basis of the effective section. Where
1f and 2f are compressive stresses, ff ÿ . = web 1 2
i height measured between outer edges, as defined in Figure F.4.2.2-4. = plate buckling coefficient ÿ = ff
have k
(absolute value)
21 (F.4.2.2-13)
(1) For webs under stress gradient ( 1f in compression and 2f in tension as shown in Figure F.4.2.2-3(a)),
the effective widths and the plate buckling coefficient shall be calculated as follows:
3
k 4 21 21 = + +ÿ + +ÿ ( )( ) (F.4.2.2-14)
for hb 4 ÿ
and
=
( ) bb3
1 It is
+ ps (F.4.2.2-15)
=
b b2 2 It is
when ÿ > 0.236 (F.4.2.2-16)
b bbwhen
= ÿ ÿ ÿ 0.236 2 e1 (F.4.2.2-17)
Additionally, bb + will
2
not exceed the compression portion of the web calculated on
1
the base of the effective section.
for hb 4 >
and
=
( ) bb3 + ps
1 It is
(F.4.2.2-18)
F-318
= (
(F.4.2.2-19)
)b
1e b1 b +ÿ ÿ 1
(2) For another element stiffened under stress gradient ( 1f and 2f in compression as
shown in Figure F.4.2.2-3(b))
2
k 4 21 21 = + ÿÿ + ÿÿ (F.4.2.2-20)
( ) ( ) ( ) bb3
= (F.4.2.2-21)
1 It is ÿps
b bb =ÿ
(F.4.2.2-22)
2 e1
Figure F.4.2.2-3 — Webs and other stiffened elements under stress gradient
(b) Determination of Service Status (deflections) — The effective widths used in determining the service status
of the member shall be calculated in accordance with Section F.4.2.2.3(a) except that d1 f replaces 1f and 2f ,
f are the calculated stresses f which
and d2the
f and
serviceability
d2 1f and state
2f based on thewhere
is determined.
effective d1
section found with the load for
F-319
Figure F.4.2.2-4 — Dimensions between outer edges of webs and stiffened elements
under stress gradient
F.4.2.2.4 — Webs of C Sections with holes under Stress Gradient — The specifications of this part shall be applicable
within the following limits:
(1) dh 0.7
h ÿ
(2) h t 200 ÿ
(3) Holes centered at half the height of the web
(4) Clear distance between holes ÿ 457 mm
(5) Non-circular holes with corner radius ÿ 2t
(6) Non-circular holes with d 64 ÿ mmh and
L 114 ÿ mm h
(7) Circular holes with diameter ÿ 152 mm (8) d 14

h
> mm
Where:
dh h = height of web hole = height of
the flat portion of the web measured along the plane of the web = thickness of the
t web = length of the
Lh hole in the web
b1 , b2 = effective widths defined by figure F.4.2.2-3
(a) Determination of resistance — When dh 0.38 h < ,

the effective widths, b1 and b2 , will be
determined in accordance with section F.4.2.2.3(a) assuming no web voids
When dh 0.38
h ÿ , the effective width shall be determined in accordance with section F.4.2.3.1(a)
assuming that the compression portion of the web consists of an unstiffened element adjacent to the hole with
ff = as shown in Figure F.4.2.2- 3. 1
(b) Determination of Serviceability (deflections) — Effective widths will be determined in accordance with
Section F.4.2.2.3(b) assuming no web voids.
F.4.2.3 — EFFECTIVE WIDTHS OF UNSTICKENED ELEMENTS
F.4.2.3.1 — Unstiffened members under uniform compression
(a) Determination of strength — The effective width, b will be determined according to the should be
,
section F.4.2.2.1(a), except that the plate buckling coefficient, k 0.43 and w as taken as ,
defined in Figure F.4.2.3-1.
F-320
(b) Determination of Serviceability (Deflections) —The effective width, bd , used in the

determination of the serviceability of the structural member shall be calculated according to procedure 1 of section
F.4.2.2.1(b), except that df replaces f and k 0.43 = .
Figure F.4.2.3-1 — Unstiffened member under uniform compression
F.4.2.3.2 — Unstiffened elements and edge stiffeners under stress gradient — The following notation shall apply to this
section:
b = effective width measured from the stiffened or supported edge, determined according to section F.4.2.2.1(a), with f
equal to 1f and with k and ÿ determined according to the procedure presented in this section. = total width of the
unstiffened element of the
be member in section C, as defined in the figure
F.4.2.3-4
1f , 2f = stresses shown in Figures F.4.2.3-2, F.4.2.3-3, and F.4.2.3-4 calculated based on gross section. Where both 1f and
2f are compressive stresses and it has to be that 1ff ÿ . 2 = total height of the unstiffened member at section
i C, defined according to Figure F.4.2.3-4. = plate buckling coefficient defined in this section or, differently, as defined
have k
in section F.4.2.2.1(a)
t = thickness of the element =
In flat width of the unstiffened element, where wt 60 ÿ
ÿ = ff1=2 (absolute value) ÿ (F.4.2.3-1)
= slenderness factor defined in section F.4.2.2.1(a) with = reduction ff= 1
r factor as defined in this section or otherwise as defined in

section F.4.2.2.1(a)
(a) Determination of strength — The effective width, b , of an unstiffened member under stress
gradient shall be determined in accordance with F.4.2.2.1(a) with f equal to 1f and the plate buckling coefficient, k
determined in accordance with this section, unless otherwise indicated. otherwise. For cases where 1f is in
,
compression and 2f is in tension, ÿ , given in section F.4.2.2.1(a), shall be determined in accordance with this section.
(1) When both 1f and 2f are compressive stresses (figure F.4.2.3-2), the plate buckling coefficient will be
calculated according to any of the following equations:
If the stress decreases towards the unsupported (free) edge (figure F.4.2.3-2(a)):
0.578
k = (F.4.2.3-2)
ÿ + 0.34
If the stress increases towards the unsupported (free) edge (figure F.4.2.3-2(b))
k 0.57 0.21
2 = ÿ ÿ+ ÿ 0.07 (F.4.2.3-3)
F-321
Figure F.4.2.3-2 — Unstiffened members under stress gradient, both longitudinal edges in compression
(2) When 1f is in compression and 2f in tension (figure F.4.2.3-3) the reduction factor and the
plate buckling coefficient will be calculated as follows:
(a) If the unsupported edge is in compression (Figure F.4.2.3-3(a)): + 0.673

ÿ = 1.0 when ÿ ÿ 1( ÿ)
ÿ
0.22 1( ) ÿÿ +ÿ ÿ
1 ÿ
l
ÿ
ÿ= +ÿ( 1 when ÿ > + 0.673 1( ÿ) (F.4.2.3-4)
ÿ)
l
2
= 0.07
k 0.57 0.21
+ ÿ+ ÿ (F.4.2.3-5)
(b) If the supported edge is in compression (Figure F.4.2.3-3(b))
Para ÿ < 1.0

ÿ = 1.0 when ÿ ÿ 0.673
ÿ 0.22
ÿ
ÿ1
ÿÿÿl
ÿ= ÿÿ( 1
ÿ)
cuando ÿ > 0.673 +ÿ ÿ (F.4.2.3-6)
2 k=1.70 5 17.1 + ÿ+ ÿ (F.4.2.3-7)

Para ÿ ÿ 1.0
ÿ = 1.0
To determine the effective width, b of the non-stiffened elements of a member in section C, the
,
use of the following two alternative methods will be allowed, as the case may be:
Alternative 1 for unstiffened C-sections: When the unsupported (free) edge is in compression and
the supported edge is in tension (Figure F.4.2.3-4(a)):
b w= when ÿ ÿ 0.856 bw = ÿ (F.4.2.3-8)

when ÿ > 0.856 (F.4.2.3-9)
F-322
Figure F.4.2.3-3 — Unstiffened members under stress gradient, one longitudinal

edge in compression and the other longitudinal edge in tension
Where:
ÿ 0.925 ÿ = (F.4.2.3-10)
k 0.145
= bh( 1.256
O O
+) (F.4.2.3-11)
0.1 ÿbÿh and
1.0
Alternative 2 for unstiffened C-sections: When the supported edge is in compression and the
unsupported edge is in tension (Figure F.4.2.3-4(b)), the effective width is determined according
to F.4.2 .2.3.
Figure F.4.2.3-4 — Unstiffened members of C-sections under stress

gradient for alternative methods
In the calculation of the module of the effective section Se of numeral F.4.3.3.1.1 or Sc of numeral
F.4.3.3.1.2.1 the extreme fiber in compression in figures F.4.2.3-2(b), F .4.2.3-3(a), and
F.4.2.3-4(a) shall be taken as the edge of the effective section closest to the unsupported (free)
end. In the calculation of the effective section modulus Se of numeral F.4.3.3.1.1, the extreme
fiber in tension in figures F.4.2.3-3(b) and F.4.2.3-4(b) will be taken as the edge of the effective
section closest to the unsupported end.
(b) Determination of Serviceability (deflections) - The effective width, bd , used in the

The serviceability determination shall be calculated in accordance with F.4.2.3.2(a), except that d1 f replace 1f
and 2f , respectively,
F.4.2.3-2,
where
F.4.2.3-3
f are the
and
stresses
F.4.2.3-4,
f and
based
d2 f on
andthe
d2gross
1f and
loaded
2f calculated
aread1foras is shown in Figures
which serviceability is determined.
F.4.2.4 — EFFECTIVE WIDTHS OF ELEMENTS UNDER UNIFORM COMPRESSION WITH A SINGLE FLANGE AS EDGE
STIFFENER — The effective widths of elements under uniform compression with a single edge stiffener shall be calculated in
accordance with (a) by determining the strength and with (b) determination of service status.
Para w t 0.328S ÿ :
aI 0 = (No edge stiffener needed)

b w= (F.4.2.4-1)
F-323
w2 = =
1 2
(see figure F.4.2.4-1) bb (F.4.2.4-2)
ÿ
d d=s s
(F.4.2.4-3)
Para w t 0.328S > :
b b2
=R
1 )( ) (see
I figure F.4.2.4-1) (F.4.2.4-4)
b bb( 2=1ÿ (see figure F.4.2.4-1) ) (F.4.2.4-5)
dwith
dR=
sI ÿ ( (F.4.2.4-6)
Where:
S =1.28 E f (F.4.2.4-7)
w = flat dimension defined in Figure F.4.2.4-1

t = thickness of the section aI
= adequate moment of Inertia of the stiffener such that each component element is
behave as a rigid element. ÿ ÿÿ ÿ wt wt 4 t 115 ÿÿ +
3
= 5
4 399t 0.328 (F.4.2.4-8)
ÿ ÿÿS ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿ S
= effective design width

b b1 , b2 = portions of the effective design width as defined in Figure F.4.2.4-1 ds = reduced effective
width of the stiffener as defined in Figure F.4.2.4-1, and used in he
calculation of all properties of the effective section
ÿ
ds
= effective width of the stiffener calculated according to section F.4.2.3.2 (see figure
F.4.2.4-1)
( =
) RI inII 1 ÿ (F.4.2.4-9)
Where:
I s
= moment of inertia of the complete section of the stiffener around its own centroidal axis parallel to the element
to be stiffened. For edge stiffeners, the rounded corner between the stiffener and the element to be stiffened
will not be considered as part of the stiffener.
3 2 dt
sen 12 ÿ ) (F.4.2.4-10)
=(
For the definition of the other variables, refer to figure F.4.2.4-1.
The effective width, b in equations F.4.2.4-4 and F.4.2.4-5 shall be calculated according to the section as defined
,
F.4.2.2.1 with the plate buckling coefficient, k below: in table F.4.2.4-1 a ,
Tabla F.4.2.4-1
Determination of the plate buckling coefficient (k)
140 O 40 ÿÿÿ O
)
Single edge stiffening flange (
D w 0.25 ÿ 0.25 D w 0.80 < <
ÿ 5D ÿ
( )n R
I 0.43 4
3.57 R 0.43 4 + ÿ 4.82 ÿ ÿ
+ ÿ
( )n I
ÿ In ÿÿ
F-324
Where:
ÿ wt 1 ÿ
ÿn
= 0.582
ÿÿ ÿ (F.4.2.4-11)
ÿ 4S 3
ÿ
Figure F.4.2.4-1 — Elements with simple edge-stiffening flange (lip)
(b) Determination of Serviceability (deflections) — The effective width, bd , used in the

service status determination shall be calculated in accordance with section F.4.2.4(a) except that df
replaces f which where df is the calculated compressive stress in the effective section with load for
,
determines the service state.
F.4.2.5 — EFFECTIVE WIDTHS OF ELEMENTS WITH SINGLE OR MULTIPLE INTERMEDIATE STIFFNESS OR EDGE
ELEMENTS WITH INTERMEDIATE STIFFNESS
F.4.2.5.1 — Effective widths of members under uniform compression with single or multiple intermediate stiffeners
— The following notation is used in this section:
At = gross area of the element, including stiffeners.

As = gross area of the stiffener =
be effective width of the element, located at the centroid of the element including stiffeners, see
figure F.4.2.5-2
= total flat width of the stiffened element, see figure F.4.2.5-1 = flat width
will bp of the largest sub-element, see figure F.4.2.5-1
c
f = horizontal distance from the edge of the element to the axis(es) of the stiffener(s),
see figure F.4.2.5-1
Fcr = elastic buckling stress of the plate = uniform
compressive stress acting on the flat element f
F-325
h = width of elements adjacent to stiffened elements (example. The height of the web in a hat section with multiple
intermediate stiffeners in the compression flange is equal to h if the adjacent elements have different widths, use
the smallest one)
I sp = moment of inertia of the stiffener about the axis of the planar portion of the element. The radius that
connects to the stiffener with the flat part can be included. = plate
k buckling coefficient of the element = plate coefficient for
kd distortional buckling
kloc = plate coefficient for local buckling of the sub-element
Lbr = unsupported length between bracing points or other constraints, which restrict distortional buckling of the element
R = modification factor for the distortional coefficient of plate buckling

n = number of stiffeners in the element = thickness
t of the element = index for
the stiffener "i"
il = slenderness factor =
r reduction factor
The effective width will be determined as follows:
A g ÿ
b It is ÿ=ÿ (F.4.2.5-1)
t
ÿÿ ÿÿ
ÿ = 1 when ÿ ÿ 0.673
) ÿ =1 0.22
ÿ ÿÿ ( when ÿ > 0.673 (F.4.2.5-2)
Where:
f
ÿ= (F.4.2.5-3)
F cr
Where:
2
2
p E ÿ ÿtÿ ÿ
Fcrk = (F.4.2.5-4)
2
12 (1 ÿ ÿ ÿ )ÿ b O
The plate buckling coefficient, k according ,

will be determined from the minimum between Rkd and kloc , determined from
to section F.4.2.5.1.1 or F.4.2.5.1.2, as appropriate.
k = the minimum value between Rkd and kloc (F.4.2.5-5)
R 2 = when bh1 O
<
11 bh 1 ÿO when bh1
ÿ
R = O
ÿ (F.4.2.5-6)
5 2
F.4.2.5.1.1 — Specific Case: “n” equally spaced identical stiffeners — For elements under uniform compression
with identical, multiple, and equally spaced stiffeners, the plate buckling coefficients and effective widths shall be
a) Determination of resistance
k 4n 1 =( + loc)2 (F.4.2.5-7)
2
2
( 1 )
( +b +c + 1n )
kd = 2 (F.4.2.5-8)
b +( d + 1( n1 ))
F-326
Where:
14
( ÿ=1+ÿ
n1+ ( )) (F.4.2.5-9)
Where:
10.92 I sp
c= 3
(F.4.2.5-10)
b Ot
A s
ÿ= (F.4.2.5-11)
bt O
If L br < ÿ bit Oshall be permitted to use the relation Lbbo instead of ÿ to account for the increase in
capacity due to bracing.
b) Determination of the State of service — The effective width, bd , used in the

Serviceability determination shall be calculated in accordance with F.4.2.5.1.1(a), except that df
replaces f where df is the calculated compressive stress on the member under consideration, based
,
on the effective section for the load at which the service state is determined.
F.4.2.5.1.2 — General Case: Arbitrary number, location, and size stiffeners — For members stiffened in
uniform compression with multiple stiffeners of arbitrary size, location, and number, the plate buckling coefficients
and effective widths shall be calculated as follows :
a) Determination of resistance
k 4b b=loc (
on
(F.4.2.5-12)
)2
2
n
(
1 + b + )2
2
ÿ = co
iii 1
kd = (F.4.2.5-13)
n
2
b + (1 2 ÿ i =1
see
ii
)
Where:
14
ÿ ÿ ÿn ÿ ÿ ÿ= ÿÿ + 1
2
ii
(F.4.2.5-14)
ÿ ÿ i =1
Where:
10.92 I( i
) sp
ÿ=i 3
(F.4.2.5-15)
b Ot
ÿ ci ÿ
ÿ=i ÿÿ ÿ2 ÿsen
ÿ (F.4.2.5-16)
b O
( A i) s
d i= (F.4.2.5-17)
b Ot
If L br < ÿ itb will

O be allowed to use the relation L b bo instead of ÿ to account for the increase in
capacity due to bracing.
F-327
Figure F.4.2.5-1 — Plate widths (flat sections) and location of stiffeners
Figure F.4.2.5-2 — Locations of effective widths
b) Determination of Serviceability (deflections) — The effective width, bd , used

in determining serviceability shall be calculated in accordance with F.4.2.5.1.2(a), except that df replaces f
where df is the calculated compressive stress on the element under consideration, based on the effective
,
section for the load at which the serviceability is determined.
F.4.2.5.2 — Edge elements with intermediate stiffeners
(a) Determination of Strength — For Edge Stiffened Elements with Stiffeners

intermediate, the effective width, be , will be determined as follows:
If bt 0.328
O
S> , the element is fully effective and it is not required to reduce the element by
local buckling
Si btO0.328 S > , then the plate buckling coefficient, k , shall be determined from the
specifications in section F.4.2.4, but with bo instead of w in all numerical expressions
If the value k ,
calculated from section F.4.2.4, is less than 4.0 ( ) k 4 < , the intermediate
stiffener(s) shall be ignored and the specifications in section F.4.2.4 shall be followed for the calculation of the
effective width.
If the value k ,
calculated from section F.4.2.4, is equal to 4.0 ( ) k 4 = edge stiffened the effective width of the
,
element shall be calculated according to the specifications of section F.4.2.5.1, with the following exception: R
calculated according to with section
F.4.2.5.1 is less than or equal to 1
Where:
bo = Total flat width of the stiffened edge element
The other variables are defined in section F.4.2.4 and F.4.2.5.1
(b) Determination of Serviceability (Deflections) —The effective width, bd , used in the

service status determination shall be calculated in accordance with section F.4.2.5.2(a), except
F-328
which df replaces f where df is the calculated compressive stress on the element under consideration, based
,
on the effective section for the load at which the serviceability state is determined.
F.4.3 — MEMBERS
F.4.3.1 — SECTION PROPERTIES — The section properties (transverse area, moment of inertia, section modulus, radius of gyration,
etc.) will be determined according to conventional structural design methods. These properties shall be based on the full cross
sections of the structural members (or net sections where their use is applicable) except where the use of a reduced cross section or
effective design width is required.
F.4.3.2 — MEMBERS IN TENSION — For axially loaded members in tension, the nominal tensile strength, Tn , will be the lowest
value obtainedin accordance with the limit states of a), b) or c).
a) For yield in the gross section:

T nOF= gy (F.4.3.2-1)
ÿ t = 0.90
Where:
Tn = nominal strength of the member in tension Ag = gross

or complete cross-sectional area Fy = design yield stress as
defined in section F.4.1.6.1
b) For break in the net section far from the connection:

T OFF
= (F.4.3.2-2)
n no
ÿ t = 0.75
Where:
An = net cross-sectional area Fu = tensile strength

as specified in section F.4.1.2.1 or F.4.1.2.3.2
c) For net section rupture at the connection — The design resistance in tension shall also be limited by Sections F.4.5.2.7,
F.4.5.3, and F.4.5.5 for members in tension when connections are used. welded, bolted and bolted connections.
F.4.3.3 — MEMBERS IN FLEXURE
F.4.3.3.1 — Flexure — The nominal flexural strength, Mn , sections will be the value calculated according to the
F.4.3.3.1.1, F.4.3.3.1.2, F.4.3.3.1.3, F.4.3.3.1.4, F .4.4.6.1.1, F.4.4.6.1.2, and F.4.4.6.2.1, as applicable.
For laterally unrestrained flexural members subject to bending and torsional loading, such as loads that do not pass through
the center of shear of the cross section, Section F.4.3.3.6 shall apply.
F.4.3.3.1.1 — Nominal resistance of the section — The nominal resistance to flexure, Mn , will be calculated, with
either from the base of the initiation point of yield in the effective section (Procedure 1) or on the basis of inelastic
reserve capacity (Procedure 2), as applicable.
For sections with stiffened or partially stiffened compression flanges: ÿ = 0.95 b
F-329
For sections with unstiffened compression flanges: ÿ = 0.90 b
a) Procedure 1 — Based on initiation of creep — The nominal resistance a , Mn , for the effective
flexion yield moment shall be calculated according to equation F.4.3.3-1, as follows:
M SF y=
n It is
(F.4.3.3-1)
Where:
Se = elastic modulus of the effective section, calculated with respect to the extreme fiber in
compression or tension when reaching Fy
Fy = design yield stress determined in section F.4.1.6.1
b) Procedure 2 — Based on the inelastic reserve capacity. It is allowed to use the inelastic reserve
capacity in bending when the following conditions are met:
(1) The member is not subject to torsion or to lateral, torsional, or flexo-torsional buckling.
(2) The effect of cold forming work is not included in the determination of the yield stress Fy
(3) The relationship between the height of the compression portion of the web and its thickness does not
exceeds ÿ1
(4) The cutting force does not exceed 0.6F times the area of the web (the area is equal to ht
and
for rigidized elements or wt for non-rigidized elements)

(5) The angle between any web and the vertical does not exceed 30 degrees.
The nominal bending resistance, Mn , must not exceed set 1.25SF of ey
according to procedure 1 of section F.4.3.3.1.1(a) nor the moment that causes the maximum
compression strain equal to C and y y (the maximum strain is not limited for tension)
Where:
h = flat height of the web =
thickness of the element base steel t = yield
strain = FE
and
and and
w = flat width of the element

E = modulus of elasticity
Cy = compression strain factor determined as follows:
(a) Stiffened compression members without intermediate stiffeners
C 3.0 = wt ÿ ÿ1
when
and
wt ÿÿÿ
= ÿ32ÿ
1
C
and
ÿÿ ÿ cuando ÿ1 < <ÿ wt 2 ÿ (F.4.3.3-2)
ÿÿÿ21
C 1.0 = wt ÿ ÿ2
when
and
Where:
1.11
ÿ=1 (F.4.3.3-3)
FE
and
1.28
ÿ= 2
(F.4.3.3-4)
FE
and
F-330
(b) Unstiffened compression members
For unstiffened compression members, Cy , shall be calculated as follows:
(i) Unstiffened compression members under stress gradient causing compression

at one longitudinal edge and tension at the other longitudinal edge: C 3.0 =
when ÿ ÿ ÿ3
and
C 32ÿ=ÿÿ
ÿ ÿÿÿ )( )ÿÿ (F.4.3.3-5)
and
ÿ( ÿ 3 43
cuando ÿ3 <ÿ<ÿ 4
C 1.0when
= ÿ ÿ ÿ4
and
Donde:
ÿ 3= 0.43
0.673 1 ÿ
4
( ) ÿ= + (F.4.3.3-6)
p = Value defined in section F.4.2.3.2
(ii) Unstiffened compression members under stress gradient that

cause compression on both longitudinal edges
C1 =
and
(iii) Unstiffened members under uniform compression:

C 1 y=
(c) Multi-stiffened compression members and compression members with edge

stiffeners:
C 1 y=
When applicable, the effective design widths will be used in the calculation of the section
properties. Mn must be calculated considering stress equilibrium, assuming an elasto-
plastic stress-strain curve, which is the same for tension and compression, small strains,
and that the sections remain flat during bending. The effect of combined web flexing
and creasing shall be reviewed in accordance with the specifications in Section F.4.3.3.5.
F.4.3.3.1.2 — Resistance to Lateral Torsional Buckling — The specifications of this section shall apply to
members with open sections as defined in section F.4.3.3.1.2.1 or with closed box sections as defined in
section F.4.3.3.1.2.2. The resistance factor in these sections will be:
ÿ b= 0.90
F.4.3.3.1.2.1 — Resistance to Torsional Lateral Buckling of Open Section Members — The

specifications in this section apply to flexural members of I, Z, C sections and other sections of simple
symmetry (multi-web decks are not included). , U, closed box members, and curved or arched
members) subject to torsional lateral buckling. The specifications in this section do not apply to
laterally unbraced compression flanges of laterally stable sections. Profiles C and Z in which the
flange in tension is attached to an enclosure board shall be calculated according to section F.4.4.6.1.1.
F-331
For laterally unbraced segments of single, double, and point symmetric sections, subject to lateral
torsional buckling, the nominal flexural resistance Mn shall be calculated as follows:
M SF =
n cc (F.4.3.3-7)
Where:
Sc = Elastic modulus of the effective section calculated with respect to the extreme compression
fiber subjected to stress Fc .
Fc is determined as follows:
ParaF ÿ 2.78F It is
and
The member segment is not subject to lateral torsional buckling for moments less than or equal to
My . The design resistance to flexion will be determined according to section F.4.3.3.1.1(a)
For 2.78FF 0.56F >> It is

yy
10 ÿ 10F ÿ
=
F cF1 ÿÿ
and
ÿ
(F.4.3.3-8)
36F
and
9
ÿ It is
ÿ
For F 0.56F ÿ It is
and
F cF= It is
(F.4.3.3-9)
Where:
Fy = design yield stress determined in accordance with Section F.4.1.6.1 Fe = elastic critical
lateral torsional buckling stress calculated in accordance with (a) or (b),
next:
(a) For sections of single, double and point symmetry
(i) For bending about the axis of symmetry:
for sections with single and double symmetry

CrA
be
F It is
= s s ey
t
(F.4.3.3-10)
Sf
For point symmetry sections

CrA
be
F It is
= s s ey
t
(F.4.3.3-11)
2S f
Where:
12.5 M max
C b
= (F.4.3.3-12)
2.5M 3M
max4M 3M +++
AC B
Where:
Mmax = absolute value of the maximum moment in the segment not
braced
MA = absolute value of the moment in the quarter of the unbraced segment
F-332
MB = absolute value of the moment at the center of the segment not

braced
MC = absolute value of the moment at three-quarters of the unbraced segment can
be conservatively
Cb taken equal to unity for all cases. For cantilevers where the free end
is not braced, Cb , shall be taken equal to unity.
or = polar radius of gyration of the cross section around the

cutting center
= 222
rrx + + xy o (F.4.3.3-13)
Where:
xr , yr = radii of gyration of the cross section about the principal centroidal axes
= distance from the center
x
o
of shear to the centroid, measure a is taken as negative.
along the principal x axis ,
A = complete unreduced cross-sectional area =

Sf elastic modulus of the complete unreduced section with respect to
to extreme fiber in compression
2
Pi AND
ÿ = ey (F.4.3.3-14)
2
( KL r )
and and and
Where:
E = modulus of elasticity of steel
Ky = effective length factor for bending about the y- axis

Ly = unbraced length of the member for bending about the
y axis
ÿ ÿ
1 Pi2 EC
GJ + In
ÿ= t (F.4.3.3-15)
With2 ( at )
2
O ÿÿÿ tt ÿÿÿ
Where:
G = shear modulus
J = Saint-Venant torsion constant of the cross section
Cw = constant of torsional warping of the cross section
Kt = effective length factor for torsion
Lt = unbraced length of torsion member
For sections of simple symmetry, the x axis is the axis of symmetry oriented in
such a way that the center of shear has an x coordinate.
negative.
For point symmetry sections, such as Z sections, the x- axis

The centroidal axis must be perpendicular to the web.
Alternatively, Fe can be calculated using the equation given in (b) for double
symmetric I sections, single symmetric C sections, or point symmetric Z sections.
F-333
(ii) For sections of simple symmetry with bending about the centroidal axis
perpendicular to the axis of symmetry:
THAT
F =
s
ÿ exÿ 2 2
+ ÿÿ t o( ex (F.4.3.3-16)
It is jC +jr ÿÿ s
C TFSf ÿ ) ÿÿ
C 1= + for moment producing compression on center side

s
cut, measured from the centroid

C 1for
= ÿmoment producing tension on the side of the center of
s
cut, measured from the centroid
2
Pi AND
ÿ = ex (F.4.3.3-17)
2
( KLxxrx )
Where:
Kx = effective length factor for bending about the x axis
Lx = unbraced length of the member for bending about the
x- axis
C TF0.6=0.4
ÿ (M M 2 1
) (F.4.3.3-18)
Where:
M1 is the smallest moment and M2 is the largest moment at the ends of the
unbraced length in the bending plane, and where M M1 2
(end moment ratio) is positive when M1 and M2
have the same sign (double curvature deflection) and negative when opposite
signs (single curvature deflection) When the bending moment at any point within
the unbraced length is greater than the moments at both ends of this length, CTF
will be taken equal to unity.
1 ÿ ÿ
3 2
= (F.4.3.3-19)
ÿ x dA xy dAÿx + ÿ
ÿ
j ÿÿ O
2I
ÿ
already A
(b) For I sections, C sections of simple symmetry, or Z sections subjected to down bending
about the centroidal axis perpendicular to the web (x axis), the use of the following equations
is allowed, for the calculation of Fe, instead of the presented in subparagraph a):
For I sections with double symmetry and C sections with single symmetry
2
C bEdI
p
yc
F It is
=
2
(F.4.3.3-20)
Sf KL
(
yy
)
For Z sections with point symmetry

2
C bEdI
p
yc
F It is
=
2
(F.4.3.3-21)
2S fKL
(
yy
)
Where:
d = height of the section
F-334
I yc
= moment of inertia of the compression portion of the section, about the centroidal axis parallel to the
web, using the full unreduced section.
The other terms are defined in (a)
F.4.3.3.1.2.2 — Resistance to torsional lateral buckling of closed box section members — For closed box
members, the nominal flexural resistance, Mn , shall be determined as follows: with
If the laterally unbraced length of the member is less than or equal to Lu , the resistance
flexural strength shall be determined using Section F.4.3.3.1.1.
Lu must be calculated as follows:
0.36C b
p
L in = EGG (F.4.3.3-22)
FS and
yf
Variables are defined in section F.4.3.3.1.2.1.
If the laterally unbraced length of a member is greater than Lu , calculated in the above equation, the as it
nominal flexural strength shall be determined in accordance with Section F.4.3.3.1.2.1, where the critical torsional
lateral buckling stress, Fe , calculate as follows: with
C b
p
F = EGG
It is
(F.4.3.3-23)
KLS and
the drink
Where:
J = torsional constant of the box section and I = moment
of inertia of the complete unreduced section about its centroidal axis parallel to the web.
The other variables are defined in section F.4.3.3.1.2.1.
F.4.3.3.1.3 — Flexural strength of closed cylindrical tubular section members — For closed cylindrical tubular section
members that have an outside diameter to wall thickness ratio, D t 0.441EF , the nominal flexural strength Mn shall be calculated.
according to andno greater than
, ,
equation F.4.3.3-24.
M FS =
n cf (F.4.3.3-24)
ÿ b= 0.95
For D t 0.0714 EF ÿ
and
Fc =
1.25 Fy (F.4.3.3-25)
For 0.0714 E F D t 0.318 E F < ÿ

yy
ÿ ÿ IF ÿ ÿ
= 0.020 +
F 0.970
and
F
c (F.4.3.3-26)
ÿ
Dt and
ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿÿ ÿ
For 0.318 E F D t 0.441 E F < ÿ

yy
F =
0.328E Dt
c
( ) (F.4.3.3-27)
F-335
Where:
D = external diameter of the cylindrical tube
t = thickness
Fc = critical bending buckling stress
Sf = elastic modulus of the complete unreduced cross section with respect to the extreme fiber in compression.
The other variables are defined in section F.4.3.3.1.2.1
F.4.3.3.1.4 — Resistance to distortional buckling — The specifications of this numeral will apply to sections I,
Z, C and other members of open cross section that use compression flanges with edge stiffeners, with the exception
of members that comply with the criteria of section F.4.4.6.1.1, F.4.4.6.1.2 when using the R factor of equation
F.4.4.6-4, or section F.4.4.6.2.1. The nominal flexural resistance will be calculated according to equations F.4.3.3-28
or
F.4.3.3-29. .
ÿ b= 0.90
Para ÿ ÿ 0.673
d
M M y= (F.4.3.3-28)
n
Para ÿ > d0.673

0.5
ÿ 0.5
ÿ
ÿÿ ÿM M ÿ
M n1 0.22 M M ÿ ÿÿcrdÿ
=ÿ ÿ ÿ crd
M (F.4.3.3-29)
and
ÿ
ÿ ÿÿ ÿy y ÿ
Where:
ÿ=d (F.4.3.3-30)
M My crd
M SF=fy y y (F.4.3.3-31)
Where:
Sfy = elastic modulus of the complete unreduced section with respect to the extreme fiber in the first
creep
M crd
SF =f d (F.4.3.3-32)
Where:
Sf = elastic modulus of the complete unreduced section with respect to the extreme fiber in
compression
Fd = distortional elastic buckling stress calculated in accordance with any of Sections F.4.3.3.1.4(a), (b) or (c)
(a) Simplified Provisions for Unrestrained C and Z Sections with Single Stiffening Flange — For C
and Z sections that do not have rotational restraints in the compression flange and are within the
dimensional limits given in this section, the use of the flange is permitted. Equation F.4.3.3-33 for a
conservative predictive calculation of the distortional buckling stress, Fd . Refer to Section
F.4.3.3.1.4(b) or F.4.3.3.1.4(c) for alternate arrangements and for members outside the dimensional
limits of this section.
The following dimensional limits will apply:
(1) 50 ÿhÿt O200
F-336
(2) 25 ÿbÿ t O100

(3) 6.25 D
ÿ t 50 <
O O
(4) 45 90 ÿÿ<
(5) 2hb
ÿ ÿ8
and
(6) 0.04 ÿDÿÿsen b 0.5O
Where:
ho = height between outer web edges as defined in Figure F.4.2.2-4 t
= thickness of base metal bo
= width of outer edges of flange as defined in figure F.4.2.2-4 D = dimension between outer
edges of flange as defined in figure
F.4.2.4-1
i = flange angle as defined in Figure F.4.2.4-1
The distortional buckling stress, Fd , shall be calculated as follows:

2
2
p E ÿ ÿt ÿ ÿ
F dk = b d (F.4.3.3-33)
2
12 1
( bO
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ)
Donde:
b = a value that takes into account the moment gradient which,
conservatively, it can be taken equal to 1.0 (F.4.3.3-34)
0.7 0.7
= 1.0 1ÿ+
0.4 L L m( 12 )( 1 M M 1.3
ÿ
) ÿ
Where:
L = minimum value between Lcr and Lm
Where:
0.6
ÿ ÿb iD sen
=
L 1.2h O ÿ 10h
cr O
ÿÿÿÿ
ht O (F.4.3.3-35)
O
Lm = distance between points of restraint against distortional buckling (for

continuously restricted members LL = ) m cr
M1 and M2 = are the smallest and largest value of the moment at the ends, respectively, in the
unbraced segment ( ) Lm of the beam; M M1 2 ; it is negative when moments
cause double curvature and positive when bending causes single curvature.
0.7
ÿ b D sen ÿi
k 0.5 0.6 =ÿ d O ÿ 8.0
ht
(F.4.3.3-36)
ÿÿ O ÿÿ
AND
= modulus of elasticity =
m Poisson's ratio
(b) Provisions for C and Z sections or any open section with a stiffened compression flange
extending to one side of the web where the stiffener is a simple flange or a complex edge
stiffener—These provisions are permitted to apply to any section with a single web and single
flange stiffened at the edge in compression, including those that meet the geometrical limits of section
F.4.3.3.1.4(a). The distortional buckling stress, Fd , shall be calculated according to equation
F.4.3.3-37 as follows:
F-337
kkfffefk+ + we
Fd =b (F.4.3.3-37)
k k
ÿ fg ÿ
+
wg
Donde:
b = a value that takes into account the moment gradient which, conservatively, can be
taken equal to 1.0
= 0.7 0.7
1.0 1 0.4 L L ÿ+( )( 1 M M 1.3 ÿ
ÿ
) (F.4.3.3-38)
m 12
Where:
L= minimum value between Lcr and Lm
Where:
14
4 2
ÿ 4h1
p.m ÿ ( ) I
2 44 ÿ
O ÿÿ ÿ 2 xyf ÿ +ÿ ÿ xf o 2
ÿ
p hO
L cr =
3
( xhwf o x)
Ixh C x
( ) ÿ + ÿ
(F.4.3.3-39)
t I 720
ÿÿ
yf ÿ
ÿ ÿ
Where:
ho = height between external web edges as defined in Figure F.4.2.2-4
m = Poisson's ratio
t = thickness of the base steel
I xf = moment of inertia of the flange around the x- axis
x
o
= distance in x from the flange-web junction to the centroid of the flange
hx = distance in x from the centroid of the fin to the center of shear of the
fin
Cwf = fin warp torsion constant
I
xyf = product of the moment of inertia of the fin
I
yf = moment of inertia of the fin about the y- axis
In the previous equations I I , Cwf , or

x and hx are the properties of the
xf I , yf , xyf
compression flange plus edge stiffener around an xy ÿ coordinate system

located at the centroid of the fin, with the positive x- axis and positive y- axis measured to the
right and down of the centroid, respectively.
Lm = distance between points of restraint against distortional buckling (for continuously

restrained members LL =
m cr )
M1 and M2 = are the smallest and largest value of the moment at the ends, respectively, in the
unbraced segment (Lm ) of the beam; M M1 2 is negative when moments cause
double curvature) and positive when bending causes single curvature.
kffe = elastic rotational stiffness provided by the flange to the flange-web junction
4 2 2
ÿÿPiÿÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ( 2 I xyf 2 ÿ Pi

EI xh EC
ÿ+ ÿExf) xh
o wf f (
o xÿ +
) GJ (F.4.3.3-40)
xTHE
ÿÿ ÿÿ IT
ÿÿ
yf
ÿÿ
Where:
G = cutting module
Jf = Saint-Venant torsion constant of the flange in compression, plus the edge stiffener
around an xy ÿ coordinate system located at the centroid of the flange, with the
positive x- axis and positive y- axis measured to the right and to the left below the
centroid, respectively.
F-338
kÿwe = rotational elastic stiffness provided by the web to the fin-web connection ÿ 3 ÿ
2
19h 43
And3 Pi
ÿ ÿÿ ÿÿPi h
O O
+ ÿ + ÿÿ ÿÿ (F.4.3.3-41)
2 12( 1 ÿ m )
ÿÿ O
ÿÿ ÿÿ h L 60 L 240
kÿ = rotational stiffness provided by a restraint element (brace, panel, cladding board) to the flange-
web junction of a member (zero if the compression flange is unrestrained)
kÿfg = rotational geometric stiffness (divided by the force Fd ) demanded by the flange from the
flange-web junction ÿ ÿ ( ÿ ÿ
2 ÿ
I ÿÿ ÿÿI xyf )
2
Pi
ÿÿÿÿ 2 ÿÿ
xyf ÿÿ 2 2
ÿÿÿ Axh 2y xhx hy II
ÿ
)
ÿ
( ÿ ++ + + ÿ ÿ (F.4.3.3-42)
ÿ LI I
ÿ f O oh x O xf yf
ÿ
ÿÿ yf yf ÿÿ ÿÿÿ ÿÿ
Where:
Af = cross-sectional area of the flange in compression plus edge stiffener around an xy ÿ coordinate
system located at the centroid of the flange, with the positive x- axis and positive y- axis
measured to the right and to the left. below the centroid, respectively.
and
O
= distance in y from the flange-web junction to the centroid of the flange
kÿwg = rotational geometric stiffness (divided by the stress Fd ) demanded by the web from the web-
flange connection ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ
2 2
ÿ
ÿ ÿL ÿ h ÿÿ
ÿÿ ÿÿÿÿ
) 45 360 1 ÿÿ + 62160 ÿ
( ÿÿ
ÿÿ
web
2 +ÿ+
448 O
53(3+1ÿÿ web
) p.m
4
hOt ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ Lÿ
2
h ÿ
O
(F.4.3.3-43)
13 440 ÿÿL ÿÿ
2
L
4
p+4 2 p 28 +hÿÿ ÿÿ 420

ÿÿ ÿÿh
ÿ O O ÿ
Where:
the opposite
web ( ) fff ÿ=ÿ 1 2 1 , stress gradient in the web, where 1f and 2f are the stresses in
ends of the web, , compression is positive,
f f > 1 2 tension is negative, and the stresses are calculated on the
basis of the gross section (eg: for pure symmetric bending, ff = ÿ 1 2 , web
ÿ=2)
(c) Rational analysis of elastic buckling - The use of a rational elastic analysis that considers distortional
buckling shall be permitted instead of the expressions given in section F.4.3.3.1.4(a) or (b). The
resistance factor of section F.4.3.3.1.4 will apply.
F.4.3.3.2 — Shear
F.4.3.3.2.1 — Shear resistance of webs without holes — The nominal shear resistance, Vn , shall be calculated
according to equation F.4.3.3-44.
Wn OF
=
wv (F.4.3.3-44)
ÿ in= 0.95
(a) Para ht Ek ÿF you
F in = y
0.60F (F.4.3.3-45)
(b) Para Ek F htyou

1.51 Ek F < ÿ you
F-339
0.60 Ek F
you
F in = (F.4.3.3-46)
( ht )
(c) Para ht 1.51

> Ek F
you
2
Pi I in
F in = (F.4.3.3-47a)
)(h)t
2
2 12
(
1ÿm
= 0.904Ek inh t( )2
(F.4.3.3-47b)
Where:
Vn = nominal shear resistance
Aw = area of web element = ht (F.4.3.3-48)
Where:
h = height of the flat portion of the web measured along its plane =
t thickness of the web
Fv = nominal cutting effort
E = modulus of elasticity of steel kv = shear
buckling coefficient calculated according to 1 or 2 as follows:
(1) For unreinforced webs, k 5.34 (2)

in
= For
webs with transverse stiffeners meeting the requirements of Section F.4.3.3.7
When ah 1.0 ÿ
5.34
=+
k in4.00 2
(F.4.3.3-49)
( ah )
When ah 1.0 >

4.00
=+
k in5.34 2
(F.4.3.3-50)
( ah )
Where:
a = length of the cut panel for the unreinforced web element
= free distance between transverse stiffeners of web elements
reinforced
Fy = design yield stress determined in accordance with section
F.4.1.6.1
m
= Poisson's ratio = 0.3
When the web consists of two or more shells, each shell shall be considered as a
separate element supporting its corresponding part of shear.
F.4.3.3.2.2 — Shear resistance of C section webs with holes — The provisions of this section shall be
applicable within the following limits:
(1) dhh 0.7 ÿ

(2) h t 200 ÿ
(3) Holes centered in the middle of the web height (4)
Clear distance between holes ÿ 457 mm (5)
Corner radius ÿ 2t for non-circular holes. (6) d 64 ÿ mm for
non-circular
h holes ÿ mm
h and L 114
F-340
(7) Diameter ÿ 152 mm for circular holes (8) d 14

h
> mm
Where:
dh = height of the hole in the web h
= height the flat portion of the web measured along its plane = thickness of
t the web
Lh = length of the hole in the web
For webs of C sections with holes, the shear resistance shall be calculated in accordance with section
F.4.3.3.2.1, multiplied by the reduction factor, qs , as defined in this subsection.
When ct 54 ÿ
=
q 1.0 s
When 5 ct 54 ÿ <
= c 54t ( ) qs (F.4.3.3-51)
Where:
c h 2 d 2.83 h
=ÿ
for circular openings (F.4.3.3-52)
c h2 d 2=ÿ
h for non-circular holes (F.4.3.3-53)
F.4.3.3.3 — Combined bending and shearing
F.4.3.3.3.1 — Design Method with Coefficients of Load and Resistance (DCCR) — For beams in combined flexure
and shear, the required flexural resistance M , and the required shear resistance, V
they must not exceed ÿb M
,
ÿv n V
n ,yrespectively.
For beams with unreinforced webs, the required flexural strength M , and the required shear strength, V
, They must also satisfy the following interaction equation:
2 2
ÿ ÿÿMÿ
In ÿI ÿÿ ÿ ÿ ÿÿ
+ ÿ ÿ 1.0 (F.4.3.3-54)
Phi am a stranger Phi v nIN
For beams with transverse stiffeners in the web, when MM 0.5 and VV 0.7 (ÿ b nxo ) >
(ÿ v n ) > ,
M and V must also satisfy the following interaction equation:
ÿ ÿÿ ÿ M V ÿ ÿÿ ÿ 0.6 ÿ
+ 1.3 (F.4.3.3-55)
ÿÿamIÿa stranger
ÿ Phi Phi v
IN
n
Where:
Mn = nominal resistance when only bending is considered M = required
bending resistance. M Mu = ÿ = resistance factor for
bending
b (see section F.4.3.3.1.1)
Mnxo = nominal flexural resistance (resistance to moment) about the centroidal axis x
determined in accordance with section F.4.3.3.1.1
V = required shear resistance V Vu =
ÿ in= resistance factor for shear (see section F.4.3.3.2)
Vn = nominal resistance when only shear is considered
F-341
F.4.3.3.4 — Web wrinkling
F.4.3.3.4.1 — Web wrinkling resistance without holes — The nominal web wrinkling resistance, Pn , shall
be determined according to equation F.4.3.3-56 or F.4.3.3-57, depending on be applicable. The resistance
factors in tables F.4.3.3-1 to F.4.3.3-5 will be used for the determination of the design resistance.
2
ÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ
R Nh ÿÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ
P Ct= F sen 1 C ny Rÿ ÿÿÿ 1 +C 1C
ÿ
(F.4.3.3-56)
Nh
ÿÿ ÿÿ t tt ÿ
Where:
Pn = nominal wrinkling resistance of the web C =
coefficient from table F.4.3.3-1, F.4.3.3-2, F.4.3.3-3, F.4.3.3-4, or F .4.3.3-5 = web
t thickness
Fy = design yield stress in accordance with section F.4.1.6.1
i = angle between the plane of the web and the plane of the support surface, 45 O 90 ÿÿÿ O
CR = coefficient of internal bending radius taken from table F.4.3.3-1, F.4.3.3-2, F.4.3.3- 3, F.4.3.3-4, or
F.4.3.3-5
R = internal bending radius CN =
support length coefficient of the load taken from table F.4.3.3-1, F.4.3.3-2, F.4.3.3-3, F.4.3.3-2. 4, or F.4.3.3-5
N = support length of the load
(minimum 19 mm)
Ch = web slenderness coefficient taken from table F.4.3.3-1, F.4.3.3-2, F.4.3.3-3, F.4.3.3-4,
or F.4.3.3-5
h = flat dimension of the web, measured in its same plane
Alternatively, for the end-load condition on a flange at a C or Z section, the nominal web kinking resistance,
Pnc , cantilevered on one side, can be calculated as follows, except that Pnc shall not be greater than value
obtained for the internal load condition on a fin:
P nc P = an (F.4.3.3-57)
Where:
Pnc = nominal resistance to wrinkling of the web of sections C and Z with cantilevers
0.26
1.34 L h )
O
ÿ= ÿ 1.0 (F.4.3.3-58)
0.009 ht (0.3
( ) +
Where:
Lo = length of the cantilever measured from the edge of the support to the end of the member Pn =
nominal web wrinkling resistance with end load on a flange calculated with equation F.4.3.3-56 and tables
F.4.3 .3-2 and F.4.3.3-3.
The use of equation F.4.3.3-57 is limited to 1.5 ÿ ÿ 0.5 Lh and ht 154 ÿ . for L hO or ht out of
O
these limits ÿ = 1.0 .
The webs of flexural members with a ht ratio greater than 200 must be provided with adequate means for
the transmission of concentrated loads or reactions directly on them.
Pn and Pnc represent the nominal resistances for the load or reaction of a solid web connected to the upper
and lower flange of a profile. For profiles made up of two or more webs,
F-342
Pn and Pnc shall be calculated for each individual web and the results added to obtain the nominal strength of the
complete section.
The term fin load or fin reaction is used when the distance between the edges of the areas of application of adjacent
opposite concentrated loads or reactions is equal to or greater than 1.5h .
The term two-finned load or two-finned reaction is used when the distance between the edges of the areas of application
of the opposite concentrated loads (on a plate) adjacent to the reactions is less than 1.5h
The term end load or end reaction is used when the distance between the edge of the loaded area and the end of the
member is equal to or less than 1.5h .
The term internal load or internal reaction is used when the distance between the edge of the loaded area and the end of
the member is greater than 1.5h , except where otherwise specified.
Table F.4.3.3-1 applies to I-beams made up of two channels connected back to back where ht 200 ÿ
O
, N t 210 ÿ , N h 1.0 ÿ ÿ = 90 . y
Table F.4.3.3-1
Resistance factors and coefficients for reinforced sections
Support Conditions and

Fin load cases C CR CN Ch wf Boundaries
Rigid or Load Extreme 10 0.14 0.28 0.001 0.75 Rt 5 ÿ

subject to partially rigid on a fin or
support fins reaction Interior 20.5 0.17 0.11 0.001 0.85 Rt 5 ÿ
Load Extreme 10 0.14 0.28 0.001 0.75 Rt 5 ÿ

on a fin or
fins reaction Interior 20.5 0.17 0.11 0.001 0.85 Rt 3 ÿ
rigid or partially
rigid Load extreme 15.5 0.09 0.08 0.04 0.75
on the two Rt 3 ÿ
does not hold fins or Interior 36 0.14 0.08 0.04 0.75
reaction
Load Extreme 10 0.14 0.28 0.001 0.75 Rt 5 ÿ
Unstiffened on a fin or
fins reaction Interior 20.5 0.17 0.11 0.001 0.85 Rt 3 ÿ
Table F.4.3.3-2 applies to channel sections with simple webs and members in C section where ht 200 ÿ ÿ = 90 . According
O
to this table, for
N t 210
,
ÿ
internal N h or
load, 2.0reaction,
,
ÿ and on the two flanges attached to the support, the distance from the edge of
the load support to the end of the member will be extended by at least 2.5h . For the cases of wings not attached, the
distance from the edge of the support of the load to the end of the member will be extended by at least 1.5h .
F-343
Table F.4.3.3-2
Resistance factors and coefficients for channel sections with simple webs and C sections
Support and Fin Conditions

load cases C CR CN Ch wf Boundaries
Load Extreme 4 0.14 0.35 0.02 0.85 Rt 9 ÿ

on a fin or
Rigid or reaction Interior 13 0.23 0.14 0.01 0.90 Rt 5 ÿ
subject to partially rigid fins
support Load extreme 7.5 0.08 0.12 0.048 0.85 R t 12 ÿ
on the two
fins or reaction Interior 20 0.10 0.08 0.031 0.85 R t 12 ÿ
Load Extreme 4 0.14 0.35 0.02 0.80

on a fin or
Rt 5 ÿ
Rigid or reaction Interior 13 0.23 0.14 0.01 0.90
partially rigid fins
Load Extreme 13 0.32 0.05 0.04 0.90
on the two
Rt 3 ÿ
fins or reaction Interior 24 0.52 0.15 0.001 0.80
does not hold Load Extreme 4 0.40 0.60 0.03 0.85 Rt 2 ÿ

on a fin or
reaction Interior 13 0.32 0.10 0.01 0.85 Rt 1 ÿ
Unstiffened
fins Load Extreme 2 0.11 0.37 0.01 0.75
on the two Rt 1 ÿ
fins or reaction Interior 13 0.47 0.25 0.04 0.80
Table F.4.3.3-3 applies to Z sections with simple webs where ht 200 ÿ , N t 210 ÿ , N h 2.0 ÿ and
O
ÿ = 90 . In this table for internal load, or reaction, on the two flanges attached to the support, the distance from the edge of the
support of the load to the end of the member will be extended by at least 2.5h .
For non-restrained cases, the distance from the edge of the load support to the end of the member will be extended by at least
1.5h .
Table F.4.3.3-3
Resistance factors and coefficients for Z sections with simple webs
Support and Fin Conditions

Load on Extreme a fin or reaction 4 0.14 0.35 0.02 0.85 Rt 9 ÿ

Rigid or
Interior 13 0.23 0.14 0.01 0.90 R t 5.5 ÿ
subject to partially rigid fins
support Load on the two extreme 9 0.05 0.16 0.052 0.85 R t 12 ÿ
fins or reaction
Interior 24 0.07 0.07 0.04 0.80 R t 12 ÿ
Load on Extreme a fin or reaction 5 0.09 0.02 0.001 0.85

Rigid or Rt 5 ÿ
Interior 13 0.23 0.14 0.01 0.90
partially rigid fins
Load on the two extreme 13 0.32 0.05 0.04 0.90
fins or reaction Rt 3 ÿ
Interior 24 0.52 0.15 0.001 0.80
No
holds End load on one flange or 4 0.40 0.60 0.03 0.85 Rt 2 ÿ
stiffened
fins no reaction Interior 13 0.32 0.10 0.01 0.85 Rt 1 ÿ
Load on both flanges or reaction extreme 2 0.11 0.37 0.01 0.75

Rt 1 ÿ
Interior 13 0.47 0.25 0.04 0.80
Table F.4.3.3-4 applies to members with single hat section where ht 200 ÿ , N t 200 ÿ ,
O
Nh 2 y ÿ = 90
F-344
Table F.4.3.3-4
Resistance factors and coefficients for simple hat sections
Conditions of
support
Load extreme 4 0.25 0.68 0.04 0.75 Rt 5 ÿ
on a fin
Interior 17 0.13 0.13 0.04 0.85 R t 10 ÿ

subject to support the reaction
Load extreme 9 0.10 0.07 0.03 0.85
on both fins R t 10 ÿ
Interior 10 0.14 0.22 0.02 0.85
Load extreme 4 0.25 0.68 0.04 0.75 Rt 4 ÿ

on a fin
does not hold
Interior 17 0.13 0.13 0.04 0.85 Rt 4 ÿ
the reaction
Table F.4.3.3-5 applies to members with multi-web deck sections where ht 200 ÿ ,
O O
N t 210 ÿ ,
Nh 3 ÿ 45 , y 90 ÿÿÿ
Table F.4.3.3-5
Resistance factors and coefficients for multi-web deck sections
Conditions of
support
Load on a fin extreme 4 0.04 0.25 0.025 0.90 R t 20 ÿ
or reaction
Interior 8 0.10 0.17 0.004 0.85 R t 10 ÿ
subject to support
Load on both extreme 9 0.12 0.14 0.040 0.85 R t 10 ÿ
fins Interior 10 0.11 0.21 0.020 0.85
Load on a fin extreme 3 0.04 0.29 0.028 0.60
or reaction R t 20 ÿ
Interior 8 0.10 0.17 0.004 0.85
does not hold
Load on both extreme 6 0.16 0.15 0.050 0.90 Rt 5 ÿ
fins Interior 17 0.10 0.10 0.046 0.90
F.4.3.3.4.2 — Crinkle resistance of C- section webs with holes — When a hole in the web is within the support
length, a support stiffener shall be used.
For beams with holes, the resistance to crumpling shall be calculated using section F.4.3.3.4.1, multiplying the
value obtained by the reduction factor, Rc , given in this section.
The specifications of this section shall apply within the following limits:
(1) dh 0.7 h ÿ
(2) h t 200 ÿ
(3) Holes centered at half web height (4) Clearance between
holes ÿ 457 mm (18 inches)
(5) Distance between the end of the member and the edge of the hole ÿ d
(6) Corner radius ÿ 2t for non-circular holes. (7) d 64 (8)
h ÿ mm
Diameter ÿ (2.5 inches) and L 114 h ÿ mm (4.5 inches) for non-circular holes
152 mm (6 inches) for circular holes (9) d 14
h > mm (9/16 inch)
F-345
Where:
dh = height of the hole in the web h =
height of the flat portion of the web measured along its plane t = thickness of the
web d = height of the cross
section
Lh = length of the hole in the web
For end reaction on a single flange (Equation F.4.3.3-56 using Table F.4.3.3-2), when no portion of a web
hole is within the length of the support, the factor of reduction, Rc , shall be calculated as follows:
R 1.01 0.325d h 0.083x h 1.0 =ÿ + h ÿ (F.4.3.3-59)

c
N 25 ÿ mm
For internal reaction on a single flange (Equation F.4.3.3-56 with Table F.4.3.3-2) when any portion of a
web hole is not within the length of the support, the reduction factor, Rc , will be calculated as follows:
R 0.90
c
=ÿ + 0.047d h 0.053 x h 1.0
h
ÿ (F.4.3.3-60)
N 76 ÿ mm (3 inches)
Where:
x = shortest distance between the hole in the web and the edge of the area of application of the
charge
N = load support length
F.4.3.3.5 — Combined web bending and wrinkling
F.4.3.3.5.1 — Design Method with Coefficients of Load and Resistance (DCCR) — For unreinforced flat webs
of sections subjected to the combination of bending and concentrated load or reaction, shall be designed in such a
way that the moment, M , and the concentrated charge or reaction, P satisfy the relations M Mb nxo . Additionally, ,
the following ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ , and P Pw n requirements must be satisfied :
(a) For sections with simple unreinforced webs: ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ

PM
0.91 ÿ ÿ ÿ + ÿÿ ÿ ÿ 1.33 (F.4.3.3-61)
Pn M xho
Donde ÿ = 0.90
Exception: In interior supports with continuous spans, the above equation is not applicable to metal
decks or beams with two or more simple webs, when the compression part of the adjacent webs is
laterally supported in the negative moment region by continuous elements or intermittents connected
to the flange, rigid plates or lateral bracing, and the spacing between adjacent webs does not exceed
254mm.
(b) For unreinforced multiple-web sections such as I-beams assembled from two C-sections connected
back to back, or similar sections which provide a high degree of restraint to web rotation (such as I-
sections assembled from two welded angles). to a section C):
ÿ ÿPÿMÿÿÿÿ
0.88 + ÿÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ 1.46 (F.4.3.3-62)
Pn M xho
Donde ÿ = 0.90
F-346
(c) For two overlapping Z sections on the support
ÿ ÿPÿ M
ÿÿÿ
0.86 ÿ ÿ ÿ + ÿÿ ÿ ÿ 1.65 (F.4.3.3-63)
ÿ Pn M xho
Donde ÿ = 0.90
The above equation is valid for sections within the following limits:
h t 150 ÿ
N t 140 ÿ
F 483
ÿ y Mpa
R t 5.5 ÿ
The following conditions must also be satisfied:
(1) The end of one member must be connected to the other by at least two screws
A307 with 12.7mm diameter through the soul.
(2) The combined section at the overlap will be connected to the support by at least two A307 12.7 mm
diameter bolts through the wings.
(3) The souls of the two sections will be in contact.
(4) The ratio between the greatest thickness and the least thickness of the assembly shall not exceed 1.3.
The following notation is applicable to this numeral:
M = required flexural strength at or immediately adjacent to the point of application of the

concentrated load or reaction P . M Mu =
P = resistance required for concentrated load or reaction in the presence of the bending
moment. P Pu =
ÿ b= resistance factor for bending (see section F.4.3.3.1.1)
Mnxo = nominal resistance to centroidal bending about the x- axis determined from
according to section F.4.3.3.1.1
wÿ = web wrinkling resistance factor (see section F.4.3.3.4)
Pn = nominal resistance for concentrated load or reaction in the absence of
bending moment, determined in accordance with Section F.4.3.3.4
F.4.3.3.6 — Combined Bending and Torsional Loads — For laterally unrestrained members in flexure subjected to simultaneous
bending and torsion loading, the available flexural strength (moment strength multiplied by a factor) calculated in accordance with
Sec. F.4.3.3.1.1(a) must be reduced by being multiplied by a reduction factor, R
.
As specified in Equation F.4.3.3-64, the reduction factor, R , will be equal to the ratio of the normal stresses due to bending alone
,
divided by the combined stresses from both bending and torsional warpage at the point of maximum combined stress of the cross
section.
f flexion
R = ÿ 1.0 (F.4.3.3-64)
f bending
f +
torsion
Stresses must be calculated using full section properties for torsional stresses and effective section properties for flexural stresses.
For C sections of flanges with stiffened edges, if the maximum combined compressive stress occurs at the junction of the web with
the flange, the R factor can be increased by 15%, but it will never be greater than unity (1.0).
F-347
The provisions of this section will not apply when using the specifications of numerals F.4.4.6.1.1 and F.4.4.6.1.2
F.4.3.3.7 — Rigidizers
F.4.3.3.7.1 — Support stiffeners — Support (transverse) stiffeners, attached to beam webs at points of
concentrated loads, or reactions, shall be designed as members in compression. Pointed loads, or reactions,
will be applied directly to the stiffeners, or each stiffener will be fitted exactly to the flat portion of the flange so
that the load bears directly on the end of the stiffener. Mechanisms for shear transfer between the stiffener and
the web will be provided, according to the specifications of F.4.5. For concentrated load, or reactions, the
nominal resistance is equal to Pn , where Pn is the smallest value obtained between (a) and (b) of this numeral.
ÿ = 0.85
c
(a) P FA= (F.4.3.3-65)

nw yc
(b) Pn = nominal axial resistance evaluated in accordance with section F.4.3.4.1(a), with Ae
replaced by Ab
Where:
Fwy = lesser value of Fy for beam webs, or Fys for the stiffener section
For bearing stiffeners in interior supports or under concentrated loads 2

= A+
A c18t s
(F.4.3.3-66)
For support stiffeners in end supports

2
= A+
A c10t s
(F.4.3.3-67)
Where:
t = thickness of the base steel of the web of the beam
As = cross-sectional area of the bearing stiffener
For bearing stiffeners in interior supports or under concentrated loads A bt A

(F.4.3.3-68)
= + b1 s
For support stiffeners in end supports

A btb2
A s= + (F.4.3.3-69)
Where:
= 0.0024
b 125t ÿ +ÿL ÿt 0.72
ÿ ÿ( ÿ 25t
+ÿ ÿ b 12t 0.0044
L t 0.83 12t ÿst ÿ
(F.4.3.3-70)
2
= (
st
)) (F.4.3.3-71)
Where:
Lst = length of support stiffener
The ratio w ts for the stiffened and unstiffened elements of the supporting stiffeners shall not
exceed 1.28 EF y 0.42
ys
EF ys , respectively, where Fys is the stress
yield strength, and st is the thickness of the steel stiffener.
F-348
Figure F.4.3.3-1 — Support stiffener
F.4.3.3.7.2 — Support stiffeners in C -section members in flexure — For loading on the two flanges of
C -section members in flexure, with support stiffeners that do not meet the requirements of Section
F.4.3.3.7 .1, the nominal resistance, Pn , shall be determined according to equation F.4.3.3-72.
= +ÿ (
Pn 0.7 PAFPwc o ) wc
(F.4.3.3-72)
ÿ = 0.90
c
Where:
Pwc = nominal web wrinkling resistance for members in section C in bending, calculated according to
equation F.4.3.3-56 for members with simple webs, at end points or inside.
Ae = effective area of bearing stiffener subjected to uniform compressive stresses, calculated

in the yield stress
Fy = yield stress of bearing stiffener steel
Equation F.4.3.3-72 applies for the following limits:
(1) Full support of the stiffener is required. If the width of the support is narrower than the width
of the stiffener such that one of the flanges of the stiffener is considered unsupported, Pn ,
will be reduced by 50%.
F-349
(2) The stiffeners will be in section C or channel with a minimum height of the web of 89 mm and a minimum
thickness of the base steel of 0.84 mm.
(3) The stiffener will be attached to the web of the member in bending with a minimum of 3 bolts or
bolts.
(4) The distance from the flanges of the bending member to the first bolt shall not be less than d 8
where d is the total height of the member in flexion
(5) The length of the stiffener shall not be less than the height of the member in bending minus 9
mm.
(6) The support width shall not be less than 38 mm
F.4.3.3.7.3 — Shear Stiffeners — In those areas where shear stiffeners are required, the spacing shall be based on the
nominal shear resistance, Vn , allowed in the section
2
( F.4.3.3.2, and the ratio ah shall not exceed the value ofÿ260
ÿ ht ÿ ) ÿ is 3.0 .
The actual moment of inertia I , of a pair of connected shear stiffeners, or a shear stiffener
s
Simple shear, with reference to an axis in the plane of the web, must have a minimum value of:
0.7 amin
h h 50
ÿ ÿ=ÿ3 ÿI ÿ5ht
ÿ( sh a) ( )
4
(F.4.3.3-73)
Where:
t and h are defined according to section F.4.2.1.2 a =
distance between shear stiffeners
The gross area of the shear stiffeners shall not be less than:
ÿ 2 ÿ
=
1 2Chainÿÿ ÿ ( ah )
ÿ
A st
ÿ
YDht (F.4.3.3-74)
2
( ah 1) +ah
+ ( )
ÿ
Where:
1.53Ek
C = in
when C 0.8 ÿ (F.4.3.3-75)
in 2 in
F ht(
and
)
1.11 Me in
C in
= when C 0.8 > in (F.4.3.3-76)
ht F y
Where:
5.34
in
=
k 4.00 + when ah 1.0 ÿ (F.4.3.3-77)
2
( ah )
4.00
in
=
k 5.34 + when ah 1.0 > (F.4.3.3-78)
2
( ah )
yield stress of web steel

AND =
yield stress of stiffener steel D 1.0 = for stiffeners
arranged in pairs for single angle stiffeners for single plate
D 1.8 = stiffeners
D 2.4 =
F.4.3.3.7.4 — Stiffeners Not Meeting These Requirements — The design strength of members with stiffeners not meeting
the requirements of Section F.4.3.3.7.1, F.4.3.3.7.2, and F.4.3 .3.7.3, such as stiffeners made from stamped or rolled steel,
shall be determined by testing in accordance with F.4.6 or rational engineering analysis in accordance with F.4.1.1.2.
F-350
F.4.3.4 — CONCENTRICALLY LOADED MEMBERS IN COMPRESSION — The design resistance to axial load shall be the lesser value
of those calculated in accordance with sections F.4.3.4.1, F.4.3.4.2, F.4.4.1.2, F.4.4.6.1.3, and F.4.4.6.1.4, as applicable.
F.4.3.4.1 — Nominal Yield Strength, Bending Buckling, Flexural-Torsional Buckling, and Torsional Buckling — This section
applies to members whose resultant of all loads acting on the member is an axial load passing through the centroid of the section
effective calculated for the effort, Fn , defined in this part of the Regulations.
(a) The nominal resistance under axial load Pn , will be calculated according to the equation F.4.3.4-1.
P nOFF
=
and
(F.4.3.4-1)
ÿ c= 0.85
Where:
But = effective area calculated with the stress Fn . For sections with circular holes, Ae
must be determined in accordance with section F.4.2.2.2(a), subject to the limitations of that section.
If the number of voids in the effective length region multiplied by the diameter of the void divided by
the effective length does not exceed 0.015, Ae can be determined by ignoring the voids. For closed
cylindrical tubular members Ae , shall be calculated according to the specifications in Section
F.4.3.4.1.5.
Fn is determined as follows:
l
Para ÿ ÿ 1.5
c
= ( F
F n0.658 c
)2
and
(F.4.3.4-2)
ÿ ÿ0.877 =
Para ÿ > 1.5
c
Fn ÿ ÿ F (F.4.3.4-3)
ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ 2ÿ and
Where:
F and
ÿ=
c (F.4.3.4-4)
F It is
Fe = is the minimum value of the elastic bending, torsional buckling and flexo-torsional buckling stress
determined in accordance with sections F.4.3.4.1.1 to F.4.3.4.1.5.
(b) Concentrically loaded angle sections shall be designed for additional bending moment as specified in the definitions
of Mx and My (DCCR) in section F.4.3.5.2.
F.4.3.4.1.1 – Sections not subject to torsional or flexo-torsional buckling – For double symmetric sections, closed
sections or any other section for which it can be shown that it is not subject to torsional or flexo-torsional buckling, the
elastic bending buckling stress, Fe , will be determined as follows: with
2
p E
F It is
=
2
(F.4.3.4-5)
( KL r )
Where:
K = effective length factor
L = laterally unbraced length of member = radius of gyration of full
r unreduced cross section about buckling axis
F-351
In frames where lateral stability is provided by diagonal bracing, shear walls, fastenings to adjacent structures with
adequate lateral stability, or by floor decks or roof decks secured horizontally by walls or bracing systems parallel
to the plane of the frame, and In trusses, the effective length factor, K , for the member in compression, which does
not depend on its own flexural stiffness for the lateral stability of the frame or truss, shall be taken equal to unity,
unless an analysis shows that a lower value can be used. In a frame that depends on its own flexural stiffness for
lateral stability, the effective length, KL, of the member in compression shall be determined by a rational method
and shall not be less than the actual unbraced length.
F.4.3.4.1.2 — Double symmetric and single symmetric sections subject to torsional or flexo-torsional
buckling — For single symmetric sections subject to flexo-torsional buckling, Fe will be taken as the lowest value
of Fe calculated according to the section F.4.3.4.1.1 and Fe calculated as follows:
1 ÿ
F =
It is
2 ÿbÿ
ÿ (ÿ)(ex+)2
ÿ ÿ tÿ + ÿ ÿ ÿÿ
ex
ÿ t
4
ex t
(F.4.3.4-6)
ÿÿ
Alternatively, a conservative estimate of Fe can be obtained from the following equation:
s sext
F = (F.4.3.4-7)
It is
s +s
t ex
Where:
( ÿ= ÿ1 xr and )2
(F.4.3.4-8)
ÿt and ÿex are defined in section F.4.3.3.1.2.1
For sections of simple symmetry, the x- axis is assumed as the axis of symmetry.
For double symmetric sections subject to torsional buckling, Fe will be taken as the smaller value of Fe.
calculated according to section F.4.3.4.1.1 and Fe where ÿt is defined
=ÿt in section F.4.3.3.1.2.1.
,
For sections of simple symmetry in angle in which the effective area ( ) Ae for the stressFy
is equal to the full unreduced cross-sectional area (A) , Fe shall be calculated using equation F.4.3.4-5 where r is
the minimum radius of gyration.
F.4.3.4.1.3 — Point symmetry sections — For point symmetry sections, Fe shall be taken as the lesser of ÿt , as
defined in section F.4.3.3.1.2.1, and Fe as calculated in section F.4.3.4.1.1 using the minor principal axis of the
section.
F.4.3.4.1.4 — Nonsymmetrical Sections — For members whose cross sections do not possess any symmetry,
either about an axis or a point, Fe shall be determined by rational analysis. Alternatively, members in compression
with such cross sections may be performance tested as specified in Section F.4.6.
F.4.3.4.1.5 — Closed Cylindrical Tubular Sections — For closed cylindrical tubular members having an external
diameter to wall thickness ratio, D t 0.441EF and in which the resultant of all loads and acting
, moments
no greater than are and
equivalent to one point force in the direction of the member axis passing through the centroid of the section, the
bending buckling stress, Fe , shall be calculated in accordance with Section F.4.3.4.1.1, and the effective area, Ae ,
shall be calculated as go on: with
F-352
AA =+
RAÿA(
by him
) (F.4.3.4-9)
Where: ÿ
ÿ
0.037 SD ÿ 0.441
A O
= +ÿ DF tE 0.667 A A ÿ
for (F.4.3.4-10)
) t F
ÿ( ÿ and
ÿ
and
Where:
D = external diameter of the cylindrical tube
Fy = yield stress
= thickness
t E = modulus of elasticity of steel A =
unreduced full cross-sectional area ÿ RF 2F 1.0
=
and
(
It is
) (F.4.3.4-11)
F.4.3.4.2 — Resistance to distortional buckling — The specifications of this numeral will apply to sections I, Z, C,
hat, and other members of open cross section that use flanges with edge stiffeners, with the exception of members
that meet the criterion of section F.4.4.6.1.2. The nominal resistance under axial load shall be calculated according to
equations F.4.3.4-12 and F.4.3.4-13.
ÿ c= 0.85
Para ÿ ÿ 0.561
d
PP y= (F.4.3.4-12)
n
Para ÿ > d0.561

0.6 0.6
ÿ
ÿ ÿÿ
P ÿ
ÿ
P
P
n
=ÿ ÿ
1 0.25 P ÿ ÿÿcrdÿ ÿ crd
P (F.4.3.4-13)
P and
ÿ
ÿ ÿÿ ÿ ÿ and and
Where:
ÿ= PP (F.4.3.4-14)
d and crd
Pn = nominal axial resistance

=
P OFF (F.4.3.4-15)
y gy
Where:
Ag = gross cross sectional area
Fy = yield stress
=
P OF crd gd (F.4.3.4-16)
Where:
Fd = Elastic distortional buckling stress calculated in accordance with section F.4.3.4.2(a), (b) or (c)
(a) Simplified Arrangement for Unrestrained C and Z Sections with Single Stiffening Flange — For C
and Z sections that do not have flange rotational restraint, and that are within the dimensional limits
indicated in this section, the use of the flange is permitted. Equation F.4.3.4-17 for a conservative
predictive calculation of the distortional buckling stress, Fd .
Refer to section F.4.3.4.2(b) or F.4.3.4.2(c) for alternate member options that are outside dimensional
limits.
The following dimensional limits will apply:
F-353
(1) 50 hÿ ÿt 200
O
(2) 25 bÿ ÿt 100
O
(3) 6.25 D t 50 ÿ ÿ
O O
(4) 45 90 ÿÿÿ
(5) 2hb
ÿ ÿ8
and
(6) 0.04 Dÿ sen

ÿÿ b 0.50
O
Where:
ho = height between outer edges of the web as defined in Figure F.4.2.2-4 bo = width
between outer edges of the flange as defined in Figure F.4.2.2-4 D = dimension between
outer edges flange angle as defined in Figure F.4.2.4-1 = base steel thickness t ÿ = flange angle as
defined in Figure F.4.2.4-1
The distortional buckling stress, Fd , shall be calculated as follows:
2
p2E ÿ ÿt
Fdd
k =12
a 1 ÿÿ
(F.4.3.4-17)
2 b
( ÿ ÿ ÿ )ÿ O
Where:
ÿ = a value that takes into account the benefit of an unbraced length, Lm , shorter than Lcr , which can
conservatively be taken equal to 1.0 = 1.0 for LL
ÿ
m cr
ln L L) (
m cr
=( L mL cr ) para L L <m cr (F.4.3.4-18)
Where:
Lm = distance between points of restraint against distortional buckling (for members however, the restraint
continuously restricted LL = may be included as a rotational spring, kÿ , according
cr m ,
to the provisions of section F.4.3.4.2(b) or (c )
0.6
ÿ b D sen ÿ i
=
L 1.2h O
ÿ 10h
cr O O
(F.4.3.4-19)
ÿÿ
ht
O ÿÿ
1.4
ÿb
ÿ iD sen
d ÿ ÿ0.05 0.1 o ÿ ÿ =ÿ k ÿ 8.0 (F.4.3.4-20)
hOt
E = modulus of elasticity of steel = Poisson's ratio
m
(b) For sections C and Z, hat or any open section with stiffened flanges of equal dimension where the
stiffener is a simple flange (lip) or a complex edge stiffener — The provisions of this part of the standard
shall apply to any open section with stiffened ribs of equal dimension, including those that meet the geometric
limits of section F.4.3.4.2(a)
kkfek + + ffwef
F = (F.4.3.4-21)
d
kk +
ÿ fg ÿ wg
Where:
kffe = elastic rotational stiffness provided by the flange to the flange-web joint, according to the
equation F.4.3.3-40
F-354
kÿwe = rotational elastic stiffness provided by the web to the fin-web connection
3
And
=
(F.4.3.4-22)
2
6hO1ÿÿ
( )
kÿ = rotational stiffness provided by the restraint elements (braces, panel, cladding board) to the flange-web
joint of a member (the value is zero if the element is unrestrained) If the rotational stiffness provided
to the two flanges is different each other, the smaller value between the two will be used.
kÿfg
= geometric rotational stiffness (divided by the stress Fd ) demanded by the fin a
from the fin-web junction, according to equation F.4.3.3-42
kÿwg = rotational geometric stiffness (divided by the stress Fd ) demanded by the web at
from the fin-web junction ÿ ÿ ÿ
23
th
= O
ÿÿÿ (F.4.3.4-23)
ÿ L 60
Where:
L = minimum value between Lcr and Lm
Where:
14
ÿ 6h1
4 ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ ( 2
) I 2 ÿ
ÿ
O 2
L = Ixh (C xhÿ +ÿ ÿ xf) o2 wf
xyf
( )
ÿÿ
(F.4.3.4-24)
cr x O x
t 3 I
ÿ ÿÿ yf ÿÿ
Lm = distance between points of restraint against distortional buckling (for continuously restrained members LL = )
cr m
Refer to section F.4.3.3.1.4(b) for definition of the other variables in equation F.4.3.4-24.
(c) Rational Elastic Buckling Analysis — The use of a rational elastic analysis that considers distortional buckling
shall be permitted instead of the expressions given in Section F.4.3.4.2(a) or (b). The resistance factor of section
F.4.3.4.2 shall be applied.
F.4.3.5 — COMBINED AXIAL LOAD AND MOMENT
F.4.3.5.1 — Axial Load in Combined Tension and Moment
F.4.3.5.1.1 — Design Method with Coefficients of Load and Resistance (DCCR) — The required resistances (stress
and factored moments) T, Mx and My must satisfy the following interaction equations:
M xM T + +ÿ and
1.0 (F.4.3.5-1)
MMT
fffb nxt b nyt tn
M M T 1.0
x
+ ÿÿ and
(F.4.3.5-2)
fffb nMMT
x b ny tn
Where:
=
Mx , My = required flexural resistance with respect to the centroidal axes. mm x ux
,
M M=
and Uy
F-355
Phi b = for flexural strength (section F.4.3.3.1.1), ÿ = 0.90 or 0.95

b . For beams not arriostrated
laterally (section F.4.3.3.1.2), ÿ = 0.90 . For closed cylindrical

b tubular members (section
F.4.3.3.1.3), ÿ = 0.95 . b
M SF nut= y (F.4.3.5-3)
Mnxt , ft
Where:
Sft = modulus of the full unreduced section with respect to the extreme fiber in tension about the appropriate axis
My
= design yield stress determined in accordance with Section F.4.1.6.1
T = required resistance to axial tension, T Tu =

ÿ = 0.95
t
Tn = nominal resistance under axial load according to section F.4.3.2
Mnx , Mny = nominal flexural strengths around the centroidal axes according to the
section F.4.3.3.1
F.4.3.5.2 — Combined Compressive Axial Load and Moment
F.4.3.5.2.1 — Design Method with Coefficients of Load and Resistance (DCCR) — The required resistances P , Mx , and My
shall be determined using first-order elastic analysis and shall satisfy the following interaction equations. Alternatively, the resistors
required P , Mx and My will be determined according to a second order analysis6 and must be
==
satisfy the following interaction equations using the values for KK 1.0 x and
,
ÿ =ÿ = 1.0 , y CC 1.0 y = =
x mx my . Additionally, each individual relationship in equations F.4.3.5-
4 to F.4.3.5-6 shall not exceed unity.
For unstiffened angle sections, of simple symmetry, with unreduced effective area, it is permissible to take My as the required
flexural resistance only. For other types of angle sections or unstiffened angles of simple symmetry for which the effective area ( )
Ae in the stress Fy is less than the area of the complete unreduced cross section (A) , My will be taken either as
the required flexural strength or the required flexural strength plus PL 1000 a minimum allowable value , the one that results in
for P .
P C M mx
C xM my y
++ÿ 1.0 (F.4.3.5-4)
Phi c PM
n Mf bf a
nx x b is y
PMM x and
++ÿ 1.0 (F.4.3.5-5)
ffcfPM
no M b nx the b
When PP 0.15 the

cn
use of the following equation will be allowed instead of the previous two: ÿ ÿ
PMM x and
++ÿ 1.0 (F.4.3.5-6)

ffcfPM
n M b nx the b
Where:
P = required resistance under axial compression. P Pu =
6
The second order analysis will be in accordance with the specifications of the AISI STANDARD. North American Specification (Refer to the
reference documents in section F.4.1.8 of this standard)
F-356
ÿ c= 0.85
= nominal axial strength determined in accordance with section F.4.3.4
Pn Mx , My = required flexural strengths about the centroidal axes of the effective section determined only for the
required strength under axial compression.
MM
x
=
ux
, MM=
and Uy
Phi b = factor for bending resistance (section F.4.3.3.1.1), laterally braced ÿ b= 0.90 or 0.95 . For beams at ÿ = 0.90 .
(section F.4.3.3.1.2), closed cylindrical (section F.4.3.3.1.3), for
b tubular limbs
ÿ = 0.95 b
Mnx , Mny = nominal resistance to bending around the centroidal axes according to the
section F.4.3.3.1
P
ÿ=ÿ >
x
1 0 (F.4.3.5-7)
P
EX
P
ÿ=ÿ > 1 0 (F.4.3.5-8)
and
P
EY
Where:
2
Pi Hex
P EX =
2
(F.4.3.5-9)
( at x x )
2
p He
y
P EY =
2
(F.4.3.5-10)
( at y y )
Where:
xI = moment of inertia of the complete unreduced cross section about the axis
x
Kx
= effective length factor for buckling about the x- axis
wxya
= unbraced length for bending about the x- axis
_
= moment of inertia of the complete unreduced cross section about the axis
and
this = effective length factor for buckling about the y- axis
Ly = unbraced length for bending about the y- axis

= nominal axial strength determined according to section F.4.3.4 with FF =
Pno n and
Cmx , Cmy = coefficients whose values will be determined as follows:
(a) For members under compression in frames subject to translation of the nodes (inclination
lateral)
=
C m0.85
(b) For members restrained in compression in frames braced against translation of nodes and not subject
to lateral load between their supports, in plane of bending
C m0.6
= ÿ0.4
( M M 12
) (F.4.3.5-11)
Where:
M M1 2 is the ratio between the smallest and largest moment at the ends of the segment of the
member under consideration, which is not braced in the plane of bending. it is positive when the
member flexes in double curvature and negative when M M1 2 flexes in simple curvature.
F-357
(c) For compression members in frames braced against the translation of nodes in the plane of load and
subjected to transverse loading between their supports, the value of Cm may be determined by
rational engineering analysis. However, instead of such an analysis, it is allowed to use the following
values:
=
(1) For members whose ends are constrained, C 0.85 (2) For members
m
=
whose ends are not constrained, C 1.00 m
F.4.4 — FRAME MEMBERS AND STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS

F.4.4.1 — ARMED SECTIONS
F.4.4.1.1 — Flexural members composed of two back-to-back C- sections — The maximum longitudinal separation
between welds or other connectors, joining two C-sections to form an sI-section
max shall be:
=
s max L 6 2gT mq ÿs (F.4.4.1-1)
Where:
L = beam span =
g vertical distance between the two closest connection lines to the upper and lower flanges = design resistance of
the tension connection (see F.4.5)
Ts m = distance from the center of shear of a single section C to the median plane of the web q
= design load on beam for spacing of connectors (See below for methods of
determination)
The load, q , will be obtained by dividing the magnitude of the concentrated loads or factored reactions between the support
length. In beams designed for a uniformly distributed load, q , shall be taken equal to three times the uniformly distributed
load, based on the critical load combinations. If the length of support of a concentrated load or reaction is smaller than the
space between welds, s the design strength of the welds or connections closest to the load or reaction shall be calculated ,
as follows:
T sP =m 2g
s
(F.4.4.1-2)
Where:
Ps
= concentrated load or reaction based on critical load combinations.
The maximum allowable connection spacing, , will depend on the sload

max
current applied directly to the connection. Therefore,
if it is desired to use a uniform spacing for the connections over the entire length of the beam, it will be determined at the
point of maximum local load intensity. In cases where this procedure results in very close and uneconomical spacing, the
adoption of any of the following methods shall be permitted:
(a) The spacing of the connection varies along the beam according to the variation of the intensity of the load (b)
Placement of
reinforcement cover plates welded to the flanges at the points where concentrated loads occur. The design shear
resistance of the connections that join these plates to the flanges will be used for the value of Ts and g will be
taken as the height of the beam.
F.4.4.1.2 — Compression members composed of two sections in contact — For compression members composed of
two sections in contact, the design axial resistance shall be determined in accordance with Section F.4.3.4.1(a) with the
following modification: If the buckling mode involves a
F-358
relative strain producing shear forces in connectors between individual sections, KL r is replaced by ( )m KL r calculated as
follows:
2 2
ÿÿatÿÿ ÿ ÿ KL a
ÿÿ rÿÿrr= +ÿ (F.4.4.1-3)
ÿ ÿÿ ÿÿforÿ ÿ i
Where:
( )o KL r = total slenderness ratio of the complete section around the axis of the reinforced member
a = spacing of intermediate fastener, spot or weld bead = minimum radius of gyration
ri of the total unreduced cross-sectional area of an individual section in a
armed member
Refer to section F.4.3.4.1.1 for definition of the other symbols.
Additionally, the strength of the fastener and its spacing must satisfy the following:
(1) The spacing of the intermediate fastener, of the spot or weld bead, a, is limited in such a way that i ar does not
exceed one half ofthe slenderness ratio that governs the assembled member.
(2) The ends of a member in reinforced compression shall be connected by welding with a length not less than the
maximum width of the member or by connectors spaced longitudinally not more than four (4) times its diameter
over a distance equal to 1.5 times the maximum width. of the member.
(3) Intermediate fasteners or welds at any junction point of the longitudinal member shall be capable of transmitting
a force in any direction equal to 2.5% of the nominal axial strength of the reinforced member.
F.4.4.1.2.1 — Box section compression members composed of two C sections in contact — For box section
members, formed from two C sections in contact through their stiffening flanges or lips and joined by intermittent
chords welding, you have to:
When ar 50 > i
2 2
ÿÿatÿÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ =KL
+ÿ ÿa ÿÿ ÿ
ÿÿ rÿ rr ÿ 50
(F.4.4.1-4)
for i ÿ
When withi 50 ÿ
at
ÿÿÿÿ at
= ÿÿÿÿ
r
ÿÿÿÿ r (F.4.4.1-5)
m O
All variables are defined and constrained in section F.4.4.1.2. The value of a shall not exceed 300 mm.
F.4.4.1.3 — Spacing of Connectors in Coverplate Sections — The spacing, or line of stress, of welds, rivets, or in the
,
bolts connecting a coverplate, sheet, or nonintegral compression stiffener to another member shall not exceed (a), (b) and
(c) as follows:
(a) To the spacing, s , required to transmit the shear between the connected parts on the
basis of the design strength per connection specified elsewhere in this Title.
(b) 1.16t E f c
Where:
F-359
t = thickness of cover plate or sheet cf =

compressive stress for nominal load in cover plate or sheet
(c) Three times the flat width, w the of the narrowest unstiffened compression element tributary to
,
connections, but need not be less than 1.11t EF if wt 0.50 EF < o 1.33t EF ,
and and and
ÿ EFy
si w t 0.50 , unless less spacing is required in parts (a) or (b)
previously specified.
In the case of intermittent fillet welds parallel to the direction of stress, the spacing shall be taken as the free
distance between welds plus 12.7 mm. In all other cases, the spacing will be taken as the center-to-center
distance between connections.
Exception: The requirements of this section do not apply to plates or sheets that act only as covers or material
for overlap and are not considered as load-bearing elements.
F.4.4.2 — MIXED SYSTEMS — The design of members in mixed systems that use cold-formed steel components together with other
materials shall be done in accordance with the provisions of this Regulation and any other specification applicable to the other material.
F.4.4.3 — LATERAL BRACING AND STABILITY — Braces shall be designed to restrain lateral bending or twisting of a loaded beam
or column, and to prevent local buckling at attachment points.
F.4.4.3.1 — Symmetrical Beams and Columns — Braces and bracing systems, including connections, shall be designed
considering strength and stiffness requirements.
F.4.4.3.2 — C -Section and Z -Section Beams — The following bracing provisions to restrain torsion in C -sections and Z
-sections used as beams loaded in the plane of the web shall apply only when no flange is connected to a metal deck or
panel in such a way as to effectively restrict the lateral deflection of the attached fin. When only the upper flap is connected
in this way, refer to section F.4.4.6.3.1. When both wings are connected so that lateral deflection is effectively restricted, no
further bracing is necessary.
F.4.4.3.2.1 — No flanges connected to a panel that contribute to the strength and stability of the C section or
Z section — Each intermediate brace in the top and bottom flanges of C or Z section members shall be designed
with a strength PL1 and PL2 , where PL1 is the required brace force on the flange, in the quadrant with both x and
y axes positive, and PL2 is the brace force on the other flange. The x axis will be the centroidal axis perpendicular
to the web and the y axis the centroidal axis parallel to the web. The x and y coordinates will be oriented in such a
way that one of the fins is located in the quadrant where both axes, x and y , are positive. Refer to figure F.4.4.3-1
for the schematization of the coordinate systems and positive directions of the forces.
(a) For uniform loads
PL1x1.5 WKW
= ÿ+ ÿ 2 Mÿd( and
)( With
ÿ)ÿ
(F.4.4.3-1)
PL21.5ÿ WKW
= ÿÿ ÿ 2
ÿ (M) d
(ÿ x With
(F.4.4.3-2)
and
ÿ)ÿ
When the uniform charge, W , acts through the soul plane, then WW = : and
P
L1 =ÿ =PL2(1.5 m d W ) for sections C ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ (F.4.4.3-3)
ÿI xy
PP =
L1 L21.5 W = ÿ
for Z sections (F.4.4.3-4)
ÿ 2i x
ÿ
F-360
Where:
Wx , Wy = components of the design load W parallel to the x and y axes, respectively, Wx and Wy
are positive if they point in the positive direction of the x and y axes , respectively.
Where:
W = design load within a distance of 0.5a on each side of the brace.
Where:
a= longitudinal distance between centers of braces
ÿ
K 0= for C sections
ÿ
=
TO xy (F.4.4.3-5)
x2i( ) for Z sections
Where:
I
xy
= product of inertia of the complete unreduced section
yI = moment of inertia of the complete unreduced section about the x- axis

M We Torsional moment of W about the center of shear
sxWe
, xs=ÿ +y y
With
Where:
and sex
, eand= eccentricities of the load components measured from the center
of shear in the x and y directions , respectively. = height of
d the section = distance
m from the center of shear to the median plane of the web of the section
C
Figure F.4.4.3-1 — Coordinate system and positive directions of forces
(b) For concentrated loads,
P PK P 2 M dÿ=ÿ
(+ )( ) (F.4.4.3-6)
L1 y x With
P PK P 2 M dÿ=ÿ
(+ )( ) (F.4.4.3-7)
L2 y x With
When a design load acts through the web plane, then PP and
=
P L1
=ÿ =PL2(md P ) for sections C (F.4.4.3-8)
F-361
ÿ I ÿ
PP P=
L1 L2 =ÿ
xy
for Z sections (F.4.4.3-9)
ÿÿ
2i x ÿÿÿ
Where:
Px , Py = components of the design load P parallel to the x and y axes , respectively. Px and Py
are positive if they point in the positive direction of the x and y axes , respectively.
M Pe Pe xs
With
Torsional moment of P about the center of shear =ÿ +yy sx ,
P = design concentrated load within a distance of 0.3a on each ( ÿ ) times each design
side of the brace, plus 1.4 1 the
concentrated load located beyond 0.3a but not more
than 1.0a from the brace. The concentrated design load is the applied load
determined according to the most critical load combination.
Where:
l= distance from the concentrated load to the brace
Refer to section F.4.4.3.2.1(a) for definition of the other variables.
The bracing force, PL1 or PL2 , is positive when the restraint is required to prevent movement of
the flap corresponding to the negative x -direction .
Where braces are provided, they shall be fastened in such a way as to effectively restrain the
section against lateral deflection of both flanges at the ends and at any intermediate bracing point.
When all loads and reactions on a beam are transmitted through members that fit within the
section in such a way as to restrain the section against torsional rotation and lateral displacement,
no additional braces shall be required, except those required for strength. according to section
F.4.3.3.1.2.1.
F.4.4.3.3 — Bracing of Axially Loaded Compression Members — The strength required in the braces to restrain
lateral translation at a bracing point for a single member in compression shall be calculated as follows:
P
br,1
= 0.01P
n (F.4.4.3-10)
The required stiffness in the brace to restrain lateral translation at a bracing point for a single member in compression
shall be calculated as follows:
ÿ ÿ2 ÿ4 2n
( Pÿ)ÿ n
ÿ br,1
= (F.4.4.3-11)
L
b
Where:
Pbr,1 = nominal strength required of the brace for a single member in compression = nominal strength
under axial compression of a single member
Pn ÿbr,1 = required stiffness of brace for a single member in compression
n = number of equally spaced intermediate bracing points
Lb = distance between braces on a compression member
F.4.4.4 — LIGHT-WEIGHT FRAME CONSTRUCTION WITH COLD-FORMED STEEL MEMBERS — The design and installation
of structural and non-structural members used in repetitive cold-formed steel framing applications where the specified minimum
thickness of base steel is between 0.455 mm and 2.997 mm will be in accordance with F.4.8 of this Regulation and the following,
as applicable:
F-362
(a) Headers, including box and back-to-back headers, and L-type headers, double and
simple, shall be designed in accordance with section F.4.8.4.4 of this standard.
(b) Trusses for cold-formed steel framing shall be designed in accordance with Section F.4.8.4.3
of this norm.
(c) Wall studs shall be designed in accordance with Section F.4.8.4.2, either based on an all-steel system conforming to
Section F.4.4.4.1 or based on a panel-braced design. of enclosure according to an appropriate theory, tests or a
rational engineering analysis. Webs with and without perforations are allowed. Both ends must be connected to
constrain rotation about the longitudinal axis of the upright and horizontal displacement perpendicular to the axis of
the upright.
(d) Framing for floor and deck systems in buildings shall be designed in accordance with this part.
of the Regulation.
(e) Shear walls for light frameworks, bracing by means of diagonal bands (elements that are part of the structural wall)
and diaphragms to resist wind, earthquake and other lateral loads in their own plane, shall be designed in accordance
with AISI S213.
F.4.4.4.1 — All-steel design of wall stud assemblies — Wall stud assemblies using an all-steel design shall disregard
the structural contribution of cladding panels attached to them and shall comply with the requirements of F.4.3. For
compression members with circular and non-circular web bores, the effective section properties shall be determined in
accordance with Section F.4.2.2.2.
F.4.4.5 — CONSTRUCTION OF STEEL DIAPHRAGMS FOR FLOORS, ROOFS OR WALLS — The nominal resistance to shear
in its own plane of a diaphragm, Sn , will be established by calculation or tests.
The resistance factors for diaphragms given in Table F.4.4.5-1 shall apply to both methods. If the nominal shear resistance is
established only by tests without defining all limit state thresholds, the resistance factors shall be limited to the values given in
table F.4.4.5-1 for the standard connections and the related failure modes. with connection. The limit state multiplied by a worst
case factor will control the design.
Where combinations of fasteners are used within a diaphragm system, the most unfavorable factor will be used.
=
Phi
d as specified in table F.4.4.5-1
Table F.4.4.5-1
Resistance factors for diaphragms
limit state
Load type or Concerning the Connection Panel Buckling*
combination Connection type
Phi Phi
d d
welded 0.55
earthquake
bolted 0.65
welded
Wind 0.70 0.80
bolted
welded 0.60
all others
bolted 0.65
Use:
*Panel buckling is out-of-plane deformation of the element and is not related to local buckling that
occurs in fasteners
For other types of mechanical fasteners other than screws, ÿ will not be
d greater than the values shown in table F.4.4.5-1 for screws.
Additionally, ÿ values using mechanical

d fasteners other than bolts should be limited to ÿ values established through shear strength
calibration of an individual fastener, unless sufficient data exists to establish a consistent diaphragm system effect. with section
F.4.6.1.1. The fastener shear strength calibration will include the type of diaphragm material. Calibration of individual fastener
shear strengths shall be in accordance with Section F.4.6.1.1. The test assembly shall be such that the evaluated failure mode is
representative of the design. The impact of support material thickness on the failure mode must be considered.
F-363
F.4.4.6 — METALLIC WALL AND ROOF SYSTEMS — The provisions of Section F.4.4.6.1 through Section F.4.4.6.3 shall apply to
metallic wall and roof systems that include cold-formed steel purlins, stringers, roof and wall panels, or standing seam roof panels,
as applicable.
F.4.4.6.1 — Purlins, Stringers and other members
F.4.4.6.1.1 — Members in Flexure with a Flange Fully Attached to Decks or Enclosure Panels — This section
does not apply to a continuous beam in the region between inflection points adjacent to the support or to
cantilevered beams.
The nominal flexural resistance, Mn , of a C or Z section loaded in a plane parallel to the web, with the tension
flange attached to a deck or panel and with the compression flange not laterally braced, shall be calculated
according to the equation F.4.4.6-1.
M RS= F
n It is
and
(F.4.4.6-1)
ÿ b= 0.90
Where R is obtained from table F.4.4.6-1 for a simple span with sections C or Z, and R 0.60 = R 0.70 =
for C sections in continuous spans for Z
sections in continuous spans
Se and Fy = are the values defined in section F.4.3.3.1.1
The reduction factor, R , shall be limited to roof and wall systems that meet the following
conditions:
(1) Member height ÿ 292 mm

(2) Fins on the member with edge stiffeners 60 height
(3) thickness
ÿ 170 ÿ
(4) 2.8 height

ÿ brim width 4.5 ÿ
(5) ÿ width flange thickness 43 For

16 flat ÿ
(6) continuous span systems, the length of the overlap at each interior support to each side (distance from the center of
the support to the end of the overlap) shall not be less than 1.5d
(7) Span length for the member not greater than 10 m
(8) Both wings are restricted to lateral movement at supports (9)
Wall or roof panels shall be steel sheets with a minimum yield stress of 340 MPa and a minimum
of 0.46 mm for base metal thickness, with a minimum ridge formation height of 29 mm spaced a
maximum of 305 mm o.c. , and fastened in such a way as to effectively inhibit relative movement
between the panel and the purlin flap
(10) The insulation is a layer of fiberglass up to 152 mm thick located between the member and the panel
in a manner compatible with the fastener used.
(11) Type of fastener: minimum #12 self-tapping or self-clinching sheet metal screws or 4.76 mm rivets
and 12.7 mm diameter washers.
(12) Fasteners must be structural type screws.
(13) The distance between fasteners must not be greater than 305 mm center to center and they must be
located near the center of the flange of the beam and adjacent to the crest of the panel.
(14) The design yield point of the member must not exceed 410 MPa.
If any of the variables do not meet the limits stated above, full scale tests should be performed in accordance with
section F.4.6.1, or designed using a rational method of analysis. For continuous purlin systems in which the spans
of adjacent spans vary by more than 20%, the values of R for the adjacent spans shall be taken from Table F.4.4.6–
1. Testing is permitted in accordance with section F.4.6.1 as an alternative procedure to that described in this
section.
F-364
Table F.4.4.6-1
R values for sections C or Z in simple spans
Height Range, mm d Profile R

165 ÿ CoZ 0.70
165 6.5 d )216

<ÿ CoZ 0.65
)<ÿ
216 8.5 d 292 WITH 0.50
216 8.5 d )
((( <ÿ
292 C 0.40
For members in single spans, R will be reduced due to the effects of compressed insulation between the steel
sheet and the member. The reduction must be calculated by multiplying R from table F.4.4.6-1 by the following
correction factor, r :
r 1.00 0.0004t i
=ÿ with t in millimeters i (F.4.4.6-2)
Where:
t
i = Thickness of non-compressed fiberglass insulation, mm
F.4.4.6.1.2 — Members in Flexure with a Flange Attached to a Standing Seam Deck System — The nominal
flexural strength, Mn , of a C or Z section, loaded in a plane parallel to the web Support of a continuous-joint roof
system at the top flange shall be determined using discrete bracing and the specifications in Section F.4.3.3.1.2.1
or may be calculated in accordance with this section.
M RS=F y
n It is (F.4.4.6-3)
ÿ b= 0.90
Where:
R= Reduction factor determined in accordance with AISI S9087
Se and Fy are defined in section F.4.3.3.1.1
F.4.4.6.1.3 — Members in compression with one flange fully attached to a deck or cladding panel — The
provisions given herein are applicable to C or Z sections loaded concentrically along their longitudinal axis with
only one flange attached to a board or enclosure panel with connection elements.
The nominal resistance under axial load of a C or Z section, in a single or continuous span, shall be calculated as
follows:
(a) The nominal resistance in the weak axis shall be calculated according to equation F.4.4.6-5.
Fire= Protection AE 29 500

n 123 (F.4.4.6-4)
ÿ c= 0.85
Where:
=
C 10.79x 0.54 + )
(F.4.4.6-5)
C 21.17 (t( 0.93 = ÿ+ (F.4.4.6-6)
C 32.5b 1.63d
( 22.8 =a ÿ )) + (F.4.4.6-7)
7
AISI. American Iron and Steel Institute. Refer to the reference documents.
F-365
Where:
x = for sections Z is the distance to the connector or fastening element, measured from the outer
side of the web, divided by the width of the flange, as shown in figure F.4.4.6-1.
= for C sections, it is the flange width minus the distance to the fastener, measured from the
outer side of the web, divided by the flange width, as shown in Figure F.4.4.6-1.
= 0.0394 when t = , b and d are in millimeters

t thickness of C or Z section, mm = width
b of fin of C or Z section, mm = height of C or Z
d section, mm
A = full unreduced cross-sectional area for sections C or Z
E = modulus of elasticity of steel, 203,000 MPa
Equation F.4.4.6-5 will be applicable to roof and wall systems that meet the following conditions:
(1) t 3.22 ÿ mm
(2) 152 mm ÿ d 305 ÿ mm
(3) Fins are edge-stiffened compression elements ÿ ÿ
(4) 70 d t 170
(5) 2.8 dÿbÿ5
(6) 70 wing ÿwidth t 50 ÿ
(7) Both wings are restricted to lateral movement at the supports (8)
Metal decking or steel wall panels shall have connectors or fasteners spaced 305 mm
centers maximum, with a minimum lateral-rotational stiffness of 10 300 N/m/m (fastened
at half the width of the flange for determination of stiffness) as determined by the AISI8
test procedure
(9) Sections C and Z will have a minimum yield point of 230 MPa
(10) The length of the light shall not exceed 10 m
(b) For the nominal resistance in the strong axis, the equations of the
sections F.4.3.4.1 and F.4.3.4.1.1
Figure F.4.4.6-1 — Definition of x
F.4.4.6.1.4 — Compression members of Z sections with a fin attached to a continuous joint cover system
(Standing Seam) — The provisions of this numeral apply to Z sections loaded concentrically along their longitudinal
axis, with a single fin attached to continuous joint roof panels (Standing Seam). Alternatively, design values for a
particular system may be taken based on discrete bracing points, or on tests in accordance with F.4.6.
8
More information on the test procedure can be obtained from the AISI S901 document.
F-366
The nominal axial resistance of Z sections, in simple or continuous spans, will be calculated in accordance with
subparagraphs a) and b)
(a) For the design strength in the weak axis
P k =RF A af
n
and
(F.4.4.6-8)
ÿ = 0.85
Where:
For dt 90 ÿ
= of
k 0.36
For 90 dt 130 < ÿ

d
k of
0.72=ÿ
(F.4.4.6-9)
250t
For dt 130 >

= of
k 0.20
R = reduction factor determined from suction head tests carried out accordingly
with AISI S908
A = total unreduced cross-sectional area of section Z d =
height of section Z t =
thickness of section Z
Refer to section F.4.3.3.1.1 for the definition of Fy .
The use of equation F.4.4.6-9 will be limited to roof systems that meet the following conditions:
(1) Belt thickness, 1.37 mm ÿ t ÿ 3.22 mm 152 mm ÿ d ÿ

(2) 305 mm Fins are edge-
(3) stiffened compression elements 70 dt 170 ÿ ÿ
(4)
(5) 2.8 db
where
5 ÿ <b = fin width of section Z
(6) 16 wingÿ width t 50 <
(7) Both wings are restricted to lateral movement at the supports (8)
Yield stress, F 483 ÿ Mpa and
(b) For the design resistance about the strong axis, the equations of
sections F.4.3.4.1 and F.4.3.4.1.1
F.4.4.6.2 — Standing Seam Roof Panel System
F.4.4.6.2.1 — Standing Seam Roof Panel System Strength — Under gravity loads, the nominal strength of
standing seam roof panels shall be determined in accordance with F.4.2 and F.4.3. of this Regulation or
through tests in accordance with the AISI S906 document. Under suction loads, the nominal strength of the
continuous seam roof panel shall be determined in accordance with AISI S906 specifications. Tests shall be
carried out in accordance with the AISI S906 document with the following exceptions:
(1) The suction test procedure for class 1 panel covers described in FM 44719 will be allowed.
9
Test procedure described by Factory Mutual (FM Approvals)
F-367
(2) Existing tests conducted in accordance with the suction test procedure described by CEGS 0741610
and prior to this standard will be allowed.
The use of test procedures described in ASTM E1592 is permitted for deck load tests. The resistance factor, ÿ ,
must not be greater than 0.90. When the number of assemblies for testing is less than 3, a resistance factor, ÿ , of
0.80 will be used.
F.4.4.6.3 — Bracing and anchoring of roof systems
F.4.4.6.3.1 — Bracing anchorage for roof-purlin systems under gravity load with top flange connected to
metal deck — For C and Z section roof systems with metal deck, or continuous seam deck (Standing Seam)
connected to the upper flanges and designed in accordance with sections F.4.3.3.1 and F.4.4.6.1, an anchoring
device capable of transferring the forces from the deck diaphragm to the support shall be provided. Each anchorage
device must be designed to resist a force, PL , determined by Equation F.4.4.6-11 and must satisfy the minimum
stiffness requirements of Equation F.4.4.6-17.
Additionally, the purlins must be restrained by the metal deck in such a way that the maximum lateral displacements
of the upper flange between lateral anchor lines, evaluated with the service loads, do not exceed the length of the
span divided by 360.
Anchorage devices11, or braces, shall be located in each purlin bay and shall be connected to the member at or
near the top flange. If the anchorage devices are not directly connected to all purlin lines in each span, mechanisms
shall be provided to transmit the forces from another purlin line to the anchorage devices. It must be shown that the
required force, PL , can be transferred to the anchorage device through the deck board and its fastening system.
The lateral stiffness of the anchorage device shall be determined by analysis or testing. These analyzes or tests
must take into account the effects of the flexibility of the web of the purlin on the connection of the anchorage device.
NF K ÿ
eff
P
Lj
ÿ
ÿ=ÿ
ÿi
P
k
i,j
(F.4.4.6-10)
i =1 ÿ total i ÿÿÿ
Where:
PLj = lateral force that must be resisted by the jÿ th anchorage device (it is positive when the restraint is required to
restrain the movement of the purlins in the direction up the roof slope)
Np = number of purlin lines on the roof slope = index for each purlin line (i 1,
i =
2,..., N p )
j = index for each anchor device (j = 1,2,...,Na )
Where:
Na = number of anchor devices along an anchor line = lateral force introduced to the system at the ith ÿ
correa
Pi
ÿÿ
ÿÿÿ C2IL ( ÿ ÿ ÿ m 0.25b
+ t ) ÿ
xy
= ( C1 W
)
Pi ÿÿÿÿ
1 000 I d ÿ
ÿ + C3 () ÿ ÿcos
ÿ ÿ ÿÿ
C4 sen
( ) i (F.4.4.6-11)
2d
x ÿÿ ÿÿ
Where:
C1 ,
C2 , C3 and C4 = Coefficients presented in tables F.4.4.6-2 to F.4.4.6-4.
WPi = total required vertical load supported by the ith ÿ purlin in a single span
= wLi _ (F.4.4.6-12)
10
Test procedure described by the Corps of Engineers of USA
11
In this part of the Regulation the term "anchoring device" will be used instead of "brace"
F-368
Where:
wi = distributed gravitational load supported by the ith ÿ purlin, per unit length (determined from the critical
combination for design) = product of inertia of the full unreduced
I
xy section about centroidal axes
parallel and perpendicular to the web of the purlin ( I xy
0 = for sections C)
L = length of the span of the purlin m =
distance from the center of the shear to the median plane of the web ( m 0 = for Z sections) b = width of the
upper flange of the purlin = thickness of the purlin t =
moment of inertia of the
unreduced
xI full section about the centroidal axis
perpendicular to the web of the purlin
d = purlin height
ÿ = +1 if the upper purlin flap points up the slope = -1 if the upper purlin flap points down
the slope = angle between the vertical and the plane of the purlin web
i
Keffi,j= effective lateral stiffness of the jÿ th anchorage device with respect to the ith ÿ correa
ÿ
ÿÿ 1 d P
= i,j
ÿ+ ÿ (F.4.4.6-13)
K C6
a
LA E )
ÿ
ÿÿ (ÿ
p
Where:
d = distance measured along the roof slope between the ith ÿ purlin line and the
Pi,j
jÿ th anchorage device
Ka = lateral stiffness of the anchoring device C6 =
coefficient taken from tables F.4.4.6-2 to F.4.4.6-4
Ap = gross cross-sectional area of the roof panel, per unit width
=
Who alli effective lateral stiffness of all elements resisting the force Pi
Na
=
ÿ ( K eff
K sys) + (F.4.4.6-14)
i,j
j =1
Where:
Ksys = lateral stiffness of the roof system, disregarding the contribution of the support devices
anchorage
2
ÿ ÿ ÿC5
ÿÿ1 ELt
=
000 ÿ
( N
p
)
2
(F.4.4.6-15)
d
For systems with multiple spans, the force Pi , calculated according to equation F.4.4.6-12 and the coefficients C1
to C4 from tables F.4.4.6-2 to F.4.4.6-4, in the cases of “outer line of frames”, “end span” or “outer anchorage of
end span”, must be greater than 80% of the force determined using coefficients C2 to C4 for all other positions in
the roof area.
For systems with multiple spans and anchorage devices at the supports, when the two adjacent spans have
different section properties or different spans, the values of Pi in equation F.4.4.6-11 and equation F.4.4.6-18 they
should be taken as the average of the values found from equation F.4.4.6-12, evaluated separately for each of the
two spans. The values of Ksys and Keff in equations F.4.4.6-11 and F.4.4.6-15 will be calculated using equations
F.4.4.6-14 and F.4.4.6-16, with the average
i,j values of L
, t and d of both spans.
For systems with multiple spans and anchorage devices at thirds or midpoints, when adjacent spans have different
section properties or different spans than the span under consideration, the following procedure should be used to
account for the influence of the spans:
F-369
adjacent bays. The values for Pi in equation F.4.4.6-11 and equation F.4.4.6-18 should be taken as the average of
the values found from equation F.4.4.6-12, evaluated separately for each one of the three bays. The value of Ksys
in Equation F.4.4.6-15 shall be calculated using Equation F.4.4.6-16, with L t and d taken as the average of the
values in the three spans. The Keff values should be calculated using Equation F.4.4.6-14, with L taken as the
,
span of the span under consideration. In an end span, when the average values for Pi are calculated or the
i,j
properties for the calculation of Ksys are averaged , these must be found by adding the value coming from the first
interior span plus two times the value obtained from the end span and dividing the total of the sum by three.
The total effective stiffness in each purlin must satisfy the following equation:
KK req
total i
ÿ (F.4.4.6-16)
Where:
E.G
1
20 ÿ i =1
P
i
K = (F.4.4.6-17)
req
Phi
d
ÿ = 0.75
Instead of Equations F.4.4.6-11 to F.4.4.6-16, an alternative analysis is allowed for lateral restraint forces. Such an
analysis should include first or second order effects and also take into account the effects of roof slope, torsion
resulting from loads applied eccentric to the center of shear, torsion resulting from lateral resistance provided by the
enclosure, and loads applied obliquely to the principal axes. This alternative analysis must also include the effects
of lateral and rotational restraint provided by the deck attached to the top flange of the members. The rigidity of the
anchorage device must be considered and the effect of purlin web flexibility on the anchorage device connection
taken into account.
When lateral restraint forces are determined by rational analysis, the maximum purlin top flange lateral displacement
between lateral bracing lines evaluated at service loads shall not exceed span span divided by 360. Lateral
displacement of the upper purlin flange at the restraint line, ÿtf shall be calculated at factored load levels for design
and shall be limited by:
d
D tfÿÿ 20 (F.4.4.6-18)
Table F.4.4.6-2
Coefficients for support restrictions
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
0.5 8.2 33 0.99 28 0.61 0.43 0.17

Subject along its length (TF)
plain light 0.29
Standing Seam Cover (SS) 0.5 8.3 0.051
exterior gantry line 0.5 14 6.9 0.94 0.073 0.085
TF Line of first interior portico 1.0 4.2 18 0.99 23 2.5 0.43
all other points 1.0 6.8 0.99 11 1.8 0.36
multiple lights 0.5 13 0.35 69 2.4 0.25
Outdoor gantry line
SS Line of first interior portico 1.0 1.7 0.77 55 1.6 0.13
all other points 1.0 4.3 0.71 1.4 0.17
F-370
Table F.4.4.6-3
Coefficients for constraints at midpoints
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
Light Subject along its length (TF) 1.0 7.6 44 0.96 0.75 0.42
simple Standing Seam Cover (SS) 1.0 7.5 15 0.62 0.35 0.18
end span 1.0 8.3 47 0.95 53 3.1 0.33
TF first interior bay 1.0 3.6 0.92 46 0.93 3.9 0.36
multiple all other points 1.0 5.4 19 0.54 41 3.1 0.31
lights end span 1.0 7.9 0.47 0.46 2.0 0.08
SS first interior bay 1.0 2.5 2.6 0.13
all other points 1.0 4.1 31 2.7 0.15
Table F.4.4.6-4
Coefficients for restrictions in thirds
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
plain Subject along its length (TF) 0.5 7.8 42 0.98 0.39 0.40
light Standing Seam Cover (SS) 0.5 7.3 21 0.73 0.19 0.18
External anchorage of end span 0.5 15 17 0.98 0.72 0.043
TF Interior anchorage of end span and exterior anchorage of 0.5 2.4 50 0.96 0.82 0.20
first interior span
multiple all other points 0.5 6.1 41 0.96 0.69 0.12
lights External anchorage of end span 0.5 13 13 0.72 0.59 0.035
SS Interior anchorage of end span and exterior anchorage of 0.5 0.84 56 0.64 0.20 0.14
first interior span
all other points 0.5 3.8 45 0.65 0.10 0.014
F.4.4.6.3.2 — Alternative Lateral and Stability Bracing for Deck-purlin Systems

— Torsional bracing that prevents rotation about the longitudinal axis of a member, in combination with lateral restraints
that prevent lateral displacement of the top flange at the frame line, is permitted instead of the requirements of Section
F.4.4. 6.3.1. The torsional brace shall prevent rotation of the cross section at the discrete bracing point along the span of
the member. The connection of the braces shall be made at, or close to, both flanges of common open sections, including
sections C and Z. The effectiveness of torsional braces in preventing cross section rotation and the required strength of
the braces laterals on the frame line shall be determined by rational engineering analysis or testing. The lateral
displacement of the upper flange of the C or Z section in the frame line shall be limited to ÿd 20 calculated for factored
load, where d is the height of the member in C or Z section, and ÿ is the resistance factor . Lateral displacement between
lines of frames, calculated for service load, is limited to L 180 pairs of adjacent purlins, restraining each other against
rotation, no external anchorage required for torsional bracing.
, ,
,
where L is the span of the member span. For
ÿ = 0.75
F.4.5 — CONNECTIONS AND JOINTS
F.4.5.1 — GENERAL — The connections will be designed to transmit the required resistance acting on the connected members, taking into
account the eccentricity when applicable.
F.4.5.2 — WELDED CONNECTIONS — The following design criteria shall apply to welded connections used for cold-formed steel structural
members in which the thickness of the thinnest connected part is 4.76 mm or less. For the design of welded connections in which the
thickness of the thinnest connected part is greater than 4.76 mm, the specifications established in numeral F.2 must be referred to. Section
F.4.4.5 will apply in cases where diaphragms are used.
F-371
Arc welds in which at least one of the connected parts is 4.76 mm or less thick must be made in accordance with AWS D1.31.
unless otherwise specified in this Regulation. Welders
,
and welding procedures must be qualified as specified in AWS D1.3.

These provisions are applicable to all welding positions listed in table F.4.5.2-1. Resistance process welds shall be made in
accordance with the procedures given in AWS C1.1 or AWS C1.3.
Table F.4.5.2-1
Welding positions
welding position
Bevel Flare V Flare
Slot to butt arc weld arc weld seam Fillet, Lap or
Connection Groove Weld Groove Weld
welding spot T Weld
P --
P P P P
sheet to H --
H H H H
sheet IN -- --
IN IN IN
S -- --
S S S
--
P P P P --
Blade -- -- --
H H --
supporting -- -- --
IN IN --
member -- -- --
S S --
P = Flat, H = Horizontal, V = Vertical, S = Overhead
F.4.5.2.1 — Grooved Welds in Butt Joints — The nominal strength, Pn , grooved in a butt joint, of a weld
on one or both sides, shall be determined in accordance with subsections (a) or (b), whichever is applicable.
(a) For tension or compression normal to the effective area or parallel to the axis of the weld, the
Nominal resistance, Pn , shall be calculated according to equation F.4.5.2-1:
P Lt= F
what
(F.4.5.2-1)
ÿ = 0.90
(b) For effective area shear, the nominal resistance, Pn , will be the smallest value calculated according to
equations F.4.5.2-2 and F.4.5.2-3:
PnLt= 0.6F It is xx
(F.4.5.2-2)
ÿ = 0.80
P Lt =F 3 n ey (F.4.5.2-3)
ÿ = 0.90
Where:
Pn = nominal resistance of the groove weld
L = length of the weld et =
dimension of the effective throat of the groove weld
Fy = yield stress of the lowest strength base steel
Fxx = ultimate resistance of the electrode
F.4.5.2.2 — Plug Welding — Plug welds permitted by this Regulation shall be used to weld sheets to support
members of greater thickness or to weld sheets together, in a flat position.
AWS (American Welding Society). AWS D1.3/D1.3M:2008 Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel
F-372
These welds cannot be made when the thinnest thickness to be connected is greater than 3.8mm, nor when a
combination of sheets exceeds said thickness.
Welding washers must be used, as shown in figures F.4.5.2-1 and F.4.5.2-2, when the sheet thickness is less than
0.711 mm. The washers for welding must have thicknesses between 1.27 and 2.03 mm, with a minimum hole of 9.53
mm in diameter. Sheet-to-sheet welds will not require welding washers.
Plug welds shall be specified with a minimum effective fusion area diameter of , which cannot be less than 9.5 mm.
Figure F.4.5.2-1 — Washer for typical welding
Figure F.4.5.2-2 — Plug Weld with Washer
F.4.5.2.2.1 — Shear
F.4.5.2.2.1.1 — Minimum Edge Distance — The distance measured along the line of force, from
the center axis of one weld, to the nearest edge of another adjacent weld, or to the final edge of the
part connected to the which the force is directed, shall not be less than the value e determined with
equation F.4.5.2-4. Refer to figures F.4.5.2-3 and F.4.5.2-
min
4 for edge distances of plug welds.
P
It is
= (F.4.5.2-4)
min
Ft
Phi
in
F-373
When FF 1.08 u sy ÿ
ÿ = 0.70
When FF 1.08
in
<and
ÿ = 0.60
Where:
Fu = ultimate strength according to F.4.1.2.1, F.4.1.2.2 or F.4.1.2.3.2 t =
total combined thickness of the base steel (not including coatings) of the sheets involved in the
shear transfer above the plane of maximum shear transfer.
P = design shear resistance transmitted by the weld. PP = Fsy = yield stressin

according to section F.4.1.2.1, F.4.1.2.2 or F.4.1.2.3.2
Additionally, the distance from the axis of any weld to the extreme edge or limit of the connected
member shall not be less than 1.5d . In no case shall the free distance between welds and the
extreme edge of the member be less than 1.0d .
Figure F.4.5.2-3 — Edge distance for plug welds — single sheet
Figure F.4.5.2-4 — Edge distance for plug welds — double shell
F-374
F.4.5.2.2.1.2 — Shear Strength for Sheets Welded to a Thicker Support Member — The nominal
shear strength, Pn , of each plug weld between the sheet, or sheets, and a thicker support member.
thickness, the smaller value between subparagraphs (a) or (b) will be determined.
(a) Pn ( d )4 20.75F = p
It is xx
(F.4.5.2-5)
ÿ = 0.60
ÿ
(b) For ( ) dt 0.815
a EF in
=
Pn2.20td F At
(F.4.5.2-6)
ÿ = 0.70
(c) For 0.815 EF dt 1.397< (EF ÿ +) ÿ

< ÿ ÿ
do in
IF in
ÿ
Pn 0.280
= 1 5.59 ÿ
td AtF (F.4.5.2-7)
d at
ÿÿ
ÿ = 0.55
ÿ
(d) For ( ) dt 1,397
a EC in
=
Pn1.40td F At
(F.4.5.2-8)
ÿ = 0.50
Where:
Pn = nominal shear resistance of the plug weld de = effective diameter
of the fusion area in the plane of maximum shear transfer
= 0.7d 1.5t 0.55d ÿ

ÿ
(F.4.5.2-9)
Where:
d = visible diameter of the outer surface of the plug weld t
= total combined thickness of the base steel (not including coatings) of the sheets involved
in the shear transfer above the plane of maximum shear transfer.
Fxx = ultimate resistance of the electrode da

= average diameter of plug weld at half thickness, (
where da dt
for= one
ÿ sheet or for no more than four sheets
) superimposed on the support member. See Figures F.4.5.2-5 and F.4.5.2-6 for
definitions of diameter.
E = modulus of elasticity of the steel Fu =
ultimate strength determined according to section F.4.1.2.1, F.4.1.2.2
from F.4.1.2.3.2
F-375
Figure F.4.5.2-5 — Plug weld — Single sheet thickness
Figure F.4.5.2-6 — Plug weld — Double thickness of sheet
F.4.5.2.2.1.3 — Shear Strength for Sheet-to-Sheet Connections — The nominal shear strength for each weld between
two sheets of equal thickness shall be determined according to equation F.4.5.2-10.
=
Pn1.65td F At (F.4.5.2-10)
ÿ = 0.70
Where:
Pn = nominal shear resistance of the shell-to-shell connection
t = total combined thickness of the base steel (not including coatings) of the sheets involved in the shear transfer
above the plane of maximum shear transfer
and = average diameter of the plug weld at half the thickness t . See the
Figure F.4.5.2-7 for definitions of diameter
= ( ) dt ÿ
Where:
d = visible diameter of the outer surface of the plug weld = effective diameter of the fusion
of area in the plane of maximum heat transfer
cutting
= 0.7d 1.5t 0.55d ÿ
ÿ
It was
= ultimate shell strength determined in accordance with Section F.4.1.2.1 or
F.4.1.2.2
F-376
Additionally, the following limits must be applied:
(1) ÿ MPa (59 ksi)

Fin407
(2) FxxF > in
(3) 0.70 mm ÿ t ÿ 1.60 mm
Figure F.4.5.2-7 — Plug weld — Sheet to sheet
F.4.5.2.2.2 — Tension — The nominal ultimate tensile strength, Pn , of each concentrically loaded plug weld
connecting sheets and support members shall be calculated as the lesser of Equations F.4.5. 2-11 or
F.4.5.2-12.
2
Pid It is
Pn = F xx (F.4.5.2-11)
4
P 0.8 =
n
F F td F u( y au
)2
(F.4.5.2-12)
For application to metal boards and panels: ÿ

= 0.60
For other applications:

ÿ = 0.50
The following limits must apply:
td F
At 13.34kN ÿ
and min dÿ
410ÿ MPa
F xx
ÿ
F in565 MPa (of the connected sheets)
F xx
F> in
Refer to section F.4.5.2.2.1 for the definition of the variables.
For eccentrically loaded plug welds subjected to a tensile uplift load, the nominal ultimate strength shall be
taken as 50% of the value obtained in the above equations.
For multiple sheet connections, the resistance shall be determined by the sum of the sheet thicknesses when
using Equation F.4.5.2-12.
The nominal ultimate resistance in welded side-lap connections, within a panel system, will be 70% of the
above values.
F-377
When it is shown through tests that a welding procedure consistently provides a larger effective diameter,
of , or an average diameter, da , when applicable, the use of this larger diameter will be permitted provided
the specific welding procedure has been followed for its realization.
F.4.5.2.3— Groove Welding — Groove welds (see Figure F.4.5.2-8) covered by this specification shall apply only to
the following types of joints:
(a) Between sheet and a thicker support member in a flat position, and (b) Sheet to
sheet in a flat or horizontal position
The nominal shear resistance, Pn , of a groove weld shall be determined with the lesser value of equations F.4.5.2-13
and F.4.5.2-14.
2
ÿ Pid ÿ
=
P + Ld 0.75Fÿ
(F.4.5.2-13)
It is
n It is xx
4
ÿÿ ÿ
Pdid =
2.5tF
not
0.25L (0.96d + ) (F.4.5.2-14)
ÿ = 0.60
Where:
Pn = nominal shear strength of the groove weld de = effective
groove width at the cast surfaces
= 0.7d 1.5t ÿ (F.4.5.2-15)
Where:
d = width of groove weld
L = length of groove weld not including rounded ends (for calculation purposes L does not
will exceed 3d )
da = average width of groove weld
= ( ) dt ÿ for a single shell or double shells Fu , Fxx and
t = Values defined in section F.4.5.2.2.1
The minimum edge distance shall be determined as it is done for plug welds in Section F.4.5.2.2.1. See Figure
F.4.5.2-9 for details.
Figure F.4.5.2-8 — Groove weld — Sheet to support member flat position
F-378
Figure F.4.5.2-9 — Edge distances for groove welds
F.4.5.2.4 — Fillet Welds — Fillet welds covered by this specification shall apply to welding joints in any position,
whether sheet to sheet or sheet to a thicker steel member.
The nominal shear strength, Pn , of a fillet weld shall be determined in accordance with this section.
(1) For longitudinal load
For L t 25 <
0.01L ÿ ÿ
ÿ nP ÿ1 ÿ= ÿ ÿ LtF in
(F.4.5.2-16)
t ÿ
= 0.60
For L t 25 ÿ
=
Pn0.75tLF in
(F.4.5.2-17)
ÿ = 0.50
(2) For transverse load
=
PntLF in
(F.4.5.2-18)
ÿ = 0.65
Where:
t = minimum value of 1t or 2t , as shown in figures F.4.5.2-10 and F.4.5.2-11
Figure F.4.5.2-10 — Fillet welds — Lap joint
F-379
F.4.5.2.4-2 — T-Joint Fillet Welds
Additionally, for t 2.54 > mm, the nominal shear resistance determined according to (1) and (2), previously
described, will not exceed the following value of Pn :
Pn0.75t
= LF w xx (F.4.5.2-19)
ÿ = 0.60
Where:
Pn = nominal strength of the fillet weld
L = length of fillet weld Fu and Fxx =
values defined in section F.4.5.2.2.1 wt
= effective throat
= 0.707w or 0.707w2is
1 whichever _ less. A larger effective throat is permitted if it is shown by testing that the
,
welding procedure to be used is capable of consistently producing a larger value of wt
Where:
w1 the w2 = thickness at the base of the weld (see Figures F.4.5.2-10 and F.4.5.2-11) and
w 1t 1= at overlapping joints
F.4.5.2.5 — Flare Welds — Flare welds covered by this specification shall apply to welded joints in any position, whether
sheet-to-sheet for V-flare welds, sheet-to-sheet for half-V flare welds, or sheet-to-member. thicker steel for half V flare welds.
The nominal resistance to shear, Pn , section. of a flare weld shall be determined in accordance with this
(a) For transversely loaded half-V flare welds (see Figure F.4.5.2-12)
Pn0.833tLF
=
in (F.4.5.2-20)
ÿ = 0.60
F-380
Figure F.4.5.2-12 — Half V flare weld
(b) For longitudinally loaded flare welds (see Figures F.4.5.2-13 to

F.4.5.2.5-7)
(1) For t tÿ <Inor if2tthe height of the lip or flange, h , is less than the length of
welding, L :
=
Pn0.75tLF in
(F.4.5.2-21)
ÿ = 0.55
(2) For wt 2t ÿ with the height of the lip or flange, h , equal to or greater than the length of
welding, L :
=
Pn1.50tLF in
(F.4.5.2-22)
ÿ = 0.55
Additionally, for t 2.5 > mm, the nominal resistance determined according to (a) and (b) shall not exceed
the value of Pn calculated according to equation F.4.5.2-23.
=
Pn0.75t LF w xx (F.4.5.2-23)
ÿ = 0.60
Where:
Pn
= nominal resistance of the flare weld
t = thickness of the welded member as defined in Figures F.4.5.2-12 to
F.4.5.2-18
L = weld length Fu and Fxx = values as
defined in section F.4.5.2.2.1 h
= height of the flange or lip
F-381
Figure F.4.5.2-13 — Half V flare weld shear
Figure F.4.5.2-14 — Shear in V-flare weld
Figure F.4.5.2-15 — V-Half Flare Weld (Flush Fill, w R = ) 1
F-382
Figure F.4.5.2-16 — Mid-V flare weld (Filled flush, w R = ) 1
Figure F.4.5.2-17 — Half V flare weld (Not flush, w R > ) 1
Figure F.4.5.2-18 — Mid-V flare weld (Not flush, wR < ) 1
wt = effective throat of flare weld filled flush with surface

(see Figures F.4.5.2-15 and F.4.5.2-16): =
( ) 5 16 R for half flare groove weld V = ( ) 12 R when R 12.7 ÿ
mm for V flare weld = ( ) 38 R when R 12.7 > mm for V-flare weld
= effective throat of non-flush flare groove weld:
F-383
= 0.707w from 0.707w

1 2
, whichever is smaller (see Figures F.4.5.2-17 and
F.4.5.2-18)
= a larger effective throat is permitted if testing shows that the welding procedure to be used
consistently produces a larger value of wt
Where:
R = radius of the outer bending surface = thickness
w1 the w2 at the base of the weld (see Figures F.4.5.2-17 and F.4.5.2-18)
F.4.5.2.6 – Electrowelded Welds – The nominal shear resistance, Pn , of weld points by the resistance process
(electrowelded) shall be determined in accordance with this section.
ÿ = 0.65
With t in millimeters and Pn in kN:
Para 0.25 mm ÿ <t 3.6 mm
1.47
n
=P 5.51t (F.4.5.2-24)
For 3.6 mm ÿ ÿt 4.6 mm

= 8.57 +
Pn7.6t (F.4.5.2-25)
Where:
Pn = nominal resistance of the electrowelded weld = thickness of the
t thinnest outer shell
F.4.5.2.7 — Failure in Net Section of Members Other Than Flat Sheets (Shear Lag) — The nominal tensile strength of a
welded member shall be determined in accordance with Section F.4.3.2.
For rupture and/or creep in the net effective section of the connected part, the nominal ultimate tensile strength, Pn , shall be
determined according to equation F.4.5.2-28.
=
PnOFF
me (F.4.5.2-26)
ÿ = 0.60
Where:
Fu = ultimate resistance to tension of the connected part according to section F.4.1.2.1 or
F.4.1.2.3.2.
But
= AU net effective area with U defined as follows:
,
When the load is transmitted only by transverse welds:
A = area of directly connected elements

In 1.0 =
When the load is transmitted only with longitudinal welds or with longitudinal welds in combination with transverse welds:
A = gross area of the member, Ag

In 1.0 = for members in which the load is transmitted directly with all members of the cross section
Otherwise, the reduction coefficient U will be determined in accordance with subparagraphs (a) or (b) below:
F-384
(a) For angled members U 1.0

1.20 x L 0.9 =ÿ < (F.4.5.2-27)
But U 0.4 ÿ
(b) For members in channel U

1.0 0.36 x L 0.90 =ÿ < (F.4.5.2-28)
But U 0.5 ÿ
Where:
x = distance from the cutting plane to the centroid of the cross section
L = length of the connection
Figure F.4.5.2-19 — Definition of x for sections with shear lag
F.4.5.3—BOLTING CONNECTIONS— The requirements of this section apply to bolted connections for cold-formed steel structural
members in which the thickness of the thinnest connected part is 4.76 mm or less. For the design of bolted connections in which the
thickness of the thinnest connected part is greater than 4.76 mm, refer to Chapter F.2.
Bolt holes shall not exceed the sizes specified in Table F.4.5.3-1, except that larger hole sizes are permitted in base plates for
columns or structural systems attached to concrete walls.
Standard holes shall always be used in bolted connections, except where designer-approved enlarged and slot-type holes are
permitted. The length of slotted holes shall be normal to the direction of the load. Washers or backing plates shall always be installed
above the sheet over enlarged or slot-type perforations, unless adequate performance without them is demonstrated by testing in
accordance with the specifications in F.4.6. The non-application of the previous requirements is allowed, with respect to the direction
of the groove and the use of washers, in the cases in which there are perforations in the overlaps of members in section Z, subject
to the following limitations:
(1) 12.7mm diameter bolts only (2) Maximum slot

hole size is 14.3mm x 22.2mm done vertically (3) Maximum enlarged hole diameter is 15.9mm ( 4 ) Thickness The
minimum nominal length of the member is 1.5 mm (5) The maximum yield
stress of the member is 410 MPa (6) The minimum length of
lap, measured from the center of the support to the end of the lap,
is 1.5 times
the height of the member
F-385
Table F.4.5.3-1a
Maximum size of bolt holes, mm
Standard bore Enlarged bore

Nominal bolt Short slot type Long slot type
diameter, diameter,
diameter, d dh mm drilling dimensions, mm drilling
dh
(mm) dimensions, mm
(mm)
< 12.7 d 0.8 + d 1.6 + 0.8+xd 6.4
+ )) () (d
( (d 1.6 d +0.8 x )2.5( d )
ÿ 12.7 d 1.6 + d 3.2 + 6.4+) xd + d 1.6 x )2.5d

(( ( + )
Bolts, nuts and washers must meet one of the following specifications:
NTC 4028 (ASTM A490M) Fixing elements. High-strength steel bolts, class 10.9 and 10.9.3 for structural steel joints –
metric
NTC 4029 (ASTM A325M) Fixing elements. High strength bolts intended for structural steel joints – metric system.
NTC 4031 (ASTM F436M) Fixing elements. Hardened Steel Washers – Metric
NTC 4034 (ASTM A307 (Type A) Fasteners. Specification for carbon steel screws and bolts, with 60,000PSI tensile
strength.
NTC 4035 (ASTM A194/A194M) Specification for carbon and alloy steel nuts for high pressure and high temperature
services.
NTC 4479 (ASTM A449) Quenched and tempered carbon steel screws and bolts (for bolts with a diameter less than
12.7mm)
NTC 4511 (ASTM A563M) Specifications for alloy and carbon steel nuts – metric system
NTC 4512 (ASTM A354 (Grade BD)) Screws, bolts and other externally threaded fasteners, quenched and tempered, of
alloy steel (for bolts less than 12.7mm in diameter)
NTC 4701 (ASTM F959) Fixing elements. Direct Compressible Washer Type Strain Indicators For Use With Structural
Fasteners
NTC 4965 (ASTM A563) Carbon steel and alloy steel nuts
ASTM A325. Specifications for Heat Treated Steel Structural Bolts with a Minimum Tensile Strength of 835/735MPa
ASTM A490 Heat Treated Steel Structural Bolts with 1035MPa Minimum Tensile Strength
ASTM F436. hardened steel washers
ASTM F844 Washers, Steel and Flat Products, Unhardened for General Purpose
ASTM F959M Direct Compressible Washer-Type Strain Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners – Metric
When using a standard other than those presented above, the plans must clearly indicate the type and size of the bolts
to be used and the nominal resistance assumed in the design.
Bolts will be installed and tightened to achieve satisfactory performance.
F.4.5.3.1 — Shear, Spacing, and Edge Distance — The nominal shear resistance, Pn , of the connected part
when affected by the spacing and edge distance in the direction of the applied force shall be calculated in
accordance with the equation F.4.5.3-1.
F-386
=
PnteF in
(F.4.5.3-1)
(a) When FF 1.08 ÿ = ÿ0.70

u and
(b) When FF 1.08 ÿ =<0.60

u and
Where:
Pn = nominal resistance of each bolt
It is
= distance measured on the line of force from the center of the standard perforation to the nearest edge of
the adjacent perforation or to the edge of the connected part = thickness of the thinnest
t connected part
Fu = ultimate tensile strength of the connected part as specified in section F.4.1.2.1, F.4.1.2.2 or F.4.1.2.3.2 Fsy =
yield stress of the connected part
as specified in section F.4.1.2.1,
F.4.1.2.2 or F.4.1.2.3.2
Additionally, the minimum distance between drilling centers will provide sufficient separation for the heads of the
bolts, nuts, washers and the key, but must not be less than 3 times the nominal diameter of the bolt, d . Likewise,
the distance from the center of any standard perforation to the edge of the connected member, or other boundary,
shall not be less than 1.5d .
For enlarged perforations and slot-type perforations, the distance between the edges of two adjacent perforations
and the distance measured from the edge of the perforation to the edge of the connected member, or other
by d2 ÿ h ) where is
boundary, on the line of stress, shall not be less than the value of ( is the required distance ,
used in equation F.4.5.3-1, and dh is the standard bore diameter defined in table F.4.5.3-1 In no case shall the free
distance between the edges of two adjacent bores be less a 2d and the distance between the edge of the perforation
and the extreme edge of the member will be less than d .
F.4.5.3.2 — Failure in Net Section — The rated ultimate tensile strength of a bolted member shall be determined in
accordance with Section F.4.3.2. For rupture in the net effective section of the connected part, the nominal ultimate tensile
strength, Pn , shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of this section.
(a) For flat sheet connections without a staggered hole pattern

= n nt
P OF (F.4.5.3-2)
(1) When two washers are installed, one under the bolt head and one on the nut
For a single bolt, or a single row of bolts perpendicular to the force F 0.1 3d s FF =+ ÿ t
( )
he
(F.4.5.3-3)
For multiple bolts in a line parallel to the force

F F=t in
(F.4.5.3-4)
For double shear: ÿ

= 0.65
For simple shear: ÿ =

0.55
F-387
(2) When no washers are installed or only one is installed under the head of the bolt, or in the
nut
For a single bolt, or a single row of bolts perpendicular to the force F 2.5ds FF
t
= ( )
he
ÿ (F.4.5.3-5)
For multiple bolts in a line parallel to the force

F F=t (F.4.5.3-6)
in
ÿ = 0.65
Where:
An = net area of the connected part
Ft = nominal tensile stress in the flat plate d = nominal
diameter of the bolt s = width of the
plate divided by the number of bolt holes in the section
analyzed cross section (when Ft is evaluated )
Fu = ultimate voltage resistance of the connected part as specified in section F.4.1.2.1, F.4.1.2.2 or
F.4.1.2.3.2
(b) For flat sheet connections with a staggered hole pattern

=
P OFF (F.4.5.3-7)
n nt
ÿ = 0.65
Where:
Ft = is determined according to equations F.4.5.3-3 to F.4.5.3-6
ÿ 2
A 0.90
bh A n ÿd t = ÿ+ ÿ g (ÿ ÿ s 4 g )t (F.4.5.3-8)
n ÿ
Ag = gross area of the member sÿ

= center-to-center longitudinal spacing of any two consecutive holes = center-to-center transverse spacing
between bolt centers g = number of bolt holes in the cross section tested.
nb
dh = diameter of the standard bore
See section F.4.5.3.1 for the definition of t
(c) For connections other than flat sheets

=
P OFF (F.4.5.3-9)
n me
ÿ = 0.65
Where:
=
TO TO , net effective area with U defined as follows:
It is n
U 1.0 for members in which the load is transmitted directly to all members of the
= cross section. Otherwise, the reduction coefficient U is determined as follows:
(1) For angle members with two or more bolts in the line of force
U 1.0 1.20 x L 0.9 =ÿ < (F.4.5.3-10)
But U 0.4 ÿ
(2) For channel members with two or more bolts in the line of force (F.4.5.3-11)
U 1.0 0.36 x L 0.9 =ÿ <
But U 0.5 ÿ
Where:
x = Distance from the cutting plane to the centroid of the cross section
F-388
L = Length of the connection
Figure F.4.5.3-1 — Definition of x for sections with bolted connections
Figure F.4.5.3-2 — Flat sheet connections with stepped holes
F.4.5.3.3 — Bearing — The nominal bearing strength in a bolted connection shall be determined in accordance with
Sections F.4.5.3.3.1 and F.4.5.3.3.2. For conditions not listed, the design bearing resistance of bolted connections
shall be determined by testing.
F.4.5.3.3.1 — Strength without Consideration of Boring Strain — When strain around bolt bores is not a
design consideration, the nominal bearing strength, Pn , of the plate connected by each bolt loaded must be
determined according to equation F.4.5.3-12.
= dtF
PfCm (F.4.5.3-12)
ÿ = 0.60
Where:
C = crush factor, determined according to table F.4.5.3-2 mf
= modification factor for the type of bearing connection, which will be determined accordingly.
according to table F.4.5.3-3
d = nominal diameter of the bolt =
thickness of the uncoated plate t Fu =
ultimate resistance of the plate as defined in section F.4.1.2.1 or F.4.1.2.2
F-389
Table F.4.5.3-2
Crushing factor C
Ratio of fastener diameter to

Thickness of the member thickness, dt C
connected part, t mm,
d t 10 < 3.0
0.61 t 4.76 ÿ < t 22ÿ ÿ 10 d 4 ÿ0.1

( dt
)
d t 22 > 1.8
Table F.4.5.3-3
Modification factor, mf , for bearing connections
Crimp Connection Type mf

Single shear and double shear connection outer sheets with washers under bolt 1.00
head and nut
Single shear and outer connecting sheets in double shear without washers under
the head of the bolt and nut, or with just a washer 0.75
Internal double shear connection sheet with and without washers 1.33
F.4.5.3.3.2 — Strength with consideration of bore deflections — When deflection around bolt bores is a
design consideration, the nominal bearing resistance, Pn , shall be calculated according to Equation F.4.5
.3-13. Additionally, the design strength shall not exceed the design strength obtained in accordance with
Pn4.64
= a+t 1.53 dtF )
in
(F.4.5.3-13)
( ÿ = 0.65
ÿ = 0.0394 for the international system of units ( t in millimeters)
Refer to section F.4.5.3.3.1 for the definition of the other variables.
F.4.5.3.4 — Shear and tension in bolts — The nominal resistance of the bolt, Pn , resulting from shear, tension or
a combination of shear and tension, shall be calculated in accordance with the provisions of this section.
Pnbn
OFF
= (F.4.5.3-14)
Where:
Ab = gross cross-sectional area of the bolt
Fn = nominal strength in MPa is determined according to (a) or (b) as follows:
(a) When the bolts are subjected to shear or tension only, not combined, Fn will be obtained
by means of Fnv or Fnt in table F.4.5.3-4.
The corresponding resistance factors, ÿ , are shown in table F.4.5.3-4
Consideration must be given to the pullout resistance of the plate connected to the head of the bolt, nut
or washer, when the bolt is under tension. See section F.4.5.6.2.
(b) When the bolts are subjected to a combination of shear and tension, Fn , is obtained from
of Fntÿ in the following equation F.4.5.3-15 as follows:
F-390
F nt
ÿ
F nt =ÿ ÿ
1.3F nt f in
F nt (F.4.5.3-15)
F nv
Phi
Where:
Fntÿ = nominal tensile stress modified to include the effects of required shear stress, MPa
Fnt = nominal tensile stress from table F.4.5.3-4 Fnv =

nominal shear stress from table F.4.5.3-4 vf = required
shear stress, MPa ÿ = resistance factor for
shear taken from table F .4.5.3-4
Additionally, the required shear force, vf , shall not exceed the design shear force, Fnv ÿ , of the bolt .
Table F.4.5.3-4
Nominal tensile and shear resistance for bolts
ultimate tensile strength shear strength

Effort Effort
Resistance Resistance
nominal Fnt , nominal Fnv ,
factor ÿ MPa factor ÿ MPa
Bolts A307, Grade A 6.4
279 165
mm ÿ ÿ d 12.7 mm
A307 Bolts, Grade A d
12.7 ÿ mm 310 186
A325 Bolts, thread included in shear planes A325 621 372

Bolts, thread excluded from shear planes A354 Bolts 621 496
Grade BD 6.4 mm ÿ d
12.7 mm thread included 696 407
in shear planes A354 Bolts Grade BD
6.4 mm ÿ < d 12.7 mm
thread excluded from 696 621
0.75 0.65
cutting planes A449 Bolts 6.4 mm ÿ <
d 12.7 mm
thread included in cutting 558 324
planes A449 Bolts 6.4 mm ÿ < d 12.7
mm
558 496
thread excluded from cutting planes
A490 bolts
776 465
Thread included in the cut planes
A490 bolts
776 621
Thread excluded from cutting planes
In Table F.4.5.3-4, the shear strength will apply to bolts in holes limited by the requirements of Table F.4.5.3-1. The washers
and backing plates will be installed over the long slot type holes and the capacity of this connection will be determined by load
tests in accordance with F.4.6.
F.4.5.4 — SCREWED CONNECTIONS — All the requirements of this section shall apply to screws with 2 mm ÿ ÿ d 6.35 mm.
Screws must have a thread made by cutting rolling, with or without a self-drilling point. Screws should be installed and
tightened in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
The nominal resistances of bolted connections shall also be limited in accordance with section F.4.3.2.
For applications in diaphragms, refer to section F.4.4.5.
The following resistance factor should be used to determine the design resistance. ÿ =
0.50
F-391
Alternatively, the use of design values for a particular application, based on tests, with a resistance factor, ÿ , determined
according to the provisions of F.4.6, is permitted.
The following notation will apply to this section:
d = nominal diameter of the screw

dh = diameter of the bolt head or diameter of the washer on hex head bolts with integrated washer dw = diameter of the steel washer = effective diameter of the tear resistance of the material
in contact with the head or
washer dw
ÿ
Pns = nominal shear resistance of the bolt

Pss = nominal shear strength of the bolt supplied by the manufacturer or determined by tests in an independent laboratory
Pnot = nominal tear strength for each bolt

Pnov = nominal tear resistance of the material in contact with the head and washer, if any, for
each screw
Pts = nominal tensile strength of the bolt supplied by the manufacturer or determined by tests in an independent laboratory
1t = thickness of the member in contact with the head of the bolt or washer =
2t thickness of the member not in contact with the head of the bolt or washer = the smaller of the
ct penetration depth and the thickness 2t
Fu1 = ultimate resistance of the member in contact with the head of the bolt or washer
Fu2 = ultimate resistance of the member that is not in contact with the head of the bolt or washer
F.4.5.4.1 — Minimum spacing — The distance between bolt centers shall not be less than 3d
F.4.5.4.2 — Minimum Edge and End Distances — The distance from the center of a fastener to the edge of any part
shall not be less than 1.5d . If the final distance is parallel to the force on the bolt, the nominal shear resistance per bolt,
Pns , shall be limited by section F.4.5.4.3.2.
F.4.5.4.3 — Shear
F.4.5.4.3.1 — Tilt and Bearing Limited Shear Connection — The nominal bolt shear resistance, Pns , shall
be determined in accordance with this section.
Pair tt 1.0 ÿ , Pns will be taken as the smallest value of:

21
3
Pns4.2
= tdF
(
2 u2 (F.4.5.4-1)
)1 2
Pns2.7t
= dF
1 in 1 (F.4.5.4-2)
Pns2.7t
= dF
2 u2 (F.4.5.4-3)
For tt 2.5 ÿ , Pns will be taken as the smallest value of: 2 1

Pns2.7t
= dF 1 u1 (F.4.5.4-4)
Pns2.7t
= dF 2 u2 (F.4.5.4-5)
For 2.5 < <2 1 , Pns will be calculated by linear interpolation between the two cases presented 1.0 tt
previously
F.4.5.4.3.2 — Shear connection limited by the distance to the edge of the connected part — The nominal
shear resistance per bolt, Pns , shall not exceed that calculated according to equation F.4.5.4-6, where the
distance to the edge of the connected part is parallel to the line of the applied force.
F-392
teF=
P ns in (F.4.5.4-6)
ÿ = 0.50
Where:
t = thickness of the part in which the edge distance is measured =
It is
distance measured on the line of force from the center of a standard bore to the nearest edge of the
connected part
Fu = ultimate resistance of the part in which the edge distance is measured
F.4.5.4.3.3 — Shear in bolts — The nominal shear resistance of the bolt will be taken as
Pss .
Instead of the values supplied in section F.4.5.4, the determination of the resistance factor shall be allowed by the
provisions of section F.4.6.1, and it must be fulfilled that ÿ ÿ 1.25 0.5
F.4.5.4.4 — Tension — For tension-bearing bolts, the head, or washer, if used, shall have a diameter dh of not less than 8
mm. Washers must have a minimum thickness of 1.27 mm. or dw ,
F.4.5.4.4.1 — Screw tearing — The nominal tearing resistance of the screw will be calculated as follows: Pnot ,
P 0.85t=dF not c u2 (F.4.5.4-7)
F.4.5.4.4.2 — Tear of the material in contact with the head or the washer — The nominal tear resistance of the
material in contact with the head of the screw or the washer, shall be calculated as follows: Pnov ,
(F.4.5.4-8)
ÿ
1.5t d= F 1 w u1
P nov
Where:
= Effective tearing diameter of the material in contact with the head or washer, determined in accordance
ÿ
dw
with (a), (b) or (c) as shown below:
(a) For a bolt with round head, hexagonal head (figure F.4.5.4-1(1)), or hexagonal head with integrated
washer (figure F.4.5.4-1(2)) with a steel washer solid and independent under the head
(F.4.5.4-9)
ÿ
d d 2t t d = + +ÿ w h w1 w
Where:
dh = diameter of the head of the screw or diameter of the washer in the screws of
hex head with integrated washer
= thickness of steel washer wt dw =
diameter of steel washer
F-393
1. Steel flat washer under head 2. Steel flat washer under the head of a screw with
of a hexagonal screw integrated washer
3. Dome washer (not solid) under screw head
Figure F.4.5.4-1 — Tearing of material in contact with washer
(b) For a bolt with a round head, hex head, or hex head with
integrated washer without a separate washer under the head
ÿ
ddwh = but not greater than 12.7 mm
(c) For a dome type washer (not solid and independent) under the bolt head (figure F.4.5.4-1(3)), it is
ÿ
allowed to use dw as calculated in Equation F.4.5.4-9, with dh , wt and

ÿ
1t defined according to Figure F.4.5.4-1(3). In the equation, dw cannot

exceed 16mm . Alternatively, calculation of the design values of tear resistance of the material
around the head for dome washers, including the resistance factor, ÿ , is permitted by tests in
accordance with F.4.6.
F.4.5.4.4.3 — Tension in bolts — The nominal tensile strength of the bolt will be taken as Pts .
Instead of the values supplied in section F.4.5.4, the determination of the resistance factor shall be allowed by
the provisions of section F.4.6.1, and it must be fulfilled that ÿ ÿ 1.25 0.5
F-394
F.4.5.4.5 — Combined Behavior Between Shear and Tear of Material in Contact with Head or Washer — For bolted
connections subjected to a combination of shear and tensile forces, the following requirements must be met:
Q T 0.71 1.10
+ ÿÿ P (F.4.5.4-10)
P ns nov
Additionally, Q and T must not exceed the corresponding design resistances determined according to sections
F.4.5.4.3 and F.4.5.4.4, respectively.
Where:
Q = required shear resistance of the connection, Q V= in
T = required tensile strength of the connection, TT = in
Pns = nominal shear resistance of the connection

= 2.7t dF (F.4.5.4-11)
1 in 1
Pnov = nominal tear resistance of the material in contact with the head or washer
of the connection
= 1.5t dwFu1
1 (F.4.5.4-12)
Where:
dw = largest diameter of the screw head or diameter of the washer ÿ = 0.65
Equation F.4.5.4-10 is valid for connections that are within the following limits:
(1) 0.724 mm ÿ ÿ t 1.130 mm 1

(2) Self-drilling screws No. 12 and No. 14, with and without washers (3) d
19.1 ÿIn mm
(4) F 483
in1 MPa
ÿ (5)
t 2t 1 2.5 ÿ
For eccentrically loaded connections that produce a non-uniform tear force on the bolt, the nominal tear
strength, Pnov , must be reduced by 50%.
F.4.5.5 — BREAKING
F.4.5.5.1— Shear Failure — In beam-end connections where one or more flanges are undercut and failure can occur along
a plane through the fasteners, the nominal resistance a shall be calculated in accordance with the equation F.4.5.5-1. sharp,
Vn ,
=
V n0.6FA u wn (F.4.5.5-1)
ÿ = 0.75
Where:
h nd= tÿ (wchwc
A wn h
) (F.4.5.5-2)
= height of trimmed flat web = number of holes
n in critical plane = diameter of hole = ultimate strength
d of connected part specified in
It was
section F.4.1.2.1 or F.4.1.2.2 = thickness of trimmed web
t
F-395
F.4.5.5.2 — Tension rupture — The design resistance to tension rupture along a pattern, in the affected elements of
the connected members, shall be determined according to section F.4.5.2.7 or
F.4.5.3.2 for welded or bolted connections, respectively.
F.4.5.5.3 — Shear block rupture — When the thickness of the thinnest connected part is less than 4.76 mm, the
nominal shear block rupture resistance, Rn , shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of this section.
Connections in which the thickness of the thinnest connected part is equal to or greater than 4.76 mm must be
calculated in accordance with Chapter F.2 of this Regulation.
The nominal resistance to rupture per shear block, Rn , will be determined as the lower value between equations
F.4.5.5-3 and F.4.5.5-4.
= A F A + y gv u nt
R 0.6F
n (F.4.5.5-3)
= A F A + u nt
R n0.6F u nv (F.4.5.5-4)
For bolted connections ÿ = 0.65
For welded connections ÿ = 0.60
Where:
Agv = gross area subjected to shear
Anv = net area subjected to shear
Ant = net area subjected to tension
F.4.5.6 — CONNECTIONS TO OTHER MATERIALS
F.4.5.6.1 — Support — Mechanisms necessary to transfer support loads from steel components covered by this
specification to adjacent structural components made of other materials shall be provided.
F.4.5.6.2 — Tension — The pullout shear produced in the steel sheet by tensile forces around the head of the fastener
must be considered, as well as the tearing of the fastener resulting from the forces produced by axial loads and
bending moments transmitted on the fastener. fastener or screw, from several adjacent structural components in the
assembly.
The nominal tensile strength of the fastener and the nominal anchorage strength of adjacent structural components
must be determined by the standards applicable to the product, its specifications, pertinent literature, or a combination
thereof.
F.4.5.6.3 — Shear — The necessary mechanisms must be provided to transfer the shear forces coming from the steel
components covered by this Regulation to the adjacent structural components made of other materials. Shear and
crush resistance on steel components shall not exceed those values permitted by this Regulation. Design shear
strength in fasteners and other material shall not be exceeded. Anchorage requirements must be met. Proper
procedures for handling shear forces in combination with other forces must be followed.
F.4.6 — TESTS FOR SPECIAL CASES
The tests can be carried out by an independent laboratory or by a manufacturer's testing laboratory.
The provisions of this chapter shall not apply to cold-formed steel diaphragms. For these elements, refer to the specifications
in section F.4.4.5
F-396
F.4.6.1 — TESTS TO DETERMINATE THE STRUCTURAL BEHAVIOR
F.4.6.1.1 — Design with Load and Resistance Coefficients (DCCR) — When it is required to determine the structural
behavior through tests, the procedure described below must be followed:
(a) The evaluation of the results must be based on the average value of the data obtained from testing with not less
than three identical specimens, provided that the deviation between the result of any individual test and the
average value of the entire study does not exceed ±15%
If such deviation from the average value exceeds 15%, further tests of the same class should be performed
until the deviation between the result of any individual test and the average obtained from the entire study does
not exceed 15% or until, at least, have performed three additional trials. No test result will be removed unless
there are strong grounds for its exclusion. The average value of all the tests will then be considered as the
nominal resistance, Rn , for the series of tests. The Rn value and the coefficient of variation Vp of the test
results shall be determined by means of statistical analysis.
(b) The strength of the tested elements, assemblies, connections, or members shall satisfy Equation F.4.6.1-1:
ÿÿiiQR
n ÿf (F.4.6.1-1)
Where:
ÿÿi i Q
= required resistance based on the most critical load combination and determined according to section
F.4.1.5.1.2. i ÿ and Qi are loading factors and effects of
load, respectively.
Phi = resistance factor
2 2 22 ÿb
= VVPP
o MF CV QV+++
C MFP
(
Phi
e
mmm
) (F.4.6.1-2)
Where:
Cÿ = calibration coefficient
= 1.52
= 1.6 for beams with the flange in tension attached, throughout its length, to a metal deck or cladding
panel and with the compression flange not laterally braced Mm = mean value of the
material factor , M , presented in table F. 4.6.1-1 for the type of
component involved
Fm = average value of the manufacturing factor, F , presented in table F.4.6.1-1 for the type of
component involved
Pm = average value of the professional factor, P , for the tested component
= 1.0
It is = base of natural logarithm =
2.718
ÿo = reliability index of the objective
= 2.5 for structural members and 3.5 for connections = 1.5 for
beams with the flange in tension attached, for its entire length, to a metal deck or closing panel and with
the compression flange not laterally braced
VM = coefficient of variation of the material factor presented in table F.4.6.1-1 for the type
of component involved
VF = coefficient of variation of the manufacturing factor presented in table F.4.6.1-1 for the type of component
involved Cp = correction factor = ( )
( ) ÿ for n 4 ÿ = 5.7 for n 3 =
1 +1n m m 2 (F.4.6.1-3)
F-397
Where:
n = number of trials m =
degrees of freedom = n 1 ÿ
Vp = coefficient of variation of the test results, not less than 6.5% VQ = coefficient of
variation of the load effect
= 0.21
= 0.43 for beams with the flange in tension attached, along its entire length, to a metal deck or
cladding panel and with the compression flange not laterally braced
Rn = average value of all test results
The values recorded in table F.4.6.1-1 will not exclude the use of other documented statistical data if
the latter are established from sufficient results on the properties of the material and its manufacture.
For steels not listed in section F.4.1.2.1, the Mm and Vm values will be determined by statistical analysis
of the materials used.
When some distortions interfere with the proper performance of the specimen in actual use, the loading
effects based on the combination of critical load and the incidence of acceptable distortion shall also
satisfy Equation F.4.6.1-1, except that the resistance factor ÿ will be taken as unity and the load factor
for dead load will be taken as 1.0
(c) The mechanical properties of the steel sheet shall be determined based on representative samples of
the material taken from the test specimen or the flat sheet used to form the test specimen. The
mechanical properties reported by the steel supplier will not be used in the evaluation of the test results.
If the yield stress of the steel from which the sections tested are formed is greater than the specified
value, the test results shall be lowered to the specified minimum yield stress of the steel the manufacturer
intends to use. The test results will not be increased if the yield stress of the test specimen is less than
the specified minimum yield stress.
Similar adjustments should be made based on ultimate strength in those cases where ultimate strength
is the critical factor. Variations that may occur between the design thickness and the thickness of the
specimens used in the tests must also be considered.
Table F.4.6.1-1
Statistical data for the determination of the resistance factor
Component Type Mm Vm Fm VF
Transverse stiffeners 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05
Shear stiffeners 1.00 0.06 1.00 0.05
Limbs under tension 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05
flexed limbs
Flexural strength 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05
Resistance to torsional lateral buckling 1.00 0.06 1.00 0.05
A fin attached for its entire length to a panel or 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05
Board
shear strength 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05
Combined bending and shear 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05
Soul Wrinkle Resistance 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05
Combined bending and web wrinkling 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05
Concentrically Loaded Compression Members 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05
Combined axial load and bending 1.05 0.10 1.00 0.05
... keep going
F-398

Statistical data for the determination of the resistance factor
Component Type Mm Vm Fm VF
Cylindrical tubular members
bending strength 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05
axial compression 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05
Wall studs and wall stud assemblies
Wall studs in compression 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05
Wall studs in flexure 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.05
Wall studs with axial load and bending 1.05 0.10 1.00 0.05
Combined
Structural members not listed in this table 1.00 0.10 1.00 0.05
soldered connections
Arc Weld Spots
Shear resistance of welds 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.10
Ultimate tensile strength of welds 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.10
plate failure 1.10 0.08 1.00 0.15
Arc Weld Beads
plate tear 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.10
fillet welds
plate failure 1.10 0.08 1.00 0.15
Flare groove welds
plate failure 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.10
resistance welds 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.10
bolted connections
bolt shear strength 1.10 0.08 1.00 0.05
ultimate tensile strength of bolt 1.10 0.08 1.00 0.05
Minimum spacing and edge distance 1.10 0.08 1.00 0.05
Tensile strength in net section 1.10 0.08 1.00 0.05
crush resistance 1.10 0.08 1.00 0.05
bolted connections
Screw shear strength 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.10
ultimate tensile strength of bolt 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.10
Minimum spacing and edge distance 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.10
Tensile strength in net section 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.10
Tilt and crush resistance 1.10 0.08 1.00 0.05
screw tearing 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.10
Tearing of material in contact with the head of the bolt or washer 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.10
Combined shear and tear forces of material in contact with head 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.10
or washer
Connections not listed in this table 1.10 0.10 1.00 0.15
F.4.6.2 — STRUCTURAL PERFORMANCE CONFIRMATION TESTS — For structural members, connections and
assemblies for which the nominal resistance is calculated in accordance with the provisions of this Regulation or its
specific references, confirmation tests will be allowed to demonstrate that the resistance is not less than the nominal
resistance, Rn , specified in this Regulation or its specific references for the type of behavior under study.
F.4.6.3 — TESTS TO DETERMINATE THE MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
F.4.6.3.1 — Complete section — The tests to determine the mechanical properties of the complete sections to
be used in numeral F.4.1.6.2 will be carried out as described below:
F-399
(a) The tensile test procedures must be in accordance with NTC 3353.
(ASTM A370-05)
(b) Compressive yield stress determinations shall be made by compression tests on short specimens1 of
the full section.
The compressive yield stress will be taken as the lower value of the maximum compressive strength
divided by the cross-sectional area or the stress defined by one of the following two methods.
(1) For steels with well-defined yield, the yield stress is determined by the autographic diagram
method or by the method of total deformation under loads.
(2) For gradually creeping steels, the stress is determined by the deformation method
under load or by the 0.2% parallel method.
When using the total deformation under load method, the yield stress determined must not have a
difference greater than 5% with respect to the yield stress determined by the parallel method at 0.2%.
(c) When the main effect on the member corresponds to flexural stresses for service loads, the yield stress
shall be determined only for the flanges. For the determination of such yield stress, each specimen
shall consist of a complete fin, plus a portion of the web with a ratio of flat width such that the value of
ÿ for the specimen is equal to unity.
(d) For acceptance and control purposes, a full section test shall be made for each
mother roll
(e) The use of tests, whether in tension or compression, for routine approval and control purposes shall be
permitted, at the manufacturer's option, provided the manufacturer demonstrates that such tests reliably
indicate the yield stress of the section when subject to the class of stress under which the member is
to be used.
F.4.6.3.2 — Flat elements of formed sections — The tests for the determination of the mechanical properties of
flat elements of formed sections and the representative mechanical properties of virgin steel to be used in section
F.4.1.6.2 will be carried out in accordance with with this section.
The flat part yield stress, Fyf , shall be establishedby means of a weighted average of the yield stresses of standard
tensile test specimens taken longitudinally from the flat portions of a representative cold-formed member. The
weighted average shall be the sum of the products of the average yield stress for each flat portion multiplied by the
cross-sectional area, divided by the total area of the flats in the cross-section. The exact number of such test
samples will depend on the shape of the member. In the cross section, at least one sample should be taken from
the middle of each flat part. If the actual virgin yield stress exceeds the specified minimum yield stress, the flat part
yield stress, Fyf , shall be adjusted by multiplying the test values by the ratio of the specified minimum yield stress
to the actual virgin yield stress.
F.4.6.3.3 — Virgin steel — The following provisions shall apply to steels produced differently from those listed in
section F.4.1.2.1, under NTC (or ASTM) specifications, and used in sections for which the yield stress The increase
in steel after cold forming is calculated from the properties of virgin steel in accordance with Section F.4.1.6.2. For
acceptance and control purposes, at least four tensile specimens shall be taken from each mother roll for
establishment of representative values of virgin tensile yield stress and ultimate tensile strength. Test samples shall
be taken longitudinally at a distance from the outer edge of the roll equal to one quarter of the width.
For more information on this test, refer to document AISI S902.
F-400
F.4.7 — METALLIC PANELS FOR WORK IN COMPOSITE SECTION

The provisions of this part of the Regulations apply to slabs or diaphragms designed and built with a metal deck on which a concrete pour is made.
Everything stipulated in this section is in accordance with numerals F.4.1 to F.4.5 of this standard, except where otherwise indicated.
The plans must clearly specify the technical solution of the system and show the installation details as well as the accessories to be used.
F.4.7.1 — SCOPE — This part of the Regulation refers to steel decks for decks with composite behavior. The deck is cold formed and acts as a
permanent formwork and positive flexural reinforcement for structural concrete. When properly fastened, the steel deck also acts as a work platform for
various construction activities. After the concrete has cured it forms a bond with the steel deck due to the geometry of the metal panel, mechanical
means, surface adhesion or a combination of all of these means. Figure F.4.7.1-1 shows the typical cross section of a composite behavior slab with a
steel deck.
Figure F.4.7.1-1 — Cross section of slab or mezzanine in composite behavior with a metal deck
F.4.7.2 — MATERIALS — Composite performance steel deck deck shall be fabricated following the guidelines set forth in sections F.4.1 through F.4.5
of this standard, unless otherwise stated in this section. The steel used for its formation must have a minimum yield stress of 230 MPa (33 ksi). The
minimum thickness of the sheet, accepted for the manufacture of the metallic work deck in composite section, corresponds to a base steel thickness of
0.71 mm (type or gauge 22), according to section F.4.7.2.1 and table F. .4.7.2-2.
F.4.7.2.1 – Tolerances – The tolerances applicable in the manufacture of the board are listed in table F.4.7.2-1:
Table F.4.7.2-1
Board manufacturing tolerances
panel length ±12 mm

It should not be less than 95% of the design
Thickness thickness.
+20 mm ,
Useful width of the panel

ÿ10 mm
arrow and curvature 6 mm in 3.00 m of length 1 0 mm
Panel end out of square per meter of panel width
If published product literature does not list the thickness of the uncoated material in millimeters (or tenths of an inch), but does list the type or
gauge numbers, the thickness of the steel before paint or metal coating (base thickness according to section F.4.1.2.4) must be in accordance
with the provisions of table F.4.7.2-2
F-401
Table F.4.7.2-2
Design and minimum acceptable thicknesses of material before coating
Design Thickness in Minimum thickness in

like the caliber
mm 0.0295 mm 0.0280
22 0.75 0.0329 0.71 0.0311
21 0.84 0.0358 0.79 0.0340
20 0.91 0.86
19 1.06 0.0418 1.01 0.0398
18 1.20 0.0474 1.14 0.0449
17 1.37 0.0538 1.30 0.0512
16 1.52 0.0598 1.44 0.0567
F.4.7.2.2 — Finishes — The finish on steel composite deck deck shall be specified by the designer and shall be
suitable for the environment in which the structure is located.
Since the deck is the flexural reinforcement for the slab, it must be designed to work throughout the useful life of
the structure. The minimum finish must be a zinc galvanized coating G60 (Z180), in accordance with NTC 4011
(ASTM A653/A653M)
F.4.7.3 — DESIGN OF THE DECK AS FORMAT — The section properties of the steel deck must be calculated in
accordance with the provisions of sections F.4.2 to F.4.5 of these Regulations.
Figure F.4.7.3-1 — Load, moments, deflections, and reactions diagrams during

construction with metal deck deck
F-402
F.4.7.3.1 — Design by Allowable Efforts (DEA) — The interaction of shear and bending must be considered in
the calculations. The stress due to bending shall not exceed 0.6 times the yield stress of with a maximum of 250
design, Fy , MPa, under the combined loads of fresh concrete, metal panel and
the following minimum construction live loads: 1.0 kPa uniformly distributed load or a 2.2 kN concentrated load
in a 1.0 m width. Refer to figure F.4.7.3-1 for the load conditions during construction when the deck works as a
formwork. The metal deck must be selected to support a minimum distributed load of 2.4 kPa. For simple spans,
the fresh concrete load must be at least the lesser of its own weight increased by 50% or 1.5 kPa.
F.4.7.3.2 — Design with Load and Resistance Coefficients (DCCR) — The load factors to be used for the
construction conditions shown in figure F.4.7.3-1 must be in accordance with Title B of this Regulation . The
interaction between shear and bending must be verified. The required strength shall be calculated taking into
account the combined loads of fresh concrete, metal panel, and the following minimum construction live loads:
1.0 kPa uniformly distributed load or 2.2 kN concentrated load over a 1.0 m width. The metal deck must be
selected to support a minimum distributed load of 2.4 kPa. For simple spans, the fresh concrete load must be at
least the lesser of its own weight increased by 50% or 1.5 kPa.
The resistance factors for bending, shear, and internal support shall be determined in accordance with the
requirements of sections F.4.3 to F.4.5 of this specification.
F.4.7.3.3 — Deflections — The calculated theoretical deflections for the steel deck working as form shall be
based on the weight of the fresh concrete, determined from the design thickness of the slab, and the self-weight
of the uniformly loaded metal panel at all lights (see figure F.4.7.3-1 column 2). Deflections shall be limited to the
lesser of L 180 or 20 mm, measured with respect to the supporting members. Construction loads are not taken
into account for the calculation of deflections due to their temporary nature.
F.4.7.3.4 — Minimum Support Length — Minimum support lengths shall be determined in accordance with the
provisions of Section F.4.3.3.4 of this standard. To calculate these lengths, the load of the fresh concrete, the
self-weight of the metal panel, and a construction load of 1.0 kPa must be used. (see figure F.4.7.3-1 column 3)
A minimum support of 40 mm is recommended to prevent slippage of the sheet with respect to its support,
however, this must be calculated following the provisions of the previous paragraph. The steel deck must be
adequately fastened to prevent it from slipping. The wrinkling capacity of the core of the deck, in interior supports,
can be increased by 33% due to temporary construction loads.
F.4.7.4 — ON-SITE STORAGE AND INSTALLATION
F.4.7.4.1 — On-Site Storage — The steel panel bundle should be off the ground with one end raised to provide
sufficient drainage and weather protected with a waterproof cover, sufficiently ventilated to prevent condensation.
F.4.7.4.2 — Deck Installation — Each deck unit must be placed on the support structure. It must be adjusted to
its final position, with its longitudinal overlaps well aligned and the ends resting on the structural members without
staggering on the supports. All metal panels must be aligned longitudinally in the different openings.
F.4.7.4.3 — Butt End Edges — Panel sheets must butt over supports. The maximum tolerance in the length of
12 mm must be taken into account (refer to section F.4.7.2.1)
The overlap on the supports of the sheets is not convenient due to the shear ridges (embossed in the web) or
that the profile of the cross section can prevent the fit sheet to sheet. The gap between overlapping sheets can
make the welding fastening operation more difficult. The spaces between the extreme edges of the sheets are
acceptable, and the placement of special tapes may be required to seal the joint.
F-403
F.4.7.4.4 — Anchorage — Deck deck sheets must be anchored to supporting members (including steel framing
and/or load-bearing walls along the longitudinal perimeter and not just transverse), either by welding or by
fasteners. mechanics. This clamping should be done immediately after alignment. The minimum anchorage for
the installation of the sheet is specified in section F.4.7.4.4.1. The steel deck should not be walked or parked until
these minimum anchors have been made. The units of the metal deck with separations between supports greater
than 1.5 m must have longitudinal fasteners in the overlaps sheet to sheet and sheet to perimeter edge (the
perimeter with the steel or concrete structural member), in the middle of the span or at intervals of 1.0 m, the
lesser of the two. These longitudinal fasteners will be placed from the center of the light towards the supports.
Under no circumstances should sheets be left unfastened, always guaranteeing the anchoring of the boards. The
objective of the fastener in the longitudinal lap is to prevent differential deflections between the sheets or boards
during the pouring of the concrete and therefore avoid the separation of the longitudinal joint.
Gaps caused by welding during sheet clamping operations must not be admitted. A suitable anchoring system
must be selected.
F.4.7.4.4.1 — Welding — Welding procedures will be strictly in accordance with the specifications of
section F.4.5 of these Regulations, or a default to the provisions of numeral F.2. A minimum 15mm
diameter spot weld, or equivalent, is required on the side ridges of the metal deck above the support, plus
an additional number of intermediate spot welds to achieve an average spacing of 300mm. The maximum
spacing between adjacent fastening points will not exceed 460 mm. Where fillet welds are used they must
be at least 25mm in length. The filler metal will penetrate all layers of deck material at the end of the
longitudinal lap over the support and will have a good fusion to the supporting structural members. Weld
washers must be used on all 0.71 mm (22 gauge) base thickness panel units. The washers will have a
minimum thickness of 1.50 mm (16 gauge), and a nominal drilling diameter of 10 mm.
F.4.7.4.4.2 — Mechanical Fasteners — Mechanical fasteners (screws, pneumatically anchored, or

powder-actuated fasteners) may be used as anchoring means, provided the type and spacing of the
fastener meet the design criteria. For the approval of its use, the bra manufacturer must present the
documented tests, design formulas and tables.
F.4.7.5 — DESIGN OF BOARD AND CONCRETE AS A COMPOSITE UNIT
F.4.7.5.1— General — The composite deck system shall be designed as a reinforced concrete slab with the steel
deck acting as the positive reinforcement. Slabs should be designed as single or continuous span systems under
uniform loads. The height or thickness of the slab corresponds to the distance measured from the bottom of the
metal deck to the top plane of the concrete.
Special considerations for concentrated loads (section F.4.7.7.4) and behavior as a diaphragm require further
analysis. The horizontal load capacity must be analyzed with accepted rational procedures2 . Its behavior as a
diaphragm must be approved by the design engineer.
If the designer requires a continuous slab system on the supports, the presence of negative reinforcement must
be guaranteed using the conventional equations for reinforced concrete, in accordance with the provisions of Title
C of this standard. The electro-welded mesh, in case of being selected as the reinforcement by temperature, does
not guarantee by itself the sufficient area of steel to achieve the behavior as a continuous slab (see section
F.4.7.5.5). The metal deck cannot be considered as compression reinforcement in the case of cantilevers. Special
care must be taken with loads coming from false ceilings in cantilevers of the composite mezzanine system.
The design procedures of this section cannot be applied to subfloor systems without shear connectors attached
to the support system, without the presence of barriers to concrete setting or other restrictions. The slabs must be
attached to their support system, even with the minimum anchorages for construction of numeral F.4.7.4.4. In the
event that shear connectors are not considered for the
2
Information on this can be found in the SDI Diaphragm Design Manual, Third Edition.
F-404
design, the load capacity per unit area must be determined by concrete-sheet adhesion tests or by the allowable stress
method (DEA) (section F.4.7.5.6.1). The presence of shear connectors in an adequate quantity guarantees the achievement
of the design resistance to bending in the cross section of the slab. The appropriate resistance factor, ÿ , shall be used for
the determination of the design resistance.
F.4.7.5.2 — Tests — The manufacturer may use the applicable design criteria to determine the strength of the slab system
(see section F.4.7.5.6) or, alternatively, the manufacturer shall perform, under professional supervision, a sufficient number
of tests with the slab-board system to guarantee its composite behaviour.
F.4.7.5.2.1 — Load Determination — The available superimposed load capacity shall be determined by standard
reinforced concrete design procedures, using design strength factors or safety factors, as applicable, and reduction
factors based on the presence, absence, or spacing of shear connectors on beams perpendicular to the deck, as
shown in Section F.4.7.5.6.
F.4.7.5.3 — Concrete — The concrete will be in accordance with the provisions of Title C of this Regulation.
The minimum compressive strength, cfÿ , shall be 21 MPa or whatever is required for fire resistance or durability. Additives
containing hydrochloric salts must not be used.
F.4.7.5.3.1 — Minimum Cover — The minimum concrete cover over the crest of the metal deck shall be 50 mm.
When additional negative moment reinforcement is required, the minimum concrete cover over these bars will be
20 mm.
F.4.7.5.4— Deflections — Deflections of the composite deck system shall not exceed L 360 under the superimposed load.
For the composite system these deflections can be calculated using the average of the cracked and uncracked inertia, when
using the transformed section procedure.
F.4.7.5.5 — Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement — Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall consist of
electro-welded mesh or reinforcing bars, with a minimum area of 0.00075 times the area of the , but not less than one mesh.
with an area of 59.3 mm2 of concrete steel on the metal deck per meter of slab width.
Alternatively, steel fibers can be used instead of reinforcing mesh for shrinkage and temperature effects according to NTC
5214 (ASTM A820)3 specifications, in a minimum amount of 14.8 kg/m3 , or macrosynthetic fibers made from of virgin
polyolefin, with an equivalent diameter between 0.4 mm and 1.25 mm with a minimum aspect ratio (equivalent length/
,
diameter) of 50, in a minimum amount of 2.4 kg/m3 .
F.4.7.5.6 — Flexure
F.4.7.5.6.1 — Design Method by Allowable Efforts (DEA) — The allowable flexural resistance must be
determined with the following equation:
M CF S =adm y c (F.4.7.5-1)
Where
Madm = allowable bending resistance4

My = design yield stress determined in Section F.4.1.6.1
Sc = minimum elastic modulus of the cracked transformed cross section = factor of safety
C
3
NTC 5214 – Steel fibers for reinforced concrete There
4
is no correlation between the load capacities found by the two different design methods, DCCR or DEA.
F-405
If the presence of shear connectors in the design is not considered C 0.60 = . If these are considered C it can be
taken equal to 0.75 .
F.4.7.5.6.2 – Design Method with Load and Resistance Coefficients (DCCR) – The flexural design resistance
must be calculated from the standard reinforced concrete design procedures of Title C of this Regulation and the
combinations cargo in accordance with the provisions of Title B of these Regulations. The design resistance to
bending, when enough connectors are available to achieve the maximum capacity of the cross section, as specified
in F.4.7.5.6-3, shall be determined from Equation F.4.7. 5-2:
M AF
ÿ =ÿ d a2 sy ( ÿ
) (F.4.7.5-2)
n
Where:
Mn ÿ = unit width design flexural strength. ÿ = resistance
factor, ÿ = 0.85
Fy = design yield stress determined in section F.4.1.6.1
d = distance from the top of the concrete slab to the centroid of the deck
metallic
As = cross-sectional area of the metal deck
= 0.85fb sy(
a OF )ÿ
c
(F.4.7.5-3)
Where:
cfÿ = compressive strength of concrete, minimum 21 MPa b = unit
width of concrete compressive zone (usually, 1.0 m = 1000 mm)
Additionally, the design resistance to flexure when shear connectors are not available or are not taken into account,
is determined by:
ÿM=SF
n
ÿ cy (F.4.7.5-4)
Donde:
ÿ = 0.85
Fy = design yield stress determined in section F.4.1.6.1 Sc = minimum elastic
modulus of the cracked transformed cross section
Due to the paucity of tests on 16 gauge (1.50 mm) metal decks and the depth of the shear projections (embossed
in the web) required to develop the moment capacity in the cross section, not including the shear connectors, could
not be sufficient in this sheet thickness, the maximum values of flexural resistance must be those obtained for the
system with an 18 gauge (1.20 mm) board. The manufacturer may only publish load tables and maximum capacities
limited to the maximum obtained for a deck system with a 1.2 mm (18 gauge) thick deck. The properties for the
design of the cross section of the metal board must be supplied by the manufacturer of the product.
Linear interpolation between Equations F.4.7.5-2 and F.4.7.5-4 can be performed to obtain the flexural strength of
a slab with insufficient number of shear connectors to achieve the maximum nominal flexural strength. of the cross
section.
F.4.7.5.6.3 — Shear Connectors — The required number of 19 mm diameter shear connector bolts per meter
width to anchor the slab so that the nominal flexural strength in cross section can be achieved shall be estimated.
by the following equation:
s and
( fE
NFAA=ÿ2ÿ A 142.58
s webs bf 1 2 ) () ( )
ÿ
cc
(F.4.7.5-5)
F-406
Where:
Ns = number of 19mm connecting bolts required per meter width = area of steel in mm2 per
As meter width
Awebs = web area in mm2 per meter width = lower web area of
Abf steel in mm2 per meter width
My = design yield stress in MPa determined in Section F.4.1.6.1
Ec
= modulus of elasticity of the concrete in MPa according to Title C of this
Regulation.
The As value is calculated based on the flat width of the material. The properties of the cross section, for the
determination of the required number of shear connectors, must be supplied by the manufacturer of the product, or
failing that, he will present diagrams or plans of the section for the calculation of the areas in obtaining the ns .
F.4.7.5.7 — Shear — The area of concrete available for shear is obtained from Figure F.4.7.5-1.
Because negative reinforcement may or may not be used, it is up to the designer to review whether the area of concrete
over any steel bars should be deducted from the area of concrete available to resist shear forces. The design shear
resistance, Vn ÿ , is the total vertical shear resistance of the composite deck system, multiplied by a resistance factor. This
resistance will be the sum of the shear capacities of the metal deck and the concrete, calculated using equation F.4.7.5-6:
ÿVV
=ÿ V
n +ÿ tab c (F.4.7.5-6)
Therefore: ÿ = resistance factor, ÿ = 0.85

Vn ÿ = design shear resistance of the composite subfloor system Vtab ÿ = design shear
resistance of the metal deck as specified in F.4.3.3.2.1 Vc ÿ = design shear resistance supplied by the concrete, which
can be calculated as:
ÿ
fc
ÿV=ÿ
c
Ac (F.4.7.5-7)
6
Where:
cfÿ = concrete compressive strength in MPa, minimum 21 MPa = concrete area
And available for shear in mm2 obtained from figure F.4.7.5-1
(a)
(b)
F-407
(c)
Figure F.4.7.5-1 — Areas available for shear
F.4.7.5.8 — Combined shear and bending moment
F.4.7.5.8.1 — Design Method by Allowable Efforts (DEA) — The interaction equation for shear and bending
moment is the following:
2 2
ÿÿ M
ÿ Oh ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿ in IN
b
ÿ ÿÿ ÿ + ÿ 1.0 (F.4.7.5-8)
M n
INn
ÿ = 1.60
in
ÿ = 1.67
b
Where:
V = required shear strength M = required
flexural strength Vn = nominal shear
strength according to section F.4.7.5.7 Mn = flexural strength for DEA = F Sy c
(F.4.7.5-9)
Fy and Sc are defined in section F.4.7.5.6.1
Equation F.4.7.5-8 must be used for the interaction of the metal deck acting as formwork (construction stage) and
also when working with concrete as a composite system.
F.4.7.5.8.2 — Design Method with Load and Resistance Coefficients (DCCR) — The interaction equation
between shear and bending moment is:
2 2
ÿ ÿÿMÿ ÿ IN
ÿÿ+ÿ ÿ 1.0 (F.4.7.5-10)
bM
ÿ ÿÿ ÿn
Phi Phi
IN
vn
vÿ = 0.95
bÿ = 0.95
Where:
V = required shear resistance, V Vu =
M = required flexural strength, M Mu =
Vn = nominal shear resistance according to section F.4.7.5.7 Mn = nominal flexural
resistance according to section F.4.7.5.6.2
F-408
Equation F.4.7.5-10 should be used for the interaction of the metal deck acting as formwork (construction
stage) and also when working with concrete as a composite system.
F.4.7.6 — CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURE
F.4.7.6.1 — Temporary Shoring — If temporary shoring is required for the minimum deck superimposed load
condition of 2.4 kPa, it must be secured in place before beginning deck installation. The shoring must be designed
and installed in accordance with the shoring procedures for reinforced concrete stipulated in Title C of this
Regulation. The shoring must remain in place until the concrete reaches 75% of its specified compressive strength
and for a minimum of 7 days.
F.4.7.6.2 — Cleaning — Prior to concrete placement, the steel deck shall be free of dirt, debris, standing water,
drilling debris, or other foreign material.
F.4.7.6.3 — Concrete placement — Special care must be taken during concrete placement so that the deck is
not subjected to any impact in excess of its design capacity. The concrete must be placed from a low level with
respect to the metal panel, to avoid impacts. The pour must be made evenly on the support structure and from
there extend towards the center of the light of the panel. If smaller material hauling equipment is used, boards
must be placed for their transit. Teams can only operate on this platform. The planks will be of adequate rigidity to
transfer the loads to the metal deck without causing damage. All damage from improper concrete placement must
be avoided.
F.4.7.7 — ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS
F.4.7.7.1 — Parking Lots — The use of the composite deck system is appropriate for parking lot buildings.
Practical experience has shown excellent performance. For use in parking buildings, the following considerations
must be taken into account:
(1) Slabs should be designed as continuous span systems with reinforcement for moment
Negative on supports.
(2) If necessary, additional reinforcement must be provided to stop cracking caused by large temperature
differences and to ensure better load distribution.
(3) In areas with a high saline presence (marine water) protection measures must be taken. A minimum
galvanizing G90 (Z275) is recommended, in accordance with NTC 4011 (ASTM A653/A653M) and
coating the underside of the board with a durable paint. Protective measures must be maintained
throughout the useful life of the structure.
F.4.7.7.2 — Cantilevers — In the case of cantilevers, the deck must only work as a permanent formwork, and
the negative reinforcement required to support the loading condition must be provided. The board should not be
considered as reinforcement in compression.
The maximum allowable stress in the cross section of the metal deck, acting as a cantilever form, shall be 138
MPa (20,000 psi ) calculated under the combined loads of the self-weight of the fresh concrete, the self-weight of
the metal deck, and 1.0 kPa. or the own weight of the fresh concrete, the own weight of the metal deck and a
point load, applied at the end of the cantilever, of 2200 N per meter of width, the most critical of both combinations.
The maximum deflection at the free edge is L 120 where L is the length of the cantilever, under the self-weight
,
loads of the concrete and the self-weight of the deck. A bearing width of 89 mm is assumed for web wrinkling
revision with a combined load of the self-weight of the concrete, the self-weight of the metal deck, and 1.0 kPa. If
the width of the support is less than 89 mm, the manufacturer of the metal panel should be consulted.
F.4.7.7.3 — Composite Section Beams and Joists — Composite deck system sections are appropriate for use
with composite section beams.
F.4.7.7.4 — Spot Loads — Figure F.4.7.7-1 shows the effective distribution widths of a spot load. This analysis
should be done when superimposed loads are applied to the system.
F-409
greater than 20 kPa. The area obtained for distribution steel by this procedure shall not be less than where Ac
is the area of concrete (per unit width) above the crests of the metal deck, which is
ÿ
0.00075Aÿ c
,
different from the area of concrete Ac available for shear. The formulas for the effective distribution widths are as follows:
bb 2t 2t =+ + m2 ct (F.4.7.7-1)
Bending in a single span: b b 21 xL x =+ÿ

( ) (F.4.7.7-2)
in
Where x is the location distance of the load with respect to the support
Flexion in continuous spans: b b 43 1 xL x( =+

)( ÿ ) (F.4.7.7-3)
in
Shear: bb 1 xL x = +ÿ ( ) (F.4.7.7-4)
in
But in no case : ) ,
b 2.71 t h > (
It is c
in meters (F.4.7.7-5a)
Moment about the weak axis:
Pbe
M = (F.4.7.7-6)
15w
Where:
L
w b= + 3 , but must not exceed the value of L (F.4.7.7-7)
2
F.4.7.7.5— Piping — Conduit may be placed in the slab system when the pipe size is 25.4 mm or less in diameter, or less
than 1/3 the concrete cover, without crossing valleys in the deck, and is spaced 460 mm minimum, with a minimum cover of
19 mm, unless design specifications limit a more demanding condition.
(a)
Figure F.4.7.7-1 — Distribution of concentrated loads (continued...)
F-410
(b)
Figure F.4.7.7-1 — Distribution of concentrated loads (continued)
F.4.8 — SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF COLD-FORMED

STEEL FRAMES, DRY-BUILD SYSTEMS, AND TRUSS FRAMES
F.4.8.1 — GENERAL — The provisions of this section are applicable to the design and installation of structural and non-structural members for
cold-formed steel framing5 in which the minimum thickness of ,
the steel is between 0.46 mm and 3.00 mm. Members covered by this section include C-section uprights, joists, guide channels, U-sections,
omega sections, angles, and other members of similar behavior.
F.4.8.2.1— Material Specifications — Structural and nonstructural members shall be cold formed from sheet steel in accordance with
the requirements of ASTM A1003 / A1003M.
F.4.8.2.2 — Base Steel Thickness — Structural and nonstructural members shall be cold formed from sheet steel with the minimum
thickness listed in Table F.4.8.2-1.
5
Specifications for frameworks of dry construction systems (Drywall)
F-411
Table F.4.8.2-1
Standard thicknesses
Design Thickness Minimum thickness of base steel

mm inches mm inches
0.478 0.0188 0.455 0.0179
0.719 0.0283 0.683 0.0269
0.792 0.0312 0.752 0.0296
0.879 0.0346 0.836 0.0329
1.146 0.0451 1.087 0.0428
1.438 0.0566 1.367 0.0538
1.811 0.0713 1.720 0.0677
2.583 0.1017 2.454 0.0966
3.155 0.1242 2.997 0.1180
F.4.8.2.3 — Corrosion Protection — Structural and nonstructural members shall meet the minimum metallic
coating requirements listed in Table F.4.8.2-2 (mass of coating per unit area). The use of alternative coatings is
permitted if their equivalence is demonstrated.
Table F.4.8.2-2
Minimum requirements for metallic coatings (mass per unit area)
Material Designation Coating designation

H type and L type G60 [Z180]A AZ50 [AZM150]B
Type NS G40 [Z120]A AZ50 [AZM150)B
A
Zinc-coated steel sheets in accordance with NTC 4011 specification
(ASTM A653/A653M)
B
Steel sheets coated with 55% aluminum-zinc alloy according to the NTC 4015 specification
(ASTM A792/A792M)
F.4.8.3 — PRODUCTS
F.4.8.3.1 — Product Designation — To reference structural and nonstructural members, a four-part nomenclature
shall be used, identifying size (both web height and flange width), style, and thickness, according to the following
sequential codes:
A first number of 3 or 4 digits indicating the height of the web of the member in millimeters, followed by a letter
indicating:
P = member of a framing, stud or joist, with flanges

G = guide channel section
U = channel or paral section of a framework without flanges
O = omega section
L = angled section
A third number of 3 or 4 digits that indicates the width of the fin in millimeters, followed by a hyphen, and a last
number indicating the thickness in millimeters.
When members are used for structural applications, the grade (strength) of the material must be specified on all
documents and drawings.
F.4.8.3.2 — Standard Geometry — The standard geometry for structural and non-structural members is shown
in Figure F.4.8.3-1 and can correspond to any combination of the basic dimensions listed in Tables F.4.8.3- 1 to
F.4.8.3-5, depending on the type of member.
F-412
Figure F.4.8.3-1 — Typical members for cold-formed sheet framing.
Table F.4.8.3-1
Standard dimensions for studs and joists in section C (P)
Soul Height Fin Width

(design height) (design width)
mm in mm in
41.3 1-5/8 31.8 1-1/4
63.5 2-1/2 34.9 1-3/8
88.9 3-1/2 41.3 1-5/8
92.1 3-5/8 50.8
102 63.5 2 2-1/2
140 4 76.2
152 88.9 3 3-1/2
203
254 5-1/2 6 8 10
305 12
356 14
F-413
Table F.4.8.3-2
Standard dimensions for guide channels (G)

mm In mm in
41.3 1-5/8 31.8 1-1/4
63.5 2-1/2 50.8
88.9 3-1/2 63.5 2
92.1 3-5/8 76.2 2-1/2 3
102 4
140 5-1/2
152 6
203 8
254 10
305 12
356 14
Table F.4.8.3-3
Standard dimensions for U sections (U)

mm in mm in 1/2
19.1 3/4 12.7 3/4
38.1 1-1/2 19.1
50.8
63.5 2 2-1/2
Table F.4.8.3-4
Standard dimensions for omega profiles (O)

mm in mm in
22.2 7/8 31.8 1-1/4
38.1 1-1/2
Table F.4.8.3-5
Standard dimensions for angles (L)
Fin Width “A” Fin width "B"

mm in mm in
15.9 5/8 15.9 5/8
22.2 7/8 22.2 7/8
34.9 1-3/8 34.9 1-3/8
38.1 1-1/2 38.1 1-1/2
50.8 2 50.8 2
76.2 3 76.2 3
F.4.8.3.3 — Internal Bend Radius — The size of the internal bend radius used for design shall meet the requirements
shown in Table F.4.8.3-6.
F-414
Table F.4.8.3-6
Internal bend radius for design
Design thickness mm Internal bend radius in. 0.0843

(in) 0.478 mm
(0.0188) 0.719 2.141 0.0796
(0.0283) 0.792 2.022 0.0781
(0.0312) 0.879 1.984
(0.0346) 1.146 1.941 0.0764
(0.0451) 1.438 1.808 0.0712
(0.0566) 1.811 2.156 0.0849
(0.0713) 2.583 2.715 0.1069
(0.1017) 3.155 3.874 0.1525
(0.1242) 4.732 0.1863
F.4.8.3.4 — Flange Length — The flange length on a structural or nonstructural member, stud or joist, at C section
shall be related to the flange width, as shown in Table F.4.8. .3-7.
Table F.4.8.3-7
Design Flange Length for Studs and Joists in C-sections
Fin Width in 1-1/4 Design Length of Flange in 3/16 3/8

Section
mm 1-3/8 mm
P31.8 31.8 4.8
P34.9 34.9 9.5
P41.3 41.3 1-5/8 12.7 1/2
P50.8 50.8 15.9 5/8
P63.5 63.5 2 15.9 5/8
P76.2 76.2 15.9 5/8
P88.9 88.9 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 25.4 1
F.4.8.3.5 — Perforations — Perforations made by the manufacturer must comply with the following conditions,
unless the manufacturer specifies otherwise:
(1) The holes must be made along the longitudinal axis of the web of the member of
framework.
(2) The holes must have a center-to-center spacing of not less than 600 mm.
(3) Perforations must have a width not greater than half the height of the member or 63.5 mm,
whichever is less.
(4) The perforations must have a length no greater than 114 mm.
(5) The distance from the center of the last hole to the end of the structural member must not be less than
305 mm, unless otherwise specified.
Any configuration or combination of perforations that conform to the limitations, in widths and length, previously
exposed, is allowed.
F.4.8.3.6 — Product marking
F.4.8.3.6.1 — Structural members — Structural members must be legibly marked with the following
minimum information:
(1) Manufacturer (Name, logo or initials)

(2) Thickness of base steel
(3) Minimum Yield Stress (not required if Grade 33 [230 MPa])
(4) Coating (not necessary if G60 [Z180])
F.4.8.3.6.2 — Non-structural members — Non-structural members must be legibly marked with the
following minimum information:
F-415
(1) Manufacturer (Name, logo or initials)

(2) Thickness of base steel
(3) Minimum Yield Stress (not required if Grade 33 [230 MPa])
(4) Coating (not necessary if G40 [Z120])
F.4.8.3.6.3 — Color coding — When using color coding for members or packages of similar members,
the classification presented in Table F.4.8.3-8 shall be used.
Table F.4.8.3-8
Standard color coding
design thickness Color

mm
0.478 None
0.719 Negro
0.792 Rosado
0.879 White
1.146 Yellow
1.438 Green
1.811 Orange
2.583 Red
3.155 Blue
F.4.8.3.7 — Manufacturing Tolerances — Structural members shall comply with the manufacturing tolerances
listed in Table F.4.8.3-9. Non-structural members shall comply with the manufacturing tolerances listed in Table
F.4.8.3-10.
Table F.4.8.3-9
Manufacturing tolerances for structural members
DimensionA revised item Parales, mm Guide Channels, mm

+2.38 +12.7
A Length
-2.38 -6.35
+0.79 +0.79
BB soul height
-0.79 +3.18
encamped +1.59 +0
C
excess fold -1.59 -2.38
Width to center of hole +1.59 THAT
D
-1.59 NA
hole center length +6.35 NA
AND
-6.35 NA
+1.59 +1.59
F Corona
-1.59 -1.59
G Lateral curvature 2.6 per m 2.6 per m

12.7 max. 12.7 max.
H Bow 2.6 per m 2.6 per m

12.7 max. 12.7 max.
2.6 per m 2.6 per m
I
Torsion (axial twist)
12.7 max. 12.7 max.
A
All measurements must be taken at a distance of not less than 305mm from the end
B
Dimension between external faces for Uprights, internal faces for Guide Channels
F-416
Figure F.4.8.3-2 — Manufacturing tolerances for structural members
Table F.4.8.3-10
Manufacturing tolerances for non-structural members
DimensionA revised item Parales, mm Guide Channels, mm

+3.18 +25.4
A Length
-6.35 -6.35
BB
+0.79 +3.18
soul height
-0.79 -0
encamped +1.59 +0
C
excess fold -1.59 -4.76
Width to center of hole +3.18 NA
D
-3.18 NA
hole center length +6.35 THAT
AND
-6.35 THAT
+3.18 +3.18
F Corona
-3.18 -3.18
G Lateral curvature 2.6 per m 2.6 per m

12.7 max. 12.7 max.
H Bow 2.6 per m 2.6 per m

12.7 max. 12.7 max.
2.6 per m 2.6 per m
I
Torsion (axial twist)
12.7 max. 12.7 max.
A
All measurements must be taken at a distance of not less than 305 mm from the end
B
Dimension between external faces for uprights, internal faces for Guide Channels
F-417
Figure F.4.8.3-3 — Manufacturing tolerances for non-structural members
F.4.8.4 — DESIGN — The determination of the resistance of the members for framing systems will be in accordance
with the provisions of numerals F.4.1, F.4.2, F.4.3 and F.4.4 of this Regulation, except when be modified in this section.
F.4.8.4.1 — Section properties — For C sections and other cross sections with simple geometry (see Figure
F.4.8.3-1), the properties are determined according to conventional structural design methods. These properties
must be based on the total cross sections, except when the use of a reduced cross section is required or an
effective design width is required in accordance with the specifications of numerals F.4.2 to F.4.4 of this
Regulation. For other cross-sectional geometries, the properties shall be based on tests, in accordance with
section F.4.6.
F.4.8.4.2 — Design of wall studs — The members for framework systems will be in accordance with what is
specified in this Regulation. Members must be in good condition. Damaged members shall be replaced or
repaired in accordance with the approved design. Wall studs should be designed based on an all-steel or deck-
braced design. The webs must not have perforations, or if they do, they must be in accordance with the provisions
of sections F.4.2 to F.4.5.
(a) All-Steel Design — Wall stud assemblies using the criteria for all-steel behavior shall be designed
without regard to structural bracing and/or the compound action contribution of the decks to which
they are attached. joined.
(b) Board Braced Design— Wall stud assemblies using deck-inclusive criteria shall be designed
assuming identical boards are installed on both sides of the stud and are connected to the horizontal
members located on top and bottom of the wall to provide lateral and torsional support to the stud in
the plane of the wall. Uprights whose side closure boards installed on both sides are not identical
shall be designed with the assumption that the weaker of the two boards is attached to both sides.
F-418
When a deck-braced design is used, the plans must specify the deck as a structural element. However,
the studs must be checked without considering the bracing due to the deck, for the following load
combination:
1.2D +0.5L
( ó 0.2G 0.2W
) + (F.4.8.4-1)
Where:
D = dead load
L = live load
G = hail load
W = wind load
F.4.8.4.2.1 — Axial Load — Both ends of the upright shall be restrained against rotation about the
longitudinal axis of the member, as well as displacement perpendicular to it.
(a) For columns in compression, considering the all-steel design, the axial load capacity is defined
in sections F.4.3.4 and F.4.4.4.1. The effective length, KL is determined by means of suitable
analysis and/or tests, or in the absence of these, Kx , Ky and Kt shall be taken equal to unity.
,
The unbraced length with respect to the main axis, Lx , is the end support of the member,
while the unbraced lengths Ly and Lt are to be should be taken as the distance between
taken as the distances between braces.
(b) For studs in compression, considering the bracing of the decks, the axial resistance shall be
determined in accordance with the provisions of this section.
The axial resistance shall be calculated according to section F.4.3.4. The unbraced length with respect to
the main axis, Lx , shall be taken as the distance between end supports of the member.
The unbraced length about the minor axis, Ly and the unbraced length for torsion, Lt , shall be taken as
twice the distance between deck connectors. The buckling coefficients Kx , Ky and Kt must be taken
equal to unity.
To prevent failure of the stud-to-board connection, when installing equal gypsum boards on both sides of
the wall, with screws spaced 305 mm center to center maximum, the maximum axial load rating on the
wall stud shall be limited to the values given in table F.4.8.4-1.
Table F.4.8.4-1
Maximum nominal axial load by capacity of the stud-drywall connection
screw size Nominal (specified) maximum axial

Gypsum Board
load for parallel 25.8 kN 29.8
12.7 mm No. 6 kN 30.2
12.7 mm No. 8 kN 34.7
15.9 mm No. 6 kN
15.9 mm No. 8
F.4.8.4.2.2 — Flexure — For a completely steel design, the guidelines of section F.4.3.3.1.2.1 and
F.4.3.3.1.4 will be followed, to determine the flexural resistance.
For design considering the bracing by the decks, and ignoring any rotational restriction provided by them,
the provisions of section F.4.3.3.1.1 will be used to determine the design flexural resistance.
F.4.8.4.2.3 — Shear — For a completely steel design, or considering the composite behavior with gypsum
boards, the design shear resistance must be that defined in numeral F.4.3.3.2.
F-419
F.4.8.4.2.4 — Axial Load and Flexural — For all-steel design, or considering composite behavior with
gypsum board, the axial and flexural strength must satisfy the interaction equations in Section F.4.3. .5.
F.4.8.4.2.5 — Web deformation — For all-steel design, or composite design with decks, the deformation
resistance of the web of the member, Pn , shall be determined in accordance with Section F.4.3.3.4, o Pn
must be modified according to section F.4.8.4.2.7.2 to take into account the increase in resistance due to the
guide channel.
F.4.8.4.2.6 — Reinforced Sections — For all-steel design, or in conjunction with decks, the design strength
of reinforced sections is defined in F.4.4.1. When the applicable connection requirements are not met, the
design strength of the reinforced sections shall be equal to the sum of the design resistances of the individual
members of the cross section of the reinforced member.
F.4.8.4.2.7 — Design of connections for wall studs
F.4.8.4.2.7.1 — Fastening Methods — Screws, bolts, and welded connections must be designed in
accordance with the requirements of F.4.5 and described in this section. For connections with other
types of fasteners, the design strength shall be determined by testing in accordance with Section
F.4.6.1.
F.4.8.4.2.7.2 — Connection of C-section stud to guide channel — The connection of the stud to
the guide channel must satisfy the requirements for resistance to wrinkling of the web of the stud, in
accordance with Section F.4.8.4.2.5 , or as defined in this section.
(a) For curtain wall studs that are not adjacent to openings (doors and windows), where both stud
fins are connected to guide channels and the thickness of the guide channel is greater than or
equal to the thickness of the stud, the nominal resistance Pnst , is determined according to the
equation F.4.8.4-2, which is shown below:
ÿ R Nh
ÿÿ 2 ÿÿ ÿ
PnstCt=ÿF+1 C R
1C Nh
1C ÿ
ÿ (F.4.8.4-2)
y t tt
ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿ
Where:
C = wrinkling coefficient of the web = 3.7 CR = internal
bending radius coefficient = 0.19 CN = support length
coefficient = 0.74 Ch = slenderness coefficient of the
web = 0.019 R = internal bending radius of the stud N
= length h -post support
= height of the flat portion of the web of the post, measured along its plane = design
t thickness of the post ÿ = 0.90
The previous equation is valid for the following range of parameters:
Screw Size: #8, minimum
Cross section:
Design thickness: 0.88 mm to 1.96 mm
Design yield strength: 228 MPa to 345 MPa Nominal height:
88.9 mm to 152.4 mm
Guide Channel Section:

Design Thickness: 0.88 mm to 1.96 mm
Yield Strength: 228 MPa to 345 MPa
F-420
Nominal Height: 88.9mm to 152.4mm Nominal

Wing Width: 31.8mm to 60.3mm
(b) For curtain wall studs that are not adjacent to openings and when both stud flanges are connected
to the guide channel flanges and the guide channel thickness is less than the stud thickness, the
nominal strength, Pnst , shall be the lower value obtained from equations F.4.8.4-2 or F.4.8.4-3:
Pst
0.6t
= w F nst t
ut (F.4.8.4-3)
Where:
t
t
= design thickness of the guide channel in mm
w st20t
t 0.56 = +a
ÿ = 25.4
Fut = ultimate resistance to tension of the guide channel

Pnst = nominal resistance for the connection of the pole to the guide channel when it is
subject to transverse loads
ÿ = 0.90
The above equation is valid within the following range of parameters:
Screw Size: #8, minimum
Cross section:
88.9 mm to 152.4 mm
Guide Channel Section:

Design Thickness: 0.88 mm to 1.96 mm
Design Yield Strength: 228 MPa to 345 MPa Nominal Height:
88.9 mm to 152.4 mm Nominal Wing Width: 31.8 mm to 60.3 mm
(c) For curtain wall studs that are adjacent to openings and when both flanges are connected to the
guide channel flanges, and the guide channel terminates at the opening, the nominal resistance
shall be taken as 0.5P using Pnst and ÿ as shown .nstdetermined in section F.4.8.4.2.7.2(a) when
the thickness of the guide channel is greater than or equal to the thickness of the stud, or in
section F.4.8.4.2.7.2(b) when the thickness of the guide channel is less than the thickness of the
column.
(d) For curtain wall studs that are not adjacent to openings and do not have both flanges connected
to the guide channel flanges and the thickness of the guide channel is greater with ÿ as or equal
the stud, the nominal strength , Pnst is equal to Pn , determine in section to the thickness of
F.4.3.3.4.1.
(e) For curtain wall studs that are adjacent to openings and do not have both flanges connected to
the guide channel flanges and the thickness of the guide channel is greater than or equal to the
0.5P
thickness of the stud, the nominal strength, Pnst is equal to with ÿ as determined
n in section
,
F.4.3.3.4.1.
F.4.8.4.2.7.3 — Strain-Resistant Runway Connection for C-Section Uprights — For curtain-wall

studs used in strain-restrained guide-channel connections6 Pnst shall be equal to Pn , with ÿ as
determined in section F.4.3.3.4.1.
6
The deformation considered corresponds to the structure above the wall. This could be the concrete slab or steel beam to which the
hold the guide channel. This guide channel is independent of the wall stud.
F-421
The support length to be used in these calculations shall not exceed the minimum fit between the upright
and the guide channel or 25.4 mm.
The nominal resistance of a guide channel subjected to deflection under transverse loads, and connected
to its support with a fastener spacing no greater than the stud spacing is determined in accordance with
Equation F.4.8.4-4, as follows:
2
wtF
dt
(F.4.8.4-4)
and
P ndt =
4e
Where:
0.5 1.5
Tue = effective length of guide channel = 0.11 ( 2)(a and ) + ÿÿ
5.5 S
S = center-to-center spacing of studs = guide channel

t design thickness = design yield strength
My
It is = design distance at the end or sliding (distance between the web of the stud at its end and the
web of the guide channel, measured perpendicular to the web of the guide channel)7
a = 25.4
ÿ = 0.55
The previous equation will be valid within the following range of parameters:
Cross section:
88.9 mm to 152.4 mm Nominal fin width:
41.3 mm to 63.5 mm Spacing between cross bars:
305 mm at 610 mm at centers Length of support of the parallel:
19.1 mm
Guideway Section: Design

Thickness: 1.14 mm to 1.81 mm Design
Yield Strength: 228 MPa to 345 MPa Nominal Height: 88.9 mm
to 152.4 mm Nominal Wing Width: 50.8
mm to 76.3 mm The horizontal distance measured
from the web side of the post to the terminal edge of the guide profile shall not be less than half the
effective length of the guide channel wdt .
Figure F.4.8.4-1 — Guide Channel Connection subject to deformation
7
“e” is the amount of vertical deformation expected of the structure above the wall.
F-422
F.4.8.4.2.8 — Bracing of wall studs
F.4.8.4.2.8.1 — Intermediate Brace Design — For flexural members, each intermediate brace shall
be designed in accordance with F.4.4.3.
For members subjected to axial loading, each intermediate brace shall be designed for 2% of the
design compressive force in the member.
For combined flexural and axial loads, each intermediate brace shall be designed for the combined
brace force determined in accordance with Section F.4.4.3 and 2% of the design compressive force in
the member.
F.4.8.4.3 — Design of trusses for framing systems
F.4.8.4.3.1 — Analysis — Instead of a rational analysis to define the flexibility of joints, the following
assumptions can be made for the analysis:
(1) Chord members are continuous, unless assumed to be hinged in

the heels8 , breakpoints9 or in splices along its length.
(2) The members in the web of the truss (diagonals and verticals) are assumed with
joints at the ends
The use of a specific joint stiffness, other than the consideration of complete freedom of rotation of a ball joint,
is allowed if the connection is designed for the forces coming from a structural analysis with the initially defined
joint stiffness.
F.4.8.4.3.2 — Design of members
F.4.8.4.3.2.1 — Compression chord members — Compression chord members shall be checked for
axial loading only using the provisions of Section F.4.3.4, for flexure only under the provisions of
Section F.4.3. 3.1 and, axial load and bending, combined, using section F.4.3.5.2.
F.4.8.4.3.2.1.1 — Axial Load — For determination of strength under axial load, the effective
length, KL shall be established by rational analysis, testing, or the following design
,
considerations, as appropriate. :
(a) For sections C the x- axis is the axis of symmetry. Lx is equal to the distance between
panel10 points, and Cm is taken as 0.85 unless some analysis is done to justify a different
,
value. When the chord member is continuous, at least at one intermediate panel point and
there is a deck attached directly to it, Kx is taken as 0.75 . In other cases, Kx is taken
equal to unity.
Alternatively, Lx can be taken as the distance between bending curvature change points
with Cm and Kx taken as unity. When the board is attached to the cord member, Ly is
equal to the distance between board connectors and Ky should be taken as 0.75 . When
purlins are attached to the chord member, Ly is the distance between purlins with Ky
equal to unity. Lt is equal to the distance between panel points. When the chord is
continuous at at least one intermediate panel point between the heel and a chord breaking
point and when the deck is attached directly to the chord member, Kt is taken to be 0.75 .
In other cases, Kt is taken as unity. Alternatively, Lt.
can be the distance between points of change of curvature by bending with Kt

taken as the unit.
8
See definition of Stub in section F.4.1
9
See definition of Break Point in section F.4.1
10
See definition of Panel Point in section F.4.1
F-423
Where:
Cm = moment coefficient at the ends, in the interaction formula
Kx = effective length factor for buckling about the x axis
Ky = effective length factor for buckling about the y- axis
Lt = unbraced length for torsion of the compression member
Lx = unbraced length for bending about the x- axis of the member in compression
Ly = unbraced length for bending about the y- axis of the member in compression
(b) For hat sections the x- axis is the axis of symmetry. When the board is attached to the chord
member, Lx is equal to the distance between board connectors and Kx is taken as 0.75 .
When the straps are attached to the chord member, Lx
is the distance between purlins with Kx equal to unity. Ly is equal to the distance between
panel points, and Cm is taken as 0.85 analysis to justify , unless something is done
a different value. When the chord member is continuous over at least one intermediate panel
point and when the deck is attached directly to it, Ky is taken to be 0.75 . Otherwise, Ky is
taken as the unit. Alternatively, Ly can be equal to the distance between bending curvature
change points with Cm and Ky taken as unity. Lt is equal to the distance between board
connectors or purlin spacing.
When the chord member is continuous at at least one intermediate panel point between the
heel and a breaking point, and when the deck is fastened directly to the chord member, Kt
is taken to be 0.75 . In other cases, Kt
will be taken as the unit. Alternatively, Lt may be the distance between bending curvature
change points with Kt taken as unity.
(c) For Z sections the x axis is outside the plane of the truss. Lx is equal to
distance between panel points, and Cm is taken as 0.85 unless some analysis is done to
,
justify a different value. When the chord member is continuous over at least one intermediate
panel point and when the deck is attached directly to it, Kx is taken to be 0.75 . In other
cases, Kx is taken as unity. Alternatively, Lx is equal to the distance between bending
curvature change points with Cm and Kx taken as unity. When the board is attached to the
chord member, Ly is equal to the distance between panel or board connectors and Ky is
taken as 0.75 . When purlins are attached to the chord member, Ly is the distance between
purlins with Ky equal to unity. When the height of the chord member is less than 152 mm,
Lt is equal to the distance between board connectors or the spacing between purlins. For Z
sections in which the height of the chord member is greater than or equal to 152 mm, Lt is
equal to the distance between panel points. When the chord member is continuous at at
least one intermediate panel point between the heel and a breaking point, and when the
deck is directly attached to the chord member, Kt is taken to be 0.75 . In other cases, Kt is
taken as unity. Alternatively, Lt is equal to the distance between points of change of
curvature by bending with Kt
taken as the unit.
F-424
F.4.8.4.3.2.1.2 — Flexure — For the determination of flexural strength, the effective length, KL
shall be established through rational analysis, testing, or the following design considerations as
,
appropriate:
(a) When the deck is attached to the flange in compression the value of Mn of the chord member
under axial load shall be taken as S Fe according to the
and
(b) When the purlins are attached to the flange in compression between panel points, according
M SF =
n cc to sections F.4.3.3.1.2.1 and F.4.3.3.1.4 with KLy and KLt for sections C and
Z, and KLx and KLt for hat sections, taken as the distance between purlins.
(c) When the deck or purlins are attached to the flange in tension, and the compression flange
is not laterally braced, Mn is taken as S Fc c in accordance with Sections F.4.3.3.1.2.1 and
F.4.3. 3.1.4. For chord members with continuous spans, Mn in the region of the panel point
is determined by KLy and KLt for sections C and Z, and KLx and KLt for hat sections, taken
as the distance between the panel point and the change point. bending curvature, with Cb
taken as unity. For continuous single spans of chord members, Mn in the region between
supports is determined with the effective length taken as the distance between panel points
and Cb is calculated according to Section F.4.3.3.1.2.1
Where:
Cb = bending coefficient dependent on the moment gradient
Fc = critical buckling stress
Fy = yield stress used in the design
Kx = effective length factor for buckling about the x axis
Ky = effective length factor for buckling about the y- axis
Lt = unbraced length for torsion of the compression member
Lx = unbraced length for bending about the x- axis of the member in compression
Ly = unbraced length for bending about the y- axis of the member in compression
Mn = nominal bending resistance

Sc = elastic modulus of the effective section calculated with respect to the
extreme fiber in compression for the stress Fc
Se = elastic modulus of the effective section calculated with respect to the extreme fiber in
compression for the stress Fy
F.4.8.4.3.2.1.3 — Concentrated loads on panel points — When a chord member, made up of

a C section, is subjected to concentrated loads on a panel point, the interaction between axial
compression, bending, and creasing of the panel soul is considered as follows:
P RM x
+ +ÿÿ 1.49 (F.4.8.4-5)
PM
no
R xho n
Where:
P = required axial compressive strength
F-425
Mx = required flexural strength

R = required strength under concentrated creasing load = nominal axial strength
Pno calculated with fF= and
Mnxo = nominal flexural resistance calculated with f F =

Rn y = nominal wrinkling resistance of the web under the load condition
inside on a fin
ÿ = 0.85
F.4.8.4.3.2.2 — Chord Members in Tension — Chord members in tension shall be checked for axial
load only using Section F.4.3.2, for flexure only using Section F.4.3.3.1, and axial load and combined
bending using section F.4.3.5.1. It is allowed to take the axial load acting at the centroid of the section.
F.4.8.4.3.2.3 — Web members in compression (vertical and diagonal) — Web members (diagonal
and vertical) in compression shall be checked for axial load only using Section F.4.3.4, and axial load and
combined bending using section F.4.3.5.2, and the requirements of this section, as applicable:
(a) For a member in the web of the truss (vertical or diagonal) of section C, under compression
load, supported at the ends through its web, back to back with the web of a chord member
in section C and that is not subject to loads applied between its ends, the interaction between
the axial compressive load and the bending out of its plane is determined by means of the
following interaction equation,
RP CRPemy
+ ÿ 1.0 (F.4.8.4-6)
cP
n M
f fa b is y
Where:
2
ÿ Lr Lr ÿÿ + ÿ 173
R =ÿ ÿ
ÿ
0.22 0.6 (F.4.8.4-7)
ÿÿ
88
L = unbraced length of web member in compression = radius of gyration of

r full section about minor axis Pn = nominal axial resistance based on
section F.4.3.4.1.1. Only bending buckling is considered.
It is = eccentricity of the compression force with respect to the centroid of the

complete section of the soul member. ÿ and
P , Cmy , Mny , ÿP, ,bc ÿy are defined in section F.4.3.5.2.
In the design strength calculation, the effective lengths, K Lx x , K Ly y and
of they are taken as the distance between the centers of the connection patterns K Lt t
the ends of members.
(b) For other web members under compression loads, loaded concentrically, it is permitted to
take the axial load acting through the centroid of the section.
(c) For other web members under compression load, not concentrically loaded, eccentricity must
be taken into account.
F.4.8.4.3.2.4 — Web Members in Tension (Vertical and Diagonal) — Web members (diagonal and
vertical) in tension shall be checked for axial loading only using the provisions of Section F.4.3.2. For
symmetrically loaded web members, it is permitted to take the axial tension load acting through the
centroid of
F-426
the section. For other members in tension, not symmetrically loaded, the eccentricity must be taken into account.
F.4.8.4.3.2.5 — Eccentricity at joints (joints) — An analysis using multiple nodes or an analysis using single
nodes shall be performed including appropriate considerations for eccentricity effects.
The calculation of the shear and the moment for the chord member on the joints must include the following
considerations:
(a) When the web member's overlap length is greater than or equal to 75% of the chord member's
height, it shall be checked for combined bending and shear in accordance with equation F.4.3.3-55.
For C-section trusses where bolts are used as connectors, a minimum of four units must be placed
at the connection of the web member (vertical or diagonal) to the chord member and must be
evenly distributed over the overlapped area. (b) When the web member's overlap length is less
than 75% of the chord member's height, it shall be checked for combined bending
and shear in accordance with Equation F.4.3.3-54.
Along the length of the chord member, at the midpoint between the intersection with web members at a joint, the
shear shall be checked in accordance with Section F.4.3.3.2. The shear buckling coefficient is determined with
either of the equations F.4.3.3-49 or F.4.3.3-50 with taken as the smaller value of the distance between groups
“ ”
of fasteners, or center to center of the members. of the
a soul.
F.4.8.4.3.3 — Design of gussets — The nominal resistance under compressive axial load, Pn , of flat and thin gussets is
PR btf
= gy (F.4.8.4-8)
n
W min
For ÿ 1.5
L
eff
ÿW ÿ
= min +
ÿ R 0.47 g ÿ 0.3 (F.4.8.4-9)
ÿ
L ÿ
eff
IN
For min > 1.5
L
eff
R 1.0= g (F.4.8.4-10)
Where:
b = effective width determined in accordance with section F.4.2.2.1, with fF=
y , k 4 = and
w w = min
Fy = specified minimum yield strength = gusset design thickness ÿ = 0.60

t
F-427
Figure F.4.8.4-1 — Whitmore plate width
Wmin is the lesser of the actual haunch width and the Whitmore section, which is determined using a 30° spread
angle on both sides of the connection, starting at the first row of fasteners in the connection. Leff is taken as the
average length between the last rows of adjacent truss member fasteners in the connection (see figure F.4.8.4-1).
The previous equations are valid for the following parameters:
Gusset Plate Design Thickness: 1,438 mm to 2,583 mm Gusset Plate

Design Yield Stress: 228 MPa to 345 MPa Ratio WL min eff
: 0.8 a 6.0.
Gusset to Chord Member Fastener Pattern: Minimum two rows with two fasteners per row
(a) Without intervening parallel
F-428
(b) Intermediate parallel cone
Figure F.4.8.4-3 — Effective length for typical connection at break point
The nominal axial tensile strength of thin flat gusset plates is calculated in accordance with the requirements of
Section F.4.3.2.
F.4.8.4.3.4 — Design of connections
F.4.8.4.3.4.1 — Fastening or fixing methods — Fastening or fixing systems must be approved by the
truss designer. Screws, bolts and welded connections must be designed in accordance with the provisions
of this Regulation. For connections using other types of fasteners, design values shall be determined by
testing in accordance with Section F.4.6.1. For other fastening methods, the manufacturer's specifications
must be followed.
F.4.8.4.3.4.2 — Cutout Connections for C Sections — Cutout between members in C section is

permitted at breakpoint and heel connections, according to truss design.
Figure F.4.8.4-4 — Definition of cutout dimensions in trusses
(a) In bead connections, with a clipped flange, and a bearing stiffener with resistance to
a moment of inertia (Imin ) greater than or equal to 67,000 mm4 ,
F-429
shear force is calculated in accordance with section F.4.3.3.2 and shall be reduced by the
following factor, R :
0.556c 0.532d c
R 0.976=ÿ ÿ
ÿ 1.0 (F.4.8.4-11)
h h
with the following limits:
h t 200 ÿ , 0.10 ch 1.0 0.10 dh 0.4 < < y < < c
(b) In bead connections, with a clipped flange and a support stiffener with a moment of inertia
(Imin ) less than 67,000 mm4 the calculated resistance in the
,
heel is governed by web wrinkling in accordance with section F.4.3.3.4 and must be reduced
by the following factor, R :
0.668c 0.0505d c
R 1.036=ÿ ÿ
ÿ 1.0 (F.4.8.4-12)
h h
with the following limits:
h t 200 ÿ , 0.10 ch 1.0 0.10 dh 0.4 < < y < < c
Where:
c = cutout length = cutout
dc
height
h = flat width of the web of the cut section = calculated
I min
with respect to an axis parallel to the web of the chord member = design thickness
t of the cut section
F.4.8.4.4 — Lintels — The design and installation of single and double box-type, back-to-back, and L-type cold-formed steel
lintels for load-bearing purposes shall be in accordance with Sections F. 4.2 to F.4.5 and what is stipulated in this numeral.
F.4.8.4.4.1 — Design of lintels
F.4.8.4.4.1.1 — Back-to-Back Type Lints — The provisions of this section are limited to back-to-back
type lintel beams that are constructed using cold-formed steel C-sections in accordance with Section
F.4.8.4.4. 2.
F.4.8.4.4.1.1.1 — Deflection — Deflection shall be checked using the provisions of Section

F.4.3.3.1.1.
F.4.8.4.4.1.1.2 — Shear — Shear should be checked using the provisions of Section F.4.3.3.2.
F.4.8.4.4.1.1.3 — Web wrinkling — Web wrinkling should be checked per section F.4.3.3.4. For
back-to-back type lintel beams, the equations for reinforced members must be used.
F.4.8.4.4.1.1.4 — Bending and Shear — The combination of bending and shear should be
reviewed using Section F.4.3.3.3.
F.4.8.4.4.1.1.5 — Web Deflection and Crumpling — Webs of back-to-back rafter girders

subjected to a combination of web deflection and deflection shall be designed using Section
F.4.3.3.5. For back-to-back type lintel beams, the equations for reinforced members must be used.
F-430
F.4.8.4.4.1.2 — Box Headers — The provisions of this section are limited to box headers that are
installed using cold-formed steel C-sections in accordance with Section F.4.8.4.4.2.
F.4.8.4.4.1.2.1 — Deflection — Deflection is evaluated using the provisions of Section

F.4.3.3.1.1.
F.4.8.4.4.1.2.2 — Shear — Shear is evaluated using the provisions of Section F.4.3.3.2.
F.4.8.4.4.1.2.3 — Web wrinkling — Web wrinkling is evaluated using section F.4.3.3.4.

For box-type lintel beams, the equations for geometries with simple webs are used. It will
be allowed that the value of Pn , for an internal load condition on a fin, with the respective
resistance factor ÿ , can be multiplied by ÿ due to the Guide Channel and is defined as
follows: ,
where ÿ takes into account the increase in resistance
ÿ = Parameter defined by equation F.4.8.4-13 or F.4.8.4-14 ÿ =

0.80
When the design thickness of the Guide Channel section is ÿ 0.879 mm, the width of the Guide
Channel flange is ÿ 25.4 mm, the height of the C section is ÿ 305 mm, and the design thickness of
the C section is ÿ 0.879mm , then:
t t
a= 2.3 ÿ 1.0 (F.4.8.4-13)
t c
Donde:
t = 0.879 mm t
ct = design thickness of section C
In the event that the aforementioned limits are not met:
ÿ = 1.0 (F.4.8.4-14)
F.4.8.4.4.1.2.4 — Bending and Shear — The combination of bending and shear is

evaluated using Section F.4.3.3.3.
F.4.8.4.4.1.2.5 — Web bending and buckling — Box rafter webs subjected to a

combination of web bending and buckling are designed using either Section F.4.3.3.5 or
the following equation:
PinM in
1.5 (F.4.8.4-15)
Pn M+ ÿÿn
Where:
Pu = required resistance to wrinkling of the core
Mu = required flexural strength
Pn = nominal resistance to wrinkling of the web calculated in the section
F.4.8.4.4.1.2.3.
ÿ = 0.85
Mn = as defined in section F.4.3.3.1.
F.4.8.4.4.1.3 — Type Double L Lints — The provisions of this section are limited to Type L Double
Lints that are installed using cold-formed steel angles in accordance with Section F.4.8.4.4.2 and
that comply with with the following parameters:
F-431
(1) Minimum top flange width = 38.1 mm (2) Maximum

vertical side dimension = 254 mm (3) Minimum base steel
thickness = 0.838 mm (4) Maximum design thickness =
1.829 mm (5) Minimum yield stress design, F 230
= MPa and
(6) Maximum Design Yield Stress, F 345 = MPa and (7) Upright for
localized creasing at all load points (8) Minimum support length of 38.1 mm at
load points (9) Minimum wall width = 88.9mm (3.5 inches)
(10) Maximum span between supports = 4.88 m
F.4.8.4.4.1.3.1 — Flexion
F.4.8.4.4.1.3.1.1 — Gravitational load
(a) For double L-type rafters with the vertical side 203 mm in length or less, the design
shall be based on the flexural capacity of the L-sections only. The nominal resistance
to bending under gravity load is determined as follows: Mng ,
M SF = (F.4.8.4-16)
of etc
Where:
Sec = elastic modulus of the effective section calculated with respect f F = con y
to the extreme compression fibers
(b) For double L-type lintel beams with the vertical side greater than 203 mm, and a
span/vertical side ratio of the lintel greater than or equal to 10, the design must be
based on the flexural capacity of the L sections only (Equation F .4.8.4-16)
(c) For double L-type lintel beams with a vertical side greater than 203 mm, and a span/
vertical side ratio of the lintel less than 10, the nominal flexural resistance under
gravity load, Mng , is determined as follows:
= of ec y
M 0.9SF (F.4.8.4-17)
Where:
Sec = elastic modulus of the effective section calculated with f F = con y
with respect to extreme compression fibers
F.4.8.4.4.1.3.1.2 — Suction Load — For double L-type rafters, the nominal flexural
resistance under suction loads, Mnu , is determined as follows:
M RM
not
= ng (F.4.8.4-18)
Where:
Mng = nominal flexural strength under determined gravitational load
by equation F.4.8.4-16
R = suction factor
F-432
ÿ
= 0.25 for L t 150 h= 0.20
ÿ
for L t 170 = use linear
h
interpolation for 150 L t 170 < < h
Lh = dimension of the vertical side of the angle =

t design thickness
F.4.8.4.4.1.3.1.3 — Design capacity at moment — Design flexural strength is

determined as follows:
For gravity loads:
M inM= Phi of (F.4.8.4-19)

ÿ = 0.90 para vigas con L 203 hÿ ÿmm
= 0.70
para vigas con L 203 > mm h
For suction loads:
M inM= f not
(F.4.8.4-20)
ÿ = 0.80
F.4.8.4.4.1.3.2 — Shear — Shear need not be considered for the design of type L rafters that
are manufactured and installed in accordance with this Regulation.
F.4.8.4.4.1.3.3 — Web wrinkling — Web wrinkling does not need to be considered for the
design of type L rafters that are manufactured and installed in accordance with this Code.
F.4.8.4.4.1.3.4 — Bending and shear — The combination of bending and shear need not be
considered for the design of L-type rafters fabricated and installed in accordance with this Code.
F.4.8.4.4.1.3.5 — Web bending and wrinkling — The combination of web bending and
wrinkling need not be considered for the design of Type L rafters fabricated and installed in
accordance with this Code.
F.4.8.4.4.1.4 — Type Single L Lints — The provisions of this section are limited to Type L Single Lints
that are installed using cold-formed steel angles in accordance with Section F.4.8.4.4.2 and that meet
with the following parameters:
(1) Minimum width of the upper fin = 38.1 mm (2)

Maximum dimension of the vertical side = 203 mm
(3) Minimum thickness of the base steel = 0.838 mm
(4) Maximum design thickness = 1,448 mm (5)
Design minimum yield stress, F 230 = MPa (6) (7) (8)
and
Maximum Design Yield Stress, F 345 = MPa

and
Upright for localized creasing at all load points Minimum support length
of 38.1 mm at load points
(9) Minimum wall width = 88.9 mm (10)
Maximum clearance between props = 1.22 m
F.4.8.4.4.1.4.1 — Flexure
F.4.8.4.4.1.4.1.1 — Gravitational load
(a) For single L-type rafters with the vertical side 152mm in length or less, the design
shall be based on the flexural capacity of the L section.
F-433
only. The nominal resistance to bending under gravity load, Mng , is determined
as follows:
= ec y
M SF of (F.4.8.4-21)
Where:
Sec = elastic modulus of the effective section calculated with f F = con
and
with respect to extreme compression fibers
(b) For single L-type rafters with the vertical side greater than 152 mm, but less
than or equal to 203 mm, the nominal resistance to bending under gravity load,
Mng , is determined as follows:
= of ec y
M 0.9SF (F.4.8.4-22)
Where:
Sec = elastic modulus of the effective section calculated with f F = con y
respect to the extreme compression fibers
F.4.8.4.4.1.4.1.2 — Suction head — Not applicable
F.4.8.4.4.1.4.1.3 — Design capacity at moment — Design flexural strength is

determined as follows:
For gravity loads:
MM =f
in of
(F.4.8.4-23)
ÿ = 0.90
F.4.8.4.4.1.4.2 — Shear — Shear need not be considered for the design of type L rafters
that are manufactured and installed in accordance with this Regulation.
F.4.8.4.4.1.4.3 — Web wrinkling — Web wrinkling need not be considered for the design
of type L rafters that are manufactured and installed in accordance with this Code.
F.4.8.4.4.1.4.4 — Bending and shear — The combination of bending and shear need not
be considered for the design of L-type rafters fabricated and installed in accordance with
this Code.
F.4.8.4.4.1.4.5 — Web bending and wrinkling — The combination of web bending and
wrinkling need not be considered for the design of type L rafters fabricated and installed in
accordance with this Code.
F.4.8.4.4.1.5 — Sets of inverted L-type lintels
(a) The provisions of this section are limited to inverted L-type rafters that meet the
requirements defined in sections F.4.8.4.4.1.3 and F.4.8.4.4.1.4
for double and single lintels, respectively.
(b) For double L-type lintels, the nominal flexural resistance of the combined L-type
assembly (i.e., an L-type lintel plus an inverted L-lintel), is determined by the sum of the
nominal flexural resistances under gravity and suction load such as determined in
section F.4.8.4.4.1.3.1.
F-434
(c) For single L-type headers, the nominal flexural strength of the combined L-head (i.e.,
one L-head plus one inverted L-head) shall be based on the nominal flexural strength
under gravity loading as determined in Section F. .4.8.4.4.1.4.1. (d) Shear, web
creasing, combined
flexure and shear, and combined flexure and web creasing need not be considered for
the design of inverted L rafters fabricated and installed in accordance with this Code.
F.4.8.4.4.2 — Installation of Lintels — Lintels shall be installed in accordance with the provisions given
in F.4.8 and the requirements of Sections F.4.8.4.4.2.1, F.4.8.4.4.2.2 and F.4.8.4.4.2.3, as applicable.
F.4.8.4.4.2.1 — Back-to-Back and Box Headers — Back-to-back and box headers shall be
installed in accordance with Figures F.4.8.4-5 and F.4.8.4-6, respectively. For box headers, it is
permissible to connect Track Channels to the webs of C sections using 25.4 mm weld beads
spaced 610 mm o.c., instead of No. 8 bolts.
Figure F.4.8.4-5 — Back-to-back type lintel
F-435
Figure F.4.8.4-6 — Box type lintel
F.4.8.4.4.2.2 — Double and single L-type headers — Double and single L-type headers shall be
installed in accordance with figures F.4.8.4-7 and F.4.8.4-8, respectively.
Figure F.4.8.4-7 — Double L-type lintel
F-436
Figure F.4.8.4-8 — Single L-type lintel
F.4.8.5 — STATE OF SERVICE — The requirements for states of service, as described in this Regulation, must be determined by
the designer of the building or with criteria according to the specifications described in this Regulation. The use of full cross-sectional
areas for framing members in calculating deflections is permitted.
F-437
Grades:
F-438
NSR-10 – Chapter F.5 – Aluminum structures
CHAPTER F.5
ALUMINUM STRUCTURES
F.5.1 — GENERAL
F.5.1.1 — SCOPE — This Chapter establishes the requirements for the design of aluminum members of framed, lattice,
and stiffened sheet structures, made up of extruded or rolled elements. If hot cast or forged parts are used, they must be
manufactured and designed in accordance with appropriate recognized standards, in the opinion of the Permanent
Advisory Commission for the Seismic Resistant Construction Regime, and in consultation with the specific manufacturer.
In this Chapter the international SI system of units was not used, therefore the forces are in kgf and the stresses in kgf/
mm2 . In those terms that are used in this Chapter, but whose definition is in Chapters F.1, F.2 or F.3, (in which the SI
system is used), when N is said there, it must be interpreted here as kgf, when MPa is said there it must be interpreted
here as kgf/mm2 , and when N mm is said there it must be interpreted here as kgf mm.
These design requirements address a wide variety of aluminum alloys suitable for structural use and can be applied to
structures subjected to normal atmospheric conditions such as bridges, buildings, towers, highway and rail vehicles,
marine vessels, cranes, and structures above. deck located offshore.
The prescriptions do not cover aerospace alloys, casting detail design, curved shell structures, or structures subjected to
severe thermal or chemical conditions. They are not intended for the design of containment tanks, pipes, structures that
move in the air or vessels, nor for any other application for which there are specific design codes issued by entities of
recognized authority.
F.5.1.2 — DEFINITIONS — For the purpose of this Chapter, the following definitions apply:
Compact Cross Section — A cross section that can develop its full plastic capacity, subject to compression or bending,
without reduction due to local buckling of thin-walled members.
Design life — Period during which the structure or component must perform safely, with an acceptable probability that it
will not require repair or removal from service.
Design Spectrum — Tabulation of the number of occurrences of all ranges of stresses caused by load events.
Detail Class — Rating given to a detail indicating its level of resistance to fatigue.
Edge Distance — Distance from the center of a fastener hole to the nearest edge of the element.
Effective Length — Length between points of effective restraint of a member multiplied by a coefficient that takes into
account end conditions and loading.
Factored Load — Nominal load multiplied by the relevant factored load factor.
Factored Life — This is the design life multiplied by the relevant partial life factor.
Design Strength — This is the nominal strength of the member multiplied by the relevant reduction factor.
Safety at Failure — The ability of the structure to remain usable after the discovery and monitoring of fatigue cracks.
Fatigue — Gradual cracking damage occurred to a structural member due to repeated applications of a stress that is
insufficient to cause failure by a single application.
Fusion Boundary — Material affected by heat immediately adjacent to the side of a weld bead.
F-439
Heat affected zone — Zone in which there is a reduction in the strength of the material and which occurs in the vicinity of
welds in certain classes of aluminum alloys.
Imposed Load — Any load on a structure other than dead or wind load.
Instability — Loss of rigidity of a structure (usually sudden) that limits its load-carrying capacity and, in certain cases, can
cause catastrophic failure.
Lateral Torsional Buckling — Buckling of a beam accompanied by a combination of lateral displacement and twisting.
Lateral Constraint — A constraint that limits the lateral movement of the compression flange of a beam.
Limit State — Condition beyond which the structure is unsuitable for its intended use.
Charge Event — A defined charge cycle that, for design purposes, is assumed to repeat a given number of times.
Load Spectrum — Tabulation showing the relative frequencies of loading events of different intensities on a structure.
Local Buckling — Thin-wall buckling of a component in compression characterized by the formation of waves or curls
along the length of the member.
Miner's Grand Total — Grand total of cumulative fatigue damage calculated based on a rule developed by Palmagren and
Miner.
Rated Load — The load to which a structure can be expected to be subjected during its normal service.
Projecting element — Element of a section, composed of flat or curved elements, that is supported along one longitudinal
edge and free along the other.
Reinforced element — An element of a section that is stiffened by the introduction of longitudinal reinforcement along the
edge of the element or within its width.
Strength — The strength of a member based on calculations using maximum acceptable values for the strength of the
material.
Safe Life — Fatigue design in which the calculated life is several times longer than the required service life.
Semi-Compact Cross Section — Cross section of a beam in which the stress at the end fibers is limited to the 0.2% proof
stress because local buckling of compression members would not allow the development of the full moment capacity plastic.
Serviceability limit states — These are those limit states that, when exceeded, may make the structure unsuitable for the
proposed use even if there is no collapse.
Slenderness — The effective length of a compression member divided by its radius of gyration.
Stiffened element — An element of a section, composed of flat or curved elements, that is supported along its longitudinal
edges.
Stress Cycle — Pattern of stress variation at a point. It is usually in the form of two opposite half-waves.
Stress History — A record showing how the stress varies at a point during the load.
F-440
effort range
(1) It is the largest algebraic difference between the principal stresses that occur on principal planes separated by no more than 45°, in any
stress cycle, on a shell or element.
(2) It is the algebraic or vectorial difference between the greatest and the least vectorial sum of the stresses in any stress cycle on a weld.
Stress Spectrum — Tabulation of the number of occurrences of all ranges of stress of different magnitudes during a loading event.
Torsional Buckling — Buckling of a member accompanied by twisting.
Flexo-torsional buckling — Buckling of a member accompanied by full bending and twisting.
Ultimate limit states — These are those limit states that, when exceeded, may cause the partial or total collapse of the structure.
F.5.1.3 — MAIN SYMBOLS
A = area. Durability Rating = Effective Section

But Area
Of = effective cutting area

a
= spacing of transverse stiffeners. Unstiffened shell width = total width of multi-stiffened shell. Durability
B Rating
BRF = design crush resistance of a fastener = width of flat member b = effective
width of web sheet (joint beams) =
durability
be rating = diameter of a round tube to the middle of the metal wall. Total height
C of the web up to the part
D
outer fins
d
= height of the web between the wings. Height of unstiffened sheets = nominal
df diameter of fastener or dowel = modulus of elasticity =
AND
coefficient of fatigue test = melt
F
boundary of heat affected zone = frictional
F holding capacity of a properly tightened high-strength bolt =
FC reduction coefficient applied to kz
f
f
oc = constant amplitude limiting stress = variable
f
ov amplitude limiting stress = design stress range =
rf ultimate tensile stress
uf
f
0.2 = minimum test stress of 0.2% = shear modulus =
G coefficient of stress gradient
g = throat of a weld = length of the bead side of a
tg weld = coefficient of warpage =
g It is coefficient of reinforced elements. Distance to free edge =
H second moment of the area of
h the entire section of an effective stiffener (joint beam) = second moment of the
I
s area of a shell sub-unit (multi-stiffened shells) = second moment of the area about the centroidal axis
I
They are
I
y
J = torsion constant = effective

K
length coefficient for compression members = coefficient for bolt strength
K1 calculation = constant for fatigue failure criteria
K2
F-441
kL = local buckling coefficient =

sq coefficient of longitudinal resistance reduction that is taken into account for shear values
tall
kz = coefficient of resistance for the material of the heat affected zone = coefficient
of resistance modified for the material of the heat affected zone = length between supports
ÿ
kz
L = effective length between
l lateral supports = effective length of a butt
weld el = length effective fillet weld
M = moment produced by the factored load

M = equivalent uniform moment
Mcr = critical uniform moment in the elastic range for lateral torsional buckling
Mf = fully compact value of MRS
MRF = reduced MRS value for fins only

MRS = design resistance at moment of a section in the absence of shear
MRSO = design resistance at moment of a section, reduced to account for shear
MRSx = design resistance at uniaxial moment about the major axis (taking shear into account)
MRSy = design resistance to uniaxial moment about the minor axis (taking shear into account)
MRx = design moment based on resistance to lateral torsional buckling
Ms = semi-compact value of MRS
Mx = uniaxial moment about the major axis
Mh = equivalent uniform moment about the major axis
My = uniaxial moment about the minor axis
My = equivalent uniform moment about the minor axis
M1 = maximum factored moment
M2 = minimum factored moment m =
inverse slope of the rf Nÿ (fatigue) curve
number = shear buckling coefficients (assembled beams) m1 , m2 =
N of webs. Expected cycles to failure (fatigue strength) = equivalent number of
n cycles of a range of stress (fatigue). Time in days between welding and
charge
P = axial force of tension or compression due to the factored load. Protection = elastic
Pcr critical load for torsional buckling = proof load
After for a bolt = prestress load
Pp
PR = design axial resistance calculated on the basis of general buckling as a column or on buckling
torsional
PRB = design strength of a butt weld
PRF = design strength of a fillet weld
PRFB = design resistance of the heat affected zone adjacent to the fusion boundary of a butt weld (direct normal tensile
force)
PRFF = design resistance of the heat affected zone adjacent to the fusion boundary of a weld
fillet strength (direct normal tensile force) =
PRG design strength of a glued joint = axial design
PRS strength (tension or compression)
PRTB = design resistance of the heat affected zone adjacent to the edge of a butt weld (direct normal tensile force)
PRTF = design resistance of the heat affected zone adjacent to the edge of a fillet weld
(direct normal tensile force)
F-442
PRx = axial design resistance for general buckling as a column about the major axis = axial design
PRy
resistance for general buckling as a column about the minor axis = design resistance of the heat
PROV affected zone under direct load = limiting stress for local capacity (tension
well and compression) = direct limit stress in the heat affected zone
peace = limit stress for solid rivets and bolts = limit stress for
pf bending and total yield = limit stress of the material
after of the fins
pof
pow
= limit stress of web material
ps = limit stress for total buckling stability. Lateral torsional buckling stress. buckling stress
for the soul treated as a thin column between fins
pt = weld penetration
pv
= shear limit stress
e.g = limiting shear stress of the heat affected zone = limiting
pw stress of the filler metal = stress
pw1 originated at the extreme edge of the web due to a localized force = stress originated
pw2 at the midpoint of the web due to a localized force = value in the stress axis of pS
p1 in the curved diagrams for members in compression. po value
for fully packed unwelded section = radius of
R curvature through the middle of the metal of a curved internal element =
the
radius of gyration about the minor axis
S = plastic modulus of the gross section without reduction by heat affected zone, local buckling or holes
Sa , Sb = actions of the external load produced by the factored load
Sf = plastic modulus of effective flange section (assembled beam) =
Sn plastic modulus of net section = plastic
Snow modulus of effective net section = cross-
S0
sectional area of member.
s = coefficient on p1 to take into account that a compression member does not comply with the tolerances of
straightness or twist
T = boundary of the heat affected zone =
t thickness
At
= the lesser of 0.5 t BC( t + y B) 1.5t
Bt = thickness of thinnest element connected by weld = thickness of

Ct thickest element connected by weld = effective throat thickness
and = flange thickness = flange
tf thickness = shear
2t force produced by
IN factored load
VRFB = design shear resistance of the heat affected zone adjacent to the melt boundary of a
welding to butt
VRFF = design shear resistance of the heat affected zone adjacent to the fusion boundary of a fillet weld = design shear
resistance
VRS
VRTB = design shear resistance of the heat affected zone adjacent to the edge of a weld at
tope
VRTF = design shear resistance of the heat affected zone adjacent to the edge of a weld
fillet
VRW = valor reducido de VRS
VRZ = design shear resistance of the heat affected zone
F-443
v
tf = coefficient of stress field (assembled beams) =
in
1 coefficient of critical buckling in shear in the elastic range =
in
2 basic coefficient of buckling in shear considering stress field = coefficient
in
3 of buckling in shear considering stress field and flange contribution
W = filler metal = spacing
In of stiffeners in a multi-stiffened shell = distance from the center
and of a multi-stiffened shell to the center of the most extreme stiffener = distance from the neutral axis to the
and c most compressed edge = distance from the neutral axis to the
and O least compressed edge, or in tension = distance from the neutral axis to the most
1 and stressed fibers in a beam = distance from the neutral axis to the compression
2 and flange element in a beam = elastic modulus of effective section
She
Zn
= elastic modulus of the net section
What?
= elastic modulus of the effective net section
With = distance the heat affected zone extends from a weld = basic value of z
z
o
a = ratio between the minimum and maximum web shear stress (elastic stress distribution)
Modifying coefficient of the extension of the zone affected by the heat to take into account a high temperature
= coefficient for the
as calculation of bolts or rivets in simple cut = slenderness parameter =
b semi-compact limit value
bo of ÿ
b1 = totally compact limit value of ÿ
f = coefficient of capacity reduction
= coefficient of consequences of failure
c c
c = load increase coefficient = fatigue

Lg coefficient = material
mf c fatigue coefficient = coefficient for
sc friction capacity calculation
e = constant ( 25 p O )1 2
l = slenderness parameter for buckling as a column, torsional buckling, and lateral torsional buckling
ÿy = slenderness ratio of a compression member about its minor axis = coefficient
the
of heat affected zone extension modifier to account for increased accumulation of heat = critical elastic stress of
a member with reinforcement
scr
ÿcro = critical elastic stress of an unreinforced element

p1 = normal stress in a weld under factored load = shear stress
t1 perpendicular to the axis of the weld = shear stress
t2 parallel to the axis of the weld
ÿs = slip coefficient
F.5.2 — PROPERTIES AND SELECTION OF MATERIALS
F.5.2.1 — DESIGNATION OF MATERIALS — The designation of wrought aluminum and aluminum alloys used for
general engineering purposes used in this standard is in accordance with the 4-digit international classification system.
Details of this system are given in Appendix F.5.A. Table F.5.A.1 shows the former and current names of British Standards
together with the nearest ISO equivalents and other foreign names.
F-444
The designation for castings is in accordance with the system used in the English standard BS 1490 for aluminum alloy
castings.
The alloy temper designation used in this standard is generally in accordance with the NTC 1937 (ISO 2107) "alternative"
temper designation system. Details of this system are given in appendix F.5.A together with the earlier system still used
for some alloys and shapes of the material.
To simplify the text and avoid confusion, the temper designations M, TB, TF and TH are not used in F.5.4, F.5.5 and F.5.6.
The equivalent designations F, T4, T6 and T8 are used respectively.
F.5.2.2 — PERMITTED MATERIALS
F.5.2.2.1 — Extrusions, Sheets, Sheets, Extruded Pipe, Forgings, and Castings
(a) Standard Materials— This part of the standards covers the design of structures fabricated from a
number of aluminum alloys used in the conditions and tempers listed in Tables F.5.2.2-1 and F.5.2.2-2
and commonly supplied to specifications given in standards such as BS 8118: Part 2.
The alloys are classified into two categories: the first is the alloys that accept heat treatment, given in
table F.5.2.2-1 and described in (b), and the second is the alloys that do not accept heat treatment, given
in table F.5.2.2-1 and described in (b). Table F.5.2.2-2 and described in (c).
Castings should be used in load-bearing structures only after an adequate production quality control and
testing procedure has been performed and approved by the engineer. The design rules of this standard
shall not be applied to castings without close consultation with manufacturers.
The values listed in tables F.5.2.2-1 and F.5.2.2-2 can be taken as characteristic values in calculations of
structures subjected to service temperatures below 100ºC.
For structures subjected to high temperatures associated with fire, these values are not recommended.
(b) Heat Treated Alloys— The following alloys derive their strength from heat treatment:
(1) Alloy 6082 — The most common of these alloys is Medium Strength Alloy 6082 ( )
Al Si1 Mg Mn of durability B (see F.5.2.4.1), generally used in the fully heat-treated
condition, ie 6082-T6, and used in welded and non-welded structures.
The selection of this alloy is based on a combination of good physical properties with a good
degree of corrosion resistance. It is available in most forms: solid and hollow extrusions,
plates, thin sheets, pipes, and forgings. Attention should be paid in design to the loss of
strength in welded joints in the heat affected zone.
(2) Alloy 6061 — It is an alternative alloy to 6082. Alloy 6061 (AlMg1SiCu) has B durability and
very similar properties with a slight improvement in formability and surface finish. It is
available in extruded tubular shapes and is used primarily in structures.
(3) Alloy 6063 — Alloy 6063 ( Al Mg 0.7Si) of B duration is preferred in applications where
strength is not of paramount importance and good appearance is needed as this alloy
combines moderate strength with good durability and surface finish. It responds particularly
well to anodizing and other similar proprietary finishing processes. Alloy 6063 has a lower
strength than 6082 and, like 6082, exhibits strength loss
F-445
in the heat affected zone of welded joints. It is achieved in extrusions, pipes and forgings. It
is particularly suitable for thin-walled and intricate extruded sections. It is mainly used in
architectural elements such as curtain walls and window frames.
(4) Alloy 7020 — Another alloy that is readily weldable (although not restricted to welded
structures) is the 7*** series medium strength alloy, 7020 ( Al Zn 4.5Mg1 of C durability. It
has better post-strength
)
strength weld than those of the 6*** series due to its natural aging
property.This material, like others of the 7*** series, is, however, sensitive to ambient
conditions and its satisfactory behavior depends as much on having correct manufacturing
and fabrication methods such as control of composition and tensile properties If the material
in the T6 condition is subjected to any operation that induces cold working such as bending,
shearing, punching, etc., the alloy may become susceptible to stress corrosion; therefore,
direct collaboration between the engineer and the manufacturer as to future use and likely
service conditions is essential.
This alloy is normally available only in rolled forms and simple solid and hollow extruded
sections. Forgings can sometimes be made to special order.
(5) LM25 Alloy — LM25 ( AlSi 7Mg) durability B alloy is a casting alloy with good casting
characteristics, corrosion resistance and mechanical properties. It is available in four
conditions of hot treatment in sand casting and quenching, and is generally used in
architecture and food manufacturing facilities.
(c) Non-heat-treated alloys— The following alloys derive their strength solely from strain hardening.
They are normally produced in thin sheet and sheet shapes and occasionally in some simple extruded
shapes.
(1) Alloy 1200 — Alloy 1200 ( Al 99.0) of A duration is commercially pure aluminum with high
ductility and very good corrosion resistance. It is used for architectural works in which the
components are not very stressed. It is only available in thin sheets.
(2) Alloy 3103 — Duration A 3103 ( AlMn1) alloy is stronger and harder than commercially pure
aluminum but has the same high ductility and very good corrosion resistance. It is intensively
used in panels for buildings and vehicles.
It is available in thin sheets.
(3) Alloy 3105 — Alloy 3105 ( AlMn0.5 Mg0.5) of durability A is coming to prevail in the market
of profiled thin sheet for buildings due to its superior properties to 3103 in hardness and
strength. It also has an economic advantage. The available shapes are limited to thin sheets.
(4) Alloy 5083 — Alloy 5083 ( Al Mg4.5 Mn0.7) of durability A is used for welded structures and
in armor and tank work as it is easily weldable without significant loss of strength and has
high ductility. The tensile strength of 5083 under conditions O and F is lower than that of
6082-T6 but significantly higher if the latter is soldered. However, prolonged exposure to
temperatures above 65°C can result in the precipitation of magnesium/aluminum intermetallic
boundary grains that corrode preferentially in some harsh environments. This effect is
aggravated if the alloy is subjected to subsequent cold working operations. It is available in
plates, thin sheets, singular extruded sections, extruded pipe, and forgings.
In addition to its easy welding and good formability properties, it also has very good
durability, especially in marine environments.
F-446
(5) Alloys 5251, 5154A and 5454 — Alloys 5251 ( ) AlMg2 , ) 5154A
( Al Mg3.5 A( ) and 5454 ( Al Mg3Mn) of durability A are available in sheets

thin, plates and simple extrusions. The 5154A and 5251 are also available as forgings. Their
main addition is Magnesium and, as a result, these alloys are ductile in the soft condition
but work harden quickly. They have good weldability and very good resistance to corrosive
attack, especially in marine atmospheres. For this reason, they are used in panels and in
structures exposed to marine environments. The 5154A and 5454 are stronger than the
5251.
The strongest alloy in the 5*** series, which offers immunity to stress corrosion when
exposed to elevated temperature, is 5454. 5*** series alloys with more than 3% Mg may be
susceptible to stress corrosion when exposed to elevated temperatures.
(6) Alloy 5251: in seam welded pipe. Seam welded pipes are produced from a strip of 5251
(Al Mg2) alloy which gives a B durability to the pipe which in turn has increased strength by
work hardening through forming and finishing rolls . Its main uses are in elements such as
garden furniture, handrails and ladders.
(7) LM5 Alloy — Durability A LM5 ( Al Mg5 Si1) alloy is a medium strength cast alloy that has
excellent finishing characteristics while maintaining a high gloss surface but is only suitable
for simple shapes. It is mainly used for sand casting used for architectural and decorative
purposes and where anodizing is required.
(8) LM6 Alloy — Durability B LM6 ( AlSi12) alloy is another medium-strength casting alloy that
has excellent casting characteristics, high ductility, and impact resistance. It is suitable for
sand casting or quench casting and useful for a wide range of uses in general, electrical
and marine applications and castings of above average complexity and size.
F-447
Table F.5.2.2-1
Heat treated alloys
(use
1)
Thickness
Elongation
strain
Alloy Product durability

Condition
resistance
weld Clasification
of
Minimum
effort
of
resistance
Minimum
to
voltage
0.2%
test
of
Approximate
loss
of
designation
Closest
209-1)
(see
ISO
ISO
From to 5.65 (S)1

0
2 50 mm %
mm mm kgf/mm2 kgf/mm2 % %
1)
T6 Extrusions -
150 24.0 28.0 8 7 50 B AlMg1SiCu
2) 2)
6061 -
6.0 24.0 29.5 7 7 50
T6 extruded pipe 2) 2)
6.0 10 25.5 29.5 9 9 50
T4 Extrusions -
150 7.0 13.0 16 14 0 B AlMg0.7Si
2) 2)
T4 extruded pipe -
10 10.0 15.5 15 15 0
forged
-
150 8.5 14.0 16 -
0
6063 T5 Extrusions -
25 11.0 15.0 8 7 25
T6 Extrusions -
150 16.0 18.5 8 7 50
2)
T6 extruded pipe -
10 18.0 20.0 8 50
forged
-
150 16.0 18.5 2) 8 -
50
T4 Extrusions -
150 12.0 19.0 10 16 14 0 B AlSi1MgMn
Leaf 0.2 3.0 12.0 20.0 -
15 0
Iron 3.0 25 11.5 20.0 12 15 0
2)
T4 -
6.0 11.5 21.5 12 2) 0
extruded pipe
2) 12
6.0 10 14 2) 14
forged
-
150 12.0 18.5 16 -
0
6082 T6 -
20 25.5 29.5 8 7 50
Extrusions
20 150 27.0 31.0 8 -
50
Leaf 0.2 3.0 25.5 29.5 -
8 50
Iron 3.0 25 24.0 29.5 8 8 50
2) 2)
-
6.0 25.5 31.0 7 7 50
extruded pipe
2) 2)
6.0 10 24.0 31.0 9 9 50
forged
-
120 25.5 29.5 8 -
50
T4 Extrusions -
25 19.0 30.0 10 12 0 C AlZn4.5Mg1
Foil and iron 25 17.0 28.0 10 12 0
7020
T6 Extrusions -
25 28.0 34.0 8 10 40
Foil and iron 25 27.0 32.0 8 10 40

TB7 casting with - -
8.0 a 16.0 2.5 AND B AlSi7MG
arena 11.0
Quick chill casting - -
9.0 a 23.0 5
11.0
LM25
TF casting with - -
20.0 a 23.0 -
arena 25.0
Quick chill casting - -
22.0 a 28.0 2
26.0
NA = not applicable
1) Extrusions: bars, round pipe and sections
2) Elongation over ( )15.65
2 for
S 0 tubes with walls of 3 mm or less and over 50 mm for thicker tubes
NOTE 1 Properties after 3 days natural aging at 15°C to 25°C for 6*** series alloys and 30 days at 15°C to 25°C, or artificially aged for 24 h at 120°C, for
alloy 7020 (see F.7.4.4.2(b)).
F-448
Table F.5.2.2-2
Alloys not heat treated
Thickness
(F.7.4.4.2)
Elongation
Alloy Product
Condition
209-1)
(see
ISO
Approximate
Strength
Weld
Loss
per
resistance
Minimum
voltage
durability
Classify
of
minimum
voltage
0.2%
Sph.
test
of
designation
Closest
ISO
From to 5.65 (S)1

0
2 50 mm
mm mm kgf/mm2 kgf/mm2 % % %
1200 H14 Leaf 0.2 12.5 1) 11.5 10.5 -

3a6 50 A Al99.0
H14 0.2 12.5 1) 14.0 14.0 -
3a7 50
3103 Leaf A AlMn1
H18 0.2 3 1) 18.5 17.5 -
2a4 65
H14 14.5 16.0 -
2a4 75
3105 H16 Leaf 0.2 3 17.0 18.5 -
1a3 80 A AlMn0.5Mg0.5
H18 19.0 21.5 -

1a2 80
Extrusions -
150 12.5 27.5 14 13 0
12 a
O 0.2 80 12.5 27.5 14 0
Foil and iron 16
3)
extruded pipe -
10 12.5 27.5 12 3) 0
1) 1) 1) 1)
5083 Extrusions -
150 13.0 28.0 12 12 0 A AlMn4.5Mn0.7
F
1) 1) 11
Foil and iron 3 25 17.5 32.0 -
1) 18 0
F forged
-
150 13.0 28.0 12 -
0
H22 Sheet and iron 0.2 6 23.5 31.0 -

5 a 10 45
3)
H22 Extruded Pipe -
10 23.5 31.0 5 3) 5 45
Extrusions -
150 8.5 21.5 18 16 0
12 a
O 0.2 6 8.5 21.5 -
0
Foil and iron 18
3)
extruded pipe -
10 8.5 21.5 16 3) 16 0
1) 1) 1)
5154th F Extrusions -
150 10.0 21.5 16 1) 14 0 A AlMg3.5 (A)
F forged
-
150 10.0 21.5 16 -
0
H22 Sheet and iron 0.2 6 16.5 24.5 -

5a8 45
H24 Foil and iron 0.2 6 22.5 27.5 -

4a6 60
3)
H24 Extruded Pipe -
10 20.0 24.5 4 60
F Seam Welded 0.8 1.0 22.0 24.5 -
3) 4 3 70
Pipe B
1.2 2.0 22.0 24.5 -
5 70
5251 AlMg2
forged
-
150 6.0 17.0 16 -
70
H22 0.2 6 13.0 20.0 -
4a8 55 A
Foil and iron
H24 0.2 6 17.5 22.5 -
3a5 65
Extrusions -
150 8.5 21.5 18 16 0
O 12 a
0.2 6 8.0 21.5 -
0
Foil and iron 18
5454 A AlMg3Mn
F Extrusions -
150 10.0 21.5 16 14 0
H22 Leaf 0.2 3 18.0 25.0 -

4a83 55
H24 Leaf 0.2 3 20.0 27.0 -
a6 60
casting with 9.0 a
- -
14.0 3 THAT
arena 11.0
LM5 F A AlMg5Si1
Quick chill casting 9.0 a
- -
17.0 5
12.0
casting with
- -
6.0 a 7.0 16.0 5 THAT
arena
LM6 F B AlSi12
Quick chill casting
- -
7.0 a 8.0 19.0 7
F-449
NA = not applicable
1) Typical values
2) Extrusions: bars, round pipe and sections ( )1 2
3) Elongation on 0 5.65 S for tubes with walls of 3 mm or less and over 50 mm for thicker tubes
(d) Materials in other thicknesses and alloys with other standard and non-standard properties—
The alloys listed in Tables F.5.2.2-1 and F.5.2.2-2 are sometimes used in other thicknesses and in other
tempers and standard and non-standard conditions. The minimum guaranteed properties for such
materials may be used if there is agreement between the designer and the client.
(e) Other alloys — Other alloys are available that offer higher strengths, eg 2014A, and/or better post-
weld strengths, eg 7019, but these strengths can be achieved at the expense of other properties. The
engineer is therefore cautioned against using these alloys without careful consideration and close
consultation with a reputable manufacturer. Properties to be considered should include durability,
weldability, resistance to crack propagation, and behavior in service. 7*** series alloys that have higher
proof strengths, such as 7019, require particular control in manufacturing processes, eg, control of
microstructure, residual stresses, and cold working.
(f) Alloys not included in the tables — Alloys not included in tables F.5.2.2-1 and F.5.2.2-2 may be
used as long as their use in structures is authorized in standards issued by recognized entities. authority,
at the discretion of the Permanent Advisory Commission for the Regime of Earthquake-Resistant
Constructions.
(g) Bolts and rivets— Bolt and rivet materials and their durability are given in Table F.5.2.2-3. A guide
for the selection of bolt and rivet materials is given in F.5.2.4.2(b).
These materials can also be used for special products for screws and rivets including elements inserted
into the thread. For larger diameter rivets special head shapes may be required.
Table F.5.2.2-3
Bolt and rivet materials
Test stress of last stand
temple Diameter 0.2% kgf/mm2
Type Material Process used mm kgf/mm2 Durability
1)
less than 6 6 to 12 25.5 29.5 B
6082 T6 1)
27.0 31.0 B
Patented 6061 Q8 less than or equal to 12 24.5 31.0

1)
Threaded 5056A 2) H24 less than or equal to 12 24.0 31.0 B
Studs and Stainless steel: 3)
Fasteners A4 (316S16) (note 1)

3) See appropriate standard
A2 (304S15) (note 1)
Steel (note 2)
Hot or cold laid 1)
My F less than or equal to 25 21.5 A
5154A
cold laid H22 less than or equal to 25 24.5
cold-placed in 1)
T4 less than or equal to 25 20.0 B
6082 temple T4
Cold set in 4) temper T6
Solid rivets T6 less than or equal to 25 29.5
and
Cold or hot laid 1)
patented 2) The u F less than or equal to 25 25.5 B
5056A
blind
cold laid H22 less than or equal to 25 28.0
rivets Stainless steel:
Cold or hot laid
A4 (316S16) (note 1)
A2 (304S15) (note 1)
See appropriate standard
nickel-copper cold laid(zinc
alloy coated) (note 1)
Steel cold laid (note 2)
F-450
1) The durability of the joined alloys, if this is less.

2) 5056A Studs and Rivets should not be used in corrosive or tropical environments.
3) For example, see English standard BS 6105 for stainless steel bolts.
4) 6082-T4 rivets set most easily immediately after solution heat treatment.
NOTE 1 See F.5.2.4.2 (b)
NOTE 2—Steel bolts should preferably be galvanized or sherardized.
(h) Filler Metals— Filler metals for tungsten inert gas (TIG) welding and metal inert gas (MIG) welding are
given in Table F.5.2.2-4 with their durability. A guide for the selection of filler metals is given in Table
F.5.2.7-1.
Table F.5.2.2-4
Filler metals for welding
filler metal group Alloy designation Durability
1) 2)
BS ISO
Type 1 1080A Al99.8 A
1050A Al99.5
type 3 3103 AlMn1 A
4043 AlSi5 (A)
Type 4 B
4047A 3) AlSi12 (A)
5056A AlMg5 A
5356 AlMg5Cr (A)
type 5
5556A AlMg5.2MnCr A
5183 AlMg4.5Mn
1) For chemical composition see relevant standards 2) Or
nearest equivalent 3) 4047A is
specifically used to prevent filler metal cracking in a joint that has high dilution and high restriction. In
most cases, it is preferable to use the 4043A
F.5.2.3 — STRENGTH, MECHANICAL AND PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
F.5.2.3.1 — Strength and mechanical properties — Tables F.5.2.2-1 and F.5.2.2-2 show the range of standard
alloys with their available shapes, quenching conditions, and mechanical properties.
The mechanical properties for the wrought materials for the alloy tempers and conditions given in Tables F.5.2.2-1
and F.5.2.2-2 have been used to determine the limiting stresses given in Table F.5.4. 2-1. When alloys are welded,
the approximate percentage reduction in strength of the alloy is given for each temper. These resistances in the
heat affected zone may not be achieved until after a period of natural or artificial aging, (see notes to table
F.5.2.2-1). The material strength of bolts and rivets is given in Table F.5.2.2-3. The mechanical properties of alloys
vary with temperature and those given in tables F.5.2.2-1, F.5.2.2-2 and F.5.2.2-3 should be applied for the design
of structures in a temperature range between -50°C and 70°C, except alloy 5083 (see F.5.2.2.1(c)). The 0.2% proof
stress and tensile strength improve at lower temperatures but decrease at higher temperatures. Properties outside
the given temperature range should be consulted with the manufacturer. Alloys melt in a range of 550°C to 660°C
depending on their composition.
F.5.2.3.2— Physical Properties — The physical properties of standard alloys, although they vary slightly, can be
considered constant and are listed in Table F.5.2.3-1. In critical structures the engineer can use the exact value
obtained from a recognized manufacturer.
F-451
Table F.5.2.3-1
Physical properties
Property Value
Density 2 710 kg/m3
modulus of elasticity 7 000 kgf/mm2
stiffness modulus 2 660 kgf/mm2
Coefficient of thermal expansion 23 x10-6 per °C
Poisson's Ratio n = 0.3
F.5.2.4 — DURABILITY AND CORROSION PROTECTION — In many cases, the standard materials listed in Tables F.5.2.2-1 through F.5.2.2-4 can
be used with the mill finish, such as They are extruded or as-welded without the need for surface protection.
The good corrosion resistance of aluminum and its alloys is attributable to the protective oxide layer that forms on the metal surface immediately upon
exposure to air. This film is normally invisible, relatively inert, and because it forms naturally on exposure to air or oxygen, is self-sealing.
In mild environments an aluminum surface maintains its original appearance for years and no additional protection is needed for most alloys. In
moderate industrial environments there will be darkening and roughening of the surface. When the atmosphere becomes more aggressive, such as in
strongly acidic or alkaline environments, surface discoloration and roughening worsen and powdery white oxide surfaces become visible. The oxide
film can be self-dissolving, the metal is no longer fully protected and additional protection is needed. These conditions can also occur in crevices due
to highly acidic or alkaline local conditions, but agents that have this extreme effect are relatively rare.
In coastal and marine environments, the surface becomes rough and takes on a gray, stone-like appearance. Protection of certain alloys is necessary.
When aluminum is submerged in water special precautions may be necessary.
When surface attack occurs, the corrosion/time curves of aluminum and aluminum alloys have an exponential form and there is a fairly rapid loss of
reflectivity after slight deterioration from exposure. After this there is very little change over very long periods. On atmospheric exposure, the initial
phase may be a few months or two or three years, followed by little or no change over periods of 10, 30, or even 80 years. Such behavior is consistent
for all external free exposure conditions and for all internal or protected conditions, except where extreme acidity or alkalinity may develop.
Tropical environments, in general, are no more damaging to aluminum than temperate environments, although certain alloys are affected by long
exposure to high ambient temperatures, particularly in a marine environment.
F.5.2.4.1— Durability of Alloys — The alloys listed in Tables F.5.2.2-1, F.5.2.2-2, F.5.2.2-3, and F.5.2.2-4 are categorized as in three
levels of durability A, B and C in descending order. These levels are used to determine the need and degree of protection required. In
constructions employing more than one alloy, including filler metals in welded construction, protection must be commensurate with the
lowest of the durability levels.
When using another structural alloy other than those listed in tables F.5.2.2-1, F.5.2.2-2, F.5.2.2-
3 and F.5.2.2-4, the appropriate data must be requested to assign the durability category to the alloy, as well as to justify its application.
F.5.2.4.2 — Protection against corrosion
(a) Total corrosion protection — The need for total corrosion protection to structures constructed of the alloys or combinations
of alloys listed in Tables F.5.2.2-1, F.5.2.2-2, F. 5.2.2-3 and F.5.2.2-4 when exposed to different environments is given in table
F.5.2.4-1. Methods of providing corrosion protection in these environments are detailed in standards such as BS 8112: Part 2.
In order to select the appropriate column of table F.5.2.4-1 for the atmospheric environment, it must be taken into account that
there may be localities, within a region, that have microclimates well
F-452
different from the environmental characteristics of the region as a whole. A region designated as rural may have
local environments that are more like an industrial atmosphere in places near and downwind from factories.
Similarly, a location near the sea but close to coastal facilities may have the characteristics of an industrial rather
than a marine atmosphere. The environment is not necessarily the same for a structure inside a building as it is
outside.
The occurrence of corrosion does not depend only on the susceptibility of the material and global conditions; in
practice it depends more on the period of time during which moisture may be present in conjunction with trapped
dirt and corrosive agents. The areas of the elements, or the structural details, where the dirt is caught or retained
are more critical than in those areas where the rain, and the wind that drives the rain, clean the surface and dry it
quickly.
To assign the need and the degree of protection required, the history of the useful life of the structure must be
considered. For short-lived structures, less severe measures or no protection may be acceptable. When inspection
and maintenance is planned to show the degree of corrosion at an incipient stage, allowing corrective action to be
taken, it may be possible to lower the initial degree of protection provided. However, when the inspection is
impracticable and the degree of corrosion is not easy to perceive, the initial degree of protection must be higher.
However, the degree of protection must be established jointly by the engineer, the manufacturer and, if necessary,
a corrosion specialist.
Because of these factors, localized conditions of increased severity may result. The precise conditions at the actual
site should be studied before deciding on the appropriate environment column from Table F.5.2.4-1.
When hollow sections are used, the need to protect the internal cavity must be considered to prevent corrosion
caused by the ingress of corrosive agents. Because of the difficulty of painting such sections, chemical conversion
coatings can be beneficial.
When the internal cavity is effectively sealed, the internal protection is not necessary.
Table F.5.2.4-1
General protection against corrosion of aluminum structures
Necessary protection according to the environment

Alloy Durability Thickness Atmospheric Submerged
industrial/urban Marino Water salty
(mm) Rural Moderate Severe Non-industrial Moderate Severe fresh water
A All None None P None None P None None
B Less than 3 None 3 or P P P P P P P
more None All None P None P None None P P P
1) 2)
C Requires protection 1) P P P P P P No.
P Requires only local corrosion protection in the weld and heat affected zone in urban non-industrial environments. 2)
P Shielding is not recommended for welded construction.
NR Immersion in salt water is not recommended.
(b) Metal-to-metal contacts including joints — Consideration must also be given to contact surfaces in grooves
and contact with certain metals or laundering of certain metals that can cause electrochemical attack of aluminum.
This situation occurs in the joints of a structure. The contact surfaces and joints of aluminum with aluminum or
other metals and the contact surfaces in bolted, riveted, welded joints and connections with high friction resistance
bolts must have additional protection to that required in table F.5.2.4- 1 as defined in Table F.5.2.4-2. Details of the
required corrosion protection procedure are given in standards such as BS 8118: Part 2.
F-453
Table F.5.2.4-2
Additional protection of metal-to-metal contacts to combat cracking and galvanic effects
Necessary protection according to the environment

Atmospheric Marino Submerged
metal metal
Rural urban industrial Industrial
attached to bolt or
dry, No Sweet Water
aluminum rivet Moderated
uncontaminated Mild Moderate Severe industrial Severe water Salad
O
O
Aluminum 0 0 0 2 2 0 2 0 2
Steel, Aluminized
or galvanized
Aluminum
steel, 1 1 3 4 4 3 4 5 5
stainless steel
Aluminum 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 5
Zinc o Steel, aluminized
zinc or galvanized
coated steel, 1 1 3 4 4 3 4 5 5
steel
stainless steel
Steel, Aluminum 0 0 3 3 3 3 3 5 5
Steel, aluminized
stainless steel or galvanized
e, cast steel, 1 1 4 4 4 4 4 5 5
iron, lead steel

stainless
Aluminum 0 No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No.
Copper
1) copper,
copper alloy
0 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
1) Contact surfaces and joints of aluminum with copper or copper alloys must be avoided. If used, aluminum should be of A or B durability and bolts and nuts
should be copper or copper alloy.
NR It is not recommended to use aluminum rivets or bolts to join aluminum and copper in these environments.
(c) Contact with other non-metallic materials
(1) Contact with concrete, masonry or plaster — Aluminum in contact with compact and
dense concrete, masonry or plaster in a dry environment without pollution or in a mild
environment shall be covered with a layer of bituminous paint. In an industrial or marine
environment, the contact surface should be covered with at least two coats of heavy-duty
bituminous paint, preferably the surface of the material in contact should be similarly painted.
Submerged contact of aluminum and such materials is not advisable but, if unavoidable, it
is recommended that the materials be separated by an appropriate mastic or heavy-duty
waterproofing coating.
Lightweight concrete and similar products require additional consideration when water or
rising damp can extract aggressive alkalis from the cement. Alkaline water can then attack
even aluminum surfaces that are not in direct contact.
(2) Aluminum Embedded in Concrete — Before aluminum is embedded in concrete, surfaces

must be protected with at least two coats of bituminous paint or hot bitumen. Coats should
extend at least 75mm above the concrete surface after embedment.
If the concrete contains chlorides, for example as admixtures or due to the use of aggregates
dredged from the sea, at least two coats of plasticized coal tar pitch should be applied and
the finished assembly repainted locally with the same material to seal the gap. surface after
the concrete has fully set. Attention must be paid to possible contacts between the
embedded aluminum and the steel reinforcement.
F-454
(3) Contact with wood — In industrial, humid, and marine environments, wood
It must be properly prepared and painted.
Some wood preservatives can be harmful to aluminum. As a general guide the following
preservatives have been approved as safe for use with aluminum without taking special
precautions: (a) coal tar creosote (b) coal tar
oil (c) chlorinated naphthalenes
(d) zinc naphthanates (e)
pentachlorophenol (f)
organic tin oxides (g)
orthophenylphenol
When wood treated with the following preservatives is used in wet situations, the aluminum
surface in contact with the treated wood should have a substantial application of sealant: (a)
copper naphthanate ( b) cupro-
chromium-arsenical
salts (c) borax and boric acid
compounds
Other preservatives should not be used in association with aluminum.
Oak, chestnut, and western red cedar can be harmful to aluminum unless well matured.
(4) Ground Contact — The metal surface in contact with the ground shall be protected with at
least two coats of bituminous paint, hot bitumen, or plasticized coal tar pitch. An additional
taping bandage may be used to prevent mechanical damage to the coating.
(5) Immersion in water — When aluminum parts are submerged in fresh water or sea water,
including polluted water, the aluminum should preferably be of durability A and aluminum or
corrosion-resistant steel fasteners should be used or welding should be used. Tables
F.5.2.4-1 and F.5.2.4-2 give the necessary protection for immersion in fresh and sea water.
Additionally, the engineer must obtain competent information on oxygen content, pH,
chemical or metallic content, particularly copper, and the amount of water movement. These
factors can affect the degree of protection required.
(6) Contact with chemicals used in the construction industry — Fungicides and mold
repellents may contain metallic compounds based on copper, mercury, tin, and lead which,
under humid conditions, can cause corrosion of aluminum. The damaging effects can be
counteracted by protecting contact surfaces that may be subject to chemical washout or
seepage.
Some cleaning materials can affect the surface of aluminum. When such chemicals are used
to clean aluminum or other materials in the structure, care must be taken to ensure that their
effects will not be detrimental to the aluminum. Often a quick and adequate rinse with water
is sufficient but in other cases temporary measures must be taken to protect the aluminum
from contact with such cleaners.
(7) Contact with insulation materials used in the construction industry — Products such as
fiberglass, polyurethane, and various insulation products may contain corrosive agents that
can be extracted under humid conditions and deteriorate aluminum. Insulating materials
must be tested for
F-455
Observe its compatibility with aluminum in humid and saline conditions. When in doubt, a
sealant should be applied to associated aluminum surfaces.
F.5.2.5 — MANUFACTURING AND CONSTRUCTION — In addition to the general manufacturing and construction
requirements, the following should be considered:
F.5.2.5.1 — Bending and Forming — Aluminum alloys are available in a wide range of tempers that affect their
ability to be formed. When bending or forming is required, the engineer should consult with the manufacturer to
select the alloy, quench, and any subsequent heat treatment that may be required.
Heat treatments and hot forming must be carried out under the direction and supervision of competent personnel.
Without the agreement of the producer, 7*** series alloys should not be bent or cold formed in fully heat treated
condition due to the risk of stress corrosion cracking. However, minor corrections in the shape of the profiles or
in the weld distortions can be carried out.
F.5.2.5.2— Weld — The strength loss that can occur in the vicinity of the weld in some alloys must be considered
in the selection of the alloy or alloys to be used in welded construction. The engineer must be convinced that the
combination of base and filler materials is possible to achieve the strength and durability required in the service
conditions of the structure.
Particular attention should be paid to the susceptibility of alloys 6082, 6063, 6061, and 5251 to cracking during
solidification when welds are made under restraint. This can be avoided by using the recommended filler metals
and welding techniques. This will ensure a proper blend of filler metal in the actual weld.
F.5.2.5.3 — Filler Metals — The filler wire used in welded construction shall be chosen in accordance with Table
F.5.2.7-1.
F.5.2.6 — SELECTION OF MATERIALS — The selection of an alloy or alloys for any particular structure and shape is
determined by a combination of several factors: strength, see F.5.2.3; durability, see F.5.2.4; physical properties, see
F.5.2.3; weldability, see F.5.2.5; formability, see F.5.2.5; and availability, see F.5.2.7. The standard materials given in
tables F.5.2.2-1 and F.5.2.2-2 are described in terms of the above factors in F.5.2.2.1(b) and (c).
F.5.2.7 — AVAILABILITY — The range of alloys given in Tables F.5.2.2-1 and F.5.2.2-2 is not available in all product
forms. Table F.5.2.7-2 indicates the alloys that are achievable in a particular product form and their availability. Products
and alloy combinations that are not normally manufactured but are available by special order are indicated; Design with
this material should only be attempted after confirming its availability with the supplier.
F.5.2.7.1— Structural Sections — A number of extruded structural sections and some other structural sections
are commonly available in 6082-T6 or 6063-T6; but, in most cases, they should be produced to order, see table
F.5.2.7-2. Table F.5.2.7-3 gives the range of most commonly available section sizes. Other sizes can be obtained
from existing or new dies according to the manufacturer. When sections are produced to order, a minimum order
quantity may be required. Special new extruded sections are normally made to order and the low cost of simple
dies gives great flexibility to your design. The engineer should verify with the manufacturer, at an early stage, the
shape, thickness, size and design possibility of a new section and the delivery time of the new die and extruded
section. Some sections or products are made by drawing, forming or roll rolling, these operations may require
special machinery.
F-456
Table F.5.2.7-1
Selection of filler metal wires and rods for inert gas welding
1)
base metal combination
First part Second part
LM5 LM6 3103 6061 5154
Foundries LM5 3105 1200 7020 6063 5251 5083
foundries 6082 5454
5083
type 5 type 5 type 5 5556A type 5 type 5 5556A
3)
type 5 No. type 5 type 5 type 5 type 5 type 5 type 5
type 5 type 5 type 5 5556A type 5 type 5 type 5
5154A type 5 type 5 type 5 type 5 type 5 type 5
2) 3)
5251 type 5 No. type 5 type 5 type 5 type 5 type 5
5454 type 5 type 5 type 5 type 5 type 5 type 5
6061 type 5 Type 4 Type 4 Type 4 type 5 Type 4/5
6063 type 5 Type 4 Type 4 Type 4 type 5 Type 4
6082 type 5 Type 4 Type 4 Type 4 type 5 Type 4
type 5 type 5 type 5 5556A
2)
7020 type 5 No. type 5 type 5 type 5
type 5 type 5 type 5 type 5
4)
type 5 Type 4 Type 4 Type 1
1200 type 5 Type 4 Type 3/4 Type 1 1)
type 5 Type 4 Type 4 4) Type

3103 type 5 Type 4 type 3
type 5 Type 4 Type 3 4)
3105 type 5 Type 4 type 3

LM6 Type 4
2)
LM25 No. Type 4
foundries Type 4
LM5 type 5
Foundries type 5
type 5
1) The filler metals for the base combination to be welded are shown in a box located at the intersection of the row with the column of the base metal. In each box,
the first line corresponds to the filler metal that provides the maximum resistance, in the case of 6*** and 7020 alloys, this value is below the resistance with
complete heat treatment of the base metal; in the middle line, the filler metal that gives the maximum resistance to corrosion appears; and in the last line,
the filler metal that does not present cracking of the persistent weld is shown.
2) NR = Not recommended. Welding of alloys containing about 2% or more Mg with Al-Si (5% to 12% Si) filler metal (and vice versa) is inadvisable as sufficient
Mg2Si precipitate forms at the melt boundary to make the union fragile.
3) The corrosion behavior of the filler metal is better if its alloy content is close to that of the base metal and not markedly higher. This means that, for potentially
corrosive service, it is preferable to weld 5154A with 5154A filler metal or weld 5454 with 5554 filler metal. However, in some cases this is only possible at
the expense of weld depth.
4) If higher strength and/or higher crack resistance is essential, type 4 filler metal may be used.
NOTE. See Table F.5.2.2-4 to find the particular alloys of the filler metal for each type of alloy.
Table F.5.2.7-2
Availability of product forms
sheets and
irons strips extruded sections
Thickness Solid sections Round forged castings
Alloy Thickness greater extruded
smaller the bars and rectangular and hollow Longitudinal parts
than simple sections pipe welded piping mind
6 mm equal to 6 complex extruded
mm shapes specials
pipes
1200 L L 1) S S
3103 O L
3105 O
5083 L L S S O
5154A O O S S O
5251 L L S S L O
5454 L L S S
6061 S S O O O O O
6063 L L L O O O
6082 L 2) L L O L O O O
7020 O O S S S
LM5 O
LM6 O
LM25 O
F-457
L Standard product made to order in a limited range of sizes.

O Standard product made to order.
S Product not normally made in that alloy but may be available by special order.
A blank space indicates that the product is not available.
1) Includes sheets and plates with indentations or projections.
2) Includes indented plate.
NOTE. Certain mechanical properties are given in tables F.5.2.2-1 and F.5.2.2-2.
Table F.5.2.7-3
Range of most commonly available extruded section sizes
size range
section type
mm
Angles with equal sides 30x30 a 120x120
Angles with unequal sides 50x38 a 140x105
channels 60x30 a 240x100
T sections 50x38 a 120x90
Sections I 60x30 a 160x80
Angles with equal bulbs 50x50 a 120x120
Angles with unequal bulbs 50x37.5 a 140x105
Tabbed Channels 80x40 a 140x70
Bulbous T Sections 90x75 a 180x150
F.5.2.7.2 — Tubing — Tubing may be produced by extrusion, drawing, or seam welding.

Tubing is available in some of these shapes in a limited range of sizes but they are generally made to order, see
Table F.5.2.7-2.
F.5.2.7.3— Thin Sheet, Strip, and Plate — A wide range of thin sheet, strip, and plate is normally readily
available in standard alloys (see Table F.5.2.7-2). Some alloys are available in the form of sheets or plates with
indentations or projections. There is a wide range of standard laminate siding and roofing products, some of
which are readily available in moderate quantities, mill finished or painted, but most are produced to order.
F.5.2.7.4 — Forgings — Hand and die forgings are furnished to order. The former normally require additional
work to achieve the required dimensions while the latter are produced to the defined dimensions. Forging dies
are relatively expensive and costs should include at least the fabrication of a forging and cutting to check grain
flow or distribution to prove that the die can be used for structural forgings.
F.5.2.7.5 — Castings — Sand castings or quenched castings are supplied upon request. Sand castings are
produced with moderate cost molds and are typically used for small quantity production. Rapid quench castings
are generally used in larger quantity production and where high productivity rates are needed; they are also
preferred when good surface finish and good measurement accuracy are required. The cost of machinery can be
high, especially for dies that must withstand pressure.
F.5.3 — DESIGN PRINCIPLES

F.5.3.1 — DESIGN FOR LIMIT STATES — Aluminum structures shall be designed considering the limit states for which
they may become unsuitable during future use. The following limit states must always be considered:
• Static resistance (ultimate limit state) (see F.5.3.3) •

Deformation (serviceability limit state) (see F.5.3.4) •
Durability (see F.5.3.5)
In certain structures it is necessary to consider one or both of the following states:
• Fatigue (see F.5.3.6) •

Vibration (see F.5.3.7)
F-458
The design will be done using the guidance given in F.5.4 to F.5.7 and in Appendices F.5.B to F.5.J. However, it is
permissible to verify a proposed design by testing (see F.5.8).
F.5.3.2 — LOADS — Aluminum structures will be designed for the load combinations stipulated in Title B.
F.5.3.3 — STATIC RESISTANCE — A component is acceptable in terms of static resistance if it is satisfied that:
R ÿn
ÿÿÿ iiQ
where:
Phi = coefficient of capacity reduction, stipulated in table F.5.3.3-1 = coefficient

ic of increase for load i
Qi = action on the structure resulting from the application of load i
Rn = nominal resistance of a structural member, calculated based on procedures established in this
Chapter
F.5.3.3.1 — Action-Effect Under Factored Load — This is the axial force, bending moment, or shear force
generated in a component by the application of a factored load and found using an accepted structural analysis
procedure. The factored load is found by taking the load combinations stipulated in Title B and multiplying each
one by the factoring coefficient, established in table F.5.3.2-1.
F.5.3.3.2 — Design resistance — The design resistance is defined as the product of the nominal resistance and
the capacity reduction coefficient ÿ . The nominal resistance is the capacity of the component in relation to the
structural action under consideration (axial load, bending moment, shear force, etc.), calculated based on an
analysis procedure recognized in this Chapter.
The capacity reduction coefficient ÿ takes into account differences between the actual strength of a structural
member and its nominal strength, caused by variations in material properties, manufacturing tolerances, and
approximations in analysis. In aluminum structures, the reduction coefficients established in table F.5.3.3-1 will
be used.
Table F.5.3.3-1
Capacity reduction coefficients, ÿ
Phi
Type of construction
Members Unions
riveted and bolted 0.86 0.86
*
welded 0.86 0.80
Footprint 0.86 0.34
*
0.70 should be used in procedures that do not meet the specifications for welding procedure test approval such as BS4870 Part 2, welding of
aluminum and its alloys with TIG or MIG processes.
In F.5.4, F.5.5 (members) and F.5.6 (joints), the rules for establishing the calculated resistance are given.
F.5.3.4 — DEFORMATION — For acceptance purposes, the deflections of an aluminum structure shall be calculated for
the service loads and load combinations stipulated in B.2.3.
F.5.3.4.1 — Recoverable Elastic Deformation — A structure is acceptable in terms of deformation if its elastic
deflection under service load is less than the limiting deflection.
F-459
The elastic deflection calculation will generally be based on the properties of the gross cross section. However,
in slender sections it may be necessary to take the properties of the reduced section to account for local buckling
(see F.5.4).
Table F.5.3.4-1
Limit deflections
Recommended limit deflection

Element
(see note)
Cantilevers supporting floors L/180
Beams finished with plaster or other brittle material L/360
Deck Joists and Tracks (a) dead
load only (b) under worst dead L/200
load combination, L/100
imposed, wind and snow
Stringers and crosspieces of curtain walls
(a) single glass L/175
(b) double glass L/250
Top of columns: horizontal deflection NOTE L is L/300
the
length between supports.
The limit deflection must be based on rational engineering criteria and will be evaluated for service conditions
with the load combinations stipulated in numeral B.2.3. Table F.5.3.4-1 gives suggested values for certain types
of structures. When defining limit deflections, it must be taken into account that aluminum is three times more
flexible than steel and therefore excessively small limit deflections must be avoided.
F.5.3.4.2 — Permanent Inelastic Deformation — Components whose static strength has been calculated in
accordance with F.5.4 can generally be assumed to undergo no significant permanent deformation under nominal
loading. This can be applied to all groups of alloys.
F.5.3.4.3 — Distortion due to frequent assembly — In certain structures that have to be assembled and
disassembled frequently, it is necessary to consider the possibility of changes in the main dimensions of the
coupling system that lead to the gradual appearance of unacceptable errors in the assembly. assembled form.
F.5.3.5 — DURABILITY — The durability classification of the alloy groups is given in Tables F.5.2.2-1 through F.5.2.2-4.
If a structure is designed in a durable alloy and is adequately protected in accordance with standards such as BS 8118:
Part 2, it is expected to perform satisfactorily. The degree of exposure and design life must be considered.
F.5.3.6 — FATIGA
F.5.3.6.1 — General — Any structure or structural component that is subjected to significant load variations must
be checked for fatigue. Two limit states must be considered:
(a) Total collapse

(b) Stable crack growth (damage tolerance)
In both cases it is assumed that the service load spectrum (not factored) acts.
F.5.3.6.2 — Total collapse — The procedure for considering this limit state is to determine the expected life in
accordance with F.5.7 and verify that it is not less than the design life. In certain circumstances, the designer
may wish to increase nominal design life by multiplying by a fatigue life coefficient ÿL ( ) > 1 . The selection of Lÿ
can be influenced by the following:
(a) The possibility of increased crack growth during later stages of construction.
life of detail (b)
The accuracy of the assumed load spectrum (c)
Whether load records will be kept for the life of the detail
F-460
(d) The possibility of a change of use of the structure during its life
The designer may also wish to apply a material fatigue coefficient, mf ÿ , for the range of design stresses given in
Figure F.5.9. The range of design stresses would be divided by ÿmf (> 1) and the
selection of mf ÿ could be influenced by the following:
(1) The detail must exist in a very hostile environment

(2) If the failure of the detail would result in the failure of the entire structure or if alternative paths exist
to the charge
F.5.3.6.3— Stable Crack Growth — Damage of a structure under fatigue conditions is determined by monitoring
the rate of fatigue crack growth at regular inspection intervals.
Inspection methods, acceptable limiting crack lengths, allowable crack growth rates, and time between inspections
shall be agreed upon by the designer and the client. Crack growth is stable when the allowable crack growth rate
does not increase suddenly between inspections.
Methods for calculating crack growth and crack limit length are outside the scope of these standards but the ease
with which a detail can be inspected for cracks may influence the selection of mf ÿ ( see F.5.3.6.2 ).
F.5.3.7 — VIBRATION — For certain structures the possibility of undesirable vibration under normal service conditions
must be considered. Nominal loads must be used to verify the incompatibility of vibration amplitudes. If vibration is believed
to be a potential problem, the possibility of fatigue failure should also be checked (see F.5.3.6).
When the effects of vibrations are appreciable, the damping characteristics of the shape of the structure and of the
materials must be taken into account. The need to provide artificial damping will need to be examined, and prototype
testing may be necessary.
Vibration of structures with low natural frequencies can cause discomfort to users and should be considered in project
design.
F.5.3.8—TESTS— Structural components designed in accordance with F.5.4 to F.5.7 and the appropriate appendices
may be accepted without testing. Components designed using other calculation procedures and components not calculated
must be accepted only if their resistance has been verified with tests. Such tests shall be performed in accordance with
F.5.8.
F.5.4 — STATIC LAYOUT OF MEMBERS

F.5.4.1 — GENERAL — All members must satisfy the limit states of static resistance and deformation. Deformation is
discussed in F.5.4.9.
When referring to design curves, it is permissible instead to use the formulas with which those curves were derived (see
Appendix F.5.I).
Members are usually made of extrusions, plates, thin sheets, pipes, or a combination thereof. The following rules do not
apply to castings and therefore designers wishing to use castings should consult with manufacturers in this regard.
F.5.4.1.1 — Static Strength Limit State — The design resistance of a member to a specific action-effect shall
not be less than the magnitude of that action-effect generated under factored loading. The following are the rules
for obtaining resistance against different actions:
(a) For beams (resistance to moment and shear force) (see F.5.4.5) (b)
For braces (resistance to axial tension) (see F.5.4.6) (c) For
struts (resistance to axial compression ) (see F.5.4.7)
F-461
In F.5.4.8 the procedure for calculating the interaction of moment and axial load in members subjected to
combined actions is defined.
The given formulas contain the limit stresses ( po , pa , pv ) related to the material properties and which must be
taken according to F.5.4.2. They also contain the capacity reduction coefficient ÿ that must be read in table
F.5.3.3-1.
The resistance of a member can be reduced as a result of local buckling, depending on the slenderness of the
cross section. A proposed design is reviewed (except for members in axial tension) by classifying the section in
terms of its susceptibility to this type of failure. In F.5.4.3, a method for checking local buckling including section
classification is given.
F.5.4.1.2— Heat Affected Zones — Structural aluminum material generally weakens in the heat affected zone
adjacent to welds and this must be accounted for in design. This need not be applied when the base material is
in condition O or T4, or when it is in condition F and the design is based on the properties of condition O.
Rules for estimating the severity and extent of softening in the heat affected zone are given in F.5.4.4, and the
following clauses show how to account for the effect of this softening on member strength.
It is important to realize that a small weld such as is used, for example, to place a small fixture, can cause a
considerable reduction in the strength of the member due to softening of part of the cross section. In beams, it is
often beneficial to locate welds in areas of low stress, such as near the neutral axis or away from the region of
peak moment.
F.5.4.1.3 — Advanced Design — Members can be designed for safe behavior using the recommendations in
this section and some appropriate appendices. Other appendices go into depth on specific aspects of member
behavior and can lead to lighter-weight designs.
F.5.4.2 — LIMIT STRESSES — Strength calculations for members are made assuming the following
limit efforts:
po = limit stress for bending and total yield pa = limit

stress for local capacity of the section in tension or compression pv = limit stress in
shear
ps = limit stress for general buckling stability
The values of po , pa and pv depend on the properties of the material and must be taken according to tables F.5.4.2-1
and F.5.4.2-2. For materials not covered in these tables, refer to appendix F.5.C.
The ps values shall be determined in accordance with F.5.4.5.6(c) or F.5.4.7.5.
F-462
Table F.5.4.2-1
Ultimate stresses, heat-treated alloys
Thickness limit effort
Alloy Condition Product after well pv

From to
mm mm kgf/mm2 kgf/mm2 kgf/mm2

T6 Extrusion -
150 24 26,0 14,5 26,5 14,5
6061 extruded pipe -
6 24 26,0 13,5 8,5 4,0
T6
6 10 22,5 12,0 6,0 10,0 5,0
T4 Extrusion -
150 6,5 13,0 6,5 17,5 9,5
T4 extruded pipe -
10 9,5 19,0 11,0 17,0 9,5
T4 forged
-
150 8
6063 T5 Extrusion -
25 11
T6 Extrusion -
150 16
T6 extruded pipe -
10 18
T6 forged
-
150 16
T4 Extrusion -
150 11,5 14,5 7,0
T4 Leaf 0,2 3 11,5 14,5 7,0
T4 Iron 3 25 10,5 14,0 6,5
T4 extruded pipe -
10 10,5 14,0 6,5
T4 forged
-
150 11,5 14,5 7,0
Extrusion -
20 25,5 27,5 15,5
6082 T6
20 150 27 29,0 16,0
T6 Leaf 0,2 3 25,5 27,5 15,5
T6 Iron 3 25 24 26,5 14,5
extruded pipe -
6 25,5 28,0 15,5
T6
6 10 24 27,5 14,5
T6 forged
-
120 25,5 27,5 15,5
T4 Extrusion -
25 18,5 23,0 11,0
T4 sheet, iron 0,2 25 16 20,5 9,5
7020
T6 Extrusion -
25 28 31,0 17,0
T6 sheet, plate 0,2 25 27 29,5 16,0
F-463
Table F.5.4.2-2
Ultimate stresses, non-heat-treated alloys
Thickness limit effort

Alloy Condition Product From to after pa pv
mm mm kgf/mm2 kgf/mm2 kgf/mm2

1200 H14 Leaf 0,2 12,5 9,0 9,5 5,5
H14 Leaf 0,2 12,5 11,0 12,0 6,5
3103
H18 Leaf 0,2 3 15,0 15,0 9,0
H14 Leaf 0,2 3 14,5 15,0 8,5
3105 H16 Leaf 0,2 3 17,0 17,5 10,0
H18 Leaf 0,2 3 19,0 20,0 11,5
Oh, F Extrusion -
150 10,5 15,0 6,5
O sheet, plate 0,2 80 10,5 15,0 6,5
O extruded pipe -
10 10,5 15,0 6,5
5083
F sheet, plate 3 25 13,0 17,0 7,5
H22 sheet, iron 0,2 6 23,5 27,0 14,0
H22 extruded pipe -
10 23,5 27,0 14,0
Oh, F Extrusion -
150 6,5 10,0 4,0
O sheet, iron 0,2 6 6,5 10,0 4,0
5154A O extruded pipe -
10 6,5 10,0 4,0
H22 sheet, iron 0,2 6 16,0 20,0 9,5
H24 sheet, plate 0,2 6 22,5 25,0 13,5
F extruded pipe -
10 20,0 22,0 18,0
5251 H22 welded pipe 0,8 2,0 22,0 23,0 13,0
H24 sheet, iron 0,2 6 12,5 15,5 7,5
Oh, F sheet, plate 0,2 6 17,5 20,0 10,5
O Extrusion -
150 6,5 10,0 4,0
5454 F sheet, iron 0,2 6 6,0 9,5 3,5
H22 Leaf 0,2 3 18,0 21,5 11,0
H24 Leaf 0,2 3 20,0 23,5 12,0
F.5.4.3 — SECTION CLASSIFICATION AND LOCAL BUCKLING
F.5.4.3.1 — General
(a) Section classification — The resistance of members subjected to axial moment or compression can
be reduced by local buckling if the slenderness of their component elements is high. The first step in
the verification of such members is to establish the section classification, that is, its susceptibility to
local buckling. To do so, and also to account for the effect of local buckling (when necessary), the
designer must consider the slenderness of the individual elements that make up the section.
(b) Types of elements — The following basic types of thin-walled elements are identified: projecting flat
element, internal flat element, and internal curved element.
These are often unreinforced, that is, they are not longitudinally stiffened (see Figure F.5.4.3-1(a)). The
stability of flat elements can be greatly improved by the placement of longitudinal stiffening ribs or flanges,
see Figure F.5.4.3-1(b) in which case the elements are called reinforced.
F-464
(a) Unreinforced (b) Reinforced

Conventions - O : Outgoing I : Internal
Figure F.5.4.3-1 — Types of flat elements
(c) Webs in shear — Buckling of webs in shear is treated separately (see F.5.4.5.3 and F.5.5 (c)).
F.5.4.3.2 — Slenderness parameter ÿ — The susceptibility to local buckling of a beam element (resistance to
moment) or in a compression member (resistance to axial force) depends on the parameter ÿ
as defined in literals (a) to (d) of this numeral.
(a) Flat unreinforced elements — The parameter ÿ depends on the ratio bt or dt of the element
considered; t is the thickness of the element, b is generally the width of the element, and d
is the height of the web element in a beam. The values of b and d are to be taken as the width of the flat
element measured to the beginning of a fillet or to the edge of a weld.
ÿ is defined as follows:
• Element subjected to uniform compression • ÿ = bt

Element subjected to a stress gradient:
(1) Internal element with a stress gradient that results in a

neutral axis at the center ÿ = 0.35dt
o, ÿ = 0.35bt
(2) For any other stress gradient ÿ = gb t
of, ÿ = gd t
where g is the stress gradient coefficient as read in Figure F.5.4.3-2. In Figure F.5.4.3-2, and are the
distances from the neutral axis of the gross section to the most strongly compressed end and to the
c O
other end of the element respectively; are taken as positive towards the compressed side. They must
generally be measured from the elastic neutral axis, but in the verification of whether a section is totally
compact it is allowed to use the plastic neutral axis.
F-465
NOTE: For internal or projecting elements (peak compression at root) use curve A. For projecting
elements (peak compression at edge) use line B.
Figure F.5.4.3-2 — Flat members under stress gradient, value of g
Figure F.5.4.3-3 — Buckling modes of reinforced planar elements
Figure F.5.4.3-3 — Buckling modes of reinforced planar elements
(b) Reinforced planar elements — Two possible buckling modes must be considered (see Figure
F.5.4.3-3) and different values of ÿ must be found for each of them:
• mode 1 — the reinforced element buckles as a unit taking with it the

booster
F-466
• mode 2 — the sub-elements, encompassing the reinforced element, buckle as individual elements while
the joints between them remain straight • mode 3 — this is a combination of Modes
1 and 2 in which the buckling of the sub-elements is superimposed to buckling of the entire element, this
is indicated in Figure F.5.4.3-3. (c)
In buckling mode 2, ÿ is found separately for each sub-element according to item (a) of F.5.4.3.2. In mode 1, ÿ is
generally determined as follows (see F.5.4.3.2 for what relates to projecting elements in beams).
• Mode 1, uniform compression
(1) Standard reinforcement — Defined as reinforcement consisting of a unilateral rib or flange

with a thickness equal to that of the element, t , and located as shown in Figure F.5.4.3-4:
ÿ = hb t (F.5.4.3-1)
Where:
b and t = are defined as in F.5.4.3.2 (a) h = read in Figure
F.5.4.3-4 (a), (b) or (c) as appropriate
In Figure F.5.4.3-4, c shall be taken as the free height of the rib or flange measured to the
surface of the sheet.
(2) Non-standard reinforcement — With any other form of reinforcement, ÿ must be found by
replacing it with an equivalent rib or flange of standard form and proceeding as in (1). The
value of c for the equivalent rib or flange is chosen so that its second moment of area about
the midplane of the shell is equal to that of the true reinforcement.
(3) General method — For cases not covered by (1) and (2), ÿ should be taken from
agree with:
0.4
b ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿ ÿ =
ÿ ÿÿ
cro
ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿ ÿ
t
(F.5.4.3-2)
cr
Where:
ÿcr and ÿcro critical elastic stresses, assuming support on a single edge, with and without
the booster
• Mode 1, stress gradient
ÿ is to be found using the general expression given in (3) in which ÿcr and ÿcro
they now refer to the stress at the most compressed edge of the element.
F-467
(a) (b)
(c)
Figure F.5.4.3-4 — Reinforced elements, value of h
(c) Internal curved members — In low-rise curved members subjected to uniform compression, ÿ shall be determined using:
bt
b= (F.5.4.3-3)
12
+ (
ÿ 1 0.006b Rt 4 22 )
ÿ
ÿ ÿ
Where:
R = radius of curvature to the middle of the metal
F-468
b = width of development of the element in the middle part of the metal t =

thickness
In curved elements subjected to a stress gradient, a more favorable value of ÿ can be taken, obtained by factoring
the previous value by g (obtained in Figure F.5.4.3-2).
The above treatment is valid as long as R b is not less than 0.1bt . Sections containing elements of greater
curvature require special study.
(d) Round tubes
ÿ shall be calculated according to the following, without distinguishing between axial compression and bending:
2 ( ÿ = 3 Dt)1 (F.5.4.3-4)
Where:
D = diameter to the middle of the metal t = thickness
F.5.4.3.3 — Section classification — The procedure consists of classifying the individual elements that make up the
section, except for any element subjected to full tension. The classification of the section is taken as that of the least
favorable element. The individual elements are classified according to literals (c) or (d) of this numeral.
(a) Sections — beams and members in compression — For the section of a beam (resistance to moment) or
of a member in compression (resistance to axial force) the following classifications apply.
• Resistance to moment:
(1) Fully compact — local buckling can be ignored
(2) Semi-compact — the section can develop a moment equal to p times the
elastic modulus of the section
(3) Slender — moment resistance is reduced by premature local buckling with
a stress in the extreme fiber less than po .
• Resistance to axial compression:

(1) Compact — local buckling can be ignored
(2) Slender — local buckling decreases resistance
(b) Sections subjected to combined actions — See subparagraph (a) of F.5.4.8.2 for the classification of
sections subjected to biaxial bending or simultaneous bending and axial force.
(c) Classification of elements — The classification of an individual element depends on the value of ÿ (see
F.5.4.3.2):
• beam elements (resistance to moment): ÿÿÿ1 fully

compact ÿ <ÿÿÿ semi-compact
1 0
b>b0 slender
• compression member elements (axial resistance):

ÿÿÿ0 slim
ÿ>ÿ0 compact
where ÿ0 and ÿ1 are given in Table F.5.4.3-1.
F-469
Table F.5.4.3-1
Boundary values of ÿ
Elements b0 b1
not soldier soldier 6ÿ Not welded 6ÿ Soldier
outgoing elements 7e 5e
internal elements 22e 18e 18e 15e
NOTE 1 The value of ÿ is generally taken as ( in beams,ÿ = 25 p O )1 2

(except for certain fin elements
see F.5.4.3.3 (d)). po is the limit stress in kgf/mm2 (see tables F.5.4.2-1 and F.5.4.2-2).
NOTE 2 An element is considered welded if it contains weld on one edge or at any point along its width. However,
when evaluating the stability of a particular cross section of a member, it is permissible to consider the member
as unwelded if it contains no weld in that section even though it is welded elsewhere along its length.
NOTE 3— In a welded item, the classification is independent of the extent of the heat-affected zone.
(d) Understressed Flange Members — A more favorable classification may be used for flange members in
members subjected to bending or bending plus axial force that are:
• Parallel to the axis of flexion; and

• Less highly stressed than the more severely stressed fibers in the section.
It is then allowed, using table F.5.4.3-1, to take a modified value of ÿ according to:
12
ÿ 25y ÿ
1
ÿ=ÿ (F.5.4.3-5)
ÿ py the 2 ÿÿ
where 1 and and 2 and are, respectively, the distances from the neutral axis of the gross section to the
most severely stressed fibers and to the element. They should generally be measured from the elastic
neutral axis; however, when checking whether the section is totally compact, it is allowed to use the plastic
neutral axis.
F.5.4.3.4 — Local Buckling — The possibility of local buckling in members classified as slender is generally accounted for
by replacing the actual section with an effective section. The effective section is obtained using a local buckling coefficient
kL to reduce the thickness; this is applicable to any slender element of uniform thickness that is totally or partially subjected
to compression. Elements that do not have uniform thickness require special study.
(a) Determination of kL — The coefficient kL , which is found separately for the different section elements, is read
from the appropriate curve of Figure F.5.4.3-5 selected according to Table F.5.4. 3-2. The correct value of ÿ/ÿ
must be determined as shown below in order to select the correct curve:
Table F.5.4.3-2
Selection of the curve from Figure F.5.4.3-5 (local buckling)
Elements not soldier Soldier

flat projecting elements Curve A B curve
Internal elements (flat or curved) C curve Curve D
round pipe The lower of curves The lower one between

C and E curves D and E
NOTE: In a weldment, the classification is independent of the extent of the heat affected zone.
=
b is found according to F.5.4.3.2
F-470
( ÿ = 25 pO )1 2 generally (see note 3 of subparagraph (c) of F.5.4.5.2 for beam compression flanges)
Where:
po = limit stress of the material in kgf/mm2 , without considering the area effect
affected by heat
To decide whether an element is to be taken as unwelded or welded in Table F.5.4.4, see Note 2 of
Table F.5.4.3.
In the case of flat reinforced elements it is important to consider both possible buckling modes (see
figure F.5.4.3) and take the most critical one. In the case of mode 1, the buckling coefficient kL shall be
applied to the reinforcement area as well as to the basic thickness of the shell.
(b) Sections subjected to combined actions — See F.5.4.8.2 (b) to determine kL in sections subjected
to biaxial bending or simultaneous bending and axial force.
Curve A: protruding elements, not welded

Curve B: Projecting elements,
welded (a) for flat projecting elements
Curve C: internal elements, not welded Curve

D: internal elements, welded Curve E:
round tubes NOTE. see
note 3 of table F.5.4.3-1
(b) for internal members and round tubes
Figure F.5.4.3-5 — Local buckling coefficient kL
F-471
F.5.4.4 — SOFTENING IN THE ZONE AFFECTED BY THE HEAT ADJACENT TO THE WELD
F.5.4.4.1 — General — It is necessary to consider in the design the softening that usually occurs in the vicinity of welds. The most affected
region is located immediately around the weld, however, the material properties improve rapidly with distance to those of the original
material. Softening affects 0.2% proof stress more severely than tensile strength.
For design it is acceptable to approximate the actual condition by assuming that around each weld there is a heat affected zone in which
the strength properties are reduced by a constant coefficient kz .
Outside this zone, it is assumed that all the original properties of the base material can be applied.
The severity of softening in the heat affected zone, defined by k is discussed in F.5.4.4.2. The z extent of the heat affected zone, defined
,
by a distance z see in F.5.4.4.3. , measured from the weld
Sometimes it is possible to mitigate the effect of softening in the heat affected zone by an artificial aging treatment applied after welding
(see appendix F.5.E).
F.5.4.4.2 — Severity of softening
(a) Coefficient of softening of the heat affected zone — The coefficient kz

normally it should be taken from table F.5.4.4-1 but for certain calculations it is allowed to use a more favorable value, as
explained in appendix F.5.E. This applies when a member's stamina is governed by pa or pv instead of po . To find the
coefficient kz
For materials not covered in Table F.5.4.4-1, see Appendix F.5.E.
(b) 7020 Material — Alternative values of kz given in Table F.5.4.4-1 for 7020 material should normally be applied according to
the nature of the stress acting on the material in the heat affected zone:
• value (A) — tensile stress acting transversely to the axis of a weld to

top or fillet
• value (B) — any other stress condition, that is, longitudinal stress,
transverse shear compression.
Sometimes it is possible to increase the value (A) to a higher figure than in the table depending on the degree of thermal
control achieved in manufacturing (see appendix F.5.E).
(c) Recovery time for heat-treated alloys — The kz values given in Table F.5.4.4-1 are valid from the following times after
welding, provided the material has been held at a temperature not less than 15ºC:
• 6*** series alloys 3 days • 7*** series alloys 30

days
To determine the resistance of components that must be loaded earlier, but never earlier than 24 hours after welding, the value
of kz must be reduced by a coefficient f
calculated according to the following:
12
• 6*** series alloys f 0.9 0.1 n 1 2( =+
ÿ ÿÿ ÿ ÿ (F.5.4.4-1)
12
• 7*** series alloys ) f 0.8 0.2 n 1 29 =+ ÿ ÿ ÿ ( ) ÿ
ÿ (F.5.4.4-2)
where n is the time, in days, between welding and loading.
F-472
If the material is kept at a temperature below 15ºC after welding, the recovery time will be prolonged and
this should be noted.
Table F.5.4.4-1
Coefficient of softening of the heat affected zone, kz
Alloy Condition Product (note 1) kz

not heat treated
1200 H14 S 0.13
3103 H14 S 0.18
H18 S 0.13
H14 S 0.17
3105 H16 S 0.15
H18 S 0.13
Oh, F E, S, P, DT 1.00
5083
H22 S, P 0.45
Oh, F E, S, P 1.00
5154A H22 S, P 0.40
H24 S, P 0.29
F WT 0.20
F F 1.00
5251
H22 S, P 0.35
H24 S, P 0.24
Oh, F E, S, P 1.00
5454 H22 S 0.35
H24 S 0.30
hot treated
6061 T6 E, DT 0.50
T4 AND 1.00
T4 DT 0.65
T4 F 0.80
6063
T5 AND 0.75
T6 E, F 0.50
T6 DT 0.45
T4 E, S, P, DT, F 1.00
6082
T6 E, S, P, DT, F 0.50
T4 E, S, P 0,80(A)
1,00(B)
7020 T6 E, S, P 0,60(A)
0,80(B)
(nota 2)
NOTE 1. In the product column, E, S, P, DT, WT and F refer, respectively, to
extrusion, sheet, plate, extruded pipe, welded pipe and forgings.
NOTE 2 Refer to subparagraph (b) of F.5.4.4.2 to see the applicability of

values A and B for material 7020.
F.5.4.4.3 — Extent of heat affected zone
(a) Definition of z — The heat affected zone is assumed to extend a distance z in

any direction from the weld, measured in accordance with the following:
(1) Across from the center line of an inline butt weld (see figure
F.5.4.4-1(a))
(2) In fillet welds, transversely from the point of intersection of the welded surfaces (see Figures
F.5.4.4-1(e), (f), (g) and (h))
(3) In butt welds used in corner, tee , or cruciform joints, transversely from the point of intersection
of the welded surfaces (see Figures F.5.4.4-1(b), (c), and (d))
(4) In any radial direction from the end of a weld (see figures
F.5.4.4-1(i) y (j))
F-473
The boundaries of the heat affected zone should generally be taken as straight lines normal to the metal surface,
as shown in Figure F.5.4.4-1. However, it is permissible instead to assume a curved boundary of radius z as
shown at B (instead of A) in Figure F.5.4.4-1(i). This is advantageous when the surface weld is applied to a thick
,
material.
Figure F.5.4.4-1(a) — Extent of heat affected zone, location of z
Table F.5.4.4-1b
Extension of the heat-affected zone, coefficient ÿ
Value of ÿ
Case Junction Configuration
ct 25 ÿ mm ct 25 > mm
Substantially straight continuous weld (see figures F.7.4.6(a), (c),
(e) and (g) total deposit area less than or equal to
P 50 mm2 1.0 1.5
Q total area of the tank greater than 50 mm2 1.5 2.0
R Substantially straight continuous weld having two or more adjacent welds 1.5 2.0
(see Figures F.7.4.6(b), (d), (f) and (h)
S Connection with local irregularity (a) 1.5 2.0

member-to-member connections in reinforcement (b) welds
connecting transverse stiffeners in girders and assembled beams
(c) welds used to connect ears and other fittings
(b) Basic formula for z — The following general expression should be used to estimate the value
de of .
F-474
zz = a O
Where:
z
o
= is the basic value calculated in (c). =
ayh modification factors, are determined in (d) and (e) or you can refer to the appendix
F.5.E.
(c) Determination of z O— The basic value of z ,

which is the ratio between the weld
o
deposited on the material does not heat with the interface completely cooled, the lower of the two values
calculated in i) and ii) must be taken.
• For butt welding for 7***

series alloys z 30 t 2
=ÿ
O A
(i) z 4.5t =
O A
(ii) for other alloys (i) z

20 t 3 O(ii)=ÿ
of 3.0t =
O A
• For other types of welding including variations of fillet welding. for 7*** series alloys z
30 t 2
=ÿ
O A
2
(i) =
o BA 4.5t t z
(ii) for other alloys (i) z
20 t 3 O= + A
2
(ii) =
z it3.0tt
BA
Where:
At = is the smallest value of 0.5(t B Ct ) + y 1.5t B
Bt , Ct = are the thicknesses of the elements to be connected by means of welding,

Ct is the thickness of the thickest element to be joined.
(d) Determination of ÿ — the factor ÿ shall be taken from table F.5.4.4-2, or alternatively according to appendix
F.5.E. According to (c), this numeral provides for the possibility of weld deposition starting in the material
due to elevated temperature, due to further preheating or previous deposition in the joint or of the weld in
the same joint.
(e) Determination of ÿ — The coefficient ÿ in subparagraph (b) of F.5.4.4.3 covers the possibility of incremental
heat accumulation due to:
• proximity of a free edge or edges; or • another weld

in the vicinity.
The value of ÿ can be found as indicated in (1) or (2) below.

Alternatively refer to appendix F.5.E.
(1) For a junction from which there are at least two heat paths
valid:
n=1
A valid heat path is one in which h h1 ÿ ; where
h = distance to free edge or half the distance to a nearby weld
F-475
The distance h shall be measured from the reference point in the weld under
consideration (see Figure F.5.4.4-1) and along the relevant heat path through the
metal at half the thickness. The heat path follows the profile of the section and
does not necessarily have to be straight (see Figure F.5.4.4-2).
Figure F.5.4.4-2 — Typical heat path measurement
h 4.5
ÿ =zfor
= 7***
O
series alloys, or (F.5.4.4-3)
h13z
= = ÿ other
(F.5.4.4-4)
for O alloys 1
(2) For a junction from which there is only one valid heat path:
ct 25 ÿ mm n = 1.50
ct 25 > mm n = 1.33
(f) Overlap of heat-affected zones — When two joints are located so that their respective heat-affected
zones (determined in accordance with F.5.4.4.3) overlap, it may be assumed that the extent of the
heat-affected zone by heat on the outer side of each joint is not altered by proximity.
(g) Experimental determination of z — It is an alternative to estimate the extent of the zone affected by
heat instead of doing it by calculation. This can be done by hardness examination of a representative
specimen (see appendix F.5.E).
F.5.4.5 - BEAMS
F.5.4.5.1 — General — The following checks must be made to all beams (including assembled beams).
(a) Review to moment — In any cross section, the moment M under factored load shall not exceed the
design moment resistance MRS of the section, calculated in accordance with F.5.4.5.2 (or alternatively
in accordance with appendix F. .5 D). MRS shall be reduced appropriately, when necessary, to
account for a coincident shear (see F.5.4.5.4).
(b) Shear check— At any cross section, the shear force V under factored load shall not exceed the
design shear strength VRS (see F.5.4.5.3).
In some cases, it is necessary to also do one or both of the following checks:
(1) Soul Crush Check (see F.5.4.5.5)

(2) Check for lateral torsional buckling (see F.5.4.5.6)
Assembled beams, which have slenderer stiffened webs, should preferably be designed using F.5.5.4. It
is allowed to design them as beams but it is likely to lose in economy.
For the design of beams subjected to biaxial bending combined with axial loading, F.5.4.8 shall be used.
F-476
Beams subjected to biaxial bending about both principal axes shall also be checked in accordance with
F.5.4.8.
F.5.4.5.2 — Resistance to uniaxial moment of the section
(a) Classification of the section for moment resistance — It is first necessary to classify the section as
fully compact, semi-compact, or slender based on the least favorable component element, in accordance
with F.5.4.3.3.
In the case of a reinforced projecting element that forms part or all of the compression flange, the
presence of reinforcement in the form of an outwardly directed flange must be ignored for the classification
of the section.
(b) Basic calculation — The design resistance at MRS moment of a given section, in the absence
of shear, should generally be found as follows:
• Non-welded, fully compact M pZ RS

=
on Phi
(F.5.4.5-1)
• Unwelded, semi-compact M pS • Welded, fully
RS
=
on Phi
(F.5.4.5-2)
compact M pZ • Welded, semi-compact • Unwelded,
RS
=
of ne Phi
(F.5.4.5-3)
slim M pS
RS
=
of ne Phi
(F.5.4.5-4)
M pS
RS
=
are you
f o,
M pS
RS
=
on ÿ whichever is less (F.5.4.5-5)
• Welded, slim M pS
RS
=
are you
f o,
M pS
RS
=
of ne
ÿ whichever is less (F.5.4.5-6)
Where:
Sn and Zn = elastic and plastic moduli, respectively, of the net section
Sne and Zne = elastic and plastic moduli, respectively, of the effective net section
She = plastic modulus of the effective section =
limit stress (see tables F.5.4.2-1 and F.5.4.2-2) = coefficient of
po f capacity reduction (see table F.5.3.3-1)
It is permitted in semi-compact and slender sections, if favourable, to take the moment resistance
based on an elasto-plastic stress pattern as indicated in appendix F.5.D, instead of using the above
expressions. If this is done, note 5 of literal (c) of this same numeral is not valid.
(c) Assumed section - The terminology used in subparagraph (b) of this same numeral implies the
following:
• The net section includes only the reduction for the holes • The effective
net section includes the reduced thickness taken in the vicinity of the welds to take into account the
softening in the heat affected zone together with the reduction for the holes.
• The effective section includes thickness reduced to account for softening in the heat affected zone
and local buckling but no reduction is made for holes.
The reduced thickness should generally be taken according to the following for the different elements in a
section.
(1) Slender element free from heat affected zone effects — A thickness kt L is taken for the entire
element, kLis found by following F.5.4.3.4.
F-477
(2) Non-slender elements subject to heat affected zone effects — A thickness k tz is taken for the
softened parts of the element. kz and the extent of softening are given in F.5.4.4.2 and F.5.4.4.3.
(3) Slender element with heat affected zone effects — The reduced thickness is taken as the lesser of
k tz and kt L for the softened part and kt Lfor the rest of the element.
Note 1 — When a hole is located in the region of reduced thickness, the reduction for that hole should be
based on the reduced thickness.
Note 2— In the case of reinforced members, kL shall apply to the area of reinforcement as well as to the
basic thickness of the shell.
Note 3— When considering a slender fin element that is located closer to the neutral axis than to the
extreme fiber in tension of the material, it is permissible to take a more favorable value of kL . This is done
by using a modified value of ÿ in Figure F.5.4.3-5 (instead of the normal value, see F.5.4.3.4 (a)) according
to:
ÿ 25 years ÿ
1
ÿ= (F.5.4.5-7)
ÿ ÿ py
the 2 ÿÿ
where 1 and and 2 and are the distances from the neutral elastic axis of the gross section to the extreme
fibers and to the element considered, respectively. This relationship applies only if the element is
substantially parallel to the bending axis.
Note 4— For a reinforced element that forms part of the compression flange of a slender section in which
the reinforcement is in the form of an outwardly directed flange, the presence of the flange must be ignored
in determining the moment resistance.
Note 5— For a welded element in a semi-compact or slender section, a more favorable thickness may be
assumed according to the following:
• Softening in the heat affected zone is ignored for any material that is less than k yz 1 from the elastic
neutral axis of the gross section, where 1 y is the distance from there to the furthest fibers in the
section.
• For material in the heat affected zone, at a distance y ky > from 1

of the neutral axis,
kz can be replaced by a kzy value determined according to:
and
k k1 = +ÿ zy (F.5.4.5-8)
With
and
1
(d) Hybrid Sections — The moment capacity of a hybrid section containing materials of different strengths can be
safely based on the smallest value of po within the section. As an alternative, the following procedure can be
used which is more advantageous.
• Each element is classified according to its particular value of po

• For a totally compact section, MRS is found using conventional plastic bending theory taking into account
the value of po in each element and again using the effective net section in the case of welded
members.
• For other sections, MRS is found with the expression F.5.20, F.5.22 or F.5.23 of literal (b) of F.5.4.5.2,
whichever is appropriate, based on the values of po and Z
from the point of the section that gives the lowest MRS values .
F-478
(e) Semi-compact sections — For this type of sections it is allowed, if desired, to take an improved value of
MRS that is obtained by interpolation according to the following:
M RS
M MM
b ÿb 0
=+ ÿ
s
(
f S
) (F.5.4.5-9)
b ÿb
0 1
Where:
Mf and Ms = fully compact and semi-compact MRS values found according to item (b) of F.5.4.5.2 = value of
ÿ for the most critical
b element of the section = limit values of ÿ fully and semi
b1 y b0 -compact for that same element (see the
tabla F.5.4.3-1).
F.5.4.5.3 — Shear force resistance
(b) Classification of the section — First it is necessary to classify the section as compact or slender in
terms of its resistance to shear: a compact section is not affected by buckling while a slender section
must be checked for buckling. The sections are classified as follows:
(1) Sections containing webs in shear oriented in the load plane, without
chain plates: d 49
ÿ ÿ compacta t
d
>
49 ÿ slender t
Where:
d = free height of the web between flanges (measured on the slope in the case of inclined
webs) t = thickness
of the web
12 12
ÿÿ25ÿÿ
15
e= = ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ
pO pn
po and pÿ = limit stresses (in kgf/mm²) (see tables F.5.4.2-1 and F.5.4.2-2)
(2) Sections containing shear webs oriented in the load plane, with plate plates — See item (e).
(3) Solid bar — compact (4)

Round pipe — same classification as for axial compression (see F.5.4.3.2. (d) and F.5.4.3.3. (c)).
(b) Compact sections — The design shear resistance VRS of a section, in the absence of moment, can be
calculated by the following equation:
pA=
V RS f nn (F.5.4.5-10)
Where:
pn = limit stress (see tables F.5.4.2-1 and F.5.4.2-2)
Aÿ = effective shear area ÿ =
capacity reduction coefficient (see table F.5.3.3-1)
The area of the effective section will be:
F-479
(1) For sections containing shear webs without plate plates that are free from softening in the heat affected
zone, Aÿ is determined using:
=
A 0.8NDt
n (F.5.4.5-11)
Where:
D = total height of the web measured from the outer surface of the flanges t =
thickness of the web
N = number of souls
The presence of small holes can be ignored as long as they do not occupy, in total, more than 20%
of the free height of the web between fins.
(2) For sections like those in (a) but with webs affected by softening in the heat affected zone, Aÿ is
determined by the following equation:
AND )z
n 0.8Dt 1 kdt
( )
= ÿÿ (
With (F.5.4.5-12)
Where:
div = total material height of the heat affected zone within the inter-flange clearance of the web
(see F.5.4.4.3) softening coefficient (see
kz = F.5.4.4.2)
For a web welded to its full height or continuously longitudinally welded at any point of its height, VRS
shall be taken as kz times the unwelded value.
(3) For a solid bus: A 0.8A or

in
= 0.8A It is (F.5.4.5-13)
(4) For a compact round tube: ó

= 0.6A
A 0.6A
in It is (F.5.4.5-14)
Where:
A = sectional area (in the absence of softening in the heat affected zone)
Ae = effective sectional area (when there is softening in the heat affected zone) found by taking an
effective thickness of kz times the actual thickness for the material in the heat affected zone.
In the case of sections containing webs in shear, the methods for calculating VRS of assembled beams
can be used (see subparagraphs (a) and (d) of F.5.5.4.2).
(c) Slender sections — The design shear strength VRS , In absence of

moment, for sections that contain slender webs in shear without plate plates and oriented in the load plane, it
should be taken as the lower of the two values obtained in the following reviews:
(1) Yield check — Strength is calculated as for a compact section using the
literal (b) of F.5.4.5.3.
(2) Buckling revision — The VRS value in kgf is obtained with the following expression:
3
34 000Nt
INRS =f ÿÿ pAv v (F.5.4.5-15)
d
Where:
d = free height of the web between wings
F-480
t = web thickness N =
number of webs ÿ = capacity
reduction coefficient (see table F.5.3.3-1)
(d) Inclined shear webs — The expressions covering compact sections in F.5.4.5.3 (b) remain valid for inclined
webs as long as D is measured perpendicular to the neutral axis. To check slender inclined sections (see
F.5.4.5.3, subparagraph (c)), the expression F.5.4.5-15 must be factored by cosÿ where ÿ is the angle between
the web and the load application plane. ,
(e) Use of plate plates — The shear resistance of sections containing webs to shear with plate plates can generally
be safely calculated using the treatment given in F.5.5.4.2 but with the coefficients v taken as follows :
v = critical buckling coefficient to shear in the elastic range determined according to literal (b)
1
the F.5.5.4.2
v tf= stress field coefficient, equal to zero
This treatment is valid only if the veneer plates comply with F.5.5.4.4.
F.5.4.5.4 - Combination of moment and shear force
(a) Low Shear Moment — At any section, the design moment strength MRS may be assumed to be unaffected by a
coincident shear force V (under factored load) less than half the design shear strength VRS found in literal (c) of
F.5.4.5.3.
(b) Moment with high shear — If V exceeds 0.5V RS ,

a reduced value of
the design resistance at MRSO moment :
(1) For sections with shear webs connected to flanges at both ends
longitudinal:
ÿ 1.2V ÿ ÿ
ÿ ÿ M M=1 1 0.6
RS + ÿÿ
( ÿ RSO
) ÿ ÿÿ (F.5.4.5-16)
INRS
ÿÿ ÿ ÿ
(2) For other sections: ÿ ÿ 1.2V

ÿÿÿ
MM 1.6
RSO
=
RS (F.5.4.5-17)
ÿÿ
INRS
Where:
MRS = design resistance at section moment, in the absence of shear (see
F.5.4.5.2)
a = ratio between the minimum and maximum shear forces in the web assuming
elastic stress distribution
For sections classified as slender in bending or affected by softening in the heat affected zone, ÿ shall be
based on the assumed section used in the MRS demonstration ( see F.5.4.5.2 (c)).
F.5.4.5.5 — Web crush — This clause deals with the design of webs subjected to localized forces caused by concentrated
loads or reactions applied to a beam.
(a) Unstiffened web — When the web, by itself, must withstand the localized force, without the provision of a
supporting stiffener, such as under a rolling load, the following two conditions must be met:
F-481
k a
o, pppz ÿ ÿ a (F.5.4.5-18)
w1 ÿ
ÿ ppÿw2 s
(F.5.4.5-19)
Where:
pw1 , pw2 = stresses at the extreme edge and at the midpoint, respectively, assuming a 45° dispersion angle on
each side of a localized force
well = limit stress (see tables F.5.4.2-1 and F.5.4.2-2) = buckling stress
ps for the web treated as a thin column between flanges
kz = softening coefficient for heat affected zone material (see F.5.4.4.2) capacity reduction coefficient
(see table
Phi = F.5.3.3-1)
In equation F.5.4.5-18, the second expression should be used when the web is welded to the fin and there is
softening in the heat affected zone. Otherwise, the first expression is valid.
The value of ps shall be determined according to item (a) of F.5.4.7.3, selecting the curve in Figure F.5.4.5-3(a)
that intercepts the stress axis at a value po (see tables F.5.4.2-1 and F.5.4.2-2). The slenderness parameter ÿ to
be used to select the curve must take into account the possible relative lateral movement of the flanges when the
web buckles and must never be less than 3.5dt
.
(b) Veneered web — When a veneered web is supplied, Equation F.5.4.5-18 shall be satisfied at both the top of
the veneer and the top of the thin web.
(c) Stiffened web — A suitable bearing stiffener should be of close section. It can be conservatively designed
assuming it will withstand the full crushing force, without web support. The stiffener is checked as a compression
member (see F.5.4.7) for buckling as an out-of-plane column and local bearing considering flexural effects, if
necessary (see F.5.4.8). Alternatively, a more economical stiffener can be designed using the assembled
beam stiffener clause (see F.5.5.4.4).
F.5.4.5.6 — Lateral torsional buckling — A beam, other than one of the exceptions given here, must be checked against
possible failure due to lateral torsional buckling in accordance with subparagraphs (a) to (f) of this same numeral.
The possibility of premature failure from lateral torsional buckling can be ignored in any of the following
cases:
• Bending about the minor axis •

Beam supported against lateral movement along its entire length •
Compression flange lateral support provided at spacing no greater than 40 rÿ and
Where:
the = minor axis of rotation of the section
e = ( 25 p O )1 2
after = limit stress (in kgf/mm2 ) of the compression fin material (see tables F.5.4.2-1 and
F.5.4.2-2)
(a) Basic condition — The beam should be checked for possible lateral torsional buckling at each unsupported
span between lateral support points. In each of them the following condition must be satisfied:
M Mÿ Rx (F.5.4.5-20)
F-482
Where:
M = moment under load factored in the considered length
MRx = factored moment of lateral torsional pandeing resistance, is equal to p Ss ÿ
S = plastic modulus of the gross section without reduction by softening in the zone
affected by heat, local buckling or holes =
Phi capacity reduction coefficient (see table F.5.3.3-1) = buckling stress (see
ps item (c) of F.5.4.5.6)
(b) Margin for moment variation — The value of M in item (a) can surely be taken as the maximum value
in the section considered. Alternatively, it is allowed to take M
as the equivalent uniform moment M . For the case of simple gradient of moment in the considered
length (linear variation) M can be taken as follows:
M 2
to M 1.0 > ÿÿ 0.5 =
M 0.6M 0.4M +1 2 (F.5.4.5-21)
1
M 2
for <ÿ 0.5 M 0.4M = 1 (F.5.4.5-22)
M 1
where M1 and M2 are, respectively, the maximum and minimum moments (see Figure F.5.4.5-1). For
other cases of moment variation, see appendix F.5.G.
Figure F.5.4.5-1 — Lateral torsional buckling, equivalent uniform moment M
F-483
Figure F.5.4.5-2 — Lateral torsional buckling of beams, buckling stress ÿs
NOTE: To find ÿs with ÿ > 130 see Figure F.5.I-1, Appendix I.
Figure F.5.4.5-3(a) — Buckling stress as a column for compression members ÿs
F-484
Figure F.5.4.5-3(b) — Buckling stress as a column for compression members ÿs
Figure F.5.4.5-3(c) — Buckling stress as a column for compression members ÿs
(c) Buckling stress — The lateral torsional buckling stress ÿs is read from Figure F.5.4.5-2 using the
curve intercepting the stress axis at a stress p1 found according to the following:
(1) For totally compact unwelded sections
F-485
= (F.5.4.5-23)
pp1 O
(2) For other sections including hybrid sections

M
RS
= (F.5.4.5-24)
p1

NSR 10 (English)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NSR 10 (English)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Machine Translated by Google

Ministry of Environment, Housing and Territorial Development

PERMANENT ADVISORY COMMISSION FOR THE REGIME

Bogota DC, Colombia

Colombian Association of Earthquake Engineering

Ministry of Environment, Housing and Territorial Development

PERMANENT ADVISORY COMMISSION FOR THE REGIME

TECHNICAL AND SCIENTIFIC MODIFICATIONS IN THE UPDATE OF THE COLOMBIAN

TITLE A — GENERAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

TITLE B — CHARGES ................................................ ................................................................ ......B-1

TITLE C — STRUCTURAL CONCRETE .................................................. ........................C-1

TITLE D — STRUCTURAL MASONRY ................................................... .................D-1

TITLE E — ONE AND TWO-STORY HOUSES ............................................ ........................ E-1

TITLE F — METALLIC STRUCTURES .................................................... ........................ F-1

TITLE G — WOODEN STRUCTURES AND GUADUA STRUCTURES ....................G-1

TITLE H — GEOTECHNICAL STUDIES ................................................... .......................... H-1

TITLE I — TECHNICAL SUPERVISION ................................................... ...................................I-1

TITLE J — FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS IN

TITLE K — SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS ................................................... .............K-1

Colombian Association of Earthquake Engineering

Ministry of Environment, Housing and Territorial Development

PERMANENT ADVISORY COMMISSION FOR THE REGIME

UPDATE COLOMBIAN REGULATION OF

TECHNICAL AND SCIENTIFIC MODIFICATIONS

Colombian Association of Earthquake Engineering

Ministry of Environment, Housing and Territorial Development

PERMANENT ADVISORY COMMISSION FOR THE REGIME

Title A — General earthquake resistant design and construction requirements

Chapter A.1 — Introduction

Colombian Association of Earthquake Engineering

Ministry of Environment, Housing and Territorial Development

PERMANENT ADVISORY COMMISSION FOR THE REGIME

Chapter A.2 — Seismic hazard zones and design seismic movements

Colombian Association of Earthquake Engineering

Ministry of Environment, Housing and Territorial Development

PERMANENT ADVISORY COMMISSION FOR THE REGIME

Colombian Association of Earthquake Engineering

Ministry of Environment, Housing and Territorial Development

PERMANENT ADVISORY COMMISSION FOR THE REGIME

ÿ Figure A.2.3-1 — Seismic Hazard Zones applicable to buildings for NSR-10

Colombian Association of Earthquake Engineering

Ministry of Environment, Housing and Territorial Development

PERMANENT ADVISORY COMMISSION FOR THE REGIME

Chapter A.3 — General earthquake resistant design requirements

Chapter A.4 — Equivalent horizontal force method

Chapter A.5 — Dynamic analysis method

Colombian Association of Earthquake Engineering

Ministry of Environment, Housing and Territorial Development

PERMANENT ADVISORY COMMISSION FOR THE REGIME

Chapter A.6 — Drift requirements

Chapter A.7 — Soil-structure interaction

Chapter A.9 — Non-structural elements

Colombian Association of Earthquake Engineering

Ministry of Environment, Housing and Territorial Development

PERMANENT ADVISORY COMMISSION FOR THE REGIME

ÿ A.10.9.2.5 — Buildings declared as historical heritage • Section A.10.10

Colombian Association of Earthquake Engineering

Ministry of Environment, Housing and Territorial Development

PERMANENT ADVISORY COMMISSION FOR THE REGIME

Chapter A.11 — Seismic instrumentation

Chapter A.13 — Definitions and nomenclature of Title A

Appendix A-2 — Recommendations for calculating soil-structure dynamic interaction effects

• This Addendum remains essentially the same in Regulation NSR-10.